Version3.2.

TechnicalReferenceGuide

AT321_TRR_E1

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Release:AT321_TRR_E1(February2014)
Copyright19972014Forsk.AllRightsReserved.
Publishedby:
Forsk
7ruedesBriquetiers
31700Blagnac,France
Tel:+33562747210
Fax:+33562747211
Thesoftwaredescribedinthisdocumentisprovidedunderalicenceagreement.Thesoftwaremayonlybeusedorcopiedunderthetermsandconditionsofthelicenceagreement.
Nopartofthecontentsofthisdocumentmaybereproducedortransmittedinanyformorbyanymeanswithoutwrittenpermissionfromthepublisher.
Theproductorbrandnamesmentionedinthisdocumentaretrademarksorregisteredtrademarksoftheirrespectiveregisteringparties.
Thepublisherhastakencareinthepreparationofthisdocument,butmakesnoexpressedorimpliedwarrantyofanykindandassumesnoresponsibilityforerrorsoromissions.No
liabilityisassumedforincidentalorconsequentialdamagesinconnectionwithorarisingoutoftheuseoftheinformationcontainedherein.

Atoll 3.2.1 Technical Reference Guide

2014 Forsk

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGudie
TableofContents

AT321_TRR_E1

TableofContents

1
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.1.3
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.5
1.5.1
1.5.1.1
1.5.1.2
1.5.1.3
1.5.1.4
1.5.2
1.5.2.1
1.5.2.2
1.5.3
1.5.3.1
1.5.3.2
1.6
1.6.1
1.6.1.1
1.6.1.2
1.6.1.3
1.6.1.4
1.6.2
1.6.3
1.6.4

2
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.2.1
2.1.2.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.2
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.5
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.2.1
2.5.2.2
2.5.2.3
2.5.2.4
2.5.2.5
2.5.2.6

AntennasandEquipment............................................23
AntennaAttenuation ................................................................................... 23
CalculationofAzimuthandTiltAngles.................................................................... 23
AntennaPattern3DInterpolation ....................................................................... 24
AdditionalElectricalDowntiltModelling.................................................................. 25
AntennaPatternSmoothing.............................................................................. 25
PowerReceivedFromSecondaryAntennas................................................................. 27
TransmitterRadioEquipment ............................................................................ 28
GSMDocuments...................................................................................... 28
UMTS,CDMA2000,TDSCDMA,WiMAX,andLTEDocuments................................................. 28
RepeatersandRemoteAntennas ......................................................................... 30
UMTS,CDMA2000,TDSCDMA,WiMAX,andLTEDocuments................................................. 30
SignalLevelCalculation .............................................................................. 30
TotalGainCalculation................................................................................ 32
RepeaterNoiseFigure ............................................................................... 34
Appendix:CarrierPowerandInterferenceCalculation..................................................... 34
GSMDocuments...................................................................................... 37
SignalLevelCalculation .............................................................................. 37
EIRPCalculation .................................................................................... 38
DonorsideParameterCalculations ...................................................................... 40
Azimuth........................................................................................... 40
MechanicalDowntilt................................................................................. 40
BeamformingSmartAntennaModels ...................................................................... 41
DefinitionsandFormulas............................................................................... 42
Definitions ......................................................................................... 42
DownlinkBeamforming.............................................................................. 42
UplinkBeamforming................................................................................. 43
UplinkBeamformingandInterferenceCancellation(MMSE)................................................ 43
DownlinkBeamforming ................................................................................ 44
UplinkBeamforming .................................................................................. 46
UplinkBeamformingandInterferenceCancellation(MMSE) ................................................. 47

RadioPropagation ..................................................53
PathLossCalculationPrerequisites ........................................................................ 53
GroundAltitudeDetermination......................................................................... 53
ClutterDetermination................................................................................. 55
ClutterClasses ...................................................................................... 55
ClutterHeights ..................................................................................... 55
GeographicProfileExtraction ........................................................................... 56
ResolutionoftheExtractedProfiles ...................................................................... 57
ListofDefaultPropagationModels........................................................................ 58
OkumuraHataandCostHataPropagationModels........................................................... 59
HataPathLossFormula ................................................................................ 59
CorrectionstotheHataPathLossFormula ................................................................ 59
CalculationsinAtoll................................................................................... 60
ITU5293PropagationModel ............................................................................ 60
ITU5293PathLossFormula............................................................................ 60
CorrectionstotheITU5293PathLossFormula ............................................................ 60
CalculationsinAtoll................................................................................... 61
StandardPropagationModel(SPM) ....................................................................... 61
SPMPathLossFormula................................................................................ 61
CalculationsinAtoll................................................................................... 62
VisibilityandDistanceBetweenTransmitterandReceiver.................................................. 62
EffectiveTransmitterAntennaHeight .................................................................. 62
EffectiveReceiverAntennaHeight..................................................................... 65
CorrectionforHillyRegionsinCaseofLOS............................................................... 66
Diffraction......................................................................................... 66
LossesduetoClutter ................................................................................ 66

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
TableofContents

2.5.2.7
2.5.3
2.5.3.1
2.5.3.2
2.5.4
2.6
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.7
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.8
2.8.1
2.8.2
2.9
2.9.1
2.9.2
2.9.3
2.10
2.10.1
2.10.1.1
2.10.1.2
2.10.1.3
2.10.1.4
2.10.1.5
2.10.1.6
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.13.1
2.13.2
2.13.3
2.13.4
2.13.5
2.14
2.14.1
2.14.1.1
2.14.1.2
2.14.2
2.14.2.1
2.14.2.1.1
2.14.2.1.2
2.14.2.2
2.14.2.2.1
2.14.2.2.2
2.15
2.15.1
2.15.2
2.15.3
2.15.3.1
2.15.3.2
2.16
2.16.1
2.16.1.1
2.16.1.2
2.16.1.3
2.16.2
2.16.2.1
2.16.2.2
2.16.2.3
2.16.3
2.16.3.1
2.16.3.2
2.16.3.3
2.16.3.4
2.16.3.5
2.16.3.6

Forsk2014

Recommendations...................................................................................67
AutomaticCalibration .................................................................................68
GeneralAlgorithm ...................................................................................68
SampleValuesforSPMPathLossFormulaParameters.....................................................69
UnmaskedPathLossCalculation .........................................................................70
WLLPropagationModel .................................................................................71
WLLPathLossFormula.................................................................................71
CalculationsinAtoll ...................................................................................71
ITURP.5265PropagationModel .........................................................................72
ITU5265PathLossFormula ............................................................................72
CalculationsinAtoll ...................................................................................72
ITURP.3707PropagationModel .........................................................................72
ITU3707PathLossFormula ............................................................................72
CalculationsinAtoll ...................................................................................72
ErcegGreenstein(SUI)PropagationModel..................................................................74
SUITerrainTypes .....................................................................................74
ErcegGreenstein(SUI)PathLossFormula .................................................................75
CalculationsinAtoll ...................................................................................75
ITURP.15462PropagationModel ........................................................................76
CalculationsinAtoll ...................................................................................76
Step1:DeterminationofGraphstobeUsed .............................................................76
Step2:CalculationofMaximumFieldStrength...........................................................77
Step3:DeterminationofTransmitterAntennaHeight.....................................................77
Step4:Interpolation/ExtrapolationofFieldStrength......................................................77
Step5:CalculationofCorrectionFactors ................................................................79
Step6:CalculationofPathLoss........................................................................80
SakagamiExtendedPropagationModel ....................................................................80
FreeSpaceLoss ........................................................................................82
Diffraction .............................................................................................82
KnifeedgeDiffraction .................................................................................82
3KnifeedgeDeygoutMethod ..........................................................................83
EpsteinPetersonMethod ..............................................................................85
DeygoutMethodwithCorrection ........................................................................85
MillingtonMethod....................................................................................85
ShadowFadingModel ...................................................................................86
ShadowingMarginCalculation ..........................................................................91
ShadowingMarginCalculationinPredictions.............................................................91
ShadowingMarginCalculationinMonteCarloSimulations .................................................93
MacroDiversityGainsCalculation .......................................................................93
UplinkMacroDiversityGainEvaluation.................................................................94
ShadowingErrorPDF(nSignals) ......................................................................94
UplinkMacroDiversityGain .........................................................................96
DownlinkMacroDiversityGainEvaluation...............................................................96
ShadowingErrorPDF(nSignals) ......................................................................96
DownlinkMacroDiversityGain ......................................................................99
PathLossMatrices ......................................................................................99
CalculationAreaDetermination ....................................................................... 100
ValidityofPathLossMatrices......................................................................... 100
PathLossTuning .................................................................................... 101
TransmitterPathLossTuning ........................................................................ 102
RepeaterPathLossTuning .......................................................................... 103
FileFormats ......................................................................................... 103
PathLossMatrixFileFormat.......................................................................... 103
Pathloss.dbfFileFormat ............................................................................ 103
Pathloss.dbfFileContents .......................................................................... 106
LOSFileFormat................................................................................... 107
PathLossTuningFileFormat .......................................................................... 107
Pathloss.dbfFileFormat ............................................................................ 107
Pathloss.dbfFileContents .......................................................................... 107
PTSFileFormat ................................................................................... 107
InterferenceMatrixFileFormats....................................................................... 108
CLCFormat(OneValueperLine) ..................................................................... 108
CLCFileFormat ................................................................................... 108
DCTFileFormat ................................................................................... 109
IM0Format(OneHistogramperLine)................................................................. 110
IM1Format(OneValueperLine,TXNameRepeated) ................................................... 111
IM2Format(CoandAdjacentchannelProbabilities) .................................................... 112

AT321_TRR_E1

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGudie
TableofContents

2.16.4
2.16.4.1
2.16.4.2
2.16.5
2.16.5.1
2.16.5.2
2.16.5.3
2.16.5.4

"PerTransmitter"PredictionFileFormat................................................................. 113
<per_transmitter_prediction>.dbfFileFormat .......................................................... 114
<per_transmitter_prediction>.dbfFileContents ......................................................... 114
CoveragePredictionExportandReports ................................................................. 114
FilteringCoveragePredictionsatExport................................................................ 114
SmoothingCoveragePredictionsatExport ............................................................. 115
ExamplesofPredictionExportFilteringandSmoothing ................................................... 116
CoveragePredictionReportsOverFocus/ComputationZones.............................................. 117

3
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.3.1
3.1.3.2
3.1.4
3.1.4.1
3.1.4.1.1
3.1.4.1.2
3.1.4.1.3
3.1.4.1.4
3.1.4.1.5
3.1.4.1.6
3.1.4.1.7
3.1.4.1.8
3.1.4.2
3.1.4.2.1
3.1.4.2.2
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.3.1
3.2.3.2
3.2.3.2.1
3.2.3.2.2
3.2.3.3
3.2.3.3.1
3.2.3.3.2
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.1.1
3.3.1.2
3.3.1.3
3.3.2
3.3.2.1
3.3.2.2
3.3.2.3
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.5.1
3.3.5.1.1
3.3.5.1.2
3.3.5.1.3
3.3.5.1.4
3.3.5.1.5
3.3.5.1.6
3.3.5.1.7
3.3.5.1.8
3.3.5.2
3.3.5.2.1
3.3.5.2.2
3.4
3.4.1

GSMGPRSEDGENetworks ..........................................121
SignalLevelCalculation................................................................................. 121
DLSignalLevel ...................................................................................... 121
ULSignalLevel ...................................................................................... 121
PointAnalysis....................................................................................... 122
ProfileTab........................................................................................ 122
ReceptionTab..................................................................................... 122
SignalLevelbasedDLCoveragePredictions.............................................................. 122
DLServiceAreaDetermination....................................................................... 122
AllServers....................................................................................... 122
BestSignalLevelandaMargin ...................................................................... 123
SecondBestSignalLevelandaMargin............................................................... 123
BestSignalLevelperHCSLayerandaMargin ......................................................... 123
SecondBestSignalLevelperHCSLayerandaMargin ................................................... 124
HCSServersandaMargin.......................................................................... 124
HighestPriorityHCSServerandaMargin ............................................................. 124
BestIdleModeReselectionCriterion(C2)............................................................. 125
CoverageDisplay................................................................................... 125
CoverageResolution.............................................................................. 125
DisplayTypes.................................................................................... 125
InterferencebasedDLCalculations ....................................................................... 127
DLCarriertoInterferenceRatioCalculation .............................................................. 127
PointAnalysis....................................................................................... 130
InterferencebasedDLCoveragePredictions ............................................................. 131
ServiceAreaDetermination.......................................................................... 131
CoverageAreaDetermination ........................................................................ 131
InterferenceConditionSatisfiedbyAtLeastOneTRX ................................................... 131
InterferenceConditionSatisfiedbyTheWorstTRX ..................................................... 131
CoverageDisplay................................................................................... 131
CoverageResolution.............................................................................. 131
DisplayTypes.................................................................................... 131
GPRS/EDGECalculations ................................................................................ 132
CodingSchemeSelectionandThroughputCalculationWithoutIdealLinkAdaptation ........................... 133
CalculationsBasedonC............................................................................. 133
CalculationsBasedonC/I ............................................................................ 133
CalculationsBasedonC/(I+N)........................................................................ 133
CodingSchemeSelectionandThroughputCalculationWithIdealLinkAdaptation .............................. 134
CalculationsBasedonC............................................................................. 134
CalculationsBasedonC/I ............................................................................ 134
CalculationsBasedonC/(I+N)........................................................................ 135
ApplicationThroughputCalculation ..................................................................... 135
BLERCalculation ..................................................................................... 136
GPRS/EDGECoveragePredictions ...................................................................... 136
ServiceAreaDetermination.......................................................................... 136
AllServers....................................................................................... 136
BestSignalLevelandaMargin ...................................................................... 136
SecondBestSignalLevelandaMargin............................................................... 137
BestSignalLevelperHCSLayerandaMargin ......................................................... 137
SecondBestSignalLevelperHCSLayerandaMargin ................................................... 137
HCSServersandaMargin.......................................................................... 137
HighestPriorityHCSServerandaMargin ............................................................. 138
BestIdleModeReselectionCriterion(C2)............................................................. 138
CoverageDisplay................................................................................... 138
CoverageResolution.............................................................................. 138
DisplayTypes.................................................................................... 139
CodecModeSelectionandCQICalculations................................................................ 141
CircuitQualityIndicatorCalculations .................................................................... 143

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
TableofContents

3.4.2
3.4.2.1
3.4.2.2
3.4.3
3.4.3.1
3.4.3.2
3.4.4
3.4.4.1
3.4.4.1.1
3.4.4.1.2
3.4.4.1.3
3.4.4.1.4
3.4.4.1.5
3.4.4.1.6
3.4.4.1.7
3.4.4.2
3.4.4.2.1
3.4.4.2.2
3.5
3.5.1
3.5.1.1
3.5.1.2
3.5.1.3
3.5.1.4
3.5.1.5
3.5.1.6
3.5.1.7
3.5.1.8
3.5.2
3.5.2.1
3.5.2.2
3.5.2.2.1
3.5.2.2.2
3.5.2.2.3
3.5.2.2.4
3.5.3
3.5.3.1
3.5.3.2
3.5.3.3
3.5.3.4
3.5.3.4.1
3.5.3.4.2
3.5.3.4.3
3.5.4
3.5.4.1
3.5.4.2
3.5.4.3
3.5.5
3.5.5.1
3.5.5.2
3.6
3.6.1
3.6.1.1
3.6.1.1.1
3.6.1.1.2
3.6.1.2
3.6.1.2.1
3.6.1.2.2
3.6.1.3
3.6.1.3.1
3.6.1.3.2
3.6.2
3.6.2.1
3.6.2.1.1
3.6.2.1.2
3.6.2.1.3
3.6.2.2

Forsk2014

CQICalculationWithoutIdealLinkAdaptation........................................................... 143
CalculationsBasedonC/N .......................................................................... 143
CalculationsBasedonC/(I+N) ....................................................................... 144
CQICalculationWithIdealLinkAdaptation.............................................................. 144
CalculationsBasedonC/N .......................................................................... 144
CalculationsBasedonC/(I+N) ....................................................................... 144
CircuitQualityIndicatorsCoveragePredictions........................................................... 145
ServiceAreaDetermination......................................................................... 145
AllServers ...................................................................................... 145
BestSignalLevelandaMargin..................................................................... 145
SecondBestSignalLevelandaMargin .............................................................. 146
BestSignalLevelperHCSLayerandaMargin ......................................................... 146
SecondBestSignalLevelperHCSLayerandaMargin.................................................. 146
HCSServersandaMargin......................................................................... 146
HighestPriorityHCSServerandaMargin............................................................ 147
CoverageDisplay .................................................................................. 147
CoverageResolution ............................................................................. 147
DisplayTypes ................................................................................... 147
ULCoveragePredictions............................................................................... 148
DLServiceAreaDetermination........................................................................ 148
AllServers........................................................................................ 148
BestSignalLevelandaMargin....................................................................... 148
SecondBestSignalLevelandaMargin................................................................ 149
BestSignalLevelperHCSLayerandaMargin .......................................................... 149
SecondBestSignalLevelperHCSLayerandaMargin .................................................... 149
HCSServersandaMargin........................................................................... 150
HighestPriorityHCSServerandaMargin .............................................................. 150
BestIdleModeReselectionCriterion(C2) ............................................................. 151
CoveragebyULSignalLevel........................................................................... 151
CoverageResolution ............................................................................... 151
DisplayTypes ..................................................................................... 151
ULSignalLevel(indBm,dBV,dBV/m) ............................................................. 151
BestULSignalLevel(indBm,dBV,dBV/m) ......................................................... 151
ULTotalLosses(dB) .............................................................................. 152
MinimumULTotalLosses(dB)..................................................................... 152
CoveragebyULC/I.................................................................................. 152
CoverageResolution ............................................................................... 152
ULC/IEvaluation .................................................................................. 152
CoverageAreaDetermination....................................................................... 152
DisplayTypes ..................................................................................... 152
C/ILevel ....................................................................................... 152
MaxC/ILevel ................................................................................... 153
MinC/ILevel.................................................................................... 153
CoveragebyULCodingSchemes....................................................................... 153
ServiceAreaDetermination......................................................................... 153
CodingSchemeSelection........................................................................... 154
ThroughputCalculation............................................................................. 154
CoveragebyULCodecModes ......................................................................... 154
ServiceAreaDetermination......................................................................... 155
CodecModeSelection ............................................................................. 155
TrafficAnalysis....................................................................................... 155
TrafficDistribution.................................................................................. 155
NormalCells(Nonconcentric,NoHCSLayer)........................................................... 155
CircuitSwitchedServices.......................................................................... 155
PacketSwitchedServices.......................................................................... 155
ConcentricCells ................................................................................... 156
CircuitSwitchedServices.......................................................................... 156
PacketSwitchedServices.......................................................................... 156
HCSLayers ....................................................................................... 156
CircuitSwitchedServices.......................................................................... 156
PacketSwitchedServices.......................................................................... 156
CalculationoftheTrafficDemandperSubcell ............................................................ 156
UserProfileTrafficMaps ........................................................................... 156
NormalCells(Nonconcentric,NoHCSLayer) ......................................................... 156
ConcentricCells ................................................................................. 157
HCSLayers...................................................................................... 158
SectorTrafficMaps................................................................................ 162

AT321_TRR_E1

3.6.2.2.1
3.6.2.2.2
3.6.2.2.3
3.7
3.7.1
3.7.1.1
3.7.1.2
3.7.1.2.1
3.7.1.2.2
3.7.1.2.3
3.7.2
3.7.2.1
3.7.2.1.1
3.7.2.1.2
3.7.2.2
3.7.2.2.1
3.7.2.2.2
3.7.2.2.3
3.7.2.2.4
3.7.2.2.5
3.7.2.2.6
3.8
3.8.1
3.8.1.1
3.8.1.2
3.8.1.3
3.8.2
3.8.2.1
3.8.2.1.1
3.8.2.1.2
3.8.2.1.3
3.8.2.1.4
3.8.2.1.5
3.8.2.1.6
3.8.2.2
3.8.2.2.1
3.8.2.2.2
3.8.2.2.3
3.8.2.2.4
3.8.2.2.5
3.8.2.2.6
3.9
3.9.1
3.9.1.1
3.9.1.2
3.9.1.3
3.9.1.4
3.9.1.5
3.9.1.6
3.9.1.7
3.9.1.8
3.9.1.9
3.10
3.10.1
3.10.2
3.10.3
3.10.4
3.11
3.11.1
3.11.1.1
3.11.1.2
3.11.1.2.1
3.11.1.2.2
3.11.1.2.3
3.11.2
3.11.2.1
3.11.2.2

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGudie
TableofContents

NormalCells(Nonconcentric,NoHCSLayer) .......................................................... 162

ConcentricCells .................................................................................. 162
HCSLayers ...................................................................................... 163
NetworkDimensioning ................................................................................. 167
DimensioningModelsandQualityGraphs................................................................ 167
CircuitSwitchedTraffic.............................................................................. 167
PacketSwitchedTraffic ............................................................................. 168
Throughput ..................................................................................... 168
Delay ........................................................................................... 170
BlockingProbability ............................................................................... 171
NetworkDimensioningProcess ........................................................................ 172
NetworkDimensioningEngine ....................................................................... 172
Inputs.......................................................................................... 173
Outputs......................................................................................... 173
NetworkDimensioningSteps......................................................................... 173
Step1:TimeslotsRequiredforCSTraffic ............................................................. 173
Step2:TRXsRequiredforCSTrafficandDedicatedPSTimeslots.......................................... 174
Step3:EffectiveCSBlocking,EffectiveCSTrafficOverflowandServedCSTraffic............................ 174
Step4:TRXstoAddforPSTraffic.................................................................... 174
Step5:ServedPSTraffic ........................................................................... 176
Step6:TotalTrafficLoad .......................................................................... 176
KeyPerformanceIndicatorsCalculation................................................................... 177
CircuitSwitchedTraffic ............................................................................... 177
ErlangB .......................................................................................... 177
ErlangC .......................................................................................... 177
ServedCircuitSwitchedTraffic ....................................................................... 178
PacketSwitchedTraffic............................................................................... 178
Case1:TotalTrafficDemand>Dedicated+SharedTimeslots.............................................. 178
TrafficLoad...................................................................................... 178
PacketSwitchedTrafficOverflow ................................................................... 178
ThroughputReductionFactor....................................................................... 178
Delay ........................................................................................... 178
BlockingProbability ............................................................................... 178
ServedPacketSwitchedTraffic ..................................................................... 179
Case2:TotalTrafficDemand<Dedicated+SharedTimeslots.............................................. 179
TrafficLoad...................................................................................... 179
PacketSwitchedTrafficOverflow ................................................................... 179
ThroughputReductionFactor....................................................................... 179
Delay ........................................................................................... 179
BlockingProbability ............................................................................... 179
ServedPacketSwitchedTraffic ..................................................................... 179
Simulations........................................................................................... 180
RadioResourceManagementinGSM................................................................... 180
GSMSimulationProcess............................................................................. 180
ServersSelection................................................................................... 183
CodecModeAssignmentandDLPowerControl......................................................... 183
CodingSchemeAssignment,ThroughputEvaluationandDLPowerControl .................................. 184
SubcellTrafficLoadsManagement .................................................................... 185
HalfRateTrafficRatioManagement................................................................... 185
DLPowerControlGainManagement.................................................................. 186
DTXDLGainManagement ........................................................................... 186
GSMSimulationResults ............................................................................. 186
AutomaticNeighbourAllocation......................................................................... 187
NeighbourAllocationforAllTransmitters ................................................................ 187
NeighbourAllocationforaGroupofTransmittersorOneTransmitter ........................................ 190
NeighbourImportanceCalculation...................................................................... 190
Appendix:CalculationoftheInterTransmitterDistance .................................................... 191
AFPAppendices ....................................................................................... 192
TheAFPCostFunction ................................................................................ 192
CostFunction...................................................................................... 193
CostComponents.................................................................................. 194
SeparationViolationCostComponent ............................................................... 194
InterferenceCostComponent ...................................................................... 196
I_DIV,F_DIVandOtherAdvancedCostParameters .................................................... 197
TheAFPBlockedTrafficCost........................................................................... 198
CalculationofNewTrafficLoadsIncludingBlockedTrafficLoads ........................................... 199
RecalculationofCSandPSFromTrafficLoads........................................................... 200

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
TableofContents

3.11.2.3
3.11.3
3.11.3.1
3.11.3.2
3.11.3.3
3.11.3.4
3.11.3.4.1
3.11.3.4.2
3.11.3.4.3
3.11.3.5

4
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.2.1
4.1.2.2
4.1.3
4.1.3.1
4.1.3.1.1
4.1.3.1.2
4.1.3.1.3
4.1.3.2
4.1.3.2.1
4.1.3.2.2
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
4.2.5
4.3
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.1.1
4.4.1.1.1
4.4.1.1.2
4.4.1.2
4.4.1.2.1
4.4.1.2.2
4.4.1.2.3
4.4.2
4.4.2.1
4.4.2.2
4.4.2.3
4.4.2.3.1
4.4.2.3.2
4.4.2.3.3
4.4.2.3.4
4.4.2.3.5
4.4.2.3.6
4.4.2.3.7
4.4.2.4
4.4.2.4.1
4.4.2.4.2
4.4.2.4.3
4.4.2.4.4
4.4.2.5
4.4.3
4.4.3.1
4.4.3.2
4.4.3.2.1
4.4.3.2.2
4.4.3.2.3
4.4.3.2.4
4.4.4

10

Forsk2014

TestingtheBlockedCostUsingTrafficAnalysis ......................................................... 201

Interference........................................................................................ 201
UsingInterferences ................................................................................ 201
CumulativeDensityFunctionofC/ILevels ............................................................. 201
PreciseDefinition ................................................................................. 202
PreciseInterferenceDistributionStrategy ............................................................. 202
DirectAvailabilityofPreciseInterferenceDistributiontotheAFP ........................................ 202
EfficientCalculationandStorageofInterferenceDistribution ........................................... 202
RobustnessoftheIM ............................................................................. 202
TrafficLoadandInterferenceInformationDiscrimination ................................................ 203

UMTSHSPANetworks ............................................. 207

GeneralPredictionStudies ............................................................................. 207
CalculationCriteria .................................................................................. 207
PointAnalysis ...................................................................................... 207
ProfileTab ....................................................................................... 207
ReceptionTab .................................................................................... 208
CoverageStudies ................................................................................... 208
ServiceAreaDetermination......................................................................... 208
AllServers ...................................................................................... 208
BestSignalLevelandaMargin..................................................................... 208
SecondBestSignalLevelandaMargin .............................................................. 209
CoverageDisplay .................................................................................. 209
PlotResolution .................................................................................. 209
DisplayTypes ................................................................................... 209
Definitions........................................................................................... 210
Glossary ........................................................................................... 210
Inputs ............................................................................................. 211
Ec/I0Calculation .................................................................................... 218
DLEb/NtCalculation................................................................................. 219
ULEb/NtCalculation................................................................................. 220
ActiveSetManagement ............................................................................... 221
Simulations .......................................................................................... 221
GeneratingaRealisticUserDistribution................................................................. 221
SimulationsBasedonUserProfileTrafficMaps ......................................................... 222
CircuitSwitchedService(i) ........................................................................ 222
PacketSwitchedService(j)........................................................................ 223
SimulationsBasedonSectorTrafficMaps ............................................................. 226
ThroughputsinUplinkandDownlink ................................................................ 226
TotalNumberofUsers(AllActivityStatuses) ......................................................... 227
NumberofUsersperActivityStatus ................................................................ 227
PowerControlSimulation ............................................................................ 227
AlgorithmInitialization............................................................................. 228
R99PartoftheAlgorithm ........................................................................... 229
HSDPAPartoftheAlgorithm........................................................................ 234
HSDPAPowerAllocation.......................................................................... 234
NumberofHSSCCHChannelsandMaximumNumberofHSDPABearerUsers ............................. 234
HSDPABearerAllocationProcess ................................................................... 235
FastLinkAdaptationModelling .................................................................... 238
MIMOModelling ................................................................................ 248
SchedulingAlgorithms ............................................................................ 249
DualCellHSDPA ................................................................................. 251
HSUPAPartoftheAlgorithm........................................................................ 254
AdmissionControl ............................................................................... 255
HSUPABearerAllocationProcess ................................................................... 257
NoiseRiseScheduling ............................................................................ 259
RadioResourceControl ........................................................................... 263
ConvergenceCriteria............................................................................... 263
Results............................................................................................ 263
R99RelatedResults................................................................................ 263
HSPARelatedResults .............................................................................. 265
StatisticsTab.................................................................................... 265
MobilesTab .................................................................................... 266
CellsTab ....................................................................................... 269
SitesTab ....................................................................................... 271
Appendices ........................................................................................ 272

AT321_TRR_E1

4.4.4.1
4.4.4.2
4.4.4.2.1
4.4.4.2.2
4.4.4.2.3
4.4.4.3
4.4.4.3.1
4.4.4.3.2
4.4.4.4
4.4.4.5
4.4.4.6
4.5
4.5.1
4.5.1.1
4.5.1.1.1
4.5.1.1.2
4.5.1.1.3
4.5.1.1.4
4.5.1.1.5
4.5.2
4.5.2.1
4.5.2.1.1
4.5.2.1.2
4.5.2.2
4.5.2.2.1
4.5.2.2.2
4.5.2.3
4.5.2.3.1
4.5.2.3.2
4.5.2.4
4.5.2.4.1
4.5.2.4.2
4.5.2.4.3
4.5.2.5
4.5.2.5.1
4.5.2.5.2
4.5.2.6
4.5.2.6.1
4.5.2.6.2
4.5.2.6.3
4.6
4.6.1
4.6.2
4.6.3
4.6.3.1
4.6.3.2
4.6.4
4.6.4.1
4.7
4.7.1
4.7.1.1
4.7.1.2
4.7.1.2.1
4.7.1.2.2
4.7.1.3
4.7.1.3.1
4.7.1.3.2
4.7.1.3.3
4.7.2
4.7.2.1
4.7.2.1.1
4.7.2.1.2
4.7.2.1.3
4.7.2.1.4
4.7.2.2
4.8
4.8.1

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGudie
TableofContents

AdmissionControlintheR99Part .................................................................... 272

ResourcesManagement............................................................................. 272
OVSFCodesManagement ......................................................................... 272
ChannelElementsManagement .................................................................... 274
IubBackhaulThroughput.......................................................................... 274
DownlinkLoadFactorCalculation ..................................................................... 275
DownlinkLoadFactorperCell...................................................................... 275
DownlinkLoadFactorperMobile ................................................................... 277
UplinkLoadFactorDuetoOneUser ................................................................... 277
IntercarrierPowerSharingModelling................................................................. 279
BestServerDeterminationinMonteCarloSimulationsOldMethod ....................................... 280
UMTSHSPAPredictionStudies .......................................................................... 283
PointAnalysis....................................................................................... 283
ASAnalysisTab.................................................................................... 283
BarGraphandPilotSubMenu...................................................................... 283
DownlinkR99SubMenu .......................................................................... 286
UplinkR99SubMenu............................................................................. 289
HSDPASubMenu ................................................................................ 292
HSUPASubMenu ................................................................................ 295
CoverageStudies.................................................................................... 298
PilotQualityAnalysis ............................................................................... 298
PredictionStudyInputs ............................................................................ 299
StudyDisplayOptions ............................................................................. 299
DownlinkServiceAreaAnalysis ....................................................................... 299
PredictionStudyInputs ............................................................................ 300
StudyDisplayOptions ............................................................................. 300
UplinkServiceAreaAnalysis ......................................................................... 301
PredictionStudyInputs ............................................................................ 302
StudyDisplayOptions ............................................................................. 302
DownlinkTotalNoiseAnalysis ........................................................................ 303
StudyInputs ..................................................................................... 303
AnalysisontheBestCarrier........................................................................ 303
AnalysisonaSpecificCarrier ....................................................................... 304
HSDPAPredictionStudy ............................................................................. 304
PredictionStudyInputs ............................................................................ 305
StudyDisplayOptions ............................................................................. 305
HSUPAPredictionStudy ............................................................................. 309
PredictionStudyInputs ............................................................................ 309
CalculationOptions ............................................................................... 310
DisplayOptions .................................................................................. 310
AutomaticNeighbourAllocation......................................................................... 312
NeighbourAllocationforAllTransmitters ................................................................ 313
NeighbourAllocationforaGroupofTransmittersorOneTransmitter ........................................ 317
ImportanceCalculation............................................................................... 317
ImportanceofIntracarrierNeighbours................................................................ 317
ImportanceofIntercarrierNeighbours................................................................ 319
Appendices ......................................................................................... 320
CalculationoftheInterTransmitterDistance ........................................................... 320
PrimaryScramblingCodeAllocation...................................................................... 320
AutomaticAllocationDescription ....................................................................... 320
OptionsandConstraints............................................................................. 320
AllocationProcess.................................................................................. 322
SingleCarrierNetwork ............................................................................ 322
MultiCarrierNetwork............................................................................. 323
PriorityDetermination.............................................................................. 324
CellPriority...................................................................................... 324
TransmitterPriority ............................................................................... 326
SitePriority...................................................................................... 326
AllocationExamples .................................................................................. 327
AllocationStrategiesandUseaMaximumofCodes ...................................................... 327
Strategy:Clustered ............................................................................... 327
Strategy:Distributed .............................................................................. 328
Strategy:OneClusterperSite ...................................................................... 329
Strategy:DistributedperSite ...................................................................... 329
AllocateCarriersIdentically .......................................................................... 330
AutomaticGSMUMTSNeighbourAllocation ............................................................... 330
Overview ........................................................................................... 330

11

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
TableofContents

4.8.2
4.8.2.1
4.8.2.2
4.8.2.3
4.8.2.3.1

5
5.1
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.2.1
5.1.2.2
5.1.3
5.1.3.1
5.1.3.1.1
5.1.3.1.2
5.1.3.1.3
5.1.3.2
5.1.3.2.1
5.1.3.2.2
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.1.1
5.2.1.2
5.2.1.3
5.2.1.4
5.2.1.5
5.2.2
5.2.2.1
5.2.2.2
5.2.2.3
5.2.2.4
5.3
5.4
5.4.1
5.4.1.1
5.4.1.1.1
5.4.1.1.2
5.4.1.2
5.4.1.3
5.4.2
5.4.2.1
5.4.2.1.1
5.4.2.1.2
5.4.2.1.3
5.4.2.2
5.4.2.2.1
5.4.2.2.2
5.4.2.2.3
5.4.3
5.4.3.1
5.4.3.2
5.4.3.2.1
5.4.3.2.2
5.4.3.3
5.4.3.3.1
5.4.3.3.2
5.4.3.4
5.5
5.5.1
5.5.1.1
5.5.1.2
5.5.1.2.1
5.5.1.2.2
5.5.1.3
5.5.1.3.1

12

Forsk2014

AutomaticAllocationDescription...................................................................... 331
AlgorithmBasedonDistance ........................................................................ 331
AlgorithmBasedonCoverageOverlapping ............................................................ 332
Appendices....................................................................................... 334
DeleteExistingNeighboursOption.................................................................. 334

CDMA2000Networks ............................................. 337

GeneralPredictionStudies ............................................................................. 337
CalculationCriteria .................................................................................. 337
PointAnalysis ...................................................................................... 338
ProfileTab ....................................................................................... 338
ReceptionTab .................................................................................... 338
CoverageStudies ................................................................................... 338
ServiceAreaDetermination......................................................................... 338
AllServers ...................................................................................... 338
BestSignalLevelandaMargin..................................................................... 338
SecondBestSignalLevelandaMargin .............................................................. 339
CoverageDisplay .................................................................................. 339
PlotResolution .................................................................................. 339
DisplayTypes ................................................................................... 339
DefinitionsandFormulas............................................................................... 340
ParametersUsedforCDMA20001xRTTModelling ........................................................ 340
Inputs........................................................................................... 340
Ec/I0Calculation .................................................................................. 345
DLEb/NtCalculation ............................................................................... 346
ULEb/NtCalculation ............................................................................... 347
SimulationResults ................................................................................. 348
ParametersUsedforCDMA20001xEVDOModelling ..................................................... 350
Inputs........................................................................................... 350
Ec/I0andEc/NtCalculations......................................................................... 354
ULEb/NtCalculation ............................................................................... 355
SimulationResults ................................................................................. 356
ActiveSetManagement ............................................................................... 358
Simulations .......................................................................................... 358
GeneratingaRealisticUserDistribution................................................................. 359
NumberofUsers,UserActivityStatusandUserThroughput .............................................. 359
SimulationsBasedonUserProfileTrafficMaps ....................................................... 359
SimulationsBasedonSectorTrafficMaps ............................................................ 362
TransitionFlagsfor1xEVDORev.0UserThroughputs ................................................... 367
UserGeographicalPosition ......................................................................... 368
NetworkRegulationMechanism ....................................................................... 368
CDMA20001xRTTPowerControlSimulationAlgorithm.................................................. 368
AlgorithmInitialization ........................................................................... 369
PresentationoftheAlgorithm ..................................................................... 369
ConvergenceCriterion ............................................................................ 376
CDMA20001xEVDOPower/DataRateControlSimulationAlgorithm ...................................... 377
AlgorithmInitialization ........................................................................... 377
PresentationoftheAlgorithm ..................................................................... 377
ConvergenceCriterion ............................................................................ 385
Appendices ........................................................................................ 386
AdmissionControl ................................................................................. 386
ResourcesManagement ............................................................................ 386
WalshCodeManagement ......................................................................... 386
ChannelElementManagement .................................................................... 387
DownlinkLoadFactorCalculation.................................................................... 388
DownlinkLoadFactorperCell ..................................................................... 388
DownlinkLoadFactorperMobile................................................................... 389
BestServerDeterminationinMonteCarloSimulationsOldMethod....................................... 389
CDMA2000PredictionStudies .......................................................................... 392
PointAnalysis:TheASAnalysisTab..................................................................... 392
BarGraphandPilotSubMenu....................................................................... 392
DownlinkSubMenu............................................................................... 395
CDMA20001xRTT................................................................................ 395
CDMA20001xEVDO ............................................................................. 400
UplinkSubMenu .................................................................................. 402
CDMA20001xRTT................................................................................ 402

AT321_TRR_E1

5.5.1.3.2
5.5.2
5.5.2.1
5.5.2.2
5.5.2.2.1
5.5.2.2.2
5.5.2.3
5.5.2.3.1
5.5.2.3.2
5.5.2.4
5.5.2.4.1
5.5.2.4.2
5.6
5.6.1
5.6.2
5.6.3
5.6.3.1
5.6.3.2
5.6.4
5.6.4.1
5.7
5.7.1
5.7.1.1
5.7.1.2
5.7.1.2.1
5.7.1.2.2
5.7.1.2.3
5.7.1.3
5.7.1.3.1
5.7.1.3.2
5.7.1.3.3
5.7.2
5.7.2.1
5.7.2.2
5.7.2.3
5.8
5.8.1
5.8.2
5.8.2.1
5.8.2.2
5.8.2.3

6
6.1
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.2.5
6.2.6
6.2.7
6.2.8
6.2.9
6.2.10
6.2.11
6.2.12
6.2.13
6.2.14
6.2.15
6.2.16
6.2.17
6.2.18
6.2.19
6.2.20
6.3

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGudie
TableofContents

CDMA20001xEVDO .............................................................................. 406

CoverageStudies.................................................................................... 412
PilotQualityAnalysis ............................................................................... 412
DownlinkServiceAreaAnalysis ....................................................................... 414
CDMA20001xRTT ................................................................................ 414
CDMA20001xEVDO .............................................................................. 415
UplinkServiceAreaAnalysis ......................................................................... 417
CDMA20001xRTT ................................................................................ 417
CDMA20001xEVDO .............................................................................. 419
DownlinkTotalNoiseAnalysis ........................................................................ 422
AnalysisontheBestCarrier........................................................................ 423
AnalysisonaSpecificCarrier ....................................................................... 423
AutomaticNeighbourAllocation......................................................................... 423
NeighbourAllocationforallTransmitters................................................................ 424
NeighbourAllocationforaGroupofTransmittersorOneTransmitter ........................................ 427
ImportanceCalculation............................................................................... 428
ImportanceofIntracarrierNeighbours................................................................ 428
ImportanceofIntercarrierNeighbours................................................................ 429
Appendices ......................................................................................... 430
CalculationoftheInterTransmitterDistance ........................................................... 430
PNOffsetAllocation ................................................................................... 430
AutomaticAllocationDescription ....................................................................... 431
OptionsandConstraints............................................................................. 431
AllocationProcess.................................................................................. 432
SingleCarrierNetwork ............................................................................ 432
MultiCarrierNetwork............................................................................. 433
DifferencebetweenAdjacentandDistributedPNClusters............................................... 433
PriorityDetermination.............................................................................. 433
CellPriority...................................................................................... 433
TransmitterPriority ............................................................................... 435
SitePriority...................................................................................... 436
AllocationExamples .................................................................................. 436
Strategy:PNOffsetperCell.......................................................................... 437
Strategy:AdjacentPNClustersPerSite ................................................................ 437
Strategy:DistributedPNClustersPerSite.............................................................. 438
AutomaticGSMCDMANeighbourAllocation............................................................... 438
Overview ........................................................................................... 438
AutomaticAllocationDescription ....................................................................... 438
AlgorithmBasedonDistance......................................................................... 439
AlgorithmBasedonCoverageOverlapping ............................................................. 439
DeleteExistingNeighboursOption.................................................................... 442

LTENetworks .....................................................445
Definitions ........................................................................................... 445
CalculationQuickReference............................................................................. 450
DownlinkTransmissionPowersCalculation............................................................... 450
CoandAdjacentChannelOverlapsCalculation ........................................................... 453
SignalLevelCalculation(DL)........................................................................... 453
NoiseCalculation(DL)................................................................................ 455
InterferenceCalculation(DL) .......................................................................... 455
C/NCalculation(DL).................................................................................. 459
C/(I+N)Calculation(DL) ............................................................................... 460
SignalLevelCalculation(UL)........................................................................... 462
NoiseCalculation(UL)................................................................................ 462
InterferenceCalculation(UL) .......................................................................... 462
NoiseRiseCalculation(UL)............................................................................ 463
C/NCalculation(UL).................................................................................. 463
C/(I+N)Calculation(UL) ............................................................................... 463
CalculationofDownlinkCellResources .................................................................. 464
CalculationofUplinkCellResources .................................................................... 465
CalculationofDownlinkUECapacity.................................................................... 465
CalculationofUplinkUECapacity....................................................................... 465
ChannelThroughput,CellCapacity,AllocatedBandwidthThroughput,andPeruserThroughputCalculation........ 466
SchedulingandRadioResourceManagement ............................................................ 467
UserThroughputCalculation .......................................................................... 469
AvailableCalculations.................................................................................. 470

13

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
TableofContents

6.3.1
6.3.1.1
6.3.1.2
6.3.1.3
6.3.1.4
6.3.2
6.3.2.1
6.3.2.2
6.3.2.3
6.3.2.4
6.3.3
6.3.4
6.3.4.1
6.3.4.1.1
6.3.4.1.2
6.3.4.2
6.4
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.2.1
6.4.2.2
6.4.2.3
6.4.2.4
6.4.3
6.4.3.1
6.4.3.2
6.4.3.3
6.4.4
6.4.4.1
6.4.4.2
6.4.4.3
6.4.4.4
6.4.4.5
6.4.4.6
6.4.4.7
6.4.4.8
6.4.4.8.1
6.4.4.8.2
6.4.4.9
6.4.4.10
6.4.5
6.4.6
6.4.6.1
6.4.6.1.1
6.4.6.1.2
6.4.6.2
6.4.6.2.1
6.4.6.2.2
6.4.6.3
6.4.7
6.4.7.1
6.4.7.2
6.5
6.5.1
6.5.2
6.5.3
6.5.3.1
6.5.3.2
6.5.3.3
6.5.4
6.5.4.1
6.5.4.2
6.5.4.3
6.5.5
6.5.5.1
6.5.5.2

14

Forsk2014

PointAnalysis ...................................................................................... 470

ProfileView ...................................................................................... 470
ReceptionView ................................................................................... 470
InterferenceView ................................................................................. 470
DetailsView ...................................................................................... 470
CoveragePredictions................................................................................ 471
DownlinkSignalLevelCoveragePredictions............................................................ 471
EffectiveSignalAnalysisCoveragePredictions .......................................................... 472
C/(I+N)basedCoveragePredictions .................................................................. 473
CellIdentifierCollisionZonesCoveragePrediction ...................................................... 475
CalculationsonSubscriberLists........................................................................ 476
MonteCarloSimulations............................................................................. 476
UserDistribution.................................................................................. 476
SimulationsBasedonUserProfileTrafficMapsandSubscriberLists ...................................... 476
SimulationsBasedonSectorTrafficMaps ............................................................ 478
SimulationProcess ................................................................................ 479
CalculationDetails.................................................................................... 485
DownlinkTransmissionPowerCalculation............................................................... 485
CoandAdjacentChannelOverlapsCalculation .......................................................... 493
ConversionFromChannelNumberstoStartandEndFrequencies ......................................... 494
CoChannelOverlapCalculation...................................................................... 495
AdjacentChannelOverlapCalculation ................................................................ 496
TotalOverlapRatioCalculation...................................................................... 496
SubframePatternCollisionCalculation ................................................................. 497
SubframePatternNormalisation ..................................................................... 497
DeterminationofEffectiveSubframePatterns.......................................................... 498
CalculationofSubframeCollisionProbabilities ......................................................... 499
SignalLevelandSignalQualityCalculations .............................................................. 501
SignalLevelCalculation(DL) ......................................................................... 501
NoiseCalculation(DL) .............................................................................. 505
InterferenceCalculation(DL)........................................................................ 505
C/NCalculation(DL) ............................................................................... 516
C/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(DL)................................................................... 518
SignalLevelCalculation(UL)......................................................................... 523
NoiseCalculation(UL) .............................................................................. 525
InterferenceCalculation(UL)........................................................................ 525
InterferingSignalLevelCalculation(UL).............................................................. 526
NoiseRiseCalculation(UL)........................................................................ 528
C/NCalculation(UL) ............................................................................... 529
C/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(UL)................................................................... 532
BestServerDetermination............................................................................ 535
ThroughputCalculation.............................................................................. 537
CalculationofTotalCellResources ................................................................... 537
CalculationofDownlinkCellResources .............................................................. 537
CalculationofUplinkCellResources ................................................................ 542
CalculationUECapacities........................................................................... 544
CalculationofDownlinkUECapacity................................................................ 545
CalculationofUplinkUECapacity................................................................... 545
ChannelThroughput,CellCapacity,AllocatedBandwidthThroughput,andPeruserThroughputCalculation ...... 546
SchedulingandRadioResourceManagement............................................................ 551
SchedulingandRadioResourceAllocation ............................................................. 551
UserThroughputCalculation........................................................................ 561
AutomaticPlanningAlgorithms ......................................................................... 562
AutomaticNeighbourPlanning........................................................................ 562
AutomaticIntertechnologyNeighbourPlanning ......................................................... 566
AutomaticFrequencyPlanningUsingtheAFP ............................................................ 569
ConstraintandRelationshipWeights ................................................................. 569
CostCalculation ................................................................................... 570
AFPAlgorithm .................................................................................... 570
AutomaticPhysicalCellIDPlanningUsingtheAFP........................................................ 571
ConstraintandRelationshipWeights ................................................................. 571
CostCalculation ................................................................................... 573
AFPAlgorithm .................................................................................... 575
Appendices ........................................................................................ 575
InterferenceMatrixCalculation ...................................................................... 575
DistanceImportanceCalculation ..................................................................... 576

AT321_TRR_E1

7
7.1
7.2
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.3

8
8.1
8.2
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.3

9
9.1
9.1.1
9.1.2
9.1.3
9.1.4
9.1.5
9.1.6
9.1.7
9.2
9.2.1
9.2.1.1
9.2.1.2
9.2.2
9.2.2.1
9.2.2.2
9.2.2.2.1
9.2.2.2.2
9.2.2.3
9.2.2.4
9.2.2.5
9.2.2.5.1
9.2.2.5.2
9.2.2.6
9.2.2.6.1
9.2.2.6.2
9.2.2.7
9.2.2.7.1
9.2.2.7.2
9.2.2.8
9.3
9.3.1
9.3.1.1
9.3.1.1.1
9.3.1.1.2
9.3.1.2
9.3.1.2.1
9.3.1.2.2
9.3.1.2.3
9.3.2
9.3.2.1
9.3.2.2
9.3.2.2.1
9.3.2.2.2
9.3.2.2.3
9.3.2.2.4
9.3.2.2.5
9.3.2.2.6
9.3.2.2.7
9.3.2.3
9.3.2.3.1

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGudie
TableofContents

3GPPMultiRATNetworks ..........................................581
Definitions ........................................................................................... 581
MultiRATMonteCarloSimulations ...................................................................... 581
UserDistribution .................................................................................... 581
SimulationProcess ................................................................................... 583
MultiRATCoveragePredictions ......................................................................... 583

3GPP2MultiRATNetworks .........................................587
Definitions ........................................................................................... 587
MultiRATMonteCarloSimulations ...................................................................... 587
UserDistribution .................................................................................... 587
SimulationProcess ................................................................................... 588
MultiRATCoveragePredictions ......................................................................... 589

TDSCDMANetworks...............................................593
DefinitionsandFormulas ............................................................................... 593
Inputs ............................................................................................. 593
PCCPCHEb/NtandC/ICalculation ..................................................................... 598
DwPCHC/ICalculation................................................................................ 598
DLTCHEb/NtandC/ICalculation ....................................................................... 599
ULTCHEb/NtandC/ICalculation ....................................................................... 599
InterferenceCalculation .............................................................................. 600
HSDPADynamicPowerCalculations .................................................................... 600
SignalLevelBasedCalculations .......................................................................... 600
PointAnalysis....................................................................................... 600
ProfileTab........................................................................................ 601
ReceptionTab..................................................................................... 601
RSCPBasedCoveragePredictions....................................................................... 601
CalculationCriteria ................................................................................. 601
PCCPCHRSCPCoveragePrediction ................................................................... 602
CoverageCondition ............................................................................... 602
CoverageDisplay ................................................................................. 602
BestServerPCCPCHCoveragePrediction.............................................................. 603
PCCPCHPollutionAnalysisCoveragePrediction......................................................... 603
DwPCHRSCPCoveragePrediction .................................................................... 603
CoverageCondition ............................................................................... 603
CoverageDisplay ................................................................................. 604
UpPCHRSCPCoveragePrediction ..................................................................... 604
CoverageCondition ............................................................................... 604
CoverageDisplay ................................................................................. 604
BatonHandoverCoveragePrediction .................................................................. 605
CoverageCondition ............................................................................... 605
CoverageDisplay ................................................................................. 605
ScramblingCodeInterferenceAnalysis................................................................. 605
MonteCarloSimulations ............................................................................... 606
GeneratingaRealisticUserDistribution ................................................................. 606
SimulationsBasedonUserProfileTrafficMaps.......................................................... 606
CircuitSwitchedService(i)......................................................................... 607
PacketSwitchedService(j) ......................................................................... 607
SimulationsBasedonSectorTrafficMaps.............................................................. 610
ThroughputsinUplinkandDownlink................................................................. 610
TotalNumberofUsers(AllActivityStatuses) .......................................................... 611
NumberofUsersperActivityStatus................................................................. 611
PowerControlSimulation............................................................................. 611
AlgorithmInitialisation .............................................................................. 612
R99PartoftheAlgorithm ........................................................................... 612
DeterminationofMisBestServer(SBS(Mi)) .......................................................... 612
DynamicChannelAllocation ........................................................................ 613
UplinkPowerControl ............................................................................. 615
DownlinkPowerControl ........................................................................... 617
UplinkSignalsUpdate............................................................................. 619
DownlinkSignalsUpdate .......................................................................... 619
ControlofRadioResourceLimits(DownlinkTrafficPowerandUplinkLoad)................................ 620
HSDPAPartoftheAlgorithm ......................................................................... 620
HSDPAPowerAllocation ........................................................................... 620

15

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
TableofContents

9.3.2.3.2
9.3.2.3.3
9.3.2.3.4
9.3.2.3.5
9.3.2.4
9.4
9.4.1
9.4.2
9.4.3
9.4.4
9.4.5
9.4.6
9.4.7
9.4.8
9.4.9
9.4.10
9.4.11
9.5
9.5.1
9.5.1.1
9.5.1.2
9.5.1.3
9.5.1.4
9.5.1.5
9.5.2
9.5.3
9.5.4
9.5.4.1
9.5.4.1.1
9.5.4.1.2
9.5.4.2
9.5.4.2.1
9.5.4.2.2
9.5.4.2.3
9.6
9.6.1
9.7
9.7.1
9.7.2
9.7.3
9.7.4
9.8
9.8.1
9.8.1.1
9.8.1.2
9.8.1.3
9.8.1.3.1
9.8.1.3.2
9.8.1.4
9.8.1.4.1
9.8.1.4.2
9.8.1.4.3
9.8.2
9.8.2.1
9.8.2.1.1
9.8.2.1.2
9.8.2.1.3
9.8.2.1.4
9.8.2.2
9.9
9.9.1
9.9.1.1
9.9.1.2
9.9.1.3
9.9.1.3.1

16

Forsk2014

ConnectionStatusandNumberofHSDPAUsers ...................................................... 622

HSDPAAdmissionControl ......................................................................... 622
HSDPADynamicChannelAllocation................................................................. 623
RessourceUnitSaturation......................................................................... 623
ConvergenceCriteria............................................................................... 623
TDSCDMAPredictionStudies........................................................................... 624
PCCPCHReceptionAnalysis(Eb/Nt)or(C/I)............................................................. 624
DwPCHReceptionAnalysis(C/I) ....................................................................... 626
DownlinkTCHRSCPCoverage......................................................................... 627
UplinkTCHRSCPCoverage............................................................................ 628
DownlinkTotalNoise................................................................................ 629
DownlinkServiceAreaAnalysis(Eb/Nt)or(C/I)........................................................... 630
UplinkServiceAreaAnalysis(Eb/Nt)or(C/I)............................................................. 632
EffectiveServiceAreaAnalysis(Eb/Nt)or(C/I)........................................................... 633
CelltoCellInterference.............................................................................. 634
UpPCHInterference................................................................................. 635
HSDPAPredictions .................................................................................. 635
SmartAntennaModelling .............................................................................. 637
ModellinginSimulations............................................................................. 637
GridofBeamsModelling ........................................................................... 637
AdaptiveBeamModelling........................................................................... 639
StatisticalModelling ............................................................................... 639
BeamformingSmartAntennaModels ................................................................. 640
3rdPartySmartAntennaModelling .................................................................. 640
ConstructionoftheGeographicDistributions............................................................ 640
ModellinginCoveragePredictions..................................................................... 641
HSDPAQualityandThroughputAnalysis................................................................ 642
FastLinkAdaptationModelling...................................................................... 642
CQIBasedonPCCPCHQuality..................................................................... 642
CQIBasedonHSPDSCHQuality .................................................................... 646
CoveragePredictionDisplayOptions.................................................................. 647
ColourperCQI .................................................................................. 648
ColourperPeakThroughput ....................................................................... 648
ColourperHSPDSCHEc/Nt ....................................................................... 648
NFrequencyModeandCarrierAllocation ................................................................ 648
AutomaticCarrierAllocation .......................................................................... 648
NeighbourAllocation .................................................................................. 649
NeighbourAllocationforAllTransmitters ............................................................... 649
NeighbourAllocationforaGroupofTransmittersorOneTransmitter........................................ 653
ImportanceCalculation .............................................................................. 653
Appendix:CalculationoftheInterTransmitterDistance................................................... 654
ScramblingCodeAllocation............................................................................. 655
AutomaticAllocationDescription...................................................................... 655
AllocationConstraintsandOptions ................................................................... 655
AllocationStrategies............................................................................... 656
AllocationProcess ................................................................................. 656
SingleCarrierNetwork............................................................................ 657
MultiCarrierNetwork ............................................................................ 658
PriorityDetermination ............................................................................. 658
CellPriority ..................................................................................... 658
TransmitterPriority.............................................................................. 661
SitePriority ..................................................................................... 661
ScramblingCodeAllocationExample................................................................... 662
SingleCarrierNetwork ............................................................................. 662
Strategy:Clustered............................................................................... 662
Strategy:DistributedperCell ...................................................................... 663
Strategy:OneSYNC_DLCodeperSite ............................................................... 663
Strategy:DistributedperSite...................................................................... 664
MultiCarrierNetwork .............................................................................. 664
AutomaticGSM/TDSCDMANeighbourAllocation .......................................................... 665
AutomaticAllocationDescription...................................................................... 665
AlgorithmBasedonDistance ........................................................................ 665
AlgorithmBasedonCoverageOverlapping ............................................................ 666
Appendices....................................................................................... 668
DeleteExistingNeighboursOption.................................................................. 668

AT321_TRR_E1

10
10.1
10.2
10.2.1
10.2.2
10.2.3
10.2.4
10.2.5
10.2.6
10.2.7
10.2.8
10.2.9
10.2.10
10.2.11
10.2.12
10.2.13
10.2.14
10.2.15
10.2.16
10.2.17
10.2.18
10.2.19
10.2.20
10.3
10.3.1
10.3.1.1
10.3.1.2
10.3.1.3
10.3.1.4
10.3.2
10.3.2.1
10.3.2.2
10.3.2.3
10.3.2.4
10.3.3
10.3.4
10.3.4.1
10.3.4.1.1
10.3.4.1.2
10.3.4.2
10.4
10.4.1
10.4.1.1
10.4.1.2
10.4.1.3
10.4.1.4
10.4.1.5
10.4.2
10.4.2.1
10.4.2.2
10.4.2.3
10.4.2.4
10.4.2.5
10.4.3
10.4.4
10.4.5
10.4.6
10.4.6.1
10.4.6.2
10.4.6.3
10.4.6.3.1
10.4.6.3.2
10.4.6.4
10.4.6.5
10.4.6.6
10.4.6.7

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGudie
TableofContents

WiMAXBWANetworks .............................................671
Definitions ........................................................................................... 671
CalculationQuickReference............................................................................. 676
CoandAdjacentChannelOverlapsCalculation ........................................................... 676
PreambleSignalLevelCalculation ...................................................................... 677
PreambleNoiseCalculation ........................................................................... 677
PreambleInterferenceCalculation...................................................................... 677
PreambleC/NCalculation............................................................................. 677
PreambleC/(I+N)Calculation.......................................................................... 678
TrafficandPilotSignalLevelCalculation(DL) ............................................................. 678
TrafficandPilotNoiseCalculation(DL) .................................................................. 678
TrafficandPilotInterferenceCalculation(DL)............................................................. 679
TrafficandPilotC/NCalculation(DL) .................................................................... 680
TrafficandPilotC/(I+N)Calculation(DL)................................................................. 680
TrafficSignalLevelCalculation(UL) ..................................................................... 681
TrafficNoiseCalculation(UL) .......................................................................... 681
TrafficInterferenceCalculation(UL) .................................................................... 681
TrafficC/NCalculation(UL) ............................................................................ 682
TrafficC/(I+N)Calculation(UL) ......................................................................... 682
CalculationofTotalCellResources...................................................................... 682
ChannelThroughput,CellCapacity,AllocatedBandwidthThroughput,andPeruserThroughputCalculation........ 683
SchedulingandRadioResourceManagement ............................................................ 685
UserThroughputCalculation .......................................................................... 687
AvailableCalculations.................................................................................. 688
PointAnalysis....................................................................................... 688
ProfileView ....................................................................................... 688
ReceptionView .................................................................................... 688
InterferenceView .................................................................................. 688
DetailsView....................................................................................... 688
CoveragePredictions ................................................................................. 689
PreambleSignalLevelCoveragePredictions ............................................................ 689
EffectiveSignalAnalysisCoveragePredictions........................................................... 690
C/(I+N)basedCoveragePredictions ................................................................... 691
CellIdentifierCollisionZonesCoveragePrediction ....................................................... 693
CalculationsonSubscriberLists ........................................................................ 693
MonteCarloSimulations .............................................................................. 694
UserDistribution................................................................................... 694
SimulationsBasedonUserProfileTrafficMapsandSubscriberLists....................................... 694
SimulationsBasedonSectorTrafficMaps ............................................................ 696
SimulationProcess................................................................................. 697
CalculationDetails ..................................................................................... 700
CoandAdjacentChannelOverlapsCalculation ........................................................... 700
ConversionFromChannelNumberstoStartandEndFrequencies.......................................... 701
CoChannelOverlapCalculation ...................................................................... 702
AdjacentChannelOverlapCalculation................................................................. 703
FDDTDDOverlapRatioCalculation.................................................................. 703
TotalOverlapRatioCalculation ....................................................................... 704
PreambleSignalLevelandQualityCalculations ........................................................... 705
PreambleSignalLevelCalculation ..................................................................... 705
PreambleNoiseCalculation .......................................................................... 706
PreambleInterferenceCalculation.................................................................... 708
PreambleC/NCalculation ........................................................................... 710
PreambleC/(I+N)Calculation......................................................................... 710
BestServerDetermination ............................................................................ 711
ServiceAreaCalculation .............................................................................. 712
PermutationZoneSelection........................................................................... 712
TrafficandPilotSignalLevelandQualityCalculations...................................................... 713
TrafficandPilotSignalLevelCalculation(DL)............................................................ 713
TrafficandPilotNoiseCalculation(DL)................................................................. 715
TrafficandPilotInterferenceCalculation(DL) ........................................................... 716
TrafficandPilotInterferenceSignalLevelsCalculation(DL).............................................. 716
EffectiveTrafficandPilotInterferenceCalculation(DL) ................................................. 720
TrafficandPilotC/NCalculation(DL) .................................................................. 724
TrafficandPilotC/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(DL)...................................................... 725
TrafficSignalLevelCalculation(UL).................................................................... 727
TrafficNoiseCalculation(UL)......................................................................... 728

17

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
TableofContents

10.4.6.8
10.4.6.8.1
10.4.6.8.2
10.4.6.9
10.4.6.10
10.4.7
10.4.7.1
10.4.7.1.1
10.4.7.1.2
10.4.7.1.3
10.4.7.1.4
10.4.7.2
10.4.8
10.4.8.1
10.4.8.2
10.5
10.5.1
10.5.2
10.5.3
10.5.3.1
10.5.3.2
10.5.3.3
10.5.4
10.5.4.1
10.5.4.2
10.5.4.3
10.5.5
10.5.5.1
10.5.5.2
10.5.5.3
10.5.6
10.5.6.1
10.5.6.2

11
11.1
11.2
11.2.1
11.2.2
11.2.3
11.2.4
11.2.5
11.2.6
11.2.7
11.2.8
11.2.9
11.2.10
11.2.11
11.2.12
11.2.13
11.2.14
11.2.15
11.3
11.3.1
11.3.1.1
11.3.1.2
11.3.1.3
11.3.2
11.3.2.1
11.3.2.2
11.3.2.3
11.3.3
11.3.4
11.3.4.1
11.3.4.1.1
11.3.4.1.2

18

Forsk2014

TrafficInterferenceCalculation(UL).................................................................. 729
TrafficInterferenceSignalLevelsCalculation(UL) ..................................................... 729
NoiseRiseCalculation(UL)........................................................................ 731
TrafficC/NCalculation(UL) ......................................................................... 732
TrafficC/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(UL) ............................................................. 735
ThroughputCalculation.............................................................................. 738
CalculationofTotalCellResources ................................................................... 738
CalculationofSamplingFrequency.................................................................. 738
CalculationofSymbolDuration .................................................................... 739
CalculationofTotalCellResourcesTDDNetworks .................................................... 739
CalculationofTotalCellResourcesFDDNetworks .................................................... 740
ChannelThroughput,CellCapacity,AllocatedBandwidthThroughput,andPerUserThroughputCalculation ..... 741
SchedulingandRadioResourceManagement............................................................ 746
SchedulingandRadioResourceAllocation ............................................................. 746
UserThroughputCalculation........................................................................ 755
AutomaticPlanningAlgorithms ......................................................................... 757
AutomaticNeighbourPlanning........................................................................ 757
AutomaticIntertechnologyNeighbourPlanning ......................................................... 761
AutomaticFrequencyPlanningUsingtheAFP ............................................................ 763
ConstraintandRelationshipWeights ................................................................. 764
CostCalculation ................................................................................... 764
AFPAlgorithm .................................................................................... 765
AutomaticPreambleIndexPlanningUsingtheAFP ....................................................... 765
ConstraintandRelationshipWeights ................................................................. 766
CostCalculation ................................................................................... 767
AFPAlgorithm .................................................................................... 769
AutomaticZonePermBasePlanningUsingtheAFP........................................................ 769
ConstraintandRelationshipWeights ................................................................. 770
CostCalculation ................................................................................... 770
AFPAlgorithm .................................................................................... 772
Appendices ........................................................................................ 772
InterferenceMatrixCalculation ...................................................................... 772
DistanceImportanceCalculation ..................................................................... 772

WiFiNetworks................................................... 777
Definitions........................................................................................... 777
CalculationQuickReference ............................................................................ 780
CoandAdjacentChannelOverlapsCalculation .......................................................... 780
SignalLevelCalculation(DL) .......................................................................... 781
NoiseCalculation(DL) ............................................................................... 781
InterferenceCalculation(DL).......................................................................... 781
C/NCalculation(DL)................................................................................. 782
C/(I+N)Calculation(DL).............................................................................. 782
SignalLevelCalculation(UL) .......................................................................... 782
NoiseCalculation(UL) ............................................................................... 782
InterferenceCalculation(UL).......................................................................... 782
C/NCalculation(UL) ................................................................................. 783
C/(I+N)Calculation(UL).............................................................................. 783
CalculationofTotalCellResources ..................................................................... 783
ChannelThroughput,CellCapacity,andPeruserThroughputCalculation..................................... 784
SchedulingandRadioResourceManagement............................................................ 785
UserThroughputCalculation .......................................................................... 786
AvailableCalculations ................................................................................. 787
PointAnalysis ...................................................................................... 787
ProfileView ...................................................................................... 787
ReceptionView ................................................................................... 787
InterferenceView ................................................................................. 787
CoveragePredictions................................................................................ 787
SignalLevelCoveragePredictions.................................................................... 787
EffectiveSignalAnalysisCoveragePredictions .......................................................... 789
C/(I+N)basedCoveragePredictions .................................................................. 789
CalculationsonSubscriberLists........................................................................ 791
MonteCarloSimulations............................................................................. 791
UserDistribution.................................................................................. 791
SimulationsBasedonUserProfileTrafficMapsandSubscriberLists ...................................... 792
SimulationsBasedonSectorTrafficMaps ............................................................ 793

AT321_TRR_E1

11.3.4.2
11.4
11.4.1
11.4.1.1
11.4.1.2
11.4.1.3
11.4.1.4
11.4.2
11.4.2.1
11.4.2.2
11.4.2.3
11.4.2.4
11.4.2.5
11.4.2.6
11.4.2.7
11.4.2.8
11.4.2.8.1
11.4.2.8.2
11.4.2.9
11.4.2.10
11.4.3
11.4.4
11.4.5
11.4.5.1
11.4.5.2
11.4.6
11.4.6.1
11.4.6.2
11.5
11.5.1
11.5.2
11.5.3
11.5.3.1
11.5.3.2
11.5.3.3
11.5.4
11.5.4.1
11.5.4.2

12
12.1
12.1.1
12.1.1.1
12.1.1.2
12.1.2
12.1.2.1
12.1.2.2
12.1.2.3
12.1.2.4
12.1.2.5
12.1.2.6
12.1.2.7
12.1.2.8
12.1.3
12.2
12.2.1
12.2.2
12.2.2.1
12.2.2.2
12.2.2.3
12.2.3
12.2.4
12.3
12.3.1
12.3.1.1
12.3.1.2

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGudie
TableofContents

SimulationProcess................................................................................. 795
CalculationDetails ..................................................................................... 797
CoandAdjacentChannelOverlapsCalculation ........................................................... 797
ConversionFromChannelNumberstoStartandEndFrequencies.......................................... 798
CoChannelOverlapCalculation ...................................................................... 798
AdjacentChannelOverlapCalculation................................................................. 799
TotalOverlapRatioCalculation ....................................................................... 800
SignalLevelandQualityCalculations .................................................................... 801
SignalLevelCalculation(DL) ......................................................................... 801
NoiseCalculation(DL)............................................................................... 802
InterferenceCalculation(DL) ......................................................................... 802
C/NCalculation(DL)................................................................................ 804
C/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(DL) ................................................................... 805
SignalLevelCalculation(UL) ......................................................................... 807
NoiseCalculation(UL) .............................................................................. 808
InterferenceCalculation(UL)......................................................................... 808
InterferenceSignalLevelsCalculation(UL) ............................................................ 809
NoiseRiseCalculation(UL) ......................................................................... 809
C/NCalculation(UL)................................................................................ 810
C/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(UL) ................................................................... 811
BestServerDetermination ............................................................................ 813
ServiceAreaCalculation .............................................................................. 813
ThroughputCalculation ............................................................................... 814
CalculationofTotalCellResources.................................................................... 814
ChannelThroughput,CellCapacity,andPeruserThroughputCalculation.................................... 815
SchedulingandRadioResourceManagement ............................................................ 818
SchedulingandRadioResourceAllocation.............................................................. 818
UserThroughputCalculation ......................................................................... 821
AutomaticPlanningAlgorithms.......................................................................... 822
AutomaticNeighbourPlanning......................................................................... 823
AutomaticIntertechnologyNeighbourPlanning.......................................................... 827
AutomaticFrequencyPlanningUsingtheAFP............................................................. 829
ConstraintandRelationshipWeights.................................................................. 830
CostCalculation.................................................................................... 830
AFPAlgorithm ..................................................................................... 831
Appendices ......................................................................................... 831
InterferenceMatrixCalculation....................................................................... 831
DistanceImportanceCalculation...................................................................... 832

ACPModule......................................................837
Objectives............................................................................................ 837
QualityObjective.................................................................................... 837
DefinitionandEvaluation............................................................................ 837
TargetFiltering .................................................................................... 838
QualityIndicatorsintheACP........................................................................... 838
GSMQualityIndicators.............................................................................. 838
UMTSQualityIndicators............................................................................. 838
CDMA2000QualityIndicators........................................................................ 838
LTEQualityIndicators ............................................................................... 839
WiMAXQualityIndicators ........................................................................... 839
QualityIndicatorParametersandReferenceMaps....................................................... 839
AdvancedObjectiveConfiguration.................................................................... 840
CostObjective ..................................................................................... 840
AtollandACPPredictionMatching...................................................................... 840
QualityPredictionsandtheAntennaMaskingMethod ....................................................... 841
OptimisedMethod ................................................................................... 841
AntennaMaskingModesforNonNativePropagationModels ............................................... 841
BasicMethod...................................................................................... 841
ImprovedMethod.................................................................................. 842
FullPathLossMethod .............................................................................. 842
CrossWavePropagationModel......................................................................... 843
AntennaMaskingandRepeaters,RemoteAntennas,andSecondaryAntennas ................................. 843
Configuration ......................................................................................... 843
ConfiguringanOptimisationSetup...................................................................... 843
AntennaSetup..................................................................................... 843
AdditionalElectricalTilt(AEDT) ....................................................................... 844

19

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
TableofContents

12.3.1.3
12.4
12.4.1
12.4.2
12.5
12.5.1
12.5.2
12.5.3
12.5.4
12.5.4.1
12.5.4.2
12.5.5
12.5.6
12.5.7
12.5.8
12.5.9
12.5.9.1
12.5.9.2
12.6
12.6.1
12.6.2
12.6.2.1
12.6.2.2
12.6.2.3
12.6.2.4
12.6.2.5
12.6.2.6
12.6.3
12.6.3.1
12.6.3.2
12.6.4
12.6.4.1
12.6.4.2
12.6.5
12.7
12.7.1
12.7.1.1
12.7.1.2
12.7.1.3
12.7.1.4
12.7.1.5
12.7.2
12.7.3
12.8
12.9
12.9.1
12.9.2
12.9.3
12.9.4
12.9.5
12.9.5.1
12.9.5.2
12.9.5.3
12.9.5.4
12.9.5.5
12.9.6
12.10

20

Forsk2014

RelativeElectricalTiltValues ........................................................................ 844

MultiLayer,MultiRATandCoplanningSupport ........................................................... 845
ACP'sMultiRATandCoplanningMode................................................................. 845
LayerDefinition..................................................................................... 845
OptimisationMethodology ............................................................................. 846
SearchAlgorithm ................................................................................... 846
TuningAlgorithm ................................................................................... 847
SortingAlgorithm................................................................................... 847
GlobalScoreFunction................................................................................ 848
SearchAlgorithm .................................................................................. 848
TuningAlgorithm .................................................................................. 849
Weighting ......................................................................................... 849
ControllingtheOptimisation .......................................................................... 849
ImplementationPlan ................................................................................ 850
MemoryUsageandOptimisationResolution ............................................................ 851
InternalDataManagementandPerformance ............................................................ 851
MemoryUsage.................................................................................... 851
DiskSpaceUsage .................................................................................. 852
LoadBalancingObjective .............................................................................. 852
PrincipleUsedinACP................................................................................ 852
OptimisationPrinciple ............................................................................... 852
TrafficCaptureforLoadBalancing.................................................................... 852
CellCapacityLoadCalculation....................................................................... 853
LoadBalancingScoreFunction....................................................................... 853
LoadQualityIndex................................................................................. 854
CapturedTrafficRatio .............................................................................. 854
IntroductionoftheLoadBalanceasQualityIndicator.................................................... 855
QualityFiguresUsedforGraphsandStatisticsResults ..................................................... 855
LoadBalance ..................................................................................... 856
AverageLoad ..................................................................................... 856
OptimisationResults................................................................................. 856
CapacityTab...................................................................................... 856
Graphs .......................................................................................... 857
ImpactontheGlobalScoreFunction ................................................................... 858
EMFExposure........................................................................................ 858
ConceptsofACPEMFExposure........................................................................ 858
PropagationClasses................................................................................ 858
TerrainProfile .................................................................................... 859
DistributionofEvaluationPoints..................................................................... 859
TheContributionofTransmitterPowertoEMFExposure................................................. 859
WorstcaseMode ................................................................................. 859
GeneralWorkflow................................................................................... 860
EMFExposureCalculation............................................................................ 860
ShadowingMarginandIndoorCoverage.................................................................. 861
MultiStoreyOptimisation.............................................................................. 861
PathLossCalculationandDataCaching ................................................................. 861
PixelWeighting ..................................................................................... 862
Results............................................................................................ 862
Notes............................................................................................. 862
ConceptsofACPEMFExposure........................................................................ 863
PropagationClasses................................................................................ 863
TerrainProfile .................................................................................... 863
DistributionofEvaluationPoints..................................................................... 864
TheContributionofTransmitterPowertoEMFExposure................................................. 864
WorstcaseMode ................................................................................. 864
GeneralWorkflow................................................................................... 864
ACPSoftwareDataFlow ............................................................................... 864

Chapter1
Antennasand
Equipment
Thischapterprovidesinformationaboutthecalculationsrelatedtoantennas
andotherequipmentinradionetworks.

Inthischapter,thefollowingareexplained:

"AntennaAttenuation"onpage 23

"AntennaPatternSmoothing"onpage 25

"PowerReceivedFromSecondaryAntennas"on
page 27

"TransmitterRadioEquipment"onpage 28

"RepeatersandRemoteAntennas"onpage 30

"BeamformingSmartAntennaModels"on
page 41

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter1:AntennasandEquipment

AT321_TRR_E1

1 AntennasandEquipment
1.1 AntennaAttenuation
Todeterminethetransmitterantennaattenuation,Atollcalculatestheaccurateazimuthandtiltanglesandperforms3D
interpolationofthehorizontalandverticalpatterns.

1.1.1 CalculationofAzimuthandTiltAngles
From the directionofthetransmitter antenna andthe receiver position relativeto the transmitter, Atoll determines the
receiverpositionrelativetothedirectionofthetransmitterantenna(i.e.thedirectionofthetransmitterreceiverpathinthe
transmitterantennacoordinatesystem).
aTxandeTxarerespectivelythetransmitter(Tx)antennaazimuthandtiltinthecoordinatesystem S 0 x y z .
aRxandeRxarerespectivelytheazimuthandtiltofthereceiver(Rx)inthecoordinatesystem S 0 x y z .
disthedistancebetweenthetransmitter(Tx)andthereceiver(Rx).

Figure 1.1:AzimuthandTiltComputation
Inthecoordinatesystem S 0 x y z ,thereceivercoordinatesare:
x Rx

cos e Rx sin a Rx d

y Rx =

cos e Rx cos a Rx d

z Rx

(1)

sin e Rx d

Letazandelrespectivelybetheazimuthandtiltofthereceiverinthetransmitterantennacoordinatesystem S Tx x'' y'' z'' .

Theseanglesdescribethedirectionofthetransmitterreceiverpathinthetransmitterantennacoordinatesystem.Therefore,
thereceivercoordinatesin S Tx x'' y'' z'' are:
x'' Rx
y'' Rx =
z'' Rx

cos el sin az d
cos el cos az d
sin el d

(2)

Accordingtothefigureabove,wehavethefollowingrelations:
x'
y' =
z'

cos a Tx sin a Tx 0

sin a Tx cos a Tx 0
y
z
0
0
1

(3)

and

23

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter1:AntennasandEquipment

Forsk2014

1
0
0
x''
x'
=

cos

sin

0
e
y''
y'
Tx
Tx
0 sin e Tx cos e Tx
z''
z'

(4)

Therefore,therelationbetweenthesystem S 0 x y z andthetransmitterantennasystem S Tx x'' y'' z'' is:

1
0
0
cos a Tx sin a Tx 0
x''
x
=

0
e
cos

sin

y''
sin a Tx cos a Tx 0
y
Tx
Tx
z''
z
0 sin e Tx cos e Tx
0
0
1

(5)

Weget,
cos a Tx
sin a Tx
0
x
x''
=

e
cos

sin

cos

cos

sin

y
y''
Tx
Tx
Tx
Tx
Tx
z
z''
sin e Tx sin a Tx sin e Tx cos a Tx cos e Tx

(6)

Then,substitutingthereceivercoordinatesinthesystemS0fromEq.(1)andthereceivercoordinatesinthesystemSTxfrom
Eq.(2)inEq.(6)leadstoasystemwheretwosolutionsarepossible:
1stsolution:If a Rx = a Tx ,then az = 0 and el = e Rx e Tx
2ndsolution:If a Rx a Tx ,then
1
az = atan ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------cos e Tx
sin e Tx tan e Rx
----------------------------------- + ---------------------------------------------tan a Rx a Tx
sin a Rx a Tx
and
cos e Tx tan eRx
sin e Tx
el = atan sin az ---------------------------------- + ----------------------------------------------
sin a Rx a Tx
tan a Rx a Tx
If sin az sin a Rx a Tx 0 ,then az = az + 180

1.1.2 AntennaPattern3DInterpolation
Thedirectionofthetransmitterreceiverpathinthetransmitterantennacoordinatesystemisgivenbyanglevalues,azand
el.Atollconsidersthesevaluesinordertodeterminetransmitterantennaattenuationsinthehorizontalandverticalpatterns.
ItreadstheattenuationH(az)inthehorizontalpatternforthecalculatedazimuthangleazandtheattenuationV(el)inthe
verticalpatternforthecalculatedtiltangleel.Then,itcalculatestheantennatotalattenuation, L antTx az el .
180 az
az
L antTx az el = H az ----------------------- H 0 V el + --------- H 180 V 180 el
180
180
Atollassumesthatthehorizontalandverticalpatternsarecrosssectionsofa3Dpattern.Inotherwords,thedescriptionof
theantennapatternmustsatisfythefollowing:H(0)=V(0)andH()=V()
Incaseofanelectricaltilt,,thehorizontalpatternisaconicalsectionwithanelevationofdegreesoffthehorizontalplane.
Here,horizontalandverticalpatternsmustsatisfythefollowing:H(0)=V()andH()=V()
Iftheconstraintslistedabovearesatisfied,thisimpliesthat:

Interpolatedhorizontalandverticalpatternsrespectivelyfitinwiththeenteredhorizontalandverticalpatterns,even
incaseofelectricaltilt,and
Thecontributionofboththeverticalpatternbackandfrontpartsaretakenintoaccount.

Otherwise,onlythesecondpointisguaranteed.

24

ThisinterpolationisperformedindBs.
Anglevaluesinformulasarestatedindegrees.
Thisinterpolationisnotusedwith3Dantennapatterns.

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter1:AntennasandEquipment

AT321_TRR_E1

1.1.3 AdditionalElectricalDowntiltModelling
The additional electrical downtilt, AEDT, also referred to as remote electrical downtilt or REDT, introduces a conical
transformation of the 3D antenna pattern in the vertical axis. In order to take it into account, the vertical pattern is
transformedasfollows:
V x = V x AEDT when x [ 90,90]
V x = V x + AEDT when x [90,270]
Where,theanglevaluesareindegrees.
Theverticalpatterntransformationisrepresentedbelow.Theleftpictureshowstheinitialverticalpatternwhenthereisno
electricaldowntiltandtherightoneshowstheverticalpatterntransformationduetoanelectricaldowntiltof10.
Then,Atollproceedsasexplainedintheprevioussection.Itdeterminestheantennaattenuationinthetransformedvertical
patternforthecalculatedtiltangle(V(el))andappliesthe3Dinterpolationformulainordertocalculatetheantennatotal
attenuation, L antTx az el .

Figure 1.2:VerticalPatternTransformationduetoElectricalDowntilt

1.2 AntennaPatternSmoothing
Empiricalpropagationmodels,liketheStandardPropagationModel(SPM),requireantennapatternsmoothinginthevertical
planetosimulatetheeffectsofreflectionsanddiffractions.Signallevelpredictionscanbeimprovedbysmoothingthehigh
attenuationpointsoftheverticalpattern.YoucansmoothverticalaswellashorizontalantennapatternsinAtoll.
TheantennapatternsmoothingalgorithminAtollfirstdeterminesthepeaksandnullsinthepatternwithinthesmoothing
angle(ASmoothing)definedbytheuser.Peaks(P)arethelowestattenuationanglesandnulls(N)arethehighestattenuation
anglesinthepattern.Then,itdeterminesthenullstobesmoothed(NSmoothing)andtheircorrespondinganglesaccordingto
thedefinedPeaktoNullDeviation(DPeaktoNull).DPeaktoNullistheminimumdifferenceofattenuationindBsbetweentwo
peaksandanullbetweenthem.Finally,Atollsmoothsthepatternbetween0andthesmoothingangle(ASmoothing)byapplying
thesmoothingtoacertainsmoothingfactor(FSmoothing)definedbytheuser.
Letstakeanexampleofanantennapatterntobesmoothed,asshowninFigure 1.3onpage 26.LetDPeaktoNullbe10dB,
ASmoothing=90degrees,andFSmoothing=0.5.

25

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter1:AntennasandEquipment

Forsk2014

Figure 1.3:VerticalAntennaPattern
Atollfirstdeterminesthepeaksandnullsinthepartofthepatterntobesmoothedbyverifyingtheslopesofthepatterncurve
ateachangle.

Figure 1.4:PeaksandNullsintheAntennaPattern
Peaks(P)andNulls(N)
Angle()

Attenuation(dB)

0.1

15

33.5

21

13.2

30

37.6

38

16.9

49

32.2

67

15.6

Then,AtollverifieswhetherthedifferenceofattenuationatagivenangleisDPeaktoNulllessthanthebeforeandafterit.This
comparisondeterminesthenullstobesmoothed(NSmoothing).
Nullstobesmoothed(NSmoothing)

26

Angle()

Attenuation(dB)

15

33.5

30

37.6

49

32.2

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter1:AntennasandEquipment

AT321_TRR_E1

Oncethenullsareknown,Atollappliesthesmoothingalgorithmtoalltheattenuationvaluesatalltheanglesbetweenthe
firstpeak,thenull,andthelastpeak.
SmoothingAlgorithm
Forallnulls n N Smoothing surroundedbytwopeaksP1andP2atangles 1 and 2 ,
A 2 A 1

- i 1
A i Smoothed = A i F Smoothing A i A + ---------------------1 2 1

Where,
iistheangleindegreesfrom 1 to 2 incrementedby1degree,
AAngleistheattenuationatanygivenanglewhichcanbei, 1 or 2 ,and
FSmoothingisthesmoothingfactordefinedbytheuser.

1.3 PowerReceivedFromSecondaryAntennas
Whensecondaryantennasareinstalledonatransmitter,thesignallevelreceivedfromitiscalculatedasfollows:

G ant m Tx

G ant i
X i ---------------------Tx
P Tx 1
P Tx X i --------------------
L Tx

L Tx
i
------------------------------------------------------------------ +
----------------------------------------
L ant m az m el m
L ant i az i el i

Tx
Tx
i

= -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (notindB1)
L model

P rec

Where,
PTxisthetransmitterpower(PpilotinUMTSHSPAandCDMA2000,PPCCPCHinTDSCDMA,PPreambleinWiMAX,andPDLRSin
LTE),
iisthesecondaryantennaindex,
xiisthepercentageofpowerdedicatedtothesecondaryantenna,i,
G ant m isthegainofthemainantennainstalledonthetransmitter,
Tx

LTxaretransmitterlosses(LTx=LtotalDL),
G ant i isthegainofthesecondaryantenna,i,installedonthetransmitter,
Tx

Lmodelisthepathlosscalculatedbythepropagationmodel,
L ant m az m el m istheattenuationduetomainantennapattern,
Tx

L ant i az i el i istheattenuationduetopatternofthesecondaryantenna,i.
Tx

Thedefinitionofangles,azandel,dependsontheusedcalculationmethod.

1.

Method1(mustbeindicatedinanAtoll.inifile):
azm:thedifferencebetweenthereceiverantennaazimuthandazimuthofthetransmittermainantenna,
elm:thedifferencebetweenthereceiverantennatiltandtiltofthetransmittermainantenna,
azi:thedifferencebetweenthereceiverantennaazimuthandazimuthofthetransmittersecondaryantenna,i,
eli:thedifferencebetweenthereceiverantennatiltandtiltofthetransmittersecondaryantenna,i,
Method2(default):
azm:thereceiverazimuthinthecoordinatesystemofthetransmittermainantenna,
elm:thereceivertiltinthecoordinatesystemofthetransmittermainantenna,
azi:thereceiverazimuthinthecoordinatesystemofthetransmittersecondaryantenna,i,
eli:thereceivertiltinthecoordinatesystemofthetransmittersecondaryantenna,i.

FormulacannotbedirectlycalculatedfromcomponentsstatedindBandmustbeconvertedinlinearvalues.

27

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter1:AntennasandEquipment

Forsk2014

1.4 TransmitterRadioEquipment
RadioequipmentsuchasTMA,feederandBTS,aretakenintoaccounttoevaluate:

Total UL and DL losses of transmitter ( L total UL L total DL ) and transmitter noise figure NF Tx in UMTS HSPA,

CDMA20001xRTT1xEVDO,TDSCDMA,WiMAX,andLTEdocuments,
Transmittertotallosses L Total inGSMGPRSEGPRSdocuments.

InAtoll,thetransmitterequipmentpairismodelledasingleentity.TheentrytotheBTSisconsideredthereferencepoint
whichisthelocationofthetransmission/receptionparameters.

Figure 1.5:ReferencePointLocationoftheTransmission/Receptionparameters

AccordingtothebookRadionetworkplanningandoptimisationforUMTSbyLaiho
J.,WackerA.,NovosadT.,thenoisefigurecorrespondstothelossincaseofpassive
components.Therefore,feedernoisefigureisequaltothecableuplinklosses.
UL

NF Feeder = L Feeder

LossandgaininputsspecifiedinATLdocumentsmustbepositivevalues.

1.4.1 GSMDocuments
AtollcalculatesDLtotallossesasfollows:
DL

DL

DL

DL

L Total DL = L TMA + L Feeder + L Misc + L BTS Conf

Where,
DL

L TMA istheTMAtransmissionloss.

L Feeder isthefeedertransmissionloss( L Feeder = L Feeder I Feeder + L Connector ,where L Feeder , I Feeder and L Connector

DL

DL

DL

DL

DL

DL

arerespectivelythefeederlosspermetre,thetransmissionfeederlengthinmetreandtheconnectortransmission
loss).
DL

L Misc arethemiscellaneoustransmissionlosses.

L BTS Conf arethelossesduetoBTSconfiguration(BTSproperty).

DL

1.4.2 UMTS,CDMA2000,TDSCDMA,WiMAX,andLTEDocuments
AsthereferencepointistheBTSentry,thetransmitternoisefigurecorrespondstotheBTSnoisefigure.Therefore,wehave
NF TX = NF BTS .Where NF BTS istheBTSnoisefigure.
UplinkTotalLosses
AtollcalculatestotalULlossesasfollows:
UL

UL

UL

UL

L Total UL = L Misc + L Feeder + L BTS Conf + NR Repeaters G Ant div G TMA

Where,

28

UL

L Misc arethemiscellaneousreceptionlosses(Transmitterproperty).

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter1:AntennasandEquipment

AT321_TRR_E1

UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

L Feeder are the feeder reception losses ( L Feeder = L Feeder I Feeder + L Connector , where L Feeder , I Feeder and
UL

L Connector are respectively the feeder loss per metre (Feeder property), the reception feeder length in metre
(Transmitterproperty)andtheconnectorreceptionlosses.
UL

L BTS Conf arethelossesduetoBTSconfiguration(BTSproperty).

G Ant div istheantennadiversitygain(Transmitterproperty).ThisgaindoesnotexistinWiMAXandLTEdocuments.

NRRepeaters is the noise rise at transmitter due to repeaters. This parameter is taken into account only if the

UL

transmitterhasactiverepeater(s).Thenoiseriseattransmitterduetorepeatersiscalculatedasfollows:

NRRepeaters = 10 Log 1 +

------------------
NIM
Rp
r

Foreachactiverepeater( k ),Atollcalculatesanoiseinjectionmargin( NIM Rp ).Thisisthedifferencebetweenthe

k

donortransmitternoisefigure( NF TX )andtherepeaternoisefigurereceivedatthedonor.
Rp k

NIM Rp = NF TX NF Rp + G amp L

r
k

TX Rp k

Where,

NF Rp istherepeaternoisefigure,
k

Rp k

G amp istherepeateramplificationgain(repeaterproperty),

Foreachactiverepeater( k ),Atollconvertsthenoiseinjectionmargin( NIM Rp )toWatt.Then,itusesthevalues

TX R p k

arethelossesbetweenthedonortransmitterandtherepeater(repeaterproperty).
k

tocalculatethenoiseriseatthedonortransmitterduetoactiverepeaters( NRRepeaters ).

G TMA isthegainduetoTMA,whichiscalculatedasfollows:
WithoutTMA

G TMA = NF Composite
WithTMA

WithTMA

NF Composite
WithoutTMA

Where NF Composite and NF Composite arethecompositenoisefigureswithandwithoutTMArespectively.

Friis'equationisusedtocalculatethecompositenoisefigurewhenthereisaTMA.

WithTMA

NF Composite

NF Feeder
NF BTS
NF

-----------------------------------------TMA
------------------
10
10
10
10

1
10

1
+ ---------------------------------- + -----------------------------------------------
= 10 Log 10

UL
UL
UL
G TMA
G TMA
G Feeder

----------------------------------------------------

10
10
10
10
10
10

WithoutTMA

And, NF Composite

= NF BTS + NF Feeder

Where,

NF Feeder isthefeedernoisefigure.

NF TMA istheTMAnoisefigure.

NF BTS istheBTSnoisefigure.

G TMA istheTMAreceptiongain.

G Feeder isthefeederULgain G Feeder = L Feeder .

L Feeder is the feeder reception loss ( L Feeder = L Feeder I Feeder + L Connector , where L Feeder , I Feeder and

UL
UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

L Connector arerespectivelythefeederlosspermetre,thereceptionfeederlengthinmetreandtheconnector
receptionloss).
DownlinkTotalLosses
AtollcalculatestotalDLlossesasfollows.

29

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter1:AntennasandEquipment

Forsk2014
DL

DL

DL

DL

L Total DL = L TMA + L Feeder + L Misc + L BTS Conf

Where,
DL

L TMA istheTMAtransmissionloss.

L Feeder isthefeedertransmissionloss( L Feeder = L Feeder I Feeder + L Connector ,where L Feeder , I Feeder and L Connector

DL

DL

DL

DL

DL

DL

arerespectivelythefeederlosspermetre,thetransmissionfeederlengthinmetreandtheconnectortransmission
losses).
DL

L Misc arethemiscellaneoustransmissionlosses.

L BTS Conf arethelossesduetoBTSconfiguration(BTSproperty).

DL

1.5 RepeatersandRemoteAntennas
Arepeaterreceives,amplifies,andretransmitstheradiatedorconductedRFcarrierbothindownlinkanduplink.Ithasa
donorsideandaserverside.Thedonorsidereceivesthesignalfromadonor(transmitter,repeater,orremoteantenna),and
theserversideamplifiesandretransmitsthereceivedsignal.Repeatersincreasethecoverageareaoftheirdonorsbyre
transmittingallthefrequencies(TRXsinGSM,carriersinUMTS,CDMA2000andTDSCDMA,andchannelsinWiMAXandLTE
documents).
Donorsandrepeatersmaybelinkedthrough:

Air:
MicrowaveLinks:
OpticalFibreLinks:

Userdefinedorcalculatedpropagationlosses
Userdefinedlinklosses
Userdefinedlinklosses

Remoteantennasareantennaslocatedfarfromthetransmitters,atlocationsthatwouldnormallyrequirelongrunsoffeeder
cable.Aremoteantennaisconnectedtothebasestationwithanopticfibre.Remoteantennasallowyoutoensureradio
coverageinanareawithoutanewbasestation.InAtoll,remoteantennasshouldbeconnectedtobasestationsthatdonot
haveanyantennas.Aremoteantenna,asopposedtoarepeater,doesnothaveanyequipmentandthereforegenerates
neitheramplificationgainnornoise.
InUMTS,CDMA2000,TDSCDMA,WiMAX,andLTEdocuments,Atollcalculatesthesignallevelreceivedfromarepeaterora
remoteantennabydeterminingthetotaldownlinkanduplinkgains(describedin"UMTS,CDMA2000,TDSCDMA,WiMAX,
and LTE Documents" on page 30). In GSM documents, the received signal level from a repeater or a remote antenna is
calculated by determining the EIRP transmitted by the repeater or remote antenna (described in "GSM Documents" on
page 37).
Thefollowingsectionsdescribehowreceivedsignallevels,andtherelateddownlinkanduplinkgainsandEIRP,arecalculated
fromarepeaterorremoteantennaRwithadonorD.

1.5.1 UMTS,CDMA2000,TDSCDMA,WiMAX,andLTEDocuments
1.5.1.1 SignalLevelCalculation
Thereceivedsignallevel(dBm)onacarriericfromadonorDatapixel/mobileMiviaarepeaterorremoteantennaR(see
Figure 1.6onpage 32)iscalculatedasfollows:
R

R Mi

C DL ic = P DL ic + G Total L Path M Shadowing L Indoor + G

Mi

Mi

Mi

Mi

L Ant L Body L Misc DL

Ifapixel/mobileMireceivessignalsfromthedonorDanditsrepeaterR,thetotalsignal
D

strengthisthesumofthetwosignals: C DL ic + C DL ic
Thereceivedsignallevel(dBm)fromapixel/mobileMiatadonorDviaarepeaterorremoteantennaR(seeFigure 1.6on
page 32)iscalculatedasfollows:
Mi

Mi

R Mi

C UL = P UL + G Total L Path M Shadowing L Indoor + G

Mi

Mi

Mi

Mi

Here:

30

P DL ic isthedownlinktransmissionpowerofadonorDoncarrieric.

P UL istheuplinktransmissionpowerofapixel/mobileMi.

Mi

L Ant L Body L Misc UL

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter1:AntennasandEquipment

AT321_TRR_E1
R

G Total isthetotalgain,userdefinedorcalculatedasexplainedin"TotalGainCalculation"onpage 32.

L Path isthepathloss(dB)calculatedasfollows:

RM

RM

L Path = L Model + L Ant ,with:

L Model isthepathlosscalculatedusingapropagationmodel.

L Ant :Antennaattenuation(fromantennapatterns)calculatedfortheantennausedbytherepeaterorremote

antennaR.
M Shadowing istheshadowingmargin.

L Indoor istheindoorloss.

Mi

Mi

istheterminalantennagainforthepixel/mobileMi.
istheterminallossforthepixel/mobileMi.

Mi

L Ant is the terminal antenna attenuation (from antenna patterns) calculated for the pixel/mobile Mi (available in
WiMAXandLTEonly).

Mi

Forcalculatingtheusefulsignallevelfromthebestservingcell, L Ant isdeterminedinthe

direction (H,V) = (0,0) from the antenna patterns of the antenna used by Mi. For
Mi

calculating the interfering signal level from any interferer, L Ant is determined in the
directionoftheinterferingcellfromtheantennapatternsoftheantennausedbyMi,
whiletheantennaispointedtowardsMisbestservingcell.

Mi

L Body isthebodylossdefinedfortheserviceusedbythepixel/mobileMi.

Mi

, G

Mi

Mi

Mi

, L Ant ,and L Body arenotusedinallthecalculations.Formoreinformation,see

thetechnologyspecificchapters.
R

L Misc DL isthemiscellaneoustransmissionlossesdefinedfortherepeaterorremoteantennaR.

L Misc UL isthemiscellaneousreceptionlossesdefinedfortherepeaterorremoteantennaR.

31

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter1:AntennasandEquipment

Forsk2014

Figure 1.6:UMTS,CDMA2000,TDSCDMA,WiMAX,andLTE:SignalLevelCalculation

1.5.1.2 TotalGainCalculation
Thetotalgainiscalculatedfromthedonortransmitterreferencepoint( )totherepeaterorremoteantennareferencepoint
( )asfollows:
OvertheAirRepeaters
D

DR

R
G Total = L Total DL + G Ant L Model + G Donor Ant LDonor

RX Feeder

+ G Amp LCov

TX Feeder

+ G Cov Ant

Figure 1.7:DownlinkTotalGain:OvertheAirRepeaters

32

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter1:AntennasandEquipment

AT321_TRR_E1

Here:
D

L Total DL arethetotaldownlinklossesofthedonorD.

G Ant isthegainoftheantennausedatthedonorD.

L Model isthepathlossbetweenthedonor Dandtherepeaterorremote antennaR.Thiscanbeuserdefinedor

DR

calculatedusingtheselectedpropagationmodel.Ifyoudonotselectapropagationmodel,thepropagationlosses
betweenthedonorandtherepeaterorremoteantennaarecalculatedusingtheITU5265propagationmodel.
R

G Donor Ant isthegainofthedonorsideantennausedattherepeaterorremoteantennaR.

LDonor

arethedonorsidereceptionfeederlossesfortherepeaterorremoteantennaR.

RX Feeder
R

G Amp istheamplifiergainoftherepeaterR.Forremoteantennas,thisis0.

LCov

arethecoveragesidetransmissionfeederlossesfortherepeaterorremoteantennaR.

TX Feeder

G Cov Ant isthegainofthecoveragesideantennausedattherepeaterorremoteantennaR.

Secondaryantennasarefullysupportedintheevaluationoftherepeatergains.

MicrowaveLinkRepeaters
DR

R
G Total = L MW + G Amp LCov

TX Feeder

+ G Cov Ant

Figure 1.8:DownlinkTotalGain:MicrowaveLinkRepeaters
Here:
DR

L MW aretheuserdefinedmicrowavelinklossesbetweenthedonorDandtherepeaterorremoteantennaR.

G Amp istheamplifiergainoftherepeaterR.Forremoteantennas,thisis0.

LCov

arethecoveragesidetransmissionfeederlossesfortherepeaterorremoteantennaR.

TX Feeder

G Cov Ant isthegainofthecoveragesideantennausedattherepeaterorremoteantennaR.

OpticalFibreLinkRepeatersandRemoteAntennas
DR

R
G Total = L Fibre + G Amp LCov

TX Feeder

+ G Cov Ant

33

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter1:AntennasandEquipment

Forsk2014

Figure 1.9:DownlinkTotalGain:OpticalFibreLinkRepeatersorRemoteAntennas
Here:
DR

L Fibre aretheuserdefinedopticalfibrelinklossesbetweenthedonorDandtherepeaterorremoteantennaR.

G Amp istheamplifiergainoftherepeaterR.Forremoteantennas,thisis0.

LCov

arethecoveragesidetransmissionfeederlossesfortherepeaterorremoteantennaR.

TX Feeder

G Cov Ant isthegainofthecoveragesideantennausedattherepeaterorremoteantennaR.

RepeaterDownlinkPowerLimitation
Atollverifiesthatthedownlinkpowerafteramplificationisconsistentwiththerepeaterequipmentlimitation.
D

P DL ic + G Total P Max + G Cov Ant LCov

TX Feeder

Here:

P DL ic isthedownlinktransmissionpowerofadonorDoncarrieric.Whenthedonorhasmorethanonecell,Atoll
considersthehighestpower.
R

G Total isthetotaldownlinkgain,userdefinedorcalculatedasexplainedin"TotalGainCalculation"onpage 32.

P Max isthemaximumdownlinkpowerallowedbytheequipment.

LCov

arethecoveragesidetransmissionfeederlossesfortherepeaterorremoteantennaR.

TX Feeder

G Cov Ant isthegainofthecoveragesideantennausedattherepeaterorremoteantennaR.

1.5.1.3 RepeaterNoiseFigure
Youcandefineandassignarepeaterequipmenttoeachrepeater.Inadditiontotheallowedrangesofgainsandpowers
allowedtoeachrepeater,theseequipmentcontainanoisefigurewhichisappliedtotherepeatertheyareassignedto.This
noise figure has an impact on the donor total reception losses. For information, see "Transmitter Radio Equipment" on
page 28.

1.5.1.4 Appendix:CarrierPowerandInterferenceCalculation
ThissectionexplainshowAtollcalculatesthereceivedcarrierpowerandinterferencewhenatransmitterhasaconnected
repeater.
Amobilereceiverreceivessignalfromthedonortransmitteraswellasitsrepeater.Similarly,thesignalfromthemobileis
receivedatthedonortransmitteraswellasitsrepeater.Inpractice,whenamobilereceiverisinthevicinityofthedonor
transmitter,thesignalto/fromtherepeaterwouldbeveryweakduetohighpathlossbetweentherepeaterandthemobile
receiver.Similarly,whenthemobilereceiverislocatedinthevicinityoftherepeater,thesignalto/fromthedonortransmitter
wouldbeveryweakduetothesamereason.
Atoll does not differentiate between the mobile receiver being in the transmitter coverage area or being in its repeater
coveragearea.Atolladdsthesignalsreceivedfromthedonortransmitteranditsrepeatertogenerateacombinedpathloss
matrixthatisassociatedwiththedonortransmitterandincludestheeffectofitsrepeater.

34

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter1:AntennasandEquipment

AT321_TRR_E1

CalculationofTotalPathLoss
Thetotalpathloss, L Total ,iscalculatedbycomputingadownlinkbudget.IfwetakethecaseofaCDMAproject,without
consideringanyshadowingmarginorindoorloss,thepowerreceivedfromthedonortransmitter,Txdonacarrieric,atthe
mobilereceivercanbestatedas(foralinkovertheair):
D

P Pilot ic G Ant
D
P Rec ic = ------------------------------------------D
D Mi
L Total DL L Path
Where,
D

P Rec ic isthecarrierpowerreceivedatthereceiverfromthedonortransmitteronacarrieric(inW)
D

P Pilot ic isthepilotpowerofthedonortransmitteronthecarrieric(inW)
D

G Ant isthedonortransmitterantennagain.
D

L Total DL isthetransmissionfeederlossofthedonortransmitter.
D Mi

L Path isthepathlossbetweenthedonortransmitterandthemobilereceiver.
Similarly,thepowerreceivedatthemobilereceiverfromtherepeaterRis:
D

P Pilot ic G Total
R
P Rec ic = -------------------------------------------R Mi
L Path
Where,
R

P Rec ic isthecarrierpowerreceivedatthemobilereceiverfromtherepeateronacarrieric(inW)
D

P Pilot ic isthepilotpowerofthedonortransmitteronthecarrieric(inW)
R

G Total isthetotalgainofrepeaterlinkedtoadonortransmitterwithanairlink.
R Mi

L Path isthepathlossbetweentherepeaterandthemobilereceiver
So,thetotalcarrierpowerreceivedatthemobilereceiveris:
D
R

G Ant
G Total
DR
R
R
D
P Rec ic = P Rec ic + P Rec ic = P Pilot ic ---------------------------------------------
- + ------------ Mi
R Mi
L DTotal DL L DPath
L Path

Since,
D

P Pilot ic G Ant
L Total = -----------------------------------------------DR
D
L Total DL P Rec ic
Therefore,
D

P Pilot ic G Ant
L Total = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------D
R

G Ant
G Total
D
D
L Total DL P Pilot ic ---------------------------------------------- + --------------
Mi
R Mi
L DTotal DL L DPath
L Path
Hence,
D

G Ant
L Total = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------D
R

G Total
G Ant
D
- + ------------L Total DL ---------------------------------------------
Mi
R Mi
L DTotal DL L DPath
L Path
Thistotalpathlossdependsonthelocationofthemobilereceiverinrealisticnetworkscenarios.Asamobileinthedonor
transmitter/repeater coverage area is likely to be far from the repeater/donor transmitter coverage area, the respective
pathlossvaluewillbeverylarge.Thisimpliesthatwecanstudythetwocasesseparatelywithoutinfluencingtheresultsmuch.

Case1:ReceiverinDonorTransmitterCoverageArea

35

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter1:AntennasandEquipment

Forsk2014
R

G Total
R Mi
- canbeignored.Thisimpliesthat:
L Path islikelytobeveryhigh,sotheterm ------------R Mi
L Path
D Mi

L Total = L Path

Consideringthistotalpathlossvalue,thetotalreceivedpowerintheuplinkandinthedownlinkcanbestatedas:
D

P Pilot ic G Ant
P Pilot ic G Ant
D
P Rec DL ic = ------------------------------------------- = --------------------------------------------D
D
D Mi
L Total DL L Total
L Total DL L Path
Mi

Mi

P Output ic G Ant
P Output ic G Ant
D
- = ---------------------------------------------P Rec UL ic = ---------------------------------------------D
D
D Mi
L Total UL L Total
L Total UL L Path
Where,
Mi

P Output ic isthetransmittedpowerfromthemobileterminalonthecarrieric(inW)
D

L Total UL isthereceptionfeederlossofthetransmitter

Case2:ReceiverinRepeaterCoverageArea
D

G Ant
D Mi
- canbeignored.Thisimpliesthat:
L Path islikelytobeveryhigh,sotheterm --------------------------------------------D
D Mi
L Total DL L Path
D

G Ant
G Ant
L Total = --------------------------------------------------- = ---------------------------------------R
R
R
G Total L Total DL
D
G Total
-----------------------------------------
L Total DL ------------R Mi
Mi

L RPath

L Path
D

P Pilot ic G Ant
P Pilot ic G Total
D
- = -------------------------------------------P Rec DL ic = ------------------------------------------D
R Mi
L Total DL L Total
L Path
Mi

Mi
D
P Output ic G Total L Total DL
P Output ic G Ant
D
- ---------------------P Rec UL = ---------------------------------------------- = ------------------------------------------------R Mi
D
D
L Path
L Total UL
L Total UL L Total

Where,
Mi

P Output ic isthetransmittedpowerfromthemobileterminal(inW)
D

L Total UL isthereceptionfeederlossofthetransmitter
CalculationofEb/NtUplink
Intheuplink,thequalitylevelatthetransmitteronatrafficchannelis:
E b
C W
---= --- ---- N t UL
I R
Where,
Cisthecarrierpowerreceivedfromthemobileterminal(inW)
Iisthetotalinterference(inW)
Wisthespreadingbandwidth(Hz)
Ristheeffectiveservicethroughputintheuplink(bits/s)
(W/Ristheserviceprocessinggainintheuplink)
CandIarebothevaluatedatthesamereferencepoint,whichistheentryofBTSusingthefollowingformulas.
Mi

P Output G Ant
C = P Total UL = --------------------------------------D
L Total UL L Total
I = I Total + N 0

36

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter1:AntennasandEquipment

AT321_TRR_E1

Where,
I Total isthesumofthesignalsreceivedfrommobileterminalsinsidethesamecellandthoseoutside(inW)
N 0 isthetransmitterequipmentthermalnoise(inW)
Therefore,foreachmobileterminalMi,

I Total =

Mi

Mi

P Output G Ant
--------------------------------------
L DTotal UL L Mi
Total

And,
D

N 0 = NF K T W
Where,
D

NF isthenoisefigureofthetransmitterequipmentatthereferencepoint,i.e.theentryoftheBTS
KisBoltzmanconstant
Tistheambienttemperature(inK)
Hence
N 0 = NF

BTS

KTW

1.5.2 GSMDocuments
1.5.2.1 SignalLevelCalculation
Thereceivedsignallevel(dBm)onaTRXtypettfromadonorDatapixel/mobileMiviaarepeaterorremoteantennaR(see
Figure 1.10onpage 38)iscalculatedasfollows:
R

R Mi

C DL tt = EIRPDL tt P tt L Path M Shadowing L Indoor + G

Mi

Mi

L Misc DL

Ifapixel/mobileMireceivessignalsfromthedonorDanditsrepeaterR,thetotalsignal
D

strengthisthesumofthetwosignals: C DL tt + C DL tt
Here:
R

EIRP DL tt istheeffectiveisotropicradiatedpoweroftherepeaterorremoteantennaRontheTRXtypett.Itcanbe

userdefinedorcalculatedasexplainedin"EIRPCalculation"onpage 38.
thedownlinktransmissionpowerofadonorDoncarrieric.
P tt isthepoweroffsetdefinedfortheTRXtypett.

L Path isthepathloss(dB)calculatedasfollows:

R Mi

R Mi

L Path = L Model + L Ant ,with:

L Model isthepathlosscalculatedusingapropagationmodel.

L Ant :Antennaattenuation(fromantennapatterns)calculatedfortheantennausedbytherepeaterorremote

antennaR.
M Shadowing istheshadowingmargin.

L Indoor istheindoorloss.

Mi

Mi

istheterminalantennagainforthepixel/mobileMi.

R
L Misc DL

istheterminallossforthepixel/mobileMi.
isthemiscellaneoustransmissionlossesdefinedfortherepeaterorremoteantennaR.

37

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter1:AntennasandEquipment

Forsk2014

s
Figure 1.10:GSM:SignalLevelCalculation

1.5.2.2 EIRPCalculation
D

TheEIRPofarepeaterorremoteantennaRiscalculatedattherepeaterorremoteantennareferencepoint( )w.r.t. P DL
atthedonorreferencepoint( )asfollows:
OvertheAirRepeaters
R

DR

EIRP DL tt = P DL L Total DL + G Ant L Model + G Donor Ant LDonor

RX Feeder

Figure 1.11:EIRP:OvertheAirRepeaters
Here:

38

P DL isthedownlinktransmissionpowerofthedonorD.

L Total DL arethetotaldownlinklossesofthedonorD.

+ G Amp LCov

TX Feeder

+ G Cov Ant

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter1:AntennasandEquipment

AT321_TRR_E1
D

G Ant isthegainoftheantennausedatthedonorD.

L Model isthepathlossbetweenthedonor Dandtherepeaterorremote antennaR.Thiscanbeuserdefinedor

DR

calculatedusingtheselectedpropagationmodel.Ifyoudonotselectapropagationmodel,thepropagationlosses
betweenthedonorandtherepeaterorremoteantennaarecalculatedusingtheITU5265propagationmodel.
R

G Donor Ant isthegainofthedonorsideantennausedattherepeaterorremoteantennaR.

LDonor

arethedonorsidereceptionfeederlossesfortherepeaterorremoteantennaR.

RX Feeder
R

G Amp istheamplifiergainoftherepeaterR.Forremoteantennas,thisis0.

LCov

arethecoveragesidetransmissionfeederlossesfortherepeaterorremoteantennaR.

TX Feeder

G Cov Ant isthegainofthecoveragesideantennausedattherepeaterorremoteantennaR.

Secondaryantennasarefullysupportedintheevaluationoftherepeatergains.

MicrowaveLinkRepeaters
D

DR

R
EIRP DL tt = P DL L MW + G Amp LCov

TX Feeder

+ G Cov Ant

Figure 1.12:DownlinkTotalGain:MicrowaveLinkRepeaters
Here:
D

P DL isthedownlinktransmissionpowerofthedonorD.

L MW aretheuserdefinedmicrowavelinklossesbetweenthedonorDandtherepeaterorremoteantennaR.

G Amp istheamplifiergainoftherepeaterR.Forremoteantennas,thisis0.

LCov

DR
R

arethecoveragesidetransmissionfeederlossesfortherepeaterorremoteantennaR.

TX Feeder

G Cov Ant isthegainofthecoveragesideantennausedattherepeaterorremoteantennaR.

OpticalFibreLinkRepeatersandRemoteAntennas
D

DR

R
EIRP DL tt = P DL L Fibre + G Amp LCov

TX Feeder

+ G Cov Ant

39

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter1:AntennasandEquipment

Forsk2014

Figure 1.13:DownlinkTotalGain:OpticalFibreLinkRepeatersorRemoteAntennas
Here:
D

P DL isthedownlinktransmissionpowerofthedonorD.

L Fibre aretheuserdefinedopticalfibrelinklossesbetweenthedonorDandtherepeaterorremoteantennaR.

G Amp istheamplifiergainoftherepeaterR.Forremoteantennas,thisis0.

LCov

DR
R

arethecoveragesidetransmissionfeederlossesfortherepeaterorremoteantennaR.

TX Feeder
R

G Cov Ant isthegainofthecoveragesideantennausedattherepeaterorremoteantennaR.

RepeaterDownlinkPowerLimitation
AtollverifiesthattheEIRPafteramplificationisconsistentwiththerepeaterequipmentlimitation.
R

EIRP DL tt P Max + G Cov Ant LCov

TX Feeder

Here:
R

EIRP DL tt istheeffectiveisotropicradiatedpoweroftherepeaterRontheTRXtypett.

P Max isthemaximumdownlinkpowerallowedbytheequipment.

LCov

arethecoveragesidetransmissionfeederlossesfortherepeaterorremoteantennaR.

TX Feeder

G Cov Ant isthegainofthecoveragesideantennausedattherepeaterorremoteantennaR.

1.5.3 DonorsideParameterCalculations
1.5.3.1 Azimuth
ThisistheangleatwhichthedonorantennaissituatedwithrespecttotheNorthattherepeaterorremoteantenna.This
angleismeasuredclockwiseasshowninthefigurebelow.Itistheabsolutehorizontalangleatwhichthedonorsideantenna
oftherepeatershouldbepointedinordertobealignedwiththedonorantenna.

Figure 1.14:AnglefromNorth(Azimuth)

1.5.3.2 MechanicalDowntilt
Thisisthetiltanglefortherepeatersdonorsideantenna,whichensuresthatitpointstowardsthedonorantennainthe
verticalplane.Asageneralrule,downtiltanglesareconsideredpositiveanduptiltanglesnegative.

40

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter1:AntennasandEquipment

AT321_TRR_E1

Figure 1.15:Positive/NegativeMechanicalDowntilt
Sincethisparameterdependsonthedifferenceofheights/altitudesbetweenthedonortransmitterandtherepeater,itcan
beautomaticallycalculatedintherepeatersDonorsideproperties.Iftheheight/altitudeoftheantennaismodified,the
correspondingtiltanglecanbefoundoutandappliedusingtheCalculatebutton.
Example

Figure 1.16:TiltAngleComputation
Thetiltanglerepeatersdonorsideantennaintheabovefigurewouldbe:
R

H Donor Ant H Ant

R
-
T Donor Ant = atan ------------------------------------------DR

D
Asobvious,thisanglewillbenegativeforuptiltsandpositivefordowntiltsoftheantenna.
Here:
R

H Donor Ant istheheightofthedonorsideantennaoftherepeaterorremoteantennaR.

H Ant istheheightoftheantennaofthedonorD.

DR

isthedistancebetweentheantennaofthedonorDandtheantennaoftherepeaterorremoteantennaR.

1.6 BeamformingSmartAntennaModels
Adaptive antenna systems use more than one antenna elements, along with smart signal processing, to locate and track
varioustypesofsignals,todynamicallyminimizeinterference,andmaximizeusefulsignalreception.Thesignalprocessor
dynamicallyappliesweightstoeachelementoftheadaptiveantennasystemtocreatearraypatternsinrealtime.
Beamformingsmartantennasdynamicallycreateantennapatternswithamainbeampointedinthedirectionoftheuser
beingserved,i.e.,theusefulsignal.Adaptivealgorithmscanalsobeusedinordertominimizetheinterferencereceivedby
thecells.Thesealgorithmsarebasedonoptimizationmethodssuchastheminimummeansquareerrormethod.
ThefollowingbeamformingsmartantennamodelsareavailableinAtoll.Thesesmartantennamodelssupportlinearadaptive
arraysystems,suchastheoneshowninFigure 1.17onpage 42.

Optimum Beamformer: The Optimum Beamformer smart antenna model performs dynamic beamforming in
downlinkasexplainedin"DownlinkBeamforming"onpage 44,andbeamformingandinterferencecancellationin
uplink using the minimum mean square error algorithm as explained in "Uplink Beamforming and Interference
Cancellation(MMSE)"onpage 47.Smartantennaresultsarelateronusedincoveragepredictioncalculations.

ConventionalBeamformer:TheConventionalBeamformersmartantennamodelperformsdynamicbeamformingin
downlink and uplink asexplained in "Downlink Beamforming" on page 44 and "Uplink Beamforming" on page 46,
respectively.Smartantennaresultsarelateronusedincoveragepredictioncalculations.

41

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter1:AntennasandEquipment

Forsk2014

Figure 1.17:LinearAdaptiveAntennaArray
Inthefollowingexplanations,weassume:

Thereareatotalof E SA elementsintheadaptiveantennasystem.

istheangleofarrivalfortheusefulsignal.

istheangleatwhichwewanttocalculatethesmartantennagain.
disthedistancebetweentwoadjacentantennaelements.

1.6.1 DefinitionsandFormulas
Thetablesinthefollowingsubsectionslisttheparametersandformulasusedinbeamformingsmartantennamodels.

1.6.1.1 Definitions
Name

Value

Unit

Description

E SA

Smartantennamodelparameter

None

Numberofsmartantennaelements

Calculationparameter

Degrees

Angleofarrivalfortheusefulsignal

Calculationparameter

Degrees

Angleatwhichthesmartantenna
effectiscalculated

--- ,where isthewavelengthofthesignal

2

Distancebetweentwoadjacent
antennaelements

1.6.1.2 DownlinkBeamforming
Name

Value

Unit

Description

gn

Smartantennamodelparameter

None

Gainofasingleelement

None

Steeringvectorforthedirectionof

None

Complexsmartantennaweight

None

Arraycorrelationmatrixforagiven
userdirection

None

Smartantennagaininanydirection

1 e

2
j ------ d sin

wn
e

42

2
j ------ 2d sin

... e

T
2
j ------ E SA 1 d sin

2
j ------ nd sin

j n sin

with d =
--2
H

S S

G SA

g n S R S = g n S S S S = g n E SA

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter1:AntennasandEquipment

AT321_TRR_E1

Name

Value

Unit

Description

None

Downlinkarraycorrelationmatrixfor
iterationk

None

Averagedownlinkarraycorrelation
matrixoverasimulation(K
iterations)

pj Rj

Rk

j=1
K

--1-
K

R Avg

Rk

k=1

1.6.1.3 UplinkBeamforming
Name

Value

Unit

Description

S
----------E SA

None

VectorofESAcomplexweightsfor
theconventionalbeamformer

None

Totalnoisecorrelationmatrix

None

Thermalnoisecorrelationmatrix

None

Interferencecorrelationmatrix

RN

Rn +

2
R I = n

I+

pj Sj Sj

j=1
2

n I

Rn
J

pj Sj Sj

RI

j=1
H

PN

w RN w

Totaluplinknoisepower

p w S S w = p E SA

Totalpowerreceivedfromthe
serveduser

CINR UL

P
p E SA
------ = -------------------------H
PN
w RN w

None

C/(I+N)intheuplink
(WiMAX)

Q UL

P
p E SA
------ = -------------------------H
PN
w RN w

None

Signalqualityintheuplink
(TDSCDMA)

G SA

E SA

None

Uplinksmartantennabeamforming
gaininthedirectionoftheserved
user

Averagenoisecorrelationmatrix

Uplinkinterference

None

Angulardistributionofuplinknoise
rise

SA

RN

--1-
K

Avg

RN k
k=1

I UL

w RN

Avg

w n
2

NRUL

I UL + n
--------------------------2
n

1.6.1.4 UplinkBeamformingandInterferenceCancellation(MMSE)
Name

Value

Unit

Description

RN S

None

VectorofESAcomplexweightsfor
theoptimumbeamformer

E SA
----------------------------H
1
S RN S

None

MMSEoptimizationconstant

43

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter1:AntennasandEquipment

Forsk2014

Name

Value

Unit

Description

None

Totalnoisecorrelationmatrix

None

Thermalnoisecorrelationmatrix

None

Interferencecorrelationmatrix

Totaluplinknoisepower(optimum
beamformer)

Totalpowerreceivedfromthe
serveduser(optimumbeamformer)

RN

Rn +

2
R I = n

I+

pj Sj Sj

j=1
2

n I

Rn
J

RI

pj Sj Sj

j=1
H

P N

S RN S

p S RN S

CINR UL

P
H
P
1
------ = ------ = p S R N S
PN
P N

None

C/(I+N)intheuplink
(WiMAX)

Q UL

P
H
P
1
------ = ------ = p S R N S
P
PN
N

None

Signalqualityintheuplink
(TDSCDMA)

G SA

S I S = E SA

None

Uplinksmartantennabeamforming
gaininthedirectionoftheserved
user

Averageinversenoisecorrelation
matrix

Uplinkinterference

None

Angulardistributionofuplinknoise
rise

SA

K
1
RN
Avg

--1-
K

RN

1
k

k=1

I UL

E SA
2
------------------------------------ n
H
1
S RN
S
Avg

NRUL

I UL + n
--------------------------2
n

1.6.2 DownlinkBeamforming

Figure 1.18:DownlinkBeamforming
Beamformingdynamicallycreatesabeamtowardstheserveduser.Thesmartantennaprocessorappliescomplexweights,
w n ,toeachantennaelementinordertoformabeamtowardstheserveduser.Themagnitudeofthesecomplexweightsis

44

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter1:AntennasandEquipment

AT321_TRR_E1

setto1.Thebeamformingisperformedusingonlythephaseofthecomplexweights.Thesteeringvector, S ,representing
thecomplexweightsforformingabeamtowardstheserveduser,i.e.,attheangleofarrival isgivenby:
S = 1 e

2
j ------ d sin

2
j ------ 2d sin

... e

T
2
j ------ E 1 d sin
SA

WhereTrepresentsthetransposeofamatrix.
Therefore,thecomplexweightatanynthantennaelementcanbegivenby:
wn = e

2
j ------ nd sin

j n sin
InAtoll, d =
--- ,therefore, w n = e
.
2

Thesmartantennagaininanydirection canbegivenby:
H

G SA = g n S R S
WhereHrepresentstheHilberttransform,whichisthecomplexconjugatetransposeofamatrix, g n isthegainofthenth
antennaelementinthedirection ,and R isthearraycorrelationmatrixforagivenuserdirection ,givenby:
H

R = S S

Forthedirectionoftheserveduser,i.e., ,thesmartantennagainiscalculatedasfollows:
H

G SA = g n S R S = g n S S S S = g n E SA
Thesmartantennagainincludesthegainofthebeamformingaswellasthegainofpowercombination.
ThesmartantennagainindBwillbe G SA = 10 Log G SA .
Thesmartantennaisabletoformthebeamonlyinthehorizontalplane,therefore,theverticalpatternisassumedtoremain
thesame.
PowerCombiningGain
Celltransmissionpowerisfedtoeachantennaelementofthesmartantennasystem.Sinceeachelementtransmitsthesame
inputpower,thisresultsinagainduetopowercombination,i.e.,thepowersfedtoeachantennaelementarecombinedfor
transmission.
AdditionalProcessinginMonteCarloSimulations
DuringMonteCarlosimulations,Atollcalculatesthesmartantennagains(arraycorrelationmatrix R )foreachservedmobile
inacellscoverageareaineachiteration.Thesumofthesearraycorrelationmatricesforalltheusersservedinoneiteration
kiscalculatedasfollows:
J

Rk =

pj Rj
j=1

Where R k foranycellisthedownlinkarraycorrelationmatrixforiterationk,Jisthenumberofservedmobilesduringthe
iteration, p j istheEIRPtransmittedtowardsthemobilej,and R j isthearraycorrelationmatrixforthemobilej.
Atollcalculatesamovingaverageofthearraycorrelationmatricescalculatedineachiteration.Attheendofasimulationwith
Kiterations,theaveragedownlinkarraycorrelationmatrixforanycellisgivenby:
K

1
R Avg = ---
K

Rk
k=1

45

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter1:AntennasandEquipment

Forsk2014

1.6.3 UplinkBeamforming

Figure 1.19:UplinkBeamforming
Let w representthevectorofESAcomplexweightsforthebeamformer. w isgivenby:
S
w = ----------E SA
Where S isthesteeringvectorinthedirectionoftheserveduser, .
Thetotalnoisereceivedintheuplink,i.e.,interferenceandthermalnoise,isstoredinatotalnoisecorrelationmatrix, R N .
Thetotalnoisecorrelationmatrixisthesumofthethermalnoisecorrelationmatrix R n ,andtheinterferencecorrelation
matrix R I ,givenby:
J

RN = Rn + RI =

2
n

I+

pj Sj Sj

j=1
J
2

Where R n = n I and R I =

pj Sj Sj

j=1
2

n isthethermalnoisepower.Iistheidentitymatrix. p j isthepowerreceivedbyoneelementofthesmartantennafrom
thejthinterferingmobile. S j isthesteeringvectorinthedirectionofthejthinterferingmobile, .Jisthetotalnumberof
interferingmobiles.
Thetotalnoisepower,includingthermalnoiseandinterferencefromalluplinkinterferers,receivedbyacellisgivenby:
H

PN = w RN w
And,thetotalpowerreceivedfromtheserveduserisgivenby:
H

P = p w S S w = p E SA
Where p isthepowerreceivedbyoneelementofthesmartantennafromtheserveduser.
InTDSCDMA,theuplinksignalqualityiscalculatedby:
p E SA
P
SA
Q UL = ------ = -------------------------H
PN
w RN w
InWiMAX,theC/(I+N)intheuplinkisthencalculatedby:
P
p E SA
CINR UL = ------ = -------------------------H
PN
w RN w

46

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter1:AntennasandEquipment

AT321_TRR_E1

Fromtheaboveequation,wecandeterminetheuplinksmartantennabeamforminggaininthedirectionoftheserveduser,
whichequalsthenumberofsmartantennaelements,i.e., G SA = E SA .
AdditionalProcessinginMonteCarloSimulations
Thenoisecorrelationmatrix R N foreachiterationkincludestheeffectofthematrixcalculatedforthepreviousiteration.The
resultistheangulardistributionoftheuplinkload(TDSCDMA)ortheuplinknoiserise(WiMAX),whichiscalculatedfromthe
noisecorrelationmatrixobtainedattheendofthelastiterationofaMonteCarlosimulation.Thisangulardistributionofthe
uplinkload(TDSCDMA)ortheuplinknoiserise(WiMAX)canbestoredintheCellstable.Theaverageofthenoisecorrelation
matricesiscalculatedasfollows:
K

RN

Avg

1
= ---
K

RN k
k=1

Where R N

Avg

istheaverageofthenoisecorrelationmatricesofalltheiterationsfromk=1toK,and R N isthenoise
k

correlationmatrixofthekthiteration.
Theinterferencecanbeisolatedfromthethermalnoiseandcanbecalculatedforanydirectionusingtheformula.
H

I UL = w R N

Avg

w n

Where I UL istheinterferingsignalinthedirection ,ESAisthenumberofsmartantennaelements, S isthesteering

2

vectorinthedirection ,and n isthethermalnoisepower.

InTDSCDMA,theuplinkloadiscalculatedfromtheaveragenoisecorrelationmatrix.InWiMAX,theangulardistributionof
theuplinknoiseriseisgivenby:
2

I UL + n
NR UL = --------------------------2
n

1.6.4 UplinkBeamformingandInterferenceCancellation(MMSE)
TheoptimumbeamformerusestheMinimumMeanSquareErroralgorithmintheuplinkinordertocancelinterference.The
MinimumMeanSquareErroralgorithmoptimizestheusefulsignalaswellasmaximizesthesignalquality.
Asimplenullsteeringbeamformercancanceltheinterferencefromthemostinterfering E SA 1 interferingmobiles.The
optimumbeamformingmethodusedinAtollovercomesthislimitation.Itcalculatestheoptimumsmartantennaweights
using the knowledge of directions and power levels of interference. These weights do not try to fully cancel E SA 1
interferencesignals,butrathertrytoreducetheoverallreceivedinterferenceasmuchaspossible.

Figure 1.20:UplinkAdaptiveAlgorithm
representthevectorofESAcomplexweightsforthebeamformer. w
isgivenby:
Let w

47

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter1:AntennasandEquipment

Forsk2014

= R N1 S
w
Where S isthesteeringvectorinthedirectionoftheserveduser, . ,whichisaconstantvalueforagivenusefulsignal
thatoptimizesthebeamformerweights.Itisgivenbytheequation:
E SA
= ----------------------------H
1
S RN S
1

R N istheinverseofthetotalnoisecorrelationmatrix.Thetotalnoisecorrelationmatrixisthesumofthethermalnoise
correlationmatrix R n ,andtheinterferencecorrelationmatrix R I ,givenby:
J

RN = Rn + RI =

2
n

I+

pj Sj Sj

j=1
J

Where R n =

2
n

pj Sj Sj

I and R I =

j=1
2

n isthethermalnoisepower.Iistheidentitymatrix. p j isthepowerreceivedbyoneelementofthesmartantennafrom
thejthinterferingmobile. S j isthesteeringvectorinthedirectionofthejthinterferingmobile, .Jisthetotalnumberof
interferingmobiles.
Thetotalnoisepower,includingthermalnoiseandinterferencefromalluplinkinterferers,receivedbyacellisgivenby:
H
2
1
P N = S R N S

And,thetotalpowerreceivedfromtheserveduserisgivenby:
2
H
2
1
P = p S R N S

Where p isthepowerreceivedbyoneelementofthesmartantennafromtheserveduser.
InTDSCDMA,theuplinksignalqualityiscalculatedby:
H
P
SA
1
Q UL = ------ = p S R N S
P N

InWiMAX,theC/(I+N)intheuplinkisthencalculatedby:
H
P
1
CINR UL = ------ = p S R N S
P
N

Fromtheaboveequation,wecandeterminetheuplinksmartantennabeamforminggaininthedirectionoftheserveduser.
RSCP TCH UL (TDSCDMA)or C UL (WiMAX)canbecalculatedfromtheaboveequationbyconsideringtheinterferenceand
1

noisetobenull,i.e., R N = I .Thisgives:
H

InTDSCDMA, RSCP TCH UL = p S I S = p E SA

H

InWiMAX, C UL = p S I S = p E SA
Fromtheaboveequation,theuplinksmartantennabeamforminggainequalsthenumberofsmartantennaelements,i.e.,
G SA = E SA .
AdditionalProcessinginMonteCarloSimulations
1

Theinversenoisecorrelationmatrix R N foreachiterationkincludestheeffectofthematrixcalculatedfortheprevious
iteration.Hence,Atollisabletocalculateanaverageofthesmartantennainterferencecancellationeffect.Theresultisthe
angulardistributionoftheuplinkload(TDSCDMA)ortheuplinknoiserise(WiMAX),whichiscalculatedfromtheinverseof
thenoisecorrelationmatrixobtainedattheendofthelastiterationofaMonteCarlosimulation.Thisangulardistributionof
theuplinkload(TDSCDMA)ortheuplinknoiserise(WiMAX)canbestoredintheCellstable.Theaverageoftheinversenoise
correlationmatricesiscalculatedasfollows:

48

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter1:AntennasandEquipment

AT321_TRR_E1
K
1
RN
Avg

1
= ---
K

RN

1
k

k=1
1

Where R N

Avg

istheaverageoftheinversenoisecorrelationmatricesofalltheiterationsfromk=1toK,and R N

isthe

inversenoisecorrelationmatrixofthekthiteration.
Theinterferencecanbeisolatedfromthethermalnoiseandcanbecalculatedforanydirectionusingtheformula.
E SA
2
I UL = ------------------------------------ n
H
1
S RN
S
Avg

Where I UL istheinterferingsignalinthedirection ,ESAisthenumberofsmartantennaelements, S isthesteering

2

vectorinthedirection ,and n isthethermalnoisepower.

In TDSCDMA, the uplink load is calculated from the average inverse noise correlation matrix. In WiMAX, the angular
distributionoftheuplinknoiseriseisgivenby:
2

I UL + n
NR UL = --------------------------2
n

49

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter1:AntennasandEquipment

50

Forsk2014

Chapter2
RadioPropagation
Thischapterprovidesinformationaboutpropagationmodelsand
calculationsrelatedtopathloss.
Inthischapter,thefollowingareexplained:

"PathLossCalculationPrerequisites"onpage 53

"ListofDefaultPropagationModels"onpage 58

"OkumuraHataandCostHataPropagation
Models"onpage 59

"ITU5293PropagationModel"onpage 60

"StandardPropagationModel(SPM)"onpage 61

"WLLPropagationModel"onpage 71

"ITURP.5265PropagationModel"onpage 72

"ITURP.3707PropagationModel"onpage 72

"ErcegGreenstein(SUI)PropagationModel"on
page 74

"ITURP.15462PropagationModel"onpage 76

"SakagamiExtendedPropagationModel"on
page 80

"FreeSpaceLoss"onpage 82

"Diffraction"onpage 82

"ShadowFadingModel"onpage 86

"PathLossMatrices"onpage 99

"CoveragePredictionExportandReports"on
page 114

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

AT321_TRR_E1

2 RadioPropagation
Pathlosscalculationsarecarriedoutbetweenatransmitterandareceiverusingpropagationmodelsandothercalculations
related to radio wave propagation such as diffraction and shadow fading. Propagation models are mathematical
representationsoftheaveragelossinsignalstrengthoverdistance.Diffractionlossandshadowfadingmarginsareaddedto
thisaveragelossinordertogetmoreprecisepathlossvalues.
Pathlossmatricesarecalculatedforeachtransmitterandtheirresultsusedinothercalculations(coveragepredictions,Monte
Carlosimulations,pointanalysis,etc.).Themethodofcalculationmaydifferdependingontheanalysisbeingperformed:
Analysistype

Receiver
position

Calculation

Profile
extraction

Result

Coveragepredictions

Centreofeachbin
insidethecalculation
area

Basedonpathloss
matrices

Radiala

Onevalueforthebins
surfacearea

Pointanalysis(Profile)

Anywhere

Realtime

Systematic

Differentvaluesinside
acalculationbin

Pointanalysis(other)

Anywhereinsidethe
calculationareas

Basedonpathloss
matrices

Radiala

Onevalueforthebins
surfacearea

MonteCarlo
simulations

Mobilecoordinates

Basedonpathloss
matrices

Radiala

Onevalueatthe
mobilelocation

Subscriberlists

Subscribercoordinates

Realtime

Radiala

Onevalueatthe
subscriberlocation

a.

WiththeStandardPropagationModel,youcanchoosebetweenradialorsystematic.

ThischapterdescribesthevariouspropagationmodelsavailableinAtoll,andotherradiowavepropagationphenomenasuch
asdiffractionandshadowfading.

2.1 PathLossCalculationPrerequisites
2.1.1 GroundAltitudeDetermination
AtolldeterminesreceptionandtransmissionsitealtitudefromDigitalTerrainModelmap.Themethodusedtoevaluatesite
altitudeisbasedonabilinearinterpolation.
DTMfilesprovidealtitudevaluez(inmetre)onevenlyspacedpoints.Abscissaandordinateaxesarerespectivelyorientedin
rightanddownwardsdirections.SpacebetweenpointsisdefinedbypixelsizeP(inmetre).Pixelsizemustbethesameinboth
directions.Thefirstpointgiveninthefilecorrespondstothecentreofthetopleftpixelofthemap(northwestpointgeo
referencedbyAtoll).

Figure 2.1:DigitalTerrainModel
Fourpoints(hence,fouraltitudevalues)arenecessarytodescribeabin;thesepointsarebinvertices.Therefore,aDTMfile
thatcontainsNxNbinsrequiresN2points(altitudevalues).

53

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

Forsk2014

Figure 2.2:SchematicviewofaDTMfile

InAtoll,DEM(DigitalElevationModel)isthesameasDigitalTerrainModel(DTM).In
literature,DEMandDTMdonotalwayshavethesamemeaning.Bydefinition,DEM
referstothealtitudeabovesealevelincludinggroundandclutter,whileDTMrefers
tothegroundaltitudeabovesealevelalone.

LetussupposeasiteSlocatedinsideabin.Atollknowsthealtitudesoffourbinvertices,S1,S1,S2andS2,fromtheDTM
file(centreofeachDTMpixel).

Figure 2.3:GroundAltitudeDetermination1
1. AtolldrawsaverticallinethroughS.Thislinerespectivelyintersects(S1,S1)and(S2,S2)linesatS1andS2.

Figure 2.4:GroundAltitudeDetermination2
2. AtolldeterminestheS1andS2altitudesusingalinearinterpolationmethod.

Figure 2.5:GroundAltitudeDetermination3
3. AtollperformsasecondlinearinterpolationtoevaluatetheSaltitude.

54

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

AT321_TRR_E1

Figure 2.6:GroundAltitudeDetermination4

2.1.2 ClutterDetermination
Somepropagationmodelsneed clutterclassand clutter heightasinformationatreceiveroralongatransmitterreceiver
profile.

2.1.2.1 ClutterClasses
Atollusesclutterclassesfiletodeterminetheclutterclass.Theclutterclassesmapisagridrepresentingthegroundwitheach
binassignedaclutterclasscodecorrespondingtoitscluttertype.Itispossibletospecifyanaverageheightforeachclutter
classinAtoll.
Clutterclassfilesprovideacluttercodeperbin.BinsizeisdefinedbypixelsizeP(inmetre).Pixelsizemustbethesamein
bothdirections.Abscissaandordinateaxesarerespectivelyorientedinrightanddownwardsdirections.Thefirstpointgiven
inthefilecorrespondstothecentreofthetopleftpixelofthemap(northwestpointgeoreferencedbyAtoll.

Figure 2.7:ClutterClasses
Atollsupportsamaximumof255clutterclasses(8bits/pixel).AclutterclassesfilefilethatcontainsNxNbinsrequiresN2
codevalues.

2.1.2.2 ClutterHeights
Toevaluatetheclutterheight,Atollusesclutterheightsfileifavailableinthe.atldocument;clutterheightofasiteisthe
heightofthenearestpointinthefile.
Example:LetussupposeasiteS.Intheclutterheightsfile,Atollreadsclutterheightsoffourpointsaroundthesite,S1,S1,
S2andS2.Here,thenearestpointtoSisS2;thereforeAtolltakestheS2clutterheightasclutterheightofS.

Figure 2.8:ClutterHeight
Ifyoudonothaveanyclutterheightfile,Atolltakesclutterheightinformationinclutterclassesfile.Inthiscase,clutterheight
isanaverageheightrelatedtoaclutterclass.

55

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

Forsk2014

2.1.3 GeographicProfileExtraction
Geographicprofileextractionisneededinordertocalculatediffractionlosses.ProfilescanbebasedonDTMonlyoronDTM
andclutterboth,dependingontheselectedpropagationmodel.
Method1:RadialExtraction
Atoll draws radials from the site (where transmitter is located) to each calculation bin located along the transmitter
calculationareaborder.Inotherwords,Atolldeterminesageographicprofilebetweensiteandeachbincentre.

Figure 2.9:Radialcalculationmethod
Transmitterlocation
Radials(Atollextractsageographicprofileforeachradial)
Centresofbinslocatedonthecalculationborder
Receiverlocation

Figure 2.10:Sitebincentreprofile
Depending on the calculation being carried out, the receiver may be located at the centre of a calculation bin (coverage
predictions)oranywherewithinacalculationbin.Atollusestheprofilenearesttothereceiverforcalculations(thereceiver
isassumedtobelocatedontheprofile).

56

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

AT321_TRR_E1

Method2:SystematicExtraction
Atollextractsaprecisegeographicprofilebetweenthesiteandthereceiver.

Figure 2.11:Radialcalculationmethod
Transmitterlocation
Geographicprofile
Receiverlocation

2.1.4 ResolutionoftheExtractedProfiles
Geographicprofileresolutiondependsonresolutionofgeographicdatausedbythepropagationmodel(DTMand/orclutter).
Theselectedprofileresolutiondoesnotdependonthegeographiclayerorder.

IfthepropagationmodelusesbothDTMandclutterheightsalongtheprofile,theprofileresolutionwillbethehighest
ofthetwo.
Example1(UsingtheStandardPropagationModel)
A DTM map with a 40 m resolution and a clutter heights map with a 20 m resolution are available. The profile
resolutionwillbe20 m.ItmeansthatAtollwillextractgeographicinformation,groundaltitudeandclutterheight,
every20 m.
To get ground altitude every 20 m, Atoll uses the bilinear interpolation method described in "Ground Altitude
Determination"onpage 53.Clutterheightsarereadfromtheclutterheightsmap.Atolltakestheclutterheightofthe
nearestpointevery20 m.
Example2(UsingtheStandardPropagationModel)
ADTMmapwitha40 mresolutionandaclutterclassesmapwitha20 mresolutionareavailable.Noclutterheight
filehasbeenimportedinthedocument.Theprofileresolutionwillbe20 m.ItmeansthatAtollwillextractgeographic
information,groundaltitudeandclutterheight,every20 m.
To get ground altitude every 20 m, Atoll uses the bilinear interpolation method described in "Ground Altitude
Determination"onpage 53.Atollusestheclutterclassesmaptodetermineclutterheight.Every20 m,itdetermines
clutterclassandtakesassociatedaverageheight.

IfthepropagationmodelusesonlyDTMalongtheprofile,theprofileresolutionwillbethehighestresolutionamong
theDTMfiles.
Example(UsingtheCostHataPropagationModel)

57

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

Forsk2014

DTM maps with 40 m and 25 m resolutions and a clutter map with a 20 m resolution are available. The profile
resolutionwillbe25 m.ItmeansthatAtollwillextractgeographicinformation,onlythegroundaltitude,every25 m.
The profile resolution does not depend on the geographic layer order in the Geo tab of the Explorer window.
However,thegeographiclayerorderhasinfluenceontheusageofthedata.Forexample,whenDTM1isonthetop
ofDTM2,AtollwilluseDTM1forextractingtheprofilewhereDTMaisavailableanditwilluseDTM2elsewhere.
To get ground altitude every 25 m, Atoll uses the bilinear interpolation method described in "Ground Altitude
Determination"onpage 53.
GeoTaboftheExplorerWindow
>DTM
>DTM1(25m)
>DTM2(40m)
>Clutter
>Clutter(20m)

2.2 ListofDefaultPropagationModels
PropagationmodelsavailableinAtollarelistedinthetablebelowalongwiththeirmaincharacteristics.
Propagation
model

ITU3707
(Vienna93)

ITU1546

ITU5265

WLL

Frequencyband

100400MHz

303000MHz

3010000MHz

3010000MHz

Physical
phenomena

Freespaceloss
Correctedstandardloss

Freespaceloss+corrections

Freespaceloss
Diffractionloss

Freespaceloss
Diffractionloss

Diffraction
calculation
method

Deygout(3obstacles)
Deygoutcorrected
(3obstacles)

Deygout(3obstacles)

Profilebasedon

DTM

DTM
Clutter

Profileextraction
mode

Radial

Radial

Cellsize

Macrocell

Macrocell

Macrocell

Receiverlocation

Rooftop

Rooftop

Street

Street
Rooftop

Receiver

Fixed

Mobile

Fixed

Fixed

Use

d>10 km
Lowfrequencies
Broadcast

1<d<1000 km
Landandmaritimemobile,
broadcast

Fixedreceivers
WLL

Fixedreceivers
WLL,Microwavelinks,
WiMAX

Propagation
model

StandardPropagation
Model

ErcegGreenstein(SUI)

ITU5293

COSTHata
OkumuraHata

Frequencyband

1503500MHz

19006000MHz

3001500MHz

1502000MHz

Physical
phenomena

L(d,HTxeff,HRxeff,Diffloss,
clutter)

L(d,f,HTx,HRx)
(perenvironment)
Diffractionloss

L(d,f,HRx)
(perenvironment)
Diffractionloss

L(d,f,HRx)
(perenvironment)
Diffractionloss

Diffraction
calculation
method

Deygout(3obstacles)
EpsteinPeterson
(3obstacles)
Deygoutcorrected
(3obstacles)
Millington(1obstacle)

Deygout
(1obstacle)

Deygout
(1obstacle)

Deygout
(1obstacle)

58

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

AT321_TRR_E1

Propagation
model

StandardPropagation
Model

ErcegGreenstein(SUI)

ITU5293

COSTHata
OkumuraHata

Profilebasedon

DTM
Clutter

DTM

DTM

DTM

Profileextraction
mode

Radial
Systematic

Radial

Radial

Radial

Cellsize

Macrocell
Minicell

Macrocell
Minicell

Macrocell
Minicell

Macrocell
Minicell

Receiverlocation

Street
Rooftop

Street

Street

Street

Receiver

MobileandFixed

Fixed

Mobile

Mobile

Use

1<d<20 km
GSM,UMTS,CDMA2000,
WiMAX,LTE

Urbanandsuburbanareas
100 m<d<8 km
FixedWiMAX

1<d<100 km
GSM,CDMA2000,LTE

GSM,UMTS,CDMA2000,LTE

2.3 OkumuraHataandCostHataPropagationModels
2.3.1 HataPathLossFormula
Hataformulaempiricallydescribesthepathlossasafunctionoffrequency,receivertransmitterdistanceandantennaheights
foranurbanenvironment.Thisformulaisvalidforflat,urbanenvironmentsand1.5metremobileantennaheight.
Pathloss(Lu)iscalculated(indB)asfollows:
Lu = A 1 + A 2 log f + A 3 log h Tx + B 1 + B 2 log h Tx + B 3 h Tx log d
fisthefrequency(MHz).
hTxisthetransmitterantennaheightaboveground(m)(HbnotationisalsousedinAtoll).
disthedistancebetweenthetransmitterandthereceiver(km).
TheparametersA1,A2,A3,B1,B2,andB3canbeuserdefined.Defaultvaluesareproposedinthetablebelow:
Parameters

OkumuraHata
f1500MHz

CostHata
f>1500MHz

A1

69.55

49.30

A2

26.16

33.90

A3

13.82

13.82

B1

44.90

44.90

B2

6.55

6.55

B3

2.3.2 CorrectionstotheHataPathLossFormula
As described above, the Hata formula is valid for urban environment and a receiver antenna height of 1.5m. For other
environmentsandmobileantennaheights,correctiveformulasmustbeapplied.

Forurbanareas: L model1 = Lu a h Rx

f 2
Forsuburbanareas: L model1 = Lu a h Rx 2 log ------ 5.4
28

Forquasiopenruralareas: L model1 = Lu a h Rx 4.78 log f + 18.33 log f 35.94

Foropenruralareas: L model1 = Lu a h Rx 4.78 log f + 18.33 log f 40.94

a(hRx)isacorrectionforareceiverantennaheightdifferentfrom1.5m.

Forrural/smallcities: a h Rx = 1.1 log f 0.7 h Rx 1.56 log f 0.8

Forlargecities: a h Rx = 3.2 log 11.75h Rx 4.97

59

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

Forsk2014

Whenreceiverantennaheightequals1.5m,a(hRx)iscloseto0 dBregardlessoffrequency.

2.3.3 CalculationsinAtoll
Hatamodelstakeintoaccounttopomap(DTM)betweentransmitterandreceiverandmorphomap(clutter)atthereceiver.
1ststep:Foreachcalculationbin,Atolldeterminestheclutterbinonwhichthereceiverislocated.Thisclutterbincorresponds
toaclutterclass.Then,itusestheHataformulaassignedtothisclutterclasstoevaluate L model1 .
2ndstep:ThisstepdependsonwhethertheAdddiffractionlossoptionischecked.

IftheAdddiffractionlossoptionisunchecked,Atollstopscalculations.
L model = L model1

IftheAdddiffractionlossoptionisselected,Atollproceedsasfollows:
a. Itextractsageographicprofilebetweenthetransmitterandthereceiverbasedontheradialcalculationmode.
b. ItdeterminesthelargestobstaclealongtheprofileinaccordancewiththeDeygoutmethodandevaluateslosses
duetodiffraction L model2 .
L model = L model1 + L model2

2.4 ITU5293PropagationModel
2.4.1 ITU5293PathLossFormula
TheITU529.3modelisaHatabasedmodel.Forthisreason,itsformulaempiricallydescribesthepathlossasafunctionof
frequency,receivertransmitterdistanceandantennaheightsforaurbanenvironment.Thisformulaisvalidforflat,urban
environmentsand1.5metremobileantennaheight.
ThestandardITU5293formula,forareceiverlocatedonaurbanenvironment,isgivenby:
E = 69.82 6.16 log f + 13.82 log h Tx 44.9 6.55 log h Tx log d

where:
Eisthefieldstrengthfor1kWERP
fisthefrequency(MHz).
h Tx isthetransmitterantennaheightaboveground(m)(HbnotationisalsousedinAtoll)
h Rx isthereceiverantennaheightaboveground(m)
disthedistancebetweenthetransmitterandthereceiver(km)
bisthedistancecorrection
Thedomainofvalidityofsuchisformulais:

Frequencyrange:3001500MHz
BaseStationheight:30200m
Mobileheight:110m
Distancerange:1100km

SinceAtollneedsthepathloss(Lu)formula,aconversionhastobemade.Onecanfindthefollowingconversionformula:
Lu = 139.37 + 20 log f E
whichgivesthefollowingpathlossformulafortheITU5293model:
Lu = 69.55 + 26.16 log f 13.82 log h Tx + 44.9 6.55 log h Tx log d

2.4.2 CorrectionstotheITU5293PathLossFormula
EnvironmentCorrection
Asdescribedabove,theHataformulaisvalidforurbanenvironment.Forotherenvironmentsandmobileantennaheights,
correctiveformulasmustbeapplied.

60

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

AT321_TRR_E1

L model1 = Lu a h Rx forlargecityandurbanenvironments
f 2
L model1 = Lu a h Rx 2 log ------ 5.4 forsuburbanarea
28
2

L model1 = Lu a h Rx 4.78 log f + 18.33 log f 40.94 forruralarea

AreaSizeCorrection
Intheformulasabove, a h Rx istheenvironmentcorrectionandisdefinedaccordingtotheareasize.

Forrural/smallcities: a h Rx = 1.1 log f 0.7 h Rx 1.56 log f 0.8

Forlargecities: a h Rx = 3.2 log 11.75h Rx 4.97

DistanceCorrection
Thedistancecorrectionreferstothetermbabove.

d<20 km: b = 1

h Tx
4
3
d 0.8
d>20 km: b = 1 + 0.14 + 1.87 10 f + 1.07 10 h' Tx log ------ with h' Tx = ---------------------------------------- 20
6 2
1 + 7 10 h Tx

2.4.3 CalculationsinAtoll
Hatabasedmodelstakeintoaccounttopomap(DTM)betweentransmitterandreceiverandmorphomap(clutter)atthe
receiver.
1ststep:Foreachcalculationbin,Atolldeterminestheclutterbinonwhichthereceiverislocated.Thisclutterbincorresponds
toaclutterclass.Then,itusestheITU5293formulaassignedtothisclutterclasstoevaluate L model1 .
2ndstep:ThisstepdependsonwhethertheAdddiffractionlossoptionischecked.

IftheAdddiffractionlossoptionisunchecked,Atollstopscalculations.
L model = L model1

IftheAdddiffractionlossoptionisselected,Atollproceedsasfollows:
a. Itextractsageographicprofilebetweenthetransmitterandthereceiverbasedontheradialcalculationmode.
b. ItdeterminesthelargestobstaclealongtheprofileinaccordancewiththeDeygoutmethodandevaluateslosses
duetodiffraction L model2 .
L model = L model1 + L model2

2.5 StandardPropagationModel(SPM)
2.5.1 SPMPathLossFormula
SPMisbasedonthefollowingformula:
L model = K 1 + K 2 log d + K 3 log H Txeff + K 4 DiffractionLoss + K 5 log d log H Txeff +
K 6 H Rxeff + K 7 log H Rxeff + K clutter f clutter
with,
K1:constantoffset(dB).
K2:multiplyingfactorforlog(d).
d:distancebetweenthereceiverandthetransmitter(m).
K3:multiplyingfactorforlog(HTxeff).
HTxeff:effectiveheightofthetransmitterantenna(m).
K4:multiplyingfactorfordiffractioncalculation.K4hastobeapositivenumber.

61

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

Forsk2014

Diffractionloss:lossduetodiffractionoveranobstructedpath(dB).
K5:multiplyingfactorfor log d log H Txeff
K6:multiplyingfactorfor H Rxeff
K7:multiplyingfactorfor log H Rxeff .
H Rxeff :effectivemobileantennaheight(m).
Kclutter:multiplyingfactorforf(clutter).
f(clutter):averageofweightedlossesduetoclutter.

2.5.2 CalculationsinAtoll
2.5.2.1 VisibilityandDistanceBetweenTransmitterandReceiver
Foreachcalculationbin,Atolldetermines:

Thedistancebetweenthetransmitterandthereceiver.

IfthedistanceTxRxislessthanthemaximumuserdefineddistance(breakdistance),thereceiverisconsideredtobenear
thetransmitter.AtollwillusethesetofvaluesmarkedNeartransmitter.
IfthedistanceTxRxisgreaterthanthemaximumdistance,receiverisconsideredfarfromtransmitter.Atollwillusetheset
ofvaluesFarfromtransmitter.

Whetherthereceiverisinthetransmitterlineofsightornot.

Ifthereceiverisinthetransmitterlineofsight,Atollwilltakeintoaccountthesetofvalues(K1,K2)LOS.TheLOSisdefinedby
noobstructionalongthedirectraybetweenthetransmitterandthereceiver.
Ifthereceiverisnotinthetransmitterlineofsight,Atollwillusethesetofvalues(K1,K2)NLOS.

2.5.2.2 EffectiveTransmitterAntennaHeight
Effectivetransmitterantennaheight(HTxeff)maybecalculatedwithsixdifferentmethods.
HeightAboveGround
Thetransmitterantennaheightisabovetheground(HTxinm).
HTxeff=HTx
HeightAboveAverageProfile
Thetransmitterantennaheightisdeterminedrelativetoanaveragegroundheightcalculatedalongtheprofilebetweena
transmitter and a receiver. The profile length depends on distance min and distance max values and is limited by the
transmitterandreceiverlocations.DistanceminandDistancemaxareminimumandmaximumdistancesfromthetransmitter
respectively.
H Txeff = H Tx + H 0Tx H 0
where,
H 0Tx isthegroundheight(groundelevation)abovesealevelattransmitter(m).
H 0 istheaveragegroundheightabovesealevelalongtheprofile(m).
Iftheprofileisnotlocatedbetweenthetransmitterandthereceiver,HTxeffequalsHTx
only.

SlopeatReceiverBetween0andMinimumDistance
Thetransmitterantennaheightiscalculatedusingthegroundslopeatreceiver.
H Txeff = H Tx + H 0Tx H 0Rx + K d
where,

62

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

AT321_TRR_E1

H 0Rx isthegroundheight(groundelevation)abovesealevelatreceiver(m).
K isthegroundslopecalculatedoverauserdefineddistance(Distancemin).Inthiscase,Distanceminisadistancefrom
receiver.

If H Txeff 20m then,Atolluses20mincalculations.

If H Txeff 200m then,Atolltakes200m.

SpotHt
If H 0Tx H 0Rx then, H Txeff = H Tx + H 0Tx H 0Rx
If H 0Tx H 0Rx then, H Txeff = H Tx
AbsoluteSpotHt
H Txeff = H Tx + H 0Tx H 0Rx
Distance min and distance max are set to 3000 and 15000 m according to ITU
recommendations (low frequency broadcast f < 500 Mhz) and to 0 and 15000 m
accordingOkumurarecommendations(highfrequencymobiletelephony).
Thesevaluesareonlyusedinthetwolastmethodsandhavedifferentmeaningsaccordingtothemethod.
EnhancedSlopeatReceiver
AtolloffersanewmethodcalledEnhancedslopeatreceivertoevaluatetheeffectivetransmitterantennaheight.

Figure 2.12:EnhancedSlopeatReceiver
Letxaxisandyaxisrespectivelyrepresentpositionsandheights.Weassumethatxaxisisorientedfromthetransmitter
(origin)towardsthereceiver.
Thiscalculationisachievedinseveralsteps:
1. Atolldetermineslineofsightbetweentransmitterandreceiver.
TheLOSlineequationis:
H 0Tx + H Tx H 0Rx + H Rx
- Res i
Los i = H 0Tx + H Tx ----------------------------------------------------------------------d
where,
H Rx isthereceiverantennaheightabovetheground(m).
iisthepointindex.
Resistheprofileresolution(distancebetweentwopoints).
2. Atollextractsthetransmitterreceiverterrainprofile.

63

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

Forsk2014

3. Hillsandmountainsarealreadytakenintoaccountindiffractioncalculations.Therefore,inorderforthemnotto
unfavourablyinfluencetheregressionlinecalculation,Atollfilterstheterrainprofile.
Atollcalculatestwofilteredterrainprofiles;oneestablishedfromthetransmitterandanotherfromthereceiver.It
determinesfilteredheightofeveryprofilepoint.Profilepointsareevenlyspacedonthebasisofprofileresolution.To
determinefilteredterrainheightatapoint,Atollevaluatesgroundslopebetweentwopointsandcomparesitwitha
thresholdsetto0.05;wherethreecasesarepossible.
Somenotationsdefinedhereafterareusedinnextpart.
H filt isthefilteredheight.
H orig istheoriginalheight.Originalterrainheightisdeterminedfromextractedgroundprofile.

Filterstartingfromtransmitter
Letusassumethat H filt Tx Tx = H orig Tx
Foreachpoint,wehavethreedifferentcases:
i.

H orig i H orig i 1
- 0.05 ,
If H orig i H orig i 1 and --------------------------------------------------Res
Then, H filt Tx i = H filt Tx i 1 + H orig i H orig i 1

H orig i H orig i 1
- 0.05
ii. If H orig i H orig i 1 and --------------------------------------------------Res
Then, H filt Tx i = H filt Tx i 1
iii. If H orig i H orig i 1
Then, H filt Tx i = H filt Tx i 1
If H filt i H orig i additionally
Then, H filt Tx i = H orig i

Filterstartingfromreceiver

Letusassumethat H filt Rx = H orig Rx

Foreachpoint,wehavethreedifferentcases:
i.

H orig i H orig i + 1
- 0.05 ,
If H orig i H orig i + 1 and --------------------------------------------------Res
Then, H filt Rx i = H filt Rx i + 1 + H orig i H orig i + 1

H orig i H orig i + 1
ii. If H orig i H orig i + 1 and ---------------------------------------------------- 0.05
Res
Then, H filt Rx i = H filt Rx i + 1
iii. 3rdcase:If H orig i H orig i + 1
Then, H filt Rx i = H filt Rx i + 1
If H filt i H orig i additionally
Then, H filt Rx i = H orig i
Then,foreverypointofprofile,Atollcomparesthetwofilteredheightsandchoosesthehigherone.
H filt i = max H filt Tx i H filt Rx i
4. Atolldeterminestheinfluencearea,R.Itcorrespondstothedistancefromreceiveratwhichtheoriginalterrainprofile
plus30metresintersectstheLOSlineforthefirsttime(whenbeginningfromtransmitter).
Theinfluenceareamustsatisfyadditionalconditions:

64

R 3000m

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

AT321_TRR_E1

R 0.01 d
Rmustcontainatleastthreebins.

Whenseveralinfluenceareasarepossible,Atollchoosesthehighestone.
Ifd<3000m,R=d.

5. AtollperformsalinearregressiononthefilteredprofilewithinRinordertodeterminearegressionline.
Theregressionlineequationis:
y = ax + b

d i dm Hfilt i Hm
i
and b = H m ad m
a = --------------------------------------------------------------------2
d i dm

where,
1
H m = --n

Hfilt i
i

iisthepointindex.OnlypointswithinRaretakenintoaccount.
dm = d R
--2
d(i)isthedistancebetweeniandthetransmitter(m).
Then,Atollextendstheregressionlinetothetransmitterlocation.Therefore,itsequationis:
regr i = a i Res + b
6. Then,Atollcalculateseffectivetransmitterantennaheight, H Txeff (m).
H 0Tx + H Tx b
H Txeff = --------------------------------2
1+a
IfHTxeffislessthan20m,Atollrecalculatesitwithanewinfluencearea,whichbeginsattransmitter.

Incase H Txeff 1000m ,1000mwillbeusedincalculations.

If H Txeff isstilllessthan20m,anadditionalcorrectionistakenintoaccount(7thstep).

7. If H Txeff isstilllessthan20m(evennegative),Atollevaluatespathlossusing H Txeff = 20m andappliesacorrection

factor.
Therefore,if H Txeff 20m ,
L model = L model H Txeff = 20m d f + K lowant
20 1 H Txeff 20
d - 0.3 H
where, K lowant = ------Txeff 20 -------------------------------------------------------------------------5
d - 6.93 + ----------d -
9.63 + ----------10

1000
1000

2.5.2.3 EffectiveReceiverAntennaHeight
H Rxeff = H Rx + H 0Rx H 0Tx
where,
H Rx isthereceiverantennaheightabovetheground(m).
H 0Rx isthegroundheight(groundelevation)abovesealevelatthereceiver(m).

65

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

Forsk2014

H 0Tx isthegroundheight(groundelevation)abovesealevelatthetransmitter(m).

Thecalculationofeffectiveantennaheights( H Rxeff and H Txeff )isbasedonextracted

DTMprofiles.Theyarenotproperlyperformedifyouhavenotimportedheights(DTM
file)beforehand.

2.5.2.4 CorrectionforHillyRegionsinCaseofLOS
AnoptionalcorrectivetermenablesAtolltocorrectpathlossforhillyregionswhenthetransmitterandthereceiverarein
Lineofsight.
Therefore,ifthereceiverisinthetransmitterlineofsightandtheHillyterraincorrectionoptionisactive,wehave:
L model = K 1 LOS + K 2 LOS log d + K 3 log H Txeff + K 5 log H Txeff log d + K 6 H Rx + K clutter f clutter + K hill LOS
Whenthetransmitterandthereceiverarenotinlineofsight,thepathlossformulais:
L model = K 1 NLOS + K 2 NLOS log d + K 3 log H Txeff + K 4 Diffraction + K 5 log H Txeff log d + K 6 H Rx + K clutter f clutter
K hill LOS isdeterminedinthreesteps.Influencearea,R,andregressionlinearesupposedavailable.
1ststep:Foreveryprofilepointwithininfluencearea,Atollcalculatesheightdeviationbetweentheoriginalterrainprofileand
regressionline.Then,itsortspointsaccordingtothedeviationanddrawstwolines(paralleltotheregressionline),onewhich
isexceededby10%oftheprofilepointsandtheotheroneby90%.
2ndstep:Atollevaluatestheterrainroughness,h;itisthedistancebetweenthetwolines.
3rdstep:Atollcalculates K hill LOS .
Wehave K hill LOS = K h + K hf
If 0 h 20m , K h = 0
2

Else K h = 7.73 log h 15.29 log h + 6.746

If 0 h 10m , K hf = 2 0.1924 H 0Rx + H Rx regr i Rx
H 0Rx + H Rx regr i Rx
2
Else K hf = 2 1.616 log h + 14.75 log h 11.21 ----------------------------------------------------h
iRxisthepointindexatreceiver.

2.5.2.5 Diffraction
Fourmethodsareavailabletocalculatediffractionlossoverthetransmitterreceiverprofile.
Alongthetransmitterreceiverprofile,youmayconsider:

Eithergroundaltitudeandclutterheight(Considerheightsindiffractionoption),
Inthiscase,Atollusesclutterheightinformationfromclutterheightsfileifavailableinthe.atldocument.Otherwise,
itconsidersaverageclutterheightspecifiedforeachclutterclassintheclutterclassesfiledescription.

Oronlygroundaltitude.

2.5.2.6 LossesduetoClutter
n

Atollcalculatesf(clutter)overamaximumdistancefromreceiver: f clutter =

Li wi
i=1

where,
L:lossduetoclutterdefinedintheCluttertabbytheuser(indB).
w:weightdeterminedthroughtheweightingfunction.
n:numberofpointstakenintoaccountovertheprofile.Pointsareevenlyspaceddependingontheprofileresolution.
Fourweightingfunctionsareavailable:

66

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

AT321_TRR_E1

Uniformweightingfunction: w i = 1
--n

di
Triangularweightingfunction: w i = -----------n

dj
j=1

d i = D d' i ,wherediisthedistancebetweenthereceiverandtheithpointandDisthemaximumdistancedefined.

d
log ----i + 1
D

Logarithmicweightingfunction: w i = -----------------------------------n
d
log ----j + 1
D

j=1
di
---D

e 1
Exponentialweightingfunction: w i = -----------------------n

dj
---D

j=1

Thechartbelowshowstheweightvariationwiththedistanceforeachweightingfunction.

Figure 2.13:LossesduetoClutter

2.5.2.7 Recommendations
Bewarethattheclutterinfluencemaybetakenintoaccountintwoterms,Diffractionlossandf(clutter)atthesametime.To
avoidthis,weadvise:
1. Nottoconsiderclutterheightstoevaluatediffractionlossoverthetransmitterreceiverprofileifyouspecifylosses
perclutterclass.
Thisapproachisrecommendediftheclutterheightinformationisstatistical(clutterroughlydefined,noaltitude).
Or
2. Nottodefineanylossperclutterclassifyoutakeclutterheightsintoaccountinthediffractionloss.
Inthiscase,f(clutter)=0.LossesduetoclutterareonlytakenintoaccountinthecomputedDiffractionlossterm.
Thisapproachisrecommendediftheclutterheightinformationiseithersemideterministic(clutterroughlydefined,
altitudedefinedwithanaverageheightperclutterclass)ordeterministic(cluttersharplydefined,altitudedefined
withanaverageheightperclutterclassorevenbetterviaaclutterheightfile).
Incaseofsemideterministicclutterinformation,specifyreceiverclearance(m)perclutterclass.Bothgroundaltitudeand
clutterheightareconsideredalongthewholetransmitterreceiverprofileexceptoveraspecificdistancearoundthereceiver
(clearance),whereAtollproceedsasiftherewasonlytheDTMmap.Theclearanceinformationisusedtomodelstreets.

67

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

Forsk2014

Figure 2.14:TxRxprofile
Intheabovefigure,thegroundaltitudeandclutterheight(inthiscase,averageheightspecifiedforeachclutterclassinthe
clutterclassesmapdescription)aretakenintoaccountalongtheprofile.
Clearancedefinitionisnotnecessaryincaseofdeterministicclutterheightinformation.Clutterheightinformationisaccurate
enoughtobeuseddirectlywithoutadditionalinformationsuchasclearance.Twocasescanbeconsidered:
1. Ifthereceiverisinthestreet(clutterheightlowerthanreceiverheight),Atollcalculatesthepathlossbyconsidering
potentiallysomediffractionlossatreception.
2. Ifthereceiverissupposedtobeinsideabuilding(clutterheighthigherthanreceiverheight),Atolldoesnotconsider
anydifraction(andclearance)fromthebuildingbuttakesintoaccounttheindoorlossasanadditionalpenetration
loss.

To consider indoor losses in building only when using a deterministic clutter map
(clutter height map), the'IndoorCoverage' box must not be checked in predictions
unlessthislosswillbecountedtwiceinsidebuildings(ontheentirereceptionclutter
classandnotonlyinsidethebuilding).
Even with no clearance, the clutter height (extracted either from clutter class or
clutterheightfolders)isneverconsideredatthelastprofilepoint.

2.5.3 AutomaticCalibration
ThegoalofthistoolistocalibrateparametersandmethodsoftheSPMformulainasimpleandreproducibleway.Calibration
isbasedonimportedCWmeasurementdata.Itistheprocessoflimitingthedifferencebetweenpredictedandmeasured
values.Foracompletedescriptionofthecalibrationprocedure(includingtheveryimportantprerequisitefilteringworkon
theCWmeasurementpoints),pleaserefertotheUserManualandtheSPMCalibrationGuide.
ThefollowingSPMformulaparameterscanbeestimated:

K1,K2,K3,K4,K5,K6andK7
Lossesperclutterclass(Kcluttermustbeuserdefined)
Effectiveantennaheightmethod
Diffractionmethod

Automaticmodelcalibrationprovidesamathematicalsolution.Therelevanceofthismathematicalsolutionwithaphysical
andrealisticsolutionmustbedeterminedbeforecommittingtheseresults.
Youmustkeepinmindthatthemodelcalibrationanditsresult(standarddeviationandrootmeansquare)stronglydepend
ontheCWmeasurementsamplesyouuse.AcalibratedmodelmustrestorethebehaviourofCWmeasurementsdepending
ontheirconfigurationonalargescale,andnotjusttotallycoincidewithafewnumberofCWmeasurements.Thecalibrated
modelhastogivecorrectresultsforeverynewCWmeasurementpointinthesamegeographicalzone,withouthavingbeen
calibratedonthesenewCWmeasurements.

2.5.3.1 GeneralAlgorithm
PropagationmodelcalibrationisaspecialcaseofthemoregeneralLeastSquareproblems,i.e.givenarealmxnmatrixA,
andarealmvectorb,findarealnvectorx0thatminimisestheEuclideanlengthofAxb.
Here,
misthenumberofmeasurementpoints,
nisthenumberofparameterstocalibrate,

68

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

AT321_TRR_E1

Aisthevaluesofparameterassociatedvariables(log(d),log(heff),etc.)ateachmeasurementpoint,and
bisthevectorofmeasurementvalues.
Thevectorx0isthesetofparametersfoundattheendofthecalibration.
The theoretical mathematical solution of this problem was found by Gauss (around 1830). Further enhancements to the
originalmethodwereproposedinthe60'sinordertosolvethenumericalinstabilityproblem.
In 1974, Lawson & Hanson [2] proposed a theoretical solution of the leastsquare problem with general linear inequality
constraintsonthevectorx0.Atollimplementationisbasedonthismethod,whichisexplainedindetailin[1].
References:
[1]BjrckA.NumericalMethodsforLeastSquareProblems,SIAM,1996.
[2]LawsonC.L.,HansonR.J.SolvingLeastSquaresProblems,SIAM,1974.

2.5.3.2 SampleValuesforSPMPathLossFormulaParameters
ThefollowingtableslistsomesampleordersofmagnitudesforthedifferentparameterscomposingtheStandardPropagation
Modelformula.
Minimum

Typical

Maximum

K1

Variable

Variable

Variable

K2

20

44.9

70

K3

20

5.83

20

K4

0.5

0.8

K5

10

6.55

K6

K7

10

ItisrecommendedtosetK6to0,anduseK7insteadofK6.K6isamultiplicativecoefficienttoavalueindB,whichmeansthat
slightvariationsinK6haveconsiderableimpactonthepathloss.
K1dependsonthefrequencyandthetechnology.Herearesomesamplevalues:
Projecttype

Frequency(MHz)

K1

GSM900

935

12.5

GSM1800

1805

22

GSM1900

1930

23

UMTS

2045a

23.8

1xRTT

1900

23

2300

25.6

2500

26.8

2700

27.9

3300

30.9

3500

31.7

WiMAX

a.

2045MHz=(2140+1950)/2.Itistheaverageofthedownlink
anduplinkcentrefrequenciesoftheband.

The above K1 values for WiMAX are extrapolated estimates for different frequency ranges. It is highly recommended to
calibratetheSPMusingmeasurementdatacollectedonthefieldforWiMAXnetworksbeforeusingtheSPMforpredictions.
AllKparamaterscanbedefinedbytheautomaticcalibrationwizard.SinceKclutterisaconstant,itsvalueisstronglydependant
onthevaluesgiventothelossesperclutterclasses.Fromexperience,typicallosses(indB)perclutterclassare:
Denseurban

From4to5

Woodland

From2to3

Urban

69

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

Forsk2014

Suburban

From5to3

Industrial

From5to3

Openinurban

From6to4

Open

From12to10

Water

From14to12

Thesevalueshavetobeenteredonlywhenconsideringstatisticalclutterclassmapsonly.
The Standard Propagation Model is derived from the Hata formulae, valid for urban
environments.Theabovevaluesarenormalizedforurbancluttertypes(0 dBforurban
clutter class). Positive values correspond to more dense clutter classes and negative
valuestolessdenseclutterclasses.

2.5.4 UnmaskedPathLossCalculation
YoucanusetheSPMtocalculateunmaskedpathlosses.Unmaskedpathlossesarecalculatedbynottakingintoaccountthe
transmitterantennapatterns,i.e.,theattenuationduetothetransmitterantennapatternisnotincluded.Suchpathlosses
areusefulwhenusingpathlossmatricescalculatedbyAtollwithautomaticoptimisationtools.
TheinstanceoftheSPMavailablebydefault,underthePropagationModelsfolderintheModulestab,hasthefollowing
characteristics:

Signature:
Type:

{D5701837B08111D4931D00C04FA05664}
Atoll.StdPropagModel.1

YoucanaccesstheseparametersinthePropagationModelstablebydoubleclickingthePropagationModelsfolderinthe
Modulestab.
TomaketheSPMcalculatepathlossesexcludingtheantennapatternattenuation,youhavetochangethetypeoftheSPMto:

Type:

Atoll.StdPropagModelUnmasked.1

However,changingthetypeonlydoesnotinvalidatethealreadycalculatedpathlossmatrices,becausethesignatureofthe
propagationmodelisstillthesame.IfyouwantAtolltorecognizethattheSPMhaschanged,andtoinvalidatethepathloss
matricescalculatedwiththismodel,youhavetochangethesignatureofthemodelaswell.ThedefaultsignaturefortheSPM
thatcalculatesunmaskedpathlossmatricesis:

Signature:

{EEE060E5255C4C1FB36CA80D3D972583}

Theabovesignatureisadefaultsignature.Atollautomaticallycreatesdifferentsignaturesfordifferentinstancesofthesame
propagationmodel.Therefore,itispossibletocreatedifferentinstancesoftheSPM,withdifferentparametersettings,and
createunmaskedversionsoftheseinstances.
YoucanchangethesignatureandtypeoftheoriginalinstanceoftheSPM,butitisrecommendedtomakeacopyoftheSPM
in order not to lose the original SPM parameters. So, you will be able to keep different versions of the SPM, those that
calculatepathlosseswithantennapatternattenuation,andothersthatcalculatepathlosseswithoutit.
TheusualprocessflowofanACPworkingonanAtolldocumentthroughtheAPIwouldbeto:
1. Backupthestoragedirectoryofpathlossmatrices.
2. Setadifferentstoragedirectoryforcalculatingandstoringunmaskedpathlossmatrices.
3. SelecttheSPMused,backupitssignature,andchangeitssignatureandtypeasshownabove.
4. PerformoptimisationusingthepathlossmatricescalculatedbytheunmaskedversionoftheSPM.
5. RestorethetypeandthesignatureoftheSPM.
6. Resetthepathlossstoragedirectorytotheoriginalone.

70

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

AT321_TRR_E1

ItisnotpossibletocalibratetheunmaskedversionoftheSPMusingmeasurement
data.
You can also use Atoll.ini options, AngleCalculation = 2000 and AngleCalculation =
3000, for calculating unmasked path losses and angles of incidence, respectively.
TheseoptionsareonlyavailableforthepropagationmodelsavailablewithAtollby
default.PleaserefertotheAdministratorManualfordetails.
Using the SPM, you can also calculate the angles of incidence by creating a new
instanceoftheSPMwiththefollowingcharacteristics:
Type:Atoll.StdPropagModelIncidence.1
Signature:{659F0B9E28104e599F0DDA9E78E1E64B}
The "masked" version of the algorithm has not been changed. It still takes into
account Atoll.ini options. However, the "unmasked" version does not take Atoll.ini
optionsintoaccount.
Itshighlyrecommendedtouseonemethod(Atoll.inioptions)ortheotherone(new
identifier&signature)butnottocombineboth.

2.6 WLLPropagationModel
2.6.1 WLLPathLossFormula
L model = L FS + F Diff L Diff
Where L FS isthefreespacelosscalculatedusingtheformulaenteredinthemodelproperties, L Diff isthediffractionloss
calculated using the 3obstacle Deygout method, and F Diff is the diffraction multiplying factor defined in the model
properties.

2.6.2 CalculationsinAtoll
FreeSpaceLoss
Forfreespacelosscalculation,see"FreeSpaceLoss"onpage 82.
Diffraction
AtollcalculatesdiffractionlossalongthetransmitterreceiverprofilebuiltfromDTMandcluttermaps.Therefore,lossesdue
toclutteraretakenintoaccountindiffractionlosses.Atolltakesclutterheightinformationfromtheclutterheightsfileif
availableinthe.atldocument.Otherwise,itconsidersaverageclutterheightspecifiedforeachclutterclassintheclutter
classesfiledescription.
TheDeygoutconstruction(considering3obstacles)isused.Thismethodisdescribedunder"Diffraction"onpage 82.Thefinal
diffractionlossesaredeterminedbymultiplyingthediffractionlossescalculatedusingtheDeygoutmethodbytheDiffraction
multiplyingfactordefinedinthemodelproperties.

ReceiverClearance
Define receiver clearance (m) per clutter class when clutter height information is either statistical or semi
deterministic.Bothgroundaltitudeandclutterheightareconsideredalongthewholeprofileexceptoveraspecific
distancearoundthereceiver(clearance),whereAtollproceedsasiftherewasonlytheDTMmap(seeSPMpart).Atoll
usestheclearanceinformationtomodelstreets.
Iftheclutterisdeterministic,donotdefineanyreceiverclearance(m)perclutterclass.Inthiscase,clutterheight
informationisaccurateenoughtobeuseddirectlywithoutadditionalinformationsuchasclearance(Atollcanlocate
streets).

ReceiverHeight
EnteringreceiverheightperclutterclassenablesAtolltoconsiderthefactthatreceiversarefixedandlocatedonthe
roofs.

Visibility
IftheoptionLineofsightonlyisnotselected,AtollcomputesLmodeloneachcalculationbinusingtheformuladefined
above.WhenselectingtheoptionLineofsightonly,AtollchecksforeachcalculationbiniftheDiffractionloss(as
definedintheDiffractionloss:Deygoutpart)calculatedalongprofileequals0.

Inthiscase,receiverisconsideredinlineofsightandAtollcomputesLmodeloneachcalculationbinusingthe
formuladefinedabove.

71

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

Forsk2014

Otherwise,AtollconsidersthatLmodeltendstoinfinity.

2.7 ITURP.5265PropagationModel
2.7.1 ITU5265PathLossFormula
L model = L FS + L Diff
Where L FS isthefreespacelosscalculatedusingtheformulaenteredinthemodelpropertiesand L Diff isthediffractionloss
calculatedusingthe3obstacleDeygoutmethod.

2.7.2 CalculationsinAtoll
FreeSpaceLoss
Forfreespacelosscalculation,see"FreeSpaceLoss"onpage 82.
Diffraction
AtollcalculatesdiffractionlossalongthetransmitterreceiverprofileisbuiltfromtheDTMmap.TheDeygoutconstruction
(considering3obstacles),withorwithoutcorrection,isused.Thesemethodsaredescribedunder"Diffraction"onpage 82.

2.8 ITURP.3707PropagationModel
2.8.1 ITU3707PathLossFormula
Ifd<1km, L model = L FS
Ifd>1000km, L model = 1000
If1<d<1000km, L model = max L FS CorrectedS tan dardLoss
disthedistancebetweenthetransmitterandthereceiver(km).

2.8.2 CalculationsinAtoll
FreeSpaceLoss
Forfreespacelosscalculation,see"FreeSpaceLoss"onpage 82.
CorrectedStandardLoss
Thisformulaisgivenfora60dBm(1kW)transmitterpower.
CorrectedS tan dardLoss = 60 C n A H

Rxeff

A cl 108.75 + 31.54 20 log f

where,
CnisthefieldstrengthreceivedindBV/m,
AH

Rxeff

isacorrectionfactorforeffectivereceiverantennaheight(dB),

Aclisthecorrectionforterrainclearanceangle(dB),
fisthefrequencyinMHz.

CnCalculation
TheCnvalueisdeterminedfromchartsCn=f(d,HTxeff).
Inthefollowingpart,letusassumethatCn=En(d,HTxeff)(whereEn(d,HTxeff)isthefieldreceivedindBV/m)isreadfrom
chartsforadistance,d(inkm),andaneffectivetransmitterantennaheight,HTxeff(inm).
Firstofall,Atollevaluatestheeffectivetransmitterantennaheight, H Txeff ,asfollows:

72

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

AT321_TRR_E1

If 0 d 3km , H Txeff = H 0Tx + H Tx H 0Rx

If 3 d 15km , H Txeff = H 0Tx + H Tx H 0 3 ;d
If 15 d , H Txeff = H 0Tx + H Tx H 0 3 ;15
where,
H Tx isthetransmitterantennaheightabovetheground(m).
H 0Tx isthegroundheight(groundelevation)abovesealevelatthetransmitter(m).
H 0 3 ;d istheaveragegroundheight(m)abovesealevelfortheprofilebetweenapoint3kmfromtransmitterand
thereceiver(locatedatdkmfromtransmitter).
H 0 3 ;15 istheaveragegroundheight(m)abovesealevelfortheprofilebetweenapoint3kmandanother15km
fromtransmitter.
Then,dependingondandHTxeff,AtolldeterminesCnusingbilinearinterpolationasfollows.
If37.5HTxeff1200,Cn=En(d,HTxeff)
Otherwise,Atollconsiders d horizon = 4.1 H Txeff (disstatedinkm)
Therefore,
IfHTxeff<37.5
If d d horizon ,wehave C n = E n d + 25 d horizon 37.5
ElseCn=En(d,37.5)En(dhorizon,37.5)+En(25,37.5)
IfHTxeff>1200
If d d horizon ,wehave C n = E n d + 142 d horizon 1200
ElseCn=En(d,1200)En(dhorizon,1200)+En(142,1200)

AHRxeffCalculation
AH

Rxeff

H Rx
c
= --- 20 log ------ 10
6

where,
HRxistheuserdefinedreceiverheight,
cistheheightgainfactor.
cvaluesareprovidedintherecommendation3707;forexample,c=4inaruralcase.

AclCalculation
2

Iff 300MHz, A cl = 8.1 6.9 + 20 log 0.1 + 1 + 0.1

2

Otherwise, A cl = 14.9 6.9 + 20 log 0.1 + 1 + 0.1

f
With = 4000 ---------
300
where,
istheclearanceangle(inradians)determinedaccordingtotherecommendation3707(figure19),
fisthefrequencystatedinMHz.

73

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

Forsk2014

2.9 ErcegGreenstein(SUI)PropagationModel
ErcegGreensteinpropagationmodelisastatisticalpathlossmodelderivedfromexperimentaldatacollectedat1.9 GHzin95
macrocells.Themodelisforsuburbanareas,anditdistinguishesbetweendifferentterraincategoriescalledtheStanford
UniversityInterimTerrainModels.Thispropagationmodeliswellsuitedfordistancesandbasestationantennaheightsthat
arenotwellcoveredbyothermodels.Thepathlossmodelappliestobaseantennaheightsfrom10to80m,basetoterminal
distancesfrom0.1to8km,andthreedistinctterraincategories.
ThebasicpathlossequationoftheErcegGreensteinpropagationmodelis:
d
PL = A + 10 a HBS Log 10 -----
d 0
4d 0
Where A = 20 Log 10 ------------ .Thisisafixedquantitywhichdependsuponthefrequencyofoperation.disthedistance

between the base station antenna and the receiver terminal and d0 is a fixed reference distance (100 m). a(HBS) is the
correctionfactorforbasestationantennaheights,HBS:
ca H BS = a b H BS + ------H BS
Where 10m H BS 80m ,anda,b,andcarecorrectioncoefficientswhichdependontheSUIterraintype.
The ErcegGreenstein propagation model is further developed through the correction factors introduced by the Stanford
UniversityInterimmodel.ThestandardsproposedbytheIEEEworkinggroup802.16includechannelmodelsdevelopedby
StanfordUniversity.Thebasicpathlossequationwithcorrectionfactorsispresentedbelow:
d
PL = A + 10 a HBS Log 10 ----- + a f a H R
d0
f
Where a(f) is the correction factor for the operating frequency, a f = 6 Log 10 ------------ , with f being the operating
2000
HR
frequencyinMHz.a(HR)isthecorrectionfactorforthereceiverantennaheight, a H R = X Log 10 ------ ,whereddepends
2
ontheterraintype.

a(HR)=0forHR=2m.
References:

[1]V.Erceget.al,Anempiricallybasedpathlossmodelforwirelesschannelsin
suburbanenvironments,IEEEJ.SelectAreasCommun.,vol.17,no.7,July1999,
pp.12051211.
[2] Abhayawardhana, V.S.; Wassell, I.J.; Crosby, D.; Sellars, M.P.; Brown, M.G.;
"Comparisonofempiricalpropagationpathlossmodelsforfixedwirelessaccess
systems,"VehicularTechnologyConference,2005.IEEE61stVolume1,30May1
June2005Page(s):7377Vol.1

2.9.1 SUITerrainTypes
TheSUImodelsaredividedintothreetypesofterrains2,namelyA,BandC.

Type A is associated with maximum path loss and is appropriate for hilly terrain with moderate to heavy tree
densities.
TypeBischaracterisedwitheithermostlyflatterrainswithmoderatetoheavytreedensitiesorhillyterrainswith
lighttreedensities.
TypeCisassociatedwithminimumpathlossandappliestoflatterrainwithlighttreedensities.

Theconstantsusedfora,b,andcaregiveninthetablebelow.

2.

74

ModelParameter

TerrainA

TerrainB

TerrainC

4.6

4.0

3.6

b(m1)

0.0075

0.0065

0.005

The word terrain is used in the original definition of the model rather than environment. Hence it is used
interchangeablywithenvironmentinthisdescription.

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

AT321_TRR_E1

ModelParameter

TerrainA

TerrainB

TerrainC

c(m)

12.6

17.1

20

10.8

10.8

20

2.9.2 ErcegGreenstein(SUI)PathLossFormula
TheErcegGreenstein(SUI)propagationmodelformulacanbesimplifiedfromthefollowingequation:
4d
d
PL = 20 Log 10 -----------0- + 10 a H BS Log 10 ----- + a f a H R

d 0

(1)

totheequationbelow:
PL = 7.366 + 26 Log 10 f + 10 a H BS 1 + Log 10 d a H R

(2)

Where,

fistheoperatingfrequencyinMHz
disthedistancefromthetransmittertothereceivedinminequation(1)andinkminequation(2)
HBSisthetransmitterheightinm
HRisthereceiverheightinm

TheaboveequationisdividedintotwopartsinAtoll:
PL = Lu a H R
Where,
Lu = 7.366 + 26 Log 10 f + 10 a H BS 1 + Log 10 d
Theabovepathlossformulasarevalidford>d0,i.e.d>100 m.Ford<100 m,thepathlosshasbeenrestrictedtothefree
spacepathlosswithcorrectionfactorsforoperatingfrequencyandreceiverheight:
4d
4d
PL = 20 Log 10 ------------------ + a f a H R insteadof PL = 20 Log 10 ------------------

Wherea(f)anda(Hr)havethesamedefinitionasgivenabove.Simplifyingtheaboveequation,weget,
PL = 12.634 + 26 Log 10 f + 20 Log 10 d a H R ,or Lu = 12.634 + 26 Log 10 f + 20 Log 10 d
The above equation is not usermodifiable in Atoll except for the coefficient of Log 10 f , i.e. 26. Atoll uses the same
coefficientastheoneyouenterfor Log 10 f inAtollforthecased>d0.
Youcangetthesameresultingequationbysettinga(hBS)=2.

2.9.3 CalculationsinAtoll
TheErcegGreenstein(SUI)propagationmodeltakesDTMintoaccountbetweenthetransmitterandthereceiver,anditcan
alsotakeclutterintoaccountatthereceiverlocation.
1ststep:Foreachpixelinthecalculationradius,Atolldeterminestheclutterbinonwhichthereceiverislocated.Thisclutter
bincorrespondstoaclutterclass.AtollusestheErcegGreenstein(SUI)pathlossformulaassignedtothisclutterclassto
evaluatepathloss.
2ndstep:ThisstepdependsonwhethertheAdddiffractionlossoptionisselectedornot.

IftheAdddiffractionlossoptionisnotselected,1ststepgivesthefinalpathlossresult.
IftheAdddiffractionlossoptionisselected,Atollproceedsasfollows:
a. Itextractsageographicprofilebetweenthetransmitterandthereceiverusingtheradialcalculationmethod.
b. ItdeterminesthelargestobstaclealongtheprofileinaccordancewiththeDeygoutmethodandevaluateslosses
duetodiffraction L Diffraction .FormoreinformationontheDeygoutmethod,see"3KnifeedgeDeygoutMethod"
onpage 83.
Thefinalpathlossisthesumofthepathlossdeterminedin1ststepand L Diffraction .

75

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

Forsk2014

Shadow fadingiscomputed in Atollindependent of the propagation model. Formore information onthe shadow fading
calculation,see"ShadowFadingModel"onpage 86.

2.10 ITURP.15462PropagationModel
ThispropagationmodelisbasedontheP.15462recommendationsoftheITUR.TheserecommendationsextendtheP.370
7 recommendations, and are suited for operating frequencies from 30 to 3000 MHz. The path loss is calculated by this
propagationmodelwiththehelpofgraphsavailableintherecommendations.Thegraphsprovidedintherecommendations
representfield(orsignal)strength,givenin db V m ,asafunctionofdistancefor:

Nominalfrequencies, f n :100,600,and1000 MHz

Thegraphsprovidedfor100 MHzareapplicabletofrequenciesfrom30to300 MHz,thosefor600 MHzareapplicable
to frequencies from 300 to 1000 MHz, and the graphs for 1000 MHz are applicable to frequencies from 1000 to
3000 MHz.Themethodforinterpolationisdescribedintherecommendations(Annex5,6).

Transmitterantennaheights, h 1 :10,20,37.5,75,150,300,600,and1200 m
Foranyvaluesof h 1 from10to3000 m,aninterpolationorextrapolationfromtheappropriatetwocurvesisused,as
describedintherecommendations(Annex5,4.1).For h 1 below10m,theextrapolationtobeappliedisgivenin
Annex5,4.2.Itispossibleforthevalueof h 1 tobenegative,inwhichcasethemethodisgiveninAnnex5,4.3.

Timevariability, t :1,10,and50 %
Thepropagationcurvesrepresentthefieldstrengthvaluesexceededfor1,10and50 %oftime.

Receiverantennaheight, h 2 :10 m
Forlandpaths,thegraphsrepresentfieldstrengthvaluesforareceiverantennaheightaboveground,equaltothe
representativeheightoftheclutteraroundthereceiver.Theminimumvalueoftherepresentativeheightofclutteris
10 m.Forseapaths,thegraphsrepresentfieldstrengthvaluesforareceiverantennaheightof10 m.
Forothervaluesofreceiverantennaheight,acorrectionisappliedaccordingtotheenvironmentofthereceiver.The
methodforcalculatingthiscorrectionisgiveninAnnex5,9.

Theserecommendationsarenotvalidfortransmitterreceiverdistanceslessthan1 kmorgreaterthan1000 km.Thereforein

Atoll,thepathlossbetweenatransmitterandareceiveroverlessthan1 kmisthesameasthepathlossover1 km.Similarly,
thepathlossbetweenatransmitterandareceiverovermorethan1000 kmisthesameasthepathlossover1000 km.
Moreover, these recommendations are not valid for transmitter antenna heights less than the average clutter height
surroundingthetransmitter.

Thecoldseagraphsareusedforcalculationsoverwarmandcoldseaboth.
ThemixtureoflandandseapathsisnotsupportedbyAtoll.

2.10.1 CalculationsinAtoll
Theinputtothepropagationmodelarethetransmissionfrequency,transmitterandreceiverheights,thedistancebetween
thetransmitterandthereceiver,theprecentageoftimethefieldstrengthvaluesareexceeded,thetypeofenvironment(i.e.,
landorsea),andtheclutteratthereceiverlocation.
Inthefollowingcalculations, f isthetransmissionfrequency, d isthetransmitterreceiverdistance,and t isthepercentage
oftimeforwhichthepathlosshastobecalculated.
ThefollowingcalculationsareperformedinAtolltocalculatethepathlossusingthispropagationmodel.

2.10.1.1 Step1:DeterminationofGraphstobeUsed
Firstofall,theupperandlowernominalfrequenciesaredeterminedforanygiventransmissionfrequency.Theupperand
lowernominalfrequenciesarethenominalfrequencies(100,600,and2000 MHz)betweenwhichthetransmissionfrequency
islocated,i.e., f n1 f f n2 .
Once f n1 and f n1 areknown,alongwiththeinformationaboutthepercentageoftime t andthetypeofpath(landorsea),
thesetsofgraphswhichwillbeusedforthecalculationarealsoknown.

76

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

AT321_TRR_E1

2.10.1.2 Step2:CalculationofMaximumFieldStrength
Afieldstrengthmustnotexceedamaximumvalue, E Max ,whichisgivenby:
E Max = E FS = 106.9 20 Log d forlandpaths,and
E Max = E FS + E SE = 106.9 20 Log d + 2.38 1 exp d 8.94 Log 50 t forseapaths.
Where E FS isthefreespacefieldstrengthfor1 kWERP, E SE isanenhancementforseagraphs.

2.10.1.3 Step3:DeterminationofTransmitterAntennaHeight
Thetransmitterantennaheighttobeusedinthecalculationdependsonthetypeandlengthofthepath.

Landpaths
h 1 = h eff

Seapaths
h 1 = Max 1 h a

Here,allantennaheights(i.e., h 1 , h eff ,and h a )areinexpressedinm. h a istheantennaheightabovegroundand h eff isthe

effectiveheightofthetransmitterantenna,whichisitsheightovertheaveragelevelofthegroundbetweendistancesof
0.2 d andd kmfromthetransmitterinthedirectionofthereceiver.

2.10.1.4 Step4:Interpolation/ExtrapolationofFieldStrength
The interpolations are performed in series in the same order as described below. The first interpolation/extrapolation is
performedoverthefieldstrengthvalues, E ,fromthegraphsfortransmitterantennaheighttodetermine E h1 .Thesecond
interpolation/extrapolationisperformedovertheinterpolated/extrapolatedvaluesof E h1 todetermine E d .And,thethrid
andfinalinterpolation/extrapolationisperformedovertheinterpolated/extrapolatedvaluesof E d todetermine E f .
Step4.1:Interpolation/ExtrapolationofFieldStrengthforTransmitterAntennaHeight
Ifthevalueof h 1 coincideswithoneoftheeightheightsforwhichthefieldstrengthgraphsareprovided,namely10,20,37.5,
75,150,300,600,and1200 m,therequiredfieldstrengthisobtaineddirectlyfromthecorrespondinggraph.Otherwise:

If 10m h 1 3000m
Thefieldstrengthisinterpolatedorextrapolatedfromfieldstrengthsobtainedfromtwocurvesusingthefollowing
equation:
Log h 1 h Low
E h1 = E Low + E Up E Low ------------------------------------Log h Up h Low
Where h Low = 600m if h 1 1200m , otherwise h Low is the nearest nominal effective height below h 1 ,
h Up = 1200m if h 1 1200m ,otherwise h Up isthenearestnominaleffectiveheightabove h 1 , E Low isthefield
strengthvaluefor h Low attherequireddistance,and E Up isthefieldstrengthvaluefor h Up attherequireddistance.

If 0m h 1 10m

For land path if the transmitterreceiver distance is less than the smoothEarth horizon distance
d H h 1 = 4.1 h 1 ,i.e.,if d 4.1 h 1 ,
E h1 = E 10 d H 10 + E 10 d E 10 d H h 1 ,or
E h1 = E 10 12.9km + E 10 d E 10 d H h 1 because d H 10 = 12.9km

ForlandpathifthetransmitterreceiverdistanceisgreaterthanorequaltothesmoothEarthhorizondistance
d H h 1 = 4.1 h 1 ,i.e.,if d 4.1 h 1 ,
E h1 = E 10 d H 10 + d d H h 1 ,or E h1 = E 10 12.9km + d d H h 1 because d H 10 = 12.9km
Where E x y isthefieldstrengthvaluereadforthetransmitterreceiverdistanceofyfromthegraphavailable
forthetransmitterantennaheightofx.

77

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

Forsk2014

If in the above equation, d H 10 + d d H h 1 1000km even though d 1000km , the field strength is
determinedfromlinearextrapolationforLog(distance)ofthegraphgivenby:
Log d D Low
E h1 = E Low + E Up E Low -------------------------------------Log D Up D Low
Where D Low ispenultimatetabulationdistance(km), D Up isthefinaltabulationdistance(km), E Low isthefield
strengthvaluefor D Low ,and E Up isthefieldstrengthvaluefor D Up .

Forseapath, h 1 shouldnotbelessthan1 m.Thiscalculationrequiresthedistanceatwhichthepathhas0.6of

thefirstFresnelzonejustunobstructedbytheseasurface.Thisdistanceisgivenby:
D h1 = D 0.6 f h 1 h 2 = 10m (km)
D f D h
- (km)with D f = 0.0000389 f h 1 h 2 (frequencydependentterm),and
Where D 0.6 = Max 0.001 ---------------
D f + D h
D h = 4.1 h 1 + h 2 (asymptotictermdefinedbythehorizondistance).
If d D h1 the0.6Fresnelclearancedistancefortheseapathwherethetransmitterantennaheightis20 misalso
calculatedas:
D 20 = D 0.6 f h 1 = 20m h 2 = 10m (km)
Once D h1 and D 20 areknown,thefieldstrengthfortherequireddistanceisgivenby:

E h1

E Max

Log d D h1
= E D + E D E D ---------------------------------h1
20
h1
Log D 20 D h1

E' 1 F S + E'' F S

ford D h1
forD h1 d D 20
ford D 20

Where E Max is the maximum field strength at the required distance as calculated in "Step 2: Calculation of
MaximumFieldStrength"onpage 77, E D
ED

20

h1

is E Max for d = D h1 ,

Log h1 10
Log h1 10
= E 10 D 20 + E 20 D 20 E 10 D 20 ------------------------------- , E' = E 10 d + E 20 d E 10 d ------------------------------- , and
Log 20 10
Log 20 10

E'' isthefieldstrengthcalculatedasdescribedforlandpaths. E 10 y and E 20 y arefieldstrengthsinterpolated

fordistanceyand h 1 = 10mand20m ,respectively,and F S = d D 20 d .

If h 1 0m
Acorrectionisappliedtothefieldstrength, E h1 ,calculatedintheabovedescriptioninordertotakeintoaccountthe
diffraction and tropospheric scattering. This correction is the maximum of the diffraction correction,, and
troposphericscatteringcorrection,.
C h1 = Max C h1d C h1t
2

Where C h1d = 6.03 J with J = 6.9 + 20 Log 0.1 + 1 + 0.1 and = K eff2 ,
h1
- ,and K is1.35for100 MHz,3.31for600 MHz,6.00for2000 MHz.
eff2 = arc tan ----------9000
e
180 d- , a = 6370km (radius of the Earth), and k = 4 3 is the
- with e = -------------------C h1t = 30 Log --------------------- e + eff2
ak
effectiveEarthradiusfactorformeanrefractivityconditions.
Step4.2:Interpolation/ExtrapolationofFieldStrengthforTransmitterReceiverDistance
Inthefieldstrengthgraphsintherecommendations,thefieldstrengthisplottedagainstdistancefrom1 kmto1000 km.The
distancevaluesforwhichfieldstrengthsaretabulatedare1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,19,20,25,
30,35,40,45,50,55,60,65,70,75,80,85,90,95,100,110,120,130,140,150,160,170,180,190,200,225,250,275,300,
325,350,375,400,425,450,475,500,525,550,575,600,625,650,675,700,725,750,775,800,825,850,875,900,925,
950,975,1000.Ifthetransmitterreceiverdistanceisavaluefromthislist,theninterpolationoffieldstrengthisnotrequired
andthefieldstrengthcanbedirectlyreadfromthegraphs.

78

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

AT321_TRR_E1

Ifthetransmitterreceiverdistancedoesnotcoincidewiththelistofdistancesforwhichthefieldstrengthsareaccurately
availablefromthegraphs,thefieldstrengtharelinearlyinterpolatedorextrapolatedforthelogarithmofthedistanceusing
thefollowingequation:
Log d d Low
E d = E Low + E Up E Low ------------------------------------Log d Up d Low
Where d Low isthelowervalueofthenearesttabulateddistanceto d , d Up isthehighervalueofthenearesttabulated
distanceto d , E Low isthefieldstrengthvaluefor d Low ,and E Up isthefieldstrengthvaluefor d Up .
Step4.3:Interpolation/ExtrapolationofFieldStrengthforTransmissionFrequency
Thefieldstrengthatthetransmissionfrequencyisinterpolatedfromthegraphsavailablefortheupperandlowernominal
frequenciesasfollows:
Log f f Low
E f = E Low + E Up E Low ----------------------------------Log f Up f Low
Where f Low is the lower nominal frequency (100 MHz if f < 600 MHz, 600 MHz otherwise), f Up is the higher nominal
frequency (600 MHz if f < 600 MHz, 2000 MHz otherwise), E Low is the field strength value for f Low , and E Up is the field
strengthvaluefor f Up .
Inthecaseoftransmissionfrequenciesbelow100 MHzorabove2000 MHz,thefieldstrengthvaluesareextrapolatedfrom
thetwonearernominalfrequencyvalues.Theaboveequationisusedforalllandpathsandseapaths.

2.10.1.5 Step5:CalculationofCorrectionFactors
Step5.1:CorrectionforReceiverAntennaHeight
Thereceiverantennaheightcorrectiondependsonthetypeofpathandclutterinwhichthereceiverislocated.Thefield
strengthvaluesgivenbythegraphsforlandpathsareforareferencereceiverantennaataheight, R (m),representativeof
theheightofthecluttersurroundingthereceiver,subjecttoaminimumheightvalueof10 m.Examplesofreferenceheights
are20 mforanurbanarea,30 mforadenseurbanarea,and10 mforasuburbanarea.Forseapathsthenotionalvalueof R
is10 m.
Forlandpaths,theelevationangleofthearrivingrayistakenintoaccountbycalculatingamodifiedrepresentativeclutter
1000 d R 15 h 1
height R' ,givenby R' = Max 1 ----------------------------------------------------------.

1000 d 15
Notethatfor h 1 6.5 d + R , R' R .
Thedifferentcorrectionfactorsarecalculatedasfollows:

Forlandpathinurbanandsuburbanzones
6.03 J
forh 2 R'

C Receiver =
h
3.2 + 6.2 Log f Log ----2- forh 2 R'
R'

R' h 2
2
With J = 6.9 + 20 Log 0.1 + 1 + 0.1 and = 0.0108 f R' h 2 arc tan --------------- .
27
10
If R' 10m , C Receiver isreducedby 3.2 + 6.2 Log f Log ------ .
R'

Forlandpathotherzones
h
C Receiver = 3.2 + 6.2 Log f Log -----2-
10

Forseapath
d 10 and d h2 aredeterminedasdistancesatwhichatwhichthepathhas0.6ofthefirstFresnelzonejustunobstructed
by the sea surface with h 2 = 10m and variable h 2 , respectively. These distances are given by

79

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

Forsk2014

D f D h
- as
d 10 = D 0.6 f h 1 h 2 = 10m and d h2 = D 0.6 f h 1 h 2 (km),respectively.Here D 0.6 = Max 0.001 ---------------
D f + D h
explainedearlier.

h2
If h 2 10m , C Receiver = 3.2 + 6.2 Log f Log ------
10

h2
If h 2 10m and d d 10 , C Receiver = 3.2 + 6.2 Log f Log ------
10

If h 2 10m and d d 10 and d dh2 , C Receiver = 0

Log d d h2
h2
If h 2 10m and d d 10 and d dh2 , C Receiver = 3.2 + 6.2 Log f Log ------ ----------------------------------
10 Log d 10 d h2

Step5.2:CorrectionforShortUrban/SuburbanPaths
Thiscorrectionisonlyappliedwhenthepathlossistobecalculatedoverlandpaths,overatransmitterreceiverdistanceless
than15 km,inurbanandsuburbanzones.Thiscorrectiontakesintoaccountthepresenceofbuildingsinthesezones.The
buildingsareassumedtobeofuniformheight.
Thecorrectionrepresentsareductioninthefieldstrengthduetobuildingclutter.Itisaddedtothefieldstrengthandisgiven
by:
C Building = 3.3 Log f 1 0.85 Log d 1 0.46 Log 1 + h a R
Where h a istheantennaheightabovetheground,andRistheclutterheightoftheclutterclasswherethereceiverislocated.
Thiscorrectionisonlyappliedwhen d 15km and h 1 R 150m .
Step5.3:CorrectionforReceiverClearanceAngle
Thiscorrectionisonlyappliedwhenthepathlossistobecalculatedoverlandpaths,andoveratransmitterreceiverdistance
lessthan16 km.Thiscorrectiongivesmoreprecisefieldstrengthpredictionoversmallreceptionareas.Thecorrectionis
addedtothefieldstrengthandisgivenby:
C Clearance = J ' J
2

Where J = 6.9 + 20 Log 0.1 + 1 + 0.1 , ' = 0.036 f ,and = 0.065 Clearance f
Clearance istheclearanceangleindegreesdeterminedfrom:

:Theelevationangleofthelinefromthereceiverwhichjustclearsallterrainobstructionsinthedirectionofthe
transmitteroveradistanceofupto16 kmbutnotgoingbeyondthetransmitter.
h 1S h 2S
- .
Ref :Thereferenceangle, Ref = arc tan ------------------- 1000 d
Where h 1S and h 2S aretheheightsofthetransmitterandthereceiverabovesealevel,respectively.

2.10.1.6 Step6:CalculationofPathLoss
First,thefinalfieldstrengthiscalculatedfromtheinterpolated/extrapolatedfieldstrength, E f ,byapplyingthecorrections
calculatedearlier.Thecalculatedfieldstrengthisgivenby:
E Calc = E f + C Receiver + C Building + C Clearance
The resulting field strength is given by E = Min E Calc E Max , from which the path loss (basic transmission loss, L B ) is
calculatedasfollows:
L B = 139 E + 20 Log f

2.11 SakagamiExtendedPropagationModel
The Sakagami extended propagation model is based on the simplification of the extended SakagamiKuboi propagation
model. The Sakagami extended propagation model is valid for frequencies above 3 GHz. Therefore, it is only available in
WiMAXdocumentsbydefault.

80

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

AT321_TRR_E1

TheSakagamiKuboipropagationmodelrequiresdetailedinformationabouttheenvironment,suchaswidthsofthestreets
wherethereceiverislocated,theanglesformedbythestreetaxesandthedirectionsoftheincidentwaves,heightsofthe
buildingsclosetothereceiver,etc.ThepathlossformulafortheSakagamiKuboipropagationmodelis[1]:
H 2
L Model = 100 7.1 Log W + 0.023 + 1.4 Log h s + 6.1 Log H 1 24.37 3.7 -------- Log h b +
h b0
43.2 3.1 Log h b Log d + 20 Log f + e

13 Log f 3.23

Where,

Wisthewidth(inmeters)ofthestreetswherethereceiverislocated
istheangle(indegrees)formedbythestreetaxesandthedirectionoftheincidentwave
hsistheheight(inmeters)ofthebuildingsclosetothereceiver
H1istheaverageheight(inmeters)ofthebuildingsclosetothereceiver
hbistheheight(inmeters)ofthetransmitterantennawithrespecttotheobserver
hb0istheheight(inmeters)ofthetransmitterantennawithrespecttothegroundlevel
Histheaverageheight(inmeters)ofthebuildingsclosetothebasestation
distheseparation(inkilometres)betweenthetransmitterandthereceiver
fisthefrequency(inMHz)

TheSakagamiKuboipropagationmodelisvalidfor:
5m

<W<

50m

< <

90

5m

<hs<

80m

5m

<H1<

50m

20m

<hb<

100m

0.5km

<d<

10km

450MHz

<f<

2200MHz

h b0 H
Studies[2]haveshownthattheSakagamiKuboipropagationmodelcanbeextendedtofrequencieshigherthan3 GHz,which
alsoallowsasimplificationintermsoftheinputrequiredbythemodel.
ThepathlossformulafortheextendedSakagamiKuboipropagationmodelis:
L Model = 54 + 40 Log d 30 Log h b + 21 Log f + a
Whereaisacorrectivefactorwiththreecomponents:
hm
H
W
a = a H 0 + a W + a h m = 11 Log -----0- 7.1 Log ------ 5 Log -----20
20
1.5

Wisthewidth(inmeters)ofthestreetswherethereceiverislocated
H0(=hs=H1)istheheight(inmeters)ofthebuildingsclosetothereceiver
hb(=hb0)istheheight(inmeters)ofthetransmitterantennawithrespecttotheground
hmistheheight(inmeters)ofthereceiverantenna
Histheaverageheight(inmeters)ofthebuildingsclosetothebasestation
distheseparation(inmetres)betweenthetransmitterandthereceiver
fisthefrequency(inGHz)

TheextendedSakagamiKuboipropagationmodelisvalidfor:
5m

<W<

50m

10m

<H0<

30m

10m

<hb<

100m

0.1km

<d<

3km

0.8GHz

<f<

8GHz

1.5m

<hm<

5m

81

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

Forsk2014

Studies also show that above 3 GHz, the path loss predicted by the extended model is almost independant of the input
parameterssuchasstreetwidthsandangles.Therefore,theextendedSakagamiKuboipropagationmodelcanbesimplified
totheextendedSakagamipropagationmodel:
L Model = 54 + 40 Log d 30 Log h b + 21 Log f 5 Log h m
TheextendedSakagamipropagationmodelisvalidfor:
10m

<hb<

0.1km

<d<

3km

3GHz

<f<

8GHz

1.5m

<hm<

5m

100m

The path loss calculation formula of the Sakagami extended propagation model resembles the formula of the Standard
PropagationModel.InAtoll,thismodelisinfactacopyoftheStandardPropagationModelwiththefollowingvaluesassigned
totheKcoefficients:
K1

65.4
(calculatedfor3.5GHz)

K2

40

K3

30

K4

K5

K6

K7

FormoreinformationontheStandardPropagationModel,see"StandardPropagationModel(SPM)"onpage 61.
References:

[1] Manuel F. Catedra, Jesus PerezArriaga, "Cell Planning for Wireless

Communications,"ArtechHousePublishers,1999.
[2] Koshiro Kitao, Shinichi Ichitsubo, "Path Loss Prediction Formula for Urban and
SuburbanAreasfor4GSystems,"IEEE,2006.

2.12 FreeSpaceLoss
ThecalculationoffreespacelossisbasedonITU525recommendations.
L FS = 32.4 + 20 log f + 20 log d
where,
fisthefrequencyinMHz,
distheTxRxdistanceinkm,
FreespacelossisstatedindB.

2.13 Diffraction
ThecalculationofdiffractionisbasedonITU5265recommendations.Generalmethodforoneormoreobstacles(knifeedge
diffraction)isusedtoevaluatediffractionlosses(DiffractionlossindB).FourconstructionmodesareimplementedinAtoll.
Allofthemarebasedonthissamephysicalprinciplepresentedhereafter,butdifferinthewaytheyconsideroneorseveral
obstacles.CalculationstaketheearthcurvatureintoaccountthroughtheeffectiveEarthradiusconcept(Kfactor=1.333).

2.13.1 KnifeedgeDiffraction
TheprocedurecheckswhetheraknifeedgeobstructsthefirstFresnelzoneconstructedbetweenthetransmitterandthe
receiver. The diffraction loss, J(), depends on the obstruction parameter (), which corresponds to the ratio of the
obstructionheight(h)andtheradiusoftheFresnelzone(R).

82

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

AT321_TRR_E1

Figure 2.15:KnifeEdgeDiffraction
R =

c0 n d1 d2
------------------------------f d1 + d2

where,
nistheFresnelzoneindex,
c0isthespeedoflight(2.99792x108ms1),
fisthefrequencyinHz
d1isthedistancefromthetransmittertoobstacleinm,
d2isthedistancefromobstacletoreceiverinm.
Wehave: = h
--r
where,
R
r = ------2
histheobstructionheight(heightfromtheobstacletoptotheTxRxaxis).
Hence,
2

For1knifeedgemethod,if 0.7 , J = 6.9 + 20 log 0.1 + 1 + 0.1

Else, J = 0
Incaseofmultipleknifeedgemethod,theminimum requiredtoestimatediffraction
lossis0.78.

2.13.2 3KnifeedgeDeygoutMethod
TheDeygoutconstruction,limitedtoamaximumofthreeedges,isappliedtotheentireprofilefromtransmittertoreceiver.
Thismethodisusedtoevaluatepathlossincurredbymultipleknifeedges.Deygoutmethodisbasedonahierarchicalknife
edgesortingusedtodistinguishthemainedges,whichinducethelargestlosses,andsecondaryedges,whichhavealesser
effect.Theedgehierarchydependsontheobstructionparameter()value.

83

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

Forsk2014

1Obstacle

Figure 2.16:DeygoutConstruction1Obstacle
AstraightlinebetweentransmitterandreceiverisdrawnandtheheightoftheobstacleabovetheTxRxaxis,hi,iscalculated.
Theobstructionposition,di,isalsorecorded.iareevaluatedfromthesedata.Thepointwiththehighestvalueistermed
theprincipaledge,p,andthecorrespondinglossisJ(p).
Therefore,wehave
DiffractionLoss = J P
3Obstacles
Then,themainedge(pointp)isconsideredasasecondarytransmitterorreceiver.Therefore,theprofileisdividedintwo
parts: one half profile, between the transmitter and the knifeedge section, another half, constituted by the knifeedge
receiversection.

Figure 2.17:DeygoutConstruction3Obstacles
Thesameprocedureisrepeatedoneachhalfprofiletodeterminetheedgewiththehigher.Thetwoobstaclesfound,(points
tandr),arecalledsecondaryedges.Lossesinducedbythesecondaryedges,J(t)andJ(r),arethencalculated.
Oncetheedgehierarchyisdetermined,thetotallossisevaluatedbyaddingalltheintermediarylossesobtained.
Therefore,if P 0
wehave DiffractionLoss = J P + J t + J r
Otherwise,If P 0.7 , DiffractionLoss = J P

84

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

AT321_TRR_E1

IncaseofITU5265andWLLpropagationmodels,Diffractionlosstermisdeterminedas
follows:

If P 0.78 ,wehave DiffractionLoss = J P + J t + J r t

Otherwise DiffractionLoss = 0

J P
- 1
Here, t = min ----------
6

2.13.3 EpsteinPetersonMethod
TheEpsteinPetersonconstructionislimitedtoamaximumofthreeedges.First,Deygoutconstructionisappliedtodetermine
thethreemainedgesoverthewholeprofileasdescribedabove.Then,themainedgeheight,hp,isrecalculatedaccordingto
theEpsteinPetersonconstruction.hpistheheightaboveastraightlineconnectingtandrpoints.Themainedgepositiondp
isrecordedandpandJ(p)areevaluatedfromthesedata.

Figure 2.18:EpsteinPetersonConstruction
Therefore,wehave
DiffractionLoss = J P + J t + J r

2.13.4 DeygoutMethodwithCorrection
The Deygout method with correction (ITU 5265) is based on the Deygout construction (3 obstacles) plus an empirical
correction,C.
Therefore,If P 0 ,
wehave DiffractionLoss = J P + J t + J r + C
Otherwise DiffractionLoss = J P + C
IncaseofITU5265propagationmodel,Diffractionlosstermisdeterminedasfollows:

If P 0.78 ,wehave DiffractionLoss = J P + t J t + J r + C

Otherwise DiffractionLoss = 0

J P
- 1 and C = 8.0 + 0.04d withd=distancestatedinkmbetween
Here, t = min ----------
6
thetransmitterandthereceiver.

2.13.5 MillingtonMethod
TheMillingtonconstruction,limitedtoasingleedge,isappliedovertheentireprofile.Twohorizonlinesaredrawnatthe
transmitterandatthereceiver.Astraightlinebetweenthetransmitterandthereceiverisdefinedandtheheightofthe

85

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

Forsk2014

intersectionpointbetweenthetwohorizonlinesabovetheTxRxaxis,hh,iscalculated.Thepositiondhisrecordedandthen,
fromthesevalues,handJ(h)areevaluatedusingthesamepreviousformulas.
Therefore,wehave
DiffractionLoss = J h

Figure 2.19:MillingtonConstruction

2.14 ShadowFadingModel
Propagationmodelspredictthemeanpathlossasafunctionoftransmissionandreceptionparameterssuchasfrequency,
antennaheights,anddistance,etc.Therefore,thepredictedpathlossbetweenatransmitterandareceiverisconstant,ina
givenenvironmentandforagivendistance.However,inrealitydifferenttypesofcluttermayexistinthetransmitterreceiver
path.Therefore,thepathlossesforthesamedistancecouldbedifferentalongpathsthatpassthroughtdifferenttypesof
environments.Thelocationofthereceiverindifferenttypesofcluttercausesvariationswithrespecttothemeanpathloss
valuesgivenbythepathlossmodels.Somepathsundergomorelosswhileothersarelessobstructedandmayhavehigher
receivedsignalstrength.Thevariationofpathlosswithrespecttothemeanpathlossvaluespredictedbythepropagation
models,dependingonthetypeofenvironmentiscalledshadowfading(shadowing)orslowfading."Slow"fadingimpliesthat
thevariationsinthepathlossduetoshadowfadingoccurcomparativelyslowerthanthefastfadingeffect(Rayleighfading),
whichisduetothemobilereceivingmultipathcopiesofasignal.
Differenttypesofclutter(buildings,hills,etc.)makelargeshadowsthatcausevariationsinthepathlossoverlongdistances.
Asamobilepassesunderashadow,thepathlosstothemobilekeepsvaryingfrompointtopoint.Shadowfadingvariesas
the mobile moves, while fast fading can vary even if the mobile remains at the same location or moves over very small
distances.Itiscrucialtoaccountfortheshadowfadinginordertopredictthereliabilityofcoverageprovidedbyanymobile
cellularsystem.
Theshadowingeffectismodelledbyalognormal(Gaussian)distribution,asshowninFigure 2.20onpage 86,whosestandard
deviation dependsonthetypeofclutter.

Figure 2.20:LognormalProbabilityDensityFunction

86

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

AT321_TRR_E1

Differentcluttertypeshavedifferentshadowingeffects.Therefore,eachcluttertypeinAtollcanhaveadifferentstandard
deviationrepresentingitsshadowingcharacteristics.Fordifferentstandarddeviations,theshapeoftheGaussiandistribution
curveremainssimilar,asshowninFigure 2.20onpage 86.
Theaccuracyofthismodeldependsupon:

Thesuitabilityoftherangeofstandarddeviationusedforeachclutterclass,
Thedefinition(binsize)ofthedigitalmap,
Howuptodatethedigitalmapis,
Thenumberofclutterclasses,
Theaccuracyofassignmentofclutterclasses.

Shadowing is applied to the predicted path loss differently depending on the technology, and whether it is applied to
predictionsorsimulations.Thefollowingsectionsexplainhowshadowingmarginsarecalculatedandappliedtodifferent
technologydocuments.
Shadowing margins are calculated for a given cell edge coverage probability. The cell edge coverage probability is the
probabilityofcoverageatapixellocatedatthecelledge,andcorrespondstothereliabilityofcoveragethatyouareplanning
toachieveatthecelledge.Forexample,acelledgecoverageprobabilityof75 %meansthattheuserslocatedatthecelledge
will receive adequate signal level during 75 % of the time. Therefore, a coverage prediction with a cell edge coverage
probabilityofx %meansthatthesignallevelpredictedoneachpixelisreliablex %ofthetime,andtheoverallpredicted
coverageareaisreliableatleastx %ofthetime.
References:

[1]SaundersS.AntennasandpropagationforWirelessCommunicationSystems
pp.180198
[2]HolmaH.,ToskalaA.WCDMAforUMTS
[3]JhongS.,LeonardM.CDMAsystemsengineeringhandbookpp.309315,1051
1053
[4] Remy J.G., Cueugnet J., Siben C. Systmes de radiocommunications avec les
mobilespp.309310
[5] Laiho J., Wacker A., Novosad T. Radio network planning and optimisation for
UMTSpp.8081

GSMGPRSEGPRSDocuments
Theshadowingmarginsarecalculatedasexplainedin"ShadowingMarginCalculationinPredictions"onpage 91,andapplied
tosignallevelorC/Iasexplainedbelow.

SignalLevelBasedPredictions
Signallevelbasedpredictionsincludecoveragepredictions(CoveragebyTransmitter,CoveragebySignalLevel,and
Overlapping Zones) and calculations in point analysis tabs (Profile and Reception) that require calculation of the
receivedsignallevelonly,anddonotdependoninterference.
Inthesecalculations(signallevelcalculations),ashadowingmargin( M Shadowing model )isappliedtothereceived
signallevelcalculatedforeachpixel.Theshadowingmarginiscalculatedforagivencelledgecoverageprobability,
anddependsonthemodelstandarddeviation( model indB)associatedtotheclutterclasswherethereceiveris
located.

InterferenceBasedPredictions
Interferencebasedpredictionsincludecoveragepredictions(CoveragebyC/ILevel,InterferedZones,Coverageby
GPRS/EDGE Coding Scheme, RLC Throughout/Timeslot, Application Throughput/Timeslot, Circuit Quality Indicator
Analysis)andcalculationsinpointanalysiswindowsInterferencetabthatrequirecalculationofthereceivedsignal
levelandinterferencereceivedfromotherbasestations.
Inthesecalculations,( C I calculations),theshadowingmargin( M Shadowing C I )isappliedtotheratioofthecarrier
power(C)andtheinterferingsignallevels(I)receivedfromtheinterferingbasestations.Thisshadowingmarginis
calculatedforagivencelledgecoverageprobabilityanddependsontheC/Istandarddeviation( C I indB)associated
totheclutterclasswherethereceiverislocated.

UMTSHSPAandCDMA20001xRTT1xEVDODocuments
The shadowing margins are calculated as explained in "Shadowing Margin Calculation in Predictions" on page 91 and
"Shadowing Margin Calculation in MonteCarlo Simulations" on page 93, and applied to signal level, Ec/I0, or Eb/Nt as
explainedbelow.

SignalLevelBasedPredictions

87

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

Forsk2014

Signallevelbasedpredictionsincludecoveragepredictions(CoveragebyTransmitter,CoveragebySignalLevel,and
Overlapping Zones) and calculations in point analysis tabs (Profile and Reception) that require calculation of the
receivedsignallevelonly,anddonotdependoninterference.
Inthesecalculations(signallevelcalculations),ashadowingmargin( M Shadowing model )isappliedtothereceived
signallevelcalculatedforeachpixel.Theshadowingmarginiscalculatedforagivencelledgecoverageprobability,
anddependsonthemodelstandarddeviation( model indB)associatedtotheclutterclasswherethereceiveris
located.

Interference+noiseBasedPredictions
Interference+noisebased predictions include coverage predictions (Pilot Quality Analysis, Downlink Total Noise,
ServiceAreaAnalyses,HandoffStatus,etc.)andpointanalysis(ASAnalysistab)thatrequirecalculationofthereceived
signallevelandinterferenceandnoisereceivedfromotherbasestations.
Inthesecalculations,theshadowingmargins( M Shadowing Ec Io , M Shadowing Eb Nt

DL

,or M Shadowing Eb Nt

UL

areappliedtoEc/I0orEb/Nt.Theseshadowingmarginsarecalculatedforagivencelledgecoverageprobabilityand
dependontheEc/I0orEb/Ntstandarddeviations( Ec Io , Eb Nt

DL

,or Eb Nt

UL

,indB)associatedtotheclutter

classwherethereceiverislocated.

MacroDiversityGains
UL

DL

Atollcalculatestheuplinkanddownlinkmacrodiversitygains( G macro diversity and G macro diversity )dependingon

thereceiverhandoverstatus.ThesegainsarerespectivelytakenintoaccounttoevaluatetheuplinkEb/Ntincaseof
softhandoverandthedownlinkEc/Iofrombestserver.Fordetaileddescriptionofthecalculationofmacrodiversity
gains,pleasereferto"MacroDiversityGainsCalculation"onpage 93.

MonteCarloSimulations
Randomvaluesforshadowingmarginsarecalculatedforeachtransmitterreceiverlinkandappliedtothepredicted
signallevel.Ashadowingmarginforeachtransmitterreceiverlinkineachsimulationisobtainedbytakingarandom
valuefromtheprobabilitydensitydistributionfortheappropriateclutterclass.Theprobabilitydistributionisalog
normaldistributionasexplainedabove.

TDSCDMADocuments
The shadowing margins are calculated as explained in "Shadowing Margin Calculation in Predictions" on page 91 and
"ShadowingMarginCalculationinMonteCarloSimulations"onpage 93,andappliedtosignallevelorinterference+noise
predictionsasexplainedbelow.

SignalLevelBasedPredictions
Signal levelbased predictions include coverage predictions (Best Server and RSCP PCCPCH Coverages, PCCPCG
PollutionAnalysis,BatonHandoverCoverage,DwPCHandUpPCHCoverages,CelltoCellInterference,andScrambling
Code Interference) and calculations in point analysis tabs (Profile and Reception) that require calculation of the
receivedsignallevelonly,anddonotdependoninterference.
Inthesecalculations(signallevelcalculations),ashadowingmargin( M Shadowing model )isappliedtothereceived
signallevelcalculatedforeachpixel.Theshadowingmarginiscalculatedforagivencelledgecoverageprobability,
anddependsonthemodelstandarddeviation( model indB)associatedtotheclutterclasswherethereceiveris
located.

Interference+noiseBasedPredictions
Interference+noisebasedpredictionsincludecoveragepredictions(PCCPCHEb/NtandC/ICoverages,ServiceArea
Analsyses for downlink and uplink Eb/Nt and C/I, etc.) that require calculation of the received signal level and
interferencereceivedfromotherbasestations.
In these calculations, the shadowing margins ( M Shadowing Eb Nt
M Shadowing Eb Nt

UL

P CCPCH

, M Shadowing Eb Nt

DL

, or

)areappliedtoEb/Nt.Theseshadowingmarginsarecalculatedforagivencelledgecoverage

probability and depend on the Eb/Nt standard deviations ( Eb Nt

P CCPCH

, Eb Nt

DL

, or Eb Nt

UL

, in dB)

associatedtotheclutterclasswherethereceiverislocated.

MonteCarloSimulations
Randomvaluesforshadowingmarginsarecalculatedforeachtransmitterreceiverlinkandappliedtothepredicted
signallevel.Ashadowingmarginforeachtransmitterreceiverlinkineachsimulationisobtainedbytakingarandom
valuefromtheprobabilitydensitydistributionfortheappropriateclutterclass.Theprobabilitydistributionisalog
normaldistributionasexplainedabove.

88

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

AT321_TRR_E1

WiMAXDocuments
The shadowing margins are calculated as explained in "Shadowing Margin Calculation in Predictions" on page 91 and
"ShadowingMarginCalculationinMonteCarloSimulations"onpage 93,andappliedtosignallevelorC/(I+N)asexplained
below.

SignalLevelBasedPredictions
Signallevelbasedpredictionsincludecoveragepredictions(CoveragebyTransmitter,CoveragebySignalLevel,and
Overlapping Zones) and calculations in point analysis tabs (Profile and Reception) that require calculation of the
receivedsignallevelonly,anddonotdependoninterference.
Inthesecalculations(signallevelcalculations),ashadowingmargin( M Shadowing model )isappliedtothereceived
signallevelcalculatedforeachpixel.Theshadowingmarginiscalculatedforagivencelledgecoverageprobability,
anddependsonthemodelstandarddeviation( model indB)associatedtotheclutterclasswherethereceiveris
located.

Interference+noiseBasedPredictions
Interferencebased predictions include coverage predictions (Coverage by C/(I+N) Level, Coverage by Bearer,
CoveragebyThroughput,etc.)thatrequirecalculationofthereceivedsignallevelandinterference.
Inthesecalculations,(C/(I+N)calculations),inadditiontotheshadowingmargin( M Shadowing model )appliedtothe
received signal level calculated for each pixel, the ratio M Shadowing model M Shadowing C I is applied to the
interferingsignallevels(I). M Shadowing C I iscalculatedforagivencelledgecoverageprobabilityanddependsonthe
C/Istandarddeviation( C I indB)associatedtotheclutterclasswherethereceiverislocated.
The reason why the ratio M Shadowing model M Shadowing C I is used can be understood from the following
derivation(linear,notitdB):
Inputs

C P :Thepredictedreceivedcarrierpowerwithoutanyshadowingmargin.

I P :Thepredictedreceivedinterferencepowerwithoutanyshadowingmargin.

m C :Shadowingmarginbasedonthemodelstandarddeviation( 10

m C I :ShadowingmarginbasedontheC/Istandarddeviation( 10

N :Thermalnoise

M
Shadowing model
---------------------------------------------------------10

M Shadowing C I
------------------------------------------------10

Calculations
Theeffectivereceivedcarrierpowerisgivenby:
C = mC CP
TheeffectiveC/Iisgivenby:
CP
C
--- = m C I ----IP
I
Theaboveequationsleadto:
mC
mC CP
C - = ----------------------I
- = ---------I = ---------------------mC I P
CP
CP
m C I ----m C I ----IP
IP
mC
Where ----------- correspondsto M Shadowing model M Shadowing C I indB.
mC I
Therefore,theeffectiveC/(I+N)isgivenby:
mC CP
C - = -------------------------------------------------I + N
m
C
---------
-I +N
mC I P

MonteCarloSimulations

89

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

Forsk2014

Randomvaluesforshadowingmarginsarecalculatedforeachtransmitterreceiverlinkandappliedtothepredicted
signallevel.Ashadowingmarginforeachtransmitterreceiverlinkineachsimulationisobtainedbytakingarandom
valuefromtheprobabilitydensitydistributionfortheappropriateclutterclass.Theprobabilitydistributionisalog
normaldistributionasexplainedabove.
LTEDocuments
The shadowing margins are calculated as explained in "Shadowing Margin Calculation in Predictions" on page 91 and
"ShadowingMarginCalculationinMonteCarloSimulations"onpage 93,andappliedtosignallevelorC/(I+N)asexplained
below.

SignalLevelBasedPredictions
Signallevelbasedpredictionsincludecoveragepredictions(CoveragebyTransmitter,CoveragebySignalLevel,and
Overlapping Zones) and calculations in point analysis tabs (Profile and Reception) that require calculation of the
receivedsignallevelonly,anddonotdependoninterference.
Inthesecalculations(signallevelcalculations),ashadowingmargin( M Shadowing model )isappliedtothesignallevel
calculatedforeachpixel.Theshadowingmarginiscalculatedforagivencelledgecoverageprobability,anddepends
onthemodelstandarddeviation( model indB)associatedtotheclutterclasswherethereceiverislocated.

Interference+noiseBasedPredictions
Interferencebased predictions include coverage predictions (Coverage by C/(I+N) Level, Coverage by Bearer,
CoveragebyThroughput,etc.)thatrequirecalculationofthereceivedsignallevelandreceivedinterference.
Inthesecalculations,(C/(I+N)calculations),inadditiontotheshadowingmargin( M Shadowing model )appliedtothe
signallevelcalculatedforeachpixel,theratio M Shadowing model M Shadowing C I isappliedtotheinterferingsignal
levels(I). M Shadowing C I iscalculatedforagivencelledgecoverageprobabilityanddependsontheC/Istandard
deviation( C I indB)associatedtotheclutterclasswherethereceiverislocated.
The reason why the ratio M Shadowing model M Shadowing C I is used can be understood from the following
derivation(linear,notitdB):
Inputs

C P :Thepredictedreceivedcarrierpowerwithoutanyshadowingmargin.

I P :Thepredictedreceivedinterferencepowerwithoutanyshadowingmargin.

m C :Shadowingmarginbasedonthemodelstandarddeviation( 10

m C I :ShadowingmarginbasedontheC/Istandarddeviation( 10

N :Thermalnoise

M Shadowing model
---------------------------------------------------------10

M Shadowing C I
-------------------------------------------------10

Calculations
Theeffectivereceivedcarrierpowerisgivenby:
C = mC CP
TheeffectiveC/Iisgivenby:
C
C
--- = m C I ----PIP
I
Theaboveequationsleadto:
mC
mC CP
C - = ----------------------I
- = ---------I = ---------------------mC I P
CP
CP
m C I ----m C I ----IP
IP
mC
Where ----------- correspondsto M Shadowing model M Shadowing C I indB.
mC I
Therefore,theeffectiveC/(I+N)isgivenby:

90

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

AT321_TRR_E1

mC CP
C - = -------------------------------------------------m
I + N
C
---------- I P + N
mC I

MonteCarloSimulations
Randomvaluesforshadowingmarginsarecalculatedforeachtransmitterreceiverlinkandappliedtothepredicted
signallevel.Ashadowingmarginforeachtransmitterreceiverlinkineachsimulationisobtainedbytakingarandom
valuefromtheprobabilitydensitydistributionfortheappropriateclutterclass.Theprobabilitydistributionisalog
normaldistributionasexplainedabove.

2.14.1 ShadowingMarginCalculation
Thefollowingsectionsdescribethecalculationmethodusedfordeterminingdifferentshadowinmargins.
Thefollowingshadowingmarginsarecalculatedusingthemethoddescribedbelow:
NetworkType

StandardDeviation

MShadowing

Appliedto

model

M Shadowing model

C I

M Shadowing C I

C/I

model

M Shadowing model

Ec Io

M Shadowing Ec Io

Ec/I0

GSMGPRSEGPRS

UMTSHSPA

Eb Nt
Eb Nt

CDMA2000

DL

UL

UL

Eb/Nt(UL)
C

Ec Io

M Shadowing Ec Io

Ec/I0

DL

UL

model
Eb Nt

P CCPCH

Eb Nt
Eb Nt

LTE

Eb/Nt(DL)

M Shadowing model

Eb Nt

WiMAX

M Shadowing Eb Nt

DL

model

Eb Nt

TDSCDMA

M Shadowing Eb Nt

DL

UL

M Shadowing Eb Nt
M Shadowing Eb Nt

DL

Eb/Nt(DL)

UL

Eb/Nt(UL)

M Shadowing model
M Shadowing Eb Nt

P CCPCH

M Shadowing Eb Nt
M Shadowing Eb Nt

C
Eb/NtPCCPCH

DL

Eb/Nt(DL)

UL

Eb/Nt(UL)

model

M Shadowing model

CandC/(I+N)

C I

M Shadowing C I

C/(I+N)

model

M Shadowing model

CandC/(I+N)

C I

M Shadowing C I

C/(I+N)

2.14.1.1 ShadowingMarginCalculationinPredictions
Shadowingmargins,MShadowing,arecalculatedfromstandarddeviationvaluesdefinedfortheclutterclasswherethepixel
(probemobile)islocated,andrequiredcelledgecoverageprobability,andappliedtothepathloss,Lpath.
ShadowingErrorPDF(1Signal)
ThemeasuredpathlossindBcanbeexpressedasaGaussianrandomvariable:
L = L path + dB G 0 1
where,

Lpathisthepredictedpathloss,

91

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

Forsk2014

dBistheuserdefinedstandarddeviationoftheerror,
G(0,1)isazeromeanunitvarianceGaussianrandomvariable.

Therefore,theprobabilitydensityfunction(pdf)fortherandom(shadowing)partofpathlossis:

1
p L x = -------------------- e
dB 2

2
x
-------------2
2
dB

TheprobabilitythattheshadowingerrorexceedszdBis
2
x ------------2
2 dB

PL x z =

pL x dx =
z

1
-------------------- e
dB 2

dx

NormalisingxbydividingitbydB:

1
P L x z = ----------
2

z
--------- dB

2
x
----2

z
dx = Q --------
dB

whereQisthecomplementarycumulativefunction.
Toensureagivencelledgecoverageprobability, R L ,forthepredictedvalue,ashadowingmargin, M Shadowing ,isaddedto
thelinkbudget.
Confidenceinthepredictioncanbeexpressedas:
C d = P' Tx L P rec L P' Tx P rec G 0 1 dB M Shadowing
where,

P rec isthesignallevelpredictedatthereceiver. P rec = P' Tx L path M Shadowing

P' Tx = EIRP + G antRx L Rx

EIRPistheeffectiveisotropicradiatedpowerofthetransmitter.
L Rx arereceiverlosses.

G antRx isthereceiverantennagain.

Theshadowingmarginiscalculatedsuchthat:
M Shadowing
P C d P rec = R L M Shadowing = 1 P L x M Shadowing 0 = 1 Q -------------------------

dB
AlookuptableisusedformappingthevaluesofQvs.asetofcelledgecoverageprobabilities.

M Shadowing
Figure 2.21:NormalisedMargin M arg in = ------------------------- dB
Ininterferencebasedpredictions,wheresignaltonoiseratioiscalculated,theshadowingmarginisonlyappliedtothesignal
fromtheinterferedtransmitter(C).Weconsiderthattheinterferencevalueisnotalteredbytheshadowingmargin.Random
variationsalsoexistintheinterferingsignals,buttakingonlytheaverageinterferencegivesaccurateresults.[3]explainshow
acertainlevelofinterferenceismaintainedbycongestioncontrolinCDMAbasednetworks.

92

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

AT321_TRR_E1

2.14.1.2 ShadowingMarginCalculationinMonteCarloSimulations
Shadowingmargins,MShadowing,arecalculatedfromstandarddeviationvaluesdefinedfortheclutterclasswherethepixel
(probemobile)islocated,andrequiredcelledgecoverageprobability,andaddedtothepathloss,Lpath.
Randomvaluesaregeneratedduring MonteCarlo simulation.Each userisassigned a service,amobilitytype,anactivity
status,ageographicpositionandarandomshadowingvalue.
Foreachlink,pathloss(L)canbebrokendownto L = L path + .
Here, isazeromeangaussianrandomvariable G 0 dB representingvariationduetoshadowing.Itcanbeexpressedas
thesumoftwouncorrelatedzeromeangaussianrandomvariables, L and P . L modelstheerrorrelatedtothereceivers
location(surroundingenvironment),andremainsthesameforalllinksbetweenthereceiverandthebasestationsfromwhich
itisreceivingsignals. P modelstheerrorrelatedtothepathbetweenthetransmitterandthereceiver.
Therefore,incaseoftwolinks,wehave:
1

1 = L + P forlink1
2

2 = L + P forlink2
i

Standard deviations of L L and P P can be calculated from i , the model standard deviation model , and the
correlationcoefficient between 1 and 2 .
Assumingall P havethesamestandarddeviations,wehave:
2

model = L + P
2

L
= --------------2
model
Therefore,
2

P = model 1
L = model
issetto0.5inAtoll,whichgives:
model
model
L = --------------- and P = --------------2
2
Receiver

Therefore, to model shadowing error common to all the signals received at a receiver ( E Shadowing model ), values are
randomly generatedfor eachreceiver. These values have a zeromean gaussian distribution with a standard deviation of
model

--------------- ,where model isthemodelstandarddeviationassociatedwiththereceiversclutterclass.

2
Next,Atollgeneratesanotherrandomvalueforeachtransmitterreceiverpair.Thisvaluesrepresentstheshadowingerror
Path

notrelatedtothelocationofthereceiver( E Shadowing model ).Thesevaluesalsohaveazeromeangaussiandistributionwith

model
- .
astandarddeviation --------------
2
So,wehave:
Receiver

Path

E Shadowing model = E Shadowing model + E Shadowing model

Randomshadowingerrorhasitsmeanvalueatzero.Hence,thisshadowingmodellingmethodhasnoimpactonthesimulated
network load. On the other hand, as shadowing errors on the transmitterreceiver links are uncorrelated, the method
influencesthecalculatedmacrodiversitygainincasethemobileisinsofthandover.

2.14.2 MacroDiversityGainsCalculation
ThefollowingsectionsexplainhowuplinkanddownlinkmacrodiversitygainsarecalculatedinUMTSHSPAandCDMA2000
1xRTT1xEVDOdocumentsforpredictionsandASAnalysistabofthepointanalysistool.

93

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

Forsk2014

ThecalculationanduseofmacrodiversitygainscanbedisabledthroughtheAtoll.inifile.
Formoreinformation,seetheAdministratorManual.

2.14.2.1 UplinkMacroDiversityGainEvaluation
InUMTSHSPAandCDMA20001xRTT1xEVDO,mobilesmaybeinsofthandoff(mobileconnectedtocellslocatedondifferent
sites).Inthiscase,wecanconsidertheshadowingerrorpdfdescribedbelow.

2.14.2.1.1

ShadowingErrorPDF(nSignals)
Foreachlink,pathloss(L)canbebrokendownas:
L = L path +
isazeromeangaussianrandomvariable G 0 dB representingvariationduetoshadowing.Itcanbeexpressedasthe
sumoftwouncorrelatedzeromeangaussianrandomvariables, L and P . L modelserrorrelatedtothereceiverlocal
environment;itisthesamewhicheverthelink. P modelserrorrelatedtothepathbetweentransmitterandreceiver.
Therefore,incaseoftwolinks,wehave:
1

1 = L + P forthelink1
2

2 = L + P forthelink2
Knowing i ,theuplinkEb/Ntstandarddeviation Eb Nt andthecorrelationcoefficient between 1 and 2 ,wecan
UL

calculatestandarddeviationsof L L and P P (assumingall P havethesamestandarddeviations).

Wehave:
2

Eb Nt

UL

= L + P
2

L
= ----------------------2
Eb Nt

UL

Therefore,
2

P = Eb Nt
2

UL

L = Eb Nt

UL

2SignalsWithoutRecombination
In technologies supporting soft handoff (UMTS and CDMA2000), cell is interference limited. As for one link, to ensure a
required cell edge coverage probability R L for the prediction, we add to each link budget a shadowing margin,
2signals

M Shadowing Eb Nt

UL

PredictionreliabilityinordertohaveEb/NthigherorequaltoEb/Ntfromthebestservercanbeexpressedas:
Cd
1
1
-------1 = P' Tx1 L 1 N 1 CI pred 1 P' Tx1 L path N 1 CI pred
1
N1
or
Cd
1
1
-------2 = P' Tx2 L 2 N 2 CI pred 2 P' Tx2 L path N 2 CI pred
2
N2
where
i

CI pred isthequalitylevel(signaltonoiseratio)predictedatthereceiverforlinki.
Niisthenoiselevelforlinki.
Wenote:

94

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

AT321_TRR_E1
2signals

M Shadowing Eb Nt

UL

= P' Txi L path N i CI pred

i

and
2

1 = CI pred CI pred
2

1 istheminimumneededmarginoneachlink.
Therefore,theprobabilityofhavingaqualityatleastequaltothebestpredictedoneis:
noMRC

RL

noMRC

RL

Cd
Cd

2signals
1
1
M Shadowing Eb Nt = 1 P L1 L2 -------1 CI pred -------2 CI pred
UL
N
N
1

2
2signals

M Shadowing Eb Nt = 1 P
UL

1 2 1

2signals

2signals

M Shadowing Eb Nt 2 M Shadowing Eb Nt
UL

UL

Wecanexpressitusing L , P and P
P

2signals

1 2 1

UL

= P L P
L

2signals

M Shadowing Eb Nt 2 M Shadowing Eb Nt

1
1 2 P
P P

2signals

M Shadowing Eb Nt

2signals

1 2 1

2signals

2signals

UL

2signals

noMRC

UL

UL

2
1 L = L

L P M Shadowing Eb Nt

M Shadowing Eb Nt 2 M Shadowing Eb Nt

= P L P P M Shadowing Eb Nt

RL

UL

UL

UL

1 L

2
1 L = L

2signals

L P P M Shadowing Eb Nt
P

UL

1 L

2signals

M Shadowing Eb Nt
UL

1
2signals
2
2signals
2
= 1 P L P P M Shadowing Eb Nt L P P M Shadowing Eb Nt 1 L d L

L
P
UL
P
UL

2signals

P P M Shadowing Eb Nt
P

1
= ---------------- 2
P
M 2signals

Shadowing Eb Nt

UL

e
UL

2
x
---------2
2 P

2signals
M Shadowing Eb Nt UL L
dx = Q ----------------------------------------------------------------
P

Then,wehave:
noMRC

RL

2signals

M Shadowing Eb Nt
UL

2signals
M Shadowing Eb Nt UL

2signals
2

L
M Shadowing Eb Nt UL 1 L

= 1 P L Q ---------------------------------------------------------------- Q ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- d L

L
P
P

If we introduce user defined standard deviation Eb Nt and correlation coefficient , and consider that P is a
UL

Gaussianpdf:
noMRC

RL

2signals

M Shadowing Eb Nt
UL

1
= 1 ---------- e
2

2
xL
--------2

M 2signals
M 2signals
Shadowing Eb Nt UL x L Eb Nt UL
Shadowing Eb Nt UL x L Eb Nt UL 1

Q ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Q ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ dx L
Eb Nt
1
Eb Nt
1

UL
UL

95

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

Forsk2014

nSignalsWithoutRecombination
Wecangeneralizethepreviousexpressiontonsignals(nisthenumber ofavailablesignalsAtollmay considerup to3
signals):
noMRC

RL

nsignals

M Shadowing Eb Nt
UL

1
= 1 ---------- e
2

2
xL
--------2

M nsignals
M nsignals
Shadowing Eb Nt UL x L Eb Nt UL
Shadowing Eb Nt UL x L Eb Nt UL 1

Q ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Q ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ dx L
1
1
Eb Nt
Eb Nt

UL
UL

Thecasewheresofterhandoffoccurs(twosignalsfromcositecells)isequivalenttotheonesignalcase.TheSofter/softcase
isequivalenttothetwosignalscase.Forthepathassociatedwiththesofterrecombination,wewillusecombinedSNRto
calculatetheavailabilityofthelink.
CorrelationCoefficientDetermination
Thereiscurrentlynoagreedmodelforpredictingcorrelationcoefficient between 1 and 2 .Twokeyvariablesinfluence
correlation:

Theanglebetweenthetwosignals.Ifthisangleissmall,correlationishigh.
Therelativevaluesofthetwosignallengths.Ifangleis0andlengthsarethesame,correlationiszero.Correlationis
differentfromzerowhenpathlengthsdiffer.

Asimplemodelhasbeenfound[1]:
T
= -----

D1
------- when T
D2

T isafunctionofthemeansizeofobstaclesnearthereceiverandisalsolinkedtothereceiverenvironment.
Inanormalhandoverstatus,assumingahexagonaldesignforsites, iscloseto(+//3)andD1/D2iscloseto1.

In[1,5], = 0.5 when = 0.3 and T = ------ .

10
InAtoll, issetto0.5.

2.14.2.1.2

UplinkMacroDiversityGain
UL

Atolldeterminestheuplinkmacrodiversitygain( G macro diversity )fromtheshadowingmarginscalculatedincaseofone

signalandnsignals.
Therefore,wehave:
UL

nsignals

G macro diversity = M Shadowing Eb Nt

UL

M Shadowing Eb Nt

UL

Wherenisthenumberofcellmobilesignals.

2.14.2.2 DownlinkMacroDiversityGainEvaluation
InUMTSHSPAandCDMA20001xRTT1xEVDO,incaseofsofthandoff,mobilesareabletoswitchfromonecelltoanotherif
thebestpilotdrasticallyfades.Tomodelthisfunction,wehavetoconsidertheprobabilityoffadingovertheshadowing
margin,bothforthebestsignalandforalltheotheravailablesignals,intheshadowingmargincalculation.
Letusconsidertheshadowingerrorpdfdescribedbelow.

2.14.2.2.1

ShadowingErrorPDF(nSignals)
Foreachlink,pathloss(L)canbebrokendownas:
L = L path +
isazeromeangaussianrandomvariable G 0 dB representingvariationduetoshadowing.Itcanbeexpressedasthe
sumoftwouncorrelatedzeromeangaussianrandomvariables, L and P . L modelstheerrorrelatedtothereceiverlocal
environment, which is the same for all links. P models the error related to the path between the transmitter and the
receiver.
Therefore,incaseoftwolinks,wehave:

96

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

AT321_TRR_E1
1

1 = L + P forthelink1
2

2 = L + P forthelink2
Knowing i ,theEc/Iostandarddeviation Ec I o andthecorrelationcoefficient between 1 and 2 ,wecancalculate
standarddeviationsof L L and P P (assumingall P havethesamestandarddeviations).
Wehave:
2

Ec I o = L + P
2

L
= ------------2
Ec I o
Therefore,
2

P = Ec I o 1
L = Ec I o
2AvailableSignals
Intechnologiessupportingsofthandoff(UMTSandCDMA2000)cellsareinterferencelimited.Asforonelink,toensurea
2signals

requiredcelledgecoverageprobability R L fortheprediction,weaddashadowingmargin, M Shadowing Ec Io ,toeachlink

budget.
Ec
Ec
Predictionreliabilitytohave ----- -----
forthebestservercanbeexpressedas:
Io
Io pred
Ec 1
Ec 1
Ec 1
-------- = P pilot L 1 Io -----
1 P pilot L m Io -----
Io pred
Io pred
1
1
1
Io
Or
Ec 2
Ec 1
Ec 1
-------- = P pilot L 2 Io -----
2 P pilot L m Io -----
Io pred
Io pred
2
2
2
Io
Wenote:
1

Ec
2signals
M Shadowing Ec Io = P pilot L m Io -----
Io pred
i
i
Ec 1
Ec 2
2
1 = -----
-----
Io pred
Io pred
2

1 istheminimumneededmarginoneachlink.
Therefore,probabilityofhavingaqualityatleastequaltothebestpredictedoneis:
noMRC

RL

noMRC

RL

Ec
Ec
Ec 1
Ec 1
2signals
M Shadowing Ec Io = 1 P L1 L2 -------1- -----
-------2- -----
Io
Io pred Io Io pred
2signals

2signals

2signals

M Shadowing Ec Io = 1 P 1 2 1 M Shadowing Ec Io 2 M Shadowing Ec Io 1

1

Wecanexpressitbyusing L , P and P
2signals

2signals

P 1 2 1 M Shadowing Ec Io 2 M Shadowing Ec Io 1 L = L
= P L P
L

1
1 2 P
P P

2signals

2signals

M Shadowing Ec Io L P M Shadowing Ec Io 1 L

2signals

2signals

P 1 2 1 M Shadowing Ec Io 2 M Shadowing Ec Io 1 L = L
1

2signals

2signals

= P L P P M Shadowing Ec Io L P P M Shadowing Ec Io 1 L
L

97

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

noMRC

RL

Forsk2014

2signals

M Shadowing Ec Io

= 1

PL L PP P MShadowing Ec Io L PP P MShadowing Ec Io 1 L dL
1

2signals

2signals

1
i
2signals
P P M Shadowing Ec Io L = ----------------P
P 2

SHO L

2
x --------2
2
P

2signals

M Shadowing Ec Io L
-
dx = Q ----------------------------------------------------P

Then,wehave:

noMRC
2signals
RL
M Shadowing Ec Io

= 1

2signals

2signals

M Shadowing Ec Io L
M Shadowing Ec Io 1 L
P L Q ------------------------------------------------------ Q ------------------------------------------------------------------ d L
L

If we introduce a user defined Ec/Io standard deviation and a correlation coefficient and consider that P is a
L

Gaussianpdf:
noMRC

RL

2signals

M Shadowing Ec Io

1
= 1 ---------2

2
xL
--------2

2signals

2signals

M Shadowing Ec Io x L Ec I o
M Shadowing Ec Io 1 x L Ec I o
Q ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- Q ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- dx L
Ec I o 1
Ec I o 1

nAvailableSignals
Wecangeneralizethepreviousexpressionfornsignals(nisthenumberofavailablesignalsAtollmayconsiderupto3
signals):
noMRC

RL

nsignals

M Shadowing Ec Io

1
= 1 ---------2

2
xL
--------2

nsignals

M Shadowing Ec Io x L Ec I o
- x
Q -------------------------------------------------------------------------- Ec I o 1

i=2

nsignals

M Shadowing Ec Io 1 x L Ec I o
Q ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- dx L
Ec I o 1

1 =1dB
2

1 =5dB
2

1 =10dB

Figure 2.22:MarginProbability(Caseof2Signals)

98

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

AT321_TRR_E1

2signals
3

1 =5dB
3

1 =10dB

Figure 2.23:MarginProbability(Caseof3Signalswithsigma=8dB,delta1=1dB)

2signals
3

1 =5dB
3

1 =10dB

Figure 2.24:MarginProbability(Caseof3Signalswithsigma=8dB,delta1=2dB)
CorrelationCoefficientDetermination
Forfurtherinformationaboutdeterminationofthecorrelationcoefficient,pleasesee"CorrelationCoefficientDetermination"
onpage 99.

2.14.2.2.2

DownlinkMacroDiversityGain
DL

Atolldeterminesthedownlinkmacrodiversitygain( G macro diversity )fromtheshadowingmarginscalculatedincaseofone

signalandnsignals.
Therefore,wehave:
DL

nsignals

G macro diversity = M Shadowing Ec Io M Shadowing Ec Io

Wherenisthenumberofavailablesignals.

2.15 PathLossMatrices
Atollisabletocalculatetwopathlossmatricespertransmitter,afirstmatrixoverasmallerradiuscomputedwithahigh
resolutionandapropagationmodel(mainmatrix),andasecondmatrixoveralargerradiuscomputedwithalowresolution
andanotherpropagationmodel(extendedmatrix).
Tobeconsideredforcalculations,atransmittermustfulfilthefollowingconditions:

Itmustbeactive,
ItmustsatisfyfiltercriteriadefinedintheTransmittersfolder,and
Itmusthaveacalculationarea.

Intherestofthedocument,atransmitterfulfillingtheconditionsdetailedabovewillbecalledTBCtransmitter.
ThepathlossmatrixsizeofaTBCtransmitterdependsonitscalculationarea.Atolldeterminesapathlossvalue( L path )on
eachcalculationbin(calculationbinisdefinedbytheresolution)ofthecalculationareaoftheTBCtransmitter.Youmayhave
oneortwopathlossmatricesperTBCtransmitter.

99

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

Forsk2014

2.15.1 CalculationAreaDetermination
Transmitter calculation area is made of a rectangle or a square depending on transmitter calculation radius and the
computationzone.
CalculationradiusenablesAtolltodefineasquarearoundthetransmitter.Onesideofthesquareequalstwicetheentered
calculationradius.
Since the computation zone can be made of one or several polygons, transmitter calculation area corresponds to the
intersectionareabetweenitscalculationsquareandtherectanglecontainingthecomputationzonearea(s).

Figure 2.25:Example1:SingleCalculationArea

Figure 2.26:Example2:MultipleCalculationAreas
Computationzone
Rectanglecontainingthecomputationzone(s)
Calculationareadefined(square)

Transmitter
ActualcalculationareaonwhichAtollcalculatespathlosses

2.15.2 ValidityofPathLossMatrices
Most geographic data modifications and some radio data changes make path loss matrices invalid. This table lists these
modificationsandalsochangesthathaveanimpactonlyoncoveragepredictions.

100

Modification

Matrixvalidity

Impacton

Calculate

Forcecalculation

Frequency

Invalid

Pathloss
matrices

Sufficient

Notnecessary

Antennacoordinates
(sitecoordinate:XandY,DxandDy)

Invalid

Pathloss
matrices

Sufficient

Notnecessary

Antennaaheight

Invalid

Pathloss
matrices

Sufficient

Notnecessary

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

AT321_TRR_E1

a.
b.

Modification

Matrixvalidity

Impacton

Calculate

Forcecalculation

Antennaapattern

Invalid

Pathloss
matrices

Sufficient

Notnecessary

Downtilta

Invalid

Pathloss
matrices

Sufficient

Notnecessary

Azimutha

Invalid

Pathloss
matrices

Sufficient

Notnecessary

% Power(secondaryantennas)

Invalid

Pathloss
matrices

Sufficient

Notnecessary

Siteposition/altitude

Invalid

Pathloss
matrices

Sufficient

Notnecessary

Gridresolution(mainorextended)

Invalid

Pathloss
matrices

Sufficient

Notnecessary

Propagationmodel(mainorextended)

Invalid

Pathloss
matrices

Sufficient

Notnecessary

Propagationmodelparameters

Invalid

Pathloss
matrices

Sufficient

Notnecessary

Calculationareas
(Calculationareasgetssmaller)

Valid

Coverage
predictions

Sufficient

Notnecessary

Calculationareas
(Calculationareasgetslarger)

Invalid

Pathloss
matrices

Sufficient

Notnecessary

Receiverheight

Invalid

Pathloss
matrices

Sufficient

Notnecessary

Receiverlosses

Valid

Coverage
predictions

Sufficient

Notnecessary

Receivergain

Valid

Coverage
predictions

Sufficient

Notnecessary

Receiverantenna

Valid

Coverage
predictions

Sufficient

Notnecessary

Geographiclayerorder

Invalid

Pathloss
matrices

Insufficientb

Necessary

Geographicfileresolution

Invalid

Pathloss
matrices

Insufficientb

Necessary

NewDTMmap

Invalid

Pathloss
matrices

Insufficientb

Necessary

Clutterclassedition

Invalid

Pathloss
matrices

Insufficientb

Necessary

Coveragepredictionresolution

Valid

Coverage
predictions

Sufficient

Notnecessary

Celledgecoverageprobability

Valid

Coverage
predictions

Sufficient

Notnecessary

Coveragepredictionconditions

Valid

Coverage
predictions

Sufficient

Notnecessary

Coveragepredictiondisplayoptions

Valid

Coverage
predictions

Sufficient

Notnecessary

Modificationofanyparameterrelatedtomainorotherantennasmakesmatrixinvalid.
Exceptifthisactionhasanimpactonthesitepositions/altitudes.

2.15.3 PathLossTuning
Atollcantunepathlossmatricesobtainedfrompropagationresultsbytheuseofrealmeasurements(CWMeasurementsor
TestMobileData).Foreachmeasuredtransmitter,Atolltriestomergemeasurementsandpredictionsonthesamepoints
andtosmooththesurroundingpointsofthepathlossmatricesforhomogeneityreasons.Atransmitterpathlossmatrixcan
be tuned several times by the use of several measurement paths. All these tuning paths are stored in a catalogue. This
catalogueisstoredundera.tuningfoldercontaininga.dbffileandone.ptsfilepertunedtransmitter.Sinceatuningfilecan
containseveralmeasurementpaths,allthesemeasurementsareaddedtothetuningfile.

101

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

Forsk2014

Formoreinformationonthetuningfiles,seetheAdministratorManual.

2.15.3.1 TransmitterPathLossTuning
ThesamealgorithmisusedforCWMeasurementandTestMobileData.Itisalsothesameformainandextendedmatrices.
PathLossestuningwillbedoneusingtwosteps.
1. Totalmatrixcorrection
Ameanerroriscalculatedbetweeneachmeasuredvalueandthecorrespondingbininthepathlossmatrix.Mean
erroriscalculatedforeachpathlossmatrix(mainandextended)ofeachtransmitter.Thismeanerroristhenapplied
toallthematrixbins.Thistuningisdonetosmooththelocalcorrections(step2)ofmeasuredvaluesandnotthetuned
bins.
2. Localcorrectionforeachmeasuredvalue
Foreachmeasuredvalue,anellipseisusedtodefinethepathlossareawhichhastobetuned.Themainaxisofthe
ellipseisorientedtothetransmitter.Theellipseisuserdefinedbytwoparameters:

TheradiusoftheaxisparalleltotheProfile(A)
TheradiusoftheaxisperpendiculartotheProfile(B)

LetstakeMameasurementvalueand P i thepathlossvalueatpointi,beforeanytuning.
Mislimitedbytheminimummeasurementthresholddefinedintheinterface.

ThesquaredellipticdistancebetweeniandMisgivenby:
2

Xi XM
Yi YM
D i = ----------------------- + ----------------------2
2
A
B
Where:
X i and X M aretheXcoordinatesofiandMrespectively
Y i and Y M aretheYcoordinatesofiandMrespectively
Themeanerrorforthefirsttuningisgivenby:
1
E = ---
n

ei
i

Where e i istheerrorbetweenmeasurementandpredictionatpointi
Eislimitedbythemaximumtotalcorrectiondefinedintheinterface.

Then,thepathlossvalueistunedusingE:
Pi

new

= Pi

old

+E

Finally,asecondtuning( R i )isappliedwhere:
Ri = 1 Di M g P i

new

so R i = 1 D i M g P i

old

+ E

Where g is(measurementgainlosses).
R i islimitedbythemaximumlocalcorrectiondefinedintheinterface.

So,thefinaltunedpathlossis:
Pi

102

tuned

= Pi

new

+ R i so P i

tuned

= Pi

old

+ E + Ri

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

AT321_TRR_E1

Whenseveralellipsesoverlapapathlossbin,thefinaltunedpathlossisgivenby:

1 d j P j

tuned

j
= ------------------------------------------------

d j
n

Pi

tuned

Where n isthenumberofoverlappingellipses

2.15.3.2 RepeaterPathLossTuning
Inthecaseofrepeaters,Atollprovidesonlyacompositemeasuredvalueperpixelwhichisacombinationofthecontribution
ofbothatransmitterandoneorseveralrepeaters.Inordertotunethepathlossmatricesofdonortransmittersandrepaters,
itsismandatorytosplitthecontributionofeachelementinthemeasuredvalueasstartingpoint.
LetstakeMthemeasuredvalue.
M = Md + Mr
where:
M d representsthecontributionofthedonortransmitterinthemeasuredvalue.
M r representsthecontributionoftherepeaterinthemeasuredvalue.
AllthevaluesareusedinWatts.

If C d and C r representrespectivelythefilteredsignallevelfromthedonortransmitterandtherepeateronapixel,onecan
definethecontributionofeachelementasfollows:
Cd
Cr
and M r = M ---------------.
M d = M ---------------Cd + Cr
Cd + Cr
Followingthepathlosstuningprocessdescribedin"TransmitterPathLossTuning"onpage 102,thedonortransmitter(resp.
therepeater)isthentunedusing M d (resp. M r )values.

2.16 FileFormats
2.16.1 PathLossMatrixFileFormat
Whenpathlossmatricesarestoredexternally,i.e.,outsidetheATLfile,thepathlossmatricesfoldercontainsapathloss.dbf
filecontainingthecalculationparametersofthetransmittersandoneLOS(pathlossresults)filepercalculatedtransmitter.
ThepathlossmatricesfolderalsocontainsaLowResfolderwithanotherpathloss.dbffileandoneLOS(pathlossresults)file
pertransmitterthathasanextendedpathlossmatrix.
Theformatsofthepathloss.dbfandLOSfilesaredescribedhere.

2.16.1.1 Pathloss.dbfFileFormat
Thepathloss.dbffilehasastandardDBF(dBaseIII)format.ThefilecanbeopenedinMicrosoftAccess,butitshouldnotbe
modifiedwithoutconsultingtheForskcustomersupport.
Forgeneralinformation,theformatofDBFfilesinanyXbaselanguageisasfollows:
Notationsusedinthefollowingtables:FS=FlagShip;D3=dBaseIII+;Fb=FoxBase;D4=
dBaseIV;Fp=FoxPro;D5=dBaseV;CL=Clipper

103

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

Forsk2014

DBFStructure
Byte

Description

0...n

DBFheader(seenextpartforsize,byte8)

Remarks

n+1

1strecordoffixedlength(seenextparts);2ndrecord(seenextpartforsize,byte10);last
record

last

optional:0x1a(eofbyte)

If.dbfisnotempty

DBFHeader
TheDBFheadersizeisvariableanddependsonthefieldcount.
Byte

Size

Contents

Description

Appliesto

00

0x03

plain.dbf

FS,D3,D4,D5,Fb,Fp,CL

0x04

plain.dbf

D4,D5(FS)

0x05

plain.dbf

D5,Fp(FS)

0x43

with.dbvmemovarsize

FS

0xB3

with.dbvand.dbtmemo

FS

0x83

with.dbtmemo

FS,D3,D4,D5,Fb,Fp,CL

0x8B

with.dbtmemoinD4format

D4,D5

0x8E

withSQLtable

D4,D5

0xF5

with.fmpmemo

Fp

01

YYMMDD

Lastupdatedigits

All

04

ulong

Numberofrecordsinfile

All

08

ushort

Headersizeinbytes

All

10

ushort

Recordsizeinbytes

All

12

0,0

Reserved

All

14

0x01

Begintransaction

D4,D5

0x00

EndTransaction

D4,D5

0x00

ignored

FS,D3,Fb,Fp,CL

15

0x01

Encrypted

D4,D5

0x00

normalvisible

All

16

12

0(1)

multiuserenvironmentuse

D4,D5

28

0x01

productionindexexists

Fp,D4,D5

0x00

indexupondemand

All

29

languagedriverID

D4,D5

0x01

codepage437DOSUSA

Fp

0x02

codepage850DOSMultiling

Fp

30

32

n*32

+1

0x03

codepage1251WindowsANSI

Fp

0xC8

codepage1250WindowsEE

Fp

0x00

ignored

FS,D3,Fb,Fp,CL

0,0

reserved

All

FieldDescriptor(seenextparagraph)

all

HeaderRecordTerminator

all

0x0D

FielddescriptorarrayintheDBFheader(32bytesforeachfield):

104

Byte

Size

Contents

Description

Appliesto

11

ASCI

fieldname,0x00termin

all

11

ASCI

fieldtype(seenextparagraph)

all

12

n,n,n,n

Fldaddressinmemory

D3

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

AT321_TRR_E1

Byte

Size

Contents

Description

Appliesto

n,n,0,0

offsetfromrecordbegin

Fp

0,0,0,0

ignored

FS,D4,D5,Fb,CL

16

byte

Fieldlength,bin(seenextparagraph)

all\FS,CL:forCfieldtype

17

byte

decimalcount,bin

all/bothusedforfldlng

18

0,0

reserved

all

20

byte

WorkareaID

D4,D5

0x00

unused

FS,D3,Fb,Fp,CL

multiuserdBase

D3,D4,D5

21

n,n
0,0

ignored

FS,Fb,Fp,CL

23

0x01

SetFields

D3,D4,D5

0x00

ignored

FS,Fb,Fp,CL
all

24

0...0

reserved

31

0x01

Fieldisin.mdxindex

D4,D5

0x00

ignored

FS,D3,Fb,Fp,CL

FieldtypeandsizeintheDBFheader,fielddescriptor(1byte):
Size

Type

Description/Storage

Appliesto

C1...n

Char

ASCII(OEMcodepagechars)
rest=space,not\0term.

all

n=1...64kb(usingdecicount)

FS

n=1...32kb(usingdecicount)

Fp,CL

n=1...254

all

D8

Date

8ASCIIdigits(0...9)intheYYYYMMDDformat

all

F1...n

Numeric

ASCIIdigits(.0123456789)
variablepos.offloat.point
n=1...20

FS,D4,D5,Fp

N1...n

Numeric

ASCIIdigits(.0123456789)
fixposit/nofloat.point

all

n=1...20

FS,Fp,CL

n=1...18

D3,D4,D5,Fb

Logical

ASCIIchars(YyNnTtFfspace)

FS,D3,Fb,Fp,CL

ASCIIchars(YyNnTtFf?)

D4,D5(FS)

Memo

10digitsrepres.thestartblockposit.in.dbtfile,or10
spacesifnoentryinmemo

all

V10

Variable

Variable,bin/ascdatain.dbv
4bytesbin=startposinmemo
4bytesbin=blocksize
1byte=subtype
1byte=reserved(0x1a)
10spacesifnoentryin.dbv

FS

P10

Picture

binarydatain.ftp
structurelikeM

Fp

B10

Binary

binarydatain.dbt
structurelikeM

D5

G10

General

OLEobjects
structurelikeM

D5,Fp

22

shortint

binaryintmax+/32767

FS

44

longint

binaryintmax+/2147483647

FS

88

double

binarysigneddoubleIEEE

FS

L1

M10

EachDBFrecord(fixedlength):

105

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

Forsk2014

Byte

Size

Description

Appliesto

deletedflag"*"ornotdeleted""

All

1n

xtimescontentsoffields,fixedlength,unterminated.
Forn,see(2)byte1011

All

2.16.1.2 Pathloss.dbfFileContents
TheDBFfileprovidesinformationthatisneededtocheckvalidityofeachpathlossmatrix.
Field

Type

Description

TX_NAME

Text

Nameofthetransmitter

FILE_NAME

Text

Name(andoptionally,path)of.losfile

MODEL_NAME

Text

Nameofpropagationmodelusedtocalculatepathloss

MODEL_SIG

Text

Signature(identitynumber)ofmodelusedincalculations.Youcancheckitinthe
propagationmodelproperties(Generaltab).
TheModel_SIGisusedforthepurposeofvalidity.AuniqueModel_SIGisassignedto
eachpropagationmodel.Whenmodelparametersaremodified,theassociatedmodel
IDchanges.ThisenablesAtolltodetectpathlossmatrixinvalidity.Inthesameway,two
identicalpropagationmodelsindifferentprojectsdonothavethesamemodelIDa.

ULXMAP

Float

Xcoordinateofthetopleftcornerofthepathlossmatrixupperleftpixel

ULYMAP

Float

Ycoordinateofthetopleftcornerofthepathlossmatrixupperleftpixel

RESOLUTION

Float

Resolutionofpathlossmatrixinmetre

NROWS

Float

Numberofrowsinpathlossmatrix

NCOLS

Float

Numberofcolumnsinpathlossmatrix

FREQUENCY

Float

Frequencyband

TILT

Float

Transmitterantennamechanicaltilt

AZIMUTH

Float

Transmitterantennaazimuth

TX_HEIGHT

Float

Transmitterheightinmetre

TX_POSX

Float

Xcoordinateofthetransmitter

TX_POSY

Float

Ycoordinateofthetransmitter

ALTITUDE

Float

Groundheightabovesealevelatthetransmitterinmetre

RX_HEIGHT

Float

Receiverheightinmetre

ANTENNA_SI

Float

Logicalnumberreferringtoantennapattern.Antennaswiththesamepatternwillhave
thesamenumber.

MAX_LOS

Float

Maximumpathlossstatedin1/16dB.Thisinformationisused,whennocalculation
radiusisset,tocheckthematrixvalidity.

CAREA_XMIN

Float

Lowestxcoordinateofcentrepixellocatedonthecalculationradiusb

CAREA_XMAX

Float

Highestxcoordinateofcentrepixellocatedonthecalculationradius

CAREA_YMIN

Float

Lowestycoordinateofcentrepixellocatedonthecalculationradius

CAREA_YMAX

Float

Highestycoordinateofcentrepixellocatedonthecalculationradius

WAREA_XMIN

Float

Lowestxcoordinateofcentrepixellocatedinthecomputationzonec

WAREA_XMAX

Float

Highestxcoordinateofcentrepixellocatedinthecomputationzone

WAREA_YMIN

Float

Lowestycoordinateofcentrepixellocatedinthecomputationzone

WAREA_YMAX

Float

Highestycoordinateofcentrepixellocatedinthecomputationzone

LOCKED

Boolean

Lockingstatus
0:pathlossmatrixisnotlocked
1:pathlossmatrixislocked.

Boolean

Atollindicatesiflossesduetotheantennapatternaretakenintoaccountinthepath
lossmatrix.
0:antennalossesnottakenintoaccount
1:antennalossesincluded

INC_ANT

106

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

AT321_TRR_E1

a.

Inordertobenefitfromthecalculationsharingfeature,usersmustretrievethepropagationmodelsfromthesame
central database. This can be done using the Open from database command for a new document or the Refresh
commandforanexistingone.Otherwise,Atollgeneratesdifferentmodel_ID(evenifsameparametersareappliedon
thesamekindofmodel)andcalculationsharingbecomeunavailableduetoinconsistency.
ThesecoordinatesenableAtolltodeterminetheareaofcalculationforeachtransmitter.
ThesecoordinatesenableAtolltodeterminetherectangleincludingthecomputationzone.

b.
c.

2.16.1.3 LOSFileFormat
The LOS (path loss results) files are binary files with a standard rowcolumn structure. Data are stored starting from the
southwesttothenortheastcornerofthearea.Thefilecontains16bitsignedintegervaluesintherange[32768;+32767]
witha1/16 dBprecision."Nodata"valuesarerepresentedby+32767.

2.16.2 PathLossTuningFileFormat
AtollcantunepathlossescalculatedbypropagationmodelsusingCWmeasurementsordrivetestData.Pathlossesaretuned
bymergingmeasurementdatawithpropagationresultsonpixelscorrespondingtothemeasurementpointsandthepixelsin
thevicinity.Pathlossessurroundingthemeasurementpointsaresmoothedforhomogeneity.
Measuremmentpathsthatareusedforpathlosstuningarestoredasacatalogueinafoldercontainingapathloss.dbffileand
onePTS(pathlosstuning)filepertransmitter.Atuningfilecancontainseveralmeasurementpaths.
Formoreinformationonthepathlosstuningalgorithm,seetheTechnicalReferenceGuide.

2.16.2.1 Pathloss.dbfFileFormat
See"Pathloss.dbfFileFormat"onpage 103.

2.16.2.2 Pathloss.dbfFileContents
TheDBFfileprovidesinformationaboutthemeasuredtransmittersinvolvedinthetuning.
Field

Type

Description

TX_NAME

Text

Nameofthetransmitter

FILE_NAME

Text

Name(andoptionally,path)of.ptsfile

AREA_XMIN

Float

Notused

AREA_XMAX

Float

Notused

AREA_YMIN

Float

Notused

AREA_YMAX

Float

Notused

2.16.2.3 PTSFileFormat
ThePTS(pathlosstuning)filescontainaheaderandthelistofmeasurementpoints.
Header:

4bytes:version
4bytes:flag(canbeusedtomanageflagslikeactiveflag)
50bytes:GUID
4bytes:numberofpoints
255bytes:originalmeasurementname(withprefix"Num"fordrivetestdataand"CW"forCWmeasurements)
256bytes:comments
4bytes:X_RADIUS
4bytes:Y_RADIUS
4bytes:gain=measurementgainlosses
4bytes:globalerror
4bytes:rxheight
4bytes:frequency
8bytes:txPosition

Listofmeasurementpoints:

4bytes:X
4bytes:Y
4bytes:measurementvalue
4bytes:incidenceangle.

107

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

Forsk2014

2.16.3 InterferenceMatrixFileFormats
InterferencematricesareusedbyGSM,LTE,andWiMAXAFPs(automaticfrequencyplanningtools).Interferencematrices
canbeimportedandexportedusingthefollowingformats:

GSM:CLC,IM0,IM1,IM2
LTEandWiMAX:IM2,TXT,CSV

Interferencematrixfilesmustcontaininterferenceprobabilityvaluesbetween0and1,andnotinprecentage(between0and
100%).Wheninterferencematrixfilesareimported,Atolldoesnotchecktheirvalidityandimportsinterferenceprobability
valuesforloadedtransmittersonly.
Inthefollowingformatdescriptionsandsamples,linesstartingwiththe"#"areconsideredascomments.

InGSMinterferencematrices:

The interferer TRX type is not specified and is always considered to be BCCH.
Subcells have different powers defined as offsets with respect to the BCCH. For
subcells other than the BCCH, if the power offset of a subcell is X dB, then its
interferencehistogramwillbeshiftedbyX dBwithrespecttotheBCCHinterference
histogram.
IfnopoweroffsetisdefinedontheinterferedTRXtype,itispossibletoset"All".
For each interfered subcellinterferer subcell pair, Atoll saves probabilities for
severalC/Ivalues(6to24values),includingfivefixedones:9,1,8,14,and22 dB.
BetweentwofixedC/Ivalue,therecanbeuptothreeadditionalvalues(thisnumber
dependsontheprobabilityvariationbetweenthefixedvalues).TheC/Ivalueshave
0.5 dBaccuracyandprobabilityvaluesarecalculatedandstoredwithanaccuracyof
0.002 for probabilities between 1 and 0.05, and with an accuracy of 0.0001 for
probabilitieslowerthan0.05.

2.16.3.1 CLCFormat(OneValueperLine)
TheCLCformatuseswoASCIItextfiles:aCLCfileandaDCTfile.InterferencematricesareimportedbyselectingtheCLCfile
toimport.AtolllooksfortheassociatedDCTfileinthesamedirectoryandusesittodecodetransmitteridentifiers.IfnoDCT
fileisavailable,Atollassumesthatthetransmitteridentifiersarethetransmitternames,andthecolumns1and2oftheCLC
filemustcontainthenamesoftheinterferedandinterferingtransmittersinsteadoftheiridentificationnumbers.

2.16.3.2 CLCFileFormat
TheCLCfileconsistsoftwoparts.Thefirstpartisaheaderusedforformatidentification.Itmuststartwithandcontainthe
followinglines:
# Calculation Results Data File.
# Version 1.1, Tab separated format. Commented lines start with #.
Thesecondpartdetailsinterferencehistogramofeachinterferedsubcellinterferingsubcellpair.Thelinesaftertheheader
areconsideredascommentsiftheystartwith"#".Ifnot,theymusthavethefollowingformat:
<Column1><tab><Column2><tab><Column3><tab><Column4><tab><Column5><newline>
The5tabseparatedcolumnsaredefinedinthetablebelow:
Column

Name

Description

Column1

Interferedtransmitter

Identificationnumberoftheinterferedtransmitter.Ifthecolumnisempty,
itsvalueisidenticaltotheoneofthelineabove.

Column2

Interferingtransmitter

Identificationnumberoftheinterferertransmitter.Ifthecolumnisnull,its
valueisidenticaltotheoneofthelineabove.

Column3

InterferedTRXtype

Interferedsubcell.Ifthecolumnisnull,itsvalueisidenticaltotheoneofthe
lineabove.Inordertosavestorage,allsubcellswithnopoweroffsetarenot
duplicated(e.g.BCCH,TCH).

Column4

C/Ithreshold

C/Ivalue.Thiscolumncannotbenull.

Column5

ProbabilityC/I>Threshold

ProbabilitytohaveC/Ithevaluespecifiedincolumn4(C/Ithreshold).This
fieldmustnotbeempty.

Thecolumns1,2,and3mustbedefinedonlyinthefirstlineofeachhistogram.

108

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

AT321_TRR_E1

Sample
# Calculation Results Data File.
# Version 1.1,
# Remark:

Tab separated format. Commented lines start with #.

C/I results do not incorporate power offset values.

# Fields are:
##------------#------------#------------#-----------#------------------#
#| Interfered | Interfering| Interfered | C/I
#| Transmitter| Transmitter| Trx type

| Probability

| Threshold | C/I >= Threshold |

##------------#------------#------------#-----------#------------------#
#
# Warning, The parameter settings of this header can be wrong if
# the "export" is performed following an "import". They
# are correct when the "export" follows a "calculate".
#
# Service Zone Type is "Best signal level of the highest priority HCS layer".
# Margin is 5.
# Cell edge coverage probability 75%.
# Traffic spreading was Uniform
##---------------------------------------------------------------------#
1

TCH_INNER

8
9

a.

BCCH,TCHa

1
0.944

10

0.904

11

0.892

14

0.844

15

0.832

16

0.812

17

0.752

22

0.316

25

0.292

0.944

10

.904

13

0.872

14

0.84

17

0.772

IftheTCHandBCCHhistogramsarethesame,theyarenotrepeated.Asinglerecordindicatesthatthehistograms
belongtoTCHandBCCHboth.

2.16.3.3 DCTFileFormat
The.dctfileisdividedintotwoparts.Thefirstpartisaheaderusedforformatidentification.Itmuststartwithandcontain
thefollowinglines:
# Calculation Results Dictionary File.
# Version 1.1, Tab separated format. Commented lines start with #.
ThesecondpartprovidesinformationabouttransmitterstakenintoaccountinAFP.Thelinesaftertheheaderareconsidered
ascommentsiftheystartwith"#".Ifnot,theymusthavethefollowingformat:
<Column1><tab><Column2><newline>

109

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

Forsk2014

Column

Name

Type

Description

Column1

Transmittername

Text

Nameofthetransmitter

Column2

TransmitterIdentifier

Integer

Identificationnumberofthetransmitter

Column3

BCCHduringcalculation

Integer

BCCHusedincalculations

Column4

BSICduringcalculation

Integer

BSICusedincalculations

Column5

%ofviccoverage

Float

Percentageofoverlapofthevictimservicearea

Column6

%ofintcoverage

Float

Percentageofoverlapoftheinterfererservicearea

Thelast four columns describe the interference matrix scope. One transmitter per line is describedseparated with a tab
character.
Sample
# Calculation Results Dictionary File.
# Version 2.1,

Tab separated format. Commented lines start with #.

# Fields are:
##-----------#-----------#-----------#-----------#---------#---------#
#|Transmitter|Transmitter|BCCH during|BSIC during|% of vic'|% of int'|
#|Name

|Identifier |calculation|calculation|coverage |coverage |

##-----------#-----------#-----------#-----------#---------#---------#
#
# Warning, The parameter settings of this header can be wrong if
# the "export" is performed following an "import". They
# are correct when the "export" follows a "calculate".
#
# Service Zone Type is "Best signal level per HCS layer".
# Margin is 5.
# Cell edge coverage probability is 75%.
# Traffic spreading was Uniform (percentage of interfered area)
##---------------------------#
Site0_0

-1

-1

100

100

Site0_1

-1

-1

100

100

Site0_2

-1

-1

100

100

Site1_0

-1

-1

100

100

Site1_1

-1

-1

100

100

Site1_2

-1

-1

100

100

Site2_0

-1

-1

100

100

Site2_1

-1

-1

100

100

2.16.3.4 IM0Format(OneHistogramperLine)
Thisfilecontainsonehistogramperlineforeachinterfered/interferingsubcellpair.ThehistogramisalistofC/Ivalueswith
associatedprobabilities.
The.im0fileconsistsoftwoparts.Thefirstpartisaheaderusedforformatidentification.Itmuststartwithandcontainthe
followinglines:
# Calculation Results Data File.
# Version 1.1, Tab separated format. Commented lines start with #.
Thesecondpartdetailsinterferencehistogramofeachinterferedsubcellinterferersubcellpair.Thelinesaftertheheader
areconsideredascommentsiftheystartwith"#".Ifnot,theymusthavethefollowingformat:
<Column1><tab><Column2><tab><Column3><tab><Column4><newline>
The4tabseparatedcolumnsaredefinedinthetablebelow:

110

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

AT321_TRR_E1

Column

Name

Description

Column1

Interferedtransmitter

Nameoftheinterferedtransmitter.

Column2

Interferingtransmitter

Nameoftheinterferertransmitter.

Column3

InterferedTRXtype

Interferedsubcell.Inordertosavestorage,allsubcellswithnopoweroffset
arenotduplicated(e.g.BCCH,TCH).

Column4

C/Iprobability

C/Ivalueandtheprobabilityassociatedtothisvalueseparatedbyaspace
character.Thisentrycannotbenull.

Sample
# Calculation Results Data File.
# Version 1.1, Tab separated format. Commented lines start with #.
# Remark:

C/I results do not incorporate power offset values.

# Fields are:
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------#Transmitter

Interferer

TRX type

{C/I Probability} values

#-----------------------------------------------------------------------#
# Warning, The parameter settings of this header can be wrong if
# the "export" is performed following an "import". They
# are correct when the "export" follows a "calculate".
#
# Service Zone Type is "Best signal level of the highest priority HCS layer".
# Margin is 5.
# Cell edge coverage probability 75%.
# Traffic spreading was Uniform
##---------------------------------------------------------------------#
#
Site0_2

Site0_1

BCCH,TCH-10 1 -9 0.996 -6 0.976 -4 0.964 -1 0.936

0 0.932 1 0.924 4 0.896 7 0.864 8 0.848
9 0.832 10 0.824 11 0.804 14 0.712 17 0.66

Site0_2

Site0_3

BCCH,TCH-10 1 -9 0.996 -6 0.976 -4 0.972 -1 0.948

0 0.94 1 0.928 4 0.896 7 0.856 8 0.84
11 0.772 13 0.688 14 0.636 15 0.608 18 0.556

Site0_3

Site0_1

BCCH,TCH-10 1 -9 0.996 -6 0.98 -3 0.948 0 0.932

1 0.924 4 0.892 7 0.852 8 0.832 9 0.816
10 0.784 11 0.764 14 0.644 15 0.616 18 0.564

Site0_3

Site0_2

BCCH,TCH-9 1 -6 0.972 -3 0.964 -2 0.96 0 0.94

1 0.932 4 0.904 7 0.876 8 0.86 9 0.844
11 0.804 13 0.744 14 0.716 15 0.692 18 0.644

2.16.3.5 IM1Format(OneValueperLine,TXNameRepeated)
This file contains one C/I threshold and probability pair value per line for each interfered/interfering subcell pair. The
histogramisalistofC/Ivalueswithassociatedprobabilities.
The.im1fileconsistsoftwoparts.Thefirstpartisaheaderusedforformatidentification.Itmuststartwithandcontainthe
followinglines:
# Calculation Results Data File.
# Version 1.1, Tab separated format. Commented lines start with #.
Thesecondpartdetailsinterferencehistogramofeachinterferedsubcellinterferersubcellpair.Thelinesaftertheheader
areconsideredascommentsiftheystartwith"#".Ifnot,theymusthavethefollowingformat:

111

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

Forsk2014

<Column1><tab><Column2><tab><Column3><tab><Column4><tab><Column5><newline>
The5tabseparatedcolumnsaredefinedinthetablebelow:
Column

Name

Description

Column1

Interferedtransmitter

Nameoftheinterferedtransmitter.

Column2

Interferingtransmitter

Nameoftheinterferertransmitter.

Column3

InterferedTRXtype

Interferedsubcell.Inordertosavestorage,allsubcellswithnopoweroffset
arenotduplicated(e.g.BCCH,TCH).

Column4

C/Ithreshold

C/Ivalue.Thiscolumncannotbenull.

Column5

ProbabilityC/I>Threshold

ProbabilitytohaveC/Ithevaluespecifiedincolumn4(C/Ithreshold).This
fieldmustnotbeempty.

Sample
# Calculation Results Data File.
# Version 1.1, Tab separated format. Commented lines start with #.
# Remark:

C/I results do not incorporate power offset values.

# Fields are:
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------#Transmitter

Interferer

TRX type

C/I

Probability

#-----------------------------------------------------------------------#
# Warning, The parameter settings of this header can be wrong if
# the "export" is performed following an "import". They
# are correct when the "export" follows a "calculate".
#
# Service Zone Type is "Best signal level of the highest priority HCS layer".
# Margin is 5.
# Cell edge coverage probability 75%.
# Traffic spreading was Uniform
##---------------------------------------------------------------------#
Site0_2

Site0_1

BCCH,TCH

-10

Site0_2

Site0_1

BCCH,TCH

-9

0.996

Site0_2

Site0_1

BCCH,TCH

-6

0.976

Site0_2

Site0_1

BCCH,TCH

-4

0.964

Site0_2

Site0_1

BCCH,TCH

-1

0.936

Site0_2

Site0_1

BCCH,TCH

0.932

Site0_2

Site0_1

BCCH,TCH

0.924

Site0_2

Site0_1

BCCH,TCH

0.896

Site0_2

Site0_1

BCCH,TCH

0.864

Site0_2

Site0_1

BCCH,TCH

0.848

Site0_2

Site0_1

BCCH,TCH

0.832

Site0_2

Site0_1

BCCH,TCH

10

0.824

...

2.16.3.6 IM2Format(CoandAdjacentchannelProbabilities)
IM2 files contain cochannel and adjacentchannel interference probabilities for each interfered transmitter interfering
transmitterpair.InGSM,thereisonlyonesetofvaluesforallthesubcellsoftheinterferedtransmitter.Eachlinemusthave
thefollowingformat:
<Column1><SEP><Column2><SEP><Column3><SEP><Column4><newline>

112

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

AT321_TRR_E1

Wheretheseparator(<SEP>)caneitherbeataborasemicolon.
Thefourcolumnsaredefinedinthetablebelow:
Column

Name

Description

Column1

Interferedtransmitter

Nameoftheinterferedtransmitter

Column2

Interferingtransmitter

Nameoftheinterferertransmitter

Column3

Cochannelprobability

Cochannelinterferenceprobability

Column4

Adjacentchannelprobability

Adjacentchannelinterferenceprobability

Sample
# Calculation Results Data File.
# Version 1.1, Tab separated format. Commented lines start with #.
# Remark:

C/I results do not incorporate power offset values.

# Fields are:
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------#Transmitter

Interferer

Co-channel

Adjacent channel

#-----------------------------------------------------------------------#
# Warning, The parameter settings of this header can be wrong if
# the "export" is performed following an "import". They
# are correct when the "export" follows a "calculate".
#
# Service Zone Type is "Best signal level of the highest priority HCS layer".
# Margin is 5.
# Cell edge coverage probability 75%.
# Traffic spreading was Uniform
##---------------------------------------------------------------------#
Site0_2

Site0_1

0.226667

0.024

Site0_2

Site0_3

0.27

0.024

Site0_3

Site0_1

0.276

0.02

Site0_3

Site0_2

0.226

0.028

Thecolumnsinthesampleaboveareseparatedwithatab.Thesecolumnscanalsobeseparatedwithasemilcolon:
Site0_2;Site0_1;0.226667;0.024
Site0_2;Site0_3;0.27;0.024
Site0_3;Site0_1;0.276;0.02
Site0_3;Site0_2;0.226;0.028

2.16.4 "PerTransmitter"PredictionFileFormat
Whenacoveragepredictioniscalculatedbyvalueintervalsitisstoredexternally,i.e.,outsidetheATLfile.Acorresponding
<doc_name>\{<GUID>}folderisactuallycreatedwheretheATLdocumentislocated,assoonasthelatterissaved.
Thecalculationofthecoveragepredictioniseitherglobalor"pertransmitter".

Whenthecalculationisglobal,theresultsarestoredintwofilesfortheentireprediction:oneHDRfileandoneBIL
file(bothidentifiedbythepredictionname).

Whenacalculationis"pertransmitter",oneHDRfileandoneBILfilearecreatedforeachtransmitterintheprediction
(bothidentifiedbythetransmittersname).Insome"pertransmitter"predictions,anadditionalDBFfileiscreatedfor
theentireprediction(identifiedbythepredictionname).TheDBFfilecontainsinformationoneachtransmitteranda
pointertoeachtransmittersspecificHDRandBILfiles.
InLTE,whenaCellIdentifierCollisionZones(DL)predictioniscalculatedbyvalueintervalswiththedisplaytypeset
"No.ofinterfererspercell",theHDRfileandtheBILfilearecreatedforeachcellintheprediction(bothidentifiedby
thecellsname).

113

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

Forsk2014

TheformatandthecontentoftheDBFfileisdescribedhere.
Inbothcases,anXMLfiledescribingthepredictionisalsocreatedinthecorresponding
<doc_name>\{<GUID>}folder.

2.16.4.1 <per_transmitter_prediction>.dbfFileFormat
Theformatof<per_transmitter_prediction>.dbffilesisidenticaltotheformatdescribedin"Pathloss.dbfFileFormat"on
page 103.

2.16.4.2 <per_transmitter_prediction>.dbfFileContents
The<per_transmitter_prediction>.dbffilesgeneratedinspecific{<GUID>}foldersprovideinformationthatisneededto
checkthevalidityofeach"pertransmitter"prediction>calculatedbyvalueintervals.
Field

Type

Description

TX_NAME

Text

Nameofthetransmitter

FILE_NAME

Text

NameofthetransmittersBILresultfile

RESOLUTION

Float

Resolutionofthecalculation,sameasxdimandydimintheHDRfile

AREA_XMIN

Float

SameasulxmapintheHDRfile

AREA_XMAX

Float

Sameasulxmap+xdim*ncolsintheHDRfile

AREA_YMIN

Float

SameasulymapintheHDRfile

AREA_YMAX

Float

Sameasulymap+ydim*nrowsintheHDRfile

NBITS

Float

SameasnbitsintheHDRfile

NBANDS

Float

SameasnbandsintheHDRfile

BYTE_ORDER

Float

SameasbyteorderintheHDRfile

BAND_ROW_BYTES

Float

SameasbandrowbytesintheHDRfile

TOTAL_ROW_BYTES

Float

SameastotalrowbytesintheHDRfile

SKIP_BYTES

Float

SameasskipbytesintheHDRfile

DATA_TYPE

Text

SameasdatatypeintheHDRfile

NO_DATA_VALUE

SameasnodatavalueintheHDRfile

2.16.5 CoveragePredictionExportandReports
2.16.5.1 FilteringCoveragePredictionsatExport
Rasterandvectorcoveragepredictionscanbefilteredatexportinordertoexcludeholesandislands.Predictionsarefiltered
bysettingthecolourofapixeltothedominantcolouroftheboundingbox,i.e.,surroundingpixels,usingadispersionfactor:
2

exp D X 2 .
Here, D isthedistancefromthepixeltobecolouredtoeachpixelwithintheboundingboxand X isthevalueatthatpixel.
Inotherwords,thepixelwillbecolouredbythemostrepresentativevaluewithinthisboundingbox.

114

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

AT321_TRR_E1

Figure 2.27:Boundingboxforpredictionfiltering
Theuserdefinedfilteringpercentage Y givesthesizeoftheboundingbox: Y 10 pixelsineachdirection.Inotherwords,the
boundingboxisincreasedbyonepixelevery10 %(sinceYisdefinedasapercentage).

2.16.5.2 SmoothingCoveragePredictionsatExport
Vectorcoveragepredictionscanbesmoothedatexportinorertosimplifyitscontours.Predictionsaresmoothedbyreducing
thenumberofpointsdefiningthecontoursofthepolygonsusingavertexreductionroutinethatsuccessivelyreducesthe
number of closely clustered vertices (vertex reduction within tolerance of prior vertex cluster, DouglasPeucher polyline
simplification).
Twosmoothingmethodsexistfordefiningthedegreeofcoveragesmoothing:smoothingbypercentageandsmoothingby
themaximumnumberofpoints.
SmoothingbyPercentage
2
Z
Theuserdefinedsmoothingpercentage Z givestheapproximationtolerance: ------- R ------ ,where R istheuserdefined
2
20
exportresolution.ToleranceistheintervalwithinwhichAtolltriestoreducethenumberofpoints.

Figure 2.28:SmoothingToleranceDefinition
Forexample,forthreesuccessivepoints,A1,A2,andA3asshowninFigure 2.29onpage 115,A2willbedeletedifwithinthis
tolerance(andA1andA3willbedirectlylinked)andA2willbeconservedifoutsidethistolerance.

A2outsidethetoleranceinterval

A2insidethetoleranceinterval

Figure 2.29:SmoothingbyPercentage

115

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

Forsk2014

SmoothingbyNumberofPoints
Thesecondmethodconsistsindefiningamaximumnumberofpointstobedeleted.Thisnumberofpointshelpsthealgorithm
todeterminetheoptimisedtolerance(see"SmoothingbyPercentage"onpage 115)suchthat,withthisobtainedtolerance,
thenumberofpointstobedeletedwillbelowerthanthisvalue.
Letsconsiderthefollowingexample( 1 ).Startingfromthemaximumpossibletolerance,thenumberofpointstobefiltered
outareestimated(circledinredinthefollowingexample( 2 )).Ifthisnumberisgreaterthanthemaximumnumberofpoints
definedbytheuser,Atollreducesthetoleranceuntilreachingtherequestedmaximumnumberofpointsorless( 3 ).The
firstthenumberofpointsrespectingtheconstraintisobtained,smoothingisappliedbydeletingthesepointsandlinkingthe
remainingclosestpoints( 4 ).
1

Figure 2.30:SmoothingbyNumberofPoints

2.16.5.3 ExamplesofPredictionExportFilteringandSmoothing
Figure 2.31onpage 117showstheoriginalsignallevelcoveragepredictionwhosefilteredandsmoothedexportedresultsare
presentedinFigure 2.32onpage 117.

116

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

AT321_TRR_E1

Figure 2.31:Boundingboxforpredictionfiltering

FilteringPercentage:0 %
SmoothingPercentage:0 %

FilteringPercentage:0 %
SmoothingPercentage:100 %

FilteringPercentage:100 %
SmoothingPercentage:0 %

FilteringPercentage:100 %
SmoothingPercentage:100 %

Figure 2.32:Exportedpredictionwithfilteringandsmoothing

2.16.5.4 CoveragePredictionReportsOverFocus/ComputationZones
Statisticsarecalculatedincoveragepredictionreportsoverthefocuszoneorthecomputationzone,ifnofocuszoneexists,
orthecoveredarea,ifneitherzoneexists.
Ifthereferencesurfaceareaforthestatisticsisbasedonafocusorcomputationzone,theremaybeminuteinaccuraciesin
thecalculatedstatisticsbecauseofthedifferenceinthesurfaceareacalculationmethods:

Thesurfaceareasofthezones(polygons)arecalculatedbytriangulation.
Thesurfaceareaofacoveragepredictionsiscalculatedbycountingthenumberofcoveredpixelsandmultiplyingthis
numberwiththeareaofonepixel,calculatedfromresolutionofthecoverageprediction.

Attheborderofthefocusorcomputationzone,apixelisconsideredinsidethezoneifitscentreisinside.Otherwise,thepixel
isconsideredoutsidethezone.Thisestimationmaygiverisetoinaccuracies.

117

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter2:RadioPropagation

118

Forsk2014

Chapter3
GSMGPRSEDGE
Networks
ThischapterdescribesGSMGPRSEDGEcalculations.

Inthischapter,thefollowingareexplained:

"DLSignalLevel"onpage 121

"Interferencebased
page 127

"GPRS/EDGECalculations"onpage 132

"CodecModeSelectionandCQICalculations"on
page 141

"TrafficAnalysis"onpage 155

"NetworkDimensioning"onpage 167

"Key Performance Indicators Calculation" on

page 177

"Radio Resource Management in GSM" on

page 180

"AFPAppendices"onpage 192

DL

Calculations"

on

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

3 GSMGPRSEDGENetworks
ThischapterdescribesallthecalculationsperformedinAtollGSM/GPRS/EDGEdocuments.Thefirstfoursectionsdescribethe
signallevel,interference,GPRS/EDGEspecific,andCQIcalculations,respectively.Thefollowingthreesectionsexplainthe
traffic analysis, network dimensioning, and KPI calculation processes. The last section describes the neighbour allocation
processinGSM.

All the calculations are performed on TBC (to be calculated) transmitters. For the
definitionofTBCtransmitterspleasereferto"PathLossMatrices"onpage 99.
Logarithmsusedinthischapter(Logfunction)arebase10unlessstatedotherwise.

3.1 SignalLevelCalculation
3.1.1 DLSignalLevel
Threeparameterscanbestudiedinpointanalysis(Profiletab)andinsignallevelbasedcoveragepredictions:
StudiedParameter

Formulas
SignallevelreceivedfromatransmitteronaTRXtype

Txi
DLSignallevel( P rec

Txi

Txi

P rec tt = EIRP tt P tt L path M Shadowing model L Indoor + G ant

Txi

L Term

Txi

Txi

L path = L model + L ant

Pathloss( L path )
DLTotallosses( L total )

Term

Txi

Tx

Txi

L total = L path + M Shadowing model + L Indoor + L Tx DL + L Term G ant + G ant

Tx

Term

Here,

EIRPistheeffectiveisotropicradiatedpowerofthetransmitter,
L model isthelossonthetransmitterterminalpath(pathloss)calculatedbythepropagationmodel,

L ant isthetransmitterantennaattenuation(fromantennapatterns),
Tx

M Shadowing model istheshadowingmargin.ThisparameteristakenintoaccountwhentheoptionShadowingtaken

intoaccountisselected,
L Indoor aretheindoorlosses,takenintoaccountwhentheoptionIndoorcoverageisselected,

L Term aretheterminallosses,

L Tx DL arethetotaltransmitterDLlosses,

G ant

PisthepoweroffsetdefinedfortheselectedTRXtypeinthetransmitterpropertydialogue,
ttistheTRXtype(intheGSMGPRSEDGE.mdbdocumenttemplate,therearethreepossibleTRXtypes,BCCH,TCHand
innerTCH).

Term

istheterminalantennagain,

3.1.2 ULSignalLevel
TwoparameterscanbestudiedinULsignallevelbasedcoveragepredictions:
StudiedParameter

Formulas
Signallevelreceivedfromaterminalatatransmitter

Term

ULSignallevel( P rec )

Term

ULTotallosses( L total )

Term
P rec

Term

max
P Term

Txi

+ G ant L path M Shadowing model L Indoor + G ant

Tx

Term

L Tx UL L Term

Txi

L total = L path + M Shadowing model + L Indoor + L Tx UL + L Term G ant + G ant

Tx

Term

Here,

max

P Term isthemaximumterminalallowedpower,

121

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

Forsk2014

Txi

L path isthepathlossonthetransmitterterminallink,identicalinDLandinUL(seeabove),

M Shadowing model istheshadowingmargin.ThisparameteristakenintoaccountwhentheoptionShadowingtaken

intoaccountisselected,
L Indoor aretheindoorlosses,takenintoaccountwhentheoptionIndoorcoverageisselected,

L Term aretheterminallosses,

L Tx UL arethetotaltransmitterULlosses,

G ant isthetransmitterantennagain,

G ant

Tx

Term

istheterminalantennagain.

3.1.3 PointAnalysis
3.1.3.1 ProfileTab
Txi

Txi

Foraselectedtransmitter,itispossibletodisplaythesignallevelreceivedfromaTRXtype( P rec tt ),thepathloss, L path ,

Txi

ortheDLtotallosses, L total DL .PathlossandDLtotallossesarethesameforallTRXtypes.

Ifthepowerreductionvaluesdefinedforallthesubcellsarethesame,thereceivedsignallevelfromtheselectedtransmitter
willbethesameforallTRXtypes.

3.1.3.2 ReceptionTab
AnalysisprovidedintheReceptiontabisbasedonpathlossmatrices.Therefore,itispossibletodisplaythesignallevels
receivedfromTBCtransmittersforwhichpathlossmatriceshavebeencalculatedovertheircalculationareas.
Txi

Txi

Foreachtransmitter,AtollcandisplaythesignallevelreceivedfromaTRXtype( P rec tt ),thepathloss, L path ,orthetotal

Txi

losses, L total DL .PathlossandtotallossesarethesameforallTRXtypes.

Ifthepowerreductionvaluesdefinedforallthesubcellsarethesame,thereceivedsignallevelfromtheselectedtransmitter
willbethesameforallTRXtypes.
Receptionlevelbarsaredisplayedintheorderofdecreasingsignallevel.Thenumberofdisplayedbarsdependsonthesignal
levelreceivedfromthebestserver.Barsareonlydisplayedfortransmitterswhosesignalleveliswithina30 dBmarginfrom
thebestserversignallevel.
Youcanuseavalueotherthan30 dBforthemarginfromthebestserversignallevel,for
exampleasmallervalueforimprovingthecalculationspeed.Formoreinformationon
definingadifferentvalueforthismargin,seetheAdministratorManual.

3.1.4 SignalLevelbasedDLCoveragePredictions
ForeachTBCtransmitter,Txi,AtollcalculatestheselectedparameteroneachpixelinsidetheTxicalculationarea.Inother
words,eachpixelinsidetheTxicalculationareaisconsideredaprobe(noninterfering)receiver.
Coveragepredictionparameterstobesetare:

ThecoverageconditionsinordertodeterminetheserviceareaofeachTBCtransmitter,and
Thedisplaysettingstoselectthedisplayedparameteranditsshadinglevels.

3.1.4.1 DLServiceAreaDetermination
AtollusesparametersenteredintheConditiontabofthecoveragepredictionpropertiesdialoguetodeterminetheareas
coveragewillbedisplayed.
Wecandistinguisheightcasesasbelow.Letusassumethat:

3.1.4.1.1

Eachtransmitter,Txi,belongstoaHierarchicalCellStructure(HCS)layer,k, withadefinedpriorityandadefined
receptionthreshold.
Nomaxrangeisset.

AllServers
TheserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothepixels:

122

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
Txi

MinimumThreshold P rec tt MaximumThreshold

Txi

Forpuresignallevelbasedcalculations(notC/IorC/(I+N)), P rec tt canbereplaced

Txi

Txi

with L total DL or L path .

3.1.4.1.2

BestSignalLevelandaMargin
TheserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothepixels:
Txi

MinimumThreshold P rec tt MaximumThreshold

Txi

Forpuresignallevelbasedcalculations(notC/IorC/(I+N)), P rec tt canbereplaced

Txi

Txi

with L total DL or L path .

Txi
Txj
And P rec tt Best P rec tt M
ji

Misthespecifiedmargin(dB).TheBestfunctionconsidersthehighestvaluefromalistofvalues.

3.1.4.1.3

IfM=0 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiisthehighest.
IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiiseitherthehighestorwithina2 dBmarginfrom
thehighest.
If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitterswhichare2ndbestservers.

SecondBestSignalLevelandaMargin
TheserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothepixels:
Txi

MinimumThreshold P rec tt MaximumThreshold

Txi

Forpuresignallevelbasedcalculations(notC/IorC/(I+N)), P rec tt canbereplaced

Txi

Txi

with L total DL or L path .

nd

Txi
Txj
And P rec tt 2 Best P rec tt M
ji

Misthespecifiedmargin(dB).The2ndBestfunctionconsidersthesecondhighestvaluefromalistofvalues.

3.1.4.1.4

IfM=0 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiisthesecondhighest.
IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiiseitherthesecondhighestorwithina2 dBmargin
fromthesecondhighest.
If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitterswhichare3rdbestservers.

BestSignalLevelperHCSLayerandaMargin
ForeachHCSlayer,k,theserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothepixels:
Txi

MinimumThreshold P rec tt MaximumThreshold

Txi

Forpuresignallevelbasedcalculations(notC/IorC/(I+N)), P rec tt canbereplaced

Txi

Txi

with L total DL or L path .

Txi
Txj
And P rec BCCH Best P rec BCCH M
ji

123

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

Forsk2014

Misthespecifiedmargin(dB).TheBestfunctionconsidersthehighestvaluefromalistofvalues.

3.1.4.1.5

IfM=0 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiisthehighest.
IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiiseitherthehighestorwithina2 dBmarginfrom
thehighest.
If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitterswhichare2ndbestservers.

SecondBestSignalLevelperHCSLayerandaMargin
ForeachHCSlayer,k,theserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothepixels:
Txi

MinimumThreshold P rec tt MaximumThreshold

Txi

Forpuresignallevelbasedcalculations(notC/IorC/(I+N)), P rec tt canbereplaced

Txi

Txi

with L total DL or L path .

nd

Txi
Txj
And P rec BCCH 2 Best P rec BCCH M
ji

Misthespecifiedmargin(dB).The2ndBestfunctionconsidersthesecondhighestvaluefromalistofvalues.

3.1.4.1.6

IfM=0 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiisthesecondhighest.
IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiiseitherthesecondhighestorwithina2 dBmargin
fromthesecondhighest.
If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitterswhichare3rdbestservers.

HCSServersandaMargin
TheserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothepixels:
Txi

MinimumThreshold P rec tt MaximumThreshold

Txi

Forpuresignallevelbasedcalculations(notC/IorC/(I+N)), P rec tt canbereplaced

Txi

Txi

with L total DL or L path .

Txi
Txj
And P rec BCCH Best P rec BCCH M
ji
Txi

Andthereceived P rec tt exceedsthereceptionthresholddefinedperHCSlayer.

Misthespecifiedmargin(dB).TheBestfunctionconsidersthehighestvaluefromalistofvalues.

3.1.4.1.7

IfM=0 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiisthehighest.
IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiiseitherthehighestorwithina2 dBmarginfrom
thehighest.
If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitterswhichare2ndbestservers.

HighestPriorityHCSServerandaMargin
TheserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothepixels:
Txi

MinimumThreshold P rec tt MaximumThreshold

Txi

Forpuresignallevelbasedcalculations(notC/IorC/(I+N)), P rec tt canbereplaced

Txi

Txi

with L total DL or L path .

124

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Txi
Txj
And P rec BCCH Best P rec BCCH M
ji

AndTxibelongstotheHCSlayerwiththehighestpriority.Thehighestpriorityisdefinedbythepriorityfield(0:lowest).
Txi

Andthereceived P rec tt exceedsthereceptionthresholddefinedperHCSlayer.

Inthecasetwolayershavethesamepriority,thetrafficisservedbythetransmitterfor
whichthedifferencebetweenthereceivedsignalstrengthandtheHCSthresholdisthe
highest.Thewaythecompetitionismanagedbetweenlayerswiththesameprioritycan
bemodified.Formoreinformation,seetheAdministratorManual.
Misthespecifiedmargin(dB).TheBestfunctionconsidersthehighestvaluefromalistofvalues.

3.1.4.1.8

IfM=0 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiisthehighest.
IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiiseitherthehighestorwithina2 dBmarginfrom
thehighest.
If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitterswhichare2ndbestservers.

BestIdleModeReselectionCriterion(C2)
Suchtypeofcoverageisuseful:

Tocompareidleanddedicatedmodebestserversforvoicetraffic
DisplaytheGPRS/EDGEbestservermap(basedonGSMidlemode)

ThepathlosscriterionC1usedforcellselectionandreselectionisdefinedby:
Txi

C1 = P rec BCCH MinimumThreshold BCCH

Thepathlosscriterion(GSM03.22)issatisfiedif C1 0 .
ThereselectioncriterionC2isusedforcellreselectiononlyandisdefinedby:
C2 = C1 + CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET
CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET istheCellReselectOffsetdefinedforthetransmitter.
TheserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothepixels:
Txi

MinimumThreshold P rec BCCH MaximumThreshold

Txi

Forpuresignallevelbasedcalculations(notC/IorC/(I+N)), P rec tt canbereplaced

Txi

Txi

with L total DL or L path .

And C2

Txi

Txj
BCCH = Best C2 BCCH
j

TheBestfunctionconsidersthehighestvaluefromalistofvalues.
Oneachpixel,thetransmitterwiththehighestC2valueiskept.Itcorrespondstothebestserverinidlemode.C2isdefined
asanintegerinthe3GPPspecifications,therefore,theC2valuesintheabovecalculationsareroundeddowntothenearest
integer.

3.1.4.2 CoverageDisplay
3.1.4.2.1

CoverageResolution
Theresolutionofthecoveragepredictiondoesnotdependontheresolutionsofthepathlossmatricesorthegeographicdata
andcanbedefinedseparatelyforeachcoverageprediction.Coveragepredictionsaregeneratedusingabilinearinterpolation
methodfrommultiresolutionpathlossmatrices(similartotheoneusedtocalculatesitealtitudes,see"PathLossCalculation
Prerequisites"onpage 53formoreinformation).

3.1.4.2.2

DisplayTypes
Itispossibletodisplaythecoveragepredictionswithcoloursdependingonanytransmitterattributeorothercriteriasuchas:

125

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

Forsk2014

SignalLevel(indBm,dBV,dBV/m)
Atollcalculatessignallevelreceivedfromthetransmitteroneachpixelofeachtransmitterservicearea.Apixelofaservice
areaiscolouredifthesignallevelisgreaterthanorequaltothedefinedminimumthresholds(pixelcolourdependsonsignal
level).Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.Thereareasmany
layersastransmitterserviceareas.Eachlayershowsthedifferentsignallevelsavailableinthetransmitterservicearea.
BestSignalLevel(indBm,dBV,dBV/m)
Atollcalculatessignallevelsreceivedfromtransmittersoneachpixelofeachtransmitterservicearea.Whenotherservice
areasoverlapthestudiedone,Atollchoosesthehighestvalue.Apixelofaserviceareaiscolouredifthesignallevelisgreater
than or equal to the defined thresholds (the pixel colour depends on the signal level). Coverage consists of several
independentlayerswhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.Thereareasmanylayersasdefinedthresholds.Each
layercorrespondstoanareathesignallevelfromthebestserverexceedsadefinedminimumthreshold.
PathLoss(dB)
Atoll calculates pathloss fromthe transmitteron each pixel of each transmitter service area.A pixel of a service area is
colouredifpathlossisgreaterthanorequaltothedefinedminimumthresholds(pixelcolourdependsonpathloss).Coverage
consistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.Thereareasmanylayersasservice
areas.Eachlayershowsthedifferentpathlosslevelsinthetransmitterservicearea.
TotalLosses(dB)
AtollcalculatesDLtotallossesfromthetransmitteroneachpixelofeachtransmitterservicearea.Apixelofaserviceareais
colourediftotallossesisgreaterthanorequaltothedefinedminimumthresholds(pixelcolourdependsontotallosses).
Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.Thereareasmanylayers
asserviceareas.Eachlayershowsthedifferenttotallosseslevelsinthetransmitterservicearea.
BestServerPathLoss(dB)
Atollcalculatessignallevelsreceivedfromtransmittersoneachpixelofeachtransmitterservicearea.Whenotherservice
areasoverlapthestudiedone,Atolldeterminesthebesttransmitterandevaluatespathlossfromthebesttransmitter.Apixel
ofaserviceareaiscolouredifthepathlossisgreaterthanorequaltothedefinedthresholds(pixelcolourdependsonpath
loss).Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.Thereareasmany
layersasdefinedthresholds.Eachlayercorrespondstoanareathepathlossfromthebestserverexceedsadefinedminimum
threshold.
BestServerTotalLosses(dB)
Atollcalculatessignallevelsreceivedfromtransmittersoneachpixelofeachtransmitterservicearea.serviceareasoverlap
thestudiedone,AtolldeterminesthebesttransmitterandevaluatesDLtotallossesfromthebesttransmitter.Apixelofa
serviceareaiscolouredifthetotallossesisgreaterthanorequaltothedefinedthresholds(pixelcolourdependsontotal
losses).Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.Thereareasmany
layers as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area the total losses from the best server exceed a defined
minimumthreshold.
NumberofServers
Atollevaluateshowmanyserviceareascoverapixelinordertodeterminethenumberofservers.Thepixelcolourdepends
onthenumberofservers.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.
Thereareasmanylayersasdefinedthresholds.Eachlayercorrespondstoanareathenumberofserversisgreaterthanor
equaltoadefinedminimumthreshold.
CellEdgeCoverageProbability(%)
Oneachpixelofeachtransmitterservicearea,thecoveragecorrespondstothepixelsthesignallevelfromthistransmitter
fulfilssignalconditionsdefinedinConditionstabwithdifferentcelledgecoverageprobabilities.Thereisonecoveragearea
pertransmitterintheexplorer.
BestCellEdgeCoverageProbability(%)
Oneachpixelofeachtransmitterservicearea,thecoveragecorrespondstothepixelsthebestsignallevelreceivedfulfils
signalconditionsdefinedinConditionstab.Thereisonecoverageareapercelledgecoverageprobabilityintheexplorer.
BestC2(dBm)
AtollcalculatesC2valuesreceivedfromtransmittersoneachpixelofeachtransmitterservicearea.Whenotherserviceareas
overlapthestudiedone,Atollchoosesthehighestvalue.ApixelofaserviceareaiscolourediftheC2valueisgreaterthanor

126

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

equaltothedefinedthresholds(thepixelcolourdependsontheC2value).Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayers
whosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.Thereareasmanylayersasdefinedthresholds.Eachlayercorrespondsto
anareathebestC2valueexceedsadefinedminimumthreshold.

3.2 InterferencebasedDLCalculations
Interferencebased calculations include all the calculations that involve the calculation of interference received from
interferingtransmittersinadditiontothesignallevelreceivedfromtheserver.

3.2.1 DLCarriertoInterferenceRatioCalculation
MSA(MobileStationAllocation)Definition
Inordertounderstandthedifferencebetweeneachfrequencyhoppingmodefromthepointofviewofamobile,itisinter
estingtoconsidertheMobileStationAllocation.MSAischaracterisedbythepair(Channellist,MAIO).Inthefollowing,we
willusethisnotiontocharacterisetheinterferenceandresourcessetofamobile.
Fornonhopping(NH)mode,thechannellistis1channel.Forbasebandhopping(BBH)orsynthesizedfrequencyhopping
(SFH),thechannellistcorrespondstothemobileallocationlist(MAL).
ForBBH,channelsofMALbelongtothesameTRXtype.
Examples:

Nonhopping(NH):AnMSAisthechannelassignedtoaTRXusedbyamobile.
TRXindex

Channellist

MAIO

MSA

53

(53,)

54

(54,)

Basebandhopping(BBH):AnMSAistheMobileAllocationList(MAL)andtheTRXindex.
TRXindex

Channellist

MAIO

MSA

53

([53,54,55],0)

54

([53,54,55],1)

55

([53,54,55],2)

Synthesisedfrequencyhopping(SFH):AnMSAistheMobileAllocationList(MAL)andtheMobileAllocationIndex
Offset(MAIO).
TRXindex

Channellist

MAIO

MSA

53545556

([53,54,55,56],2)

53545556

([53,54,55,56],3)

Therefore,fromthepointofviewofamobilestation,BBHandSFHworkinthesameway.AnMSAwillbeattachedtoeach
mobileconsideredduringthesimulationandthelevelofinterferencewillbeevaluatedonthisMSA.
NotationsandAssumptions
Inthefollowingdescription:

visavictimtransmitter,
MSAS(v)isthesetofMSAs(MobileStationAllocations)associatedtov,
ThenumberofMSAS(v)dependsonTRXtypestobeanalysed.YoumaystudyagivenTRXtypett(therewillbeasmany
MSA(v) as TRXs allocated to the subcell (v,tt)) or all the TRX types (the number of MSA(v) will correspond to the
numberofTRXsallocatedtov).
C v m
- for each victim
Several MSAs, m, are related to a transmitter. Therefore, Atoll calculates the DL C/I ------------- Iv m
transmittervwithMSAm(mMSAS(v)).

127

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

Forsk2014

C v m
C
- or
Atoll considers the most interfered MSA, therefore, the displayed C/I or C/(I+N) are --- = Min ------------- Iv
k Iv m
v

C -
C m -
--------------------------------=
Min
--------------------

,respectively.IftheDetailedResultscheckboxisselected,theC/Ivaluesfor
k I v m + N Term
I + N Term
tot
tot
v

allMSAsaredisplayed.

iisanypotentialinterferingtransmitter(TBCtransmitterswhosecalculationareasintersecttheserviceareaofv),
MSAS(i)isthesetofMSAsrelatedtopotentialinterferersi,
INT(v)isthesetoftransmittersthatinterferev,

C m isthecarrierpowerlevelreceivedfromvonm,

I m correspondstotheinterferencereceivedfrominterferingtransmittersionm,

M Shadowing usedintheC/IcalculationisbasedontheC/Istandarddeviation.

TheC/Ishadowingmarginisappliedonthecarrierpowerlevel.Theinterferencelevels
arenotchanged.

Calculations
Thecarrierpowerlevelisthepowerreceivedfromthevictimtransmitterattheterminal.
v

C m = P rec m
Term

IftheinterferenceconditionsarebasedonC/(I+N),Atolltakesthetotalnoise N tot intoaccount.Thetotalnoiseisthesum

of the thermal noise N thermal (121 dBm by default or userdefined), the terminal noise figure NF
v DL
technologydownlinknoiserise NRinter techno log y
Term

N tot

= N thermal + NF

Term

Term

, and the inter

v DL

+ NR inter techno log y

Interferencecanbereceivedfrominterferingtransmittersioncochannelandadjacentchannels.Interferencemayalsobe
receivedfromthetransmittersofanothertechnology.
v

DL

Therefore, I m = I co m + I adj m + I inter techno log y G PC G Div

i

G PC istheaveragepowercontrolgaindefinedfortheinterferingtransmitteriand G Div isthediversitygaindefinedforthe

consideredsubcell.
Eachinterferencecomponentisexplainedbelow.
CoandAdjacentChannelInterference:
v

I co m istheinterferencereceivedatvonmoncochannel,givenby:

I co m =

i INT v n MSAS i
v
I adj m

v i
i
p m n P rec n T i n

co

istheinterferencereceivedatvonmonadjacentchannels,givenby:

I adj m =

i INT v n MSAS i

P rec n

v i
- T i n
p m n ---------------F
adj

Here, P rec n isthecarrierpowerlevelreceivedfromionn.

Ti(n)isoccupancyoftheMSAn:
i

T i n = L traffic n f act n
i

L traffic n isthetrafficloaddefinedfortheMSAnori.Itcanbesetto100%inthecoveragepredictionproperties.

128

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
i

f act n istheactivityfactordefinedfortheMSAnofi.Ifthesubcell(i,tt)supportsDTX,thevaluespecifiedinthe
coveragepredictionpropertiesisused.Otherwise,theactivityfactoris1.
BCCHTRXsarealwayson.Therefore,DTXandtrafficloadsdonotimpacttheinterference
i

fromBCCH.Inotherwords, f act n = 1 and L traffic n = 1 fortheBCCHTRXsofthe

interferers.
v i

p m n istheprobabilityofhavingacooradjacentchannelcollisionbetweenMSAsnandm,dependingontheused
frequencyhoppingmode.

CollisionProbabilityforNonHoppingMode:
v i

p m n = 1

CollisionProbabilityforBBHandSFHModes:
MSAmofvcanbedefinedasthepair([f1,f2,.fn],MAIO)andMSAnofiasthepair([f1,f2,.fn],MAIO)(fand
farechannels).
v

Anoccurence OCCUR f m f' n referstotheeventwhenachannelfofmencountersachannelfofnduring

hopping.Acollisionoccurswhenfandfarecooradjacentchannels:
v

Collision = OCCUR f m f' n suchthat f m f' n = 0or1

Theprobabilityofcollisionistheratioofthenumberofcollisionstothenumberofoccurences:
n collision
v i
p m n = ---------------------n occurence
Theprobibilityofcollisiondependsonthecorrelationbetweenmandn.Therecanbetwocases:
i.

MSAsmandnarecorrelated
m and n must have identical HSN and synchronisation. The number of occurrences depends on the MAL
length,MAIO,andMAIO.
Example:
Schematicviewofhoppingsequences
MSAmofv
([343739],MAIO=0)

343739

MSAnofi
([383634],MAIO=2)

383634

Here,thenumberofoccurrencesis3,thenumberofcochannelcollisionsis1,andthenumberofadjacent
channelcollisionsis1.Therefore,
v i
v i
p m n co = 1
--- and p m n adj = 1
--3
3

ii. MSAsmandnarenotcorrelated
mandndonothaveidenticalHSNandsynchronisation.Theprobabilityofcollisionisthesameforallthe
channels.
Example:
Schematicviewofhoppingsequences
MSAmofv
([343739],MAIO=0)

343739

MSAnofi
([383634],MAIO=2)

383634

Here,thenumberofoccurrencesis9,thenumberofcochannelcollisionsis1,andthenumberofadjacent
channelcollisionsis3.Therefore,

129

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

Forsk2014
v i
v i
p m n co = 1
--- and p m n adj = 1
--9
3

Diversitygain:
v

G Div isthediversitygaindefinedforthevictimsubcell.
Twotypesofdiversitymodescanbedefined.InTxDiversity,thesignalistransmittedasmanytimesthatthereare
antennas.In,thesignalissuccessivelytransmittedonthevariousantennas.
ForTxDiversitymode,thediversitygainisdefinedas:
v

Tx_Div

G Div = 3dB + G clutter

Tx_Div

G clutter istheadditionaltransmitdiversitygaindefinedfortheclutterclassonwhichislocatedm.
ForAntennaHoppingmode,thediversitygainisdefinedas:
v

Ant_Div

G Div = G clutter
Ant_Div

G clutter istheantennahoppinggaindefinedfortheclutterclassonwhichislocatedm.
IntertechnologyDownlinkInterference:
DL

I inter techno log y isthetotalintertechnologyinterferencelevelonmduetotransmittersinalinkedAtolldocument.

TheinterferencefromatransmitterTxinalinkedAtolldocumentisgivenas:
Tx

DL

I inter techno log y =

P Transmitted ic i

------------------------------------Tx
Tx
L
ICP
ni

ic i f

total

th

Tx

ic i is the i frequency used by the transmitter Tx within its list of frequencies, P Transmitted ic i is the total
Tx

Tx

transmittedTxpoweron ic i , L total arethetotallossesbetweenthetransmitterTxandtheterminal,and ICP ic f is

i

the intertechnology channel protection between the frequencies used by the transmitter Tx and the victim
transmitterv.

In case of frequency hopping, the ICP value is weighted according to the fractional
load.
In the ICP, the frequency gap is based on the defined base frequency for each
technology(e.g.,935MHzinGSM900)

3.2.2 PointAnalysis
AnalysisprovidedintheInterferencetabisbasedonpathlossmatrices.Therefore,itispossibletodisplaytheinterference
levelsreceivedfromTBCtransmittersforwhichpathlossmatriceshavebeencalculatedovertheircalculationareas.
Atolldisplaysthefollowingattheterminal:

ThecarrierpowerlevelreceivedfromthevictimtransmittervonthemostinterferedMASm,
Cochannel,adjacentchannel,orbothcoandadjacentchannelinterferencereceivedfrominterferingtransmittersi
onMASm(forfurtherinformationaboutnoisecalculation,pleaserefertoSignaltonoisecalculation:noisecalculation
part),

Interferersaresortedintheorderofdescendingcarrierpowerlevels.

NeitherDTXnortrafficloadofTRXsaretakenintoaccounttoevaluateinterference
i

levels.Therefore,wehave T i n = L traffic n f act n = 1 .

130

The C/I shadowing margin is applied on the carrier power level. The interference
levelsarenotchanged.

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

3.2.3 InterferencebasedDLCoveragePredictions
TwointerferencebasedDLcoveragepredictionsareavailable:

CoveragebyC/ILevel(DL):Providesaglobalanalysisofthenetworkquality.
AtollcalculatestheC/Ioneachpixelwithintheserviceareaofstudiedtransmitters,determinesthepixelswherethe
calculatedC/Iexceedsthedefinedminimumthreshold,andcoloursthesepixelsdependingonC/Ivalue.

InterferedZones:Showstheareasatransmitterisinterfered.
AtollcalculatestheC/Ioneachpixelwithintheserviceareaofstudiedtransmitters,determinesthepixelswherethe
calculatedC/Iislowerthanthedefinedmaximumthreshold,andcoloursthesepixelsdependingoncolourofthe
interferedtransmitter.

ForeachTBCtransmitter,Txi,AtollcalculatestheselectedparameteroneachpixelinsidetheTxicalculationarea.Inother
words,eachpixelinsidetheTxicalculationareaisconsideredaprobe(noninterfering)receiver.
Coveragepredictionparameterstobesetare:

ThecoverageconditionsinordertodeterminetheserviceareaofeachTBCtransmitter,
Theinterferenceconditionstomeetforapixeltobecovered,and
Thedisplaysettingstoselectthedisplayedparameteranditsshadinglevels.

Thethermalnoise(N=121 dBm,bydefault)isusedinthecalculationsifthecoveragepredictionisbasedonC/(I+N).This
valuecanbemodifiedbytheuser.

3.2.3.1 ServiceAreaDetermination
AtollusesparametersenteredintheConditiontabofthecoveragepredictionpropertiesdialoguetodeterminetheareas
coveragewillbedisplayed.Serviceareasaredeterminedinthesamemannerasforsignallevelbasedcoveragepredictions.
See"DLServiceAreaDetermination"onpage 122formoreinformation.

3.2.3.2 CoverageAreaDetermination
C
C
Foreachvictimtransmitterv,coverageareacorrespondstopixelswhereDL --- or ----------- isbetweenthelowerandupper
I v
I+N v
thresholdsdefinedinthecoveragepredictionproperties.
Thetwooptionsdefiningthethresholdsareexplainedbelow.

3.2.3.2.1

InterferenceConditionSatisfiedbyAtLeastOneTRX
Inthiscase,thecoverageareaofatransmitterTxicorrespondstothepixels:
C
Minimumthreshold ---
I v

TRX

C
Maximumthreshold or Minimumthreshold -----------
I+N v

Maximumthreshold
TRX

,TRXjisanyTRXbelongingtoTxi.

3.2.3.2.2

InterferenceConditionSatisfiedbyTheWorstTRX
Inthiscase,thecoverageareaofatransmitterTxicorrespondstothepixels:
C
Minimumthreshold ---
Iv

TRX j

C
Maximumthreshold or Minimumthreshold -----------
I + N v

Maximumthreshold
TRX j

,TRXjistheTRX(belongingtoTxi)withtheworstC/IorC/(I+N)atthepixel.

3.2.3.3 CoverageDisplay
3.2.3.3.1

CoverageResolution
Theresolutionofthecoveragepredictiondoesnotdependontheresolutionsofthepathlossmatricesorthegeographicdata
andcanbedefinedseparatelyforeachcoverageprediction.Coveragepredictionsaregeneratedusingabilinearinterpolation
methodfrommultiresolutionpathlossmatrices(similartotheoneusedtocalculatesitealtitudes,see"PathLossCalculation
Prerequisites"onpage 53formoreinformation).

3.2.3.3.2

DisplayTypes
Itispossibletodisplaythecoveragepredictionswithcoloursdependingonanytransmitterattributeorothercriteriasuchas:

131

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

Forsk2014

C/ILevel
EachpixelofthetransmittercoverageareaiscolouredifthecalculatedDLC/I(orC/(I+N))levelisgreaterthanorequaltothe
specifiedminimumthresholds(pixelcolourdependsonDLC/I(orC/(I+N))level).Coverageconsistsofseveralindependent
layerswhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.Thereareasmanylayersastransmittercoverageareas.Eachlayer
showsthedifferentDLC/Ilevelsavailableinthetransmittercoveragearea.
MaxC/ILevel
AtollcomparescalculatedDLC/I(orC/(I+N))levelsreceivedfromtransmittersoneachpixelofeachtransmittercoveragearea
coverageareasoverlapthestudiedoneandchoosesthehighestvalue.ApixelofacoverageareaiscolourediftheDLC/I(or
C/(I+N))levelisgreaterthanorequaltothespecifiedthresholds(thepixelcolourdependsontheDLC/I(orC/(I+N))level).
Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.Thereareasmanylayers
as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area the highest received DL C/I level exceeds a defined minimum
threshold.
MinC/ILevel
AtollcomparesDLC/I(orC/(I+N))levelsreceivedfromtransmittersoneachpixelofeachtransmittercoverageareathe
coverageareasoverlapthestudiedoneandchoosesthelowestvalue.ApixelofacoverageareaiscolourediftheDLC/I(or
C/(I+N))levelisgreaterthanorequaltothespecifiedthresholds(thepixelcolourdependsontheDLC/I(orC/(I+N))level).
Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.Thereareasmanylayers
as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area the lowest received DL C/I level exceeds a defined minimum
threshold.

3.3 GPRS/EDGECalculations
GPRS/EDGEcalculationsincludecodingschemeselectionandthroughputcalculation.Codingschemesmaybeselectedusing
ideallinkadaptationorwithoutit.Oncecodingschemeshavebeenselected,throughputscorrespondingtothesecoding
schemesarereadilydeterminedfromthelookuptables.
Thefollowing sections describethetwo categories of calculations,i.e., with andwithout ideallink adaptations.Ideallink
adaptationimpliesthattheselectedcodingschemecorrespondstothehighestavailablethroughputunderthegivenradio
conditions.
GPRS/EDGEcalculationsmaybebasedonsignallevels(C)alone,onC/I,oronC/(I+N).Forcalculatingthenoise,eitherthe
noisefiguredefinedforthecalculationsorthatoftheselectedterminaltypeisused.
DifferentGPRS/EDGEconfigurationsmaybedefinedfortransmitterandterminals.Inthiscase,Atollonlyselectsthecoding
schemesthatarecommoninthetwo,andgivesprioritytothethresholdsdefinedintheterminalconfiguration.Ifnoterminal
typeisdefinedforthecalculation,oriftheterminaltypedoesnothaveanyGPRS/EDGEconfigurationassignedtoit,Atollonly
usestheGPRS/EDGEconfigurationofthetransmitter.IfthetransmitterdoesnothaveanyGPRS/EDGEconfigurationassigned
toit,nocodingschemeselectionandthroughputcalculationiscarriedout.
Inthefollowingcalculations,weassumethat:

Txi

P rec TRX isthesignallevelreceivedfromtheselectedTRXtype(tt)oronalltheTRXsofTxioneachpixeloftheTxi

coveragearea,
Txi

P Backoff TRX isthePowerBackoffdefinedforthesubcellfor8PSK,16QAM,or32QAMmodulations,

CSisthesetofallavailablecodingschemes,
ReceptionThreshold CS arethevaluesofreceptionthresholdsforthecodingschemesavailableintheGPRS/EDGE
configuration,

-- I Threshold CS arethevaluesofC/IthresholdsforthecodingschemesavailableintheGPRS/EDGEconfiguration,
C
----------
I + N Threshold CS are the values of C/(I+N) thresholds for the coding schemes available in the GPRS/EDGE
configuration,
Theprioritiesofthecodingschemelistsareasfollows:DBS>DAS>MCS>CS.

WhenthecalculationsarebasedonC/IandC/(I+N):

132

AtollcalculatesthecarriertointerferenceratioforalltheGPRS/EDGETBCtransmittersbuttakesintoaccountallthe
TBCtransmitters(GSMandGPRS/EDGE)toevaluatetheinterference.
ThereceptionthresholdsgivenforsignallevelCareinternallyconvertedtoC/Nthresholds(Nisthethermalnoise
definedinthedocumentdatabaseat121dBmbydefault)inordertobeindexedbyC/(I+N)values.C/Ithresholdsare
alsoindexedbytheC/(I+N)value.

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

The selection of coding schemes is mainly based on the radio conditions mentionned
above. Nevertheless, you can optionally define some specific coding scheme graphs
accoding to a specific hopping mode, mobility type, frequency band and MAL. As an
example,youcanmodelthegainduetolongerMALsincodingschemeselection.
Formoreinformationoninterference(I)calculation,see"DLCarriertoInterferenceRatioCalculation"onpage 127.

3.3.1 CodingSchemeSelectionandThroughputCalculation
WithoutIdealLinkAdaptation
3.3.1.1 CalculationsBasedonC
CodingSchemeSelection
Atollselectsacodingscheme,cs,fromamongthecodingschemesavailableintheGPRS/EDGEconfiguration,suchthat:
ForeachTRXtype,tt, cs = Lowest CS

Txi
Txi

P rec TRX P Backoff TRX ReceptionThreshold CS

Theselectedcodingscheme,cs,isthecodingschemewiththelowestcodingschemenumberfromthelowestprioritycoding
schemelist.
ThroughputCalculation
Oncethecodingschemecsisselected,Atollreadsthecorrespondingthroughputvalueforthereceivedsignallevelfromthe
Throughput=f(C)graphassociatedwithcs.

3.3.1.2 CalculationsBasedonC/I
CodingSchemeSelection
AtollselectstwocodingschemesfromamongthecodingschemesavailableintheGPRS/EDGEconfiguration,suchthat:
ForeachTRXtype,tt, cs C = Lowest CS

And, cs C I

= Lowest CS

Txi
Txi

P rec TRX P Backoff TRX ReceptionThreshold CS

Txi
Txi
P
TRX P
TRX

rec
Backoff
C

------------------------------------------------------------------------- --- Threshold

I
CS
I

csCisthecodingschemedeterminedfromthesignallevel,andcsC/IisthecodingschemedeterminedfromtheC/Ilevel.Both
codingschemesarethecodingschemeswiththelowestcodingschemenumberfromthelowestprioritycodingschemelist.
The selected coding scheme, cs, is the coding scheme with the lower coding scheme number among csC and csC/I:
cs = Min cs C cs C I .
ThroughputCalculationBasedontheWorstCaseBetweenCandC/I
ForthecodingschemecsCdeterminedabove,athroughputvalue,TPC,correspondingtothesignallevelisdeterminedfrom
theTP=f(C)graph.
ForthecodingschemecsC/Ideterminedabove,athroughputvalue,TPC/I,correspondingtotheC/IisdeterminedfromtheTP
=f(C/I)graph.
TheresultingthroughputTPisthelowerofthetwovalues,TPCandTPC/I: TP = Min TP C TP C I .

3.3.1.3 CalculationsBasedonC/(I+N)
CodingSchemeSelection
AtollselectstwocodingschemesfromamongthecodingschemesavailableintheGPRS/EDGEconfiguration,suchthat:

133

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

Forsk2014

ForeachTRXtype,tt, cs C N = Lowest CS

And, cs C I + N

= Lowest CS

Txi
Txi
P
TRX P
TRX

rec
Backoff
C
------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------Threshold
I + N
CS
N

Txi
Txi
P rec TRX P Backoff TRX
C -Threshold
------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------I + N
CS
I+N

csC/NisthecodingschemedeterminedfromtheC/N,andcsC/(I+N)isthecodingschemedeterminedfromtheC/(I+N)level.
Bothcodingschemesarethecodingschemeswiththelowestcodingschemenumbersfromthelowestprioritycodingscheme
list.
The selected coding scheme, cs, is the coding scheme with the higher coding scheme number among csC/N and csC/(I+N):
cs = Max cs C N cs C I + N .
ThroughputCalculationBasedonInterpolationBetweenC/NandC/(I+N)
ForthecodingschemecsC/Ndeterminedabove,theTP=f(C)graphisinternallyconvertedtoTP=f(C/N)graph.Athroughput
value,TPC/N,correspondingtotheC/(I+N)isdeterminedfromtheTP=f(C/N)graph.
ForthecodingschemecsC/(I+N)determinedabove,theTP=f(C/I)graphisinternallyconvertedtoTP=f(C/(I+N))graph.A
throughputvalue,TPC/(I+N),correspondingtotheC/(I+N)isdeterminedfromtheTP=f(C/(I+N))graph.
The final throughput is computed by interpolating between the throughput values obtained from these two graphs. The
throughputinterpolationmethodconsistsininterpolatingTPC/NandTPC/(I+N)accordingtotherespectiveweightsofIandN
values.
TheresultingthroughputTPisgivenby: TP = TP C N + 1 TP C I + N
pN - ,pNisthethermalnoisepower(valueinWatts),andp(I+N)istheinterferences+thermalnoisepower(value
= ------------------p I + N
inWatts).

3.3.2 CodingSchemeSelectionandThroughputCalculationWith
IdealLinkAdaptation
3.3.2.1 CalculationsBasedonC
ThroughputCalculation
Forthereceivedsignallevel,andcodingschemeswhosereceptionthresholdsarelowerthanthereceivedsignallevel,Atoll
determinesthehighestthroughputfromthe TP=f C graphsavailableintheGPRS/EDGEconfiguration.
TP C = Highest TP=f C = P rec TRX P Backoff TRX CS

Txi

Txi

Txi
Txi

P rec TRX P Backoff TRX ReceptionThreshold CS

CodingSchemeSelection
Theselectedcodingscheme,cs,istheonecorrespondingtothehighestthroughputcalculatedabove.
Iftherearemorethanonecodingschemesprovidingthehighestthroughputatthepixel,theselectedcodingscheme,cs,is
theonewiththelowestcodingschemenumberfromthelowestprioritycodingschemelist.

3.3.2.2 CalculationsBasedonC/I
ThroughputCalculationBasedonWorstCaseBetweenCandC/I
Forthereceivedsignallevel,andcodingschemeswhosereceptionthresholdsarelowerthanthereceivedsignallevel,Atoll
determinesthehighestthroughputfromthe TP=f C graphsavailableintheGPRS/EDGEconfiguration.

134

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Txi
Txi
TP C = Highest TP=f C = P rec TRX P Backoff TRX CS

Txi
Txi

TRX P
TRX ReceptionThreshold
rec
Backoff
CS

ForthereceivedC/I,andcodingschemeswhoseC/IthresholdsarelowerthanthereceivedC/I,Atolldeterminesthehighest
throughputfromthe TP=f C I graphsavailableintheGPRS/EDGEconfiguration.

TP C I

Txi
Txi
P rec TRX P Backoff TRX

= Highest TP=f C I = ---------------------------------------------------------------- CS

I

Txi
Txi
P rec TRX P Backoff TRX

------------------------------------------------------------------------- --- Threshold

I
CS
I

TheresultingthroughputTPisthelowerofthetwovalues,TPCandTPC/I.
TP = Min TP C TP C I
CodingSchemeSelection
Theselectedcodingscheme,cs,istheonecorrespondingtothelowerofthetwohighestthroughputscalculatedabove.
Iftherearemorethanonecodingschemesprovidingthehighestthroughputsatthepixel,theselectedcodingscheme,cs,is
theonewiththelowestcodingschemenumberfromthelowestprioritycodingschemelist.

3.3.2.3 CalculationsBasedonC/(I+N)
ThroughputCalculationBasedonInterpolationBetweenC/NandC/(I+N)
AtollinternallyconvertstheTP=f(C)graphsintoTP=f(C/N)graphs.ForthereceivedC/(I+N),andcodingschemeswhoseC/
(I+N)thresholdsarelowerthanthereceivedC/(I+N),AtolldeterminesthehighestthroughputfromtheTP=f(C/N)graphs
availableintheGPRS/EDGEconfiguration.

TP C N

Txi
Txi
P rec TRX P Backoff TRX
C

= Highest TP=f --- = ---------------------------------------------------------------- CS

I+N
N

Txi
Txi
P rec TRX P Backoff TRX

C
------------------------------------------------------------------------- ----------- Threshold
I + N
CS
I+N

AtollinternallyconvertstheTP=f(C/I)graphsintoTP=f(C/(I+N))graphs.ForthereceivedC/(I+N),andcodingschemeswhose
C/(I+N)thresholdsare lowerthanthereceivedC/(I+N),Atolldeterminesthehighestthroughput fromtheTP=f(C/(I+N))
graphsavailableintheGPRS/EDGEconfiguration.

TP C I + N

Txi
Txi
P rec TRX P Backoff TRX
C

= Highest TP=f ----------- = ---------------------------------------------------------------- CS

I+N
I+N

Txi
Txi
P rec TRX PBackoff TRX

C
------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------Threshold
I + N
CS
I+N

The final throughput is computed by interpolating between the throughput values obtained from these two graphs. The
throughputinterpolationmethodconsistsininterpolatingTPC/NandTPC/(I+N)accordingtotherespectiveweightsofIandN
values.
TheresultingthroughputTPisgivenby: TP = TP C N + 1 TP C I + N
pN
= -------------------- ,pNisthethermalnoisepower(valueinWatts),andp(I+N)istheinterferences+thermalnoisepower(value
pI + N
inWatts).
CodingSchemeSelection
Theselectedcodingscheme,cs,istheonecorrespondingtothehigherofthetwohighestthroughputscalculatedabove.
Iftherearemorethanonecodingschemesprovidingthehighestthroughputsatthepixel,theselectedcodingscheme,cs,is
theonewiththehighestcodingschemenumberfromthehighestprioritycodingschemelist.

3.3.3 ApplicationThroughputCalculation
ApplicationthroughputiscalculatedfromtheeffectiveRLCthroughputasfollows:
SF- TP
TP Application = TP RLC MAC -------Offset
100

135

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

Forsk2014

TP RLC MAC istheeffectiveRLCthroughput,and TP Offset and SF arethethroughputoffset(kbps)andthethroughputscaling

factor(%)definedfortheselectedservice.

3.3.4 BLERCalculation
Blockerrorrateiscalculatedasfollows:
TP
--------------- If TP TP MAX
BLER = TP MAX

0 If TP TP MAX

TPisthethroughputpertimeslotcalculatedforapixelandTPMAXisthemaximumthroughputpertimeslotreadfromthe
GPRS/EDGEconfigurationusedforthecalculations.

3.3.5 GPRS/EDGECoveragePredictions
TwoGPRS/EDGEcoveragepredictionsareavailable:

CoveragebyGPRS/EDGECodingScheme:Showstheareasvariouscodingschemesareavailable.

PacketThroughputandQualityAnalysis:Showsthethroughputscorrespondingtothecodingschemesavailable.

ForeachTBCtransmitter,Txi,AtollcalculatestheselectedparameteroneachpixelinsidetheTxicalculationarea.Inother
words,eachpixelinsidetheTxicalculationareaisconsideredaprobe(noninterfering)receiver.
Coveragepredictionparameterstobesetare:

ThecoverageconditionsinordertodeterminetheserviceareaofeachTBCtransmitter,
Theinterferenceconditionstomeetforapixeltobecovered,and
Thedisplaysettingstoselectthedisplayedparameteranditsshadinglevels.

Thethermalnoise(N=121 dBm,bydefault)isusedinthecalculationsifthecoveragepredictionisbasedonC/(I+N).This
valuecanbemodifiedbytheuser.

3.3.5.1 ServiceAreaDetermination
AtollusesparametersenteredintheConditiontabofthecoveragepredictionpropertiesdialoguetodeterminetheareas
coveragewillbedisplayed.
Wecandistinguisheightcasesasbelow.Letusassumethat:

3.3.5.1.1

Eachtransmitter,Txi,belongstoaHierarchicalCellStructure(HCS)layer,k, withadefinedpriorityandadefined
receptionthreshold.
Eachtransmitter,Txi,isGPRS/EDGEcapable.
Nomaxrangeisset.

AllServers
TheserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothepixels:
Txi

SubcellReceptionThreshold P rec tt

3.3.5.1.2

BestSignalLevelandaMargin
TheserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothepixels:
Txi

SubcellReceptionThreshold P rec tt
Txi
Txj
And P rec tt Best P rec tt M
ji

Misthespecifiedmargin(dB).TheBestfunctionconsidersthehighestvaluefromalistofvalues.

136

IfM=0 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiisthehighest.
IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiiseitherthehighestorwithina2 dBmarginfrom
thehighest.
If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitterswhichare2ndbestservers.

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

3.3.5.1.3

SecondBestSignalLevelandaMargin
TheserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothepixels:
Txi

SubcellReceptionThreshold P rec tt
nd

Txi
Txj
And P rec tt 2 Best P rec tt M
ji

Misthespecifiedmargin(dB).The2ndBestfunctionconsidersthesecondhighestvaluefromalistofvalues.

3.3.5.1.4

IfM=0 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiisthesecondhighest.
IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiiseitherthesecondhighestorwithina2 dBmargin
fromthesecondhighest.
If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitterswhichare3rdbestservers.

BestSignalLevelperHCSLayerandaMargin
ForeachHCSlayer,k,theserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothepixels:
Txi

SubcellReceptionThreshold P rec tt
Txi
Txj
And P rec BCCH Best P rec BCCH M
ji

Misthespecifiedmargin(dB).TheBestfunctionconsidersthehighestvaluefromalistofvalues.

3.3.5.1.5

IfM=0 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiisthehighest.
IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiiseitherthehighestorwithina2 dBmarginfrom
thehighest.
If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitterswhichare2ndbestservers.

SecondBestSignalLevelperHCSLayerandaMargin
ForeachHCSlayer,k,theserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothepixels:
Txi

SubcellReceptionThreshold P rec tt
nd

Txi
Txj
And P rec BCCH 2 Best P rec BCCH M
ji

Misthespecifiedmargin(dB).The2ndBestfunctionconsidersthesecondhighestvaluefromalistofvalues.

3.3.5.1.6

IfM=0 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiisthesecondhighest.
IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiiseitherthesecondhighestorwithina2 dBmargin
fromthesecondhighest.
If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitterswhichare3rdbestservers.

HCSServersandaMargin
TheserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothepixels:
Txi

SubcellReceptionThreshold P rec tt
Txi
Txj
And P rec BCCH Best P rec BCCH M
ji
Txi

Andthereceived P rec tt exceedsthereceptionthresholddefinedperHCSlayer.

Misthespecifiedmargin(dB).TheBestfunctionconsidersthehighestvaluefromalistofvalues.

IfM=0 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiisthehighest.
IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiiseitherthehighestorwithina2 dBmarginfrom
thehighest.

137

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

3.3.5.1.7

Forsk2014

If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitterswhichare2ndbestservers.

HighestPriorityHCSServerandaMargin
TheserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothepixels:
Txi

SubcellReceptionThreshold P rec tt
Txi
Txj
And P rec BCCH Best P rec BCCH M
ji

AndTxibelongstotheHCSlayerwiththehighestpriority.Thehighestpriorityisdefinedbythepriorityfield(0:lowest).
Txi

Andthereceived P rec tt exceedsthereceptionthresholddefinedperHCSlayer.

Inthecasetwolayershavethesamepriority,thetrafficisservedbythetransmitterfor
whichthedifferencebetweenthereceivedsignalstrengthandtheHCSthresholdisthe
highest.Thewaythecompetitionismanagedbetweenlayerswiththesameprioritycan
bemodified.Formoreinformation,seetheAdministratorManual.
Misthespecifiedmargin(dB).TheBestfunctionconsidersthehighestvaluefromalistofvalues.

3.3.5.1.8

IfM=0 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiisthehighest.
IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiiseitherthehighestorwithina2 dBmarginfrom
thehighest.
If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitterswhichare2ndbestservers.

BestIdleModeReselectionCriterion(C2)
Suchtypeofcoverageisuseful:

Tocompareidleanddedicatedmodebestserversforvoicetraffic
DisplaytheGPRS/EDGEbestservermap(basedonGSMidlemode)

ThepathlosscriterionC1usedforcellselectionandreselectionisdefinedby:
Txi

C1 = P rec BCCH MinimumThreshold BCCH

Thepathlosscriterion(GSM03.22)issatisfiedif C1 0 .
ThereselectioncriterionC2isusedforcellreselectiononlyandisdefinedby:
C2 = C1 + CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET
CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET istheCellReselectOffsetdefinedforthetransmitter.
TheserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothepixels:
Txi

SubcellReceptionThreshold P rec BCCH

And C2

Txi

Txj
BCCH = Best C2 BCCH
j

TheBestfunctionconsidersthehighestvaluefromalistofvalues.
Oneachpixel,thetransmitterwiththehighestC2valueiskept.Itcorrespondstothebestserverinidlemode.C2isdefined
asanintegerinthe3GPPspecifications,therefore,theC2valuesintheabovecalculationsareroundeddowntothenearest
integer.

3.3.5.2 CoverageDisplay
3.3.5.2.1

CoverageResolution
Theresolutionofthecoveragepredictiondoesnotdependontheresolutionsofthepathlossmatricesorthegeographicdata
andcanbedefinedseparatelyforeachcoverageprediction.Coveragepredictionsaregeneratedusingabilinearinterpolation
methodfrommultiresolutionpathlossmatrices(similartotheoneusedtocalculatesitealtitudes,see"PathLossCalculation
Prerequisites"onpage 53formoreinformation).

138

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

3.3.5.2.2

DisplayTypes
Itispossibletodisplaythecoveragepredictionswithcoloursdependingoncriteriasuchas:
CoveragebyGPRS/EDGECodingScheme:CodingSchemes
Only the pixels with a coding scheme assigned are coloured. The pixel colour depends on the assigned coding scheme.
Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityinthemapwindowcanbemanaged.Thereareasmanylayers
astransmittercoverageareas.Eachlayershowsthecodingschemesavailableinthetransmittercoveragearea.
CoveragebyGPRS/EDGECodingScheme:MaxCodingSchemes
Oneachpixel,AtollchoosesthehighestcodingschemeavailablefromtheTRXsofdifferenttransmitterscoveringthatpixel.
Only the pixels with a coding scheme assigned are coloured. The pixel colour depends on the assigned coding scheme.
Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityinthemapwindowcanbemanaged.Thereareasmanylayers
aspossiblecodingschemes.Eachlayershowstheareasagivencodingschemecanbeused.
PacketThroughputandQualityAnalysis:EffectiveRLCThroughput/Timeslot(kbps)
ApixelofthecoverageareaiscolouredifthecalculatedeffectiveRLCthroughputpertimeslotfromanytransmittercovering
thatpixelexceedsthedefinedminimumthreshold.ThepixelcolourdependsontheeffectiveRLCthroughputpertimeslot.
Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityinthemapwindowcanbemanaged.Thereareasmanylayers
as transmitter coverage areas and throughput display thresholds. Each layer shows the effective RLC throughput that a
transmittercanprovideononetimeslot.
PacketThroughputandQualityAnalysis:MaxEffectiveRLCThroughput/Timeslot(kbps)
ApixelofthecoverageareaiscolouredifthecalculatedhighesteffectiveRLCthroughputpertimeslotfromanytransmitter
coveringthatpixelexceedsthedefinedminimumthreshold.ThepixelcolourdependsonthehighesteffectiveRLCthroughput
pertimeslot.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityinthemapwindowcanbemanaged.Thereare
asmanylayersasthroughputdisplaythresholds.EachlayershowsthebesteffectiveRLCthroughputthatanytransmittercan
provideononetimeslot.
PacketThroughputandQualityAnalysis:AverageEffectiveRLCThroughput/Timeslot(kbps)
A pixel of the coverage area is coloured if the calculated average effective RLC throughput per timeslot from all the
transmitterscoveringthatpixelexceedsthedefinedminimumthreshold.Thepixelcolourdependsontheaverageeffective
RLCthroughputpertimeslot.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityinthemapwindowcanbe
managed.Thereareasmanylayersasthroughputdisplaythresholds.EachlayershowstheaverageeffectiveRLCthroughput
thatallthetransmitterscanprovideononetimeslot.
PacketThroughputandQualityAnalysis:ApplicationThroughput/Timeslot(kbps)
Apixelofthecoverageareaiscolouredifthecalculatedapplicationthroughputpertimeslotfromanytransmittercovering
thatpixelexceedsthedefinedminimumthreshold.Thepixelcolourdependsontheapplicationthroughputpertimeslot.
Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityinthemapwindowcanbemanaged.Thereareasmanylayers
as transmitter coverage areas and throughput display thresholds. Each layer shows the application throughput that a
transmittercanprovideononetimeslot.
PacketThroughputandQualityAnalysis:BestApplicationThroughput/Timeslot(kbps)
Apixelofthecoverageareaiscolouredifthecalculatedhighestapplicationthroughputpertimeslotfromanytransmitter
coveringthatpixelexceedsthedefinedminimumthreshold.Thepixelcolourdependsonthehighestapplicationthroughput
pertimeslot.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityinthemapwindowcanbemanaged.Thereare
asmanylayersasthroughputdisplaythresholds.Eachlayershowsthebestapplicationthroughputthatanytransmittercan
provideononetimeslot.
PacketThroughputandQualityAnalysis:AverageApplicationThroughput/Timeslot(kbps)
Apixelofthecoverageareaiscolouredifthecalculatedaverageapplicationthroughputpertimeslotfromallthetransmitters
coveringthatpixelexceedsthedefinedminimumthreshold.Thepixelcolourdependsontheaverageapplicationthroughput
pertimeslot.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityinthemapwindowcanbemanaged.Thereare
as many layers as throughput display thresholds. Each layer shows the average application throughput that all the
transmitterscanprovideononetimeslot.
PacketThroughputandQualityAnalysis:EffectiveRLCThroughput(kbps)
ApixelofthecoverageareaiscolouredifthecalculatedeffectiveRLCthroughputfromanytransmittercoveringthatpixel
exceedsthedefinedminimumthreshold.ThepixelcolourdependsontheeffectiveRLCforallthetimeslotssupportedbythe

139

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

Forsk2014

selected terminal type (Number of Simultaneous Carriers x Number of DL Timeslots). The number of DL timeslots is the
minimumbetweenthenumberofDLtimeslotsdefinedintheselectedterminalandservice.Coverageconsistsofseveral
independentlayerswhosevisibilityinthemapwindowcanbemanaged.Thereareasmanylayersastransmittercoverage
areasandthroughputdisplaythresholds.Eachlayershowstheapplicationthroughputthatatransmittercanprovideonall
availabletimeslotsintheterminal.
PacketThroughputandQualityAnalysis:MaxEffectiveRLCThroughput(kbps)
ApixelofthecoverageareaiscolouredifthecalculatedhighesteffectiveRLCthroughputfromanytransmittercoveringthat
pixelexceedsthedefinedminimumthreshold.ThepixelcolourdependsonthehighesteffectiveRLCthroughputforallthe
timeslotssupportedbytheselectedterminaltype(NumberofSimultaneousCarriersxNumberofDLTimeslots).Thenumber
ofDLtimeslotsistheminimumbetweenthenumberofDLtimeslotsdefinedintheselectedterminalandservice.Coverage
consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be managed. There are as many layers as
throughputdisplaythresholds.EachlayershowsthehighesteffectiveRLCthroughputthatanytransmittercanprovideonall
availabletimeslotsintheterminal.
PacketThroughputandQualityAnalysis:AverageEffectiveRLCThroughput(kbps)
ApixelofthecoverageareaiscolouredifthecalculatedaverageeffectiveRLCthroughputfromallthetransmitterscovering
thatpixelexceedsthedefinedminimumthreshold.ThepixelcolourdependsontheaverageeffectiveRLCthroughputforall
thetimeslotssupportedbytheselectedterminaltype(NumberofSimultaneousCarriersxNumberofDLTimeslots).The
numberofDLtimeslotsistheminimumbetweenthenumberofDLtimeslotsdefinedintheselectedterminalandservice.
Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityinthemapwindowcanbemanaged.Thereareasmanylayers
asthroughputdisplaythresholds.EachlayershowstheaverageeffectiveRLCthroughputthatallthetransmitterscanprovide
onallavailabletimeslotsintheterminal.
PacketThroughputandQualityAnalysis:ApplicationThroughput(kbps)
Apixelofthecoverageareaiscolouredifthecalculatedapplicationthroughputfromanytransmittercoveringthatpixel
exceeds the defined minimum threshold. The pixel colour depends on the application throughput for all the timeslots
supportedbytheselectedterminaltype(NumberofSimultaneousCarriersxNumberofDLTimeslots).ThenumberofDL
timeslotsistheminimumbetweenthenumberofDLtimeslotsdefinedintheselectedterminalandservice.Coverageconsists
ofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityinthemapwindowcanbemanaged.Thereareasmanylayersastransmitter
coverageareasandthroughputdisplaythresholds.Eachlayershowstheapplicationthroughputthatatransmittercanprovide
onallavailabletimeslotsintheterminal.
PacketThroughputandQualityAnalysis:MaxApplicationThroughput(kbps)
Apixelofthecoverageareaiscolouredifthecalculatedhighestapplicationthroughputfromanytransmittercoveringthat
pixelexceedsthedefinedminimumthreshold.Thepixelcolourdependsonthehighestapplicationthroughputforallthe
timeslotssupportedbytheselectedterminaltype(NumberofSimultaneousCarriersxNumberofDLTimeslots).Thenumber
ofDLtimeslotsistheminimumbetweenthenumberofDLtimeslotsdefinedintheselectedterminalandservice.Coverage
consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be managed. There are as many layers as
throughputdisplaythresholds.Eachlayershowsthehighestapplicationthroughputthatanytransmittercanprovideonall
availabletimeslotsintheterminal.
PacketThroughputandQualityAnalysis:AverageApplicationThroughput(kbps)
Apixelofthecoverageareaiscolouredifthecalculatedaverageapplicationthroughputfromallthetransmitterscovering
thatpixelexceedsthedefinedminimumthreshold.Thepixelcolourdependsontheaverageapplicationthroughputforallthe
timeslotssupportedbytheselectedterminaltype(NumberofSimultaneousCarriersxNumberofDLTimeslots).Thenumber
ofDLtimeslotsistheminimumbetweenthenumberofDLtimeslotsdefinedintheselectedterminalandservice.Coverage
consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be managed. There are as many layers as
throughputdisplaythresholds.Eachlayershowstheaverageapplicationthroughputthatallthetransmitterscanprovideon
allavailabletimeslotsintheterminal.
PacketThroughputandQualityAnalysis:ThroughputperUser(kbps)
Apixelofthecoverageareaiscolouredifthecalculatedthroughputperuserfromanytransmittercoveringthatpixelexceeds
thedefinedminimumthreshold.Thepixelcolourdependsonthethroughputperuserforallthetimeslotssupportedbythe
selected terminal type (Number of Simultaneous Carriers x Number of DL Timeslots). The number of DL timeslots is the
minimum between the number of DL timeslots defined in the selected terminal and service. The throughput per user is
calculatedbyapplyingthethroughputreductionfactor,determinedusingtheselecteddimensioningmodel,totheapplication
throughput.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityinthemapwindowcanbemanaged.Thereare
asmanylayersastransmittercoverageareasandthroughputdisplaythresholds.Eachlayershowsthethroughputperuser
thatatransmittercanprovideonallavailabletimeslotsintheterminal.

140

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

PacketThroughputandQualityAnalysis:MaxThroughputperUser(kbps)
Apixelofthecoverageareaiscolouredifthecalculatedhighestthroughputperuserfromanytransmittercoveringthatpixel
exceedsthedefinedminimumthreshold.Thepixelcolourdependsonthehighestthroughputperuserforallthetimeslots
supportedbytheselectedterminaltype(NumberofSimultaneousCarriersxNumberofDLTimeslots).ThenumberofDL
timeslotsistheminimumbetweenthenumberofDLtimeslotsdefinedintheselectedterminalandservice.Thethroughput
peruseriscalculatedbyapplyingthethroughputreductionfactor,determinedusingtheselecteddimensioningmodel,tothe
applicationthroughput.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityinthemapwindowcanbemanaged.
There are as many layers as throughput display thresholds. Each layer shows the highest throughput per user that any
transmittercanprovideonallavailabletimeslotsintheterminal.
PacketThroughputandQualityAnalysis:AverageThroughputperUser(kbps)
Apixelofthecoverageareaiscolouredifthecalculatedaveragethroughputperuserfromallthetransmitterscoveringthat
pixel exceeds the defined minimum threshold. The pixel colour depends on the average throughput per user for all the
timeslotssupportedbytheselectedterminaltype(NumberofSimultaneousCarriersxNumberofDLTimeslots).Thenumber
of DL timeslots is the minimum between the number of DL timeslots defined in the selected terminal and service. The
throughputperuseriscalculatedbyapplyingthethroughputreductionfactor,determinedusingtheselecteddimensioning
model,totheapplicationthroughput.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityinthemapwindowcan
bemanaged.Thereareasmanylayersasthroughputdisplaythresholds.Eachlayershowstheaveragethroughputperuser
thatallthetransmitterscanprovideonallavailabletimeslotsintheterminal.
PacketThroughputandQualityAnalysis:BLER(%)
ApixelofthecoverageareaiscolouredifthecalculatedBLERfromanytransmitterexceedsthedefinedminimumthreshold.
ThepixelcolourdependsontheBLER.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityinthemapwindow
canbemanaged.ThereareasmanylayersastransmittercoverageareasandBLERdisplaythresholds.Eachlayershowsthe
BLERsthatthecoveredpixelsexperienceononetimeslot.
PacketThroughputandQualityAnalysis:MaxBLER(%)
ApixelofthecoverageareaiscolouredifthecalculatedhighestBLERfromallthetransmittersexceedsthedefinedminimum
threshold.ThepixelcolourdependsontheBLER.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityinthemap
windowcanbemanaged.ThereareasmanylayersasBLERdisplaythresholds.EachlayershowstheBLERthatthecovered
pixelsexperienceononetimeslot.

3.4 CodecModeSelectionandCQICalculations
AtollsupportsFR,HR,EFR,andAMRcodecmodes.Acodecconfigurationcontainscodecmodeadaptationthresholdsand
qualitygraphsforcircuitqualityindicators.Atollhasthefollowingcircuitqualityindicatorsincludedbydefault:

FERorFrameErasureRate:Thenumberofframesinerrordividedbythetotalnumberofframes.Theseframesare
usuallydiscarded,inwhichcasethiscanbecalledtheFrameErasureRate.
BERorBitErrorRate:BERisameasurementoftherawbiterrorrateinreceptionbeforethedecodingprocessbegins.
Anyfactorthatimpactsthedecodingperformance,suchasfrequencyhopping,willimpactthecorrelationbetween
BERandFER,ortheperceivedenduservoicequality.
MOSorMeanOpinionScore:Voicequalitycanbequantifiedusingmeanopinionscore(MOS).MOSvaluescanonly
bemeasuredinatestlaboratoryenvironment.MOSvaluesrangefrom1(bad)to5(excellent).Differentvoicecodecs
have slightly different FER to MOS correlation since the smaller the voice codec bit rate is, the more sensitive it
becomestoframeerasures.

ThedefaultcodecconfigurationsinAtollincludedefaultFER,BER,andMOSqualitygraphswithrespecttothecarrierto
interferenceratio,andcodecmodeadaptationthresholds(calculatedfromtheFERvs.C/Igraphsforallcodecmodesat5 %
FER).

141

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

Forsk2014

Figure 3.1:FERvs.C/IGraphs

Figure 3.2:BERvs.C/IGraphs

Figure 3.3:MOSvs.C/IGraphs

142

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Thegraphsarebasedon:
[1] T. Halonen, J. Romero, J. Melero; GSM, GPRS and EDGE performance Evolution
towards3G/UMTS,JohnWileyandSonsLtd.
[2]J.Wigard,P.Mogensen;AsimplemappingfromC/ItoFERandBERforaGSMtypeof
airinterface.
[3]3GPPSpecificationsTR26.975V6.0.0;PerformancecharacterizationoftheAdaptive
MultiRate(AMR)speechcodec(Release6)

3.4.1 CircuitQualityIndicatorCalculations
CircuitqualityindicatorcalculationsincludecodecmodeselectionandCQIcalculation.Codecmodesmaybeselectedusing
ideal link adaptation or without it. Once codec modes have been selected, CQI corresponding to these codec modes are
determinedfromthelookuptables.
Thefollowingsections describethetwocategories ofcalculations, i.e.,with and withoutideal link adaptations. Ideallink
adaptationimpliesthattheselectedcodecmodecorrespondstothebestvalueofthereferenceCQIunderthegivenradio
conditions.Withoutideallinkadaptation,thecodecmodeisselectedbasedonthecodecadaptationthresholds.
CQI calculations may be based on C/N or on C/(I+N). For calculating the noise, either the noise figure defined for the
calculationsorthatoftheselectedterminaltypeisused.
Different codec configurations may be defined for transmitter and terminals. In this case, Atoll only selects the coding
schemesthatarecommoninthetwo,andgivesprioritytothethresholdsdefinedintheterminalconfiguration.Ifnoterminal
typeisdefinedforthecalculation,oriftheterminaltypedoesnothaveanycodecconfigurationassignedtoit,Atollonlyuses
thecodecconfigurationofthetransmitter.Ifthetransmitterdoesnothaveanycodecconfigurationassignedtoit,nocodec
modeselectionandCQIcalculationiscarriedout.
IfmorethanonecodecmodessatisfytheC/NorC/Iconditions,Atollselectsthehigherprioritycodecmode.
Inthefollowingcalculations,weassumethat:
Txi

P rec TRX isthesignallevelreceivedfromtheselectedTRXtype(tt)oronalltheTRXsofTxioneachpixeloftheTxi

coveragearea,
CMisthesetofallavailablecodecmodes,
AdaptationThreshold CM are the values of adaptation thresholds for the codec modes available in the codec
configuration,
Thecomputednoise N iscomparedtothecodecconfigurationreferencenoise N Ref .Ifthevaluesarethesame,the
definedgraphsareusedasis,otherwisethegraphsaredownshiftedbythedifference N NRef .

WhenthecalculationsarebasedonC/(I+N):

AtollcalculatesthecarriertointerferenceratioforalltheTBCtransmitterswithcodecconfigurationsassigned,but
takesintoaccountalltheTBCtransmitters(withandwithoutcodecconfigurations)toevaluatetheinterference.
Theselectionofcodecmodesismainlybasedontheradioconditionsmentionnedabove.
Nevertheless,youcanoptionallydefinesomespecificcodecmodegraphsaccodingtoa
specifichoppingmode,mobilitytype,frequencybandandMAL.Asanexample,youcan
modelthegainduetolongerMALsincodecmodeselection.

Formoreinformationoninterference(I)calculation,see"DLCarriertoInterferenceRatioCalculation"onpage 127.
Ideallinkadaptationforcircuitqualityindicatorstudiesisdefinedatthecodecconfigurationlevel.Iftheideallinkadaptation
optionischecked,Atollwillselectthecodecmode,forthetransmitterunderstudy,accordingtothecodecqualitygraphs(CQI
= f(C/N) and CQI = f(C/I)) related to the defined reference CQI, which may be different from the CQI being calculated.
Otherwise,AtollwillusetheadaptationthresholdsdefinedintheAdaptationThresholdstabtodeterminethecodecmode
tobeusedinthestudies.

3.4.2 CQICalculationWithoutIdealLinkAdaptation
3.4.2.1 CalculationsBasedonC/N
Atollselectsthehighestprioritycodecmode,cm,fromamongthecodecmodesavailableinthecodecconfiguration:

143

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

Forsk2014

ForeachTRXtype,tt, cm = HighestPriority CM

Txi

P
TRX
rec
--------------------------- AdaptationThreshold
CM
N

Txi

P rec TRX
For ------------------------ ,AtolldeterminestheCQIfromtheCQI=f(C/N)graphassociatedtotheselectedcodecmode,cm.
N

3.4.2.2 CalculationsBasedonC/(I+N)
Atollselectsthehighestprioritycodecmode,cm,fromamongthecodecmodesavailableinthecodecconfiguration:

ForeachTRXtype,tt, cm = HighestPriority CM

Txi
P rec TRX
--------------------------- AdaptationThreshold
CM
I+N

Txi

P rec TRX
- ,AtolldeterminestheCQIfromtheCQI=f(C/I)graphassociatedtotheselectedcodecmode,cm.
For ----------------------I+N

3.4.3 CQICalculationWithIdealLinkAdaptation
3.4.3.1 CalculationsBasedonC/N
IdeallinkadaptationisusedbyacodecconfigurationaccordingtoadefinedreferenceCQI(MOSbydefault).
AtollcalculatessignallevelreceivedfromTxioneachpixelofTxicoverageareaandconvertsitintoC/Nvaluesasdescribed
earlier. Then, Atoll filters all the codec modes that satisfy the C/N criterion (defined by the CQI = f(C/N) graphs for the
referenceCQI)andarecommonbetweenthetransmitterandtheterminaltypecodecconfiguration.
Theselectedcodecmodeamongthesefilteredcodecmodeswillbe,

ForeachTRXtype,tt, cm = HighestPriority CM

Or, cm = HighestPriority CM

,forMOS

Txi

TRX

C rec

CQI Ref = Highest CQI=f ---= ---------------------------

N

N tot

,forBERandFER

P Txi TRX
C rec

CQI Ref = Lowest CQI=f ---= ---------------------------

N
N tot

,cmisthecodecmodewiththehighestpriorityamongthesetofcodecmodesCMforwhichthereferenceCQIgivesthe
Txi

P rec TRX
- .
highestorthelowestvalueatthereceivedC/Nlevel, ----------------------N tot
IfmorethanonecodecmodegraphsgivethesamevalueforreferenceCQI,thenAtollselectsthecodecmodewiththehighest
priority.
FromtheCQI=f(C/N)graphassociatedtotheselectedcodecmodecm,AtollevaluatestheCQIforwhichthestudywas
Txi

P rec TRX
performedcorrespondingto ------------------------ fortheselectedcodecmode.
N tot

3.4.3.2 CalculationsBasedonC/(I+N)
IdeallinkadaptationisusedbyacodecconfigurationaccordingtoadefinedreferenceCQI(MOSbydefault).
AtollcalculatestheC/IlevelreceivedfromthetransmitteroneachpixelofTxicoveragearea,foreachTRXandconvertsitinto
C/(I+N).Then,Atoll filtersallthe codecmodesthatsatisfy theC/(I+N)criteria (defined bytheCQI =f(C/I)graphsforthe
referenceCQI)andarecommonbetweenthetransmitterandtheterminaltypecodecconfiguration.
Theselectedcodecmodeamongthesefilteredcodecmodeswillbe,

144

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

ForeachTRXtype,tt, cm = HighestPriority CM

Or, cm = HighestPriority CM

,forMOS

P Txi TRX
C rec

CQI
= Highest CQI=f --- = ---------------------------
Ref

I I+N

tot

,forBERandFER

Txi

P
TRX
C rec

CQI
= Lowest CQI=f --- = ---------------------------
Ref

I I+N

tot

,cmisthecodecmodewiththehighestpriorityamongthesetofcodecmodesCMforwhichthereferenceCQIgivesthe
Txi

P rec TRX
-.
highestorthelowestvalueatthereceivedC/(I+N)level, ----------------------I + N tot
IfmorethanonecodecmodegraphsgivethesamevalueforreferenceCQI,thenAtollselectsthecodecmodewiththehighest
priority.
FromtheCQI=f(C/I)graphassociatedtotheselectedcodecmodecm(indexedwiththeC/(I+N)values),Atollevaluatesthe
Txi

P rec TRX
- fortheselectedcodecmode.
CQIforwhichthestudywasperformedcorrespondingto ----------------------I + N tot

3.4.4 CircuitQualityIndicatorsCoveragePredictions
TheCircuitQualityIndicatorscoveragepredictionsshowtheareasBER,FER,andMOSvaluesinthetransmittercoverage
areas.
ForeachTBCtransmitter,Txi,AtollcalculatestheselectedparameteroneachpixelinsidetheTxicalculationarea.Inother
words,eachpixelinsidetheTxicalculationareaisconsideredaprobe(noninterfering)receiver.
Coveragepredictionparameterstobesetare:

ThecoverageconditionsinordertodeterminetheserviceareaofeachTBCtransmitter,
Theinterferenceandqualityindicatorconditionstomeetforapixeltobecovered,and
Thedisplaysettingstoselectthedisplayedparameteranditsshadinglevels.

Thethermalnoise(N=121 dBm,bydefault)isusedinthecalculationsifthecoveragepredictionisbasedonC/(I+N).This
valuecanbemodifiedbytheuser.

3.4.4.1 ServiceAreaDetermination
AtollusesparametersenteredintheConditiontabofthecoveragepredictionpropertiesdialoguetodeterminetheareas
coveragewillbedisplayed.
Wecandistinguishsevencasesasbelow.Letusassumethat:

3.4.4.1.1

Eachtransmitter, Txi, belongsto a Hierarchical CellStructure(HCS)layer,k,with a definedpriorityand a defined

receptionthreshold.
Eachtransmitter,Txi,hasacodecconfigurationassigned.
Nomaxrangeisset.

AllServers
TheserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothepixels:
Txi

SubcellReceptionThreshold P rec BCCH

3.4.4.1.2

BestSignalLevelandaMargin
TheserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothepixels:
Txi

SubcellReceptionThreshold P rec BCCH

Txi
Txj
And P rec BCCH Best P rec BCCH M
ji

Misthespecifiedmargin(dB).TheBestfunctionconsidersthehighestvaluefromalistofvalues.

IfM=0 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiisthehighest.

145

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

3.4.4.1.3

Forsk2014

IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiiseitherthehighestorwithina2 dBmarginfrom

thehighest.
If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitterswhichare2ndbestservers.

SecondBestSignalLevelandaMargin
TheserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothepixels:
Txi

SubcellReceptionThreshold P rec BCCH

nd

Txi
Txj
And P rec BCCH 2 Best P rec BCCH M
ji

Misthespecifiedmargin(dB).The2ndBestfunctionconsidersthesecondhighestvaluefromalistofvalues.

3.4.4.1.4

IfM=0 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiisthesecondhighest.
IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiiseitherthesecondhighestorwithina2 dBmargin
fromthesecondhighest.
If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitterswhichare3rdbestservers.

BestSignalLevelperHCSLayerandaMargin
ForeachHCSlayer,k,theserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothepixels:
Txi

SubcellReceptionThreshold P rec BCCH

Txi
Txj
And P rec BCCH Best P rec BCCH M
ji

Misthespecifiedmargin(dB).TheBestfunctionconsidersthehighestvaluefromalistofvalues.

3.4.4.1.5

IfM=0 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiisthehighest.
IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiiseitherthehighestorwithina2 dBmarginfrom
thehighest.
If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitterswhichare2ndbestservers.

SecondBestSignalLevelperHCSLayerandaMargin
ForeachHCSlayer,k,theserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothepixels:
Txi

SubcellReceptionThreshold P rec BCCH

nd

Txi
Txj
And P rec BCCH 2 Best P rec BCCH M
ji

Misthespecifiedmargin(dB).The2ndBestfunctionconsidersthesecondhighestvaluefromalistofvalues.

3.4.4.1.6

IfM=0 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiisthesecondhighest.
IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiiseitherthesecondhighestorwithina2 dBmargin
fromthesecondhighest.
If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitterswhichare3rdbestservers.

HCSServersandaMargin
TheserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothepixels:
Txi

SubcellReceptionThreshold P rec BCCH

Txi
Txj
And P rec BCCH Best P rec BCCH M
ji
Txi

Andthereceived P rec BCCH exceedsthereceptionthresholddefinedperHCSlayer.

146

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Misthespecifiedmargin(dB).TheBestfunctionconsidersthehighestvaluefromalistofvalues.

3.4.4.1.7

IfM=0 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiisthehighest.
IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiiseitherthehighestorwithina2 dBmarginfrom
thehighest.
If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitterswhichare2ndbestservers.

HighestPriorityHCSServerandaMargin
TheserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothepixels:
Txi

SubcellReceptionThreshold P rec BCCH

Txi
Txj
And P rec BCCH Best P rec BCCH M
ji

AndTxibelongstotheHCSlayerwiththehighestpriority.Thehighestpriorityisdefinedbythepriorityfield(0:lowest).
Txi

Andthereceived P rec BCCH exceedsthereceptionthresholddefinedperHCSlayer.

Inthecasetwolayershavethesamepriority,thetrafficisservedbythetransmitterfor
whichthedifferencebetweenthereceivedsignalstrengthandtheHCSthresholdisthe
highest.Thewaythecompetitionismanagedbetweenlayerswiththesameprioritycan
bemodified.Formoreinformation,seetheAdministratorManual.
Misthespecifiedmargin(dB).TheBestfunctionconsidersthehighestvaluefromalistofvalues.

IfM=0 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiisthehighest.
IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiiseitherthehighestorwithina2 dBmarginfrom
thehighest.
If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitterswhichare2ndbestservers.

3.4.4.2 CoverageDisplay
3.4.4.2.1

CoverageResolution
Theresolutionofthecoveragepredictiondoesnotdependontheresolutionsofthepathlossmatricesorthegeographicdata
andcanbedefinedseparatelyforeachcoverageprediction.Coveragepredictionsaregeneratedusingabilinearinterpolation
methodfrommultiresolutionpathlossmatrices(similartotheoneusedtocalculatesitealtitudes,see"PathLossCalculation
Prerequisites"onpage 53formoreinformation).

3.4.4.2.2

DisplayTypes
Itispossibletodisplaythecoveragepredictionswithcoloursdependingoncriteriasuchas:
BER
Onlythepixelswithacodecmodeassignedarecoloured.ThepixelcolourdependsontheBERvalue.Coverageconsistsof
severalindependentlayerswhosevisibilityinthemapwindowcanbemanaged.Thereareasmanylayersastransmitter
coverageareasandBERdisplaythresholds.EachlayershowstheBERinthetransmittercoveragearea.
FER
Onlythepixelswithacodecmodeassignedarecoloured.ThepixelcolourdependsontheFERvalue.Coverageconsistsof
severalindependentlayerswhosevisibilityinthemapwindowcanbemanaged.Thereareasmanylayersastransmitter
coverageareasandFERdisplaythresholds.EachlayershowstheFERinthetransmittercoveragearea.
MOS
Onlythepixelswithacodecmodeassignedarecoloured.ThepixelcolourdependsontheMOSvalue.Coverageconsistsof
severalindependentlayerswhosevisibilityinthemapwindowcanbemanaged.Thereareasmanylayersastransmitter
coverageareasandMOSdisplaythresholds.EachlayershowstheMOSinthetransmittercoveragearea.

147

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

Forsk2014

MaxBER
Onlythepixelswithacodecmodeassignedarecoloured.ThepixelcolourdependsonthehighestBERvalueamongtheBER
valuesforallthetransmitterscoveringthepixel.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityinthemap
windowcanbemanaged.ThereareasmanylayersasBERdisplaythresholds.EachlayershowstheBERvalue.
MaxFER
Onlythepixelswithacodecmodeassignedarecoloured.ThepixelcolourdependsonthehighestFERvalueamongtheFER
valuesforallthetransmitterscoveringthepixel.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityinthemap
windowcanbemanaged.ThereareasmanylayersasFERdisplaythresholds.EachlayershowstheFERvalue.
MaxMOS
Onlythepixelswithacodecmodeassignedarecoloured.ThepixelcolourdependsonthehighestMOSvalueamongtheMOS
valuesforallthetransmitterscoveringthepixel.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityinthemap
windowcanbemanaged.ThereareasmanylayersasMOSdisplaythresholds.EachlayershowstheMOSvalue.

3.5 ULCoveragePredictions
ForeachTBCtransmitter,Txi,AtollcalculatestheselectedparameterateachTxiinsideitscalculationarea.Resultsareshown
oneachpixel,eachpixelactingasatransmittingterminal.Hence,transmittersarehere(noninterfering)receivers.
Coveragepredictionparameterstobesetare:

ThecoverageconditionsinordertodeterminetheDLserviceareaofeachTBCtransmitter,and
Thedisplaysettingstoselectthedisplayedparameteranditsshadinglevels.

Twointerfacedpredictionsareavailable:

OnepredictionwhichshowsoneachpixelULlossesorULsignallevels
OnepredictionwhichshowsoneachpixelULC/Ilevels.

Additionalstudiessuchascodecmodesandcodingschemespredictionsareusedduringsimulationsbutarenotgraphically
available.

3.5.1 DLServiceAreaDetermination
AtollusesparametersenteredintheConditiontabofthecoveragepredictionpropertiesdialoguetodeterminetheservice
areasoftheTBCtransmitters.
Wecandistinguisheightcasesasbelow.Letusassumethat:

Eachtransmitter,Txi,belongstoaHierarchicalCellStructure(HCS)layer,k, withadefinedpriorityandadefined
receptionthreshold.
Nomaxrangeisset.

3.5.1.1 AllServers
TheserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothepixels:
Txi

MinimumThreshold P rec tt MaximumThreshold

Txi

Forpuresignallevelbasedcalculations(notC/IorC/(I+N)), P rec tt canbereplaced

Txi

Txi

with L total DL or L path .

3.5.1.2 BestSignalLevelandaMargin
TheserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothepixels:
Txi

MinimumThreshold P rec tt MaximumThreshold

Txi

Forpuresignallevelbasedcalculations(notC/IorC/(I+N)), P rec tt canbereplaced

Txi

Txi

with L total DL or L path .

148

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Txi
Txj
And P rec tt Best P rec tt M
ji

Misthespecifiedmargin(dB).TheBestfunctionconsidersthehighestvaluefromalistofvalues.

IfM=0 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiisthehighest.
IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiiseitherthehighestorwithina2 dBmarginfrom
thehighest.
If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitterswhichare2ndbestservers.

3.5.1.3 SecondBestSignalLevelandaMargin
TheserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothepixels:
Txi

MinimumThreshold P rec tt MaximumThreshold

Txi

Forpuresignallevelbasedcalculations(notC/IorC/(I+N)), P rec tt canbereplaced

Txi

Txi

with L total DL or L path .

nd

Txi
Txj
And P rec tt 2 Best P rec tt M
ji

Misthespecifiedmargin(dB).The2ndBestfunctionconsidersthesecondhighestvaluefromalistofvalues.

IfM=0 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiisthesecondhighest.
IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiiseitherthesecondhighestorwithina2 dBmargin
fromthesecondhighest.
If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitterswhichare3rdbestservers.

3.5.1.4 BestSignalLevelperHCSLayerandaMargin
ForeachHCSlayer,k,theserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothepixels:
Txi

MinimumThreshold P rec tt MaximumThreshold

Txi

Forpuresignallevelbasedcalculations(notC/IorC/(I+N)), P rec tt canbereplaced

Txi

Txi

with L total DL or L path .

Txi
Txj
And P rec BCCH Best P rec BCCH M
ji

Misthespecifiedmargin(dB).TheBestfunctionconsidersthehighestvaluefromalistofvalues.

IfM=0 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiisthehighest.
IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiiseitherthehighestorwithina2 dBmarginfrom
thehighest.
If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitterswhichare2ndbestservers.

3.5.1.5 SecondBestSignalLevelperHCSLayerandaMargin
ForeachHCSlayer,k,theserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothepixels:
Txi

MinimumThreshold P rec tt MaximumThreshold

149

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

Forsk2014

Txi

Forpuresignallevelbasedcalculations(notC/IorC/(I+N)), P rec tt canbereplaced

Txi

Txi

with L total DL or L path .

nd

Txi
Txj
And P rec BCCH 2 Best P rec BCCH M
ji

Misthespecifiedmargin(dB).The2ndBestfunctionconsidersthesecondhighestvaluefromalistofvalues.

IfM=0 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiisthesecondhighest.
IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiiseitherthesecondhighestorwithina2 dBmargin
fromthesecondhighest.
If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitterswhichare3rdbestservers.

3.5.1.6 HCSServersandaMargin
TheserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothepixels:
Txi

MinimumThreshold P rec tt MaximumThreshold

Txi

Forpuresignallevelbasedcalculations(notC/IorC/(I+N)), P rec tt canbereplaced

Txi

Txi

with L total DL or L path .

Txi
Txj
And P rec BCCH Best P rec BCCH M
ji
Txi

Andthereceived P rec tt exceedsthereceptionthresholddefinedperHCSlayer.

Misthespecifiedmargin(dB).TheBestfunctionconsidersthehighestvaluefromalistofvalues.

IfM=0 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiisthehighest.
IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiiseitherthehighestorwithina2 dBmarginfrom
thehighest.
If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitterswhichare2ndbestservers.

3.5.1.7 HighestPriorityHCSServerandaMargin
TheserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothepixels:
Txi

MinimumThreshold P rec tt MaximumThreshold

Txi

Forpuresignallevelbasedcalculations(notC/IorC/(I+N)), P rec tt canbereplaced

Txi

Txi

with L total DL or L path .

Txi
Txj
And P rec BCCH Best P rec BCCH M
ji

AndTxibelongstotheHCSlayerwiththehighestpriority.Thehighestpriorityisdefinedbythepriorityfield(0:lowest).
Txi

Andthereceived P rec tt exceedsthereceptionthresholddefinedperHCSlayer.

Inthecasetwolayershavethesamepriority,thetrafficisservedbythetransmitterfor
whichthedifferencebetweenthereceivedsignalstrengthandtheHCSthresholdisthe
highest.Thewaythecompetitionismanagedbetweenlayerswiththesameprioritycan
bemodified.Formoreinformation,seetheAdministratorManual.

150

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Misthespecifiedmargin(dB).TheBestfunctionconsidersthehighestvaluefromalistofvalues.

IfM=0 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiisthehighest.
IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelsthereceivedsignallevelfromTxiiseitherthehighestorwithina2 dBmarginfrom
thehighest.
If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitterswhichare2ndbestservers.

3.5.1.8 BestIdleModeReselectionCriterion(C2)
Suchtypeofcoverageisuseful:

Tocompareidleanddedicatedmodebestserversforvoicetraffic
DisplaytheGPRS/EDGEbestservermap(basedonGSMidlemode)

ThepathlosscriterionC1usedforcellselectionandreselectionisdefinedby:
Txi

C1 = P rec BCCH MinimumThreshold BCCH

Thepathlosscriterion(GSM03.22)issatisfiedif C1 0 .
ThereselectioncriterionC2isusedforcellreselectiononlyandisdefinedby:
C2 = C1 + CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET
CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET istheCellReselectOffsetdefinedforthetransmitter.
TheserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothepixels:
Txi

MinimumThreshold P rec BCCH MaximumThreshold

Txi

Forpuresignallevelbasedcalculations(notC/IorC/(I+N)), P rec tt canbereplaced

Txi

Txi

with L total DL or L path .

And C2

Txi

Txj
BCCH = Best C2 BCCH
j

TheBestfunctionconsidersthehighestvaluefromalistofvalues.
Oneachpixel,thetransmitterwiththehighestC2valueiskept.Itcorrespondstothebestserverinidlemode.C2isdefined
asanintegerinthe3GPPspecifications,therefore,theC2valuesintheabovecalculationsareroundeddowntothenearest
integer.

3.5.2 CoveragebyULSignalLevel
3.5.2.1 CoverageResolution
Theresolutionofthecoveragepredictiondoesnotdependontheresolutionsofthepathlossmatricesorthegeographicdata
andcanbedefinedseparatelyforeachcoverageprediction.Coveragepredictionsaregeneratedusingabilinearinterpolation
methodfrommultiresolutionpathlossmatrices(similartotheoneusedtocalculatesitealtitudes,see"PathLossCalculation
Prerequisites"onpage 53formoreinformation).

3.5.2.2 DisplayTypes
ULsignallevelsandULlossescalculationsareexplainedin"ULSignalLevel"onpage 121.Itispossibletodisplaythecoverage
byULsignallevelwithcoloursdependingonanytransmitterattributeorothercriteriasuchas:

3.5.2.2.1

ULSignalLevel(indBm,dBV,dBV/m)
Atollcalculatesthesignallevelreceivedateachtransmitteronitsserviceareafromsurroundingpixels.Apixelofaservice
areaiscolourediftheULsignallevelisgreaterthanorequaltothedefinedminimumthresholds(pixelcolourdependson
signallevel).Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.Thereareas
manylayersastransmitterserviceareas.EachlayershowsthedifferentULsignallevelsatthetransmitteronitsservicearea.

3.5.2.2.2

BestULSignalLevel(indBm,dBV,dBV/m)
Atollcalculatesthesignallevelreceivedateachtransmitteronitsserviceareafromsurroundingpixels.Whenotherservice
areasoverlapthestudiedone,Atollchoosesthehighestvalue.ApixelofaserviceareaiscolourediftheULsignallevelis

151

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

Forsk2014

greaterthanorequaltothedefinedthresholds(thepixelcolourdependsonthesignallevel).Coverageconsistsofseveral
independentlayerswhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.Thereareasmanylayersastransmitterserviceareas.
EachlayershowsthedifferentULsignallevelsatthetransmitteronitsservicearea.

3.5.2.2.3

ULTotalLosses(dB)
Atollcalculatestotallossesfromtheterminalateachtransmitteronitsservicearea.ApixelofaserviceareaiscolouredifUL
totallossesaregreaterthanorequaltothedefinedminimumthresholds(pixelcolourdependsonULtotallosses).Coverage
consistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.Thereareasmanylayersasservice
areas.EachlayershowsthedifferentULtotallossesatthetransmitteronitsservicearea.

3.5.2.2.4

MinimumULTotalLosses(dB)
Atollcalculatestotallossesfromthetransmitteroneachpixelofeachtransmitterservicearea.Whenotherserviceareas
overlapthestudiedone,Atollchoosesthelowestvalue.ApixelofaserviceareaiscolouredifULtotallossesaregreaterthan
orequaltothedefinedminimumthresholds(pixelcolourdependsontotallosses).Coverageconsistsofseveralindependent
layerswhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.Thereareasmanylayersasserviceareas.Eachlayershowsthe
differenttotallosseslevelsinthetransmitterservicearea.

3.5.3 CoveragebyULC/I
AnULC/Icoveragepredictionsisavailable.ItprovidestheULC/Ilevelatthetransmitterlevelcausedbysurroundinguplink
traffic.

3.5.3.1 CoverageResolution
Theresolutionofthecoveragepredictiondoesnotdependontheresolutionsofthepathlossmatricesorthegeographicdata
andcanbedefinedseparatelyforeachcoverageprediction.Coveragepredictionsaregeneratedusingabilinearinterpolation
methodfrommultiresolutionpathlossmatrices(similartotheoneusedtocalculatesitealtitudes,see"PathLossCalculation
Prerequisites"onpage 53formoreinformation).

3.5.3.2 ULC/IEvaluation
TheULC/Ilevelcanbecomputedasfollows,foragivenMSA
C
--I

MSA

Term

Tx

= P rec N tot

UL

,
Tx

Tx

MSA DL

N tot = N thermal + NF

+ NR Intra techno log y istheULtotalnoiseattransmitterontheconsideredMSA

P rec isthereceivedsignallevelatthetransmitter,

N thermal isthethermalnoise(121 dBmbydefaultoruserdefined)

NF isthetransmitternoisefigure

NR Intra techno log y istheintratechnologyULnoiseriseattheconsideredMSA.SinceULnoiserisearedefinedper

Term

Tx

MSA DL

TRX,AtolltakestheTRXULnoiseriseincaseofnonhoppingorextractsameannoiserisefromtheseveralTRXs
composingtheMSAincaseofBaseBandHoppingorSynthesizedFrequencyHopping.
MSA

ForagiventransmitterhavingseveralMSAs,allpossible C
aredisplayedincasethedetailedresultsboxisselected.If
--I UL
not,theworstresults(theminC/Ipertransmitter)areretained.

3.5.3.3 CoverageAreaDetermination
ForeachMSA,coverageareacorrespondstopixelswhere C
--I
coveragepredictionproperties.

MSA

isbetweenthelowerandupperthresholdsdefinedinthe

UL

3.5.3.4 DisplayTypes
Itispossibletodisplaythecoveragepredictionswithcoloursdependingonanytransmitterattributeorothercriteriasuchas:

3.5.3.4.1

C/ILevel
EachpixelofthetransmittercoverageareaiscolouredifthecalculatedULC/Ilevelisgreaterthanorequaltothespecified
minimumthresholds(pixelcolourdependsonULC/Ilevel).Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibility

152

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

intheworkspacecanbemanaged.Thereareasmanylayersastransmitterserviceareas.EachlayershowsthedifferentUL
C/Ilevelsavailableinthetransmittercoveragearea.

3.5.3.4.2

MaxC/ILevel
AtollcomparescalculatedULC/Ilevelsreceivedfromtransmittersoneachpixelofeachtransmittercoverageareacoverage
areasoverlapthestudiedoneandchoosesthehighestvalue.ApixelofacoverageareaiscolourediftheULC/Ilevelisgreater
than or equal to the specified thresholds (the pixel colour depends on the UL C/I level). Coverage consists of several
independentlayerswhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.Thereareasmanylayersasdefinedthresholds.Each
layercorrespondstoanareathehighestreceivedULC/Ilevelexceedsadefinedminimumthreshold.

3.5.3.4.3

MinC/ILevel
AtollcomparesULC/Ilevelsreceivedfromtransmittersoneachpixelofeachtransmittercoverageareathecoverageareas
overlapthestudiedoneandchoosesthelowestvalue.ApixelofacoverageareaiscolourediftheULC/Ilevelisgreaterthan
orequaltothespecifiedthresholds(thepixelcolourdependsontheULC/Ilevel).Coverageconsistsofseveralindependent
layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as defined thresholds. Each layer
correspondstoanareathelowestreceivedULC/Ilevelexceedsadefinedminimumthreshold.

3.5.4 CoveragebyULCodingSchemes
AnULCodingSchemecoveragepredictionisimplementedinordertobeusedinsimulations.Thepredictionitselfdoesnot
haveanyinterface.forthesimulations,settingsarehardcodedandaredescribedhereafter.
ThesecalculationsarebasedonC/(I+N).Codingschemesareselectedwithoutusingideallinkadaptation.
DifferentGPRS/EDGEconfigurationsmaybedefinedfortransmitterandterminals.Inthiscase,Atollonlyselectsthecoding
schemesthatare commoninthetwo,and givespriority to the thresholds defined inthetransmitter configuration.Ifno
terminaltypeisdefinedforthecalculation,oriftheterminaltypedoesnothaveanyGPRS/EDGEconfigurationassignedtoit,
Atoll only uses the GPRS/EDGE configuration of the transmitter. If the transmitter does not have any GPRS/EDGE
configurationassignedtoit,nocodingschemeselectionandthroughputcalculationiscarriedout.
Inthefollowingcalculations,weassumethat:
Txi

P rec TRX istheDLsignallevelreceivedfromtheBCCHofTxioneachpixeloftheTxicoveragearea,

P rec istheULthesignallevelreceivedateachtransmitteronitsserviceareafromsurroundingpixels

CSisthesetofallavailablecodingschemes,
ReceptionThreshold CS arethevaluesofreceptionthresholdsforthecodingschemesavailableintheGPRS/EDGE

Term

configuration,

C
----------Threshold are the values of C/(I+N) thresholds for the coding schemes available in the GPRS/EDGE
I + N
CS
configuration,
Theprioritiesofthecodingschemelistsareasfollows:DBS>DAS>MCS>CS.

SincethecalculationsarebasedonC/IandC/(I+N):

AtollcalculatestheULC/ItoalltheGPRS/EDGETBCtransmitters.
ThereceptionthresholdsgivenforsignallevelCareinternallyconvertedtoC/Nthresholds(Nisthethermalnoise
definedinthedocumentdatabaseat121dBmbydefault)inordertobeindexedbyC/(I+N)values.C/Ithresholdsare
alsoindexedbytheC/(I+N)value.

FormoreinformationonULC/Icalculation,see"CoveragebyULC/I"onpage 152.

3.5.4.1 ServiceAreaDetermination
Atolluseshardcodedparametersforsimulations.Inthatcase,theDLserviceareaisbasedontheoption"HCSservers"with
amarginof4 dB.
TheserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothepixels:
Txi

SubcellReceptionThreshold P rec tt
Txi
Txj
And P rec BCCH Best P rec BCCH 4dB
ji
Txi

Andthereceived P rec BCCH exceedsthereceptionthresholddefinedperHCSlayer.

153

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

Forsk2014

3.5.4.2 CodingSchemeSelection
AtollselectstwocodingschemesfromamongthecodingschemesavailableintheGPRS/EDGEconfiguration,suchthat:

ForeachMSA, cs C N = Lowest CS

And, cs C I + N = Lowest CS

Term
P rec
C -Threshold
----------------- ---------I + N
CS
N

Term
P rec

C
----------------- -----------Threshold
I + N
CS
I+N

csC/NisthecodingschemedeterminedfromtheC/N,andcsC/(I+N)isthecodingschemedeterminedfromtheC/(I+N)level.
Bothcodingschemesarethecodingschemeswiththelowestcodingschemenumbersfromthelowestprioritycodingscheme
list.
The selected coding scheme, cs, is the coding scheme with the higher coding scheme number among csC/N and csC/(I+N):
cs = Max cs C N cs C I + N .

3.5.4.3 ThroughputCalculation
ForthecodingschemecsC/Ndeterminedabove,theTP=f(C)graphisinternallyconvertedtoTP=f(C/N)graph.Athroughput
value,TPC/N,correspondingtotheC/(I+N)isdeterminedfromtheTP=f(C/N)graph.
ForthecodingschemecsC/(I+N)determinedabove,theTP=f(C/I)graphisinternallyconvertedtoTP=f(C/(I+N))graph.A
throughputvalue,TPC/(I+N),correspondingtotheC/(I+N)isdeterminedfromtheTP=f(C/(I+N))graph.
The final throughput is computed by interpolating between the throughput values obtained from these two graphs. The
throughputinterpolationmethodconsistsininterpolatingTPC/NandTPC/(I+N)accordingtotherespectiveweightsofIandN
values.
TheresultingthroughputTPisgivenby: TP = TP C N + 1 TP C I + N
pN
= -------------------- ,pNisthethermalnoisepower(valueinWatts),andp(I+N)istheinterferences+thermalnoisepower(value
p I + N
inWatts).

3.5.5 CoveragebyULCodecModes
AnULCodecModecoveragepredictionisimplementedinordertobeusedinsimulations.Thepredictionitselfdoesnothave
anyinterface.forthesimulations,settingsarehardcodedandaredescribedhereafter.
CircuitqualityindicatorcalculationsincludecodecmodeselectionandCQIcalculation.Codecmodesareselectedaccording
to C/(I+N) quality without using ideal link adaptation. Once codec modes have been selected, CQI and number of used
timeslots(0.5incaseofHR)correspondingtothesecodecmodesaredeterminedfromthelookuptables.
Different codec configurations may be defined for transmitter and terminals. In this case, Atoll only selects the coding
schemes thatarecommonin the two,and givespriority tothethresholdsdefinedin the transmitterconfiguration.Ifno
terminaltypeisdefinedforthecalculation,oriftheterminaltypedoesnothaveanycodecconfigurationassignedtoit,Atoll
onlyusesthecodecconfigurationofthetransmitter.Ifthetransmitterdoesnothaveanycodecconfigurationassignedtoit,
nocodecmodeselectionandCQIcalculationiscarriedout.
Ifmorethanonecodecmodessatisfythequalityconditions,Atollselectsthehigherprioritycodecmode.
Inthefollowingcalculations,weassumethat:
Txi

P rec TRX istheDLsignallevelreceivedfromtheBCCHofTxioneachpixeloftheTxicoveragearea,

P rec istheULthesignallevelreceivedateachtransmitteronitsserviceareafromsurroundingpixels

CMisthesetofallavailablecodecmodes,
AdaptationThreshold CM are the values of adaptation thresholds for the codec modes available in the codec

Term

configuration,
Thecomputednoise N iscomparedtothecodecconfigurationreferencenoise N Ref .Ifthevaluesarethesame,the
definedgraphsareusedasis,otherwisethegraphsaredownshiftedbythedifference N N Ref .

154

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

SincethecalculationsarebasedonC/IandC/(I+N):

AtollcalculatestheULC/ItoalltheGPRS/EDGETBCtransmitters.

FormoreinformationonULC/Icalculation,see"CoveragebyULC/I"onpage 152.

3.5.5.1 ServiceAreaDetermination
Atolluseshardcodedparametersforsimulations.Inthatcase,theDLserviceareaisbasedontheoption"HCSservers"with
amarginof4 dB.
TheserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothepixels:
Txi

SubcellReceptionThreshold P rec BCCH

Txi
Txj
And P rec BCCH Best P rec BCCH 4dB
ji
Txi

Andthereceived P rec BCCH exceedsthereceptionthresholddefinedperHCSlayer.

3.5.5.2 CodecModeSelection
Atollselectsthehighestprioritycodecmode,cm,fromamongthecodecmodesavailableinthecodecconfiguration:

ForeachMSA, cm = HighestPriority CM

Term

P rec
----------------- AdaptationThreshold
CM
I+N

Term

P rec
- ,AtolldeterminestheCQIfromtheCQI=f(C/I)graphassociatedtotheselectedcodecmode,cm.
For -----------I+N

3.6 TrafficAnalysis
When starting a traffic analysis, Atoll distributes the traffic from maps to transmitters of each layer according to the
compatibilitycriteriadefinedinthetransmitter,services,mobilitytype,terminaltypeproperties.Transmittersconsideredin
trafficanalysisaretheactiveandfilteredtransmittersthatbelongtothefocuszone.

Ifnofocuszoneexistsinthe.atldocument,Atolltakesintoaccountthecomputation
zone.
For details of the average timeslot capacity calculation, see the Network
Dimensioningsection(calculationofminimumreductionfactor).

3.6.1 TrafficDistribution
3.6.1.1 NormalCells(Nonconcentric,NoHCSLayer)
3.6.1.1.1

CircuitSwitchedServices
Auserwithagivencircuitswitchedservice,c,aterminal,t,andamobilitytype,m,willbedistributedtotheBCCHandTCH
subcellsofatransmitterif:

3.6.1.1.2

Theterminal,t,worksonthefrequencybandusedbytheBCCHsubcell,
Theterminal,t,worksonthefrequencybandusedbytheTCHsubcell.

PacketSwitchedServices
Auserwithagivenpacketswitchedservice,p,aterminal,t,andamobilitytype,m,willbedistributedtotheBCCHandTCH
subcellsofatransmitterif:

ThetransmitterisanGPRS/EDGEstation(optionspecifiedinthetransmitterpropertydialogue),
Theterminal,t,istechnologicallycompatiblewiththetransmitter,
Theterminal,t,worksonthefrequencybandusedbytheBCCHsubcell,
Theterminal,t,worksonthefrequencybandusedbytheTCHsubcell.

155

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

Forsk2014

3.6.1.2 ConcentricCells
Incaseofconcentriccells,TCH_INNERTRXtypehasthehighestprioritytocarrytraffic.

3.6.1.2.1

CircuitSwitchedServices
Auserwithagivencircuitswitchedservice,c,aterminal,t,andamobilitytype,m,willbedistributedtotheTCH_INNER,BCCH
andTCHsubcellsofatransmitterif:

3.6.1.2.2

Theterminal,t,worksonthefrequencybandusedbytheBCCHsubcell,
Theterminal,t,worksonthefrequencyband(s)usedbytheTCH_INNERandTCHsubcells.

PacketSwitchedServices
Auserwithagivenpacketswitchedservice,p,aterminal,t,andamobilitytype,m,willbedistributedtotheTCH_INNER,
BCCHandTCHsubcellsofatransmitterif:

ThetransmitterisanGPRS/EDGEstation(optionspecifiedinthetransmitterpropertydialogue),
Theterminal,t,istechnologicallycompatiblewiththetransmitter,
Theterminal,t,worksonthefrequencybandusedbytheBCCHsubcell,
Theterminal,t,worksonthefrequencyband(s)usedbytheTCH_INNERandTCHsubcells.

3.6.1.3 HCSLayers
ForeachHCSlayer,k,youmayspecifythemaximummobilespeedsupportedbythetransmittersofthelayer.

3.6.1.3.1

CircuitSwitchedServices
Auserwithagivencircuitswitchedservice,c,aterminal,t,andamobilitytype,m,willbedistributedtotheBCCHandTCH
subcells(andTCH_INNERincaseofconcentriccells)ofatransmitterif:

3.6.1.3.2

Theterminal,t,worksonthefrequencybandusedbytheBCCHsubcell,
Theterminal,t,worksonthefrequencyband(s)usedbytheTCH_INNERandTCHsubcells,
Theusersmobility,m,islessthanthemaximumspeedsupportedbythelayer,k.

PacketSwitchedServices
Auserwithagivenpacketswitchedservice,p,aterminal,t,andamobilitytype,m,willbedistributedtotheBCCHandTCH
subcells(andTCH_INNERincaseofconcentriccells)ofatransmitterif:

ThetransmitterisanGPRS/EDGEstation(optionspecifiedinthetransmitterpropertydialogue),
Theterminal,t,istechnologicallycompatiblewiththetransmitter,
Theterminal,t,worksonthefrequencybandusedbytheBCCHsubcell,
Theterminal,t,worksonthefrequencyband(s)usedbytheTCH_INNERandTCHsubcells,
Theusermobility,m,islessthanthemaximumspeedsupportedbythelayer,k.

3.6.2 CalculationoftheTrafficDemandperSubcell
Hereweassumethat:

Usersconsideredforevaluatingthetrafficdemandfulfilthecompatibilitycriteriadefinedinthetransmitter,services,
mobility,terminalpropertiesasexplainedabove.
Atolldistributestrafficonsubcellserviceareas,whicharedeterminedusingtheoptionBestsignallevelperHCS
layerwitha0dBmarginandthesubcellreceptionthresholdaslowerthreshold.
SametrafficisdistributedtotheBCCHandTCHsubcells.

3.6.2.1 UserProfileTrafficMaps
3.6.2.1.1

NormalCells(Nonconcentric,NoHCSLayer)
Numberofsubscribers( X up m )foreachTCHsubcell(Txi,TCH),peruserprofileupwithagivenmobilitym,isinferredas:
X up m Txi TCH = S up m Txi TCH D
Sup,mistheTCHserviceareacontainingtheuserprofileupwiththemobilitymandDistheuserprofiledensity.
Foreachbehaviourdescribedintheuserprofileup,Atollcalculatestheprobabilityfortheusertobeconnectedwithagiven
serviceusingaterminalt.
CircuitSwitchedServices
Foracircuitswitchedservicec,wehave:

156

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

N call d
p up c t = ------------------3600
Ncallisthenumberofcallsperhouranddistheaveragecallduration(inseconds).
Then,Atollevaluatesthetrafficdemand, D up c t m ,inErlangsforthesubcell(Txi,TCH)servicearea.
D up c t m Txi TCH = X up m Txi TCH p up c t
PacketSwitchedServices(MaxRate)
Foramaxratepacketswitchedservicep,wehave:
N call V 8
p up p t = ----------------------------3600
NcallisthenumberofcallsperhourandVisthetransmitteddatavolumepercall(inKbytes).
Then,Atollevaluatesthetrafficdemand, D up p t m ,inkbits/sforthesubcell(Txi,TCH)servicearea.
D up p t m Txi TCH = X up m Txi TCH p up p t
PacketSwitchedServices(ConstantBitRate)
Foraconstantbitpacketswitchedservicep,wehave:
N call d
p up p t = ------------------3600
Ncallisthenumberofcallsperhouranddistheaveragecallduration(inseconds).
Then,Atollevaluatesthetrafficdemand, D up p t m ,inkbits/sforthesubcell(Txi,TCH)servicearea.
D up p t m Txi TCH = X up m Txi TCH p up p t

3.6.2.1.2

ConcentricCells
Incaseofconcentriccells,AtolldistributesapartoftrafficontheTCH_INNERservicearea(TCH_INNERisthehighestpriority
trafficcarrier)andtheremainingtrafficontheouterringservedbytheTCHsubcell.ThetrafficspreadovertheTCH_INNER
subcellmayoverflowtotheTCHsubcell.Inthiscase,thetrafficdemandisthesameontheTCH_INNERsubcellbutincreases
ontheTCHsubcell.

TrafficoverflowingfromtheTCH_INNERtotheTCHisnotuniformlyspreadoverthe
TCHservicearea.ItisstilllocatedontheTCH_INNERservicearea.

Numberofsubscribers( X up m )foreachTCH_INNER(Txi,TCH_INNER)andTCH(Txi,TCH)subcell,peruserprofileupwitha
givenmobilitym,isinferredas:
X up m Txi,TCH_INNER = S up m Txi,TCH_INNER D
X up m Txi,TCH = S up m Txi,TCH S up m Txi,TCH_INNER D
S up m Txi,TCH_INNER and S up m Txi,TCH respectivelyrefertotheTCH_INNERandTCHsubcellserviceareascontaining
theuserprofileupwiththemobilitym.Distheuserprofiledensity.

Figure 3.4:RepresentationofaConcentricCellTXi

157

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

Forsk2014

CircuitSwitchedServices
For each user of the user profile up using a circuit switched service c with a terminal t, Atoll calculates the probability
( p up c t )oftheuserbeingconnected.Calculationsaredetailedin"CircuitSwitchedServices"onpage 155.
Then,Atollevaluatesthetrafficdemand, D up c t m ,inErlangsinthe(Txi,TCH_INNER)and(Txi,TCH)subcellserviceareas.
D up c t m Txi,TCH_INNER = X up m Txi,TCH_INNER p up c t
D up c t m Txi,TCH = X up m Txi,TCH p up c t + D up c t m Txi,TCH_INNER O max Txi,TCH_INNER
O max Txi,TCH_INNER isthemaximumrateoftrafficoverflow(in%)specifiedfortheTCH_INNERsubcell.
PacketSwitchedServices(MaxRate)
Foreachuseroftheuserprofileupusingamaxratepacketswitchedservicepwithaterminalt,probabilityoftheuserbeing
connected( p up p t )iscalculatedasexplainedin"PacketSwitchedServices"onpage 155.
Atollevaluatesthetrafficdemand, D up p t m ,inkbits/sinthe(Txi,TCH_INNER)and(Txi,TCH)subcellserviceareas.
D up p t m Txi,TCH_INNER = X up m Txi,TCH_INNER p up p t
D up p t m Txi,TCH = X up m Txi,TCH p up p t + D up p t m Txi,TCH_INNER O max Txi,TCH_INNER
O max Txi,TCH_INNER isthemaximumrateoftrafficoverflow(in%)specifiedfortheTCH_INNERsubcell.
PacketSwitchedServices(ConstantBitRate)
Foreachuseroftheuserprofileupusingaconstantbitpacketswitchedservicepwithaterminalt,probabilityoftheuser
beingconnected( p up p t )iscalculatedasexplainedin"PacketSwitchedServices"onpage 155.
Atollevaluatesthetrafficdemand, D up p t m ,inkbits/sinthe(Txi,TCH_INNER)and(Txi,TCH)subcellserviceareas.
D up p t m Txi,TCH_INNER = X up m Txi,TCH_INNER p up p t
D up p t m Txi,TCH = X up m Txi,TCH p up p t + D up p t m Txi,TCH_INNER O max Txi,TCH_INNER
O max Txi,TCH_INNER isthemaximumrateoftrafficoverflow(in%)specifiedfortheTCH_INNERsubcell.

3.6.2.1.3

HCSLayers
WeassumetwoHCSlayers:themicrolayerhasahigherprioritythanthemacrolayer.TxibelongstothemicrolayerandTxj
tothemacro.ThetrafficcontainedintheinputtrafficmapcanbeassignedtoalltheHCSlayers.
NormalCells
AtolldistributestrafficontheTCHserviceareas.ThetrafficcaptureiscalculatedwiththeoptionBestsignallevelperHCS
macro

layermeaningthatthereisanoverlapbetweenHCSlayersserviceareas.Let S overlapping Txj TCH denotethisarea(TCH

serviceareaofthemacrolayeroverlappedbytheTCHserviceareaofthemicrolayer).Trafficontheoverlappingareais
distributedtotheTCHsubcellofthemicrolayerbecauseithasahigherpriority.Onthisarea,trafficofthemicrolayermay
overflowtothemacrolayer.Inthiscase,thetrafficdemandisthesameontheTCHsubcellofthemicrolayerbutincreases
ontheTCHsubcellofthemacrolayer.
TrafficoverflowingtothemacrolayerisnotuniformlyspreadovertheTCHservicearea
ofTxj.Itisonlylocatedontheoverlappingarea.

158

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Figure 3.5:RepresentationofMicroandMacroLayers
Atollevaluatesthetrafficdemandonthemicrolayer(higherpriority)asexplainedabove.Forfurtherdetails,pleasereferto
formulasfornormalcells.Then,itproceedswiththemacrolayer(lowerpriority).
macro

Numberofsubscribers( X up m )foreachTCHsubcell(Txj,TCH)ofthemacrolayer,peruserprofileupwiththemobilitym,is
inferredas:
macro

macro

macro

X up m Txj TCH = S up m Txj TCH S up m overlapping Txj TCH D

macro

S up m Txj TCH istheTCHserviceareaofTxjcontainingtheuserprofileupwiththemobilitymandDistheprofiledensity.

Foreachuserdescribedintheuserprofileupwiththecircuitswitchedservicecandtheterminalt,theprobabilityfortheuser
beingconnected( p up c t )iscalculatedasexplainedin"CircuitSwitchedServices"onpage 155.
macro

Then,Atollevaluatesthetrafficdemand, D up c t m ,inErlangsinthesubcell(Txj,TCH)servicearea.
macro

S upm overlapping Txj TCH

macro
macro
micro
D up c t m Txj TCH = X up m Txj TCH p up c t + D up c t m Txi TCH ----------------------------------------------------------------- Omax Txi TCH
micro
S up m Txi TCH
Foreachuserdescribedintheuserprofileupwiththepacketswitchedservicepandtheterminalt,probabilityfortheuser
tobeconnected( p up p t )iscalculatedasexplainedin"PacketSwitchedServices"onpage 155.
macro

Then,Atollevaluatesthetrafficdemand, D up p t m ,inkbits/sinthesubcell(Txj,TCH)servicearea.
macro

S upm overlapping Txj TCH

macro
macro
micro
D up p t m Txj TCH = X up m Txj TCH p up p t + D up p t m Txi TCH ----------------------------------------------------------------- Omax Txi TCH
micro
S up m Txi TCH
O max Txi TCH isthemaximumrateoftrafficoverflow(statedin%)specifiedfortheTCHsubcellofTxi(micro
micro

layer)and S up m Txi TCH istheTCHserviceareaofTxicontainingtheuserprofileupwiththemobilitym.

ConcentricCells
Atollevaluatesthetrafficdemandonthemicrolayer(higherpriorityHCSlayer)asexplainedabove.Forfurtherdetails,please
refertoformulasgivenincaseofconcentriccells.Then,itproceedswiththemacrolayer(lowerpriorityHCSlayer).
ThetrafficcaptureiscalculatedwiththeoptionBestsignallevelperHCSlayer.Itmeansthatthereareoverlappingareas
betweenHCSlayerstrafficisspreadaccordingtothelayerpriority.Ontheseareas,trafficofthehigherprioritylayermay
overflow.
TheTCH_INNERserviceareaofthemacrolayerisoverlappedbythemicrolayer.Thisareaconsistsoftwoparts:anarea
macro

overlappedbytheTCHserviceareaofthemicrolayer S overlapping Txi TCH Txj,TCH_INNER andanotheroverlappedby

macro

theTCH_INNERserviceareaofthemicrolayer S overlapping Txi,TCH_INNER Txj,TCH_INNER .

Letusconsiderthreeareas,S1,S2andS3.
macro

macro

S 1 = S up m Txj,TCH_INNER S up m overlapping Txi TCH Txj,TCH_INNER

macro

S 2 = S up m overlapping Txi,TCH_INNER Txj,TCH_INNER

macro

S 3 = S up m overlapping Txi TCH Txj,TCH_INNER S 2

159

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

Forsk2014

Figure 3.6:ConcentricCells
macro

S up m Txj,TCH_INNER istheTCH_INNERsubcellserviceareaofTxjcontainingtheuserprofileupwiththemobilitym.We
onlyconsidertheoverlappingareascontainingtheuserprofileupwiththemobilitym.
macro

OnS1,thenumberofsubscribersperuserprofileupwithagivenmobilitym( X up m )isinferred:
macro

X up m Txj,TCH_INNER = S 1 D
Distheuserprofiledensity.
ThetrafficspreadovertheTCH_INNERserviceareaofthemicrolayermayoverflowontheTCHsubcell.Thetrafficoverflowing
totheTCHsubcellislocatedontheTCH_INNERservicearea.OnS2,theTCHsubcelltrafficcomingfromtheTCH_INNERsubcell
trafficoverflowmayoverflowproportionaltoR2.
S2
R 2 = ------------------------------------------------------micro
S up m Txi,TCH_INNER
ThetrafficspreadovertheringservedbytheTCHsubcellofthemicrolayeronlymayoverflowonS3proportionaltoR3.
S3
R 3 = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------micro
micro
S up m Txi,TCH S up m Txi,TCH_INNER
micro

micro

S up m Txi,TCH and S up m Txi,TCH_INNER aretheTCHandTCH_INNERserviceareasofTxirespectivelycontainingthe

userprofileupwiththemobilitym.
Foreachuserdescribedintheuserprofileupwithacircuitswitchedservicecandaterminalt,theprobabilityfortheuser
beingconnected( p up c t )iscalculatedasexplainedin"CircuitSwitchedServices"onpage 155.Then,Atollevaluatesthe
macro

trafficdemand, D up c t m ,inErlangsinthesubcell(Txj,TCH_INNER)servicearea.
macro

X up m Txj,TCH_INNER p up c t +
macro

D up c t m Txj,TCH_INNER = R D micro Txi,TCH_INNER O Txi,TCH_INNER O Txi,TCH +

2
up c t m
max
max
micro

R 3 X up m Txi TCH p up c t O max Txi TCH

Foreachuserdescribedintheuserprofileupwithapacketswitchedservicepandaterminalt,probabilityfortheusertobe
connected( p up p t )iscalculatedasexplainedin"PacketSwitchedServices"onpage 155.
macro

Then,Atollevaluatesthetrafficdemand, D up p t m ,statedinkbits/sinthesubcell(Txj,TCH_INNER)servicearea.
macro

X up m Txj,TCH_INNER p up p t +
macro

D up p t m Txj,TCH_INNER = R D micro
2
up p t m Txi,TCH_INNER O max Txi,TCH_INNER O max Txi,TCH +
micro

R 3 X up m Txi TCH p up p t O max Txi TCH

160

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

O max Txi TCH and O max Txi,TCH_INNER arethemaximumratesoftrafficoverflow(statedin%)specifiedfortheTCH

andTCH_INNERsubcellsofTxirespectively.
TheareaoftheTCHringofthemacrolayerisoverlappedbythemicrolayer.Therearetwoparts:anareaoverlappedbythe
macro

TCH service area of the micro layer S overlapping Txi TCH Txj,TCHTCH_INNER and another one by the TCH_INNER
macro

serviceareaofthemicrolayer S overlapping Txi,TCH_INNER Txj,TCHTCH_INNER .

Letusconsiderthreeareas,S1,S2andS3.
macro

macro

macro

S' 1 = S up m Txj,TCH S up m Txj,TCH_INNER S up m overlapping Txi TCH Txj,TCHTCH_INNER

macro

S' 2 = S up m overlapping Txi,TCH_INNER Txj,TCHTCH_INNER

macro

S' 3 = S up m overlapping Txi TCH Txj,TCHTCH_INNER S' 2

macro

macro

S up m Txj,TCH and S up m Txj,TCH_INNER aretheTCHandTCH_INNERsubcellserviceareasofTxjrespectively.Weonly

considertheoverlappingareascontainingtheuserprofileupwiththemobilitym.
macro

OnS1,thenumberofsubscribersperuserprofileupwithagivenmobilitym( X up m )isinferred:
macro

X up m Txj,TCH = S' 1 D
Distheuserprofiledensity.
ThetrafficspreadovertheTCH_INNERserviceareaofthemicrolayermayoverflowontheTCHsubcell.Thetrafficoverflowing
ontheTCHsubcellislocatedontheTCH_INNERservicearea.OnS2,theTCHsubcelltrafficcomingfromtheTCH_INNER
subcelltrafficoverflowmayoverflowproportionallytoR2.
S' 2
R' 2 = ------------------------------------------------------micro
S up m Txi,TCH_INNER
ThetrafficspreadovertheringservedbytheTCHsubcellofthemicrolayeronlymayoverflowonS3proportionaltoR3.
S' 3
R' 3 = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------micro
micro
S up m Txi,TCH S up m Txi,TCH_INNER
micro

micro

S up m Txi,TCH and S up m Txi,TCH_INNER aretheTCHandTCH_INNERserviceareasofTxirespectivelycontainingthe

userprofileupwiththemobilitym.
Foreachuserdescribedintheuserprofileupwithacircuitswitchedservicecandaterminalt,theprobabilityfortheuser
beingconnected( p up c t )iscalculatedasexplainedin"CircuitSwitchedServices"onpage 155.
macro

Then,Atollevaluatesthetrafficdemand, D up c t m ,inErlangsinthesubcell(Txj,TCH)servicearea.

macro

X up m Txj TCH p up c t +
macro

D up c t m Txj TCH =

macro

D up c t m Txj,TCH_INNER O max Txj,TCH_INNER +

micro

R' 2 D up c t m Txi,TCH_INNER O max Txi,TCH_INNER O max Txi,TCH +

micro

R' 3 X up m Txi TCH p up c t m O max Txi TCH

Foreachuserdescribedintheuserprofileupwithapacketswitchedservicepandaterminalt,theprobabilityfortheuser
beingconnected( p up p t )iscalculatedasexplainedin"PacketSwitchedServices"onpage 155.
macro

Then,Atollevaluatesthetrafficdemand, D up p t m ,inkbits/sinthesubcell(Txj,TCH)servicearea.

macro

X up m Txj TCH p up p t +
macro

D up p t m Txj TCH =

macro

D up p t m Txj,TCH_INNER O max Txj,TCH_INNER +

micro

R' 2 D up p t m Txi,TCH_INNER O max Txi,TCH_INNER O max Txi,TCH +

micro

R' 3 X up m Txi TCH p up p t m O max Txi TCH

161

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

Forsk2014

O max Txi,TCH is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the TCH subcell of Txi (micro layer),
O max Txi,TCH_INNER the maximum rate of traffic overflow indicated for the TCH_INNER subcell of Txi (macro layer),
O max Txj,TCH_INNER themaximumrateoftrafficoverflowindicatedfortheTCH_INNERsubcellofTxj(macrolayer)and
micro

X up m Txi TCH the number of subscribers with the user profile up and mobility m on the TCH service area of Txi (as
explainedin"ConcentricCells"onpage 156).

3.6.2.2 SectorTrafficMaps
WeassumethatthetrafficmapisbuiltfromacoveragebytransmitterpredictioncalculatedfortheTCHsubcellswithoptions:

HCSServersandnomarginifthenetworkonlyconsistsofnormalcellsandconcentriccells,
HighestPriorityHCSServerandnomarginincaseofHCSlayers.

Whencreatingthetrafficmap,youhavetospecifythetrafficdemandpertransmitterandperservice(throughputforamax
ratepacketswitchedserviceandErlangsforacircuitswitchedorconstantbitratepacketswitchedservice)andtheglobal
distributionofterminalsandmobilitytypes.
Let E c Txi TCH denotetheErlangsforthecircuitswitchedservice,c,ontheTCHsubcellofTxi.
Let T p Txi TCH denotethethroughputofthepacketswitchedservice(MaxBitRate),p,ontheTCHsubcellofTxi.
Let E p Txi TCH denotetheErlangsforthepacketswitchedservice(ConstantBitRate),p,ontheTCHsubcellofTxi.
Weassumethat100%ofusershavetheterminal,t,andthemobilitytype,m.

3.6.2.2.1

NormalCells(Nonconcentric,NoHCSLayer)
Foreachcircuitswitchedservice,c,Atollevaluatesthetrafficdemand,Dc,t,m,inErlangsinthesubcell(Txi,TCH)servicearea.
D c t m Txi TCH = E c Txi TCH
Foreachpacketswitchedservice(MaxBitRate),p,Atollevaluatesthetrafficdemand,Dp,t,m,inkbits/sinthesubcell(Txi,TCH)
servicearea.
D p t m Txi TCH = T p Txi TCH
Foreachpacketswitchedservice(ConstantBitRate),p,Atollevaluatesthetrafficdemand,Dp,t,m,inkbits/sinthesubcell(Txi,
TCH)servicearea.
D p t m Txi TCH = E p Txi TCH TP p GBR
TP p GBR istheguaranteedbitrateoftheconstantbitratepacketswitchedservicep.

3.6.2.2.2

ConcentricCells
Incaseofconcentriccells,AtolldistributesapartoftrafficontheTCH_INNERservicearea(TCH_INNERisthehighestpriority
trafficcarrier)andtheremainingtraffic,ontheringservedbytheTCHsubcellonly.ThetrafficspreadovertheTCH_INNER
subcellmayoverflowtotheTCHsubcell.Inthiscase,thetrafficdemandisthesameontheTCH_INNERsubcellandriseson
theTCHsubcell.
TrafficoverflowingfromtheTCH_INNERtotheTCHisnotuniformlyspreadovertheTCH
servicearea.ItisonlylocatedontheTCH_INNERservicearea.

Foreachcircuitswitchedservice,c,Atollevaluatesthetrafficdemand,Dc,t,m,inErlangsinthesubcell,(Txi,TCH_INNER)and
(Txi,TCH),serviceareas.
S Txi,TCH_INNER
D c t m Txi,TCH_INNER = -------------------------------------------- E c Txi TCH
S Txi TCH
and

D c t m Txi,TCH =

S Txi,TCH S Txi,TCH_INNER ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- E c Txi TCH +

S Txi TCH
D c t m Txi,TCH_INNER O max Txi,TCH_INNER

Foreachpacketswitchedservice(MaxBitRate),p,Atollevaluatesthetrafficdemand,Dp,t,m,inkbits/sinthesubcell,(Txi,
TCH_INNER)and(Txi,TCH),serviceareas.

162

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

S Txi,TCH_INNER
D p t m Txi,TCH_INNER = -------------------------------------------- T p Txi TCH
S Txi TCH
and

D p t m Txi,TCH =

S Txi,TCH S Txi,TCH_INNER
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- T p Txi TCH +
S Txi TCH
D p t m Txi,TCH_INNER O max Txi,TCH_INNER

O max Txi,TCH_INNER is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the TCH_INNER subcell,
S Txi,TCH and S Txi,TCH_INNER aretheTCHandTCH_INNERserviceareasofTxirespectively.
Foreachpacketswitchedservice(ConstantBitRate),p,Atollevaluatesthetrafficdemand,Dp,t,m,inkbits/sinthesubcell,(Txi,
TCH_INNER)and(Txi,TCH),serviceareas.
S Txi,TCH_INNER
D p t m Txi,TCH_INNER = -------------------------------------------- E p Txi TCH TP p GBR
S Txi TCH
and

D p t m Txi,TCH =

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------S Txi,TCH S Txi,TCH_INNER E p Txi TCH TP p GBR +

S Txi TCH
D p t m Txi,TCH_INNER O max Txi,TCH_INNER

O max Txi,TCH_INNER is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the TCH_INNER subcell,
S Txi,TCH and S Txi,TCH_INNER aretheTCHandTCH_INNERserviceareasofTxirespectively.

3.6.2.2.3

HCSLayers
WeassumewehavetwoHCSlayers:themicrolayerhasahigherpriorityandthemacrolayerhasalowerone.Txibelongsto
themicrolayerandTxjtothemacroone.ThetrafficcontainedintheinputtrafficmapcanbeassignedtoalltheHCSlayers.
NormalCells
AtolldistributestrafficontheTCHserviceareas.ThetrafficcaptureiscalculatedwiththeoptionHCSServers.Itmeansthat
macro

thereisanoverlappingareabetweenHCSlayers.Let S overlapping Txj TCH denotetheTCHserviceareaofthemacrolayer

overlappedbytheTCHserviceareaofthemicrolayer.TrafficontheoverlappingareaisdistributedtotheTCHsubcellofthe
microlayer(higherprioritylayer).Onthisarea,trafficofthemicrolayermayoverflowtothemacrolayer.Inthiscase,the
trafficdemandisthesameontheTCHsubcellofthemicrolayerbutrisesontheTCHsubcellofthemacrolayer.
TrafficoverflowingonthemacrolayerisnotuniformlyspreadovertheTCHservicearea
ofTxj.Itisonlylocatedontheoverlappingarea.

Atollstartsevaluatingthetrafficdemandonthemicrolayer(highestpriorityHCSlayer).
micro

Foreachcircuitswitchedservice,c,Atollcalculatesthetrafficdemand, D c t m ,inErlangsinthesubcell(Txi,TCH)service
area.
micro

D c t m Txi TCH = E c Txi TCH

micro

Foreachpacketswitchedservice(MaxBitRate),p,Atollcalculatesthetrafficdemand, D p t m ,inkbits/sinthesubcell(Txi,
TCH)servicearea.
micro

D p t m Txi TCH = T p Txi TCH

micro

Foreachpacketswitchedservice(ConstantBitRate),p,Atollcalculatesthetrafficdemand, D p t m ,inkbits/sinthesubcell
(Txi,TCH)servicearea.
micro

D p t m Txi TCH = E p Txi TCH TP p GBR

Then,Atollproceedswiththemacrolayer(lowerpriorityHCSlayer).
macro

Foreachcircuitswitchedservice,c,Atollcalculatesthetrafficdemand, D c t m ,inErlangsinthesubcell(Txj,TCH)servicearea.

163

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

Forsk2014

macro

S overlapping Txj TCH

macro
micro
- O max Txi TCH
D c t m Txj TCH = E c Txj TCH + D c t m Txi TCH ---------------------------------------------------micro
S
Txi TCH
macro

Foreachpacketswitchedservice(MaxBitRate),p,Atollcalculatesthetrafficdemand, D p t m ,inkbits/sinthesubcell(Txj,
TCH)servicearea.
macro

S overlapping Txj TCH

macro
micro
- O max Txi TCH
D p t m Txj TCH = T p Txj TCH + D p t m Txi TCH ---------------------------------------------------micro
S
Txi TCH
O max Txi TCH is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (in %) specified for the TCH subcell of Txi (micro cell) and
S

micro

Txi TCH theTCHserviceareaofTxi.

macro

Foreachpacketswitchedservice(ConstantBitRate),p,Atollcalculatesthetrafficdemand, D p t m ,inkbits/sinthesubcell
(Txj,TCH)servicearea.
macro

S overlapping Txj TCH

macro
micro
- O max Txi TCH
D p t m Txj TCH = E p Txi TCH TP p GBR + D p t m Txi TCH ---------------------------------------------------micro
S
Txi TCH
O max Txi TCH is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (in %) specified for the TCH subcell of Txi (micro cell) and
S

micro

Txi TCH theTCHserviceareaofTxi.

YoucanrestrictthetrafficassignementofeachtrafficmaptoaspecificHCSlayerinthe
running options of the traffic capture. If you do so, no overflow occurs between HCS
layers and the only overflow which is considered occurs within concentric cells (See
"ConcentricCells"onpage 156).

ConcentricCells
Atollevaluatesthetrafficdemandonthemicrolayerasexplainedaboveincaseofconcentriccellsandthenproceedswith
themacrolayer(lowerprioritylayer).
ThetrafficcaptureiscalculatedwiththeoptionHCSServers.ItmeansthatthereisoverlappingareasbetweenHCSlayers
trafficisspreadoveraccordingtothelayerpriority.Ontheseareas,trafficofthehigherprioritylayermayoverflow.

Figure 3.7:ConcentricCells
TheTCH_INNERserviceareaofthemacrolayerisoverlappedbythemicrolayer.Thisareaconsistsoftwoparts:anarea
macro

overlappedbytheTCHserviceareaofthemicrolayer S overlapping Txi TCH Txj,TCH_INNER andanotheroverlappedby

macro

theTCH_INNERserviceareaofthemicrolayer S overlapping Txi,TCH_INNER Txj,TCH_INNER .

Letusconsiderthreeareas,S1,S2andS3.

164

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

S1 = S

macro

macro

Txj,TCH_INNER S overlapping Txi TCH Txj,TCH_INNER

macro

S 2 = S overlapping Txi,TCH_INNER Txj,TCH_INNER

macro

S 3 = S overlapping Txi TCH Txj,TCH_INNER S 2

S

macro

Txj,TCH_INNER istheTCH_INNERsubcellserviceareaofTxj.

ThetrafficspecifiedforTxjinthemapdescription( E c Txj TCH )isspreadoverS1proportionallytoR1.

S1
R 1 = ------------------------------------map
S
Txj TCH
map

S
Txj TCH istheTCHserviceareaofTxjinthetrafficmapwiththeoptionBestsignallevelofthehighestpriority
layer.
ThetrafficspreadovertheTCH_INNERserviceareaofthemicrolayermayoverflowtotheTCHsubcell.Thetrafficoverflowing
totheTCHsubcellislocatedontheTCH_INNERservicearea.OnS2,theTCHsubcelltrafficcomingfromtheTCH_INNERsubcell
trafficoverflowmayoverflowproportionaltoR2.
S2
R 2 = ------------------------------------------------------micro
S
Txi,TCH_INNER
ThetrafficspreadovertheringonlyservedbytheTCHsubcellofthemicrolayermayoverflowonS3proportionaltoR3.
S3
R 3 = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------micro
micro
S
Txi,TCH S
Txi,TCH_INNER
macro

Foreachcircuitswitchedservice,c,Atollcalculatesthetrafficdemand, D c t m ,inErlangsinthesubcell(Txj,TCH_INNER)
servicearea.
R 1 E c Txj TCH +
macro

D c t m Txj,TCH_INNER =

micro

R 2 D c t m Txi,TCH_INNER O max Txi,TCH_INNER O max Txi TCH +

micro

micro

S
Txi TCH S
Txi,TCH_INNER
- E c Txi TCH O max Txi TCH
R 3 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------micro
S
Txi TCH
macro

Foreachpacketswitchedservice(MaxBitRate),p,Atollcalculatesthetrafficdemand, D p t m ,inkbits/sinthesubcell(Txj,
TCH_INNER)servicearea.
R 1 T p Txj TCH +
macro

D p t m Txj,TCH_INNER =

micro

R 2 D p t m Txi,TCH_INNER O max Txi,TCH_INNER O max Txi TCH +

micro

micro

S
Txi TCH S
Txi,TCH_INNER R 3 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- T p Txi TCH O max Txi TCH
micro
Txi TCH
S

O max Txi TCH is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the TCH subcell of Txi,
O max Txi,TCH_INNER isthemaximumrateoftrafficoverflow(statedin%)specifiedfortheTCH_INNERsubcellofTxiand
S

micro

Txi TCH istheTCHsubcellserviceareaofTxi.

macro

Foreachpacketswitchedservice(ConstantBitRate),p,Atollcalculatesthetrafficdemand, D p t m ,inkbits/sinthesubcell
(Txj,TCH_INNER)servicearea.
R 1 E p Txi TCH TPp GBR +
micro

R 2 D p t m Txi,TCH_INNER O max Txi,TCH_INNER O max Txi TCH +

macro

D p t m Txj,TCH_INNER =

micro
micro
S
Txi TCH S
Txi,TCH_INNER ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------micro

Txi TCH
S
R3

Txi

TCH

TP

p
p GBR O max Txi TCH

165

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

Forsk2014

O max Txi TCH is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the TCH subcell of Txi,
O max Txi,TCH_INNER isthemaximumrateoftrafficoverflow(statedin%)specifiedfortheTCH_INNERsubcellofTxiand
S

micro

Txi TCH istheTCHsubcellserviceareaofTxi.

TheareaoftheTCHringofthemacrolayerisoverlappedbythemicrolayer.Therearetwoparts:anareaoverlappedbythe
macro

TCH service area of the micro layer S overlapping Txi TCH Txj,TCHTCH_INNER and another overlapped by the
macro

TCH_INNERserviceareaofthemicrolayer S overlapping Txi,TCH_INNER Txj,TCHTCH_INNER .

Letusconsiderthreeareas,S1,S2andS3.
S' 1 = S

macro

Txj TCH S

macro

macro

Txj,TCH_INNER S overlapping Txi TCH Txj,TCHTCH_INNER

macro

S' 2 = S overlapping Txi,TCH_INNER Txj,TCHTCH_INNER

macro

S' 3 = S overlapping Txi TCH Txj,TCHTCH_INNER S' 2

S

macro

Txj TCH and S

macro

Txj,TCH_INNER aretheTCHandTCH_INNERsubcellserviceareasofTxjrespectively.

ThetrafficspecifiedforTxjinthemapdescription( E c Txj TCH )isspreadoverS1proportionaltoR1.

S' 1
R' 1 = ------------------------------------map
S
Txj TCH
map

S
Txj TCH istheTCHserviceareaofTxjinthetrafficmapwiththeoptionBestsignallevelofthehighestpriority
layer.
ThetrafficspreadovertheTCH_INNERserviceareaofthemicrolayermayoverflowtotheTCHsubcell.Thetrafficoverflowing
totheTCHsubcellislocatedontheTCH_INNERservicearea.OnS2,theTCHsubcelltrafficcomingfromtheTCH_INNER
subcelltrafficoverflowmayoverflowproportionaltoR2.
S' 2
R' 2 = ------------------------------------------------------micro
S
Txi,TCH_INNER
ThetrafficspreadovertheringonlyservedbytheTCHsubcellofthemicrolayermayoverflowonS3proportionaltoR3.
S' 3
R' 3 = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------micro
micro
S
Txi,TCH S
Txi,TCH_INNER
macro

Foreachcircuitswitchedservice,c,Atollcalculatesthetrafficdemand, D c t m ,inErlangsinthesubcell(Txj,TCH)servicearea.

R' 1 E c Txj TCH +

macro

macro

D c t m Txj TCH =

D c t m Txj,TCH_INNER O max Txj,TCH_INNER +

micro

R' 2 D c t m Txi,TCH_INNER O max Txi,TCH_INNER O max Txi TCH +

micro

micro

S
Txi,TCH S
Txi,TCH_INNER
- E c Txi TCH O max Txi TCH
R' 3 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------micro
S
Txi,TCH
macro

Foreachpacketswitchedservice(MaxBitRate),p,Atollcalculatesthetrafficdemand, D p t m ,inkbits/sinthesubcell(Txj,
TCH)servicearea.

R' 1 T p Txj TCH +

macro

macro
D p t m Txj

TCH =

D c t m Txj,TCH_INNER O max Txj,TCH_INNER +

micro

R' 2 D p t m Txi,TCH_INNER O max Txi,TCH_INNER O max Txi TCH +

micro

micro

S
Txi,TCH S
Txi,TCH_INNER
- T p Txi TCH O max Txi TCH
R' 3 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------micro
S
Txi,TCH

166

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

O max Txj,TCH_INNER isthemaximumrateoftrafficoverflow(statedin%)specifiedfortheTCH_INNERsubcellofTxj,

O max Txi TCH is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the TCH subcell of Txi,
O max Txi,TCH_INNER is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the TCH_INNER subcell of Txi,
micro

S
Txi.

Txi,TCH istheTCHsubcellserviceareaofTxiand S

micro

Txi,TCH_INNER istheTCH_INNERsubcellserviceareaof
macro

Foreachpacketswitchedservice(ConstantBitRate),p,Atollcalculatesthetrafficdemand, D p t m ,inkbits/sinthesubcell
(Txj,TCH)servicearea.

R' 1 E p Txi TCH TP p GBR +

macro

D c t m Txj,TCH_INNER O max Txj,TCH_INNER +

micro

macro

D p t m Txj TCH =

R' 2 D p t m Txi,TCH_INNER O max Txi,TCH_INNER O max Txi TCH +

micro
micro
S
Txi,TCH S
Txi,TCH_INNER
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------micro

S
Txi,TCH
R' 3

E p Txi TCH TP p GBR O max Txi TCH

O max Txj,TCH_INNER isthemaximumrateoftrafficoverflow(statedin%)specifiedfortheTCH_INNERsubcellofTxj,

O max Txi TCH is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the TCH subcell of Txi,
O max Txi,TCH_INNER is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the TCH_INNER subcell of Txi,
micro

S
Txi.

Txi,TCH istheTCHsubcellserviceareaofTxiand S

micro

Txi,TCH_INNER istheTCH_INNERsubcellserviceareaof

3.7 NetworkDimensioning
AtolliscapableofdimensioningaGSMGPRSEDGEnetworkwithamixtureofcircuitandpackageswitchedservices.This
sectiondescribesthetechnicaldetailsofAtollsdimensioningengine.

3.7.1 DimensioningModelsandQualityGraphs
InAtoll,adimensioningmodelisanentityutilizedbythedimensioningenginealongwithotherinputs(traffic,limitations,
criteria, etc.)inthe processofdimensioning.A dimensioningmodeldefines theQoSKPIsto betakeninto accountwhen
dimensioninganetworkforbothcircuitandpacketswitchedtraffic.TheusercandefineeithertouseErlangBorErlangC
queuingmodelforcircuitswitchedtrafficandcandefinewhichKPIstoconsiderwhendimensioningthenetworkforpacket
switchedtraffic.ThedimensioningenginewillonlyutilizethequalitycurvesoftheKPIselected.TheKPIsnotselectedare
supposedtobeeitheralreadysatisfactoryornotrelativelyimportant.

3.7.1.1 CircuitSwitchedTraffic
ThenetworkdimensioningforcircuitswitchedtrafficisperformedusingtheuniversallyacceptedandadoptedErlangBand
ErlangCformulas.ThedimensioningcriterionintheseformulasistheGradeofServiceortheallowedblockingprobabilityof
thecircuitswitchedtraffic.
IntheErlangBapproach,thisGradeofServiceisdefinedasthepercentageofincomingcircuitswitchedcallsthatareblocked
duetolackofresourcesortimeslots.Thisformulaimpliesalosssystem.Theblockedcallsaresupposedtobelostandthe
callerhastoreinitiateit.
IntheErlangCapproach,theGradeofServiceisthepercentageofincomingcallsthatareplacedinawaitingqueuewhen
therearenoresourcesavailable,untilsomeresourcesortimeslotsareliberated.Thisqueuingsystemhasnolostcalls.Asthe
loadonthesystemincreases,theaveragewaitingtimeinthequeuealsoincreases.
Theseformulasandtheirdetailsareavailableinmanybooks.Forexample,WirelessCommunicationsPrinciplesandPractice
byTheodoreS.Rappaport,PrenticeHall.
Followingthecommonpractice,networkdimensioninginAtollisbasedontheprinciplethatavoiceorGSMcallhaspriority
over data transmission. Therefore, as explained later in the network dimensioning steps, Atoll first performs network
dimensioningaccordingtothecircuitswitchedtrafficpresentinthesubcellinordertoensurethehigherpriorityservice
availabilitybeforeperformingthesameforthepacketswitchedtraffic.

167

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

Forsk2014

3.7.1.2 PacketSwitchedTraffic
Sincepacketswitchedtrafficdoesnotoccupyanentiretimeslotthewholetime,itismuchmorecomplicatedtostudythan
circuitswitchedtraffic.Packettrafficisintermittentandbursty.Wheneverthereispacketdatatobetransferred,aTemporary
BlockFlow(TBF)isinitiatedfortransferringthesepackets.MultipleTBFscanbemultiplexedonthesametimeslot.Thisimplies
thattherecanbemanypacketswitchedserviceusersthathavethesametimeslotsassignedforpacketdatatransferbutat
differentintervalsoftime.
This multiplexing of a numberof packet switched service usersover the same timeslots incursa certain reductioninthe
throughput(datatransferrate)foreachmultiplexeduser.Thisreductioninthethroughputismoreperceivablewhenthe
systemtrafficloadishigh.ThefollowingpartsdescribethethreemostimportantKeyPerformanceIndicatorsinGPRS/EDGE
networksandhowtheyaremodelledinAtoll.

3.7.1.2.1

Throughput
ThroughputisdefinedastheamountofdatadeliveredtotheLogicalLinkControlLayerinagivenunitoftime.Eachtemporary
blockflow(TBF),andhenceeachuser,hasanassociatedmeasuredthroughputsampleinagivennetwork.Eachnetworkwill
haveadifferentthroughputprobabilitydistributiondependingontheloadandnetworkconfiguration.Insteadofusingthe
preciseprobabilitydistributions,itismorepracticaltocomputetheaverageandpercentilethroughputvalues.
In GPRS, the resources are shared between the users being served, and consequently, the throughput is reduced as the
numberofactiveusersincreases.Thisreductioninuserperceivedthroughputismodelledthroughareductionfactor.The
throughputexperiencedbyauseraccessingaparticularservicecanbecalculatedas:
Userthroughput=NumberofallocatedtimeslotsxTimeslotcapacityxReductionFactor
Or
Userthroughputperallocatedtimeslot=TimeslotcapacityxReductionFactor
TimeslotCapacity
Thetimeslotcapacityistheaveragethroughputperfullyutilizedtimeslot.Itrepresentstheaveragethroughputfromthe
network pointofview.Itmainlydependsonthenetworkspropagationconditions andcriteria inthecoverageareaofa
transmitter(carrierpower,carriertointerferencedistribution,etc.).Itisameasureofhowmuchdatathenetworkisableto
transferwith1dataErlang,orinotherwords,howefficientlythehardwareresourcesarebeingutilizedbythenetwork.Itmay
alsodependontheRLCprotocolefficiency.
Atollcomputestheaveragetimeslotcapacityduringthetrafficanalysisandisusedtodeterminetheminimumthroughput
reductionfactor.Butsincethisinformationisdisplayedinthenetworkdimensioningresults(onlyduetorelevance),this
informationhasbeenconsideredasapartofthenetworkdimensioningprocessinthisdocument.
TimeslotUtilisation
Timeslotutilizationtakesintoaccounttheaveragenumberoftimeslotsthatareavailableforpacketswitchedtraffic.Itisa
measureofhowmuchthenetworkisloadedwithdataservices.Networkswithtimeslotutilisationcloseto100%arecloseto
saturationandtheenduserperformanceislikelytobeverypoor.
InAtollthisparameteristermedastheLoad(Trafficloadforcircuitswitchedtrafficandpacketswitchedtrafficloadforpacket
switchedtraffic).ItisdescribedinmoredetailintheNetworkdimensioningstepssection.
ReductionFactor
Reductionfactortakesintoaccounttheuserthroughputreductionduetotimeslotsharingamongmanyusers.Thefigure
belowshowshowthepeakthroughputavailablepertimeslotisreducedbyinterferenceandsharing.Reductionfactorisa
functionofthenumberoftimeslotsassignedtoauser(Nu),numberoftimeslotsavailableinthesystem(Ns)andtheaverage
systempacketswitchedtrafficload(Lp)(utilizationofresourcesinthesystem).DataErlangsordatatrafficisgivenby:
DataErlangs = L P N S

168

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Figure 3.8:ReductionofThroughputperTimeslot
Moreprecisely,thereductionfactorisafunctionoftheratioNs/Nu(Np).Npmodelstheequivalenttimeslotsthatareavailable
for the packet switched traffic in the system. For example, a 24timeslot system with each user assigned 3 timeslots per
connectioncanbemodelledbyasingletimeslotconnectionsystemwith8timeslotsintotal.
TheformulaforreductionfactorcanbederivedfollowingthesamehypothesesfollowedbyErlanginthederivationofthe
blockingprobabilityformulas(ErlangBandErlangC).
LetXbearandomvariablethatmeasuresthereductionfactorinacertainsystemstate:
0 ifn=0
1 if0<n N P

NP
------ ifn>N P
n
nistheinstantaneousnumberofconnectionsinthesystem.Thethroughputreductionfactorisdefinedas:

P X= n

X -------------------P X= 0

RF

n=0

Or,

RF =

PX= n

X --------------------------n=0
PX= i
i

Here,P(X=n)istheprobabilityfunctionofhavingnconnectionsinthesystem.Underthesameassumptionsasthoseofthe
Erlangformulas,theprobabilityfunctioncanbewrittenas:
n

LP NP
---------------------n!
P X = n = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------N
P

LP NP

LP NP
----------------------------- i NP
+ 1 N P! N P

+
--------------------i!
i=0

i=N

if0 n N P

LP NP
-----------------------------i N
P
N P! N P
P X = n = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------N
P

LP NP

LP NP
----------------------------- i NP
+ 1 N P! N P

+
--------------------i!
i=0

i = NP

ifn>N P

Hencethereductionfactorcanfinallybewrittenas:

169

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

NP

Forsk2014

LP NP
+
--------------------i!

N
LP NP
-----P-
-----------------------------i N i
P
i=1
i = N + 1 N P! N P
P
RF = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------N

LP NP
--------------------- +
i!

i=1

LP NP
-----------------------------i N
P
+ 1 N P! N P

i = NP

Thisformulaisnotdirectlyapplicableinanysoftwareapplicationduetothesummationsuptoinfinity.Atollusesthefollowing
versionofthisformulathatisexactlythesameformulawithoutthesummationoverflowproblem.
NP

NP + 1
P
n
n

NP
L P
LP NP

----------------------- ------------------- ln 1 L P +
---
N P!
n!
n

n
=
1
n
=
1
RF = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------N
P

NP

n
LP
LP NP
LP NP
---------------------- + -------------------------- -------------N P!
1 LP
n!

n=1

Thedefaultqualitycurves fortheReduction Factorhavebeenderivedusingthe above formula.Eachcurveisforafixed

numberoftimeslotsavailableforpacketswitchedtraffic(Np)describingthereductionfactoratdifferentvaluesofpacket
switchedtrafficload(Lp).ThefigurebelowcontainsallthereductionfactorqualitycurvesinAtoll.TheMaximumreduction
factor can be 1, implying a maximum throughput, and the minimum can be 0, implying a saturated system with no data
throughput.

Figure 3.9:ReductionFactorforDifferentPacketSwitchedTrafficLoads(Lp,Xaxis)
Eachcurveintheabovefigurerepresentsanequivalentnumberofpacketswitchedtimeslots,NP.

3.7.1.2.2

Delay
DelayisthetimerequiredforanLLCPDUtobecompletelytransferredfromtheSGSNtotheMS,orviceversa.Asthedelay
isafunctionofthedelaysandthelossesincurredatthepacketlevel,thenetworkparameters,suchasthepacketqueue
length,anddifferentprotocolproperties,suchasthesizeoftheLLCPDU,becomeimportant.Itisalsoquitedependentupon
theradioaccessroundtriptime(RARTT)andhasaconsiderableimpactontheapplicationlevelperformanceviewedbythe
user.
Thedelayparameterisauserlevelparameterratherthanbeinganetworklevelquantity,likethroughputpercell,timeslot
capacity,TBFblockingandreductionfactor,henceitisdifficulttomodelandiscurrentlyunderstudy.Hence,nodefaultcurve
ispresentlyavailablefordelayinAtoll.

170

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

3.7.1.2.3

BlockingProbability
InGPRS,thereisnoblockingasincircuitswitchedconnections.Ifanewtemporaryblockflow(TBF)establishmentisrequested
andtherearealreadyMuserspertimeslot,Mbeingthemaximumlimitofmultiplexingpertimeslot(Multiplexingfactor),the
requestisqueuedinthesystemtobeestablishedlaterwhenresourcesbecomeavailable.
SupposingthatMnumberofuserscanbemultiplexedoverasingletimeslot(PDCH),wecanhaveamaximumofM*Npusers
inthesystem.ThisimpliesthatifanewTBFisrequestedwhentherearealreadyM*Npusersactive,itwillbeblockedand
placedinaqueue.SotheblockingprobabilityistheprobabilityofhavingM*Np+1usersinthesystemormore,meaning,
P X= n

forn = M N P + 1

asinthiscasenisalwaysgreaterthanNp,wehave,
n

LP NP
----------------------------- i NP
N P! N P
P X = n = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------N
P

LP NP
--------------------- +
i!

i=0

LP NP
----------------------------- i NP
+ 1 N P! N P

i = NP

So,theBlockingProbabilitycanbegivenas:

BP =

LP NP
------------------------------ 1 NP
N
!

N
n = MN +1 P
P
P
P X = n = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------N

n = MN+1

LP NP
--------------------+
i!

i=0

i = NP

LP NP
------------------------------ 1 NP
+ 1 N P! N P

Eliminatingthesummationstoinfinity,theblockingprobabilitycanbestatedinasimplerform:
M NP

LP NP
LP
----------------------------------------- ------------ M NP NP 1 L
P
N P! N P
BP = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------N
P

NP

i
LP
LP NP LP NP
+ -------------------------- --------------------------------N P!
1 LP
i!

i=0

TheaboveformulahasbeenusedtogeneratethedefaultqualitycurvesforblockingprobabilityinAtoll.
Thesegraphsaregeneratedforausermultiplexingfactorof8userspertimeslot.Eachcurverepresentsanequivalentnumber
ofpacketswitchedtimeslots,NP.
Thecurvesdepicttheblockingprobabilitiesfordifferentnumberofavailableconnections(Np)atdifferentpacketswitched
trafficloads(Lp)forafixedusermultiplexingfactorof8.Thefigurebelowcontainsalltheblockingprobabilitycurvesfor
packetswitchedtrafficdimensioninginAtoll.Theblockingprobabilityincreaseswiththepacketswitchedtrafficload,which
impliesthatasthepacketswitchedtrafficincreasesforagivennumberoftimeslots,thesystemstartstogetmoreandmore
loaded,hencethereishigherprobabilityofhavingatemporaryblockflowplacedinawaitingqueue.

171

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

Forsk2014

Figure 3.10:BlockingProbabilityforDifferentPacketSwitchedTrafficLoads(Lp,Xaxis)
Reference: T. Halonen, J. Romero, J. Melero; GSM, GPRS and EDGE performance
Evolutiontowards3G/UMTS,JohnWileyandSonsLtd.

3.7.2 NetworkDimensioningProcess
Thenetworkdimensioningprocessisdescribedbelowindetail.Asthewholedimensioningprocessisinfactachainofsmall
processesthathavethererespectiveinputsandoutputs,withoutputsofaprecedingonebeingtheinputstothenext,the
bestmethodistodetaileachprocessindividuallyinformofstepsoftheglobaldimensioningprocess.

3.7.2.1 NetworkDimensioningEngine
Duringthedimensioningprocess,Atollfirstcomputesthenumberoftimeslotsrequiredtoaccommodatethecircuitswitched
traffic.Thenitcalculatesthenumberoftimeslotstoaddinordertosatisfythedemandofpacketswitchedtraffic.Thisis
performedusingthequalitycurvesenteredinthedimensioningmodelused.Ifthedimensioningmodelhasbeenindicatedto
takeallthreeKPIsintoaccount(throughputreductionfactor,delayandblockingprobability),thenumberoftimeslotstobe
addediscalculatedsuchthat:

Thethroughputreductionfactorisgreaterthantheminimumthroughputreductionfactor,

Delayislessthanthemaximumpermissibledelaydefinedintheserviceproperties,and

Theblockingprobabilityislessthanthemaximumallowableblockingprobabilitydefinedintheserviceproperties.

ThefigurebelowdepictsasimplifiedflowchartofthedimensioningengineinAtoll.

Figure 3.11:NetworkDimensioningProcess

172

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Onthewhole,followingaretheinputsandoutputsofthenetworkdimensioningprocess:

3.7.2.1.1

Inputs

3.7.2.1.2

Circuitswitchedtrafficdemand
Packetswitchedtrafficdemand
Timeslotconfigurationsdefinedforeachsubcell
TargettrafficoverflowrateandHalfratetrafficratioforeachsubcell
Serviceavailabilitycriteria:minimumrequiredthroughputperuser,maximumpermissibledelay,maximumallowable
blockingprobabilityetc.
Dimensioningmodelparameters:MaximumnumberofTRXspertransmitter,dimensioningmodelforcircuitswitched
traffic,numberofminimumdedicatedpacketswitchedtimeslotspertransmitter,maximumnumberofTRXsadded
forpacketswitchedservices,KPIstoconsider,andtheirqualitycurves.

Outputs

NumberofrequiredTRXspertransmitter
Numberofrequiredshared,circuitswitchedandpacketswitchedtimeslots
Trafficload
Servedcircuitswitchedtraffic
Servedpacketswitchedtraffic
Effectiverateoftrafficoverflow
ActualKPIvalues:throughputreductionfactor,delayandblockingprobability

3.7.2.2 NetworkDimensioningSteps
ThissectiondescribestheentireprocessstepbystepasitisactuallyperformedinAtoll.Detailsofthecalculationsofthe
parametersthatarecalculatedduringeachsteparedescribedaswell.

3.7.2.2.1

Step1:TimeslotsRequiredforCSTraffic
Atollcomputesthenumberoftimeslotsrequiredtoaccommodatethecircuitswitchedtrafficassignedtoeachsubcell.Atoll
takesthecircuitswitchedtrafficdemand(Erlangs)eitheruserdefinedorcalculatedinthetrafficanalysisandassignedtothe
currentsubcellandthemaximumblockingprobabilitydefinedforthecircuitswitchedservice,andcomputestherequired
numberoftimeslotstosatisfythisdemandusingtheErlangBorErlangCformula(asdefinedbytheuser).
Iftheuserdefinedtargetrateoftrafficoverflowpersubcell,OTarget,isgreaterthanthemaximumblockingratedefinedinthe
servicesproperties,itisgoingtobetakenastheGradeofServicerequiredforthatsubcellinsteadofthemaximumblocking
rateoftheservice.
FortheblockingprobabilityGoSandcircuitswitchedtrafficdemandTDC,Atolldeterminestherequirednumberoftimeslots
TSreq.Cforeachsubcellusingformulasdescribedbelow.Infact,AtollsearchesforTSreq.Cvalueuntilthedefinedgradeof
serviceisreached.
ForErlangB,wehave:
TS reqC

TD C
-------------------------- TS reqC !
GoS = TS
-----------------------------reqC

TD C
---------------k!

k=0

ForErlangC,wehave:
TS

reqC

TD C
GoS = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TS
1
reqC

TD C

TS reqC

TD C
+ TS reqC ! 1 --------------
TS reqC

TD C
---------------k!

k=0

Atollconsiderstheeffectofhalfratecircuitswitchedtrafficbytakingintoaccountauserdefinedpercentageofhalfrate
traffic.Atollcomputestheeffectiveequivalentnumberoffullratetimeslotsthatwillberequiredtocarrythetotaltrafficwith
thedefinedpercentageofhalfratetraffic.
IfthenumberoftimeslotsrequiredtoaccommodatethefullratecircuitswitchedtrafficisTSreq.FR,andthepercentageof
halfratetrafficwithinthesubcellisdefinedbyHR,thentheeffectivenumberofequivalentfullratecircuitswitchedtimeslots
TSeff.thatcancarrythistrafficmixiscalculatedby:
TS eff = TS reqFR 1 HR
-------

173

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

Forsk2014

Atollemploysthissimplifiedapproachtointegratinghalfratecircuitswitchedtraffic,whichprovidesapproximatelythesame
resultsasobtainedbyusingthehalfratetrafficcharts.

3.7.2.2.2

Step2:TRXsRequiredforCSTrafficandDedicatedPSTimeslots
ThisstageofthenetworkdimensioningprocesscomputesthenumberofTRXsrequiredtocarrythecircuitswitchedtraffic
demandthroughthenumberofrequiredtimeslotscalculatedaboveandthetimeslotconfigurationdefinedbytheuserinthe
networksettings.AtolldistributesthenumberofrequiredcircuitswitchedtimeslotscalculatedinStep1takingintoaccount
thepresenceofdedicatedpacketswitchedtimeslotsineachTRXaccordingtothetimeslotconfigurations.
IfatimeslotconfigurationdefinesacertainnumberofdedicatedpacketswitchedtimeslotspreallocatedincertainTRXs,
thosetimeslotswillnotbeconsideredcapableofcarryingcircuitswitchedtrafficandhencewillnotbeallocated.Forexample,
if4timeslotshavebeenmarkedaspacketswitchedtimeslotsinthefirstTRXandAtollcomputes8timeslotsforcarryinga
certain circuit switched traffic demand, then the number of TRXs to be allocated cannot be 1 even if there is no packet
switchedtrafficconsideredyet.
Thetotalnumbersoftimeslotsthatcarrycircuitswitchedandpacketswitchedtrafficrespectivelyarethesumsofrespective
dedicatedandsharedtimeslots:
TS P = TS S + TS P dedicated and TS C = TS S + TS C dedicated

3.7.2.2.3

Step3:EffectiveCSBlocking,EffectiveCSTrafficOverflowandServedCSTraffic
Inthisstep,thepreviouslycalculatednumberofrequiredTRXsisusedtocomputetheeffectiveblockingrateforthecircuit
switchedtraffic.ThisisperformedbyusingtheErlangBorErlangCformulawiththecircuitswitchedtrafficdemandandthe
number of required TRXs as inputs and computing the Grade of Service (or blocking probability). It then calculates the
effectivetrafficoverflowrate,Oeff..
IncaseofErlangBformula,the effectiverateof trafficoverflowforthecircuitswitched trafficisthesameasthecircuit
switchedblockingrate.WhileincaseoftheErlangCmodel,thecircuitswitchedtrafficissupposedtobeplacedinaninfinite
lengthwaitingqueue.Thisimpliesthatthereisnooverflowinthiscase.
Fromthisdata,italsocomputestheservedcircuitswitchedtraffic.Thisisthedifferenceofthecircuitswitchedtrafficdemand
andthepercentageoftrafficthatoverflowsfromthesubcelltoothersubcellscalculatedabove.Hence,foraneffectivetraffic
overflowrateofOeff.andthecircuitswitchedtrafficdemandofTDC,theservedcircuitswitchedtrafficSTCiscomputedas:
ST C = TD C 1 O eff

3.7.2.2.4

Step4:TRXstoAddforPSTraffic
Thisstepisthecoreofthedimensioningprocessforpacketswitchedservices.Firstofall,AtollcomputesthenumberofTRXs
tobeaddedtocarrythepacketswitchedtrafficdemand.ThisisthenumberofTRXsthatcontaindedicatedpacketswitched
andsharedtimeslots.
TodeterminethisnumberofTRXs,Atollcalculatestheequivalentaveragepacketswitchedtrafficdemandintimeslotsby
studyingeachpixelcoveredbythetransmitter.Thiscalculationisinfactperformedinthetrafficanalysisprocessorisuser
definedinthesubcellstable.Knowingthetrafficdemandperpixelofthecoveredareaintermsofkbpsandthemaximum
attainablethroughputperpixel(accordingtotheCand/orC/IconditionsandthecodingschemecurvesintheGPRS/EDGE
configuration),Atollcalculatestheaveragetrafficdemandinpacketswitchedtimeslotsby:
TD P

Timeslots

Trafficdemandperpixel(kbps)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------Throughputperpixel(kbps)

pixel

Theaveragetimeslotcapacityofatransmitteriscalculatedbydividingthepacketswitchedtrafficdemandovertheentire
coveragearea(inkbps)bythepacketswitchedtrafficdemandintimeslotscalculatedabove.
Withthenumberoftimeslotsrequiredtoservethecircuitswitchedtraffic,thetimeslotsrequiredforpacketswitchedtraffic
and their respective distributions according to the timeslot configurations being known, Atoll calculates the number of
timeslots available for carrying the packet switched traffic demand. These timeslots can be dedicated packet switched
timeslotsandthesharedones.So,followingtheprinciplethatsharedtimeslotsarepotentialcarriersofbothtraffictypes,
TS P = TS S + TS P dedicated
TS C = TS S + TS C dedicated
Thepacketswitchedtrafficloadiscalculatedbytheformula:
ST C TS C dedicated + TD P

Timeslots
L P = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------TS P
ThesecondimportantparameterforthecalculationofReductionFactor,DelayandBlockingProbabilityistheequivalent
numberofavailabletimeslotsforpacketswitchedtraffic,i.e.NP.Thisiscomputedbydividingthetotalnumberoftimeslots

174

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

availableforcarryingpacketswitchedtrafficbythenumberofdownlinktimeslotsdefinedinthemobileterminalproperties.
So,NPiscalculatedatthisstageas:
TS P
N P = ----------------------TS Terminal
,TSTerminalisthenumberoftimeslotsthataterminalwilluseinpacketswitchedcalls.
ThenumbertimeslotsthataterminalcanuseinpacketswitchedcallsistheproductofthenumberofavailableDLtimeslots
forpacketswitchedservices(onaframe)andthenumberofsimultaneouscarriers(incaseofEDGEevolution).
Thenumberoftimeslotsthataterminalwilluseinpacketswitchedcallsisdeterminedbytakingthelowerofthemaximum
numberoftimeslotsonacarrierforpacketswitchedservicedefinedintheservicepropertiesandthemaximumnumberof
timeslotsthatamobileterminalcanuseforpacketswitchedservices(seeabove)onacarrier.
TS Terminal = min TS Max Service TS Max TerminalType
and TS Max TerminalType = TS DL TerminalType Carriers DL TerminalType
Here,themin(X,Y)functionyieldsthelowervalueamongXandYasresult.
Now,knowingthepacketswitchedtrafficload,LP,andtheequivalentnumberofavailabletimeslots,NP,Atollfindsoutthe
KPIsthathavebeenselectedbeforelaunchingthedimensioningprocessusingthequalitycurvesstoredinthedimensioning
model.
ThisparticularpartofthisstepcanbeiterativeiftheKPIstoconsiderindimensioningarenotsatisfiedinthefirsttry.Ifthe
KPIs calculated above are within acceptable limits as defined by the user, it means that the dimensioning process has
acceptable results. If these KPIs are not satisfied, then Atoll increases the number of TRXs calculated for carrying packet
switchedtrafficby1(eachincrementadding8moretimeslotsforcarryingpacketswitchedtrafficastheleastunitthatcanbe
physicallyaddedorremovedisaTRX)andresumesthecomputationsfromStep3.Itthenrecalculatesthepacketswitched
trafficload,LP,andtheequivalentnumberofavailabletimeslots,NP.ThenitrecomputestheKPIswiththesenewvaluesofLP
andNP.IftheKPIsarewithinsatisfactorylimitstheresultsareconsideredtobeacceptable.Otherwise,Atollperformsanother
iterationtofindthebestpossibleresults.
ThecalculatedvaluesofalltheKPIsarecomparedwiththeonesdefinedintheserviceproperties.Thevaluesformaximum
Delay and Blocking probability are defined directly in the properties but the minimum throughput reduction factor is
calculatedbyAtollusingtheusersinputs:minimumthroughputperuserandrequiredavailability.Thiscalculationisinfact
performedduringthetrafficanalysisprocess,butsinceitisrelevanttothedimensioningprocedure,itisdisplayedinacolumn
inthedimensioningresultssothattheusercaneasilycomparetheminimumrequirementonthereductionfactorKPIwith
theresultingone.Ifdimensioningisnotbasedonatrafficanalysis,theminimumthroughputreductionfactorisauserdefined
parameter.
MinimumThroughputReductionFactorCalculation
Theminimumthroughputreductionfactoriscomputedusingtheinputdata:minimumrequiredthroughputperuserdefined
intheserviceproperties,theaveragethroughputpertimeslotdeducedfromthethroughputcurvesstoredintheGPRS/EDGE
configurationpropertiesforeachcodingscheme,thetotalnumberofdownlinktimeslotsdefinedinthepropertiesofthe
mobileterminal(See TS Max TerminalType defintionabove)andtherequiredavailabilitydefinedintheserviceproperties.
ItisatthestageofcalculatingtheaveragetimeslotcapacitypertransmitterthatAtollstudieseachcoveredpixelforcarrier
powerorcarriertointerferenceratio.Accordingtothemeasuredcarrierpowerorcarriertointerferenceratio,Atolldeduces
themaximumthroughputavailableonthatpixelthroughthethroughputvs.Corthroughputvs.C/IcurvesoftheGPRS/EDGE
configuration.
ThethroughputpertimeslotperpixelTPTS,PixelcanbeeitherafunctionofcarrierpowerC,orcarrierpowerCandthecarrier
tointerferenceratioC/I,dependingontheuserdefinedtrafficanalysisRFconditionscriteria.Therefore,
TP TS Pixel = f C
Or
C
TP TS Pixel = f C and TP TS Pixel = f ---
i
Therequiredavailabilityparameterdefinesthepercentageofpixelswithinthecoverageareaofthetransmitterthatmust
satisfy the minimum throughput condition. This parameter renders usermanageable flexibility to the throughput
requirementconstraint.
To calculate the minimum throughput reduction factor for the transmitter, Atoll computes the minimum throughput
reductionfactorforeachpixelusingtheformula:

175

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

Forsk2014

TP user min
RF min Pixel = ---------------------------------------------------TP TS Pixel TS Terminal
Oncetheminimumreductionfactorforeachpixelisknown,Atollcalculatestheglobalminimumreductionfactorthatis
satisfied by the percentage of covered pixels defined in the required availability. The following example may help in
understandingtheconceptandcalculationmethod.
Example:Letthetotalnumberofpixels,coveredbyasubcellS,be1050.Thereliabilitylevelsetto90%.Thisimpliesthatthe
requiredminimumthroughputforthegivenservicewillbeavailableat90%ofthepixelscovered.This,inturn,impliesthat
therewillbeacertainlimitonthereductionfactor,i.e.iftheactualreductionfactorinthatsubcellbecomeslessthana
minimumrequired,theservicewillnotbesatisfactory.
Atollcomputestheminimumreductionfactorateachpixelusingtheformulamentionedabove,andoutputsthefollowing
results:
RFmin

Numberofpixels

0.3

189

0.36

57

0.5

20

0.6

200

0.72

473

0.9

23

0.98

87

Soforareliabilitylevelof90%,thecorrespondingRFminwillbetheoneprovidedatleast90%ofthepixelscovered,i.e.945
pixels.ThecorrespondingvalueoftheresultingRFmininthisexamplehenceturnsouttobe0.9,sincethisvaluecovers962
pixelsintotal.Only87ofthecoveredpixelsimplyanRFminof0.98.Thesewillbethepixelsthatdonotprovidesatisfactory
service.
This calculation is performed for each service type available in the subcell coverage area. The final minimum throughput
reductionfactoristhehighestoneamongstallcalculatedforeachserviceseparately.
The minimum throughput reduction factor RFmin value is a minimum requirement that must be fulfilled by the network
dimensioningprocesswhentheReductionFactorKPIisselectedinthedimensioningmodel.

Figure 3.12:MinimumThroughputReductionFactor

3.7.2.2.5

Step5:ServedPSTraffic
Atollcalculatestheservedpacketswitchedtrafficusingthenumberoftimeslotsavailabletocarrythepacketswitchedtraffic
demand.Astheresultoftheaboveiterativestep,Atollalwaysfindsthebestpossibleanswerintermsofnumberoftimeslots
requiredtocarrythepacketswitchedtrafficdemandunlesstherequirementexceedsthemaximumlimitonthenumberof
thepacketswitchedtraffictimeslotsdefinedinthedimensioningmodelproperties.Hence,thereisnopackettrafficoverflow
unlessthepacketswitchedtrafficdemandrequiresmoreTRXsthanthemaximumallowed

3.7.2.2.6

Step6:TotalTrafficLoad
Thisstepcalculatesthefinalresultofthedimensioningprocess,i.e.thetotaltrafficload.ThetotaltrafficloadLiscalculatedas:

176

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

ST C + ST P
L = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------TS C dedicated + TS P dedicated + TS S
,

STCistheservedcircuitswitchedtraffic
STPistheservedpacketswitchedtraffic
TSC,dedicatedisthenumberofdedicatedcircuitswitchedtimeslots
TSP,dedicatedisthenumberofdedicatedpacketswitchedtimeslots
TSSisthenumberofsharedtimeslots

3.8 KeyPerformanceIndicatorsCalculation
ThisfeaturecalculatesthecurrentvaluesforallcircuitswitchedandpacketswitchedKeyPerformanceIndicatorsasameasure
ofthecurrentperformanceofthenetwork.Itcanbeusedtoevaluateanalreadydimensionednetworkinwhichrecenttraffic
changes have been made in limited regions to infer the possible problematic areas and then to improve the network
dimensioningwithrespecttothesechanges.
Theconceptofthiscomputationistheinverseofthatofthedimensioningprocess.Inthiscase,Atollhastheresultsofthe
dimensioningprocessalreadycommittedandknown.AtollthencomputesthecurrentvaluesforalltheKPIsknowingthe
numberofrequiredTRXs,therespectivenumbersofsharedanddedicatedtimeslotsandthecircuitswitchedandpacket
switchedtrafficdemands.
Thecomputationalgorithmutilizestheparameterssetinthedimensioningmodelpropertiesandthequalitycurvesforthe
throughputreductionfactor,delayandtheblockingprobability.
Thefollowingconventionalrelationsapply:
If,

TSC,dedicatedisthenumberoftimeslotsdedicatedtothecircuitswitchedtraffic,
TSP,dedicatedisthenumberoftimeslotsdedicatedtothepacketswitchedtraffic,
TSSisthenumberofsharedtimeslotsforatransmitter,

Then,thenumberoftimeslotsavailableforthecircuitswitchedtraffic,TSC,isdefinedas:
TS C = TS S + TS C dedicated
Andthenumberoftimeslotsavailableforthepacketswitchedtraffic,TSP,isgivenby:
TS P = TS S + TS P dedicated

3.8.1 CircuitSwitchedTraffic
Foreachsubcell,Atollhasalreadycalculatedtheeffectivetrafficoverflowrateandtheblockingrateduringthedimensioning
process.Alsoknowingthecircuitswitchedtrafficdemand,TDC,andthenumberoftimeslotsavailableforcircuitswitched
traffic,TSC,theblockingprobabilitycanbeeasilycomputedusingtheErlangformulasortables.

3.8.1.1 ErlangB
Underthecurrentconditionsofcircuitswitchedtrafficdemand,TDC,andthenumberoftimeslotsavailableforthecircuit
switchedtraffic,TSC,thepercentageofblockedcircuitswitchedtrafficcanbecomputedthrough:
TS C

TD C
-------------------- TS C !
%ofblockedtraffic = -------------------------TS
C

TD C
---------------k!

k=0

In a network dimensioning based on Erlang B model, the circuit switched traffic overflow rate, OC, is the same as the
percentageoftrafficblockedbythesubcellcalculatedabove.

3.8.1.2 ErlangC
Similarly,underthecurrentconditionsofcircuitswitchedtrafficdemand,TDC,andthenumberoftimeslotsavailableforthe
circuitswitchedtraffic,TSC,thepercentageofdelayedcircuitswitchedtrafficcanbecomputedthrough:

177

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

Forsk2014
TS

TD C
%oftrafficdelayed = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TS 1
C

TD C

TS

TD
+ TS C ! 1 --------C-
TS C

TD C
---------------k!

k=0

Ifthecircuitswitchedtrafficdemand,TDC,ishigherthanthenumberoftimeslotsavailabletoaccommodatecircuitswitched
traffic,thecolumnforthisresultwillbeemptysignifyingthatthereisapercentageofcircuitswitchedtrafficactuallybeing
rejectedratherthanjustbeingdelayedundertheprincipleofErlangCmodel.
Thecircuitswitchedtrafficoverflowrate,OC,willbe0ifthecircuitswitchedtrafficdemand,TDC,islessthanthenumberof
timeslotsavailableforthecircuitswitchedtraffic,TSC.
If,ontheotherhand,thecircuitswitchedtrafficdemand,TDC,ishigherthanthenumberoftimeslotsavailabletocarrythe
circuitswitchedtraffic, TSC,then therewillbe acertain percentageofcircuitswitchedtrafficthatwilloverflowfromthe
subcell.Thiscircuitswitchedtrafficoverflowrate,OC,iscalculatedas:
TD C TS C
O C = ----------------------TD C

3.8.1.3 ServedCircuitSwitchedTraffic
Theresultoftheabovetwoprocesseswillbeatrafficoverflowrateforthecircuitswitchedtrafficforeachsubcell,OC.The
servedcircuitswitchedtraffic,STC,iscalculatedas:
ST C = TD C 1 O C

3.8.2 PacketSwitchedTraffic
Identifyingthetotaltrafficdemand,TDT,(circuitswitchedtrafficdemand+packetswitchedtrafficdemand)as:
TD T = TD C + TD P
Thefollowingtwocasescanbeconsidered.

3.8.2.1 Case1:TotalTrafficDemand>Dedicated+SharedTimeslots
Inthecasethetotalnumberoftimeslotsavailableislessthanthetotaltrafficdemand,therewillbepacketswitcheddata
trafficthatwillberejectedbythesubcellasitwillnotbeabletoaccommodateit.Thefollowingresultsareexpectedinthis
case:

3.8.2.1.1

TrafficLoad
Thetrafficloadwillbe100%,asthesubcellwillhavemoretraffictocarrythanitcan.Thisimpliesthatthesystemwillbe
loadedtothemaximumandevensaturated.Hencetheuserlevelqualityofserviceisboundtobeveryunsatisfactory.

3.8.2.1.2

PacketSwitchedTrafficOverflow
Ina100%loaded,orevensaturatedsubcell,thepacketswitcheddatacallswillstartbeingrejectedbecauseofshortageof
availableresources.Hencetherewillbeaperceptiblepacketswitchedtrafficoverflowinthissubcell,OP.Thisoverflowrate
iscalculatedasshowbelow:
TS C dedicated + TS P dedicated + TS S ST C
O P = 1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 100
TD P

3.8.2.1.3

ThroughputReductionFactor
Theresultingthroughputreductionfactorfora100%loadedorsaturatedsubcellwillbe0.Hence,thethroughputperceived
bythepacketswitchedserviceuserwillbe0,implyingaverybadqualityofservice.

3.8.2.1.4

Delay
Againfora100%loadedorsaturatedsubcell,thedelayatthepacketswitchedserviceuserendwillbeinfiniteasthereisno
datatransfer(throughput=0).

3.8.2.1.5

BlockingProbability
Allthedatapacketswillberejectedbythesystemsinceitissaturatedandhasnofreeresourcestoallocatetoincomingdata
packets.Hence,theblockingprobabilitywillbe100%.

178

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

3.8.2.1.6

ServedPacketSwitchedTraffic
Withthepacketswitcheddatatrafficoverflowingfromthesubcell,therewillbeapartofthattrafficthatisnotserved.The
servedpacketswitcheddatatraffic,STP,iscalculatedonthesameprincipleastheservedcircuitswitchedtraffic:
ST P = TD P 1 O P

3.8.2.2 Case2:TotalTrafficDemand<Dedicated+SharedTimeslots
Inthecasethetotaltrafficdemandislessthanthenumberoftimeslotsavailabletocarrythetraffic,thesubcellwillnotbe
saturatedandtherewillbesomededuciblevaluesforallthedataKPIs.Inanormallyloadedsubcell,thepacketswitcheddata
trafficwillhavenooverflowpercentage.Thisisduetothefactthatthepacketswitcheddatatrafficisratherplacedinawaiting
queuethanberejected.
Therefore,therewillbeawithinlimitspacketswitchedtrafficload,LP,calculatedasunder:
ST C TS C dedicated + TD P

Timeslots
L P = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------TS P
ThesecondparameterforcomputingtheKPIsfromthequalitycurvesofthedimensioningmodelisthenumberofequivalent
timeslotsavailableforthepacketswitcheddatatraffic,NP,whichiscalculatedinthesamemannerasinthedimensioning
processaswell:
TS P
N P = ----------------------TS Terminal
Theseparameterscalculated,nowAtollcancomputetherequiredKPIsthroughtheirrespectivequalitycurves.

3.8.2.2.1

TrafficLoad
Thetrafficloadiscomputedknowingthetotaltrafficdemandandthetotalnumberoftimeslotsavailabletocarrytheentire
trafficdemand:
TD T
TrafficLoad = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------TS C dedicated + TS P dedicated + TS S

3.8.2.2.2

PacketSwitchedTrafficOverflow
In a normally loaded subcell, no packet switched data calls will be rejected. The packet switched traffic overflow will,
therefore,be0.

3.8.2.2.3

ThroughputReductionFactor
Theresultingthroughputreductionfactorforanormallyloadedsubcelliscalculatedthroughthethroughputreductionfactor
qualitycurveforgivenpacketswitchedtrafficload,LP,andnumberofequivalenttimeslots,NP.

3.8.2.2.4

Delay
Theresultingdelaythesubcelliscalculatedthroughthedelayqualitycurveforgivenpacketswitchedtrafficload,LP,and
numberofequivalenttimeslots,NP.

3.8.2.2.5

BlockingProbability
Theresultingblockingprobabilityforanormallyloadedsubcelliscalculatedthroughtheblockingprobabilityqualitycurvefor
givenpacketswitchedtrafficload,LP,andnumberofequivalenttimeslots,NP.

3.8.2.2.6

ServedPacketSwitchedTraffic
As there is no overflow of the packet switched traffic demand from the subcell under consideration, the served packet
switchedtrafficwillbethesameasthepacketswitchedtrafficdemand:
ST P = TD P

179

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

Forsk2014

3.9 Simulations
Onceyouhavemodelledthenetworkservicesandusersandhavecreatedtrafficmaps,youcancreatesimulations.Thesimu
lationprocessconsistsoftwosteps:
1. Obtainingarealisticuserdistribution:AtollgeneratesauserdistributionusingaMonteCarloalgorithm;thisuser
distributionisbasedonthetrafficdatabaseandtrafficmapsandisweightedbyaPoissondistributionbetweensimu
lationsofthesamegroup.
Eachuserisassignedaservice,amobilitytype,andanactivitystatusbyrandomtrial,accordingtoaprobabilitylaw
thatusesthetrafficdatabase.
Theuseractivitystatusisanimportantoutputoftherandomtrialandhasdirectconsequencesonthenextstepof
thesimulationandonthenetworkinterferences.Ausercanbeeitheractiveorinactive.Bothactiveandinactiveusers
consumeradioresourcesandcreateinterference.
Finally,anotherrandomtrialdeterminesuserpositionsintheirrespectivetrafficzone(possiblyaccordingtotheclut
terweightingandtheindoorratioperclutterclass).
2. Modellingnetworkregulationmechanisms:AtollmanagestheGSMresourcesasdescribedin"RadioResourceMan
agementinGSM"onpage 180

3.9.1 RadioResourceManagementinGSM
Inthissection,thefollowingareexplained:

"MSA(MobileStationAllocation)Definition"onpage 127
"GSMSimulationProcess"onpage 180.

3.9.1.1 GSMSimulationProcess
Figure 3.13showstheGSMsimulationalgorithm.ThespecificsimulationprocessinGSMconsistsofthefollowingsteps:

180

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Figure 3.13:GSMsimulationalgorithm
Foreachsimulation,thesimulationprocess,
1. Itsetsinitialvaluesforthefollowingparameters:
a. Mobiletransmissionpowerissettothemaximummobilepower.
b. CelltrafficloadsforeachMSAandtransmitteraresettotheiraveragecurrentvalueintheTransmitterstable(one
trafficloadvaluepersubcell).
Foreachiterationk,thesimulationprocess
2. Foreachcircuitswitchedmobile
a. DeterminestheserverandtheMSAtowhichthecircuitswitchedmobileisattached.
b. DeterminesthedownlinkC/(I+N)foreachofthesemobilesasexplainedin"DLCarriertoInterferenceRatioCal
culation"onpage 127.
c. DeterminestheuplinkC/(I+N)foreachofthesemobilesasexplained"ULC/IEvaluation"onpage 152
d. DeterminesMSAcodecmodesindownlinkasexplainedin"CalculationsBasedonC/(I+N)"onpage 144partof
"CQICalculationWithoutIdealLinkAdaptation"onpage 143.
e. DeterminesMSAcodecmodesinuplinkasexplainedin"CodecModeSelection"onpage 155.
f. Performsthecorrespondingtargetpowercontrols.

181

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

Forsk2014

Seedetailedinformationin"ServersSelection"onpage 183and"CodecModeAssignmentandDLPowerControl"on
page 183.
3. Foreachpacketswitchedmobile
a. DeterminestheserverandtheMSAtowhichthepacketswitchedmobileisattached.
b. DeterminesthedownlinkC/(I+N)foreachofthesemobilesasexplainedin"DLCarriertoInterferenceRatioCal
culation"onpage 127.
c. DeterminestheuplinkC/(I+N)foreachofthesemobilesasexplained"ULC/IEvaluation"onpage 152
d. DeterminesMSAcodingschemeindownlinkasexplainedin"CalculationsBasedonC/(I+N)"onpage 133partof
"CodingSchemeSelectionandThroughputCalculationWithoutIdealLinkAdaptation"onpage 133.
e. DeterminesMSAcodingschemeinuplinkasexplainedin"CodingSchemeSelection"onpage 154.
f. Evaluatesthenumberofnecessarytimeslotstoreachtheminimumdownlinkanduplinkthroughputdemands
(definedintherequestedservice)oftheusersrandomlyranked.
g. Performsthecorrespondingtargetpowercontrols.ThenumberoftimeslotsinDLandULareobviouslynotlinked.
Seedetailedinformationin"ServersSelection"onpage 183and"CodingSchemeAssignment,ThroughputEvaluation
andDLPowerControl"onpage 184.
4. Itequallysharestheremainingresourcestopacketswitcheduserswhodidnotreachtheirmaximumthroughput
demands.Resourcesandthroughputsarefinallyassignedtoeachpacketswitcheduser.
Seedetailedinformationin"CodecModeAssignmentandDLPowerControl"onpage 183.
5. Itupdatesthetrafficloads,HalfRatetrafficratios,DLpowercontrolgainsandDTXgainsofallthesubcellsaccording
totheresourcesinuseandthetotalresources.
Seedetailedinformationin"SubcellTrafficLoadsManagement"onpage 185,"HalfRateTrafficRatioManagement"
onpage 185,"DLPowerControlGainManagement"onpage 186and"DTXDLGainManagement"onpage 186.
6. ItupdatestheULtrafficloadsofallthesubcellsandtheULnoiserisesofalltheTRXsaccordingtotheresourcesinuse
andthetotalresources.
7. Performstheconvergencetesttoseewhetherthedifferencesbetweenthecurrentandthenewloadsarewithinthe
convergencethresholds.
Theconvergencecriteriaareevaluatedattheendofeachiterationk,andcanbewrittenasfollows:
Subcell i

TL DL GSM

Subcell i

TL UL GSM

Subcell

Subcell i

PCG DL GSM

Subcell

i
i
TL
TL DL GSM
DL GSM k
AllSubcell

Max

Subcell

Subcell

i
i
TL
TL UL GSM
UL GSM k
AllSubcell

Max

Subcell i

If TL DL GSM

TRX

i
i
Max NR UL GSM NR UL GSM
k
AllTRX
Subcell i

Req

, PCG DL GSM

k 1

Subcell i

Req

k 1

k 1

TRX

NR UL GSM

Subcell

TRX i

Subcell

i
i
PCG
DL GSM k PCG DL GSM

AllSubcell

Max

k 1

, TL UL GSM

TRX i

Req

and NR UL GSM are the simulation convergence

k

thresholdsdefinedwhencreatingthesimulation,Atollstopsthesimulationinthefollowingcases.
Convergence:Simulationhasconvergedbetweeniterationk1andkif:
Subcell i

Subcell i

TL DL GSM TL DL GSM
k

TRX i

Subcell i

Req

Subcelli

AND PCGDL GSM PCG DL GSM

k

Subcell i

Req

Subcell i

AND TL UL GSM TL UL GSM

k

Req

AND

TRX i

NR UL GSM NR UL GSM
k

Req

Noconvergence:Simulationhasnotconvergedevenafterthelastiteration,i.e.,k=MaxNumberofIterationsdefined
Subcell

Subcell

Subcell i

Subcell i

TL UL GSM TL UL GSM
k

182

TRX i

Req

Subcell

when creating the simulation, if: TL DL GSM TL DL GSM

Req

TRX i

ORNRUL GSM NR UL GSM

k

Req

Subcell

OR PCG DL GSM PCG DL GSM

k

Req

OR

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

8. Repeatstheabovesteps(fromstep 2.)fortheiterationk+1usingthenewcalculatedloadsasthecurrentloadsuntil
convergence.

3.9.1.2 ServersSelection
Foragivennetwork,theserviceareasofeachtransmitterareevaluatedinthesamewaythananHCSserverstudywith0dB
margin.Inotherwords,eachpixel,iscoveredbythebestserverofeachHCSlayer,assumingthereceivedsignalstrengthis
greaterthanthereceptionthresholddefinedonthatlayer.
Inadditiontothecoverageconditionabove,foragivenmobiledistribution,amobilemightbeservedbyatransmitterifits
mobility(asassignedbyAtollatthebeginningofthesimulation)doesnotexceedthemaximumspeedpermittedonthatlayer.
Finallythefrequencyband(s)inuseinthetransmitterhavetobesupportedbytheuserterminal.
Innoneoftheseconditionsarefulfilled,themobileisrejectedwiththecondition"NoCoverage".
Iftheseconditionsarefulfilled,asaresult,eachmobilethenhasalistofpotentialservers,eachserverbeingonadifferent
HCSlayer.Foreachmobilelist,AtollsortsthepotentialserversaccordingtotheirHCSlayerpriorityindecreasingorder.
Ontheveryfirstiterationofthesimulation,themobileselectsthehighestprioritytransmitter.Duringtheiterativeprocess,
ifthemobileisregularlyrejectedfromthehighestprioritytransmitter,itwillselectthesecondhighestprioritytransmitter
andsoon,untilconvergence.
Inaddition,ifthemobileisrejectedfromalayer,evenafterconvergence,thealgorithmwilltrytoattachthismobiletoalower
prioritylayeruntilnosolutioncanbefound.

3.9.1.3 CodecModeAssignmentandDLPowerControl
Twotypesofservicescanbeassignedtousers:circuitswitchedandpacketswitchedones.Thenetworkhasbeensetupand
dimensionedinordertofirstservecircuitservices,andthentoservepacketserviceswiththeremainingresources.
Whenservingacircuitswitcheduser,dependingonthecomputedradioconditionsattheserverlocation,acodecmodeis
assignedtoauser.Dependingonthiscodecmode,theuserwilluseeitheranentiretimeslot(anyAMR,EFRorFRcodecmode)
orhalfatimeslot(HRcodecmode).
As explained in "GSM Simulation Process" on page 180, the resource element assigned to a mobile station is an MSA.
DependingontheassignedMSA,thelevelofqualityatthemobilemightbedifferent,andconsequently,itsservedcodec
modesoastherequirednumberoftimeslots.
Assumingaserverisselectedforeachmobile,severalMSAsarecandidate.ForeachcandidateMSA,acodecmodestudyis
run, using the computed C/(I+N) and based on the user terminal and mobility (See "Calculations Based on C/(I+N)" on
page 144formoreinformation).ForeachMSA,acodecmodeisobtained.Foreachmobile,thelistofcandidatecodecmodes
issaved.
Atthebeginningofasimulationiteration,notrafficisattachedtoMSAs.Theirloadstartsfrom0andisincreasedastraffic
increasesandmobilesareattachedtothem.Foragivenuser,withinhisMSAlist,theMSAhavingcurrentlythelowestloadis
selectedand,asaconsequence,theloadofthisMSAisnowincreased.Theeffectofthismechanismresultsinaloadbalancing
ofMSAswithinatransmitter.
WhenMSAsarealmostfull,AtollselectstheMSAsthemostoptimisedintermoftimeslotoccupancy.Asanexample,to
optimisetheresourceallocation,acodecmodecostinghalfatimeslotmightbechoseninsteadofacodecmodecostingan
entiretimeslotinthecasetheMSAwiththelowestcostwouldhavebeenchosen.
Thismechanismisthenreproducedforalltheusersrequestingacircuitswitchedservice.
i

ForeachMSAk,theassignedcodecmodeicorrespondstoaqualitytarget: C I Target .Duetotheradioconditions,andusing

k

thevictimmaxpower,a C I Max isobtained.

k

If C I Max C I Target ,nocodecmodecanbeservedandthemobileisrejectedwiththecondition"NoService".

If C I Max C I Target ,thecorrespondingcodecmodeisassignedtothemobile.IftheMSAisontheBCCH,nopower
k

controlisapplied.ForanyotherTRXtype,Atollevaluatestheminimumrequiredpower P Min inordertoreducethequality

i

attheusersterminalto C I Target fortheassignedMSAk.

Themaximumallowedpowerreductionissetat30 dBbydefault.Thismeansthatthe
powercannotbereducedbymorethan30 dBfromtheinitialtofinalC/(I+N),afterpower
control.
ThepowercontrolisconsideredachievedwhenthefinalC/(I+N)isatlessthan1 dBfrom
i

the C I Target .

183

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

Forsk2014

Tosummarise,atthisstep,eachcircuitswitcheduserisassignedaMSA,acodecmode,acorrespondingnumberoftimeslots
i

(0.5or1)andacorrespondingminimumrequiredpowertogetthe C I Target oftheservedMSA.

Then,iftheuserhasbeendroppedasinactiveatthebeginningofthesimulation,hiscorrespondingnumberoftimeslotsis
consumedbutnoDLpowerisconsideredforthisspecificuser.Inactiveusersonlyparticipateinthetimeslotmanagementbut
donotaffectDLpower.
Finally, if the user has been dropped as active atthe beginning of thesimulation,both timeslots and powers have tobe
consideredtomakehimconnected.

3.9.1.4 CodingSchemeAssignment,ThroughputEvaluationandDLPower
Control
Afterhavingservedthecircuittrafficoveroneiteration,thealgorithmnowtriestoservepacketswitchedtraffic.
Whenservingapacketswitcheduser,dependingonthecomputedradioconditionsattheserverlocation,acodingscheme
isassignedtoauserandathroughputpertimeslotisobtained.Thensometimeslotsareassignedtoeachpacketswitched
serviceuserinordertoobtainathroughputbetweentheminandthemaxDLthroughputdemandperuserdefinedinthe
consideredserviceproperties.
Asexplainedin"MSA(MobileStationAllocation)Definition"onpage 127,theresourceelementassignedtoamobilestation
isanMSA.DependingontheassignedMSA,thelevelofqualityatthemobilemightbedifferent,andconsequently,itsserved
codingschemesoastherequirednumberoftimeslotstogetacertainthroughputdemand.Forpacketswitchedtraffic,the
timeslotAssignmentisrealisedintwosteps.Inthefirststep,Atolltriestoallocatetheminimumthroughputdemandofthe
service.Inthesecondstep,usingremainingresources(timeslots),Atolltriestoallocatemorethroughputuptothemaximum
throughputdemandoftheservice.Ifausercannotgetitsminimumthroughputdemandforinsufficientnumberofavailable
timeslots,theuserisrejectedwiththecondition"ResourceSaturation".
Assumingaserverisselectedforeachmobile,severalMSAsarecandidate.ForeachcandidateMSA,acodingschemestudy
is run, using the computed C/(I+N) and based on the user terminal and mobility (See "Calculations Based on C/(I+N)" on
page 135formoreinformation).ForeachMSA,acodingschemeisobtained,fromwhichwegetathroughputpertimeslot.
As explained in "Packet Throughput and Quality Analysis: Application Throughput (kbps)" on page 140, the maximum of
timeslotstheusercanbenefitistheminimumbetweenthenumberofDLtimeslotsdefinedintheselectedterminaland
service.ConsideringtheminimumDLthroughputdemandfortheservice,onecanestimatehowmanytimeslotsareneeded
togetthatthroughputoneachMSA.Then,AtollonlykeepstheMSAsforwhichthisnumberoftimeslotsislowerthanthe
numberoftimeslotssupported(seeabove)andforwhichthereisenoughremainingtimeslots.Then,foreachmobile,thelist
ofcandidatecodingschemesissaved.
Foragivenuser,withinhisMSAlist,theMSAhavingcurrentlythelowestloadisselectedand,asaconsequence,theloadof
thisMSAisnowincreased.Inthesamewaythanforcircuittraffic,theeffectofthismechanismresultsinaloadbalancingof
MSAswithinatransmitter.
Thismechanismisthenreproducedforalltheusersrequestingapacketswitchedservice.Atthisstep,eachpacketswitched
servicehasacodingschemeand,ideally,issupposedtobeservedhisDLminimumthroughputdemand.
Thesecondstepofresourcesallocationforpacketswitchedtrafficistosharetheremainingresourcesbetweenconnected
usersinordertheygettheirmaximumthroughputdemand.Asanexample,letsimaginethanaMSAisalreadyoccupiedas
follows:

2TSforcircuitswitchedserviceusers(3users:2HRcodecmodes+1FRcodecmode)
2.4TSforpacketswitchedserviceusersafterthefirststep(2users).

IfthisMSAisdefinedoveraTCHsubcell,itscapacityis8TS.Inotherwords,4.4TShavebeenused,and3.6TSremain.The
twopacketswitchedusershaveobtainedtheirminimumthroughputdemand.Inordertoreachtheirmaximumthroughput
demand,theremainingTSareequallysharedbetweenthetwoconnectedusers:1.8TSperuser.Ifthefirstusercangethis
maximumthroughputdemandwithonly1.5TS,theremaining0.3TSwillbeabletobeusedbytheuser.Asaconsequence,
thissecondusercouldbenefitof2.1TSinordertogethismaximumdemand.If,finally,heonlyneeds1.3TStogetthis
demand,0.8TSremainunusedforthatMSA.
Thismechanismofequallyshareofremainingresourcesisthenappliedforalltheconnectedpacketswitchedserviceusers
overalltheirMSAs.
j

ForeachMSAk,theassignedcodingschemejcorrespondstoaqualitytarget: C I Target .Duetotheradioconditions,and

k

usingthevictimmaxpower,a C I Max isobtained.

k

If C I Max C I Target ,nocodingschemecanbeservedandthemobileisrejectedwiththecondition"NoService".

184

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
k

If C I Max C I Target ,thecorrespondingcodingschemeisassignedtothemobile.IftheMSAisontheBCCH,nopower

k

controlisapplied.ForanyotherTRXtype,Atollevaluatestheminimumrequiredpower P Min inordertoreducethequality

j

attheusersterminalto C I Target fortheassignedMSAk.

Themaximumallowedpowerreductionissetat30 dBbydefault.Thismeansthatthe
powercannotbereducedbymorethan30 dBfromtheinitialtofinalC/(I+N),afterpower
control.
ThepowercontrolisconsideredachievedwhenthefinalC/(I+N)isatlessthan1 dBfrom
i

the C I Target .
To summarise, at this step, each packetswitched user is assigned a MSA, a coding scheme, a corresponding number of
j

timeslots(whichmightnotbeanintegervalue)andacorrespondingminimumrequiredpowertogetthe C I Target ofthe

servedMSA.

3.9.1.5 SubcellTrafficLoadsManagement
When circuitswitched and packetswitched traffic have been served or rejected, Atoll performs an update on several
parameters.ThefirstparametertobeupdatedarethesubcellDLandULtrafficloads.Consideringthatsubcellloadsarevalues
whichareuniquepertrafficpool(e.g.BCCHandTCHsubcellsbelongtothesametrafficpoolbecausetheyareinchargeof
thesametrafficarea)inDLandinUL,thenumberoftimeslotsnecessarytoconnectthetraffichavetobesummedupover
theseveralMSAsoverasametrafficpool.
Forthetrafficpool TP i ,thesubcellDLtrafficloadiscomputedasfollows:

TL TP

TS DL used

MSA TP

i DL

i
= ------------------------------------------------- wherethenumberofDLTSavailableforaBCCHsubcellis7and8foranyothersubcell.
TS DL available

MSA

TP i

TheDLtrafficloadvalueisthenassignedtoallthesubcellsofasametrafficpool.
Forthetrafficpool TP i ,thesubcellULtrafficloadiscomputedasfollows:

MSA

TL TP

i UL

TS UL used

TP

i
= ------------------------------------------------- wherethenumberofULTSavailableforaBCCHsubcellis7and8foranyothersubcell.
TS UL available

MSA TP

TheULtrafficloadvalueisthenassignedtoallthesubcellsofasametrafficpool.

3.9.1.6 HalfRateTrafficRatioManagement
ThesecondparameterattheendofaniterationistheHalfratetrafficratio.Thisisthepercentageofhalfratevoicetrafficin
thesubcell.Thisvalueisusedtocalculatethenumberoftimeslotsrequiredtorespondtothevoicetrafficdemandandis
evaluatedpertrafficpool.Thisvaluereferringtovoicetrafficonly,circuitswitchedusersonlyaretakenintoaccountinits
evaluation.

HRusers

MSA TP

i
HRRATIO TP = ------------------------------------.
users representsHRandFRcircuitswitchedserviceusers.
i
users MSATP

MSA TP

TheHalfRatetrafficratioisthenassignedtoallthesubcellsofasametrafficpool.

185

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

Forsk2014

3.9.1.7 DLPowerControlGainManagement
Attheendofeachiteration,thesubcellDLpowercontrolgainisevaluatedbytakingintoaccountalltheconnectedusers:

activeandinactivecircuitswitchedserviceusers(assumingeachinactiveuserdoesnotcostanyDLpowerbutonly
sometimeslots)
allpacketusers

Fromtheminimumrequiredpowersevaluatedattheendof"CodecModeAssignmentandDLPowerControl"onpage 183
and"CodingSchemeAssignment,ThroughputEvaluationandDLPowerControl"onpage 184inordertogetrespectivelythe
appropriatecodecmodesandcodingschemeswithoutanyexcessofunneededpower,anaverageminimumrequiredpower
isobtainedforeachmobileconnectedtothesubcellSasfollows:
k

PMin TSi
i

i-------------------------------S
-

= P Moy whereiarethemobilesconnectedtothesubcellS,overitsMSAs
S

TS i

Theratio PCG

P Max
= ---------------S (indB),where P Max isthemaxpoweroftheconsideredsubcell,representsthemeanpower
S
P Moy
S

controlgain,duetoactiveandinactiveusers,whichcanbeassignedtothesubcell.
ItisessentialtonotethatthereisnopowercontrolontheBCCHand,consequently,themeanpowercontrolgainontheBCCH
is0.

3.9.1.8 DTXDLGainManagement
A certain gain representing inactive circuitswitched service users has also to be evaluated. In "DL Power Control Gain
Management"onpage 186,themeanDLpowercontrolgainconcernsbothactiveandinactiveusers.TheDTXgainmodels
thefactthatinactivecircuitswitchedusers,eveniftheyareconnectedtothenetwork,donotproducethesamelevelof
interferencethanactivecircuitswitchedusers.
Fromtheminimumrequiredpowersevaluatedattheendof"CodecModeAssignmentandDLPowerControl"onpage 183in
ordertogettheappropriatecodecmodeswithoutanyexcessofunneededpower,anaverageminimumrequiredpoweris
obtainedforeachcircuitswitchedactivemobileconnectedtothesubcellSasfollows:

ki

active

P Min

TS i

i active S

active

------------------------------------------------------------ = P Moy
TS i

S active

where i active arethecircuitswitchedactivemobilesconnectedtothesubcellS,over

active

i active

itsMSAs
P Moy
S
Theratio -------------------------- (indB),where P Moy isaveragerequestedpowerdefinedin"DLPowerControlGainManagement"on
S
P Moy
S active

page 186above,representstheDTXgain,duetocircuitswitchedactiveusers,whichcanbeassignedtothesubcell.

3.9.1.9 GSMSimulationResults
Attheendofthesimulations,anactiveusercanbeconnectedinDLif:

hehasaservingcellassigned,
Foracircuitswitched(resp.packetswitched)service,hehasacodecmode(resp.codingscheme)correspondingto
hisactivitystatus,
heisnotrejectedduetoresourcesaturation.

Ifauserisrejectedduringserverdetermination,thecauseofrejectionis"NoCoverage".Ifauserisrejectedbecausequality
istoolowtoobtainanycodecmodeorcodingscheme,thecauseofrejectionis"NoService".Ifauserisrejectedbecausehe
cannotbeallocatedasufficientnumberofresourcestoobtainitscodecmodeorcodingscheme,thecauseofrejectionis
"ResourceSaturation,"i.e.,allofthecellsresourceswereusedupbyotherusers.
ConsideringonlytheconnectedtrafficattheendoftheGSMpartofthesimulationprocess,themainresultsobtainedare:

Atthesubcelllevel

186

Subcelltrafficloads(ULandDL)
DLPowercontrolgains
DTXgains

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Halfratetrafficratios

AttheTRXlevel

intratechnologyULnoiserises

Subcelltrafficloads,DLPowercontrolgainsandintratechnologyULnoiserisescanbeusedasinputforGSMqualitybased
coveragepredictions.

3.10 AutomaticNeighbourAllocation
TheintratechnologyneighbourallocationalgorithmtakesintoaccountalltheTBCtransmitters.ItmeansthatalltheTBC
transmittersofthe.atldocumentarepotentialneighbours.
ThetransmitterstobeallocatedwillbecalledTBAtransmitters.Theymustfulfilthefollowingconditions:

Theyareactive,
TheysatisfythefiltercriteriaappliedtotheTransmittersfolder,
Theyarelocatedinsidethefocuszone,
Theybelongtothefolderonwhichallocationhasbeenexecuted.ThisfoldercanbeeithertheTransmittersfolderor
agroupoftransmittersorasingletransmitter.

OnlyTBAtransmittersmaybeassignedneighbours.
Ifnofocuszoneexistsinthe.atldocument,Atolltakesintoaccountthecomputation
zone.

3.10.1 NeighbourAllocationforAllTransmitters
WeassumeareferencetransmitterAandacandidateneighbour,transmitterB.
Whenautomaticallocationstarts,Atollchecksfollowingconditions:

The distancebetweenbothtransmitters mustbe less thantheuserdefinable maximumintersitedistance. If the

distance between the reference transmitter and the candidate neighbour is greater than this value, then the
candidateneighbourisdiscarded.
Atoll calculates the effective distance, which corresponds to the real intertransmitter distance weighted by the
azimuthsofantennas.Forinformationontheeffectivedistancecalculation,see"Appendix:CalculationoftheInter
TransmitterDistance"onpage 191.

Thecalculationoptions:
Forcecositetransmittersasneighbours:Thisoptionenablesyoutoforcetransmitterslocatedonthereference
transmittersiteinthecandidateneighbourlist.Thisconstraintscanbeweightedamongtheothersandranksthe
neighboursthroughtheimportancefield.
ForceintraHCSadjacentsasneighbours:Thisoptionenablesyoutoforcetransmittersgeographicallyadjacent
tothereferencetransmitter,andbelongingtothesameHCSlayer,inthecandidateneighbourlist.Thisconstraint
canbeweightedamongothersandrankstheneighboursthroughtheimportancefield.
ForceinterHCSadjacentsasneighbours:Thisoptionenablesyoutoforcetransmittersgeographicallyadjacent
tothereferencetransmitter,andbelongingtodifferentHCSlayers,inthecandidateneighbourlist.Thisconstraint
canbeweightedamongothersandrankstheneighboursthroughtheimportancefield.

187

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

Forsk2014

Adjacencycriterion:
GeographicallyadjacenttransmittersaredeterminedonthebasisoftheirBestServer
coverages in 2G (GSM GPRS EDGE) projects. More precisely, a transmitter TXi is
consideredadjacenttoanothertransmitterTXjifthereexistsatleastonepixelofTXiBest
ServercoverageareaTXjisthe2ndBestServer.Therankingoftheadjacentneighbour
transmitterincreaseswiththenumberofthesepixels.Thefigurebelowshowstheabove
concept.

Whenanadjacencyoptionischecked,adjacentcellsaresortedandlistedfromthe
mostadjacenttotheleast,dependingontheabovecriterion.Adjacencyisrelative
tothenumberofpixelssatisfyingthecriterion.

Force symmetry: This option enables user to force the reciprocity of a neighbourhood link. Therefore, if the
referencetransmitterisacandidateneighbourofanothertransmitter,thelatterwillbeconsideredascandidate
neighbourofthereferencetransmitter.
Iftheneighbourslistofatransmitterisfull,thereferencetransmitterwillnotbeadded
as a neighbour of that transmitter and that transmitter will be removed from the
referencetransmittersneighbourslist.YoucanforceAtolltokeepthattransmitterin
thereferencetransmittersneighbourslistbyaddingthefollowingoptionintheAtoll.ini
file:
[Neighbours]
DoNotDeleteSymmetrics=1

Forceexceptionalpairs:Thisoptionenablesyoutoforce/forbidsomeneighbourhoodrelationships.Therefore,
youmayforce/forbidatransmittertobecandidateneighbourofthereferencetransmitter.
Deleteexistingneighbours:WhenselectingtheDeleteexistingneighboursoption,Atolldeletesallthecurrent
neighboursandcarriesoutanewneighbourallocation.Ifnotselected,theexistingneighboursarekept.

IftheUseCoverageConditionscheckboxisselected,theremustbeanoverlappingzone( S A S B )withagivencell
edgecoverageprobability.Otherwise,onlythedistancecriterionistakenintoaccount.
Theoverlappingzone( S A S B )isdefinedasfollows:

SAistheareawherethereceivedsignallevelfromtransmitterAisgreaterthanaminimumsignallevel.SAisthe
coverageareaofreferencetransmitterArestrictedbetweentwoboundaries;thefirstboundaryrepresentsthe
startofthehandoverarea(bestserverareaofAplushandovermarginnamedhandoverstart)andthesecond
boundaryshowstheendofthehandoverarea(bestserverareaofAplusthemargincalledhandoverend).
SBisthecoverageareawherethecandidatetransmitterBisthebestserver.

SA SB
Atoll calculateseitherthepercentageofcovered area( ------------------ 100 )iftheoption Takeintoaccount CoveredArea is
SA
selected,orthepercentageoftrafficcoveredontheoverlappingarea S A S B fortheoptionTakeintoaccountCovered
Traffic.Then,itcomparesthisvaluetothe%minimumcoveredarea(minimumpercentageofcoveredareafortheoption

188

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Take into account Covered Area or minimum percentage of covered traffic for the option Take into account Covered
Traffic).Ifthispercentageisnotexceeded,thecandidateneighbourBisdiscarded.
The coverage condition can be weighted among the others and ranks the neighbours through the importance field (see
number4below).

Figure 3.14:OverlappingZones

Theimportancevaluesareusedbytheallocationalgorithmtoranktheneighboursaccordingtotheallocationreason,
andtoquantifytheneighbourimportance.

Atolllistsallneighboursandranksthembyimportancevaluesoastoeliminatesomeofthemfromtheneighbourlistifthe
maximumnumberofneighbourstobeallocatedtoeachtransmitterisexceeded.Ifweconsiderthecaseforwhichthereare
15candidateneighboursandthemaximumnumberofneighbourstobeallocatedtothereferencetransmitteris8.Among
these15candidateneighbours,only8(havingthehighestimportances)willbeallocatedtothereferencetransmitter.
IntheResultspart,Atollprovidesthelistofneighbours,thenumberofneighboursandthemaximumnumberofneighbours
allowedforeachcell.Inaddition,itindicatestheimportance(in%)ofeachneighbourandtheallocationreason.Therefore,a
neighbour may be marked as exceptional pair, cosite, intraHCS and interHCS adjacent, coverage or symmetric. For
neighboursacceptedforcosite,intraHCSorinterHCSadjacencyandcoveragereasons,Atolldisplaysthepercentageofarea
meetingthecoverageconditions(orthepercentageofcoveredtrafficonthisarea)andthecorrespondingsurfacearea(km2)
(orthetrafficcoveredontheareainErlangs),thepercentageofareameetingtheadjacencyconditionsandthecorresponding
surfacearea(km2).Finally,ifcellshavepreviousallocationsinthelist,neighboursaremarkedasexisting.

Bydefault,theautomaticneighbourallocationcomparesthedefinedMaxinter
site distance with the effective intertransmitter distance. As a consequence,
there can be cases where the real distance between assigned neighbours is
higher than the Max intersite distance, because the effective distance is
smaller.YoucanforceAtolltocomparetheMaxintersitedistancewiththereal
intersitedistancebyaddingthefollowinglinesinAtoll.ini:
[Neighbours]
RealInterSiteDistanceCondition=1

Bydefault,theneighbourimportancecalculatedwithrespecttodistanceisbased
ontheglobalMaxintersitedistancesettingforallneighbourcandidates.Asa
consequence,therecanbecaseswherethecalculatedimportanceisdifferent
whentheglobalMaxintersitedistanceismodified.Toavoidthat,youcanforce
Atolltoprioritisetheindividualdistancesbetweenreferencetransmittersand
theirrespectiveneighbourcandidatesbyaddingthefollowinglinesinAtoll.ini:
[Neighbours]
CandidatesMaxDistanceInImportanceCalculation=1

189

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

Forsk2014

No coverage prediction is needed to perform an automatic neighbour allocation.

Whenstartinganautomaticneighbourallocation,Atollautomaticallycalculatesthe
pathlossmatricesifnotfound.
Atollusestrafficmap(s)selectedinthedefaulttrafficanalysisinordertodetermine
thepercentageoftrafficcoveredintheoverlappingarea.
Whenanadjacencyoptionischecked,themarginhandoverstartisnottakeninto
account.Atollconsidersafixedvalueof0dB.
Aforbiddenneighbourmustnotbelistedasneighbourexceptiftheneighbourhood
relationship already exists and the Delete existing neighbours option is unchecked
whenyoustartthenewallocation.Inthiscase,AtolldisplaysawarningintheEvent
viewerindicatingthattheconstraintontheforbiddenneighbourwillbeignoredby
algorithmbecausetheneighbouralreadyexists.
Theforceneighboursymmetryoptionenablestheuserstoconsiderthereciprocityof
a neighbourhood link. This reciprocity is allowed only if the neighbour list is not
already full. Thus, if transmitter B is a neighbour of the transmitter A while
transmitterAisnotaneighbourofthetransmitterB,twocasesarepossible:
1stcase:ThereisspaceinthetransmitterBneighbourlist:thetransmitterAwillbe
addedtothelist.Itwillbethelastone.
2ndcase:ThetransmitterBneighbourlistisfull:AtollwillnotincludetransmitterAin
the list and will cancel the link by deleting transmitter B from the transmitter A
neighbourlist.
WhentheoptionsForceexceptionalpairsandForcesymmetryareselected,Atoll
considers the constraints between exceptional pairs in both directions so as to
respect symmetry condition. On the other hand, if neighbourhood relationship is
forced in one direction and forbidden in the other one, symmetry cannot be
respected.Inthiscase,AtolldisplaysawarningintheEventviewer.
IntheResults,Atolldisplaysonlythetransmittersforwhichitfindsnewneighbours.
Therefore,ifatransmitterhasalreadyreacheditsmaximumnumberofneighbours
beforestartingthenewallocation,itwillnotappearintheResultstable.

3.10.2 NeighbourAllocationforaGroupofTransmittersorOne
Transmitter
Inthiscase,Atollallocatesneighboursto:

TBAtransmitters,
NeighboursofTBAtransmittersmarkedasexceptionalpair,intraHCSorinterHCSadjacentandsymmetric,
NeighboursofTBAtransmittersthatsatisfycoverageconditions.

Automaticneighbourallocationparametersaredescribedin"NeighbourAllocationforAllTransmitters"onpage 187.

3.10.3 NeighbourImportanceCalculation
Theneighbourimportancedependsonthedistancefromthereferencetransmitterandontheneighbourhoodcause(cf.table
below);thisvaluevariesbetween0and100%.
Neighbourhoodcause

When

Importancevalue

Existingneighbour

OnlyiftheDeleteexistingneighboursoptionisnotselected
andincaseofanewallocation

Existingimportance

Exceptionalpair

OnlyiftheForceexceptionalpairsoptionisselected

100%

Cositetransmitter

OnlyiftheForcecositecellsasneighboursoptionis
selected

ImportanceFunction(IF)

Adjacenttransmitter

190

OnlyiftheForceintraHCSadjacentsasneighboursorForce
ImportanceFunction(IF)
interHCSadjacentsasNeighboursoptionsareselected

Neighbourhoodrelationshipthat
fulfilscoverageconditions

Onlyifthe%minimumcoveredareaisexceeded

ImportanceFunction(IF)

Symmetricneighbourhood
relationship

OnlyiftheForceneighboursymmetryoptionisselected

ImportanceFunction(IF)

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Exceptthecaseofforcedneighbours(importance=100%),priorityassignedtoeachneighbourhoodcauseisdetermined
usingtheImportanceFunction(IF).TheIFconsidersthefollowingfactorsforcalculatingtheimportance:

The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.
d Di = 1 ---------d max
d istheeffectivedistance(inm).Itcorrespondstotherealintertransmitterdistanceweightedbytheazimuthsof
antennas.Forinformationontheeffectivedistancecalculation,see"Appendix:CalculationoftheInterTransmitter
Distance"onpage 191.
d max isthemaximumdistancebetweenthereferencetransmitterandapossibleneighbour.

Thecositefactor(C):aBoolean,
Theadjacencyfactor(A):thepercentageofadjacency,
Theoverlappingfactor(O):thepercentageofoverlapping.

Theminimumandmaximumimportanceassignedtoeachoftheabovefactorscanbedefined.
Factor

Minimportance

Defaultvalue

Maximportance

Defaultvalue

Distancefactor(Di)

Min(Di)

1%

Max(Di)

10%

Overlappingfactor(O)

Min(O)

10%

Max(O)

30%

Adjacencyfactor(A)

Min(A)

30%

Max(A)

60%

Cositefactor(C)

Min(C)

60%

Max(C)

100%

TheImportanceFunctionisevaluatedasfollows:
Neighbourhoodcause

ImportanceFunction

ResultingIFusingthedefaultvalues
fromthetableabove

No

Min(O)+Delta(O){Max(Di)(Di)+(100%
Max(Di))(O)}+Min(Di)+Delta(Di)(Di)

10%+20%{10%(Di)+90%(O)}+1%+9%(Di)

No

Yes

Min(A)+Delta(A){Max(Di)(Di)+Max(O)(O)+
(100%Max(Di)Max(O))(A)}+Min(Di)+Delta(Di)(Di)

30%+30%{10%(Di)+30%(O)
+60%(A)}+1%+9%(Di)

Yes

Yes

Min(C)+Delta(C){Max(Di)(Di)+Max(O)(O)+
(100%Max(Di)Max(O))(A)}+Min(Di)+Delta(Di)(Di)

60%+40%{10%(Di)+30%(O)
+60%(A)}+1%+9%(Di)

Cosite

Adjacent

No

Delta(X)=Max(X)Min(X)

SetMin(Di)andMax(Di)to0%ifyoudonotwanttotakeintoaccountthedistance
factorintheimportancecalculation.
IftheMinandMaxvaluerangesoftheimportancefunctionfactorsdonotoverlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum andmaximum importance fields,neighbours will be rankedin thisorder:
cositeneighbours,adjacentneighbours,andneighboursallocatedbasedoncoverage
overlapping.
If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.
ThedefaultvalueofMin(O)=1%ensuresthatneighboursselectedforsymmetrywill
have an importance greater than 0%. With a value of Min(O) = 0%, neighbours
selectedforsymmetrywillhaveanimportancefieldgreaterthan0%onlyifthereis
somecoverageoverlapping.

3.10.4 Appendix:CalculationoftheInterTransmitterDistance
Atoll takes into account the real distance ( D in m) and azimuths of antennas in order to calculate the effective inter
transmitterdistance( d inm).
d = D 1 + x cos x cos
x=0.3%sothatthemaximumDvariationdoesnotexceed1%.

191

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

Forsk2014

Figure 3.15:InterTransmitterDistanceComputation
The formula above implies that two cells facing each other will have a smaller effective distance than the real physical
distance.Itisthiseffectivedistancethatwillbetakenintoaccountratherthantherealdistance.

3.11 AFPAppendices
3.11.1 TheAFPCostFunction
Thenotationslistedhereafterareusedtodescribethecostfunction:

TRG:
TRGs:
:
g :
ARFCN:

ARFCN

x :

A i g :

GroupofTRXs
SetofalltheTRGs
Ifandonlyif
Sizeofanygroupg
Setofallthefrequencies
:

Setofallthesubsetsoffrequencies
Thelargestinteger x
Numberoftimesagroup g 2

ARFCN

isassignedtoTRGiintheassignmentA

Forexample:

WheniisNH, A i g = 1 gisasinglemembergroupcontainingoneofthefrequenciesassignedatTRGi.
If|g|isnot1orifgdoesnotcontainafrequencyassignedati,then A i g = 0 .

WheniisBBH, A i g canbeeither0orequaltothenumberofTRXsinTRGi.
A i g =NumberofTRXsinTRGigisthesetoffrequenciesassignedtoTRXsofTRGi.(|g|=numberofTRXsin
TRGi).
Whenwetalkabout"TRXsofiusingg",andinthecaseofBBH,thenthereare|g|suchvirtualTRXs,eachusing
theentiregroupgandhavingavirtualMAIO[0,|g|1].

WheniisSFH, A i g mustbelessthanorequaltotheumberofTRXsinTRGi. A i g = n gisthesetoffrequencies

assignedtonTRXsofTRGi.
WeassumeallthegroupsassignedtoTRGitohavethesamelength.

TSi:
TLi:

NumberoftimeslotsavailableforeachTRXinTRGi
TrafficloadofTRGi(calculatedoruserdefined)

TL i = #Erlangs ofasingleTRXinTRGidividedbyTSi

TSUi:
CFi:
QMINi:
PMAXi:
REQi:

Downlinktimeslotuseratio(duetoDTX)atTRGi
CostfactorofTRGi(AFPWeight)
Minimumrequiredquality(inC/I)atTRGi
PercentagepermittedtohavequalitylowerthanQMINiatTRGi
RequirednumberofTRXsatTRGi

A communication uses the group g in TRGi if its mobile allocation is g. The probability to be interfered is denoted by
P i i' g A (i is the TRX index). Different TRX indexes may have different MAIOs. P i i' g A is a function of the whole
frequencyassignment.Theprecisedefinitionofthetermtobeinterferedisprovidedafterwards.Theprobabilitypenalty
duetoviolatingaseparationconstraintis P i i' g A .Itisafunctionofthewholefrequencyassignmentaswell.

192

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

ThetermAtomwillbeusedinthefollowingcontext:
FortwoTRGs,iandk,
ATOM i ATOM k
iandkaresynchronised,havethesameHSN,thesameMALlengthandthesamehoppingmode.
NHTRGsorBBHTRGsarealwaysinseparateatoms.IftwoTRGsinterferebutarenotinthesameatom,thesecanbetaken
asunsynchronised.ThequalityofunsynchronisedTRGsisafunctionofallpossiblefrequencycombinations.Forsynchronised
TRGs,pairsoffrequenciesemittedatthesametimeareknown.

3.11.1.1 CostFunction
TheAtollAFPcostfunctionisaTRXbasedcostandnotaninterferencematrixentrybasedcost.Itcountstheimpairedtraffic
ofthenetworkTRXsinweightedErlangs.
Thecostfunction isreportedtotheuserduringtheAFPprogresswiththehelpofits5components: mis , sep , comp ,
corr and dom .
= mis + sep + comp + corr + dom
,
mis representsthemissingTRXcostcomponent
sep representstheseparationcomponent
comp representstheadditionalcostcomponent(interference,costofchangingaTRX)
corr representsthecorruptedTRXcostcomponent
dom representstheoutofdomainfrequencyassignmentcostcomponent
mis =

MIS_TRX i TL i CF i TS i

CORR_TRX i TL i CF i TS i

DOM_TRX i TL i CF i TS i

i TRGs

corr =

i TRGs

dom =

i TRGs

sep

i TRGs

comp

ARFCN
g2
i' TRXsofiusingg

i TRGs

' i i' g A TL i CF i TS i

ARFCN
g2
i' TRXsofiusingg

'' i i' g A TL i CF i TS i

Intheaboveequations,

iistheTRXindexbelongingto 0 1 ... A i g 1 .

MIS_TRXi isthenumberofmissingTRXsforthesubcelli.

MIS_TRX i = MAX 0 REQ i

g2

A i g

ARFCN

isthecostvalueforamissingTRX.Thisvaluecanvarybetween0and10.Thedefaultcostvalueissetto1andcan
bemodifiedintheAFPmodulepropertiesdialogue.
CORR_TRX i isthenumberofcorruptedTRXsforthesubcelli.

193

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

Forsk2014

isthecostvalueofacorruptedTRX.Thisvaluecanvarybetween0and10.Thedefaultcostvalueissetto10and
canbemodifiedintheAFPmodulepropertiesdialogue.
DOM_TRX i isthenumberofTRXs,forthesubcelli,havingoutofdomainfrequenciesassigned.
isthecostvalueofaTRXwithoutofdomainfrequenciesassigned.Thisvaluecanvarybetween0and1.Thedefault
costvalueissetto0.5andcanbemodifiedintheAFPmodulepropertiesdialogue.
And,asmentionedearlier,avirtualTRXisconsideredincaseofBBH.
Ifiisvalid,thealgorithmevaluatesthecostofavalidTRX.Thiscosthastwocomponents, ' i i' g A and '' i i' g A .

' i i' g A istheseparationviolationprobabilitypenalty.

'' i i' g A iscomplementaryprobabilitypenaltyduetointerferenceandthecostofmodifyingaTRX.

IftheoptionTakeintoaccountthecostofalltheTRXsavailableintheAFPmodulepropertiesdialogueisselected,
then,
' i i' g A = P' i i' g A and '' i i' g A = P'' i i' g A
OriftheoptionDonotincludethecostofTRXshavingreachedtheirqualitytargetavailableintheAFPmodule
propertiesdialogueisselected,thealgorithmcompares P' i i' g A + P'' i i' g A withthequalitytargetspecifiedfor
i, P MAX :
If P' i i' g A + P'' i i' g A P MAX ,
Then ' i i' g A = P' i i' g A and '' i i' g A = P'' i i' g A .
Otherwise,
Both ' i i' g A and '' i i' g A willbeequal0.

P' i i' g A is the same as ' i i' g A (separation violation probability penalty) and P'' i i' g A the same as '' i i' g A
(complementaryprobabilitypenaltyduetointerferenceandthecostofmodifyingaTRX)inmostcases.Theseareexplained
indetailinthenextsections.

3.11.1.2 CostComponents
Separationviolationandinterferencecostcomponentsaredescribedhereafter.Parametersconsideredinthecostfunction
components can be fully controlled by the user. Some of these parameters are part of the general data model (quality
requirements,percentageofinterferenceallowedpersubcell),whileothers(suchasseparationcostsanddiversitygains)can
bemanagedthroughthepropertiesdialogueoftheAtollAFPmodule.

3.11.1.2.1

SeparationViolationCostComponent
TheseparationviolationcostcomponentisevaluatedforeachTRX.Estimationisbasedoncostsspecifiedfortherequired
separations.
Let SEP_CONSTRi k denotetherequiredseparationconstraintbetweenTRGiandTRGk.Let Cost s z denotetheuserdefined
separationpenaltyforarequiredseparationsandactualseparationz. SEP i k v isusedinsteadof Cost SEP_CONSTR

i k z

as

abbreviation.
TheAFPmodulepropertiesdialoguetakesprobabilitypercentagesasinputswhilethis
documentdealsinprobabilityvalues.

ii'kgg'k' isconsideredtobetheeffectofaseparationviolationonthe i' thTRXofTRGiassignedthegroupg,causedbythe

k' thTRXofTRGkassignedthegroup g' .
denotestheoverallweightoftheseparationviolationcostcomponent.Thisvaluecanbebetween0and1,setto1by
default.ItcanbemodifiedintheAFPmodulepropertiesdialogue.

194

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

ik representstheweightofthespecificseparationconstraintbetweeniandk.Thisspecificweightdependsonthetypeof
separationviolationandfollowsthefollowingpriorityrule:
1. Exceptionalpairs
2. Cotransmitters
3. Cosite
4. Neighbours
Forexample,ifapairofsubcellsarecositeandneighboursatthesametime,theywillbeconsideredascositebecausehigher
priority.Hence, ik ofthesesubcellswillbetheweightofcositerelations.Ifonlyaneighbourrelationexistsbetweentwo
subcells,then ik willbefurtherweightedbytheneighbourrelationimportance.Thevalueof ik remainsbetween0and1.
ThedefaultweightsofeachtypeofseparationareavailableintheSeparationcosttab.
If ATOM i ATOM k

SEP i k

f f'

fg
f' g'

Then ii'kgg'k' = ik ----------------------------------------- ,whichissameforallvaluesofk.

g g'
If ATOM i = ATOM k

SEPi k

g g'

0 1 ... F_N 1
---------------------------------------------------------------------------Then ii'kgg'k' = ik f_n
F_N

Intheaboveequations, F_N g isthenumberofframesintheMALg. F_N g = g .

Since F_N g = F_N g' ,weshortlydenotethetwoas F_N .

Let f_n denotetheinstantaneousframenumberfrom0to F_N .

While = f_n + MAIO A
And = f_n + MAIO A

th

i g i'

modulo F_N and g isthe frequencying,

th

k g' k'

modulo F_N and g' isthe frequencying.

Inaddition,frequenciesbelongingtoaMALwithalowfractionalload,andbreakingaseparationconstraint,shouldnotbe
weightedequallyasinanonhoppingseparationbreakingcase.Therefore,thecostisweightedbyaninterfererdiversitygain.
1
G i k g g' = ---------------------------------------------------------- 0.1 SEP_GAIN i k g g'
10
Theseparationgain,denotedby SEP_GAIN i k g g' isbasicallyafunctionoftheMALlength(and,ofcourse,ofthe
hoppingmode).Withfrequencyhopping,theeffectsofDTXandtrafficloadbecomemoresignificant(duetotheconsideration
of the average case instead of the worst case). For this reason, it is possible to consider these effects in
SEP_GAIN i k g g' throughtherelevantoptionavailableintheAdvancedtaboftheAFPmodulepropertiesdialogue.
Withoutthisoption,the SEP_GAIN i k g g' is:
SEP_GAIN i k g g' = I_DIV g
I_DIV g istheuserdefinedinterfererdiversitygain(dB)foragivenMALlength.Itisusedin P i i' g A definitionaswell.
Ontheotherhand,ifthisoptionisselected,the SEP_GAIN i k g g' becomes,
2 + ASYN_GAIN i k g'
SEP_GAIN i k g g' = I_DIV g +0.5 TSU_GAIN k min 10 4 + 2 + I_DIV g -----------------------------------------------------------------

4
1
TSU_GAIN k = log 10 -------------------------- ,
TL k TSU k

195

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

Forsk2014

And ASYN_GAIN i k g' =

0
ifATOM(i)=ATOM(k)
I_DIV( g'
Otherwise

MorethanoneseparationviolationsmayexistforaTRX.Manysmall G i k g g' and ' ii'kgg' havetobecombinedtoform

one cost element, the P' i i' g A . This is done through iterating over all violating assignments and by summing up an
equivalenttotheprobabilityofnotbeingviolatedwhileconsideringeachseparationviolationasanindependentprobability
event.Thissumisnaturallylimitedto100%oftheTRXtraffic,andisgivenby,

1 ii'kgg'k' G i k g g'
1
P' i i' g A =
k TRGs

ARFCN

g' 2
k' TRXsofkusingg'

Intheaboveformula,if k = i ,then k' i' ,sothatinterferencewithitselfisnottakenintoaccount.

3.11.1.2.2

InterferenceCostComponent
TheinterferencecostcomponentisevaluatedforeachTRX.Itsestimationisbasedoninterferencehistogramscalculatedfor
pairsofsubcells.Inaddition,ittakesintoaccountfrequencyandinterfererdiversitygainsandmodelsfrequencyhoppingand
gainduetoDTX.
Interference histograms are described in User Manual (GSM GPRS EDGE project
management, GSM GPRS EDGE network optimisation, GSM GPRS EDGE generic AFP
management). Interference histograms can also be exported to files. For further
description,referto"Interference"onpage 201.
Whenestimating P'' i i' g A ,thefollowingproblemsareencountered:

The QMINi C/I quality indicator corresponds to the accumulated interference level of all interferers while the C/I
interferencehistogramscorrespondtopairwiseinterferences.
Both QMINi and the histograms correspond to a single frequency. In case of a MAL containing more than one
frequencies,interferencesonseveraldifferentfrequenciesofaMALmustbecombined.
This estimation, presented below, is the simplest possible as it solves the first problem by linear summation and
truncationatthevalueof1anditsolvesthesecondproblembyaveragingandaddingthetwodiversitygains:

F_DIV g ,thefrequencydiversitygain,and

I_DIV g ,theinterfererdiversitygain.

Hereafter, denotestheglobalweightofinterferencecostcomponent.Thisvaluecanvarybetween0and1andissetto
0.35bydefault,whichcanbemodifiedintheAFPmodulepropertiesdialogue.
Let F_N g bethenumberofframesintheMALg. F_N g = g .
Let f_n denotetheinstantaneousframenumberfrom0to F_N .
Let MAIO A

k g' j

bethejthMAIOof A k g' ,jisoneofthe 0 1 ... A k g' 1 TRXs.

Thevalueof MAIO A

k g' j

isoneof 0 1 ... g'

IfTRGkisNH,then MAIO A

k g' j

IfTRGkisBBH,then MAIO A

k g' j

= 0 .
= j .

Assaidearlier,incaseofBBH,weconsider g' virtualTRXs,thejthTRXhastheMAIOj.

Let g i betheithfrequencyinthegroupg.
Similartothedefinitionof ii'kgg'k' , ' ii'kgg'k' isdefinedasaninterferenceevent. ' ii'kgg'k' istheeffectinterferenceonthe i' th
TRXofTRGiassignedthegroupg,causedbythe k' thTRXofTRGkassignedthegroup g' .

196

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

If ATOM i ATOM k

Then ' ii'kgg'k' =

f g f' g'

C
Probability ----- Q_UB i k f f'
I ik

-------------------------------------------------------------------------g g'

Q_UB i k f f' = QMIN i

f f' ADJ_SUP + INTERF_GAIN i k g g'

If ATOM i = ATOM k
Then,
Since F_N g = F_N g' ,thesearebothrepresentedby F_N .

ii'kgg'k'

C
Probability ----- Q_UB i k f f'

ik
-
=
------------------------------------------------------------------------F_N

f_n 0 1 ... F_N 1

,
f = g ,
f' = g' ,
= f_n + MAIO A
= f_n + MAIO A

i g i'

modulo F_N ,

k g' k'

modulo F_N ,

Q_UB i k f f' = QMIN i

f f' ADJ_SUP + INTERF_GAIN i k g g'

Therefore,wehave, P'' i i' g A = 1 1 P' i i' g A

1 ii'kgg'k' P' i i' g A

k TRGs
ARFCN
g' 2
k' TRXsofkusingg'

Intheaboveformula,if i = k ,then k' i' ,sothatinterferencewithitselfisnottakenintoaccount.

Thesumislimitedto100%oftheTRXtraffic. INTERF_GAIN i k g g' isquitesimilarto SEP_GAIN i k g g' .The
onlydifferenceisthefrequencydiversitygain, F_DIV g ,addedto SEP_GAIN i k g g' .

3.11.1.2.3

I_DIV,F_DIVandOtherAdvancedCostParameters
When combining interference effects (or separation violation effects) on different frequencies belonging to a MAL, the
followingconsiderationsshouldbetakenintoaccount:
1. NonlinearityofFrameErrorRate(FER)withrespecttoaverageC/IconditionsandMALlength.
2. InterferenceDiversityGain.Thisfactorrepresentsthattheeffectofaveragenegativeeffectsoverusergeographic
locationaredirectlyproportionaltotheMALlength.
3. FrequencyDiversityGain.Thisfactormodelsthegainduetodiversityofmultipatheffectsandshouldbeappliedto
theinterferencecostcomponentonly.
4. ThefactthatlongMALswithsynthesizedhoppingpermitdiscardingtheworstcaseestimationandincludeagaindue
toDTXandlowtrafficloadattheinterfererend.
TheAdvancedpropertiestabshowninthefigurebelowfacilitatesmodellingtheseeffects.

197

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

Forsk2014

Figure 3.16:TheAdvancedtaboftheAFPmodulePropertiesdialogue
TheInterferenceDiversityGaintableliststhevaluesofI_DIVprovidedasafunctionsofMALlength.Thisgainisappliedtothe
interferencecostcomponentandtotheseparationconstraintviolationcostcomponent.Therefore,itprovidesameansto
modelthenonlinearFEReffectsandinterferencediversityboth.Thedefaultvaluesinthistablecorrespondtothecurve
y = 2 log 10 x . This equation generates values somewhat lower than empirical bestfound values (this is because we
preferaslightlypessimisticcostfunctiontobeonthesafeside).
TheothertablecontainstheF_DIVvalues,whicharethesameastheI_DIVvaluesbydefault.

3.11.2 TheAFPBlockedTrafficCost
ThissectionprovidesadditionalinformationontheAFPcostcomponentsusedfortheoptimisationofthenumberofTRXs.
Thisoptimisationisperformedforeachtrafficpoolinthenetwork.Inmostcases,thetrafficpoolisequivalenttoatransmitter
andcorrespondstotheBCCHandTCHsubcells.Inmorecomplexcases,atrafficpoolmayincludeadditionalsubcells,and
morethanonetrafficpoolsmayexistpertransmitter.
The cost component described below, and the recalculation of traffic loads, is only used when the AFP performs the
oprimisationofthenumberofTRXs.
Thenotationslistedhereafterareusedforthedescription.

198

{BCCH,TCH(1),TCH(2),,TCH(n)}:

{d(0),d(1),d(2),,d(n)}:
{ts(0),ts(1),ts(2),,ts(n)}:
{L(0),L(1),L(2),,L(n)}:
{CF(0),CF(1),CF(2),,CF(n)}:
CS(Erlangs):

PS(DataTimeslots):

{nb(0),nb(1),nb(2),,nb(n)}:
{HR(0),HR(1),HR(2),,HR(n)}:

Subcellsofatrafficpool.
Forconcentriccells,atleasttwotrafficpoolsexistpertransmitter.
TheBCCHsubcellmaynotalwaysbepartofthepoolsTRXtypes.
NumberofrequiredTRXsofeachTRXtypeinthepool.
Numbersoftraffictimeslots.
Trafficloads.
AFPcostfactors.
Overallcircuitswitchedtrafficdemandofthetrafficpool(Subcellstableor
trafficanalysisresults).
Overallpacketswitchedtrafficdemandofthetrafficpool(Subcellstableor
trafficanalysisresults).
IfCSorPSislessthan1,itsvalueissetto1inordertoavoidworking
withtransmitterscarryingnotraffic.
NumberofTRXsinthefrequencyplan.
TCHHRuseratios.

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

3.11.2.1 CalculationofNewTrafficLoadsIncludingBlockedTrafficLoads
DuringtheoptimisationofthenumberofTRXs,trafficloadsarecalculatedinordertodeterminetheblockedtrafficloads
BL nb .TheblockedtrafficloadisthenmultipliedbytheAFPcostweightandthenumberoftimeslotstocalculatethe
blockedtrafficcost.
WithouttheoptimisationofthenumberofrequiredTRXs,thenetworksweightedErlangsarecalculatedasfollows:
n

WE =

d i ts i L i CF i
i=0

WiththeoptimisationofthenumberofTRXs,thenetworksweightedErlangsarecalculatedasfollows:
n

WE =

nb i ts i BL nb + L nb CF i
i=0

BL nb and L nb representtheloadestimationandtheblockedloadestimationoftheAFP.Theyarecalculatedattraffic
poollevelforthevector{nb(0),nb(1),nb(2),,nb(n)}asfollows:

HR
PS + CS 1 -------------
2

BL nb + L nb = --------------------------------------------------------------n

Max 1
nb i ts i

i=0

HR

= Max i = 0 HR i

BL nb is determined from the above equation once L nb is known. L nb is obtained from the Erlang B equation
appliedtothetrafficpooldemandandthetotalnumberoftimeslots(TTS):
n

nb i ts i -
TTS = Max 1
----------------------------
HR

i = 0 1 ------------2

TheMax()functionabovegives1timeslotwhenthereisnoTRX.
P Blocking = ErlangB CS TTS
Theaboveequationsgivethenumberofservedcircuitswitchedtimeslots(SCS):
HR CS 1 P
SCS = 1 ------------Blocking
2
Thenumberofservedpacketswitchedtimeslots(SPS)isobtainedasfollows:
n

SPS = Min PS Max 1

nb i ts i SCS

i=0

L nb isgivenby:
SCS + SPS
L nb = -------------------------------------------------------------n

Max 1
nb i ts i

i=0

BL nb isgivenby:
HR
PS + CS 1 ------------
2
BL nb = --------------------------------------------------------------- L nb
n

Max 1
nb i ts i
i=0

199

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

Forsk2014

Once L nb and BL nb areknown, L nb replacesTLiinthecostfunction(See"TheAFPCostFunction"onpage 192),

and BL nb isusedtogenerateanewcostcomponent,theblockedErlangsofthepool:
n

nb i ts i BL nb CF i
i=0

3.11.2.2 RecalculationofCSandPSFromTrafficLoads
Inearlierversions,thedetailedtrafficdemandinformationisnotavailable.InordertoguidetheAFPtogenerateitfromthe
loads,thefollowingtwoequationswiththreevariablesmustbesolved.Theequationsaresolvableduetothemonotone
natureoftheErlangBfunction.
Inputsforagiventrafficpool:

{d(0),d(1),d(2),,d(n)}:
L:

NumberofrequiredTRXsofeachTRXtypeinthepool
Trafficload

TTS' :

ts

TTS' = Max 1
----------------------------
HR

i = 0 1 ------------2

MB:

Maximumblockingrate(between0and1).

Theratioofpacketswitcheddemandisgivenby:
PS
R = ---------------------------------------------------HR
PS + CS 1 ------------
2
Here,weassumethatatrafficloadof1isgeneratedbyademandof(1+MB)*TTSwhichgeneratesablockingrateofMB.In
otherwords,theratioiscalculatedsothattheworstcaseblockingrateisBM,givingaloadof1.
ThefollowingequationsaresolvedtofindPS,CS,andR,whicharecalculatedforatrafficloadof1.
MB = ErlangB CS' TTS'
PS'
R' = ------------------------------------------------------HR
PS' + CS' 1 ------------
2
PS' - + CS'
1 + MB TTS' = --------------------------HR
1 ------------
2
Whenthetrafficloadofapoolisnot1,PSisdifferentfromPSandCSisdifferentfromCS.Here,however,weassumethat
R=R.ThisassumptionimpliesthatRismoreorlessthesameasMBforbigtrafficpoolsandconsiderablylargerthanMBfor
smallerpools.
ThefollowingequationsaresolvedtofindPS,CS,andR,whicharecalculatedfortheactualtrafficloads.
PS
R = ---------------------------------------------------HR

PS + CS 1 -------------
2
P Blocking = ErlangB CS TTS'
HR CS 1 P
SCS = 1 ------------Blocking

2
n

SPS = Min PS Max 1

d i ts i SCS

i=0

SCS + SPS =

d i ts i L i
i=0

TheabovefiveequationsaresolvedtogetthevaluesofthefivevariablesPS,PC, P Blocking ,SCS,SPS,andcalculatethecost.

200

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

3.11.2.3 TestingtheBlockedCostUsingTrafficAnalysis
Aslongastheconditionsbelowholdtruw,theblockedcostcalculationintheAFPandtheeffectiveoverflowcalculationinthe
KPIcalculationanddimensioningusethesamealgorithm.Theconditionsare:

TheAFPcostfactorsare1,
TheHRratiosarethesamewithinthesubcellsofatrafficpool,
ThedimensioningmodelisbasedonErlangB,
Thetimeslotconfigurationsarethedefaultones,
ThereexistsatleastoneTRXinthetrafficpool(andatleastoneErlangoftraffic),
AlltransmittersbelongtothesameHCSLayer.

L nb
EffectiveOverflowrate= 1 -------------------------------------L nb + BL nb
Output:NewvaluesforCSandPS.

3.11.3 Interference
ThisappendixprovidesahighleveloverviewofinterferencetakenintoaccountbytheAFP.

3.11.3.1 UsingInterferences
IfinterferencesaretobetakenintoaccountbytheAFP,theymustbecalculatedorimportedbeforehand.Inordertodothis,
theusershouldpreviouslydecidetotakeinterferencesintoaccount(enablingtheloadingofallthepotentialinterferers).
Otherwise,Atolldoesnotallowperformingtheircomputationbydisablingthehistogrampartinthecorrespondingdialogue.

3.11.3.2 CumulativeDensityFunctionofC/ILevels
Foreach[interferedsubcell,interferingsubcell]pair,AtollcalculatesaC/Ivalueoneachpixeloftheinterferedsubcellservice
area(asifthetwosubcellssharethesamechannel).Then,AtollintegratestheseC/IvaluestodetermineaC/Idistributionand
transformsthisdistributionfunctionintoacumulativedensityfunctioninthenormalway.
InAtoll,boththeIMcoandIMadjarerepresentedbythisCumulativeDensityfunctionThisimpliesthateachqueryforthe
probabilitytohaveC/IconditionsworsethanXdBrequiresasinglememoryaccess:thecochannelinterferenceprobability
atXdB.Inordertodeducetheadjacentinterferenceprobabilityvalue,Atolllooksupthecumulativedensityfunctionatthe
valuecorrespondingtoXYdB,YdBbeingtheadjacencysuppressionvalue.Thefollowingexamplemaybehelpfulinfurther
clarifyingthisconcept:
Example:Let[TX1,BCCH]and[TX2,BCCH]betheinterferedandinterferingsubcellsrespectively.Theserviceareas
forbothhavebeendefinedbyBestServerwith0dBmargin.Theinterferenceprobabilityisstatedinpercentageof
interferedarea.

Figure 3.17:ThecumulativedensityofC/Ilevelsbetween[TX1,BCCH]and[TX2,BCCH]
Inthiscase,weobservethattheprobabilityforC/I(BCCHofTX2effectingtheBCCHofTX1)beinggreaterthan0is
100%(whichisnormalbecauseTX1istheBestServer).TheprobabilityofhavingaC/Ivalueatleastequalto31dBis
31.1%.ForarequiredC/Ilevelof12dBontheBCCHofTX1,theinterferenceprobabilityis6.5%(asthisrequirement
isfulfilledwithaprobabilityof93.5%).

201

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

Forsk2014

Thesubcellpoweroffsetdoesnotenterthecalculationresultsinthe.clcfile.Itisadded
laterbytheAFPinterface.Ontheotherhand,itsinfluenceonthesubcellservicezoneis
takenintoaccountinthe.clcfile.

3.11.3.3 PreciseDefinition
Pci v n C_I isdefinedtobetheprobabilityofacommunication(call)occupyingatimeslotinsubcellv(victim)tohaveC/
IconditionsofC_IwithrespecttoacochannelinterferencefromtheBCCHTRXofcelln(neighbour).WeassumeC_Ivalues
tobediscreteandindB.CDF(Pci)isthecumulativedensityfunctionofPci:
CDF Pci v n C_I =

Pci v n x

xC I

3.11.3.4 PreciseInterferenceDistributionStrategy
WhydoesAtollcalculateandmaintainpreciseinterferencedistributions,whilethemostcommonsolution(usedbymost
other tools) is rather to compress the information into two values: the cochannel and adjacentchannel interference
probabilities?
Thereasonissimplythatit,

3.11.3.4.1

improvestheAFPresult,
introducesverylittle(orno)overhead,and
createsmoregenericinterferenceinformation.

DirectAvailabilityofPreciseInterferenceDistributiontotheAFP
Inthepresenceoffrequencyhopping,andwhenoneormorefrequenciesarecommon(oradjacent)intwointerferingMAL
sequences,thehoppinggaindependsonfollowingfactors:

theMALlength,
thetrafficloadontheinterfererTRX,
DTXlevel,and
thenumberofcommon(andadjacent)frequenciesinthetwoMALs.

AllthesefactorscannotbeprecalculatedsinceitistheAFPthatdeterminestheMALlengthandtheMALfrequencies.

3.11.3.4.2

EfficientCalculationandStorageofInterferenceDistribution
IntheinnermostloopofthecalculationprocessAtollincrementsacountereachtimeaC/Ilevelhasacertainvalue.Inthe
caseofatwoentryIM,thereareonlytwocountersforeach[interfered,interferer]pair.Inthecaseofprecisedistribution
information,thereareabout40countersperpair.Inbothcases,thenumberofoperationsisthesame:oneincrementofan
integervalue.OnceAtollfinishesthecountingforan[interfered,interferer]pair,itcompressestheinformationfromthe
counterstoaCumulativeDensityFunction(CDF)representation.Inthisway,accesstointerferenceprobabilityatacertain
levelisinstantaneous.Thus,theonlyoverheadsaretheread/writetimestothefilesandthememoryoccupationatrunning
time.Thesetwooverheadsarenegligibleanddonotaffectthecalculations,theheaviestpartofthetask.

3.11.3.4.3

RobustnessoftheIM
ByhavingpreciseC/Idistributionscalculatedandexported,theuserisfreetochangethefollowingsettingswithouttheneed
forrecalculatingtheirinterferencedistributions:
1. Qualityrequirementsofnetworkelements(requiredC/I,%ProbabilityMax,),
2. C/Iweighting(theinterferencelevelsaboveandbelowtheC/Itarget),
3. Separationrequirementsand/orneighbourrelations,
4. Hoppinggainvalues,DTXactivities,trafficloadlevels,HSNs,synchronisationinformation,
5. Any frequency assignment setting (MAL length directives, frequency domains, assignment strategies, number of
requiredTRXs,costfunctionparameters,),or
6. Removeequipment
Bynotmixinganyoftheelementsabove,theinterferenceinformationkeepsitsoriginalprobabilityunitsandiseasiertocheck
andvalidate.Therefore,theuserspendslesstimeoninterferencerecalculationsthaninthecaseofatwoentrymatrix(
everythingisincluded).

202

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

3.11.3.5 TrafficLoadandInterferenceInformationDiscrimination
Atollmaintainsthetrafficloadseparatefromtheinterferenceinformation.Thereasonsforimplementingthisstrategyare
explainedhere.
Letuslookatthepossiblealternativestothisstrategy:
1. Themixedoption:Theinterferenceinformationcontainsthetrafficinformationaswell.Inthisway,eachIMentry
willcontainthequantityoftrafficinterferedifacochannel/adjacentchannelreuseexists.
2. Theseparatedoption:TheAFPhasseparateaccesstotrafficloadinformationandtointerferenceprobabilities(Asin
Atoll).
KnowingthedifferencebetweenthetwoalternativesolutionsexplainswhythesecondstrategyhasbeenoptedforforAtoll.
However,indetail,thishasbeendonebecause:

Option2isasupersetthatcontainsoption1.Butoption1,beingasubset,doesnotcontainoption2(i.e.oncethe
informationaremixedtheycannotbeseparated).
Itdoesnotcreateanyoverhead(thesizeoftheadditionalinformationisnegligiblecomparedtothesizeoftheIM).
Ithelpskeepingtheunitdefinitionssimpler.
ItisfacilitatesmergingIMswithdifferenttrafficunits.
Thetrafficinformationcanbeusedforweightingtheseparationviolationcomponent.
ThetrafficloadcanbeusedindecidingwhetheraTRXcanbeleftuncreated.
Forexample,iftherearetoomanyTRXsatasiteandtheuserwishesthattheAFPremoveoneofthem,inordertobe
able to not violate site constraints, the AFP must know the traffic loads in order to choose a low load TRX to be
removed.

The gain introduced by the traffic load of the interferer depends on the hopping mode and the MAL length.
IncorporatingthisgainintheIM(asaresultofthemixedoption)meansthattheIMsbecomehoppingmodeandMAL
sizedependent.ThisisabadideasincetheAFPshouldbeabletochangetheMAL.Andtheusershouldbeableto
changethehoppingmodewithoutrecalculatingtheIM.Inaddition,anIMcalculatedexternallytoAtoll,withanon
hoppingBCCHcanbeusedforthehoppingTCH.

Athirdoptionalsoexists.Though,thisoptionissopracticallyuselessduetoitsinefficiency.ItconsistsinmixingIMandtraffic
butstillkeepingthetrafficinitsisolatedform.ThisisagainabadideabecauseoftheunitdefinitionandthevarietyofIM
sources.ItinvolveslessbenefitsthantheoptionchoseninAtoll.

203

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter3:GSMGPRSEDGENetworks

204

Forsk2014

Chapter4
UMTSHSPANetworks
ThischapterdescribesUMTSHSPAcalculations.

Inthischapter,thefollowingareexplained:

"GeneralPredictionStudies"onpage 207

"Definitions"onpage 210

"ActiveSetManagement"onpage 221

"Simulations"onpage 221

"UMTSHSPAPredictionStudies"onpage 283

"AutomaticNeighbourAllocation"onpage 312

"PrimaryScramblingCodeAllocation"on
page 320

"AutomaticGSMUMTSNeighbourAllocation"
onpage 330

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

4 UMTSHSPANetworks
ThischapterdescribesallthecalculationsperformedinAtollUMTSHSPAdocuments.
AllthecalculationsareperformedonTBC(tobecalculated)transmitters.ForthedefinitionofTBCtransmitterspleaserefer
to"PathLossMatrices"onpage 99.

4.1 GeneralPredictionStudies
4.1.1 CalculationCriteria
Threecriteriacanbestudiedinpointanalysis(Profiletab)andincommoncoveragestudies.Studycriteriaaredetailedinthe
tablebelow:
Studycriteria

Formulas

Signallevel( P rec )indBm

Signallevelreceivedfromatransmitteronacarrier(cell)
P rec ic = EIRP ic L path M Shadowing model L Indoor + G term L term
L path = L model + L ant

Pathloss( L path )indBm

Totallosses( L total )indBm

Tx

L total = L path + L Tx + L term + L indoor + M Shadowing model G Tx + G term

where,
EIRPistheeffectiveisotropicradiatedpowerofthetransmitter,
icisacarrierrank,
L model isthelossonthetransmitterreceiverpath(pathloss)calculatedbythepropagationmodel,
L ant isthetransmitterantennaattenuation(fromantennapatterns),
Tx

M Shadowing model istheshadowingmargin.ThisparameteristakenintoaccountwhentheoptionShadowingtakeninto

accountisselected,
L Indoor aretheindoorlosses,takenintoaccountwhentheoptionIndoorcoverageisselected,
L term arethereceiverlosses,
G term isthereceiverantennagain,
G Tx isthetransmitterantennagain,
L Tx isthetransmitterloss( L Tx = L total DL ).Forinformationoncalculatingtransmitterloss,see"UMTS,CDMA2000,TD
SCDMA,WiMAX,andLTEDocuments"onpage 28.

EIRP ic = P pilot ic + G Tx L Tx ( P pilot ic isthecellpilotpower).

Whenyoumaketheprediction,youcanconsiderthebestcarrierofallbandsorthe
bestcarrierofaparticularfrequencyband.Inthiscase,Atolltakesthehighestpilot
powerofcarrierstocalculatethesignallevelreceivedfromatransmitter.
Atollconsidersthat G term and L term equalzero.

4.1.2 PointAnalysis
4.1.2.1 ProfileTab
Atolldisplayseitherthesignallevelreceivedfromtheselectedtransmitteronacarrier( P rec ic ),orthehighestsignallevel
receivedfromtheselectedtransmitteronthebestcarrier.

207

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

Foraselectedtransmitter,itisalsopossibletostudythepathloss, L path ,orthetotal

losses, L total .Pathlossandtotallossesarethesameonanycarrier.

4.1.2.2 ReceptionTab
AnalysisprovidedintheReceptiontabisbasedonpathlossmatrices.So,youcanstudyreceptionfromTBCtransmittersfor
whichpathlossmatriceshavebeencomputedontheircalculationareas.
Foreachtransmitter,Atolldisplayseitherthesignallevelreceivedonacarrier,( P rec ic ),orthehighestsignallevelreceived
onthebestcarrier.
Receptionbarsaredisplayedinadecreasingsignallevelorder.Themaximumnumberofreceptionbarsdependsonthesignal
levelreceivedfromthebestserver.Onlyreceptionbarsoftransmitterswhosesignalleveliswithina30 dBmarginfromthe
bestservercanbedisplayed.

Foraselectedtransmitter,itisalsopossibletostudythepathloss, L path ,orthetotal

losses, L total .Pathlossandtotallossesarethesameonanycarrier.

Youcanuseavalueotherthan30 dBforthemarginfromthebestserversignallevel,
for example a smaller value for improving the calculation speed. For more
information on defining a different value for this margin, see the Administrator
Manual.

4.1.3 CoverageStudies
ForeachTBCtransmitter,Txi,AtolldeterminestheselectedcriteriononeachpixelinsidetheTxicalculationarea.Infact,each
pixelwithintheTxicalculationareaisconsideredasapotential(fixedormobile)receiver.
Coveragestudyparameterstobesetare:

ThestudyconditionsinordertodeterminetheserviceareaofeachTBCtransmitter,
Thedisplaysettingstoselecthowtocolourserviceareas.

4.1.3.1 ServiceAreaDetermination
AtollusesparametersenteredintheConditiontabofthecoveragestudypropertydialoguetopredetermineareaswhereit
willdisplaycoverage.
Wecandistinguishthreecases:

4.1.3.1.1

AllServers
TheserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothebinswhere:
Txi

Txi

Txi

MinimumThreshold P rec ic or L total or L path MaximumThreshold

4.1.3.1.2

BestSignalLevelandaMargin
TheserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothebinswhere:
Txi

Txi

Txi

MinimumThreshold P rec ic or L total or L path MaximumThreshold

And
Txi
Txj
P rec ic Best P rec ic M
ji

Misthespecifiedmargin(dB).
Bestfunction:considersthehighestvalue.

208

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Ifthemarginequals0dB,Atollwillconsiderbinswherethesignallevelreceivedfrom
Txiisthehighest.
If the margin is set to 2 dB, Atoll will consider bins where the signal level received
fromTxiiseitherthehighestor2dBlowerthanthehighest.
Ifthemarginissetto2dB,Atollwillconsiderbinswherethesignallevelreceived
from Txi is 2dB higher than the signal levels from transmitters, which are 2nd best
servers.

4.1.3.1.3

SecondBestSignalLevelandaMargin
TheserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothebinswhere:
Txi

Txi

Txi

MinimumThreshold P rec ic or L total or L path MaximumThreshold

And
nd

Txi
Txj
P rec ic 2 Best P rec ic M
ji

Misthespecifiedmargin(dB).
2ndBestfunction:considersthesecondhighestvalue.

Ifthemarginequals0dB,Atollwillconsiderbinswherethesignallevelreceivedfrom
Txiisthesecondhighest.
If the margin is set to 2 dB, Atoll will consider bins where the signal level received
fromTxiiseitherthesecondhighestor2dBlowerthanthesecondhighest.
Ifthemarginissetto2dB,Atollwillconsiderbinswherethesignallevelreceived
from Txi is 2dB higher than the signal levels from transmitters, which are 3rd best
servers.

4.1.3.2 CoverageDisplay
4.1.3.2.1

PlotResolution
Predictionplotresolutionisindependentofthematrixresolutionsandcanbedefinedonaperstudybasis.Predictionplots
are generated from multiresolution path loss matrices using bilinear interpolation method (similar to the one used to
evaluatesitealtitude).

4.1.3.2.2

DisplayTypes
Itispossibletodisplaythetransmitterserviceareawithcoloursdependingonanytransmitterattributeorothercriteriasuch
as:
SignalLevel(indBm,dBV,dBV/m)
Atollcalculatessignallevelreceivedfromthetransmitteroneachpixelofeachtransmitterservicearea.Apixelofaservice
areaiscolouredifthesignallevelisgreaterthanorequaltothedefinedminimumthresholds(pixelcolourdependsonsignal
level).Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.Thereareasmany
layersastransmitterserviceareas.Eachlayershowsthedifferentsignallevelsavailableinthetransmitterservicearea.
BestSignalLevel(indBm,dBV,dBV/m)
Atollcalculatessignallevelsreceivedfromtransmittersoneachpixelofeachtransmitterservicearea.Whereotherservice
areasoverlapthestudiedone,Atollchoosesthehighestvalue.Apixelofaserviceareaiscolouredifthesignallevelisgreater
than or equal to the defined thresholds (the pixel colour depends on the signal level). Coverage consists of several
independentlayerswhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.Thereareasmanylayersasdefinedthresholds.Each
layercorrespondstoanareawherethesignallevelfromthebestserverexceedsadefinedminimumthreshold.
PathLoss(dB)
Atoll calculates path loss from the transmitter on eachpixel of each transmitter service area. A pixel ofa service area is
colouredifpathlossisgreaterthanorequaltothedefinedminimumthresholds(pixelcolourdependsonpathloss).Coverage
consistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.Thereareasmanylayersasservice
areas.Eachlayershowsthedifferentpathlosslevelsinthetransmitterservicearea.

209

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

TotalLosses(dB)
Atollcalculatestotallossesfromthetransmitteroneachpixelofeachtransmitterservicearea.Apixelofaserviceareais
colourediftotallossesisgreaterthanorequaltothedefinedminimumthresholds(pixelcolourdependsontotallosses).
Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.Thereareasmanylayers
asserviceareas.Eachlayershowsthedifferenttotallosseslevelsinthetransmitterservicearea.
BestServerPathLoss(dB)
Atollcalculatessignallevelsreceivedfromtransmittersoneachpixelofeachtransmitterservicearea.Whereotherservice
areasoverlapthestudiedone,Atolldeterminesthebesttransmitterandevaluatespathlossfromthebesttransmitter.Apixel
ofaserviceareaiscolouredifthepathlossisgreaterthanorequaltothedefinedthresholds(pixelcolourdependsonpath
loss).Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.Thereareasmany
layersasdefinedthresholds.Eachlayercorrespondstoanareawherethepathlossfromthebestserverexceedsadefined
minimumthreshold.
BestServerTotalLosses(dB)
Atollcalculatessignallevelsreceivedfromtransmittersoneachpixelofeachtransmitterservicearea.Whereserviceareas
overlapthestudiedone,Atolldeterminesthebesttransmitterandevaluatestotallossesfromthebesttransmitter.Apixelof
aserviceareaiscolouredifthetotallossesisgreaterthanorequaltothedefinedthresholds(pixelcolourdependsontotal
losses).Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.Thereareasmany
layersasdefinedthresholds.Eachlayercorrespondstoanareawherethetotallossesfromthebestserverexceedadefined
minimumthreshold.
NumberofServers
Atollevaluateshowmanyserviceareascoverapixelinordertodeterminethenumberofservers.Thepixelcolourdepends
onthenumberofservers.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.
Thereareasmanylayersasdefinedthresholds.Eachlayercorrespondstoanareawherethenumberofserversisgreaterthan
orequaltoadefinedminimumthreshold.
CellEdgeCoverageProbability(%)
On each pixel of each transmitter service area, the coverage corresponds to the pixels where the signal level from this
transmitterfulfilssignalconditionsdefinedinConditionstabwithdifferentCelledgecoverageprobabilities.Thereisone
coverageareapertransmitterintheexplorer.
BestCellEdgeCoverageProbability(%)
Oneachpixelofeachtransmitterservicearea,thecoveragecorrespondstothepixelswherethebestsignallevelreceived
fulfilssignalconditionsdefinedinConditionstab.Thereisonecoverageareapercelledgecoverageprobabilityintheexplorer.

4.2 Definitions
Thissectiondetailsthetermsthatdescribetheusersandtheservices,theinputparametersaswellastheformulasusedin
simulationsandpredictions(coveragepredictionsandpointanalysis).

4.2.1 Glossary
Inthischapter,wewillusethefollowingtermstodescribetheusersandtheservices:
R99users:TheCircuit(R99)andPacket(R99)serviceusers.TheyrequireanR99bearer.
HSDPAusers:TheusersthatonlysupportHSDPA.TheyhaveanHSDPAcapableterminalandoneoftheseservices:

Packet(HSDPABestEffort),
Packet(HSDPAVariableBitRate).

HSDPAusersrequireanR99bearer(i.e.theADPCHradiobearer)andanHSDPAbearer.
HSPAusers:TheusersthatsupportbothHSDPAandHSUPA.TheyhaveanHSPAcapableterminalandoneoftheseservices:

Packet(HSPABestEffort),
Packet(HSPAVariableBitRate),
Packet(HSPAConstantBitRate).

HSPAusersrequireanR99bearer(i.e.theEDPCCH/ADPCHradiobearer),anHSDPAbearerandanHSUPAbearer.
DCHSPAusers:ThedualcellHSPAusers.UserswithdualcellHSPAcapableterminalsthatcansimultaneouslyconnectto
twoHSPAcellsofthetransmitterfordatatransfer.TheR99ADPCHbeareristransmittedononeofthecells,whichiscalled

210

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

theanchorcell.TheusercanbeassignedHSDPAandHSUPAbearersineachofthecells.
MCHSPAusers:ThemulticellHSPAusers.UserswithmulticellHSPAcapableterminalsthatcansimultaneouslyconnectto
severalHSPAcellsofthetransmitterfordatatransfer.TheR99ADPCHbeareristransmittedononeofthecells,whichis
calledtheanchorcell.TheusercanbeassignedHSDPAandHSUPAbearersineachofthecells.
DBMCHSPAusers:ThedualbandmulticellHSPAusers.UserswithdualbandmulticellHSPAcapableterminalsthatcan
simultaneouslyconnecttoseveralHSPAcellsoncositetransmittersusingdifferentfrequencybands.TheR99ADPCHbearer
istransmittedononeofthecells,whichiscalledtheanchorcell.TheusercanbeassignedHSDPAandHSUPAbearersineach
ofthecells.
BEservices:BestEffortservices.
VBRservices:VariableBitRateservices.
CBRservices:ConstantBitRateservices.CBRservicesdonotsupportmulticellmode.

4.2.2 Inputs
Thistablelistssimulationandpredictioninputs(calculationoptions,qualitytargets,activesetmanagementconditions,etc.).
Name

Value

Unit

Description

F ortho

Clutterparameter

None

Orthogonalityfactor

Tx

Siteequipmentparameter

None

MUDfactor

F MUD

TerminalparameterHSDPAproperties

None

MUDfactor

cn first

Frequencybandparameter

None

Firstcarriernumber

cn last

Frequencybandparameter

None

Lastcarriernumber

cn

Frequencybandparameter

None

Carriernumberstep

F MUD
Term

Frequencybandparameter

ic

None

Carrierrankofthecurrentcarrier
calculatedasfollows:
cn cnfirst
- cn lower
ic = ------------------------ cn
Where cn lower isthenumberof
carriernumberslowerthan cn
includingexcludedcarriersand
carriersofotherfrequencybands

Thresholdformacrodiversity
None specifiedforatransmitteronagiven
carrieric

AS_Th Txi ic

Cellparameter

RSCP min Txi ic

CellparameterorGlobalparameter

TheminimumpilotRSCPrequiredfor
ausertobeconnectedtothe
transmitteronagivencarrier

req

E----c
I 0 threshold Mobilityparameter

None

Ec/I0targetondownlinkforthebest
server

Globalparameter

None

PilotRSCPthresholdforcompressed
modeactivation

CM activation

Globalparameter

None

Ec/I0thresholdforcompressed
modeactivation

DL

E b
---(Receptionequipment,R99bearer,Mobility)parameter
N t req

None

Eb/Nttargetondownlink

Globalparameter

None

DownlinkEb/Nttargetincreasedue
tocompressedmodeactivation

E b
---(Receptionequipment,R99bearer,Mobility)parameter
N t req

None

Eb/Nttargetonuplink

Globalparameter

None

UplinkEb/Nttargetincreasedueto
compressedmodeactivation

Q pilot
CM activation

RSCP pilot
Q pilot

Q req

DL

DL

Q req
UL

Q req
UL

Q req

UL

211

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Name

Value

Unit

Description

Max

Siteparameter

None

Numberofchannelelements
availableforasiteonuplink

N CE DL N I

Max

Siteparameter

None

Numberofchannelelements
availableforasiteondownlink

N CE UL N I

Simulationresult

None

Numberofchannelelementsofa
siteconsumedbyusersonuplink

N CE DL N I

Simulationresult

None

Numberofchannelelementsofa
siteconsumedbyusersondownlink

SiteequipmentparameterULoverheadresourcesforcommon
channels/cell

None

Numberofchannelelementsusedby
thecellforcommonchannelson
uplink

SiteequipmentparameterDLoverheadresourcesforcommon
channels/cell

None

Numberofchannelelementsusedby
thecellforcommonchannelson
downlink

R99 T CH

(R99bearer,siteequipment)parameter

None

Numberofchannelelementsused
forR99trafficchannelsonuplink

R99 T CH

(R99bearer,siteequipment)parameter

None

Numberofchannelelementsused
forR99trafficchannelsondownlink

N CE

HSUPA

(HSUPAbearer,siteequipment)parameter

None

Numberofchannelelements
consumedbytheHSUPAbeareron
uplink

Max

Siteparameter

kbps

MaximumIubbackhaulthroughput
forasiteintheuplink

TP Iub DL N I

Max

Siteparameter

kbps

MaximumIubbackhaulthroughput
forasiteinthedownlink

TP Iub UL N I

Simulationresult

kbps

Iubbackhaulthroughputforasitein
theuplink

TP Iub DL N I

Simulationresult

kbps

Iubbackhaulthroughputforasitein
thedownlink

Siteequipmentparameter

kbps

Iubthroughputrequiredbythecell
forcommonchannelsinthe
downlink

HSDPA

Siteequipmentparameter

HSDPAIubbackhauloverhead

E1 T1 Ethernet

Siteequipmentparameter

kbps

ThroughputcarriedbyanE1/T1/
Ethernetlink

R99 T CH

(R99bearer,siteequipment)parameter

kbps

Iubbackhaulthroughputconsumed
bytheR99bearerintheuplink

R99 T CH

(R99bearer,siteequipment)parameter

kbps

Iubbackhaulthroughputconsumed
bytheR99bearerinthedownlink

HSUPA

(HSUPAbearer,siteequipment)parameter

kbps

Iubbackhaulthroughputconsumed
bytheHSUPAbearerintheuplink

N Codes Txi ic

Simulationconstraint

None

Maximumnumberof512bitlength
OVSFcodesavailablepercell(512)

N Codes Txi ic

Simulationresult

None

Numberof512bitlengthOVSF
codesusedbythecell

SiteequipmentparameterDLoverheadresourcesforcommon
channels/cell

None

Numberof256bitlengthOVSF
codesusedbythecellforcommon
channels

N CE UL N I

Overhead

N CE UL

Overhead

N CE DL

N CE UL
N CE DL

TP Iub UL N I

Overhead

TP Iub DL N I
Overhead Iub
TP

TP Iub UL
TP Iub DL
TP Iub
Max

Overhead

N Codes

Txi ic

Cellparameter(forHSDPAonly)

Maximumnumberof16bitlength
None OVSFcodesavailablepercellforHS
PDSCH

Txi ic

Cellparameter(forHSDPAonly)

Minimumnumberof16bitlength
None OVSFcodesavailablepercellforHS
PDSCH

HSPDSCH Max

N Codes

HSPDSCH Min

N Codes

212

Forsk2014

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Name

Value

Unit

Description

NF term

Terminalparameter

None

TerminalNoiseFigure

Transmitterparameter(userdefinedorcalculatedfromtransmitter
None
equipmentcharacteristics)

NF Tx

1.381023

TransmitterNoiseFigure

J/K

Boltzmanconstant

293

Ambienttemperature

3.84MHz

Hz

SpreadingBandwidth

NR inter techno log y

Cellparameter

Tx DL

NR inter techno log y

Cellparameter
OnlyusedinuplinkinterferencebasedcalculationsoftheMonte
Carlosimulation

RF ic ic adj

Networkparameter
Ifnotdefined,itisassumedthatthereisnointercarrier
interference

Tx UL

Tx m

ICP ic ic
i

Networkparameter
Ifnotdefined,itisassumedthatthereisnointertechnology
downlinkinterferencesduetoexternaltransmitters

None Intertechnologydownlinknoiserise
None

Intertechnologyuplinknoiserise

None

Interferencereductionfactor
betweentwoadjacentcarriers ic
and ic adj

IntertechnologyChannelProtection
betweenthesignaltransmittedbyTx
andreceivedbymassumingthe
None
frequencygapbetween ic i (external
network)and ic

UL

Cellparameter(userdefinedorsimulationresult)

Totaluplinkloadfactorofthecell

UL

Simulationresult

Uplinkcellloadcontributiondueto
R99traffic

X HSUPA

Cellparameter

Uplinkcellloadcontributiondueto
HSUPAtraffic

UL

Simulationconstraint(globalparameterorcellparameter)

Maximumuplinkloadfactorofthe
cell

Simulationconstraint(globalparameterorcellparameter)

Maximumpercentageofusedpower

Thermalnoiseattransmitter

Thermalnoiseatterminal

bps

Chiprate

X R99
UL

X max
DL

%Powermax

Tx UL

Tx

NF Tx K T W NR inter techno log y

Term

NF Term K T W NR inter techno log y

N0
N0

Rc

Tx DL

W 10

UL

Siteequipmentparameter

f rakeefficiency

DL

Terminalparameter

None

Downlinkrakereceiverefficiency
factor

TP P DL

R99

R99bearerparameter

kbps

R99bearerdownlinkpeak
throughput

F spreading Activeuser

R99bearerparameter

None

Downlinkspreadingfactorforactive
users

DL

R99bearerparameter

None

Downlinkspreadingfactorfor
inactiveusers

f rakeefficiency

DL

F spreading Inactiveuser

None Uplinkrakereceiverefficiencyfactor

rc

DL

R99bearerparameter

None

RatiobetweenDPCCHandDPCH
transmissiondurationondownlink
DPCCHandDPCHrespectivelyrefer
totheDedicatedPhysicalControl
ChannelandDedicatedPhysical
Channel

TP max DL

Cellparameter

kbps

Maximumconnectionthroughput
peruserondownlink

R99

R99bearerparameter

kbps

R99beareruplinkpeakthroughput

TP P UL

213

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

Name

Value

Unit

Description

f act

UL

Serviceparameter

kbps

Uplinkactivityfactorfortheservice

f act

DL

Serviceparameter

kbps

Downlinkactivityfactorforthe
service

f act ADPCH

UL

Serviceparameter

kbps

UplinkactivityfactoronEDPCCH
channels

f act ADPCH

DL

Serviceparameter

kbps

DownlinkActivityfactoronADPCH
channel

TPD min UL

Serviceparameter

kbps

Minimumrequiredbitratethatthe
serviceshouldhaveinordertobe
availableintheuplink

TPD min DL

Serviceparameter

kbps

Minimumrequiredbitratethatthe
serviceshouldhaveinordertobe
availableinthedownlink

TPD max UL

Serviceparameter

kbps

Maximumbitratethattheservice
canrequireintheuplink

TPD max DL

Serviceparameter

kbps

Maximumbitratethattheservice
canrequireinthedownlink

RatiobetweentheDPCCHandDPCH
powerstransmittedonuplink
DPCCHandDPCHrespectivelyrefer
None
totheDedicatedPhysicalControl
ChannelandDedicatedPhysical
Channel

rc

UL

R99bearerparameter

TP max UL

Cellparameter

kbps

Maximumconnectionthroughput
peruseronuplink

DL

W ----------------R99
TP P DL

None

Servicedownlinkprocessinggain

Gp

UL

W ----------------R99
TP P UL

None

Serviceuplinkprocessinggain

I HSDPABearer

HSDPAbearerparameter

None

IndexoftheHSDPAbearerobtained
bytheuserinthecell(Txi,ic)

HSDPAbearerparameter

kbps

PeakRLCthroughputsupportedby
theHSDPAbearer

kbps

PeakRLCthroughputprovidedtothe
userinthecell(Txi,ic)inthe
downlink

kbps

PeakRLCthroughputprovidedtothe
userinthedownlink

TPD min DL
----------------------------------------------------DL
TP P RLC I HSDPABearer

HSDPAbearerconsumptionfora
CBRserviceuser

HSDPAstudyresult

kbps

EffectiveRLCthroughputsupported
bytheHSDPAbearer

Gp

DL

TP P RLC
I HSDPABearer

DL

WithoutMIMO: TP P RLC I HSDPABearer

DL

TP P RLC Tx ic

DL

WithMIMO(transmitdiversity): TP P RLC I HSDPABearer

WithMIMO(spatialmultiplexing):
DL
TP P RLC I HSDPABearer

Max

1 + fSM Gain G SM 1

HSDPAstudyresult
ForsinglecarrierHSPAusers
DL

TP P RLC Tx ic
DL

TP P RLC
ForMCHSPAusers

DL

TP P RLC Tx ic

ic Tx

C HSDPABearer
DL

TP E RLC

214

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Name

Value

Unit

Description

HSDPAstudyresult

kbps

AverageeffectiveRLCthroughput
supportedbytheHSDPAbearer

DL

HSDPAstudyresult

kbps

PeakMACthroughputsupportedby
theHSDPAbearer

DL

HSDPAstudyresult

kbps

EffectiveMACthroughputsupported
bytheHSDPAbearer

DL

HSDPAstudyresult

kbps

Userapplicationthroughputon
downlink

TP A

UL

HSUPAstudyresult

kbps

Userapplicationthroughputon
uplink

TP Av A

UL

HSUPAstudyresult

kbps

Useraverageapplicationthroughput
onuplink

I HSUPABearer

HSUPABearerparameter

None

IndexoftheHSUPAbearerobtained
inthecell(Txi,ic)

DL

TP Av E RLC
TP P MAC
TP E MAC
TP A

N Rtx
I HSUPABearer

HSUPAbearerselectionparameter

Maximumnumberof
retransmissionsaHARQprocesswill
kbps
performforablockofdatabefore
movingontoanewblockofdata,for
theHSUPAbearerindex

UL

kbps

PeakRLCthroughputsupportedby
theHSUPAbearer

kbps

PeakRLCthroughputprovidedtothe
userinthecell(Txi,ic)intheuplink

kbps

PeakRLCthroughputprovidedtothe
userintheuplink

TPD min UL
----------------------------------------------------UL
TP P RLC I HSUPABearer

HSUPAbearerconsumptionfora
CBRserviceuser

HSUPAstudyresult

kbps

MinimumeffectiveRLCthroughput
supportedbytheHSUPAbearer

TP Av E R LC

HSUPAstudyresult

kbps

AverageeffectiveRLCthroughput
supportedbytheHSUPAbearer

TP P M AC

UL

HSUPAstudyresult

kbps

PeakMACthroughputsupportedby
theHSUPAbearer

TP Offset

Serviceparameter(forHSDPAonly)

kbps

Throughputoffset

f TP Scaling

Serviceparameter(forHSDPAonly)

Scalingfactor

P max Txi

Transmitterparameter

Maximumsharedpower
Availableonlyiftheintercarrier
powersharingoptionisactivated

P SCH Txi ic

Cellparameter

Cellsynchronisationchannelpower

P OtherCCH Txi ic

Cellparameter

Cellothercommonchannels(except
CPICHandSCH)power

P pilot Txi ic

Cellparameter

Cellpilotpower

P HSDPA Txi ic

Cellparameter(userdefinedorsimulationresult)(forHSDPAonly)
P HS PDSCH Txi ic + n HS SCCH P HS SCCH Txi ic

AvailablecellHSDPApower
HSDPA:HighSpeedDownlinkPacket
Access

TPP RLC
I HSUPABearer
UL

TP P RLC Tx ic

HSUPAbearerparameter

UL

TP P RLC I HSUPABearer
HSUPAstudyresult
ForsinglecarrierHSPAusers
UL

TP P RLC Tx ic
UL
TP P RLC

ForMCHSPAusers

UL

TP P RLC Tx ic

ic Tx

C HSUPABearer
UL

TP Min E R LC
UL

215

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

Name

Value

Unit

Description

P HS PDSCH Txi ic

Simulationresult(forHSDPAonly)

CellHSPDSCHpower
HSPDSCH:HighSpeedPhysical
DownlinkSharedChannel

P HS SCCH Txi ic

Cellparameter(forHSDPAonly)

CellHSSCCHpower
HSSCCH:HighSpeedSharedControl
Channel

n HS SCCH

Cellparameter(forHSDPAonly)

P Headroom Txi ic

Cellparameter(forHSDPAonly)

Cellheadroompower

P max Txi ic

Cellparameter

MaximumCellpower

P tch Txi ic

Simulationresult

R99trafficchannelpower
transmittedoncarrieric

min

R99bearerparameter

MinimumpowerallowedonR99
trafficdatachannel

P tch

max

R99bearerparameter

MaximumpowerallowedonR99
trafficdatachannel

P HSUPA Txi ic

Cellparameter

CellHSUPApower
HSUPA:HighSpeedUplinkPacket
Access

P tx H SDPA Txi ic

Simulationresult

TransmitterHSDPApower
transmittedoncarrieric

TransmitterR99powertransmitted
oncarrieric

P tch

numberofHSSCCHchannels
managedbythecell

Simulationresult
P pilot Txi ic + P SCH Txi ic + P OtherCCH Txi ic +
P tx R99 Txi ic

P tch Txi ic +

tch(ic)usedfor
R99users

DL

P tch Txi ic f act ADPCH

tch(ic)usedfor
HSUPAusers

P tx Txi ic

Cellparameter(userdefinedorsimulationresult)
P tx R99 Txi ic + P tx H SDPA Txi ic + P HSUPA Txi ic

Transmittertotalpowertransmitted
oncarrieric

P term R99

Calculatedinthesimulationbutnotdisplayed

Terminalpowertransmittedto
obtaintheR99radiobearer

P term HSUPA

Calculatedinthesimulationbutnotdisplayed

Terminalpowertransmittedto
obtaintheHSUPAradiobearer

Totalpowertransmittedbythe
terminal

Simulationresult
UL

P term

P term R99 f act ADPCH +

P term HSUPA Tx ic forHSPA,MC

ic Tx

HSPAandDBMCHSPAusers
P term R99 forR99andHSDPAusers
P term

min

Terminalparameter

Minimumterminalpowerallowed

P term

max

Terminalparameter

Maximumterminalpowerallowed

BTS

BTSparameter

PercentageofBTSsignalcorrectly
transmitted

term

Terminalparameter

Percentageofterminalsignal
correctlytransmitted

Clutterparameter

Percentageofpilotfinger
percentageofsignalreceivedbythe
terminalpilotfinger

G Tx

Antennaparameter

None

Transmitterantennagain

G Term

Terminalparameter

None

Terminalgain

DL

R99bearerparameterDependsonthetransmitterTxdiversity

None

Gainduetotransmitdiversity

G Div

216

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Name

Value

Unit

Description

UL

R99bearerparameterDependsonthetransmitterRxdiversity

None

Gainduetoreceivediversity

G SM

Max

MIMOconfigurationparameter

dB

Maximumspatialmultiplexinggain
foragivennumberoftransmission
andreceptionantennas

G TD

DL

MIMOconfigurationparameter

dB

DownlinkTransmitDiversitygainfor
agivennumberoftransmissionand
receptionantennaports

f SM Gain

Clutterparameter

None

Spatialmultiplexinggainfactor

Clutterparameter

dB

Additionaldiversitygainindownlink

G Div

DL

G TD

Transmitterparameter(userdefinedorcalculatedfromtransmitter
None
equipmentcharacteristics)

L Tx

Transmitterlossa

L body

Serviceparameter

None

Bodyloss

L Term

Terminalparameter

None

Terminalloss

L indoor

Clutterparameter

L path

Propagationmodelresult

None

Pathloss

M Shadowing model

Resultcalculatedfromcelledgecoverageprobabilityandmodel
standarddeviation

None

ModelShadowingmargin
Onlyusedinpredictionstudies

M Shadowing Ec Io

ResultcalculatedfromcelledgecoverageprobabilityandEc/I0
standarddeviation

None

Ec/I0Shadowingmargin
Onlyusedinpredictionstudies

None

DLgainduetoavailabilityofseveral
pilotsignalsatthemobileb.

DL

M Shadowing Eb Nt

n=2or3
DL

ResultcalculatedfromcelledgecoverageprobabilityandDLEb/Nt
None
standarddeviation

DLEb/NtShadowingmargin
Onlyusedinpredictionstudies

UL

ResultcalculatedfromcelledgecoverageprobabilityandULEb/Nt
None
standarddeviation

ULEb/NtShadowingmargin
Onlyusedinpredictionstudies

UL

UL
G macro diversity

E Shadowing

npaths

G macro diversity = M Shadowing Ec Io M Shadowing Ec Io

DL

G macro diversity
M Shadowing Eb Nt

Indoorloss

npaths

G macro diversity = M Shadowing Eb Nt

UL

M Shadowing Eb Nt

n=2or3
Globalparameter(defaultvalue)
Simulationresult

UL

None

ULqualitygainduetosignaldiversity
in soft handoffc.

None

Randomshadowingerrordrawn
duringMonteCarlosimulation
Onlyusedinsimulations

None

Transmitterterminaltotalloss

Chippowerreceivedatterminal

Inpredictionstudiesd
ForEc/I0calculation
L path L Tx L term L body L indoor M Shadowing Ec Io
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G Tx G term
ForDLEb/Ntcalculation
LT

L path L Tx L term L body L indoor M Shadowing Eb Nt

DL
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G Tx G term
ForULEb/Ntcalculation
L path L Tx L term L body L indoor M Shadowing Eb Nt
UL
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G Tx G term
Insimulations
L path L Tx L term L body L indoor E Shadowing
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G Tx G term

P c Txi ic

P pilot Txi ic
-------------------------------LT

217

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

Name
DL

P b Txi ic
DL

P tot Txi ic

Value

Unit

Description

P tch Txi ic
----------------------------LT

Bitpowerreceivedatterminalon
carrieric

P tx Txi ic
--------------------------LT

Totalpowerreceivedatterminal
fromatransmitteroncarrieric

P tch Txi ic
----------------------------LT

Totalpowerreceivedatterminal
fromtrafficchannelsofatransmitter
oncarrieric

P term
-----------LT

Bitpowerreceivedattransmitteron
carriericusedbyterminal

P term R99
-----------------------LT

Bitpowerreceivedattransmitteron
carriericusedbyterminal

Bitpowerreceivedattransmitteron
DPDCHfromaterminaloncarrieric

DL

P traf Txi ic

tch ic
UL

P b ic
UL

P b R99 ic
UL

UL

P b DPDCH ic
a.

UL

P b R99 ic 1 r c

L Tx = L total UL onuplinkand L Tx = L total DL ondownlink.Forinformationoncalculatingtransmitterlossesonuplinkanddownlink,

see"UMTS,CDMA2000,TDSCDMA,WiMAX,andLTEDocuments"onpage 28.
npaths

M Shadowing Ec Io correspondstotheshadowingmarginevaluatedfromtheshadowingerrorprobabilitydensityfunction(npaths)incase

b.

ofdownlinkEc/I0modelling.
npaths

M Shadowing Eb Nt

c.

UL

correspondstotheshadowingmarginevaluatedfromtheshadowingerrorprobabilitydensityfunction(npaths)

incaseofuplinksofthandoffmodelling.
In uplink prediction studies, only carrier power level is downgraded by the shadowing margin ( M Shadowing Eb Nt

d.

UL

). In downlink

predictionstudies,carrierpowerlevelandintracellinterferencearedowngradedbytheshadowingmodel( M Shadowing Eb Nt
M Shadowing Ec Io ) while extracell interference level is not. Therefore, M Shadowing Eb Nt

DL

DL

or

or M Shadowing Ec Io is set to 1 in

downlinkextracellinterferencecalculation.

4.2.3 Ec/I0Calculation
Thistabledetailsthepilotquality( Q pilot or Ec Io )calculations.
Name

Value

Unit

Description

I intra txi ic

P SCH txi ic
DL
DL
-
P tot txi ic BTS P tot txi ic ----------------------------L

Downlinkintracellinterferenceat
terminaloncarrier ic

Downlinkextracellinterferenceat
terminaloncarrier ic

Downlinkintercarrierinterference
atterminaloncarrier ic

DL

DL

I extra ic

DL

P tot txj ic

txj j i

Ptot txj icadj

DL

DL
I inter carrier ic

txj j
---------------------------------------------

RF ic ic adj
Tx

P Transmitted ic i

------------------------------------Tx
Tx m
L
ICP

DL

I inter techno log y ic

ni

ic i ic

total

Downlinkintertechnology
interferenceatterminaloncarrieric
a

WithoutPilot:
DL

DL

DL

DL

I intra txi ic + I extra ic + I inter carrier ic + I inter techno log y ic

Term

+ N0

DL

I 0 ic

1 BTS P c txi ic

DL

Totalnoise:

DL

DL

P tot txi ic + I extra ic + I inter carrier ic

DL

Term

+ I inter techno log y ic + N 0

218

Totalreceivednoiseatterminalon
carrier ic

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

a.

Name

Value

Unit

Description

E
Q pilot txi ic ----c
I0

BTS P c txi ic
-------------------------------------------------DL
I 0 ic

None

Qualitylevelatterminalonpilotfor
carrier ic

InthecaseofaninterferingGSMexternalnetworkinfrequencyhopping,theICPvalueisweightedaccordingtothefractionalload.

4.2.4 DLEb/NtCalculation
Eb
DL
Thistabledetailscalculationsofdownlinktrafficchannelquality( Q tch or ------ ).
Nt DL
Name

Value

Unit

Description

I intra txi ic

P SCH txi ic
DL
DL
-
P tot txi ic BTS F ortho P tot txi ic ----------------------------L

Downlinkintracellinterferenceat
terminaloncarrier ic

Downlinkextracellinterferenceat
terminaloncarrier ic

Downlinkintercarrierinterference
atterminaloncarrier ic

DL

DL

I extra ic

DL

P tot txj ic

txj j i

Ptot txj icadj

DL

DL
I inter carrier ic

txj
j
--------------------------------------------RF ic ic adj

DL
I inter techno log y ic

ni
DL

N tot ic

DL

DL

Tx

P Transmitted ic i
------------------------------------Tx
Tx m
L total ICP ic ic

DL

Downlinkintertechnology
interferenceatterminaloncarrieric

Totalreceivednoiseatterminalon
carrieric

None

Qualitylevelatterminalonatraffic
channelfromonetransmitteron
carrier ic b

Term

DL

I intra ic + I extra ic + I inter carrier ic + I inter techno log y ic + N 0

Withoutusefulsignal:
DL

DL
Q tch txi

E
ic ----b-
N t DL

BTS P b txi ic
DL
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ G DL
Div G p
DL
DL
N tot ic 1 F ortho BTS P b txi ic
DL

BTS P b txi ic
DL
- G DL
TotalNoise: ------------------------------------------Div G p
DL
N tot ic
DL

Q ic

DL
f rakeefficiency

DL
Q tch tx k

tx k ActiveSet
DL

Q ic
--------------------------------------------------DL
Q tch BestServer ic

DL

G SHO

req
P tch txi

a.
b.

ic

Qualitylevelatterminalusingcarrier
ic duetocombinationofall
None
transmittersoftheactiveset
(Macrodiversityconditions).

ic

None

Softhandovergainondownlink

Requiredtransmittertrafficchannel
powertoachieveEb/Nttargetat
terminaloncarrier ic

DL

Q req
----------------- P tch txi ic
DL
Q ic

InthecaseofaninterferingGSMexternalnetworkinfrequencyhopping,theICPvalueisweightedaccordingtothefractionalload.
CalculationoptionmaybeselectedintheGlobalparameterstab.Thechosenoptionwillbetakenintoaccountonlyinsimulations.Inpoint
analysisandcoveragestudies,AtollusestheoptionTotalnoisetoevaluateDLandULEb/Nt.

219

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

4.2.5 ULEb/NtCalculation
Eb
UL
Thistabledetailscalculationsofuplinktrafficchannelquality( Q tch or ------ ).
Nt UL
Name
UL intra

I tot

Value

Pb

UL

txi ic

ic

Unit

Description

Totalpowerreceivedattransmitter
fromintracellterminalsusingcarrier
ic

Totalpowerreceivedattransmitter
fromextracellterminalsusing
carrier ic

Uplinkintercarrierinterferenceat
terminaloncarrier ic

Totalreceivedinterferenceat
transmitteroncarrier ic

Totalnoiseattransmitteroncarrier
ic
(Uplinkinterference)

None

Qualitylevelattransmitterona
trafficchannelforcarrier ic a

term
txi

UL extra

I tot

txi ic

UL

P b ic

term
txj j i

Pb

UL

UL
I inter carrier txi

ic

ic adj

term
txj j
-----------------------------------

RF ic ic adj

UL extra

UL

I tot txi ic

I tot

UL intra

Tx

txi ic + 1 F MUD term I tot

txi ic

UL

+ I inter carrier txi ic

UL

UL

N tot txi ic

tx

I tot txi ic + N 0

Withoutusefulsignal:
UL

term P b DPDCH ic
UL
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- G UL
Div G p
UL
Tx
UL
N tot txi ic 1 F MUD term P b ic

E
UL
Q tch txi ic ----b-
N t UL

UL

term P b DPDCH ic
UL
- G UL
Totalnoise: --------------------------------------------------Div G p
UL
N tot txi ic
UL

NoHO: Q tch txi ic

UL

SofterHO: f rakeefficiency

UL

Q tch tx k ic

tx k ActiveSet
samesite

Soft,softer/softHO(NoMRC):

UL
Max Q UL
tch tx k ic G macro diversity

tx k ActiveSet

Softer/softHO(MRC):

UL

Q ic

UL

UL
UL
Q tch tx k ic Q tch tx l ic
txk ,tx l ActiveSet f rakeefficiency

tx k samesite

tx k
Max

Qualitylevelatsiteusingcarrieric
duetocombinationofall
transmittersoftheactivesetlocated
atthesamesiteandtakinginto
accountincreasingofthequalitydue
None
tomacrodiversity(macrodiversity
gain).

UL

Insimulations G macro diversity = 1 .

tx l othersite

UL

G macro diversity

UL

G SHO

220

UL

Q ic
-------------------------------------------------UL
Q tch BestServer ic

None

Softhandovergainonuplink

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Name

Value

Description

Requiredterminalpowertoachieve
Eb/Nttargetattransmitteroncarrier
ic

UL

Q req
----------------- P term
UL
Q ic

req

P term ic
a.

Unit

CalculationoptionmaybeselectedintheGlobalparameterstab.Thechosenoptionwillbetakenintoaccountonlyinsimulations.Inpoint
analysisandcoveragestudies,AtollusestheoptionTotalnoisetoevaluateDLandULEb/Nt.

4.3 ActiveSetManagement
Themobilesactiveset(AS)isthelistofthetransmitterstowhichthemobileisconnected.Theactivesetmayconsistofone
or more transmitters, depending on whether the service supports soft handover and on the terminal active set size.
Transmittersinthemobileactivesetmustuseafrequencybandwithwhichtheterminaliscompatibleandthepilotsignal
levelreceivedfromthesetransmittersmustexceedthedefinedminimumRSCPthreshold.
Itis,however,thequalityofthepilot(EcI0)thatfinallydetermineswhetherornotatransmittercanbelongtotheactiveset.
Cellsenteringamobilesactivesetmustsatisfythefollowingconditions:

Thebestserver(firstcellenteringactiveset)
ThepilotqualityfromthebestservingcellmustexceedtheEc/I0threshold.Bestservercellistheonewiththehighest
pilotquality.

Othercellsintheactiveset

Mustusethesamecarrierasthebestserver,
ThepilotqualitydifferencebetweenothercandidatecellsandthebestservermustbelessthantheASthreshold
specifiedforthebestserver,
Other candidate cells must belong to the neighbour list of the best server if it is located on a site where the
equipmentimposesthisrestriction(therestrictedtoneighboursoptionselectedintheequipmentproperties).

4.4 Simulations
Thesimulationprocessconsistsoftwosteps:
1. Obtainingarealisticuserdistribution
AtollgeneratesauserdistributionusingaMonteCarloalgorithm,whichrequirestrafficmapsanddataasinput.The
resultinguserdistributioncomplieswiththetrafficdatabaseandmapsprovidedtothealgorithm.
Eachuserisassignedaservice,amobilitytype,andanactivitystatusbyrandomtrial,accordingtoaprobabilitylaw
thatusesthetrafficdatabase.
Theuseractivitystatusisanimportantoutputoftherandomtrialandhasdirectconsequencesonthenextstepof
thesimulationandonthenetworkinterferences.Ausermaybeeitheractiveorinactive.Bothactiveandinactive
usersconsumeradioresourcesandcreateinterference.
Then, Atoll randomly assigns a shadowing error to each user using the probability distribution that describes the
shadowingeffect.
Finally,anotherrandomtrialdeterminesuserpositionsintheirrespectivetrafficzoneandwhethertheyareindoors
oroutdoors(accordingtotheclutterweightingandtheindoorratioperclutterclassdefinedforthetrafficmaps).
2. Powercontrolsimulation

4.4.1 GeneratingaRealisticUserDistribution
During the simulation, a first random trial is performed to determine the number of users and their activity status. Four
activitystatusaremodelled:

ActiveUL:theuserisactiveonULandinactiveonDL

ActiveDL:theuserisactiveonDLandinactiveonUL

ActiveUL+DL:theuserisactiveonULandonDL

Inactive:theuserisinactiveonULandonDL

Thedeterminationofthenumberofusersandtheactivitystatusallocationdependonthetypeoftrafficcartographyused.

221

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

Atolldetermines thetotalnumberof users attemptingconnectionineachsimulation

basedonthePoissondistribution.Thismayleadtoslightvariationsinthetotalnumbers
of users in different simulations. To have the same total number of users in each
simulationofagroup,addthefollowinglinesintheAtoll.inifile:
[Simulation]
RandomTotalUsers=0

4.4.1.1 SimulationsBasedonUserProfileTrafficMaps
Userprofileenvironmentbasedtrafficmaps:Eachpixelofthemapisassignedanenvironmentclasswhichcontainsalistof
userprofileswithanassociatedmobilitytypeandagivendensity(numberofsubscriberswiththesameprofileperkm).
Userprofiletrafficmaps:Eachpolygonandlineofthemapisassignedadensityofsubscriberswithgivenuserprofileand
mobilitytype.Ifthemapiscomposedofpoints,eachpointisassignedanumberofsubscriberswithgivenuserprofileand
mobilitytype.
Theuserprofilemodelsthebehaviourofthedifferentsubscribercategories.Eachuserprofilecontainsalistofservicesand
theirassociatedparametersdescribinghowtheseservicesareaccessedbythesubscriber.
Fromenvironment(orpolygon)surface(S)anduserprofiledensity(D),anumberofsubscribers(X)peruserprofileisinferred.
X = SD

Whenuserprofiletrafficmapsarecomposedoflines,thenumberofsubscribers(X)
peruserprofileiscalculatedfromthelinelength(L)andtheuserprofiledensity(D)
(nbofsubscribersperkm)asfollows: X = L D
Thenumberofsubscribers(X)isaninputwhenauserprofiletrafficmapiscomposed
ofpoints.

Foreachbehaviourdescribedinauserprofile,accordingtotheservice,frequencyuseandexchangevolume,Atollcalculates
theprobabilityfortheuserbeingactiveinuplinkandindownlinkataninstantt.

4.4.1.1.1

CircuitSwitchedService(i)
Userprofileparametersforcircuitswitchedservicesare:

Theusedterminal(equipmentusedfortheservice(fromtheTerminalstable)),
Theaveragenumberofcallsperhour N call ,

Theaveragedurationofacall(seconds) d .

Thenumberofusersandtheirdistributionperactivitystatusisdeterminedasfollows:

Calculationoftheserviceusagedurationperhour( p 0 :probabilityofaconnection):

N call d
p o = ------------------3600

Calculationofthenumberofuserstryingtoaccesstheservicei( n i ):

ni = X p0
Next,wecantakeintoaccountactivityperiodsduringtheconnectioninordertodeterminetheactivitystatusofeachuser.

Calculationofactivityprobabilities:
UL

DL

ProbabilityofbeinginactiveonULandDL: p inactive = 1 f act 1 f act

UL

DL

DL

UL

ProbabilityofbeingactiveonULonly: p UL = f act 1 f act

ProbabilityofbeingactiveonDLonly: p DL = f act 1 f act
UL

DL

ProbabilityofbeingactivebothonULandDL: p UL + DL = f act f act

UL

DL

Where, f act and f act arerespectivelytheULandDLactivityfactorsdefinedforthecircuitswitchedservicei.

Calculationofnumberofusersperactivitystatus:
inactive

NumberofinactiveusersonULandDL: n i

222

= n i p inactive

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

NumberofusersactiveonULandinactiveonDL: n i UL = n i p UL
NumberofusersactiveonDLandinactiveonUL: n i DL = n i p DL
NumberofusersactiveonULandDLboth: n i UL + DL = n i p UL + DL
Therefore,auserwhenheisconnectedcanhavefourdifferentactivitystatus:eitheractiveonbothlinks,orinactiveonboth
links,oractiveonULonly,oractiveonDLonly.

4.4.1.1.2

PacketSwitchedService(j)
Userprofileparametersforpacketswitchedservicesare:

Theusedterminal(equipmentusedfortheservice(fromtheTerminalstable)),
Theaveragenumberofpacketsessionsperhour N sess ,

Thevolume(inkbytes)whichistransferredonthedownlink V DL andtheuplink V UL duringasession.

Apacketsessionconsistsofseveralpacketcallsseparatedbyareadingtime.Eachpacketcallisdefinedbyitssizeandmaybe
dividedinpacketsoffixedsize(1500Bytes)separatedbyaninterarrivaltime.
InAtoll,apacketsessionisdescribedbyfollowingparameters:
UL

N packet c all :Averagenumberofpacketcallsontheuplinkduringasession,

DL

N packet c all :Averagenumberofpacketcallsonthedownlinkduringasession,

UL

T packet call :Averagetime(millisecond)betweentwopacketscallsontheuplink,

DL

T packet call :Averagetime(millisecond)betweentwopacketscallsonthedownlink,

UL

T packet :Averagetime(millisecond)betweentwopacketsontheuplink,
DL

T packet :Averagetime(millisecond)betweentwopacketsonthedownlink,
UL

S packet :Packetsize(Bytes)onuplink,
DL

S packet :Packetsize(Bytes)ondownlink.

Figure 4.1:DescriptionofaPacketSession
Thenumberofusersandtheirdistributionperactivitystatusisdeterminedasfollows:

Calculationoftheaveragepacketcallsize(kBytes):

V UL
V DL
UL
DL
S packet c all = ---------------------------------------and S packet c all = ---------------------------------------UL
UL
DL
DL
N packet c all f eff
N packet c all f eff
UL

DL

Where f eff and f eff aretheULandDLefficiencyfactorsdefinedforthepacketswitchedservicej.

223

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

UL

DL

Forpacket(HSDPA)andpacket(HSPA)services, f eff and f eff aresetto1.

Calculationoftheaveragenumberofpacketsperpacketcall:
UL

DL

S packet c all
S packet c all
UL
- + 1 and N DL
- + 1
N packet = int ------------------------------packet = int ------------------------------UL
S packet 1024
S DL
packet 1024
1kBytes=1024Bytes.

Calculationoftheaveragedurationofinactivitywithinapacketcall(s):
UL

UL

DL

DL

N packet 1 T packet
N packet 1 T packet
UL
DL
D Inactivity packet call = --------------------------------------------------------- and D Inactivity packet call = --------------------------------------------------------1000
1000

Calculationoftheaveragedurationofinactivityinasession(s):

UL

UL

UL

DL

DL

DL

D Inactivity session = N packet c all D Inactivity packet call and D Inactivity session = N packet c all D Inactivity packet call

Calculationoftheaveragedurationofactivityinasession(s):
UL

UL

DL

DL

N packet S packet 8
N packet S packet 8
UL
UL
DL
- and D DL
D Activity session = N packet c all -----------------------------------------------Activity session = N packet c all -----------------------------------------------UL
DL
TP Av 1000
TP Av 1000
UL

DL

Where TP Av and TP Av aretheuplinkanddownlinkaveragerequestedthroughputsdefinedfortheservicej.

Therefore,theaveragedurationofaconnection(ins)is:
UL

UL

UL

DL

DL

DL

D Connection = D Activity session + D Inactivity session and D Connection = D Activity session + D Inactivity session

Calculationoftheserviceusagedurationperhour(probabilityofaconnection):

N sess
N sess
UL
UL
DL
DL
p Connection = ------------ D Connection and p Connection = ------------ D Connection
3600
3600

Calculationoftheprobabilityofbeingconnected:
UL

DL

p Connected = 1 1 p Connection 1 p Connection

Therefore,thenumberofuserswhowanttogettheservicejis:
n j = X p Connected
Asyoucanseeonthepictureabove,wehavetoconsiderthreepossiblecaseswhenauserisconnected:

1stcase:Atagiventime,packetsaredownloadedanduploaded.

Inthiscase,theprobabilityofbeingconnectedis:
UL

DL

p Connection p Connection
UL + DL
p Connected = --------------------------------------------------------p Connected

2ndcase:Atagiventime,packetareuploaded(nopacketisdownloaded).

Here,theprobabilityofbeingconnectedis:
UL

DL

p Connection 1 p Connection
UL
p Connected = ----------------------------------------------------------------------p Connected

3rdcase:Atagiventime,packetaredownloaded(nopacketisuploaded).

Inthiscase,theprobabilityofbeingconnectedis:
DL

UL

p Connection 1 p Connection
DL
p Connected = ----------------------------------------------------------------------p Connected

224

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Now,wehavetotakeintoaccountactivityperiodsduringtheconnectioninordertodeterminetheactivitystatusofeach
user.

UL

Calculationoftheprobabilityofbeingactive:
UL

DL

D Activity session
D Activity session
DL
= -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------and f = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------UL
UL
DL
DL
D Inactivity session + D Activity session
D Inactivity session + D Activity session

Therefore,wehave:

1stcase:Atagiventime,packetsaredownloadedanduploaded.

TheusercanbeactiveonULandinactiveonDL;thisprobabilityis:
1

p UL = f

UL

DL

UL + DL

1 f p Connected

TheusercanbeactiveonDLandinactiveonUL;thisprobabilityis:
1

p DL = f

DL

UL

UL + DL

1 f p Connected

Theusercanbeactiveonbothlinks;thisprobabilityis:
1

p UL + DL = f

UL

DL

UL + DL

p Connected

Theusercanbeinactiveonbothlinks;thisprobabilityis:
UL

DL

UL + DL

p inactive = 1 f 1 f p Connected

2ndcase:Atagiventime,packetareuploaded(nopacketisdownloaded).

TheusercanbeactiveonULandinactiveonDL;thisprobabilityis:
2

p UL = f

UL

UL

p Connected

Theusercanbeinactiveonbothlinks;thisprobabilityis:
UL

UL

p inactive = 1 f p Connected

3rdcase:Atagiventime,packetaredownloaded(nopacketisuploaded).

TheusercanbeactiveonDLandinactiveonUL;thisprobabilityis:
3

p DL = f

DL

DL

p Connected

Theusercanbeinactiveonbothlinks;thisprobabilityis:
DL

DL

p inactive = 1 f p Connected

Calculationofnumberofusersperactivitystatus
inactive

NumberofinactiveusersonULandDL: n j

= n j p inactive + p inactive + p inactive

1

NumberofusersactiveonULandinactiveonDL: n j UL = n j p UL + p UL
NumberofusersactiveonDLandinactiveonUL: n j DL = n j p DL + p DL
1

NumberofusersactiveonULandDL: n j UL + DL = n j p UL + DL
Therefore,auserwhenheisconnectedcanhavefourdifferentactivitystatus:eitheractiveonbothlinks,orinactiveonboth
links,oractiveonULonly,oractiveonDLonly.
Theuserdistributionperserviceandtheactivitystatusdistributionbetweentheusers
are average distributions. And the service and the activity status of each user are
randomly drawn in each simulation. Therefore, if you compute several simulations at
once,theaveragenumberofusersperserviceandaveragenumbersofinactive,active
on UL, active on DL and active on UL and DL users, respectively, will correspond to
calculateddistributions.Butifyoucheckeachsimulation,theuserdistributionbetween
servicesaswellastheactivitystatusdistributionbetweenusersisdifferentineachof
them.

225

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

4.4.1.2 SimulationsBasedonSectorTrafficMaps
SectortrafficmapscanbebasedonlivetrafficdatafromOMC(OperationandMaintenanceCentre).Trafficisspreadoverthe
bestservercoverageareaofeachtransmitterandeachcoverageareaisassignedeitherthethroughputsintheuplinkandin
thedownlinkorthenumberofusersperactivitystatusorthetotalnumberofusers(includingallactivitystatuses).

4.4.1.2.1

ThroughputsinUplinkandDownlink
WhenselectingThroughputsinUplinkandDownlink,youcaninputthethroughputdemandsintheuplinkanddownlinkfor
eachsectorandforeachlistedservice.
AtollcalculatesthenumberofusersactiveinuplinkandindownlinkintheTxicellusingtheservice(NULandNDL)asfollows:
UL

DL

Rt
Rt
N UL = ---------- and N DL = ---------UL
DL
TP Av
TP Av
UL

R t isthekbitspersecondtransmittedinULintheTxicelltosupplytheservice.
DL

R t isthekbitspersecondtransmittedinDLintheTxicelltosupplytheservice.
DL

TP Av isthedownlinkaveragerequestedthroughputdefinedfortheservice,
UL

TP Av istheuplinkaveragerequestedthroughputdefinedfortheservice.
NULandNDLvaluesinclude:

Usersactiveinuplinkandinactiveindownlink(ni(UL)),
Usersactiveindownlinkandinactiveinuplink(ni(DL)),
Andusersactiveinbothlinks(ni(UL+DL)).

Atolltakesintoaccountactivityperiodsduringtheconnectioninordertodeterminetheactivitystatusofeachuser.
Activityprobabilitiesarecalculatedasfollows:
UL

DL

ProbabilityofbeinginactiveinULandDL: p inactive = 1 f act 1 f act

UL

DL

DL

UL

ProbabilityofbeingactiveinULonly: p UL = f act 1 f act

ProbabilityofbeingactiveinDLonly: p DL = f act 1 f act
UL

DL

ProbabilityofbeingactivebothinULandDL: p UL + DL = f act f act

UL

DL

Where, f act and f act arerespectivelytheULandDLactivityfactorsdefinedfortheservicei.

Then,Atollcalculatesthenumberofusersperactivitystatus:
Wehave:
p UL + p UL + DL n j UL + n j DL + n j UL + DL = N UL
p DL + p UL + DL n j UL + n j DL + n j UL + DL = N DL
Therefore,wehave:
N UL p UL + DL N DL p UL + DL
NumberofusersactiveinULandDLboth: n i UL + DL = min --------------------------------- --------------------------------
p UL + p UL + DL p DL + p UL + DL
NumberofusersactiveinULandinactiveinDL: n i UL = N UL n i UL + DL
NumberofusersactiveinDLandinactiveinUL: n i DL = N DL n i UL + DL
inactive

NumberofinactiveusersinULandDL: n i

n j UL + n j DL + n j UL + DL
- p inactive
= -----------------------------------------------------------------------------1 p inactive

Therefore,aconnectedusercanhavefourdifferentactivitystatus:eitheractiveinbothlinks,orinactiveinbothlinks,oractive
inULonly,oractiveinDLonly.

226

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

4.4.1.2.2

TotalNumberofUsers(AllActivityStatuses)
WhenselectingTotalNumberofUsers(AllActivityStatuses),youcaninputthenumberofconnectedusersforeachsector
andforeachlistedservice( n i ).
Atolltakesintoaccountactivityperiodsduringtheconnectioninordertodeterminetheactivitystatusofeachuser.
Activityprobabilitiesarecalculatedasfollows:
UL

DL

ProbabilityofbeinginactiveinULandDL: p inactive = 1 f act 1 f act

UL

DL

DL

UL

ProbabilityofbeingactiveinULonly: p UL = f act 1 f act

ProbabilityofbeingactiveinDLonly: p DL = f act 1 f act
UL

DL

ProbabilityofbeingactivebothinULandDL: p UL + DL = f act f act

UL

DL

Where, f act and f act arerespectivelytheULandDLactivityfactorsdefinedfortheservicei.

Then,Atollcalculatesthenumberofusersperactivitystatus:
inactive

NumberofinactiveusersinULandDL: n i

= n i p inactive

NumberofusersactiveinULandinactiveinDL: n i UL = n i p UL
NumberofusersactiveinDLandinactiveinUL: n i DL = n i p DL
NumberofusersactiveinULandDLboth: n i UL + DL = n i p UL + DL
Therefore,aconnectedusercanhavefourdifferentactivitystatus:eitheractiveinbothlinks,orinactiveinbothlinks,oractive
inULonly,oractiveinDLonly.

4.4.1.2.3

NumberofUsersperActivityStatus
inactive

WhenselectingNumber ofUsers perActivity Status, you candirectly input the number of inactive users ( n i

), the

numberofusersactiveintheuplink( n i UL ),inthedownlink( n i DL )andintheuplinkanddownlink( n i UL + DL ),for

eachsectorandforeachservice.
Theactivitystatusdistributionbetweenusersisanaveragedistribution.Infact,ineach
simulation,theactivitystatusofeachuserisrandomlydrawn.Therefore,ifyoucompute
severalsimulationsatonce,averagenumbersofinactive,activeonUL,activeonDLand
activeonULandDLuserscorrespondtothecalculateddistribution.Butifyoucheckeach
simulation,theactivitystatusdistributionbetweenusersisdifferentineachofthem.

4.4.2 PowerControlSimulation
ThepowercontrolalgorithmsimulatesthewayaUMTSnetworkregulatesitselfbyusinguplinkanddownlinkpowercontrols
inordertominimizeinterferenceandmaximizecapacity.
HSDPA users arelinked to the ADPCH radio bearer (anR99radio bearer). Therefore, the network uses aADPCHpower
controlonULandDLandthenitperformsfastlinkadaptationonDLinordertoselectanHSDPAradiobearer.ForHSPAusers,
thenetworkfirstusesaEDPCCH/ADPCHpowercontrolonULandDL,checksthatthereisanHSDPAconnectionondownlink
andthencarriesoutnoiseriseschedulinginordertoselectanHSUPAradiobeareronuplink.Atollsimulatesthesenetwork
regulationmechanismswithaniterativealgorithmandcalculates,foreachuserdistribution,networkparameterssuchascell
power,mobileterminalpower,activesetandhandoffstatusforeachterminal.Duringeachiterationofthealgorithm,allthe
usersselectedduringtheuserdistributiongeneration(1ststep)attempttoconnectonebyonetonetworktransmitters.The
processisrepeateduntilthenetworkisbalanced,i.e.,untiltheconvergencecriteria(onULandDL)aresatisfied.

227

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

Figure 4.2:UMTSHSPAPowerControlAlgorithm
AsshowninFigure 4.2onpage 228,thesimulationalgorithmisdividedinthreeparts.AllusersareevaluatedbytheR99part
of the algorithm. HSDPA and HSPA users, unless they have been rejected during the R99 part of the algorithm, are then
evaluatedbytheHSDPApartofthealgorithm.Finally,HSPAusers,unlesstheyhavebeenrejectedduringtheR99orHSDPA
partsofthealgorithm,arethenevaluatedbytheHSUPApartofthealgorithm.
Thestepsofthisalgorithmaredetailedbelow.

4.4.2.1 AlgorithmInitialization
The total power transmitted by the base station txi on the carrier ic m , P Tx txi ic m , is initialised to
P pilot txi ic m + P SCH txi ic m + P otherCCH txi ic m + P HSDPA txi ic m + P HSUPA txi ic .
UL intra

Uplinkpowersreceivedbythebasestationtxioncarrier ic m , I tot
areinitialisedto0W(i.e.noconnectedmobile).

228

UL extra

txi ic m , I tot

UL

txi ic m and I inter carrier txi ic m

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
UL

I tot txi ic m
UL
- = 0
Therefore,wehave: X R99 txi ic m k = ------------------------------UL
N tot txi ic m

4.4.2.2 R99PartoftheAlgorithm
The algorithm is detailed for any iteration k. Xk is the value of the X (variable) at the iteration k. In the algorithm, the
UL

DL

thresholds, Q req and Q req ,dependontheusermobilitytypeandaredefinedintheR99bearerselectiontable.Allvariables

aredescribedinDefinitionsandformulaspart.Thebearerdowngradingisnotdealtwith.
Thealgorithmappliestosinglefrequencybandnetworksandtomultibandnetworks(dualbandandtribandnetworks).
Multibandterminalscanhavethefollowingconfigurations:

Configuration1:Theterminalcanworkonf1,f2andf3withoutanypriority(select"All"asmainfrequencyband
intheterminalpropertydialogue).
Configuration2:Theterminalcanworkonf1,f2andf3butf1hasahigherpriority(select"f1"asmainfrequency
band,"f2"assecondaryfrequencybandand"f3"asthirdfrequencybandintheterminalpropertydialogue).

For each mobile (Mb), Atoll only considers the cells (txi,ic) for which the pilot RSCP exceeds the minimum pilot RSCP:
P c txi M b ic RSCP min txi ic .
ForeachmobileMb,wehavethefollowingsteps:
DeterminationofMbsBestServingCell
ForeachtransmittertxicontainingMbinitscalculationareaandworkingonthemainfrequencybandsupportedbytheMbs
terminal(i.e.eitherf1forasinglefrequencybandnetwork,orf1,f2orf3foramultibandterminalwiththeconfiguration1,
orf1foramultibandterminalwiththeconfiguration2).
BTS P c txi M b ic
Calculationof Q pilot txi ic Mb = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Term
k
DL
DL
DL
DL
P tot txi ic + I extra ic + I inter carrier ic + I inter techno log y ic + N 0
IfuserselectswithoutPilot
BTS P c txi M b ic
Q pilot txi ic Mb = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------k
DL
DL
DL
DL

I intra ic + I extra ic + I inter carrier ic + I inter techno log y ic

Term
+ N0
1 BTS P c txi M b ic

Determinationofthecandidatecells,(txBS,ic).
Foreachcarrieric,selectionofthetransmitterwiththe highest Q pilot txi M b ic , tx BS ic M i .
k

Analysisofcandidatecells,(txBS,ic).
Foreachpair(txBS,ic),calculationoftheuplinkloadfactor:
UL

I tot tx BS ic
UL
UL
X R99 tx BS ic k = ------------------------------- + X
UL
N tot tx BS ic
UL

X correspondstotheloadriseduetothemobile.Forinformationonhowthisparameteriscalculated,see"Admission
ControlintheR99Part"onpage 272.
Rejectionofbadcandidatecellsifthepilotisnotreceivedoriftheuplinkloadfactorisexceededduringtheadmissionload
control(ifsimulationrespectsaloadingfactorconstraintandMbwasnotconnectedinpreviousiteration)
pilot

If Q pilot tx BS M b ic Q req Mobility M b then(txBS,ic)isrejectedbyMb

k

UL

UL

If X R99 tx BS ic k X max ,then(txBS,ic)isrejectedbyMb

Else
Keep(txBS,ic)asgoodcandidatecell
Formultibandterminalswiththeconfiguration1orterminalsworkingononefrequencybandonly,ifnogoodcandidatecell
hasbeenselected,Mbhasfailedtobeconnectedtothenetworkandisrejected.

229

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

For multiband terminals with the configuration 2, if no good candidate cell has been selected, try to connect Mb to
transmitterstxicontainingMbintheircalculationareaandworkingonthesecondaryfrequencybandsupportedbytheMbs
terminal(i.e.f2).ifnogoodcandidatecellhasbeenselected,trytoconnectMbtotransmitterstxicontainingMbintheir
calculationareaandworkingonthethirdfrequencybandsupportedbytheMbsterminal(i.e.f3).Ifnogoodcandidatecell
hasbeenselected,Mbhasfailedtobeconnectedtothenetworkandisrejected.
For each NodeB having candidate cells, determination of the best carrier, icBS, within the set of candidate cells of the
NodeB.
ForMCHSPAandDBMCHSPAusers,thiscarrierisreferredtoasthe"anchor"carrier.
IfagivencarrierisspecifiedfortheservicerequestedbyMb
ic BS M b isthecarrierspecifiedfortheservice
Elsethecarrierselectionmodedefinedforthesiteequipmentisconsidered.
IfcarrierselectionmodeisMin.ULLoadFactor
UL

ic BS M b isthecarrierwhereweobtainthelowest X R99 tx BS ic k
ElseifcarrierselectionmodeisMin.DLTotalPower
ic BS M b isthecarrierwhereweobtainthelowest P tx tx BS ic k
ElseifcarrierselectionmodeisRandom
ic BS M b israndomlyselected
Elseifcarrierselectionmodeis"Sequential"
UL

UL

ic BS M b isthefirstcarrierwhere X R99 tx BS ic k X max

Endif
Determinationofthebestservingcell,(txBS,icBS)
max

(tx BS,ic BS) k M b isthebestservingcell( BestCell k M b )anditspilotqualityis Q pilot M b

k

Inthefollowinglines,wewillconsider ic asthecarrierusedbythebestservingcell
SelectionofthesecondservingcellforDCHSPAusers
MCHSPAandDBMCHSPAusersareprocessedasDCHSPAusers.
IftxBSsupportsmulticellmodeandifithasseveralcarriers,selectionofthesecondcarrier,ic2.
Foreachcarrierotherthanthebestservingcarrier,icp,calculationof Q pilot tx BS ic p M b
k

Selectionofthecarrier,ic2,withthehighest Q pilot tx BS ic p M b
k

pilot

If Q pilot tx BS ic 2 M b Q req Mobility M b then(txBS,ic2)isrejectedbyMb

k
Else
Keep(txBS,ic2)assecondservingcell
ActiveSetDetermination
ForeachstationtxicontainingMbinitscalculationarea,using ic ,and,ifneighboursareused,neighbourof BestCell k M b
BTS P c txi M b ic
Calculationof Q pilot txi M b ic = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------DL
DL
DL
DL
Term
k
P tot txi ic + I extra ic + I inter carrier ic + I inter techno log y ic + N 0
IfuserselectswithoutPilot
BTS P c txi M b ic
Q pilot txi M b ic = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------k
DL
DL
DL
DL

I intra txi ic + I extra ic + I inter carrier ic + I inter techno log y ic

Term
+ N0
1 BTS P c txi M b ic

Rejectionoftxifromtheactivesetifdifferencewiththebestserveristoohigh

230

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
max

If Q pilot M b Q pilot txi M b ic AS_Th BestCell k M b thentxiisrejected

k

ElsetxiisincludedintheMbactiveset
Rejectionofastationifthemobileactivesetisfull
Stationwiththelowest Q pilot intheactivesetisrejected
k

EndFor
UplinkPowerControl
R99 req

CalculationoftheterminalpowerrequiredbyMbtoobtaintheR99radiobearer: P term

M b ic k

Foreachcell(txi,ic)oftheMbactiveset
CalculationofqualitylevelonMbtrafficchannelat(txi,ic),withtheminimumpowerallowedontrafficchannelfortheMb
service
req

P term R99 M b ic k 1
UL
P b R99 txi M b ic = ---------------------------------------------------L T txi M b
UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

P b DPDCH txi M b ic = P b R99 txi M b ic 1 r c

UL

P b DPCCH txi M b ic = P b R99 txi M b ic r c

UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

P b R99 txi M b ic = P b DPCCH txi M b ic + P b DPDCH txi M b ic iftheuserisactive,

P b R99 txi M b ic = P b DPCCH txi M b ic iftheuserisinactive,
UL

term P b DPDCH txi M b ic k

UL
UL
- G UL
Q tch txi M b ic k = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------p Service M b G div
UL
Tx
UL
N tot txi ic 1 F MUD term P b R99 txi M b ic k 1
Ifuserselects"Totalnoise",
UL

term P b DPDCH txi M b ic k

UL
UL
UL
Q tch txi M b ic k = ------------------------------------------------------------------------- G p Service Mb G div
UL
N tot txi ic
EndFor
If(Mbisinnotinhandoff)
UL

UL

Q k M b = Q tch txi M b ic k
Elseif(Miisinsofterhandoff)
UL

UL

Q k M b = f rakeefficiency

UL

Q tch txi M b ic k

txi ActiveSet

Elseif(Mbisinsoft,orsofter/softwithoutMRC)
UL

Qk Mb =

UL

UL

Max Q tch txi M b ic k G macro diversity 2links

txi ActiveSet

Elseif(Mbisinsoft/soft)
UL

Qk Mb =

UL

UL

Max Q tch txi M b ic k G macro diversity 3links

txi ActiveSet

Elseif(Mbisinsofter/softwithMRC)
UL
Qk Mb

UL

UL
UL
UL
= Max f rakeefficiency
Q tch ic Q tch ic G macro diversity 2links
othersite

txi ActiveSet

samesite

231

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

EndIf
UL

Q req Service M b Mobility M b

req
- P req
P term R99 M b ic k = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------term R99 M b ic k 1
UL
Qk Mb
Ifcompressedmodeisoperated,
CompressedmodeisoperatedifMiandSjsupportcompressedmode,and
Resulting

CM activation

txi M b ic Q pilot

Either Q pilot

Or P c txi M b ic RSCP pilot

CM activation

UL

iftheEc/I0Activeoptionisselected,

iftheRSCPActiveoptionisselected.

UL

Q req Service M b Mobility M b Q req Service M b Mobility M b

req
- P req
P term R99 M b ic k = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------term R99 M b ic k 1
UL
Qk Mb
req

min

req

max

req

min

If P term R99 M b ic k P term M b then P term R99 M b ic k = P term txi M b

If P term R99 M b ic k P term M b thenMbcannotselectanycellanditsactivesetiscleared
R99

If TP P UL M b TP Max UL txi ic thenMbcannotbeconnected

Endif
DownlinkPowerControl
If(mobiledoesnotuseapacketswitchedservicethatisinactiveonthedownlink)
Foreachcell(txi,ic)inMbactiveset
Calculationofqualitylevelon(txi,ic)trafficchannelatMbwiththeminimumpowerallowedontrafficchannelfortheMb
service
min

P tch Service M b
DL
P b txi M b ic = ----------------------------------------------L T txi M b
DL

BTS P b txi M b ic k
DL
DL
- G DL
Q tch txi M b ic k = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------p Service M b G div
DL
DL
N tot ic 1 F ortho BTS P b txi M b ic k 1
Iftheuserselectstheoption"Totalnoise"
DL

BTS P b txi M b ic k
DL
DL
- G DL
Q tch txi M b ic k = -------------------------------------------------------p Service M b G div
DL
N tot ic
EndFor
DL

DL

Q k M b = f rakeefficiency

DL

Q tch txi M b ic k

txi ActiveSet

Do
Foreachcell(txi,ic)inMbactiveset
CalculationoftherequiredpowerforDLtrafficchannelbetween(txi,ic)andMb:
DL

Q req Service M b Mobility M b

req
- P min
P tch txi M b ic k = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------tch Service M b
DL
Qk Mb
Ifcompressedmodeisoperated.
DL

DL

Q req Service M b Mobility M b Q req Service Mb Mobility M b

req
- P min
P tch txi M b ic k = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------tch Service M b
DL
Qk Mb

232

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

CompressedmodeisoperatedifMiandSjsupportcompressedmode,and

req

Resulting

CM activation

txi M b ic Q pilot

Either Q pilot

Or P c txi M b ic RSCP pilot

CM activation

max

iftheEc/I0Activeoptionisselected,

iftheRSCPActiveoptionisselected.

max

If P tch txi M b ic k P tch Service M b then txi ic issetto P tch

DL

max

Recalculationofadecreased Q req (apartoftherequiredqualityismanagedbythecellssetto P tch )

req

P tch Service M b
DL
P b txi M b ic = ---------------------------------------------L T txi M b
DL

BTS P b txi M b ic
DL
DL
- G DL
Q tch txi M b ic k = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------p Service M b G div
DL
DL
N tot ic 1 F ortho BTS P b txi M b ic
DL

DL

DL

Iftheuserisinactive,thenhiscontributiontointerferenceinthecalculationof N tot ic is P b txi M b ic r c .

EndFor
DL

DL

Q k M b = f rakeefficiency

DL

Q tch txi M b ic k

txi ActiveSet
DL

DL

While Q k M b Q req Service M b Mobility M b andMbactivesetisnotempty

R99

If TP P DL M b TP Max DL txi ic thenMbcannotbeconnected

Endif
UplinkandDownlinkInterferenceUpdate
Updateofinterferenceonactivemobilesonly(oldcontributionsofmobilesandstationsarereplacedbythenewones).
Foreachcell(txi,ic)
UL

Updateof N tot txi ic

EndFor
ForeachmobileMi
DL

Updateof N tot ic
EndFor
EndFor
ControlofRadioResourceLimits(OVSFCodes,CellPower,ChannelElements,IubBackhaulThroughput)
Foreachcell(txi,ic)
P tx txi ic k
DL
While ---------------------------- %Powermax
P max
Rejectionofthemobilewiththelowestserviceprioritystartingfromthelastadmitted
EndFor
Foreachcell(txi,ic)
While N

Codes

Codes

txi ic k N max txi ic

Rejectionofthemobilewiththelowestserviceprioritystartingfromthelastadmitted
EndFor
ForeachNodeB,Ni
While N

CE DL

CE DL

N i k N max

Ni

233

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

Rejectionofthemobilewiththelowestserviceprioritystartingfromthelastadmitted
While N

CE UL

CE UL

N i k N max

Ni

Rejectionofthemobilewiththelowestserviceprioritystartingfromthelastadmitted
EndFor
ForeachNodeB,Ni
Max

While TP Iub DL N I k TP Iub DL N I

Rejectionofthemobilewiththelowestserviceprioritystartingfromthelastadmitted
Max

While TP Iub UL N I k TP Iub UL N I

Rejectionofthemobilewiththelowestserviceprioritystartingfromthelastadmitted
EndFor
UplinkLoadFactorControl
UL

UL

Foreachcell(txi,ic)with X R99 txi ic X max

Rejectionofthemobilewiththelowestserviceprioritystartingfromthelastadmitted
EndFor
UL

UL

Whileatleastonecellwith X R99 txi ic X max exists.

4.4.2.3 HSDPAPartoftheAlgorithm
HSDPABE,HSDPAVBR,HSPABEandHSPAVBRserviceusersactiveonDLaswellasallHSPACBRserviceusers(i.e.,activeand
inactive),unlesstheyhavebeenrejectedduringtheR99partofthealgorithm,arethenevaluatedbytheHSDPApartofthe
algorithm.

4.4.2.3.1

HSDPAPowerAllocation
The total transmitted power of the cell ( P tx ic ) is the sum of the transmitted R99 power, the HSUPA power and the
transmittedHSDPApower.
P tx ic = P tx R99 ic + P tx H SDPA ic + P HSUPA ic

IncaseofastaticHSDPApowerallocationstrategy,Atollchecksinthesimulationthat:
DL

P tx ic P max ic %Power max

where:
DL

%Powermax isthemaximumDLloadallowed.
Therefore,ifthemaximumDLloadissetto100%,wehave:
P tx ic P max ic

IncaseofdynamicHSDPApowerallocationstrategy,Atollchecksinthesimulationthat:
DL

P tx R99 ic + P HSUPA ic P max ic %Power max

AnditcalculatestheavailableHSDPApowerasfollows:
P HSDPA ic = P max ic P Headroom ic P tx R99 ic P HSUPA ic

4.4.2.3.2

NumberofHSSCCHChannelsandMaximumNumberofHSDPABearerUsers
ThenumberofHSSCCHchannels( n HS SCCH )isthemaximumnumberofHSSCCHchannelsthatthecellcanmanage.This
parameterisusedtomanagethenumberofBEandVBRserviceuserssimultaneouslyconnectedtoanHSDPAbearer.This
parameterisnottakenintoaccountforCBRserviceusersasHSSCCHlessoperation(i.e.,HSDSCHtransmissionswithoutany
accompanyingHSSCCH)isperformed.
EachHSDPABE,HSDPAVBR,HSPABEandHSPAVBRserviceuserconsumesoneHSSCCHchannel.Therefore,atatime(over
atransmissiontimeinterval),thenumberoftheseusersconnectedtoanHSDPAbearercannotexceedthenumberofHS
SCCHchannelspercell.

234

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

ThemaximumnumberofHSDPAbearerusers( n max )correspondstothemaximumnumberofHSDPAbearerusersthatthe

cellcansupport.Here,allHSDPAbearerusers,i.e.,HSDPABE,HSDPAVBR,HSPABEandHSPAVBRandHSPACBRserviceusers,
aretakenintoconsideration.
Letusassumethereare30usersinthecell:

10HSPACBRserviceuserswithanyactivitystatus.
2HSDPAVBRserviceusersactiveonDL.
18HSDPABEandHSPABEserviceusersactiveonDL.

AllusersareconnectedtotheADCHR99bearer.Finally,thenumberofHSSCCHchannelsandthemaximumnumberof
HSDPAbearerusersrespectivelyequal4and25.
Theschedulermanagesthemaximumnumberofuserswithineachcell.CBRserviceusershavethehighestpriorityandare
processedfirst,intheorderestablishedduringthegenerationoftheuserdistribution.AfterprocessingtheCBRserviceusers,
AtollprocessestheremainingHSDPAbearerusers(i.e.,HSDPAVBR,HSPAVBR,HSDPABEandHSPABEserviceusers).VBR
serviceusershavethehighestpriorityandaremanagedbeforeBEserviceusers.Foreachtypeofservice,theschedulerranks
theusersaccordingtotheselectedschedulingtechnique.Usersaretreatedasdescribedinthefigurebelow.

Figure 4.3:ConnectionstatusofHSDPAbearerusers

AllCBRserviceusersmaybeservedifthereareenoughHSDPApower,IubbackhaulthroughputandOVSFcodes
availableinorderforthemtoobtainthelowestHSDPAbearerthatprovidesapeakRLCthroughputhigherorequalto
the minimum throughput demand defined for the service. In this case, they will be connected. Else, they will be
rejected.
ThetwoVBRserviceusersmaybesimultaneouslyservedifthereareenoughHSDPApower,Iubbackhaulthroughput
andOVSFcodesavailableinorderforthemtoobtainanHSDPAbearerthatprovidesapeakRLCthroughputhigheror
equaltotheminimumthroughputdemanddefinedfortheservice.Inthiscase,theywillbeconnected.Else,theywill
berejected.
Then,amongtheBEserviceusers:

4.4.2.3.3

ThefirsttwousersmaybesimultaneouslyservedifthereareenoughHSDPApower,Iubbackhaulthroughputand
OVSFcodesavailableinorderforthemtoobtainanHSDPAbearer.Inthiscase,theywillbeconnected.Else,they
willbedelayed.
The next eleven ones will be delayed since there are no longer HSSCCH channels available. Their connection
statuswillbe"HSSCCHChannelsSaturation".
Finally,thelastfiveuserswillberejectedbecausethemaximumnumberofHSDPAbearerusershasbeenfixedto
25.Theirconnectionstatuswillbe"HSDPASchedulerSaturation".

HSDPABearerAllocationProcess
TheHSDPAbearerallocationprocessdependsonthetypeofservicerequestedbytheuser.Asexplainedbefore,CBRservice
usershavethehighestpriorityandareprocessedfirst,intheorderestablishedduringthegenerationoftheuserdistribution.
AfterprocessingtheCBRserviceusers,theschedulerrankstheremainingusers(i.e.,VBRandBEserviceusers)andsharesthe
cellradioresourcesbetweenthem.VBRserviceusershavethehighestpriorityandaremanagedbeforeBEserviceusers.
CBRServiceUsers
LetusfocusonthetenCBRserviceusersmentionedintheexampleofthepreviousparagraph"NumberofHSSCCHChannels
andMaximumNumberofHSDPABearerUsers"onpage 234.Fastlinkadaptationiscarriedoutontheseusersinorderto
determineiftheycanobtainanHSDPAbearerthatprovidesapeakRLCthroughputhigherorequaltotheserviceminimum
throughputdemand.AsHSSCCHlessoperationisperformed,onlyHSDPAbearersusingtheQPSKmodulationandtwoHS
PDSCHchannelsatthemaximumcanbeselectedandallocatedtotheusers.Theusersareprocessedintheorderestablished
duringthegenerationoftheuserdistributionandthecellsavailableHSDPApowerissharedbetweenthemasexplained
below.SeveralCBRserviceuserscansharethesameHSDPAbearer.Then,AtollcalculatestheHSDPAbearerconsumption( C
in%)foreachuserandtakesintoaccountthisparameterwhenitdeterminestheresourcesconsumedbytheuser(i.e.,the
HSDPApowerused,thenumberofOVSFcodesandtheIubbackhaulthroughput).
Inthebearerallocationprocessshownbelow,the10CBRserviceusersarerepresentedbyMj,withj=1to10.And,theinitial
valuesoftheirrespectiveHSDPApowersis0,i.e.PHSDPA(B(MX))=0,whereX=0to10.Thesepowervaluesareassignedone
byonebythescheduler,sothatwiththeirallocatedvalues,loopedbacktothestartingpoint,areusedinsuccessivesteps.

235

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

Fortheuser,Mj,withjvaryingfrom1to10:
PHSDPA

j 1

(PHSDPA

X 0

(M X )) served

Sufficient HS-SCCH
power to reach the
minimum quality
threshold?

No
Mj is rejected

Yes
Enough
16-bit OVSF codes
available to support the
lowest HSDPA bearer
allocated?

No

Mj is rejected

Yes
Sufficient Iub
backhaul throughput
to support the lowest
HSDPA bearer
allocated?

No

Mj is rejected

Yes

Sufficient HSDPA
power to obtain
the lowest HSDPA
bearer allocated?

No

Mj is rejected

Yes
Determination of the Best HSDPA Bearer BB(Mj)

Cell and UE both capable

of supporting BB(Mj)?

Yes

BB(Mj) selected
B(Mj) = BB(Mj)

No
Bearer Downgrading
B(Mj)

RLC Peak Rate of

B(Mj) > Mj Min Throughput
Demand?

No

Mj is rejected

Yes
Allocation of Min Throughput Demand to Mj
Mj connected with B(Mj)
(PHSDPA(Mj))served=PHS-PDSCH(B(Mj)) x C(B(Mj))

Update of Available Radio Resources

No

Mj = M10?
Yes

Resource allocation for Variable Bit Rate and

Best Effort service users

Figure 4.4:HSDPABearerAllocationProcessforCBRServiceUsers
VBRServiceUsers
AfterprocessingtheCBRserviceusers,theschedulersharesthecellsremainingresourcesbetweenHSDPAandHSPAVBR
service users. Let us focus on the two HSDPA VBR service users mentioned in the example of the previous paragraph,
"NumberofHSSCCHChannelsandMaximumNumberofHSDPABearerUsers"onpage 234.Anewfastlinkadaptationis
carriedoutontheseusersinordertodetermineiftheycanobtainanHSDPAbearerthatprovidesapeakRLCthroughput
higherorequaltotheserviceminimumthroughputdemand.Theyareprocessedintheorderdefinedbytheschedulerand
thecellsHSDPApoweravailableafterallCBRserviceusershavebeenservedissharedbetweenthemasexplainedbelow.
Inthebearerallocationprocessshownbelow,the2VBRserviceusersarerepresentedbyMj,withj=1to2.And,theinitial
valuesoftheirrespectiveHSDPApowersis0,i.e.PHSDPA(B(MX))=0,whereX=0to2.Thesepowervaluesareassignedone
byonebythescheduler,sothatwiththeirallocatedvalues,loopedbacktothestartingpoint,areusedinsuccessivesteps.

236

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Fortheuser,Mj,withjvaryingfrom1to2:

PHSDPA

j 1

(PHSDPA

X 0

(M X )) served

Sufficient HS-SCCH
power to reach the
minimum quality
threshold?

No
Mj is rejected

Yes
Enough
16-bit OVSF codes
available to support the
lowest HSDPA bearer
allocated?

No

Mj is rejected

Yes
Sufficient Iub
backhaul throughput
to support the lowest
HSDPA bearer
allocated?

No

Mj is rejected

Yes

Sufficient HSDPA
power to obtain
the lowest HSDPA
bearer allocated?

No

Mj is rejected

Yes
Determination of the Best HSDPA Bearer BB(Mj)

Bearer Downgrading B(Mj) until:

1. Cell and UE both capable of supporting B(Mj)
And
2. RLC Peak Rate of B(Mj) > Mj Min Throughput
Demand

RLC Peak Rate of

B(Mj) > Mj Min Throughput
Demand?

No

Mj is rejected

Yes
Mj connected with B(Mj)
(PHSDPA(Mj))served=PHS-PDSCH(B(Mj)) +nHS-SCCHxPHS-SCCH(Mj)

No

Mj = M2?
Yes

Resource allocation for Best Effort service users

Figure 4.5:HSDPABearerAllocationProcessforVBRServiceUsers
BEServiceUsers
AfterprocessingtheVBRserviceusers,theschedulersharesthecellsremainingresourcesbetweenBEserviceusers.Letus
focusontheHSDPAandHSPABEserviceusers,especiallyonthefirstfourusersmentionedintheexampleoftheprevious
paragraph, "Number of HSSCCH Channels and Maximum Number of HSDPA Bearer Users" on page 234. A new fast link
adaptationiscarriedoutontheseusersinordertodetermineiftheycanobtainanHSDPAbearer.Theyareprocessedinthe
orderdefinedbytheschedulerandthecellsHSDPApoweravailableafterallCBRandVBRserviceusershavebeenservedis
sharedbetweenthemasexplainedbelow.
Inthebearerallocationprocessshownbelow,the4BEserviceusersarerepresentedbyMj,withj=1to4.And,theinitial
valuesoftheirrespectiveHSDPApowersis0,i.e.PHSDPA(B(MX))=0,whereX=0to4.Thesepowervaluesareassignedone
byonebythescheduler,sothatwiththeirallocatedvalues,loopedbacktothestartingpoint,areusedinsuccessivesteps.

237

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

Fortheuser,Mj,withjvaryingfrom1to4:

Figure 4.6:HSDPABearerAllocationProcessforBEServiceUsers

4.4.2.3.4

FastLinkAdaptationModelling
Fastlinkadaptation(orAdaptiveModulationandCoding)isusedinHSDPA.ThepowerontheHSDSCHchannelistransmitted
ataconstantpowerwhilethemodulation,thecodingandthenumberofcodesarechangedtoadapttotheradioconditions
variations.Basedonthereportedchannelqualityindicator(CQI),thenodeBmaychangeevery2msthemodulation(QPSK,
16QAM,64QAM),thecodingandthenumberofcodesduringacommunication.
Atollcalculatesforeachusereitherthebestpilotquality(CPICHEc/Nt)orthebestHSPDSCHquality(HSPDSCHEc/Nt);this
dependsontheoptionselectedinGlobalparameters(HSDPApart):CQIbasedonCPICHqualityorCQIbasedonHSPDSCH
quality(CQImeanschannelqualityindicator).Then,itdeterminestheHSPDSCHCQI,calculatesthebestbearerthatcanbe
usedandselectsthesuitablebearersoastocomplywithcellandterminaluserequipmentHSDPAcapabilities.Oncethe
bearer selected, Atoll finds the highest downlink throughput that can be provided to the user and may calculate the
applicationthroughput.

238

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

CQIBasedonCPICHQuality
WhentheoptionCQIbasedonCPICHqualityisselected,Atollproceedsasfollows.
1. CPICHQualityCalculation
Ec
Letusassumethefollowingnotation: ------ ic
correspondstotheCPICHquality.
Nt
pilot
Twooptions,availableinGlobalparameters,maybeusedtocalculateNt:optionWithoutusefulsignaloroptionTotalnoise.
Therefore,wehave:
BTS P c ic
Eci
---- ic
= ----------------------------------------- forthetotalnoiseoption,
Nt
pilot
DL
N tot ic
And
BTS P c ic
Eci
----forthewithoutusefulsignaloption.
ic
= -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Nt
pilot
DL
N tot ic 1 BTS P c ic
i

With
DL

DL

DL

DL

DL

term

N tot ic = I intra ic + I extra ic + I inter carrier ic + I inter techno log y ic + N 0

DL
DL
DL
P SCH ic
P SCH ic
DL
term
I intra ic = P tot ic + BTS 1 F MUD 1 P tot ic ------------------- BTS P tot ic ------------------LT
LT
txi
txi
txi

DL

I extra ic =

DL

P tot ic

txj j i

Ptot icadj
DL

DL

txj j
I inter carrier ic = -----------------------------------RF ic ic adj

icadjisacarrieradjacenttoic.
RF ic ic adj istheinterferencereductionfactor,definedbetweenicandicadjandsettoavaluedifferentfrom0.
DL

I inter techno log y ic istheintertechnologyinterferenceatthereceiveronic.

DL

I inter techno log y ic =

ni

Tx

P Transmitted ic i
------------------------------------Tx
Tx m
L total ICP ic ic
i

th

ic i isthe i interferingcarrierofanexternaltransmitter
Tx m

ICP ic ic istheintertechnologyChannelProtectionbetweenthesignaltransmittedbyTxandreceivedbymassumingthe
i

frequencygapbetween ic i (externalnetwork)and ic .
P pilot ic
P c ic = --------------------i
LT
i

L path L Tx L term L body L indoor E Shadowing 3

L T = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ( )
G Tx G term
term

BTS , and N 0

3.

aredefinedin"Inputs"onpage 211.

IntheHSDPAcoverageprediction, L T iscalculatedasfollows:

L path L Tx L term L body L indoor M Shadowing Ec Io

-)
L T = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G Tx G term

239

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

Atollperformsintracellinterferencecomputationsbasedonthetotalpower.Youcan
instructAtolltousemaximumpowerbyaddingthefollowinglinesintheAtoll.inifile:
[CDMA]
PmaxInIntraItf = 1

Inthiscase,Atollconsidersthefollowingformula:
P max ic P SCH ic
P max ic
DL
term
-
I intra ic = -------------------+ BTS 1 F MUD 1 ---------------------------------------------
LT
LT
P max ic P SCH ic
-
BTS ---------------------------------------------

LT

2. CPICHCQIDetermination
Let us assume the following notation: CQI pilot corresponds to the CPICH CQI. CQI pilot is read in the table
Ec
.Thistableisdefinedfortheterminalreceptionequipmentandtheselectedmobility.
CQI pilot = f ------ ic

Nt
pilot
3. HSPDSCHQualityCalculation
Atollproceedsasfollows:
1ststep:AtollcalculatestheHSSCCHpower( P HS SCCH ).
P HS SCCH ic istheHSSCCHpoweroncarrieric.Itiseitherfixedbytheuser(whentheoptionHSSCCHPowerDynamic
Allocationinthecellpropertydialogueisunchecked)ordynamicallycalculated(whentheoptionHSSCCHPowerDynamic
Allocationisselected).
req

Ec
). It is
In this case, the HSSCCH power is controlled so as to reach the required HSSCCH Ec/Nt (noted ------ ic
Nt
HS SCCH
specifiedinmobilityproperties.
Wehave:
BTS P c ic
Eci
---- ic
= ------------------------------- forthetotalnoiseoption,
Nt
HS SCCH
DL
N tot ic
And
BTS P c ic
Eci
----

ic

=
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- forthewithoutusefulsignaloption.
Nt
HS SCCH
DL
term
N tot ic 1 F ortho 1 F MUD BTS P c ic
i

With
DL

DL

DL

DL

DL

term

N tot ic = I intra ic + I extra ic + I inter carrier ic + I inter techno log y ic + N 0

DL

DL

DL
P SCH ic
P SCH ic
DL
term
I intra ic = P tot ic + BTS 1 F MUD 1 F ortho P tot ic ------------------- BTS P tot ic -------------------
LT
LT
txi
txi
txi

DL

I extra ic =

DL

P tot ic

txj j i

Ptot icadj
DL

DL

txj j
I inter carrier ic = -----------------------------------RF ic ic adj

icadjisacarrieradjacenttoic.
RF ic ic adj istheinterferencereductionfactor,definedbetweenicandicadjandsettoavaluedifferentfrom0.
DL

I inter techno log y ic istheintertechnologyinterferenceatthereceiveronic.

240

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

DL

I inter techno log y ic =

Tx

P Transmitted ic i
------------------------------------Tx
Tx m
L total ICP ic ic
i

th

ic i isthe i interferingcarrierofanexternaltransmitter
Tx m

ICP ic ic istheintertechnologyChannelProtectionbetweenthesignaltransmittedbyTxandreceivedbymassumingthe
i

frequencygapbetween ic i (externalnetwork)and ic .
P HS SCCH ic
P c ic = ------------------------------i
LT
i

and
L path L Tx L term L body L indoor E Shadowing 4
L T = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ( )
G Tx G term
term

term

BTS , F ortho , F MUD and N 0

aredefinedin"Inputs"onpage 211.

Therefore,
req

EcDL
---- ic
N tot ic
Nt

HS SCCH
P HS SCCH ic = ------------------------------------------------------------------ L T forthetotalnoiseoption,
i
BTS

And
req
EcDL
----

ic
N tot ic
Nt
HS SCCH

- L T forthewithoutusefulsignaloption.
P HS SCCH ic = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------req
i
term
1 + 1 F
Ec

ortho 1 F MUD ------ ic

BTS

Nt
HS SCCH

2ndstep:AtollcalculatestheHSPDSCHpower( P HS PDSCH ).
P HSDPA ic isthepoweravailableforHSDPAonthecarrieric.Thisparameteriseitherasimulationoutput,orauserdefined
cellinput.
P HSDPA ic = P HS PDSCH ic + n HS SCCH P HS SCCH ic
Therefore,wehave:
P HS PDSCH ic = P HSDPA ic n HS SCCH P HS SCCH ic
n HS SCCH isthenumberofHSSCCHchannels.
3rdstep:Then,AtollevaluatestheHSPDSCHquality
Ec
Letusassumethefollowingnotation: ------ ic
correspondstotheHSPDSCHquality.
Nt
HS PDSCH
Wehave:
BTS P c ic
Eci
---- ic
= ------------------------------- forthetotalnoiseoption,
Nt
HS PDSCH
DL
N tot ic
And
BTS P c ic
Eci
----
- forthewithoutusefulsignaloption.
Nt ic HS PDSCH = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------P c ic
DL
term
i
N tot ic 1 F ortho 1 F MUD BTS --------------n

4.

IntheHSDPAcoverageprediction, L T iscalculatedasfollows:

L path L Tx L term L body L indoor M Shadowing Ec Io

-)
L T = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G Tx G term

241

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

Here,AtollworksontheassumptionthatfiveHSPDSCHchannelsareused(n=5).
With
DL

DL

DL

DL

DL

term

N tot ic = I intra ic + I extra ic + I inter carrier ic + I inter techno log y ic + N 0

DL

DL

DL
P SCH ic
P SCH ic
DL
term
I intra ic = P tot ic + BTS 1 F MUD 1 F ortho P tot ic ------------------- BTS P tot ic ------------------

LT
LT
txi
txi
txi

DL

I extra ic =

DL

P tot ic

txj j i

Ptot icadj
DL

DL

txj j
I inter carrier ic = -----------------------------------RF ic ic adj

icadjisacarrieradjacenttoic.
RF ic ic adj istheinterferencereductionfactor,definedbetweenicandicadjandsettoavaluedifferentfrom0.
DL

I inter techno log y ic istheintertechnologyinterferenceatthereceiveronic.

DL

I inter techno log y ic =

ni

Tx

P Transmitted ic i
-------------------------------------Tx
Tx m
L total ICPic ic
i

th

ic i isthe i interferingcarrierofanexternaltransmitter
Tx m

ICP ic ic istheintertechnologyChannelProtectionbetweenthesignaltransmittedbyTxandreceivedbymassumingthe
i

frequencygapbetween ic i (externalnetwork)and ic .
P HS PDSCH ic
P c ic = ---------------------------------i
LT
i

And
L path L Tx L term L body L indoor E Shadowing 5
- ( )
L T = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G Tx G term
term

term

BTS , F ortho , F MUD and N 0

aredefinedin"Inputs"onpage 211.

Atollperformsintracellinterferencecomputationsbasedonthetotalpower.Youcan
instructAtolltousemaximumpowerbyaddingthefollowinglinesintheAtoll.inifile:
[CDMA]
PmaxInIntraItf = 1

Inthiscase,Atollconsidersthefollowingformula:
P max ic P SCH ic
P max ic P SCH ic
P max ic
DL
term
I intra ic = -------------------+ BTS 1 F MUD 1 ----------------------------------------------- BTS -----------------------------------------------
LT
LT
LT
4. HSPDSCHCQIDetermination
The best bearer that can be used depends on the HSPDSCH CQI. Let us assume the following notation: CQI HS PDSCH
correspondstotheHSPDSCHCQI.Atollcalculates CQI HS PDSCH asfollows:
CQI HS PDSCH = CQI pilot P pilot + P HS PDSCH

5.

IntheHSDPAcoverageprediction, L T iscalculatedasfollows:

L path L Tx L term L body L indoor M Shadowing Ec Io

-)
L T = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G Tx G term

242

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

5. HSDPABearerSelection
AtollselectstheHSDPAbearerassociatedtothisCQI(inthetableBestBearer=f(HSPDSCHCQI)definedfortheterminal
receptionequipmentandtheusermobility)andcompatiblewiththeuserequipmentandcellcapabilities.
HSDPAbearerscanbeclassifiedintotwocategories:

HSDPAbearersusingQPSKand16QAMmodulations:TheycanbeselectedforallusersconnectedtoHSPAandHSPA+
capablecells.ThenumberofHSPDSCHchannelsrequiredbythebearermustnotexceedthemaximumnumberof
HSPDSCHcodesavailableforthecell.
ForVBRserviceusers,theselectedHSDPAbearermustprovideapeakRLCthroughputbetweentheminimumandthe
maximumthroughputdemandsdefinedfortheservice.
ForCBRserviceusers,HSSCCHlessoperation(i.e.,HSDSCHtransmissionswithoutanyaccompanyingHSSCCH)is
performed.Inthiscase,theUEisnotinformedaboutthetransmissionformatandhastoreverttoblinddecodingof
the transport format used on the HSDSCH. Complexity of blind detections in the UE is decreased by limiting the
transmissionformatsthatcanbeused(i.e.,theHSDPAbearersavailable).Therefore,onlyHSDPAbearersusingthe
QPSK modulation and two HSPDSCH channels at the maximum can be selected and allocated to these users.
Additionally, the selected HSDPA bearer must provide a peak RLC throughput higher or equal to the minimum
throughputdemanddefinedfortheservice.

HSDPAbearersusing64QAMmodulation(improvementintroducedbytherelease7ofthe3GPPUTRAspecifications,
referredtoasHSPA+):TheseHSDPAbearerscanbeallocatedtoVBRandBEserviceusersconnectedtocellswith
HSPA+capabilitiesonly.ThenumberofHSPDSCHchannelsrequiredbythebearermustnotexceedthemaximum
numberofHSPDSCHcodesavailableforthecell.ForVBRserviceusers,theselectedHSDPAmustprovideapeakRLC
throughput between the minimum and the maximum throughput demandsdefined for the service.These HSDPA
bearerscannotbeallocatedtoCBRserviceusers.

AtollconsidersanHSDPAbearerascompatiblewiththeuserequipmentif:

Thetransportblocksizedoesnotexceedthemaximumtransportblocksizesupportedbytheuserequipment.
The number of HSPDSCH channels required by the bearer does not exceed the maximum number of HSPDSCH
channelsthattheterminalcanuse.
Themodulationissupportedbytheuserequipment.

When there are several HSDPA bearers compatible, Atoll selects the HSDPA bearer that provides the highest RLC peak
throughput.WhenseveralHSDPAbearerscansupplythesameRLCpeakthroughput,AtollchoosestheHSDPAbearerwith
thehighestmodulationscheme.Finally,ifnoHSDPAbeareriscompatible,AtollallocatesalowerHSDPAbearercompatible
withtheuserequipmentandcellcapabilitieswhichneedsfewerresources.
Letsconsiderthefollowingexamples.
Example1:OneHSDPABEserviceuserwithcategory13userequipmentanda50km/hmobility.
Theuserequipmentcapabilitiesare:

Maximumtransportblocksize:35280bits
MaximumnumberofHSPDSCHchannels:15
Highestmodulationsupported:64QAM
MIMOSupport:No

Figure 4.7:HSDPAUECategoriesTable
ThecelltowhichtheuserisconnectedsupportsHSPA+functionalities(i.e.64QAMmodulationintheDLandMIMOsystems)
andthemaximumnumberofHSPDSCHchannelsis15.

243

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

1stcase:TheCQIexperiencedbytheuserequals26.Therefore,AtollcanchoosebetweentwoHSDPAbearers,thebearer
indexes26and31.
Characteristicsofthebearerindex26are:

Transportblocksize:17237bits
NumberofHSPDSCHchannelsused:12
16QAMmodulationisused
PeakRLCThroughput:8.32Mb/s

Characteristicsofthebearerindex31are:

Transportblocksize:15776bits
NumberofHSPDSCHchannelsused:10
64QAMmodulationisused
PeakRLCThroughput:7.36Mb/s

Both HSDPA bearers are compatible with the user equipment and cell capabilities. Atoll selects the HSDPA bearer that
providesthehighestRLCpeakthroughput,i.e.thebearerindex26.

Figure 4.8:HSDPARadioBearersTable
2ndcase:TheCQIexperiencedbytheuserequals27.Therefore,AtollcanchoosebetweentwoHSDPAbearers,thebearer
indexes27and32.
Characteristicsofthebearerindex27are:

Transportblocksize:21754bits
NumberofHSPDSCHchannelsused:15
16QAMmodulationisused
PeakRLCThroughput:10.24Mb/s

Characteristicsofthebearerindex32are:

Transportblocksize:21768bits
NumberofHSPDSCHchannelsused:12
64QAMmodulationisused
PeakRLCThroughput:10.24Mb/s

BothHSDPAbearersarecompatiblewiththeuserequipmentandcellcapabilitiesandthepeakRLCthroughputtheyprovide
isthesame.AtollselectstheHSDPAbearerusingthehighestmodulationscheme,i.e.thebearerindex32.
Example2:OneHSDPABEuserexperiencingaCQIof26.
Therefore,AtollcanchoosebetweentwoHSDPAbearers,thebearerindexes26and31.
Characteristicsofthebearerindex26are:

244

Transportblocksize:17237bits
NumberofHSPDSCHchannelsused:12
16QAMmodulationisused
PeakRLCThroughput:8.32Mb/s

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Characteristicsofthebearerindex31are:

Transportblocksize:15776bits
NumberofHSPDSCHchannelsused:10
64QAMmodulationisused
PeakRLCThroughput:7.36Mb/s

1stcase:Theuserequipmentcategoryis9.ThecelltowhichtheuserisconnectedsupportsHSPA+functionalities(i.e.64QAM
modulationintheDLandMIMOsystems)andthemaximumnumberofHSPDSCHchannelsis15.
Theuserequipmentcharacteristicsarethefollowing:

Maximumtransportblocksize:20251bits
MaximumnumberofHSPDSCHchannels:15
Highestmodulationsupported:16QAM
MIMOSupport:No

Thebearerindex31cannotbeselectedbecauseitrequiresamodulationschemenotsupportedbytheterminal.Onlythe
bearerindex26iscompatiblewiththeuserequipmentcapabilities.Atollselectsit.
2ndcase:Theuserequipmentcategoryis8.ThecelltowhichtheuserisconnectedsupportsHSPA+functionalities(i.e.64QAM
modulationintheDLandMIMOsystems)andthemaximumnumberofHSPDSCHchannelsis15.
Theuserequipmentcharacteristicsarethefollowing:

Maximumtransportblocksize:14411bits
MaximumnumberofHSPDSCHchannels:10
Highestmodulationsupported:16QAM
MIMOSupport:No

Here,noneofHSDPAbearersarecompatiblewiththeuserequipmentcapabilities.
Thebearerindex31cannotbeselectedbecauseitrequiresamodulationschemenotsupportedbytheterminal.Withthe
bearerindex26,thenumberofHSPDSCHchannels(12)exceedsthemaximumnumberofHSPDSCHchannelstheterminal
canuse(10),andthetransportblocksize(17237bits)exceedsthemaximumtransportblocksize(14411bits)theterminalcan
carried.
IntheHSDPARadioBearertable,AtollselectsalowerHSDPAbearercompatiblewithcellandUEcategorycapabilities.It
selectsthebearerindex25.

ThenumberofHSPDSCHchannels(10)doesnotexceedthemaximumnumberofHSPDSCHchannelstheterminal
canuse(10)andthemaximumnumberofHSPDSCHchannelsavailableatthecelllevel(15),
Thetransportblocksize(14411bits)doesnotexceedthemaximumtransportblocksize(14411bits)theterminalcan
carried.
16QAMmodulationissupportedbytheterminalandthecell.

3rdcase:Theuserequipmentcategoryis13.ThecelltowhichtheuserisconnectedsupportsHSPAfunctionalitiesandthe
maximumnumberofHSPDSCHchannelsis15.
Theuserequipmentcapabilitiesare:

Maximumtransportblocksize:35280bits
MaximumnumberofHSPDSCHchannels:15
Highestmodulationsupported:64QAM
MIMOSupport:No

Thebearerindex31cannotbeselectedbecauseitrequiresamodulationschemenotsupportedbythecell.Ontheotherhand,
thebearerindex26iscompatiblewithcellandUEcategorycapabilities.Therefore,itisallocated.
6. HSPDSCHQualityUpdate
Oncethebearerselected,AtollexactlyknowsthenumberofHSPDSCHchannels.Therefore,whenthemethodWithout
usefulsignalisused,itmayrecalculatetheHSPDSCHqualitywiththerealnumberofHSPDSCHchannels(Adefaultvalue
(5)wastakenintoaccountinthefirstHSPDSCHqualitycalculation).
CQIBasedonHSPDSCHQuality
WhentheoptionCQIbasedonHSPDSCHqualityisselected,Atollproceedsasfollows.
1. HSPDSCHQualityCalculation
Atollproceedsasfollows:
1ststep:AtollcalculatestheHSSCCHpower( P HS SCCH ).

245

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

P HS SCCH ic istheHSSCCHpoweroncarrieric.Itiseitherfixedbytheuser(whentheoptionHSSCCHPowerDynamic
Allocationinthecellpropertydialogueisunchecked)ordynamicallycalculated(whentheoptionHSSCCHPowerDynamic
Allocationisselected).
req

Ec
). It is
In this case, the HSSCCH power is controlled so as to reach the required HSSCCH Ec/Nt (noted ------ ic
Nt
HS SCCH
specifiedinmobilityproperties.
Wehave:
BTS P c ic
Eci
---- ic
= ------------------------------- forthetotalnoiseoption,
Nt
HS SCCH
DL
N tot ic
And
BTS P c ic
Eci
----

ic

=
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- forthewithoutusefulsignaloption.
Nt
HS SCCH
DL
term
N tot ic 1 F ortho 1 F MUD BTS P c ic
i

With
DL

DL

DL

DL

DL

term

N tot ic = I intra ic + I extra ic + I inter carrier ic + I inter techno log y ic + N 0

DL

DL

DL
P SCH ic
P SCH ic
DL
term
I intra ic = P tot ic + BTS 1 F MUD 1 F ortho P tot ic ------------------- BTS P tot ic ------------------

LT
LT
txi
txi
txi

DL

I extra ic =

DL

P tot ic

txj j i

Ptot icadj
DL

DL

txj j
I inter carrier ic = -----------------------------------RF ic ic adj

icadjisacarrieradjacenttoic.
RF ic ic adj istheinterferencereductionfactor,definedbetweenicandicadjandsettoavaluedifferentfrom0.
DL

I inter techno log y ic istheintertechnologyinterferenceatthereceiveronic.

DL

I inter techno log y ic =

ni

Tx

P Transmitted ic i
-------------------------------------Tx
Tx m
L total ICPic ic
i

th

ic i isthe i interferingcarrierofanexternaltransmitter
Tx m

ICP ic ic istheintertechnologyChannelProtectionbetweenthesignaltransmittedbyTxandreceivedbymassumingthe
i

frequencygapbetween ic i (externalnetwork)and ic .
P HS SCCH ic
P c ic = ------------------------------i
LT
i

And
L path L Tx L term L body L indoor E Shadowing 6
- ( )
L T = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G Tx G term
term

term

BTS , F ortho , F MUD and N 0

aredefinedin"Inputs"onpage 211.

Therefore,

6.

IntheHSDPAcoverageprediction, L T iscalculatedasfollows:

L path L Tx L term L body L indoor M Shadowing Ec Io

-)
L T = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G Tx G term

246

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
req
EcDL

----

ic

HS SCCH N tot ic
Nt
P HS SCCH ic = ------------------------------------------------------------------ L T forthetotalnoiseoption,
i
BTS

And
req
EcDL
----

ic
N tot ic

Nt
HS SCCH
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------P HS SCCH ic =
L T forthewithoutusefulsignaloption.
req
i
Ec
term
1 + 1 F
------ ic

BTS
ortho
MUD

Nt
HS SCCH

2ndstep:AtollcalculatestheHSPDSCHpower( P HS PDSCH )
P HSDPA ic isthepoweravailableforHSDPAonthecarrieric.Thisparameteriseitherasimulationoutput,orauserdefined
cellinput.
P HSDPA ic = P HS PDSCH ic + n HS SCCH P HS SCCH ic
Therefore,wehave:
P HS PDSCH ic = P HSDPA ic n HS SCCH P HS SCCH ic
n HS SCCH isthenumberofHSSCCHchannels.
3rdstep:Then,AtollevaluatestheHSPDSCHquality
Ec
Letusassumethefollowingnotation: ------ ic
correspondstotheHSPDSCHquality.
Nt
HS PDSCH
Twooptions,availableinGlobalparameters,maybeusedtocalculateNt:optionWithoutusefulsignaloroptionTotalnoise.
Wehave:
BTS P c ic
Eci
----
- forthetotalnoiseoption,
Nt ic HS PDSCH = ------------------------------DL
N tot ic
And
BTS P c ic
Eci
----= ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- forthewithoutusefulsignaloption.
ic
Nt
HS PDSCH
P c ic
DL
term
i
N tot ic 1 F ortho 1 F MUD BTS --------------n
Here,AtollworksontheassumptionthatfiveHSPDSCHchannelsareused(n=5).Then,itcalculatestheHSPDSCHCQIand
thebearertobeused.Oncethebearerselected,AtollexactlyknowsthenumberofHSPDSCHchannelsandrecalculatesthe
HSPDSCHqualitywiththerealnumberofHSPDSCHchannels.
With
DL

DL

DL

DL

DL

term

N tot ic = I intra ic + I extra ic + I inter carrier ic + I inter techno log y ic + N 0

DL

DL

DL
P SCH ic
P SCH ic
DL
term
I intra ic = P tot ic + BTS 1 F MUD 1 F ortho P tot ic ------------------- BTS P tot ic -------------------
LT
LT
txi
txi

txi

DL

I extra ic =

DL

P tot ic

txj j i

Ptot icadj
DL

DL

txj j
I inter carrier ic = -----------------------------------RF ic ic adj

icadjisacarrieradjacenttoic.
RF ic ic adj istheinterferencereductionfactor,definedbetweenicandicadjandsettoavaluedifferentfrom0.
DL

I inter techno log y ic istheintertechnologyinterferenceatthereceiveronic.

247

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

DL

I inter techno log y ic =

Tx

P Transmitted ic i
-------------------------------------Tx
Tx m
L total ICPic ic
i

th

ic i isthe i interferingcarrierofanexternaltransmitter
Tx m

ICP ic ic istheintertechnologyChannelProtectionbetweenthesignaltransmittedbyTxandreceivedbymassumingthe
i

frequencygapbetween ic i (externalnetwork)and ic .
P HS PDSCH ic
P c ic = ---------------------------------i
LT
i

And
L path L Tx L term L body L indoor E Shadowing 7
L T = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ( )
G Tx G term
term

term

BTS , F ortho , F MUD and N 0

aredefinedin"Inputs"onpage 211.

Atollperformsintracellinterferencecomputationsbasedonthetotalpower.Youcan
instructAtolltousemaximumpowerbyaddingthefollowinglinesintheAtoll.inifile:
[CDMA]
PmaxInIntraItf = 1

Inthiscase,Atollconsidersthefollowingformula:
P max ic P SCH ic
P max ic P SCH ic
P max ic
DL
term
- BTS ----------------------------------------------
I intra ic = -------------------+ BTS 1 F MUD 1 ---------------------------------------------

LT
LT
LT
2. HSPDSCHCQIDetermination
Letusassumethefollowingnotation: CQI HS PDSCH correspondstotheHSPDSCHCQI. CQI HS PDSCH isreadinthetable
Ec
. This table is defined for the terminal reception equipment and the specified
CQI HS PDSCH = f ------ ic
Nt
HS PDSCH
mobility.
3. HSDPABearerSelection
Thebearerisselectedasdescribedin"HSDPABearerSelection"onpage 243.

4.4.2.3.5

MIMOModelling
MIMOTransmitDiversity
IftheuserisconnectedtoacellthatsupportsHSPA+withtransmitdiversityandifhehasaMIMOcapableterminal(i.e.,a
terminalwithanHSDPAUEcategorysupportingMIMO),hewillbenefitfromdownlinkdiversitygainontheHSPDSCHEc/Nt.
EcEc
DL
DL
----= ------ ic
+ G TD + G TD indB
ic
Nt
HS PDSCH
Nt
HS PDSCH
Where
DL

G TD isthedownlinktransmitdiversitygain(indB)correspondingtothenumbersoftransmissionandreceptionantennaports
(respectivelydefinedinthetransmitterandterminalproperties).
DL

G TD istheadditionaldiversitygainindownlink(indB).Itisdefinedfortheclutterclassoftheuser.

7.

IntheHSDPAcoverageprediction, L T iscalculatedasfollows:

L path L Tx L term L body L indoor M Shadowing Ec Io

-)
L T = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G Tx G term

248

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

MIMOSpatialMultiplexing
IftheuserisconnectedtoacellthatsupportsHSPA+withspatialmultiplexingandifhehasaMIMOcapableterminal(i.e.,a
terminalwithanHSDPAUEcategorysupportingMIMO),hewillbenefitfromthespatialmultiplexinggaininitspeakRLC
throughput.
Inthiscase,thepeakRLCthroughputobtainedbytheuseristhefollowing:
DL

DL

Max

TP P R LC = TP P R LC Index HSDPABearer 1 + f SM Gain G SM 1

Where
DL

TP P R LC Index HSDPABearer isthepeakRLCthroughputthattheselectedHSDPAbearer( Index HSDPABearer )canprovideinthe

cell(Txi,ic).ItisreadintheHSDPARadioBearertable.
Max

G SM is the maximum spatial multiplexing gain (in dB) for a given number of transmission and reception antennas
(respectivelydefinedinthetransmitterandterminalproperties).
f SM Gain isthespatialmultiplexinggainfactordefinedfortheclutter

4.4.2.3.6

SchedulingAlgorithms
Theschedulermanagesthemaximumnumberofuserswithineachcell.CBRserviceusershavethehighestpriorityandare
processedfirst,intheorderestablishedduringthegenerationoftheuserdistribution.AfterprocessingtheCBRserviceusers,
theschedulerprocessestheremainingusers(i.e.,VBRandBEserviceusers).VBRserviceusershavethehighestpriorityand
are managed before BE service users. For each type of service, the scheduler ranks the users according the scheduling
technique.Threeschedulingalgorithmsareavailable,MaxC/I,RoundRobinandProportionalFair.Impacttheyhaveonthe
simulationresultisdescribedinthetablesbelow.
Letusconsideracellwith16HSDPAandHSPABEserviceusers.AllofthemareactiveonDLandconnectedtotheADCHR99
bearer. There is neither CBR service user, nor VBR service user in the cell and the number of HSSCCH channels and the
maximumnumberofHSDPAbearerusershavebeenrespectivelysetto4and15.
MaxC/I
15users(where15correspondstothemaximumnumberofHSDPAbearerusersdefined)enterstheschedulerinthesame
orderasinthesimulation.Then,theyaresortedindescendingorderbythechannelqualityindicator(CQI),i.e.inabestbearer
descendingorder.
Mobiles

SimulationRank

BestBearer(kbps)

DLObtained
Throughput(kbps)

ConnectionStatus

M1

2400

2400+3.4

Connected

M2

15

2400

1440+3.4

Connected

M3

2080

160+3.4

Connected

M4

2080

3.4

Delayed

M5

10

2080

3.4

Delayed

M6

12

2080

3.4

Delayed

M7

13

2080

3.4

Delayed

M8

14

2080

3.4

Delayed

M9

1920

3.4

Delayed

M10

1600

3.4

Delayed

M11

1600

3.4

Delayed

M12

1600

3.4

Delayed

M13

1600

3.4

Delayed

M14

1600

3.4

Delayed

M15

11

1440

3.4

Delayed

M16

16

2080

SchedulerSaturation

RoundRobin
Usersaretakenintoaccountinthesameorderthantheoneinthesimulation(randomorder).

249

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

Mobiles

SimulationRank

BestBearer(kbps)

DLObtained
Throughput(kbps)

ConnectionStatus

M1

1600

1600+3.4

Connected

M2

2400

960+3.4

Connected

M3

1600

3.4

Delayed

M4

1600

3.4

Delayed

M5

1600

3.4

Delayed

M6

1600

3.4

Delayed

M7

1920

3.4

Delayed

M8

2080

3.4

Delayed

M9

2080

3.4

Delayed

M10

10

2080

3.4

Delayed

M11

11

1440

3.4

Delayed

M12

12

2080

3.4

Delayed

M13

13

2080

3.4

Delayed

M14

14

2080

3.4

Delayed

M15

15

2400

3.4

Delayed

M16

16

2080

SchedulerSaturation

ProportionalFair
15users(where15correspondstothemaximumnumberofHSDPAbearerusersdefined)enterstheschedulerinthesame
order as in the simulation. Then, they are sorted in an ascending order according to a new random parameter which
correspondstoacombinationoftheuserrankinthesimulationandthechannelqualityindicator(CQI).
Forauseri,therandomparameter RPi iscalculatedasfollows:
Simu

RPi = 50 R i

CQI

+ 50 R i

Where,
Simu

Ri

CQI

Ri

istheuserrankinthesimulation.

istheuserrankaccordingtotheCQI.
Youcanchangethedefaultweightsbyeditingtheatoll.inifile.Formoreinformation,see
theAdministratorManual.

250

CQIRank

RP

BestBearer
(kbps)

DLObtained
Throughput
(kbps)

150

2400

2400

Connected

10

550

1600

960

Connected

M3

550

2080

160

Connected

M4

650

2080

3.4

Delayed

M5

11

700

1600

3.4

Delayed

M6

10

750

2080

3.4

Delayed

M7

12

800

1600

3.4

Delayed

M8

800

1920

3.4

Delayed

Mobiles

Simulation
Rank

M1
M2

Connection
Status

M9

15

850

2400

3.4

Delayed

M10

13

900

1600

3.4

Delayed

M11

12

900

2080

3.4

Delayed

M12

14

1000

1600

3.4

Delayed

M13

13

1000

2080

3.4

Delayed

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

4.4.2.3.7

Mobiles

Simulation
Rank

CQIRank

RP

BestBearer
(kbps)

DLObtained
Throughput
(kbps)

Connection
Status

M14

14

1100

2080

3.4

Delayed

M15

11

15

1300

1440

3.4

Delayed

M16

16

2080

Scheduler
Saturation

DualCellHSDPA
Fortransmittersthatsupportmulticellmode,theschedulermanagesasinglequeueofusersattheNodeB.
MCHSPAandDBMCHSPAusersareprocessedasDCHSPAusersiftheyareconnectedtotwocarriers.Otherwise,theyare
consideredassinglecarrierHSPAusers.Allusersbelongingtothetransmitter,i.e.,DCHSPAandsinglecarrierHSPAusers,
arerankedtogetherinauniquelist.DCHSPAusersareconsideredtwiceinthelistastheymaybeassignedtwodifferent
HSDPAbearersinthetwocells.
CBRserviceusersdonotsupportmulticellmode,anthentheyareprocessedassinglecarrierHSPAusers.VBRserviceusers
havethehighestpriorityandaremanagedbeforeBEserviceusers.Foreachtypeofservice,theschedulerrankstheusers
accordingtheschedulingtechnique(Max C/I,Round Robinand ProportionalFair).Aftertheusershave been ranked, the
schedulerallocatesHSDPAresourcestoeachuserfollowingthecalculatedorderaslongasthereareresourcesavailable.Even
ifthereisauniquelistofusersatthetransmitterlevel,theresourcesofeachcellarenotsharedandeachcarrierhasitsown
poolofresources(numberofHSSCCHchannels,maximumnumberofHSDPAbearerusers,HSDPApower,numberofOVSF
codes).Onlysitelevelresources(suchastheIubthroughputandthechannelelements)aresharedbetweentheusersofthe
twocells.
Letusconsideratransmitterwith16BEserviceusers.Thetransmittersupportsthemulticellmode.ThereisneitherCBR
serviceuser,norVBRserviceusers.AllusersareactiveinDLandconnectedtotheADCHR99bearer.Amongtheusers,there
are6DCHSPAusers(i.e.,terminalwithUEcategories21to24).
SimulationRank

DCHSPASupport

Carriers

Comments

Yes

1and2

Anchorcarrier:2

No

No

Yes

1and2

No

No

No

No

Yes

1and2

10

No

11

No

12

Yes

1and2

13

No

14

Yes

1and2

15

No

16

Yes

1and2

Anchorcarrier:2

Anchorcarrier:1

Anchorcarrier:1
Anchorcarrier:1
Anchorcarrier:2

Ineachcell,thenumberofHSSCCHchannelsandthemaximumnumberofHSDPAbearerusershavebeenrespectivelyset
to4and7.
Theschedulingalgorithmsdefinedforthetwocellsarethesameastheoneselectedforthetransmitter.
EachDCHSPAuseriscountedtwice,onceineachcell,ashemaybeassignedtwodifferentHSDPAbearersinthetwocells.
Therefore,theschedulermanagestheusersranked1stto11th(i.e.4singlecarrierusersconnectedtothefirstcarrier,4single
carrier users connected to the second carrier and 3 DCHSPA users). Users ranked 12th to 16th are rejected because the
maximumnumberofHSDPAbearerusersthattheschedulercanmanageinacellisexceeded.
Impacttheschedulingalgorithmshaveonthesimulationresultsisdescribedinthetablesbelow.

251

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

MaxC/I
7usersfromeachcell(where7correspondstothemaximumnumberofHSDPAbearerusersdefinedforeachcell),i.e.,atotal
of14usersentertheschedulerinthesameorderasinthesimulation.Then,theyaresortedintheorderofdecreasingchannel
qualityindicator(CQI),i.e.inabestbearerdescendingorder.
Mobiles

Carrier

Simulation
Rank

CQI

BestBearer
(kbps)

DLObtained
Throughput
(kbps)

Connection
Status

M1

21

3040

3040+3.4

Connected

M2
(DCHSPA)

19

2400

2400+3.4

Connected

M3

18

2080

1440+3.4

Connected

M2
(DCHSPA)

17

1920

1920

Connected

M4
(DCHSPA)

17

1920

960+3.4

Connected

M5

16

1600

3.4

Delayed

M4
(DCHSPA)

16

1600

1120

Connected

M6

15

1440

3.4

Delayed

M7

14

1120

3.4

Delayed

M8

10

14

1120

3.4

Delayed

M9
(DCHSPA)

13

960

3.4

Delayed

M10

13

960

3.4

Delayed

M9
(DCHSPA)

12

800

Delayed

M11

11

12

800

3.4

Delayed

M12
(DCHSPA)

1
2

12

14
15

1120
1440

Scheduler
Saturation

M13

13

17

1920

Scheduler
Saturation

M14
(DCHSPA)

1
2

14

13
15

960
1440

Scheduler
Saturation

M15

15

17

1920

Scheduler
Saturation

M16
(DCHSPA)

1
2

16

12
14

800
1120

Scheduler
Saturation

ThescheduledDCHSPAusershavethefollowingstatus:

Theuserranked4th(hereM2)isconnectedtoanHSDPAbearerineachcell.HeobtainsatotalDLthroughputof4323.4
kbps(2403.4+1920).
Theuserranked9th(hereM4)isconnectedtoanHSDPAbearerineachcell.HeobtainsatotalDLthroughputof2083.4
kbps(963.4+1120).
Thefirstuser(hereM9)isdelayedinthetwocells.HeobtainsatotalDLthroughputof3.4kbps.

RoundRobin
7usersfromeachcell(where7correspondstothemaximumnumberofHSDPAbearerusersdefinedforeachcell),i.e.,atotal
of14usersentertheschedulerinthesameorderasinthesimulation.

252

Mobiles

Carrier

Simulation
Rank

CQI

BestBearer
(kbps)

DLObtained
Throughput
(kbps)

Connection
Status

M1
(DCHSPA)

12

800

800

Connected

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Mobiles

Carrier

Simulation
Rank

CQI

BestBearer
(kbps)

DLObtained
Throughput
(kbps)

Connection
Status

M1
(DCHSPA)

13

960

960+3.4

Connected

M2

15

1440

1440+3.4

Connected

M3

16

1600

1600+3.4

Connected

M4
(DCHSPA)

19

2400

1600+3.4

Connected

M4
(DCHSPA)

17

1920

960

Connected

M5

21

3040

480+3.4

Connected

M6

13

960

160+3.4

Connected

M7

14

1120

3.4

Delayed

M8

18

2080

3.4

Delayed

M9
(DCHSPA)

16

1600

Delayed

M9
(DCHSPA)

17

1920

3.4

Delayed

M10

10

14

1120

3.4

Delayed

M11

11

12

800

3.4

Delayed

M12
(DCHSPA)

1
2

12

14
15

1120
1440

Scheduler
Saturation

M13

13

17

1920

Scheduler
Saturation

M14
(DCHSPA)

1
2

14

13
15

960
1440

Scheduler
Saturation

M15

15

17

1920

Scheduler
Saturation

M16
(DCHSPA)

1
2

16

12
14

800
1120

Scheduler
Saturation

ThescheduledDCHSPAusershavethefollowingstatus:

Thefirstuser(hereM1)isconnectedtoanHSDPAbearerineachcell.HeobtainsatotalDLthroughputof1763.4kbps
(800+963.4).
Theuserranked4th(hereM4)isconnectedtoanHSDPAbearerineachcell.HeobtainsatotalDLthroughputof2563.4
kbps(1603.4+960).
Theuserranked9th(hereM9)isdelayedinthetwocells.HeobtainsatotalDLthroughputof3.4kbps.

ProportionalFair
7usersfromeachcell(where7correspondstothemaximumnumberofHSDPAbearerusersdefinedforeachcell),i.e.,atotal
of14usersentertheschedulerinthesameorderasinthesimulation.Then,theyaresortedinanascendingorderaccording
toanewrandomparameterwhichcorrespondstoacombinationoftheuserrankinthesimulationandthechannelquality
indicator(CQI).
Forauseri,therandomparameter RPi iscalculatedasfollows:
Simu

RPi = 50 R i

CQI

+ 50 R i

Where,
Simu

Ri

CQI

Ri

istheuserrankinthesimulation.

istheuserrankaccordingtotheCQI.

253

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

Youcanchangethedefaultweightsbyeditingtheatoll.inifile.Formoreinformation,see
theAdministratorManual.

DL
BestBearer Obtained Connection
Throughput
(kbps)
Status
(kbps)

Mobiles

Carrier

Simulation
Rank

M1
DCHSPA

19

300

2400

2400+3.4

Connected

M2

21

300

3040

3040+3.4

Connected

M1
DCHSPA

17

400

1920

1440

Connected

M3

16

450

1600

800+3.4

Connected

M4

15

500

1440

1120+3.4

Connected

M5

18

550

2080

800+3.4

Connected

M6
DCHSPA

13

11

600

960

480+3.4

Connected

M6
DCHSPA

12

13

700

800

Delayed

M7
DCHSPA

17

700

1920

3.4

Delayed

M8

14

800

1120

3.4

Delayed

M7
DCHSPA

16

800

1600

Delayed

M9

13

12

900

960

3.4

Delayed

M10

10

14

10

1000

1120

3.4

Delayed

M11

11

12

14

1250

800

3.4

Delayed

M12
(DCHSPA)

1
2

12

14
15

1120
1440

Scheduler
Saturation

Scheduler
Saturation

M13

13

17

1920

Scheduler
Saturation

Scheduler
Saturation

M14
(DCHSPA)

1
2

14

13
15

960
1440

Scheduler
Saturation

Scheduler
Saturation

M15

15

17

1920

Scheduler
Saturation

Scheduler
Saturation

M16
(DCHSPA)

1
2

16

12
14

800
1120

Scheduler
Saturation

Scheduler
Saturation

CQI

CQIRank

RP

ThescheduledDCHSPAusershavethefollowingstatus:

Theuserranked4th(hereM1)isconnectedtoanHSDPAbearerineachcell.HeobtainsatotalDLthroughputof3843.4
kbps(2403.4+1440).
Thefirstuser(hereM6)isconnectedtoanHSDPAbearerinhisanchorcellanddelayedintheothercell.Heobtainsa
totalDLthroughputof483.4kbps(483.4+0).
Theuserranked9th(hereM7)isdelayedinthetwocells.HeobtainsatotalDLthroughputof3.4kbps.

4.4.2.4 HSUPAPartoftheAlgorithm
HSPAVBRandBEserviceusersactiveintheULaswellasallHSPACBRserviceusers(i.e.,activeandinactive),unlesstheyhave
beenrejectedduringtheR99orHSDPApartsofthealgorithm,arethenevaluatedbytheHSUPApartofthealgorithm.Atoll
managesthemaximumnumberofuserswithineachcell.CBRserviceusershavethehighestpriorityandareprocessedfirst,
intheorderestablishedduringthegenerationoftheuserdistribution.Then,AtollconsidersVBRserviceusersintheorder
establishedduringthegenerationoftheuserdistributionandlastly,itprocessesBEserviceusersintheorderestablished
duringthegenerationoftheuserdistribution.
DCHSPA,MCHSPAandDBMCHSPAusersareprocessedassinglecarrierHSPAusers.

254

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Letusassumethereare12HSPAusersinthecell:

3CBRserviceuserswithanyactivitystatus.AllofthemhavebeenconnectedtoanHSDPAbearer.
2packetVBRserviceusers.TheyhavebeenconnectedtoanHSDPAbearer.
7packetBEserviceusersactiveonUL.ThefirsttwousershavebeenconnectedtoanHSDPAbearer,thelastonehas
beenrejectedandtheremainingfourhavebeendelayedintheHSDPApart.

Finally,themaximumnumberofHSUPAbearerusersequals10.
Inthiscase,AtollwillconsiderthefirsttenHSPAusersonlyandwillrejectthelasttwousersinordernottoexceedthe
maximumnumberofHSUPAbearerusersallowedinthecell(theirconnectionstatusis"HSUPAschedulersaturation").

4.4.2.4.1

Evaluationbythe
HSDPA
HSUPApartofthe
ConnectionStatus
algorithm

Mobiles

Service

SimulationRank

M1

CBR

Connected

Yes

M2

CBR

Connected

Yes

M3

CBR

Connected

Yes

M4

VBR

Connected

Yes

M5

VBR

Connected

Yes

M6

BE

Connected

Yes

M7

BE

Connected

Yes

M8

BE

Delayed

Yes

M9

BE

Delayed

Yes

M10

BE

10

Delayed

Yes

M11

BE

11

Delayed

No

M12

BE

12

Rejected

No

AdmissionControl
During admission control, Atoll selects a list of HSUPA bearers for each user. The selected HSUPA bearers have to be
compatiblewiththeuserequipmentandcapabilitiesofeachHSUPAcelloftheactiveset.
ForCBRserviceusers,thelistisrestrictedtoHSUPAbearersthatprovideapeakRLCthroughputhigherthantheminimum
throughputdemand.
For VBR service users, the list of compatible bearers is restricted to HSUPA bearers that provide a peak RLC throughput
betweenthemaximumandtheminimumthroughputdemands.
LetusfocusononeHSPABEserviceuserwithcategory3userequipmentanda50km/hmobility.Thisuserisconnectedto
onecellonly.ThecellsupportsHSPA+functionalities,i.ethecellsupportsQPSKand16QAMmodulationsintheUL.
HSUPA user equipment categories are provided in the HSUPA User Equipment Categories table. The capabilities of the
category3userequipmentare:

MaximumNumberofEDPDCHcodes:2
TTI2ms:Nosoitsupports10msTTI
MinimumSpreadingFactor:4
MaximumBlockSizefora2msTTI:novalue
MaximumBlockSizefora10msTTI:14484bits
HighestModulationSupported:QPSK

Figure 4.9:HSUPAUECategoriesTable
HSUPA bearer characteristics are provided in the HSUPA Bearer table. An HSUPA bearer is described with following
characteristics:

255

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

RadioBearerIndex:Thebearerindexnumber.
TTIDuration(ms):TheTTIdurationinms.TheTTIcanbe2or10 ms.
TransportBlockSize(Bits):Thetransportblocksizeinbits.
NumberofEDPDCHCodes:ThenumberofEDPDCHchannelsused.
MinimumSpreadingFactor:Thesmallestspreadingfactorused.
Modulation:themodulationused(QPSKor16QAM)
PeakRLCThroughput(bps):TheRLCpeakthroughputrepresentsthepeakthroughputwithoutcoding(redundancy,
overhead,addressing,etc.).

HSUPAbearerscanbeclassifiedintotwocategories:

HSUPAbearersusingQPSKmodulation:TheycanbeselectedforusersconnectedtoHSPAandHSPA+capablecells.

HSUPAbearersusing16QAMmodulation(improvementintroducedbytherelease7ofthe3GPPUTRAspecifications,
referredtoasHSPA+).TheseHSUPAbearerscanbeallocatedtousersconnectedtocellswithHSPA+capabilitiesonly.

AtollconsidersanHSUPAbearerascompatiblewiththecategory3userequipmentif:

TheTTIdurationusedbythebearerissupportedbytheuserequipment(10ms).
Thetransportblocksizedoesnotexceedthemaximumtransportblocksizesupportedbytheuserequipment(14484
bits):
ThenumberofEDPDCHchannelsrequiredbythebearerdoesnotexceedthemaximumnumberofEDPDCHchannels
thattheterminalcanuse(2).
Theminimumspreadingfactorusedbythebearerisnotlessthanthesmallestspreadingfactorsupportedbythe
terminal(4).
Themodulationrequiredbythebearerissupportedbytheterminal.

TheHSUPAbearerscompatiblewithcategory3userequipmentareframedinred:

Figure 4.10:HSUPARadioBearersTable
Then,duringadmissioncontrol,AtollchecksthatthelowestcompatiblebearerintermsoftherequiredEDPDCHEcNtdoes
notrequireaterminalpowerhigherthanthemaximumterminalpowerallowed.
AtollusestheHSUPABearerSelectiontable.AmongthecompatibleHSUPAbearers,Atollchoosestheonewiththelowest
requiredEc/Ntthreshold.
Here,thisistheindex1HSUPAbearer;therequiredEc/Ntthresholdtoobtainthisbeareris21.7dB.
Ec req
req
Then,fromtherequiredEc/Ntthreshold, ------
,Atollcalculatestherequiredterminalpower, P term HSUPA .
Nt E DPDCH
Ec req
req
UL
P term HSUPA = ------
L N tot
Nt E DPDCH T
With
UL

tx

UL intra

N tot ic = 1 F MUD term I tot

UL extra

ic + I tot

L path L Tx L term L body L indoor E Shadowing 8

- ( )
L T = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G Tx G term

256

UL

tx

ic + I inter carrier ic + N 0

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

tx

UL

intra

term , F MUD , I tot

UL

extra

, I tot

UL

tx

, I inter carrier and N 0 aredefinedin"Inputs"onpage 211.

Figure 4.11:HSUPABearerSelectionTable
req

AtollrejectstheuseriftheterminalpowerrequiredtoobtainthelowestcompatibleHSUPAbearer( P term HSUPA )exceeds

themaximumterminalpower(hisconnectionstatusis"HSUPAAdmissionRejection").
Attheendofthisstep,thenumberofnonrejectedHSUPAbearerusersis n HSUPA .AllofthemwillbeconnectedtoanHSUPA
bearerattheend.

4.4.2.4.2

HSUPABearerAllocationProcess
TheHSUPAbearerallocationprocessdependsonthetypeofservicerequestedbytheuser.Asexplainedbefore,CBRservice
usershavethehighestpriorityandareprocessedfirst,intheorderestablishedduringthegenerationoftheuserdistribution.
AftertheadmissioncontrolonCBRserviceusers,Atollperformsanoiserisescheduling,followedbyaradioresourcecontrol.
Then,itrepeatsthesamestepsonVBRserviceusersfirst,andlastlyonBEserviceusers,intheorderestablishedduringthe
generationoftheuserdistribution.
CBRServiceUsers
Let us focus on the three CBR service users mentioned in the example of the previous paragraph "HSUPA Part of the
Algorithm"onpage 254.Weassumethatallofthemhavebeenadmitted.Noiseriseschedulingandradioresourcecontrol
arecarriedoutoneachuserinordertodeterminethebestHSUPAbearerthattheusercanobtain.SeveralCBRserviceusers
cansharethesameHSUPAbearer.Then,AtollcalculatestheHSUPAbearerconsumption( C in%)foreachuserandtakesinto
accountthisparameterwhenitdeterminestheresourcesconsumedbytheuser(i.e.,theterminalpowerused,thenumber
ofchannelelementsandtheIubbackhaulthroughput).
Inthebearerallocationprocessshownbelow,the3CBRserviceusersarerepresentedbyMj,withj=1to3.

8.

IntheHSUPAcoverageprediction, L T iscalculatedasfollows:

L path L Tx L term L body L indoor M Shadowing Eb Nt

UL
-)
L T = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G Tx G term

257

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

Fortheuser,Mj,withjvaryingfrom1to3:
Determination of the best HSUPA bearer B(Mj)

Allocation of the minimum throughput demand to

Mj
Calculation of C(B(Mj))

Sufficient Iub
backhaul throughput
to support the HSUPA
bearer?

No

Is there a lower HSUPA

bearer available?
Yes
No

Yes

Enough
channel elements
available to support the
HSUPA bearer?

Downgrading to lower
HSUPA bearer

Mj is rejected
Yes
No

Is there a lower HSUPA

bearer available?
No

Yes
Mj is rejected
Pterm-HSUPA recalculation and interference update

No

Mj = M3?
Yes

Resource allocation for packet (HSPA

Variable Bit Rate) service users

Figure 4.12:HSUPABearerAllocationProcessforCBRServiceUsers
VBRServiceUsers
LetusfocusonthetwoVBRserviceusersmentionedintheexampleofthepreviousparagraph"HSUPAPartoftheAlgorithm"
onpage 254.Weassumethatallofthemhavebeenadmitted.Noiseriseschedulingandradioresourcecontrolarecarried
outoneachuserinordertodeterminethebestHSUPAbearerthattheusercanobtain.
Inthebearerallocationprocessshownbelow,the2VBRserviceusersarerepresentedbyMj,withj=1to2.
Fortheuser,Mj,withjvaryingfrom1to2:
Determination of the best HSUPA bearer

Sufficient Iub
backhaul throughput
to support the HSUPA
bearer?

No

Is there a lower HSUPA

bearer available?
Yes
No

Yes

Enough
channel elements
available to support the
HSUPA bearer?

Downgrading to lower HSUPA

bearer

Mj is rejected
Yes
No

Is there a lower HSUPA

bearer available?
No

Yes
Mj is rejected
Pterm-HSUPA recalculation and interference update

No

Mj = M2?
Yes

Resource allocation for packet (HSPA Best

Effort) service users

Figure 4.13:HSUPABearerAllocationProcessforVBRServiceUsers
BEServiceUsers
LetusfocusonthefiveBEserviceusersmentionedintheexampleofthepreviousparagraph"HSUPAPartoftheAlgorithm"
onpage 254.Weassumethatallofthemhavebeenadmitted.Noiseriseschedulingandradioresourcecontrolarecarried
outoneachuserinordertodeterminethebestHSUPAbearerthattheusercanobtain.
Inthebearerallocationprocessshownbelow,the5BEserviceusersarerepresentedbyMj,withj=1to5.

258

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Fortheuser,Mj,withjvaryingfrom1to5:
Determination of the best HSUPA bearer

Sufficient Iub
backhaul throughput
to support the HSUPA
bearer?

No

Is there a lower HSUPA

bearer available?
Yes
No

Yes

Downgrading to lower HSUPA

bearer

Mj is rejected

Enough
channel elements
available to support the
HSUPA bearer?

Yes
No

Is there a lower HSUPA

bearer available?
No

Yes
Mj is rejected
Pterm-HSUPA recalculation and interference update

No

Mj = M5?

Figure 4.14:HSUPABearerAllocationProcessforBEServiceUsers

4.4.2.4.3

NoiseRiseScheduling
DeterminationoftheObtainedHSUPABearer
TheobtainedHSUPAradiobeareristhebearerthattheuserobtainsafternoiseriseschedulingandradioresourcecontrol.
CBR serviceusers have the highestpriority and areprocessed first. Therefore,after the admission control, the noise rise
schedulingalgorithmattemptstoevenlysharetheremainingcellloadbetweentheCBRserviceusersadmittedinadmission
control;intermsofHSUPA,eachuserisallocatedarighttoproduceinterference.Theremainingcellloadfactoronuplink
UL

( X HSPA CBR txi ic )dependsonthemaximumloadfactorallowedonuplinkandhowmuchuplinkloadisproducedbythe

servedR99traffic.Itcanbeexpressedasfollows:
UL

UL

UL

X HSPA CBR txi ic = X max txi ic X R99 txi ic

Then,AtollevenlysharestheremainingcellloadfactorbetweentheCBRserviceusersadmittedduringthepreviousstep
( n HSPA CBR ).
UL

X HSPA CBR txi ic

UL
X user txi ic = -----------------------------------------------n HSPA CBR
Ec max
Fromthisvalue,AtollcalculatesthemaximumEDPDCHEcNtallowed( ------
)foreachCBRserviceuser.Forfurther
Nt E DPDCH
informationonthecalculation,see"UplinkLoadFactorDuetoOneUser"onpage 277.
Ec- max
1
----- fortheWithoutusefulsignaloption
Nt E DPDCH = ------------------------------------------UL
txi ic
F
---------------------------------- 1
UL
X user txi ic
UL

X user
Ec- max
----fortheTotalnoiseoption
= -------------- Nt E DPDCH
UL
F
Then,itselectsanHSUPAbearer.TheallocationdependsonthemaximumEDPDCHEcNtallowedandonUEandcellcapa
bilities.AtollselectsthebestHSUPAbearerfromtheHSUPAcompatiblebearers.ThisistheHSUPAbearer( Index HSUPABearer )
UL

TP P R LC Index HSUPABearer
withthehighestpotentialthroughput( ----------------------------------------------------------------- )where:
N Rtx Index HSUPABearer

Ec- req
Ec max
---- ------
Nt E DPDCH Nt E DPDCH

And P term HSUPA P term

req

max

Ec req
.
WhenseveralHSUPAbearersareavailable,Atollselectstheonewiththelowest ------
Nt E DPDCH

259

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

Afterthenoiserisescheduling,Atollcarriesoutradioresourcecontrol,verifyingifenoughchannelelementsandIubbackhaul
throughputareavailablefortheHSUPAbearerassignedtotheuser.Forinformationonradioresourcecontrol,see"Radio
ResourceControl"onpage 263.
AfterprocessingallCBRserviceusers,AtollcarriesoutnoiseriseschedulingandradioresourcecontrolonVBRserviceusers.
Duringthenoiserisescheduling,AtolldistributestheremainingcellloadfactoravailableafterallCBRserviceusershavebeen
served.Itcanbeexpressedasfollows:
UL

UL

UL

UL

X HSPA VBR txi ic = X max txi ic X R99 txi ic X HSPA CBR txi ic
TheremainingcellloadfactorissharedequallybetweentheadmittedVBRserviceusers( n HSPA VBR ).
UL

X HSPA VBR txi ic

UL
X user txi ic = -----------------------------------------------n HSPA VBR
Ec max
Fromthisvalue,AtollcalculatesthemaximumEDPDCHEcNtallowed( ------
)asexplainedaboveandselectsan
Nt E DPDCH
HSUPAbearerforeachVBRserviceuser.Afterthenoiserisescheduling,AtollcarriesoutradioresourcecontrolonVBRservice
users.Forinformationonradioresourcecontrol,see"RadioResourceControl"onpage 263.
AfterprocessingVBRserviceusers,AtollcarriesoutnoiseriseschedulingandradioresourcecontrolonBEserviceusers.
Duringthenoiserisescheduling,AtolldistributestheremainingcellloadfactoravailableafterallCBRandVBRserviceusers
havebeenserved.Itcanbeexpressedasfollows:
UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

X HSPA txi ic = X max txi ic X R99 txi ic X HSPA CBR txi ic X HSPA VBR txi ic
TheremainingcellloadfactorissharedequallybetweentheadmittedBEserviceusers( n HSPA ).
UL

X HSPA txi ic
UL
X user txi ic = -----------------------------------n HSPA
Ec max
Fromthisvalue,AtollcalculatesthemaximumEDPDCHEcNtallowed( ------
)asexplainedaboveandselectsan
Nt E DPDCH
HSUPAbearerforeachBEserviceuser.Afterthenoiserisescheduling,AtollcarriesoutradioresourcecontrolonBEservice
users.Forinformationonradioresourcecontrol,see"RadioResourceControl"onpage 263.
Example:WehaveacellwithsixBEserviceusers,andneitherCBRusernorVBRuser.AllBEserviceusershavebeenadmitted.
Theremainingcellloadfactorequalto0.6issharedbetweentheBEserviceusers.Therefore,theULloadfactorallottedto
eachuseris0.1.LetstakethecellULreusefactorequalto1.5.AtollcalculatesthemaximumEDPDCHEcNtallowed(the
Withoutusefulsignaloptionisselected).
Ec max
= 11.5dB
Wehave: ------
Nt E DPDCH
Here,theobtainedHSUPAbeareristheindex5HSUPAbearer.Itprovidesapotentialthroughputof128kbpsandrequires
EDPDCHEcNtof13dB(lowerthan11.5dB)andaterminalpowerlowerthanthemaximumterminalpowerallowed.
.

HSUPABearersIndex

RequiredEc/Nt
Threshold(dB)

NbofRetransmissions

PeakRLCThroughput PotentialThroughput
(kbps)
(kbps)

21.7

32

16

19

64

32

16.1

128

64

13.9

192

96

13

256

128

10.1

512

256

768

384

1024

512

NoiseRiseSchedulinginSoftHandover
WithHSUPA,uplinksofthandoverimpactstheschedulingoperation.WhileHSDPAsendsdatafromonecellonly,withHSUPA
allcellsintheactivesetreceivethetransmissionfromtheterminal.Therefore,allthecellsareimpactedbythetransmission
intermsofnoiserise.

260

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

For each HSPAcapable cell of the active set tx k ic , Atoll calculates the maximum EDPDCH EcNt allowed
max

Ec
tx ic )asexplainedin"HSUPABearerAllocationProcess"onpage 257.
( ------
Nt E DPDCH k
Foreachcelloftheactiveset tx k ic ,AtollcalculatesthemaximumterminalpowerallowedtoobtainanHSUPAradiobearer
max

( P term HSUPA tx k ic ).
max

Ec
max
UL
max
P term HSUPA tx k ic = min ------
tx ic L T N tot P term
Nt E DPDCH k

With
UL

UL

tx

intra

N tot ic = 1 F MUD term I tot

UL extra

ic + I tot

tx

UL

ic + I inter carrier ic + N 0

L path L Tx L term L body L indoor E Shadowing 9

- ( )
L T = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G Tx G term
tx

UL intra

term , F MUD , I tot

UL extra

, I tot

UL

tx

, I inter carrier and N 0 aredefinedin"Inputs"onpage 211.

AsHSUPAbearerusersinsofthandoverusethelowestgrantednoiserise,Atollchoosesthelowestofmaximumterminal
powerallowedforeachcelloftheactiveset tx k ic .
max

P term HSUPA = min

tx AS
k

max

P term HSUPA tx k ic
max

OnceAtollknowstheselectedmaximumterminalpower( P term HSUPA ),itrecalculatesthemaximumEDPDCHEcNtallowed

Ec max
tx ic )foreachHSUPAcapablecelloftheactiveset.
( ------
Nt E DPDCH k
max

P term HSUPA
Ec- max
---- Nt E DPDCH tx k ic = ----------------------------UL
L T N tot
Ec max
Then,AtollcalculatesthemaximumEDPDCHEcNtallowed( ------
)aftersignalrecombinationofallHSUPAcapable
Nt E DPDCH
cellsoftheactiveset10.
Forsofter(1/2)andsoftersofter(1/3)handovers,wehave:
max

Ec-
UL
----= f rakeefficiency
Nt E DPDCH

max

Ec-
---- tx ic
Nt E DPDCH k

tx k ActiveSet
samesite

Ec max
Forsoft(2/2)andsoftsoft(3/3)handovers,wehave: ------
=
Nt E DPDCH

tx k

Ec- max
Max ---- tx ic
Nt E DPDCH k

ActiveSet

Forsoftersofthandover(2/3),itdependsoniftheMRCoptionisselected(optionavailableinGlobalparameters).Ifselected,
wehave:

9.

IntheHSUPAcoverageprediction, L T iscalculatedasfollows:

L path L Tx L term L body L indoor M Shadowing Eb Nt

UL
-)
L T = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G Tx G term

261

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

max

Ec-
---- Nt E DPDCH =

UL
tx ,tx ActiveSet f rakeefficiency
k l

tx samesite
tx
k
k
Max

max

Ec- max
Ec
----

----- Nt E DPDCH tx k ic Nt E DPDCH tx l ic

tx othersite
l

Ec max
Else,wehave: ------
=
Nt E DPDCH

Ec- max
Max ---- tx ic
Nt E DPDCH k

txk ActiveSet

Then,AtollselectsanHSUPAbeareraspreviouslyexplainedin"HSUPABearerAllocationProcess"onpage 257.Theallocation
dependsonthemaximumEDPDCHEcNtallowedandonUEandcellcapabilities.AtollselectsthebestHSUPAbearerfrom
the HSUPA compatible bearers. This is the HSUPA bearer ( Index HSUPABearer ) with the highest potential throughput
UL

TP P R LC Index HSUPABearer
( ----------------------------------------------------------------- )where:
N Rtx Index HSUPABearer
Ec- req
Ec- max
---- ---- Nt E DPDCH Nt E DPDCH

req

Ec
WhenseveralHSUPAbearersareavailable,Atollselectstheonewiththelowest ------
.
Nt E DPDCH

10.

InHSUPAcoveragepredictions,wehavethefollowing:
max

Ec
UL
Forsofter(1/2)andsoftersofter(1/3)handovers: ------
= f rakeefficiency
Nt E DPDCH

max

Ec-
---- Nt E DPDCH tx k ic

tx k ActiveSet
samesite

Ec max
Forsofthandover(2/2): ------
=
Nt E DPDCH

Ec- max
UL
Max ---- tx ic G macro diversity 2links
Nt E DPDCH k

tx k ActiveSet

Ec max
Forsoftsofthandover(3/3): ------
=
Nt E DPDCH

Ec- max
UL

Max ---- Nt E DPDCH tx k ic G macro diversity 3links

txk ActiveSet

Forsoftersofthandover(2/3),itdependsoniftheMRCoptionisselected(optionavailableinGlobalparameters).Ifselected,
wehave:

max

Ec-
----=
Nt E DPDCH

UL

Ec- max
Ec- max

--------f

tx

ic

tx

ic

txk ,txl ActiveSet rakeefficiency

Nt E DPDCH l
Nt E DPDCH k

tx k samesite

tx k
Max

tx othersite
l

UL

G macro diversity 2links

Ec max
Else,wehave: ------
=
Nt E DPDCH

262

Ec- max
UL
Max ---- tx ic G macro diversity 2links
Nt E DPDCH k

txk ActiveSet

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

DeterminationoftheRequestedHSUPABearer
TherequestedHSUPAradiobearerisselectedfromtheHSUPAbearerscompatiblewiththeuserequipment.Atolldetermines
theHSUPAbearertheuserwouldobtainbyconsideringtheentireremainingloadofthecell.Theuseristreatedasifheisthe
onlyuserinthecell.Therefore,ifwegoonwiththepreviousexample,themaximumEDPDCHEcNtallowedisequalto1.8
dBandtherequestedHSUPAbeareristheindex7HSUPAbearer.ItrequiresEDPDCHEcNtof8dB(lowerthan1.8dB)and
aterminalpowerlowerthanthemaximumterminalpowerallowed.

4.4.2.4.4

RadioResourceControl
AtollcheckstoseeifenoughchannelelementsareavailableandiftheIubbackhaulthroughputissufficientfortheHSUPA
bearerassigned to the user (taking into accountthemaximum number of channelelementsdefinedfor the site and the
maximum Iub backhaul throughput allowed on the site in the uplink). If not, Atoll allocates a lower HSUPA bearer
("downgrading")whichneedsfewerchannelelementsandconsumeslowerIubbackhaulthroughput.Ifnochannelelements
areavailable,theuserisrejected.Onthesamehand,ifthemaximumIubbackhaulthroughputallowedonthesiteinthe
uplinkisstillexceededevenbyusingthelowestHSDPAbearer,theuserisrejected.

4.4.2.5 ConvergenceCriteria
Theconvergencecriteriaareevaluatedforeachiteration,andcanbewrittenasfollow:
DL
DL
max

max
P tx ic k P tx ic k 1
N user ic k N user ic k 1

Stations
Stations
- 100 int --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 100
DL = max int ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------DL

P tx ic k

N user ic k

UL

UL
UL
UL
UL
max

max

I tot ic k I tot ic k 1
N user ic k N user ic k 1
Stations
Stations

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 100
= max int

100

int
UL
UL

I tot ic k
N user ic k

Atollstopsthealgorithmif:
1stcase:Betweentwosuccessiveiterations, UL and DL arelowerthantheirrespectivethresholds(definedwhencreating
asimulation).
Thesimulationhasreachedconvergence.
Example:Letusassumethatthemaximumnumberofiterationsis100,ULandDLconvergencethresholdsaresetto5.If
UL 5 and DL 5 betweenthe4thandthe5thiteration,Atollstopsthealgorithmafterthe5thiteration.Convergencehas
beenreached.
2ndcase:After30iterations, UL and/or DL arestillhigherthantheirrespectivethresholdsandfromthe30thiteration, UL
and/or DL donotdecreaseduringthenext15successiveiterations.
Thesimulationhasnotreachedconvergence(specificdivergencesymbol).
Examples:Letusassumethatthemaximumnumberofiterationsis100,ULandDLconvergencethresholdsaresetto5.
1. Afterthe30thiteration, UL and/or DL equal100anddonotdecreaseduringthenext15successiveiterations:Atoll
stopsthealgorithmatthe46thiteration.Convergencehasnotbeenreached.
2. Afterthe30thiteration, UL and/or DL equal80,theystartdecreasingslowlyuntilthe40thiteration(withoutgoing
underthethresholds)andthen,donotchangeduring15successiveiterations:Atollstopsthealgorithmatthe56th
iterationwithoutreachingconvergence.
3rdcase:Afterthelastiteration.
If UL and/or DL are still strictly higher than their respective thresholds, the simulation has not reached convergence
(specificdivergencesymbol).
If UL and DL arelowerthantheirrespectivethresholds,thesimulationhasreachedconvergence.

4.4.3 Results
4.4.3.1 R99RelatedResults
ThistablecontainssomeR99specificsimulationresultsprovidedintheCellsandMobilestabsofthesimulationproperty
dialogue.

263

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

Name

Value

Unit

Description

Nb E1 T1 Ethernet

E1 T1 Ethernet

TP Iub DL N I TP

RoundUp Max

E1 T1 Ethernet
TP Iub UL N I TP

None

NumberofE1/T1/Ethernetlinks
requiredbythesite

None

Downlinkintracellinterferenceat
terminaloncarrier ic

Downlinkextracellinterferenceat
terminaloncarrier ic

Downlinkintercarrierinterference
atterminaloncarrier ic

DL
I intra txi

DL

SCH txi ic
P txi ic P
DL
----------------------------P tot txi ic F ortho BTS tot

LT
txi

ic

DL

1 F ortho BTS P b txi ic

DL

I extra ic

DL

P tot txj ic

txj j i

Ptot txj icadj

DL

DL

I inter carrier ic

txj j
---------------------------------------------

RF ic ic adj

DL
I inter techno log y ic

ni

DL

DL

I tot ic

DL

Tx

P Transmitted ic i
-------------------------------------Tx
Tx m
L total ICP n ic

DL

DL

DL

DL

Term

I tot ic + N 0

Pb

UL

I tot

txi ic

ic

term

Totaleffectiveinterferenceat
terminaloncarrier ic (after
unscrambling)

Totalreceivednoiseatterminalon
carrier ic

Totalpowerreceivedattransmitter
fromintracellterminalsusingcarrier
ic

Totalpowerreceivedattransmitter
fromextracellterminalsusing
carrier ic

Uplinkintercarrierinterferenceat
terminaloncarrier ic

txi

UL extra

I tot

txi ic

UL

P b ic

term
txj j i

Pb

UL

UL
I inter carrier txi

UL

I tot txi ic

UL
N tot txi

ic

ic

ic adj

term
txj j
----------------------------------RF ic ic adj
UL extra

I tot

UL intra

Tx

txi ic + 1 F MUD term I tot

UL
I tot txi

ic +

Downlinkintertechnology
interferenceatterminaloncarrieric
a

I intra ic + I extra ic + I inter carrier ic + I inter techno log y ic

N tot ic
UL intra

UL
txi ic +I inter carrier txi icW

tx
N0

Totalreceivedinterferenceat
transmitteroncarrier ic

Totalnoiseattransmitteroncarrier
ic
(Uplinkinterference)

None

Celluplinkloadfactoroncarrier ic

UL

UL

I tot txi ic
---------------------------UL
N tot txi ic

UL

I tot txi ic
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------UL
intra
Tx
I tot
txi ic 1 F MUD term

UL

1
--------------------------UL
F txi ic

X txi ic

UL

F txi ic

E txi ic

264

None Celluplinkreusefactoroncarrier ic

None

Celluplinkreuseefficiencyfactoron
carrier ic

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Name

Value

Unit

Description

None

Downlinkloadfactoroncarrier ic

Simulationresultavailablepercell
DL
I extra ic

tch

DL

+ I inter carrier ic L T
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + 1 F ortho BTS
DL
P Tx txi ic
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 - + 1 F
---------
ortho

DL

CI req

DL

X txi ic

BTS

DL

Q req
DL
with CI req = --------DL
Gp
Simulationresultavailablepermobile
DL

I tot ic
-----------------DL
N tot ic
DL

I tot ic
----------------------------DL
I intra txi ic

DL

F txi ic
DL

10 log 1 X txi ic

UL

10 log 1 X txi ic

NR txi ic
NR txi ic
a.

None Downlinkreusefactoronacarrier ic

DL

dB

Noiseriseondownlink

UL

dB

Noiseriseonuplink

InthecaseofaninterferingGSMexternalnetworkinfrequencyhopping,theICPvalueisweightedaccordingtothefractionalload.

4.4.3.2 HSPARelatedResults
AttheendoftheR99part,theuserscanbe:

Eitherconnectedandinthiscase,theyobtaintherequestedR99bearer,
OrrejectedexactlyforthesamereasonsasR99users.

OnlyconnectedHSDPAandHSPAusersareconsideredintheHSDPApart.AttheendoftheHSDPApart,BEserviceuserscan
be:

EitherconnectediftheyobtainanHSDPAbearer,
OrrejectedifthemaximumnumberofHSDPAbeareruserspercellisexceeded,
Ordelayedincaseoflackofresources(HSDPApower,HSSCCHpower,HSSCCHchannels,OVSFcodes).

VBRserviceuserscanbe:

EitherconnectediftheyobtainanHSDPAbearer,
Orrejectedforthefollowingreasons:themaximumnumberofHSDPAbeareruserspercellisexceeded,thelowest
HSDPAbearertheusercanobtaindoesnotprovideapeakRLCthroughputhigherthantheminimumthroughput
demand, the HSSCCH signal quality is not sufficient, there are no more OVSF codes available, the maximum Iub
backhaulthroughputallowedonthesiteinthedownlinkisexceeded.

CBRserviceuserscanbe:

EitherconnectediftheyobtainanHSDPAbearer,
Orrejectedforthefollowingreasons:themaximumnumberofHSDPAbeareruserspercellisexceeded,thelowest
HSDPAbearertheusercanobtaindoesnotprovideapeakRLCthroughputhigherthantheminimumthroughput
demand, the HSSCCH signal quality is not sufficient, there are no more OVSF codes available, the maximum Iub
backhaulthroughputallowedonthesiteinthedownlinkisexceeded.

IntheHSUPApart,AtollprocessesHSPAserviceuserswhoareconnectedtoanHSDPAbearerorweredelayedintheprevious
step.Attheend,theycanbe:

4.4.3.2.1

EitherconnectediftheyobtainanHSUPAbearer,
Orrejectedforthefollowingreasons:themaximumnumberofHSUPAbeareruserspercellisexceeded,theterminal
powerrequiredtoobtainthelowestcompatibleHSUPAbearerexceedsthemaximumterminalpower,thereareno
more channel elements available, the maximum Iub backhaul throughput allowed on the site in the uplink is
exceeded,thelowestcompatibleHSUPAbearertheycanobtaindoesnotprovideapeakRLCthroughputhigherthan
theminimumthroughputdemand(onlyforCBRandVBRserviceusers).

StatisticsTab
IntheStatisticstab,Atolldisplaysasresults:

Thenumberofrejectedusers.
Thenumberofdelayedusers.

265

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

ThenumberofR99bearerusersconnectedtoacell(resultoftheR99part).ThisfigureincludesR99usersaswellas
HSDPAandHSPAuserssinceallofthemrequestanR99bearer.

ThenumberofR99bearerusersperfrequencyband.
ThenumberofR99bearerusersperactivitystatus.

Thedownlinkanduplinkpeakthroughputs( TP P D L and TP P U L )generatedbytheirconnectiontoR99bearers.

R99

R99

Onlyactiveusersareconsidered.

R99

TP P D L =

R99

R99

TP P DL R99Bearer and TPP U L =

Active
users

R99

TP P UL R99Bearer

Active
users

R99

R99

TP P DL R99Bearer isthedownlinkpeakthroughputoftheuserR99radiobearerand TP P UL R99Bearer istheuplink

peakthroughputoftheuserR99radiobearer.

The number of connected users with an HSDPA bearer (result of the HSDPA part) and the downlink peak RLC
throughputtheygenerate.HSDPAandHSPAserviceusersareconsideredsincetheyallrequestanHSDPAbearer.On
DL

theotherhand,onlyactiveusersaretakenintoconsiderationinthedownlinkthroughputcalculation( TP HSDPA ).

DL

TP HSDPA =

DL

TP P RLC

Active
users
DL

TP P RLC isthepeakRLCthroughputprovidedinthedownlink.

The number of connected users with an HSUPA bearer (result of the HSUPA part). Only HSPA service users are
considered.
Inaddition,AtollindicatestheuplinkpeakRLCthroughputgeneratedbyactiveusersconnectedwithanHSUPAbearer
UL

( TP HSUPA ):
UL

TP HSUPA =

UL

TP P RLC

Active
users
UL

TP P RLC isthepeakRLCthroughputprovidedintheuplink.

4.4.3.2.2MobilesTab
IntheMobilestab,Atollindicatesforeachuser:

UL

DL

Theuplinkanddownlinktotalrequestedthroughputsinkbps(respectively, TP requested M b and TP requested M b )

ForR99users,theDLandULtotalrequestedthroughputscorrespondtotheDLandULpeakthroughputsoftheR99bearer
associatedtotheservice.
DL

R99

UL

R99

TP requested M b = TP P DL R99Bearer
TP requested M b = TP P UL R99Bearer
ForHSDPAusers,theuplinkrequestedthroughputcorrespondstothepeakthroughputofADPCHR99radiobearerandthe
downlinkrequestedthroughputisthesumoftheADPCHradiobearerpeakthroughputandthepeakRLCthroughput(s)that
theselectedHSDPAradiobearer(s)canprovide.Here,theuseristreatedasifheistheonlyuserinthecellandthen,Atoll
determinestheHSDPAbearertheuserwouldobtainbyconsideringtheentireHSDPApoweravailableofthecell.
DL

R99

DL

R99

DL

TP requested M b = TP P DL ADPCHR99Bearer + TP P RLC forsinglecarrierusers

TP requested M b = TP P DL ADPCHR99Bearer AnchorCell +

DL

TP P RLC c fordualcarrierusers

c ServingCells
UL

R99

TP requested M b = TP P UL ADPCHR99Bearer
ForHSPAusers,theuplinkrequestedthroughputisequaltothesumoftheADPCHEDPCCHradiobearerpeakthroughputand
thepeakRLCthroughputoftherequestedHSUPAradiobearer.TherequestedHSUPAradiobearerisselectedfromtheHSUPA
bearerscompatiblewiththeuserequipment.Here,theuseristreatedasifheistheonlyuserinthecellandthen,Atoll

266

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

determines the HSUPA bearer the user would obtain by considering the entire remaining load of the cell. The downlink
requestedthroughputisthesumoftheADPCHEDPCCHradiobearerpeakthroughputandthepeakRLCthroughput(s)that
the requested HSDPA radio bearer(s) can provide. The requested HSDPA radio bearer is determined as explained in the
previousparagraph.
DL

R99

DL

R99

DL

TP requested M b = TP P DL ADPCH EDPCCHR99Bearer + TP P RLC forsinglecarrierusers

TP requested M b = TP P DL ADPCH EDPCCHR99Bearer AnchorCell +

DL

TPP RLC c fordualcarrierusers

c Servingcells
UL

R99

UL

TP requested M b = TP P UL ADPCH EDPCCHR99Bearer + TP P RLC

UL

DL

Theuplinkanddownlinktotalobtainedthroughputsinkbps(respectively, TP obtained M b and TPobtained M b )

ForR99serviceusers,theobtainedthroughputisthesameastherequestedthroughputifheisconnectedwithoutbeing
downgraded.Otherwise,theobtainedthroughputislower(itcorrespondstothepeakthroughputoftheselectedR99bearer).
Iftheuserisrejected,theobtainedthroughputiszero.
Inthedownlink,HSDPAbeareruserscanbeconnectedtoasinglecellortotwocellsofthesametransmitterwhentheuser
hasaDCHSPAcapableterminalandwhenthetransmittersupportsthemulticellmode.
ForasinglecarrierHSPAserviceuserconnectedtoanHSDPAbearer,thedownlinkobtainedthroughputcorrespondstothe
instantaneousthroughput;thisisthesumoftheADPCHradiobearerpeakthroughputandthepeakRLCthroughputprovided
bytheselectedHSDPAradiobearerafterschedulingandradioresourcecontrol.Iftheuserisdelayed(heisonlyconnected
toanR99radiobearer),downlinkobtainedthroughputcorrespondstothedownlinkpeakthroughputoftheADPCHradio
bearer. Finally, if the user is rejected either in the R99 part or in the HSDPA part (i.e., because the HSDPA scheduler is
saturated),thedownlinkobtainedthroughputiszero.
ForadualcarrierHSPAserviceuserconnectedtotwoHSDPAbearers,thedownlinkobtainedthroughputcorrespondstothe
instantaneousthroughput;thisisthesumofthepeakthroughputprovidedbytheADPCHradiobearerintheanchorcelland
thepeakRLCthroughputsprovidedbytheselectedHSDPAradiobearersafterschedulingandradioresourcecontrol.Ifthe
user is connected to one cell and delayed in the other cell, the downlink obtained throughput is the sum of the peak
throughputprovidedbytheADPCHradiobearerintheanchorcellandthepeakRLCthroughputprovidedbytheselected
HSDPAradiobearerafterschedulingandradioresourcecontrol.Iftheuserisdelayedinthetwocells(heisonlyconnected
toanR99radiobearerintheanchorcell),thedownlinkobtainedthroughputcorrespondstothedownlinkpeakthroughput
oftheADPCHradiobearerintheanchorcell.Finally,iftheuserisrejectedeitherintheR99partorintheHSDPApart(i.e.,
becausetheHSDPAschedulerissaturated),thedownlinkobtainedthroughputiszero.
Intheuplink,HSDPAserviceuserscanonlyhaveasinglecarrierconnection.Whentheuseriseitherconnectedordelayed,
theuplinkobtainedthroughputcorrespondstotheuplinkpeakthroughputoftheADPCHradiobearer.Iftheuserisrejected
eitherintheR99partorintheHSDPApart(i.e.,becausetheHSDPAschedulerissaturated),theuplinkobtainedthroughput
iszero.
ForsinglecarrierHSPAVBRandBEserviceusers,ondownlink,iftheuserisconnectedtoanHSDPAbearer,thedownlink
obtainedthroughputcorrespondstotheinstantaneousthroughput.TheinstantaneousthroughputisthesumoftheADPCH
EDPCCH radio bearer peak throughput and the peak RLC throughput provided by the selected HSDPA radio bearer after
schedulingandradioresourcecontrol.Iftheuserisdelayed,thedownlinkobtainedthroughputcorrespondstothedownlink
peakthroughputofADPCHEDPCCHradiobearer.Iftheuserisrejected,thedownlinkobtainedthroughputis"0".
For dualcarrier HSPA VBR and BE service users connected to two HSDPA bearers, the downlink obtained throughput
correspondstotheinstantaneousthroughput;thisisthesumofthepeakthroughputprovidedbytheADPCHEDPCCHradio
bearerintheanchorcellandthepeakRLCthroughputsprovidedbytheselectedHSDPAradiobearersafterschedulingand
radioresourcecontrol.Iftheuserisconnectedtoonecellanddelayedintheothercell,thedownlinkobtainedthroughputis
thesumofthepeakthroughputprovidedbytheADPCHEDPCCHradiobearerintheanchorcellandthepeakRLCthroughput
providedbytheselectedHSDPAradiobearerafterschedulingandradioresourcecontrol.Iftheuserisdelayedinthetwocells
(he is only connected to an R99 radio bearer in the anchor cell), the downlink obtained throughput corresponds to the
downlinkpeakthroughputoftheADPCHEDPCCHradiobearerintheanchorcell.Finally,iftheuserisrejected,thedownlink
obtainedthroughputiszero.
Inuplink,HSPAVBRandBEserviceuserscanonlyhaveasinglecarrierconnection.WhentheuserisconnectedtoanHSUPA
bearer,theuplinkobtainedthroughputisthesumoftheADPCHEDPCCHradiobearerpeakthroughputandthepeakRLC
throughputprovidedbytheselectedHSUPAradiobearerafternoiserisescheduling.Iftheuserisrejected,theuplinkobtained
throughputiszero.
For a connected HSPA CBR service user, the uplink and downlink total obtained throughputs are the sum of the ADPCH
EDPCCHradiobearerpeakthroughputandtheminimumthroughputdemanddefinedfortheservice.Iftheuserisrejected,
theuplinkanddownlinktotalobtainedthroughputsare"0".

Themobiletotalpower( P term )
UL

P term = P term R99 f act EDPCCH + P term HSUPA forHSPAVBRandBEserviceusers.

267

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014
UL

P term = P term R99 f act EDPCCH + P term HSUPA C HSDPABearer forHSPACBRserviceusers.

UL

ForHSPACBRserviceusers, f act EDPCCH = 0.1 .

And
P term = P term R99 forR99andHSDPAusers.

DL

TheHSDPAapplicationthroughputinkbps( TP A M b )

ThisisthenetHSDPAthroughputwithoutcoding(redundancy,overhead,addressing,etc.).

DL

TP P RLC c 1 BLER HSDPA

DL
Servingcells
TP A M b = c------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- f TP Scaling TP Offset
TTI

Where:
DL

TP P RLC isthepeakRLCthroughputprovidedtotheuserbytheselectedHSDPAradiobearerafterschedulingandradio
resourcecontrol.
BLER HSDPA isreadinthequalitygraphdefinedforthetripletreceptionequipmentselectedbearermobility(HSDPAQuality
GraphstabintheReceptionequipmentproperties).ThisgraphdescribesthevariationofBLERasafunctionofthemeasured
quality(HSPDSCHEc/Nt).KnowingtheHSPDSCHEc/Nt,AtollcalculatesthecorrespondingBLER.
TP Offset and f TP Scaling representthescalingfactorbetweentheapplicationthroughputandtheRLC(RadioLinkControl)
throughput and the throughput offset respectively. These two parameters model the header information and other
supplementarydatathatdoesnotappearattheapplicationlevel.Theyaredefinedintheserviceproperties.
TTI istheminimumnumberofTTI(TransmissionTimeInterval)betweentwoTTIused;itisdefinedintheterminaluser
equipmentcategoryproperties.

ThenumberofOVSFcodes

Thisisthenumberof512bitlengthOVSFcodesconsumedbytheuser.

TherequiredHSDPApowerindBm( P HSDPA required )

ItcorrespondstotheHSDPApowerrequiredtoprovidetheHSDPAbeareruserwiththedownlinkrequestedthroughput.The
downlinkrequestedthroughputisthethroughputtheuserwouldobtainifhewastheonlyuserinthecell.Inthiscase,Atoll
determinestheHSDPAbearertheuserwouldobtainbyconsideringtheentireHSDPApoweravailableofthecell.
P HSDPA required = P HS PDSCH used + n HS SCCH P HS SCCH
P HS PDSCH used is the HSPDSCH power required to obtain the selected HSDPA bearer (in dBm). If the HSDPA bearer
allocatedtotheuseristhebestone, P HS PDSCH used correspondstotheavailableHSPDSCHpowerofthecell.Ontheother
hand,iftheHSDPAbearerhasbeendowngradedinordertobecompliantwithcellandUEcapabilitiesorforanotherreason,
P HS PDSCH used willbelowerthantheavailableHSPDSCHpowerofthecell.

TheservedHSDPApowerindBm( P HSDPA served )

ThisistheHSDPApowerrequiredtoprovidetheHSDPAbeareruserwiththedownlinkobtainedthroughput.Thedownlink
obtainedrateisthethroughputexperiencedbytheuserafterschedulingandradioresourcecontrol.
P HSDPA served = P HS PDSCH used + n HS SCCH P HS SCCH forHSDPAusers,HSPABEandVBRserviceusers.
And
P HSDPA served = P HS PDSCH used C HSDPABearer forHSPACBRserviceusers
Where
P HS PDSCH used istheHSPDSCHpowerrequiredtoobtaintheselectedHSDPAbearer.

TheNo.ofHSUPARetransmissions(Required)

ThemaximumnumberofretransmissionsinordertohavetherequestedHSUPAradiobearerwithagivenBLER.

268

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

TheNo.ofHSUPARetransmissions(Obtained)

ThemaximumnumberofretransmissionsinordertohavetheobtainedHSUPAradiobearerwithagivenBLER.

UL

TheHSUPAapplicationthroughputinkbps( TPA M b )

ThisisthenetHSUPAthroughputwithoutcoding(redundancy,overhead,addressing,etc.).
UL

TP P RLC M b 1 BLER HSUPA f TP Scaling TP Offset

UL
TP A M b = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------N Rtx
Where:
UL

TP P RLC isthepeakRLCthroughputprovidedbytheselectedHSUPAradiobearerafternoiserisescheduling.
BLER HSUPA istheresidualBLERafter N Rtx retransmissions.Itisreadinthequalitygraphdefinedforthequartetreception
equipmentselected bearernumber of retransmissionsmobility (HSUPA Quality Graphs tab in the Reception equipment
properties).ThisgraphdescribesthevariationofBLERasafunctionofthemeasuredquality(EDPDCHEc/Nt).KnowingtheE
DPDCHEc/Nt,AtollcalculatesthecorrespondingBLER.
TP Offset and f TP Scaling respectivelyrepresentthescalingfactorbetweentheapplicationthroughputandtheRLC(RadioLink
Control) throughput and the throughput offset. These two parameters model the header information and other
supplementarydatathatdoesnotappearattheapplicationlevel.Theyaredefinedintheserviceproperties.
N Rtx isthemaximumnumberofretransmissionsfortheobtainedHSUPAbearer.ThisfigureisreadintheHSUPABearer
Selectiontable.
Thefollowingcolumnsappearif,whencreatingthesimulation,youselect"Detailedinformationaboutmobiles":

TheuplinkanddownlinkrequestedpeakRLCthroughputs(kbps)

DownlinkanduplinkrequestedpeakRLCthroughputsarenotcalculatedforR99users.
ForHSDPAusers,theuplinkpeakRLCthroughputisnotcalculatedandthedownlinkrequestedpeakRLCthroughputisthe
throughputthattheselectedHSDPAradiobearer(s)canprovide.Here,theuseristreatedasifheistheonlyuserinthecell
andthen,AtolldeterminestheHSDPAbearerhewouldobtainbyconsideringtheentireHSDPApoweravailableofthecell.
For HSPA users, the requested uplink peak RLC throughput is the throughput of the requested HSUPA radio bearer. The
requestedHSUPAradiobearerisselectedfromtheHSUPAbearerscompatiblewiththeuserequipment.Here,theuseris
treatedasifheistheonlyuserinthecellandthen,AtolldeterminestheHSUPAbearertheuserwouldobtainbyconsidering
theentireremainingloadofthecell.IftheuserisconnectedtooneortwoHSDPAbearersinthedownlink,thedownlink
requested peak RLC throughput is the throughput that the requested HSDPA radio bearer(s) can provide. The requested
HSDPAradiobearerisdeterminedasexplainedinthepreviousparagraph.

TheuplinkanddownlinkobtainedpeakRLCthroughput(kbps)

DownlinkanduplinkobtainedpeakRLCthroughputsarenotcalculatedforR99users.
ForHSDPAusersconnectedtooneortwoHSDPAbearers,theuplinkobtainedpeakRLCthroughputisnotcalculated,andthe
downlinkobtainedpeakRLCthroughputisthethroughputprovidedbytheselectedHSDPAradiobearer(s)afterscheduling
andradioresourcecontrol.
ForconnectedHSPABEandVBRserviceusers,onuplink,iftheuserisconnectedtoanHSUPAbearer,theobtaineduplink
peakRLCthroughputisthethroughputprovidedbytheselectedHSUPAradiobearerafternoiserisescheduling.Ondownlink,
iftheuserisconnectedtooneortwoHSDPAbearers,thedownlinkobtainedpeakRLCthroughputisthethroughputprovided
bytheselectedHSDPAradiobearer(s)afterschedulingandradioresourcecontrol.
ForaconnectedHSPACBRserviceuser,theuplinkanddownlinkobtainedpeakRLCthroughputsaretheuplinkanddownlink
minimumthroughputdemandsdefinedfortheservice.

4.4.3.2.3

CellsTab
IntheCellstab,Atollgives:

TheavailableHSDPApowerinthecell,c,indBm( P HSDPA c ):

Thisis:

EitherafixedvalueincaseofastaticHSDPApowerallocationstrategy,
Orasimulationresultwhentheoption"HSDPAPowerDynamicAllocation"isselected.Wehave:

P HSDPA c = P max c P Headroom c P tx R99 c P HSUPA c

269

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

with

Forsk2014

P tx R99 c = P pilot c + P SCH c + P OtherCCH c +

tchusedfor
R99 users

P tch c +

DL

P tch c f act ADPCH

tchusedfor
HSPA users

ThetransmittedHSDPApowerinthecell,c,indBm( P tx H SDPA c ):

ItcorrespondstotheHSDPApowerusedtoserveHSDPAbearerusers.

P tx H SDPA c =

P HSDPA M b served

Mb c

ThenumberofHSDPAusersinthecell

TheyaretheconnectedanddelayedHSDPAbearerusers.HSDPAandHSPAusersareconsideredsincetheyallrequestan
HSDPAbearer.DCHSPAusersareaccountedforonceineachservingcell.

ThenumberofsimultaneousHSDPAusersinthecell( n M )
b

ItcorrespondstothenumberofconnectedHSDPAbearerusersthatthecellsupportsatatime,i.e.withinonetransmission
timeinterval.AlltheseusersareconnectedtothecellattheendoftheHSDPApartofthesimulation;theyhaveaconnection
withtheR99bearerandanHSDPAbearer.DCHSPAusersareaccountedforonceineachservingcell.

DL

TheinstantaneousHSDPAthroughputinthecell,c,inkbps( TPInst c )

ThisisthenumberofkilobitspersecondthatthecellsupportsondownlinktoprovidesimultaneousconnectedHSDPAbearer
userswithanHSDPAbearer.Wewilldifferentiatesinglecarrierusers(Ms)fromDCHSPAusers(MdHSDPAstandsforHSDPA
BEandVBRusers,andMdHSPAreferstoHSPABEandVBRserviceusers).
DL

R99

DL

TP requested M b = TP P DL ADPCHR99Bearer + TP P RLC

DL

TP obtained M s +

Ms c

R99

DL

TP P DL R99Bearer + TP P RLC M d HSDPA

M d HSDPA c
cistheanchorcell

DL

TP P RLC M d HSDPA +

M
c
d HSDPA
cisthesecondarycell

DL

TP Inst cell =

R99

DL

TP P DL R99Bearer + TP P RLC M d HSPA +

M d HSPA c
cistheanchorcell

DL

M d HSPA c

TPP RLC M d HSPA

cisthesecondarycell
DL
TP P RLC

is the peak RLC throughput provided by the selected HSDPA radio bearer after scheduling and radio resource

control.
R99

TP P DL R99Bearer is the peak throughput of the ADPCH radio bearer if the user is an HSDPA user. For HSPA users, it
correspondstotheADPCHEDPCCHradiobearer.

DL

DL

TheinstantaneousHSDPAEffectiveMACThroughputinthecell,c,inkbps( TP E M AC c )

TP E M AC c =

Mb c

S block M b
--------------------------------------T TTI TTI M b

Where,
S block M b isthetransportblocksize(inkbits)oftheHSDPAbearerselectedbytheuser;itisdefinedforeachHSDPAbearer
intheHSDPARadioBearerstable.
TTI M b istheminimumnumberofTTI(TransmissionTimeInterval)betweentwoTTIused;itisdefinedintheterminaluser
equipmentcategoryproperties.

270

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
3

T TTI istheTTIduration,i.e. 2 10 s (2000TTIinonesecond).Thisvalueisspecifiedbythe3GPP.

DL

TheaverageinstantaneousHSDPAthroughputinthecell,c,inkbps( TP Av Inst c )
DL

TP Inst c
DL
TP Av Inst c = -------------------nM
b

DL

TheHSDPAapplicationthroughputinthecell,c,inkbps( TP A c )
DL

Either TP A c =

M c
b

DL

TP P RLC M b 1 BLER HSDPA f TP Scaling TP Offset

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- iftheschedulingalgorithmisRoundRobinor
TTI

ProportionalFair,
DL

TP P RLC M b maxC I 1 BLER HSDPA f TP Scaling TP Offset

DL
- iftheschedulingalgorithmisMaxC/I.
Or TP A c = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TTI
M b maxC I istheuserwiththehighest C I inthecell.
DL

TP P RLC is the peak RLC throughput provided by the selected HSDPA radio bearer after scheduling and radio resource
control.
BLER HSDPA isreadinthequalitygraphdefinedforthetripletreceptionequipmentselectedbearermobility(HSDPAQuality
GraphstabintheReceptionequipmentproperties).ThisgraphdescribesthevariationofBLERasafunctionofthemeasured
quality(HSPDSCHEc/Nt).KnowingtheHSPDSCHEc/Nt,AtollcalculatesthecorrespondingBLER.
f TP Scaling and TP Offset respectivelyrepresentthescalingfactorbetweentheapplicationthroughputandtheRLC(RadioLink
Control) throughput and the throughput offset. These two parameters model the header information and other
supplementarydatathatdoesnotappearattheapplicationlevel.Theyaredefinedintheserviceproperties.
TTI istheminimumnumberofTTI(TransmissionTimeInterval)betweentwoTTIused;itisdefinedintheterminaluser
equipmentcategoryproperties.

TheminimumHSDPARLCpeakthroughputinkbps(

DL

min TP P RLC M b )

M b cell

ItcorrespondstothelowestofRLCpeakthroughputsobtainedbyHSDPAbearerusersconnectedtothecell.

ThemaximumHSDPARLCpeakthroughputinkbps(

DL

max TP P RLC M b )

M b cell

ItcorrespondstothehighestofRLCpeakthroughputsobtainedbyHSDPAbearerusersconnectedtothecell.

ThenumberofHSUPAusersinthecell( n M ):
c

TheyaretheHSUPAbearerusersconnectedtothecell.

UL

TheHSUPAapplicationthroughputinthecell,c,inkbps( TPA c )

UL

TP A c =

UL

TP A M b

Mb c

UL

TheuplinkcellloadfactorduetoHSUPAtraffic( X HSUPA c ):
UL

I tot c HSUPA
UL
X HSUPA c = --------------------------------UL
N tot c
Where
UL

I tot c HSUPA isthetotalinterferenceattransmitterreceivedfromHSUPAbearerusers.

4.4.3.2.4

SitesTab
IntheSitestab,Atolldisplays:

DL

TheinstantaneousHSDPAthroughputcarriedbythesiteinkbps( TP Inst site )

271

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

DL

TP Inst site =

DL

TP Inst c

c site

DL

TheinstantaneousHSDPAEffectiveMACThroughputcarriedbythesiteinkbps( T MAC site inkbps)

DL

TP E M AC site =

DL

TP E M AC c

c site

UL

UL

TheHSUPAthroughputcarriedbythesiteinkbps( TP site )

TP site =

UL

TP obtained M c

M c site

4.4.4 Appendices
4.4.4.1 AdmissionControlintheR99Part
DuringadmissioncontrolintheR99partofthesimulation,Atollcalculatestheuplinkloadfactorofaconsideredcellassuming
themobileconcernedisconnectedtoit.Here,activitystatusassignedtousersisnottakenintoaccount.Soevenifthemobile
isnotactiveonUL,itcanberejectedduetocellloadsaturation.TocalculatethecellULloadfactor,eitherAtolltakesinto
accountthemobilepowerdeterminedduringpowercontrolifmobilewasconnectedinpreviousiteration,oritestimatesa
loadriseduetothemobileandaddsittothecurrentload.Theloadrise( X
X

UL

UL

)iscalculatedasfollows:

1
= --------------------------------------------W
1 + -----------------------------------UL
UL
Q req R nominal

4.4.4.2 ResourcesManagement
4.4.4.2.1

OVSFCodesManagement
OVSFcodesaremanagedinthedownlinkduringthesimulationsincethisresourceisdownlinklimitedonly.Atollchecksthe
availabilityofthisresourceduringthesimulation,firstintheR99partandthenintheHSDPApart.Itdeterminesthenumber
ofcodesthatwillbeconsumedbyeachcell.
OVSFcodesformabinarytree.Codesoflongerlengthsaregeneratedfromcodesofashorterlength.LengthkOVSFcodes
aregeneratedfromlengthk/2OVSFcodes.Therefore,ifonechannelneeds1lengthk/2OVSFcode,itisequivalenttouse2
lengthkOVSFcodes,or4length2kOVSFcodesandsoon.
512512bitlengthcodespercellareavailableinUMTSHSPAprojects.
IntheR99part,duringtheresourcecontrol,Atolldeterminesthenumberof512bitlengthcodesthatwillbeconsumedfor
eachcell.
IfthecellsupportsHSPA,AtollallocatescodesfortheDLchannelsusedforHSUPA:

A 128 bitlength code for the EHICH and ERGCH channels (i.e. four 512 bitlength OVSF codes), for each cell.
Therefore,Atollwilltakefour512bitlengthcodes,
A256bitlengthcodefortheEAGCHchannel(i.e.two512bitlengthOVSFcodes),foreachcell.Therefore,Atollwill
taketwo512bitlengthcodes,

IfthecellsupportsHSDPA,AtollreservesforpotentialHSDPAbearerusers:

HS PDSCH Min

TheminimumnumberofHSPDSCHcodesdefinedforthecell, N Codes

(i.e.thirtytwo512bitlengthOVSFcodes).Therefore,Atollwilltake 32

.Theyare16bitlengthOVSFcodes

HS PDSCH Min
N Codes

512bitlengthcodes,

A128bitlengthcodeperHSSCCHchannel(i.e.four512bitlengthOVSFcodes),foreachcell.Therefore,Atollwill
take 4 n HS SCCH 512bitlengthcodes,

Then,itallocatestothecellOVSFcodestosupportR99bearersrequiredbyusers:

A256bitlengthcodepercommonchannel(i.e.two512bitlengthOVSFcodes),foreachcell.Therefore,Atollwill
Overhead

take 2 NCodes

512bitlengthcodes,

Acodepercellreceiverlink,forTCH(trafficchannels).Thelengthofcodetobeallocated,Code_Length,dependson
theuseractivity.Wehave:
DL

Either Code_Length = Fspreading Activeuser whentheuserisactive,

272

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
DL

Or Code_Length = F spreading Inactiveuser iftheuserisinactive.

TCH

Thenumberof512bitlengthOVSFcodesneeded N Codes iscalculatedfromthelengthofthecodetobeallocatedasfollows:

TCH
512
N Codes = ------------------------------Code_Length

Figure 4.15:OVSFCodeTreeIndices(NotOVSFCodeNumbers)
TheOVSFcodeallocationfollowstheBuddyalgorithm,whichguaranteesthat:

IfaklengthOVSFcodeisused,allofitschildrenwithlengths2k,4k,,cannotbeusedastheywillnotbeorthogonal.
If a klength OVSF code is used, all of its ancestors with lengths k/2, k/4, , cannot be used as they will not be
orthogonal.

Example:WeconsiderauserwithaservicerequiringtheUDD64R99radiobearer.ThisuserisactiveonDLwhileconnected
toacell(whichdoesnotsupportHSDPA).Thespreadingfactorforactiveusershasbeensetto64andsiteequipmentrequires
fouroverheaddownlinkchannelelementspercell.Atollwillconsumefour256bitlengthOVSFcodesforcommonchannels
(i.e.eight512bitlengthOVSFcodes)anda64bitlengthOVSFcodefortrafficchannels(i.e.eightadditional512bitlength
OVSFcodes).

IntheR99part,theOVSFcodeallocationfollowsthemobileconnectionorder(mobile
orderintheMobilestab).
InDCHSPA,ADPCHisonlytransmittedintheanchorcarrier.Therefore,aDCHSPA
user requires R99 resources in the best serving cell only and consumes the same
amountofR99resourcesasasinglecarrierHSPAuser.
TheOVSFcodeandchannelelementmanagementisdifferentlydealtwithincaseof
softer handover. Atoll allocates OVSF codes for each cellmobile link while it
globallyassignschannelelementstoasite.

IntheHSDPApart,HSDPAandHSPAusersareassignedanHSDPAbearer(Fastlinkadaptation).
Therefore,Atollallocatestothecell:

16bitlengthOVSFcodespercellreceiver,forHSPDSCH.ThisfiguredependsontheHSDPAbearerassignedtothe
userandonthetypeofservice.
HS PDSCH

ForHSDPAusers,HSPAVBRandBEserviceusers,Atollneeds 32 N Codes
HS PDSCH

connectedtothecell. N Codes

isthenumberofHSPDSCHchannelsrequiredbytheHSDPAbearer.
HS PDSCH

ForHSPACBRserviceusers,Atollneeds 32 N Codes
HS PDSCH

tothecell. N Codes

512bitlengthcodesforeachuser

C HSDPABearer 512bitlengthcodesforeachuserconnected

isthenumberofHSPDSCHchannelsrequiredbytheHSDPAbearer.

DCHSPA users have twoHSDPAbearers,one for each servingcell. Therefore,one DCHSPA user consumesOVSF
codesinbothcells.

273

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

WhenHSDPAbearerusers(atleastone)areconnectedtothecell,Atollgivesthecell
HS PDSCH Min

backtheminimumnumberofOVSFcodesreservedforHSPDSCH( N Codes

).On

theotherhand,ifnoHSDPAbeareruserisconnected,Atollstillkeepsthesecodesand
thecodesforHSSCCHtoo.ThisisthesamewithHSUPAbearerusers.EvenifnoHSUPA
beareruserisconnectedtothecell,AtollstillkeepsthecodesforEHICH,ERGCHandE
AGCHchannels.

4.4.4.2.2

ChannelElementsManagement
ChannelelementsarecontrolledintheR99andtheHSUPApartsofthesimulation.Atollcheckstheavailabilityofthisresource
intheuplinkanddownlink.
IntheR99part,duringtheresourcecontrol,AtolldeterminesthenumberofchannelelementsrequiredbyeachsiteforR99
bearersintheuplinkanddownlink.Then,intheHSUPApart,AtollcarriesoutanotherresourcecontrolafterallocatingHSUPA
bearers. It takes into account the channel elements consumed by HSUPA bearer users in the uplink and recalculates the
numberofchannelelementsrequiredbyeachsiteintheuplink.
Intheuplink,Atollconsumes N CE UL j channelelementsforeachcelljonasiteNI.Thisfigureincludes:

ChannelelementsforR99bearers:
Overhead

N CE UL

R99 T CH
N CE UL

channelelementsforcontrolchannels,

percellreceiverlink,forR99TCH(trafficchannels).

ChannelelementsforHSUPAbearers:
HSUPA

percellreceiverlink,forpacket(HSPABE)andpacket(HSPAVBR)serviceusers.

HSUPA

C HSUPABearer percellreceiverlink,forCBRserviceusers.

N CE

N CE

Therefore,thenumberofchannelelementsrequiredintheuplinkatthesitelevel, N CE UL N I ,is:
N CE UL N I =

NCE UL j

j NI

Inthedownlink,Atollconsumes N CE DL j channelelementsforeachcelljonasiteNI.Thisfigureincludes:

ChannelelementsforR99bearers
Overhead

N CE DL

N CE DL percellreceiverlink,forR99TCH(trafficchannels).

channelelementsforcontrolchannels(Pilotchannel,Synchronisationchannel,commonchannels),

R99 T CH

Therefore,thenumberofchannelelementsrequiredinthedownlinkatthesitelevel, N CE DL N I ,is:
N CE DL N I =

NCE DL j

j NI

4.4.4.2.3

InDCHSPA,ADPCHisonlytransmittedontheanchorcarrier.Therefore,aDCHSPA
user requires R99 resources in the best serving cell only and consumes the same
amountofR99resourcesasasinglecarrierHSPAuser.
In case of softer handover (the mobile has several links with cosite cells), Atoll
allocateschannelelementsforthebestservingcellmobilelinkonly.

IubBackhaulThroughput
TheIubbackhaulthroughputiscontrolledintheR99,theHSDPAandtheHSUPApartsofthesimulation.Atollchecksthe
availabilityofthisresourceintheuplinkanddownlink.
IntheR99part,duringtheresourcecontrol,AtolldeterminestheIubthroughputrequiredbyeachsiteforR99bearersinthe
uplink and downlink. Then, in the HSDPA part, Atoll performs a resource control in the downlink after allocating HSDPA
bearers.IttakesintoaccounttheIubbackhaulthroughputconsumedbyHSDPAbearerusersinthedownlinkandrecalculates
theIubbackhaulthroughputrequiredbyeachsiteinthedownlink.Finally,intheHSUPApart,Atollcarriesoutaresource
controlintheuplinkafterallocatingHSUPAbearers.IttakesintoaccounttheIubbackhaulthroughputconsumedbyHSUPA
bearerusersintheuplinkandupdatestheIubbackhaulthroughputrequiredbyeachsiteintheuplink.
Intheuplink,theIubbackhaulthroughputconsumedbyeachcelljonasiteNI, TP Iub UL j ,includes:

274

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

TheIubbackhaulthroughputrequiredforR99bearers:

R99 T CH

TP Iub UL percellreceiverlink,forR99TCH(trafficchannels).

TheIubbackhaulthroughputrequiredforHSUPAbearers:
HSUPA

TP Iub

percellreceiverlink,forHSPABEandVBRserviceusers.

HSUPA
TP Iub

C HSUPABearer percellreceiverlink,forHSPACBRserviceusers.

Therefore,theIubbackhaulthroughputrequiredonuplinkatthesitelevel, TP Iub UL N I ,is:

TP Iub UL N I =

TPIub UL j

j NI

Inthedownlink,theIubbackhaulthroughputconsumedbyeachcelljonasiteNI, TP Iub DL j ,includes:

TheIubbackhaulthroughputrequiredforR99bearers:
Overhead

TP Iub DL forR99controlchannels(Pilotchannel,Synchronisationchannel,commonchannels).

TP Iub DL percellreceiverlink,forR99TCH(trafficchannels).

R99 T CH

TheIubbackhaulthroughputrequiredforHSDPAbearers:

TP Iub

HSDPA

percellreceiverlink,forHSDPA,HSPABEandVBRserviceusers.

HSDPA
TP Iub

C HSDPABearer percellreceiverlink,forHSPACBRserviceusers.

HSDPA

With TP Iub

DL

HSDPA

= TP P RLC + Overhead Iub

DL

TP P RLC

Therefore,theIubbackhaulthroughputrequiredondownlinkatthesitelevel, TP Iub DL N I ,is:

TP Iub DL N I =

TPIub DL j

j NI

InDCHSPA,ADPCHisonlytransmittedontheanchorcarrier.Therefore,aDCHSPA
user requires R99 resources in the best serving cell only and consumes the same
amountofR99resourcesasasinglecarrierHSPAuser.Ontheotherhand,the DC
HSPAuserhastwoHSDPAbearers(oneforeachservingcell)andconsumesHSDPA
resourcesinbothcells.
In case of softer handover (the mobile has several links with cosite cells), Iub
backhaulthroughputisconsumedbythebestservingcellmobilelinkonly.

4.4.4.3 DownlinkLoadFactorCalculation
Atollcalculatesadownlinkloadfactorforeachcell(availableintheCellstabofanysimulationresult)andeachconnected
mobile(availableintheMobilestabofanygivensimulationresult).

4.4.4.3.1

DownlinkLoadFactorperCell
ApproachfordownlinkloadfactorevaluationishighlyinspiredbythedownlinkloadfactordefinedinthebookWCDMAfor
UMTSbyHarryHolmaandAnttiToskala.
DL

Q req
- betherequiredquality.
Let CI req = --------DL
Gp
DL

DL

G p and Q req aretheprocessinggainondownlinkandtheEb/Nttargetondownlinkrespectively.

Incaseofsofthandoff,requiredqualityislimitedtotheeffectivecontributionofthetransmitter.
DL

P tx c = P pilot c + P SCH c + P otherCCH c +

Ptch c
tch

DL

ortho

nonOrtho

P tx c = P CCH c + P CCH

c +

Ptch c
tch

where

275

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

ortho

P CCH c = P pilot c + P otherCCH c

nonOrtho

P CCH

c = P SCH c

Atmobilelevel,wehavearequiredpower,Ptch:
term

P tch c = CI req I extra c + I inter carrier c + I inter techno log y c + I intra c + N 0

LT r

DL

With r = 1 whentheuserisactiveonthedownlinkand r = r c whentheuserisinactive.IncaseofanHSDPAbeareruser,

DL

r = f act ADPCH .

P tch c = CI req

I extra c + I inter carrier c + I inter techno log y c

DL

nonOrtho

nonOrtho

P tx c P CCH
c P tch c P CCH
c
- + ------------------------------ + N term
+ 1 F ortho BTS ------------------------------------------------------------------------------0
LT
LT

L r
T

DL

I extra c + I inter carrier c + I inter techno log y c L T r + 1 F ortho BTS P tx c r

+
nonOrtho
term
F ortho BTS P CCH
c r + N0 LT r
P tch ic = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1
-------------------- + 1 F ortho BTS
CIreq r
I intra c isthetotalpowerreceivedatthereceiverfromthecellwithwhichitisconnected.
I extra c isthetotalpowerreceivedatthereceiverfromothercells.
I inter carrier c istheintercarrierinterferencereceivedattheterminal.
I inter techno log y c istheintertechnologyinterferencereceivedattheterminalfromanexternaltransmitter.
Wehave:
ortho

nonOrtho

P CCH c + P CCH

DL
P tx c

I extra c + I inter carrier c + I inter techno log y c L T r

DL
nonOrtho
term
+ 1 F

r
+
F

r
+
N

ortho
BTS
tx
ortho
BTS
CCH
0
T

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+

------------------1
F
+

ortho
BTS
tch

CI req r

I extra c + I inter carrier c + I inter techno log y c L T r

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ P DL
tx c
DL
DL
P

tx
P tx c = P ortho c + P nonOrtho c + ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +
CCH
CCH
1
-------------------- + 1 F ortho BTS
tch
CI req r

DL

1 F ortho BTS P tx c r
--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +
1
tch -------------------- + 1 F ortho BTS
CI req r

nonOrtho

term

F ortho BTS P CCH

c r + N0 LT r
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 - 1 F
------------------+ ortho BTS
tch
CI req r

I extra c + I inter carrier c + I inter techno log y c L T r

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + 1 F ortho BTS r
DL

DL
tx
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- P DL ic
P tx c

tx
1 - + 1 F
------------------
ortho BTS
tch
CI req r

ortho

nonOrtho

= P CCH c + P CCH

276

c +

nonOrtho

term

F ortho BTS P CCH

c r + N0 LT r
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1
-------------------- + 1 F ortho BTS
tch
CI req r

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
nonOrtho

term

c r + N0 LT r
F ortho BTS P CCH
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 - 1 F
------------------+ ortho BTS
tch
CI req r
DL
P tx c = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------I extra c + I inter carrier c + I inter techno log y c L T r
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + 1 F ortho BTS r
DL

tx
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1

1 - + 1 F
------------------
ortho BTS
tch

r
CI
req

ortho

nonOrtho

P CCH c + P CCH

c +

Therefore,thedownlinkloadfactorcanbeexpressedas:

DL

I extra c + I inter carrier c + I inter techno log y c L T r

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + 1 F ortho BTS r
DL
P tx c
=
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 - + 1 F
------------------tch
ortho BTS
CI req r

The downlink load factor represents the signal degradation in relation to the reference interference (thermal noise plus
synchronisationchannelpower).

4.4.4.3.2

DownlinkLoadFactorperMobile
Atollevaluatesthedownlinkloadfactorforanyconnectedmobileasfollows:
X

DL

DL

I tot c
= ---------------DL
N tot c

4.4.4.4 UplinkLoadFactorDuetoOneUser
UL

ThispartdetailshowAtollcalculatesthecontributionofoneusertotheULloadfactor( X k ).
UL

Inthiscalculation,weassumethatthecellULreusefactor( F txi ic )isconstant.

TheresultdependsontheoptionusedtocalculateNt(WithoutusefulsignalorTotalnoisethatyoumayselectinGlobal
parameters).
WithoutUsefulSignalOption
UL

P b k req
W - ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------UL
Q req k = ------------------------
R99
UL
tx
TP P UL k I intra P b k req + I extra + I inter carrier + N 0
UL

P b k req
W
UL
- -----------------------------------------------------------------------Q req k = ------------------------UL
R99
UL
tx
TPP UL k I intra F P b k req + N 0
R99

R99

TP P UL k
TP P UL k
UL
UL
UL
tx
- = Q UL
P b k req 1 + Qreq k ------------------------+ N0
req k -------------------------- I intra F
W
W

R99

UL

P b k req

R99

TP P UL k
TP P UL k
UL
tx
- I intra F UL Q UL
Q req k ------------------------req k -------------------------- N 0
W
W
= ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + ----------------------------------------------------------------R99
R99
TP P UL k
TP P UL k
UL
UL
1 + Q req k -------------------------1 + Q req k -------------------------W
W
R99

req
TP P UL k
Ec
UL
Wenote ------ k
= Q req k ------------------------ Nt E DPDCH
W
UL

tx

I intra F
N0
UL
P b k req = ------------------------------------------------------ + -----------------------------------------------------

1
1
- + 1 --------------------------------------- + 1
--------------------------------------req
req
Ec
Ec
---- ----
Nt- k
Nt- k

E DPDCH
E DPDCH

277

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

Pb

UL

As I intra =

k req ,wehave:

I intra = I intra F

UL

tx

N0

- + N 0 ------------------------------------------------------ -----------------------------------------------------

tx

1
- + 1
--------------------------------------req
Ec
----
Nt- k

E DPDCH

1
- + 1
--------------------------------------req
Ec
----
Nt- k

E DPDCH

-----------------------------------------------------

1
- + 1
--------------------------------------req
Ec
----
Nt- k

E DPDCH
= -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------UL
1
1F
------------------------------------------------------

K
1
- + 1
--------------------------------------req
Ec
----
Nt- k

E DPDCH
K

I intra

UL

tx

N0 F
I intra = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1
----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1
UL
1
F
------------------------------------------------------

K
1
- + 1
--------------------------------------req
Ec
----
Nt- k

E DPDCH

UL
I intra + I extra + I inter carrier
I intra F
1
= ------------------------------------------------------------------------------= --------------------------------------= ----------------------------------UL
tx
tx
tx
I intra + I extra + I inter carrier + N 0
I intra F + N 0
N0
1 + -----------------------UL
I intra F

UL

Therefore,wehave:
X

UL

= F

UL

-----------------------------------------------------

1
- + 1
--------------------------------------req
Ec
----
Nt- k

E DPDCH

So,wecanconcludethatthecontributionofoneusertotheULloadisdefinedas:
UL

X k = F

UL

1
------------------------------------------------------

1
--------------------------------------+
1

Ec- req
----
Nt k

E DPDCH

TotalNoiseOption
UL

P b k req
W - ------------------------------------------------------------------------------UL
Q req k = ------------------------
R99
tx
TP P UL k I intra + I extra + I inter carrier + N 0
UL

P b k req
W - --------------------------------------UL
Q req k = ------------------------
UL
R99
tx
TP P UL k I intra F + N 0

278

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

R99

TP P UL k
UL
UL
- I intra F UL + N tx
P b k req = Q req k ------------------------0
W
R99

TP P UL k
Ec
UL
= Q req k ------------------------Wenote ------ k
W
Nt
E DPDCH
req

req
Ec
UL
UL
tx
P b k req = ------ k
I intra F + N 0
Nt E DPDCH

As I intra =

Pb

UL

k req ,wehave:

I intra = I intra F

UL

tx

+ N0

req

- k
----Nt E DPDCH
Ec

K
tx

N0

req

- k
----Nt E DPDCH
Ec

K
I intra = ------------------------------------------------------------UL
1F

UL
I intra + I extra + I inter carrier
I intra F
1
= ------------------------------------------------------------------------------= --------------------------------------= ---------------------------------UL
tx
tx
tx
I intra + I extra + I inter carrier + N 0
I intra F + N 0
N0
1 + ------------------------UL
I intra F

UL

Therefore,wehave:
X

UL

= F

UL

req

Ec-
----k
Nt E DPDCH

So,wecanconcludethatthecontributionofoneusertotheULloadisdefinedas:
UL

X k = F

UL

req

Ec
------ k
Nt E DPDCH

4.4.4.5 IntercarrierPowerSharingModelling
IntercarrierpowersharingenablesthenetworktodynamicallyallocateavailablepowerfromR99onlyandHSDPAcarriers
amongHSDPAcarriers.
Inthispart,wewillconsiderthemostcommonscenario,anetworkconsistingofanR99onlycarrier(c1)andanHSDPAcarrier
withdynamicpowerallocation(c2)(c2doesnotsupportHSUPA).
AsexplainedinTheUserManual,themaximumpoweroftheHSDPAcellmustbesettothesamevalueasthemaximum
sharedpowerinordertousepowersharingefficiently.Inthiscase,theHSDPAcellcanuse100%oftheavailablepower,i.e,
alloftheR99onlycellsunusedpowercanbeallocatedtotheHSDPAcell.
Letstakethefollowingexampletomeasuretheimpactoftheintercarrierpowersharing.

1stcase:Intercarrierpowersharingisnotactivated

Onc1,wehave: P max Tx c 1 = 43dBm and P tx R99 Tx c 1 = 39.1dBm .

Onc2,wehave: P max Tx c 2 = 43dBm , P tx R99 Tx c 2 = 36.1dBm and P Headroom Tx c 2 = 0dB .
Therefore,

P HSDPA Tx c 2 = P max Tx c 2 P tx R99 Tx c 2 P Headroom Tx c 2 = 42dBm

2ndcase:Intercarrierpowersharingisactivatedand P max Tx = 46dBm

Onc1,wehave: P max Tx c 1 = 43dBm and P tx R99 Tx c 1 = 39.1dBm .

Onc2,wehave: P max Tx c 2 = 46dBm , P tx R99 Tx c 2 = 36.1dBm and P Headroom Tx c 2 = 0dB .
Therefore,

P HSDPA Tx c 2 = P max Tx P tx R99 Tx c 1 P tx R99 Tx c 2 P Headroom Tx c 2 = 44.4dBm

279

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

4.4.4.6 BestServerDeterminationinMonteCarloSimulationsOldMethod
BeforeAtoll2.8.0,bestserverdeterminationusedtobeperformedbyselectingthebestcarrierwithintransmittersaccording
totheselectedmethod(siteequipment)andthenthebesttransmitterusingthebestcarrier.Toswitchbacktothismethod,
addthefollowinglinesintheAtoll.inifile:
[CDMA]
MultiBandSimu = 0
Themethodisdescribedbelow:
ForeachstationtxicontainingMbinitscalculationareaandusingthemainfrequencybandsupportedbytheMbsterminal
(i.e.eitherf1forasinglefrequencybandnetwork,orf1,f2orf3foramultibandterminalwithoutanypriorityonfrequency
bands,orf1foramultibandterminalwithf1asmainfrequencyband).
Determinationof BestCarrier k txi M b .
IfagivencarrierisspecifiedfortheservicerequestedbyMbandifitisusedbytxi
BestCarrier k txi M b isthecarrierspecifiedfortheservice.
Elsethecarrierselectionmodedefinedfortxiisconsidered.
IfcarrierselectionmodeisMin.ULLoadFactor
Foreachcarriericusedbytxi,wecalculatecurrentloadingfactor:
UL

I tot txi ic
UL
UL
X k txi ic = ---------------------------- + X
UL
N tot txi ic
EndFor
UL

BestCarrier k txi M b isthecarrierwiththelowest X k txi ic

ElseifcarrierselectionmodeisMin.DLTotalPower
BestCarrier k txi M b isthecarrierwiththelowest P tx txi ic k
ElseifcarrierselectionmodeisRandom
BestCarrier k txi M b israndomlyselected
Elseifcarrierselectionmodeis"Sequential"
UL

UL

BestCarrier k txi M b isthefirstcarriersothat X k txi ic X max

Calculationof
BTS P c txi M b BestCarrier
Q pilot txi BestCarrier = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------k
DL
DL

P tot txi BestCarrier k txi M b + I extra BestCarrier k txi M b +

DL
DL
Term
I inter carrier BestCarrier k txi M b + I inter techno log y BestCarrier k txi M b + N 0

IfuserselectswithoutPilot
BTS P c txi M b BestCarrier
Q pilot txi BestCarrier = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------k

DL
DL
P tot txi BestCarrier k txi M b + I extra BestCarrier k txi M b

DL
DL
+I
BestCarrier k txi M b + I inter techno log y BestCarrier k txi M b
inter

carrier

Term

+ N0
1 BTS P c txi M b BestCarrier

Rejectionofstationtxiifthepilotisnotreceived
pilot

If Q pilot txi M b BestCarrier Q req Mobility M b thentxiisrejectedbyMb

k

max

If Q pilot txi M b BestCarrier Q pilot M b

k

Admissioncontrol(IfsimulationrespectsaloadingfactorconstraintandMbwasnotconnectedinpreviousiteration).

280

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
UL

UL

If X k txi BestCarrier txi M b X max ,thentxiisrejectedbyMb

Else
max

Q pilot M b = Q pilot txi M b BestCarrier

k

Tx BS M b = txi
Endif
EndFor
IfnoTxBShasbeenselectedandMbsterminalcanworkononefrequencybandonly,Mbhasfailedtobeconnectedtothe
networkandisrejected.
IfnoTxBShasbeenselectedandMbsterminalcanworkonanotherfrequencyband.
Determination of BestCarrier k txi M b for each station txi containing Mb in its calculation area and using another
frequencybandsupportedbytheMbsterminal(i.e.f1,f2orf3foramultibandterminalwithoutanypriorityonfrequency
bands,orf2foramultibandterminalwithf2assecondaryfrequencyband)
IfagivencarrierisspecifiedfortheservicerequestedbyMbandifitisusedbytxi
BestCarrier k txi M b isthecarrierspecifiedfortheservice.
Elsethecarrierselectionmodedefinedfortxiisconsidered.
IfcarrierselectionmodefortxiisMin.ULLoadFactor
Foreachcarriericusedbytxi,wecalculatecurrentloadingfactor:
UL

I tot txi ic
UL
UL
- + X
X k txi ic = ---------------------------UL
N tot txi ic
EndFor
UL

BestCarrier k txi M b isthecarrierwiththelowest X k txi ic

ElseifcarrierselectionmodeisMin.DLTotalPower
BestCarrier k txi M b isthecarrierwiththelowest P tx txi ic k
ElseifcarrierselectionmodeisRandom
BestCarrier k txi M b israndomlyselected
Elseifcarrierselectionmodeis"Sequential"
UL

UL

BestCarrier k txi M b isthefirstcarriersothat X k txi ic X max

Calculationof
BTS P c txi M b BestCarrier
Q pilot txi BestCarrier = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------k
DL
DL

P tot txi BestCarrier k txi M b + I extra BestCarrier k txi M b +

DL
DL
Term
I inter carrier BestCarrier k txi M b + I inter techno log y BestCarrier k txi M b + N 0

IfuserselectswithoutPilot
BTS P c txi M b BestCarrier
Q pilot txi BestCarrier = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------k

DL
DL
P tot txi BestCarrier k txi M b + I extra BestCarrier k txi M b

DL
DL
+I
BestCarrier k txi M b + I inter techno log y BestCarrier k txi M b
inter

carrier

Term

N
+

txi

BestCarrier

0
BTS
c
b

Rejectionofstationtxiifthepilotisnotreceived
pilot

If Q pilot txi M b BestCarrier Q req Mobility M b thentxiisrejectedbyMb

k

281

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014
max

If Q pilot txi M b BestCarrier Q pilot M b

k

Admissioncontrol(IfsimulationrespectsaloadingfactorconstraintandMbwasnotconnectedinpreviousiteration).
UL

UL

If X k txi BestCarrier txi M b X max ,thentxiisrejectedbyMb

Else
max

Q pilot M b = Q pilot txi M b BestCarrier

k

Tx BS M b = txi
Endif
EndFor
IfnoTxBShasbeenselectedandMbsterminalcanworkontwofrequencybandsonly,Mbhasfailedtobeconnectedtothe
networkandisrejected.
IfnoTxBShasbeenselectedandMbsterminalcanworkonanotherfrequencyband.
Determination of BestCarrier k txi Mb for each station txi containing Mb in its calculation area and using another
frequencybandsupportedbytheMbsterminal(i.e.f1,f2orf3foramultibandterminalwithoutanypriorityonfrequency
bands,orf3foramultibandterminalwithf3asthirdfrequencyband)
IfagivencarrierisspecifiedfortheservicerequestedbyMbandifitisusedbytxi
BestCarrier k txi M b isthecarrierspecifiedfortheservice.
Elsethecarrierselectionmodedefinedfortxiisconsidered.
IfcarrierselectionmodefortxiisMin.ULLoadFactor
Foreachcarriericusedbytxi,wecalculatecurrentloadingfactor:
UL

I tot txi ic
UL
UL
- + X
X k txi ic = ---------------------------UL
N tot txi ic
EndFor
UL

BestCarrier k txi M b isthecarrierwiththelowest X k txi ic

ElseifcarrierselectionmodeisMin.DLTotalPower
BestCarrier k txi M b isthecarrierwiththelowest P tx txi ic k
ElseifcarrierselectionmodeisRandom
BestCarrier k txi M b israndomlyselected
Elseifcarrierselectionmodeis"Sequential"
UL

UL

BestCarrier k txi M b isthefirstcarriersothat X k txi ic X max

Calculationof
BTS P c txi M b BestCarrier
Q pilot txi BestCarrier = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------k
DL
DL

P tot txi BestCarrier k txi M b + I extra BestCarrier k txi M b +

DL
DL
Term
I inter carrier BestCarrier k txi M b + I inter techno log y BestCarrier k txi M b + N 0

IfuserselectswithoutPilot
BTS P c txi M b BestCarrier
Q pilot txi BestCarrier = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------k

DL
DL
P tot txi BestCarrier k txi M b + I extra BestCarrier k txi M b

DL
+ I DL

BestCarrier

txi

+
I

BestCarrier

txi

inter carrier
k
b
inter techno log y
k
b

Term

N
+

txi

BestCarrier

0
BTS
c
b

Rejectionofstationtxiifthepilotisnotreceived

282

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
pilot

If Q pilot txi M b BestCarrier Q req Mobility M b thentxiisrejectedbyMb

k

max

If Q pilot txi M b BestCarrier Q pilot M b

k

Admissioncontrol(IfsimulationrespectsaloadingfactorconstraintandMbwasnotconnectedinpreviousiteration).
UL

UL

If X k txi BestCarrier txi M b X max ,thentxiisrejectedbyMb

Else
max

Q pilot M b = Q pilot txi M b BestCarrier

k

Tx BS M b = txi
Endif
EndFor
IfnoTxBShasbeenselected,Mbhasfailedtobeconnectedtothenetworkandisrejected.

4.5 UMTSHSPAPredictionStudies
4.5.1 PointAnalysis
4.5.1.1 ASAnalysisTab
Letussupposeareceiverwithaterminal,aserviceandamobilitytype.Thisreceiverdoesnotcreateanyinterference.You
can makethepredictionforaspecificcarrierorforthebestcarrier.For DCHSPA,MCHSPAand DBMCHSPAusers, the
analysismustbemadeonthebestcarrier.IfyouhaveselectedaDCHSPAuseroraMCHSPAuser,select"Best(All/Main/
Second/Thirdband)"asthecarrier.ForaDBMCHSPAuser,select"Best(Allbands)"asthecarrier.
Theanalysisisbasedonthefollowingparameters:

Theuplinkloadfactorandthedownlinktotalpowerofcells,
TheavailableHSDPApowerofthecellincaseofanHSDPAbeareruser,
ThecellULreusefactor,thecellULloadfactorduetoHSUPAandthemaximumcellULloadfactorforHSUPAbearer
users.

Theseparameterscanberesultsofagivensimulation,averagevaluescalculatedfromagroupofsimulations,oruserdefined
cellinputs.Inthelastcase,whennovalueisdefinedintheCellstable,Atollusesthefollowingdefaultvalues:

Totaltransmittedpower=50%ofthemaximumpower(i.e,40 dBmifthemaximumpowerissetto43 dBm)

Uplinkloadfactor=50%.
Uplinkreusefactor=1
UplinkloadfactorduetoHSUPA=0%
Maximumuplinkloadfactor=75%

Ontheotherhand,nodefaultvalueisusedfortheHSDPApower;thisparametermustbedefinedbytheuser.
ResultsaredisplayedforanypointofthemapwherethepilotsignallevelexceedsthedefinedminimumRSCP.

4.5.1.1.1

BarGraphandPilotSubMenu
Wecanconsiderthefollowingcases:
1stcase:Analysisbasedonaspecificcarrier
Thecarrierthatcanbeusedbytransmittersisfixed.Inthiscase,foreachtransmittericontainingthereceiverinitscalculation
areaandusingtheselectedcarrier,Atollcalculatesthepilotqualityatthereceiveronthiscarrier.Then,itdeterminesthebest
servingtransmitterusingtheselectedcarrieric.
2ndcase:Analysisbasedonthebestcarrierofallfrequencybands
Atolldeterminesthebestcarrierforeachtransmitteriwhichcontainsthereceiverinitscalculationareaandusesafrequency
bandsupportedbythereceiversterminal.Thebestcarrierselectiondependsontheoptionselectedforthesiteequipment
(ULminimumnoise,DLminimumpower,random,sequential).Then,Atollcalculatesthepilotqualityatthereceiverfrom
thesetransmittersontheirbestcarrier(ic)anddefinesthebestserver(onitsbestcarrier).
3rdcase:Analysisbasedonthebestcarrierofanyfrequencyband(formultibandterminalswithprioritydefinedonfrequency
bandsonly)

283

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

Thefrequencybandthatcanbeusedisfixed.Atolldeterminesthebestcarrierforeachtransmittericontainingthereceiver
initscalculationareaandusingtheselectedfrequencyband.Thebestcarrierselectiondependsontheoptionselectedfor
thesiteequipment(ULminimumnoise,DLminimumpower,random,sequential).Then,Atollcalculatesthepilotqualityat
thereceiverfromthesetransmittersontheirbestcarrier(ic)anddefinesthebestserver(onitsbestcarrier).
Ec/I0(or Q pilot ic )Evaluation
Letusassumethaticiseitherthebestcarrierortheselectedcarrierofatransmittericontainingthereceiverinitsradius
calculationandicadjisanothercarrieradjacenttoic.Aninterferencereductionfactor, RF ic ic adj ,isdefinedbetweenic
andicadjandsettoavaluedifferentfrom0.
TwowaysmaybeusedtocalculateI0.
OptionTotalnoise:Atollconsidersthenoisegeneratedbyallthetransmittersandthethermalnoise.
OptionWithoutpilot:Atollconsidersthetotalnoisedeductingthepilotsignal.
CalculationoptionmaybeselectedinGlobalparameters.
Therefore,wehave:
BTS P c i ic
Q pilot i ic = --------------------------------------------DL
I 0 ic
With,
DL

DL

DL

DL

DL

term

DL

DL

DL

DL

term

I 0 ic = P tot i ic + I extra ic + I inter carrier ic + I inter techno log y ic + N 0

forthetotalnoiseoption,

And
DL

I 0 ic = I intra ic + I extra ic + I inter carrier ic + I inter techno log y ic + N 0

1 BTS P c i ic

for the

withoutpilotoption.
1ststep: P c i ic calculationforeachcell(i,ic)
P c i ic isthepilotpowerofatransmitterioncarriericatthereceiver.
P pilot i ic
P c i ic = ------------------------LT
I

L T isthetotallossbetweentransmitteriandreceiver.
I

L Tx L path L term L body L Indoor M Shadowing Ec Io

L T = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------I
G Tx G term
DL

DL

DL

2ndstep: P tot j ic , P tot i ic and P tot j ic adj calculations

Wehave:
DL

I extra ic =

DL

P tot j ic

txj j i

P SCH ic
DL
DL
DL
I intra ic = P tot i ic BTS P tot i ic ------------------
LT

Ptot j icadj
DL

DL

txj j
I inter carrier ic = ---------------------------------------RF ic ic adj

and
DL

I inter techno log y ic =

ni

Tx

P Transmitted ic i
-------------------------------------Tx
Tx m
L total ICP ic ic
i

DL

Foreachtransmitterofthenetwork, P tot ic isthetotalpowerreceivedatthereceiverfromthetransmitteronthebest

carriericofthetransmitteri.

284

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

P Tx ic
DL
P tot ic = ---------------LT
P Tx ic isthetotalpowertransmittedbythetransmitteronthebestcarrier.Totalpowertransmittedbyeachcelliseithera
simulationresult(providedinSimulationproperties(Cellstab))oravalueuserdefinedinCellproperties.
DL

Foreachtransmitterofthenetwork, P tot ic adj isthetotalpowerreceivedatthereceiverfromthetransmitteronthecarrier

icadj.Thiscarrierisadjacenttoic.
P Tx ic adj
DL
P tot ic adj = ---------------------LT
P Tx ic adj isthetotalpowertransmittedbythetransmitteronthecarriericadj.Totalpowertransmittedbyeachcelliseither
asimulationresult(providedinSimulationproperties(Cellstab))oravalueuserdefinedinCellproperties.
term

3rdstep: N 0
term

N0

calculation
Tx DL

= NF Term K T W NR inter techno log y

DL

4thstep: I 0 ic and Q pilot i ic evaluationusingformulasdescribedabove

DL

5thstep: G macro diversity calculation

DL

The macrodiversity gain, G macro diversity , models the decrease in shadowing margin due to the fact there are several
availablepilotsignalsatthemobile.
DL

npaths

G macro diversity = M Shadowing Ec Io M Shadowing Ec Io

npaths

M Shadowing Ec Io is the shadowing margin when the mobile receives n pilot signals (not necessarily from transmitters
belongingtothemobileactiveset).
This parameter is determined from cell edge coverage probability and Ec/I0 standard
deviation.WhentheEc/I0standarddeviationissetto0,themacrodiversitygainequals
0.
6thstep:Determinationofactiveset
Atolltakesthetransmitteriwiththehighest Q pilot i ic andcalculatesthebestpilotqualityreceivedwithafixedcelledge
Resulting

coverageprobability, Q pilot
Resulting

Q pilot

ic .

DL

ic = G macro diversity max Q pilot i ic

Resulting

If Q pilot

req

Resulting

Q pilot ,itmeanspilotqualityatthereceiverexceeds Q pilot

ic x%oftime(xisthefixedcelledgecoverage

probability).Thecellwhose Q pilot i ic isthehighestoneenterstheactivesetasbestserver( Q pilot BS ic )andthebest

carrier(icBS)ofthebestserver,BS,willbethecarrierusedbyothertransmittersoftheactiveset(whenactivesetsizeis
greaterthan1).Pilotisavailable.
Resulting

If Q pilot

req

Q pilot ,nocell(i,ic)canentertheactiveset.Pilotisunavailable.

Then,pilotqualitiesatthereceiverfromtransmittersi(exceptthebestserver)onthebestcarrierofthebestserver,icBS,are
recalculatedtodeterminetheentirereceiveractiveset(whenactivesetsizeisgreaterthan1).Sameformulasandcalculation
DL

methodareusedtoupdate I 0 ic BS valueanddetermine Q pilot i ic BS .

Wehave:
BTS P c i ic
Q pilot i ic = --------------------------------------------DL
I 0 ic
With,
DL

DL

DL

DL

DL

term

I 0 ic = P tot i ic + I extra ic + I inter carrier ic + I inter techno log y ic + N 0

forthetotalnoiseoption,

285

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

And
DL

DL

DL

DL

term

DL

I 0 ic = I intra ic + I extra ic + I inter carrier ic + I inter techno log y ic + N 0

1 BTS P c i ic

for the

withoutpilotoption.
Othercells(i,icBS)intheactivesetmustsatisfythefollowingcriteria:
Q pilot i ic BS Q pilot BS ic BS AS_threshold i BS ic BS
i ic BS neighbourlist i BS ic BS (optionally)
NumberofCellsinActiveSet
ThisisauserspecifiedinputintheTerminalproperties.Itcorrespondstotheactivesetsize.
ThermalNoise
Thisparameteriscalculatedasdescribedabove(3rdstep).
I0(BestServer)
I0(Bestserver)isthetotalnoisereceivedatthereceiveronicBS.ThenotationBestserverreferstothebestserverofactive
set.ThisisrelevantwhenusingthecalculationoptionWithoutpilot.Inthiscase,itinformsthatthepilotsignalofthebest
server(BS,icBS)isdeductedfromthetotalnoise.
DownlinkMacroDiversityGain
Thisparameteriscalculatedasdescribedabove(5thstep).

4.5.1.1.2

DownlinkR99SubMenu
TheDownlinkR99submenucontainsR99relatedresults.
Atollcalculatesthetrafficchannelqualityfromeachcell(k,icBS)ofthereceiversactivesetatthereceiver.Nopowercontrol
isperformedasinsimulations.Here,Atolldeterminesthedownlinktrafficchannelqualityatthereceiverforthemaximum
allowedtrafficchannelpowerpertransmitter.Then,aftercombination,thetotaldownlinktrafficchannelqualityisevaluated
andcomparedwiththespecifiedtargetquality.
Eb/NtTarget
DL

Eb/Nttarget( Q req )isdefinedforagivenR99bearer,amobilitytypeandareceptionequipment.Thisparameterisavailable

intheR99BearerSelectiontable.
Compressedmodeisoperatedwhenamobilesupportingcompressedmodeisconnected
toacelllocatedonasitewithacompressedmodecapableequipment,and

Either the received Ec/I0 is lower than the Ec/I0 activation threshold (Global
Resulting

parameters): Q pilot

CM activation

Q pilot

Or the pilot RSCP is lower than the pilot RSCP activation threshold (Global
CM activation

parameters): P c RSCP pilot

Whencompressedmodeisactivated,thedownlinkEb/Nttargetisincreasedbythevalue
DL

userdefinedfortheDLEb/Nttargetincreasefield(Globalparameters), Q req .
Requiredtransmitterpowerontrafficchannels
req

Thecalculationoftherequiredtransmitterpowerontrafficchannels( P tch )maybedividedintothreesteps.

DL

1ststep: Q max k ic BS evaluationforeachcell

DL

Letusassumethefollowingnotation:Eb/Ntmaxcorrespondsto Q max
Therefore,foreachcell(k,icBS),wehave:

286

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

DL

BTS P b max k ic BS
DL
DL
- G DL
Q max k ic BS = -----------------------------------------------------p G Div
DL
N tot ic BS
max

P tch
DL
With P b max k ic BS = ---------LT
k

DL

DL

DL

DL

DL

term

and N tot ic BS = I intra ic BS + I extra ic BS + I inter carrier ic BS + I inter techno log y ic BS + N 0

Where
max

P tch isthemaximumpowerallowedontrafficchannels.ThisparameterisuserdefinedintheR99RadioBearerstable.
DL

N tot ic BS isthetotalnoiseatthereceiveronthebestcarrierofthebestserver.
DL

I intra ic BS istheintracellinterferenceatthereceiveronthebestcarrierofthebestserver.
P SCH k ic BS
DL
I intra ic BS = P DL k ic BTS F ortho P DL k ic ----------------------------- tot

tot
BS
BS
L
T

DL

I extra ic BS istheextracellinterferenceatthereceiveronthebestcarrierofthebestserver.
DL

I extra ic BS =

Ptot j icBS
DL

j jk
DL
I inter carrier ic BS

istheintercarrierinterferenceatthereceiveronthebestcarrierofthebestserver.

Ptot j icadj
DL

DL

txj j
I inter carrier ic BS = ---------------------------------------RF ic BS ic adj

icadjisacarrieradjacenttoicBS.
RF ic BS ic adj istheinterferencereductionfactor,definedbetweenicandicadjandsettoavaluedifferentfrom0.
DL

I inter techno log y ic BS istheintertechnologyinterferenceatthereceiveronthebestcarrierofthebestserver.

DL

I inter techno log y ic BS =

ni

Tx

P Transmitted ic i
----------------------------------------Tx
Tx m
L total ICP ic ic
i

BS

th

ic i isthe i interferingcarrierofanexternaltransmitter
Tx m

ICP ic ic
i

BS

istheintertechnologyChannelProtectionbetweenthesignaltransmittedbyTxandreceivedbymassumingthe

frequencygapbetween ic i (externalnetwork)and ic BS .
2ndstep:Calculationofthetotaltrafficchannelquality
DL

Q MAX isthetrafficchannelqualityatthereceiveronicBSaftersignalcombinationofallthetransmitterskoftheactiveset.
Ondownlink,ifthereisnohandoff,wehave:
DL

DL

Q MAX ic BS = Q max k ic BS
Foranyotherhandoffstatus,wehave:
DL

DL

Q MAX ic BS = f rakeefficiency

Qmax k icBS
DL

Where
DL

f rakeefficiency isthedownlinkrakeefficiencyfactordefinedinTerminalproperties.
req

3rdstep: P tch calculation

287

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

DL

Q req
req
- P max
P tch = -------------------------tch
DL
Q MAX ic BS
Compressed mode is operated when a mobile supporting compressed mode is
connectedtoacelllocatedonasitewithacompressedmodecapableequipment,and

Either the received Ec/I0 is lower than the Ec/I0 activation threshold (Global
Resulting

parameters): Q pilot

CM activation

Q pilot

Or the pilot RSCP is lower than the pilot RSCP activation threshold (Global
CM activation

parameters): P c RSCP pilot

Whencompressedmodeisactivated,thedownlinkEb/Nttargetisincreasedbythevalue
DL

userdefinedfortheDLEb/Nttargetincreasefield(Globalparameters), Q req .Inthis

DL

DL

Q req Q req
req
- P max
case,wehave: P tch = -----------------------------tch
DL
Q MAX ic BS
MaxEb/NtforEachCellofActiveSet
Foreachcell(k,icBS),wehave:
DL

BTS P b max k ic BS
DL
DL
- G DL
Q max k ic BS = -----------------------------------------------------p G Div
DL
N tot ic BS
max

P tch
DL
-
With P b max k ic BS = ---------LT
k

DL

DL

DL

DL

DL

term

N tot ic BS = I intra ic BS + I extra ic BS + I inter carrier ic BS + I inter techno log y ic BS + N 0

max

req

P SCH k ic BS
P tch P tch
DL
I intra ic BS = P DL k ic BTS F ortho P DL k ic ------------------------------,0)
1 BTS max (-------------------------tot
BS
tot
BS
L
L
T

DL

I extra ic BS =

Tk

Ptot j icBS
DL

j jk

Ptot j icadj
DL

DL

txj j
I inter carrier ic BS = ---------------------------------------RF ic BS ic adj

DL

I inter techno log y ic BS =

ni

Tx

P Transmitted ic i
----------------------------------------Tx
Tx m
L total ICP ic ic
i

BS

Where
req

P tch istherequiredtransmitterpowerontrafficchannels.
MaxEb/Nt
DL

Q MAX isthetrafficchannelqualityatthereceiveronicBSaftersignalcombinationofallthetransmitterskoftheactiveset.
Ondownlink,ifthereisnohandoff,wehave:
DL

DL

Q MAX ic BS = Q max k ic BS
Foranyotherhandoffstatus,wehave:
DL

DL

Q MAX ic BS = f rakeefficiency

Qmax k icBS
DL

Where

288

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
DL

f rakeefficiency isthedownlinkrakeefficiencyfactordefinedinTerminalproperties.
DL

DL

DL

DL

DL

Therefore,theserviceonthedownlinktrafficchannelisavailableif Q MAX ic BS Q req (or Q MAX ic BS Q req Q req when

compressedmodeisactivated).
EffectiveEb/Nt
DL

Q eff istheeffectivetrafficchannelqualityatthereceiveronicBS.
DL

DL

DL

DL

DL

DL

DL

Q eff = min Q MAX Q req (or Q eff = min Q MAX Q req Q req whencompressedmodeisactivated).
DownlinkSoftHandoverGain
DL

G SHO correspondstotheDLsofthandovergain.
DL

Q MAX ic BS
DL
G SHO = -----------------------------------------------DL
max Q max k ic BS
DL

DL

max Q max k ic BS correspondstothehighest Q max k ic BS value.

4.5.1.1.3

UplinkR99SubMenu
TheUplinkR99submenucontainsR99relatedresults.
Foreachcell(k,icBS)inthereceiversactiveset,Atollcalculatesuplinktrafficchannelqualityfromreceiver.Nopowercontrol
isperformedasinsimulations.Here,Atolldeterminestheuplinktrafficchannelqualityatthecellforthemaximumterminal
powerallowed.Then,thetotaluplinktrafficchannelqualityisevaluatedwithrespecttothereceiverhandoverstatus.From
thisvalue,AtollcalculatestheterminalpowerrequiredtoobtaintheR99bearerandcomparesittothemaximumterminal
powerallowed.
MaxTerminalPower
max

Maxterminalpower( P term )isaninputuserdefinedforeachterminal.Itcorrespondstotheterminalsmaximumpower.

RequiredTerminalPower
req

ThecalculationoftheterminalpowerrequiredtoobtainanR99bearer( P term R99 )maybedividedintothreesteps.

UL

1ststep: Q max k ic BS evaluationforeachcell

Foreachcell(k,icBS)inthereceiversactiveset,wehave:
UL

term P b max k ic BS
UL
UL
- G UL
Q max k ic BS = -------------------------------------------------------p G Div
UL
N tot k ic BS
max

UL

P term 1 r c
UL
With P b max k ic BS = --------------------------------------LT
k

UL

N tot k ic BS isthetotalnoiseatthetransmitteronthebestcarrierofthebestserver.Thisvalueiscalculatedfromthecell
UL

uplinkloadfactor X k ic BS .
tx

N0
UL
N tot k ic BS = -----------------------------------UL
1 X k ic BS
tx

N 0 isthetransmitterthermalnoise.
2ndstep:Calculationofthetotaltrafficchannelquality
UL

Q MAX ic BS isthetrafficchannelqualityatthetransmitteronicBSaftersignalcombinationofallthetransmitterskofthe
activeset.

289

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014
UL

UL

Ifthereisnohandoff(1/1): Q MAX ic BS = Q max k ic BS

Forsofthandoff(2/2):
UL

UL

UL

Q MAX ic BS = G macro diversity 2links max Qmax k ic BS

UL

G macro diversity 2links istheuplinkmacrodiversitygain.Thisparameterisdeterminedfromthefixedcelledgecoverage

probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option Shadowing taken into account is not selected
(Predictionproperties),AtollconsiderstheuplinkmacrodiversitygaindefinedbytheuserinGlobalparameters.
UL

UL

max Q max k ic BS correspondstothehighest Q max k ic BS value.

Forsoftsofthandoffs(3/3):
UL

UL

UL

Q MAX ic BS = G macro diversity 3links max Q max k ic BS

UL

G macro diversity 3links istheuplinkmacrodiversitygain.Thisparameterisdeterminedfromthefixedcelledgecoverage

probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option Shadowing taken into account is not selected
(Predictionproperties),AtollconsiderstheuplinkmacrodiversitygaindefinedbytheuserinGlobalparameters.
Forsofterandsoftersofterhandoffs(1/2and1/3):
UL

UL

Q MAX ic BS = f rakeefficiency

Qmax k icBS
UL

Forsoftersofthandoffs(2/3),therearetwopossibilities.IftheMRCoptionisselected(optionavailableinGlobalparameters),
wehave:
UL
UL
UL
Q MAX ic BS = G macro diversity 2links max f rakeefficiency

UL

UL

Q max k ic BS Q max

konthesamesite

k on the same site

k ic BS

Else,
UL

UL

UL

Q MAX ic BS = G macro diversity 2links max Qmax k ic BS

req

3rdstep: P term R99 calculation

req

P term R99 istherequiredterminalpower.

UL

Q req
req
- P max
P term R99 = -------------------------term
UL
Q MAX ic BS
UL

Q req istheuplinktrafficqualitytargetdefinedbytheuserforagivenreceptionequipment,agivenR99bearerandagiven
mobilitytype.ThisparameterisavailableintheR99BearerSelectiontable.
Compressed mode is operated when a mobile supporting compressed mode is
connectedtoacelllocatedonasitewithacompressedmodecapableequipment,and

ThereceivedEc/I0islowerthantheEc/I0activationthreshold(Globalparameters):
Resulting

Q pilot

CM activation

Q pilot

ThepilotRSCPislowerthanthepilotRSCPactivationthreshold(Globalparameters):
CM activation

P c RSCP pilot

Whencompressedmodeisactivated,theuplinkEb/Nttargetisincreasedbythevalue
UL

userdefinedfortheULEb/Nttargetincreasefield(Globalparameters), Q req .Inthis

UL

UL

Q req Q req
req
- P max
case,wehave: P term R99 = -----------------------------term
UL
Q MAX ic BS

req

max

Therefore,theserviceontheuplinktrafficchannelisavailableif P term R99 P term .

Eb/NtMax
Foreachcell(k,icBS)inthereceiversactiveset,wehave:

290

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

UL

term P b max k ic BS
UL
UL
- G UL
Q max k ic BS = -------------------------------------------------------p G Div
UL
N tot k ic BS
max

UL

P term 1 r c
UL
With P b max k ic BS = --------------------------------------LT
k

UL

N tot k ic BS isthetotalnoiseatthetransmitteronthebestcarrierofthebestserver.Thisvalueiscalculatedfromthecell
UL

uplinkloadfactor X k ic BS .
tx

max

req

N0
P term P term R99
UL
- + 1 term max (-----------------------------------------N tot k ic BS = -----------------------------------,0)
UL
LT
1 X k ic BS
k
tx

N 0 isthetransmitterthermalnoise.
UL

Q MAX ic BS isthetrafficchannelqualityatthetransmitteronicBSaftersignalcombinationofallthetransmitterskofthe
activeset.
UL

UL

Ifthereisnohandoff(1/1): Q MAX ic BS = Q max k ic BS

Forsofthandoff(2/2):
UL

UL

UL

Q MAX ic BS = G macro diversity 2links max Q max k ic BS

UL

G macro diversity 2links istheuplinkmacrodiversitygain.Thisparameterisdeterminedfromthefixedcelledgecoverage

probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option Shadowing taken into account is not selected
(Predictionproperties),AtollconsiderstheuplinkmacrodiversitygaindefinedbytheuserinGlobalparameters.
UL

UL

max Q max k ic BS correspondstothehighest Q max k ic BS value.

Forsoftsofthandoffs(3/3):
UL

UL

UL

Q MAX ic BS = G macro diversity 3links max Q max k ic BS

UL

G macro diversity 3links istheuplinkmacrodiversitygain.Thisparameterisdeterminedfromthefixedcelledgecoverage

probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option Shadowing taken into account is not selected
(Predictionproperties),AtollconsiderstheuplinkmacrodiversitygaindefinedbytheuserinGlobalparameters.
Forsofterandsoftersofterhandoffs(1/2and1/3):
UL

UL

Q MAX ic BS = f rakeefficiency

Qmax k icBS
UL

Forsoftersofthandoffs(2/3),therearetwopossibilities.IftheMRCoptionisselected(optionavailableinGlobalparameters),
wehave:
UL
UL
UL
Q MAX ic BS = G macro diversity 2links max f rakeefficiency

UL

UL

Q max k ic BS Q max

konthesamesite

k on the same site

k ic BS

Else,
UL

UL

UL

Q MAX ic BS = G macro diversity 2links max Q max k ic BS

EffectiveEb/Nt
UL

Q eff istheeffectivetrafficchannelqualityatthetransmitteronicBS.
UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

Q eff = min Q MAX Q req (or Q eff = min Q MAX Q req Q req whencompressedmodeisactivated).
UplinkSoftHandoverGain
UL

G SHO correspondstotheuplinksofthandovergain.

291

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014
UL

Q MAX ic BS
UL
G SHO = -----------------------------------------------UL
max Q max k ic BS
UL

UL

max Q max k ic BS correspondstothehighest Q max k ic BS value.

4.5.1.1.4

HSDPASubMenu
TheHSDPAsubmenucontainsHSDPArelatedresultsforHSDPAandHSPAuserswhentheHSSCCHqualityissufficientand
iftheusercanobtainanHSDPAbearer.
AtolldeterminesthebestHSDPAbearerthattheusercanobtain.TheHSDPAbeareruserisprocessedasifheistheonlyuser
in the cell, i.e. he uses the entire HSDPA power available in the cell. For further information on the fast link adaptation
modelling,see"FastLinkAdaptationModelling"onpage 238.
WhenmodellingMCHSPAusers(includingDCHSPAusers)andDBMCHSPAusers,Atolldeterminestheservingcellsandthe
bestHSDPAbearerobtainedineachservingcell.Ineachcell,theuserisprocessedasifheistheonlyuserinthecell.Atoll
detailstheresultsforeachcelltowhichtheuserisconnected.ForfurtherinformationonMCHSPAusermodelling,see"MC
HSPAUsers"onpage 294.ForfurtherinformationonDBMCHSPAusermodelling,see"DBMCHSPAUsers"onpage 294.
GeneralResults
Atolldisplaysthenameofthecelltowhichtheuserisconnected,thefrequencybandusedbythetransmitter,theselected
carrier,andthemaximumavailableHSDPApowerofthecell.
HSPDSCHEc/Nt
AtollcalculatesthebestHSPDSCHquality(HSPDSCHEc/Nt).Thewayofcalculatingitdependsontheselectedoptioninthe
transmittersglobalparameters(HSDPApart):CQIbasedonCPICHqualityorCQIbasedonHSPDSCHquality.
ForfurtherdetailsontheHSPDSCHqualitycalculation,seeeither"HSPDSCHQualityCalculation"onpage 240iftheselected
optionis"CQIbasedonCPICHquality"or"HSPDSCHQualityCalculation"onpage 245iftheselectedoptionis"CQIbasedon
HSPDSCHquality".
HSPDSCHPower
AtollcalculatestheavailableHSPDSCHpower.ForfurtherdetailsontheHSPDSCHpowercalculation,seeeither"HSPDSCH
QualityCalculation"onpage 240iftheselectedoptionis"CQIbasedonCPICHquality"or"HSPDSCHQualityCalculation"on
page 245iftheselectedoptionis"CQIbasedonHSPDSCHquality".
HSSCCHEc/NtThreshold
AtolldisplaystheHSSCCHEc/Ntthresholdsetfortheselectedmobilitytype.
HSSCCHEc/Nt
AtolldisplaystheobtainedHSSCCHquality.
WhentheHSSCCHpowerallocationstrategyisdynamic,thisparametercorrespondstotheHSSCCHEc/Ntthresholddefined
fortheselectedmobilitytype.
WhentheHSSCCHpowerallocationstrategyisstatic,theHSSCCHEc/NtiscalculatedfromthefixedHSSCCHpower.
Wehave:
BTS P c ic
Eci
---- ic
= ------------------------------- forthetotalnoiseoption,
Nt
HS SCCH
DL
N tot ic
And
BTS P c ic
Eci
---- ic
= --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Nt
HS SCCH
DL
term
N tot ic 1 F ortho 1 F MUD BTS P c ic

forthewithoutusefulsignaloption.

With
DL

DL

DL

DL

DL

term

N tot ic = I intra ic + I extra ic + I inter carrier ic + I inter techno log y ic + N 0

DL

DL

DL
P SCH ic
P SCH ic
DL
term
I intra ic = P tot ic + BTS 1 F MUD 1 F ortho P tot ic ------------------- BTS P tot ic ------------------

LT
LT
txi
txi
txi

292

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

DL

I extra ic =

DL

P tot ic

txj j i

Ptot icadj
DL

DL

txj j
I inter carrier ic = -----------------------------------RF ic ic adj

icadjisacarrieradjacenttoic.
RF ic ic adj istheinterferencereductionfactor,definedbetweenicandicadjandsettoavaluedifferentfrom0.
DL

I inter techno log y ic istheintertechnologyinterferenceatthereceiveronic.

Tx

DL

I inter techno log y ic =

P Transmitted ic i

------------------------------------Tx
Tx m
L
ICP
total

ni

ic i ic

th

ic i isthe i interferingcarrierofanexternaltransmitter
Tx m

ICP ic ic istheintertechnologyChannelProtectionbetweenthesignaltransmittedbyTxandreceivedbymassumingthe
i

frequencygapbetween ic i (externalnetwork)and ic .
P HS SCCH ic
P c ic = ------------------------------i
LT
i

And
L path L Tx L term L body L indoor M Shadowing Ec Io
L T = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G Tx G term
term

term

BTS , F ortho , F MUD and N 0

aredefinedin"Inputs"onpage 211.

CQI
ItcorrespondstotheHSPDSCHCQI.
Thewayofcalculatingitdependsontheselectedoptioninthetransmittersglobalparameters(HSDPApart):CQIbasedon
CPICHqualityorCQIbasedonHSPDSCHquality.
ForfurtherdetailsontheHSPDSCHqualitycalculation,seeeither"HSPDSCHCQIDetermination"onpage 242iftheselected
optionis"CQIbasedonCPICHquality"or"HSPDSCHCQIDetermination"onpage 248iftheselectedoptionis"CQIbasedon
HSPDSCHquality".
HSDPABearerParameters
KnowingtheHSPDSCHCQI,AtollcalculatesthebestHSDPAbearerthatcanbeusedandselectsabearercompatiblewithcell
and terminal user equipment HSDPA capabilities. For further details on the HSDPA bearer selection, see "HSDPA Bearer
Selection"onpage 243.
AtolldisplaystheparametersoftheselectedHSDPAbearer:

Thetransportblocksize,
Themodulationschemeused,
ThenumberofHSPDSCHchannelsused.

PeakRLCThroughput
DL

AtolldisplaysthepeakRLCthroughputprovidedbytheservingcell,c,inthedownlink( TP P RLC c ).Thisonecorrespondsto

DL

thepeakRLCthroughputoftheselectedHSDPAbearer( TP P RLC I HSDPABearer ).

EffectiveRLCThroughput
DL

Atolldisplays the Effective RLC throughput ( TP E RLC ) provided to the user.TheEffectiveRLC throughput is calculated as
follows:

293

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014
DL

TP P RLC c
DL
TP E RLC = ------------------------TTI
Where TTI istheminimumnumberofTTI(TransmissionTimeInterval)betweentwoTTIused;itisdefinedintheterminal
userequipmentcategoryproperties.
BLER
AtollreadstheBLERinthequalitygraphBLER=f(HSPDSCHEc/Nt)thatisdefinedfortheselectedbearerandmobilitytype.
KnowingtheHSPDSCHEc/Nt,itfindsthecorrespondingBLER.
BearerConsumption
Atoll provides this result for HSPA CBR service users only. The minimum throughput demand required by the service is
allocated to these users. Therefore, they partly consume the HSDPA bearer. The bearer consumption expressed in %,
C HSDPABearer ,iscalculatedasfollows:
TPD Min DL
C HSDPABearer = --------------------------------------------------DL
TP P R LC I HSDPABearer
MCHSPAUsers
Whenmulticellmodeisactive,MCHSPAuserscansimultaneouslyconnecttoseveralHSDPAcellsofthetransmitterfordata
transfer.ThemaximumnumberofcellstowhichtheusercansimultaneouslyconnectdependsontheDLmulticellmodeset
fortheHSDPAUEcategoryoftheterminal.
Atolldeterminesthebestcarrieraccordingtothecarrierselectioncriteriondefinedinthesiteequipment.Ifthebestcarrier
belongstoatransmitterthatsupportsthemulticellmodeandifthetransmitterhasseveralHSDPAcarriers,Atollselectsthe
otherservingcells,i.e.,thesecondarycells.Thesecondarycellsbelongtothesametransmitterandarechosenamongthe
adjacentcarriersaccordingtotheCQI.Whentwoadjacentcarriersareavailable,AtolltakestheonewiththehighestCQI
value.AtollselectssecondarycellsaslongasHSDPAcarriersareavailableinthetransmitterandthemaximumnumberofcells
towhichtheusercansimultaneouslyconnectisnotexceeded.Ineachservingcell(i.e.,thebestcellandthesecondarycells),
AtolldeterminesthebestHSDPAbearerobtained.Ineachcell,theuserisprocessedasifheistheonlyuserinthecell.The
userisconnectedtoacellifheobtainsanHSDPAbearer.
DBMCHSPAUsers
WhenmulticellanddualbandHSDPAmodesareactive,DBMCHSPAuserscansimultaneouslyconnecttoHSDPAcellsof
twocositetransmittersusingdifferentfrequencybands.Ifthetwocositetransmittersworkonthesamefrequencyband,
thentheuserscanonlyconnecttotheHSDPAcellsofonetransmitter.Themaximumnumberofcellstowhichtheusercan
simultaneouslyconnectdependsontheDLmulticellmodesetfortheHSDPAUEcategoryoftheterminal.
Letsconsiderthefollowingconfiguration:

Asitewithtransmittersworkingontwodifferentfrequencybands,
ThesiteequipmentsupportsthedualbandHSDPAmode,
EachtransmitterhasseveralHSDPAcarriers,
Themulticellmodeisactiveforeachtransmitter.

Atolldeterminesthebestcarrieramongallsupportedfrequencybands,accordingtothecarrierselectioncriteriondefinedin
the site equipment. The secondary cells are taken in the same band as the best carrier (i.e., they belong to the same
transmitter), as long as carriers are available. Then, if additional carriers are required and if there are no more carriers
availableinthistransmitter,Atollselectsthecarriersinatransmitterusingthesecondfrequencyband.Withinonefrequency
band,thesecondarycellsarefirstselectedaccordingtoanadjacencycriterionandthen,accordingtotheCQIvalue.When
twoadjacentcarriersareavailable,AtolltakestheonewiththehighestCQIvalue.Ineachservingcell(i.e.,thebestcelland
thesecondarycells),AtolldeterminesthebestHSDPAbearerobtained.Ineachcell,theuserisprocessedasifheistheonly
userinthecell.TheuserisconnectedtoacellifheobtainsanHSDPAbearer.
ResultsforMCHSPAandDBMCHSPAUsers
WhentheuserissimultaneouslyconnectedtoseveralHSDPAcells,Atolldetailstheresultsforeachcell.Inaddition,itdisplays
thefollowingresultsunderTotal:

DL

ThePeakRLCThroughput

TP P RLC =

DL

TP P RLC c

c Servingcell

294

TheEffectiveRLCThroughput

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
DL

TP P RLC
DL
TP E RLC = ----------------TTI
Where TTI istheminimumnumberofTTI(TransmissionTimeInterval)betweentwoTTIused;itisdefinedintheterminal
userequipmentcategoryproperties.

TheApplicationThroughput

DL

TP P RLC c 1 BLER HSDPA

DL
Servingcells
- f TP Scaling TP Offset
TP A = c---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TTI

Where:
BLER HSDPA isreadinthequalitygraphdefinedforthetripletreceptionequipmentselectedbearermobility(HSDPAQuality
GraphstabintheReceptionequipmentproperties).ThisgraphdescribesthevariationofBLERasafunctionofthemeasured
quality(HSPDSCHEc/Nt).KnowingtheHSPDSCHEc/Nt,AtollfindsthecorrespondingBLER.
TTI istheminimumnumberofTTI(TransmissionTimeInterval)betweentwoTTIused;itisdefinedintheterminaluser
equipmentcategoryproperties.
f TP Scaling and TP Offset respectivelyrepresentthescalingfactorbetweentheapplicationthroughputandtheRLC(RadioLink
Control) throughput and the throughput offset. These two parameters model the header information and other
supplementarydatathatdoesnotappearattheapplicationlevel.Theyaredefinedintheserviceproperties.

4.5.1.1.5

HSUPASubMenu
TheHSUPAsubmenucontainsHSUPArelatedresultsforHSPAusersiftheusercanobtainanHSUPAbearer.
AtolldeterminesthebestHSUPAbearerthattheusercanobtain.TheHSUPAbeareruserisprocessedasifheistheonlyuser
inthecell,i.e.heusestheentireremainingloadofthecell.
ForfurtherinformationontheHSUPAbearerselection,see"HSUPABearerAllocationProcess"onpage 257.
WhenmodellingMCHSPAusers(includingDCHSPAusers)andDBMCHSPAusers,Atolldeterminestheservingcellsandthe
bestHSUPAbearerobtainedineachservingcellwithoutexceedingthemaximumpowerallowedbytheterminal.Ineachcell,
theuserisprocessedasifheistheonlyuserinthecell.Atolldetailstheresultsforeachcelltowhichtheuserisconnected.
ForfurtherinformationonMCHSPAandDBMCHSPAusermodelling,see"MCHSPAandDBMCHSPAUsers"onpage 297.
GeneralResults
Atolldisplaysthenameofthecelltowhichtheuserisconnected( c ),thefrequencybandusedbythetransmitter,andthe
selectedcarrier.
RequiredEDPDCHEc/Nt
req

Ec
ItcorrespondstotheEDPDCHEc/NtrequiredtoobtaintheHSUPAbearer( ------
).ThisvalueisdefinedforanHSUPA
Nt E DPDCH
bearer( I HSUPABearer )andanumberofretransmissions( N Rtx )intheHSUPABearerSelectiontable.
RequiredTerminalPower
Ec req
req
From ------
,AtollcalculatestheterminalpowerrequiredtoobtaintheHSUPAbearer, P term HSUPA .
Nt E DPDCH
Ec req
req
UL
P term HSUPA = ------
L T N tot
Nt E DPDCH
With
UL

UL

tx

intra

N tot ic = 1 F MUD term I tot

UL extra

ic + I tot

UL

tx

ic + I inter carrier ic + N 0

L path L Tx L term L body L indoor M Shadowing Eb Nt

UL
L T = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G Tx G term
tx

UL intra

term , F MUD , I tot

UL extra

, I tot

UL

tx

, I inter carrier and N 0 aredefinedin"Inputs"onpage 211.

295

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

MaxEDPDCHEc/Nt
max

Ec
AtollcalculatesthemaximumEDPDCHEcNtallowed( ------
).Forfurtherdetailsonthecalculation,see"MaxE
Nt E DPDCH
DPDCHEc/Nt"onpage 296.
HSUPABearerParameters
AtollselectsthebestHSUPAbearerfromtheHSUPAcompatiblebearers.ThisistheHSUPAbearerwiththehighestpotential
UL

TP P RLC I HSUPABearer
- )where:
throughput( ----------------------------------------------------N Rtx I HSUPABearer

Ec- req
Ec max
---- ------
Nt E DPDCH Nt E DPDCH
max

req

And P term HSUPA P term

With
max

P term :themaximumterminalpowerallowed.
AtolldisplaystheparametersoftheselectedHSUPAbearer:

Theradiobearerindex,
TheTTIduration,
Themodulationschemeused,
ThenumberofEDPDCHcodesused.

PeakRLCThroughput
UL

AtolldisplaysthepeakRLCthroughputprovidedbytheservingcell,c,intheuplink( TP P RLC c ).Thisonecorrespondsto

UL

thepeakRLCthroughputoftheselectedHSUPAbearer( TPP RLC I HSUPABearer ).

PeakRLCThroughput/No.ofRTX
UL

TPP RLC I HSUPABearer

- ).Atollconsiderstheratio
AtolldisplaysthepeakRLCthroughputtonumberofretransmissionsratio( ----------------------------------------------------N Rtx I HSUPABearer
toselecttheHSUPAbearerwhenseveralHSUPAbearersmeettheselectioncriteria.
AverageEffectiveRLCThroughput
UL

FromtheRLCpeakthroughput,AtollcalculatestheaverageeffectiveRLCthroughput, TP Av E RLC .
UL

TP P RLC c 1 BLER HSUPA

UL
TP Av E RLC M b = ----------------------------------------------------------------------- N Rtx Av
Where:
BLER HSUPA is the residual BLER after N Rtx Av retransmissions. The average number of retransmissions ( N Rtx Av ) is
determinedfromearlyterminationprobabilitiesdefinedfortheselectedHSUPAbearer(intheHSUPABearerSelectiontable).
MinEffectiveRLCThroughput
UL

FromtheRLCpeakthroughput,AtollcalculatestheminimumeffectiveRLCthroughput, TP Min E RLC .

UL

TP P RLC c 1 BLER HSUPA

UL
TP Min E RLC M b = -----------------------------------------------------------------------N Rtx
Where:
BLER HSUPA istheresidualBLERafter N Rtx retransmissions.

296

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

BLER
Knowing the EDPDCH Ec/Nt, Atoll finds the corresponding BLER. It is read in the quality graph defined for the quartet
reception equipmentselected bearernumber of retransmissionsmobility (HSUPA Quality Graphs tab in the Reception
equipmentproperties).ThisgraphdescribesthevariationofBLERasafunctionofthemeasuredquality(EDPDCHEc/Nt).
ApplicationThroughput
UL

Atolldisplaystheprovidedapplicationthroughput( TPA ).Theapplicationthroughputrepresentsthenetthroughputafter

deductionofcoding(redundancy,overhead,addressing,etc.).Thisoneiscalculatedasfollows:
UL

TP P RLC c 1 BLER HSUPA f TP Scaling TP Offset

UL
TP A M b = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------N Rtx
BearerConsumption
AtollprovidesthisresultforCBRserviceusersonly.Theminimumbitraterequiredbytheserviceisallocatedtotheseusers.
Therefore,theypartlyconsumetheHSUPAbearer.Thebearerconsumptionexpressedin%, C HSUPABearer ,iscalculatedas
follows:
TPD min UL
C HSUPABearer = ----------------------------------------------------UL
TP P RLC I HSUPABearer
MCHSPAandDBMCHSPAUsers
Whenmulticellmodeisactive,MCHSPAandDBMCHSPAuserscansimultaneouslyconnecttotwocellsofthetransmitter
intheuplink.ThemaximumnumberofcellstowhichtheusercansimultaneouslyconnectdependsontheULmulticellmode
setfortheHSUPAUEcategoryoftheterminal.
Tobeconnectedtotwocarriersintheuplink,MCHSPAandDBMCHSPAusersmustfirstinitiateaconnectiontoseveral
carriersin thedownlink.Thebest carrieristheoneselectedinthedownlink.Thesecondarycarrierbelongs tothesame
transmitter;itisthesecondbestcarrieramongtheadjacentcarriersselectedinthedownlink.Ineachservingcell(i.e.,the
bestcellandthesecondarycell),AtolldeterminesthebestHSUPAbearerobtained.Ineachcell,theuserisprocessedasifhe
istheonlyuserinthecell.TheuserisconnectedtoacellifheobtainsanHSUPAbearer.
ForfurtherinformationontheHSUPAbearerselectionforthebestservingcell,see"HSUPABearerAllocationProcess"on
page 257.ThesameprocessisusedtoselecttheHSUPAbearerforthesecondarycell.AmongthecompatibleHSUPAbearers,
UL

TP P RLC I HSUPABearer
- )where:
AtollselectstheHSUPAbearerwiththehighestpotentialthroughput( ----------------------------------------------------N Rtx I HSUPABearer

Ec- req
Ec max
---- ------
Nt E DPDCH Nt E DPDCH
remaining

req

And P term HSUPA P term

remaining

Where P term

istheremainingterminalpowerafterallocatingtheHSUPAbearertothebestservingcell.

ResultsforMCHSPAandDBMCHSPAUsers
Whentheuserissimultaneouslyconnectedtotwocellsintheuplink,Atolldetailstheresultsforeachservingcell( c ).In
addition,itdisplaysthefollowingresultsunderTotal:

ThePeakRLCThroughput

UL

TP P RLC =

UL

TP P RLC c

c Serving cell

TheAverageEffectiveRLCThroughput

UL

TP Av E RLC =

c Servingcell

UL

UL

TP P RLC c 1 BLER HSUPA

------------------------------------------------------------------------ N Rtx av

TheMinEffectiveRLCThroughput

TP Min E RLC =

c Serving cell

UL

TP P RLC c 1 BLER HSUPA

------------------------------------------------------------------------N Rtx

297

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

TheApplicationThroughput

UL
TP A =

UL

c Servingcell

TP P RLC c 1 BLER HSUPA

------------------------------------------------------------------------- f TP Scaling TP Offset
N Rtx

Where:
f TP Scaling and TP Offset respectivelyrepresentthescalingfactorbetweentheapplicationthroughputandtheRLC(RadioLink
Control) throughput and the throughput offset. These two parameters model the header information and other
supplementarydatathatdoesnotappearattheapplicationlevel.Theyaredefinedintheserviceproperties.

TheMaxTerminalPower
max

Atolldisplaysthemaximumterminalpower( P term ).

TheRequiredTerminalPower

req

P term HSUPA =

req

P term c

c Serving cells

4.5.2 CoverageStudies
Atoll calculates UMTSspecific coverage studies on each pixel where the pilot signal level exceeds the minimum RSCP
threshold.Letusassumeeachpixelonthemapcorrespondstoaprobereceiverwithaterminal,amobilitytypeandaservice.
Thisreceiverdoesnotcreateanyinterference.Youcanmakethecoveragepredictionforaspecificcarrierorforthebest
carrierCoveragepredictionsarebasedonparametersthatcanbeeithersimulationresults,oruserdefinedcellinputs.

4.5.2.1 PilotQualityAnalysis
Forfurtherdetailsofcalculationformulasandmethods,pleaserefertoDefinitionsandformulaspart,andPointanalysis
ASanalysistabPilotsubmenupart.
Weconsiderthefollowingcases:
1stcase:Analysisbasedonaspecificcarrier
Thecarrierthatcanbeusedbytransmittersisfixed.Inthiscase,foreachtransmittericontainingthereceiverinitscalculation
areaandusingtheselectedcarrier,Atollcalculatesthepilotqualityatthereceiveronthiscarriericgiven.Then,itdetermines
thebestservingtransmitterBSusingthecarriericgiven( Q pilot ic given )andcalculatesthebestpilotqualityreceivedwitha
BS

Resulting
ic given
fixedcelledgecoverageprobability, Q pilot

Atolldisplaysthebestpilotqualityreceivedwithafixedcelledgecoverageprobability.
2ndcase:Analysisbasedonthebestcarrierofallfrequencybands
Atoll proceeds as in point predictions. It determines the best carrier of each transmitter i containing the receiver in its
calculationareaandusingafrequencybandsupportedbythereceiversterminal.Thebestcarrierselectiondependsonthe
optionselectedforthesiteequipment(ULminimumnoise,DLminimumpower,random,sequential)andisbasedontheUL
loadpercentageandthedownlinktotalpowerofcells(simulationresultsorcellproperties).Atollcalculatesthepilotquality
atthereceiverfromthesetransmittersontheirbestcarrieranddeterminesthebestservingtransmitterBSonitsbestcarrier
icBS ( Q pilot ic BS ). Then, it calculates the best pilot quality received with a fixed cell edge coverage probability,
BS

Resulting
Q pilot
ic BS

Atolldisplaysthebestpilotqualityreceivedwithafixedcelledgecoverageprobability.
3rdcase:Analysisbasedonthebestcarrierofanyfrequencyband(formultibandterminalswithprioritydefinedonfrequency
bandsonly)
Thefrequencybandthatcanbeusedisfixed.Atolldeterminesthebestcarrierofeachtransmittericontainingthereceiver
initscalculationareaandusingtheselectedfrequencyband.Thebestcarrierselectiondependsontheoptionselectedfor
thesiteequipment(ULminimumnoise,DLminimumpower,random,sequential)andisbasedontheULloadpercentageand
thedownlinktotalpowerofcells(simulationresultsorcellproperties).Then,Atollcalculatesthepilotqualityatthereceiver
from these transmitters on their best carrier and determines the best serving transmitter BS on its best carrier icBS
( Q pilot ic BS ). Then, it calculates the best pilot quality received with a fixed cell edge coverage probability,
BS

Resulting
Q pilot
ic BS

Atolldisplaysthebestpilotqualityreceivedwithafixedcelledgecoverageprobability.

298

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

4.5.2.1.1

PredictionStudyInputs
ThePilotQualityAnalysisdependsonthedownlinktotaltransmittedpowerofcells.Thisparametercanbeeitherasimulation
output,orauserdefinedcellinput.Inthelastcase,whennovalueisdefinedintheCellstableforthetotaltransmittedpower,
Atollconsiders50%ofthemaximumpowerasdefaultvalue(i.e.40dBmifthemaximumpowerissetto43 dBm).

4.5.2.1.2

StudyDisplayOptions
Singlecolour
Resulting

Atoll displays a coverage if Q pilot

req

ic Q pilot . Coverage consists of a single layer with a unique colour

req

( ic = ic BS oric given ). Q pilot isatargetvaluedefinedintheMobilitytablebytheuser.

Colourpertransmitter
Resulting

Atolldisplaysacoverageif Q pilot

req

ic Q pilot ( ic = ic BS oric given ).Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithassociated

colours.Thereisalayerpertransmitterwithnointersectionbetweenlayers.Layercolouristhecolourassignedtothebest
servingtransmitterBS.
Colourpermobility
Inthiscase,receiverisnotcompletelydefinedandnomobilityisassigned.
CoverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperuserdefinedmobilitydefinedinMobilitysubfolder.Foreachlayer,area
Resulting

iscoveredif Q pilot

req

ic Q pilot ( ic = ic BS oric given ).Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersections

betweenlayers.
Colourperprobability
Thisdisplayoptionisavailableonlyifanalysisisbasedonallsimulationsinagroup(i.e.ifyouselectagroupofsimulations
andtheAlloptionintheConditiontabofpredictionproperties).Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperuser
defined probability level defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if
Resulting

Q pilot

req

ic Q pilot ( ic = ic BS oric given ) in the required number of simulations. Each layer is assigned a colour and

displayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.
Colourpercelledgecoverageprobability
Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperuserdefinedcelledgecoverageprobability,p,definedintheDisplaytab
Resulting

(Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q pilot

req

ic p Q pilot ( ic = ic BS oric given ). Each layer is

assignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.
Colourperqualitylevel(Ec/I0)
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per userdefined quality threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction
Resulting

properties).Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif Q pilot

ic Q pilot threshold ( ic = ic BS oric given ).Eachlayerisassigned

acolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.
Colourperqualitymargin(Ec/I0margin)
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per userdefined quality margin defined in the Display tab (Prediction
Resulting

properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q pilot

req

ic Q pilot Q pilot m arg in ( ic = ic BS oric given ). Each layer is

assignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.
Colourperpilotsignallevel(Ec)
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per userdefined pilot signal level defined in the Display tab (Prediction
Resulting

properties).Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif Q pilot

ic Q pilot threshold ( ic = ic BS oric given ).Eachlayerisassigned

acolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

4.5.2.2 DownlinkServiceAreaAnalysis
Asinpointpredictions,Atollcalculatestrafficchannelqualityatthereceiverforeachcell(k,ic)(withic=icBSoricgiven)inthe
receiversactiveset.Nopowercontrolisperformedasinsimulations.Here,Atolldeterminesdownlinktrafficchannelquality

299

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

atthereceiverforamaximumallowedtrafficchannelpowerfortransmitters.Then,thetotaldownlinktrafficchannelquality
DL

( Q MAX ic )isevaluatedafterrecombination.
Bestserverandactivesetdeterminationisperformedasinpointprediction(ASanalysis).

Atolldisplaystrafficchannelqualityatthereceiverfortransmittersinactivesetonthecarrieric( ic BS or ic given ).
Forfurtherdetailsofcalculationformulasandmethods,see"DownlinkR99SubMenu"onpage 286.

4.5.2.2.1

PredictionStudyInputs
TheDownlinkServiceAreaAnalysisdependsonthedownlinktotaltransmittedpowerofcells.Thisparametercanbeeither
asimulationoutput,orauserdefinedcellinput.Inthelastcase,whennovalueisdefinedintheCellstableforthetotal
transmittedpower,Atollconsiders50%ofthemaximumpowerasdefaultvalue(i.e.40dBmifthemaximumpowerissetto
43 dBm).

4.5.2.2.2

StudyDisplayOptions
Singlecolour
DL

DL

DL

DL

DL

Atoll displays a coverage with a unique colour if Q MAX ic Q req (or Q MAX ic Q req Q req if compressed mode is
activated).
DL

Q req isthedownlinktrafficqualitytargetdefinedbytheuserforagivenreceptionequipment,agivenR99bearerandagiven
mobilitytype.ThisparameterisavailableintheR99BearerSelectiontable.
DL

Q req istheDLEb/Nttargetincrease;thisparameterisuserdefinedintheGlobalparameters.
Colourpertransmitter
DL

DL

DL

DL

DL

Atoll displays a coverage if Q MAX ic Q req (or Q MAX ic Q req Q req if compressed mode is activated). Coverage
consistsofseverallayerswithassociatedcolours.Thereisalayerpertransmitterwithnointersectionbetweenlayers.Layer
colouristhecolourassignedtobestservingtransmitter.
Colourpermobility
Inthiscase,receiverisnotcompletelydefinedandnomobilityisassigned.Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerper
DL

DL

userdefined mobility defined in Mobility subfolder. For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ic Q req (or
DL

DL

DL

Q MAX ic Q req Q req ifcompressedmodeisactivated).Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersections

betweenlayers.
Colourperservice
Inthiscase,receiverisnotcompletelydefinedandnoserviceisassigned.Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerper
DL

DL

userdefined service defined in Services subfolder. For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ic Q req (or
DL

DL

DL

Q MAX ic Q req Q req ifcompressedmodeisactivated).Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersections

betweenlayers.
Colourperprobability
Thisdisplayoptionisavailableonlyifanalysisisbasedonallsimulationsinagroup(i.e.ifyouselectagroupofsimulations
andtheAlloptionintheConditiontabofpredictionproperties).Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperuser
DL

DL

definedprobabilityleveldefinedintheDisplaytab(Predictionproperties).Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif Q MAX ic Q req

intherequirednumberofsimulations.Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

300

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Colourpercelledgecoverageprobability
Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperuserdefinedcelledgecoverageprobability,p,definedintheDisplaytab
DL

DL

DL

DL

DL

(Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ic p Q req (or Q MAX ic Q req Q req if compressed
modeisactivated).Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.
Colourpermaximumqualitylevel(maxEb/Nt)
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per userdefined quality threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction
DL

properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ic Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
intersectionsbetweenlayers.
Colourpereffectivequalitylevel(EffectiveEb/Nt)
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per userdefined quality threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction
DL

properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q eff ic Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
DL

DL

DL

DL

DL

DL

DL

intersections between layers. Q eff ic = min Q MAX ic Q req (or Q eff ic = min Q MAX ic Q req Q req when
compressedmodeisactivated).
Colourperqualitymargin(Eb/Ntmargin)
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per userdefined quality margin defined in the Display tab (Prediction
DL

DL

DL

DL

DL

properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ic Q req M arg in (or Q MAX ic Q req Q req M arg in when
compressedmodeisactivated).Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.
Colourperrequiredpower
req

Atollcalculatesthedownlinkrequiredpower, P tch ic ,asfollows:

DL

Q req
req
max
P tch ic = --------------------- P tch
DL
Q MAX ic
Where
DL

Q req istheEb/Nttargetondownlink.Thisparameter,availableintheR99BearerSelectiontable,isuserdefinedforagiven
R99bearer,agivenreceptionequipmentandamobilitytype.
max

P tch isauserdefinedinputforeachbearerrelatedtoaservice.Itcorrespondstothemaximumallowabletrafficchannel
powerforatransmitter.
DL

DL

Q req Q req
req
- P max
Whencompressedmodeisactivated,wehave: P tch ic = -----------------------------tch .
DL
Q MAX ic
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per userdefined required power threshold defined in the Display tab
req

(Predictionproperties).Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif P tch ic Threshold .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayed

withintersectionsbetweenlayers.
Colourperrequiredpowermargin
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per userdefined power margin defined in the Display tab (Prediction
req

max

properties).Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif P tch ic P tch M arg in .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwith

intersectionsbetweenlayers.

4.5.2.3 UplinkServiceAreaAnalysis
Asinpointprediction,Atollcalculatesuplinktrafficchannelqualityfromreceiverforeachcell(k,ic)(withic=icBSoricgiven)in
receiver active set. No power control simulation is performed. Atoll determines uplink traffic channel quality at the
UL

transmitterforthemaximumterminalpowerallowed.Then,thetotaluplinktrafficchannelquality( Q MAX ic )isevaluated

withrespecttoreceiverhandoverstatus.

301

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

Bestserverandactivesetdeterminationisperformedasinpointprediction(ASanalysis).

Atolldisplaystrafficchannelqualityattransmittersinactivesetonthecarrieric( ic BS or ic given )receivedfromthereceiver.

Forfurtherdetailsofcalculationsformulasandmethods,see"UplinkR99SubMenu"onpage 289.

4.5.2.3.1

PredictionStudyInputs
TheUplinkServiceAreaAnalysisdependsontheULloadfactorofcells.Thisparametercanbeeitherasimulationoutput,or
auserdefinedcellinput.Inthelastcase,whennovalueisdefinedintheCellstablefortheuplinkloadfactor,Atolluses50%
asdefaultvalue.

4.5.2.3.2

StudyDisplayOptions
Singlecolour
UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

Atolldisplaysacoverageif Q MAX ic Q req (or Q MAX ic Q req Q req ifcompressedmodeisactivated).Coveragecolour

isunique.
UL

Q req isdefinedforareceptionequipment,aR99bearerandamobilitytype.ThisparameterisavailableintheR99Bearer
Selectiontable.
UL

Q req istheULEb/Nttargetincrease;thisparameterisuserdefinedintheGlobalparameters.
Colourpertransmitter
UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

Atoll displays a coverage if Q MAX ic Q req (or Q MAX ic Q req Q req if compressed mode is activated). Coverage
consistsofseverallayerswithassociatedcolours.Thereisalayerpertransmitterwithnointersectionbetweenlayers.Layer
colouristhecolourassignedtobestservertransmitter.
Colourpermobility
Inthiscase,receiverisnotcompletelydefinedandnomobilityisassigned.Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerper
UL

UL

userdefined mobility defined in Mobility subfolder. For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ic Q req (or
UL

UL

UL

Q MAX ic Q req Q req ifcompressedmodeisactivated).Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersections

betweenlayers.
Colourperservice
Inthiscase,receiverisnotcompletelydefinedandnoserviceisassigned.Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerper
UL

UL

userdefined service defined in Services subfolder. For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ic Q req (or
UL

UL

UL

Q MAX ic Q req Q req ifcompressedmodeisactivated).Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersections

betweenlayers.
Colourperprobability
Thisdisplayoptionisavailableonlyifanalysisisbasedonallsimulationsinagroup(i.e.ifyouselectagroupofsimulations
andtheAlloptionintheConditiontabofpredictionproperties).Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperuser
UL

UL

definedprobabilityleveldefinedintheDisplaytab(Predictionproperties).Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif Q MAX ic Q req

UL

UL

UL

(or Q MAX ic Q req Q req ifcompressedmodeisactivated)intherequirednumberofsimulations.Eachlayerisassigned

acolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.
Colourpermaximumqualitylevel(MaxEb/Nt)
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per userdefined quality threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction
UL

properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ic Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
intersectionsbetweenlayers.

302

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Colourpereffectivequalitylevel(EffectiveEb/Nt)
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per userdefined quality threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction
UL

properties).Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif Q effective ic Threshold .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwith

intersectionsbetweenlayers.
UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

Q eff ic = min Q MAX ic Q req (or Q eff ic = min Q MAX ic Q req Q req whencompressedmodeisactivated).
Colourperqualitymargin(Eb/Ntmargin)
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per userdefined quality margin defined in the Display tab (Prediction
UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ic Q req M arg in (or Q MAX ic Q req Q req M arg in if
compressedmodeisactivated).Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.
Colourperrequiredpower
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per userdefined power threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction
req

properties).Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif P term R99 ic Threshold .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwith

intersectionsbetweenlayers.
Colourperrequiredpowermargin
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per userdefined power margin defined in the Display tab (Prediction
req

max

properties).Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif P term R99 ic P term M arg in .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayed

withintersectionsbetweenlayers.
Colourpersofthandovergain
CoverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerpersofthandovergainvaluedefinedintheDisplaytab(Predictionproperties).
UL

Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif G SHO Threshold .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetween

layers.

4.5.2.4 DownlinkTotalNoiseAnalysis
Atolldeterminesthedownlinktotalnoisegeneratedbycells.

Ptot icadj
DL

DL

N tot ic =

Tx

P Transmitted ic i

txj j
+ -------------------------------------- + N 0
Ptot ic + -----------------------------------Tx
Tx m
RF ic ic adj
L
ICP
DL

txj j

ni

total

term

ici ic

DL

Downlinknoiserise, NRDL ic ,iscalculatedfromthedownlinktotalnoise, N tot ,asfollows:

term

N0
-
NR DL ic = 10 log ----------- N DL
tot

4.5.2.4.1

StudyInputs
TheDownlinkTotalNoiseAnalysisdependsonthedownlinktotaltransmittedpowerofcells.Thisparametercanbeeithera
simulation output, or a userdefined cell input. In the last case, when no value is defined in the Cells table for the total
transmittedpower,Atollconsiders50%ofthemaximumpowerasdefaultvalue(i.e.40dBmifthemaximumpowerissetto
43 dBm).

4.5.2.4.2

AnalysisontheBestCarrier
Ifthebestcarrierisselected,AtolldeterminesDLtotalnoiseforthebestcarrier.Then,allowstheusertochoosedifferent
colours.
Colourperminimumnoiselevel
CoverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperuserdefinednoiseleveldefinedintheDisplaytab(Predictionproperties).
DL

Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif minN tot ic Threshold .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersections

ic

betweenlayers.

303

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

Colourpermaximumnoiselevel
CoverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperuserdefinednoiseleveldefinedintheDisplaytab(Predictionproperties).
DL

Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif maxN tot ic Threshold .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersections

ic

betweenlayers.
Colourperaveragenoiselevel
CoverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperuserdefinednoiseleveldefinedintheDisplaytab(Predictionproperties).
DL

For each layer, area is covered if averageN tot ic Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
ic

intersectionsbetweenlayers.
Colourperminimumnoiserise
Atolldisplaysbinswhere minNR DL ic Threshold .Coverageconsistsofseveralareaswithanareaperuserdefinednoise
ic

risethresholddefinedintheDisplaytab.Eachareaisassignedacolourwithintersectionsbetweenareas.
Colourpermaximumnoiserise
Atolldisplaysbinswhere maxNR DL ic Threshold .Coverageconsistsofseveralareaswithanareaperuserdefinednoise
ic

risethresholddefinedintheDisplaytab.Eachareaisassignedacolourwithintersectionsbetweenareas.
Colourperaveragenoiserise
Atolldisplaysbinswhere averageNR DL ic Threshold .Coverageconsistsofseveralareaswithanareaperuserdefined
ic

noiserisethresholddefinedintheDisplaytab.Eachareaisassignedacolourwithintersectionsbetweenareas.

4.5.2.4.3

AnalysisonaSpecificCarrier
Whenonlyonecarrierisanalysed,AtolldeterminesDLtotalnoiseorDLnoiseriseonthiscarrier.Inthiscase,thedisplayed
coverageisthesameforanyselecteddisplaypernoiselevel(average,minimum,maximum)oranydisplaypernoiserise
(average,minimum,maximum).
Colourpernoiselevel
CoverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperuserdefinednoiseleveldefinedintheDisplaytab(Predictionproperties).
DL

For each layer, area is covered if N tot ic Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections
betweenlayers.
Colourpernoiserise
Atolldisplaysbinswhere NR DL ic Threshold .Coverageconsistsofseveralareaswithanareaperuserdefinednoiserise
thresholddefinedintheDisplaytab.Eachareaisassignedacolourwithintersectionsbetweenareas.

4.5.2.5 HSDPAPredictionStudy
WhencalculatingtheHSDPAcoverageprediction,eitheryoucantakeallthepossibleHSDPAradiobearersintoconsideration,
oryoucanstudyacertainHSDPAradiobearer.Then,availabledisplayoptionsdependonwhatyouhaveselected.
WhenconsideringalltheHSDPAradiobearers,youcansetdisplayparameters:

ToanalysetheuplinkanddownlinkADPCHqualitiesonthemap,
ToanalysetheHSSCCHquality/power,
TomodelfastlinkadaptationforasingleHSDPAbeareruserorforadefinednumberofHSDPAbearerusers.

WhenstudyingacertainHSDPAradiobearer,youcandisplayareaswhereacertainRLCpeakthroughputisavailablewith
differentcelledgecoverageprobabilities(i.e.theprobabilityofhavingacertainRLCpeakthroughput).Thistypeofanalysisis
notrelevantwhenmodellingMCHSPAandDBMCHSPAusers.
LetusassumeeachpixelonthemapcorrespondstooneorseveraluserswithHSDPAcapableterminal,mobilityandHSDPA
service.Theuserdoesnotcreateanyinterference.Eachusermaybeusingaspecificcarrierorthebestcarrier.ForDCHSPA,
MCHSPAandDBMCHSPAusers,theanalysismustbemadeonthebestcarrier.IfyouhaveselectedaDCHSPAuserora
MCHSPAuser,select"Best(All/Main/Second/Thirdband)"asthecarrier.Forinformationonthecarrierselection,see"MC
HSPAUsers"onpage 294.ForaDBMCHSPAuser,select"Best(Allbands)"asthecarrier.Forinformationonthecarrier
selection,see"DBMCHSPAUsers"onpage 294.

304

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

NotethattheHSDPAserviceareaislimitedbythepilotquality,theADPCHqualityandtheHSSCCHquality.

4.5.2.5.1

PredictionStudyInputs
ParametersusedasinputfortheHSDPApredictionstudyare:

TheavailableHSDPApowerofthecell,
Thedownlinktotaltransmittedpowerofthecell,
ThenumberofHSDPAbeareruserswithinthecellifthestudyiscalculatedforseveralusers.

Theseparameterscanbeeithersimulationoutputs,oruserdefinedcellinputs.Inthelastcase,whennovalueisdefinedin
theCellstableforthetotaltransmittedpowerandthenumberofHSDPAbearerusers,Atollusesthefollowingdefaultvalues:

Totaltransmittedpower=50%ofthemaximumpower(i.e,40dBmifthemaximumpowerissetto43 dBm)
NumberofHSDPAbearerusers=1

Ontheotherhand,nodefaultvalueisusedfortheavailableHSDPApower;thisparametermustbedefinedbytheuser.

4.5.2.5.2

StudyDisplayOptions
WhenconsideringalltheHSDPAradiobearers,severaldisplayoptionsareavailableinthestudypropertiesdialogue.Theycan
beregroupedinfourcategoriesaccordingtotheobjectiveofthestudy:

ToanalysetheuplinkanddownlinkADPCHqualitiesonthemap,
ToanalysetheHSSCCHquality/power,
TomodelfastlinkadaptationforasingleHSDPAbeareruser,
TomodelfastlinkadaptationforadefinednumberofHSDPAbearerusers.

WhenstudyingacertainHSDPAradiobearer,onlyonedisplayoptionisavailable.ItallowsyoutodisplaywhereacertainRLC
peakthroughputisavailablewithdifferentcelledgecoverageprobabilities.
AnalysisofULAndDLADPCHQualities

ColourperMaxADPCHEb/NtDL
DL

AtolldisplaystheADPCHqualityatthereceiver( Q MAX ic )forthebestserveronthecarrieric( ic BS or ic given ).Nopower

controlisperformedasinsimulations.Here,Atolldeterminesdownlinktrafficchannelqualityatthereceiverforamaximum
trafficchannelpowerallowedforthebestserver.
Forfurtherdetailsofcalculationformulasandmethods,pleaserefertoPredictionstudies:PointanalysisASanalysistab
Downlinksubmenupart.
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per userdefined quality threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction
DL

properties).Foreach layer,area iscoveredif Q MAX ic Threshold .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayed with

intersectionsbetweenlayers.

ColourperMaxADPCHEb/NtUL
UL

Atoll displays the ADPCH quality at the best server ( Q MAX ic ) on the carrier ic ( ic BS or ic given ). No power control is
performedasinsimulations.Here,Atolldeterminesuplinktrafficchannelqualityatthereceiverforamaximumterminal
powerallowed.
Forfurtherdetailsofcalculationsformulasandmethods,pleaserefertoPointanalysisASanalysistabUplinksubmenu
part.
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per userdefined quality threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction
UL

properties).Foreach layer,area iscoveredif Q MAX ic Threshold .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayed with

intersectionsbetweenlayers.
AnalysisofTheHSSCCHQuality/Power

ColourperHSSCCHPower

ThisdisplayoptionisrelevantincaseofdynamicHSSCCHpowerallocationonly.Inthiscase,Atolldisplaysoneachpixelthe
HSSCCHpowerperHSSCCHchannel.Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperthreshold.Foreachlayer,areais
coveredif P HS SCCH ic Threshold .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

ColourperHSSCCHEc/Nt

ThisdisplayoptionisrelevantincaseofstaticHSSCCHpowerallocationonly.Inthiscase,AtolldisplaysoneachpixeltheHS
SCCH quality per HSSCCH channel. Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per threshold. For each layer, area is
Ec
coveredif ------ ic
Threshold .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.
Nt
HS SCCH

305

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

FastLinkAdaptationModellingForASingleUser
Whenyoucalculatethestudywiththefollowingdisplayoptions,Atollconsidersoneuseroneachpixelanddeterminesthe
bestHSDPAbearerthattheusercanobtain.ForMCHSPAandDBMCHSPAusers,AtolldeterminesthebestHSDPAbearers
thattheusercanobtainineachservingcell.Oneachpixel,theuserisprocessedasifheistheonlyuserinthecelli.e.heuses
theentireHSDPApoweravailableinthecell.
Forfurtherinformationonthefastlinkadaptationmodelling,see"FastLinkAdaptationModelling"onpage 238.

ColourperHSPDSCHEc/Nt

AtolldisplaysoneachpixeltheHSPDSCHquality.ForMCHSPAandDBMCHSPAusers,itcorrespondstotheHSPDSCHEc/
Ntofthebestservingcell.Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperthreshold.Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif
Ec ---- Threshold .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.
ic
Nt
HS PDSCH

ColourperCQI

AtolldisplayseithertheCPICHCQI(seethecalculationdetailin"CPICHCQIDetermination"onpage 240)whentheselected
optioninGlobalparameters(HSDPApart)isCQIbasedonCPICHquality,ortheHSPDSCHCQI(seethecalculationdetailin
thesection10.7.1.2.2)whenconsideringtheCQIbasedonHSPDSCHqualityoption.
ForMCHSPAandDBMCHSPAusers,itcorrespondstotheCQIofthebestservingcell.
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per CQI threshold ( CQI threshold ). For each layer, area is covered if
CQI CQI threshold .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

ColourperPeakMACThroughput
DL

AtolldisplaysthePeakMACthroughput( TP P M AC )providedoneachpixel.ThePeakMACthroughputiscalculatedasfollows:
DL

TP P M AC =

c Servingcells

S block c
--------------------T TTI

Where,
S block c isthetransportblocksize(inkbits)oftheHSDPAbearerselectedinthecell,c,fortheuser;itisdefinedforeach
HSDPAbearerintheHSDPARadioBearerstable.
3

T TTI istheTTIduration,i.e. 2 10 s (2000TTIinonesecond).Thisvalueisspecifiedbythe3GPP.

DL

CoverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperpossiblePeakMACthroughput( TP P M AC ).Foreachlayer,areaiscovered
if the Peak MAC throughput exceeds the userdefined thresholds. Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
intersectionsbetweenlayers.

ColourperEffectiveMACThroughput
DL

AtolldisplaystheEffectiveMACthroughput( TP E M AC )providedoneachpixel.TheEffectiveMACthroughputiscalculatedas
follows:
DL

TP E M AC =

c Servingcells

S block c
-------------------------T TTI TTI

Where,
S block c isthetransportblocksize(inkbits)oftheselectedHSDPAbearerinthecell,c;itisdefinedforeachHSDPAbearer
intheHSDPARadioBearerstable.
TTI istheminimumnumberofTTI(TransmissionTimeInterval)betweentwoTTIused;itisdefinedintheterminaluser
equipmentcategoryproperties.
3

T TTI istheTTIduration,i.e. 2 10 s (2000TTIinonesecond).Thisvalueisspecifiedbythe3GPP.

DL

CoverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperpossibleEffectiveMACthroughput( TP E M AC ).Foreachlayer,areais
coverediftheEffectiveMACthroughputexceedstheuserdefinedthresholds.Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayed
withintersectionsbetweenlayers.

306

ColourperPeakRLCThroughput

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

DL

AtolldeterminesthepeakRLCthroughputprovidedbytheservingcell,c,inthedownlink( TP P RLC c ).Thisonecorresponds

DL

tothepeakRLCthroughputoftheselectedHSDPAbearer( TP P RLC I HSDPABearer ).

DL

DL

ForanHSDPAuser,wehave: TP P RLC = TP P RLC c

ForMCHSPAandDBMCHSPAusers,thepeakRLCthroughputprovidedtotheuseriscalculatedasfollows:

DL

TP P RLC =

DL

TPP RLC c

c Servingcell
DL

CoverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperpossibleRLCpeakthroughput( TP P RLC ).Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif

thepeakRLCthroughputcanbeprovided.Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

ColourperEffectiveRLCThroughput
DL

AtolldisplaystheEffectiveRLCthroughput( TP E RLC )providedoneachpixel.TheEffectiveRLCthroughputiscalculatedas

follows:
DL

TP P RLC
DL
TP E RLC = ----------------TTI
Where TTI istheminimumnumberofTTI(TransmissionTimeInterval)betweentwoTTIused;itisdefinedintheterminal
userequipmentcategoryproperties.
DL

Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per possible Effective RLC throughput ( TP E RLC ). For each layer, area is
coverediftheEffectiveRLCthroughputexceedstheuserdefinedthresholds.Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayed
withintersectionsbetweenlayers.

ColourperAverageEffectiveRLCThroughput
DL

AtolldisplaystheaverageeffectiveRLCthroughput( TPAv E RLC )providedoneachpixel.

ForanHSDPAuser,wehave:
DL

TP P RLC c 1 BLER HSDPA

DL
TP Av E RLC = -----------------------------------------------------------------------TTI
ForMCHSPAandDBMCHSPAusers,wehave:

DL

DL

TP P RLC c 1 BLER HSDPA

Servingcells
TPAv E RLC = c---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TTI

Where,
BLER HSDPA isreadinthequalitygraphdefinedforthetripletreceptionequipmentselectedbearermobility(HSDPAQuality
GraphstabintheReceptionequipmentproperties).ThisgraphdescribesthevariationofBLERasafunctionofthemeasured
quality(HSPDSCHEc/Nt).KnowingtheHSPDSCHEc/Nt,AtollfindsthecorrespondingBLER.
TTI istheminimumnumberofTTI(TransmissionTimeInterval)betweentwoTTIused;itisdefinedintheterminaluser
equipmentcategoryproperties.
DL

CoverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperpossibleaverageeffectiveRLCthroughput( TP Av E RLC ).Foreachlayer,

areaiscoverediftheaverageeffectiveRLCthroughputexceedstheuserdefinedthresholds.Eachlayerisassignedacolour
anddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

ColourperApplicationThroughput
DL

Atoll displays the application throughput ( TP A ) provided on each pixel. The application throughput represents the net
throughputafterdeductionofcoding(redundancy,overhead,addressing,etc.).
Itiscalculatedasfollows:
DL

DL

TP A = TP Av E RLC f TP Scaling TP Offset

Where:
DL

TP Av E RLC istheaverageeffectiveRLCthroughput.

307

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

BLER HSDPA isreadinthequalitygraphdefinedforthetripletreceptionequipmentselectedbearermobility(HSDPAQuality

GraphstabintheReceptionequipmentproperties).ThisgraphdescribesthevariationofBLERasafunctionofthemeasured
quality(HSPDSCHEc/Nt).KnowingtheHSPDSCHEc/Nt,AtollfindsthecorrespondingBLER.
f TP Scaling and TP Offset respectivelyrepresentthescalingfactorbetweentheapplicationthroughputandtheRLC(RadioLink
Control) throughput and the throughput offset. These two parameters model the header information and other
supplementarydatathatdoesnotappearattheapplicationlevel.Theyaredefinedintheserviceproperties.
TTI istheminimumnumberofTTI(TransmissionTimeInterval)betweentwoTTIused;itisdefinedintheterminaluser
equipmentcategoryproperties.
DL

Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperpossibleapplicationthroughput( TP A ).Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif
the application throughput exceeds the userdefined thresholds. Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
intersectionsbetweenlayers.
FastLinkAdaptationModellingForSeveralUsers
Whenyoucalculatethestudywiththefollowingdisplayoptions,Atollconsidersseveralusersperpixelanddeterminesthe
bestHSDPAbearerthateachusercanobtain.Inthiscase,thecellavailableHSDPApowerissharedbetweenHSDPAbearer
users.Whenthecoveragepredictionisnotbasedonasimulation,thenumberofHSDPAbearerusersistakenfromthecell
properties.Thedisplayedresultsofthecoveragepredictionwillbeanaverageresultforoneuser.
ForfurtherinformationontheHSDPAbearerallocationprocesswhenthereareseveralusers,see"HSDPABearerAllocation
Process"onpage 235Forfurtherinformationonthefastlinkadaptationmodelling,see"FastLinkAdaptationModelling"on
page 238.

ColourperEffectiveMACThroughputperUser
DL

AtolldisplaystheaverageEffectiveMACthroughputperuser( TP E M AC Av )providedoneachpixel.TheaverageEffective
MACthroughputperuseriscalculatedasfollows:
n HSDPA

DL

TP E M AC x

DL

x=1
TP E M AC Av = ---------------------------------------------Max n HSDPA c
c Servingcells x

Where,
n HSDPA c isthenumberofHSDPAbeareruserswithinthecell,c.
DL

TP E M AC x istheEffectiveMACthroughputofeachHSDPAbeareruser.Forfurtherinformationonthecalculationofthe
EffectiveMACthroughput,see"ColourperEffectiveMACThroughput"onpage 306.
DL

CoverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperpossibleaverageEffectiveMACthroughputperuser( TP E M AC Av ).For
eachlayer,areaiscoverediftheaverageEffectiveMACthroughputperuserexceedstheuserdefinedthresholds.Eachlayer
isassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

ColourperRLCThroughputperUser
DL

AtolldisplaystheaverageeffectiveRLCthroughputperuser( TP E R LC Av )providedoneachpixel.TheaverageeffectiveRLC
throughputperuseriscalculatedasfollows:
n HSDPA

DL

TP E R LC x

DL

x=1
TP E R LC Av = ----------------------------------------n HSDPA

Where,
n HSDPA isthenumberofHSDPAbeareruserswithinthecell.
DL

TP E R LC x istheEffectiveRLCthroughputofeachHSDPAbeareruser.Forfurther informationonthecalculation ofthe

EffectiveRLCthroughput,see"ColourperEffectiveRLCThroughput"onpage 307.

308

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

DL

CoverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperpossibleaverageeffectiveRLCthroughputperuser( TPE R LC Av ).Foreach

layer,areaiscoverediftheaverageeffectiveRLCthroughputperuserexceedstheuserdefinedthresholds.Eachlayeris
assignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

ColourperApplicationThroughputperUser
DL

Atoll displays the average application throughput per user ( TP A Av ) provided on each pixel. The average application
throughputperuseriscalculatedasfollows:
n HSDPA

DL

TP A x

DL

x=1
TP A Av = ---------------------------------n HSDPA

Where,
n HSDPA isthenumberofHSDPAbeareruserswithinthecell.
DL

TP A x is the application throughput of each HSDPA bearer user. For further information on the calculation of the
applicationthroughput,see"ColourperApplicationThroughput"onpage 307.
DL

Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperpossibleaverageapplicationthroughputperuser( TPA Av ).Foreach

layer, area is covered if the average application throughput per user exceeds the userdefined thresholds. Each layer is
assignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.
ProbabilityofHavingaCertainPeakRLCThroughput
ThisresultcanbeobtainedonlyifyouhaveselectedanHSDPAradiobearerintheConditiontab.

ColourperCellEdgeCoverageProbability

AtollshowsareaswheretheselectedHSDPAradiobearerisavailablewithdifferentcelledgecoverageprobabilities.Coverage
consistsofseverallayerswithalayerpercelledgecoverageprobabilitydefinedintheDisplaytab.Foreachlayer,areais
covered if the selected HSDPA radio bearer is available. Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections
betweenlayers.

4.5.2.6 HSUPAPredictionStudy
AdedicatedHSUPAstudyisavailablewithdifferentcalculationanddisplayoptions.Atolldeterminesoneachpixelthebest
HSUPA bearer that can be obtained; it can consider either a single HSPA user or several ones on each pixel. For further
informationontheHSUPAbearerselection,see"HSUPABearerAllocationProcess"onpage 257.Bycalculatingthisstudywith
suitabledisplayoptions,itispossible:

Toanalysethepowerrequiredbytheselectedterminal,
ToanalysetherequiredEDPDCHquality,
Toanalysepeakandeffectivethroughputs.

LetusassumeeachpixelonthemapcorrespondstooneorseveraluserswithHSUPAcapableterminal,mobilityandHSUPA
service.Eachusermaybeusingaspecificcarrierorthebestcarrier.Moreover,hedoesnotcreateanyinterference.ForDC
HSPA,MCHSPAandDBMCHSPAusers,theanalysismustbemadeonthebestcarrier.IfyouhaveselectedaDCHSPAuser
or a MCHSPA user, select "Best (All/Main/Second/Third band)" as the carrier. For a DBMCHSPA user, select "Best (All
bands)"asthecarrier.Forinformationonthecarrierselection,see"MCHSPAandDBMCHSPAUsers"onpage 297.
NotethattheHSUPAserviceareaislimitedbythepilotqualityandtheADPCHEDPCCHquality.

4.5.2.6.1

PredictionStudyInputs
ParametersusedasinputfortheHSUPApredictionstudyare:

ThecellULloadfactor,
ThecellULreusefactor,
ThecellULloadfactorduetoHSUPA,
ThemaximumcellULloadfactor,
ThenumberofHSUPAbeareruserswithinthecellifthestudyiscalculatedforseveralusers.

Theseparameterscanbeeithersimulationoutputs,oruserdefinedcellinputs.Inthelastcase,Whennovalueisdefinedin
theCellstable,Atollusesthefollowingdefaultvalues:

Uplinkloadfactor=50%
Uplinkreusefactor=1
UplinkloadfactorduetoHSUPA=0%
Maximumuplinkloadfactor=75%

309

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

4.5.2.6.2

Forsk2014

NumberofHSUPAbeareusers=1

CalculationOptions
AtollcancalculatetheHSUPAcoveragepredictioninoneoftwoways:

HSUPAresourcescanbededicatedtoasingleuser:Atollconsidersoneuseroneachpixelanddeterminesthebest
HSUPAbearerthattheusercanobtain.Oneachpixel,theuserisprocessedasifheistheonlyuserinthecelli.e.he
usestheentireremainingloadafterallocatingcapacitytoallR99users.
HSUPAresourcescanbesharedbyHSUPAusersdefinedorcalculatedpercell:AtollconsidersseveralHSUPAbearer
usersperpixel.AfterallocatingcapacitytoallR99users,theremainingloadofthecellwillbesharedequallybetween
alltheHSUPAbearerusers.Whenthecoveragepredictionisnotbasedonasimulation,thenumberofHSUPAbearer
usersistakenfromthecellproperties.Thedisplayedresultsofthecoveragepredictionwillbeanaverageresultfor
oneuser.

ForMCHSPAandDBMCHSPAusers,AtolldeterminesthebestHSUPAbearersthattheusercanobtainineachservingcell
withoutexceedingthemaximumpowerallowedbytheterminal.

4.5.2.6.3

DisplayOptions
Thefollowingdisplayoptionsareavailableinthepredictionpropertydialogue.
ColourperRequiredEDPDCHEc/Nt
AtolldisplaysoneachpixeltheEDPDCHEc/NtrequiredtoobtaintheselectedHSUPAbearer.ForMCHSPAandDBMCHSPA
users,thiscorrespondstotheEDPDCHEc/Ntofthebestservingcell.Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerper
req

Ec
threshold.Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif ------
.Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwith
Nt E DPDCH Threshold
intersectionsbetweenlayers.
ColourperRequiredTerminalPower
AtolldisplaysoneachpixeltheterminalpowerrequiredtoobtaintheselectedHSUPAbearer.Therequiredterminalpower
is calculated from the required EDPDCH Ec/Nt. For MCHSPA and DBMCHSPA users, this corresponds to the required
terminalpowerforthebestservingcell.Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperthreshold.Foreachlayer,areais
req

coveredif P term Threshold .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

ColourperPeakMACThroughput
UL

AtolldisplaysthePeakMACthroughput( TP P M AC )providedoneachpixel.ThePeakMACthroughputiscalculatedasfollows:

UL

UL

S block c

Servingcell
TP P M AC = c----------------------------------------------T TTI

Where,
UL

S block c isthetransportblocksize(inkbits)oftheHSUPAbearerselectedinthecell,c,fortheuser;itisdefinedforeach
HSUPAbearerintheHSUPARadioBearerstable.
T TTI isthedurationofoneTTIfortheselectedHSUPAbearer;itisdefinedforeachHSUPAbearerintheHSUPARadioBearers
table.
UL

CoverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperpossiblePeakMACthroughput( TP P M AC ).Foreachlayer,areaiscovered
if the Peak MAC throughput exceeds the userdefined thresholds. Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
intersectionsbetweenlayers.
ColourperPeakRLCThroughput
UL

AtolldeterminesthepeakRLCthroughputprovidedbytheservingcell,c,intheuplink( TP P RLC c ).Thisonecorresponds

UL

tothepeakRLCthroughputoftheselectedHSUPAbearer( TPP RLC I HSUPABearer ).

UL

ThepeakRLCthroughputprovidedtotheuser( TPP RLC )iscalculatedasfollows:

UL

UL

ForanHSPAuser, TP P RLC = TP P RLC c

310

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

UL

ForDCHSPAandDBMCHSPAusers, TP P RLC =

UL

TP P RLC c

c Serving cell
UL

CoverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperpossibleRLCpeakthroughput( TP P RLC ).Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif

thepeakRLCthroughputcanbeprovided.Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.
ColourperMinimumEffectiveRLCThroughput
UL

Atoll displays the minimum effective RLC throughput ( TP Min E RLC ) provided on each pixel. The minimum effective RLC
throughputcorrespondstotheRLCthroughputobtainedforagivenBLERandthemaximumnumberofretransmissions.
UL

TP P RLC c 1 BLER HSUPA

UL
ForanHSPAuser, TP Min E RLC = -----------------------------------------------------------------------N Rtx
UL

ForDCHSPAandDBMCHSPAusers, TPMin E RLC =

UL

c Serving cell

TP P RLC c 1 BLER HSUPA

------------------------------------------------------------------------N Rtx

Where,
BLER HSUPA istheresidualBLERfortheselecteduplinktransmissionformat(HSUPAbearerwith N Rtx retransmissions).Itis
readinthequalitygraphdefinedforthequartetreceptionequipmentselectedbearernumberofretransmissionsmobility
(HSUPAQualityGraphstabintheReceptionequipmentproperties).ThisgraphdescribesthevariationofBLERasafunction
ofthemeasuredquality(EDPDCHEc/Nt).KnowingtheEDPDCHEc/Nt,AtollfindsthecorrespondingBLER.
N Rtx isthemaximumnumberofretransmissionsfortheselectedHSUPAbearer.ThisfigureisreadintheHSUPABearer
Selectiontable.
UL

CoverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperpossibleminimumeffectiveRLCthroughput( TP Min E RLC ).Foreachlayer,

areaiscoverediftheminimumeffectiveRLCthroughputexceedstheuserdefinedthresholds.Eachlayerisassignedacolour
anddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.
ColourperAverageEffectiveRLCThroughput
WhenHARQ(HybridAutomaticRepeatRequest)isused,therequiredaveragenumberofretransmissionsissmallerandthe
UL

EffectiveRLCthroughputisanaverageeffectiveRLCthroughput( TP Av E RL C ).ThisistheRLCthroughputobtainedforagiven
BLERandtheaveragenumberofretransmissions.Itiscalculatedasfollows:
UL

TP P RLC c 1 BLER HSUPA

UL
ForanHSPAuser, TP Av E RL C = ----------------------------------------------------------------------- N Rtx av
UL

ForDCHSPAandDBMCHSPAusers, TPAv E RL C =

c Servingcell

UL

TP P RLC c 1 BLER HSUPA

------------------------------------------------------------------------ N Rtx av

BLER HSUPA istheresidualBLERfortheselecteduplinktransmissionformat(HSUPAbearerwith N Rtx retransmissions).Itis

readinthequalitygraphdefinedforthequartetreceptionequipmentselectedbearernumberofretransmissionsmobility
(HSUPAQualityGraphstabintheReceptionequipmentproperties).ThisgraphdescribesthevariationofBLERasafunction
ofthemeasuredquality(EDPDCHEc/Nt).KnowingtheEDPDCHEc/Nt,AtollfindsthecorrespondingBLER.
The average number of retransmissions ( N Rtx av ) is determined from early termination probabilities defined for the
selectedHSUPAbearer(intheHSUPABearerSelectiontable).TheEarlyTerminationProbabilitygraphshowstheprobability
of early termination ( p ) as a function of the number of retransmissions ( N Rtx ). Atoll calculates the average number of
retransmissions( N Rtx av )asfollows:
N Rtx

max

p N Rtx p N Rtx 1 N Rtx

=1

Rtx
N Rtx av = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------p N Rtx max
UL

CoverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperpossibleaverageeffectiveRLCthroughput( TP Av E RL C ).Foreachlayer,
areaiscoverediftheminimumeffectiveRLCthroughputexceedstheuserdefinedthresholds.Eachlayerisassignedacolour
anddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

311

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

ColourperApplicationThroughput
UL

Atoll displays the application throughput ( TP A ) provided on each pixel. The application throughput represents the net
throughputafterdeductionofcoding(redundancy,overhead,addressing,etc.).Thisoneiscalculatedasfollows:
UL

TP P RLC c 1 BLER HSUPA

UL
ForanHSPAuser, TP A M b = ------------------------------------------------------------------------- f TP Scaling TP Offset
N Rtx

UL
ForDCHSPAandDBMCHSPAusers, TP A M b =

c Servingcell

UL

TP P RLC c 1 BLER HSUPA

------------------------------------------------------------------------- f TP Scaling TP Offset
N Rtx

Where:
f TP Scaling and TP Offset respectivelyrepresentthescalingfactorbetweentheapplicationthroughputandtheminimumRLC
(RadioLinkControl)throughputandthethroughputoffset.Thesetwoparametersmodeltheheaderinformationandother
supplementarydatathatdoesnotappearattheapplicationlevel.Theyaredefinedintheserviceproperties.
UL

Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperpossibleapplicationthroughput( TP A ).Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif
the application throughput exceeds the userdefined thresholds. Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
intersectionsbetweenlayers.
ColourperAverageApplicationThroughput
UL

Atolldisplaystheaverageapplicationthroughput( TP Av A )providedoneachpixel.Itiscalculatedasfollows:
UL

TP P RLC c 1 BLER HSUPA

UL
ForanHSPAuser, TP Av A M b = ------------------------------------------------------------------------- f TP Scaling TP Offset
N Rtx av

UL
ForDCHSPAandDBMCHSPAusers, TP Av A M b =

c Servingcell

UL
TP P RLC c 1 BLER HSUPA
------------------------------------------------------------------------ f TP Scaling TP Offset
N Rtx av

Where:
f TP Scaling and TP Offset respectively represent the scaling factor between the average application throughput and the
averageRLC(RadioLinkControl)throughputandthethroughputoffset.Thesetwoparametersmodeltheheaderinformation
andothersupplementarydatathatdoesnotappearattheapplicationlevel.Theyaredefinedintheserviceproperties.
UL

Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperpossibleaverageapplicationthroughput( TP Av A ).Foreachlayer,areais
covered if the average application throughput exceeds the userdefined thresholds. Each layer is assigned a colour and
displayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

4.6 AutomaticNeighbourAllocation
Atollpermitstheautomaticallocationofintratechnologyneighboursinthecurrentnetwork.Twoallocationalgorithmsare
available,onededicatedtointracarrierneighboursandtheotherforintercarrierneighbours.
TheintratechnologyneighbourallocationalgorithmstakeintoaccountallthecellsofTBCtransmitters.Itmeansthatallthe
cellsofTBCtransmittersofyour.atldocumentarepotentialneighbours.
ThecellstobeallocatedwillbecalledTBAcells.Theymustfulfilfollowingconditions:

Theyareactive,
TheysatisfythefiltercriteriaappliedtotheTransmittersfolder,
Theyarelocatedinsidethefocuszone,
Theybelongtothefolderonwhichallocationhasbeenexecuted.ThisfoldercanbeeithertheTransmittersfolderor
agroupoftransmittersorasingletransmitter.

OnlyTBAcellsmaybeassignedneighbours.
Ifnofocuszoneexistsinthe.atldocument,Atolltakesintoaccountthecomputation
zone.

312

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Inthissection,thefollowingareexplained:

"NeighbourAllocationforAllTransmitters"onpage 313.
"NeighbourAllocationforaGroupofTransmittersorOneTransmitter"onpage 317.
"ImportanceCalculation"onpage 317.

4.6.1 NeighbourAllocationforAllTransmitters
Weassumethatwehaveareference,cellA,andacandidateneighbour,cellB.Whentheautomaticneighbourallocation
starts,Atollchecksthefollowingconditions:

Thedistancebetweenbothcellsmustbelessthantheuserdefinablemaximumintersitedistance.Ifthedistance
betweenthereferencecellandthecandidateneighbourisgreaterthanthisvalue,thenthecandidateneighbouris
discarded.
Atoll calculates the effective distance, which corresponds to the real intertransmitter distance weighted by the
azimuthsofantennas.Forinformationontheeffectivedistancecalculation,see"CalculationoftheInterTransmitter
Distance"onpage 320.

Thecalculationoptions:
Carriers:Thisoptionenablesyoutoselectthecarrier(s)onwhichyouwanttoruntheallocation.Youmaychoose
oneormorecarriers.Atollwillallocateneighbourstocellsusingtheselectedcarriers.
Forcecositecellsasneighbours:Thisoptionenablesyoutoforcecellslocatedonthereferencecellsiteinthe
candidateneighbourlist.Thisconstraintcanbeweightedamongtheothersandrankstheneighboursthroughthe
importancefield(seeafter).
Force adjacent cells as neighbours (only for intracarrier neighbours): This option enables you to force cells
geographically adjacent to the reference cell in the candidate neighbour list.This constraint can be weighted
amongtheothersandrankstheneighboursthroughtheimportancefield(seebelow).
Adjacencycriterion:
LetCellAbeacandidateneighbourcellofCellB.CellAisconsideredadjacenttoCellBif
thereexistsatleastonepixelintheCellBBestServercoverageareawhereCellAisBest
Server(ifseveralcellshavethesamebestservervalue)orCellAisthesecondbestserver
thatenterstheActiveSet(respectingtheHOmarginoftheallocation).

WhenForceadjacentcellsasneighboursisselected,adjacentcellsaresortedandlisted
from the most adjacent to the least adjacent, depending on the above criterion.
Adjacencyisrelativetothenumberofpixelssatisfyingthecriterion.

Force symmetry: This option enables user to force the reciprocity of a neighbourhood link. Therefore, if the
referencecellisacandidateneighbourofanothercell,thisonewillbeconsideredascandidateneighbourofthe
referencecell.
Iftheneighbourslistofacellisfull,thereferencecellwillnotbeaddedasaneighbour
ofthatcellandthatcellwillberemovedfromthereferencecellsneighbourslist.Youcan
forceAtolltokeepthatcellinthereferencecellsneighbourslistbyaddingthefollowing
optionintheAtoll.inifile:
[Neighbours]
DoNotDeleteSymmetrics=1

313

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

Forceexceptionalpairs:Thisoptionenablesyoutoforce/forbidsomeneighbourhoodrelationships.Therefore,
youmayforce/forbidacelltobecandidateneighbourofthereferencecell.

Deleteexistingneighbours:WhenselectingtheDeleteexistingneighboursoption,Atolldeletesallthecurrent
neighboursandcarriesoutanewneighbourallocation.Ifnotselected,theexistingneighboursarekept.

IftheUseCoverageConditionscheckboxisselected,theremustbeanoverlappingzone( S A S B )withagivencell
edgecoverageprobability.Otherwise,onlythedistancecriterionistakenintoaccount.

Theoverlappingzone( S A S B )isdefinedasfollows:

Intracarrierneighbours:intracarrierhandoverisasofthandover.

ThereferencecellAandthecandidatecellBarelocatedinsideacontinuouslayerofcellswithcarrierc1(c1istheselected
carrieronwhichyouruntheallocation).
SAistheareawherethecellAisthebestservingcell.ItmeansthatthecellAisthefirstoneintheactiveset.

ThepilotsignalreceivedfromthecellAisgreaterthantheminimumpilotsignallevel.
ThepilotqualityfromAexceedsauserdefinableminimumvalue(minimumEc/I0).
ThepilotqualityfromAisthebest.

SBistheareawherethecellBcanentertheactiveset.

ThepilotsignalreceivedfromthecellBisgreaterthantheminimumpilotsignallevel.
ThepilotqualityfromBisgreaterthanthepilotqualityfromAminustheEc/I0margin.TheEc/I0marginhasthe
samemeaningastheASthresholddefinedintheCellproperties.So,itshouldlogicallyhavethesamevalue.

Figure 4.16:OverlappingZoneforIntracarrierNeighbours

Intercarrier neighbours: interfrequency handover is a hard handover. It is needed in a multicarrier WCDMA

network:

Tobalanceloadingbetweencarriersandlayers(1stcase),
Tomakeacoveragereasonhandoverfrommicrocellfrequencytomacrocells(2ndcase).

1stcase:thereferencecellAislocatedinsideacontinuouslayerofcellswithcarrierc1(c1istheselectedcarrieronwhichyou
runtheallocation)andthecandidatecellBbelongstoalayerofcellswithcarrierc2.
SAistheareawherethecellAisnotthebestservingcellofitslayerbutcanentertheactiveset.

ThepilotsignalreceivedfromthecellAisgreaterthantheminimumpilotsignallevel.
ThepilotqualityfromAexceedsauserdefinableminimumvalue(minimumEc/I0).
ThepilotqualityfromAisnotthehighestone.Itisstrictlylowerthanthebestpilotqualityreceivedandgreater
thanthebestpilotqualityminustheEc/I0margin.

SBistheareawherethecellBisthebestservingcellofitslayer.

314

ThepilotsignalreceivedfromthecellBisgreaterthantheminimumpilotsignallevel.
ThepilotqualityfromBexceedsauserdefinableminimumvalue(minimumEc/I0).
ThepilotqualityfromBisthehighestone.

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Figure 4.17:OverlappingZoneforIntercarrierNeighbours1stCase
2ndcase:thereferencecellAislocatedontheborderofalayerwithcarrierc1(c1istheselectedcarrieronwhichyourunthe
allocation)andthecandidatecellBbelongstoalayerofcellswithcarrierc2.
SAistheareawherethepilotqualityfromthecellAstartssignificantlydecreasingbutthecellAisstillthebestservingcellof
itslayer(sinceitisontheborder).

ThepilotsignalreceivedfromthecellAisgreaterthantheminimumpilotsignallevel.
ThepilotqualityfromAisthehighestone
ThepilotqualityfromAislowerthanauserdefinableminimumvalue(minimumEc/I0)plustheEc/I0margin.

SBistheareawherethecellBisthebestservingcellofitslayer.

ThepilotsignalreceivedfromthecellBisgreaterthantheminimumpilotsignallevel.
ThepilotqualityfromBexceedsauserdefinableminimumvalue(minimumEc/I0).
ThepilotqualityfromBisthehighestone.
TwowaysenableyoutodeterminetheI0value:
1. GlobalValue:Apercentageofthecellmaximumpowerisconsidered.Ifthe%of
maximumpoweristoolow,i.e.if % Pmax P pilot ,Atolltakesintoaccountthe
pilotpowerofthecell.Then,I0representsthesumofvaluescalculatedforeach
cell.
2. DefinedperCell:Atolltakesintoaccountthetotaldownlinkpowerdefinedper
cell.I0representsthesumoftotaltransmittedpowers.

Figure 4.18:OverlappingZoneforIntercarrierNeighbours2ndCase

315

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

SA SB
- 100 )andcomparesthisvaluetothe%minimumcoveredarea.If
Atollcalculatesthepercentageofcoveredarea( ----------------SA
thispercentageisnotexceeded,thecandidateneighbourBisdiscarded.

Theimportanceofneighbours.

Forinformationontheimportancecalculation,see"ImportanceCalculation"onpage 317.
Importancevaluesareusedbytheallocationalgorithmtoranktheneighboursaccordingtotheallocationreason.Atolllists
allneighboursandsortsthembyimportancevaluesoastoeliminatesomeofthemfromtheneighbourlistifthemaximum
number of neighbours to be allocated to each transmitter is exceeded. If we consider the case for which there are 15
candidateneighboursandthemaximumnumberofneighbourstobeallocatedtothereferencecellis8.Amongthese15
candidateneighbours,only8(havingthehighestimportancevalues)willbeallocatedtothereferencecell.Notethatspecific
maximum numbers of neighbours (maximum number of intracarrier neighbours, maximum number of intercarrier
neighbours)canbedefinedatthecelllevel(propertydialogueorcelltable).Ifdefinedthere,thisvalueistakenintoaccount
insteadofthedefaultoneavailableintheNeighbourAllocationdialogue.
IntheResultspart,Atollprovidesthelistofneighbours,thenumberofneighboursandthemaximumnumberofneighbours
allowedforeachcell.Inaddition,itindicatestheimportance(in%)ofeachneighbourandtheallocationreason.Therefore,a
neighbourmaybemarkedasexceptionalpair,cosite,adjacent,coverageorsymmetric.Forneighboursacceptedforcosite,
adjacency and coverage reasons, Atoll displays the percentage of area meeting the coverage conditions and the
correspondingsurfacearea(km2),thepercentageofareameetingtheadjacencyconditionsandthecorrespondingsurface
area(km2).Finally,ifcellshavepreviousallocationsinthelist,neighboursaremarkedasexisting.

Bydefault,theautomaticneighbourallocationcomparesthedefinedMaxinter
sitedistancewiththeeffectiveintercelldistance.Asaconsequence,therecan
becaseswheretherealdistancebetweenassignedneighboursishigherthanthe
Maxintersitedistance,becausetheeffectivedistanceissmaller.Youcanforce
AtolltocomparetheMaxintersitedistancewiththerealintersitedistanceby
addingthefollowinglinesinAtoll.ini:
[Neighbours]
RealInterSiteDistanceCondition=1

Bydefault,theneighbourimportancecalculatedwithrespecttodistanceisbased
ontheglobalMaxintersitedistancesettingforallneighbourcandidates.Asa
consequence,therecanbecaseswherethecalculatedimportanceisdifferent
whentheglobalMaxintersitedistanceismodified.Toavoidthat,youcanforce
Atoll to prioritise the individual distances between reference cells and their
respectiveneighbourcandidatesbyaddingthefollowinglinesinAtoll.ini:
[Neighbours]
CandidatesMaxDistanceInImportanceCalculation=1

316

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

No simulation or prediction study is needed to perform an automatic neighbour

allocation. When starting an automatic neighbour allocation, Atoll automatically
calculatesthepathlossmatricesifnotfound.
Evenifnospecificterminal,mobilityorserviceisselectedintheautomaticallocation,
it is interesting to know that the algorithm works such as finding the maximum
numberofneighboursbyselectionthemultiservicetrafficdataasfollows:
Service:selectionoftheonewiththelowestbodyloss.
Mobility:noimpactontheallocation,nospecificselection.
Terminal:selectionoftheonewiththegreatest(GainLoss)value,and,ifequal,the
onewiththelowestnoisefigure.
The neighbour lists may be optionally used in the power control simulations to
determinethemobile'sactiveset.
Aforbiddenneighbourmustnotbelistedasneighbourexceptiftheneighbourhood
relationship already exists and the Delete existing neighbours option is unchecked
whenyoustartthenewallocation.Inthiscase,AtolldisplaysawarningintheEvent
viewerindicatingthattheconstraintontheforbiddenneighbourwillbeignoredby
algorithmbecausetheneighbouralreadyexists.
Theforceneighboursymmetryoptionenablestheuserstoconsiderthereciprocityof
a neighbourhood link. This reciprocity is allowed only if the neighbour list is not
already full. Thus, if the cell B is a neighbour of the cell A while the cell A is not a
neighbourofthecellB,twocasesarepossible:
1stcase:ThereisspaceinthecellBneighbourlist:thecellAwillbeaddedtothelist.
Itwillbethelastone.
2ndcase:ThecellBneighbourlistisfull:AtollwillnotincludecellAinthelistandwill
cancelthelinkbydeletingcellBfromthecellAneighbourlist.
WhentheoptionsForceexceptionalpairsandForcesymmetryareselected,Atoll
considers the constraints between exceptional pairs in both directions so as to
respect symmetry condition. On the other hand, if neighbourhood relationship is
forced in one direction and forbidden in the other one, symmetry cannot be
respected.Inthiscase,AtolldisplaysawarningintheEventviewer.
In the Results, Atoll displays only the cells for which it finds new neighbours.
Therefore, if a TBA cell has already reached its maximum number of neighbours
beforestartingthenewallocation,itwillnotappearintheResultstable.

4.6.2 NeighbourAllocationforaGroupofTransmittersorOne
Transmitter
Atollallocatesneighboursto:

TBAcells,
NeighboursofTBAcellsmarkedasexceptionalpair,adjacentandsymmetric,
NeighboursofTBAcellsthatsatisfycoverageconditions.

Automaticneighbourallocationparametersaredescribedin"NeighbourAllocationforAllTransmitters"onpage 313.

4.6.3 ImportanceCalculation
Importancevaluesareusedbytheallocationalgorithmtoranktheneighboursaccordingtotheallocationreasonandthe
distance,andtoquantifytheneighbourimportance.

4.6.3.1 ImportanceofIntracarrierNeighbours
Theneighbourimportancedependsonthedistancefromthereferencetransmitterandontheneighbourhoodcause(cf.table
below);thisvaluevariesbetween0and100%.
Neighbourhoodcause

When

Importancevalue

Existingneighbour

OnlyiftheDeleteexistingneighboursoptionisnotselected
andincaseofanewallocation

Existingimportance

Exceptionalpair

OnlyiftheForceexceptionalpairsoptionisselected

100%

Cositecell

OnlyiftheForcecositecellsasneighboursoptionis
selected

ImportanceFunction(IF)

Adjacentcell

OnlyiftheForceadjacentcellsasneighboursoptionis
selected

ImportanceFunction(IF)

317

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

Neighbourhoodcause

When

Importancevalue

Neighbourhoodrelationshipthat
fulfilscoverageconditions

Onlyifthe%minimumcoveredareaisexceeded

ImportanceFunction(IF)

Symmetricneighbourhood
relationship

OnlyiftheForceneighboursymmetryoptionisselected

ImportanceFunction(IF)

Exceptthecaseofforcedneighbours(importance=100%),priorityassignedtoeachneighbourhoodcauseisdetermined
usingtheImportanceFunction(IF).TheIFconsidersfourfactorsforcalculatingtheimportance:

The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.
d Di = 1 ---------d max
d istheeffectivedistance(inm).Itcorrespondstotherealintertransmitterdistanceweightedbytheazimuthsof
antennas.Forinformationontheeffectivedistancecalculation,see"CalculationoftheInterTransmitterDistance"on
page 320.
d max isthemaximumdistancebetweenthereferencetransmitterandapossibleneighbour.

Thecositefactor(C):aBoolean,
Theadjacencyfactor(A):thepercentageofadjacency,
Theoverlappingfactor(O):thepercentageofoverlapping.

Theminimumandmaximumimportanceassignedtoeachoftheabovefactorscanbedefined.
Factor

Minimportance

Defaultvalue

Maximportance

Defaultvalue

Distancefactor(Di)

Min(Di)

1%

Max(Di)

10%

Overlappingfactor(O)

Min(O)

10%

Max(O)

30%

Adjacencyfactor(A)

Min(A)

30%

Max(A)

60%

Cositefactor(C)

Min(C)

60%

Max(C)

100%

TheImportanceFunctionisevaluatedasfollows:
Neighbourhoodcause

ImportanceFunction

ResultingIFusingthedefaultvalues
fromthetableabove

No

Min(O)+Delta(O){Max(Di)(Di)+(100%
Max(Di))(O)}+Min(Di)+Delta(Di)(Di)

10%+20%{10%(Di)+90%(O)}+1%+9%(Di)

No

Yes

Min(A)+Delta(A){Max(Di)(Di)+Max(O)(O)+
(100%Max(Di)Max(O))(A)}+Min(Di)+Delta(Di)(Di)

30%+30%{10%(Di)+30%(O)
+60%(A)}+1%+9%(Di)

Yes

Yes

Min(C)+Delta(C){Max(Di)(Di)+Max(O)(O)+
(100%Max(Di)Max(O))(A)}+Min(Di)+Delta(Di)(Di)

60%+40%{10%(Di)+30%(O)
+60%(A)}+1%+9%(Di)

Cosite

Adjacent

No

Where:
Delta(X)=Max(X)Min(X)

318

SetMin(Di)andMax(Di)to0%ifyoudonotwanttotakeintoaccountthedistance
factorintheimportancecalculation.
IftheMinandMaxvaluerangesoftheimportancefunctionfactorsdonotoverlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum andmaximum importance fields, neighbours will beranked inthis order:
cositeneighbours,adjacentneighbours,andneighboursallocatedbasedoncoverage
overlapping.
If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.
ThedefaultvalueofMin(O)=1%ensuresthatneighboursselectedforsymmetrywill
have an importance greater than 0%. With a value of Min(O) = 0%, neighbours
selectedforsymmetrywillhaveanimportancefieldgreaterthan0%onlyifthereis
somecoverageoverlapping.

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

4.6.3.2 ImportanceofIntercarrierNeighbours
Asindicatedinthetablebelow,theneighbourimportancedependsonthedistanceandontheneighbourhoodcause;this
valuevariesbetween0to100%.
Neighbourhoodcause

When

Importancevalue

Existingneighbour

IftheDeleteexistingneighboursoptionisnotselected

Existingimportance

Exceptionalpair

IftheForceexceptionalpairsoptionisselected

100%

Cositecell

IftheForcecositecellsasneighboursoptionisselected

ImportanceFunction(IF)

Neighbourhoodrelationshipthat
fulfilscoverageconditions

Ifthe%minimumcoveredareaisexceeded

ImportanceFunction(IF)

Symmetricneighbourhood
relationship

IftheForceneighboursymmetryoptionisselected

ImportanceFunction(IF)

Exceptthecaseofforcedneighbours(importance=100%),priorityassignedtoeachneighbourhoodcauseisdetermined
usingtheImportanceFunction(IF).TheIFconsidersthreefactorsforcalculatingtheimportance:

The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.
d Di = 1 ---------d max
d istheeffectivedistance(inm).Itcorrespondstotherealintertransmitterdistanceweightedbytheazimuthsof
antennas.Forinformationontheeffectivedistancecalculation,see"CalculationoftheInterTransmitterDistance"on
page 320.
d max isthemaximumdistancebetweenthereferencetransmitterandapossibleneighbour.

Thecositefactor(C):aBoolean,
Theoverlappingfactor(O):thepercentageofoverlapping.

TheIFisuserdefinableusingtheMinimportanceandMaximportancefields.
Factor

Minimportance

Defaultvalue

Maximportance

Defaultvalue

Distancefactor(Di)

Min(Di)

1%

Max(Di)

10%

Overlappingfactor(O)

Min(O)

10%

Max(O)

60%

Cositefactor(C)

Min(C)

60%

Max(C)

100%

TheIFevaluatesimportanceasfollows:
CositeNeighbourhood
cause

IF

ResultingIFusingthedefaultvalues
fromthetableabove

No

Min(O)+Delta(O){Max(Di)(Di)+(100%Max(Di))(O)}

10%+50%{10%(Di)+90%(O)}

Yes

Min(C)+Delta(C){Max(Di)(Di)/(Max(Di)+Max(O))+
Max(O)(O)/(Max(Di)+Max(O))}

60%+40%{1/7%(Di)+6/7%(O)}

Where
Delta(X)=Max(X)Min(X)

SetMin(Di)andMax(Di)to0%ifyoudonotwanttotakeintoaccountthedistance
factorintheimportancecalculation.
IftheMinandMaxvaluerangesoftheimportancefunctionfactorsdonotoverlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum andmaximum importance fields,neighbours will be rankedin thisorder:
cositeneighboursandneighboursallocatedbasedoncoverageoverlapping.
If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.
ThedefaultvalueofMin(O)=1%ensuresthatneighboursselectedforsymmetrywill
have an importance greater than 0%. With a value of Min(O) = 0%, neighbours
selectedforsymmetrywillhaveanimportancefieldgreaterthan0%onlyifthereis
somecoverageoverlapping.

319

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

4.6.4 Appendices
4.6.4.1 CalculationoftheInterTransmitterDistance
Atoll takes into account the real distance ( D in m) and azimuths of antennas in order to calculate the effective inter
transmitterdistance( d inm).
d = D 1 + x cos x cos
wherex=0.3%sothatthemaximumDvariationdoesnotexceed1%.

Figure 4.19:InterTransmitterDistanceComputation
The formula above implies that two cells facing each other will have a smaller effective distance than the real physical
distance.Itisthiseffectivedistancethatwillbetakenintoaccountratherthantherealdistance.

4.7 PrimaryScramblingCodeAllocation
Downlinkprimaryscramblingcodesenableyoutodistinguishcellsfromoneanother(cellidentification).
Bydefault,thereare512primaryscramblingcodesnumbered(0...511).
The cells to which Atoll allocates scrambling codes are referred to as the TBA cells (cells to be allocated). TBA cells fulfil
followingconditions:

Theyareactive,
TheysatisfythefiltercriteriaappliedtotheTransmittersfolder,
Theyarelocatedinsidethefocuszone,
Theybelongtothefolderonwhichallocationhasbeenexecuted.ThisfoldercanbeeithertheTransmittersfolder
oragroupoftransmittersorasingletransmitter.
Ifnofocuszoneexistsinthe.atldocument,Atolltakesintoaccountthecomputation
zone.

4.7.1 AutomaticAllocationDescription
4.7.1.1 OptionsandConstraints
Thescramblingcodeallocationalgorithmcantakeintoaccountfollowingconstraintsandoptions:

Neighbourhoodbetweencells,

Youmayconsider:

320

Firstorderneighbours:TheneighboursofTBAcellslistedintheIntratechnologyneighbourstable,
Secondorderneighbours:Theneighboursofneighbours,

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Thirdorderneighbours:Theneighboursneighboursneighbours.

Inthecontextoftheprimaryscramblingcodeallocation,theterm"neighbours"refers
tointracarrierneighbours.
Atoll can take into account intertechnology neighbour relations as constraints to
allocatedifferentscramblingcodestotheUMTSneighboursofaGSMtransmitter.In
order to consider intertechnology neighbour relations in the scrambling code
allocation, you must make the Transmitters folder of the GSM .atl document
accessibleintheUMTS.atldocument.ForinformationonmakinglinksbetweenGSM
andUMTS.atldocuments,seetheUserManual.
Atoll considers symmetry relationship between a cell, its first order neighbours, its
secondorderneighboursanditsthirdorderneighbours.

CellsfulfillingacriteriononEc/I0(optionAdditionalOverlappingConditions),

Atollreusestheintracarrierneighbourallocationalgorithmtodeterminethelistofcellswhichcannotbeallocatedthesame
scramblingcode,andtocalculatetheirimportance.
ForareferencecellA,AtollconsidersallthecellsBthatcanentertheactivesetontheareawherethereferencecellis
thebestserver(areawhere(Ec/I0)AexceedstheminimumEc/I0andisthehighestoneand(Ec/I0)BiswithinaEc/I0margin
of(Ec/I0)A).

Atollconsiderseitherapercentageofthecellmaximumpowersorthetotaldownlink
powerusedbythecellsinordertoevaluateI0.Inthiscase,I0equalsthesumoftotal
transmittedpowers.Whenthisparameterisnotspecifiedinthecellproperties,Atoll
uses50%ofthemaximumpower.

Reusedistanceisaconstraintontheallocationofscramblingcodes.Acodecannotbe
reused at a cell that is not at least as far away as the reuse distance from the cell
allocatedwiththeparticularcode.
Scramblingcodereusedistancecanbedefinedatcelllevel.Ifthisvalueisnotdefined,
then Atoll will use the default reuse distance defined in the Scrambling Code
AutomaticAllocationdialogue.

Reusedistance,

Exceptionalpairs,

Domainsofscramblingcodes,
Whennodomainisassignedtocells,Atollconsidersthe512primaryscramblingcodes
available.

Thenumberofprimaryscramblingcodespercluster.InAtoll,wecall"cluster",agroupofscramblingcodesasdefined
in3GPPspecifications.3GPPspecificationsdefine64clustersconsistingof8scramblingcodes(inthiscase,clusters
arenumbererdfrom0to63).However,youcandefineanothervalue(e.g.ifyousetthenumberofcodespercluster
to4,scramblingcodeswillbedistributedin128clusters).
WhentheallocationisbasedonaDistributedstrategy(DistributedperCellorDistributedperSite),thisparametercan
alsobeusedtodefinetheintervalbetweentheprimaryscramblingcodesassignedtocellsonasamesite.Thedefined
intervalisappliedbyaddingthefollowinglinesintheAtoll.inifile:

[PSC]
ConstantStep = 1
Formoreinformationaboutsettingoptionsintheatoll.inifile,seetheAdministratorManual.

Thecarrieronwhichtheallocationisrun:Itcanbeagivencarrierorallofthem.Inthiscase,eitherAtollindependently
plansscramblingcodesforthedifferentcarriers,oritallocatesthesameprimaryscramblingcodetoeachcarrierofa
transmitteriftheoption"Allocatecarriersidentically"isselected.

Thepossibilitytouseamaximumofcodesfromthedefineddomains(option"UseaMaximumofCodes"):Atollwill
trytospreadthescramblingcodespectrumthemost.

The"DeleteAllCodes"option:Whenselectingthisoption,Atolldeletesallthecurrentscramblingcodesandcarries
outanewscramblingcodeallocation.Ifnotselected,theexistingscramblingcodesarekept.

321

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

Inaddition,itdependsontheselectedallocationstrategy.Allocationstrategiescanbe:

Clusteredallocation:Thepurposeofthisstrategyistochooseforagroupofmutuallyconstrainedcells,scrambling
codesamongaminimumnumberofclusters.Inthiscase,Atollwillpreferentiallyallocateallthecodeswithinthe
samecluster.
Distributedpercellallocation:Thisstrategyconsistsinusingasmanyclustersaspossible.Atollwillpreferentially
allocatecodesfromdifferentclusters.
Oneclusterpersiteallocation:Thisstrategyallocatesoneclustertoeachsite,then,onecodefromtheclustertoeach
cellofeachsite.Whenalltheclustershavebeenallocatedandtherearestillsitesremainingtobeallocated,Atoll
reusestheclustersasfaraspossibleatanothersite.
Distributedpersiteallocation:Thisstrategyallocatesagroupofadjacentclusterstoeachsite,then,oneclusterto
each transmitter on the site according to its azimuth and finally, one code from the cluster to each cell of each
transmitter.Thenumberofadjacentclusterspergroupdependsonthenumberoftransmitterspersiteyouhavein
yournetwork;thisinformationisrequiredtostartallocationbasedonthisstrategy.Whenallthegroupsofadjacent
clustershavebeenallocatedandtherearestillsitesremainingtobeallocated,Atollreusesthegroupsofadjacent
clustersasfaraspossibleatanothersite.

IntheResultstable,AtollonlydisplaysscramblingcodesallocatedtoTBAcells.

4.7.1.2 AllocationProcess
ForeachTBAcell,Atolllistsallcellswhichhaveconstraintswiththecell.Theyarereferredtoasnearcells.Thenearcellsofa
TBAcellmaybe:

Itsneighbourcells:theneighbourslistedintheIntratechnologyneighbourstable(optionsExistingneighboursand
"FirstOrder"),
Theneighboursofitsneighbours(optionsExistingneighboursandSecondOrder),
Thethirdorderneighbours(optionsExistingneighboursandThirdOrder),
ThecellsthatfulfilEc/I0condition(optionAdditionalOverlappingConditions),
ThecellswithdistancefromtheTBAcelllessthanthereusedistance,
ThecellsthatmakeexceptionalpairswiththeTBAcell.

Additionalconstraintsareconsideredwhen:

ThecellanditsnearcellsareneighboursofasameGSMtransmitter(onlyiftheTransmittersfolderoftheGSM.atl
documentisaccessibleintheUMTS.atldocument),
Theneighbourcellscannotsharethesamecluster(forthe"Distributedpersite"allocationstrategyonly).

TheseconstraintshaveacertainweighttakenintoaccounttodeterminetheTBAcellpriorityduringtheallocationprocess
andthecostofthescramblingcodeplan.Duringtheallocation,AtolltriestoassigndifferentscramblingcodestotheTBAcell
and its near cells. If it respects all the constraints, the cost of the scrambling code plan is 0. When a cell has too many
constraintsandtherearenotanymorescramblingcodesavailable,Atollbreakstheconstraintwiththelowestcostsoasto
generatethescramblingcodeplanwiththelowestcost.Forinformationonthecostgeneratedbyeachconstraint,see"Cell
Priority"onpage 324.

4.7.1.2.1

SingleCarrierNetwork
Theallocationprocessdependsontheselectedstrategy.Algorithmworksasfollows:
Strategies:ClusteredandDistributedperCell
AtollprocessesTBAcellsaccordingtotheirpriority.Itallocatesscramblingcodesstartingwiththehighestprioritycellandits
nearcells,andcontinuingwiththelowestprioritycellsnotallocatedyetandtheirnearcells.Forinformationoncalculating
cellpriority,see"CellPriority"onpage 324.
Strategy:OneClusterperSite
Allsiteswhichhaveconstraintswiththestudiedsitearereferredtoasnearsites.
Atollassignsaclustertoeachsite,startingwiththehighestprioritysiteanditsnearsites,andcontinuingwiththelowest
prioritysitesnotallocatedyetandtheirnearsites.Whenalltheclustershavebeenallocatedandtherearestillsitesremaining
tobeallocated,Atollreusestheclustersatanothersite.WhentheReuseDistanceoptionisselected,thealgorithmreuses
theclustersassoonasthereusedistanceisexceeded.Otherwise,whentheoptionisnotselected,thealgorithmtriestoassign
reusedclustersasspacedoutaspossible.
Then,Atollallocatesaprimaryscramblingcodefromtheclustertoeachcelllocatedonthesites(codesbelongtotheassigned
clusters).Itstartswiththehighestprioritycellanditsnearcellsandgoesonwiththelowestprioritycellsnotallocatedyet
andtheirnearcells.
Forinformationoncalculatingsitepriority,see"SitePriority"onpage 326.Forinformationoncalculatingcellpriority,see
"CellPriority"onpage 324.

322

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Strategy:DistributedperSite
Allsiteswhichhaveconstraintswiththestudiedsitearereferredtoasnearsites.
Atollassignsagroupofadjacentclusterstoeachsite,startingwiththehighestprioritysiteanditsnearsites,andcontinuing
with the lowest priority sites not allocated yet and their near sites. When all the groups of adjacent clusters have been
allocatedandtherearestillsitesremainingtobeallocated,Atollreusesthegroupsofadjacentclustersatanothersite.When
theReuseDistanceoptionisselected,thealgorithmreusesthegroupsofadjacentclustersassoonasthereusedistanceis
exceeded.Otherwise,whentheoptionisnotselected,thealgorithmtriestoassignreusedgroupsofadjacentclustersas
spaced out as possible. Then, Atoll assigns each cluster of the group to each transmitter of the site according to the
transmitter azimuth and selected neighbourhood constraints (options "Neighbours in Other Clusters" and "Secondary
NeighboursinOtherClusters").Then,Atollallocatesaprimaryscramblingcodetoeachcelllocatedonthetransmitters(codes
belongtotheassignedclusters).Itstartswiththehighestprioritycellanditsnearcellsandgoesonwiththelowestpriority
cellsnotallocatedyetandtheirnearcells.
Forinformationoncalculatingsitepriority,see"SitePriority"onpage 326.Forinformationoncalculatingcellpriority,see
"CellPriority"onpage 324.
DeterminationofGroupsofAdjacentClusters
Inordertodeterminethegroupsofadjacentclusterstobeused,Atollproceedsasfollows:Itdefinestheoreticalgroupsof
adjacent clusters, independently of the defined domain, considering the 512 primary scrambling codes available and the
specifiednumberofcodespercluster(ifthisoneissetto8,64clustersaresupposedtobeavailable).Itstartsthedivisionin
groupfromthecluster0(hardcoded)andtakesintoaccountthemaximumnumberoftransmitterspersiteuserspecifiedin
ordertodeterminethenumberofclustersineachgroupandthen,thenumberofpossiblegroups.
Let us assumethat the number of codes per cluster issetto 8 andthemaximum number oftransmitterspersite in the
networkis3.Inthiscase,wehavethefollowingtheoreticalgroups:
Group1

Group2

Group3

Group4

...

Group21

Cluster0
Cluster1
Cluster2

Cluster3
Cluster4
Cluster5

Cluster6
Cluster7
Cluster8

Cluster9
Cluster10
Cluster11

...

Cluster61
Cluster62
Cluster63

Ifnodomainisassignedtocells,Atollcanuseallthesegroupsfortheallocation.Ontheotherhand,ifadomainisused,the
toolcomparesadjacentclustersreallyavailableintheassigneddomaintothetheoreticalgroupsandonlykeepsadjacent
clustersmappingthetheoreticalgroups.
Letusassumethatwehaveadomainconsistedof12clusters:clusters1to8andclusters12to15.
Therefore,Atollwillbeabletousethefollowinggroupsofadjacentclusters:

Group2withcluster3,4and5,
Group3withcluster6,7and8,
Group6withcluster12,13and14.
Theclusters1,2and15willnotbeused.

Ifadomaindoesnotcontainanyadjacentclusters,theuseriswarnedthroughthe'EventViewer'.

4.7.1.2.2

MultiCarrierNetwork
Incaseyouhaveamulticarriernetworkandyourunthescramblingcodeallocationonallthecarriers,theallocationprocess
depends on the allocation strategy as detailed above and in addition, wether the option "Allocate Carriers Identically" is
selectedornot.
Whentheoptionisnotselected,algorithmworksforeachstrategy,asexplainedabove.Ontheotherhand,whentheoption
isselected,allocationorderchanges.Itisnolongerbasedonthecellprioritybutdependsonthetransmitterpriority.All
transmitterswhichhaveconstraintswiththestudiedtransmitterwillbereferredtoasneartransmitters.
Incaseofa"Percell"strategy(ClusteredandDistributedpercell),Atollstartsscramblingcodeallocationwiththehighest
prioritytransmitteranditsneartransmittersandcontinueswiththelowestprioritytransmittersnotallocatedyetandtheir
neartransmitters.Thesamescramblingcodeisassignedtoeachcellofthetransmitter.
Incaseofthe"Oneclusterpersite"strategy,Atollassignsaclustertoeachsiteandthen,allocatesascramblingcodetoeach
transmitter.Itstartswiththehighestprioritytransmitteranditsneartransmittersandcontinueswiththelowestpriority
transmitters not allocated yet and their near transmitters. The same scrambling code is assigned to each cell of the
transmitter.
Incaseofthe"Distributedpersite"strategy,Atollassignsagroupofadjacentclusterstoeachsite,thenaclustertoeach
transmitterandfinally,allocatesascramblingcodetoeachtransmitter.Itstartswiththehighestprioritytransmitterandits
neartransmittersandcontinueswiththelowestprioritytransmittersnotallocatedyetandtheirneartransmitters.Thesame
scramblingcodeisassignedtoeachcellofthetransmitter.
Forinformationoncalculatingtransmitterpriority,see"TransmitterPriority"onpage 326.

323

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

When cells, transmitters or sites have the same priority, processing is based on an
alphanumericorder.

4.7.1.3 PriorityDetermination
4.7.1.3.1

CellPriority
Scrambling code allocation algorithm in Atoll allots priorities to cells before performing the actual allocation. Priorities
assignedtocellsdependuponhowmuchconstrainedeachcellisandthecostdefinedforeachconstraint.Acellwithoutany
constrainthasadefaultcost, C ,equalto0.Thehigherthecostonacell,thehigherthepriorityithasforthescramblingcode
allocationprocess.
Therearesixcriteriaemployedtodeterminethecellpriority:

ScramblingCodeDomainCriterion

Thecostduetothedomainconstraint, C i Dom ,dependsonthenumberofscramblingcodesavailablefortheallocation.

Thedomainconstraintismandatoryandcannotbebroken.
Whennodomainisassignedtocells,512scramblingcodesareavailableandwehave:
C i Dom = 0
Whendomainsofscramblingcodesareassignedtocells,eachunavailablescramblingcodegeneratesacost.Thehigherthe
numberofcodesavailableinthedomain,thelesswillbethecostduetothiscriterion.Thecostisgivenas:
C i Dom = 512 Numberofscramblingcodesinthedomain

DistanceCriterion

Theconstraintlevelofanycellidependsonthenumberofcells(j)presentwithinaradiusof"reusedistance"fromitscentre.
Thetotalcostduetothedistanceconstraintisgivenas:

Cj Dist i

C i Dist =

Eachcelljwithinthereusedistancegeneratesacostgivenas:
C j Dist i = w d ij c dis tan ce
Where
w d ij isaweightdependingonthedistancebetweeniandj.Thisweightisinverselyproportionaltotheintercelldistance.
Forareusedistanceof2000m,theweightforanintercelldistanceof1500mis0.25,theweightforcositecellsis1andthe
weightfortwocellsspacedout2100mapartis0.
c dis tan ce isthecostofthedistanceconstraint.ThisvaluecanbedefinedintheConstraintCostdialogue.

ExceptionalPairCriterion

Theconstraintlevelofanycellidependsonthenumberofexceptionalpairs(j)forthatcell.Thetotalcostduetoexceptional
pairconstraintisgivenas:
C i EP =

cEP i j
j

Where
c EP isthecostoftheexceptionalpairconstraint.ThisvaluecanbedefinedintheConstraintCostdialogue.

NeighbourhoodCriterion

Theconstraintlevelofanycellidependsonthenumberofitsneighbourcellsj,thenumberofsecondorderneighbourskand
thenumberofthirdorderneighboursl.
Letsconsiderthefollowingneighbourschema:

324

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Figure 4.20:NeighbourhoodConstraints
Thetotalcostduetotheneighbourconstraintisgivenas:

Ci N =

Cj N1 i + Cj j N1 i + Ck N2 i + Ck k N2 i + Cl N3 i + Cl l N3 i
j

Eachfirstorderneighbourcelljgeneratesacostgivenas:
C j N1 i = I j c N1
Where
I j istheimportanceoftheneighbourcellj.
c N1 isthecostofthefirstorderneighbourconstraint.ThisvaluecanbedefinedintheConstraintCostdialogue.
Becausetwofirstorderneighboursmustnothavethesamescramblingcode,Atollconsidersthecostcreatedbytwofirst
orderneighbourstobeeachother.
C j N1 i + C j N1 i
C j j N1 i = ----------------------------------------------------2
Eachsecondorderneighbourcellkgeneratesacostgivenas:
C k N2 i = Max ( C j N1 i C k N1 j , C j N1 i C k N1 j ) c N2
Where
c N2 isthecostofthesecondorderneighbourconstraint.ThisvaluecanbedefinedintheConstraintCostdialogue.
Becausetwosecondorderneighboursmustnothavethesamescramblingcode,Atollconsidersthecostcreatedbytwo
secondorderneighbourstobeeachother.
C k N2 i + C k N2 i
C k k N2 i = ------------------------------------------------------2
Eachthirdorderneighbourcelllgeneratesacostgivenas:
C N1 i C k N1 j C l N1 k C j N1 i C k N1 j C l N1 k
C l N3 i = Max j
c N3
C j N1 i C k N1 j C l N1 k C j N1 i C k N1 j C l N1 k
Where
c N3 isthecostofthethirdorderneighbourconstraint.ThisvaluecanbedefinedintheConstraintCostdialogue.
Becausetwothirdorderneighboursmustnothavethesamescramblingcode,Atollconsidersthecostcreatedbytwothird
orderneighbourstobeeachother.
C l N3 i + C l N3 i
C l l N3 i = ----------------------------------------------------2

325

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

Atollconsidersthehighestcostofbothlinkswhenaneighbourrelationissymmetricand
theimportancevalueisdifferent.

Inthiscase,wehave:
C j N1 i = Max I i j I j i c N1
And
C k N2 i = Max (C j N1 i C k N1 j ,C j N1 k C i N1 j ) c N2

GSMNeighbourCriterion

Thiscriterionisconsideredwhenthecoplanningmodeisactivated(i.e.theTransmittersfolderoftheGSM.atldocumentis
madeaccessibleintheUMTS.atldocument)andintertechnologyneighbourshavebeenallocated.Ifthecelliisneighbourof
aGSMtransmitter,thecellconstraintleveldependsonhowmanycellsjareneighboursofthesameGSMtransmitter.The
totalcostduetoGSMneighbourconstraintisgivenas:
C i N 2G =

cN2G j Tx2G
j

Where
cN

2G

isthecostoftheGSMneighbourconstraint.ThisvaluecanbedefinedintheConstraintCostdialogue.

ClusterCriterion

Whenthe"DistributedperSite"allocationstrategyisused,youcanconsideradditionalconstraintsonallocatedclusters(one
cell,itsfirstorderneighboursanditssecondorderneighboursmustbeassignedscramblingcodesfromdifferentclusters).In
thiscase,theconstraintlevelofanycellidependsonthenumberoffirstandsecondorderneighbours,jandk.Thetotalcost
duetotheclusterconstraintisgivenas:
C i Cluster =

Cj N1 i cCluster + Ck N2 i cCluster
j

Where
c Cluster isthecostoftheclusterconstraint.ThisvaluecanbedefinedintheConstraintCostdialogue.
Therefore,thetotalcostduetoconstraintsonanycelliisdefinedas:
C i = C i Dom + C i U
With
C i U = C i Dist + C i EP + C i N + C i N 2G + C i Cluster

4.7.1.3.2

TransmitterPriority
Incaseyouhaveamulticarriernetworkandyourunscramblingcodeallocationon"all"thecarrierswiththeoption"allocate
carriers identically", algorithm in Atoll allots priorities to transmitters. Priorities assigned to transmitters depend on how
muchconstrainedeachtransmitterisandthecostdefinedforeachconstraint.Thehigherthecostonatransmitter,thehigher
thepriorityithasforthescramblingcodeallocationprocess.
LetusconsideratransmitterTxwithtwocellsusingcarriers0and1.Thecostduetoconstraintsonthetransmitterisgivenas:
C Tx = C Tx Dom + C Tx U
With C Tx U =

Max C U and C Dom = 512 Numberofscramblingcodesinthedomain

Tx
i Tx i

Here,thedomainavailableforthetransmitteristheintersectionofdomainsassignedtocellsofthetransmitter.Thedomain
constraintismandatoryandcannotbebroken.

4.7.1.3.3

SitePriority
Incaseof"PerSite"allocationstrategies(OneclusterpersiteandDistributedpersite),algorithminAtollallotsprioritiesto
sites.Prioritiesassignedtositesdependonhowmuchconstrainedeachsiteisandthecostdefinedforeachconstraint.The
higherthecostonasite,thehigherthepriorityithasforthescramblingcodeallocationprocess.

326

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

LetusconsiderasiteSwiththreetransmitters;eachofthemhastwocellsusingcarriers0and1.Thecostduetoconstraints
onthesiteisgivenas:
C S = C S U + C S Dom
With C S U =

Max C U and C Dom = 512 Numberofscramblingcodesinthedomain

S
Tx S Tx

Here,thedomainconsideredforthesiteistheintersectionofdomainsavailablefortransmittersofthesite.Thedomain
constraintismandatoryandcannotbebroken.

4.7.2 AllocationExamples
4.7.2.1 AllocationStrategiesandUseaMaximumofCodes
Inordertounderstandthedifferencesbetweenthedifferentallocationstrategiesandthebehaviourofalgorithmwhenusing
amaximumofcodesornot,letusconsiderthefollowingsamplescenario:

Figure 4.21:PrimaryScramblingCodesAllocation
LetSite0,Site1,Site2andSite3befoursiteswith3cellsusingcarrier0whomscramblingcodeshavetobeallocatedoutof
threeclustersconsistedof8primaryscramblingcodes.Thisimpliesthatthedomainofscramblingcodesforthefoursitesis
from 0 to 23 (cluster 0 to cluster 2). The reuse distance is supposed to be less than the intersite distance. Only cosite
neighboursexist.
Thefollowingsectionliststheresultsofeachcombinationofoptionswithexplanationwherenecessary.

4.7.2.1.1

Strategy:Clustered
Sincetherestrictionsofneighbourhoodonlyapplytocositeswiththesameimportanceandsitesdistancesaregreaterthan
reusedistances,everycellhasthesamepriority.Then,scramblingcodeallocationtocellsisperformedinanalphanumeric
order.

327

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

WithoutUseaMaximumofCodes

Forsk2014

WithUseaMaximumofCodes

Atollstartsallocatingthecodesfromthestartofcluster0at As it is possible to use a maximum of codes, Atoll starts

eachsite.
allocationatthestartofadifferentclusterateachsite.When
aclusterisreused,andtherearenonallocatedcodesleftin
the cluster, Atoll first allocates those codes before reusing
thealreadyusedones.

4.7.2.1.2

Strategy:Distributed
Sincetherestrictionsofneighbourhoodonlyapplytocositeswiththesameimportanceandsitesdistancesaregreaterthan
reusedistances,everycellhasthesamepriority.Then,scramblingcodeallocationtocellsisperformedinanalphanumeric
order.
WithoutUseaMaximumofCodes

WithUseaMaximumofCodes

Atoll allocates codes fromdifferent clusters to each cellof Atoll allocates codes from different clusters to each sites
thesamesite.Undergivenconstraintsofneighbourhoodand cells. As it is possible to use a maximum of codes, Atoll
reuse distance, same codes can be allocated to each sites allocatesthecodessothatthereisleastrepetitionofcodes.
cells.

328

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

4.7.2.1.3

Strategy:OneClusterperSite
Sincetherestrictionsofneighbourhoodonlyapplytocositeswiththesameimportanceandsitesdistancesaregreaterthan
reusedistances,everysitehasthesamepriority.Then,clusterallocationtositesisperformedinanalphanumericorder.
WithoutUseaMaximumofCodes

WithUseaMaximumofCodes

Inthisstrategy,aclusterofcodesislimitedtobeusedatjust When it is possible to use a maximum of codes, Atoll can

one site at a time unless all codes and clusters have been allocatedifferentcodesfromareusedclusteratanothersite.
allocatedandtherearestillsitesremainingtobeallocated.In
thiscaseAtollreusestheclustersasfaraspossibleatanother
site.

4.7.2.1.4

Strategy:DistributedperSite
Sincetherestrictionsofneighbourhoodonlyapplytocositeswiththesameimportanceandsitesdistancesaregreaterthan
reusedistances,everysitehasthesamepriority.Then,thegroupofadjacentclustersallocationtositesisperformedinan
alphanumericorder.
WithoutUseaMaximumofCodes

WithUseaMaximumofCodes

Inthisstrategy,agroupofadjacentclustersislimitedtobe When it is possible to use a maximum of codes, Atoll can

usedatjustonesiteatatimeunlessallcodesandgroupsof allocate different codes from a reused group of adjacent
adjacentclustershavebeenallocatedandtherearestillsites clusteratanothersite.
remainingtobeallocated.Inthiscase(hereonlyonegroup
of adjacent clusters (clusters 0, 1 and 2) is available), Atoll
reusesthegroupatanothersite.

329

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

4.7.2.2 AllocateCarriersIdentically
Inordertounderstandthebehaviourofalgorithmwhenusingtheoption"AllocateCarriersIdentically"ornot,letusconsider
thefollowingsamplescenario:
LetSite0,Site1,Site2andSite3befoursiteswith3cellsusingcarrier0and3cellsusingcarrier1.Scramblingcodeshaveto
beallocatedoutof3clustersconsistedof8primaryscramblingcodes.Thisimpliesthatthedomainofscramblingcodesfor
thefivesitesisfrom0to23(cluster0tocluster2).Thereusedistanceissupposedtobelessthantheintersitedistance.Only
cosite neighbours exist. Allocation algorithm will be based on the "One Cluster per Site" strategy and the option "Use a
MaximumofCodes"isselected.
WithoutAllocateCarriersIdentically

WithAllocateCarriersIdentically

Atoll allocates one cluster at each site as detailed in the Inthiscase,Atollallocatesoneclusterateachsiteandthen,

previoussection.Then,itallocatesacodefromtheclusterto one code to each transmitter so as to use a maximum of
eachcellofthesitesoastouseamaximumofcodes.
codes. Then, the same code is given to each cell of the
transmitter.
Inbothcases(withandwithoutAllocateCarriersIdentically),everysitehasthesamepriority.Then,clusterallocationtosites
isperformedinanalphanumericorder.

4.8 AutomaticGSMUMTSNeighbourAllocation
4.8.1 Overview
You can automatically calculate and allocate neighbours between GSM and UMTS networks. In Atoll, it is called inter
technologyneighbourallocation.
Intertechnologyhandoverisusedintwocases:

WhentheUMTScoverageisnotcontinuous.Inthiscase,theUMTScoverageisextendedbyUMTSGSMhandoverinto
theGSMnetwork,
Andinordertobalancetrafficandservicedistributionbetweenbothnetworks.

Notethattheautomaticintertechnologyneighbourallocationalgorithmtakesintoaccountbothcases.
Inordertobeabletousetheintertechnologyneighbourallocationalgorithm,youmusthave:

An.atldocumentcontainingtheGSMnetwork,GSM.atl,andanotheronedescribingtheUMTSnetwork,UMTS.atl,
AnexistinglinkontheTransmittersfolderofGSM.atlintoUMTS.atl.

The external neighbour allocation algorithm takes into account all the GSM TBC transmitters. It means that all the TBC
transmitters of GSM.atl are potential neighbours. The cells to be allocated will be called TBA cells which, being cells of
UMTS.atl,satisfyfollowingconditions:

Theyareactive,
TheysatisfythefiltercriteriaappliedtoTransmittersfolder,
Theyarelocatedinsidethefocuszone,
Theybelongtothefolderforwhichallocationhasbeenexecuted.ThisfoldercanbeeithertheTransmittersfolderor
agroupoftransmitterssubfolder.

OnlyUMTSTBAcellsmaybeassignedneighbours.

330

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

4.8.2 AutomaticAllocationDescription
Theallocationalgorithmtakesintoaccountcriterialistedbelow:

Theintertransmitterdistance,
Themaximumnumberofneighboursfixed,
Allocationoptions,
Theselectedallocationstrategy,

Twoallocationstrategiesareavailable:thefirstoneisbasedondistanceandthesecondoneoncoverageoverlapping.
WeassumewehaveaUMTSreferencecell,A,andaGSMcandidateneighbour,transmitterB.

4.8.2.1 AlgorithmBasedonDistance
Whentheautomaticallocationstarts,Atollchecksthefollowingconditions:

ThedistancebetweentheUMTSreferencecellandtheGSMneighbourmustbelessthantheuserdefinablemaximum
intersitedistance.IfthedistancebetweentheUMTSreferencecellandtheGSMneighbourisgreaterthanthisvalue,
thenthecandidateneighbourisdiscarded.
Atoll calculates the effective distance, which corresponds to the real intertransmitter distance weighted by the
azimuthsofantennas.Forinformationontheeffectivedistancecalculation,see"CalculationoftheInterTransmitter
Distance"onpage 320.

Thecalculationoptions,

Carriers:Thisoptionenablesyoutoselectthecarrier(s)onwhichyouwanttoruntheallocation.Youmaychooseoneormore
carriers.Atollwillallocateneighbourstocellsusingtheselectedcarriers.
Forcecositecellsasneighbours:ItenablesyoutoautomaticallyincludeGSMtransmitterslocatedonthesamesiteasthe
referenceUMTScellinthecandidateneighbourlist.Thisoptionisautomaticallyselected.
Force exceptional pairs: This option enables you to force/forbid some neighbourhood relationships. Therefore, you may
force/forbidaGSMtransmittertobecandidateneighbourofthereferenceUMTScell.
Deleteexistingneighbours:WhenselectingtheDeleteexistingneighboursoption,Atolldeletesallthecurrentneighboursand
carriesoutanewneighbourallocation.Ifnotselected,existingneighboursarekept.

Theimportanceofneighbours.

Importancevaluesareusedbytheallocationalgorithmtoranktheneighbours.Atolllistsallneighboursandsortsthemby
importance value so as to eliminate some of them from the neighbour list if the maximum number of neighbours to be
allocatedtoeachcellisexceeded.Ifweconsiderthecaseforwhichthereare15candidateneighboursandthemaximum
numberofneighbourstobeallocatedtothereferencecellis8.Amongthese15candidateneighbours,only8(havingthe
highest importance values) will be allocated to the reference cell. Note that the maximum number of intertechnology
neighbourscanbedefinedatthecelllevel(propertydialogueorcelltable).Ifdefinedthere,thisvalueistakenintoaccount
insteadofthedefaultoneavailableintheNeighbourAllocationdialogue.
Asindicatedinthetablebelow,theneighbourimportancedependsonthedistanceandontheneighbourhoodcause;this
valuevariesbetween0to100%.
Neighbourhoodcause

When

Importancevalue

Existingneighbour

IftheDeleteexistingneighboursoptionisnotselected

Existingimportance

Exceptionalpair

IftheForceexceptionalpairsoptionisselected

100%

Cositetransmitter

IftheForcecositecellsasneighboursoptionisselected

100%

Neighbourhoodrelationshipthat
fulfilsdistanceconditions

Ifthemaximumdistanceisnotexceeded

d1 ---------d max

Where d istheeffectivedistancebetweentheUMTSreferencecellandtheGSMneighbourand d max isthemaximuminter

sitedistance.
IntheResultspart,Atollprovidesthelistofneighbours,thenumberofneighboursandthemaximumnumberofneighbours
allowedforeachcell.Inaddition,itindicatestheimportance(in%)ofeachneighbourandtheallocationreason.Therefore,a
neighbour may be marked as exceptional pair, cosite, or distance. For neighbours accepted for distance reasons, Atoll
displaysthedistancefromthereferencecell(m).Finally,ifcellshavepreviousallocationsinthelist,neighboursaremarked
asexisting.

331

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

4.8.2.2 AlgorithmBasedonCoverageOverlapping
Whenautomaticallocationstarts,Atollchecksfollowingconditions:

ThedistancebetweentheUMTSreferencecellandtheGSMneighbourmustbelessthantheuserdefinablemaximum
intersitedistance.IfthedistancebetweentheUMTSreferencecellandtheGSMneighbourisgreaterthanthisvalue,
thenthecandidateneighbourisdiscarded.
Atoll calculates the effective distance, which corresponds to the real intertransmitter distance weighted by the
azimuthsofantennas.Forinformationontheeffectivedistancecalculation,see"CalculationoftheInterTransmitter
Distance"onpage 320.

Thecalculationoptions,

Carriers:Thisoptionenablesyoutoselectthecarrier(s)onwhichyouwanttoruntheallocation.Youmaychooseoneormore
carriers.Atollwillallocateneighbourstocellsusingtheselectedcarriers.
Forcecositecellsasneighbours:ItenablesyoutoautomaticallyincludeGSMtransmitterslocatedonthesamesiteasthe
referenceUMTScellinthecandidateneighbourlist.Thisoptionisautomaticallyselected.
Force exceptional pairs: This option enables you to force/forbid some neighbourhood relationships. Therefore, you may
force/forbidaGSMtransmittertobecandidateneighbourofthereferenceUMTScell.
Deleteexistingneighbours:WhenselectingtheDeleteexistingneighboursoption,Atolldeletesallthecurrentneighboursand
carriesoutanewneighbourallocation.Ifnotselected,existingneighboursarekept.

Theremustbeanoverlappingzone( S A S B )withagivencelledgecoverageprobability.

FourdifferentcasesmaybeconsideredforSA:

1stcase:SAistheareawherethecellAisthebestservingcelloftheUMTSnetwork.
ThepilotsignalreceivedfromAisgreaterthantheminimumpilotsignallevel,
ThepilotqualityfromAexceedsauserdefinableminimumvalue(minimumEc/I0)andisthehighestone.
Inthiscase,theEc/I0marginmustbeequalto0dBandthemaxEc/I0optiondisabled.

2ndcase:SArepresentstheareawherethepilotqualityfromthecellAstratsdecreasingbutthecellAisstillthe
bestservingcelloftheUMTSnetwork.
TheEc/I0marginmustbeequalto0dB,themaxEc/I0optionselectedandamaximumEc/I0userdefined.

ThepilotsignalreceivedfromAisgreaterthantheminimumpilotsignallevel,
ThepilotqualityfromAexceedstheminimumEc/I0butislowerthanthemaximumEc/I0.
ThepilotqualityfromAisthehighestone.
3rdcase:SArepresentstheareawherethecellAisnotthebestservingcellbutcanentertheactiveset.
Here,theEc/I0marginhastobedifferentfrom0dBandthemaxEc/I0optiondisabled.

ThepilotsignalreceivedfromAisgreaterthantheminimumpilotsignallevel,
ThepilotqualityfromAiswithinamarginfromthebestEc/I0,wherethebestEc/I0exceedstheminimumEc/
I0.
4thcase:SArepresentstheareawhere:
ThepilotsignalreceivedfromAisgreaterthantheminimumpilotsignallevel,
ThepilotqualityfromAiswithinamarginfromthebestEc/I0(wherethebestEc/I0exceedstheminimumEc/
I0)andlowerthanthemaximumEc/I0.
Inthiscase,themarginmustbedifferentfrom0dB,themaxEc/I0optionselectedandamaximumEc/I0user
defined.

TwodifferentcasesmaybeconsideredforSB:

1stcase:SBistheareawherethecellBisthebestservingcelloftheGSMnetwork.
Inthiscase,themarginmustbesetto0dB.

ThesignallevelreceivedfromBontheBCCHTRXtypeexceedstheuserdefinedminimumthresholdandisthe
highestone.
2ndcase:Themarginisdifferentfrom0dBandSBistheareawhere:
ThesignallevelreceivedfromBontheBCCHTRXtypeexceedstheuserdefinedminimumthresholdandis
withinamarginfromthebestBCCHsignallevel.

SA SB
- 100 )andcomparesthisvaluetothe%minimumcoveredarea.If
Atollcalculatesthepercentageofcoveredarea( ----------------SA
thispercentageisnotexceeded,thecandidateneighbourBisdiscarded.

332

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Candidateneighboursfulfillingcoverageconditionsaresortedindescendingorderwithrespectto%ofcoveredarea.
Whentheautomaticallocationisbasedoncoverageoverlapping,werecommendyouto
performtwosuccessiveautomaticallocations:

AfirstallocationinordertofindhandoversduetononcontinuousUMTScoverage.
Inthiscase,youhavetoselectthemaxEc/I0optionanddefineahighenoughvalue.
Asecondallocationinordertocompletethepreviouslistwithhandoversmotivated
forreasonsoftrafficandservicedistribution.Here,themaxEc/I0optionmustbe
disabled.

Theimportanceofneighbours.

Importancevaluesareusedbytheallocationalgorithmtoranktheneighboursaccordingtothedistanceandtheallocation
reason.Atolllistsallneighboursandsortsthembyimportancevaluesoastoeliminatesomeofthemfromtheneighbourlist
ifthemaximumnumberofneighbourstobeallocatedtoeachcellisexceeded.Ifweconsiderthecaseforwhichthereare15
candidateneighboursandthemaximumnumberofneighbourstobeallocatedtothereferencecellis8.Amongthese15
candidateneighbours,only8(havingthehighestimportancevalues)willbeallocatedtothereferencecell.Notethatthe
maximumnumberofintertechnologyneighbourscanbedefinedatthecelllevel(propertydialogueorcelltable).Ifdefined
there,thisvalueistakenintoaccountinsteadofthedefaultoneavailableintheNeighbourAllocationdialogue.
Asindicatedinthetablebelow,theneighbourimportancedependsonthedistanceandontheneighbourhoodcause;this
valuevariesbetween0to100%.
Neighbourhoodreason

When

Importancevalue

Existingneighbour

IftheDeleteexistingneighboursoptionisnotselected

Existingimportance

Exceptionalpair

IftheForceexceptionalpairsoptionisselected

100%

Cositetransmitter

IftheForcecositecellsasneighboursoptionisselected

ImportanceFunction(IF)

Neighbourhoodrelationshipthat
fulfilscoverageconditions

Ifthe%minimumcoveredareaisexceeded

ImportanceFunction(IF)

Exceptthecaseofforcedneighbours(importance=100%),priorityassignedtoeachneighbourhoodcauseisdetermined
usingtheImportanceFunction(IF).TheIFconsidersthreefactorsforcalculatingtheimportance:

The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.
d
Di = 1 ----------d max
d istheeffectivedistance(inm).Itcorrespondstotherealintertransmitterdistanceweightedbytheazimuthsof
antennas.Forinformationontheeffectivedistancecalculation,see"CalculationoftheInterTransmitterDistance"on
page 320.
d max isthemaximumdistancebetweenthereferencetransmitterandapossibleneighbour.

Thecositefactor(C):aBoolean,
Theoverlappingfactor(O):thepercentageofoverlapping.

TheIFisuserdefinableusingtheMinimportanceandMaximportancefields.
Factor

Minimportance

Defaultvalue

Maximportance

Defaultvalue

Distancefactor(Di)

Min(Di)

1%

Max(Di)

10%

Overlappingfactor(O)

Min(O)

10%

Max(O)

60%

Cositefactor(C)

Min(C)

60%

Max(C)

100%

TheIFevaluatesimportanceasfollows:
CositeNeighbourhood
cause

IF

ResultingIFusingthedefaultvalues
fromthetableabove

No

Min(O)+Delta(O){Max(Di)(Di)+(100%Max(Di))(O)}

10%+50%{10%(Di)+90%(O)}

Yes

Min(C)+Delta(C){Max(Di)(Di)/(Max(Di)+Max(O))+
Max(O)(O)/(Max(Di)+Max(O))}

60%+40%{1/7%(Di)+6/7%(O)}

Where
Delta(X)=Max(X)Min(X)

333

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter4:UMTSHSPANetworks

Forsk2014

SetMin(Di)andMax(Di)to0%ifyoudonotwanttotakeintoaccountthedistance
factorintheimportancecalculation.
IftheMinandMaxvaluerangesoftheimportancefunctionfactorsdonotoverlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum andmaximum importance fields, neighbours will beranked inthis order:
cositeneighboursandneighboursallocatedbasedoncoverageoverlapping.
If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.

IntheResultspart,Atollprovidesthelistofneighbours,thenumberofneighboursandthemaximumnumberofneighbours
allowedforeachcell.Inaddition,itindicatestheimportance(in%)ofeachneighbourandtheallocationreason.Therefore,a
neighbourmaybemarkedasexceptionalpair,cositeorcoverage.Forneighboursacceptedforcositeandcoveragereasons,
Atolldisplaysthepercentageofareameetingthecoverageconditionsandthecorrespondingsurfacearea(km2).Finally,if
cellshavepreviousallocationsinthelist,neighboursaremarkedasexisting.

Nopredictionstudyisneededtoperformanautomaticneighbourallocation.When
starting an automatic neighbour allocation, Atoll automatically calculates the path
lossmatricesifnotfound.
Aforbiddenneighbourmustnotbelistedasneighbourexceptiftheneighbourhood
relationship already exists and the Delete existing neighbours option is unchecked
whenyoustartthenewallocation.Inthiscase,AtolldisplaysawarningintheEvent
viewerindicatingthattheconstraintontheforbiddenneighbourwillbeignoredby
algorithmbecausetheneighbouralreadyexists.
In the Results, Atoll displays only the cells for which it finds new neighbours.
Therefore, if a TBA cell has already reached its maximum number of neighbours
beforestartingthenewallocation,itwillnotappearintheResultstable.

4.8.2.3 Appendices
4.8.2.3.1

DeleteExistingNeighboursOption
Asexplainedabove,AtollkeepstheexistingintertechnologyneighbourswhentheDeleteexistingneighboursoptionisnot
checked.Weassumethatwehaveanexistingallocationofintertechnologyneighbours.
A new TBA cell i is created in UMTS.atl. Therefore, if you start a new allocation without selecting the Delete existing
neighboursoption,Atolldeterminestheneighbourlistofthecelli.
If you change some allocation criteria (e.g. increase the maximum number of neighbours or create a new GSM TBC
transmitter)andstartanewallocationwithoutselectingtheDeleteexistingneighboursoption,itexaminestheneighbourlist
ofTBAcellsandchecksallocationcriteriaifthereisspaceintheirneighbourlists.AnewGSMTBCtransmittercanenterthe
TBAcellneighbourlistifallocationcriteriaaresatisfied.Itwillbethefirstoneintheneighbourlist.

334

Chapter5
CDMA2000Networks
ThischapterdescribesCDMA2000calculations.

Inthischapter,thefollowingareexplained:

"GeneralPredictionStudies"onpage 337

"DefinitionsandFormulas"onpage 340

"ActiveSetManagement"onpage 358

"Simulations"onpage 358

"CDMA2000PredictionStudies"onpage 392

"AutomaticNeighbourAllocation"onpage 423

"PNOffsetAllocation"onpage 430

"AutomaticGSMCDMANeighbourAllocation"
onpage 438

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

5 CDMA2000Networks
ThischapterdescribesallthecalculationsperformedinAtollCDMA2000documents.
AllthecalculationsareperformedonTBC(tobecalculated)transmitters.ForthedefinitionofTBCtransmitterspleaserefer
to"PathLossMatrices"onpage 99.

5.1 GeneralPredictionStudies
5.1.1 CalculationCriteria
Threecriteriacanbestudiedinpointanalysis(Profiletab)andincommoncoveragestudies.Studycriteriaaredetailedinthe
tablebelow:
Studycriteria

Formulas

Signallevel( P rec )indBm

Signallevelreceivedfromatransmitteronacarrier(cell)
P rec ic = EIRP ic L path M Shadowing model L Indoor + G term L term
L path = L model + L ant

Pathloss( L path )indBm

Totallosses( L total )indBm

Tx

L total = L path + L Tx + L term + L indoor + M Shadowing model G Tx + G term

where,
EIRPistheeffectiveisotropicradiatedpowerofthetransmitter,
icisacarrierrank,
L model isthelossonthetransmitterreceiverpath(pathloss)calculatedbythepropagationmodel,
L ant isthetransmitterantennaattenuation(fromantennapatterns),
Tx

M Shadowing model istheshadowingmargin.ThisparameteristakenintoaccountwhentheoptionShadowingtakeninto

accountisselected,
L Indoor aretheindoorlosses,takenintoaccountwhentheoptionIndoorcoverageisselected,
L term arethereceiverlosses,
G term isthereceiverantennagain,
G Tx isthetransmitterantennagain,
L Tx isthetransmitterloss( L Tx = L total DL ).Forinformationoncalculatingtransmitterloss,"UMTS,CDMA2000,TDSCDMA,
WiMAX,andLTEDocuments"onpage 28.

For CDMA2000 1xRTT systems, EIRP ic = P pilot ic + G Tx L Tx (where, P pilot ic

isthecellpilotpower).
ForCDMA20001xEVDOsystems, EIRP ic = P max ic + G Tx L Tx (where P max ic

isthemaximumcellpower).
Whenyoumaketheprediction,youcanconsiderthebestcarrierofallbandsorthe
bestcarrierofaparticularfrequencyband(Best(AllBands/SpecificBand)option).In
thiscase,Atolldisplaysthebestsignallevelreceivedfromatransmitter.Therefore,if
thenetworkconsistsof1xRTTand1xEVDOcarriers,Atolltakesthehighestpowerof
bothcellsforeachtransmitter(i.e.thehighestvaluebetweenthepilotpowerofthe
1xRTT cell and the maximum power of the 1xEVDO cell) to calculate the received
signallevel.
Atollconsidersthat G term and L term equalzero.

337

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

5.1.2 PointAnalysis
5.1.2.1 ProfileTab
Atolldisplayseitherthesignallevelreceivedfromtheselectedtransmitteronacarrier( P rec ic ),orthehighestsignallevel
receivedfromtheselectedtransmitteronthebestcarrier.

Foraselectedtransmitter,itisalsopossibletostudythepathloss, L path ,orthetotal

losses, L total .Pathlossandtotallossesarethesameonanycarrier.

5.1.2.2 ReceptionTab
AnalysisprovidedintheReceptiontabisbasedonpathlossmatrices.So,youcanstudyreceptionfromTBCtransmittersfor
whichpathlossmatriceshavebeencomputedontheircalculationareas.
Foreachtransmitter,Atolldisplayseitherthesignallevelreceivedonacarrier,( P rec ic ),orthehighestsignallevelreceived
onthebestcarrier.
Receptionbarsaredisplayedinadecreasingsignallevelorder.Themaximumnumberofreceptionbarsdependsonthesignal
levelreceivedfromthebestserver.Onlyreceptionbarsoftransmitterswhosesignalleveliswithina30 dBmarginfromthe
bestservercanbedisplayed.

Foraselectedtransmitter,itisalsopossibletostudythepathloss, L path ,orthetotal

losses, L total .Pathlossandtotallossesarethesameonanycarrier.

Youcanuseavalueotherthan30 dBforthemarginfromthebestserversignallevel,
for example a smaller value for improving the calculation speed. For more
information on defining a different value for this margin, see the Administrator
Manual.

5.1.3 CoverageStudies
ForeachTBCtransmitter,Txi,AtolldeterminestheselectedcriteriononeachbininsidetheTxicalculationarea.Infact,each
binwithintheTxicalculationareaisconsideredasapotential(fixedormobile)receiver.
Coveragestudyparameterstobesetare:

ThestudyconditionsinordertodeterminetheserviceareaofeachTBCtransmitter,
Thedisplaysettingstoselecthowtocolourserviceareas.

5.1.3.1 ServiceAreaDetermination
AtollusesparametersenteredintheConditiontabofthecoveragestudypropertydialoguetopredetermineareaswhereit
willdisplaycoverage.
Wecandistinguishthreecases:

5.1.3.1.1

AllServers
TheserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothebinswhere:
Txi

Txi

Txi

Minimumthreshold P rec ic or L total or L path Maximumthreshold

5.1.3.1.2

BestSignalLevelandaMargin
TheserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothebinswhere:
Txi

Txi

Txi

Minimumthreshold P rec ic or L total or L path Maximumthreshold

And
Txi

Txj

P rec ic Best P rec ic M

ji

Misthespecifiedmargin(dB).
Bestfunction:considersthehighestvalue.

338

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

5.1.3.1.3

Ifthemarginequals0dB,Atollwillconsiderbinswherethesignallevelreceivedfrom
Txiisthehighest.
If the margin is set to 2 dB, Atoll will consider bins where the signal level received
fromTxiiseitherthehighestor2dBlowerthanthehighest.
Ifthemarginissetto2dB,Atollwillconsiderbinswherethesignallevelreceived
from Txi is 2dB higher than the signal levels from transmitters, which are 2nd best
servers.

SecondBestSignalLevelandaMargin
TheserviceareaofTxicorrespondstothebinswhere:
Txi

Txi

Txi

Minimumthreshold P rec ic or L total or L path Maximumthreshold

And
Txi

nd

Txj

P rec ic 2 Best P rec ic M

ji

Misthespecifiedmargin(dB).
2ndBestfunction:considersthesecondhighestvalue.

Ifthemarginequals0dB,Atollwillconsiderbinswherethesignallevelreceivedfrom
Txiisthesecondhighest.
If the margin is set to 2 dB, Atoll will consider bins where the signal level received
fromTxiiseitherthesecondhighestor2dBlowerthanthesecondhighest.
Ifthemarginissetto2dB,Atollwillconsiderbinswherethesignallevelreceived
from Txi is 2dB higher than the signal levels from transmitters, which are 3rd best
servers.

5.1.3.2 CoverageDisplay
5.1.3.2.1

PlotResolution
Predictionplotresolutionisindependentofthematrixresolutionsandcanbedefinedonaperstudybasis.Predictionplots
are generated from multiresolution path loss matrices using bilinear interpolation method (similar to the one used to
evaluatesitealtitude).

5.1.3.2.2

DisplayTypes
Itispossibletodisplaythetransmitterserviceareawithcoloursdependingonanytransmitterattributeorothercriteriasuch
as:
SignalLevel(indBm,dBV,dBV/m)
Atollcalculatessignallevelreceivedfromthetransmitteroneachbinofeachtransmitterservicearea.Abinofaservicearea
iscolouredifthesignallevelisgreaterthanorequaltothedefinedminimumthresholds(bincolourdependsonsignallevel).
Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.Thereareasmanylayers
astransmitterserviceareas.Eachlayershowsthedifferentsignallevelsavailableinthetransmitterservicearea.
BestSignalLevel(indBm,dBV,dBV/m)
Atollcalculatessignallevelsreceivedfromtransmittersoneachbinofeachtransmitterservicearea.Whereotherservice
areasoverlapthestudiedone,Atollchoosesthehighestvalue.Abinofaserviceareaiscolouredifthesignallevelisgreater
thanorequaltothedefinedthresholds(thebincolourdependsonthesignallevel).Coverageconsistsofseveralindependent
layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as defined thresholds. Each layer
correspondstoanareawherethesignallevelfromthebestserverexceedsadefinedminimumthreshold.
PathLoss(dB)
Atollcalculatespathlossfromthetransmitteroneachbinofeachtransmitterservicearea.Abinofaserviceareaiscoloured
ifpathlossisgreaterthanorequaltothedefinedminimumthresholds(bincolourdependsonpathloss).Coverageconsists
ofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.Thereareasmanylayersasserviceareas.
Eachlayershowsthedifferentpathlosslevelsinthetransmitterservicearea.

339

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

TotalLosses(dB)
Atoll calculates total losses from the transmitter on each bin of each transmitter service area. A bin of a service area is
coloured if total losses is greater than or equal to the defined minimum thresholds (bin colour depends on total losses).
Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.Thereareasmanylayers
asserviceareas.Eachlayershowsthedifferenttotallosseslevelsinthetransmitterservicearea.
BestServerPathLoss(dB)
Atollcalculatessignallevelsreceivedfromtransmittersoneachbinofeachtransmitterservicearea.Whereotherservice
areasoverlapthestudiedone,Atolldeterminesthebesttransmitterandevaluatespathlossfromthebesttransmitter.Abin
ofaserviceareaiscolouredifthepathlossisgreaterthanorequaltothedefinedthresholds(bincolourdependsonpath
loss).Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.Thereareasmany
layersasdefinedthresholds.Eachlayercorrespondstoanareawherethepathlossfromthebestserverexceedsadefined
minimumthreshold.
BestServerTotalLosses(dB)
Atollcalculatessignallevelsreceivedfromtransmittersoneachbinofeachtransmitterservicearea.Whereserviceareas
overlapthestudiedone,Atolldeterminesthebesttransmitterandevaluatestotallossesfromthebesttransmitter.Abinof
aserviceareaiscolouredifthetotallossesisgreaterthanorequaltothedefinedthresholds(bincolourdependsontotal
losses).Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.Thereareasmany
layersasdefinedthresholds.Eachlayercorrespondstoanareawherethetotallossesfromthebestserverexceedadefined
minimumthreshold.
NumberofServers
Atollevaluateshowmanyserviceareascoverabininordertodeterminethenumberofservers.Thebincolourdependson
thenumberofservers.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.
Thereareasmanylayersasdefinedthresholds.Eachlayercorrespondstoanareawherethenumberofserversisgreaterthan
orequaltoadefinedminimumthreshold.
CellEdgeCoverageProbability(%)
On each bin of each transmitter service area, the coverage corresponds to the pixels where the signal level from this
transmitterfulfilssignalconditionsdefinedinConditionstabwithdifferentCelledgecoverageprobabilities.Thereisone
coverageareapertransmitterintheexplorer.
BestCellEdgeCoverageProbability(%)
Oneachbinofeachtransmitterservicearea,thecoveragecorrespondstothepixelswherethebestsignallevelreceivedfulfils
signalconditionsdefinedinConditionstab.Thereisonecoverageareapercelledgecoverageprobabilityintheexplorer.

5.2 DefinitionsandFormulas
5.2.1 ParametersUsedforCDMA20001xRTTModelling
5.2.1.1 Inputs
Thistablelistssimulationandpredictioninputs(calculationoptions,qualitytargets,activesetmanagementconditions,etc.)

340

Name

Value

Unit

Description

F ortho

Clutterparameter

None

Orthogonalityfactor

F MUD

Tx

Siteequipmentparameter

None

MUDfactor

cn first

Frequencybandparameter

None

Firstcarriernumber

cn last

Frequencybandparameter

None

Lastcarriernumber

cn

Frequencybandparameter

None

Carriernumberstep

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

Name

Value

Unit

Frequencybandparameter

ic

None

Description
Carrierrankofthecurrentcarrier
calculatedasfollows:
cn cnfirst
- cn lower
ic = ------------------------ cn
Where cn lower isthenumberof
carriernumberslowerthan cn
includingexcludedcarriersand
carriersofotherfrequencybands

Q pilot

req

Q pilot txi ic + Q pilot

min

Q pilot txi ic + Q pilot

Q pilot txi ic

req

Min.Ec/I0Cellparameter

min

T_DropCellparameter

Q pilot

Q pilot txi ic

req

req

min

min

Activesetupperthreshold
None (usedtodeterminethebestserverin
theactiveset)
None

Activesetlowerthreshold
(usedtodetermineothermembers
oftheactiveset)

MinimumEc/I0requiredfromthe
None celltobethebestserverintheactive
set
None

MinimumEc/I0requiredfromthe
cellnottoberejectedfromthe
activeset

VariationoftheminimumEc/I0
None requiredfromthecelltobethebest
serverintheactiveset

req

DeltaMin.Ec/I0Mobilityparameter

Q pilot

min

DeltaT_DropMobilityparameter

None

VariationoftheminimumEc/I0
requiredfromthecellnottobe
rejectedfromtheactiveset

RSCP min Txi ic

CellparameterorGlobalparameter

TheminimumpilotRSCPrequiredfor
ausertobeconnectedtothe
transmitteronagivencarrier

None

Eb/NttargetforFCHchannelon
downlink

None

Eb/NttargetforSCHchannelon
downlink

None

Eb/NttargetforFCHchannelon
uplink

None

Eb/NttargetforSCHchannelon
uplink

Q pilot

DL

Q req FCH

E b
--- N t req

FCH DL

(Service,Terminal,Mobility)parameter
SCH DL

E b
--- N t req

DL
Q req SCH

(Service,Terminal,Mobility,SCHthroughputmultiple)parameter
UL

Q req FCH

E b
--- N t req

FCH UL

(Service,Terminal,Mobility)parameter
E b
--- N t req

SCH UL

UL
Q req SCH

(Service,Terminal,Mobility,SCHthroughputmultiple)parameter
Max

Siteparameter

None

Numberofchannelelements
availableforasiteonuplink

N CE D L N I

Max

Siteparameter

None

Numberofchannelelements
availableforasiteondownlink

N CE U L N I

Simulationresult

None

Numberofchannelelementsofa
siteconsumedbyusersonuplink

N CE D L N I

Simulationresult

None

Numberofchannelelementsofa
siteconsumedbyusersondownlink

Overhead

Siteequipmentparameter

None

Numberofchannelelementsusedby
thecellforcommonchannelson
uplink

Overhead

Siteequipmentparameter

None

Numberofchannelelementsusedby
thecellforcommonchannelson
downlink

N CE U L N I

N CE U L

N CE D L

341

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

Name

Value

Unit

Description

N CE U L

FCH

(Terminal,siteequipment)parameter

None

Numberofchannelelementsused
forFCHonuplink

FCH

(Terminal,siteequipment)parameter

None

Numberofchannelelementsused
forFCHondownlink

N Codes txi ic

Simulationconstraint

None

MaximumnumberofWalshcodes
availablepercell(128)

N Codes txi ic

Simulationresult

None

NumberofWalshcodesusedbythe
cell

NF term

Terminalparameter

None

TerminalNoiseFigure

N CE D L
Max

Transmitterparameter(userdefinedorcalculatedfromtransmitter
None
equipmentcharacteristics)

NF Tx

TransmitterNoiseFigure

1.381023

J/K

Boltzmanconstant

293

Ambienttemperature

1.23MHz

Hz

SpreadingBandwidth

NRinter techno log y

Cellparameter

None Intertechnologydownlinknoiserise

NRinter techno log y

Cellparameter

None

Intertechnologyuplinknoiserise

RF ic ic adj

Networkparameter
Ifnotdefined,itisassumedthatthereisnointercarrier
interference

None

Interferencereductionfactor
betweentwoadjacentcarriers ic

Tx DL

Tx UL

Tx m

ICPic ic
i

Networkparameter
Ifnotdefined,itisassumedthatthereisnointertechnology
downlinkinterferencesduetoexternaltransmitters

and ic adj
IntertechnologyChannelProtection
betweenthesignaltransmittedbyTx
andreceivedbymassumingthe
None
frequencygapbetween ic i (external
network)and ic

UL

X max
DL

%Powermax

Maximumuplinkloadfactor

Simulationconstraint(globalparameterorcellparameter)

Maximumpercentageofusedpower

Thermalnoiseattransmitter

Tx UL

Tx

NFTx K T W NR inter techno log y

Term

NF Term K T W NR inter techno log y

Thermalnoiseatterminal

Rc

bps

Chiprate

f rakeefficiency

UL

Equipmentparameter

DL

Terminalparameter

N0
N0

f rakeefficiency
SCH

TPF DL
FCH

TP P DL
SCH

TP P DL
SCH

TPF UL
FCH

TP P UL
SCH

TP P UL

342

Simulationconstraint(globalparameterorcellparameter)

Tx DL

Simulationresult
Terminalparameter
FCH

SCH

TP P DL TPF DL

Simulationresult
Terminalparameter
FCH

SCH

TP P UL TPF UL

None Uplinkrakereceiverefficiencyfactor
None

Downlinkrakereceiverefficiency
factor

SCHthroughputfactor(drawn
None followingtheSCHprobabilitiesofthe
service)
bps

DownlinkFCHpeakthroughput

bps

DownlinkSCHbitrate

SCHthroughputfactor(drawn
None followingtheSCHprobabilitiesofthe
service)
bps

UplinkFCHpeakthroughput

bps

UplinkSCHbitrate

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

Name

Value

Unit

Description

W ----------------FCH
TP P DL

None

Downlinkserviceprocessinggainon
FCH

W ----------------SCH
TP P DL

None

Downlinkserviceprocessinggainon
SCH

W ----------------FCH
TP P UL

None

Uplinkserviceprocessinggainon
FCH

W ----------------SCH
TP P UL

None

Uplinkserviceprocessinggainon
SCH

DL

Serviceparameter

None

DownlinkactivityfactoronFCH

AF FCH

UL

Serviceparameter

None

UplinkactivityfactoronFCH

P Sync txi ic

Cellparameter

Cellsynchronisationchannelpower

P paging txi ic

Cellparameter

Cellothercommonchannels(except
CPICHandSCH)power

P pilot txi ic

Cellparameter

Cellpilotpower

P max txi ic

Cellparameter

Maximumcellpower

M pooling txi ic

Cellparameter

dB

Maximumamountofpower
reservedforpooling

P FCH

min

Serviceparameter

MinimumpowerallowedforFCH

P FCH

max

Serviceparameter

MaximumpowerallowedforFCH

P SCH

min

Serviceparameter

MinimumpowerallowedforSCH

P SCH

max

Serviceparameter

MaximumpowerallowedforSCH

P FCH txi ic tch

Simulationresultincludingtheterm AF FCH Serv

CellFCHpowerforatrafficchannel
oncarrieric

TotalFCHpoweroncarrieric

Simulationresult

TransmitterSCHpowerforatraffic
channeloncarrieric

TotalSCHpoweroncarrieric

Transmittertotaltransmittedpower
oncarrieric

FCH DL

Gp

SCH DL

Gp

FCH UL

Gp

SCH UL

Gp

AF FCH

P FCH txi ic

DL

P FCH txi ic tch

tch FCH ic

P SCH txi ic tch

P SCH txi ic

P SCH ic tch

tch SCH ic

P tx txi ic

P pilot txi ic + P Sync txi ic + P paging txi ic + P SCH txi ic

+ P FCH txi ic

P term

min

Terminalparameter

Minimumterminalpowerallowed

max

Terminalparameter

Maximumterminalpowerallowed

P term
FCH

Simulationresultincludingtheterm AF FCH Serv

TerminalFCHpowertransmittedin
carrieric

P term ic

SCH

Simulationresult

TerminalSCHpowertransmittedon
carrieric

BTS

BTSparameter

PercentageofBTSsignalcorrectly
transmitted

term

Terminalparameter

Percentageofterminalsignal
correctlytransmitted

P term ic

UL

343

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

Name

Value

Unit

Description

Clutterparameter

Percentageofpilotfinger
percentageofsignalreceivedbythe
terminalpilotfinger

G Tx

Antennaparameter

None

Transmitterantennagain

G Term

Terminalparameter

None

Terminalgain

Transmitterparameter(userdefinedorcalculatedfromtransmitter
None
equipmentcharacteristics)

L Tx

Transmitterlossa

L body

Serviceparameter

None

Bodyloss

L Term

Terminalparameter

None

Terminalloss

L indoor

Clutter(and,optionally,frequencyband)parameter

L path

Propagationmodelresult

None

Pathloss

Terminalparameter

None

Numberoffingers

Terminalparameter

Pilotpowerpercentage

M Shadowing model

Resultcalculatedfromcelledgecoverageprobabilityandmodel
standarddeviation

None

ModelShadowingmargin
Onlyusedinpredictionstudies

M Shadowing Ec Io

ResultcalculatedfromcelledgecoverageprobabilityandEc/I0
standarddeviation

None

Ec/I0Shadowingmargin
Onlyusedinpredictionstudies

None

DLgainduetoavailabilityofseveral
pilotsignalsatthemobileb.

DL

M Shadowing Eb Nt

npaths

G macro diversity = M Shadowing Ec Io M Shadowing Ec Io

DL

G macro diversity
M Shadowing Eb Nt

Indoorloss

n=2or3
DL

ResultcalculatedfromcelledgecoverageprobabilityandDLEb/Nt
None
standarddeviation

DLEb/NtShadowingmargin
Onlyusedinpredictionstudies

UL

ResultcalculatedfromcelledgecoverageprobabilityandULEb/Nt
None
standarddeviation

ULEb/NtShadowingmargin
Onlyusedinpredictionstudies

UL

UL
G macro diversity

E Shadowing

npaths

G macro diversity = M Shadowing Eb Nt

M Shadowing Eb Nt

None

ULqualitygainduetosignaldiversity
in soft handoffc.

None

Randomshadowingerrordrawn
duringMonteCarlosimulation
Onlyusedinsimulations

None

Transmitterterminaltotalloss

P pilot txi ic
------------------------------LT

Chippowerreceivedatterminal

P FCH txi ic tch

----------------------------------------LT

Bitreceivedpoweratterminalfor
FCHoncarrieric

UL

n=2or3
Globalparameter(defaultvalue)
Simulationresult

UL

Inpredictionstudiesd
ForEc/I0calculation
L path L Tx L term L body L indoor M Shadowing Ec Io
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G Tx G term

LT

ForDLEb/Ntcalculation
L path L Tx L term L body L indoor M Shadowing Eb Nt
DL
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G Tx G term
ForULEb/Ntcalculation
L path L Tx L term L body L indoor M Shadowing Eb Nt
UL
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G Tx G term
Insimulations
L path L Tx L term L body L indoor E Shadowing
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G Tx G term

P c txi ic
FCH DL

Pb

344

txi ic tch

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

Name
SCH DL

Pb

txi ic tch

DL

FCH DL

P b txi ic tch

Pb

Value

Unit

Description

P SCH txi ic tch

----------------------------------------LT

Bitreceivedpoweratterminalfor
SCHoncarrieric

Bitreceivedpoweratterminalfor
FCH+SCHoncarrieric

Totalreceivedpoweratterminal
fromatransmitteroncarrieric

Totalpowerreceivedatterminal
fromtrafficchannelsofatransmitter
oncarrieric

Bitreceivedpowerattransmitterfor
FCHoncarrieric

Bitreceivedpowerattransmitterfor
SCHoncarrieric

Bitreceivedpowerattransmitterfor
SCH+FCHoncarrieric

Totalpowertransmittedbythe
terminaloncarrieric

Chipreceivedpowerattransmitter

SCH DL

txi ic tch + P b

P tx txi ic
-------------------------LT

DL

P tot txi ic

DL

P traf txi ic

tch ic

P FCH txi ic + P SCH txi ic

-----------------------------------------------------------------LT
FCH

FCH UL

ic

P term
-----------LT

SCH UL

ic

P term
-----------LT

Pb

Pb

SCH

UL

FCH UL

P b ic

Pb

SCH UL

ic + P b

ic

UL

P b ic
UL
UL
P b ic + P c ic = ---------------1 p

UL

P tot ic
UL

UL

P c ic
a.

txi ic tch

p Ptot ic

L Tx = L total UL onuplinkand L Tx = L total DL ondownlink.Forinformationoncalculatingtransmitterlossesonuplinkanddownlink,

see"UMTS,CDMA2000,TDSCDMA,WiMAX,andLTEDocuments"onpage 28.

b.

npaths

M Shadowing Ec Io correspondstotheshadowingmarginevaluatedfromtheshadowingerrorprobabilitydensityfunction(npaths)incase
ofdownlinkEc/I0modelling.
npaths

c.

M Shadowing Eb Nt

d.

caseofuplinksofthandoffmodelling.
In uplink prediction studies, only carrier power level is downgraded by the shadowing margin ( M Shadowing Eb Nt

UL

correspondstotheshadowingmarginevaluatedfromtheshadowingerrorprobabilitydensityfunction(npaths)in

UL

). In downlink

prediction studies, carrier power level and intracell interference are downgraded by the shadowing model ( M Shadowing Eb Nt
M Shadowing Ec Io )whileextracellinterferencelevelisnot.Therefore, M Shadowing Eb Nt

DL

DL

or

or M Shadowing Ec Io issetto1indownlink

extracellinterferencecalculation.

5.2.1.2 Ec/I0Calculation
Thistabledetailsthepilotquality( Q pilot or Ec Io )calculations.
Name

Value

I intra txi ic

P tot txi ic

DL

DL

DL

I extra ic

DL

P tot txj ic

Unit

Description

Downlinkintracellinterferenceat
terminaloncarrieric

Downlinkextracellinterferenceat
terminaloncarrieric

Downlinkintercarrierinterference
atterminaloncarrier ic

txj j i

Ptot txj icadj

DL

DL
I inter carrier ic

DL
I inter techno log y ic

txj
j
--------------------------------------------RF ic ic adj

ni

DL

I 0 ic

Tx

P Transmitted ic i
------------------------------------Tx
Tx m
L total ICP ic ic

Downlinkintertechnology
interferenceatterminaloncarrieric
a

Term

DL
DL
DL
DL
I intra txi ic + I extra ic + I inter carrier ic + I inter techno log y ic + N 0 W

Totalreceivednoiseatterminalon
carriericb

345

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

Name

Value

Unit

Description

E
Q pilot txi ic ----c
I0

BTS P c txi ic
-------------------------------------------------DL
I 0 ic

None

Qualitylevelatterminalonpilotfor
carrieric

a.

InthecaseofaninterferingGSMexternalnetworkinfrequencyhopping,theICPvalueisweightedaccordingtothefractionalload.

b.

Inanactiveset, N 0

Term

iscalculatedforallitsmemberswithIntertechnologydownlinknoiseriseofthebestserver.

5.2.1.3 DLEb/NtCalculation
Eb
DL
Thistabledetailscalculationsofdownlinktrafficchannelquality( Q tch (tchcouldbeFCHorSCH)or ------ ).
Nt DL
Name

Value

Unit

Description

I intra txi ic

1 BTS F ortho P DL txi ic

tot

Downlinkintracellinterferenceat
terminaloncarrieric

Downlinkextracellinterferenceat
terminaloncarrieric

Downlinkintercarrierinterference
atterminaloncarrier ic

DL

DL

I extra ic

DL

P tot txj ic

txj j i

Ptot txj icadj

DL

DL
I inter carrier ic

txj j
---------------------------------------------

RF ic ic adj

DL

I inter techno log y ic

ni
DL

N tot ic

DL

DL

Tx

P Transmitted ic i
-------------------------------------Tx
Tx m
L total ICP ic ic

DL

Downlinkintertechnology
interferenceatterminaloncarrieric

Term

DL

I intra ic + I extra ic + I inter carrier ic + I inter techno log y ic + N 0

Totalreceivednoiseatterminalon
carrieric

None

Qualitylevelatterminalonatraffic
channelfromonetransmitterfora
FCHchanneloncarriericb

Withoutusefulsignal:
FCH DL
Pb
txi

DL
Q FCH txi

E DL
ic ----b-
N t FCH

DL
Q FCH ic

BTS
ic tch
DL
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ G FCH
p
DL
DL
N tot ic 1 F ortho BTS P b txi ic
FCH DL

BTS P b
txi ic tch
DL
- G FCH
Totalnoise: -----------------------------------------------------------------p
DL
N tot ic
DL

f rakeefficiency

DL

Q FCH tx k ic

tx k ActiveSet FCH

QualitylevelatterminalforFCH
usingcarriericduetocombinationof
None
alltransmittersoftheactiveset
(Macrodiversityconditions).

Withoutusefulsignal:
SCH DL
Pb
txi

E DL
DL
Q SCH txi ic ----b-
N t SCH

DL
Q SCH ic

BTS
ic tch
DL
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ G SCH
p
DL
DL
N tot ic 1 F ortho BTS P b txi ic

None

SCH DL

BTS P b
txi ic tch
DL
- G SCH
Totalnoise: -----------------------------------------------------------------p
DL
N tot ic
DL

f rakeefficiency

DL

Q SCH tx k ic

tx k ActiveSet SCH

QualitylevelatterminalforSCH
usingcarriericduetocombinationof
None
alltransmittersoftheactiveset
(Macrodiversityconditions).

DL

DL

G SHO FCH

Q FCH ic
---------------------------------------------------DL
Q FCH BestServer ic

None

DownlinksofthandovergainforFCH
channeloncarrieric

None

DownlinksofthandovergainforSCH
channeloncarrieric

DL

DL

G SHO SCH

346

Q SCH ic
---------------------------------------------------DL
Q SCH BestServer ic

Qualitylevelatterminalonatraffic
channelfromonetransmitterfora
SCHchanneloncarriericc

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

Name

Value

Unit

Description

Q req FCH
---------------------- P FCH txi ic
DL
Q FCH ic

RequiredtransmitterFCHtraffic
channelpowertoachieveEb/Nt
targetatterminaloncarrieric

RequiredtransmitterSCHtraffic
channelpowertoachieveEb/Nt
targetatterminaloncarrieric

Requiredtransmittertrafficchannel
poweroncarrieric

DL

req

P FCH txi ic

DL

Q req SCH
----------------------- P SCH txi ic
DL
Q SCH ic

req

P SCH txi ic
req

req

P tch txi ic
a.
b.

req

P FCH txi ic + P SCH txi ic

InthecaseofaninterferingGSMexternalnetworkinfrequencyhopping,theICPvalueisweightedaccordingtothefractionalload.
CalculationoptionmaybeselectedintheGlobalparameterstab.Thechosenoptionwillbetakenintoaccountonlyinsimulations.Inpoint
analysisandcoveragestudies,AtollusestheoptionTotalnoisetoevaluateDLandULEb/Nt.
CalculationoptionmaybeselectedintheGlobalparameterstab.Thechosenoptionwillbetakenintoaccountonlyinsimulations.Inpoint
analysisandcoveragestudies,AtollusestheoptionTotalnoisetoevaluateDLandULEb/Nt.

c.

5.2.1.4 ULEb/NtCalculation
Eb
UL
Thistabledetailscalculationsofuplinktrafficchannelquality( Q tch (tchcouldbeFCHorSCH)or ------ ).
Nt UL
Name

Value

Pb

UL

UL

intra
I tot
txi

UL

extra

I tot

ic

UL

term
txj j i
UL

UL

I inter carrier txi ic

Totalpowerreceivedattransmitter
fromintracellterminalsusingcarrier
ic

Totalpowerreceivedattransmitter
fromextracellterminalsusing
carrieric

Uplinkintercarrierinterferenceat
terminaloncarrier ic

UL

P b ic + P c ic

Pb

Description

UL

ic + P c ic

term
txi

txi ic

Unit

UL

ic adj + P c ic adj

term
txj
j
----------------------------------------------------------------------

RF ic ic adj

UL

I tot txi ic
UL

N tot txi ic

UL extra

I tot

UL intra

Tx

txi ic + 1 F MUD term I tot

UL

UL
W
txi ic +I inter carrier txi ic

tx

I tot txi ic + N 0

Totalreceivedinterferenceat
transmitteroncarrieric

Totalnoiseattransmitteroncarrier
ic(Uplinkinterference)a

None

Qualitylevelattransmitterona
trafficchannelfortheFCHchannel
oncarriericb

None

Qualitylevelattransmitterona
trafficchannelfortheSCHchannel
oncarriericc

Withoutusefulsignal:
FCH UL

E
UL
Q FCH txi ic ----b-
N t UL

term P b
ic
UL
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- G FCH
p
UL
Tx
UL
N tot txi ic 1 F MUD term P b ic
FCH UL

term P b
ic
FCH UL
Totalnoise: ----------------------------------------------- Gp
UL
N tot txi ic
Withoutusefulsignal:
SCH UL

E
UL
Q SCH txi ic ----b-
N t UL

term P b
ic
UL
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- G SCH
p
UL
Tx
UL
N tot txi ic 1 F MUD term P b ic
SCH UL

term P b
ic
SCH UL
Totalnoise: ----------------------------------------------- Gp
UL
N tot txi ic

347

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

Name

Value

Unit

Description

UL

NoHO: Q tch txi ic

UL

SofterHO: f rakeefficiency

UL

Q tch tx k ic

tx k ActiveSet
samesite

Soft,Softer/SoftHO(NoMRC):

Max Q UL
tch tx k
tx k ActiveSet

UL

ic G macro diversity

Softer/SoftHO(MRC):

UL

Q tch ic

UL

UL
UL
Q tch tx k ic Q tch tx l ic
txk ,txl ActiveSet f rakeefficiency

txk samesite

txk
Max

Qualitylevelatsiteusingcarrieric
duetocombinationofall
transmittersoftheactivesetlocated
atthesamesiteandtakinginto
accountincreaseofthequalitydue
None tomacrodiversity(macrodiversity
gain).
tchcouldbeFCHorSCH

Insimulations,
UL
G macro diversity

tx othersite
l

= 1.

UL

G macro diversity

UL

Q FCH ic
---------------------------------------------------UL
Q FCH BestServer ic

UL
G SHO FCH

None

UplinksofthandovergainforFCH
channeloncarrieric

None

UplinksofthandovergainforSCH
channeloncarrieric

Requiredterminalpowertoachieve
Eb/NttargetattransmitterforFCH
oncarrieric

Requiredterminalpowertoachieve
Eb/NttargetattransmitterforSCH
oncarrieric

Requiredterminalpoweroncarrier
ic

UL

Q SCH ic
---------------------------------------------------UL
Q SCH BestServer ic

UL

G SHO SCH

UL

FCH req

ic

Q req FCH
---------------------- P FCH
term ic
UL
Q FCH ic

SCH req

ic

Q req SCH
----------------------- P SCH
term ic
UL
Q SCH ic

P term

UL

P term

req

FCH req

P term ic

P term

SCH req

ic + P term

ic

tx

a.

Inanactiveset, N 0 iscalculatedforallitsmemberswithIntertechnologyuplinknoiseriseofthebestserver.

b.

CalculationoptionmaybeselectedintheGlobalparameterstab.Thechosenoptionwillbetakenintoaccountonlyinsimulations.Inpoint
analysisandcoveragestudies,AtollusestheoptionTotalnoisetoevaluateDLandULEb/Nt.
CalculationoptionmaybeselectedintheGlobalparameterstab.Thechosenoptionwillbetakenintoaccountonlyinsimulations.Inpoint
analysisandcoveragestudies,AtollusestheoptionTotalnoisetoevaluateDLandULEb/Nt.

c.

5.2.1.5 SimulationResults
ThistablecontainssomesimulationresultsprovidedintheCellsandMobilestabsofthesimulationpropertydialogue.
Name

DL

I intra txi ic

Value

Unit

Description

DL
DL
P tot txi ic F ortho BTS P tot txi ic

None

Downlinkintracellinterferenceat
terminaloncarrieric

Downlinkextracellinterferenceat
terminaloncarrieric

DL

1 F ortho BTS P b txi ic

DL

I extra ic

348

txj j i

DL

P tot txj ic

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

Name

Value

Unit

Description

Ptot txj icadj

Downlinkintercarrierinterference
atterminaloncarrier ic

DL

DL

I inter carrier ic

txj
j
---------------------------------------------

RF ic ic adj
Tx

P Transmitted ic i
------------------------------------Tx
Tx m
L total ICP ic ic

DL
I inter techno log y ic

ni
DL

DL

I tot ic

DL

DL

DL

DL

DL

Term

I tot ic + N 0

Pb

UL

I tot

txi ic

UL extra

I tot

txi ic

UL

term
txj j i

Pb

ic

Totaleffectiveinterferenceat
terminaloncarrieric(after
unscrambling)

Totalreceivednoiseatterminalon
carrieric

Totalpowerreceivedattransmitter
fromintracellterminalsusingcarrier
ic

Totalpowerreceivedattransmitter
fromextracellterminalsusing
carrieric

Uplinkintercarrierinterferenceat
terminaloncarrier ic

UL

P b ic + P c ic

UL

UL
I inter carrier txi

UL

ic + P c ic

term
txi

Downlinkintertechnology
interferenceatterminaloncarrieric
a

I intra ic + I extra ic + I inter carrier ic + I inter techno log y ic

N tot ic
UL intra

UL

ic adj + P c ic adj

term
txj
j
----------------------------------------------------------------------

RF ic ic adj

UL

I tot txi ic

UL

extra

I tot

UL

Tx

intra

txi ic + 1 F MUD term I tot

UL

UL

N tot txi ic

UL
W
txi ic +I inter carrier txi ic

tx

I tot txi ic + N 0

Totalreceivedinterferenceat
transmitteroncarrieric

Totalnoiseattransmitteroncarrier
ic
(Uplinkinterference)

None

Celluplinkloadfactoroncarrieric

UL

I tot txi ic
---------------------------UL
N tot txi ic

UL

X txi ic

UL

UL

I tot txi ic
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------UL intra
Tx
I tot
txi ic 1 F MUD term

None

Celluplinkreusefactoroncarrieric

E txi ic

UL

1
-------------------------UL
F txi ic

None

Celluplinkreuseefficiencyfactoron
carrieric

DL

P tx txi ic
----------------------------- 100
P max txi ic

None

Percentageofmaxtransmitter
powerused.

None

Downlinkloadfactoroncarrieric

None

Downlinkreusefactoronacarrieric

F txi ic

%Power txi ic

Simulationresultavailablepercell
DL
I extra ic

DL

+ I inter carrier ic L T
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + 1 F ortho BTS
P tx txi ic
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 - + 1 F
---------tch
ortho BTS
DL
CI req

DL

X txi ic

DL
with CI req

SCH DL

FCH DL

Q req
Q req
= -------------------+ -------------------SCH DL
FCH DL
Gp
Gp
DL

I tot ic
Simulationresultavailablepermobile: -----------------DL
N tot ic
DL

DL

F txi ic

I tot ic
----------------------------DL
I intra txi ic

349

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

Name

Value

Description

DL

dB

Noiseriseondownlink

UL

dB

Noiseriseonuplink

DL

10 log 1 X txi ic

UL

10 log 1 X txi ic

NR txi ic
NR txi ic
a.

Unit

InthecaseofaninterferingGSMexternalnetworkinfrequencyhopping,theICPvalueisweightedaccordingtothefractionalload.

5.2.2 ParametersUsedforCDMA20001xEVDOModelling
5.2.2.1 Inputs
Thistablelistssimulationandpredictioninputs(calculationoptions,qualitytargets,activesetmanagementconditions,etc.)
Name

Value

Unit

Description

F ortho

Clutterparameter

None

Orthogonalityfactor

F MUD

Tx

Siteequipmentparameter

None

MUDfactor

cn first

Frequencybandparameter

None

Firstcarriernumber

cn last

Frequencybandparameter

None

Lastcarriernumber

cn

Frequencybandparameter

None

Carriernumberstep

ic

Frequencybandparameter

None

Carrierrankofthecurrentcarrier
calculatedasfollows:
cn cn first
- cn lower
ic = ------------------------ cn
Where cnlower isthenumberof
carriernumberslowerthan cn
includingexcludedcarriersand
carriersofotherfrequencybands

Q pilot

req

Q pilot txi ic + Q pilot

min

Q pilot txi ic + Q pilot

Q pilot txi ic

req

Min.Ec/I0Cellparameter

min

T_DropCellparameter

Q pilot

Q pilot txi ic

req

min

min

Activesetupperthreshold
None (usedtodeterminethebestserverin
theactiveset)
None

Activesetlowerthreshold
(usedtodetermineothermembers
oftheactiveset)

MinimumEc/I0requiredfromthe
None celltobethebestserverintheactive
set
None

MinimumEc/I0requiredfromthe
cellnottoberejectedfromthe
activeset

VariationoftheminimumEc/I0
None requiredfromthecelltobethebest
serverintheactiveset

req

DeltaMin.Ec/I0Mobilityparameter

Q pilot

min

DeltaT_DropMobilityparameter

None

VariationoftheminimumEc/I0
requiredfromthecellnottobe
rejectedfromtheactiveset

RSCP min Txi ic

CellparameterorGlobalparameter

TheminimumpilotRSCPrequiredfor
ausertobeconnectedtothe
transmitteronagivencarrier

Ec
--- N t min Rev0

Mobilityparameterfor1xEVDORev.0users

None

Minimumpilotqualityrequiredin
theuplinktooperateEVDORev.0

Ec
--- N t min RevB

Transmitterparameter

None

Minimumpilotqualityrequiredin
theuplinktooperatemulticarrier
EVDO

Q pilot

UL

UL

350

req

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

Name
Ec
--- N t min
UL

Value

Unit

Description

Parameterreadinthe1xEVDORadioBearerSelection(Uplink)table
Minimumpilotqualitylevelrequired
None
for1xEVDORev.AandRev.Busers
toobtainaradiobearerintheuplink

n SF

1xEVDORadioBearerSelection(Uplink)table

Numberofsubframesassociated
None withthe1xEVDOradiobearerinthe
uplink

TP P R LC

UL

1xEVDORadioBearerSelection(Uplink)table

None

UplinkRLCpeakthroughput
providedbythe1xEVDOradio
bearer

Ec
--- N t min

Parameterreadinthe1xEVDORadioBearerSelection(Downlink)
tablefor1xEVDORev.AandRev.Busers

None

Minimumpilotqualitylevelrequired
toobtainaradiobearerinthe
downlink

n TS

1xEVDORadioBearerSelection(Downlink)table

None

Numberoftimeslotsassociatedwith
the1xEVDOradiobearerinthe
downlink

DL

Downlink1xEVDORadioBearerTable

None

DownlinkRLCpeakthroughput
providedbythe1xEVDOradio
bearer

N EVDO CE N I

Siteparameter

None

NumberofEVDOchannelelements
availableforasiteonuplinkand
downlink

N EVDO CE N I

Simulationresult

None

TotalnumberofEVDOchannel
elementsofasiteconsumedby
usersonuplinkanddownlink

N CE UL

TCH

(Terminal,siteequipment)parameter

None

Numberofchannelelementsused
forTCHonuplink

N MacIndexes txi ic

Simulationconstraint

None

MaximumnumberofMACindexes
availablepercell(59forRev0and
114forRevA)

N MacIndexes txi ic

Simulationresult

None

NumberofMACindexesusedbythe
cell

n EVDO txi ic

Simulationconstraint(cellparameter)

None

MaximumnumberofEVDOusers
thatcanbeconnectedtothecell

n EVDO txi ic

Simulationresult

None

NumberofEVDOusersconnectedto
thecell

NF term

Terminalparameter

None

TerminalNoiseFigure

DL

TP P R LC

Max

Max

Max

NF Tx

Transmitterparameter(userdefinedorcalculatedfromtransmitter
None
equipmentcharacteristics)

TransmitterNoiseFigure

1.381023

J/K

Boltzmanconstant

293

Ambienttemperature

1.23MHz

Hz

SpreadingBandwidth

Tx DL

Cellparameter

None Intertechnologydownlinknoiserise

NR inter techno log y

Cellparameter

None

Intertechnologyuplinknoiserise

RF ic ic adj

Networkparameter
Ifnotdefined,itisassumedthatthereisnointercarrier
interference

None

Interferencereductionfactor
betweentwoadjacentcarriers ic

NR inter techno log y

Tx UL

Tx m

ICP ic ic
i

Networkparameter
Ifnotdefined,itisassumedthatthereisnointertechnology
downlinkinterferencesduetoexternaltransmitters

and ic adj
IntertechnologyChannelProtection
betweenthesignaltransmittedbyTx
andreceivedbymassumingthe
None
frequencygapbetween ic i (external
network)andic

UL

X max

Simulationconstraint(globalparameterorcellparameter)

Maximumuplinkloadfactor

351

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Name

Value
Tx UL

Unit

Description

Thermalnoiseattransmitter

Tx

NFTx K T W NR inter techno log y

Term

NF Term K T W NR inter techno log y

Thermalnoiseatterminal

Rc

bps

Chiprate

f rakeefficiency

Equipmentparameter

N0
N0

UL

UL

Tx DL

None Uplinkrakereceiverefficiencyfactor

Simulationresult

bps

Uplinkthroughput

TP TCP ACK

Simulationresult

bps

UplinkthroughputduetoTCP
aknowledgements

TP BCMCS

Cellparameter

bps

DownlinkthroughputforBroadcast/
Multicastservices

TP max DL

Simulationresult

bps

Downlinkpeakthroughputsupplied
totheterminal

TP avg

Simulationresult

bps

Downlinkaveragecellthroughput

TPD min UL

Serviceparameter

kbps

Minimumrequiredbitratethatthe
serviceshouldhaveinordertobe
availableintheuplink

TPD min DL

Serviceparameter

kbps

Minimumrequiredbitratethatthe
serviceshouldhaveinordertobe
availableinthedownlink

TP A

f TP Scaling TP max DL TP Offset

bps

Downlinkuserapplication
throughput

f TP Scaling

Serviceparameter

Scalingfactor

TP Offset

Serviceparameter

kbps

Offset

C DL Bearer

TPD min DL
-----------------------------------------------------------DL
TP P R LC Index DL Bearer

Downlinkradiobearerconsumption
fora(1xEVDORev.AGuaranteed
BitRate)serviceuser

C UL Bearer

TPD min UL
-----------------------------------------------------------UL
TP P R LC Index UL Bearer

Uplinkradiobearerconsumptionfor
a(1xEVDORev.AGuaranteedBit
Rate)serviceuser

Gp

W---------UL
TP

None

Uplinkserviceprocessinggainon
FCH

G idle power

Cellparameter

None

Idlepowergain

G MU

Cellparameter

None

Multiusergain

P max txi ic

Cellparameter

Maxcellpower

P tx txi ic b pilot

P max txi ic

Pilotbursttransmittedbythe
transmitteroncarrieric.

Trafficbursttransmittedbythe
transmitteroncarrieric.

TP
UL

DL

DL

UL

P tx txi ic b traffic

352

Forsk2014

P max txi ic ifuserstosupport

P max txi ic G idle power ifnousertosupport

ER DRC

Cellparameter

ErrorrateontheDRCchannel

TS BCMCS

Cellparameter

PourcentageofEVDOtimeslots
dedicatedtoBroadcast/Multicast
services

TS EVDO CCH

Cellparameter

PourcentageofEVDOtimeslots
dedicatedtocontrolchannels

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

Name

Value

Unit

Description

P term ic

Simulationresult

Terminalpowertransmittedon
carrieric

P term

min

Terminalparameter

Minimumterminalpowerallowed

P term

max

Terminalparameter

Maximumterminalpowerallowed

BTS

BTSparameter

PercentageofBTSsignalcorrectly
transmitted

term

Terminalparameter

Percentageofterminalsignal
correctlytransmitted

Clutterparameter

Percentageofpilotfinger
percentageofsignalreceivedbythe
terminalpilotfinger

G Tx

Antennaparameter

None

Transmitterantennagain

G Term

Terminalparameter

None

Terminalgain

Transmitterparameter(userdefinedorcalculatedfromtransmitter
None
equipmentcharacteristics)

L Tx

Transmitterlossa

L body

Serviceparameter

None

Bodyloss

L Term

Terminalparameter

None

Terminalloss

L indoor

Clutter(and,optionally,frequencyband)parameter

L path

Propagationmodelresult

None

Pathloss

G ACK

Terminalparameter

None

AcknowledgementChannelgain

G RRI

Terminalparameter(for1xEVDORevAterminalsonly)

None

ReverseRateIndicatorChannelgain

G DRC

Terminalparameter

None

DataRateControlChannelgain

G Auxiliary pilot

Terminalparameter(for1xEVDORevAterminalsonly)

None

AuxiliaryPilotChannelgain

G TCH

Terminalparameter

None

TrafficdataChannelgain

carriers

Terminalparameter

None

Maximumnumberofcarriersin
multicarriermode

M Shadowing model

Resultcalculatedfromcelledgecoverageprobabilityandmodel
standarddeviation

None

ModelShadowingmargin
Onlyusedinpredictionstudies

M Shadowing Ec Io

ResultcalculatedfromcelledgecoverageprobabilityandEc/I0
standarddeviation

None

Ec/I0Shadowingmargin
Onlyusedinpredictionstudies

None

DLgainduetoavailabilityofseveral
pilotsignalsatthemobileb.

n max

DL

n=2or3
UL

ResultcalculatedfromcelledgecoverageprobabilityandULEb/Nt
None
standarddeviation
UL

UL
G macro diversity

E Shadowing

npaths

G macro diversity = M Shadowing Ec Io M Shadowing Ec Io

DL

G macro diversity
M Shadowing Eb Nt

Indoorloss

npaths

G macro diversity = M Shadowing Eb Nt

UL

M Shadowing Eb Nt

n=2or3
Globalparameter(defaultvalue)
Simulationresult

UL

ULEb/NtShadowingmargin
Onlyusedinpredictionstudies

None

ULqualitygainduetosignaldiversity
in soft handoffc.

None

Randomshadowingerrordrawn
duringMonteCarlosimulation
Onlyusedinsimulations

353

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

Name

Value

Unit

Description

None

Transmitterterminaltotalloss

P tx txi ic b pilot
----------------------------------------LT

Pilotburstreceivedatterminalfrom
atransmitteroncarrieric

P tx txi ic b traffic
--------------------------------------------LT

Trafficburstreceivedatterminal
fromatransmitteroncarrieric

P b ic

P term
-----------LT

Bitreceivedpowerattransmitteron
carrieric

NR threshold txi ic

Cellparameter

dB

Celluplinknoiserisethreshold

Cellparameter

dB

Celluplinknoiseriseupgrading/
downgradingdelta

Inpredictionstudiesd
ForEc/I0andEc/Ntcalculations
L path L Tx L term L body L indoor M Shadowing Ec Io
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G Tx G term
ForULEb/Ntcalculation
L path L Tx L term L body L indoor M Shadowing Eb Nt
UL
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G Tx G term

LT

Insimulations
L path L Tx L term L body L indoor E Shadowing
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G Tx G term
DL

P tot txi ic b pilot

DL

P tot txi ic b traffic

UL

UL

UL

NR threshold txi ic
a.

L Tx = L total UL onuplinkand L Tx = L total DL ondownlink.

b.

M Shadowing Ec Io correspondstotheshadowingmarginevaluatedfromtheshadowingerrorprobabilitydensityfunction(npaths)incase

npaths

ofdownlinkEc/I0modelling.
npaths

c.

M Shadowing Eb Nt

d.

caseofuplinksofthandoffmodelling.
In uplink prediction studies, only carrier power level is downgraded by the shadowing margin ( M Shadowing Eb Nt

UL

correspondstotheshadowingmarginevaluatedfromtheshadowingerrorprobabilitydensityfunction(npaths)in

UL

). In downlink

prediction studies, carrier power level and intracell interference are downgraded by the shadowing model ( M Shadowing Ec Io ) while
extracellinterferencelevelisnot.Therefore, M Shadowing Ec Io issetto1indownlinkextracellinterferencecalculation.

5.2.2.2 Ec/I0andEc/NtCalculations
E
E
E
Thistabledetails ----c txi ic b pilot , ----c- txi ic b pilot and ----c- txi ic b traffic calculations.
I0
Nt
Nt
Name

Value

Unit

Description

txi ic
DL
I intra

b pilot orb traffic

Downlinkintracellinterferenceat
terminaloncarrieric(onlyone
mobileisservedatatime)

Downlinkextracellinterference
basedonpilotatterminaloncarrier
ic

DL

I extra ic b pilot

DL

I extra ic b traffic

P tot txj ic b pilot

P tot txj ic b traffic

Downlinkextracellinterference
basedontrafficatterminalon
carrieric

Ptot txj icadj bpilot

Downlinkintercarrierinterference
basedonpilotatterminaloncarrier
ic

DL

txj j i
DL

txj j i
DL

DL
I inter carrier ic

354

b pilot

txj j
------------------------------------------------------------RF ic ic adj

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

Name

Value

Unit

Description

Ptot txj icadj btraffic

Downlinkintercarrierinterference
basedontrafficatterminalon
carrier ic

DL

DL

I inter carrier ic b traffic

txj
j
----------------------------------------------------------------

RF ic ic adj

DL
I inter techno log y ic

ni
DL

DL

DL

Totalnoisebasedonpilotreceivedat
terminaloncarrieric

Totalnoisebasedontrafficreceived
atterminaloncarrieric

I extra ic b pilot + N 0

Totalnoisebasedonpilotreceivedat
terminaloncarrieric

DL

Totalnoisebasedontrafficreceived
atterminaloncarrieric

None

Pilotqualitylevelatterminalon
carrieric

None

Pilotqualitylevelatterminalon
carrieric

None

Trafficqualitylevelatterminalon
carrieric

DL
I inter techno log y ic

DL

DL

term
N0

DL

P tot txi ic b traffic + I extra ic b traffic + I inter carrier ic b traffic

DL

I 0 ic b traffic

+
DL

DL
I inter techno log y ic
DL

N tot ic b pilot
DL

N tot ic b traffic

term
N0

term

term

I extra ic b traffic + N 0

Q pilot txi ic

DL

BTS P tot txi ic b pilot

---------------------------------------------------------------------DL
I 0 ic b pilot

Ec
---- txi ic b pilot
I0

Downlinkintertechnology
interferenceatterminaloncarrieric
a

P tot txi ic b pilot + I extra ic b pilot + I inter carrier ic b pilot

DL

I 0 ic b pilot

a.

Tx

P Transmitted ic i
------------------------------------Tx
Tx m
L total ICP ic ic

DL

E
----c- txi ic b pilot
Nt

BTS P tot txi ic b pilot

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------DL
DL
N tot ic b pilot + 1 BTS P tot txi ic b pilot

E
----c- txi ic b traffic
Nt

BTS P tot txi ic b traffic

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------DL
DL
N tot ic b traffic + 1 BTS P tot txi ic b traffic

DL

InthecaseofaninterferingGSMexternalnetworkinfrequencyhopping,theICPvalueisweightedaccordingtothefractionalload.

5.2.2.3 ULEb/NtCalculation
Thistabledetailscalculationsofuplinkquality( Q
Name

intra
I tot
txi

UL

extra
I tot
txi

Eb
or ------ ).
Nt UL

Value

Pb

UL

UL

UL

ic

term
txi

ic

term
txj j i

Pb

ic

Description

Totalpowerreceivedattransmitter
fromintracellterminalsusingcarrier
ic

Totalpowerreceivedattransmitter
fromextracellterminalsusing
carrieric

Uplinkintercarrierinterferenceat
terminaloncarrier ic

UL

P b ic

UL

UL
I inter carrier txi

ic

Unit

ic adj

term
txj j
-----------------------------------

RF ic ic adj

UL

I tot txi ic
UL

N tot txi ic

UL extra

I tot

UL intra

Tx

txi ic + 1 F MUD term I tot

UL

tx

I tot ic + N 0

UL
W
txi ic +I inter carrier txi ic

Totalreceivedinterferenceat
transmitteroncarrieric
Totalnoiseattransmitteroncarrier
ic
(Uplinkinterference)

355

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

Name

Value

Unit

Description

None

Qualitylevelattransmitteroncarrier
ica

Withoutusefulsignal:
UL

term P b ic
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- G UL
p
UL
Tx
UL
N tot txi ic 1 F MUD term P b ic

E
UL
Q txi ic ----b-
N t UL

UL

term P b ic
UL
Totalnoise: ----------------------------------- Gp
UL
N tot txi ic
UL

NoHO: Q txi ic

UL

SofterHO: f rakeefficiency

UL

Q tch tx k ic

tx k ActiveSet
samesite

Soft,Softer/SoftHO(NoMRC):
Max Q UL
tch tx k

tx k ActiveSet

ic

UL
G macro diversity

Softer/SoftHO(MRC):

UL

Q total ic

UL

UL
UL
Q tch tx k ic Q tch tx l ic
tx ,tx ActiveSet f rakeefficiency
k l

txk samesite

txk
Max

Qualitylevelatsiteusingcarrieric
duetocombinationofall
transmittersoftheactivesetlocated
atthesamesiteandtakinginto
accountincreaseofthequalitydue
None tomacrodiversity(macrodiversity
gain).

Insimulations,
UL
G macro diversity

= 1.

tx l othersite

UL

G macro diversity

UL

Q total ic
------------------------------------------------UL
Q BestServer ic

UL

G SHO

None

Uplinksofthandovergainoncarrier
ic

None

Eb/Nttargetonuplink

Requiredterminalpowertoachieve
Eb/Nttargetattransmitteroncarrier
ic

For1xEVDORev0terminal
UL
E
UL
----c-
G p 1 + G ACK + G DRC + G TCH
N t min
For1xEVDORevAterminalb
Whentheacknoledgementsignalisconsidered

UL

Q req

UL

Ec
UL
--- G p 1 + G ACK + G RRI + G DRC + G TCH + G Auxiliary Pilot
N t min
Whentheacknoledgementsignalisnotconsidered
UL
E
UL
----c-
G p 1 + G RRI + G DRC + G TCH + G Auxiliary Pilot
N t min
UL

Q req
---------------------- P term
UL
Q total ic

req

P term ic

a.

CalculationoptionmaybeselectedintheGlobalparameterstab.Thechosenoptionwillbetakenintoaccountonlyinsimulations.Inpoint
analysisandcoveragestudies,AtollusestheoptionTotalnoisetoevaluateDLandULEb/Nt.
Insimulations,theuplinkEb/Nttargetiscalculatedwithoutconsideringtheacknowledgementsignal.

b.

5.2.2.4 SimulationResults
ThistablecontainssomesimulationresultsprovidedintheCellsandMobilestabsofthesimulationpropertydialogue.

356

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

Name

Value

Unit

Description

I intra txi ic b traffic

1 F ortho BTS P tot txi ic b traffic = 0

DL

Downlinkintracellinterferenceat
terminaloncarrieric(onlyone
mobileisservedatatime)

Downlinkextracellinterference
basedontrafficatterminalon
carrieric

Downlinkintercarrierinterference
basedontrafficatterminalon
carrier ic

DL

DL

I extra ic b traffic

DL

P tot txj ic b traffic

txj j i

Ptot txj icadj btraffic

DL

DL
I inter carrier ic

b traffic

txj
j
----------------------------------------------------------------

RF ic ic adj
Tx

P Transmitted ic i

------------------------------------Tx
Tx m
L
ICP

DL

I inter techno log y ic

DL

DL

I tot ic b traffic

n i ic

total

ni

DL

DL

DL

term

I tot ic b traffic + N 0

Pb

UL

intra
I tot
txi

UL extra

I tot

ic

ic

term
txi

txi ic

Totaleffectiveinterferencebasedon
trafficatterminaloncarrieric(after
unscrambling)

Totalnoisebasedontrafficreceived
atterminaloncarrieric

Totalpowerreceivedattransmitter
fromintracellterminalsusingcarrier
ic

Totalpowerreceivedattransmitter
fromextracellterminalsusing
carrieric

Uplinkintercarrierinterferenceat
terminaloncarrier ic

UL

P b ic

term
txj j i

Pb

UL

UL
I inter carrier txi

DL

+ I inter techno log y ic

DL

ic

Downlinkintertechnology
interferenceatterminaloncarrieric
a

I intra ic b traffic + I extra ic b traffic + I inter carrier ic b traffic

N tot ic b traffic
UL

ic adj

term
txj j
-----------------------------------

RF ic ic adj

UL

I tot txi ic

UL extra

I tot

UL intra

Tx

txi ic + 1 F MUD term I tot

UL
W
txi ic +I inter carrier txi ic

Totalreceivedinterferenceat
transmitteroncarrieric

N tot txi ic

I tot txi ic + N 0

Totalnoiseattransmitteroncarrier
ic
(Uplinkinterference)

N mobiles txi ic

Simulationresult

None

Numberofmobilesconnectedto
transmittertxioncarrieric

UL

UL

tx

N GBR m obiles txi ic

Simulationresult

None

Numberof(1xEVDORev.A
Guaranteedbitrate)serviceusers
connectedtotransmittertxion
carrieric

N VBR m obiles txi ic

Simulationresult

None

Numberof(1xEVDOVariablebit
rate)serviceusersconnectedto
transmittertxioncarrieric

DL

X txi ic

DL

I tot ic b traffic
------------------------------------DL
N tot ic b traffic

None Celldownlinkloadfactoroncarrieric

UL

UL

I tot txi ic
---------------------------UL
N tot txi ic

UL

I tot txi ic
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------UL intra
Tx
I tot
txi ic 1 F MUD term

X txi ic

None

Celluplinkloadfactoroncarrieric

None

Celluplinkreusefactoroncarrieric

UL

F txi ic

357

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Name
UL

E txi ic

Value

Unit

Description

1
--------------------------UL
F txi ic

None

Celluplinkreuseefficiencyfactoron
carrieric

DL

dB

Noiseriseondownlink

UL

dB

Noiseriseonuplink

DL

10 log 1 X txi ic

UL

10 log 1 X txi ic

NR txi ic
NR txi ic
a.

Forsk2014

InthecaseofaninterferingGSMexternalnetworkinfrequencyhopping,theICPvalueisweightedaccordingtothefractionalload.

5.3 ActiveSetManagement
Themobileactivesetisthelistofthetransmitterstowhichthemobileisconnected.Theactivesetmayconsistofoneormore
transmitters;dependingonwhethertheservicesupportssofthandoffandontheterminalactivesetsize.Transmittersinthe
mobileactivesetmustuseafrequencybandwithwhichtheterminaliscompatibleandthepilotsignallevelreceivedfrom
thesetransmittersmustexceedthedefinedminimumRSCPthreshold.
Itis,however,thequalityofthepilot(EcI0)thatfinallydetermineswhetherornotatransmittercanbelongtotheactiveset.
Cellsenteringthemobilesactivesetmustfulfillthefollowingconditions:

Thebestserver(firstcellenteringactiveset)
Inorderforagiventransmittertoenterthemobileactivesetasbestserver,thequalityofthistransmitterspilotmust
bethehighestoneanditmustexceedanupperthresholdequaltothesumoftheminimumEc/I0definedinthe
propertiesofthebestservingcellandtheDeltaminimumEc/I0definedinthepropertiesofthemobilitytype.The
upperthresholdissetforthecarrierasdefinedinthecellpropertiesandcanalsotakeintoaccounttheusermobility
typeiftheDeltaminimumEc/I0definedinthemobilitytypeisdifferentfrom0.Thecarrierusedbythetransmitters
intheactivesetcorrespondstothebestcarrierofthebestserver.Forinformationonthebestcarrierselection,see
theTechnicalReferenceGuide.

Inorderforatransmittertoentertheactiveset(othercellsofactiveset):
Theymustusethesamecarrierasthebestservercell,
Thepilotqualityfromothercandidatecellsmustexceedalowerthreshold.Thelowerthresholddependsbothon
thetypeofcarrierandthemobilitytype.ItisequaltothesumofT_Dropdefinedinthepropertiesofthebest
serverandtheDeltaT_Dropdefinedinthepropertiesofthemobilitytype.
Ifyouhaveselectedtorestricttheactivesettoneighbours,thecellmustbeaneighbourofthebestserver(the
"restrictedtoneighboursoptionisselectedintheequipmentproperties).

FormulticarrierEVDORev.Busers,theactivesetmayconsistofseveralsubactivesets,eachonebeingassociatedwithone
carrier.Thenumberofsubactivesetsdependsonthemaximumnumberofcarrierssupportedbytheterminal.Asdetailed
above,thequalityofthepilot(EcI0)determineswhetherornotatransmittercanbelongtoasubactiveset.Thesubactive
setassociatedwiththebestcarrieristhesameastheactivesetofasinglecarrieruser.Fortheothercarriers,theuplinkEcNt
receivedbythebestserveronthebestcarrierandonthestudiedcarrierdetermineswhetherornotacarriercanhaveasub
active set, and the transmitters in the subactive sets depend on the mode supported by the terminal (locked mode or
unlockedmode):

The Ec/Nt received by the best serving transmitter on the best carrier must exceed the minimum uplink Ec/Nt defined in
the properties of the transmitter.

The Ec/Nt received by the best serving transmitter on the studied carrier must exceed the minimum uplink Ec/Nt defined
in the properties of the transmitter.
When the locked mode is used, the serving transmitters must be the same in all sub-active sets. With the unlocked mode,
the serving transmitters may be different from one sub-active set to another.

5.4 Simulations
Thesimulationprocessisdividedintotwosteps:
1. Obtainingarealisticuserdistribution
AtollgeneratesauserdistributionusingaMonteCarloalgorithm,whichrequirestrafficmapsanddataasinput.The
resultinguserdistributioncomplieswiththetrafficdatabaseandmapsprovidedtothealgorithm.
Eachuserisassignedaservice,amobilitytype,andanactivitystatusbyrandomtrial,accordingtoaprobabilitylaw
thatusesthetrafficdatabase.
Theuseractivitystatusisanimportantoutputoftherandomtrialandhasdirectconsequencesonthenextstepof
thesimulationandonthenetworkinterferences.Ausermaybeeitheractiveorinactive.Bothactiveandinactive
usersconsumeradioresourcesandcreateinterference.

358

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

Additionally,each1xEVDORev.0userisassignedatransitionflag("True"or"False")foreachpossiblethroughput
transition(from9.6to19.2kbps,19.2to38.4kbps,38.4to76.8kbps,and76.8to153.6kbpsforthroughputupgrading
andfrom153.6to76.8kbps,76.8to38.4kbps,38.4to19.2kbps,and19.2to9.6kbpsforthroughputdowngrading).
Thesetransitionflagsarebasedonthethroughputdowngradingandupgradingprobabilities.Ifatransitionflagis
"True,"theuserthroughputcanbedowngradedorupgradedifnecessary.
Then, Atoll randomly assigns a shadowing error to each user using the probability distribution that describes the
shadowingeffect.
Finally,anotherrandomtrialdeterminesuserpositionsintheirrespectivetrafficzoneandwhethertheyareindoors
oroutdoors(accordingtotheclutterweightingandtheindoorratioperclutterclassdefinedforthetrafficmaps).
2. Modellingthenetworkregulationmechanism
Thisalgorithmdependsonthenetwork.AtollusesapowercontrolalgorithmincaseofCDMA20001xRTTnetworks
andadifferentalgorithm,whichmixesthroughputcontrolondownlinkandpowercontrolonuplink,forCDMA2000
1xEVDOnetworks.

5.4.1 GeneratingaRealisticUserDistribution
5.4.1.1 NumberofUsers,UserActivityStatusandUserThroughput
During the simulation, a first random trial is performed to determine the number of users and their activity status. The
determinationofthenumberofusersandtheactivitystatusallocationdependonthetypeoftrafficcartographyused.
Atolldeterminesthetotalnumberofusersattemptingconnectionin eachsimulation
basedonthePoissondistribution.Thismayleadtoslightvariationsinthetotalnumbers
of users in different simulations. To have the same total number of users in each
simulationofagroup,addthefollowinglinesintheAtoll.inifile:
[Simulation]
RandomTotalUsers=0

5.4.1.1.1

SimulationsBasedonUserProfileTrafficMaps
Userprofileenvironmentbasedtrafficmaps:Eachpixelofthemapisassignedanenvironmentclasswhichcontainsalistof
userprofileswithanassociatedmobilitytypeandagivendensity(numberofsubscriberswiththesameprofileperkm).
Userprofiletrafficmaps:Eachpolygonandlineofthemapisassignedadensityofsubscriberswithgivenuserprofileand
mobilitytype.Ifthemapiscomposedofpoints,eachpointisassignedanumberofsubscriberswithgivenuserprofileand
mobilitytype.
Theuserprofilemodelsthebehaviourofthedifferentsubscribercategories.Eachuserprofilecontainsalistofservicesand
theirassociatedparametersdescribinghowtheseservicesareaccessedbythesubscriber.
Fromenvironment(orpolygon)surface(S)anduserprofiledensity(D),anumberofsubscribers(X)peruserprofileisinferred.
X = SD

Incaseofuserprofiletrafficmapscomposedoflines,thenumberofsubscribers(X)
peruserprofileiscalculatedfromthelinelength(L)andtheuserprofiledensity(D)
(nbofsubscribersperkm)asfollows: X = L D
Thenumberofsubscribers(X)isaninputwhenauserprofiletrafficmapiscomposed
ofpoints.

Foreachbehaviourdescribedinauserprofile,accordingtotheservice,frequencyuseandexchangevolume,Atollcalculates
theprobabilityfortheuserbeingconnectedinuplinkandindownlinkataninstantt.

Calculationoftheserviceusagedurationperhour( p 0 :probabilityofaconnection):

N call d
p 0 = ------------------3600
where N call isthenumberofcallsperhourand d istheaveragecallduration(insecond).
Then,Atollcalculatesthetotalnumberofuserstryingtoaccessacertainservice.

Calculationofthenumberofuserstryingtoaccesstheservicej( n j ):

nj = X p0

359

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

Thenextstepdeterminestheactivitystatusofeachuser.

Calculationofnumberofusersperactivitystatus:

Thisstepsdependsonthetypeofservice(Voice,1xRTTdata,1xEVDOdata).

CDMA20001xRTTServices

Activitystatusofvoiceanddataserviceusersisdeterminedasfollows.
UsersarealwaysactiveonFCHinbothdirections,uplinkanddownlink.Therefore,wehave:
ProbabilityofbeingactiveonUL: p UL = 0
ProbabilityofbeingactiveonDL: p DL = 0
ProbabilityofbeingactivebothonULandDL: p UL + DL = 1
Probabilityofbeinginactive: p inactive = 0
Thus,forvoiceanddataservices,wehave:
Numberofinactiveusers: n j inactive = n j p inactive = 0
NumberofusersactiveonUL: n j UL = n j p UL = 0
NumberofusersactiveonDL: n j DL = n j p DL = 0
NumberofusersactiveonULandDLboth: n j UL + DL = n j p UL + DL = n j
n j = n j UL + n j DL + n j UL + DL + n j inactive = n j UL + DL

VoiceUsers

Voiceusersareactiveonuplinkanddownlink.However,theFCHcanhaveinactivityperiodsonbothlinks.Thisismodelledby
UL

DL

theFCHactivityfactor, AF FCH and AF FCH .Therefore,allvoiceserviceuserstrytoaccesstheservicewiththefollowingFCH

FCH

UL

FCH

DL

throughputs, TP P UL AF FCH onuplinkand TP P DL AF FCH ondownlink.

FCH

FCH

TP P UL and TP P DL arerespectivelytheuplinkanddownlinkFCHpeakthroughputs.

DataUsers

Dataserviceusersareactiveonuplinkanddownlink.FCHisalwaysallocatedbutcanhaveinactivityperiodsonbothlinks;this
UL

DL

ismodelledbytheFCHactivityfactor, AF FCH and AF FCH .SCHmaybeallocatedwithfourpossiblethroughputs(2x,4x,8xand

16xFCHpeakthroughput).
Therefore,dataserviceuserscanaccesstheservicewithdifferentthroughputs.Possiblethroughputsaredetailedinthetable
below:

OnlyFCHisused

SCHthroughputfactor
rk

OnUL

TP P UL AF FCH

2x

TP P UL AF FCH + 2

4x

TP P UL AF FCH + 4

8x

TP P UL AF FCH + 8

16x

TP P UL AF FCH + 16

BothFCHandSCHareused

FCH

Allocatedthroughputs

FCH

OnDL
UL

FCH

DL

TP P DL AF FCH

FCH

UL

TP P DL AF FCH + 2

FCH

UL

TP P DL AF FCH + 4

FCH

UL

TP P DL AF FCH + 8

FCH

UL

FCH

DL

FCH

DL

FCH

DL

FCH

DL

TP P DL AF FCH + 16

FCH

TP P UL and TP P DL arerespectivelytheuplinkanddownlinkFCHpeakthroughputs.
Then,Atolldeterminesthedistributionofusersbetweenthedifferentpossiblethroughputs.
UL

DL

In case of a data service, j, several data throughput probabilities, P k and P k , can be assigned to different throughput
factors, r k ,forSCHchannel.

360

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

Fornondataservices,theseprobabilitiesare0.

Fordataserviceusers,arandomtrialcompliantwiththroughputprobabilitiesisperformedforeachlinkinordertodetermine
thethroughputforeachuser.
Onuplink,wehave:
r

FCH

UL

FCH

DL

ForeachSCHthroughputfactor, r k ,thenumberofusers n j withthethroughput TP P UL AF FCH + r k iscalculatedas

follows,
rk

UL

nj = Pr nj
k

FCH

Therefore,thenumberofusers n j
FCH

nj

= nj

FCH

UL

withthethroughput, TP P UL AF FCH ,is:

rk

nj
rk

Ondownlink,wehave:
rk

ForeachSCHthroughputfactor, r k ,thenumberofusers, n j withthethroughput, TP P DL AF FCH + r k ,iscalculatedas

follows,
rk

DL

nj = Pr nj
k

FCH

Therefore,thenumberofusers n j
FCH

nj

= nj

FCH

DL

withthethroughput, TP P DL AF FCH ,is:

rk

nj
rk

CDMA20001xEVDOServices

Aspowercontrolisperformedintheuplinkonly,1xEVDOdataserviceuserswillbeconsideredeitheractiveintheuplinkor
inactive.1xEVDOdataRev.0serviceuserscanaccesstheservicewithuplinkthroughputsof9.6,19.2,38.4,76.8and153.6
kbps.1xEVDOdataRev.AandRev.Bserviceuserscanaccesstheservicewithuplinkthroughputsof4.8,9.6,19.2,38.4,76.8,
115.2,153.6,230.4,307.2,460.8,614.4,921.6,1,228.8and1,848.2kbps.
UL

UL

Foreachservice,j,severalthroughputprobabilities, P k ,canbeassignedtodifferentthroughputs TP k .Thenumberofusers

activeonuplink( n j UL )andthenumberofinactiveusers( n j inactive )arecalculatedasfollows:
ProbabilityofbeingactiveonUL: p UL =

Pk

UL

UL

TP k

UL
Rk

Probabilityofbeinginactive: p inactive = 1

Pk

UL

UL

TP k

UL
Rk

ProbabilityofbeingactiveonDL: p DL = 0
ProbabilityofbeingactiveonULandDLboth: p UL + DL = 0
Therefore,wehave:
NumberofusersactiveonUL: n j UL = n j p UL
Numberofinactiveusers: n j inactive = n j p inactive
NumberofusersactiveonDL: n j DL = n j p DL = 0
NumberofusersactiveonULandDLboth: n j UL + DL = n j p UL + DL = 0
n j = n j UL + n j DL + n j UL + DL + n j inactive = n j UL + n j inactive

361

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014
UL

Then,Atolldeterminesthedistributionofusersbetweenthedifferentpossiblethroughputs, TP k .Thenumberofuserswith
UL

UL

thethroughput TP k , n j TP k ,iscalculatedasfollows:
UL

UL

n j TP k = P k n j
Inactiveusershavearequestedthroughputequalto0.

The user distribution per service is an average distribution and the service of each
user is randomly drawn in each simulation. Therefore, if you compute several
simulationsatonce,theaveragenumberofusersperservicewillcorrespondtothe
calculated distribution. But if you check each simulation, the user distribution
betweenservicesisdifferentineachofthem.
ItisthesamefortheSCHthroughputdistributionbetween1xRTTdataserviceusers
andthetrafficthroughputdistributionbetween1xEVDOdataserviceusers.
Incalculationsdetailedabove,weassumethatthesumofthroughputprobabilitiesis
less than or equal to 1. If the sum of throughput probabilities exceeds 1, Atoll

considers normalised throughput probabilities values, P r

k

Prk , instead of
rk

specifiedthroughputprobabilities P r .
k

5.4.1.1.2

SimulationsBasedonSectorTrafficMaps
SectortrafficmapscanbebasedonlivetrafficdatafromOMC(OperationandMaintenanceCentre).Trafficisspreadoverthe
bestservercoverageareaofeachtransmitterandeachcoverageareaisassignedeitherthethroughputsintheuplinkandin
thedownlink,orthenumberofusersperactivitystatusorthetotalnumberofusers(includingallactivitystatuses).
CDMA20001xRTTServices

VoiceService(j)

Foreachtransmitter,Txi,Atollproceedsasfollows:

WhenselectingThroughputsinUplinkandDownlink,youcaninputthethroughputdemandsinUL( TPD
DL( TPD

DL

UL

)and

)foreachsector.

AtollcalculatesthenumberofusersactiveinULandDLusingthevoiceserviceintheTxicellasfollows:
UL

DL

N UL = TPD
--------------- and N DL = TPD
--------------UL
DL
TP j
TP j
Where,
UL

TPD isthenumberofkbitspersecondtransmittedinULintheTxicelltoprovidetheservicejtotheusers(user
definedvalueinthetrafficmapproperties)
DL

TPD isthenumberofkbitspersecondtransmittedinDLintheTxicelltoprovidetheservicejtotheusers(user
definedvalueinthetrafficmapproperties).
UL

DL

TP j and TP j correspondtotheULandDLthroughputsofauser.FCHisalwaysallocatedtoactiveusersbut
UL

can have inactivity periods on both links. Therefore, we have TP j

FCH

UL

FCH

= TP P UL AF FCH (where TP P UL is the

UL

service FCH peak throughput on UL and AF FCH corresponds to the FCH activity factor on UL) and
DL

TP j

FCH

DL

FCH

DL

= TP P DL AF FCH (where TP P DL istheserviceFCHpeakthroughputonDLand AF FCH correspondstothe

FCHactivityfactoronDL).
UsersarealwaysactiveonFCHforbothlinks.Therefore,wehavefollowingactivityprobabilities.
ProbabilityofbeingactiveinUL: p UL = 0
ProbabilityofbeingactiveinDL: p DL = 0
ProbabilityofbeingactiveinULandDLboth: p UL + DL = 1

362

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

Probabilityofbeinginactive: p inactive = 0
Then,Atollcalculatesthenumberofusersperactivitystatus:
NumberofusersactiveinULandDLboth: n j UL + DL = max (N UL,N DL)
NumberofusersactiveinULandinactiveinDL: n j UL = 0
NumberofusersactiveinDLandinactiveinUL: n j DL = 0
inactive

NumberofinactiveusersinULandDL: n j

= 0

Therefore,allconnectedvoiceusers( n j )areactiveinbothlinks.

WhenselectingTotalNumberofUsers(AllActivityStatuses),youcaninputthenumberofconnectedusersfor
eachsector( n j ).
UsersarealwaysactiveonFCHforbothlinks.Therefore,wehavefollowingactivityprobabilities.
ProbabilityofbeingactiveinUL: p UL = 0
ProbabilityofbeingactiveinDL: p DL = 0
ProbabilityofbeingactiveinULandDLboth: p UL + DL = 1
Probabilityofbeinginactive: p inactive = 0
Then,Atollcalculatesthenumberofusersperactivitystatus:
inactive

NumberofinactiveusersinULandDL: n j

= n j p inactive = 0

NumberofusersactiveinULandinactiveinDL: n j UL = n j p UL = 0
NumberofusersactiveinDLandinactiveinUL: n j DL = n j p DL = 0
NumberofusersactiveinULandDLboth: n j UL + DL = n j p UL + DL = n j
Therefore,allconnectedusers( n j )areactiveinbothlinks.

WhenselectingNumberofUsersperActivityStatus,youcandirectlyinputthenumberofusersactiveinthe
uplinkanddownlink( n j UL + DL ),foreachsector.
FCH

UL

FCH

DL

VoiceserviceuserstrytoaccesstheservicewiththeFCHthroughputs, TP P UL AF FCH onuplinkand TP P DL AF FCH on

downlink.
Allusercharacteristicsdetermined,asecondrandomtrialisperformedtoobtaintheirgeographicalpositions.

DataServiceUsers(j)

FCHisalwaysallocatedtoactiveusersbutcanhaveinactivityperiodsonbothlinks.ThisismodelledbytheFCHactivityfactors,
UL

DL

AF FCH and AF FCH . SCH may be allocated with four possible throughputs (2x, 4x, 8x, 16xFCH peak throughput). Several
UL

DL

throughputprobabilities, P k and P k ,canbeassignedtodifferentthroughputsfactor, r k ,forSCHchannel.

Fornondataservices,theseprobabilitiesare0.

Foreachtransmitter,Txi,Atollproceedsasfollows:

WhenselectingThroughputsinUplinkandDownlink,youcaninputthethroughputdemandsinUL( TPD
DL( TPD

DL

UL

)and

)foreachsector.

AtollcalculatesthenumberofusersactiveinULandDLusingtheserviceintheTxicellasfollows:
UL

DL

N UL = TPD
--------------- and N DL = TPD
--------------UL
DL
TP j
TP j

363

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

Where,
UL

TPD isthenumberofkbitspersecondtransmittedinULintheTxicelltoprovidetheservicejtotheusers(user
definedvalueinthetrafficmapproperties)
DL

TPD isthenumberofkbitspersecondtransmittedinDLintheTxicelltoprovidetheservicejtotheusers(user
definedvalueinthetrafficmapproperties).
UL

DL

TP j and TP j correspondtouplinkanddownlinkthroughputsofauser.
UL

Pj

rk

DL

Pj

rk

UL
UL
UL
r k + AF FCH R FCH P r + 1

DL
DL
DL
r k + AF FCH R FCH P r + 1
k

FCH

rk

rk

UL
FCH
UL
P r TP P UL AF FC
k

DL
FCH
DL
P r TP P DL AF FC
k

FCH

TP P UL and TP P DL aretheuplinkanddownlinkFCHpeakthroughputsrespectively.

Incalculationsdetailedabove,weassumethatthesumofthroughputprobabilitiesis
less than or equal to 1. If the sum of throughput probabilities exceeds 1, Atoll

considers normalised throughput probabilities values, P r

k

rk

P r , instead of
k

specifiedthroughputprobabilities P r .
k

UsersarealwaysactiveonFCHforbothlinks.Therefore,wehavefollowingactivityprobabilities.
ProbabilityofbeingactiveinUL: p UL = 0
ProbabilityofbeingactiveinDL: p DL = 0
ProbabilityofbeingactiveinULandDLboth: p UL + DL = 1
Probabilityofbeinginactive: p inactive = 0
Then,Atollcalculatesthenumberofusersperactivitystatusandthetotalnumberofusers:
NumberofusersactiveinULandDLboth: n j UL + DL = max (N UL,N DL)
NumberofusersactiveinULandinactiveinDL: n j UL = 0
NumberofusersactiveinDLandinactiveinUL: n j DL = 0
inactive

NumberofinactiveusersinULandDL: n j

= 0

Therefore,allconnectedusers( n j )areactiveinbothlinks.

WhenselectingTotalNumberofUsers(AllActivityStatuses),youcaninputthenumberofconnectedusersfor
eachsector( n j ).
UsersarealwaysactiveonFCHforbothlinks.Therefore,wehavefollowingactivityprobabilities.
ProbabilityofbeingactiveinUL: p UL = 0
ProbabilityofbeingactiveinDL: p DL = 0
ProbabilityofbeingactiveinULandDLboth: p UL + DL = 1
Probabilityofbeinginactive: p inactive = 0
Then,Atollcalculatesthenumberofusersperactivitystatus:
inactive

NumberofinactiveusersinULandDL: n j

364

= n j p inactive = 0

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

NumberofusersactiveinULandinactiveinDL: n j UL = n j p UL = 0
NumberofusersactiveinDLandinactiveinUL: n j DL = n j p DL = 0
NumberofusersactiveinULandDLboth: n j UL + DL = n j p UL + DL = n j
Therefore,allconnectedusers( n j )areactiveinbothlinks.

WhenselectingNumberofUsersperActivityStatus,youcandirectlyinputthenumberofusersactiveinthe
uplinkanddownlink( n i UL + DL ),foreachsector.

Asexplainedabove,dataserviceuserscanaccesstheservicewithdifferentthroughputs.Possiblethroughputsaredetailedin
thetablebelow:

OnlyFCHisused

SCHthroughputfactor
rk

Allocatedthroughputs
OnUL

TP P UL AF FCH

2x

TP P UL AF FCH + 2

4x

TP P UL AF FCH + 4

8x

TP P UL AF FCH + 8

16x

TP P UL AF FCH + 16

FCH

BothFCHandSCHareused

OnDL
UL

FCH

DL

TP P DL AF FCH

FCH

UL

TP P DL AF FCH + 2

FCH

UL

TP P DL AF FCH + 4

FCH

UL

TP P DL AF FCH + 8

FCH

UL

FCH

DL

FCH

DL

FCH

DL

FCH

DL

TP P DL AF FCH + 16

Atolldeterminesthedistributionofuserswiththedifferentpossiblethroughputs.Arandomtrialcompliantwiththroughput
probabilitiesisperformedforeachlinkinordertodeterminethethroughputofeachuser.
Onuplink,wehave,
rk

FCH

UL

FCH

DL

ForeachSCHthroughputfactor, r k ,thenumberofusers n j withthethroughput TP P UL AF FCH + r k iscalculatedas

follows,
r

UL

nj = Pr nj
k

FCH

Therefore,thenumberofusers n j
FCH

nj

= nj

FCH

UL

withthethroughput, TP P UL AF FCH ,is,

rk

nj
rk

Ondownlink,wehave,
rk

ForeachSCHthroughputfactor, r k ,thenumberofusers, n j withthethroughput, TP P DL AF FCH + r k ,iscalculatedas

follows,
k

DL

nj = Pk nj
FCH

Therefore,thenumberofusers n j
FCH

nj

= nj

nj

FCH

DL

withthethroughput, TP P DL AF FCH ,is,

rk

CDMA20001xEVDOServices
Aspowercontrolisperformedintheuplinkonly,1xEVDOdataserviceuserswillbeconsideredeitheractiveintheuplinkor
inactive.1xEVDOdataRev.0serviceuserscanaccesstheservicewithuplinkthroughputsof9.6,19.2,38.4,76.8and153.6
kbps.1xEVDOdataRev.AandRev.Bserviceuserscanaccesstheservicewithuplinkthroughputsof4.8,9.6,19.2,38.4,76.8,
115.2,153.6,230.4,307.2,460.8,614.4,921.6,1,228.8and1,848.2kbps.

365

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014
UL

UL

Foreachservice,j,severalthroughputprobabilities, P k ,canbeassignedtodifferentuplinkthroughputs TPk .Thenumber

ofusersactiveinuplink( n j UL )andthenumberofinactiveusers( n j inactive )arecalculatedintoseveralsteps.Firstof
all,AtolldeterminesthenumberofusersactiveinULusingtheservicejintheTxicell.
Foreachtransmitter,Txi,andeachservicej:

WhenselectingThroughputsinUplinkandDownlink,youcaninputthethroughputdemandsinUL( TPD
eachsector.

UL

)for

AtollcalculatesthenumberofusersactiveinULusingtheservicejintheTxicellasfollows:
UL

N UL = TPD
--------------UL
TP j
UL

Where TPD isthenumberofkbitspersecondtransmittedonULintheTxicelltoprovidetheservicej(user

definedvalueinthetrafficmapproperties).
UL

TP j correspondstotheuplinkthroughputforauser.
UL

TP j

Pk

UL

UL

TP k

Intheabovecalculations,weassumethatthesumofthroughputprobabilitiesislessthan
or equal to 1. If the sum of throughput probabilities exceeds 1, Atoll considers

normalised throughput probabilities values, P r

k

rk

P r , instead of specified
k

throughputprobabilities P r .
k

Wehavethefollowingactivityprobabilities:
ProbabilityofbeingactiveinUL: p UL =

Pk

UL

UL

TP k

UL
Rk

Probabilityofbeinginactive: p inactive = 1

Pk

UL

UL

TP k

UL
k

ProbabilityofbeingactiveinDL: p DL = 0
ProbabilityofbeingactiveinULandDLboth: p UL + DL = 0
Therefore,wehave:
NumberofusersactiveinUL: n j UL = N UL p UL
Numberofinactiveusers: n j inactive = N UL p inactive
NumberofusersactiveinDL: n j DL = 0
NumberofusersactiveinULandDLboth: n j UL + DL = 0
Totalnumberofconnectedusers: n j = n j UL + n j inactive

WhenselectingTotalNumberofUsers(AllActivityStatuses),youcaninputthenumberofconnectedusersfor
eachsector( n j ).
Wehavethefollowingactivityprobabilities:
ProbabilityofbeingactiveinUL: p UL =

Pk

UL

UL
Rk

366

UL

TP k

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

Probabilityofbeinginactive: p inactive = 1

Pk

UL

UL

TPk

UL
k

ProbabilityofbeingactiveinDL: p DL = 0
ProbabilityofbeingactiveinULandDLboth: p UL + DL = 0
Therefore,wehave:
NumberofusersactiveinUL: n j UL = n j p UL
Numberofinactiveusers: n j inactive = n j p inactive
NumberofusersactiveinDL: n j DL = 0
NumberofusersactiveinULandDLboth: n j UL + DL = 0

When selecting Number of Users per Activity Status, you can directly input the number of inactive users
( n j inactive )andthenumberofusersactiveintheuplink( n j UL ),foreachsector.
Thetotalnumberofconnectedusers( n j )iscalculatedasfollows
n j = n j UL + n j inactive

Then, Atoll determines the distribution of users with the different possible throughputs. The number of users with the
UL

UL

throughput TP k , n j TP k ,iscalculatedasfollows:
UL

UL

n j TP k = P k n j
Inactiveusershavearequestedthroughputequalto0.
Theuserdistributionperserviceisanaveragedistributionandtheserviceofeachuseris
randomly drawn In each simulation. Therefore, if you compute several simulations at
once, the average number of users per service will correspond to the calculated
distribution.Butifyoucheckeachsimulation,theuserdistributionbetweenservicesis
differentineachofthem.
ItisthesamefortheSCHthroughputdistributionbetween1xRTTdataserviceusersand
thetrafficthroughputdistributionbetween1xEVDOdataserviceusers.

5.4.1.2 TransitionFlagsfor1xEVDORev.0UserThroughputs
For1xEVDORev.0servicessupportingthroughputdowngrading,youcandefinetheprobabilityoftheservicebeingupgraded
UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

( P Upg k TP k )ordowngraded( P Downg k TP k )ontheuplink(reverselink)foreachthroughput( TP k ).Theprobabilities

are taken into account in order to determine if a user with a certain throughput can be upgraded or downgraded. User
throughputdowngradingandupgradingoccurduringcongestioncontrolwhenthecellisoverorunderloaded.
Thefollowingtableshowsthethroughputchangesthatarepossiblewhenathroughputisupgradedordowngraded.The
probabilitiesaredefinedwithanumberfrom1to255foreachthroughput.
PossibleThroughputChanges
DuringUpgrading

PossibleThroughputChanges
DuringDowngrading

From

To

From

To

9.6kbps

19.2kbps

153.6kbps

76.8kbps

19.2kbps

38.4kbps

76.8kbps

38.4kbps

38.4kbps

76.8kbps

38.4kbps

19.2kbps

76.8kbps

153.6kbps

19.2kbps

9.6kbps

Duringthegenerationoftheuserdistribution,each1xEVDORev.0userisassignedarandomnumberbetween1and255for
eachpossiblethroughputtransition.Whenthisnumberislowerorequaltothevalueoftheprobability,thetransitionflagfor
thisthroughputtransitionissetto"True"meaningthatthisthroughputtransitioncanbeperformedifnecessary.

367

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014
UL

The number of 1xEVDO Rev. 0 users with a certain throughput that can be downgraded ( n j TP k Downg ) and upgraded
UL

( n j TP k Upg )arecalculatedasfollows:
UL

UL

UL

P Upg k TP k n j TP k
UL
n j TP k Upg = -----------------------------------------------------------255
And
UL

UL

UL

P Downg k TP k n j TP k
UL
n j TP k Downg = -----------------------------------------------------------------255
Thenumberofuserswithacertainthroughputthatcanbedowngradedorupgradedis
anaverage.Therefore,ifyoucomputeseveralsimulationsatonce,theaveragenumber
ofuserswithacertainthroughputthatcanbedowngradedorupgradedwillcorrespond
tothecalculatedvalue.Butifyoucheckeachsimulation,thisnumberisdifferentineach
ofthem.

5.4.1.3 UserGeographicalPosition
Oncealltheusercharacteristicsdetermined,anotherrandomtrialisperformedtoobtaintheirgeographicalpositionsand
whethertheyareindoorsoroutdoorsaccordingtothepercentageofindoorusersperclutterclassdefinedforthetraffic
maps.

5.4.2 NetworkRegulationMechanism
5.4.2.1 CDMA20001xRTTPowerControlSimulationAlgorithm
CDMA2000 1xRTT network automatically regulates itself using traffic driven uplink and downlink power control on the
fundamentalandsupplementalchannels(FCHandSCHrespectively)inordertominimizeinterferenceandmaximizecapacity.
Atoll simulates this network regulation mechanism with an iterative algorithm and calculates, for each user distribution,
networkparameterssuchasbasestationpower,mobileterminalpower,activesetandhandoffstatusforeachterminal.
Thepowercontrolsimulationisbasedonaniterativealgorithm,whereineachiteration,allthemobilesselectedduringthe
userdistributiongeneration(1ststep)trytoconnecttonetworkactivetransmitterswithacalculationarea.Theprocessis
repeatedfromiterationtoiterationuntilconvergenceisachieved.Thealgorithmstepsaredetailedbelow.

Figure 5.1:CDMA20001xRTTPowerControlAlgorithm

368

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

5.4.2.1.1

AlgorithmInitialization
Totalpoweroncarrieric, P Tx ic ,ofbasestationSjisinitialisedto P pilot ic + P sync ic + P paging ic .
UL

intra

Uplinkreceivedpowersoncarrieric, I tot

UL

extra

ic , I tot

UL

ic and I inter carrier ic ,atbasestationSjareinitialisedto0W

(noconnectedmobile).
UL

I tot S j ic
UL
- = 0
X k S j ic = ------------------------UL
N tot S j ic

5.4.2.1.2

PresentationoftheAlgorithm
UL

Thealgorithmisdetailedforanyiterationk.XkisthevalueofthevariableXattheiterationk.Inthealgorithm,all Q req and

DL

Q req thresholdsdependonusermobilitytypeandaredefinedinServiceandMobilityparameterstables.Allvariablesare
describedinDefinitionsandformulaspart.
Thealgorithmappliestosinglefrequencybandnetworksandtomultibandnetworks(dualbandandtribandnetworks).
Multibandterminalscanhavethefollowingconfigurations:

Configuration1:Theterminalcanworkonf1,f2andf3withoutanypriority(select"All"asmainfrequencyband
intheterminalpropertydialogue).
Configuration2:Theterminalcanworkonf1,f2andf3butf1hasahigherpriority(select"f1"asmainfrequency
band,"f2"assecondaryfrequencybandand"f3"asthirdfrequencybandintheterminalpropertydialogue).

For each mobile (Mi), Atoll only considers the cells (Sj,ic) for which the pilot RSCP exceeds the minimum pilot RSCP:
P c Sj M i ic RSCP min Sj ic .
ForeachmobileMi,wehavethefollowingsteps:
DeterminationofMisBestServingCell
ForeachtransmitterSjcontainingMiinitscalculationareaandworkingonthemainfrequencybandsupportedbytheMis
terminal(i.e.eitherf1forasinglefrequencybandnetwork,orf1,f2orf3foramultibandterminalwiththeconfiguration1,
orf1foramultibandterminalwiththeconfiguration2).
BTS P c Sj M i ic
Calculationof Q pilot Sj ic M i = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Term
k
DL
DL
DL
DL
P tot Sj ic + I extra ic + I inter carrier ic + I inter techno log y ic + N 0
Determinationofthecandidatecells,(SBS,ic).
Foreachcarrieric,selectionofthetransmitterwiththe highest Q pilot Sj M i ic , S BS ic M i .
k

Analysisofcandidatecells,(SBS,ic).
Foreachpair(SBS,ic),calculationoftheuplinkloadfactor:
UL

I tot S BS ic
UL
UL
X k S BS ic = ----------------------------+ X
UL
N tot S BS ic
Rejectionofbadcandidatecellsifthepilotisnotreceivedoriftheuplinkloadfactorisexceededduringtheadmissionload
control(ifsimulationrespectsaloadingfactorconstraintandMbwasnotconnectedinpreviousiteration)
pilot

If Q pilot S BS M i ic Q req then(SBS,ic)isrejectedbyMi

k

UL

UL

If X k S BS ic X max ,then(SBS,ic)isrejectedbyMi
Else
Keep(SBS,ic)asgoodcandidatecell
Formultibandterminalswiththeconfiguration1orterminalsworkingononefrequencybandonly,ifnogoodcandidatecell
hasbeenselected,Mihasfailedtobeconnectedtothenetworkandisrejected.
For multiband terminals with the configuration 2, if no good candidate cell has been selected, try to connect Mi to
transmitterstxicontainingMiintheircalculationareaandworkingonthesecondaryfrequencybandsupportedbytheMis
terminal(i.e. f2). If no goodcandidate cellhas been selected, try toconnectMitotransmitters txi containingMiin their

369

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

calculationareaandworkingonthethirdfrequencybandsupportedbytheMisterminal(i.e.f3).Ifnogoodcandidatecell
hasbeenselected,Mihasfailedtobeconnectedtothenetworkandisrejected.
Determinationofthebestcarrier,icBS.
IfagivencarrierisspecifiedfortheservicerequestedbyMi
ic BS M i isthecarrierspecifiedfortheservice
Elsethecarrierselectionmodedefinedforthesiteequipmentisconsidered.
IfcarrierselectionmodeisMin.ULLoadFactor
UL

ic BS M i isthecellwiththelowest X k S BS ic
ElseifcarrierselectionmodeisMin.DLTotalPower
ic BS M i isthecellwiththelowest P tx S BS ic k
ElseifcarrierselectionmodeisRandom
ic BS M i israndomlyselected
Elseifcarrierselectionmodeis"Sequential"
UL

UL

ic BS M i isthefirstcarrierwhere X k S BS ic X max
Endif
Determinationofthebestservingcell,(SBS,icBS).
max

(S BS,ic BS) k M i isthebestservingcell( BestCell k M i )anditspilotqualityis Q pilot M i .

k

Inthefollowinglines,wewillconsider ic asthecarrierusedbythebestservingcell.
DeterminationoftheActiveSet
ForeachstationSjcontainingMiinitscalculationarea,usingic,andifneighboursareused,neighbourof BestCell k M i
BTS P c M i S j
Calculationof Q pilot M i S j ic = ------------------------------------------------DL
k
I 0 ic
RejectionofstationSjifthepilotisnotreceived
pilot

If Q pilot M i S j ic Q min thenSjisrejectedbyMi

k

ElseSjisincludedintheMiactiveset
RejectionofSjiftheMiactivesetisfull
Stationwiththelowest Q pilot intheactivesetisrejected
k

EndFor
UplinkPowerControl
req

CalculationoftherequiredpowerforMi, P term M i ic k
Foreachcell(Sj,ic)presentintheMiactiveset
CalculationofqualitylevelonMitrafficchannelat(Sj,ic),withtheminimumpowerallowedontrafficchannelfortheMi
service
FCH r eq

FCH U L

Pb

SCH r eq

P term M i ic k 1
P term M i ic k 1
SCH U L
- and P b
M i S j ic = --------------------------------------------- M i S j ic = ---------------------------------------------L T M i S j
L T M i S j
FCH U L

term P b
M i S j ic
UL
UL
- G FCH
Q FCH M i S j ic k = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Service
p
UL
FCH U L
SCH U L
N tot ic 1 F MUD term P b
M i S j ic + P b
M i S j ic

370

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1
SCH U L

term P b
M i S j ic
UL
UL
- G SCH
Q SCH M i S j ic k = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Service
p
UL
FCH U L
SCH U L
N tot ic 1 F MUD term P b
M i S j ic + P b
M i S j ic
IftheuserselectstheoptionTotalnoise
FCH U L

term P b
M i S j ic
UL
UL
- G FCH
Q FCH M i S j ic k = ------------------------------------------------------------- Service
p
UL
N tot ic
SCH U L

term P b
M i S j ic
UL
UL
- G SCH
Q SCH M i S j ic k = ------------------------------------------------------------- Service
p
UL
N tot ic
EndFor
If(Miisnotinhandoff)
UL

UL

UL

UL

Q FCH M i = Q FCH M i S j ic k and Q SCH M i = Q SCH M i S j ic k

k

Elseif(Miisinsofterhandoff)
UL

UL

Q FCH M i = f rakeefficiency
k

UL

UL

Q FCH M i S j ic k

S j ActiveSet
UL

Q SCH M i = f rakeefficiency
k

UL

Q SCH M i S j ic k

S ActiveSet
j

Elseif(Miisinsoftorsofter/softwithoutMRC)
UL

UL

UL

Q FCH M i = G macro diversity 2links Max Q FCH M i S j ic k

k

UL

S j ActiveSet

UL

UL

Q SCH M i = G macro diversity 2links Max Q SCH M i S j ic k

k

S j ActiveSet

Elseif(Miisinsoft/soft)
UL

UL

UL

Q FCH M i = G macro diversity 3links Max Q FCH M i S j ic k

k

UL

S j ActiveSet

UL

UL

Q SCH M i = G macro diversity 3links Max Q SCH M i S j ic k

k

S j ActiveSet

Elseif(Miisinsofter/softwithMRC)

UL
UL
UL
UL
Q FCH M i = Max f rakeefficiency
Q FCH ic Q FCH

k
othersite

i AS ActiveSet

UL
ic G macro diversity 2links

UL
UL
UL
UL
Q SCH M i = Max f rakeefficiency
Q SCH ic Q SCH

k
othersite

i ActiveSet
AS

UL
ic G macro diversity 2links

(samesite)

(samesite)

EndIf
UL

FCH r eq

P term

Q req Service M i Term M i Mobility M i FCH

r eq
- P FCH
M i ic k = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- M i ic k 1
term
UL
Q FCH M i
k

UL

SCH r eq

P term

Q req Service Mi Term M i Mobility M i SCH_rate_multiple SCH

r eq
- P SCH
M i ic k = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- M i ic k 1
term
UL
Q SCH M i
k

req

FCH r eq

P term M i ic k = P term

SCH r eq

M i ic k + P term

M i ic k

371

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks
req

Forsk2014
min

If P term M i ic k P term M i then

min

FCH r eq

P term

P term M i S j
r eq
- P FCH
M i ic k = ----------------------------- M i ic k
term
req
P term M i k
min

SCH r eq

P term

P term M i S j
r eq
- P SCH
M i ic k = ----------------------------- M i ic k
term
req
P term M i k

EndIf
FCH r eq

If P term

max

M i ic k P term M i thenMicannotselectanystationanditsactivesetiscleared

req

max

If P term M i ic k P term M i andMiusesSCHthen:

DowngradingtheserviceSCHthroughput:
req

max

SCH

FCH

While P term M i ic k P term M i and TP P UL Service M i TP P UL Service M i 2

SCH

TP P UL Service M i
SCH
TP P UL Service M i ----------------------------------------------------2
SCH r eq

SCH r eq

P term

UL
SCH
P term M i ic
Q req Service M i Term M i Mobility M i TP P UL Service Mi SCH
M i ic k = -----------------------------------------k ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------UL
SCH
2
Q Service M Term M Mobility M TP
Service M 2
req

req

FCH r eq

P term M i ic k = P term

SCH r eq

M i ic k + P term

P UL

SCH

M i ic k

EndWhile
req

max

If P term M i ic k P term M i thenMiwillnotuseSCH

Endif
Endif
IftherequirednumberofchannelelementsexceedstheavailablequantityinthesiteofSj(BestserverofMi)andMiusesSCH
then:
DowngradingtheserviceSCHthroughput:
Max

SCH

FCH

While N CE U L M i N CE U L S j and TPP UL Service M i TP P UL Service M i 2

SCH

TP P UL Service M i
SCH
TP P UL Service M i ----------------------------------------------------2
SCH

N CE U L M i k
SCH
N CE U L M i k = ----------------------------2
SCH r eq

SCH r eq
P term M i

SCH UL
SCH
P term M i ic
Service M i Term M i Mobility M i TP P UL Service Mi
Q req
ic k = -----------------------------------------k -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------SCH UL
SCH
2
Q
Service M Term M Mobility M TP
Service M 2
req

req

FCH r eq

P term M i ic k = P term
SCH

SCH r eq

M i ic k + P term

P UL

M i ic k

FCH

N CE U L M i k = N CE U L M i k + N CE U L M i k
EndWhile
Endif
DownlinkPowerControl
IfMiusesanSCHonthedownlink
Foreachcell(Sj,ic)inMiFCHactiveset
Calculationofqualitylevelon(Sj,ic)FCHatMi,withtheminimumpowerallowedonFCHfortheMiservice

372

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

FCH D L

Pb

min

P FCH Service M i
M i S j ic = ---------------------------------------------L T M i S j
FCH D L

DL
Q FCH M i

BTS P b
M i S j
DL
- G FCH
S j ic k = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Service M i
p
DL
DL
N tot ic 1 F ortho BTS P b M i S j ic

IftheuserselectstheoptionTotalnoise
FCH D L

BTS P b
M i S j
DL
Q FCH M i S j ic k = ----------------------------------------------------DL
N tot ic
Ifcell(Sj,ic)inMiSCHactiveset
Calculationofqualitylevelon(Sj,ic)SCHatMi,withtheminimumpowerallowedonSCHfortheMiservice
SCH D L

Pb

min

P SCH Service M i
M i S j ic = ---------------------------------------------L T M i S j
SCH D L

BTS P b
M i S j
DL
DL
- G SCH
Q SCH M i S j ic k = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Service Mi
p
DL
DL
N tot ic 1 F ortho BTS P b M i S j ic
IftheuserselectstheoptionTotalnoise
SCH D L

BTS P b
M i S j
DL
Q SCH M i S j ic k = ----------------------------------------------------DL
N tot ic
EndIf
EndFor
Recombinationofthefirstfactivesetlinks(fisthenumberoffingersoftheMiterminal):onlyqualitylevelsfromthefirstf
cells(Sf,ic)ofactivesetarerecombined.
DL

DL

Q FCH M i = f rakeefficiency
k

Q FCH M i S j ic k

Q SCH M i S j ic k

DL

S f ActiveSet FCH

DL

DL

Q SCH M i = f rakeefficiency
k

DL

S f ActiveSet SCH

Do
Foreachcell(Sj,ic)inMiFCHactiveset
CalculationoftherequiredpowerforDLtrafficchannelbetween(Sj,ic)andMi:
DL

FCH

Q req Service M i Term M i Mobility M i TP P DL Service M i FCH

req
- P min
P FCH M i S j ic k = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------FCH Service M i
DL
Q FCH M i
k

req

max

If P FCH M i S j ic k P FCH Service M i then S j ic isexcludedfromMiactiveset

DL

Recalculationofadecreased Q req
Ifcell(Sj,ic)inMiSCHactiveset
CalculationoftherequiredpowerforDLtrafficchannelbetween(Sj,ic)andMi:
DL

SCH

Q req Service M i Term M i Mobility M i TP P DL Service M i SCH

req
- P min
P SCH M i S j ic k = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------SCH Service M i
DL
Q SCH M i
k

DowngradingtheserviceSCHthroughput(onlyfor(Sj,ic)bestservercellofMi):
req

max

SCH

While P SCH M i S j ic k P SCH Service M i TP P DL Service M i

req

SCH

FCH

Or P tx S j ic k + P tch M i S j ic k P max S j ic and TP P DL Service M i TPP DL Service Mi 2

373

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014
SCH

TP P DL Service M i
SCH
TP P DL Service M i = ----------------------------------------------------2
req

DL

SCH

P SCH M i S j ic k
Q req Service M i Term M i Mobility M i TP P DL Service M i SCH
req
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------P SCH M i S j ic k = -------------------------------------DL
SCH
2
Q Service M Term M Mobility M TP
Service M 2
req

req

req

P DL

SCH

req

P tch M i S j ic k = P SCH M i S j ic k + P FCH M i S j ic k

EndWhile
req

max

req

If P SCH M i S j ic k P SCH Service M i or P tx S j ic k + P tch M i S j ic k P max S j ic thenMiwillnotuseSCH

Endif
Max

SCH

FCH

While N CE D L M i N CE D L S j and TP P DL Service M i TP P DL Service Mi 2

SCH

TP P DL Service M i
SCH
TP P DL Service M i = ----------------------------------------------------2
SCH

N CE D L M i k
SCH
N CE D L M i k = ----------------------------2
req

DL

SCH

P SCH M i S j ic k
Q req Service M i Term M i Mobility M i TP P DL Service M i SCH
req
P SCH M i S j ic k = ------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------DL
SCH
2
Q Service M Term M Mobility M TP
Service M 2
req

req

req

P DL

SCH

req

P tch M i S j ic k = P SCH M i S j ic k + P FCH M i S j ic k

FCH

SCH

N CE D L M i k = N CE D L M i k + N CE D L M i k
EndWhile
Max

If N CE D L M i N CE D L S j thenMiwillnotuseSCH
Endif
Max

SCH

FCH

While N Codes M i N Codes S j ic and TP P DL Service M i TP P DL Service Mi 2

SCH

TP P DL Service M i
SCH
TP P DL Service M i = ----------------------------------------------------2
SCH

N Codes M i k
SCH
N Codes M i k = ---------------------------2
req

DL

SCH

P SCH M i S j ic k
Q req Service M i Term M i Mobility M i TP P DL Service M i SCH
req
P SCH M i S j ic k = ------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------DL
SCH
2
Q Service M Term M Mobility M TP
Service M 2
req

req

req

P DL

SCH

req

P tch M i S j ic k = P SCH M i S j ic k + P FCH M i S j ic k

FCH

SCH

N Codes M i k = N Codes M i k + N Codes M i k

EndWhile
Max

If N Codes M i N Codes S j ic thenMiwillnotuseSCH

Endif
Endif
EndFor
Recombinationofthefirstfactivesetlinks(fisthenumberoffingersoftheMiterminal):onlyqualitylevelsfromthefirstf
cells(Sf,ic)ofactivesetarerecombined.
DL

DL

Q FCH M i = f rakeefficiency
k

374

DL

Q FCH M i S f ic k

S f ActiveSet FCH

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

DL

DL

Q SCH M i = f rakeefficiency
k

DL

Q SCH M i S f ic k

S ActiveSet SCH
f
DL

DL

While Q k M i Q req Service M i Mobility M i andMiFCHactivesetisnotempty

DL

DL

And Q k M i Q req Service M i Mobility M i (ifSCHactivesetisnotempty)

Endif
UplinkandDownlinkInterferenceUpdates
Updateofinterferenceonactivemobilesonly(oldcontributionsofmobilesandstationsarereplacedbythenewones)
Foreachcell(Sj,ic)
UL

Updateof N tot S j ic
EndFor
ForeachmobileMi
DL

Updateof N tot ic
EndFor
ControlofRadioResourceLimits(WalshCodes,CellPowerandSiteChannelElements)
Foreachcell(Sj,ic)onasiteNl
P tx S j ic
DL
While -------------------------k %Power max
P max
req

Rejectionofmobilewithhighest P tch S j M b ic k forthelowestservicepriority

EndWhile
EndFor
ForeachsiteNl
ThelistofrejectedmobilesforthesiteNlis L rejected N l
IftheequipmentinstalledonNlsupportspowerpoolingbetweentransmitters
Activationofpowerpoolingbetweentransmittersforeachcell(Sj,ic)containingrejectedusers
Controloftheavailablepowerfortheothercells(Si,ic)ofthesitewherepowerpoolingbetweentransmittersisnotactivated
If

DL

%Power max P max P tx S i ic k 0

S i ic
Si Nl

Then,thepowerunusedbythecells(Si,ic)ofthesitecanbeallocatedtocells(Sj,ic)
Sortofalltherejectedmobilesbypriorityinadescendingorderandbysimulationrankinadescendingorder
ForthefirstmobileMbofthelist( M b L rejected N l )
req

DL

If P tx S j ic k + P tch S j M b ic k %Power max P max + M Pooling S j ic

Mbisreconnected
EndIf
EndFor
EndIf
EndFor
Foreachcell(Sj,ic)
Max

While N Codes S j ic k N Codes S j ic

375

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

Rejectionoflastadmittedmobile
EndFor
Foreachsite(NodeB)Nl
Max

While N CE DL N I k N CE DL N I
req

Rejectionofmobilewithhighest P tch M i S j k forthelowestservicepriority

Max

While N CE UL N I k N CE UL N I
req

Rejectionofmobilewithhighest P term M i ic k forthelowestservicepriority

EndFor
UplinkLoadFactorControl
UL

UL

Foreachcell(Sj,ic)with X S j ic X max
Rejectionofamobilewiththelowestservicepriority
EndFor
UL

UL

Whileatleastonecellwith X S j ic X max exists

5.4.2.1.3

ConvergenceCriterion
Theconvergencecriteriaareevaluatedateachiteration,andcanbewrittenasfollow:
DL
DL

P tx ic k P tx ic k 1
N user ic k N user ic k 1
DL = max int ma x ------------------------------------------------ 100 int ma x ----------------------------------------------------------- 100
DL
Stations
Stations
P tx ic k

N
ic
user

UL
UL
UL
UL

I tot ic k I tot ic k 1
N user ic k N user ic k 1
100 int ma x ----------------------------------------------------------- 100
UL = max int ma x -------------------------------------------------UL
UL
Stations

Stations

I ic
N
ic
tot

user

Atollstopsthealgorithmif:
1stcase:Betweentwosuccessiveiterations, UL and DL arelower( )thantheirrespectivethresholds(definedwhen
creatingasimulation).
Thesimulationhasreachedconvergence.
Example:Letusassumethatthemaximumnumberofiterationsis100,ULandDLconvergencethresholdsaresetto5.If
UL 5 and DL 5 betweenthe4thandthe5thiteration,Atollstopsthealgorithmafterthe5thiteration.Convergencehas
beenachieved.
2ndcase:After30iterations, UL or/and DL arestillhigherthantheirrespectivethresholdsandfromthe30thiteration, UL
or/and DL donotdecreaseduringthenext15successiveiterations.
Thesimulationhasnotreachedconvergence(specificdivergencesymbol).
Examples:Letusassumethatthemaximumnumberofiterationsis100,ULandDLconvergencethresholdsaresetto5.
1.Afterthe30thiteration, UL and/or DL equal100anddonotdecreaseduringthenext15successiveiterations:Atollstops
thealgorithmatthe46thiteration.Convergencehasnotbeenachieved.
2.Afterthe30thiteration, UL and/or DL equal80,theystartdecreasingslowlyuntilthe40thiteration(withoutgoingunder
thethresholds)andthendonotchangeduringthenext15successiveiterations:Atollstopsthealgorithmatthe56thiteration
withoutachievingconvergence.
3rdcase:Afterthelastiteration.
If UL and/or DL are still strictly higher than their respective thresholds, the simulation has not converged (specific
divergencesymbol).
If UL and DL arelowerthantheirrespectivethresholds,thesimulationhasconverged.

376

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

5.4.2.2 CDMA20001xEVDOPower/DataRateControlSimulationAlgorithm

Figure 5.2:CDMA20001xEVDOPowerControlAlgorithm
InaCDMA20001xEVDOsystem,powercontrolisperformedintheuplinkonly.Inthedownlink,thetransmittertransmitsat
thefullpower(Pmax)whenaconnectionisestablished.Insteadofpowercontrol,thereisadataratecontrolbasedontheC/
Iratiocalculatedatthemobile.Foreachdistributionofusers,AtollsimulatesthepowercontrolmechanismfortheULand
thedataratecontrolfortheDL.
Thesimulationusesaniterativealgorithm,whereineachiteration,allthe1xEVDOdataserviceusersselectedduringtheuser
distributiongeneration(1ststep)trytoconnecttonetworkactivetransmitterswithacalculationarea.Atollconsidersthe
guaranteedbitrateserviceusersfirst,intheorderestablishedduringthegenerationoftheuserdistribution,andthen,it
processesthevariablebitrateserviceusers,intheorderestablishedduringthegenerationoftheuserdistribution.
Theprocessisrepeatedfromiterationtoiterationuntilconvergenceisachieved.Thealgorithmstepsaredetailedbelow.

5.4.2.2.1

AlgorithmInitialization
UL

intra

Uplinkreceivedpowersoncarrieric, I tot

UL

extra

ic , I tot

UL

ic and I inter carrier ic ,atbasestationSjareinitialisedto0W

(noconnectedmobile).
UL

I tot S j ic
UL
X k S j ic = ------------------------- = 0
UL
N tot S j ic

5.4.2.2.2

PresentationoftheAlgorithm
Thealgorithmisdetailedforanyiterationk.XkisthevalueofthevariableXattheiterationk.
E c UL
Inthealgorithm, -----
istheminimumpilotqualitylevelrequiredintheuplinktooperate1xEVDORev.0.This
N t min Rev0
thresholddependsontheusermobilitytypeandisdefinedintheMobilityparameterstable.
Ec
--- N t min RevB is the minimum pilot quality level required in the uplink to operate EVDO multicarrier. This threshold is
UL

definedintheTransmitterpropertiesdialogue.
E UL
For1xEVDORev.AandRev.Busers,thevalueof ----c-
dependsontheuserrequestedthroughput.Thisthroughputcan
N t min
be obtained by using a certain uplink 1xEVDO radio bearer ( Index UL Bearer ) in a certain number of subframes ( n SF ).
Ec
---isthevaluedefinedinthe1xEVDORadioBearerSelection(Uplink)tableforthecombination(radiobearerIndex,
N t min
UL

377

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

mobilityandnumberofsubframe)providingtheuserrequestedthroughput.Twovaluesareavailableforthisparameter,one
whentheserviceuplinkmodeis"LowLatency"andanotheroneforhighcapacityservices.
AllvariablesaredescribedinDefinitionsandformulaspart(see"DefinitionsandFormulas"onpage 340).
Thealgorithmappliestosinglefrequencybandnetworksandtomultibandnetworks(dualbandandtribandnetworks).
Multibandterminalscanhavethefollowingconfigurations:

Configuration1:Theterminalcanworkonf1,f2andf3withoutanypriority(select"All"asmainfrequencyband
intheterminalpropertydialogue).
Configuration2:Theterminalcanworkonf1,f2andf3butf1hasahigherpriority(select"f1"asmainfrequency
band,"f2"assecondaryfrequencybandand"f3"asthirdfrequencybandintheterminalpropertydialogue).

For each mobile (Mi), Atoll only considers the cells (Sj,ic) for which the pilot RSCP exceeds the minimum pilot RSCP:
P c Sj M i ic b pilot RSCP min Sj ic .
ForeachmobileMi,wehavethefollowingsteps:
DeterminationofMisBestServingCell
ForeachtransmitterSjcontainingMiinitscalculationareaandworkingonthemainfrequencybandsupportedbytheMis
terminal(i.e.eitherf1forasinglefrequencybandnetwork,orf1,f2orf3foramultibandterminalwiththeconfiguration1,
orf1foramultibandterminalwiththeconfiguration2).
BTS P c Sj M i ic ,b pilot
Calculationof Q pilot Sj ic M i = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Term
k
DL
DL
DL
P tot Sj ic ,b pilot + I extra ic ,b pilot + I inter carrier ic ,b pilot + N 0
Determinationofthecandidatecells,(SBS,ic).
Foreachcarrieric,selectionofthetransmitterwiththe highest Q pilot Sj M i ic , S BS ic M i .
k

Analysisofcandidatecells,(SBS,ic).
Foreachpair(SBS,ic),calculationoftheuplinkloadfactor:
UL

I tot S BS ic
UL
UL
X k S BS ic = ----------------------------+ X
UL
N tot S BS ic
Rejectionofbadcandidatecellsifthepilotisnotreceivedoriftheuplinkloadfactorisexceededduringtheadmissionload
control(ifsimulationrespectsaloadingfactorconstraintandMbwasnotconnectedinpreviousiteration)
pilot

If Q pilot S BS M i ic Q req then(SBS,ic)isrejectedbyMi

k

UL

UL

If X k S BS ic X max ,then(SBS,ic)isrejectedbyMi
Else
Keep(SBS,ic)asgoodcandidatecell
Formultibandterminalswiththeconfiguration1orterminalsworkingononefrequencybandonly,ifnogoodcandidatecell
hasbeenselected,Mihasfailedtobeconnectedtothenetworkandisrejected.
For multiband terminals with the configuration 2, if no good candidate cell has been selected, try to connect Mi to
transmitterstxicontainingMiintheircalculationareaandworkingonthesecondaryfrequencybandsupportedbytheMis
terminal (i.e.f2). If no goodcandidate cellhas been selected,tryto connectMito transmitters txi containing Mi in their
calculationareaandworkingonthethirdfrequencybandsupportedbytheMisterminal(i.e.f3).Ifnogoodcandidatecell
hasbeenselected,Mihasfailedtobeconnectedtothenetworkandisrejected.
Determinationofthebestcarrier,icBS.
IfagivencarrierisspecifiedfortheservicerequestedbyMi
ic BS M i isthecarrierspecifiedfortheservice
Elsethecarrierselectionmodedefinedforthesiteequipmentisconsidered.
IfcarrierselectionmodeisMin.ULLoadFactor
UL

ic BS M i isthecellwiththelowest X k S BS ic
ElseifcarrierselectionmodeisMin.DLTotalPower

378

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

ic BS M i isthecellwiththelowest P tx S BS ic k
ElseifcarrierselectionmodeisRandom
ic BS M i israndomlyselected
Elseifcarrierselectionmodeis"Sequential"
UL

UL

ic BS M i isthefirstcarrierwhere X k S BS ic X max
Endif
Determinationofthebestservingcell,(SBS,icBS).
max

(S BS,ic BS) k M i isthebestservingcell( BestCell k M i )anditspilotqualityis Q pilot M i .

k

Inthefollowinglines,wewillconsider ic asthecarrierusedbythebestservingcell.
DeterminationoftheActiveSet
ForeachstationSjcontainingMiinitscalculationarea,usingic,andifneighboursareused,neighbourofSBS(Mi)
DL

BTS P tot M i S j ic b pilot

Calculationof Q pilot M i S j ic = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------DL
k
I 0 ic b pilot
RejectionofstationSjifthepilotisnotreceived
min

If Q pilot M i S j ic Q pilot thenSjisrejectedbyMi

k

ElseSjisincludedintheMiactiveset
RejectionofSjiftheMiactivesetisfull
Stationwiththelowest Q pilot intheactivesetisrejected
k

EndFor
DeterminationoftheSubactiveSetsofaEVDOMulticarrierUser
FormulticarrierEVDORev.Bserviceuserswitha1xEVDORev.Bcapableterminal,calculationofthequalitylevelreceived
bythebestservingcell(SBS,ic)
Ec
--- N t

UL

max

term P term M i
S BS ic = -----------------------------------------UL
L T N tot S BS ic

E UL
E UL
If ----c- S BS ic ----c- S BS thenEVDOmulticarrierisnotactivated.
Nt
N t min
ForeachtransmitterSjcontainingMiinitscalculationareaandusingotherEVDOcarriers,icn(eithericnbelongstof1fora
singlefrequencybandnetwork,oritbelongstof1,f2orf3foramultibandterminal)
Calculationof Q pilot Sj ic n M i
k

Rankingofcarriers,icn,accordingto Q pilot Sj ic n M i ,fromthehighesttothelowestvalue.

k

Foreachreceivedcarrier,icn,inthedefinedorder:
carriers

While n max

M i isnotexceeded

Determinationofthebesttransmitterofthesubactiveset,basedonthereceivedpilotquality, Q pilot Sj ic n M i .
k

Determinationoftheothertransmittersofthesubactiveset,basedonthereceivedpilotquality, Q pilot Sj ic n M i .
k

Calculationofthequalitylevelreceivedbythebestservingcell(SBS,icn)
Ec
--- N t

UL

max

term P term M i
S BS ic n = -----------------------------------------UL
L T N tot S BS ic n

379

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

E UL
E UL
If ----c- S BS ic n ----c- S BS ,thennosubactivesetisassociatedwithicn
N t
N t min
IftheuserterminalsupportstheLockedmode,analysisofthesubactiveset
Ifatransmitterofthestudiedsubactivesetdoesnotbelongtothesubactivesetassociatedwiththebestcarrier,thenitis
removed.
Ifthestudiedsubactivesetdoesnotcontainthesametransmittersasthesubactivesetassociatedwiththebestcarrier,then
thestudiedsubactivesetisremoved.
EndIf
Endwhile
EndFor
UplinkPowerControl
req

CalculationoftherequiredpowerforMi, P term M i ic k
Foreachcell(Sj,ic)presentintheMiactivesetorsubactiveset
CalculationofqualitylevelonMitrafficchannelat(Sj,ic),withtheminimumpowerallowedontrafficchannelfortheMi
service
req

P term M i ic k 1
UL
P b M i S j ic = --------------------------------------L T M i S j
UL

term P b M i S j ic
UL
- G UL
Q M i S j ic k = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------p Service
UL
Tx
UL
N tot ic 1 F MUD term P b M i S j ic
IftheuserselectstheoptionTotalnoise
UL

term P b M i S j ic
- G UL
Q M i S j ic k = ---------------------------------------------------p Service
UL
N tot ic
UL

EndFor
If(Miisnotinhandoff)
UL

UL

Q total M i = Q M i S j ic
k

Elseif(Miisinsofterhandoff)
UL

UL

Q total M i = f rakeefficiency
k

UL

Q M i S j ic k

S j ActiveSet

Elseif(Miisinsoftorsofter/softwithoutMRC)
UL

UL

Q total M i =
k

UL

Max Q M i S j ic k G macro diversity 2links

I AS ActiveSet

Elseif(Miisinsoft/soft)
UL

UL

Q total M i =
k

UL

Max Q M i S j ic k G macro diversity 3links

AS

ActiveSet

Elseif(Miisinsofter/softwithMRC)

UL
UL
UL
UL
Q total M i = Max f rakeefficiency
Q M i S j ic k Q M i S j ic k
k
othersite

i AS ActiveSet

(samesite)

G UL
macro diversity 2links

EndIf
UL

Q req Service M i Term M i Mobility M i

req
- P req
P term M i ic k = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------term M i ic k 1
UL
Q total M i
k

380

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

IftheserviceofMiusesTransmissionControlProtocol(TCP)
Forthebestservercell(Sk,ic)ofMi
CalculationoftheMidownlinkapplicationthroughput
DL

Calculationof N tot ic b traffic

Ptot txj icadj btraffic

DL

DL

txj j
- + N0
Ptot Sj i c btraffic + ---------------------------------------------------------------RF ic ic adj
DL

N tot ic b traffic =

term

j j k

CalculationofthemaximumthroughputsuppliedtoMi, TPmax DL M i S k
CalculationofpilotqualitylevelatMi
DL
E
P tot M i S k ic b pilot
----c- M i S k ic b pilot = -------------------------------------------------DL
Nt
N tot ic b pilot

IfMiisa1xEVDORev.0serviceuser,determinationofthepeakthroughputfromthegraph(Peakthroughput=f(C/I))specified
forthemobilitytypeofMi
E
TP max DL M i S k = f ----c- M i S k ic b pilot
Nt

IfMiisa1xEVDORev.Aserviceuser,selectionofthedownlink1xEVDOradiobearer( Index DL Bearer ): Index DL Bearer

DL
E
E
where ----c- M i S k ic b pilot ----c- Index DL Bearer
Nt
min
Nt

IfMiisa1xEVDORev.Bserviceuser,selectionofthedownlink1xEVDOradiobearer( Index DL Bearer ): Index DL Bearer

DL
E
E
where ----c- M i S k ic b pilot ----c- Index DL Bearer
andthemodulationschemeissupportedbytheterminal.
Nt
min
Nt
DL

TP P R LC Index DL Bearer
Determinationofthepeakthroughput: TP max DL M i S k = -----------------------------------------------------------n TS Index DL Bearer
DL

TP A M i S k = TPmax DL M i S k f TP Scaling Service Mi TP Offset Service Mi

UL

DeterminationoftheuplinkthroughputduetoTCPacknowledgements, TP TCP ACK M i S k fromthegraph(ULThrdueto

TCP=f(DLThr)specifiedfortheserviceofMi
UL

DL

TP TCP ACK M i S k = f TP A M i S k
UL

UL

UL

Determinationofthenearestlowerandhighersupportedthroughputs( TP low and TP high )forTP TCP ACK M i S k

UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

For TP low and TP high ,calculationof CI req TP low and CI req TP high
E
UL
CI req = ----c-
1 + G DRC + G TCH forDORev.0terminals
N t min
UL

And
E UL
UL
CI req = ----c-
1 + G DRC + G TCH + G RRI + G Auxiliary pilot forDORev.AandDORev.Bterminals
N t min
EndFor
UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

Linearinterpolationof CI req TP TCP ACK between CI req TP low and CI req TP high
UL

UL

UL

CI req = CI req TP + CI req TP TCP ACK

W
UL
UL
Q req = CI req ----------------------------------------------UL
UL
TP + TP TCP ACK
EndIf

381

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

req

req

min

P term M i ic k = Max P term M i ic k P term M i S j

ForDORev.0andDORev.Ausers
req

max

If P term M i ic k P term M i then:

Downgradingthetrafficchannelthroughput
req

max

While P term M i ic k P term M i

And
UL

TP Service M i 9.6kbps for1xEVDORev.0users,

UL

TP Service M i 4.8kbps for(1xEVDORev.AVariablebitrate)serviceusers,

UL

TP Service M i 4.8kbps forsinglecarrier1xEVDORev.Bserviceusers,

UL

TP Service M i TPD min UL Service M i for(1xEVDORev.AGuaranteedbitrate)serviceusers,

req

P term M i ic k
req
UL
- TP UL
P term M i ic k = ---------------------------------------------low Service M i ( TP low Service M i is the nearest lower supported
UL
TP Service M i
throughput)
For 1xEVDO Rev. 0, (1xEVDO Rev. A Variable bit rate) and singlecarrier 1xEVDO Rev. B service users,
UL

UL

TP Service M i = TPlow Service M i

UL

For(1xEVDORev.AGuaranteedbitrate)serviceusers, TP Service M i = TPD min UL Service M i

EndWhile
req

max

If P term M i ic k P term M i thenMiisrejected

For 1xEVDO Rev. 0, (1xEVDO Rev. A Variable bit rate) and singlecarrier 1xEVDO Rev. B service users,
req

P term M i ic = P term M i ic k
req

For(1xEVDORev.AGuaranteedbitrate)serviceusers, P term M i ic = P term M i ic k C UL Bearer

Endif
Endif
Formulticarrier1xEVDORev.Bserviceusers,loadbalancingbetweencarriersisperformed.Theavailableterminalpoweris
equallysharedbetweeneachcarrier:
max

P term M i
req
- ,then:
If P term M i ic k ----------------------------carriers
Mi
n
Downgradingthetrafficchannelthroughput
max

P term M i
req
- and TP UL Service M i ic 153 6kbps
While P term M i ic k ----------------------------carriers
n
Mi
req

P term M i ic k
req
UL
- TP UL
P term M i ic k = ---------------------------------------------------------low Service M i ( TP low Service M i is the nearest lower supported
UL
TP Service M i ic
throughput)
UL

UL

TP Service M i ic = TP low Service M i

EndWhile
max

P term M i
req
- ,thenMiisnotconnectedtocellsofthesubactiveset.
If P term M i ic k ----------------------------carriers
n
Mi
Endif

382

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

Ifnosubactivesetcanbeused,thenMiisrejected.
Endif
UL

Calculationof TP Service M i foreachcombinationofcarriers

n
UL

TP Service M i =

TP

UL

Service M i ic wherencorrespondstothenumberofcarriersinthecombination.

ic = 1
UL

Selectionoftheconfigurationprovidingthehighestthroughput, Max TP Service M i .

UL

UL

UL

If Max TP Service M i TP high Service M i ( TP high Service M i isthenearestsupportedthroughputhigherthan

therequestedthroughput)
Downgradingthetrafficchannelthroughput
UL

UL

UL

While Max TP Service M i TP high Service M i and TP Service M i ic 153 6kbps

EndWhile
EndIf
Endfor
UplinkInterferenceUpdates
Updateofinterferenceonactivemobilesonly(oldcontributionsofmobilesandstationsarereplacedbythenewones)
Foreachcell(Sj,ic)
UL

Updateof N tot S j ic
EndFor
ControlofRadioResourceLimits(NumberofEVDOusers,MACIndicesandSiteChannelElements)
Foreachcell(Sj,ic)
Max

While n EVDO S j ic n EVDO S j ic

Rejectionofthelastadmittedmobile
EndFor
Foreachcell(Sj,ic)
Max

While N MacIndexes S j ic N MacIndexes S j ic

Rejectionofthelastadmittedmobile
EndFor
Foreachsite(NodeB)Nl
Max

While N EVDO CE N I k N EVDO CE N I

Rejectionofthelastadmittedmobile
EndFor
UplinkLoadFactorControl
UL

UL

UL

Foreachcell(Sj,ic)with NR S j ic NR threshold S j ic + NR threshold S j ic

UL

UL

UL

While NR S j ic NR threshold S j ic + NR threshold S j ic andthereisatleastonemobilethatcanbedowngraded

Downgradingthetrafficchannelthroughputforall1xEVDORev.0mobilesforwhichthethroughputtransitionflagissetto
"True".
UL

Updateof N tot S j ic
Endwhile

383

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014
UL

UL

UL

Foreachcell(Sj,ic)with NR S j ic NR threshold S j ic NR threshold S j ic

UL

UL

UL

While NR S j ic NR threshold S j ic NR threshold S j ic andthereisatleastonemobilethatcanbeupgraded

Upgradingthetrafficchannelthroughputforall1xEVDORev.0mobilesforwhichthethroughputtransitionflagissetto
"True". (only 1xEVDO Rev. 0 mobiles which have not been downgraded can be upgraded. In addition, the upgraded
throughputcannotexceedtheinitialuserthroughputdrawnbytheMonteCarloalgorithm.Thismeansthatonlymobiles
downgradedduringtheuplinkpowercontrolstepcanbeupgraded).
UL

Updateof N tot S j ic
Endwhile
UL

UL

Foreachcell(Sj,ic)with X S j ic X max
Rejectionofamobilewiththelowestservicepriority
EndFor
UL

UL

Whileatleastonecellwith X S j ic X max exists

DownlinkDataRateControl
ForeachmobileMiconnectedtoacell(Sk,ic)
DL

Calculationof N tot ic b traffic

Foreachcell(Sj,ic)( k j )
Determinationofthenumberofmobilesconnectedtothecell(Sj,ic), N mobiles S j ic
If N mobiles S j ic = 0 then, P tx S j ic b traffic = G idle power P max S j ic
Else P tx S j ic b traffic = P max S j ic
EndFor
DL

N tot ic b traffic =

Ptot Sj ic btraffic + N0
DL

term

j j k

EndFor
CalculationofthemaximumthroughputsuppliedtoMi, TP max DL
FortheMisbestservercell(Sk,ic)(intheactivesetoreachsubactiveset)
CalculationofpilotqualitylevelatMi
DL
E
P tot M i S k ic b pilot
----c- M i S k ic b pilot = -------------------------------------------------DL
Nt
N tot ic b pilot

IfMiisa1xEVDORev.0serviceuser,determinationofthepeakthroughputfromthegraph(Peakthroughput=f(C/I))specified
forthemobilitytypeofMi
E
TP max DL M i S k = f ----c- M i S k ic b pilot
Nt

If Mi is a 1xEVDO Rev. A service user, selection of the downlink 1xEVDO radio bearer ( Index DL Bearer ) for which
DL
E
E
----c- M i S k ic b pilot ----c- Index DL Bearer
Nt
min
Nt

If Mi is a 1xEVDO Rev. B service user, selection of the downlink 1xEVDO radio bearer ( Index DL Bearer ) for which
DL
E
E
----c- M i S k ic b pilot ----c- Index DL Bearer
andthemodulationissupportedbyMisterminal.
Nt
min
Nt
DL

IfMiisa(1xEVDORev.AGuaranteedbitrate)serviceuserand TP P R LC Index DL Bearer TPD min DL Service M i ,Miis

rejected.

384

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1
DL

TP P R LC Index DL Bearer
Determinationofthepeakthroughput: TP max DL M i S k ic = -----------------------------------------------------------n TS
For 1xEVDO Rev. 0, (1xEVDO Rev. A Variable bit rate) and singlecarrier 1xEVDO Rev. B service users,
TP max DL M i = TP max DL M i S k ic
For(1xEVDORev.AGuaranteedbitrate)serviceusers, TP max DL M i = TPD min DL Service M i
Formulticarrier1xEVDORev.Bserviceusers, TP max DL M i =

DL

TP max DL max M i S k ic

S ic
k

For(1xEVDORev.AGuaranteedbitrate)serviceusers,calculationof C DL Bearer
EndFor
DL

Calculationoftheaveragecellthroughput, TP av
Foreachcell(Sj,ic)

G MU N mobiles S j ic

TP max DL M i S j ic

M i NVBR m obiles Sj ic

C DL Bearer M k S j ic
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1

N VBR m obiles S j ic

M N
S ic

k
GBR m obiles j

DL

TP av S j ic =

TPD min DL M k

M k NGBR m obiles Sj ic

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
C DL Bearer M k S j ic

ic

GBR m obiles j

ic

k
GBR m obiles j

1 ER S ic
DRC j

N mobiles

1 TS
BCMCS S j ic TS EVDO CCH S j ic + TP BCMCS S j ic TS BCMCS S j ic

If N mobiles S j ic = 1 ,then G MU = 1
Elseif N mobiles S j ic 1 , G MU isdeterminedfromthegraph(MUGtable=f(nbusers))specifiedfor(Sj,ic).Ifthetransmitter
supportsthemulticarrierEVDOmode, G MU isdeterminedfromthegraph(MUGtable=f(nbusers))specifiedforSj.
EndIf
EndFor

5.4.2.2.3

ConvergenceCriterion
Thealgorithmconvergenceisstudiedonuplinkonly.Theuplinkconvergencecriterionisevaluatedateachiteration,andcan
bewrittenasfollow:
UL
UL
UL
UL

I tot ic k I tot ic k 1
N user ic k N user ic k 1
100 int ma x ----------------------------------------------------------- 100
UL = max int ma x -------------------------------------------------UL
UL
Stations
Stations

I ic
N
ic
tot

user

Atollstopsthealgorithmif:
1stcase:Betweentwosuccessiveiterations, UL islower( )thanthethreshold(definedwhencreatingasimulation).
Thesimulationhasreachedconvergence.
Example:Letusassumethatthemaximumnumberofiterationsis100,ULconvergencethresholdissetto5.If UL 5
betweenthe4thandthe5thiteration,Atollstopsthealgorithmafterthe5thiteration.Convergencehasbeenachieved.
2ndcase:After30iterations, UL isstillhigherthanthethresholdandfromthe30thiteration, UL doesnotdecreaseduring
thenext15successiveiterations.
Thesimulationhasnotreachedconvergence(specificdivergencesymbol).
Examples:Letusassumethatthemaximumnumberofiterationsis100,ULconvergencethresholdissetto5.

385

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

1. After the 30th iteration, UL equals 100 and do not decrease during the next 15 successive iterations:Atollstops the
algorithmatthe46thiteration.Convergencehasnotbeenachieved.
2. After the 30th iteration, UL equals 80, it starts decreasing slowly until the 40th iteration (without going under the
threshold)andthendoesnotchangeduringthenext15successiveiterations:Atollstopsthealgorithmatthe56thiteration
withoutachievingconvergence.
3rdcase:Afterthelastiteration.
If UL isstillstrictlyhigherthanthethreshold,thesimulationhasnotconverged(specificdivergencesymbol).
If UL islowerthanthethreshold,thesimulationhasconverged.

5.4.3 Appendices
5.4.3.1 AdmissionControl
During admission control, Atoll calculates the uplink load factor of a considered cell assuming the mobile concerned is
connectedwithit.Here,activitystatusassignedtousersisnottakenintoaccount.SoevenifthemobileisnotactiveonUL,
itcanberejectedduetocellloadsaturation.TocalculatethecellULloadfactor,eitherAtolltakesintoaccountthemobile
powerdeterminedduringpowercontrolifmobilewasconnectedinpreviousiteration,oritestimatesaloadriseduetothe
mobileandaddsittothecurrentload.Theloadrise( X
X

UL

UL

)iscalculatedasfollows:

1
= -------------------------------------W
1 + --------------------------UL
UL
Q req TP

IncaseofCDMA20001xRTTnetworks,wehave:
UL

UL

UL

Q req = Q req FCH + Q req SCH and TP

UL

FCH

SCH

= TP P UL + TP P UL

5.4.3.2 ResourcesManagement
5.4.3.2.1

WalshCodeManagement
WalshcodesaremanagedinthedownlinkduringthesimulationincaseofCDMA20001xRTTnetworks.AtollperformsWalsh
codeallocationduringtheradioresourcecontrolstep.
Walshcodesformabinarytreewithcodesofalongerlengthgeneratedfromcodesofashorterlength.LengthkWalshcodes
aregeneratedfromlengthk/2Walshcodes.Therefore,ifachannelneeds1lengthk/2Walshcode,itisequivalenttousing2
lengthkWalshcodes,or4length2kWalshcodesandsoon.

Figure 5.3:WalshCodeTreeIndices(NotWalshCodeNumbers)
128128bitlengthWalshcodespercellareavailableinCDMA2000documents.
Duringtheresourcecontrol,Atolldeterminesthenumberof128bitlengthWalshcodesthatwillbeconsumedbyeachcell.
Therefore,itallocates:

386

Acodewiththelongestlength(i.e.a128bitlengthcode)percommonchannelforeachcell.Thenumberofcommon
channels per cell corresponds to the value defined for the DL overhead resources for common channels per cell
parameteravailableinthesiteequipmentproperties.
Two128bitlengthcodespercellreceiverlinkforFCHinRC1,RC2,RC3orRC5andonlyoneforFCHinRC4.

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

Thenumberof128bitlengthcodestobeallocatedpercellreceiverlinkforSCH(incaseSCHissupportedbytheuser
Walshcodes

radioconfiguration), N 128bits
Walshcodes

N 128bits

,isdeterminedasfollows:

SCH

= TPF DL 2 forRC1,RC2,RC3andRC5,

And
Walshcodes

N 128bits

SCH

= TPF DL forRC4.

Where
SCH

TPF DL istheSCHthroughputfactor.
TheWalshcodeallocationfollowstheBuddyalgorithm,whichguaranteesthat:

IfaklengthWalshcodeisused,allofitschildrenwithlengths2k,4k,,cannotbeusedastheyarenotorthogonal.
IfaklengthWalshcodeisused,allofitsancestorswithlengthsk/2,k/4,,cannotbeusedastheyarenotorthogonal.

5.4.3.2.2

TheWalshcodeallocationfollowsthemobileconnectionorder(mobileorderinthe
Mobilestab).
TheWalshcodeandchannelelementmanagementisdealtwithdifferentlyincaseof
softerhandoff.AtollallocatesWalshcodesforeachtransmitterreceiverlinkwhile
itassignschannelelementsgloballytoasite.

ChannelElementManagement
Channelelementsarecontrolledinthesimulation.
CDMA20001xRTTnetworks
Atollcheckstheavailabilityofthisresourceonuplinkanddownlink.
Onuplink,Atollconsumes N CE UL j channelelementsforeachcelljonasiteNI.Thisfigureincludes:
Overhead

N CE UL

FCH
N CE UL

channelelementsforcontrolchannels(Pilotchannel),
SCH

1 + TPF UL percellreceiverlink,forTCH(TCHcorrespondtoTrafficchannelsi.e.FCHandSCH).

Therefore,thenumberofchannelelementsrequiredonuplinkatthesitelevel, N CE UL N I ,is:
N CE UL N I =

NCE UL j

j NI

Inthedownlink,Atollconsumes N CE DL j channelelementsforeachcelljonasiteNI.Thisfigureincludes:
Overhead

N CE DL

N CE DL 1 + TPF DL percellreceiverlink,forTCH(TCHcorrespondtoTrafficchannelsi.e.FCHandSCH).

channelelementsforcontrolchannels(Pilotchannel,Synchronisationchannel,Pagingchannel),

FCH

SCH

Therefore,thenumberofchannelelementsrequiredondownlinkatthesitelevel, N CE DL N I ,is:
N CE DL N I =

NCE DL j

j NI

In case of softer handover (the mobile has several links with cosite cells), Atoll
allocateschannelelementsforthebestservingcellmobilelinkonly.

CDMA20001xEVDOnetworks
Intheuplink,Atollconsumes N CE UL j channelelementsforeachcelljonasiteNI.Thisfigureincludes:

2channelelementsforcontrolchannels(Pilotchannel,DataRateControlchannel,etc).Thisvalueisfixedandhard
coded.

N CE UL percellreceiverlink,for(EVDOVariablebitrate)serviceusers.

TCH

387

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

TCH

N CE UL C UL Bearer percellreceiverlink,for(EVDOGuaranteedbitrate)serviceusers.

Therefore,thenumberofchannelelementsrequiredonuplinkatthesitelevel, N CE UL N I ,is:
N CE UL N I =

NCE UL j

j NI

Inthedownlink,onlyoneusercanbeservedbyacellatatime,sothisresourceisnotlimited.

5.4.3.3 DownlinkLoadFactorCalculation
Atollcalculatesthedownlinkloadfactorforeachcell(availableintheCellstabofanygivensimulationresults)andeach
connectedmobile(availableintheMobilestabofanygivensimulationresults).

5.4.3.3.1

DownlinkLoadFactorperCell
ThedownlinkloadfactoriscalculatedforeachCDMA20001xRTTcell.
ApproachfordownlinkloadfactorevaluationishighlyinspiredbythedownlinkloadfactordefinedinthebookWCDMAfor
UMTSbyHarryHolmaandAnttiToskala.
DL FCH

DL SCH

Q req
Q req
+ -------------------Let CI req = -------------------betherequiredquality.
DL FCH
DL SCH
Gp
Gp
FCH

SCH

So,wehave CI req = CI req + CI req

Incaseofsofthandoff,requiredqualityislimitedtotheeffectivecontributionofthetransmitter.
DL

ortho

P tx ic = P pilot ic + P sync ic + P paging ic + P SCH ic + P FCH ic = P CCH ic +

Ptch ic
tch

where
ortho

P CCH ic = P pilot ic + P sync ic + P paging ic

Ptch ic = PSCH ic + PFCH ic

tch

Atmobilelevel,wehavearequiredpower,Ptch:
term

P tch ic = CI req I extra ic + I intra ic + I inter carrier ic + I inter techno log y ic + N 0

P tch ic = CI req

I extra ic + I inter carrier ic + I inter techno log y ic

DL

P tx ic P tch ic
- + N term
+ 1 F ortho BTS ----------------------------------------0
L

LT

L
T

DL

term

I extra ic + I inter carrier ic + I inter techno log y ic L T + 1 F ortho BTS P tx ic + N 0 L T

P tch ic = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1
----------- + 1 F ortho BTS
CIreq
where
DL

I intra ic isthetotalpowerreceivedatreceiverfromthecelltowhichitisconnected.
DL

I extra ic isthetotalpowerreceivedatreceiverfromothercells.
I inter carrier ic istheintercarrierinterferencereceivedatreceiver.
I inter techno log y ic istheintertechnologyinterferencereceivedatreceiver.

388

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

I
ic + I inter carrier ic + I inter techno log y ic L T
extra

DL
term

1
F
+

ic

+
N

ortho
BTS
tx
0
T

DL
ortho
P tx ic = P CCH ic +
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1

----------- + 1 F ortho BTS

tch

CI req

Wehave:
I extra ic + I inter carrier ic + I inter techno log y ic L T
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DL

P tx ic

DL
term

+ 1 F ortho BTS P tx ic + N 0 L T

DL
ortho
P tx ic = P CCH ic +
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 - + 1 F

---------ortho BTS
tch

CI req

I extra ic + I inter carrier ic + I inter techno log y ic L T

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ 1 F ortho BTS

DL

P tx ic
tch
DL
DL
P tx ic --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- P tx ic
1

----------- + 1 F ortho BTS

CI req

ortho
= P CCH ic +

term

N0 LT
---------------------------------------------------------------
1

tch ----------- + 1 F ortho BTS

CI req

term
ortho

N0 LT
---------------------------------------------------------------
P CCH ic +
1

tch ----------- + 1 F ortho BTS

CI req
DL
P tx ic = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ I extra ic + I inter carrier ic + I inter techno log y ic L T

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + 1 F ortho BTS

DL

P tx ic
1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1 - + 1 F
---------

tch
ortho BTS
CI req

Therefore,thedownlinkloadfactorcanbeexpressedas:

DL

I extra ic + I inter carrier ic + I inter techno log y ic L T

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ 1 F ortho BTS
DL

P tx ic

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
=

1 - + 1 F
---------
ortho BTS
tch
CI req

Thedownlinkloadfactorrepresentsthesignaldegradationinrelativetothereferenceinterference(thermalnoise).

5.4.3.3.2

DownlinkLoadFactorperMobile
Atollevaluatesthedownlinkloadfactorforanyconnectedmobile(CDMA20001xRTT1xEVDOuser)asfollows,
X

DL

DL

I tot ic
= -----------------DL
N tot ic

5.4.3.4 BestServerDeterminationinMonteCarloSimulationsOldMethod
BeforeAtoll2.8.0,bestserverdeterminationusedtobeperformedbyselectingthebestcarrierwithintransmittersaccording
totheselectedmethod(siteequipment)andthenthebesttransmitterusingthebestcarrier.Toswitchbacktothismethod,
addthefollowinglinesintheAtoll.inifile:
[CDMA]
MultiBandSimu = 0

389

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

Themethodisdescribedbelow:
ForeachstationSjcontainingMiinitscalculationareaandusingthemainfrequencybandsupportedbytheMisterminal(i.e.
eitherf1forasinglefrequencybandnetwork,orf1,f2orf3foramultibandterminalwithoutanypriorityonfrequencybands,
orf1foramultibandterminalwithf1asmainfrequencyband).
Determinationof BestCarrier k S j M i .
IfagivencarrierisspecifiedfortheservicerequestedbyMiandifitisusedbySj
BestCarrier k S j M i isthecarrierspecifiedfortheservice.
ElsethecarrierselectionmodedefinedforSjisconsidered.
IfcarrierselectionmodeisMin.ULLoadFactor
ForeachcarriericusedbySj,wecalculatecurrentloadingfactor:
UL

I tot S j ic
UL
UL
X k S j ic = ------------------------- + X
UL
N tot S j ic
EndFor
UL

BestCarrier k S j M i isthecarrierwiththelowest X k S j ic
ElseifcarrierselectionmodeisMin.DLTotalPower
BestCarrier k S j M i isthecarrierwiththelowest P tx S j ic k
ElseifcarrierselectionmodeisRandom
BestCarrier k S j M i israndomlyselected
Elseifcarrierselectionmodeis"Sequential"
UL

UL

BestCarrier k S j M i isthefirstcarriersothat X k S j ic X max

BTS P c M i S j BestCarrier
Calculationof Q pilot M i S j BestCarrier = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------DL
k
I 0 BestCarrier k S j M i
RejectionofstationSjifthepilotisnotreceived
pilot

If Q pilot M i S j BestCarrier Q req thenSjisrejectedbyMi

k
max

If Q pilot M i S j BestCarrier Q pilot M i

k

Admissioncontrol(IfsimulationrespectsaloadfactorconstraintandMiwasnotconnectedinpreviousiteration).
UL

UL

If X k S j BestCarrier k S j M i X max ,thenSjisrejectedbyMi

Else
max

Q pilot M i = Q pilot M i S j BestCarrier

k

S BS M i = S j
Endif
EndFor
IfnoSBShasbeenselectedandMisterminalcanworkononefrequencybandonly,Mihasfailedtobeconnectedtothe
networkandisrejected.
IfnoSBShasbeenselectedandMisterminalcanworkonanotherfrequencyband.
Determinationof BestCarrier k Sj M i foreachstationtxjcontainingMiinitscalculationareaandusinganotherfrequency
bandsupportedbytheMisterminal(i.e.f1,f2orf3foramultibandterminalwithoutanypriorityonfrequencybands,orf2
foramultibandterminalwithf2assecondaryfrequencyband)
IfagivencarrierisspecifiedfortheservicerequestedbyMiandifitisusedbySj
BestCarrier k S j M i isthecarrierspecifiedfortheservice.

390

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

ElsethecarrierselectionmodedefinedforSjisconsidered.
IfcarrierselectionmodeisMin.ULLoadFactor
ForeachcarriericusedbySj,wecalculatecurrentloadingfactor:
UL

I tot S j ic
UL
UL
- + X
X k S j ic = ------------------------UL
N tot S j ic
EndFor
UL

BestCarrier k S j M i isthecarrierwiththelowest X k S j ic
ElseifcarrierselectionmodeisMin.DLTotalPower
BestCarrier k S j M i isthecarrierwiththelowest P tx S j ic k
ElseifcarrierselectionmodeisRandom
BestCarrier k S j M i israndomlyselected
Elseifcarrierselectionmodeis"Sequential"
UL

UL

BestCarrier k S j M i isthefirstcarriersothat X k S j ic X max

BTS P c M i S j BestCarrier
Calculationof Q pilot M i S j BestCarrier = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------DL
k
I 0 BestCarrier k S j M i
RejectionofstationSjifthepilotisnotreceived
pilot

If Q pilot M i S j BestCarrier Q req thenSjisrejectedbyMi

k

max

If Q pilot M i S j BestCarrier Q pilot M i

k

Admissioncontrol(IfsimulationrespectsaloadfactorconstraintandMiwasnotconnectedinpreviousiteration).
UL

UL

If X k S j BestCarrier k S j M i X max ,thenSjisrejectedbyMi

Else
max

Q pilot M i = Q pilot M i S j BestCarrier

k

S BS M i = S j
Endif
EndFor
IfnoSBShasbeenselectedandMisterminalcanworkontwofrequencybandsonly,Mihasfailedtobeconnectedtothe
networkandisrejected.
IfnoSBShasbeenselectedandMisterminalcanworkonanotherfrequencyband.
Determinationof BestCarrier k Sj M i foreachstationtxjcontainingMiinitscalculationareaandusinganotherfrequency
bandsupportedbytheMisterminal(i.e.f1,f2orf3foramultibandterminalwithoutanypriorityonfrequencybands,orf3
foramultibandterminalwithf3asthirdfrequencyband)
IfagivencarrierisspecifiedfortheservicerequestedbyMiandifitisusedbySj
BestCarrier k S j M i isthecarrierspecifiedfortheservice.
ElsethecarrierselectionmodedefinedforSjisconsidered.
IfcarrierselectionmodeisMin.ULLoadFactor
ForeachcarriericusedbySj,wecalculatecurrentloadingfactor:
UL

I tot S j ic
UL
UL
X k S j ic = ------------------------- + X
UL
N tot S j ic
EndFor

391

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014
UL

BestCarrier k S j M i isthecarrierwiththelowest X k S j ic
ElseifcarrierselectionmodeisMin.DLTotalPower
BestCarrier k S j M i isthecarrierwiththelowest P tx S j ic k
ElseifcarrierselectionmodeisRandom
BestCarrier k S j M i israndomlyselected
Elseifcarrierselectionmodeis"Sequential"
UL

UL

BestCarrier k S j M i isthefirstcarriersothat X k S j ic X max

BTS P c M i S j BestCarrier
Calculationof Q pilot M i S j BestCarrier = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------DL
k
I 0 BestCarrier k S j M i
RejectionofstationSjifthepilotisnotreceived
pilot

If Q pilot M i S j BestCarrier Q req thenSjisrejectedbyMi

k

max

If Q pilot M i S j BestCarrier Q pilot M i

k

Admissioncontrol(IfsimulationrespectsaloadfactorconstraintandMiwasnotconnectedinpreviousiteration).
UL

UL

If X k S j BestCarrier k S j M i X max ,thenSjisrejectedbyMi

Else
max

Q pilot M i = Q pilot M i S j BestCarrier

k

S BS M i = S j
Endif
EndFor
IfnoSBShasbeenselected,Mihasfailedtobeconnectedtothenetworkandisrejected.

5.5 CDMA2000PredictionStudies
5.5.1 PointAnalysis:TheASAnalysisTab
Letusassumeareceiverwithaterminal,amobilitytypeandaservicewithcertainULandDLthroughputs.Thisreceiverdoes
notcreateanyinterference.Youcanmakethepredictionforaspecificcarrierorforthebest1xRTTor1xEVDOcarrier.The
typeofcarrierandthecarriersyoucanselectdependontheserviceandonthefrequencyband(s)supportedbytheterminal.
Theanalysisisbasedontheuplinkloadpercentageandthedownlinktotalpowerofcells.Theseparameterscanbeeither
outputsofagivensimulation,averagevaluescalculatedfromagroupofsimulations,oruserdefinedcellinputs.
ResultsaredisplayedforanypointofthemapwherethepilotsignallevelexceedsthedefinedminimumRSCP.

5.5.1.1 BarGraphandPilotSubMenu
Wecanconsiderthefollowingcases:
1stcase:Analysisbasedonaspecificcarrier
Thecarrierthatcanbeusedbytransmittersisfixed.Inthiscase,foreachtransmittericontainingthereceiverinitscalculation
areaandusingtheselectedcarrier,Atollcalculatesthepilotqualityatthereceiveronthiscarrier.Then,itdeterminesthebest
servingtransmitterusingtheselectedcarrieric.
2ndcase:Analysisbasedonthebestcarrierofallfrequencybands
Atolldeterminesthebestcarrierforeachtransmitteriwhichcontainsthereceiverinitscalculationareaandusesafrequency
bandsupportedbythereceiversterminal.Thebestcarrierselectiondependsontheoptionselectedforthesiteequipment
(ULminimumnoise,DLminimumpower,random,sequential).Then,Atollcalculatesthepilotqualityatthereceiverfrom
thesetransmittersontheirbestcarriers(ic)anddefinesthebestserver(onitsbestcarrier).

392

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

3rd case: Analysis based on the best carrier of any frequency band (for multiband terminals with priority defined on
frequencybandsonly)
Thefrequencybandthatcanbeusedisfixed.Atolldeterminesthebestcarrierforeachtransmittericontainingthereceiver
initscalculationareaandusingtheselectedfrequencyband.Thebestcarrierselectiondependsontheoptionselectedfor
thesiteequipment(ULminimumnoise,DLminimumpower,random,sequential).Then,Atollcalculatesthepilotqualityat
thereceiverfromthesetransmittersontheirbestcarriers(ic)anddefinesthebestserver(onitsbestcarrier).
Atollprovidesthesameoutputsinthebargraphandpilotsubmenuwhicheverthestudiednetwork,CDMA20001xRTTor
1xEVDO.

Ec/I0(or Q pilot ic )evaluation

Weassumethaticisthebestcarrierofatransmittericontainingthereceiverinitscalculationradius.
ForCDMA20001xRTTuserswehave,
BTS P c i ic
Q pilot i ic = --------------------------------------------
DL
I 0 ic
DL

DL

DL

DL

term

DL

with I 0 ic = P tot i ic + I extra ic + I inter carrier ic + I inter techno log y ic + N 0

ForCDMA20001xEVDOusers,wehave,
DL

BTS P tot i ic b pilot

Q pilot i ic = ---------------------------------------------------------------DL
I 0 ic b pilot
DL

DL

DL

DL

DL

term

With I 0 ic b pilot = P tot i ic b pilot + I extra ic b pilot + I inter carrier ic b pilot + I inter techno log y ic + N 0
Thecalculationof Q pilot i ic canbedividedinto6stepsexplainedinthetablebelow.
CDMA20001xRTTusers

CDMA20001xEVDOusers
DL

P tot i ic b pilot calculationforeachcell(i,ic)

P c i ic calculationforeachcell(i,ic)
P c i ic isthepilotpowerfromatransmitterionthecarriericat

DL

P tot i ic b pilot isthepilotburstfromthetransmitterionthe

carriericatthereceiver.

1ststep

thereceiver.
P pilot i ic
P c i ic = ------------------------LT
I

P tx i ic b pilot
DL
P tot i ic b pilot = ----------------------------------LT
I

and
P tx i ic b pilot = P max i ic

L path L Tx L term L body L indoor M Shadowing Ec Io

L T isthetotallossbetweenthetransmitteriandthereceiver: -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------I
G Tx G term

393

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

CDMA20001xRTTusers
DL

DL

CDMA20001xEVDOusers

DL

I extra ic , I inter carrier ic and I inter techno log y ic calculation

Wehave,
DL

I extra ic =

Ptot j ic
DL

DL

DL

I extra ic b pilot and I inter carrier ic b pilot calculation

j j i

DL

2ndstep

Foreachtransmitterofthenetwork, P tot j ic isthetotalpower

Wehave,
receivedatthereceiverfromthetransmitterjonthebestcarrieric
ofthetransmitteri.
DL
I extra ic b pilot =
P tx j ic
DL
P tot j ic = -------------------LT

Ptot j ic bpilot
DL

j j i

Ptot j icadj bpilot

DL

P tx j ic isthetotalpowertransmittedbythetransmitterjonthe
DL

bestcarrierofthetransmitteri.

j
I inter carrier ic b pilot = j---------------------------------------------------RF ic ic adj

Finally,wehave,

and

Ptot j icadj
DL

DL

DL

I inter techno log y ic =

j
-
I inter carrier ic = j-----------------------------------RF ic ic adj

ni

Tx

P Transmitted ic i
-------------------------------------Tx
Tx m
L total ICP ic ic
i

and
DL

I inter techno log y ic =

4thstep

3rdstep

n
term
N0

Tx

P Transmitted ic i
-------------------------------------Tx
Tx m
L total ICP ic ic
i

calculation
Tx DL

NF Term K T W NR inter techno log y

DL

I 0 ic and Q pilot i ic evaluationbasedonformulasdefinedabove

DL

G macro diversity calculation

DL

Themacrodiversitygain, G macro diversity ,modelsthedecreaseinshadowingmarginduetothefactthereareseveralpilotsignalsatthe

5thstep

mobile.
DL

npaths

G macro diversity = M Shadowing Ec Io M Shadowing Ec Io

npaths

M Shadowing Ec Io istheshadowingmarginforthemobilereceivingnpilotsignals(notnecessarilyfromtransmittersbelongingtothe
mobileactiveset).
Note:Thisparameterisdeterminedfromthefixedcelledgecoverageprobabilityandthemodelstandarddeviation.Whenthemodel
standarddeviationissetto0,themacrodiversitygainequals0.

394

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

CDMA20001xRTTusers

CDMA20001xEVDOusers

Determinationofactiveset
Atolltakesthetransmitteriwiththehighest Q pilot i ic andcalculatesthebestpilotqualityreceivedwithafixedcelledgecoverage
Resulting

probability Q pilot
Resulting
Q pilot
ic
Resulting

Q pilot

ic .

DL
G macro diversity

max Q pilot i ic

req

Resulting

Q pilot meansthatthepilotqualityatthereceiverexceeds Q pilot

ic x%oftimes(xisthefixedcelledgecoverage

6thstep

probability).Thecellwiththehighest Q pilot i ic enterstheactivesetasbestserver( Q pilot BS ic )andthebestcarrier(icBS)ofthe

bestserver
BSwillbetheoneusedbyothertransmittersofactiveset(whenactivesetsizeisgreaterthan1).Pilotisavailable.
Resulting

If Q pilot

req

ic Q pilot ,nocell(i,ic)canentertheactiveset.Pilotisunavailable.

Then,pilotqualitiesatthereceiverfromtransmittersi(otherthanthebestserver)onthebestcarrierofthebestserver,icBS,are
recalculatedtodeterminetheentirereceiveractiveset(whenactivesetisgreaterthan1).Sameformulasandcalculationmethodare
usedtoupdate
DL

I 0 ic BS anddetermine Q pilot i ic BS .
Othercells(i,icBS)inactivesetmustfulfillthefollowingcriteria:
pilot

Q pilot i ic BS Q min

i ic BS neighbourlist BS ic BS (optional)
Formulticarrier1xEVDORev.Bserviceusers,theseresultsaredetailedforeachsubactiveset.Foreachcarrier,Atolldisplays
thethermalnoise,I0(Bestserver),thepilotqualityfromthebestserverandfromtheotherserversofthesubactiveset,and
thedownlinkmacrodiversitygain.Theyarecalculatedasdescribedabove.

Numberofcellsinactiveset

Thisisauserdefinedinputintheterminalproperties.Itcorrespondstotheactivesetsize.

Numberoffingers

Thenumberoffingers,f,oftherakereceiver.Thisparameterisdefinedintheterminalproperties.ItisrelevantinCDMA2000
1xRTTonly11.Thisisthemaximumnumberofactivesetlinksthattheterminal(rake)cancombine.

Thermalnoise

Thisparameteriscalculatedasdescribedabove(3rdstep).

I0(Bestserver)

I0(Bestserver)isthetotalnoisereceivedatthereceiveronicBS.

Downlinkmacrodiversitygain

Thisparameteriscalculatedasdescribedabove(5thstep).

5.5.1.2 DownlinkSubMenu
OutputscalculatedbyAtolldependonthestudiednetwork(CDMA20001xRTTorCDMA20001xEVDO).

5.5.1.2.1

CDMA20001xRTT
LetmFCHandmSCHrespectivelydenotethenumberofcellsinthereceiveractivesetforthefundamentalchannel(FCH)and
thesupplementalchannel(SCH)andfbethenumberofrakefingersdefinedfortheterminal.Weassumethatfislessthan
orequaltomFCHandmSCH.
Among the mFCH cells of the receiver active set, only the first f cells will be considered in order to determine the FCH
availabilityondownlink.Inthesameway,onlythefirstfcellsamongthemSCHcellsofthereceiveractivesetwillbeconsidered
inordertodeterminetheSCHavailabilityondownlink.Eachofthesecellsisnoted(k,icBS).
AtollcalculatesthetrafficchannelqualityonFCHfromeachcell(k,icBS).Nopowercontrolisperformedasinsimulations.
Here,AtolldeterminesthedownlinktrafficchannelqualityonFCHatthereceiverforthemaximumtrafficchannelpowerper
transmitter allowed on FCH. Then, after combination, the total downlink traffic channel quality on FCH is evaluated and
comparedwiththespecifiedtargetquality.

11.

CDMA20001xEVDOsystemsdonotsupportsofthandoverondownlink.

395

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

AtollcalculatesthetrafficchannelqualityonSCHfromeachcell(k,icBS).Nopowercontrolisperformedasinsimulations.
Here,AtolldeterminesthedownlinktrafficchannelqualityonSCHatthereceiverforthemaximumtrafficchannelpowerper
transmitter allowed on SCH. This value depends on the downlink throughput specified in the analysis. Then, after
combination,thetotaldownlinktrafficchannelqualityonSCHisevaluatedandcomparedwiththespecifiedtargetquality.

Eb/NttargetonFCHandEb/NttargetonSCH
DL

Eb/NttargetonFCH( Q req FCH )isthedownlinktrafficdataqualitytargetonthefundamentalchannel(FCH).Thisvalueis

userdefinedforagivenserviceandterminal.
DL

Eb/NttargetonSCH( Q req SCH )isthedownlinktrafficdataqualitytargetonthesupplementalchannel(SCH).Thisvalueis

specifiedforagivenservice,terminalandSCHthroughput.

RequiredtransmitterpowersonFCHandSCH
req

req

ThecalculationoftherequiredtransmitterpowersonFCHandSCH( P FCH and P SCH )maybedividedintothreesteps.

1ststep:Eb/Ntmaxforthefirstf(numberoffingers)cellsofactiveset
DL

DL

Letusassumethefollowingnotations:Eb/NtmaxonFCHandSCHrespectivelycorrespondto Q max FCH and Q max SCH .

Therefore,foreachcell(k,icBS),wehave:
DL FCH

DL
Q max k

BTS P b max k ic BS
FCH
- G DL
= -------------------------------------------------------p
DL
N tot ic BS

ic BS FCH

And
DL SCH

BTS P b max k ic BS
DL
SCH
- G DL
Q max k ic BS SCH = -------------------------------------------------------p
DL
N tot ic BS
DL FCH

With P b

DL

max

max

P FCH DL SCH
P SCH
k ic BS = ---------- , P b max k ic BS = ---------LT
LT
DL

DL

DL

DL

term

And N tot ic BS = I intra ic BS + I extra ic BS + I inter carrier ic BS + I inter techno log y ic BS + N 0

Where
max

P FCH isthemaximumpowerallowedonFCH.ThisparameterisuserdefinedintheServicestableforacertainterminal.
max

P SCH isthemaximumpowerallowedonSCHforthespecifieddownlinkthroughput.Thisparameterisuserdefinedinthe
ServicestableforacertainterminalandSCHthroughput.
L T isthetotallossbetweenthetransmitteriandthereceiver.
k

L path L Tx L term L body L indoor M Shadowing Eb Nt

DL
L T = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G Tx G term
DL

N tot ic BS isthetotalnoiseatthereceiveronthebestcarrierofthebestserver.
With
DL

I intra ic BS = 1 BTS F ortho P DL k ic

tot
BS
And
DL

I extra ic BS =

Ptot j icBS
DL

j j k

DL

Foreachtransmitterinthenetwork, P tot ic BS isthetotalpowerreceivedatthereceiverfromthistransmitteronicBS.

DL

I inter carrier ic BS istheintercarrierinterferenceatthereceiveronthebestcarrierofthebestserver.

396

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

Ptot j icadj
DL

DL

j
---------------------------------------I inter carrier ic BS = txj
RF ic BS ic adj

icadjisacarrieradjacenttoicBS.
RF ic BS ic adj istheinterferencereductionfactor,definedbetweenicandicadjandsettoavaluedifferentfrom0.
DL

I inter techno log y ic BS istheintertechnologyinterferenceatthereceiveronthebestcarrierofthebestserver.

DL

I inter techno log y ic BS =

ni

Tx

P Transmitted ic i
----------------------------------------Tx
Tx m
L total ICP ic ic
i

BS

th

ic i isthe i interferingcarrierofanexternaltransmitter
Tx m

ICP ic ic
i

BS

istheintertechnologyChannelProtectionbetweenthesignaltransmittedbyTxandreceivedbymassumingthe

frequencygapbetween ic i (externalnetwork)and ic BS .
2ndstep:CalculationofthetotaltrafficchannelqualityonFCHandSCH
DL

Q MAX FCH isthetrafficchannelqualityonFCHatthereceiveronicBSaftercombiningthesignalfromeachcell(k,icBS).

Ondownlink,ifthereisnohandoff,wehave:
DL

DL

Q MAX ic BS FCH = Q max k ic BS FCH

Foranyotherhandoffstatus,wehave:
DL

DL

Q MAX ic BS FCH = f rakeefficiency

Qmax k icBS FCH

DL

Where
DL

f rakeefficiency isthedownlinkrakeefficiencyfactordefinedinTerminalproperties.
DL

Q MAX SCH isthetrafficchannelqualityonSCHatthereceiveronicBSaftercombiningthesignalfromeachcell(k,icBS).

Ondownlink,ifthereisnohandoff,wehave:
DL

DL

Q MAX ic BS SCH = Q max k ic BS SCH

Foranyotherhandoffstatus,wehave:
DL

DL

Q MAX ic BS SCH = f rakeefficiency

Qmax k icBS SCH

DL

k
req

req

3rdstep: P FCH and P SCH calculation

DL

Q req FCH
req
- P max
P FCH = --------------------------------------FCH
DL
Q MAX ic BS FCH
DL

Q req SCH
req
- P max
P SCH = --------------------------------------SCH
DL
Q MAX ic BS SCH

Eb/NtmaxonFCHforthefirstf(numberoffingers)cellsofactiveset
DL

Letusassumethefollowingnotation:Eb/NtmaxonFCHcorrespondsto Q max FCH .

Therefore,foreachcell(k,icBS),wehave:
DL FCH

BTS P b max k ic BS
DL
FCH
- G DL
Q max k ic BS FCH = -------------------------------------------------------p
DL
N tot ic BS

397

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014
max

P FCH
DL FCH
DL
DL
DL
DL
term
With P b max k ic BS = ---------- and N tot ic BS = I intra ic BS + I extra ic BS + I inter carrier ic BS + N 0
LT
k

Where
max

P FCH isthemaximumpowerallowedonFCH.ThisparameterisuserdefinedintheServicestableforacertainterminal.
L T isthetotallossbetweenthetransmitteriandthereceiver.
k

L path L Tx L term L body L indoor M Shadowing Eb Nt

DL
L T = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G Tx G term
DL

N tot ic BS isthetotalnoiseatthereceiveronthebestcarrierofthebestserver.
With
max

req

DL
P FCH P FCH
I intra ic BS = 1 BTS F ortho P DL
tot k ic BS 1 BTS max (----------------------------,0)
LT
k

And
DL

I extra ic BS =

Ptot j icBS
DL

j j k

DL

Foreachtransmitterinthenetwork, P tot ic BS isthetotalpowerreceivedatthereceiverfromthetransmitteronicBS.

DL

I inter carrier ic BS istheintercarrierinterferenceatthereceiveronthebestcarrierofthebestserver.

Ptot j icadj
DL

DL

txj j
I inter carrier ic BS = ---------------------------------------RF ic BS ic adj

icadjisacarrieradjacenttoicBS.
RF ic BS ic adj istheinterferencereductionfactor,definedbetweenicandicadjandsettoavaluedifferentfrom0.
DL

I inter techno log y ic BS istheintertechnologyinterferenceatthereceiveronthebestcarrierofthebestserver.

DL

I inter techno log y ic BS =

ni

Tx

P Transmitted ic i
----------------------------------------Tx
Tx m
L total ICP ic ic
i

BS

th

ic i isthe i interferingcarrierofanexternaltransmitter
Tx m

ICP ic ic
i

BS

istheintertechnologyChannelProtectionbetweenthesignaltransmittedbyTxandreceivedbymassumingthe

frequencygapbetween ic i (externalnetwork)and ic BS .

Eb/NtmaxonSCHforthefirstf(numberoffingers)cellsofactiveset
DL

Letusassumethefollowingnotation:Eb/NtmaxonSCHcorrespondsto Q max SCH .

Therefore,foreachcell(k,icBS),wehave:
DL SCH

BTS P b max k ic BS
DL
SCH
- G DL
Q max k ic BS SCH = -------------------------------------------------------p
DL
N tot ic BS
max

P SCH
DL SCH
-
With P b max k ic BS = ---------LT
k

DL

DL

DL

DL

DL

term

and N tot ic BS = I intra ic BS + I extra ic BS + I inter carrier ic BS + I inter techno log y ic BS + N 0

Where

398

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1
max

P SCH isthemaximumpowerallowedonSCHforthespecifieddownlinkthroughput.Thisparameterisuserdefinedinthe
ServicestableforacertainterminalandSCHthroughput.
L T isthetotallossbetweenthetransmitteriandthereceiver.
k

L path L Tx L term L body L indoor M Shadowing Eb Nt

DL
L T = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G Tx G term
DL

N tot ic BS isthetotalnoiseatthereceiveronthebestcarrierofthebestserver.
With
max

req

DL
P SCH P SCH
I intra ic BS = 1 BTS F ortho P DL
tot k ic BS 1 BTS max (----------------------------,0)
LT
k

And
DL

I extra ic BS =

Ptot j icBS
DL

j j k

DL

Foreachtransmitterinthenetwork, P tot ic BS isthetotalpowerreceivedatthereceiverfromthetransmitteronicBS.

DL

I inter carrier ic BS istheintercarrierinterferenceatthereceiveronthebestcarrierofthebestserver.

Ptot j icadj
DL

DL

j
---------------------------------------I inter carrier ic BS = txj
RF ic BS ic adj

icadjisacarrieradjacenttoicBS.
RF ic BS ic adj istheinterferencereductionfactor,definedbetweenicandicadjandsettoavaluedifferentfrom0.
DL

I inter techno log y ic BS istheintertechnologyinterferenceatthereceiveronthebestcarrierofthebestserver.

DL

I inter techno log y ic BS =

ni

Tx

P Transmitted ic i
----------------------------------------Tx
Tx m
L total ICP ic ic
i

BS

th

ic i isthe i interferingcarrierofanexternaltransmitter
Tx m

ICP ic ic
i

BS

istheintertechnologyChannelProtectionbetweenthesignaltransmittedbyTxandreceivedbymassumingthe

frequencygapbetween ic i (externalnetwork)and ic BS .

Eb/NtmaxonFCHandEb/NtmaxonSCH

DL

Q MAX FCH isthetrafficchannelqualityonFCHatthereceiveronicBSaftercombiningthesignalfromeachcell(k,icBS).

Ondownlink,ifthereisnohandoff,wehave:
DL

DL

Q MAX ic BS FCH = Q max k ic BS FCH

Foranyotherhandoffstatus,wehave:
DL

DL

Q MAX ic BS FCH = f rakeefficiency

Qmax k icBS FCH

DL

Where
DL

f rakeefficiency isthedownlinkrakeefficiencyfactordefinedinTerminalproperties.
DL

Q MAX SCH isthetrafficchannelqualityonSCHatthereceiveronicBSaftercombiningthesignalfromeachcell(k,icBS).

Ondownlink,ifthereisnohandoff,wehave:

399

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

DL

DL

Q MAX ic BS SCH = Q max k ic BS SCH

Foranyotherhandoffstatus,wehave:
DL

DL

Q MAX ic BS SCH = f rakeefficiency

Qmax k icBS SCH

DL

k
DL

DL

Therefore, the service on the downlink traffic channel is available if Q MAX ic BS FCH Q req FCH and
DL

DL

Q MAX ic BS SCH Q req SCH .

EffectiveEb/NtonFCHandEb/NtonSCH

DL

DL

Q eff FCH and Q eff SCH arerespectivelyeffectivetrafficchannelqualitiesatthereceiveronicBSsuppliedonFCHandSCH.

DL

DL

DL

DL

DL

Q eff FCH = min Q MAX FCH Q req FCH

And
DL

Q eff SCH = min Q MAX SCH Q req SCH

DownlinksofthandovergainonFCHanddownlinksofthandovergainonSCH

DL

DL

G SHO FCH and G SHO SCH respectivelycorrespondtoDLsofthandovergainsonFCHandSCH.

DL

Q MAX ic BS FCH
DL
G SHO FCH = -------------------------------------------------------------DL
max Q max k ic BS FCH
k

And
DL

Q MAX ic BS SCH
DL
G SHO SCH = -------------------------------------------------------------DL
max Q max k ic BS SCH
k

max
k

5.5.1.2.2

DL
Q max k

DL

ic BS correspondstothehighest Q max k ic BS value.

CDMA20001xEVDO
Atollcalculatestheeffectivepilotqualitylevelatthereceiverandcomparesthisvaluewiththerequiredqualitylevel.
1xEVDORev.0and1xEVDORev.AServiceUsers
For1xEVDORev.0and1xEVDORev.Ausers,Atolldisplaysthefollowingresults:

Requiredthroughput
DL

Therequiredthroughput, TP req ,isthedownlinkthroughputselectedfortheanalysis.

RequiredC/I

C
For1xEVDORev.0users,therequiredC/I( --- )isdeterminedfromthegraphPeakthroughput=f(C/I)definedforthe
I req
mobilitytypeselectedintheanalysis.ItcorrespondstothevaluereadinthegraphPeakthroughput=f(C/I)(Rev0)forthe
DL

specifiedrequiredthroughput, TP req .
DL

For1xEVDORev.Ausers,therequiredthroughput( TP req )isobtainedbyusingacertaindownlinktransmissionformat(i.e.

a1xEVDOradiobearer( Index DL Bearer )withacertainnumberoftimeslots( n TS )).Itiscalculatedasfollows:
DL

TP P R LC Index DL Bearer
DL
TP req = -----------------------------------------------------------n TS

400

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

C
--- isthevaluedefinedinthe1xEVDORadioBearerSelection(Downlink)tableforthisdownlinktransmissionformat
I req
(radiobearerIndex,mobilityandnumberoftimeslots).ItcorrespondstotheC/Irequiredtoobtainthedefinedrequired
DL

throughput, TP req .

EffectiveC/I

Ec
Let ----- ic BS b pilot betheeffectiveC/IatthereceiveronicBS.
Nt
Forthebestcell(BS,icBS)ofthereceiveractiveset,wehave:

1
-
----c- ic BS b pilo t = -----------------------------Nt
1
---------------------- 1
Q pilot

resulting
Where
pilot

DL

Q resulting ic BS = G macro diversity Q pilot ic BS

BS

Obtainedthroughput

For1xEVDORev.0users,theobtainedthroughput, TP
definedforthemobilitytypeselectedintheanalysis. TP

DL

DL

,isdeterminedfromthegraphPeakthroughput=f(C/I)(Rev0)

isthevaluereadinthegraphPeakthroughput=f(C/I)(Rev0)for

E
thecalculatedeffectiveC/I, ----c- ic BS b pilot .
Nt
For1xEVDORev.Ausers,theobtainedthroughput( TP

DL

)ondownlinkdependsonthedownlinktransmissionformat,i.ethe

radio bearer index ( Index DL Bearer ) with the number of timeslots ( n TS ). For the defined mobility type, Atoll selects the
E
C
downlink transmission format where ----c- ic BS b pilot --- . Then, it determines the downlink obtained throughput as
Nt
I req
follows:
TP

DL

DL

TPP R LC Index DL Bearer

= -----------------------------------------------------------n TS

Thetrafficdatachannelindownlinkisavailableif TP

DL

DL

TP req .

BearerConsumption

For(1xEVDORev.AGuaranteedbitrate)serviceusers,Atollcalculatesthe1xEVDObearerconsumption.
TPD min DL
C DL Bearer = -----------------------------------------------------------DL
TP P R LC Index DL Bearer
Where TPD min DL correspondstotheminimumbitraterequiredbytheserviceinthedownlink.
1xEVDORev.BServiceUsers
Forsinglecarrierandmulticarrier1xEVDORev.Busers,Atolldisplaysthefollowingresults:

Requiredthroughput
DL

Therequiredthroughput, TP req ,isthedownlinkthroughputselectedfortheanalysis.

Obtainedthroughput

Theobtainedthroughputcorrespondstothesumoftheobtainedthroughputsoneachcarrier.
TP

DL

TP

DL

ic

ic

Thetrafficdatachannelondownlinkisavailableif TP

DL

DL

TP req .

Foreachsubactiveset,AtollindicatestheeffectiveC/Iandtheobtainedthroughput:

401

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

E
Let ----c- ic b pilot betheeffectiveC/Iatthereceiveronic,thecarrierassociatedwiththesubactiveset.
Nt
Forthebestcell(BS,ic)ofthereceiversubactiveset,wehave:
pilot
E
Q resulting ic
----c- ic b pilot = ----------------------------------------pilot
Nt
Q resulting ic

Where
pilot

DL

Q resulting ic = G macro diversity Q pilot ic

BS

DL

Theobtainedthroughput( TP ic )ondownlinkdependsonthedownlinktransmissionformat,i.etheradiobearerindex
( Index DL Bearer )withthenumberoftimeslots( n TS ).Forthedefinedmobilitytype,Atollselectsthedownlinktransmission
E
C
formatwhere ----c- ic b pilot --- andwhosemodulationschemeissupportedbytheterminal.
Nt
I req
C
---
I req isthevaluedefinedinthe1xEVDORadioBearerSelection(Downlink)tableforthisdownlinktransmissionformat
(radiobearerIndex,mobilityandnumberoftimeslots).ItcorrespondstotheC/Irequiredtoobtainthedefinedrequired
DL

throughput, R req .
Thedownlinkobtainedthroughputisdeterminedasfollows:
DL

TP P RLC Index DL Bearer

DL
TP ic = -------------------------------------------------------------n TS

5.5.1.3 UplinkSubMenu
OutputscalculatedbyAtolldependonthestudiednetwork(CDMA20001xRTTorCDMA20001xEVDO).

5.5.1.3.1

CDMA20001xRTT
Foreachcell(i,icBS)inthereceiveractiveset,AtollcalculatestheuplinktrafficchannelqualityonFCHandSCHfromthe
receiver.Nopowercontrolisperformedasinsimulations.Here,AtolldeterminestheuplinktrafficchannelqualityonFCHat
thecellforthemaximumterminalpowerallowedonFCH.Inthesameway,itevaluatestheuplinktrafficchannelqualityon
SCHatthecellforthemaximumterminalpowerallowedonSCH.Then,totaluplinktrafficchannelqualitiesonFCHandSCH
areevaluatedwithrespecttothereceiverhandoverstatus.Fromthesevalues,Atolldeducesrequiredterminalpowerson
FCH and SCH, calculates the total terminal power required and compares this value with the maximum terminal power
allowed.

MaxterminalpoweronFCHandSCH
max

TheMaxterminalpowerparameter( P term )isuserdefinedforeachterminal.Itcorrespondstothemaximumterminalpower

allowed.Onuplink,theterminalpowerissharedbetweenpilot,FCHandSCHchannels.So,wemaywrite:
max

max

max

max

P term = P term pilot + P term FCH + P term SCH

Wehave:
max

max

P term pilot = p P term

Wherepisthepercentageoftheterminalpowerdedicatedtopilot.Thisparameterisuserdefinedintheterminalproperties.
And
UL

FCH

UL

max
Q req FCH TP P UL AF FCH
P term FCH
- -------------------------------------------------------------- = ---------------------UL
SCH
max
Q req SCH
TP P UL
P term SCH

Therefore,
max

1 p P term
max
P term FCH = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------UL
SCH
Q req SCH TP P UL
1 + -------------------------------------------------------------------UL
FCH
UL
Q req FCH TP P UL AF FCH
And

402

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1
max

1 p P term
max
P term SCH = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------UL
FCH
UL
Q req FCH TP P UL AF FCH
1 + -------------------------------------------------------------------UL
SCH
Q req SCH TPP UL

RequiredterminalpoweronFCHandSCH
req

req

TherequiredterminalpowersonFCHandSCH,respectively P term FCH and P term SCH ,arecalculatedasfollows:

UL

1ststep:EvaluationofuplinktrafficchannelqualitiesonFCHandSCH, Q max ic BS
i

UL

FCH

and Q max ic BS
i

SCH

,foreachcell

ofactiveset.
Foreachcell(i,icBS),wehave:
UL FCH

term P b max i ic BS
UL
FCH
- G UL
Q max i ic BS FCH = --------------------------------------------------------p
UL
N tot i ic BS
And
UL SCH

UL
Q max i

ic BS SCH

term P b max i ic BS
SCH
- G UL
= --------------------------------------------------------p
UL
N tot i ic BS
max

max

P term FCH
P term SCH
UL FCH
UL SCH
With P b max i ic BS = ------------------------ and P b max i ic BS = -----------------------LT
LT
i

L T isthetotallossbetweenthetransmitteriandthereceiver.
i

L path L Tx L term L body L indoor M Shadowing Eb Nt

UL
L T = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G Tx G term
UL

N tot i ic BS isthetotalnoiseatthetransmitteronthebestcarrierofthebestserver.Thisvalueisdeducedfromthecell
UL

uplinkloadfactor X i ic BS .
tx

N0
UL
N tot i ic BS = ----------------------------------UL
1 X i ic BS
tx

N 0 isthetransmitterthermalnoise.
UL

UL

2nd step:CalculationofFCHandSCHtotaltrafficchannelqualitiesatthetransmitteronicBS, Q MAX FCH and Q max SCH ,

basedonthereceiverhandoverstatus.
Ifthereisnohandoff,wehave:
UL

UL

UL

UL

Q MAX ic BS FCH = Q max i ic BS FCH and Q MAX ic BS SCH = Q max i ic BS SCH

Forsofthandover,wehave:
UL

UL

UL

Q MAX ic BS FCH = G macro diversity 2links max Q max i ic BS FCH

i

And
UL

UL

UL

Q MAX ic BS SCH = G macro diversity 2links max Q max i ic BS SCH

i

UL

G macro diversity 2links istheuplinkmacrodiversitygain.Thisparameterisdeterminedfromthefixedcelledgecoverage

probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option Shadowing taken into account is not selected
(Predictionproperties),AtollconsiderstheuplinkmacrodiversitygaindefinedbytheuserinGlobalparameters.
UL

UL

max Q max i ic BS correspondstothehighest Q max i ic BS value.

i

Forsoftsofthandover,wehave:
UL

UL

UL

Q MAX ic BS FCH = G macro diversity 3links max Q max i ic BS FCH

i

403

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

And
UL

UL

UL

Q MAX ic BS SCH = G macro diversity 3links max Q max i ic BS SCH

i

UL

G macro diversity 3links istheuplinkmacrodiversitygain.Thisparameterisdeterminedfromthefixed celledgecoverage

probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option Shadowing taken into account is not selected
(Predictionproperties),AtollconsiderstheuplinkmacrodiversitygaindefinedbytheuserinGlobalparameters.
Forsofterandsoftersofterhandovers,wehave:
UL

UL

Q MAX ic BS FCH = f rakeefficiency

Qmax i icBS FCH

UL

i
UL

UL

And Q MAX ic BS SCH = f rakeefficiency

Qmax i icBS SCH

UL

Forsoftersofthandover,therearetwopossibilities.IftheMRCoptionisselected(optionavailableinGlobalparameters),we
have:
UL
UL
UL
Q MAX ic BS FCH = G macro diversity 2links max f rakeefficiency

UL

UL

Q max i ic BS FCH Q max

i ic BS

iontheothersite

ionthesamesite

FCH

And
UL
UL
UL
Q MAX ic BS SCH = G macro diversity 2links max f rakeefficiency

UL

UL

Q max i ic BS SCH Q max

i ic BS

iontheothersite

ionthesamesite

SCH

otherwise,
UL

UL

UL

Q MAX ic BS FCH = G macro diversity 2links max Q max i ic BS FCH

i

And
UL

UL

UL

Q MAX ic BS SCH = G macro diversity 2links max Q max i ic BS SCH

i

req

req

3rdstep:Calculationof P term FCH and P term SCH

UL

UL

Q req FCH
Q req SCH
req
req
- P max
- P max
P term FCH = --------------------------------------term FCH and P term SCH = --------------------------------------term SCH
UL
UL
Q MAX ic BS FCH
Q MAX ic BS SCH
Where
UL

Q req FCH istheuserdefineduplinkdatatrafficqualitytargetonFCHforagivenserviceandaterminal.Thisparameteris

availableintheServicestable.
UL

Q req SCH istheuserdefineduplinkdatatrafficqualitytargetonSCHforagivenservice,terminalandSCHthroughput.This

parameterisavailableintheServicestable.
req

Then,fromtherequiredterminalpoweronFCHandSCH,Atolldeterminesthetotalterminalpowerrequired( P term ).
req

req

req

req

P term = P term FCH + P term SCH + P term pilot

req

req

As P term pilot = p P term ,wehave:

req

req

P term FCH + P term SCH

req
P term = -------------------------------------------------------1p
req

max

Therefore,theserviceontheuplinkdatatrafficchannelisavailableif P term P term .

Eb/NtmaxonFCHforeachcellinactiveset

Foreachcell(i,icBS),wehave:
UL FCH

term P b max i ic BS
UL
FCH
- G UL
Q max i ic BS FCH = --------------------------------------------------------p
UL
N tot i ic BS

404

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1
max

P term FCH
UL FCH
With P b max i ic BS = ------------------------
LT
i

L T isthetotallossbetweenthetransmitteriandthereceiver.
i

L path L Tx L term L body L indoor M Shadowing Eb Nt

UL
L T = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G Tx G term
UL

N tot i ic BS isthetotalnoiseatthetransmitteronthebestcarrierofthebestserver.Thisvalueisdeducedfromthecell
UL

uplinkloadfactor X i ic BS .
tx

max

req

N0
P FCH P FCH
UL
- + 1 term max (--------------------------N tot i ic BS = -----------------------------------,0)
UL
LT
1 X i ic BS
i
tx

N 0 isthetransmitterthermalnoise.

Eb/NtmaxonSCHforeachcellinactiveset

Foreachcell(i,icBS),wehave:
UL SCH

term P b max i ic BS
UL
SCH
- G UL
Q max i ic BS SCH = --------------------------------------------------------p
UL
N tot i ic BS
max

P term SCH
UL SCH
With P b max i ic BS = -----------------------LT
i

L T isthetotallossbetweenthetransmitteriandthereceiver.
i

L path L Tx L term L body L indoor M Shadowing Eb Nt

UL
L T = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G Tx G term
UL

N tot i ic BS isthetotalnoiseatthetransmitteronthebestcarrierofthebestserver.Thisvalueisdeducedfromthecell
UL

uplinkloadfactor X i ic BS .
tx

max

req

N0
P SCH P SCH
UL
N tot i ic BS = -----------------------------------,0)
- + 1 term max (--------------------------UL
LT
1 X i ic BS
i
tx

N 0 isthetransmitterthermalnoise.

Eb/NtmaxonFCHandSCH

UL

UL

Q MAX ic BS FCH and Q MAX ic BS SCH arerespectivelythetrafficchannelqualitiesonFCHandSCHatthetransmitteronicBS

aftersignalcombinationofallthetransmittersoftheactiveset.
Ifthereisnohandoff,wehave:
UL

UL

UL

UL

Q MAX ic BS FCH = Q max i ic BS FCH and Q MAX ic BS SCH = Q max i ic BS SCH

Forsofthandover,wehave:
UL

UL

UL

Q MAX ic BS FCH = G macro diversity 2links max Q max i ic BS FCH

i

And
UL

UL

UL

Q MAX ic BS SCH = G macro diversity 2links max Q max i ic BS SCH

i

UL

G macro diversity 2links istheuplinkmacrodiversitygain.Thisparameterisdeterminedfromthefixedcelledgecoverage

probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option Shadowing taken into account is not selected
(Predictionproperties),AtollconsiderstheuplinkmacrodiversitygaindefinedbytheuserinGlobalparameters.
UL

UL

max Q max i ic BS correspondstothehighest Q max i ic BS value.

i

405

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

Forsoftsofthandover,wehave:
UL

UL

UL

Q MAX ic BS FCH = G macro diversity 3links max Q max i ic BS FCH

i

And
UL

UL

UL

Q MAX ic BS SCH = G macro diversity 3links max Q max i ic BS SCH

i

UL

G macro diversity 3links istheuplinkmacrodiversitygain.Thisparameterisdeterminedfromthefixedcelledgecoverage

probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option Shadowing taken into account is not selected
(Predictionproperties),AtollconsiderstheuplinkmacrodiversitygaindefinedbytheuserinGlobalparameters.
Forsofterandsoftersofterhandovers,wehave:
UL

UL

Q MAX ic BS FCH = f rakeefficiency

Qmax i icBS FCH

UL

i
UL

UL

And Q MAX ic BS SCH = f rakeefficiency

Qmax i icBS SCH

UL

Forsoftersofthandover,therearetwopossibilities.IftheMRCoptionisselected(optionavailableinGlobalparameters),we
have:
UL
UL
UL
Q MAX ic BS FCH = G macro diversity 2links max f rakeefficiency

UL

UL

Q max i ic BS FCH Q max

i ic BS

iontheothersite

ionthesamesite

FCH

And
UL
UL
UL
Q MAX ic BS SCH = G macro diversity 2links max f rakeefficiency

UL

UL

Q max i ic BS SCH Q max

i ic BS

iontheothersite

ionthesamesite

SCH

otherwise,
UL

UL

UL

Q MAX ic BS FCH = G macro diversity 2links max Q max i ic BS FCH

i

And
UL

UL

UL

Q MAX ic BS SCH = G macro diversity 2links max Q max i ic BS SCH

i

EffectiveEb/NtonFCHandSCH

UL

Q eff FCH istheuplinkeffectivetrafficchannelqualityonFCHatthereceiveronicBS.

UL

Q eff SCH istheuplinkeffectivetrafficchannelqualityonSCHatthereceiveronicBS.

UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

Q eff FCH = min Q MAX FCH Q req FCH and Q eff SCH = min Q MAX SCH Q req SCH

UplinksofthandovergainFCHandSCH

UL

G SHO FCH correspondstotheULsofthandovergainonFCH.

UL

G SHO SCH correspondstotheULsofthandovergainonSCH.

UL

UL

Q MAX ic BS FCH
Q MAX ic BS SCH
UL
UL
G SHO FCH = ------------------------------------------------------------ and G SHO SCH = -----------------------------------------------------------UL
UL
max Q max i ic BS FCH
max Q max i ic BS SCH
I

UL

UL

max Q max i ic BS correspondstothehighest Q max i ic BS value.

I

5.5.1.3.2

CDMA20001xEVDO
1xEVDORev.0and1xEVDORev.AServiceUsers
Foreachcell(l,icBS)inthereceiveractiveset,Atollcalculatestheuplinkqualitylevelfromthereceiver.Nopowercontrolis
performed as in simulations. Here, Atoll determines the uplink quality level at the cell for the maximum terminal power

406

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

allowed.Then,thetotaluplinkqualitylevelisevaluatedwithrespecttothereceiverhandoverstatus.Fromthisvalue,Atoll
calculatestherequiredterminalpowerandcomparesitwiththemaximumterminalpowerallowed.

Maxterminalpower
max

TheMaxterminalpowerparameter( P term )isuserdefinedforeachterminal.Itcorrespondstothemaximumterminalpower

allowed.

RequiredterminalpowerwithACK
req

Therequiredterminalpower( P term )calculationmaybedividedintofoursteps:

UL

1ststep:Evaluationoftheuplinkquality, Q max i ic BS ,foreachcellofactiveset

Foreachcell(i,icBS),wehave:
UL

term P b max i ic BS
UL
- G UL
Q max i ic BS = ----------------------------------------------------p
UL
N tot i ic BS
max

P term
UL
With P b max i ic BS = -----------LT
i

L T isthetotallossbetweenthetransmitteriandthereceiver.
i

L path L Tx L term L body L indoor M Shadowing Eb Nt

UL
L T = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G Tx G term
UL

N tot i ic BS isthetotalnoiseatthetransmitteronthebestcarrierofthebestserver.Thisvalueisdeducedfromthecell
UL

uplinkloadfactor X i ic BS .
tx

max

req

N0
P term P term
UL
- + 1 term max (-----------------------------N tot i ic BS = -----------------------------------,0)
UL
LT
1 X i ic BS
i
tx

N 0 isthetransmitterthermalnoise.
UL

2ndstep:CalculationofthetotalqualityatthetransmitteronicBS( Q MAX )basedonthereceiverhandoverstatus.

Ifthereisnohandoff,wehave:
UL

UL

Q MAX ic BS = Q max i ic BS
Forsofthandover,wehave:
UL

UL

UL

Q MAX ic BS = G macro diversity 2links max Q max i ic BS

i

UL

G macro diversity 2links isthe uplink macrodiversitygain.Thisparameterisdeterminedfromthefixedcelledgecoverage

probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option Shadowing taken into account is not selected
(Predictionproperties),AtollconsiderstheuplinkmacrodiversitygaindefinedbytheuserinGlobalparameters.
UL

UL

max Q max i ic BS correspondstothehighest Q max i ic BS value.

i

Forsoftsofthandover,wehave:
UL

UL

UL

Q MAX ic BS = G macro diversity 3links max Q max i ic BS

i

UL

G macro diversity 3links istheuplinkmacrodiversitygain.Thisparameterisdeterminedfromthefixedcelledgecoverage

probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option Shadowing taken into account is not selected
(Predictionproperties),AtollconsiderstheuplinkmacrodiversitygaindefinedbytheuserinGlobalparameters.
Forsofterandsoftersofterhandovers,wehave:
UL

UL

Q MAX ic BS = f rakeefficiency

Qmax i icBS
UL

407

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

Forsoftersofthandover,therearetwopossibilities.IftheMRCoptionisselected(optionavailableinGlobalparameters),we
have:
UL
UL
UL
Q MAX ic BS = G macro diversity 2links max f rakeefficiency

Qmax i icBS Qmaxiontheothersite i icBS

UL

UL

ionthesamesite

otherwise,
UL

UL

UL

Q MAX ic BS = G macro diversity 2links max Q max i ic BS

i

UL

3rdstep:Evaluationoftherequiredqualitylevelonuplink, Q req
Incaseofa1xEVDORev.0capableterminal,wehave:
E UL
UL
UL
Q req = ----c-
G p 1 + G ACK + G DRC + G TCH
N t min
Where
Ec
---istheminimumpilotqualitylevelonuplink.ThisparameterisavailableintheMobilitytypestable.
N t min
UL

G ACK , G DRC and G TCH arerespectivelyacknowledgement,dataratecontrolandtrafficdatagainsrelativetothepilot.They

aredefinedintheterminalproperties(1xEVDORev.0tab).
Incaseofa1xEVDORev.Acapableterminal,wehave:
E UL
UL
UL
Q req = ----c-
G p 1 + G ACK + G DRC + G TCH + G RRI + G Auxiliary pilot
N t min
Where
Ec
UL
--- is the minimum pilot quality level required on uplink to obtain the defined throughput, TP req . The required
N t min
UL

UL

throughput, TP req (i.e.theuplinkthroughputselectedfortheanalysis)isobtainedbyusingacertainuplinktransmission

format(i.e.1xEVDOradiobearer( Index UL Bearer )withacertainnumberofsubframes( n SF ))andcalculatedasfollows:
UL

TP P R LC Index UL Bearer
UL
TP req = -----------------------------------------------------------n SF
Ec
--- N t min isthevaluedefinedinthe1xEVDORadioBearerSelection(Uplink)tableforthisuplinktransmissionformat(radio
UL

bearerIndex,mobilityandnumberofsubframe).Twovaluesareavailableforthisparameter,onewhentheserviceuplink
modeis"LowLatency"andanotheroneforhighcapacityservices.
G ACK , G DRC , G TCH , G RRI and G Auxiliary pilot are respectively acknowledgement, data rate control, traffic data channel,
reverserateindicatorandauxiliarypilotchannelgainsrelativetothepilot.Theyaredefinedintheterminalproperties(1xEV
DORev.Atab).Twovaluesof G TCH areavailable,onewhentheserviceuplinkmodeis"LowLatency"andanotheronefor
highcapacityservices.
req

4thstep:Calculationof P term
UL

Q req
req
- P max
P term = -------------------------term
UL
Q MAX ic BS
req

max

Therefore,theserviceontheuplinktrafficdatachannelisavailableif P term P term .

RequiredterminalpowerwithoutACK

AtollalsocalculatestherequiredterminalpowerwithouttakingintoaccounttheACKchannelcontribution.Calculationsare
quitesimilartothosedetailedinthepreviousparagraph,onlytheevaluationoftherequiredqualityonuplinkisdifferent.
Inthiscase,wehave:
E UL
UL
UL
Q req withoutACK = ----c-
G p 1 + G DRC + G TCH for1xEVDORev.0capableterminals
N t min

408

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

And
E
UL
UL
Q req withoutACK = ----c-
G p 1 + G DRC + G TCH + G RRI + G Auxiliary pilot for1xEVDORev.Acapableterminals
N t min
UL

Andthen,
UL

Q req withoutACK
req
- P max
P term withoutACK = -------------------------------------term
UL
Q MAX ic BS

ULSHOgain
UL

1ststep:Evaluationoftheuplinkquality, Q max i ic BS ,foreachcellofactiveset.

Foreachcell(i,icBS),wehave:
UL

term P b max i ic BS
UL
- G UL
Q max i ic BS = ----------------------------------------------------p
UL
N tot i ic BS
max

P term
UL
With P b max i ic BS = -----------LT
i

L T isthetotallossbetweenthetransmitteriandthereceiver.
i

L path L Tx L term L body L indoor M Shadowing Eb Nt

UL
L T = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G Tx G term
UL

N tot i ic BS isthetotalnoiseatthetransmitteronthebestcarrierofthebestserver.Thisvalueisdeducedfromthecell
UL

uplinkloadfactor X i ic BS .
tx

max

req

N0
P term P term
UL
N tot i ic BS = -----------------------------------,0)
- + 1 term max (-----------------------------UL
LT
1 X i ic BS
i
tx

N 0 isthetransmitterthermalnoise.
UL

2ndstep:CalculationofthetotalqualityatthetransmitteronicBS( Q MAX )basedonthereceiverhandoverstatus.

UL

Q MAX ic BS isthetrafficchannelqualityatthetransmitteronicBSaftersignalcombinationofallthetransmittersoftheactive
set.
Ifthereisnohandoff,wehave:
UL

UL

Q MAX ic BS = Q max i ic BS
Forsofthandover,wehave:
UL

UL

UL

Q MAX ic BS = G macro diversity 2links max Q max i ic BS

i

UL

G macro diversity 2links istheuplinkmacrodiversitygain.Thisparameterisdeterminedfromthefixedcelledgecoverage

probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option Shadowing taken into account is not selected
(Predictionproperties),AtollconsiderstheuplinkmacrodiversitygaindefinedbytheuserinGlobalparameters.
UL

UL

max Q max i ic BS correspondstothehighest Q max i ic BS value.

i

Forsoftsofthandover,wehave:
UL

UL

UL

Q MAX ic BS = G macro diversity 3links max Q max i ic BS

i

UL

G macro diversity 3links istheuplinkmacrodiversitygain.Thisparameterisdeterminedfromthefixedcelledgecoverage

probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option Shadowing taken into account is not selected
(Predictionproperties),AtollconsiderstheuplinkmacrodiversitygaindefinedbytheuserinGlobalparameters.
Forsofterandsoftersofterhandovers,wehave:

409

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

UL

Forsk2014

UL

Q MAX ic BS = f rakeefficiency

Qmax i icBS
UL

Forsoftersofthandover,therearetwopossibilities.IftheMRCoptionisselected(optionavailableinGlobalparameters),we
have:
UL
UL
UL
Q MAX ic BS = G macro diversity 2links max f rakeefficiency

Qmax i icBS Qmaxiontheothersite i icBS

UL

UL

ionthesamesite

otherwise,
UL

UL

UL

Q MAX ic BS = G macro diversity 2links max Q max i ic BS

i

3rdstep:CalculationoftheULSHOgain
UL

G SHO correspondstotheuplinksofthandovergain.
UL

Q MAX ic BS
UL
G SHO = ----------------------------------------------UL
max Q max i ic BS
i

BearerConsumption

For(1xEVDORev.AGuaranteedbitrate)serviceusers,Atollcalculatesthe1xEVDObearerconsumption.
TPD min UL
C UL Bearer = -------------------------------------------------------------UL
TP P RLC Index UL Bearer
Where TPD min UL correspondstotheminimumbitraterequiredbytheserviceintheuplink.
1xEVDORev.BServiceUsers
For multicarrier 1xEVDO Rev. B users, Atoll models load balancing between carriers. Atoll equally shares the available
terminalpowerbetweeneachcarrieranddeterminestheuplink1xEVDOradiobearerobtainedoneachcarrier.Then,it
selectsthebestconfigurationamongallcombinationsofcarriers,i.e.,thecombinationwhichprovidesthehighestobtained
throughput.
Thefollowingresultsaredisplayed:

Foreachcarrierusedintheselectedconfiguration,AtollindicatestheULSHOGain,theobtainedthroughputandthe
requiredpower.

Thecalculationscanbedividedintofoursteps:
UL

1ststep:Evaluationoftheuplinkquality, Q max i ic ,foreachcellofthesubactiveset

Foreachcell(i,ic),wehave:
UL

term P b max i ic
UL
- G UL
Q max i ic = -----------------------------------------------p
UL
N tot i ic
max

carriers

P term n
UL
With P b max i ic = ---------------------------------LT
i

carriers

isthenumberofcarriersintheuseractiveset.

L T isthetotallossbetweenthetransmitteriandthereceiver.
i

L path L Tx L term L body L indoor M Shadowing Eb Nt

UL
L T = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G Tx G term
UL

UL

N tot i ic isthetotalnoiseatthetransmitteronthecarrieric.Thisvalueisdeducedfromthecelluplinkloadfactor X i ic .
tx

max

carriers

req

N0
P term n
P term
UL
N tot i ic = ------------------------------,0)
- + 1 term max (----------------------------------------------------UL
L
Ti
1 X i ic

410

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1
tx

N 0 isthetransmitterthermalnoise.
UL

2ndstep:Calculationofthetotalqualityatthetransmitteronic( Q MAX )basedonthereceiverhandoverstatus.

Ifthereisnohandoff,wehave:
UL

UL

Q MAX ic = Q max i ic
Forsofthandover,wehave:
UL

UL

UL

Q MAX ic = G macro diversity 2links max Q max i ic

i

UL

G macro diversity 2links isthe uplink macrodiversitygain.Thisparameterisdeterminedfromthefixedcelledgecoverage

probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option Shadowing taken into account is not selected
(Predictionproperties),AtollconsiderstheuplinkmacrodiversitygaindefinedbytheuserinGlobalparameters.
UL

UL

max Q max i ic correspondstothehighest Q max i ic value.

i

Forsoftsofthandover,wehave:
UL

UL

UL

Q MAX ic = G macro diversity 3links max Q max i ic

i

UL

G macro diversity 3links istheuplinkmacrodiversitygain.Thisparameterisdeterminedfromthefixedcelledgecoverage

probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option Shadowing taken into account is not selected
(Predictionproperties),AtollconsiderstheuplinkmacrodiversitygaindefinedbytheuserinGlobalparameters.
Forsofterandsoftersofterhandovers,wehave:
UL

UL

Q MAX ic = f rakeefficiency

Qmax i ic
UL

Forsoftersofthandover,therearetwopossibilities.IftheMRCoptionisselected(optionavailableinGlobalparameters),we
have:
UL
UL
UL
Q MAX ic = G macro diversity 2links max f rakeefficiency

Qmax i ic Qmaxiontheothersite i ic
UL

UL

ionthesamesite

otherwise,
UL

UL

UL

Q MAX ic = G macro diversity 2links max Q max i ic

i

UL

3rdstep:CalculationoftheULSHOgain( G SHO )
UL

Q MAX ic
UL
G SHO = ------------------------------------------UL
max Q max i ic
i

4thstep:Selectionoftheuplink1xEVDOradiobearer
UL

req

Atollevaluatesoftherequiredqualitylevelintheuplink( Q req )andtherequiredterminalpower( P term ic )foreach1xEV

DOradiobearer.
E
UL
UL
Q req = ----c-
G p 1 + G ACK + G DRC + G TCH + G RRI + G Auxiliary pilot
N t min
UL

Where
Ec
---istheminimumpilotqualitylevelrequiredintheuplinktoobtainthe1xEVDOradiobearer.Thevaluesaredefined
N t min
UL

inthe1xEVDORadioBearerSelection(Uplink)tableforeachuplinktransmissionformat(radiobearerIndex,mobilityand
numberofsubframe).Twovaluesareavailable,onewhentheserviceuplinkmodeis"LowLatency"andanotheroneforhigh
capacityservices.
G ACK , G DRC , G TCH , G RRI and G Auxiliary pilot are respectively acknowledgement, data rate control, traffic data channel,
reverserateindicatorandauxiliarypilotchannelgainsrelativetothepilot.Theyaredefinedintheterminalproperties(1xEV

411

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

DORev.Atab).Twovaluesof G TCH areavailable,onewhentheserviceuplinkmodeis"LowLatency"andanotheronefor

highcapacityservices.
And
UL

max

Q req
P term
req
- -----------------P term ic = --------------------carriers
UL
Q MAX ic n
Then, Atoll selects the best 1xEVDO radio bearer. This is the 1xEVDO radio bearer ( Index UL Bearer ) with the highest
UL

TP P RLC Index UL Bearer

UL
obtainedthroughput( TP ic = -------------------------------------------------------------)where:
n SF Index UL Bearer
max

P term
req
P term ic -----------------,
carriers
n
Andtherequiredmodulationschemeissupportedbytheterminal.

n SF isthenumberofsubframesassociatedwiththe1xEVDOradiobearer( Index UL Bearer ).

Maxterminalpower
max

TheMaxterminalpowerparameter( P term )isuserdefinedforeachterminal.Itcorrespondstothemaximumterminalpower

allowed.

Requiredthroughput
UL

Therequiredthroughput, R req ,istheuplinkthroughputselectedfortheanalysis.

Obtainedthroughput

Atollcalculatesthethroughputforallcombinationsofcarriers.
m
UL
TP total

TP

UL

ic wheremcorrespondstothenumberofcarriersinthecombination.

ic = 1

The obtained throughput ( TP

UL

) corresponds to the best configuration among all combinations of carriers, i.e., the
UL

combinationwhichprovidesthehighestthroughput, Max TP total .

Thetrafficdatachannelisavailableinuplinkif TP

UL

UL

TP req .

Requiredterminalpower
m

req
P term

Pterm ic
req

ic = 1

5.5.2 CoverageStudies
Atoll calculates CDMAspecific coverage studies on each pixel where the pilot signal level exceeds the minimum RSCP
threshold.Letusassumeeachpixelofthemapcorrespondstoaprobereceiverwithaterminal,amobilitytypeandaservice.
Thisreceiverdoesnotcreateanyinterference.Youcanmakethecoveragepredictionforaspecificcarrierorforthebest
1xRTTor1xEVDOcarrier.Thetypeofcarrierandthecarriersyoucanselectdependontheserviceandonthefrequency
band(s)supportedbytheterminal.Coveragestudiesarebasedontheuplinkloadpercentageandthedownlinktotalpower
ofcells.Theseparameterscaneitherbeeithersimulationresults,oraveragevaluescalculatedfromagroupofsimulations,
oruserdefinedcellinputs.

5.5.2.1 PilotQualityAnalysis
Forfurtherdetailsoncalculationformulas,see"DefinitionsandFormulas"onpage 340.Forfurtherdetailsoncalculations,
see"BarGraphandPilotSubMenu"onpage 392
1stcase:Analysisbasedonaspecificcarrier
Thecarrierthatcanbeusedbytransmittersisfixed.Inthiscase,foreachtransmittericontainingthereceiverinitscalculation
areaandusingtheselectedcarrier,Atollcalculatespilotqualityatthereceiveronthiscarriericgiven.Then,itdeterminesthe

412

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

bestservingtransmitterBSusingthecarriericgiven( Q pilot ic given )anddeducesthebestpilotqualityreceivedwithafixed

BS

Resulting
ic given
celledgecoverageprobability, Q pilot

Atolldisplaysthebestpilotqualityreceivedwithafixedcelledgecoverageprobability.
2ndcase:Analysisbasedonthebestcarrierofallfrequencybands
Atollproceedsasinpointanalysis.Itdeterminesthebestcarrierofeachtransmittericontainingthereceiverinitscalculation
area and using a frequency band supported by the receivers terminal. The best carrier selection depends on the option
selectedforthesiteequipment(ULminimumnoise,DLminimumpower,random,sequential)andisbasedontheULload
percentageandthedownlinktotalpowerofcells(simulationresultsorcellproperties).Atollcalculatesthepilotqualityatthe
receiverfromthesetransmittersontheirbestcarrieranddeterminesthebestservingtransmitterBSonitsbestcarriericBS
Resulting

( Q pilot ic BS ).Then,itdeducesthebestpilotqualityreceivedwithafixedcelledgecoverageprobability, Q pilot

BS

ic BS .

Atolldisplaysthebestpilotqualityreceivedwithafixedcelledgecoverageprobability.
3rd case: Analysis based on the best carrier of any frequency band (for multiband terminals with priority defined on
frequencybandsonly)
Thefrequencybandthatcanbeusedisfixed.Atolldeterminesthebestcarrierofeachtransmittericontainingthereceiver
initscalculationareaandusingtheselectedfrequencyband.Thebestcarrierselectiondependsontheoptionselectedfor
thesiteequipment(ULminimumnoise,DLminimumpower,random,sequential)andisbasedontheULloadpercentageand
thedownlinktotalpowerofcells(simulationresultsorcellproperties).Then,Atollcalculatesthepilotqualityatthereceiver
from these transmitters on their best carrier and determines the best serving transmitter BS on its best carrier icBS
Resulting

( Q pilot ic BS ).Then,itcalculatesthebestpilotqualityreceivedwithafixedcelledgecoverageprobability, Q pilot

BS

ic BS .

Atolldisplaysthebestpilotqualityreceivedwithafixedcelledgecoverageprobability.

Singlecolour
Resulting

Atoll displays a coverage if Q pilot

req

ic Q pilot . Coverage consists of a single layer with a unique colour.

ic = ic BS oric given

Colourpertransmitter
Resulting

Atolldisplaysacoverageif Q pilot

req

ic Q pilot ( ic = ic BS oric given ).Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithassociated

colours.Thereisalayerpertransmitterwithnointersectionbetweenlayers.Layercolouristhecolourassignedtothebest
servingtransmitterBS.

Colourpermobility

Inthiscase,thereceiverisnotcompletelydefinedandnomobilityassigned.Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayer
per userdefined mobility type defined in the Mobility Types subfolder. For each layer, area is covered if
Resulting

Q pilot

req

ic Q pilot ( ic = ic BS oric given ).Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

Colourperprobability

Thisdisplayoptionisavailableonlyifanalysisisbasedonallsimulationsinagroup(i.e.ifyouselectagroupofsimulations
andtheAlloptionintheConditiontabofpredictionproperties).
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per userdefined probability level defined in the Display tab (Prediction
Resulting

properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q pilot

req

ic Q pilot ( ic = ic BS oric given ) in the required number of

simulations.Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

Colourpercelledgecoverageprobability

Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperuserdefinedcelledgecoverageprobability,p,definedintheDisplaytab
Resulting

(Predictionproperties).Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif Q pilot

req

ic p Q pilot ( ic = ic BS oric given ).Eachlayerisassigned

acolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

Colourperqualitylevel(Ec/I0)

Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per userdefined quality threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction
Resulting

properties).Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif Q pilot

ic Q pilot threshold ( ic = ic BS oric given ).Eachlayerisassigneda

colouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

Colourperqualitymargin(Ec/I0margin)

413

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per userdefined quality margin defined in the Display tab (Prediction
Resulting

properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q pilot

req

ic Q pilot Q pilot m arg in ( ic = ic BS oric given ). Each layer is

assignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.
Colourperpilotsignallevel(Ec)
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per userdefined pilot signal level defined in the Display tab (Prediction
Resulting

properties).Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif Q pilot

ic Q pilot threshold ( ic = ic BS oric given ).Eachlayerisassigneda

colouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

5.5.2.2 DownlinkServiceAreaAnalysis
The downlink service area analysis depends on the studied network (CDMA2000 1xRTT or CDMA2000 1xEVDO). Several
displayoptionsareavailablewhencalculatingthisstudy,someofwhicharededicatedtoCDMA20001xRTTnetworkswhile
othersarerelevantwhenanalysingCDMA20001xEVDOsystemsonly.

5.5.2.2.1

CDMA20001xRTT
Asinpointanalysis,AtollcalculatesdownlinkqualityonFCHatthereceiverforeachcell(k,ic)(withic=icBSoricgiven)(these
cellsarethefirstfcellsinthereceiversactivesetandfisthenumberoffingersdefinedfortheterminal).Nopowercontrol
isperformedasinsimulations.Here,AtolldeterminesthedownlinkqualityonFCHatthereceiverforamaximumtraffic
channel power per transmitter allowed on the fundamental channel (FCH). Then, the total downlink quality on FCH
DL

( Q MAX ic FCH )isevaluatedafterrecombination.

Bestserverandactivesetdeterminationisperformedasinpointprediction.

Atolldisplaystotaltrafficchannelqualityatthereceiveronthecarrieric( ic BS or ic given ).
Forfurtherdetailsonformulas,see"DefinitionsandFormulas"onpage 340.Forfurtherdetailsoncalculation,see"Downlink
SubMenu"onpage 395.
Youmaychoosefollowingdisplayoptions:

Singlecolour
DL

DL

DL

Atolldisplaysacoveragewithauniquecolourif Q MAX ic FCH Q req FCH . Q req FCH isthedownlinktrafficdataquality

targetonthefundamentalchannel(FCH).ThisparameterisuserdefinedforagivenserviceandaterminalintheServicessub
folder.

Colourpertransmitter
DL

DL

Atolldisplaysacoverageif Q MAX ic FCH Q req FCH .Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithassociatedcolours.Thereis

alayerpertransmitterwithnointersectionbetweenlayers.Layercolouristhecolourassignedtobestservingtransmitter.

Colourpermobility

Inthiscase,receiverisnotcompletelydefinedandnomobilityisassigned.Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerper
DL

DL

userdefinedmobilitydefinedinMobilitysubfolder.Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif Q MAX ic FCH Q req FCH .Eachlayer

isassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

Colourperservice

Inthiscase,receiverisnotcompletelydefinedandnoserviceisassigned.Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerper
DL

DL

userdefinedservicedefinedinServicessubfolder.Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif Q MAX ic FCH Q req FCH .Eachlayer

isassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

Colourperprobability

Thisdisplayoptionisavailableonlyifanalysisisbasedonallsimulationsinagroup(i.e.ifyouselectagroupofsimulations
andtheAlloptionintheConditiontabofpredictionproperties).
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per userdefined probability level defined in the Display tab (Prediction
DL

DL

properties).Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif Q MAX ic FCH Q req FCH intherequirednumberofsimulations.Eachlayeris

assignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

414

Colourpercelledgecoverageprobability

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperuserdefinedcelledgecoverageprobability,p,definedintheDisplaytab
DL

DL

(Predictionproperties).Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif Q MAX ic p FCH Q req FCH .Eachlayerisassignedacolourand

displayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

Colourpermaximumqualitylevel(maxEb/Nt)

Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per userdefined quality threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction
DL

properties).Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif Q MAX ic FCH Threshold .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwith

intersectionsbetweenlayers.

Colourpereffectivequalitylevel(EffectiveEb/Nt)

Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per userdefined quality threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction
DL

properties).Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif Q eff ic FCH Threshold .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwith

intersectionsbetweenlayers.

Colourperqualitymargin(Eb/Ntmargin)

Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per userdefined quality margin defined in the Display tab (Prediction
DL

DL

properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ic FCH Q req FCH M arg in . Each layer is assigned a colour and
displayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

Colourperrequiredpower
req

AtollcalculatesthedownlinkpowerrequiredonFCH, P FCH ic ,asfollows:

DL

Q req FCH
req
- P max
P FCH ic = ---------------------FCH
DL
Q MAX ic
max

Where P FCH is a userdefined input for a given service and terminal. It corresponds to the maximum traffic data power
allowedonFCHforatransmitter.
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per userdefined required power threshold defined in the Display tab
req

(Predictionproperties).Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif P FCH ic Threshold .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayed

withintersectionsbetweenlayers.

Colourperrequiredpowermargin

Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per userdefined power margin defined in the Display tab (Prediction
max

req

properties).Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif P FCH P FCH ic M arg in .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwith

intersectionsbetweenlayers.

Colourperthroughput

ThisdisplayoptionisrelevantforCDMA20001xRTTdataservicesonly.Foreachpossiblethroughput, TP
FCH

DL

FCH

DL

FCH

DL

FCH

DL

FCH

DL

( TP P DL AF FCH ,

DL

TP P DL AF FCH + 2 , TP P DL AF FCH + 4 , TP P DL AF FCH + 8 , TP P DL AF FCH + 16 ), Atoll calculates traffic

channelqualityatthereceiverforeachcell(k,ic)(withic=icBSoricgiven).Downlinktrafficchannelqualityatthereceiveris
evaluatedfromamaximumtrafficchannelpowerpertransmitterallowedforthecorrespondingthroughput.Then,thetotal
DL

DL

downlinktrafficchannelquality( Q MAX ic TP )iscalculatedafterrecombination.

Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per possible throughput, TP
DL
Q MAX ic
DL

DL

TP

DL
DL
Q req TP

DL

. For each layer, area is covered if

.Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

DL

Q req TP isthedownlinktrafficdataqualitytargetforthethroughput, TP

DL

.Thisparameterisuserdefinedforagiven

service,terminalandthroughputintheServicessubfolder.

5.5.2.2.2

CDMA20001xEVDO
E
Asinpointanalysis,Atollcalculatestheeffectivepilotqualitylevelatthereceiverfromthebestservercell, ----c- ic b pilot .Best
Nt
serverandactivesetdeterminationisperformedasinpointprediction(ASanalysis).Then,fromthisvalue,itdeterminesthe
effectivedownlinkthroughputreceived, TP

DL

Forfurtherdetailsonformulas,see"DefinitionsandFormulas"onpage 340.Forfurtherdetailsoncalculations,see"Downlink
SubMenu"onpage 395.

415

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

1xEVDORev.0Users
For1xEVDORev.0users(userswithEVDORev.0capableterminalsandEVDORev.0services),theobtainedthroughput
( TP

DL

)ondownlinkisdeterminedfromthegraphPeakthroughput=f(C/I)(Rev0)definedforthemobilitytypeselectedin

the Condition tab (Prediction properties). TP

DL

is the value read in the graph Peak throughput=f(C/I) (Rev0) for the

E
calculatedeffectivepilotqualitylevel, ----c- ic BS b pilot .
Nt
1xEVDORev.AUsers
For1xEVDORev.Ausers(userswithEVDORev.AcapableterminalsandEVDORev.Aservices),theobtainedthroughput
( TP

DL

) on downlink depends on the downlink transmission format, i.e the radio bearer index ( Index DL Bearer ) with the

Ec
C
number of timeslots ( n TS ). Atoll selects the downlink transmission format where ----- ic BS b pilot --- . Then, it
Nt
I req
determinesthedownlinkobtainedthroughputasfollows:
TP

DL

DL

TP P RLC Index DL Bearer

= -------------------------------------------------------------.
n TS

The obtained throughput corresponds to the guaranteed throughput after a certain number of retransmissions (i.e. the
numberoftimeslots, n TS ).
WhenHARQ(HybridAutomaticRepeatRequest)isused,therequiredaveragenumberofretransmissionsissmallerandthe
DL

throughputisanaveragethroughput( TP av )calculatedasfollows:
DL

TP P RLC Index DL Bearer

DL
TP av = --------------------------------------------------------------------DL
n Rtx (Index DL Bearer,n TS) av
DL

Theaveragenumberofretransmissions( n Rtx av )isdeterminedfromearlyterminationprobabilitiesdefinedfortheselected

downlinktransmissionformat.TheEarlyTerminationProbabilitygraphshowstheprobabilityofearlytermination( p )asa
DL

DL

function of the number of retransmissions ( n Rtx ). Atoll calculates the average number of retransmissions ( n Rtx av ) as
follows:
n DL
Rtx max

DL

DL

DL

DL

DL

p n Rtx p n Rtx 1 n Rtx

=1

Rtx
n Rtx av = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------DL
p n Rtx max

1xEVDORev.BUsers
SinglecarrierEVDORev.Bserviceusersaremanagedas1xEVDORev.Aserviceusers.
FormulticarrierEVDORev.Bserviceusers,theobtainedthroughput( TP
obtainedthroughputsoneachcarrier.

DL

)inthedownlinkcorrespondstothesumofthe

DL

Theobtainedthroughput( TP ic )onacarrierdependsonthedownlinktransmissionformat,i.etheradiobearerindex
( Index DL Bearer ) with the number of timeslots ( n TS ). Atoll selects the downlink transmission format where
E
----c- ic b pilot C
---
I req andwhosemodulationschemeissupportedbytheterminal.
Nt
Thedownlinkobtainedthroughputcorrespondstotheguaranteedthroughputafteracertainnumberofretransmissions(i.e.
thenumberoftimeslots, n TS ).Itisdeterminedasfollows:
DL

TP P RLC Index DL Bearer

DL
TP ic = -------------------------------------------------------------n TS
WhenHARQ(HybridAutomaticRepeatRequest)isused,therequiredaveragenumberofretransmissionsissmallerandthe
DL

throughputonacarrierisanaveragethroughput( TP av ic )calculatedasfollows:

416

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1
DL

TP P RLC Index DL Bearer

DL
TP av ic = --------------------------------------------------------------------DL
n Rtx (Index DL Bearer,n TS) av
DL

Theaveragenumberofretransmissions( n Rtx av )isdeterminedfromearlyterminationprobabilitiesdefinedfortheselected

downlinktransmissionformat.TheEarlyTerminationProbabilitygraphshowstheprobabilityofearlytermination( p )asa
DL

DL

function of the number of retransmissions ( n Rtx ). Atoll calculates the average number of retransmissions ( n Rtx av ) as
follows:
n DL
Rtx max

DL

DL

DL

DL

DL

p n Rtx p n Rtx 1 n Rtx

=1

Rtx
n Rtx av = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------DL
p n Rtx max
DL

Theaveragethroughput( TP av )providedondownlinkcorrespondstothesumoftheaveragethroughputsobtainedoneach
carrier.
DisplayOptions
Youmaychoosethefollowingdisplayoptions:

ColourperC/I

CoverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperqualitythresholddefinedintheDisplaytab(Predictionproperties).For
E
each layer, area is covered if ----c- ic b pilot Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections
Nt
betweenlayers.

Colourperthroughput

Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per possible throughput ( TP

throughput, TP

DL

DL

). For each layer, area is covered if the

,canbeobtained.Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

Colourperaveragethroughput

Thisdisplayoptionisavailablefor1xEVDORev.Aand1xEVDORev.Busersonly.Itenablesyoutoviewtheobtaineddownlink
DL

throughputwhenHARQisused.Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperpossibleaveragethroughput( TP av ).For
DL

eachlayer,areaiscoverediftheaveragethroughput, TP av ,canbeobtained.Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayed
withintersectionsbetweenlayers.

5.5.2.3 UplinkServiceAreaAnalysis
Theresultsdisplayedwhencalculatingtheuplinkserviceareaanalysisdependonthestudiednetwork(CDMA20001xRTTor
CDMA20001xEVDO).

5.5.2.3.1

CDMA20001xRTT
Asinpointanalysis,AtollcalculatesuplinkqualityonFCHfromreceiverforeachcell(l,ic)(withic=icBSoricgiven)inreceiver
active set. No power control simulation is performed. Atoll determines uplink quality on FCH at the transmitter for the
UL

maximumterminalpower.Then,thetotaluplinktrafficchannelquality( Q MAX ic FCH )isevaluatedwithrespecttothe

receiverhandoverstatus.
Bestserverandactivesetdeterminationisperformedasinpointprediction(ASanalysis).

AtolldisplaysuplinkqualityonFCHattransmittersinactivesetonthecarrieric( ic BS or ic given )receivedfromthereceiver.

Forfurtherdetailsonformulas,see"DefinitionsandFormulas"onpage 340.Forfurtherdetailsoncalculations,see"Uplink
SubMenu"onpage 402.

Singlecolour

417

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014
UL

UL

UL

Atolldisplaysacoverageif Q MAX ic FCH Q req FCH .Coveragecolourisunique. Q req FCH istheuplinkdatatrafficquality

targetonthefundamentalchannel(FCH).ThisparameterisuserdefinedforagivenserviceandaterminalintheServicessub
folder.

Colourpertransmitter
UL

UL

Atolldisplaysacoverageif Q MAX ic FCH Q req FCH .Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithassociatedcolours.Thereis

alayerpertransmitterwithnointersectionbetweenlayers.Layercolouristhecolourassignedtobestservertransmitter.

Colourpermobility

Inthiscase,receiverisnotcompletelydefinedandnomobilityisassigned.Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerper
UL

UL

userdefinedmobilitydefinedinMobilitysubfolder.Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif Q MAX ic FCH Q req FCH .Eachlayer

isassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

Colourperservice

Inthiscase,receiverisnotcompletelydefinedandnoserviceisassigned.Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerper
UL

UL

userdefinedservicedefinedinServicessubfolder.Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif Q MAX ic FCH Q req FCH .Eachlayer

isassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

Colourperprobability

Thisdisplayoptionisavailableonlyifanalysisisbasedonallsimulationsinagroup(i.e.ifyouselectagroupofsimulations
andtheAlloptionintheConditiontabofpredictionproperties).Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperuser
defined probability level defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if
UL

UL

Q MAX ic FCH Q req FCH in the required number of simulations. Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
intersectionsbetweenlayers.

Colourpercelledgecoverageprobability

Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperuserdefinedcelledgecoverageprobability,p,definedintheDisplaytab
UL

UL

(Predictionproperties).Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif Q MAX ic p FCH Q req FCH .Eachlayerisassignedacolourand

displayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

Colourpermaximumqualitylevel(MaxEb/Nt)

Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per userdefined quality threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction
UL

properties).Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif Q MAX ic FCH Threshold .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwith

intersectionsbetweenlayers.

Colourpereffectivequalitylevel(EffectiveEb/Nt)

Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per userdefined quality threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction
UL

properties).Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif Q effective ic FCH Threshold .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayed

withintersectionsbetweenlayers.

Colourperqualitymargin(Eb/Ntmargin)

Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per userdefined quality margin defined in the Display tab (Prediction
UL

UL

properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ic FCH Q req FCH M arg in . Each layer is assigned a colour and
displayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

Colourperrequiredpower
FCH re q

Therequiredterminalpower, P term

,iscalculatedasdescribedinthePointanalysisASanalysistabUplinksubmenu

part.CoverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperuserdefinedpowerthresholddefinedintheDisplaytab(Prediction
FCH re q

properties).Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif P term

ic Threshold .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwith

intersectionsbetweenlayers.

Colourperrequiredpowermargin

Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per userdefined power margin defined in the Display tab (Prediction
max

FCH re q

properties).Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif P term P term

withintersectionsbetweenlayers.

418

Colourperthroughput

ic M arg in .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayed

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

ThisdisplayoptionisrelevantforCDMA20001xRTTdataservicesonly.Foreachpossiblethroughput, TP
FCH

UL

FCH

UL

FCH

UL

FCH

UL

FCH

UL

( TP P UL AF FCH ,

UL

TP P UL AF FCH + 2 , TP P UL AF FCH + 4 , TP P UL AF FCH + 8 , TP P UL AF FCH + 16 ), Atoll calculates the total

UL

UL

uplink traffic channel quality ( Q MAX ic TP ). Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per possible throughput,
TP

UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

. Foreach layer,areaiscovered if Q MAX ic TP Q req TP . Each layerisassignedacolourand displayed with

UL

UL

intersectionsbetweenlayers. Q req TP istheuplinktrafficdataqualitytargetforthethroughput, TP

UL

.Thisparameteris

userdefinedfortheservice,agiventerminalandthroughputintheserviceproperties.

5.5.2.3.2

CDMA20001xEVDO
Asinpointanalysis,Atollcalculatestheuplinkqualityfromreceiverforeachcell(l,ic)(withic=icBSoricgiven)inreceiveractive
set. No power control simulation is performed. For 1xEVDO Rev. 0 users, Atoll determines the uplink quality at the
transmitterforthemaximumterminalpowerallowedandanuplinkchannelthroughputof9.6kbps.For1xEVDORev.Aand
1xEVDORev.Busers,Atolldeterminestheuplinkqualityatthetransmitterforthemaximumterminalpowerallowedandan
UL

uplinkchannelthroughputof4.8kbps.Then,thetotaluplinkquality( Q MAX ic )isevaluatedwithrespecttothereceiver

handoverstatus.
Bestserverandactivesetdeterminationisperformedasinpointprediction(ASanalysis).

Atolldisplaystheuplinkqualityattransmittersinactivesetonthecarrieric( ic BS or ic given )receivedfromthereceiver.For

multicarrierEVDOusers,Atollconsidersthebestsubactiveset.
Forfurtherdetailsonformulas,see"DefinitionsandFormulas"onpage 340.Forfurtherdetailsoncalculations,see"Uplink
SubMenu"onpage 402.

Singlecolour
UL

UL

UL

Atolldisplaysacoverageif Q MAX ic Q req .Coveragecolourisunique.For1xEVDORev.0users, Q req isthequalityrequired

UL

onuplinkfora9.6kbpschannelthroughput.For1xEVDORev.Aand1xEVDORev.Busers, Q req isthequalityrequiredon

uplinkfora4.8kbpschannelthroughput.Thisparameteriscalculatedfromtheminimumuplinkpilotqualityandgainsonthe
differentuplinkchannels.
Wehave:
E UL
UL
UL
Q req = ----c-
G p 1 + G ACK + G DRC + G TCH for1xEVDORev.0terminals,
N t min
And
E UL
UL
UL
Q req = ----c-
G p 1 + G ACK + G RRI + G DRC + G TCH + G Auxiliary Pilot for1xEVDORev.Aand1xEVDORev.Bterminals.
N t min

Colourpertransmitter
UL

UL

Atolldisplaysacoverageif Q MAX ic Q req .Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithassociatedcolours.Thereisalayerper

transmitterwithnointersectionbetweenlayers.Layercolouristhecolourassignedtobestservertransmitter.

Colourpermobility

Inthiscase,receiverisnotcompletelydefinedandnomobilityisassigned.Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerper
UL

UL

userdefinedmobilitydefinedinMobilitysubfolder.Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif Q MAX ic Q req .Eachlayerisassigned

acolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

Colourperservice

Inthiscase,receiverisnotcompletelydefinedandnoserviceisassigned.Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerper
UL

UL

userdefinedservicedefinedinServicessubfolder.Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif Q MAX ic Q req .Eachlayerisassigned

acolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

Colourperprobability

Thisdisplayoptionisavailableonlyifanalysisisbasedonallsimulationsinagroup(i.e.ifyouselectagroupofsimulations
andtheAlloptionintheConditiontabofpredictionproperties).Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperuser

419

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014
UL

UL

definedprobabilityleveldefinedintheDisplaytab(Predictionproperties).Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif Q MAX ic Q req

intherequirednumberofsimulations.Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

Colourpercelledgecoverageprobability

Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperuserdefinedcelledgecoverageprobability,p,definedintheDisplaytab
UL

UL

(Predictionproperties).Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif Q MAX ic p Q req .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayed

withintersectionsbetweenlayers.

Colourpermaximumqualitylevel(MaxEb/Nt)
UL

Here,Atollcalculatesthetotaluplinktrafficchannelquality( Q MAX ic TCH ).

UL

Q req TCH
UL
- P max
Q MAX ic TCH = ---------------------term
req
P term
With
UL

E
UL
UL
Q req TCH = ----c-
G p G TCH
N t min
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per userdefined quality threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction
UL

properties).Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif Q MAX ic TCH Threshold .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwith

intersectionsbetweenlayers.

Colourpereffectivequalitylevel(EffectiveEb/Nt)

Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per userdefined quality threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction
UL

properties).Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif Q effective ic TCH Threshold .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayed

withintersectionsbetweenlayers.
UL

UL

UL

Q effective ic TCH = min Q MAX ic TCH Q req TCH

Colourperqualitymargin(Eb/Ntmargin)

Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per userdefined quality margin defined in the Display tab (Prediction
UL

UL

properties).Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif Q MAX ic Q req M arg in .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwith

intersectionsbetweenlayers.

Colourperrequiredpower

1xEVDORev.0,1xEVDORev.Aandsinglecarrier1xEVDORev.Bserviceusers
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per userdefined power threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction
TCH re q

properties).Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif P term

ic Threshold .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwith

intersectionsbetweenlayers.
TCH re q

Therequiredterminalpowerontrafficdatachannel, P term

,iscalculatedasdescribedinthePointanalysisASanalysis

tabUplinksubmenupart.
req

TCH re q

P term

P term
= --------------------------------------------------------- G TCH for1xEVDORev.0terminals,
1 + GACK + G DRC + G TCH

And
req

TCH re q

P term

P term
- G TCH for1xEVDORev.Aterminals.
= ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 + GACK + G RRI + G DRC + G TCH + G Auxiliary Pilot

Multicarrier1xEVDORev.Bserviceusers
FormulticarrierEVDOusers,thecoverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperuserdefinedpowerthresholddefined
TCH re q

intheDisplaytab(Predictionproperties).Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif P term

Threshold .Eachlayerisassigneda

colouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.
TCH re q

Fortheselectedconfiguration(i.e.,thecombinationofcarrierswhichprovidesthehighestthroughput), P term
tothesumoftheterminalpowersrequiredoneachcarrieroftheconfiguration.

420

Colourperrequiredpowermargin

corresponds

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per userdefined power margin defined in the Display tab (Prediction
max

req

properties).Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif P term P term ic M arg in .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwith

intersectionsbetweenlayers.

Colourperthroughput

1xEVDORev.0serviceusers
Foreachpossiblethroughput, TP

UL

UL

UL

,Atollcalculatesthetotaluplinkquality( Q MAX ic TP ).Coverageconsistsofseveral

UL

UL

UL

UL

layerswithalayerperpossiblethroughput.Foreachlayer, areais coveredif Q MAX ic TP Q req TP . Eachlayeris

assignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.
UL

UL

Q req TP istheuplinkqualityrequiredtoobtainthethroughput, TP
Thepossiblethroughputsonuplink, TP

UL

UL

,are:9.6,19.2,38.4,76.8and153.6kbps

E UL
UL
UL
Q req = ----c-
G p 1 + G ACK + G DRC + G TCH
N t min
Where
Ec
--- N t min istheminimumpilotqualitylevelonuplink.ThisparameterisavailableintheMobilitytypestable.
UL

G ACK , G DRC and G TCH arerespectivelyacknowledgement,dataratecontrolandtrafficdatagainsrelativetothepilot.They

aredefinedintheterminalproperties(1xEVDORev.0tab).
1xEVDORev.Aandsinglecarrier1xEVDORev.Bserviceusers
Foreachpossiblethroughput, TP

UL

UL

UL

,Atollcalculatesthetotaluplinkquality( Q MAX ic TP ).Coverageconsistsofseveral

UL

UL

UL

UL

layerswithalayer perpossible throughput.For eachlayer,area iscovered if Q MAX ic TP Q req R v .Each layeris

assignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.
UL

UL

Q req TP istheuplinkqualityrequiredtoobtainthethroughput, TP
Thethroughput, TP

UL

UL

isobtainedwhenacertainuplinktransmissionformat(i.e.1xEVDOradiobearer( Index UL Bearer )

withacertainnumberofsubframes( n SF ))isused.Itiscalculatedasfollows:
UL

TP P RLC Index UL Bearer

UL
TP req = -------------------------------------------------------------n SF
E UL
UL
UL
Q req = ----c-
G p 1 + G ACK + G DRC + G TCH + G RRI + G Auxiliary pilot
N t min
Where
Ec
UL
--- N t min istheminimumpilotqualitylevelrequiredonuplinktoobtainthethroughput, TP .Thevalueisdefinedinthe
UL

1xEVDORadioBearerSelection(Uplink)tablefortheuplinktransmissionformat(radiobearerIndex,mobilityandnumberof
subframe).Twovaluesareavailableforthisparameter,onewhentheserviceuplinkmodeis"LowLatency"andanotherone
forhighcapacityservices.
G ACK , G DRC , G TCH , G RRI and G Auxiliary pilot are respectively acknowledgement, data rate control, traffic data channel,
reverserateindicatorandauxiliarypilotchannelgainsrelativetothepilot.Theyaredefinedintheterminalproperties(1xEV
DORev.Atab).Twovaluesof G TCH areavailable,onewhentheserviceuplinkmodeis"LowLatency"andanotheronefor
highcapacityservices.
Multicarrier1xEVDORev.Bserviceusers
For multicarrier 1xEVDO Rev. B users, Atoll models load balancing between carriers. Atoll equally shares the available
terminalpowerbetweeneachcarrieranddeterminestheuplink1xEVDOradiobearerobtainedoneachcarrier.Then,it
selects the best configuration among all combinations of carriers, i.e., the combination which provides the highest
throughput.
Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperpossiblethroughput.Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif TP

UL

UL

TP req .Each

layerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

421

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

UL

TP req istheuplinkthroughputassociatedwiththelayer.
TP

UL

correspondstothethroughputofthebestconfiguration,i.e.,thecombinationwhichprovidesthehighestthroughput.

Colourperaveragethroughput

Thisdisplayoptionisavailablefor1xEVDORev.Aand1xEVDORev.Busersonly.WhenHARQ(HybridAutomaticRepeat
Request)isused,therequiredaveragenumberofretransmissionsissmallerandthethroughputisanaveragethroughput
UL

( TP av )calculatedasfollows:
UL

TP P RLC Index UL Bearer

UL
TP av = ----------------------------------------------------------------------UL
n Rtx Index UL Bearer n SF av
UL

Theaveragenumberofretransmissions( n Rtx av )isdeterminedfromearlyterminationprobabilitiesdefinedfortheselected

uplink transmissionformat(i.e.theradio bearerindex( Index UL Bearer )withthe number of subframes ( n SF )). TheEarly
TerminationProbabilitygraphshowstheprobabilityofearlytermination( p )asafunctionofthenumberofretransmissions
UL

UL

( n Rtx ).Atollcalculatestheaveragenumberofretransmissions( n Rtx av )asfollows:

n UL
Rtx max

UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

p n Rtx p n Rtx 1 n Rtx

=1

Rtx
n Rtx av = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------UL
p n Rtx max

1xEVDORev.Aandsinglecarrier1xEVDORev.Bserviceusers
UL

UL

UL

Foreachpossibleaveragethroughput, TP av ,Atollcalculatesthetotaluplinkquality( Q MAX ic TP av ).Coverageconsistsof

UL

UL

UL

UL

severallayerswithalayerperpossibleaveragethroughput.Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif Q MAX ic TP av Q req TP av .

Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.
UL

UL

UL

Q req TP av istheuplinkqualityrequiredtoobtaintheaveragethroughput, TP av .
Multicarrier1xEVDORev.Bserviceusers
Formulticarrier1xEVDORev.Busers,thecoverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperpossiblethroughput.Foreach
UL

UL

layer,areaiscoveredif TP av TP req .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

UL

TP req istheuplinkthroughputassociatedwiththelayer.
UL

Fortheselectedconfiguration(i.e.,thecombinationofcarrierswhichprovidesthehighestthroughput), TP av correspondsto
thesumoftheaveragethroughputsobtainedoneachcarrieroftheconfiguration.

5.5.2.4 DownlinkTotalNoiseAnalysis
Atolldeterminesdownlinktotalnoisegeneratedbycells.
ForCDMA20001xRTTsystems,wehave:

Ptot icadj
DL

DL

N tot ic =

txj j
+ N0
Ptot ic + -----------------------------------RF ic ic adj
DL

term

txj j

ForCDMA20001xEVDOsystems,wehave:

Ptot icadj bpilot

DL

DL

N tot ic =

j
- + N0
Ptot ic bpilot + txj--------------------------------------------------RF ic ic adj
DL

term

txj j

term

N0
DL
-
Downlinknoiserise, NRDL ic ,iscalculatedfromthedownlinktotalnoise, N tot ,as: NRDL ic = 10 log ----------- N DL
tot

422

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

5.5.2.4.1

AnalysisontheBestCarrier
Ifthebestcarrierisselected,AtolldeterminesDLtotalnoiseforthebestcarrier.Then,allowstheusertochoosedifferent
displays.

Colourperminimumnoiselevel

CoverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperuserdefinednoiseleveldefinedintheDisplaytab(Predictionproperties).
DL

For each layer, area is covered if minNRtot ic Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
ic

intersectionsbetweenlayers.

Colourpermaximumnoiselevel

CoverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperuserdefinednoiseleveldefinedintheDisplaytab(Predictionproperties).
DL

Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif maxNR tot ic Threshold .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersections

ic

betweenlayers.

Colourperaveragenoiselevel

CoverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperuserdefinednoiseleveldefinedintheDisplaytab(Predictionproperties).
DL

For each layer, area is covered if averageNR tot ic Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
ic

intersectionsbetweenlayers.

Colourperminimumnoiserise

Atolldisplaysbinswhere minNR DL ic Threshold .Coverageconsistsofseveralareaswithanareaperuserdefinednoise

ic

risethresholddefinedintheDisplaytab.Eachareaisassignedacolourwithintersectionsbetweenareas.

Colourpermaximumnoiserise

Atolldisplaysbinswhere maxNR DL ic Threshold .Coverageconsistsofseveralareaswithanareaperuserdefinednoise

ic

risethresholddefinedintheDisplaytab.Eachareaisassignedacolourwithintersectionsbetweenareas.

Colourperaveragenoiserise

Atolldisplaysbinswhere averageNR DL ic Threshold .Coverageconsistsofseveralareaswithanareaperuserdefined

ic

noiserisethresholddefinedintheDisplaytab.Eachareaisassignedacolourwithintersectionsbetweenareas.

5.5.2.4.2

AnalysisonaSpecificCarrier
Whenonlyonecarrierisanalysed,AtolldeterminesDLtotalnoiseorDLnoiseriseonthiscarrier.Inthiscase,thedisplayed
coverageisthesameforanyselecteddisplaypernoiselevel(average,minimumormaximum)oranydisplaypernoiserise
(average,minimumormaximum).

Colourpernoiselevel

CoverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperuserdefinednoiseleveldefinedintheDisplaytab(Predictionproperties).
DL

For each layer, area is covered if N tot ic Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections
betweenlayers.

Colourpernoiserise

Atolldisplaysbinswhere NR DL ic Threshold .Coverageconsistsofseveralareaswithanareaperuserdefinednoiserise

thresholddefinedintheDisplaytab.Eachareaisassignedacolourwithintersectionsbetweenareas.

5.6 AutomaticNeighbourAllocation
Atollpermitstheautomaticallocationofintratechnologyneighboursinthecurrentnetwork.Twoallocationalgorithmsare
available,onededicatedtointracarrierneighboursandtheotherforintercarrierneighbours.
TheintratechnologyneighbourallocationalgorithmstakeintoaccountallthecellsofTBCtransmitters.Itmeansthatallthe
cellsofTBCtransmittersofyour.atldocumentarepotentialneighbours.
ThecellstobeallocatedwillbecalledTBAcells.Theymustfulfillthefollowingconditions:

Theyareactive,
TheysatisfythefiltercriteriaappliedtotheTransmittersfolder,
Theyarelocatedinsidethefocuszone,

423

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

Theybelongtothefolderonwhichallocationhasbeenexecuted.ThisfoldercanbeeithertheTransmittersfolderor
agroupoftransmittersorasingletransmitter.

OnlyTBAcellsmaybeassignedneighbours.
Ifnofocuszoneexistsinthe.atldocument,Atolltakesintoaccountthecomputation
zone.

Inthissection,thefollowingareexplained:

"NeighbourAllocationforallTransmitters"onpage 424.
"NeighbourAllocationforaGroupofTransmittersorOneTransmitter"onpage 427.
"ImportanceCalculation"onpage 428.

5.6.1 NeighbourAllocationforallTransmitters
WeassumethatwehaveareferencecellAandacandidateneighbour,cellB.Whenautomaticallocationstarts,Atollchecks
followingconditions:

Thedistancebetweenbothcellsmustbelessthantheuserdefinablemaximumintersitedistance.Ifthedistance
betweenthereferencecellandthecandidateneighbourisgreaterthanthisvalue,thenthecandidateneighbouris
discarded.
Atoll calculates the effective distance, which corresponds to the real intertransmitter distance weighted by the
azimuthsofantennas.Forinformationontheeffectivedistancecalculation,see"CalculationoftheInterTransmitter
Distance"onpage 430.

Thecalculationoptions:
Carriers:Thisoptionenablesyoutoselectthecarrier(s)onwhichyouwanttoruntheallocation.Youmaychoose
oneormorecarriers.Atollwillallocateneighbourstocellsusingtheselectedcarriers.
Forcecositecellsasneighbours:Thisoptionenablesyoutoforcecellslocatedonthereferencecellsiteinthe
candidateneighbourlist.Thisconstraintscanbeweightedamongtheothersandrankstheneighboursthrough
theimportancefield(seeafter).
Force adjacent cells as neighbours (only for intracarrier neighbours): This option enables you to force cells
geographically adjacent to the reference cell in the candidate neighbour list.This constraints can be weighted
amongtheothersandrankstheneighboursthroughtheimportancefield(seeafter).
Force symmetry: This option enables user to force the reciprocity of a neighbourhood link. Therefore, if the
referencecellisacandidateneighbourofanothercell,thisonewillbeconsideredascandidateneighbourofthe
referencecell.
Iftheneighbourslistofacellisfull,thereferencecellwillnotbeaddedasaneighbour
ofthatcellandthatcellwillberemovedfromthereferencecellsneighbourslist.Youcan
forceAtolltokeepthatcellinthereferencecellsneighbourslistbyaddingthefollowing
optionintheAtoll.inifile:
[Neighbours]
DoNotDeleteSymmetrics=1

Forceexceptionalpairs:Thisoptionenablesyoutoforce/forbidsomeneighbourhoodrelationships.Therefore,
youmayforce/forbidacelltobecandidateneighbourofthereferencecell.
Deleteexistingneighbours:WhenselectingtheDeleteexistingneighboursoption,Atolldeletesallthecurrent
neighboursandcarriesoutanewneighbourallocation.Ifnotselected,theexistingneighboursarekept.
Adjacencycriterion:
LetCellBbeacandidateneighbourcellofCellA.CellBisconsideredadjacenttoCellAif
thereexistsatleastonepixelintheCellABestServercoverageareawhereCellBisBest
Server(ifseveralcellshavethesamebestservervalue)orCellBisthesecondbestserver
thatenterstheActiveSet(respectingtheT_Dropoftheallocation).
WhentheForceadjacentcellsasneighbourscheckboxisselected,adjacentcellsare
sortedandlistedfromthemostadjacenttotheleast,dependingontheabovecriterion.
Adjacenceisrelativetothenumberofpixelssatisfyingthecriterion.

IftheUseCoverageConditionscheckboxisselected,theremustbeanoverlappingzone( S A S B )withagivencell
edgecoverageprobability.Otherwise,onlythedistancecriterionistakenintoaccount.

424

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

Theoverlappingzone( S A S B )isdefinedasfollows:

Intracarrierneighbours:intracarrierhandoverisasofthandover.

ThereferencecellAandthecandidatecellBarelocatedinsideacontinuouslayerofcellswithcarrierc1(c1istheselected
carrieronwhichyouruntheallocation).
SAistheareawherethecellAisthebestservingcell.ItmeansthatthecellAisthefirstoneintheactiveset.

ThepilotsignalreceivedfromthecellAisgreaterthantheminimumpilotsignallevel.
ThepilotqualityfromAexceedsMin.Ec/I0.
ThepilotqualityfromAisthebest.

SBistheareawherethecellBcanentertheactiveset.

ThepilotsignalreceivedfromthecellBisgreaterthantheminimumpilotsignallevel.
ThepilotqualityfromBisgreaterthanT_Drop.

Intercarrierneighbours:interfrequencyhandoverisahardhandover.Itisneededinamulticarrier(1xRTTand1xEV
DOcarriers)CDMAnetwork:

Tobalanceloadingbetweencarriersandlayers(1stcase),
Tomakeacoveragereasonhandoverfrommicrocellfrequencytomacrocells(2ndcase).

1stcase:thereferencecellAislocatedinsideacontinuouslayerofcellswithcarrierc1(c1istheselectedcarrieronwhichyou
runtheallocation)andthecandidatecellBbelongstoalayerofcellswithcarrierc2.
SAistheareawhere:

ThepilotsignalreceivedfromthecellAisgreaterthantheminimumpilotsignallevel.
ThepilotsignalfromAisnotthehighestone.Itisstrictlylowerthanthebestpilotsignalreceivedandhigherthan
thebestpilotsignalminusthemargin.

SBistheareawhere:

ThepilotsignalreceivedfromthecellBisgreaterthantheminimumpilotsignallevel.
ThepilotsignalfromBisthehighestone.

Figure 5.4:OverlappingZones1stCase
2ndcase:thereferencecellAislocatedontheborderofalayerwithcarrierc1(c1istheselectedcarrieronwhichyourunthe
allocation)andthecandidatecellBbelongstoalayerofcellswithcarrierc2.
SAistheareawhere:

ThepilotsignalreceivedfromthecellAisgreaterthantheminimumpilotsignallevel.
ThepilotsignalfromAisthehighestone
ThepilotsignalfromAislowerthantheminimumpilotsignallevelplusthemargin.

SBistheareawhere:

ThepilotsignalreceivedfromthecellBisgreaterthantheminimumpilotsignallevel.
ThepilotsignalfromBisthehighestone.

425

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

Figure 5.5:OverlappingZones2ndCase
TwowaysenableyoutodeterminetheI0value:

GlobalValue:A percentageofthecellmaximumpowerisconsidered.Ifthe%of
maximum power is too low, i.e. if % P max P pilot , Atoll takes into account the
pilotpowerofthecell.Then,I0representsthesumofvaluescalculatedforeachcell.
DefinedperCell:Atolltakesintoaccountthetotaldownlinkpowerdefinedpercell.
I0representsthesumoftotaltransmittedpowers.

SA SB
- 100 )andcomparesthisvaluetothe%minimumcoveredarea.If
Atollcalculatesthepercentageofcoveredarea( ----------------SA
thispercentageisnotexceeded,thecandidateneighbourBisdiscarded.
Thecoverageconditioncanbeweightedamongtheothersandrankstheneighboursthroughtheimportancefield(seeafter).

Theimportanceofneighbours.

Forinformationontheimportancecalculation,see"ImportanceCalculation"onpage 428.
Importancevaluesareusedbytheallocationalgorithmtoranktheneighbours.Atolllistsallneighboursandsortsthemby
importance value so as to eliminate some of them from the neighbour list if the maximum number of neighbours to be
allocated to each transmitter is exceeded. If we consider the case for which there are 15 candidate neighbours and the
maximumnumberofneighbourstobeallocatedtothereferencecellis8.Amongthese15candidateneighbours,only8
(having the highest importance values) will be allocated to the reference cell. Note that specific maximum numbers of
neighbours(maximumnumberofintracarrierneighbours,maximumnumberofintercarrierneighbours)canbedefinedat
thecelllevel(propertydialogueorcelltable).Ifdefinedthere,thisvalueistakenintoaccountinsteadofthedefaultone
availableintheNeighbourAllocationdialogue.
IntheResultspart,Atollprovidesthelistofneighbours,thenumberofneighboursandthemaximumnumberofneighbours
allowedforeachcell.Inaddition,itindicatestheimportance(in%)ofeachneighbourandtheallocationreason.Therefore,a
neighbourmaybemarkedasexceptionalpair,cosite,adjacent,coverageorsymmetric.Forneighboursacceptedforcosite,
adjacency and coverage reasons, Atoll displays the percentage of area meeting the coverage conditions and the
correspondingsurfacearea(km2),thepercentageofareameetingtheadjacencyconditionsandthecorrespondingsurface
area(km2).Finally,ifcellshavepreviousallocationsinthelist,neighboursaremarkedasexisting.

426

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

Bydefault,theautomaticneighbourallocationcomparesthedefinedMaxinter
sitedistancewiththeeffectiveintercelldistance.Asaconsequence,therecan
becaseswheretherealdistancebetweenassignedneighboursishigherthanthe
Maxintersitedistance,becausetheeffectivedistanceissmaller.Youcanforce
AtolltocomparetheMaxintersitedistancewiththerealintersitedistanceby
addingthefollowinglinesinAtoll.ini:
[Neighbours]
RealInterSiteDistanceCondition=1

Bydefault,theneighbourimportancecalculatedwithrespecttodistanceisbased
ontheglobalMaxintersitedistancesettingforallneighbourcandidates.Asa
consequence,therecanbecaseswherethecalculatedimportanceisdifferent
whentheglobalMaxintersitedistanceismodified.Toavoidthat,youcanforce
Atoll to prioritise the individual distances between reference cells and their
respectiveneighbourcandidatesbyaddingthefollowinglinesinAtoll.ini:
[Neighbours]
CandidatesMaxDistanceInImportanceCalculation=1

No simulation or prediction study is needed to perform an automatic neighbour

allocation. When starting an automatic neighbour allocation, Atoll automatically
calculatesthepathlossmatricesifnotfound.
Evenifnospecificterminal,mobilityorserviceisselectedintheautomaticallocation,
it is interesting to know that the algorithm works such as finding the maximum
numberofneighboursbyselectionthemultiservicetrafficdataasfollows:
Service:selectionoftheonewiththelowestbodyloss.
Mobility:noimpactontheallocation,nospecificselection.
Terminal:selectionoftheonewiththegreatest(GainLoss)value,and,ifequal,the
onewiththelowestnoisefigure.
The neighbour lists may be optionally used in the power control simulations to
determinethemobile'sactiveset.
Aforbiddenneighbourmustnotbelistedasneighbourexceptiftheneighbourhood
relationship already exists and the Delete existing neighbours option is unchecked
whenyoustartthenewallocation.Inthiscase,AtolldisplaysawarningintheEvent
viewerindicatingthattheconstraintontheforbiddenneighbourwillbeignoredby
algorithmbecausetheneighbouralreadyexists.
Theforceneighboursymmetryoptionenablestheuserstoconsiderthereciprocityof
a neighbourhood link. This reciprocity is allowed only if the neighbour list is not
already full. Thus, if the cell B is a neighbour of the cell A while the cell A is not a
neighbourofthecellB,twocasesarepossible:
1stcase:ThereisspaceinthecellBneighbourlist:thecellAwillbeaddedtothelist.
Itwillbethelastone.
2ndcase:ThecellBneighbourlistisfull:AtollwillnotincludecellAinthelistandwill
cancelthelinkbydeletingcellBfromthecellAneighbourlist.
WhentheoptionsForceexceptionalpairsandForcesymmetryareselected,Atoll
considers the constraints between exceptional pairs in both directions so as to
respect symmetry condition. On the other hand, if neighbourhood relationship is
forced in one direction and forbidden in the other one, symmetry cannot be
respected.Inthiscase,AtolldisplaysawarningintheEventviewer.
In the Results, Atoll displays only the cells for which it finds new neighbours.
Therefore, if a TBA cell has already reached its maximum number of neighbours
beforestartingthenewallocation,itwillnotappearintheResultstable.

5.6.2 NeighbourAllocationforaGroupofTransmittersorOne
Transmitter
Inthiscase,Atollallocatesneighboursto:

TBAcells,
NeighboursofTBAcellsmarkedasexceptionalpair,adjacentandsymmetric,
NeighboursofTBAcellsthatsatisfycoverageconditions.

Automaticneighbourallocationparametersaredescribedin"NeighbourAllocationforallTransmitters"onpage 424.

427

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

5.6.3 ImportanceCalculation
Importancevaluesareusedbytheallocationalgorithmtoranktheneighboursaccordingtotheallocationreason,andto
quantifytheneighbourimportance.

5.6.3.1 ImportanceofIntracarrierNeighbours
Theneighbourimportancedependsonthedistancefromthereferencetransmitterandontheneighbourhoodcause(cf.table
below);thisvaluevariesbetween0and100%.
Neighbourhoodcause

When

Importancevalue

Existingneighbour

OnlyiftheDeleteexistingneighboursoptionisnotselected
andincaseofanewallocation

Existingimportance

Exceptionalpair

OnlyiftheForceexceptionalpairsoptionisselected

100%

Cositecell

OnlyiftheForcecositecellsasneighboursoptionis
selected

ImportanceFunction(IF)

Adjacentcell

OnlyiftheForceadjacentcellsasneighboursoptionis
selected

ImportanceFunction(IF)

Neighbourhoodrelationshipthat
fulfilscoverageconditions

Onlyifthe%minimumcoveredareaisexceeded

ImportanceFunction(IF)

Symmetricneighbourhood
relationship

OnlyiftheForceneighboursymmetryoptionisselected

ImportanceFunction(IF)

Exceptthecaseofforcedneighbours(importance=100%),priorityassignedtoeachneighbourhoodcauseisdetermined
usingtheImportanceFunction(IF).TheIFconsidersthefollowingfactorsforcalculatingtheimportance:

The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.
d Di = 1 ---------d max
d istheeffectivedistance(inm).Itcorrespondstotherealintertransmitterdistanceweightedbytheazimuthsof
antennas.Forinformationontheeffectivedistancecalculation,see"CalculationoftheInterTransmitterDistance"on
page 430.
d max isthemaximumdistancebetweenthereferencetransmitterandapossibleneighbour.

Thecositefactor(C):aBoolean,
Theadjacencyfactor(A):thepercentageofadjacency,
Theoverlappingfactor(O):thepercentageofoverlapping.

Theminimumandmaximumimportanceassignedtoeachoftheabovefactorscanbedefined.
Factor

Minimportance

Defaultvalue

Maximportance

Defaultvalue

Distancefactor(Di)

Min(Di)

1%

Max(Di)

10%

Overlappingfactor(O)

Min(O)

10%

Max(O)

30%

Adjacencyfactor(A)

Min(A)

30%

Max(A)

60%

Cositefactor(C)

Min(C)

60%

Max(C)

100%

TheImportanceFunctionisevaluatedasfollows:
Neighbourhoodcause

ImportanceFunction

ResultingIFusingthedefaultvalues
fromthetableabove

No

Min(O)+Delta(O){Max(Di)(Di)+(100%
Max(Di))(O)}+Min(Di)+Delta(Di)(Di)

10%+20%{10%(Di)+90%(O)}+1%+9%(Di)

No

Yes

Min(A)+Delta(A){Max(Di)(Di)+Max(O)(O)+
(100%Max(Di)Max(O))(A)}+Min(Di)+Delta(Di)(Di)

30%+30%{10%(Di)+30%(O)
+60%(A)}+1%+9%(Di)

Yes

Yes

Min(C)+Delta(C){Max(Di)(Di)+Max(O)(O)+
(100%Max(Di)Max(O))(A)}+Min(Di)+Delta(Di)(Di)

60%+40%{10%(Di)+30%(O)
+60%(A)}+1%+9%(Di)

Cosite

Adjacent

No

Where:
Delta(X)=Max(X)Min(X)

428

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

SetMin(Di)andMax(Di)to0%ifyoudonotwanttotakeintoaccountthedistance
factorintheimportancecalculation.
IftheMinandMaxvaluerangesoftheimportancefunctionfactorsdonotoverlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum andmaximum importance fields,neighbours will be rankedin thisorder:
cositeneighbours,adjacentneighbours,andneighboursallocatedbasedoncoverage
overlapping.
If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.
ThedefaultvalueofMin(O)=1%ensuresthatneighboursselectedforsymmetrywill
have an importance greater than 0%. With a value of Min(O) = 0%, neighbours
selectedforsymmetrywillhaveanimportancefieldgreaterthan0%onlyifthereis
somecoverageoverlapping.

5.6.3.2 ImportanceofIntercarrierNeighbours
Asindicatedinthetablebelow,theneighbourimportancedependsonthedistanceandontheneighbourhoodcause;this
valuevariesbetween0to100%.
Neighbourhoodcause

When

Importancevalue

Existingneighbour

IftheDeleteexistingneighboursoptionisnotselected

Existingimportance

Exceptionalpair

IftheForceexceptionalpairsoptionisselected

100%

Cositecell

IftheForcecositecellsasneighboursoptionisselected

ImportanceFunction(IF)

Neighbourhoodrelationshipthat
fulfilscoverageconditions

Ifthe%minimumcoveredareaisexceeded

ImportanceFunction(IF)

Symmetricneighbourhood
relationship

IftheForceneighboursymmetryoptionisselected

ImportanceFunction(IF)

Exceptthecaseofforcedneighbours(importance=100%),priorityassignedtoeachneighbourhoodcauseisdetermined
usingtheImportanceFunction(IF).TheIFconsidersthefollowingfactorsforcalculatingtheimportance:

The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.
d Di = 1 ---------d max
d istheeffectivedistance(inm).Itcorrespondstotherealintertransmitterdistanceweightedbytheazimuthsof
antennas.Forinformationontheeffectivedistancecalculation,see"CalculationoftheInterTransmitterDistance"on
page 430.
d max isthemaximumdistancebetweenthereferencetransmitterandapossibleneighbour.

Thecositefactor(C):aBoolean,
Theoverlappingfactor(O):thepercentageofoverlapping.

TheIFisuserdefinableusingtheMinimportanceandMaximportancefields.
Factor

Minimportance

Defaultvalue

Maximportance

Defaultvalue

Distancefactor(Di)

Min(Di)

1%

Max(Di)

10%

Overlappingfactor(O)

Min(O)

10%

Max(O)

60%

Cositefactor(C)

Min(C)

60%

Max(C)

100%

TheIFevaluatesimportanceasfollows:
CositeNeighbourhood
cause

IF

ResultingIFusingthedefault
valuesfromthetableabove

No

Min(O)+Delta(O){Max(Di)(Di)+(100%Max(Di))(O)}

10%+50%{10%(Di)+90%(O)}

Yes

Min(C)+Delta(C){Max(Di)(Di)/(Max(Di)+Max(O))+
Max(O)(O)/(Max(Di)+Max(O))}

60%+40%{1/7%(Di)+6/7%(O)}

Where
Delta(X)=Max(X)Min(X)

429

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

SetMin(Di)andMax(Di)to0%ifyoudonotwanttotakeintoaccountthedistance
factorintheimportancecalculation.
IftheMinandMaxvaluerangesoftheimportancefunctionfactorsdonotoverlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum andmaximum importance fields, neighbours will beranked inthis order:
cositeneighboursandneighboursallocatedbasedoncoverageoverlapping.
If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.
ThedefaultvalueofMin(O)=1%ensuresthatneighboursselectedforsymmetrywill
have an importance greater than 0%. With a value of Min(O) = 0%, neighbours
selectedforsymmetrywillhaveanimportancefieldgreaterthan0%onlyifthereis
somecoverageoverlapping.

5.6.4 Appendices
5.6.4.1 CalculationoftheInterTransmitterDistance
Atoll takes into account the real distance ( D in m) and azimuths of antennas in order to calculate the effective inter
transmitterdistance( d inm).
d = D 1 + x cos x cos
wherex=0.3%sothatthemaximumDvariationdoesnotexceed1%.

Figure 5.6:InterTransmitterDistanceComputation
The formula above implies that two cells facing each other will have a smaller effective distance than the real physical
distance.Itisthiseffectivedistancethatwillbetakenintoaccountratherthantherealdistance.

5.7 PNOffsetAllocation
PNoffsetisusedtoidentifyacell.ItisatimeoffsetusedbyacelltoshiftaPseudoNoisesequence.Mobileprocessesthe
strongestreceivedPNsequenceandreadsitsphasethatidentifiesthecell.Thereareamaximumof512PNoffsetsnumbered
from0to511.
ThecellstowhichAtollallocatesPNoffsetsarereferredtoastheTBAcells(cellstobeallocated).TBAcellsfulfilfollowing
conditions:

Theyareactive,
TheysatisfythefiltercriteriaappliedtotheTransmittersfolder,
Theyarelocatedinsidethefocuszone,
Theybelongtothefolderonwhichallocationhasbeenexecuted.ThisfoldercanbeeithertheTransmittersfolder
oragroupoftransmittersorasingletransmitter.
Ifnofocuszoneexistsinthe.atldocument,Atolltakesintoaccountthecomputation
zone.

430

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

5.7.1 AutomaticAllocationDescription
5.7.1.1 OptionsandConstraints
ThePNoffsetallocationalgorithmcantakeintoaccountfollowingconstraintsandoptions:

PILOT_INCparameter,
AtollusesthisparametertodeterminethepoolofpossiblePNoffsets(512dividedbyPILOT_INCvalue).ThefirstPN
offsetisPILOT_INCandotheronesaremultiplesofthisvalue.
Forexample:WhenPILOT_INCissetto4,thepoolofpossiblePNoffsetsconsistsofPNoffsetsfrom4to508witha
separationintervalof4(i.e.[4,8,12,16,...508]).

Neighbourhoodbetweencells,

Youmayconsider:

Firstorderneighbours:TheneighboursofTBAcellslistedintheIntratechnologyneighbourstable,
Secondorderneighbours:Theneighboursofneighbours,
Thirdorderneighbours:Theneighboursneighboursneighbours.

InthecontextofthePNoffsetallocation,theterm"neighbours"referstointracarrier
neighbours.
Atoll considers symmetry relationship between a cell, its first order neighbours, its
secondorderneighboursanditsthirdorderneighbours.
In 3GPP2 multiRAT documents, Atoll also tries to allocate different PN offsets to
CDMAcellsthatareneighboursofacommonLTEcell.

CellsfulfillingacriteriononEc/I0(optionAdditionalEc/I0conditions),

Atollreusestheintracarrierneighbourallocationalgorithmtodeterminethelistofcellswhichcannotbeallocatedthesame
scramblingcode,andtocalculatetheirimportance.
ForareferencecellA,AtollconsidersallthecellsBthatcanentertheactivesetontheareawherethereferencecellis
thebestserver(areawhere(Ec/I0)AexceedsMin.Ec/I0andisthehighestoneand(Ec/I0)BexceedsT_Drop).
Atollconsiderseitherapercentageofthecellmaximumpowersorthetotaldownlink
powerusedbythecellsinordertoevaluateI0.Inthiscase,I0equalsthesumoftotal
transmittedpowers.Whenthisparameterisnotspecifiedinthecellproperties,Atoll
uses50%ofthemaximumpower.

CoPNReusedistance,

ReusedistanceisaconstraintontheallocationofPNoffsets.APNoffsetcannotbereusedatasitethatisnotatleastasfar
awayasthereusedistancefromthesiteallocatedwiththeparticularPNoffset.
PNoffsetreusedistancecanbedefinedatcelllevel.Ifthisvalueisnotdefined,thenAtoll
will use the default reuse distance defined in the PN offset Automatic Allocation
dialogue.

PNclustersize.WithinthecontextofPNoffsetallocation,theterm"PNcluster"referstoasubgroupofPNoffsets.
Exceptionalpairs,
DomainsofPNoffsets,
Whennodomainisassignedtocells,AtollconsidersthePILOT_INCparameteronlyto
determineavailablePNoffsets(e.g.,IfPILOT_INCissetto4,allPNoffsetsfrom4to508
withaseparationintervalof4canbeallocated).

Thecarrieronwhichtheallocationisrun:Itcanbeagivencarrierorallofthem.Inthiscase,eitherAtollindependently
plansPNoffsetsforthedifferentcarriers,oritallocatesthesamePNoffsettoeachcarrierofatransmitteriftheoption
"Allocatecarriersidentically"isselected.
ThepossibilitytouseamaximumofPNoffsets(option"UseaMaximumofPNOffsets"):Atollwilltrytospreadthe
PNoffsetspectrumthemost.
The"DeleteAllCodes"option:Whenselectingthisoption,AtolldeletesallthecurrentPNoffsetsandcarriesouta
newPNoffsetallocation.Ifnotselected,theexistingPNoffsetsarekept.

431

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

Inaddition,itdependsontheselectedallocationstrategy.Allocationstrategiescanbe:

PN offset per cell: The purpose of this strategy is to reduce the spectrum of allocated PN offsets the maximum
possible.AtollwillallocatethefirstpossiblePNoffsetsinthedomain.
AdjacentPNClusterspersite: ThisstrategyconsistsofallocatingoneclusterofadjacentPNoffsetstoeachsite,then,
onePNoffsetoftheclustertoeachcellofeachtransmitteraccordingtoitsazimuth.Whenalltheclustershavebeen
allocatedandtherearestillsitesremainingtobeallocated,Atollreusestheclustersatanothersite.
Distributed PNclusters per site: This strategy consists of allocating one cluster of PN offsets to each site in the
network,then,onePNoffsetoftheclustertoeachcellofeachtransmitteraccordingtoitsazimuth.Withthisstrategy,
theclusterismadeofPNoffsetsseparatedasmuchaspossible.Whenalltheclustershavebeenallocatedandthere
arestillsitesremainingtobeallocated,Atollreusestheclustersatanothersite.

IntheResultstable,AtollonlydisplaysPNoffsetsallocatedtoTBAcells.

5.7.1.2 AllocationProcess
ForeachTBAcell,Atolllistsallcellswhichhaveconstraintswiththecell.Theyarereferredtoasnearcells.Thenearcellsofa
TBAcellmaybe:

Itsneighbourcells:theneighbourslistedintheIntratechnologyneighbourstable(optionsExistingneighboursand
"FirstOrder"),
Theneighboursofitsneighbours(optionsExistingneighboursandSecondOrder),
Thethirdorderneighbours(optionsExistingneighboursandThirdOrder),
ThecellsthatfulfilEc/I0condition(optionAdditionalEc/I0conditions),
ThecellswithdistancefromtheTBAcelllessthanthereusedistance,
ThecellsthatmakeexceptionalpairswiththeTBAcell.

Oneadditionalconstraintisconsideredin3GPP2multiRATdocuments:

ThecellanditsnearcellsareneighboursofthesameLTEcell.

TheseconstraintshaveacertainweighttakenintoaccounttodeterminetheTBAcellpriorityduringtheallocationprocess
andthecostofthePNoffsetplan.Duringtheallocation,AtolltriestoassigndifferentPNoffsetstotheTBAcellanditsnear
cells.Ifitrespectsalltheconstraints,thecostofthePNoffsetplanis0.Whenacellhastoomanyconstraintsandthereare
notanymorePNoffsetsavailable,AtollbreakstheconstraintwiththelowestcostsoastogeneratethePNoffsetplanwith
thelowestcost.Forinformationonthecostgeneratedbyeachconstraint,see"CellPriority"onpage 433.

5.7.1.2.1

SingleCarrierNetwork
Theallocationprocessdependsontheselectedstrategy.Algorithmworksasfollows:
Strategy:PNoffsetpercell
AtollprocessesTBAcellsaccordingtotheirpriority.ItallocatesPNoffsetsstartingwiththehighestprioritycellanditsnear
cells,andcontinuingwiththelowestprioritycellsnotallocatedyetandtheirnearcells.Forinformationoncalculatingcell
priority,see"CellPriority"onpage 433.
Strategy:AdjacentPNClusterspersite
Allsiteswhichhaveconstraintswiththestudiedsitearereferredtoasnearsites.
AtollassignsaPNclusterofadjacentPNoffsetstoeachsite,startingwiththehighestprioritysiteanditsnearsites,and
continuingwiththelowestprioritysitesnotallocatedyetandtheirnearsites.Whenalltheclustershavebeenallocatedand
therearestillsitesremainingtobeallocated,Atollreusestheclustersatanothersite.WhentheCoPNReuseDistanceoption
isselected,thealgorithmreusestheclustersassoonastheCoPNreusedistanceisexceeded.Otherwise,whentheoptionis
notselected,thealgorithmtriestoassignreusedclustersasspacedoutaspossible.
Then, Atoll allocates a PN offset from the cluster to each cell of each transmitter located on the sites according to the
transmitterazimuth.Itstartswiththehighestprioritycellanditsnearcellsandgoesonwiththelowestprioritycellsnot
allocatedyetandtheirnearcells.
Forinformationoncalculatingsitepriority,see"SitePriority"onpage 436.Forinformationoncalculatingcellpriority,see
"CellPriority"onpage 433.
Strategy:DistributedPNClusterspersite
Allsiteswhichhaveconstraintswiththestudiedsitearereferredtoasnearsites.
Atollassignsoneclustertoeachsite,startingwiththehighestprioritysiteanditsnearsites,andcontinuingwiththelowest
prioritysitesnotallocatedyetandtheirnearsites.Whenalltheclustershavebeenallocatedandtherearestillsitesremaining
tobeallocated,Atollreusestheclustersatanothersite.WhentheCoPNReuseDistanceoptionisselected,thealgorithm

432

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

reusestheclustersassoonastheCoPNreusedistanceisexceeded.Otherwise,whentheoptionisnotselected,thealgorithm
triestoassignreusedclustersasspacedoutaspossible.
Then, Atoll assigns a PN offset from the cluster to each cell of each transmitter located on the sites according to the
transmitterazimuth.Itstartswiththehighestprioritycellanditsnearcellsandgoesonwiththelowestprioritycellsnot
allocatedyetandtheirnearcells.
Forinformationoncalculatingsitepriority,see"SitePriority"onpage 436.Forinformationoncalculatingcellpriority,see
"CellPriority"onpage 433.

5.7.1.2.2

MultiCarrierNetwork
In case you have a multicarrier network and you run the PN offset allocation on all the carriers, the allocation process
dependsonwethertheoption"AllocateCarriersIdentically"isselectedornot.
Whentheoptionisnotselected,algorithmworksforeachstrategy,asexplainedabove.Ontheotherhand,whentheoption
isselected,allocationorderchanges.Itisnolongerbasedonthecellprioritybutdependsonthetransmitterpriority.All
transmitterswhichhaveconstraintswiththestudiedtransmitterwillbereferredtoasneartransmitters.
Incaseofa"Percell"strategy(PNoffsetpercell),AtollstartsPNoffsetallocationwiththehighestprioritytransmitterandits
neartransmittersandcontinueswiththelowestprioritytransmittersnotallocatedyetandtheirneartransmitters.Thesame
PNoffsetisassignedtoeachcellofthetransmitter.
Incaseofa"Persite"strategy(AdjacentandDistributedPNclusterspersitestrategies),Atollassignsaclustertoeachsite
andthen,allocatesaPNoffsettoeachtransmitter.Itstartswiththehighestprioritytransmitteranditsneartransmittersand
continueswiththelowestprioritytransmittersnotallocatedyetandtheirneartransmitters.ThesamePNoffsetisassigned
toeachcellofthetransmitter.
Forinformationoncalculatingcellpriority,see"CellPriority"onpage 433.Forinformationoncalculatingtransmitterpriority,
see"TransmitterPriority"onpage 435.
When cells, transmitters or sites have the same priority, processing is based on an
alphanumericorder.

5.7.1.2.3

DifferencebetweenAdjacentandDistributedPNClusters
Thefollowingexampleexplainsthedifferencebetween"AdjacentPNclusters"and"DistributedPNclusters".ThePILOT_INC
hasbeensetto4andthePNclustersizeto3.Thereare:

128PNoffsetsthatcanbeallocated:theyareallPNoffsetsfrom4to508withaseparationintervalof4.
EachPNclusterconsistsofthreePNoffsets.So,thereare42PNclustersavailable.

Ifyouselect"AdjacentPNclusterpersite"asallocationstrategy,AtollwillconsiderPNclustersconsistedofadjacentPN
offsets(e.g.{4,8,12},{16,20,24},...,{496,500,504}).
Ifyouselect"DistributedPNclusterpersite"asallocationstrategy,AtollwillconsiderPNclustersconsistedofPNoffsets
separatedasmuchaspossible(e.g.{4,172,340},{8,176,344},...,{168,336,504}).

5.7.1.3 PriorityDetermination
5.7.1.3.1

CellPriority
PNoffsetallocationalgorithminAtollallotsprioritiestocellsbeforeperformingtheactualallocation.Prioritiesassignedto
cellsdependuponhowmuchconstrainedeachcellisandthecostdefinedforeachconstraint.Acellwithoutanyconstraint
hasadefaultcost, C ,equalto0.Thehigherthecostonacell,thehigherthepriorityithasforthePNoffsetallocationprocess.
Therearefivecriteriaemployedtodeterminethecellpriority:
PNOffsetDomainCriterion
Thecostduetothedomainconstraint, C i Dom ,dependsonthenumberofPNoffsetsavailablefortheallocation. The
domainconstraintismandatoryandcannotbebroken.
Whennodomainisassignedtocells,512PNoffsetsareavailableandwehave:
C i Dom = 0
WhendomainsofPNoffsetsareassignedtocells,eachunavailablePNoffsetgeneratesacost.Thehigherthenumberofcodes
availableinthedomain,thelesswillbethecostduetothiscriterion.Thecostisgivenas:
C i Dom = 512 NumberofPNOffsetsinthedomain

433

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

DistanceCriterion
Theconstraintlevelofanycellidependsonthenumberofcells(j)presentwithinaradiusof"reusedistance"fromitscentre.
Thetotalcostduetothedistanceconstraintisgivenas:

Cj Dist i

C i Dist =

Eachcelljwithinthereusedistancegeneratesacostgivenas:
C j Dist i = w d ij c dis tan ce
Where
w d ij isaweightdependingonthedistancebetweeniandj.Thisweightisinverselyproportionaltotheintercelldistance.
Forareusedistanceof2000m,theweightforanintercelldistanceof1500mis0.25,theweightforcositecellsis1andthe
weightfortwocellsspacedout2100mapartis0.
c dis tan ce isthecostofthedistanceconstraint.ThisvaluecanbedefinedintheConstraintCostdialogue.

ExceptionalPairCriterion

Theconstraintlevelofanycellidependsonthenumberofexceptionalpairs(j)forthatcell.Thetotalcostduetoexceptional
pairconstraintisgivenas:
C i EP =

cEP i j
j

Where
c EP isthecostoftheexceptionalpairconstraint.ThisvaluecanbedefinedintheConstraintCostdialogue.
NeighbourhoodCriterion
Theconstraintlevelofanycellidependsonthenumberofitsneighbourcellsj,thenumberofsecondorderneighbourskand
thenumberofthirdorderneighboursl.
Letsconsiderthefollowingneighbourschema:

Figure 5.7:NeighbourhoodConstraints
Thetotalcostduetotheneighbourconstraintisgivenas:

Ci N =

Cj N1 i + Cj j N1 i + Ck N2 i + Ck k N2 i + Cl N3 i + Cl l N3 i
j

Eachfirstorderneighbourcelljgeneratesacostgivenas:
C j N1 i = I j c N1
Where
I j istheimportanceoftheneighbourcellj.
c N1 isthecostofthefirstorderneighbourconstraint.ThisvaluecanbedefinedintheConstraintCostdialogue.
BecausetwofirstorderneighboursmustnothavethesamePNoffset,Atollconsidersthecostcreatedbytwofirstorder
neighbourstobeeachother.
C j N1 i + C j N1 i
C j j N1 i = ----------------------------------------------------2
Eachsecondorderneighbourcellkgeneratesacostgivenas:

434

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

C k N2 i = Max ( C j N1 i C k N1 j , C j N1 i C k N1 j ) c N2
Where
c N2 isthecostofthesecondorderneighbourconstraint.ThisvaluecanbedefinedintheConstraintCostdialogue.
BecausetwosecondorderneighboursmustnothavethesamePNoffset,Atollconsidersthecostcreatedbytwosecondorder
neighbourstobeeachother.
C k N2 i + C k N2 i
C k k N2 i = ------------------------------------------------------2
Eachthirdorderneighbourcelllgeneratesacostgivenas:
C N1 i C k N1 j C l N1 k C j N1 i C k N1 j C l N1 k
C l N3 i = Max j
c N3
C j N1 i C k N1 j C l N1 k C j N1 i C k N1 j C l N1 k
Where
c N3 isthecostofthethirdorderneighbourconstraint.ThisvaluecanbedefinedintheConstraintCostdialogue.
BecausetwothirdorderneighboursmustnothavethesamePNoffset,Atollconsidersthecostcreatedbytwothirdorder
neighbourstobeeachother.
C l N3 i + C l N3 i
C l l N3 i = ----------------------------------------------------2
Atollconsidersthehighestcostofbothlinkswhenaneighbourrelationissymmetricand
theimportancevalueisdifferent.
.
Inthiscase,wehave:
C j N1 i = Max I i j I j i c N1
And
C k N2 i = Max (C j N1 i C k N1 j ,C j N1 k C i N1 j ) c N2
LTENeighbourCriterion
Thiscriterionisconsideredin3GPP2multiRATdocuments.IfthecelliisneighbourofanLTEcell,thecellconstraintlevel
dependsonhowmanycellsjareneighboursofthesameLTEcell.ThetotalcostduetoLTEneighbourconstraintisgivenas:
C i N LTE =

cNLTE j TxLTE
j

Where
cN

LTE

isthecostoftheLTEneighbourconstraint.ThisvaluecanbedefinedintheConstraintCostdialogue.

Therefore,thetotalcostduetoconstraintsonanycelliisdefinedas:
C i = C i Dom + C i U
With
C i U = C i Dist + C i EP + C i N + C i N 2G

5.7.1.3.2

TransmitterPriority
IncaseyouhaveamulticarriernetworkandyourunPNoffsetallocationon"all"thecarrierswiththeoption"allocatecarriers
identically", algorithm in Atoll allots priorities to transmitters. Priorities assigned to transmitters depend on how much
constrainedeachtransmitterisandthecostdefinedforeachconstraint.Thehigherthecostonatransmitter,thehigherthe
priorityithasforthePNoffsetallocationprocess.
LetusconsideratransmitterTxwithtwocellsusingcarriers0and1.Thecostduetoconstraintsonthetransmitterisgivenas:
C Tx = C Tx Dom + C Tx U

435

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

Max C U and C Dom = 512 NumberofPNoffsetsinthedomain

Tx
i Tx i

With C Tx U =

Here,thedomainavailableforthetransmitteristheintersectionofdomainsassignedtocellsofthetransmitter.Thedomain
constraintismandatoryandcannotbebroken.

5.7.1.3.3

SitePriority
Incaseof"PerSite"allocationstrategies(AdjacentPNclusterspersiteandDistributedPNclusterspersite),algorithminAtoll
allotsprioritiestosites.Prioritiesassignedtositesdependonhowmuchconstrainedeachsiteis.Thehighertheconstrainton
asite,thehigherthepriorityithasforthePNoffsetallocationprocess.
LetusconsiderasiteSwiththreetransmitters;eachofthemhastwocellsusingcarriers0and1.Thesiteconstraintisgivenas:
C S = C S U + C S Dom
With, C S U =

CTx U ,and CS Dom

= 512 NumberofPNoffsetsinthedomain

Tx

Here,thedomainconsideredforthesiteistheintersectionofdomainsavailablefortransmittersofthesite.

5.7.2 AllocationExamples
Inordertounderstandthedifferencesbetweenthedifferentallocationstrategiesandthebehaviourofthealgorithmwhen
usingamaximumofPNoffsetsornot,letusconsiderthefollowingsamplescenario:

Figure 5.8:PNOffsetAllocation
LetSite0,Site1,Site2andSite3befoursiteswith3cellsusingcarrier0whomPNoffsetshavetobeallocated.ThePILOT_INC
parameterhasbeensetto4andthePNClusterSizeis3.Therefore,allPNoffsetsfrom4to508withaseparationintervalof
4canbeallocated.Thereusedistanceissupposedtobelowerthantheintersitedistance.Onlycositeneighboursexistand
allofthemhavethesameimportance.
Thefollowingsectionliststheresultsofeachcombinationofoptionswithexplanationwherenecessary.

436

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

5.7.2.1 Strategy:PNOffsetperCell
Sincetherestrictionsofneighbourhoodonlyapplytocositeswiththesameimportanceandintersitedistancesaregreater
thanreusedistances,everycellhasthesamepriority.Then,thePNoffsetallocationtocellsisperformedinanalphanumeric
order.
WithoutUseaMaximumofPNOffsets

WithUseaMaximumofPNOffsets

AtollallocatesthefirstthreePNoffsetsinthedomain(4,8
and 12) to the Site0s cells. Under given constraints of
neighbourhoodandreusedistance,samePNoffsetscanbe
allocatedtoeachsitescells.

AtollallocatesthefirstthreePNoffsetsinthedomain(4,8
and12)totheSite0scells.Asitisallowedtouseamaximum
of PN offsets, Atoll allocates different PN offsets to each
sitescellssothatthereisleastrepetition.

5.7.2.2 Strategy:AdjacentPNClustersPerSite
Sincetherestrictionsofneighbourhoodonlyapplytocositeswiththesameimportanceandintersitedistancesaregreater
thanreusedistances,everycellhasthesamepriority.Then,thePNoffsetallocationtocellsisperformedinanalphanumeric
order.
WithoutUseaMaximumofPNOffsets

WithUseaMaximumofPNOffsets

AtollallocatesaPNclusterofadjacentPNoffsetstoSite0and As it is possible to use a maximum of PN offsets, Atoll

then,onePNoffsetofthePNclustertoeachcell.Undergiven allocatesdifferentPNclustersofadjacentPNoffsetstosites
constraintsofneighbourhoodandreusedistance,thesame sothatthereisleastrepetitionofPNoffsets.
PNclustercanbeallocatedtoeachsiteandsamePNoffsets
toeachsitescells.

437

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

5.7.2.3 Strategy:DistributedPNClustersPerSite
Sincetherestrictionsofneighbourhoodonlyapplytocositeswiththesameimportanceandintersitedistancesaregreater
thanreusedistances,everycellhasthesamepriority.Then,thePNoffsetallocationtocellsisperformedinanalphanumeric
order.
WithoutUseaMaximumofPNOffsets

WithUseaMaximumofPNOffsets

AtollallocatesaPNclusterofdistributedPNoffsetstoSite0 As it is possible to use a maximum of PN offsets, Atoll

andthen,onePNoffsetofthePNclustertoeachcell.Under allocates different PN clusters of distributed PN offsets to
givenconstraintsofneighbourhoodandreusedistance,the sitessothatthereisleastrepetitionofPNoffsets.
samePNclustercanbeallocatedtoeachsiteandsamePN
offsetstoeachsitescells.

5.8 AutomaticGSMCDMANeighbourAllocation
5.8.1 Overview
YoucanautomaticallycalculateandallocateneighboursbetweenGSM/TDMAandCDMA2000networks.InAtoll,itiscalled
intertechnologyneighbourallocation.
Intertechnologyhandoverisusedintwocases:

WhentheCDMAcoverageisnotcontinuous.Inthiscase,theCDMAcoverageisextendedbyCDMAGSMhandover
intotheGSMnetwork,
Andinordertobalancetrafficandservicedistributionbetweenbothnetworks.

Notethattheautomaticintertechnologyneighbourallocationalgorithmtakesintoaccountbothcases.
Inordertobeabletousetheintertechnologyneighbourallocationalgorithm,youmusthave:

An.atldocumentcontainingtheGSM/TDMAnetwork,GSM.atl,andanotheronecontainingtheCDMA2000network,
CDMA.atl,
AnexistinglinkontheTransmittersfolderofGSM.atlintoCDMA.atl.

The external neighbour allocation algorithm takes into account all the GSM TBC transmitters. It means that all the TBC
transmitters of GSM.atl are potential neighbours. The cells to be allocated will be called TBA cells which, being cells of
CDMA.atl,fulfillfollowingconditions:

Theyareactive,
TheysatisfythefiltercriteriaappliedtoTransmittersfolder,
Theyarelocatedinsidethefocuszone,
Theybelongtothefolderforwhichallocationhasbeenexecuted.ThisfoldercanbeeithertheTransmittersfolderor
agroupoftransmitterssubfolder.

OnlyCDMATBAcellsmaybeassignedneighbours.

5.8.2 AutomaticAllocationDescription
Theallocationalgorithmtakesintoaccountcriterialistedbelow:

438

Theintertransmitterdistance,
Themaximumnumberofneighboursfixed,
Allocationoptions,

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

Theselectedallocationstrategy,

Twoallocationstrategiesareavailable:thefirstoneisbasedondistanceandthesecondoneoncoverageoverlapping.
WeassumewehaveaCDMAreferencecell,A,andaGSMcandidateneighbour,transmitterB.

5.8.2.1 AlgorithmBasedonDistance
Whentheautomaticallocationstarts,Atollchecksthefollowingconditions:

The distance between the CDMA reference cell and the GSM neighbour must be less than the userdefinable
maximumintersitedistance.IfthedistancebetweentheCDMAreferencecellandtheGSMneighbourisgreaterthan
thisvalue,thenthecandidateneighbourisdiscarded.
Atoll calculates the effective distance, which corresponds to the real intertransmitter distance weighted by the
azimuthsofantennas.Forinformationontheeffectivedistancecalculation,see"CalculationoftheInterTransmitter
Distance"onpage 430.

Thecalculationoptions,

Carriers:Thisoptionenablesyoutoselectthecarrier(s)onwhichyouwanttoruntheallocation.Youmaychooseoneormore
carriers.Atollwillallocateneighbourstocellsusingtheselectedcarriers.
Forcecositecellsasneighbours:ItenablesyoutoautomaticallyincludeGSMtransmitterslocatedonthesamesiteasthe
referenceCDMAcellinthecandidateneighbourlist.Thisoptionisautomaticallyselected.
Force exceptional pairs: This option enables you to force/forbid some neighbourhood relationships. Therefore, you may
force/forbidaGSMtransmittertobecandidateneighbourofthereferenceCDMAcell.
Deleteexistingneighbours:WhenselectingtheDeleteexistingneighboursoption,Atolldeletesallthecurrentneighboursand
carriesoutanewneighbourallocation.Ifnotselected,existingneighboursarekept.

Theimportanceofneighbours.

Importancevaluesareusedbytheallocationalgorithmtoranktheneighbours.Atolllistsallneighboursandsortsthemby
importance value so as to eliminate some of them from the neighbour list if the maximum number of neighbours to be
allocatedtoeachcellisexceeded.Ifweconsiderthecaseforwhichthereare15candidateneighboursandthemaximum
numberofneighbourstobeallocatedtothereferencecellis8.Amongthese15candidateneighbours,only8(havingthe
highest importance values) will be allocated to the reference cell. Note that the maximum number of intertechnology
neighbourscanbedefinedatthecelllevel(propertydialogueorcelltable).Ifdefinedthere,thisvalueistakenintoaccount
insteadofthedefaultoneavailableintheNeighbourAllocationdialogue.
Asindicatedinthetablebelow,theneighbourimportancedependsonthedistanceandontheneighbourhoodcause;this
valuevariesbetween0to100%.
Neighbourhoodcause

When

Importancevalue

Existingneighbour

IftheDeleteexistingneighboursoptionisnotselected

Existingimportance

Exceptionalpair

IftheForceexceptionalpairsoptionisselected

100%

Cositetransmitter

IftheForcecositecellsasneighboursoptionisselected

100%

Neighbourhoodrelationshipthat
fulfilsdistanceconditions

Ifthemaximumdistanceisnotexceeded

d1 ---------d max

Where d istheeffectivedistancebetweentheCDMAreferencecellandtheGSMneighbourand d max isthemaximuminter

sitedistance.
IntheResultspart,Atollprovidesthelistofneighbours,thenumberofneighboursandthemaximumnumberofneighbours
allowedforeachcell.Inaddition,itindicatestheimportance(in%)ofeachneighbourandtheallocationreason.Therefore,a
neighbour may be marked as exceptional pair, cosite, or distance. For neighbours accepted for distance reasons, Atoll
displaysthedistancefromthereferencecell(m).Finally,ifcellshavepreviousallocationsinthelist,neighboursaremarked
asexisting.

5.8.2.2 AlgorithmBasedonCoverageOverlapping
Whenautomaticallocationstarts,Atollchecksfollowingconditions:

The distance between the CDMA reference cell and the GSM neighbour must be less than the userdefinable
maximumintersitedistance.IfthedistancebetweentheCDMAreferencecellandtheGSMneighbourisgreaterthan
thisvalue,thenthecandidateneighbourisdiscarded.

439

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

Atoll calculates the effective distance, which corresponds to the real intertransmitter distance weighted by the
azimuthsofantennas.Forinformationontheeffectivedistancecalculation,see"CalculationoftheInterTransmitter
Distance"onpage 430.

Thecalculationoptions,

Carriers:Thisoptionenablesyoutoselectthecarrier(s)onwhichyouwanttoruntheallocation.Youmaychooseoneormore
carriers.Atollwillallocateneighbourstocellsusingtheselectedcarriers.
Forcecositecellsasneighbours:ItenablesyoutoautomaticallyincludeGSMtransmitterslocatedonthesamesiteasthe
referenceCDMAcellinthecandidateneighbourlist.Thisoptionisautomaticallyselected.
Force exceptional pairs: This option enables you to force/forbid some neighbourhood relationships. Therefore, you may
force/forbidaGSMtransmittertobecandidateneighbourofthereferenceCDMAcell.
Deleteexistingneighbours:WhenselectingtheDeleteexistingneighboursoption,Atolldeletesallthecurrentneighboursand
carriesoutanewneighbourallocation.Ifnotselected,existingneighboursarekept.

Theremustbeanoverlappingzone( S A S B )withagivencelledgecoverageprobabilitywhere:

FourdifferentcasesmaybeconsideredforSA:

1stcase:SAistheareawherethecellAisthebestservingcelloftheCDMAnetwork.
ThepilotsignalreceivedfromAisgreaterthantheminimumpilotsignallevel,
ThepilotqualityfromAexceedsauserdefinableminimumvalue(minimumEc/I0)andisthehighestone.
Inthiscase,theEc/I0marginmustbeequalto0dBandthemaxEc/I0optiondisabled.

2ndcase:SArepresentstheareawherethepilotqualityfromthecellAstratsdecreasingbutthecellAisstillthe
bestservingcelloftheCDMAnetwork.
TheEc/I0marginmustbeequalto0dB,themaxEc/I0optionselectedandamaximumEc/I0userdefined.

ThepilotsignalreceivedfromAisgreaterthantheminimumpilotsignallevel,
ThepilotqualityfromAexceedstheminimumEc/I0butislowerthanthemaximumEc/I0.
ThepilotqualityfromAisthehighestone.

3rdcase:SArepresentstheareawherethecellAisnotthebestservingcellbutcanentertheactiveset.
Here,theEc/I0marginhastobedifferentfrom0dBandthemaxEc/I0optiondisabled.

ThepilotsignalreceivedfromAisgreaterthantheminimumpilotsignallevel,
ThepilotqualityfromAiswithinamarginfromthebestEc/I0,wherethebestEc/I0exceedstheminimumEc/
I0.
4thcase:SArepresentstheareawhere:
ThepilotsignalreceivedfromAisgreaterthantheminimumpilotsignallevel,
ThepilotqualityfromAiswithinamarginfromthebestEc/I0(wherethebestEc/I0exceedstheminimumEc/
I0)andlowerthanthemaximumEc/I0.
Inthiscase,themarginmustbedifferentfrom0dB,themaxEc/I0optionselectedandamaximumEc/I0user
defined.

TwodifferentcasesmaybeconsideredforSB:

1stcase:SBistheareawherethecellBisthebestservingcelloftheGSMnetwork.
Inthiscase,themarginmustbesetto0dB.

ThesignallevelreceivedfromBontheBCCHTRXtypeexceedstheuserdefinedminimumthresholdandisthe
highestone.
2ndcase:Themarginisdifferentfrom0dBandSBistheareawhere:
ThesignallevelreceivedfromBontheBCCHTRXtypeexceedstheuserdefinedminimumthresholdandis
withinamarginfromthebestBCCHsignallevel.

SA SB
- 100 )andcomparesthisvaluetothe%minimumcoveredarea.If
Atollcalculatesthepercentageofcoveredarea( ----------------SA
thispercentageisnotexceeded,thecandidateneighbourBisdiscarded.
Candidateneighboursfulfillingcoverageconditionsaresortedindescendingorderwithrespecttopercentageofcovered
area.

440

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

AT321_TRR_E1

Whentheautomaticallocationisbasedoncoverageoverlapping,werecommendyouto
performtwosuccessiveautomaticallocations:

AfirstallocationinordertofindhandoversduetononcontinuousCDMAcoverage.
Inthiscase,youhavetoselectthemaxEc/I0optionanddefineahighenoughvalue.
Asecondallocationinordertocompletethepreviouslistwithhandoversmotivated
forreasonsoftrafficandservicedistribution.Here,themaxEc/I0optionmustbe
disabled.

Theimportanceofneighbours.

Importancevaluesareusedbytheallocationalgorithmtoranktheneighboursaccordingtothedistanceandtheallocation
reason.Atolllistsallneighboursandsortsthembyimportancevaluesoastoeliminatesomeofthemfromtheneighbourlist
ifthemaximumnumberofneighbourstobeallocatedtoeachcellisexceeded.Ifweconsiderthecaseforwhichthereare15
candidateneighboursandthemaximumnumberofneighbourstobeallocatedtothereferencecellis8.Amongthese15
candidateneighbours,only8(havingthehighestimportancevalues)willbeallocatedtothereferencecell.Notethatthe
maximumnumberofintertechnologyneighbourscanbedefinedatthecelllevel(propertydialogueorcelltable).Ifdefined
there,thisvalueistakenintoaccountinsteadofthedefaultoneavailableintheNeighbourAllocationdialogue.
Asindicatedinthetablebelow,theneighbourimportancedependsontheneighbourhoodcause;thisvaluevariesbetween
0to100%.
Neighbourhoodreason

When

Importancevalue

Existingneighbour

IftheDeleteexistingneighboursoptionisnotselected

Existingimportance

Exceptionalpair

IftheForceexceptionalpairsoptionisselected

100%

Cositetransmitter

IftheForcecositecellsasneighboursoptionisselected

IF

Neighbourhoodrelationshipthat
fulfilscoverageconditions

Ifthe%minimumcoveredareaisexceeded

IF

Exceptthecaseofforcedneighbours(importance=100%),priorityassignedtoeachneighbourhoodcauseisdetermined
usingtheImportanceFunction(IF).TheIFconsidersthefollowingfactorsforcalculatingtheimportance:

The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.
d Di = 1 ---------d max
d istheeffectivedistance(inm).Itcorrespondstotherealintertransmitterdistanceweightedbytheazimuthsof
antennas.Forinformationontheeffectivedistancecalculation,see"CalculationoftheInterTransmitterDistance"on
page 430.
d max isthemaximumdistancebetweenthereferencetransmitterandapossibleneighbour.

Thecositefactor(C):aBoolean,
Theoverlappingfactor(O):thepercentageofoverlapping.

TheIFisuserdefinableusingtheMinimportanceandMaximportancefields.
Factor

Minimportance

Defaultvalue

Maximportance

Defaultvalue

Distancefactor(Di)

Min(Di)

1%

Max(Di)

10%

Overlappingfactor(O)

Min(O)

10%

Max(O)

60%

Cositefactor(C)

Min(C)

60%

Max(C)

100%

TheIFevaluatesimportanceasfollows:
CositeNeighbourhood
cause

IF

ResultingIFusingthedefaultvalues
fromthetableabove

No

Min(O)+Delta(O){Max(Di)(Di)+(100%Max(Di))(O)}

10%+50%{10%(Di)+90%(O)}

Yes

Min(C)+Delta(C){Max(Di)(Di)/(Max(Di)+Max(O))+
Max(O)(O)/(Max(Di)+Max(O))}

60%+40%{1/7%(Di)+6/7%(O)}

Where
Delta(X)=Max(X)Min(X)

441

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter5:CDMA2000Networks

Forsk2014

SetMin(Di)andMax(Di)to0%ifyoudonotwanttotakeintoaccountthedistance
factorintheimportancecalculation.
IftheMinandMaxvaluerangesoftheimportancefunctionfactorsdonotoverlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum andmaximum importance fields, neighbours will beranked inthis order:
cositeneighboursandneighboursallocatedbasedoncoverageoverlapping.
If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.

IntheResultspart,Atollprovidesthelistofneighbours,thenumberofneighboursandthemaximumnumberofneighbours
allowedforeachcell.Inaddition,itindicatestheimportance(in%)ofeachneighbourandtheallocationreason.Therefore,a
neighbourmaybemarkedasexceptionalpair,cositeorcoverage.Forneighboursacceptedforcositeandcoveragereasons,
Atolldisplaysthepercentageofareameetingthecoverageconditionsandthecorrespondingsurfacearea(km2).Finally,if
cellshavepreviousallocationsinthelist,neighboursaremarkedasexisting.

Nopredictionstudyisneededtoperformanautomaticneighbourallocation.When
starting an automatic neighbour allocation, Atoll automatically calculates the path
lossmatricesifnotfound.
Aforbiddenneighbourmustnotbelistedasneighbourexceptiftheneighbourhood
relationship already exists and the Delete existing neighbours option is unchecked
whenyoustartthenewallocation.Inthiscase,AtolldisplaysawarningintheEvent
viewerindicatingthattheconstraintontheforbiddenneighbourwillbeignoredby
algorithmbecausetheneighbouralreadyexists.
In the Results, Atoll displays only the cells for which it finds new neighbours.
Therefore, if a TBA cell has already reached its maximum number of neighbours
beforestartingthenewallocation,itwillnotappearintheResultstable.

5.8.2.3 DeleteExistingNeighboursOption
Asexplainedabove,AtollkeepstheexistingintertechnologyneighbourswhentheDeleteexistingneighboursoptionisnot
checked.Weassumethatwehaveanexistingallocationofintertechnologyneighbours.
A new TBA cell i is created in CDMA.atl. Therefore, if you start a new allocation without selecting the Delete existing
neighboursoption,Atolldeterminestheneighbourlistofthecelli,
If you change some allocation criteria (e.g. increase the maximum number of neighbours or create a new GSM TBC
transmitter)andstartanewallocationwithoutselectingtheDeleteexistingneighboursoption,itexaminestheneighbourlist
ofTBAcellsandchecksallocationcriteriaifthereisspaceintheirneighbourlists.AnewGSMTBCtransmittercanenterthe
TBAcellneighbourlistifallocationcriteriaaresatisfied.Itwillbethefirstoneintheneighbourlist.

442

Chapter6
LTENetworks
ThischapterdescribesLTEcalculations.

Inthischapter,thefollowingareexplained:

"Definitions"onpage 445

"CalculationQuickReference"onpage 450

"AvailableCalculations"onpage 470

"CalculationDetails"onpage 485

"AutomaticPlanningAlgorithms"onpage 562

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

6 LTENetworks
ThischapterdescribesallthecalculationsperformedinAtollLTEdocuments.Thefirstpartofthischapterlistsalltheinput
parametersintheLTEdocuments,theirsignificance,locationintheAtollGUI,andtheirusage.Italsocontainsthelistsofthe
formulasusedforthecalculations.
The second part describes all the calculation processes, i.e., signal level coverage predictions, point analysis calculations,
signalqualitycoveragepredictions,calculationsonsubscriberlists,andMonteCarlosimulations.Thecalculationalgorithms
usedbythesecalculationprocessesareavailableinthenextpart.
Thethirdpartdescribesallthecalculationalgorithmsusedinallthecalculations.Thesealgorithmsincludethecalculationof
signallevels,noise,andinterferencefordownlinkanduplinkconsideringpowercontrol,MIMO,smartantennas,andtheradio
resourcemanagementalgorithmsusedbythedifferentavailableschedulers.
If you are new to LTE, you can also see the Glossary of LTE Terms in the User Manual for information on LTE terms and
concepts,especiallyinthecontextoftheiruserinAtoll.

All the calculations are performed on TBC (to be calculated) transmitters. For the
definitionofTBCtransmitterspleasereferto"PathLossMatrices"onpage 99.
A cell refers to a transmittercarrier (TXc) pair. The cell being studied during a
calculationisreferredtoasTXi(ic)inthischapter.
Allthecalculationalgorithmsinthissectionaredescribedfortwotypesofcells:

Astudiedcell(representedbythesubscript"i")comprisingthestudiedtransmitter
TXianditscarrieric.Itisthecellwhichiscurrentlythefocusofthecalculation.For
example,avictimcellwhencalculatingtheinterferenceitisreceivingfromother
cells.
Othercells(representedbythesubscript"j")comprisingtheothertransmitterTXj
anditscarrierjc.Theothercellsinthenetworkcanbeinterferingcells(downlink)
ortheservingcellsofinterferingmobiles(uplink).
Allthecalculationalgorithmsinthissectionaredescribedfortwotypesofreceivers:

Mi:Apixel(coveragepredictions),subscriber(calculationsonsubscriberlists),or
mobile(MonteCarlosimulations)covered/servedbythestudiedcellTXi(ic).
Mj:Amobile(MonteCarlosimulations)covered/servedbyanyothercellTXj(jc).
Logarithmsusedinthischapter(Logfunction)arebase10unlessstatedotherwise.

6.1 Definitions
Thistableliststheinputtocalculations,coveragepredictions,andsimulations.
Name

Value

Unit

Description

D Frame

3GPPparameter(Fixedto10 msinAtoll)

ms

Frameduration

W FB

3GPPparameter(Fixedto180 kHzinAtoll)

kHz

Widthofaresource/frequencyblock

3GPPparameter(Fixedto15 kHzinAtoll)

kHz

Subcarrierwidth

N FB SS PBCH

3GPPparameter(Fixedto6inAtoll)

None

NumberoffrequencyblocksforSS
andPBCHtransmission

N SF Frame

3GPPparameter(Fixedto10inAtoll)

None

Numberofsubframesperframe

N Slots SF

3GPPparameter(Fixedto2inAtoll)

None

Numberofslotspersubframe

1.38x1023

J/K

Boltzmannsconstant

290

Ambienttemperature

n0

Calculationresult( 10 Log K T 1000 = 174dBm/Hz )

dBm/Hz

Powerspectraldensityofthermal
noise

D CP

Frameconfigurationor,otherwise,globalparameter

None

Cyclicprefixduration

N SD PDCCH

Frameconfigurationor,otherwise,globalparameter

SD

NumberofPDCCHsymboldurations
persubframe

N FB PUCCH

Frameconfigurationor,otherwise,globalparameter

RB

AveragenumberofPUCCH
frequencyblocksperframe

445

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

Name

Value

Unit

Description

TDD

Globalparameter

None

SwitchingpointperiodicityforTDD
frames

M PC

Globalparameter

dB

Uplinkpowercontroladjustment
margin

CNR Min

Globalparametera

dB

Minimumsignaltothermalnoise
threshold(interferercutoff)

W Channel

Frequencybandparameter

MHz

Channelbandwidth

First

Frequencybandparameter

None

Firstchannelnumberofthe
frequencyband

N Channel

Last

Frequencybandparameter

None

Lastchannelnumberofthe
frequencyband

F Start TDD

Frequencybandparameter

MHz

StartfrequencyoftheTDDfrequency
band

F Start FDD DL

Frequencybandparameter

MHz

DLstartfrequencyoftheFDD
frequencyband

F Start FDD UL

Frequencybandparameter

MHz

ULstartfrequencyoftheFDD
frequencyband

F Sampling

Frequencybandparameter

MHz

Samplingfrequency

f ACS

Frequencybandparameter

dB

Adjacentchannelsuppressionfactor

N FB

Frequencybandparameter

None

Numberoffrequencyblocksper
channelbandwidth

ICS Band

Frequencybandparameter

MHz

Interchannelspacing

CN Band

Frequencybandparameter

None

Channelnumberstep

N SCa Total

F Sampling
-)
Calculationresult( N SCa Total = -------------------F

None

Totalnumberofsubcarriers

N SCa Used

N FB W FB
-)
Calculationresult( N SCa Used = -----------------------F

None

Numberofusedsubcarriers

N SCa DC

Hardcodedparameter( N SCa DC = 1 )

None

NumberofDCsubcarriers

N SCa Guard

Calculationresult
( N SCa Guard = N SCa Total N SCa Used N SCa DC )

None

Numberofguardsubcarriers

i Layer

Layerparameter

None

Layerindex

p Layer

Layerparameter

None

Layerpriority

V Layer

Max

Layerparameter

km/h

Maximummobilespeedsupported
byalayer

M Layer

Layerparameter

dB

Layerselectionmargin

CE

Frameconfigurationparameter

dB

Celledgepowerboost

N FB CE0

Frameconfigurationparameter

None

Numberofcelledgefrequency
blocksforPSSID0

N FB CE1

Frameconfigurationparameter

None

Numberofcelledgefrequency
blocksforPSSID1

N FB CE2

Frameconfigurationparameter

None

Numberofcelledgefrequency
blocksforPSSID2

Bearerparameter

None

Bearerindex

Mod B

Bearerparameter

None

Modulationusedbythebearer

CR B

Bearerparameter

None

Codingrateofthebearer

Bearerparameter

bits/
symbol

Bearerefficiency

N Channel

446

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Name

Value

Unit

Description

TB

Bearerparameter

dB

Bearerselectionthreshold

TP S1 DL

Site

Siteparameter

kbps

MaximumS1interfacesitedownlink
throughput

Site

Siteparameter

kbps

MaximumS1interfacesiteuplink
throughput

Transmitterparameter(userdefinedorcalculatedfromtransmitter
equipmentcharacteristics)

dB

Transmitternoisefigure

N Ant TX

Transmitterparameter

None

Numberofantennaportsusedfor
transmission

N Ant RX

Transmitterparameter

None

Numberofantennaportsusedfor
reception

TX

Transmitterantennaparameter

dB

Antennagain

TX

Transmitterparameter(userdefinedorcalculatedfromtransmitter
equipmentcharacteristics)

dB

Transmitterloss

TX

Smartantennaparameter

None

Numberofsmartantennaelements

Array

Smartantennaparameter

dB

Arraygainoffset

Combining

Smartantennaparameter

dB

Powercombininggainoffset

G SA

Smartantennaparameter

dB

Diversitygain(crosspolarisation)

N Channel

Cellparameter

None

Cellschannelnumber

ID

Cellparameter

None

CellsphysicalID

ID SSS

ID
Cellparameter: Floor --------
3

None

CellsSSSID(oneof168pseudo
randomsequences)

ID PSS

Cellparameter: ID Mod3

None

CellsPSSID(oneof3cyclicshiftsof
thesequencegivenbytheSSSID)

Shift

Cellparameter: ID Mod6

None

Cellsvshift(alsoknownasthe
referencesignalhoppingindex)

P Max

Cellparameter

dBm

Maximumcelltransmissionpower

EPRE DLRS

Cellparameter

dBm

Energyperresourceelementforthe
downlinkreferencesignals
(Userdefinedorcalculated)

EPRE SS

Cellparameter

dB

Energyperresourceelementoffset
fortheSSwithrespecttothe
downlinkreferencesignalEPRE

EPRE PBCH

Cellparameter

dB

Energyperresourceelementoffset
forthePBCHwithrespecttothe
downlinkreferencesignalEPRE

EPRE PDCCH

Cellparameter

dB

Energyperresourceelementoffset
forthePDCCHwithrespecttothe
downlinkreferencesignalEPRE

EPRE PDSCH

Cellparameter

dB

Energyperresourceelementoffset
forthePDSCHwithrespecttothe
downlinkreferencesignalEPRE

T RSRP

Cellparameter

dB

MinimumRequiredRSRP

TL DL

Cellparameter

Downlinktrafficload

r DL CE

Cellparameter

Downlinkcelledgetrafficratio

TL UL

Cellparameter

Uplinktrafficload

TL DL Max

Cellparameter

Maximumdownlinktrafficload

TP S1 UL
nf

G
L

TX

E SA
G SA
G SA

Div

447

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

Name

Value

Unit

Description

TL UL Max

Cellparameter

Maximumuplinktrafficload

NRUL

Cellparameter

dB

Uplinknoiserise

NR UL ICIC

Cellparameter

dB

ICICuplinknoiserise

NRUL Max

Cellparameter

dB

Maximumuplinknoiserise

N Users Max

Cellparameter

None

Maximumnumberofuserspercell

N Users DL

Cellparameter

None

Numberofusersconnectedtothe
cellindownlink

N Users UL

Cellparameter

None

Numberofusersconnectedtothe
cellinuplink

L Path

Cellparameter

dB

Deltapathlossthreshold

N SF DL

Cellparameter

None

Numberofdownlinksubframesper
frame

N SF UL

Cellparameter

None

Numberofuplinksubframesper
frame

N TDD SSF

TX i ic

Cellparameter

None

NumberofTDDspecialsubframes
perframe

D Reuse

Cellparameter

ChannelandphysicalcellIDreuse
distance

G MU MIMO DL

Cellparameter

None

DownlinkMUMIMOgain

G MU MIMO UL

Cellparameter

None

UplinkMUMIMOgain

FPC

Cellparameter

None

Fractionalpowercontrolfactor

CINR PUSCH Max

Cellparameter

dB

MaximumPUSCHC/(I+N)

Inter Tech

Cellparameter

dB

Intertechnologydownlinknoiserise

Inter Tech

Cellparameter

dB

Intertechnologyuplinknoiserise

AU DL

Cellparameter

DownlinkAASusageratio

TX i ic

ProportionalFairschedulerparameter

None

Downlinkmultiuserdiversitygain
(MUG)

TX ic
i

ProportionalFairschedulerparameter

None

Uplinkmultiuserdiversitygain
(MUG)

CINR MUG

ProportionalFairschedulerparameter

dB

MaximumC/(I+N)abovewhichno
MUGgainisapplied

T AMS UL

CellLTEequipmentparameter

dB

AdaptiveMIMOswitchingthreshold

T MU MIMO UL

CellLTEequipmentparameter

dB

UplinkMUMIMOactivation
threshold

G SU MIMO UL

CellLTEequipmentparameter

None

MaximumuplinkSUMIMOgain

G Div UL

CellLTEequipmentparameter

dB

Receive,SUMIMO,orMUMIMO
diversitygain

QCI

Serviceparameter

None

QoSclassidentifier(QCI)ofthe
service

p QCI

Serviceparameter(automaticallydeterminedfromtheQCI)

None

ServicesQCIpriority

p Service

Serviceparameter

None

Userdefinedservicepriority

B DL Highest

Serviceparameter

None

Highestbearerusedbyaservicein
thedownlink

B UL Highest

Serviceparameter

None

Highestbearerusedbyaservicein
theuplink

NRDL

NRUL

G MUG DL
G MUG UL
Max

Max

448

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Name

Value

Unit

Description

B DL Lowest

Serviceparameter

None

Lowestbearerusedbyaservicein
thedownlink

B UL Lowest

Serviceparameter

None

Lowestbearerusedbyaservicein
theuplink

f Act

UL

Serviceparameter

Uplinkactivityfactor

f Act

DL

Serviceparameter

Downlinkactivityfactor

TPD Min UL

Serviceparameter

kbps

Minimumthroughputdemandinthe
uplink(GuaranteedBitRate,GBR)

TPD Min DL

Serviceparameter

kbps

Minimumthroughputdemandinthe
downlink(GuaranteedBitRate,GBR)

TPD Max UL

Serviceparameter

kbps

Maximumthroughputdemandinthe
uplink(MaximumBitRate,MBR)

TPD Max DL

Serviceparameter

kbps

Maximumthroughputdemandinthe
downlink(MaximumBitRate,MBR)

UL

Serviceparameter

kbps

Averagerequestedthroughputinthe
uplink

TP Average

DL

Serviceparameter

kbps

Averagerequestedthroughputinthe
downlink

TP Offset

Serviceparameter

kbps

Throughputoffset

f TP Scaling

Serviceparameter

Scalingfactor

L Body

Serviceparameter

dB

Bodyloss

N FB UL

Min

Serviceparameter

None

Minimumnumberoffrequency
blocks

P Min

Terminalparameter

dBm

Minimumterminalpower

P Max

Terminalparameter

dBm

Maximumterminalpower

nf

Terminalparameter

dB

Terminalnoisefigure

Terminalparameter

dB

Terminalantennagain

Terminalparameter

dB

Terminalloss

N Ant TX

Terminalparameter

None

Numberofantennaportsfor
transmission

N Ant RX

Terminalparameter

None

Numberofantennaportsfor
reception

Max DL

Terminalparameter

None

Maximumnumberofdownlink
secondarycells

Max UL

Terminalparameter

None

Maximumnumberofuplink
secondarycells

Max DL

UEcategoryparameter

Bits

Maximumnumberoftransportblock
bitsperTTI(subframe)indownlink

Max UL

UEcategoryparameter

Bits

Maximumnumberoftransportblock
bitsperTTI(subframe)inuplink

UEcategoryparameter

None

Highestmodulationsupportedin
uplink

N Ant UE

UEcategoryparameter

None

Maximumnumberofreception
antennaportssupportedindownlink

T AMS DL

TerminalLTEequipmentparameter

dB

AdaptiveMIMOswitchingthreshold

G SU MIMO DL

TerminalLTEequipmentparameter

None

MaximumdownlinkSUMIMOgain

T MU MIMO DL

TerminalLTEequipmentparameter

dB

DownlinkMUMIMOactivation
threshold

TP Average

N SCell
N SCell

N TBB TTI
N TBB TTI

Max UL

Mod UE

Max DL

Max

449

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

Name

Value

Unit

Description

G Div PBCH

TerminalLTEequipmentparameter

dB

PBCHdiversitygain

G Div PDCCH

TerminalLTEequipmentparameter

dB

PDCCHdiversitygain

G Div DL

TerminalLTEequipmentparameter

dB

Transmit,SUMIMO,orMUMIMO
diversitygain

UL

Clutterparameter

dB

Additionaluplinkdiversitygain

G Div

DL

Clutterparameter

dB

Additionaldownlinkdiversitygain

f SU MIMO

Clutterparameter

None

SUMIMOgainfactor

L Indoor

Clutterparameter

dB

Indoorloss

L Path

Propagationmodelresult

dB

Pathloss

G Div

F
ICP DL

Networkparameter

None

Intertechnologydownlinkchannel
protectionratioforafrequency
offset F betweentheinterfered
andinterferingfrequencychannels

M Shadowing Model

MonteCarlosimulations:Randomresultcalculatedfrommodel
standarddeviation
CoveragePredictions:Resultcalculatedfromcelledgecoverage
probabilityandmodelstandarddeviation

dB

Modelshadowingmargin

M Shadowing C I

CoveragePredictions:Resultcalculatedfromcelledgecoverage
probabilityandC/Istandarddeviation

dB

C/Ishadowingmargin

Anyinterferingcellwhosesignaltothermalnoiseratioislessthan CNR Min willbediscarded.

a.

6.2 CalculationQuickReference
Thefollowingtableslisttheformulasusedincalculations.

6.2.1 DownlinkTransmissionPowersCalculation
Name

Value

Unit

Description

N Sym SRB

N SCa FB N SD Slot N Slot SF

None

Numberofsymbolsperscheduler
resourceblock

N Sym SSF

DwPTS

N SCa FB N SD SSF

None

NumberofDwPTSmodulation
symbolsperschedulerresource
blockintheTDDspecialsubframes

N SCa FB

W FB
--------F

None

Numberofsubcarriersper
frequencyblock

None

Totalnumberofsymbolsin
downlink

None

Numberofsymbolsreservedfor
downlinkreferencesignalsinone
schedulerresourceblock

None

Numberofsymbolsreservedfor
downlinkreferencesignalsin
DwPTSofoneTDDspecial
subframe

TX ic
i

N Sym DL

TX i ic

N Res SRB

TX ic
i
N Res DwPTS

450

DwPTS

TX ic
i

N FB

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

N Sym SRB N SF DL + N FB

TX ic
i

DwPTS

N TDD SSF N Sym SSF

TX i ic

if N Ant TX = 1
8

TX i ic
16
if N Ant TX = 2

TX i ic

24 if N Ant TX = 4or8

See"DownlinkTransmissionPowerCalculation"onpage 485

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Name
TX ic
i

N Sym Res

Value

Unit

Description

None

Numberofsymbolsreservedfor
downlinkreferencesignalsinone
frame

None

Numberofsymbolsfordownlink
referencesignalsinonescheduler
resourceblock

None

Numberofsymbolsfordownlink
referencesignalsinDwPTSofone
TDDspecialsubframe

TX i ic

None

Numberofsymbolsfordownlink
referencesignalsinoneframe

Where N Sym PSS = 2 N FB SS PBCH N SCa FB = 144

None

NumberofsymbolsforthePSSand
theSSS

None

NumberofsymbolsforthePBCH

None

NumberofsymbolsforthePDCCH

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

N SF DL N FB

N DLRS DwPTS
TX i ic

N Sym DLRS

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

N Res DwPTS

TX ic

i
if N Ant TX = 1
8

TX i ic
8
if N Ant TX = 2

TX i ic

6 if N Ant TX = 4or8

TX ic
i
N DLRS SRB

TX i ic

TX ic
i

N Res SRB + N TDD SSF N FB

See"DownlinkTransmissionPowerCalculation"onpage 485
TX i ic

TX i ic

N SF DL N FB

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

N DLRS SRB + N TDD SSF N FB

N DLRS DwPTS

N Sym PSS + N Sym SSS = 288

N Sym SS

N Sym SSS = 2 N FB SS PBCH N SCa FB = 144

TX i ic

ExtendedCP:216
NormalCP:240

N Sym PBCH

TX ic

i
if N SD PDCCH = 0 :0

TX ic

TX ic

i
i
if N SD PDCCH = 1 AND N Ant TX 2 :

TX i ic

N Sym PDCCH

TX ic

TX ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

i
N i
N SCa FB 4 N FB
SD PDCCH

N SF DL

+ N SD PDCCH N SCa FB 4 N FB

Otherwise:
TX ic

TX i ic

N TDD SSF

TX ic

TX ic

i
i
N i
N SCa FB 2 Min 4 N Ant TX N FB
SD PDCCH

TX ic

TX ic

TX ic

i
i
i
+ Min 2 N SD PDCCH N SCa FB 2 Min 4 NAnt TX N FB

TX ic
i

N Sym PDSCH

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

TX i ic

N SF DL
TX i ic

N TDD SSF

TX ic
i

None

N Sym DL N Sym Res N Sym SS N Sym PBCH N Sym PDCCH

NumberofsymbolsforthePDSCH

TX ic

P i

Max -------------------
TX i ic
TX i ic
DwPTS
10
10 Log 10
N SD Slot N Slot SF N SF DL + N TDD SSF N SD SSF

TX ic

TX i ic

EPRE DLRS

TX ic

i
i

EPRE SS
EPRE PBCH
TX ic
--------------------------------------------------------------------i
10
10
dBm/Sym
+ N Sym PBCH 10
10 L og N Sym DLRS + N Sym SS 10

+ NSym PDCCH 10

TX i ic
EPRE PDCCH
-----------------------------------10

+ N Sym PDSCH 10

TX i ic
EPRE PDSCH
------------------------------------
10

Energyperresourceelementfor1
modulationsymbol(dBm/Sym)of
thedownlinkreferencesignals
WithreferencesignalEPRE
calculationmethodissetto
Calculated(equaldistributionof
unusedEPRE)

451

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

Name

Value

Unit

Description

TX ic

P i

Max
-------------------
TX ic
TX ic
i
i
DwPTS
10
10 Log 10
N SD Slot N Slot SF N SF DL + N TDD SSF N SD SSF

TX ic

TX ic
i

EPRE DLRS

TX ic

i
i

EPRE SS
EPRE PBCH
TX ic
--------------------------------------------------------------------i
10
10
dBm/Sym
10 L og N Sym Res + N Sym SS 10
+ N Sym PBCH 10

+ NSym PDCCH 10

TX i ic
EPRE
PDCCH
-----------------------------------10

+ N Sym PDSCH 10

TX i ic

EPRE
PDSCH
------------------------------------
10

Energyperresourceelementfor1
modulationsymbol(dBm/Sym)of
thedownlinkreferencesignals
WithreferencesignalEPRE
calculationmethodissetto
Calculated(withboost)or
Calculated(withoutboost)

EPRE SS

EPRE DLRS + EPRE SS

TX i ic

TX i ic

dBm/Sym

Energyperresourceelementfor1
modulationsymbol(dBm/Sym)of
theSS

TX ic
i
EPRE PBCH

TX ic
i
EPRE DLRS

TX ic
i
EPRE PBCH

dBm/Sym

Energyperresourceelementfor1
modulationsymbol(dBm/Sym)of
thePBCH

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

dBm/Sym

Energyperresourceelementfor1
modulationsymbol(dBm/Sym)of
thePDCCH

TX i ic

TX i ic

dBm/Sym

Energyperresourceelementfor1
modulationsymbol(dBm/Sym)of
thePDSCH

dbm/Sym

"Boosted"energyperresource
elementfor1modulationsymbol
(dBm/Sym)ofdownlinkreference
signalswhenthereferencesignal
EPREcalculationmethodissetto
Calculated(withboost)

dBm

Instantaneoustransmissionpower
ofthedownlinkreferencesignals

+ 10 Log N SCa FB N FB SS PBCH

dBm

Instantaneoustransmissionpower
oftheSS

EPRE PBCH + 10 Log N SCa FB N FB SS PBCH

dBm

Instantaneoustransmissionpower
ofthePBCH

TX i ic

N SymPDCCH

EPRE PDCCH + 10 Log ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------dBm

TX i ic
TX i ic
TX i ic
TXi ic

N SD PDCCH N SF DL + Min 2 N SD PDCCH N TDD SSF

Averagetransmissionpowerofthe
PDCCH

TX i ic

EPRE DLRS + EPRE PDCCH

EPRE PDCCH
TX i ic

EPRE DLRS + EPRE PDSCH

EPRE PDSCH

TX i ic

TX i ic
Sym Res
EPRE DLRS + 10 Log ------------------------ TXi ic

N Sym DLRS

TX i ic

EPRE DLRS

TX ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

P SS

EPRE SS

TX i ic

TX ic
i

P PDSCH

452

TX i ic

P PBCH

P PDCCH

TX ic

i
i
EPRE DLRS + 10 Log 2 N FB

P DLRS

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX ic
i

TX i ic
N
Sym

PDSCH
EPRE PDSCH + 10 Log --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

TX ic
TX ic
i
i
N
N Slot SF N SD PDCCH N SF DL
SD

Slot

TX i ic
TX i ic
DwPTS

+ N SD SSF Min 2 N SD PDCCH N TDD SSF

dBm

Averagetransmissionpowerofthe
PDSCH

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

6.2.2 CoandAdjacentChannelOverlapsCalculation
Name
TX ic
i
F Start

Value
TX ic
i
F Start Band

N TXi ic N First TXi ic

TX ic
TX ic
i
i
Channel
Channel

-
+ W Channel + ICS Band ------------------------------------------------------TX i ic

CN Band

TX i ic

TX i ic

F End

TX jc

TX i ic TX j jc

TX ic

TX jc

TX ic

TX jc

TX i ic TX j jc
H

TX ic

MHz

Startfrequencyforthechannel
numberassignedtoacell

MHz

Endfrequencyforthechannel
numberassignedtoacell

MHz

Cochanneloverlapbandwidth

None

Cochanneloverlapratio

MHz

Bandwidthofthelowerfrequency
adjacentchanneloverlap

None

Lowerfrequencyadjacentchannel
overlapratio

MHz

Bandwidthofthehigherfrequency
adjacentchanneloverlap

None

Higherfrequencyadjacentchannel
overlapratio

None

Adjacentchanneloverlapratio

None

Totaloverlapratio

TX i ic TX j jc

W ACO
L
---------------------------------TX j jc
W Channel

W ACO

TX ic

j
i
j
i
i
Min FEnd F Start Max F Start F Start W Channel

TX i ic TX j jc

r ACO

Description

TX i ic TX j jc

r CCO

TX ic

W CCO
----------------------------------TX j jc
W Channel

TX i ic TX j jc

TX i ic TX j jc

TX jc

j
i
j
i
Min FEnd F End Max F Start F Start

W CCO

W ACO

TX i ic

F Start + W Channel

Unit

TX j jc

TX i ic

Min F End F End

TX ic

TX jc

TX ic

i
j
i
+ W Channel Max F Start F End

TX i ic TX j jc

W ACO
H
---------------------------------TX j jc
W Channel

TX ic TX jc
i
j
r ACO
H

TX i ic TX j jc

TX ic TX jc
i
j

r ACO

r ACO

TX i ic TX j jc

TX i ic TX j jc

rO

r CCO

TX i ic TX j jc

+ r ACO

TX i ic TX j jc

+ r ACO

10

TX i ic
f ACS
----------------------10

6.2.3 SignalLevelCalculation(DL)
Thereceivedsignallevels(dBm)fromanycellTXi(ic)arecalculatedforapixel,subscriber,ormobileMiasfollows:
Name
TX i ic

C Max

Value
TX i ic

EIRP Max L Path M Shadowing Model L Indoor + G

L

Mi

Mi

TX i ic

TX i

TX i ic

TX i

TX i

TX i

+ 10 Log E SA +

Combining
G SA

TX ic
i

Mi

dbm

DownlinkmaxEIRP

dBm

Receiveddownlinkreferencesignal
level

dBm

RSEIRP

Div
G SA
M

Mi

L Ant L Body + f CP
TX i ic

TX i

Withoutsmartantennas: P DLRS + G Ant L

TX i ic

EIRP1 DLRS

EIRP1 DLRS L Path M Shadowing Model L Indoor + G

Mi

Receivedmaxcellpower

TX i

Withsmartantennas:
P Max + G Ant L

C DLRS

dBm

Mi

Mi

TX i ic

TX i ic

Description

L Ant L Body + f CP

Withoutsmartantennas: P Max + G Ant L

EIRP Max

Unit

TX i

Withsmartantennas:
TX i ic

TX i

P DLRS + G Ant L

TX i

TX i

+ 10 Log E SA +

Combining
G SA

453

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

Name
TX ic
i
C SS

Value
TX ic
i

EIRP1 SS
L

L Path M Shadowing Model L Indoor + G

M

TX i ic

TX i ic

C PBCH

TX i

+ G Ant L

TX i

+ G Ant L

TX i

TX i

+ 10 Log E SA +

Combining
G SA

TX i ic

Mi

Mi

TX i ic

TX i ic

C PDCCH

TX i

TX

i
G Ant

TX

TX

+ 10 Log E SA +

Combining
G SA

TX i ic
Mi

TX i ic

TX i

TX i

TX i

TX i

+ 10 Log E SA +

Combining
G SA

TX i ic

Mi

Mi

TX i

TX i

Array

P PDSCH + G SA + G SA

Combining

+ G SA

Div

+ G SA L

L Indoor + G

Mi

Mi

dBm/Sym

Receiveddownlinkreferencesignal
energyperresourceelement
(RSRP)

Mi

Mi

dBm/Sym

RSEIRP

dBm/Sym

ReceivedSSenergyperresource
element

dBm/Sym

SSEIRP

dBm/Sym

ReceivedPBCHenergyperresource
element

L Ant L Body + f CP
TX i ic

TX i

Withoutsmartantennas: EPRE DLRS + G Ant L

TX i ic

TX i

Withsmartantennas:

EIRP2 DLRS

TX i ic

TX i

EPRE DLRS + G Ant L

TX ic
i

EIRP2 SS

TX i ic

E SS

TX i

TX i

+ 10 Log E SA +

L Indoor + G

Mi

Mi

Mi

Mi

L Ant L Body + f CP
TX i ic

TX i ic

Combining
G SA

L Path M Shadowing Model

Withoutsmartantennas: EPRE SS

TX i

+ G Ant L

TX i

Withsmartantennas:
TX i ic

EPRE SS

454

PDSCHEIRP

TX i ic

E DLRS

E PBCH

dBm
TX i

EIRP2 DLRS L Path M Shadowing Model

TX i ic

TX i ic

ReceivedPDSCHsignallevel

TX i

Withsmartantennas:
TX i ic

EIRP2 SS

dBm

Mi

Mi

TX i ic

TX i ic

PDCCHEIRP

L Ant L Body + f CP

Withoutsmartantennas: P PDSCH + G Ant L

EIRP1 PDSCH

dBm
Div
G SA

EIRP1 PDSCH L Path M Shadowing Model L Indoor + G

L

ReceivedPDCCHsignallevel

TX i

Withsmartantennas:
TX i ic

P PDCCH + G Ant L

C PDSCH

dBm

Mi

Mi

TX i ic

TX i ic

PBCHEIRP

L Ant L Body + f CP

Withoutsmartantennas: P PDCCH + G Ant L

EIRP1 PDCCH

dBm
Div
G SA

EIRP1 PDCCH L Path M Shadowing Model L Indoor + G

Mi

ReceivedPBCHsignallevel

TX i

Withsmartantennas:

dBm

Mi

Mi

TX i ic

TX ic
i
P PBCH

SSEIRP

L Ant L Body + f CP

Withoutsmartantennas: P PBCH + G Ant L

EIRP1 PBCH

dBm
Div
G SA

EIRP1 PBCH L Path M Shadowing Model L Indoor + G

L

ReceivedSSsignallevel

TX i

Withsmartantennas:
P SS

dBm

TX i ic

TX i ic

Description

L Ant L Body + f CP

Withoutsmartantennas: P SS
EIRP1 SS

Unit

TX i

+ G Ant L

TX i

TX i

+ 10 Log E SA +

Combining
G SA

Div
G SA

TX i ic

EIRP2 PBCH L Path M Shadowing Model

L Indoor + G

Mi

Mi

Mi

Mi

L Ant L Body + f CP

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Name

Value
TX ic
i

TX

Withoutsmartantennas: EPRE PBCH + G Ant L

TX ic
i

EIRP2 PBCH

TX i ic

E PDCCH

TX

TX

+ G Ant L

TX

TX

+ 10 Log E SA + G SA

Combining

L Indoor + G

TX i ic

Mi

Mi

Mi

Mi

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i

TX i

TX i

PDCCHEIRP

dBm/Sym

ReceivedPDSCHenergyperresource
element

dBm/Sym

PDSCHEIRP

dB

Pathloss

dB

Totallosses

dB

Cyclicprefixfactor,i.e.,theratioof
theusefulsymbolenergytothetotal
symbolenergy

Combining
Div
+ 10 Log E SA + G SA
+ G SA

TX ic
i

EIRP2 PDSCH L Path M Shadowing Model

L Indoor + G

Mi

Mi

Mi

Mi

L Ant L Body + f CP
TX i

Withoutsmartantennas: EPRE PDSCH + G Ant L

TX i

Withsmartantennas:
TX i ic

TX i

Array

Combining

+ G SA
TX

L Path

Div

+ G SA L

L Model + L Ant
L Path + L
+L

Mi

TX i

+ L Indoor + M Shadowing Model G

Mi

Mi

TX i

Mi

TX ic
i
TX i ic

10 Log 6 7.5 If D CP
0

TX i

+ L Ant + L Body

10 Log 7 7.5 If D CP
f CP

dBm/Sym

TX i

TX i

EPRE PDSCH + G SA + G SA

L Total

ReceivedPDCCHenergyperresource
element

L Ant L Body + f CP

TX i ic

EIRP2 PDSCH

dBm/Sym

Div

Withsmartantennas:
EPRE PDCCH + G Ant L

E PDSCH

PBCHEIRP

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

dBm/Sym
+ G SA

EIRP2 PDCCH L Path M Shadowing Model

Withoutsmartantennas: EPRE PDCCH + G Ant L

EIRP2 PDCCH

Description

Withsmartantennas:
TX ic
i
EPRE PBCH

Unit

= Normal
= Extended

TX i ic isaninterferer

If

6.2.4 NoiseCalculation(DL)
Name

Value

Unit

Description

TX i ic

n 0 + 10 Log F

dBm

Thermalnoiseforoneresource
element

dBm

Downlinknoiseforoneresource
element

n 0 Sym
TX i ic

n Sym

TX i ic

n 0 Sym + nf

Mi

6.2.5 InterferenceCalculation(DL)
Name

Value

Unit

Description

dBm/Sym

Interferingenergyperresource
element(dBm/Sym)received
overdownlinkreferencesignals
(Method1:synchronised
transmissionandreception)
Case:RSoftheinterferedcell
collideonlywithRSofthe
interferingcell

TX jc

TX jc
j

DLRS

j
TX ic

E
DLRS
N i
---------------------
TX ic TX j jc
10
Ant TX
+f i
10 Log ------------------ 10
O
TXj jc

N Ant TX

455

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

Name

Value

Unit

Description

TX jc

TX j jc

DLRS

j
TX jc

E
DLRS
N TXi ic N TXj jc
N j
---------------------
TX ic TX jc
j
10
Ant

TX
Ant TX
Ant TX
-------------------------------------------- +f i
10
+

10 Log ------------------
10
Log
O
TX ic
TX ic

i
i

N Ant TX

N Ant TX

dBm/Sym
TX j jc
TX i ic TX j jc
TX j jc TX i ic TX j jc

E PDCCH + f PDCCH
E PDSCH + f PDSCH
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10
10

10
+
3

10
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4

TX jc

TX j jc

DLRS

j
TX jc
E DLRS
N j
N TXi ic N TXj jc
---------------------
TX i ic TX j jc
10
Ant TX
Ant TX
Ant TX

10 Log ------------------ 10
+ fO
+ 10 Log --------------------------------------------
TX i ic
TXi ic

N Ant TX

N Ant TX

dBm/Sym
TX j jc
TX i ic TX j jc
TX j jc TX i ic TX j jc

E PDCCH + f PDCCH
E PDSCH + f PDSCH
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10
10

+ 5 10
10
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6

TX jc

TX jc
j

DLRS

j
TX jc
E DLRS
N TXi ic N TXj jc
N j
---------------------
TX ic TX jc
10
i
j
Ant TX
Ant TX
Ant TX

+ 10 Log --------------------------------------------
10 Log ------------------ 10
TX i ic
TX i ic
+ fO

N Ant TX

N Ant TX

dBm/Sym
TX j jc
TX j jc TX ic TX jc
TX i ic TX j jc
i
j

E
E
+f
+f
PDCCH PDCCH
PDSCH PDSCH
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10
10

10
+ 2 10
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3

TX jc

TX j jc

DLRS

TX ic TX jc

TX jc

TX ic TX jc

TX i ic TX j jc

TX j jc

TX i ic TX j jc

j
i
j
j
i
j
EPDCCH

+ f PDCCH
E PDSCH + f PDSCH
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------10
10
10

+ 3 10
10 Log ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4

TX i ic TX j jc

+ fO

TX j jc

TX jc
j

DLRS

EPDCCH + fPDCCH

E PDSCH + f PDSCH
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------10
10
10

+ 5 10
10 Log ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6

TX i ic TX j jc

+ fO

456

Interferingenergyperresource
element(dBm/Sym)received
overdownlinkreferencesignals
(Method1:synchronised
transmissionandreception)
Case:RSoftheinterferedcell
collidewithRS,PDCCH,and
PDSCHoftheinterferingcell
With1or2antennaports
Interferingenergyperresource
element(dBm/Sym)received
overdownlinkreferencesignals
(Method1:synchronised
transmissionandreception)
Case:RSoftheinterferedcell
collidewithRS,PDCCH,and
PDSCHoftheinterferingcell
With4or8antennaportsand
TX i ic

N SD PDCCH = 1
Interferingenergyperresource
element(dBm/Sym)received
overdownlinkreferencesignals
(Method1:synchronised
transmissionandreception)
Case:RSoftheinterferedcell
collidewithRS,PDCCH,and
PDSCHoftheinterferingcell
With4or8antennaportsand
TX ic
i

N SD PDCCH 1

Interferingenergyperresource
element(dBm/Sym)received
overdownlinkreferencesignals
(Method1:synchronised
dBm/Sym
transmissionandreception)
Case:RSoftheinterferedcell
collidewithPDCCHandPDSCHof
theinterferingcell
With1or2antennaports
Interferingenergyperresource
element(dBm/Sym)received
overdownlinkreferencesignals
(Method1:synchronised
transmissionandreception)
Case:RSoftheinterferedcell
dBm/Sym
collidewithPDCCHandPDSCHof
theinterferingcell
With4or8antennaportsand
TX ic
i

N SD PDCCH = 1

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Name

Value

Unit

TX jc
TX ic TX jc
j
i
j
E
+f
PDCCH PDCCH
----------------------------------------------------------------------10

TX j jc

DLRS

TX jc TX ic TX jc
j
i
j

E
+f
PDSCH PDSCH
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
10

10
+ 2 10
10 Log ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3

TX i ic TX j jc

Interferingenergyperresource
element(dBm/Sym)received
overdownlinkreferencesignals
(Method1:synchronised
transmissionandreception)
Case:RSoftheinterferedcell
dBm/Sym
collidewithPDCCHandPDSCHof
theinterferingcell
With4or8antennaportsand
TX i ic

+ fO

N SD PDCCH 1
TX jc
j

TX jc
j

SS PBCH

Description

TX jc
j

E PBCH
ESS

--------------------TX jc
-------------------
10
10
j
10
N Sym SS + 10
N Sym PBCH
-
10 Log ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TX jc
j

N
+
N
Sym SS
Sym PBCH

TX ic TX jc
i
j

+ fO

dBm/Sym

TX jc
j

Interferingenergyperresource
element(dBm/Sym)received
overtheSSandthePBCH
(Method1:synchronised
transmissionandreception)

+ f MIMO

TX jc

TX j jc

PDCCH

E DLRS
TX j jc

---------------------
TX ic TX j jc
N
1
Sym DLRSinPDCCH
- 10 10 + f O i
10 Log ------------------ ----------------------------------------TX i ic
TXj jc

N Ant TX

N Sym PDCCH

TX jc

TX ic TX jc

j
i
j
TX ic

E PDCCH + f PDCCH
TX j jc
N i
-----------------------------------------------------------------------

N
10
Sym PDCCH
Sym DLRSinPDCCH

- 10
+ 10 L og ----------------------------------------------------------------------------TX i ic

N Sym PDCCH

Interferingenergyperresource
element(dBm/Sym)received
overthePDCCH
(Method1:synchronised
dBm/Sym
transmissionandreception)
Case:PDCCHoftheinterferedcell
collideswithPDCCHandalltheRS
oftheinterferingcell

TX jc

TX j jc

PDCCH

TX j jc

PDCCH

j
TX ic
E DLRS
TX j jc
TX i ic
N i
--------------------
N Sym DLRSinPDCCH N Sym DLRSinPDCCH
Ant TX
- 10 10
10 Log ------------------ -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TX

jc

TX

ic

j
i
N Ant TX
N Sym PDCCH

TX jc

TX ic TX jc

j
i
j
TX jc

E PDCCH + f PDCCH
N j
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
TX ic TX j jc
10
Sym PDCCH
+f i
10
+ 10 L og ----------------------------O
TX i ic

N Sym PDCCH

TX j jc

TX i ic TX j jc

E PDCCH + f PDCCH

Interferingenergyperresource
element(dBm/Sym)received
overthePDCCH
(Method1:synchronised
dBm/Sym
transmissionandreception)
Case:PDCCHoftheinterferedcell
collideswithPDCCHandsomeRS
oftheinterferingcell
Interferingenergyperresource
element(dBm/Sym)received
overthePDCCH
(Method1:synchronised
dBm/Sym
transmissionandreception)
Case:PDCCHoftheinterferedcell
collidesonlywithPDCCHofthe
interferingcell

TX i ic TX j jc

+ fO

TX jc

TX j jc

PDSCH

E DLRS
TX jc
j

---------------------
TX ic TX j jc
N
1
Sym DLRSinPDSCH
- 10 10 + f O i
10 Log ------------------ ----------------------------------------TX ic
TXj jc

i
N Sym PDSCH
N Ant TX

TX jc

TX ic TX jc

j
i
j
TX ic

E
+f
TX jc
PDSCH PDSCH
j
N i
----------------------------------------------------------------------

N
10
Sym

PDSCH
Sym

DLRSinPDSCH

+ 10 L og ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10
TX ic

i
N Sym PDSCH

Interferingenergyperresource
element(dBm/Sym)received
overthePDSCH
(Method1:synchronised
dBm/Sym
transmissionandreception)
Case:PDSCHoftheinterferedcell
collideswithPDSCHandalltheRS
oftheinterferingcell

457

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

Name

Value

Unit

Description

TX jc

TX j jc

PDSCH

j
TX ic

E
TX jc
TX ic
DLRS
j
i
N i
-------------------N

N
10
Ant

TX
Sym

DLRSinPDSCH
Sym

DLRSinPDSCH

- 10
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10 Log ------------------TX jc
TX ic

j
i
N Ant TX

N Sym PDSCH

TX jc

TX j jc

TX j jc

PDSCH

TX i ic TX j jc

E PDSCH + f PDSCH

TX jc

TX jc
j

DLRS

TX jc

TX jc
j

+ f MIMO
E PBCH + f MIMO
ESS

----------------------------------------------TX jc
---------------------------------------------
10
10
j
TX ic TX j jc
10
N Sym SS + 10
N Sym PBCH
- + f O i
10 Log --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TX jc
j

N Sym SS + N Sym PBCH

dBm/Sym

Interferingenergyperresource
element(dBm/Sym)received
overtheSSandthePBCH
(Method2:nonsynchronised
transmissionandreception)

TX j jc

TX jc
j

458

TX j jc
TX ic TX j jc
N Sym PDSCH
- + fO i
---------------------------TX j jc

N Sym DL

TX j jc

TX jc

TX j jc

TX ic TX jc

j
i
j
E j
E PDCCH + f PDCCH
TX j jc
TX j jc
DLRS -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------N
N Sym PDCCH
10
10
Sym DLRS

- + 10
10 Log 10
------------------------ ----------------------------TX j jc
TX j jc

N Sym DL
N Sym DL

TX j jc

TX i ic TX j jc

dBm/Sym

Interferingenergyperresource
element(dBm/Sym)received
overthePDCCH
(Method2:nonsynchronised
transmissionandreception)

dBm/Sym

Interferingenergyperresource
element(dBm/Sym)received
overthePDSCH
(Method2:nonsynchronised
transmissionandreception)

E PDSCH + f PDSCH
TX jc

----------------------------------------------------------------------- N j
TX ic TX j jc
10
Sym PDSCH
- + fO i
--------------------------- + 10
TX j jc

N Sym DL

TX jc

PDSCH

TX ic TX jc

dBm/Sym

TX j jc TX i ic TX j jc
E PDSCH + f PDSCH
----------------------------------------------------------------------10

TX jc

PDCCH

Interferingenergyperresource
element(dBm/Sym)received
overthePDSCH
(Method1:synchronised
dBm/Sym
transmissionandreception)
Case:PDSCHoftheinterferedcell
collidesonlywithPDSCHofthe
interferingcell

Interferingenergyperresource
element(dBm/Sym)received
overdownlinkreferencesignals
(Method2:nonsynchronised
transmissionandreception)

TX j jc

TX jc
j

TX i ic TX j jc

+ fO

j
i
j
E j
E PDCCH + f PDCCH
TX j jc
TX j jc
DLRS -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------N
N Sym PDCCH
10
10
Sym DLRS

- + 10
------------------------ ----------------------------10 Log 10
TX j jc
TX j jc

N Sym DL
N Sym DL

+ 10

SS PBCH

TX ic TX jc

j
i
j
TX jc

E PDSCH + f PDSCH
N j
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
TX ic TX j jc
10
Sym PDSCH
+f i
- 10
+ 10 L og ---------------------------O
TX i ic

N Sym PDSCH

Interferingenergyperresource
element(dBm/Sym)received
overthePDSCH
(Method1:synchronised
dBm/Sym
transmissionandreception)
Case:PDSCHoftheinterferedcell
collideswithPDSCHandsomeRS
oftheinterferingcell

TX jc

TX ic TX jc

j
i
j
E j
E PDCCH + f PDCCH
TX j jc
TX j jc
DLRS -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------N Sym DLRS
N Sym PDCCH
10
10
-------------------------- + 10
----------------------------10 Log 10

TX j jc
TX j jc

N Sym DL
N Sym DL

TX j jc

TX i ic TX j jc

E PDSCH + f PDSCH
TX jc

----------------------------------------------------------------------- N j
TX ic TX j jc
10
Sym PDSCH
- + fO i
--------------------------- + 10
TX j jc

N Sym DL

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Name

Value
TX jc
j

TX j jc

RSSI

TX i ic TX j jc

f PDCCH

TX i ic TX j jc

TX i ic TX j jc

TX j jc

TX j jc TX j jc TX i ic TX j jc TX i ic TX j jc

f MIMO + f TL
+ f ICIC DL
+ f ABS DL

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TX jc
10
1 AU j 10

DL

TX

jc

TX

ic

TX

jc

TX

ic

TX

jc

j
i
j
i
j
f
+
f
+
f

TL
ICIC DL
ABS DL
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TX

jc

j
10
10
+ AU DL

TX jc

TX ic TX jc

TX i ic TX j jc

TX ic TX jc
i
j

10 Log p Collision

dB

PDCCHinterferenceweighting
factor

dB

PDSCHinterferenceweighting
factor

dB

Interferencereductionfactordue
tochanneloverlap

dB

Interferencereductionfactordue
tostaticdownlinkICICusing
fractionalfrequencyreuse

TX ic TX jc

j
j
i
j
i
j

f MIMO + f TL
+ f ICIC DL
+ f ABS DL
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

TX jc
10
j

1 AU DL

10

TX j
TX i ic TX j jc TX i ic TX j jc
TX j

+
f
+
f
SA

SA
ICIC DL
ABS DL

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

TX j jc
10
+ AU DL

10

10 Log r O

f ICIC DL

Interferingenergyperfrequency
block(dBm/RB)receivedover1
frequencyblockduringanOFDM
symbolcarryingreferencesignals

dBm/RB
E
+f

PDCCH PDCCH
----------------------------------------------------------------------E DLRS
TX j jc

Fornumberofantennaports>1,
10
-------------------TX

jc

TX ic TX j jc
N Sym PDCCH

10
- 10 + 10 10 2 Min 2 N Antj TX + f O i 8isusedinsteadofencircled10
+ --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TX j jc
TX j jc

N Sym PDSCH + N Sym PDCCH

TX j jc

TX i ic TX j jc

fO

Description

TX ic TX jc
i
j

EPDSCH + f PDSCH
TX jc
---------------------------------------------------------------------j
10
N Sym PDSCH
10
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10
10 Log
TX jc
TX jc
j
j

N
+
N
Sym

PDSCH
Sym

PDCCH

TX jc

f PDSCH

Unit

TX i ic TX j jc

TX jc

TX j jc

j
10 Log TL DL

dB

Interferencereductionfactordue
tothedownlinktrafficload

TX j jc

j
10 Log N Ant TX

dB

Interferenceincrementdueto
morethanonetransmission
antennaport

TX k

P DL Rec
--------------------------------------
F

TX

ic

TX

i
k

TX k ICP DL

Downlinkintertechnology
interference

f TL

TX jc

f MIMO

Inter Tech
I DL

6.2.6 C/NCalculation(DL)
Name
TX i ic

CNR DLRS

TX i ic

Value
TX i ic

Unit

Description

TX i ic

dB

DownlinkreferencesignalsC/N

TX i ic

dB

SSC/N

dB

PBCHC/N

dB

PDCCHC/N

E DLRS n Sym
TX i ic

CNR SS

E SS

TX ic
i
CNR PBCH

E PBCH n Sym

TX i ic

TX i ic

n Sym

TX i ic

TX i ic

Mi

WithMIMO: CNR PBCH = CNR PBCH + G Div PBCH +

TX i ic

CNR PDCCH

TX i ic

DL
G Div

TX i ic

E PDCCH n Sym
TX i ic

TX i ic

Mi

WithMIMO: CNR PDCCH = CNR PDCCH + G Div PDCCH +

DL
G Div

459

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

Name

Value
TX ic
i

Description

dB

PDSCHC/N

Unit

Description

TX ic
i

E PDSCH n Sym

TX ic
i
CNR PDSCH

Unit

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

DL

WithMIMO: CNR PDSCH = CNR PDSCH + G Div DL + G Div

6.2.7 C/(I+N)Calculation(DL)
Name

Value
TX jc

TX i ic

CINR DLRS

TX ic

n Sym
DLRS

---------------------------------------
TX i ic
Inter Tech
Inter Tech
10
10

dB
E DLRS 10 Log
10
+I
+ 10
+ NR DL

DL

AllTX j jc

TX jc

TX i ic

CINR SS

TX ic

n
SS PBCH
Sym

---------------------------------------------
TX i ic
Tech
10 10 + I Inter Tech + 10 10 + NR Inter dB
E SS
10 Log
DL

DL

AllTX j jc

TX jc

TX i ic

CINR PBCH

DownlinkreferencesignalsC/(I+N)

SSC/(I+N)

TX ic

n
SS PBCH
Sym

------------------------
---------------------
TX i ic
10 10 + I Inter Tech + 10 10 + NR Inter Tech
E PBCH 10 Log
DL
DL

dB

AllTX j jc

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

PBCHC/(I+N)

DL

WithMIMO: CINR PBCH = CINR PBCH + G Div PBCH + G Div

TX jc

TX i ic

CINR PDCCH

TX ic

n Sym
PDCCH-

-------------------
---------------------
TX i ic
10 10 + I Inter Tech + 10 10 + NR Inter Tech
E PDCCH 10 Log
DL

DL
dB

AllTX j jc

TX i ic

TX i ic

Mi

PDCCHC/(I+N)

DL

WithMIMO: CINR PDCCH = CINR PDCCH + G Div PDCCH + G Div

TX jc

TX i ic

CINR PDSCH

TX ic

j
n Sym
PDSCH-

----------------------------------------
TX ic
10
10
i
Inter

Tech
Inter

Tech
+ NR

10
+I
E PDSCH 10 Log
+ 10
DL
DL

dB

AllTXj jc

TX i ic

TX i ic

Mi

PDSCHC/(I+N)

DL

WithMIMO: CINR PDSCH = CINR PDSCH + G Div DL + G Div

RSRQ

TX i ic

TX i ic

10 Log N FB

TX ic

+ E i RSSI
DLRS

TX jc

TX i ic

dB

Referencesignalreceivedquality
(RSRQ)

dBm

Receivedsignalstrengthindicator
(RSSI)

TX ic

n Sym
RSSI -
TX ic
------------------
--------------------i
Inter

Tech
10
10
10
+I
10 Log RSSI +
+ 10
12 +
DL

AllTX j jc

RSSI

TX ic
i

Inter Tech

NR DL

460

TX i ic

+ 10 Log N FB

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Name

Value
TX jc

Unit

Description

dBm

Downlinkreferencesignalstotal
noise(I+N)

dBm

SSandPBCHtotalnoise(I+N)

dBm

PDCCHtotalnoise(I+N)
(Method1:synchronised
transmissionandreception)

dBm

PDCCHtotalnoise(I+N)
(Method2:nonsynchronised
transmissionandreception)

dBm

PDSCHtotalnoise(I+N)
(Method1:synchronised
transmissionandreception)

dBm

PDSCHtotalnoise(I+N)
(Method2:nonsynchronised
transmissionandreception)

TX ic

j
n
DLRS
Sym

---------------------------------------
Inter

Tech
10
10

10
+I
10 Log
+ 10

DL
AllTXj jc

TX i ic

I + N DLRS

Inter Tech

+ NR DL

TX ic

i
+ 10 Log 2 N FB

TX jc

TX ic

n Sym
SS PBCH-

--------------------------------------------
10 10 + I Inter Tech + 10 10
10 Log
DL

AllTXj jc

TX i ic

I + N SS PBCH

Inter Tech

+ NR DL

+ 10 Log N SCa FB N FB SS PBCH

TX jc

TX i ic

I + N PDCCH

TX ic

i
j

n
PDCCH
Sym
-------------------
---------------------
Inter

Tech
10
10
10
+I

10 Log
+ 10

DL

AllTXj jc

TX i ic

N Sym PDCCH
Tech

---------------------------------------------- + NR Inter
+ 10 Log TX ic
DL
TX i ic

i
N SF DL + N TDD SSF
TX jc

TX i ic

I + N PDCCH

TX ic

j
n Sym
PDCCH

----------------------------------------
10 10 + I Inter Tech + 10 10
10 Log

DL
AllTXj jc

TX i ic
N TXi ic

Tech
Sym PDSCH + N Sym PDCCH

- + NRInter
+ 10 Log ------------------------------------------------------------------DL
TX i ic

N SD Slot N Slot SF N SF DL
TX jc

TX i ic

I + N PDSCH

TX ic

i
j

n Sym
PDSCH-
-------------------
--------------------
10 10 + I Inter Tech + 10 10
10 Log
DL

AllTXj jc

TX i ic

N Sym PDSCH
Tech

---------------------------------------------- + NR Inter
+ 10 Log TX ic
DL
TX i ic
i
N SF DL + N TDD SSF
TX jc

TX i ic

I + N PDSCH

TX ic

j
n Sym
PDSCH-

---------------------------------------
10 10 + I Inter Tech + 10 10
10 Log

DL
AllTXj jc

TX i ic
N TXi ic

Tech
Sym PDSCH + N Sym PDCCH

- + NRInter
+ 10 Log ------------------------------------------------------------------DL
TX i ic
N SD Slot N Slot SF N SF DL

461

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

6.2.8 SignalLevelCalculation(UL)
Name
TX ic
i

P O_PUSCH
Mi

P Allowed

Value
TX ic
i

TX ic
i

CINR PUSCH Max + NR UL

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

+ n PUSCH PUCCH 10 Log N FB

TX i ic
TX i ic
TX i ic
Mi

Min P Max 10 Log N FB + P O_PUSCH + FPC L Total

Mi

Mi

C PUSCH PUCCH

TX i

Mi

Description

dBm

NominalPUSCHpower

dBm

Maximumallowedtransmission
powerofauserequipment

dBm

ReceivedPUSCHandPUCCHsignal
level

dBm

PUSCHandPUCCHEIRPofauser
equipment

dB

Cyclicprefixfactor,i.e.,theratioof
theusefulsymbolenergytothetotal
symbolenergy

Unit

Description

dBm

PUSCHandPUCCHthermalnoise

dBm

PUSCHandPUCCHnoise

Unit

Description

dBm

ReceivedPUSCHandPUCCH
interference

dB

Interferencereductionfactordueto
thecoandadjacentchanneloverlap

dB

Interferencereductionfactordueto
theinterferingmobilesuplinktraffic
load

dB

Interferencereductionfactordueto
staticuplinkICICusingfractional
frequencyreuse

TX i

EIRP PUSCH PUCCH L Path M Shadowing Model L Indoor + G Ant

Mi

Mi

L Ant L Body + f CP
P

EIRP PUSCH PUCCH

Unit

With P

Mi

Mi

+G

Mi

Mi

Mi

= P Allowed withoutpowercontroladjustmentand

Mi

Mi

= P Eff afterpowercontroladjustment
TX i ic

10 Log 7 7.5 If D CP
f CP

10 Log 6 7.5 If

TX ic
i
D CP

= Normal

= Extended

If M i isaninterferer

6.2.9 NoiseCalculation(UL)
Name

Value
TX ic

TX i ic

i
n 0 + 10 Log N FB

n 0 PUSCH PUCCH
TX ic
i

W FB 1000

TX ic
i

n PUSCH PUCCH

n 0 PUSCH PUCCH + nf

TX ic
i

6.2.10 InterferenceCalculation(UL)
Name
Mj

I PUSCH PUCCH
TX i ic TX j jc

fO

j
f TL UL

TX i ic TX j jc

f ICIC UL

462

Value
Mj

TX i ic TX j jc

C PUSCH PUCCH + f O

TX i ic TX j jc

Mj

+ f TL UL + f ICIC UL

TX i ic TX j jc

10 Log r O

j
10 Log TL UL

TX i ic TX j jc

10 Log p Collision

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

6.2.11 NoiseRiseCalculation(UL)
Name

Value

Unit

Description

dB

UplinknoiseriseforanymobileMiin
cellcentreoftheinterferedcell
TXi(ic)

dB

UplinknoiseriseforanymobileMiin
celledgeoftheinterferedcellTXi(ic)

dBm

PUSCHandPUCCHtotalnoise(I+N)

Unit

Description

dB

PUSCHandPUCCHC/N

Unit

Description

dB

PUSCHandPUCCHC/(I+N)

dBm

Effectivetransmissionpowerofa
userequipmentafterpowercontrol
adjustment

Mj

TX i ic

NRUL

TX i ic
IPUSCH PUCCH

nonICICM i
n PUSCH PUCCH

-
-------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------10
10

10 Log
10
+ 10

AllMj

AllTX

jc

Inter Tech

+ NR UL

TX i ic

n PUSCH PUCCH
M

TX i ic
I PUSCH PUCCH

n PUSCH PUCCH
ICICM i

-
-------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------10
10

10 Log
10
+ 10

AllM j

AllTXj jc

TX i ic

NRUL ICIC

Inter Tech

+ NR UL

TX ic
i

n PUSCH PUCCH

ForanymobileMiincellcentreoftheinterferedcellTXi(ic):
I +

TX ic
i
N PUSCH PUCCH

TX i ic

NR UL

TX i ic

+ n PUSCH PUCCH

ForanymobileMiincelledgeoftheinterferedcellTXi(ic):
TX i ic

TX i ic

NR UL ICIC + n PUSCH PUCCH

6.2.12 C/NCalculation(UL)
Name

Value
TX i ic

Mi

C PUSCH PUCCH n PUSCH PUCCH

Mi

CNR PUSCH PUCCH

WithMIMO:
Mi

TX i ic

Mi

UL

CNR PUSCH PUCCH = CNR PUSCH PUCCH + G Div UL + G Div

6.2.13 C/(I+N)Calculation(UL)
Name

Value
ForanymobileMiincellcentreoftheinterferedcellTXi(ic):
TX i ic

Mi

CNR PUSCH PUCCH NR UL

ForanymobileMiincelledgeoftheinterferedcellTXi(ic):

Mi

CINR PUSCH PUCCH

TX i ic

Mi

CNR PUSCH PUCCH NR ICIC UL

WithMIMO:
Mi

TX i ic

Mi

UL

CINR PUSCH PUCCH = CINR PUSCH PUCCH + G Div UL + G Div

Mi

P Eff

Mi
Mi

TXi ic
Mi
Max P Allowed CINR PUSCH PUCCH T M + M PC P Min

B i

UL

463

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

6.2.14 CalculationofDownlinkCellResources
Name

Value

Unit

Description

N Sym SRB

N SCa FB N SD Slot N Slot SF

None

Numberofmodulationsymbolsper
schedulerresourceblock

N Sym SSF

DwPTS

N SCa FB N SD SSF

None

NumberofDwPTSmodulation
symbolsperschedulerresource
blockintheTDDspecialsubframes

N SCa FB

W FB
---------F

None

Numberofsubcarriersperfrequency
block

None

Totalnumberofmodulationsymbols
indownlink

None

Numberofmodulationsymbolsin
DwPTS

None

NumberofPDSCHmodulation
symbols

None

NumberofPDSCHmodulation
symbolsintheDwPTS

None

Downlinkreferencesignalsoverhead

N DLRS DwPTS N TDD SSF

None

Downlinkreferencesignalsoverhead
intheDwPTS

TX i ic

if N Ant TX = 1
8

TX i ic
16
if N Ant TX = 2

TX i ic

24 if N Ant TX = 4or8

None

Numberofsymbolsreservedfor
downlinkreferencesignalsinone
schedulerresourceblock

DwPTS

TX i ic

TX i ic

N Sym DL

N FB

TX i ic

TX i ic

N Sym DwPTS
TX ic
i

R DL

TX i ic

N FB
TX ic
i

TX i ic

N Sym SRB N SF DL + N Sym DwPTS

TX i ic

DwPTS

N TDD SSF N Sym SSF

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

N Sym DL O DLRS O PSS O SSS O PBCH O PDCCH O UERS

TX i ic

TX i ic

R DwPTS

TX i ic

TX i ic

N Sym DwPTS O DLRS DwPTS O PDCCH DwPTS

TX i ic

TX i ic

O DLRS

N FB

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

O DLRS DwPTS

N FB

TX i ic

N DLRS SRB

TX i ic

TX i ic

N DLRS SRB N SF DL + O DLRS DwPTS

TX i ic

TX i ic

N DLRS DwPTS

See"CalculationofDownlinkCellResources"onpage 537

None

Numberofsymbolsreservedfor
downlinkreferencesignalsinDwPTS
ofoneTDDspecialsubframe

O PSS

2 N FB SS PBCH N SCa FB = 144

None

PSSoverhead

O SSS

2 N FB SS PBCH N SCa FB = 144

None

SSSoverhead

ExtendedCP:216
NormalCP:240

None

PBCHoverhead

None

PDCCHoverhead

TX i ic

TX i ic

O PBCH

TX ic

i
if N SD PDCCH = 0 :0
TX ic

TX i ic

O PDCCH

TX ic

i
i
if N SD PDCCH = 1 AND N Ant TX 2 :
TX ic

TX ic

TX ic

TX ic

i
i
i
N i

N SF DL + O PDCCH DwPTS
SD PDCCH N SCa FB 4 N FB
Otherwise:
TX ic

TX ic

TX ic

i
i
N i
N SCa FB 2 Min 4 N Ant TX N FB
SD PDCCH

464

TX i ic

TX i ic

N SF DL + O PDCCH DwPTS

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Name

Value

Unit

Description

TX ic

i
if N SD PDCCH = 0 :0

TX ic

TX i ic

O PDCCH DwPTS

TX ic

i
i
if N SD PDCCH = 1 AND N Ant TX 2 :

TX ic

TX ic

i
N i
N SCa FB 4 N FB
SD PDCCH

Otherwise:
TX ic

PDCCHoverheadintheDwPTS

TX i ic

N TDD SSF
TX ic

TX ic

i
i
Min 2 N i

SD PDCCH N SCa FB 2 Min 4 N Ant TX N FB

TX i ic

O UERS

TX ic
i

Withsmartantennas: 12 N FB

TX i ic

N TDD SSF

TX ic
i

N SF DL

None

UEspecificreferencesignals
overhead

Withoutsmartantennas:0

6.2.15 CalculationofUplinkCellResources
Name

Value

Unit

Description

N Sym SRB

N SCa FB N SD Slot N Slot SF

None

Numberofmodulationsymbolsper
schedulerresourceblock

N SCa FB

W FB
---------F

None

Numberofsubcarriersperfrequency
block

None

Totalnumberofmodulationsymbols
inuplink

None

NnumberofPUSCHmodulation
symbols

TX ic
i

N Sym UL
TX i ic

R UL

TX ic

N i
FB

TX ic

TX ic

i
i
N FB PUCCH N Sym SRB N SF UL

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

N Sym UL O ULSRS O ULDRS

TX i ic

TX i ic
N SCa FB
--------------------- N Sym
UL
N Sym SRB

None

Uplinksoundingreferencesignal
overhead

TX i ic

TX i ic
N SCa FB
- N Sym
2 -------------------- UL
N Sym SRB

None

Uplinkdemodulationreference
signaloverhead

Unit

Description

bps

Maximumdownlinkthroughput
capacityofaUEcategory

Unit

Description

bps

Maximumuplinkthroughput
capacityofaUEcategory

O ULSRS

O ULDRS

6.2.16 CalculationofDownlinkUECapacity
Name

Value

Max
TP UE DL

i
N i
+ N TDD SSF
Max DL SF DL
N TBB TTI ---------------------------------------------------D Frame

TX ic

TX ic

6.2.17 CalculationofUplinkUECapacity
Name

Value

Max

Max UL N SF UL
N TBB TTI ---------------D Frame

TP UE UL

TX i ic

465

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

6.2.18 ChannelThroughput,CellCapacity,AllocatedBandwidth
Throughput,andPeruserThroughputCalculation
Name

Value
TX i ic

R DL

Unit

Description

kbps

DownlinkpeakRLCchannel
throughput

kbps

DownlinkeffectiveRLCchannel
throughput

kbps

Downlinkapplicationchannel
throughput

kbps

DownlinkpeakRLCcellcapacity

kbps

DownlinkeffectiveRLCcellcapacity

kbps

Downlinkapplicationcellcapacity

kbps

DownlinkpeakRLCthroughputper
user

kbps

DownlinkeffectiveRLCthroughput
peruser

kbps

Downlinkapplicationthroughputper
user

kbps

UplinkpeakRLCchannelthroughput

M
i
B DL

--------------------------------D Frame
TX ic
i

R DL
Mi

CTP P DL

M
i
B DL

TX i ic

Forproportionalfairschedulers: --------------------------------- G MUG DL

D Frame
WithSUMIMO:

Mi

B DL

Max M

Mi

B DL

i
1 + f SU MIMO G SU MIMO DL 1

WithMUMIMOinthroughputcoveragepredictions:
TX i ic

Mi

CTP P DL G MU MIMO DL
M

Mi

Mi

TX i ic

Mi

CTP P DL TL DL Max

Cap P DL

i
i
Cap P DL 1 BLER B DL

Cap E DL
Mi

Mi

Mi
f TP Scaling
- TP Offset
Cap E DL -----------------------100
Mi

Cap A DL

Mi

Mi
f TP Scaling
- TP Offset
CTP E DL -----------------------100
Mi

CTP A DL

i
i
CTP P DL 1 BLER B DL

CTP E DL

Mi

Cap P DL
----------------------TX i ic
N Users DL

PUTP P DL

Mi

Cap E DL
----------------------TX i ic
N Users DL

Mi

PUTP E DL

Mi

Mi
f TP Scaling
- TP Offset
PUTP E DL -----------------------100
Mi

PUTP A DL

TX ic
i

R UL

M
i
B UL

--------------------------------D Frame
TX ic
i

R UL
Mi

CTP P UL

Mi
B UL

TX ic
i

Forproportionalfairschedulers: --------------------------------- G MUG UL

D Frame
WithSUMIMO:

Mi

B UL

Max TX ic

Mi

B UL

i
1 + f SU MIMO G SU MIMO UL 1

WithMUMIMOinthroughputcoveragepredictions:
Mi

TX i ic

CTP P UL G MU MIMO UL

466

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Name

Value

i
i
CTP P UL 1 BLER B UL

Description

kbps

UplinkeffectiveRLCchannel
throughput

kbps

Uplinkapplicationchannel
throughput

kbps

UplinkpeakRLCcellcapacity

kbps

UplinkeffectiveRLCcellcapacity

kbps

Uplinkapplicationcellcapacity

kbps

UplinkpeakRLCallocatedbandwidth
throughput

kbps

UplinkeffectiveRLCallocated
bandwidththroughput

kbps

Uplinkapplicationallocated
bandwidththroughput

Cap M i

M
P UL
- ABTP P i UL
Min ---------------------- TXi ic

N Users UL

kbps

UplinkpeakRLCthroughputperuser

Cap M i

M
E UL
- ABTP E i UL
Min ---------------------- TX i ic

N Users UL

kbps

UplinkeffectiveRLCthroughputper
user

kbps

Uplinkapplicationthroughputper
user

CTP E UL
M

Unit
M

CTP A UL
Mi

Cap P UL
M

i
CTP E UL

M
f TP Scaling
i
- TP Offset
-----------------------100
TX i ic

Mi

CTP P UL TL UL Max
M

Cap E UL
Mi

Cap A UL

i
ABTP P UL

ABTP E UL
Mi

ABTP A UL

Mi

PUTP P UL

Mi

PUTP E UL

Mi

PUTP A UL

i
i
Cap P UL 1 BLER B UL

Mi

Mi
f TP Scaling
- TP Offset
Cap E UL -----------------------100
Mi

Mi

N FB UL
CTP P UL ----------------TX i ic
N FB
Mi

i
i
ABTPP UL 1 BLER B UL

Mi

Mi
Mi
f TP Scaling
- TP Offset
ABTP E UL -----------------------100

Mi

M
M
f TP Scaling
i
i
- TP Offset
PUTP E UL -----------------------100

6.2.19 SchedulingandRadioResourceManagement
Name

Value

Unit

Description

Sel
Mi
R Min DL

TPD Min DL
---------------------------

None

Resourcesallocatedtoamobileto
satisfyitsminimumthroughput
demandindownlink

None

Resourcesallocatedtoamobileto
satisfyitsminimumthroughput
demandinuplink

R Min DL

None

Remainingdownlinkcellresources
afterallocationforminimum
throughputdemands

Sel
i
R Min UL

None

Remaininguplinkcellresourcesafter
allocationforminimumthroughput
demands

kbps

Remainingthroughputdemandfora
mobileindownlink

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

CTP P DL
Sel
Mi

TPD Min UL
---------------------------

Sel
Mi
R Min UL

Sel
Mi

CTP P UL
TX i ic

R Rem DL

TX i ic

R Rem UL

Sel
i
TPD Rem DL
M

TX i ic

TL DL Max

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi
TX ic
i
TL UL Max

Sel
Mi
Sel

Sel

Mi
Mi

Max
Min TPD Max DL TPD Min DL TP UE DL

467

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

Name

Value

Sel
i
TPD Rem UL

M
M

Max
i
i
Min TPD Max UL TPD Min UL TP UE UL

Sel
Mi

Sel

Sel
Mi

TX i ic

CTP P DL

WithoutMUG

G MUG DL

Sel
i
CTP P UL

Sel
i
CTP P UL
WithoutMUG

TX ic
i
G MUG UL

Sel
Mi
RD Rem DL

Description

kbps

Remainingthroughputdemandfora
mobileinuplink

kbps

Downlinkpeakchannelthroughput
withmultiuserdiversitygain
(ProportionalFair)

kbps

Uplinkpeakchannelthroughputwith
multiuserdiversitygain
(ProportionalFair)

None

Remainingresourcedemandfora
mobileindownlink

None

Remainingresourcedemandfora
mobileinuplink

None

Resourcesallocatedtoamobileto
satisfyitsmaximumthroughput
demandindownlink

None

Resourcesallocatedtoamobileto
satisfyitsmaximumthroughput
demandinuplink

None

Effectiveremainingdownlink
resourcesinacell
(ProportionalDemand)

Sel

CTP P DL

Unit

Sel
Mi

TPD Rem DL
---------------------------Sel
Mi

CTP P DL
Sel
Mi
RD Rem UL

Sel
Mi

TPD Rem UL
---------------------------Sel
Mi
CTP P UL

Sel

TX i ic

Mi
R Rem DL
ProportionalFair: Min RD Rem DL ---------------------
N

Sel

TX i ic

Mi
R Rem DL
-
RoundRobin: Min RD Rem DL -------------------N

Sel
Mi

R Max DL

Sel
Mi

TX i ic

RD Rem DL
ProportionalDemand: R Eff Rem DL ----------------------------------

Sel
Mi

RD Rem DL

Sel
Mi
Sel
i
TPD Rem DL
MaxC/I: --------------------------Sel
M
i
CTP P DL
M

Sel

TX i ic

Mi
R Rem UL
ProportionalFair: Min RD Rem UL ---------------------
N

Sel

TX ic
i

Mi
R Rem DL
RoundRobin: Min RD Rem DL ---------------------
N

Sel
Mi

R Max UL

Sel
Mi

TX i ic

RD Rem UL
ProportionalDemand: R Eff Rem UL -----------------------------------

Sel
Mi

RD Rem UL

Sel
Mi
Sel
Mi

TPD Rem UL
MaxC/I: --------------------------Sel
Mi

CTP P UL
TX i ic

R Eff Rem DL

468

Sel
Mi
TXi ic

Min R Rem DL
RD Rem DL

Sel

M
i

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Name

Value

Unit

Description

TX ic
i
R Eff Rem UL

Sel
M
TXi ic

i
Min R Rem UL
RD Rem UL

Sel

M
i

None

Effectiveremaininguplinkresources
inacell
(ProportionalDemand)

Sel
Sel

Mi
Mi

R Max DL CTP E DL

Sel

M
Site
i
-
Max 1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Sel
Sel
Mi
Mi

Site
TP

CTP

S1 DL
Min DL
E DL

Sel

M
Site
i

None

Sitebackhauloverflowratioin
downlink

Sel
Sel

Mi
Mi

R Max UL CTP E UL

Sel

M i Site
Max 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Sel
Sel
Mi
Mi

Site
R Min UL CTP E UL
TP S1 UL

Sel

M i Site

None

Sitebackhauloverflowratioinuplink

None

Totalresourcesassignedtoamobile
indownlink
(Downlinktrafficloadofthemobile)

None

Totalresourcesassignedtoamobile
inuplink
(Uplinktrafficloadofthemobile)

Unit

Description

kbps

DownlinkpeakRLCuserthroughput

kbps

DownlinkeffectiveRLCuser
throughput

kbps

Downlinkapplicationuser
throughput

kbps

UplinkpeakRLCuserthroughput

kbps

UplinkeffectiveRLCuserthroughput

kbps

Uplinkapplicationuserthroughput

Site

BHOFDL

Site

BHOFUL

Sel

Sel
Mi

TL DL

Sel
Mi

= R DL

Sel
i

Sel
i

Mi
Mi
Max DL CTP P DL
R Min DL CTP P DL + -----------------------------------------------Site

BHOF DL

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Sel

Sel
Mi

CTP P DL
Sel

Sel
i
TL UL
M

Sel
i
R UL
M

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Mi
Mi
R Max UL CTP P UL
R Min UL CTP P UL + -----------------------------------------------Site

BHOF UL

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Sel

Sel
Mi

CTP P UL

6.2.20 UserThroughputCalculation
Name
Sel
Mi

UTP P DL
Sel
Mi

UTP E DL
Sel
Mi

UTP A DL
Sel
Mi

UTP P UL
Sel
Mi

UTP E UL
Sel
i
UTP A UL
M

Value
Sel
Mi

R DL

Sel
Mi

CTP P DL

Sel

Sel

Mi

Mi
UTP P DL 1 BLER B DL

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Sel

Mi
f TP Scaling
- TP Offset
UTP E DL -----------------------100
Sel
Mi

R UL

Sel
Mi

CTP P UL

Sel

Sel

M
Mi

i
UTP P UL 1 BLER B UL

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Sel

Mi
f TP Scaling
UTP E UL ------------------------- TP Offset
100

469

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

6.3 AvailableCalculations
6.3.1 PointAnalysis
6.3.1.1 ProfileView
Thepointanalysisprofileviewdisplaysthefollowingcalculationresultsfortheselectedtransmitterbasedonthecalculation
algorithmdescribedin"SignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 501.

TX ic
i

Downlinkreferencesignallevel C DLRS

Pathloss L Path

Totallosses L Total

, G

, L Ant , L Body ,and f CP arenotusedinthecalculationsperformedfortheprofileview.

6.3.1.2 ReceptionView
Analysisprovidedinthereceptionviewisbasedonpathlossmatrices.So,youcandisplayreceiveddownlinkreferencesignal
levelsfromthecellsforwhichcalculatedpathlossmatricesareavailable.Foreachcell,AtolldisplaysthereceivedRSRPor
referencesignal,SS,orPDSCHsignallevels.
ReceptionlevelbargraphsshowtheRSRPorsignallevelsindecreasingorder.Themaximumnumberofbarsinthegraph
dependsonthestudiedsignallevelofthebestserver.ThebargraphdisplayscellswhosereceivedRSRParehigherthantheir
minimumRSRPthresholdsandarewithina30 dBmarginfromthestudiedsignallevelofthebestserver.
Youcanuseavalueotherthan30 dBforthemarginfromthestudiedsignallevelofthebestserver,forexampleasmaller
value for improving the calculation speed. For more information on defining a different value for this margin, see the
AdministratorManual.

6.3.1.3 InterferenceView
Analysisprovidedintheinterferenceviewisbasedonpathlossmatrices.So,youcandisplaythereceivedsignallevelfrom
thebestserverandinterferingsignallevelsfromothercellsforwhichcalculatedpathlossmatricesareavailable.Foreachcell,
AtolldisplaysthebestserverRS,SS,orPDSCHsignallevel,andinterferencefromothercells.
Interferencelevelbargraphsshowtheinterferencelevelsondifferentchannelsindecreasingorder.Themaximumnumber
ofbarsinthegraphdependsonthehighestinterferencelevelonthestudiedchannel.ThebargraphdisplayscellswhoseC/
NarehigherthantheminimuminterfererC/Nthresholdandwhoseinterferencelevelsarewithina30 dBmarginfromthe
highestinterferencelevelonthestudiedchannel.
Youcanuseavalueotherthan30 dBforthemarginfromthehighestinterferencelevelonthestudiedchannel,forexample
asmallervalueforimprovingthecalculationspeed.Formoreinformationondefiningadifferentvalueforthismargin,see
theAdministratorManual.

6.3.1.4 DetailsView
Analysisprovidedinthedetailsviewisbasedonpathlossmatrices.So,youcandisplaythereceivedsignallevelfromthebest
serverandinterferingsignallevelsfromothercellsforwhichcalculatedpathlossmatricesareavailable.Foreachcell,Atoll
displaystheRSRPandRS,SS,PBCH,PDCCH,andPDSCHsignallevels,aswellasinterferencelevelsonthesechannelsfrom
interferingcells.
Theresultsforthebestserver(firstrow)aredisplayedusingbolditaliccharacters.Othercellsarelistedinthedecreasingorder
ofRSRP.AllthecellsfromwhichthereceivedRSRPishigherthantheirminimumRSRPthresholdsarelistedinthetable.As
well,interferencevaluesarelistedforallthecellswhoseC/NarehigherthantheminimuminterfererC/Nthresholdand
whoseinterferencelevelsarewithina30 dBmarginfromthehighestinterferencelevelonRS.
Youcanuseavalueotherthan30 dBforthemarginfromthehighestinterferencelevelonRS,forexampleasmallervaluefor
improvingthecalculationspeed.Formoreinformationondefiningadifferentvalueforthismargin,seetheAdministrator
Manual.

470

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

6.3.2 CoveragePredictions
6.3.2.1 DownlinkSignalLevelCoveragePredictions
Thefollowingcoveragepredictionsarebasedonthereceiveddownlinkreferencesignallevels:

CoveragebyTransmitter
CoveragebySignalLevel
OverlappingZones

For these calculations, Atoll calculates the received downlink reference signal level. Then, Atoll determines the selected
displayparameteroneachpixelinsidethecellscalculationarea.EachpixelwithinthecalculationareaofTXi(ic)isconsidered
anoninterferingreceiver.
Thesecoveragepredictionsdonotdependonthetrafficinput.Therefore,thesecalculationsareofspecialinterestbeforeand
duringthedeploymentstageofthenetworktostudythecoveragefootprintofthesystem.
L

Mi

, G

Mi

Mi

Mi

, L Ant ,and L Body arenotconsideredinthecalculationsperformedforthedownlinksignallevelbasedcoverage

predictions.
Theresolutionofthecoveragepredictiondoesnotdependontheresolutionsofthepathlossmatricesorthegeographicdata
andcanbedefinedseparatelyforeachcoverageprediction.Coveragepredictionsaregeneratedusingabilinearinterpolation
methodfrommultiresolutionpathlossmatrices(similartotheoneusedtocalculatesitealtitudes,see"PathLossCalculation
Prerequisites"onpage 53formoreinformation).
Formoreinformationondownlinkreferencesignallevelcalculations,see"SignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 501.
Formoreinformationoncoverageareadeterminationandavailabledisplayoptions,see:

"CoverageAreaDetermination"onpage 471.
"CoverageDisplayTypes"onpage 472.

CoverageAreaDetermination
AtollusesparametersenteredintheConditiontabofthecoveragepredictionpropertiesdialoguetodeterminecoverage
areastodisplay.Therearethreepossibilities.

AllServers
ThecoverageareaofeachcellTXi(ic)correspondstothepixelswhere.
TX ic

TX ic

TX ic

i
i
i
MinimumThreshold C DLRS or L Total or L Path MaximumThreshold

BestSignalLevelandaMargin
ThecoverageareaofeachcellTXi(ic)correspondstothepixelswhere.
TX ic

TX ic

TX ic

i
i
i
MinimumThreshold C DLRS or L Total or L Path MaximumThreshold

AND
TX i ic
TX j jc
C DLRS Best C DLRS M

ji

WhereMisthespecifiedmargin(dB).TheBestfunctionconsidersthehighestvaluefromalistofvalues.

IfM=0 dB,AtollconsiderspixelswherethereceiveddownlinkreferencesignallevelfromTXi(ic)isthehighest.
IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelswherethereceiveddownlinkreferencesignallevelfromTXi(ic)iseitherthe
highestorwithina2 dBmarginfromthehighest
IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelswherethereceiveddownlinkreferencesignallevelfromTXi(ic)is2 dBhigher
thanthereceiveddownlinkreferencesignallevelsfromthecellswhichare2ndbestservers

SecondBestSignalLevelandaMargin
ThecoverageareaofeachcellTXi(ic)correspondstothepixelswhere.
TX ic

TX ic

TX ic

i
i
i
MinimumThreshold C DLRS or L Total or L Path MaximumThreshold

AND

471

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

TX ic

Forsk2014

TX jc

nd
i
j
C DLRS 2 Best C DLRS M

ji

WhereMisthespecifiedmargin(dB).The2ndBestfunctionconsidersthesecondhighestvaluefromalistofvalues.

IfM=0 dB,AtollconsiderspixelswherethereceiveddownlinkreferencesignallevelfromTXi(ic)isthesecond
highest.
IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelswherethereceiveddownlinkreferencesignallevelfromTXi(ic)iseitherthe
secondhighestorwithina2 dBmarginfromthesecondhighest.
IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelswherethereceiveddownlinkreferencesignallevelfromTXi(ic)is2 dBhigher
thanthereceiveddownlinkreferencesignallevelsfromthecellswhichare3rdbestservers.

CoverageDisplayTypes
Apixelofacoverageareaiscolouredifthecalculatedvalueoftheselecteddisplayparameterisgreaterthanorequaltothe
definedthresholdsvalues.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayersthatcanbedisplayedandhiddenonthemap.
Itispossibletodisplaythecoveragepredictionswithcoloursdependingonanytransmitterorcellattribute,andothercriteria
suchas:

SignalLevel(dBm,dBV,dBV/m)
BestSignalLevel(dBm,dBV,dBV/m):Wherecellcoverageareasoverlap,Atollkeepsthehighestvalueofthesignal
level.
PathLoss(dB)
TotalLosses(dB)
BestServerPathLoss(dB):Wherecellcoverageareasoverlap,Atolldeterminesthebestcell(i.e.,thecellwiththe
highestdownlinkreferencesignallevel)andevaluatesthepathlossfromthiscell.
BestServerTotalLosses(dB):Wherecellcoverageareasoverlap,Atolldeterminesthebestcell(i.e.,thecellwiththe
highestdownlinkreferencesignallevel)andevaluatesthetotallossesfromthiscell.
NumberofServers:Atollevaluatesthenumberofcellsthatcoverapixel(i.e.,thepixelfallswithinthecoverageareas
ofthesecells).

6.3.2.2 EffectiveSignalAnalysisCoveragePredictions
Thefollowingcoveragepredictionsarebasedonthereceiveddownlinkreferencesignal,SS,PDSCH,andPUSCHandPUCCH
signallevelsandnoise,andtakeintoaccountthereceivercharacteristics( L

Mi

, G

Mi

Mi

Mi

, L Ant ,and L Body )whencalculatingthe

requiredparameter:

EffectiveSignalAnalysis(DL)
EffectiveSignalAnalysis(UL)

Forthesecalculations,AtollcalculatesthereceivedsignallevelorC/Nlevelateachpixelforthechanneltypebeingstudied,
i.e.,RS,SS,PBCH,PDCCH,PDSCH,PUSCHandPUCCH.EachpixelwithinthecalculationareaofTXi(ic)isconsideredanon
interferingreceiver.Thepropertiesofthenoninterferingprobereceiveraresetbyselectingaterminal,amobilitytype,and
aservice.
Thesecoveragepredictionsdonotdependonthetrafficinput.Therefore,thesecalculationsareofspecialinterestbeforeand
duringthedeploymentstageofthenetworktostudythecoveragefootprintofthesystem.
Theresolutionofthecoveragepredictiondoesnotdependontheresolutionsofthepathlossmatricesorthegeographicdata
andcanbedefinedseparatelyforeachcoverageprediction.Coveragepredictionsaregeneratedusingabilinearinterpolation
methodfrommultiresolutionpathlossmatrices(similartotheoneusedtocalculatesitealtitudes,see"PathLossCalculation
Prerequisites"onpage 53formoreinformation).
Formoreinformationonsignallevelcalculations,see:

"SignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 501.
"SignalLevelCalculation(UL)"onpage 523.

FormoreinformationonC/Nlevelcalculations,see:

"C/NCalculation(DL)"onpage 516.
"C/NCalculation(UL)"onpage 529.

Formoreinformationoncoverageareadeterminationandavailabledisplayoptions,see:

472

"CoverageAreaDetermination"onpage 473.
"CoverageDisplayTypes"onpage 473.

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

CoverageAreaDetermination
Thesecoveragepredictionsarebestservercoveragepredictions,i.e.,thecoverageareaofeachcellcomprisesthepixels
where the cell is the best server. Best server for each pixel is calculated as explained in "Best Server Determination" on
page 535.
CoverageDisplayTypes
Apixelofacoverageareaiscolouredifthecalculatedvalueoftheselecteddisplaytypeparameterisgreaterthanorequalto
thedefinedthresholdsvalues.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayersthatcanbedisplayedandhiddenonthemap.
ItispossibletodisplaytheEffectiveSignalAnalysis(DL)coveragepredictionwithcoloursdependingonthefollowingdisplay
options:

RSRP(RSEPRE)Level(DL)(dBm)
RSSignalLevel(DL)(dBm)
SSSignalLevel(DL)(dBm)
PBCHSignalLevel(DL)(dBm)
PDCCHSignalLevel(DL)(dBm)
PDSCHSignalLevel(DL)(dBm)
RSC/NLevel(DL)(dB)
SSC/NLevel(DL)(dB)
PBCHC/NLevel(DL)(dB)
PDCCHC/NLevel(DL)(dB)
PDSCHC/NLevel(DL)(dB)

DeltaPathLoss(dB):Atollcalculatesthedifferenceofthetotallossesfromthesecondbestservingcells( L Total )and

TX jc
j

TX i ic

TX j jc

TX i ic

thetotallossesfromthebestservingcells( L Total )oneachpixeloftheircoverageareas( L Total L Total ).Pixelsare

colouredaccordingtothethresholdsdefinedinthecoverageprediction.Totallossesarecalculatedasexplainedin
"SignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 453.
ICICCelledgeAreas:Basedonthedeltapathlosscalculationasabove.Pixelsarecolouredaccordingtothecoloursof
thetransmittersymbolsonthemap.Thepredictionisbasedonthedeltapathlossthresholdsdefinedpercell.

ItispossibletodisplaytheEffectiveSignalAnalysis(UL)coveragepredictionwithcoloursdependingonthefollowingdisplay
options:

PUSCH&PUCCHSignalLevel(UL)(dBm)
PUSCH&PUCCHC/NLevel(UL)(dB)

6.3.2.3 C/(I+N)basedCoveragePredictions
Thefollowingcoveragepredictionsarebasedonthereceivedsignallevels,totalnoise,andinterference.

CoveragebyC/(I+N)Level(DL)
ServiceAreaAnalysis(DL)
CoveragebyThroughput(DL)
CoveragebyQualityIndicator(DL)
CoveragebyC/(I+N)Level(UL)
ServiceAreaAnalysis(UL)
CoveragebyThroughput(UL)
CoveragebyQualityIndicator(UL)

Thesecoveragepredictionstakeintoaccountthereceivercharacteristics( L

Mi

, G

Mi

Mi

Mi

, L Ant ,and L Body )whencalculatingthe

requiredparameter.Forthesecalculations,Atollcalculatesthereceivedsignallevel,noise,andinterferenceateachpixel.
EachpixelwithinthecalculationareaofTXi(ic)isconsideredanoninterferingreceiver.Thepropertiesofthenoninterfering
probereceiveraresetbyselectingaterminal,amobilitytype,andaservice.
Thedownlinkcoveragepredictionsarebasedonthedownlinktrafficloadsofthecells,andtheuplinkcoveragepredictions
are based on the uplink noise rise values. These parameters can either be calculated by Atoll during the Monte Carlo
simulations,orsetmanuallybytheuserforallthecells.
Theresolutionofthecoveragepredictiondoesnotdependontheresolutionsofthepathlossmatricesorthegeographicdata
andcanbedefinedseparatelyforeachcoverageprediction.Coveragepredictionsaregeneratedusingabilinearinterpolation
methodfrommultiresolutionpathlossmatrices(similartotheoneusedtocalculatesitealtitudes,see"PathLossCalculation
Prerequisites"onpage 53formoreinformation).
FormoreinformationonRSRQ,RSSI,C/(I+N),(I+N),andbearercalculations,see:

"C/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(DL)"onpage 518.
"C/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(UL)"onpage 532.

473

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

Formoreinformationonthoughputcalculations,see:

"Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, Allocated Bandwidth Throughput, and Peruser Throughput Calculation" on
page 546.

Formoreinformationoncoverageareadeterminationandavailabledisplayoptions,see:

"CoverageAreaDetermination"onpage 474.
"CoverageDisplayTypes"onpage 474.

CoverageAreaDetermination
Thesecoveragepredictionsareallbestservercoveragepredictions,i.e.,thecoverageareaofeachcellcomprisesthepixels
where the cell is the best server. Best server for each pixel is calculated as explained in "Best Server Determination" on
page 535.
CoverageDisplayTypes
Apixelofacoverageareaiscolouredifthecalculatedvalueoftheselecteddisplaytypeparameterisgreaterthanorequalto
thedefinedthresholdsvalues.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayersthatcanbedisplayedandhiddenonthemap.
ItispossibletodisplaytheCoveragebyC/(I+N)Level(DL)coveragepredictionwithcoloursdependingonthefollowingdisplay
options:

RSRQLevel(DL)(dB)
RSSILevel(DL)(dBm)
RSC/(I+N)Level(DL)(dB)
SSC/(I+N)Level(DL)(dB)
PBCHC/(I+N)Level(DL)(dB)
PDCCHC/(I+N)Level(DL)(dB)
SS&PBCHTotalNoise(I+N)(DL)(dBm)
PDSCHC/(I+N)Level(DL)(dB)
PDSCH&PDCCHTotalNoise(I+N)(DL)(dBm)

ItispossibletodisplaytheServiceAreaAnalysis(DL)coveragepredictionwithcoloursdependingonthefollowingdisplay
options:

Bearer(DL)
Modulation(DL):Modulationusedbythebearer
Service

ItispossibletodisplaytheCoveragebyThroughput(DL)coveragepredictionwithcoloursdependingonthefollowingdisplay
options:

PeakRLCChannelThroughput(DL)(kbps)
EffectiveRLCChannelThroughput(DL)(kbps)
ApplicationChannelThroughput(DL)(kbps)
PeakRLCCellCapacity(DL)(kbps)
EffectiveRLCCellCapacity(DL)(kbps)
ApplicationCellCapacity(DL)(kbps)
PeakRLCThroughputperUser(DL)(kbps)
EffectiveRLCThroughputperUser(DL)(kbps)
ApplicationThroughputperUser(DL)(kbps)

ItispossibletodisplaytheCoveragebyQualityIndicator(DL)coveragepredictionwithcoloursdependingonthefollowing
displayoptions:

Quality indicators available in the document (Quality Indicators table): Atoll calculates the PDSCH C/(I+N) levels
receivedfromthebestservingcellsateachpixeloftheircoverageareas.FromtheC/(I+N),Atolldeterminesthebest
beareravailableoneachpixel.Then,forthecalculatedC/(I+N)andbearer,itdeterminesthevalueoftheselected
qualityindicatorfromthequalitygraphsdefinedintheLTEequipmentoftheselectedterminal.

ItispossibletodisplaytheCoveragebyC/(I+N)Level(UL)coveragepredictionwithcoloursdependingonthefollowingdisplay
options:

474

PUSCH&PUCCHC/(I+N)Level(UL)(dB)
PUSCH&PUCCHTotalNoise(I+N)(UL)(dBm)
AllocatedBandwidth(UL)(No.ofFrequencyBlocks)

PUSCH&PUCCHC/(I+N)Levelfor1FrequencyBlock(UL)(dB):PUSCH&PUCCHC/(I+N)levelwith N FB UL = 1

TransmissionPower(UL)(dBm)

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

ItispossibletodisplaytheServiceAreaAnalysis(UL)coveragepredictionwithcoloursdependingonthefollowingdisplay
options:

Bearer(UL)
Modulation(UL):Modulationusedbythebearer
Service

ItispossibletodisplaytheCoveragebyThroughput(UL)coveragepredictionwithcoloursdependingonthefollowingdisplay
options:

PeakRLCChannelThroughput(UL)(kbps)
EffectiveRLCChannelThroughput(UL)(kbps)
ApplicationChannelThroughput(UL)(kbps)
PeakRLCCellCapacity(UL)(kbps)
EffectiveRLCCellCapacity(UL)(kbps)
ApplicationCellCapacity(UL)(kbps)
PeakRLCAllocatedBandwidthThroughput(UL)(kbps)
EffectiveRLCAllocatedBandwidthThroughput(UL)(kbps)
ApplicationAllocatedBandwidthThroughput(UL)(kbps)
PeakRLCThroughputperUser(UL)(kbps)
EffectiveRLCThroughputperUser(UL)(kbps)
ApplicationThroughputperUser(UL)(kbps)

ItispossibletodisplaytheCoveragebyQualityIndicator(UL)coveragepredictionwithcoloursdependingonthefollowing
displayoptions:

Qualityindicatorsavailableinthedocument(QualityIndicatorstable):AtollcalculatesthePUSCHandPUCCHC/(I+N)
levelsreceivedatthebestservingcellsfromeachpixeloftheircoverageareas.FromtheC/(I+N),Atolldeterminesthe
bestbeareravailableoneachpixel.Then,forthecalculatedC/(I+N)andbearer,itdeterminesthevalueoftheselected
qualityindicatorfromthequalitygraphsdefinedintheLTEequipmentofthebestservingcell.

6.3.2.4 CellIdentifierCollisionZonesCoveragePrediction
The Cell Identifier Collision Zones coverage prediction is based on the received downlink reference signal levels. Atoll
calculatesthereceiveddownlinkreferencesignallevelthenAtolldeterminestheselecteddisplayparameteroneachpixel
insidethecellscalculationarea.EachpixelwithinthecalculationareaofTXi(ic)isconsideredanoninterferingreceiver. L
G

Mi

Mi

Mi

Mi

, L Ant ,and L Body arenotconsideredinthecalculations.

Theresolutionofthecoveragepredictiondoesnotdependontheresolutionsofthepathlossmatricesorthegeographicdata
andcanbedefinedseparatelyforeachcoverageprediction.Coveragepredictionsaregeneratedusingabilinearinterpolation
methodfrommultiresolutionpathlossmatrices(similartotheoneusedtocalculatesitealtitudes,see"PathLossCalculation
Prerequisites"onpage 53formoreinformation).
Formoreinformationondownlinkreferencesignallevelcalculations,see"SignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 501.
Formoreinformationoncoverageareadeterminationandavailabledisplayoptions,see:

"CoverageAreaDetermination"onpage 475.
"CoverageDisplayTypes"onpage 476.

CoverageAreaDetermination
AtollusesparametersenteredintheConditiontabofthecoveragepredictionpropertiesdialoguetodeterminecoverage
areastodisplay.Itispossibletodeterminethecoverageareabasedonthebestsignallevel.Thecoverageareaofeachcell
TXi(ic)correspondstothepixelswhere:
TX i ic
TX i ic
TX i ic
TX i ic
TX j jc
MinimumThreshold C DLRS or L Total or L Path MaximumThreshold AND C DLRS Best C DLRS M
ji

WhereMisthespecifiedmargin(dB).TheBestfunctionconsidersthehighestvaluefromalistofvalues.

IfM=0 dB,AtollconsiderspixelswherethereceiveddownlinkreferencesignallevelfromTXi(ic)isthehighest.
IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelswherethereceiveddownlinkreferencesignallevelfromTXi(ic)iseitherthehighest
orwithina2 dBmarginfromthehighest
IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelswherethereceiveddownlinkreferencesignallevelfromTXi(ic)is2 dBhigherthan
thereceiveddownlinkreferencesignallevelsfromthecellswhichare2ndbestservers

475

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

CoverageDisplayTypes
Apixelofacoverageareaiscolouredifthecalculatedvalueoftheselecteddisplayparameterisgreaterthanorequaltothe
definedthresholdsvalues.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayersthatcanbedisplayedandhiddenonthemap.
Itispossibletodisplaythecoveragepredictionswithcolourspercellor:

Numberofinterferers
Numberofinterfererspercell

6.3.3 CalculationsonSubscriberLists
WhencalculationsareperformedonalistofsubscribersbyrunningtheAutomaticServerAllocation,Atollcalculatesthepath
lossagainforthesubscriberlocationsandheightsbecausethesubscriberheightscanbedifferentfromthedefaultreceiver
heightusedforcalculatingthepathlossmatrices.
AtollcalculatesthefollowingparametersforeachsubscriberinthelistwhoseLockStatusissettoNone.

ServingBaseStationandReferenceCellasdescribedin"BestServerDetermination"onpage 535.

Atollcalculatesthefollowingparametersforeachsubscriberinthelistthathasaservingbasestationassignedandwhose
LockStatusissettoNoneorServer.

Azimuth( ):Anglewithrespecttothenorthforpointingthesubscriberterminalantennatowardsitsservingbase
station.
MechanicalDowntilt( ):Anglewithrespecttothehorizontalforpointingthesubscriberterminalantennatowards
itsservingbasestation.

Atollcalculatestheremainingparametersforeachsubscriberinthelistthathasaservingbasestationassigned,usingthe
propertiesofthedefaultterminalandservice.Formoreinformation,see:

"SignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 501.
"SignalLevelCalculation(UL)"onpage 523.
"C/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(DL)"onpage 518.
"C/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(UL)"onpage 532.
"Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, Allocated Bandwidth Throughput, and Peruser Throughput Calculation" on
page 546.

6.3.4 MonteCarloSimulations
Thesimulationprocessisdividedintotwosteps.

Generatingarealisticuserdistributionasexplainedin"UserDistribution"onpage 476.
Atoll generates user distributions as part of the Monte Carlo algorithm based on traffic data. The resulting user
distributioncomplieswiththetrafficdatabaseandmapsselectedwhencreatingsimulations.

SchedulingandRadioResourceManagementasexplainedunder"SimulationProcess"onpage 479.

6.3.4.1 UserDistribution
Duringeachsimulation,Atollperformstworandomtrials.Thefirstrandomtrialgeneratesthenumberofusersandtheir
activitystatusasexplainedinthefollowingsectionsdependingonthetypeoftrafficinput.

"SimulationsBasedonUserProfileTrafficMapsandSubscriberLists"onpage 476.
"SimulationsBasedonSectorTrafficMaps"onpage 478.

Once all the user characteristics have been determined, a second random trial is performed to obtain their geographical
locationsweightedaccordingtotheclutterclasses,andwhethertheyareindoororoutdooraccordingtothepercentageof
indoorusersperclutterclass.
Atolldetermines thetotalnumberof users attemptingconnectionineachsimulation
basedonthePoissondistribution.Thismayleadtoslightvariationsinthetotalnumbers
of users in different simulations. To have the same total number of users in each
simulationofagroup,addthefollowinglinesintheAtoll.inifile:
[Simulation]
RandomTotalUsers=0

6.3.4.1.1

SimulationsBasedonUserProfileTrafficMapsandSubscriberLists
Userprofileenvironmentbasedtrafficmaps:Eachpixelofthemapisassignedanenvironmentclasswhichcontainsalistof
userprofileswithanassociatedmobilitytypeandagivendensity,i.e.,numberofusersofauserprofileperkm.

476

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Userprofiletrafficmaps:Eachpolygonorlineofthemapisassignedadensityofuserswithagivenuserprofileandmobility
type.Ifthemapiscomposedofpoints,eachpointisassignedanumberofuserswithgivenuserprofileandmobilitytype.
Fixedsubscriberslistedinsubscriberlistshaveauserprofileassignedtoeachofthem.
Userprofilesmodelthebehaviourofthedifferentusercategories.Eachuserprofilecontainsalistofservicesandparameters
describinghowtheseservicesareaccessedbytheuser.
Thenumberofusersofeachuserprofileiscalculatedfromthesurfacearea(SEnv)ofeachenvironmentclassmap(oreach
polygon)andtheuserprofiledensity(DUP).
N Users = S Env D UP

Incaseofuserprofiletrafficmapscomposedoflines,thenumberofusersof each
user profile is calculated from the line length (L) and the user profile density (DUP)
(usersperkm): N Users = L D UP

Thenumberofusersisadirectinputwhenauserprofiletrafficmapiscomposedof
points.

Atollcalculatestheprobabilityforauserbeingactiveatagiveninstantintheuplinkandinthedownlinkaccordingtothe
service usage characteristics described in the user profiles, i.e., the number of voice calls or data sessions, the average
durationofeachvoicecall,orthevolumeofthedatatransferintheuplinkandthedownlinkineachdatasession.
VoiceService(v)
Userprofileparametersforvoicetypeservicesare:

Theuserterminalequipmentusedfortheservice(fromtheTerminalstable).
Theaveragenumberofcallsperhour N Call .

Theaveragedurationofacall(seconds) D Call .

N Call D Call
Calculationoftheserviceusagedurationperhour( p 0 :probabilityofanactivecall): p 0 = ---------------------------3600
Calculationofthenumberofuserstryingtoaccesstheservicev( n v ): n v = N Users p 0
Theactivitystatusofeachuserdependsontheactivityperiodsduringthecall,i.e.,theuplinkanddownlinkactivity
UL

DL

factorsdefinedforthevoicetypeservicev, f Act and f Act .

Calculationofactivityprobabilities:
UL

DL

Probabilityofbeinginactive: p Inactive = 1 f Act 1 f Act

UL

UL

DL

Probabilityofbeingactiveintheuplink: p Active = f Act 1 f Act

DL

DL

UL

Probabilityofbeingactiveinthedownlink: p Active = f Act 1 f Act

UL + DL

UL

DL

Probabilityofbeingactiveintheuplinkanddownlinkboth: p Active = f Act f Act

Calculationofnumberofusersperactivitystatus:
Numberofinactiveusers: n v Inactive = n v p Inactive
UL

UL

Numberofusersactiveintheuplink: n v Active = n v p Active

DL

DL

Numberofusersactiveinthedownlink: n v Active = n v p Active

UL + DL

UL + DL

Numberofusersactiveintheuplinkanddownlinkboth: n v Active = n v p Active

Therefore,aconnectedusercanbeeitheractiveonbothlinks,inactiveonbothlinks,activeonULonly,oractiveon
DLonly.
DataService(d)
Userprofileparametersfordatatypeservicesare:

Theuserterminalequipmentusedfortheservice(fromtheTerminalstable).

477

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

Theaveragenumberofdatasessionsperhour N Session .

Theaveragedatavolume(inkBytes)transferredinthedownlink V

DL
UL
Theaveragethroughputsinthedownlink TP Average andtheuplink TP Average fortheserviced.

Calculationofactivityprobabilities: f

UL

DL

andtheuplink V

UL

UL

duringasession.

DL

N Session V 8
N Session V 8
DL
= ------------------------------------------ and f = -----------------------------------------UL
DL
TP Average 3600
TPAverage 3600
UL

DL

Probabilityofbeinginactive: p Inactive = 1 f 1 f
UL

Probabilityofbeingactiveintheuplink: p Active = f
DL

UL

DL

1 f

Probabilityofbeingactiveinthedownlink: p Active = f

DL

UL

1 f
UL + DL

Probabilityofbeingactiveintheuplinkanddownlinkboth: p Active = f

UL

DL

Calculationofnumberofusers:
Numberofinactiveusers: n d Inactive = N Users p Inactive
UL

UL

Numberofusersactiveintheuplink: n d Active = N Users p Active

DL

DL

Numberofusersactiveinthedownlink: n d Active = N Users p Active

UL + DL

UL + DL

Numberofusersactiveintheuplinkanddownlinkboth: n d Active = N Users p Active

Calculationofthenumberofactiveuserstryingtoaccesstheserviced(nd):
UL

DL

UL + DL

n d = n d Active + n d Active + n d Active

Theuserdistributionperserviceandtheactivitystatusdistributionbetweentheusers
areaveragedistributions.Theserviceandtheactivitystatusofeachuserarerandomly
drawn in each simulation. Therefore, if you calculate several simulations at once, the
average number of users per service and average numbers of inactive, active on UL,
activeonDLandactiveonULandDLusers,respectively,willcorrespondtocalculated
distributions.Butifyoucheckeachsimulation,theuserdistributionbetweenservicesas
wellastheactivitystatusdistributionbetweenuserscanbedifferentineachofthem.

6.3.4.1.2

SimulationsBasedonSectorTrafficMaps
Sectortrafficmapsarealsoreferredtoaslivetrafficmaps.LivetrafficdatafromtheO&Misspreadoverthebestserver
coverageareasofthetransmittersincludedinthetrafficmap.Eitherthroughputdemandsperserviceorthenumberofactive
usersperserviceareassignedtothecoverageareasofeachtransmitter.
ForeachtransmitterTXiandeachservices,

SectorTrafficMaps(Throughputs)
AtollcalculatesthenumberofactiveusersofeachservicesonULandDLinthecoverageareaofTXiasfollows:
N

UL

UL

DL

TP Cell
TPCell
DL
= ---------------------- and N = ---------------------UL
DL
TP Average
TP Average
UL

Where TP Cell isthetotaluplinkthroughputdemanddefinedinthemapforanyservicesforthecoverageareaofthe

DL

transmitter, TP Cell isthetotaldownlinkthroughputdemanddefinedinthemapforanyservicesforthecoverage

UL

DL

areaofthetransmitter, TP Average istheaverageuplinkrequestedthroughputoftheservices,and TP Average isthe

averagedownlinkrequestedthroughputoftheservices.

SectorTrafficMaps(#ActiveUsers)
UL

Atolldirectlyusesthedefined N and N
coverageareausingtheservices.

478

DL

values,i.e.,thenumberofactiveusersonULandDLinthetransmitter

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Atanygiveninstant,Atollcalculatestheprobabilityforauserbeingactiveintheuplinkandinthedownlinkasfollows:
Usersactiveintheuplinkanddownlinkbothareincludedinthe N

UL

and N

DL

values.Therefore,itisnecessaryto

UL
DL
accuratelydeterminethenumberofactiveusersintheuplink( n Active ),inthedownlink( n Active

UL + DL

),andboth( n Active ).

Asfortheothertypesoftrafficmaps,Atollconsidersbothactiveandinactiveusers.
Theactivitystatusofeachuserdependsontheactivityperiodsduringthecall,i.e.,theuplinkanddownlinkactivity
UL

DL

factorsdefinedfortheservice, f Act and f Act .

Calculationofactivityprobabilities:
UL

DL

Probabilityofbeinginactive: p Inactive = 1 f Act 1 f Act

UL

UL

DL

Probabilityofbeingactiveintheuplink: p Active = f Act 1 f Act

DL

DL

UL

Probabilityofbeingactiveinthedownlink: p Active = f Act 1 f Act

UL + DL

UL

DL

Probabilityofbeingactiveintheuplinkanddownlinkboth: p Active = f Act f Act

Calculationofthenumberofactiveuserstryingtoaccesstheservice:
Wehave: N

UL

UL

UL + DL

= p Active + p Active n and N

DL

DL

UL + DL

= p Active + p Active n

Where,nisthetotalnumberofactiveusersinthetransmittercoverageareausingtheservice.
Calculationofnumberofusersperactivitystatus:
UL

UL + DL

DL

UL + DL

N p Active
N p Active
UL + DL
Number of users active in the uplink and downlink both: n Active = Min -------------------------------------- -------------------------------------- or
UL
UL + DL
DL
+ DL
p Active + p Active p Active + p UL
Active
UL + DL

simply, n Active = Min N

UL

DL

f Act N

DL

UL

f Act
UL

Numberofusersactiveintheuplink: n Active = N
DL

UL

Numberofusersactiveinthedownlink: n Active = N
UL

DL

UL + DL

n Active
DL

UL + DL

n Active

UL + DL

And, n = n Active + n Active + n Active

Calculationofthenumberofinactiveusersattemptingtoaccesstheservice:
nv
- p Inactive
Numberofinactiveusers: n Inactive = --------------------------1 p Inactive
Theactivitystatusdistributionbetweenusersisanaveragedistribution.Infact,ineach
simulation,theactivitystatusofeachuserisrandomlydrawn.Therefore,ifyoucalculate
severalsimulationsatonce,averagenumbersofinactive,activeonUL,activeonDLand
activeonULandDLuserscorrespondtothecalculateddistribution.Butifyoucheckeach
simulation, the activity status distribution between users can be different in each of
them.

6.3.4.2 SimulationProcess
LTE cells include intelligent schedulers and radio resource management features for regulating network traffic loads,
optimisingspectralefficiency,andsatisfyingtheQoSdemandsoftheusers.EachMonteCarlosimulationintheAtollLTE
moduleisasnapshotofthenetworkwithresourceallocationcarriedoutoveradurationof1 second(100frames).Thesteps
ofthisalgorithmarelistedbelow.
Thesimulationprocesscanbesummedupintothefollowingiterativesteps.
Foreachsimulation,thesimulationprocess,
1. Generatesmobilesaccordingtotheinputtrafficdataasexplainedin"UserDistribution"onpage 476.
2. Setsinitialvaluesforthefollowingparameters:

CelltransmissionpowersandEPREsarecalculatedfromthemaximumpowerandEPREoffsetvaluesdefinedby
theuserasexplainedin"DownlinkTransmissionPowerCalculation"onpage 485.

479

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014
M

Mobiletransmissionpowerissettothemaximummobilepower( P Max ).

Cellloads( TL DL

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

, TL UL

TX ic
i

, NRUL

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

, NR UL ICIC , r DL CE ,and AU DL

)aresettotheircurrentvaluesinthe

Cellstable.
3. Determinesthebestserversforallthemobilesgeneratedforthesimulation,anddetermineswhethertheyareinthe
cellcentreorcelledge,asexplainedin"BestServerDetermination"onpage 535.
4. Sets the maximum PUSCH C/(I+N) of each cell to a value high enough to ensure that it will not cause any power
constraintsforcelledgemobiles.
TX i ic

ForallthemobilesMiservedbyanycellTXi(ic)intheuplink,Atollcalculates CINR PUSCH Max asfollowstoensure

accesstothehighestbearerusingallthefrequencyblocks.
Fromfractionalpowercontrol(see"SignalLevelCalculation(UL)"onpage 523),weknowthat:
Mi

P Allowed = CINR PUSCH Max + NR UL + n PUSCH PUCCH + FPC L Total

(1)

Where CINR PUSCH Max isthemaximumPUSCHC/(I+N), NR UL isthenoiserise, n PUSCH PUCCH istheuplinkthermal

noise, FPC isthefractionalpowercontrolfactor,and L Total arethetotallosses.
Mi

Transmitting P Allowed ,amobileMicanaccessthehighestbearerif:

Mi

Mi

(2)

P Allowed NR UL n PUSCH PUCCH L Total = T B

Mi

Where T B isthebearerselectionthresholdsofthehighestbearerdefinedintheLTEequipmentusedbythecell
TXi(ic).
Mi

Combiningequations(1)and(2),wegetthe CINR PUSCH Max foreachmobileMithatensuresaccesstothehighest

bearer:
M

TX ic

i
i
i
CINR PUSCH Max = T B + 1 FPC L Total

ForeachcellTXi(ic),thehighestvalueiskept:
TX ic

i
i
CINR PUSCH Max = Max CINR PUSCH Max

AllM
i

Foreachiterationk,thesimulationprocess,
5. DeterminesthedownlinkanduplinkC/(I+N)andbearersforeachofthesemobilesasexplainedin"C/(I+N)andBearer
Calculation(DL)"onpage 518and"C/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(UL)"onpage 532respectively.
6. Determinesthechannelthroughputsatthemobileasexplainedin"ThroughputCalculation"onpage 537.
7. Performs radio resource management and scheduling to determine the amount of resources to allocate to each
mobileaccordingtotheserviceprioritiesandthroughputdemandsofeachmobileusingtheselectedscheduleras
explainedin"SchedulingandRadioResourceManagement"onpage 551.
8. Calculates the user throughputs after allocating resources to each mobile as explained in "User Throughput
Calculation"onpage 561.

480

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Figure 6.1:LTESimulationAlgorithm
9. Updatesthetrafficloads,andnoiserisevaluesofallthecellsaccordingtotheresourcesinuseandthetotalresources
asfollows:
CalculationofTrafficLoads:
AtollcalculatesthetrafficloadsforallthecellsTXi(ic).
TX ic
i

TL DL

TX ic
i

RDL and TLUL

i

Mi

RUL
i

Mi
TX i ic

ForMUMIMO, TL DL

MU MIMO DL
Mi

RC DL

TX i ic

and TL UL

MU MIMO DL
M
i

MU MIMO UL
Mi

RC UL

MU MIMO UL
M
i

CalculationofUplinkNoiseRise:
ForeachvictimcellTXi(ic),theuplinknoiseriseiscalculatedandupdatedbyconsideringeachinterferingmobileMj
asexplainedin"InterferenceCalculation(UL)"onpage 525.
CalculationofDownlinkCelledgeTrafficRatio:
Atollcalculatesthedownlinkcelledgetrafficratioforallthecellsasfollows:

TX i ic

CE
Mi

R DL

CE
Mi

r DL CE = --------------------TX i ic
TL DL

481

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Where

Forsk2014

CE
i

R DL isthesumofthepercentagesofthedownlinkcellresourcesallocatedtomobilesinthecelledge.

CE
i

CalculationofDownlinkAASUsage:
AtollcalculatesthedownlinkAASusagesforallthecellsasfollows:

i
AAS

Mi

TX i ic

AAS
= ------------------------------TX i ic
TL DL

AU DL

Where

R DL

Mi

R DL

AAS

isthesumofthepercentagesofthedownlinkcellresourcesallocatedtomobilesservedbythe

AAS

smartantennas.
CalculationofMUMIMOGains:
AtollcalculatestheMUMIMOgainsforallthecellsasfollows:
MU MIMO DL
Mi

MU MIMO DL
Mi

TX i ic

MU MIMO UL
Mi

R DL

TX i ic

R UL

MU MIMO UL
Mi

G MU MIMO DL = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- and G MU MIMO UL = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------M

MU MIMO DL
i

RC DL

MU MIMO DL
Mi

Where
M

MU MIMO
Mi

MU MIMO UL
i

MU MIMO UL
Mi

isthesumofthepercentagesofthecellresourcesallocatedtoMUMIMOmobiles

MU MIMO
i

and

RC UL

RC

MU MIMO
Mi

isthesumoftherealresourceconsumptionofMUMIMOmobiles.

MU MIMO
Mi

10. Performsuplinknoiserisecontrolasfollows:
ForeachcellTXi(ic),Atollcalculatesthedifferencebetweenthecurrentandthemaximumnoiserisevalues(interms
ofIoT,i.e.,theratioofinterferenceoverthermalnoiseI/Nwhichcanbecalculatedfromthenoiserise:
IoT=I/N=(I+N)/N1):
TX ic

TX ic

NR i

NR i

UL
UL Max
-----------------------
------------------------------

10
10
1 10 Log 10
1
= 10 Log 10

TX i ic

NR UL

TX i ic

Here NR UL

istheuplinknoiseriseofthecellTXi(ic)calculatedinstep 9.

Thedefaultmethodofuplinknoiserisecontrolisthebesteffortmethod.Thismeansthatuplinknoiserisecontrolis
notpartofthesimulationconvergencecriteria.Inotherwords,asimulationwillconvergeoncethedownlinkand
uplinktrafficloadsandtheuplinknoiserisevaluesarestable,irrespectiveofwhetherornotthenoiserisecontrolhas
beensuccessful.Theresultingnoiserisevaluesmaybehigherthanthemaximumallowedvaluesdefinedpercell.If
theresultingnoiserisevaluesarehigherthanthemaximumallowed,thismeansthatthenoiserisecontrolrequires
moreiterationsforstabilisingtheoverallnetworksnoiserisethanthoseneededbythesimulationtoconverge.Ifyou
wishtoachieveoptimumnoiserisecontrol,youshoulddecreasetheuplinknoiseriseconvergencethresholddefined
forthesimulationsothatthesimulationtakesmoreiterationstoconvergeandallowsnoiserisecontroltoreachits
goal.Thebesteffortnoiserisecontrolworksasfollows:

TX i ic

If NR UL

0 ,thecellTXi(ic)requestsitsneighbouringcellstodecreasetheuplinktransmissionpowersofthe

mobilestheyserve(mobilesinterferingTXi(ic)).

482

TX i ic

If 0 NR UL

M NRC ,thecellTXi(ic)doesnotrequestanychange.

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

TX ic
i

If NR UL

M NRC ,thecellTXi(ic)requestsitsneighbouringcellstoincreasetheuplinktransmissionpowersof

themobilestheyserve(mobilesinterferingTXi(ic)).
Here M NRC isanoiserisecontrolmarginsetto1 dBbydefault.ThisvaluecanbechangedthroughAtoll.inifileby
addingthefollowinglinesandsettingittoavalueotherthan"1"(positivevaluesareconsideredasnegativemargins):
[LTE]
NR_CONTROL_MARGIN_MIN = 1
TheuplinktransmissionpowersofthemobilesinneighbouringcellsofthecellTXi(ic)areadjustedaccordingtothe
requestinthenextiterationbyupdatingthemaximumPUSCHC/(I+N)fortheneighbouringcellsTXj(jc):
TX j jc

CINR PUSCH Max

TX jc

j
= Min CINR PUSCH Max

TX i ic

k1

NRUL

TX jc

j
CINR PUSCH Max CINR PUSCH Limit

TX jc
j

Here CINR PUSCH Max isthemaximumPUSCHC/(I+N)fortheneighbouringcellTXj(jc)inthecurrentiterationk,

k

TX j jc

CINR PUSCH Max

k1

isthemaximumPUSCHC/(I+N)fortheneighbouringcellTXj(jc)inthepreviousiterationk1,
TX j jc

CINR PUSCH Limit is an upper limit fixed at 50 dB, and CINR PUSCH Max is the maximum PUSCH C/(I+N) for the
neighbouringcellTXj(jc)ascalculatedinstep 4.
Ifyouwishtoincludetheuplinknoiserisecontrolinthesimulationconvergencecriteria,youcanchangetheuplink
noiserisecontrolmethodfrombestefforttostrictbysettingthefollowingoptionintheAtoll.inifile:
[LTE]
ULNRControlMethod = 1
Thestrictuplinknoiserisecontrolmethodmakestheuplinknoiserisecontrolapartofthesimulationconvergence
criteria.Inotherwords,asimulationwillconvergeoncethedownlinkanduplinktrafficloadsandtheuplinknoiserise
valuesarestable,andtheuplinknoiserisevaluesofallthecellsarelessthanorequaltothedefinedmaximumuplink
noiserise.Thestrictnoiserisecontrolworksasfollows:

TX i ic

If NR UL

0 ,thecellTXi(ic)requestsitsneighbouringcellstodecreasetheuplinktransmissionpowersofthe

mobilestheyserve(mobilesinterferingTXi(ic)).

TX i ic

If NR UL

m NRC ,thecellTXi(ic)requestsitsneighbouringcellstoincreasetheuplinktransmissionpowersof

themobilestheyserve(mobilesinterferingTXi(ic)).
Here m NRC isanoiserisecontrolprecisionlevelsetto0.5 dBbydefault.ThisvaluecanbechangedthroughAtoll.ini
filebyaddingthefollowinglines:
[LTE]
ULNRControlPrecision = 5
SettingthisoptiontoXmeansthattheprecisionwillbetakenas0.X dB.Thedefaultvalueis5(=0.5dB).
TheuplinktransmissionpowersofthemobilesinneighbouringcellsofthecellTXi(ic)areadjustedaccordingtothe
requestinthenextiterationbyupdatingthemaximumPUSCHC/(I+N)fortheneighbouringcellsTXj(jc):
TX j jc

CINR PUSCH Max

TX j jc

= Max Min CINR PUSCH Max

TX i ic

k1

NR UL

TX jc

j
CINR PUSCH Max 40 20

TX j jc

Here CINR PUSCH Max isthemaximumPUSCHC/(I+N)fortheneighbouringcellTXj(jc)inthecurrentiterationk,

k

TX j jc

CINR PUSCH Max

k1

isthemaximumPUSCHC/(I+N)fortheneighbouringcellTXj(jc)inthepreviousiterationk1,and

TX j jc

CINR PUSCH Max isthemaximumPUSCHC/(I+N)fortheneighbouringcellTXj(jc)ascalculatedinstep 4.

483

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

At most six neighbouring cells are considered in uplink noise rise control. These six
neighbouringcellsarethosewhoseservedmobilesgeneratethehighestinterferencefor
thestudiedcell.
11. Performstheconvergencetesttoseewhetherthedifferencesbetweenthepreviousandcurrentvaluesarewithinthe
convergencethresholds.
Theconvergencecriteriaareevaluatedattheendofeachiterationk,andcanbewrittenasfollows:
TX i ic

TL DL

TX ic

TX i ic

TL UL

i
Max TL DL

AllTX ic

TX i ic

TL DL

TL UL

TX ic

i
Max TL UL

AllTX ic
i

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX ic

NR UL

TX i ic

If TL DL

i
Max NR UL
AllTX ic
TX i ic

Req

, TL UL

k 1

k 1

TX i ic

NR UL

k 1

TX i ic

Req

,and NR UL

Req

arethesimulationconvergencethresholdsdefinedwhencreating

thesimulation,Atollstopsthesimulationinthefollowingcases.
Convergence:Simulationhasconvergedbetweeniterationk1andk,withthebesteffortuplinknoiserisecontrol,if:
TX i ic

TL DL

TX i ic

TL DL

TX i ic

Req

AND TL UL

TX i ic

TL UL

TX i ic

Req

AND NR UL

TX i ic

NR UL

Req

Simulationhasconvergedbetweeniterationk1andk,withthestrictuplinknoiserisecontrol,if:
TX i ic

TL DL

TX ic
i

NR UL

TX i ic

TL DL

Req

AND

TX i ic

TL UL

TX i ic

TL UL

Req

AND

TX i ic

NR UL

TX i ic

NR UL

Req

AND

TX ic
i

NR UL Max

Noconvergence:Simulationhasnotconvergedevenafterthedefinedmaximumnumberofiterations,withthebest
effortuplinknoiserisecontrol,if:
TX i ic

TL DL

TX i ic

TL DL

TX i ic

Req

OR TL UL

TX i ic

TL UL

TX i ic

Req

OR NR UL

TX i ic

NR UL

Req

Simulationhasnotconvergedevenafterthedefinedmaximumnumberofiterations,withthestrictuplinknoiserise
control,if:
TX i ic

TL DL

TX i ic

NR UL

TX i ic

TL DL

Req

OR

TX i ic

TL UL

TX i ic

TL UL

Req

OR

TX i ic

NR UL

TX i ic

NR UL

Req

TX i ic

NR UL Max

12. Repeatstheabovesteps(fromstep 3.)fortheiterationk+1usingthenewcalculatedloadsasthecurrentloads.

SimulationResults
Attheendofthesimulationprocess,themainresultsobtainedare:

Downlinktrafficloads
Uplinktrafficloads
Uplinknoiserise
DownlinkICICratio
UplinkICICnoiserise
DownlinkAASusage
DownlinkMUMIMOcapacitygain
UplinkMUMIMOcapacitygain
MaximumPUSCHC/(I+N)
Numberofconnectedusersindownlink
Numberofconnectedusersinuplink

TheseresultscanbeusedasinputforC/(I+N)basedcoveragepredictions.

484

OR

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Inadditiontotheaboveparameters,thesimulationsalsolisttheconnectionstatusofeachmobile.Mobilescanberejected
dueto:

NoCoverage:IfanLTEmobiledoesnothaveanybestservingcellwithcelltype"LTE"andifanLTEAmobiledoesnot
haveanybestservingprimarycellwithcelltype"LTEAPCell"(step 3.)
NoService:Ifthemobileisnotabletoaccessabearerinthedirectionofitsactivity(step 5.),i.e.,UL,DL,orDL+UL,or
ifthemobilesminimumthroughputdemandishigherthantheUEthroughputcapacity.
SchedulerSaturation:Ifthemobileisnotinthelistofmobilesselectedforscheduling(step 7.).ForLTEAmobiles,
thisappliestothemobilesselectedforschedulingbytheirprimarycells.
ResourceSaturation:Ifallthecellresourcesareusedupbeforeallocationtothemobileorif,forauseractivein
uplink,theminimumuplinkthroughputdemandishigherthantheuplinkallocatedbandwidththroughput(step 7.).
ForLTEAmobiles,thisappliestotheirprimarycells.
BackhaulSaturation:IfallocatingresourcestoamobilemakestheeffectiveRLCaggregatesitethroughputsexceed
themaximumS1interfacethroughputsdefinedforthesite.Thisconditionisonlyverifiedifthesimulationwascreated
withtheBackhaulcapacitycheckboxselected(step 7.)

Connectedmobiles(step 7.)canbe:

ConnectedUL:IfamobileactiveinULisallocatedresourcesinUL.
ConnectedDL:IfamobileactiveinDLisallocatedresourcesinDL.
ConnectedDL+UL:IfamobileactiveinDL+ULisallocatedresourcesinDL+UL.

6.4 CalculationDetails
The following sections describe all the calculation algorithms used in point analysis, calculation of coverage predictions,
calculationsonsubscriberlists,andMonteCarlosimulations.

6.4.1 DownlinkTransmissionPowerCalculation
LTE eNodeBs have a maximum transmission power which is shared by downlink channels. These channels include the
downlinkreferencesignals,SSS,PSS,PBCH,PDCCH(whichisconsideredtoincludethePHICHandPCFICH),andPDSCH.The
transmissionpowersofvariouschannelsaredeterminedfromthedistributionofthetotalenergyoveraframeamongthe
resource elements corresponding to these channels. The energy per resource element (EPRE) of the downlink reference
signalsisconsideredtobethereferencewithrespecttowhichtheEPREofotherchannelsisdetermined.Youcaneitherdefine
thereferencesignalEPREforeachcell,orletAtollcalculateitfromthecellsmaximumpowerandtheEPREoffsetsofother
channels.TheEPREoffsetsofchannelsotherthanthedownlinkreferencesignalscanbepositivevaluesmeaningarelative
boost with respect to the downlink reference signals EPRE, or negative values meaning a reduction with respect to the
downlinkreferencesignalsEPRE.
AtollfirstdeterminestheEPREforeachchannelinthedownlinkandthenthetransmissionpowercorrespondingtoeach
channelfromtheEPREvalues.
Input

F :Subcarrierwidth(15 kHz).

W FB :Widthofafrequencyblock(180 kHz).

N FB SS PBCH :NumberoffrequencyblocksthatcarrytheSSandthePBCH(6).

N Slot SF :Numberofslotspersubframe(2).

D CP

N SD Slot :Numberofsymboldurationsperslot(7is D CP

N SD PDCCH : Number of PDCCH symbol durations per subframe defined in the TXi(ic) frame configuration or,

TX i ic

:CyclicprefixdurationdefinedintheTXi(ic)frameconfigurationor,otherwise,globalnetworksettings.
TX i ic

TX i ic

isNormal,6if D CP

isExtended).

TX i ic

otherwise,globalnetworksettings.

TX i ic

N FB

TX j jc

and N FB

: Total number of frequency blocks defined in the frequency bands table for the channel

bandwidthusedbythecell.

TX i ic

TX j jc

N FB CE0 and N FB CE0 : Number of celledge frequency blocks defined in the frame configurations table for the
channelbandwidthusedbythecellandPSSID0.

TX i ic

TX j jc

N FB CE1 and N FB CE1 : Number of celledge frequency blocks defined in the frame configurations table for the
channelbandwidthusedbythecellandPSSID1.

485

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

TX ic
i

TX jc
j

N FB CE2 and N FB CE2 : Number of celledge frequency blocks defined in the frame configurations table for the
channelbandwidthusedbythecellandPSSID2.

TX ic
i

N SF DL :NumberofdownlinksubframesintheframeforthecellTXi(ic).Itisequalto10forFDDfrequencybands,and
isdeterminedfromthecellsTDDframeconfigurationforTDDfrequencybands.

TX i ic

N TDD SSF :NumberofTDDspecialsubframes(containingDwPTS,GP,andUpPTS)intheframeforthecellTXi(ic).Itis

equalto0forFDDfrequencybands,andisdeterminedfromthecellsTDDframeconfigurationforTDDfrequency
bands.
TX i ic

TX i ic

N SF DL and N TDD SSF aredeterminedasfollows:

TX i ic

TX i ic

Configuration

N SF DL

N TDD SSF

FDD

10

DSUUUDSUUU

DSUUDDSUUD

DSUDDDSUDD

DSUUUDSUUD

DSUUUDDDDD

DSUUDDDDDD

DSUDDDDDDD

TX ic
i

N Ant TX :Numberoftransmission(downlink)antennaportsdefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

P Max :MaximumtransmissionpowerofthecellTXi(ic).

EPRE DLRS :DownlinkreferencesignalEPREofthecellTXi(ic).

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

Youcaneithersetthe P Max or EPRE DLRS foracell.

TX i ic

EPRE SS

:EnergyperresourceelementoffsetfortheSSwithrespecttothedownlinkreferencesignalsEPRE.

TX i ic

EPRE PBCH :EnergyperresourceelementoffsetforthePBCHwithrespecttothedownlinkreferencesignalsEPRE.

EPRE PDCCH :EnergyperresourceelementoffsetforthePDCCHwithrespecttothedownlinkreferencesignalsEPRE.

EPRE PDSCH :EnergyperresourceelementoffsetforthePDSCHwithrespecttothedownlinkreferencesignalsEPRE.

TX i ic
TX i ic

Calculations
IfyouhavedirectlyenteredthedownlinkreferencesignalEPREforthecell,youcanskipthesection"CalculationofDownlink
ReferenceSignalEPRE"onpage 486andgodirectlytothesection"CalculationofOtherEPREsandPerchannelPowers"on
page 491.
CalculationofDownlinkReferenceSignalEPRE
InLTE,aresourceblock(RB)isdefinedas1frequencyblockby1slot.However,schedulersareabletoperformresource
allocationeverysubframe(2slots).1frequencyblockby1subframe(2slots)iscalledaschedulerresourceblock(SRB)inthe
calculationsbelow.
Thenumberofmodulationsymbols(resourceelements)perschedulerresourceblockiscalculatedasfollows:
N Sym SRB = N SCa FB N SD Slot N Slot SF
Where N SCa FB isthenumberofsubcarriersperfrequencyblockcalculatedasfollows:
W FB
N SCa FB = --------F
Thenumberofmodulationsymbols(resourceelements)correspondingtotheDwPTSperschedulerresourceblockintheTDD
specialsubframesiscalculatedasfollows:

486

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
DwPTS

DwPTS

N Sym SSF = N SCa FB N SD SSF

DwPTS

Where N SD SSF isthenumberofDwPTSsymboldurations(OFDMsymbols)perspecialsubframe,determinedfromtheTDD

specialsubframeconfigurationaccordingtothe3GPPspecificationsasfollows:
Special
Subframe
Configuration

CyclicPrefix=Normal

CyclicPrefix=Extended

DwPTS

GP

UpPTS

DwPTS

GP

UpPTS

DwPTS
N SD SSF

GP
N SD SSF

UpPTS
N SD SSF

DwPTS
N SD SSF

GP
N SD SSF

N SD SSF

10

10

11

10

12

10

11

UpPTS

Thetotalnumberofmodulationsymbols(resourceelements)indownlinkiscalculatedasfollows:
TX i ic

TX i ic

N Sym DL = N FB

TX i ic

TX i ic

N Sym SRB N SF DL + N FB

TX i ic

DwPTS

N TDD SSF N Sym SSF

Outofthetotalnumberofmodulationsymbols,Atollthendeterminesthenumbersofmodulationsymbolscorrespondingto
eachcontrolchannelasfollows:
Thenumberofmodulationsymbolsforthedownlinkreferencesignals
Thenumberofmodulationsymbolsreservedfordownlinkreferencesignaltransmissioninoneschedulerresource
blockdependsonthenumberoftransmissionantennaports:

TX i ic

ForallsubframesexcepttheTDDspecialsubframes: N Res SRB

TX i ic

if NAnt TX = 1
8

TX i ic
= 16
if NAnt TX = 2

TX i ic

24 if NAnt TX = 4or8

ForTDDspecialsubframes:
Special
Subframe
Configuration

CyclicPrefix=Normal
DwPTS

N SD SSF

10

CyclicPrefix=Extended

TX ic
i
N Ant TX

TX ic
i
N Res DwPTS

DwPTS

N SD SSF

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

N Ant TX

N Res DwPTS

12

12

20

20

20

20

12

12

20

20

20

20

487

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

Special
Subframe
Configuration

CyclicPrefix=Normal
TX ic
i

DwPTS

N SD SSF

11

12

10

11

CyclicPrefix=Extended
TX ic
i

N Ant TX

N Res DwPTS

12

20

20

16

24

24

12

20

20

12

20

20

12

20

20

DwPTS

N SD SSF

10

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

N Ant TX

N Res DwPTS

16

24

24

12

20

20

12

20

20

Thisgivesanumberofreservedmodulationsymbolsperframe:
TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

N Sym Res = N SF DL N FB

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

N Res SRB + N TDD SSF N FB

TX i ic

N Res DwPTS

Thenumberofmodulationsymbolsusedfordownlinkreferencesignaltransmissioninoneschedulerresourceblock
is:

TX i ic

ForallsubframesexcepttheTDDspecialsubframes: N DLRS SRB

TX i ic

if N Ant TX = 1
8

TX ic
i
= 8
if N Ant TX = 2

TX i ic

6 if N Ant TX = 4or8

ForTDDspecialsubframes:
Special
Subframe
Configuration

488

CyclicPrefix=Normal
DwPTS

N SD SSF

TX i ic

CyclicPrefix=Extended

TX i ic

N Ant TX

N DLRS DwPTS

DwPTS

N SD SSF

TX i ic

TX i ic

N Ant TX

N DLRS DwPTS

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Special
Subframe
Configuration

CyclicPrefix=Normal
DwPTS

N SD SSF

10

11

12

10

11

TX ic
i

CyclicPrefix=Extended

TX ic
i

N Ant TX

N DLRS DwPTS

DwPTS

N SD SSF

10

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

N Ant TX

N DLRS DwPTS

Thisgivesanumberofdownlinkreferencesignalmodulationsymbolsperframe:
TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

N Sym DLRS = N SF DL N FB

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

N DLRS SRB + N TDD SSF N FB

TX i ic

N DLRS DwPTS

ThenumberofmodulationsymbolsfortheSS
Theprimaryandsecondarysynchonisationsignalsaretransmittedon1symboldurationeachinthe1standthe6th
downlinksubframes,overthecenter6frequencyblocks.Therefore,
N Sym PSS = 2 N FB SS PBCH N SCa FB = 144
N Sym SSS = 2 N FB SS PBCH N SCa FB = 144
And, N Sym SS = N Sym PSS + N Sym SSS = 288
ThenumberofmodulationsymbolsforthePBCH
Thephysicalbroadcastchannelistransmittedonfoursymboldurationsinthe1stdownlinksubframeoverthecenter
6frequencyblocks.Thephysicalbroadcastchanneloverlapswiththedownlinkreferencesignals,therefore,some
modulationsymbolsreservedfordownlinkreferencesignalsaresubtracted:

489

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

216forextendedcyclicprefix
240fornormalcyclicprefix
ThenumberofmodulationsymbolsforthePDCCH
The physical downlink control channel can be transmitted over up to 4 symbol durations in each subframe. The
numberofsymboldurationsforthePDCCHisdefinedintheglobalnetworksettings.Thephysicaldownlinkcontrol
channeloverlapswiththedownlinkreferencesignals,therefore,somemodulationsymbolsreservedfordownlink
referencesignalsaresubtracted:
TX ic

i
if N SD PDCCH = 0 :
TX i ic

N Sym PDCCH = 0
TX ic

TX ic

i
i
if N SD PDCCH = 1 AND N Ant TX 2 :
TX ic

TX i ic

N Sym PDCCH =

TX ic

i
N i

SD PDCCH N SCa FB 4 N FB
TX ic

TX ic
i

N SF DL

TX ic

i
i
+ N SD PDCCH N SCa FB 4 N FB

TX i ic

N TDD SSF

Otherwise:
TX ic

TX i ic

N Sym PDCCH =

TX ic

TX ic

i
i
N i

SD PDCCH N SCa FB 2 Min 4 N Ant TX N FB

TX ic

TX ic

TX ic
i

N SF DL
TX ic

i
i
i
+ Min 2 N SD PDCCH N SCa FB 2 Min 4 N Ant TX N FB

TX i ic

N TDD SSF

ThenumberofmodulationsymbolsforthePDSCH
Thetotalnumberofmodulationsymbolsintheframeexcludingallthecontrolchannelmodulationsymbolsgivesthe
numberofmodulationsymbolsavailableforuserdata,i.e.,forthePDSCH:
TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

N Sym PDSCH = N Sym DL N Sym Res N Sym SS N Sym PBCH N Sym PDCCH
The energy per resource element for 1 modulation symbol (dBm/Sym) of the downlink reference signals is calculated as
follows:

IfthereferencesignalEPREcalculationmethodissettoCalculated(equaldistributionofunusedEPRE):
TX ic

TX i ic

EPRE DLRS

P i

Max
-------------------
TX i ic
TX i ic
DwPTS
10
N SD Slot N Slot SF N SF DL + N TDD SSF N SD SSF
= 10 Log 10

TX ic

TX ic

i
i

EPRE SS
EPRE PBCH
TX ic
--------------------------------------------------------------------i
10
10
+ N Sym PBCH 10
10 L og N Sym DLRS + N Sym SS 10

+ N Sym PDCCH 10

490

TX i ic
EPRE PDCCH
-----------------------------------10

+ N Sym PDSCH 10

TX i ic
EPRE PDSCH
------------------------------------
10

IfthereferencesignalEPREcalculationmethodissettoCalculated(withboost)orCalculated(withoutboost):

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
TX ic

TX ic
i

EPRE DLRS

P i

Max
-------------------
TX ic
TX ic
10
i
i
DwPTS
= 10 Log 10
N SD Slot N Slot SF N SF DL + N TDD SSF N SD SSF

TX ic

TX ic

i
i

EPRE SS
EPRE PBCH
TX ic
--------------------------------------------------------------------i
10
10
10 L og N Sym Res + N Sym SS 10
+ N Sym PBCH 10

+ N Sym PDCCH 10

TX ic
i
EPRE PDCCH
-----------------------------------10

+ N Sym PDSCH 10

TX ic
i
EPRE PDSCH
------------------------------------
10

CalculationofOtherEPREsandPerchannelPowers
Theenergyperresourceelementfor1modulationsymbol(dBm/Sym)oftheSSiscalculatedasfollows:
TX i ic

EPRE SS

TX i ic

TX i ic

= EPRE DLRS + EPRE SS

Theenergyperresourceelementfor1modulationsymbol(dBm/Sym)ofthePBCHiscalculatedasfollows:
TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

EPRE PBCH = EPRE DLRS + EPRE PBCH

Theenergyperresourceelementfor1modulationsymbol(dBm/Sym)ofthePDCCHiscalculatedasfollows:
TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

EPRE PDCCH = EPRE DLRS + EPRE PDCCH

Theenergyperresourceelementfor1modulationsymbol(dBm/Sym)ofthePDSCHiscalculatedasfollows:
TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

EPRE PDSCH = EPRE DLRS + EPRE PDSCH

If the reference signal EPRE calculation method is set to Calculated (with boost), the "boosted" RS energy per resource
elementiscalculatedasfollows:
TX i ic

EPRE DLRS

TX i ic

= EPRE DLRS

N TXi ic
Sym Res
+ 10 Log ------------------------ TXi ic

N Sym DLRS

Theinstantaneousdownlinkreferencesignaltransmissionpoweriscalculatedasfollows:
TX i ic

P DLRS

TX i ic

TX i ic

= EPRE DLRS + 10 Log 2 N FB

TX ic
i

Where 2 N FB

impliesthatattheinstantwhendownlinkreferencesignalsaretransmitted,theyaretransmittedusing2

subcarriersineachfrequencyblock.
TheinstantaneousSStransmissionpoweriscalculatedasfollows:
TX i ic

P SS

TX i ic

= EPRE SS

+ 10 Log N SCa FB N FB SS PBCH

TheinstantaneousPBCHtransmissionpoweriscalculatedasfollows:
TX i ic

TX i ic

P PBCH = EPRE PBCH + 10 Log N SCa FB N FB SS PBCH

Where N SCa FB N FB SS PBCH impliesthatattheinstantwhentheSSandthePBCHaretransmitted,theyaretransmitted
usingallthesubcarriersinthecentre6consecutivefrequencyblocks.
TheaveragePDCCHtransmissionpoweriscalculatedasfollows:
TX i ic

P PDCCH

TX i ic

N SymPDCCH

= EPRE PDCCH + 10 Log ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

TX

ic

TX

ic

TX

ic

TX

ic

i
i
i
i
N SD PDCCH N SF DL + Min 2 N SD PDCCH N TDD SSF
TX i ic

TheaveragePDSCHtransmissionpoweriscalculatedasfollows:

491

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

TX ic
i

P PDSCH

Forsk2014

TX ic
i

TX ic
N
i
Sym

PDSCH
= EPRE PDSCH + 10 Log --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

TX ic
TX ic
i
i
N
N Slot SF N SD PDCCH N SF DL
SD Slot

TX i ic
TX i ic
DwPTS

+ N SD SSF Min 2 N SD PDCCH N TDD SSF

AsthenumberofsubcarriersusedforthePDCCHandPDSCHtransmissionvariesovertime,i.e.,fromonesymboldurationto
thenext,theinstantaneouspowersofthePDCCHandthePDSCHalsovaryovertime.Thisiswhyaveragetransmissionpowers
arecalculatedandusedinAtoll.
EPREandTransmissionPoweradjustmentforICIC
ThefollowingappliestoRS,PDCCH,andPDSCHEPREsforcellsusingdownlinkstaticICIC.
1. NoICIC,timeswitchedFFR,andhardFFR
Celledgeandcellcentrefrequencyblocksarenottransmittedatthesametime.Therefore,
TX i ic

TX i ic

EPRE DLRS CC = EPRE DLRS

TX i ic

EPRE PDCCH CC

TX i ic

EPRE PDSCH CC
TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic
TX i ic
N FB
N FB
and EPRE DLRS CE = EPRE DLRS ---------------- ----------------TX i ic
TX i ic
N FB CC
N FB CE

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

TX i ic
TX i ic
N FB
N FB
= EPRE PDCCH ----------------and EPRE PDCCH CE = EPRE PDCCH ----------------TX i ic
TX i ic
N FB CC
N FB CE

TX i ic

TX i ic
TX i ic
N FB
N FB
and EPRE PDSCH CE = EPRE PDSCH ----------------= EPRE PDSCH ----------------TX ic
TX ic
i
i
N FB CC
N FB CE

TX i ic

TX i ic

P DLRS CC = P DLRS CE = P DLRS

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

P PDCCH CC = P PDCCH CE = P PDCCH

P PDSCH CC = P PDSCH CE = P PDSCH
2. SoftandpartialsoftFFR
Celledgeandcellcentrefrequencyblocksaretransmittedatthesametime;therefore,powerisdividedamongcell
centreandcelledgefrequencyblocks.Therefore,wehave,
TX i ic

TX i ic

EPRE DLRS CC = EPRE DLRS

TX i ic

TX i ic
TX i ic
TX i ic
N FB
---------------------------------------------------------------------- and EPRE DLRS CE = EPRE DLRS CC CE
TX ic
TX ic
TX i ic
i N i

FB CE + N FB CC
CE
TX i ic

TX i ic
TX i ic
TX i ic
TX i ic
TX i ic
N FB
- and EPRE PDCCH
EPRE PDCCH CC = EPRE PDCCH -------------------------------------------------------------------- CE = EPRE PDCCH CC CE
TX ic
TX ic
TX i ic
i N i

FB CE + N FB CC
CE

TX i ic

EPRE PDSCH CC

TX i ic

TX i ic
TX i ic
TX i ic
N FB
= EPRE PDSCH ---------------------------------------------------------------------- and EPRE PDSCH CE = EPRE PDSCH CC CE
TX i ic
TX i ic
TX i ic

N FB CE + N FB CC
CE

TX i ic

P DLRS CC = P DLRS

TX i ic

P PDCCH CC

492

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic
TX i ic EPRE
EPRE DLRS CC
DLRS CE
- and P DLRS
---------------------------- CE = P DLRS ----------------------------TX i ic
TX i ic
EPRE DLRS
EPRE DLRS

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic
TX i ic
EPRE PDCCH CC
EPRE PDCCH CE
- and P PDCCH
= P PDCCH -------------------------------- CE = P PDCCH --------------------------------TX i ic
TX i ic
EPRE PDCCH
EPRE PDCCH

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

TX ic
i
P PDSCH CC

TX ic
i

Intheabove, CE
TX i ic

If CE

TX ic
i
P PDSCH

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

TX ic
TX ic
EPRE PDSCH CC
EPRE PDSCH CE
i
i
- and P PDSCH
------------------------------- CE = P PDSCH -------------------------------TX ic
TX ic
i
i
EPRE PDSCH
EPRE PDSCH

EPRE CE
isthecelledgepowerboostforcellTXi(ic)sframeconfiguration.Bydefinition: CE = ----------------EPRE CC
TX i ic

isleftempty,itisautomaticallycalculatedasfollows: CE

TX i ic

TX i ic

N FB CC
= ----------------TX i ic
N FB CE

TX i ic

N FB CC and N FB CE arerespectivelythenumbersoffrequencyblocksincellcentreandcelledgeofTXi(ic).
Numberoffrequencyblocksin

ICICmode

Cellcentre

Celledge

TX i ic

NoFFR

N FB

TimeswitchedFFR

N FB

TX i ic

TX i ic

N FB CEx
TX i ic

SoftFFR

TX i ic

TX i ic

N FB CEx

TX i ic

HardFFR

PartialsoftFFR

TX i ic

N FB

N FB
TX i ic

N FB

TX i ic

TX ic

N FB CEx

TX i ic

TX i ic

N FB CEx
TX ic

N FB CEx
TX ic

i
i
i
N FB CE0 + N FB CE1 + N FB CE2

TX i ic

TX i ic

N FB CEx

TX i ic

Where N FB CEx canbe N FB CE0 , N FB CE1 ,or N FB CE2 dependingonthePSSIDofTXi(ic).

Output
TX ic
i

EPRE DLRS :EnergyperresourceelementofthedownlinkreferencesignalsforcellTXi(ic).

EPRE SS

EPRE PBCH :EnergyperresourceelementofthePBCHforcellTXi(ic).

EPRE PDCCH :EnergyperresourceelementofthePDCCHforcellTXi(ic).

EPRE PDSCH :EnergyperresourceelementofthePDSCHforcellTXi(ic).

P DLRS :InstantaneoustransmissionpowerofthedownlinkreferencesignalsforcellTXi(ic).

P SS

TX i ic

:EnergyperresourceelementoftheSSforcellTXi(ic).

TX i ic
TX i ic
TX i ic

TX ic
i
TX i ic

:InstantaneoustransmissionpoweroftheSSforcellTXi(ic).

TX i ic

P PBCH :InstantaneoustransmissionpowerofthePBCHforcellTXi(ic).

P PDCCH :AveragetransmissionpowerofthePDCCHforcellTXi(ic).

P PDSCH :AveragetransmissionpowerofthePDSCHforcellTXi(ic).

TX i ic
TX i ic

6.4.2 CoandAdjacentChannelOverlapsCalculation
AnLTEnetworkcanconsistofcellsthatusedifferentchannelbandwidths.Therefore,thestartandendfrequenciesofallthe
channelsmaynotexactlycoincide.Channelbandwidthsofcellscanoverlapeachotherwithdifferentratios.

493

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

Figure 6.2:CoChannelandAdjacentChannelOverlaps
Thefollowingsectionsdescribehowthecoandadjacentchanneloverlapsarecalculatedbetweenthechannelsusedbyany
studied cell TXi(ic) and any other cell TXj(jc) of the network. In terms of interference calculation, the studied cell can be
consideredavictimofinterferencereceivedfromtheothercellsthatmightbeinterferingthestudiedcell.
TX ic
i

Ifthestudiedcellisassignedachannelnumber N Channel ,itreceivescochannelinterferenceonthechannelbandwidthof

TX i ic

TX i ic

N Channel ,andadjacentchannelinterferenceontheadjacentchannelbandwidths,i.e.,correspondingto N Channel 1 and

TX i ic

N Channel + 1 .
Inordertocalculatethecoandadjacentchanneloverlapsbetweentwochannels,itisnecessarytocalculatethestartand
end frequencies of both channels (explained in "Conversion From Channel Numbers to Start and End Frequencies" on
page 494).Oncethestartandendfrequenciesareknownforthestudiedandothercells,thecoandadjacentoverlapsand
thetotaloverlapratioarecalculatedasrespectivelyexplainedin:

"CoChannelOverlapCalculation"onpage 495.
"AdjacentChannelOverlapCalculation"onpage 496.
"TotalOverlapRatioCalculation"onpage 496.

6.4.2.1 ConversionFromChannelNumberstoStartandEndFrequencies
Input

TX i ic

TX j jc

F Start Band and F Start Band :StartfrequenciesofthefrequencybandsassignedtothecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

F Start Band canbethestartfrequencyofaTDDfrequencyband( F Start TDD ),ortheuplinkorthedownlinkstart
frequencyofanFDDfrequencyband( F Start FDD UL or F Start FDD DL ).
First TX i ic

First TX j jc

N Channel

N Channel and N Channel :ChannelnumbersassignedtocellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

TX i ic

and N Channel

:FirstchannelnumbersthefrequencybandassignedtothecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

TX j jc

ForFDDnetworks,Atollconsidersthatthesamechannelnumberisassignedtoacellinthedownlinkanduplink,i.e.,
thechannelnumberyouassigntoacellisconsideredforuplinkanddownlinkboth.

494

TX i ic

TX j jc

W Channel and W Channel :BandwidthsofthechannelsassignedtocellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

ICS Band and ICS Band :InterchannelspacingofthefrequencybandsassignedtocellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

CN Band and CN Band :ChannelnumberstepofthefrequencybandsassignedtocellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX j jc

TX j jc

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Calculations
Channelnumbersareconvertedintostartandendfrequenciesasfollows:
ForcellTXi(ic):
TX ic
i
F Start

TX i ic

F End

TX ic
i
F Start Band

TX i ic

N TXi ic N First TXi ic

TX ic
TX ic
i
i
Channel
Channel

-
+ W Channel + ICS Band ------------------------------------------------------TX i ic

CN Band
TX i ic

= F Start + W Channel

ForcellTXj(jc):
TX j jc

F Start

TX j jc

F End

N TX j jc N First TXj jc
TX j jc
TX j jc
Channel
Channel

-
= F Start Band + W Channel + ICS Band ------------------------------------------------------TX jc

CN Band
TX j jc

TX j jc

TX j jc

= F Start + W Channel

Output
TX ic
i

TX jc
j

F Start and F Start :StartfrequenciesforthecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

F End

TX i ic

TX j jc

and F End

:EndfrequenciesforthecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

6.4.2.2 CoChannelOverlapCalculation
Input

TX i ic

TX j jc

F Start and F Start : Start frequencies for the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Conversion From Channel
NumberstoStartandEndFrequencies"onpage 494.

TX i ic

TX j jc

F End

and F End

: End frequencies for the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Conversion From Channel

NumberstoStartandEndFrequencies"onpage 494.

TX ic
i

W Channel :BandwidthofthechannelassignedtothestudiedcellTXi(ic).

Calculations
AtollfirstverifiesthatcochanneloverlapexistsbetweenthecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).
Cochanneloverlapexistsif:
TX i ic

TX j jc

F Start F End

TX i ic

AND F End

TX j jc

F Start

Otherwisethereisnocochanneloverlap.
Atollcalculatesthebandwidthofthecochanneloverlapasfollows:
TX i ic TX j jc

W CCO

TX jc

TX ic

TX jc

TX ic

j
i
j
i
= Min F End F End Max F Start F Start

Thecochanneloverlapratioisgivenby:
TX i ic TX j jc

r CCO

TX ic TX jc
i
j

W CCO
= ---------------------------------TX j jc
W Channel

Output

TX i ic TX j jc

r CCO

:CochanneloverlapratiobetweenthecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

495

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

6.4.2.3 AdjacentChannelOverlapCalculation
Input

TX ic
i

TX jc
j

F Start and F Start : Start frequencies for the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Conversion From Channel
NumberstoStartandEndFrequencies"onpage 494.

TX i ic

TX j jc

F End

and F End

: End frequencies for the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Conversion From Channel

NumberstoStartandEndFrequencies"onpage 494.

TX i ic

W Channel :BandwidthofthechannelassignedtothestudiedcellTXi(ic).

Calculations
Atoll first verifies that adjacent channel overlaps exist between (the lowerfrequency and the higherfrequency adjacent
channelsof)thecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).
Adjacentchanneloverlapexistsonthelowerfrequencyadjacentchannelif:
TX i ic

TX i ic

TX j jc

F Start W Channel F End

TX i ic

TX j jc

AND F Start F Start

Adjacentchanneloverlapexistsonthehigherfrequencyadjacentchannelif:
TX i ic

F End

TX j jc

F End

TX i ic

AND F End

TX i ic

TX j jc

+ W Channel F Start

Otherwisethereisnoadjacentchanneloverlap.
Atolldeterminestheadjacentchanneloverlapratioasfollows:
Bandwidthofthelowerfrequencyadjacentchanneloverlap:
TX i ic TX j jc

W ACO

TX jc

TX ic

TX jc

TX ic

TX ic

j
i
j
i
i
= Min F End F Start Max F Start F Start W Channel

Thelowerfrequencyadjacentchanneloverlapratioisgivenby:
TX i ic TX j jc

r ACO

TX i ic TX j jc

W ACO
L
= ---------------------------------TX j jc
W Channel

Bandwidthofthehigherfrequencyadjacentchanneloverlap:
TX i ic TX j jc

W ACO

TX j jc

TX i ic

= Min F End F End

TX ic

TX jc

TX ic

i
j
i
+ W Channel Max F Start F End

Thehigherfrequencyadjacentchanneloverlapratioisgivenby:
TX i ic TX j jc

r ACO

TX i ic TX j jc

W ACO
H
= ---------------------------------TX jc
j
W Channel

Theadjacentchanneloverlapratioisgivenby:
TX i ic TX j jc

r ACO

TX i ic TX j jc

= r ACO

TX i ic TX j jc

+ r ACO

Output

TX ic TX jc
i
j

r ACO

:AdjacentchanneloverlapratiobetweenthecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

6.4.2.4 TotalOverlapRatioCalculation
Input

TX i ic TX j jc

r CCO

: Cochannel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) andTXj(jc) as calculated in "CoChannel Overlap

Calculation"onpage 495.

496

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

TX ic TX jc
i
j

r ACO

:AdjacentchanneloverlapratiobetweenthecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc)ascalculatedin"AdjacentChannel

OverlapCalculation"onpage 496.

TX ic
i

f ACS

:AdjacentchannelsuppressionfactordefinedforthefrequencybandofthecellTXi(ic).

Calculations
Thetotaloverlapratiois:
TX ic TX jc
i
j
rO

TX ic TX jc
i
j
r CCO

TX ic TX jc
i
j
r ACO

10

TX i ic
f ACS
----------------------10

Output

TX i ic TX j jc

rO

:TotalcoandadjacentchanneloverlapratiobetweenthecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

6.4.3 SubframePatternCollisionCalculation
SubframetransmissionandreceptionpatternscanbedefinedforeachcellusingtheAlmostBlankSubframe(ABS)Pattern
field.TheABSpatternisabitmap,i.e.,aseriesof0sand1swhereeachbitcorrespondstoonesubframe.InanABSpattern,
each0signifiesanormalsubframeand1impliesanalmostblanksubframe.Almostblanksubframesdonotcarryanytraffic.
OnlyreferencesignalsaretransmittedoveranABS.Forexample,theABSpattern"0100001000"meansthatsubframes1and
6arealmostblanksubframeswhereasalltheothersubframesarenormalsubframescarryingtraffic.
ABSpatternsareusedinconjunctionwithcellrangeexpansionforeICIC(enhancedintercellinterferencecoordination,also
knownastimedomainICIC)inanefforttominimisecelledgeinterferencebetweenmacroandsmallcellsinheterogeneous
LTEnetworks(HetNets).
Inordertocalculatethecollisionbetweennormalandalmostblanksubframes,thecellsABSpatternsmustbenormalised,
and the used downlink, uplink, and special subframe patterns determined from the ABS patterns. These calculations are
respectivelyexplainedin:

"SubframePatternNormalisation"onpage 497.
"DeterminationofEffectiveSubframePatterns"onpage 498.
"CalculationofSubframeCollisionProbabilities"onpage 499.

6.4.3.1 SubframePatternNormalisation
Prior to the calculation of subframe collision probabilities, Atoll normalises the different ABS pattern lengths in order to
performlogical(bitbybit)ANDandORoperationsafterwards.
ABSpatternsarenormalisedasfollows:
1. ThestandardlengthoftheABSpatternofacellisdeterminedfromitsfrequencybandsduplexingmethodand,in
casethecellsfrequencybandisaTDDband,fromthecellsTDDframeconfiguration.ThestandardlengthsoftheABS
patternbitmapsasdefinedbythe3GPPareasfollows:

FDDcells:40bits
TDDcellsusingtheframeconfiguration0:70bits
TDDcellsusingtheframeconfiguration1through5:20bits
TDDcellsusingtheframeconfiguration6:60bits

ThenormalisedABSpatternlengthusedinAtollis80bits,whichcoversallthestandardlengths.ABSpatternsof
differentlengthsarenormalisedto80bitsbyAtoll.
2. TheABSpatterniscorrectedtomatchthestandardABSpatternlengthsdeterminedinstep 1.:

IftheABSpatterncontainsanasterisk,thepatternof0sand1sleadingtheasteriskiscyclicallyrepeateduntilit
matchesthestandardABSpatternlength.Any0sand1senteredafteranasteriskwillbeignored.
FDDexample:0100010000*=0100010000010001000001000100000100010000

IftheABSpatternisshorterthanthestandardABSpatternlength,itisfilledwith0stomatchthestandardABS
patternlength.
FDDexample:01000100000100010000=0100010000010001000000000000000000000000

IftheABSpatternislongerthanthestandardABSpatternlength,itistruncatedtomatchthestandardABSpattern
length.
FDDexample:01000100000100010000010001000001000100000111110000=
0100010000010001000001000100000100010000

497

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

IftheABSpatternisempty,itmeansthattherearenoalmostblanksubframesdefinedandallthesubframescan
carrytraffic.
FDDexample:NULL=0=0*=0000000000000000000000000000000000000000

3. TheABSpatterndeterminedinstep 2.isresizedto80bits.Moreprecisely,theABSpatternisconcatenatedwithitself.
Examples:

FDD:
0100010000010001000001000100000100010000=
01000100000100010000010001000001000100000100010000010001000001000100000100010000

TDDframeconfiguration0:
0100010000010001000001000100000100010000010001000001000100000100010000=
01000100000100010000010001000001000100000100010000010001000001000100000100010000

TDDframeconfigurations1through5:
01000100000100010000=
01000100000100010000010001000001000100000100010000010001000001000100000100010000

TDDframeconfiguration6:
010001000001000100000100010000010001000001000100000100010000=
01000100000100010000010001000001000100000100010000010001000001000100000100010000

OncetheABSpattern SFP ABS hasbeennormalised,itisinvertedtodeterminetheusedsubframepattern SFP Used thatis

usedinfurthercalculations:
SFP Used = !SFP ABS

6.4.3.2 DeterminationofEffectiveSubframePatterns
Effectivedownlink,uplink,andspecialsubframepatterns( SFP DL , SFP UL ,and SFP SSF )aredeterminedasfollowsbyapplying
masks ( SFM DL , SFM UL , and SFM SSF ) to the normalised used subframe patterns SFP Used determined as explained in
"SubframePatternNormalisation"onpage 497:
SFP DL = SFP Used ANDSFM DL
SFP UL = SFP Used ANDSFM UL
SFP SSF = SFP Used ANDSFM SSF
SFM DL , SFM UL ,and SFMSSF are,respectively,thedownlink,uplinkandspecialsubframemaskslistedbelow:
FDD
SFM DL
SFM UL

11111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111

SFM SSF
TDDframeconfiguration0DSUUUDSUUU
SFM DL

10000100001000010000100001000010000100001000010000100001000010000100001000010000

SFM UL

00111001110011100111001110011100111001110011100111001110011100111001110011100111

SFM SSF

01000010000100001000010000100001000010000100001000010000100001000010000100001000

TDDframeconfiguration1DSUUDDSUUD
SFM DL

10001100011000110001100011000110001100011000110001100011000110001100011000110001

SFM UL

00110001100011000110001100011000110001100011000110001100011000110001100011000110

SFM SSF

01000010000100001000010000100001000010000100001000010000100001000010000100001000

TDDframeconfiguration2DSUDDDSUDD

498

SFM DL

10011100111001110011100111001110011100111001110011100111001110011100111001110011

SFM UL

00100001000010000100001000010000100001000010000100001000010000100001000010000100

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

SFM SSF

01000010000100001000010000100001000010000100001000010000100001000010000100001000

TDDframeconfiguration3DSUUUDDDDD
SFMDL

10000111111000011111100001111110000111111000011111100001111110000111111000011111

SFM UL

00111000000011100000001110000000111000000011100000001110000000111000000011100000

SFM SSF

01000000000100000000010000000001000000000100000000010000000001000000000100000000

TDDframeconfiguration4DSUUDDDDDD
SFMDL

10001111111000111111100011111110001111111000111111100011111110001111111000111111

SFM UL

00110000000011000000001100000000110000000011000000001100000000110000000011000000

SFM SSF

01000000000100000000010000000001000000000100000000010000000001000000000100000000

TDDframeconfiguration5DSUDDDDDDD
SFMDL

10011111111001111111100111111110011111111001111111100111111110011111111001111111

SFM UL

00100000000010000000001000000000100000000010000000001000000000100000000010000000

SFM SSF

01000000000100000000010000000001000000000100000000010000000001000000000100000000

TDDframeconfiguration6DSUUUDSUUD
SFMDL

10000100011000010001100001000110000100011000010001100001000110000100011000010001

SFM UL

00111001100011100110001110011000111001100011100110001110011000111001100011100110

SFM SSF

01000010000100001000010000100001000010000100001000010000100001000010000100001000

6.4.3.3 CalculationofSubframeCollisionProbabilities
The probabilities of collision of subframes between a studied cell TXi(ic) and any interfering cell TXj(jc) are calculated as
follows.

X implies the sum of 1s in a given

In the following equations, the operator

seriesofbits,X.
Inthefollowingequations, AND and OR arelogicalbitbybitoperators.

Method1:ABSPatternsUsedOnlyatCellEdges
Bydefault,ABSpatternsareconsideredonlytobeusedforservingusersatcelledges.Thismeansthatallsubframesare
considerednonABSsubframesinthecellcentre.ThisisequivalenttosettingthefollowingAtoll.inioption:
[LTE]
UseABSonCellEdgeOnly = 1
Different collision probabilities are calculated depending on the location of the served pixel, subscriber, or mobile in cell
TXi(ic):

SubframecollisionbetweencellcentreofTXi(ic)andcellcentreofTXj(jc):

TX i ic TX j jc

p ABS DL CC

AND SFM j ORSFM j

DL
SSF

1
= ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TX ic
TX ic
SFM i ORSFM i
DL
SSF

TX i ic

SFMDL

TX i ic

ORSFM SSF

TX jc

TX jc

TX i ic TX j jc

p ABS UL CC

AND SFM j ORSFM j

UL
SSF

1
= ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TX i ic
TX i ic
SFM
ORSFM SSF
UL

TX i ic

SFMUL

TX i ic

ORSFM SSF

TX jc

TX jc

499

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

SubframecollisionbetweencelledgeofTXi(ic)andcellcentreofTXj(jc):

TX ic TX jc
i
j

p ABS DL CC

TX jc
TX jc
j
j
AND SFM DL ORSFM SSF

1
= -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TX ic
TX ic
SFP i ORSFP i
DL
SSF

TX ic
i

SFPDL

TX ic
i

ORSFP SSF

TX i ic TX j jc

p ABS UL CC

TX jc
TX jc
j
j

AND SFM UL ORSFM SSF

1
= -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TX ic
TX ic
SFP i ORSFP i
UL
SSF

TX ic
i

SFPUL

TX ic
i

ORSFP SSF

SubframecollisionbetweencellcentreofTXi(ic)andcelledgeofTXj(jc):

TX ic TX jc
i
j

p ABS DL CE

TX jc
TX jc
j
j

AND SFP DL ORSFP SSF

1
= -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TX ic
TX ic
SFM i ORSFM i
DL
SSF

TX ic
i

SFMDL

TX ic
i

ORSFM SSF

TX i ic TX j jc

p ABS UL CE

AND SFP j ORSFP j

UL
SSF

1
= --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TX ic
TX ic
SFM i ORSFM i
UL
SSF

TX i ic

SFMUL

TX i ic

TX jc

ORSFM SSF

TX jc

SubframecollisionbetweencelledgeofTXi(ic)andcelledgeofTXj(jc):

TX i ic TX j jc

p ABS DL CE

AND SFP j ORSFP j

DL
SSF

1
= ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TX ic
TX ic
SFP i ORSFP i
DL
SSF

TX i ic

SFPDL

TX i ic

TX jc

ORSFP SSF

TX jc

TX i ic TX j jc

p ABS UL CE

AND SFP j ORSFP j

UL
SSF

1
= ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TX ic
TX ic
SFP i ORSFP i
UL
SSF

TX i ic

SFPUL

TX i ic

TX jc

ORSFP SSF

TX jc

Thismethodenablesyoutoincludethecelledgetrafficratiointhecalculationofinterference.Thedownlinkinterference
reductionfactorduetosubframecollisionsforanyservedpixel,subscriber,ormobileincellTXi(ic)iscalculatedasfollows:
TX i ic TX j jc

f ABS DL

TX jc

TX ic TX jc

TX jc

TX ic TX jc

j
i
j
j
i
j
= 10 Log r DL CE p ABS DL CE + 1 r DL CE p ABS DL CC

Theuplinkinterferencereductionfactorduetosubframecollisionsforanyservedpixel,subscriber,ormobileincellTXi(ic)is
calculatedasfollows:
TX i ic TX j jc

f ABS UL

TX ic TX jc

TX ic TX j jc

i
j
i
= 10 Log p ABS UL CE or f ABS UL

TX ic TX jc

i
j
= 10 Log p ABS UL CC

Method2:ABSPatternsUsedThroughouttheCell
IfyouwishtoapplytheABSpatternsthroughoutthecell,irrespectiveofthecelledgeareaandthecelledgetrafficratio,you
candosobyaddingthefollowinglinesintheAtoll.inifile:
[LTE]
UseABSonCellEdgeOnly = 0
ThefollowingcollisionprobabilitiesarecalculatedbetweencellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc):

500

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

TX ic TX jc
i
j

p ABS DL

TX jc
TX jc
j
j

AND SFP DL ORSFP SSF

1
= ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TX ic
TX ic
SFP i ORSFP i
DL
SSF

TX ic
i

SFPDL

TX ic
i

ORSFP SSF

TX i ic TX j jc

p ABS UL

AND SFP j ORSFP j

UL
SSF

1
= ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TX i ic
TX i ic
SFP
ORSFP SSF
UL

TX i ic

SFPUL

TX i ic

ORSFP SSF

TX jc

TX jc

Thedownlinkinterferencereductionfactorduetosubframecollisionsforanypixel,subscriber,ormobileiscalculatedas
follows:
TX i ic TX j jc

TX i ic TX j jc

= 10 Log p ABS DL

f ABS DL

Theuplinkinterferencereductionfactorduetosubframecollisionsforanypixel,subscriber,ormobileiscalculatedasfollows:
TX i ic TX j jc

TX ic TX j jc

i
= 10 Log p ABS UL

f ABS UL

6.4.4 SignalLevelandSignalQualityCalculations
Thesecalculationsincludethecalculationofthereceivedsignallevels,andnoiseandinterference.Thefollowingsections
describehowthereceivedsignallevels,thenoiseandinterference,C/N,andC/(I+N)ratiosarecalculatedinAtoll:

"SignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 453.
"NoiseCalculation(DL)"onpage 505.
"InterferenceCalculation(DL)"onpage 505.
"C/NCalculation(DL)"onpage 516.
"C/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(DL)"onpage 518.
"SignalLevelCalculation(UL)"onpage 523.
"NoiseCalculation(UL)"onpage 525.
"InterferenceCalculation(UL)"onpage 525.
"NoiseRiseCalculation(UL)"onpage 528.
"C/NCalculation(UL)"onpage 529.
"C/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(UL)"onpage 532.

6.4.4.1 SignalLevelCalculation(DL)
Input
TX i ic

P Max :MaxpowerofthecellTXi(ic).

P DLRS :TransmissionpowerofthedownlinkreferencesignalsforcellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"DownlinkTransmission

TX i ic

PowerCalculation"onpage 485.

TX i ic

P SS

:TransmissionpoweroftheSSforcellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"DownlinkTransmissionPowerCalculation"on

page 485.

TX i ic

P PBCH :TransmissionpowerofthePBCHforcellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"DownlinkTransmissionPowerCalculation"
onpage 485.

TX i ic

P PDCCH :TransmissionpowerofthePDCCHforcellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"DownlinkTransmissionPowerCalculation"
onpage 485.

TX i ic

P PDSCH :TransmissionpowerofthePDSCHforcellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"DownlinkTransmissionPowerCalculation"
onpage 485.

TX i ic

EPRE DLRS :EnergyperresourceelementofthedownlinkreferencesignalsforcellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"Downlink

TransmissionPowerCalculation"onpage 485.

501

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

TX ic
i

EPRE SS

: Energyperresource elementof the SS forcellTXi(ic) as calculatedin"DownlinkTransmissionPower

Calculation"onpage 485.

TX ic
i

EPRE PBCH :EnergyperresourceelementofthePBCHforcellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"DownlinkTransmissionPower

Calculation"onpage 485.

TX i ic

EPRE PDCCH :EnergyperresourceelementofthePDCCHforcellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"DownlinkTransmissionPower

Calculation"onpage 485.

TX i ic

EPRE PDSCH :EnergyperresourceelementofthePDSCHforcellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"DownlinkTransmissionPower

Calculation"onpage 485.
TX i

E SA :NumberofantennaelementsdefinedforthesmartantennaequipmentusedbythetransmitterTXi.

G SA

G SA

Div
G SA

Array

:Smartantennaarraygainoffsetdefinedperclutterclass.

Combining

:Smartpowercombininggainoffsetdefinedperclutterclass.

:Smartantennadiversitygain(forcrosspolarisedsmartantennas)definedperclutterclass.

TX i

G Ant :TransmitterantennagainfortheantennausedbythetransmitterTXi.

G SA :Smartantennagaininthedirection oftheservedpixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.Formoreinformationon

TX i

TX i

thecalculationof G SA ,see"BeamformingSmartAntennaModels"onpage 41.

TX i

:TotaltransmitterlossesforthetransmitterTXi( L

TX i

L Model :Lossonthetransmitterreceiverpath(pathloss)calculatedusingapropagationmodel.

L Ant :Antennaattenuation(fromantennapatterns)calculatedfortheantennausedbythetransmitterTXi.

M Shadowing Model :Shadowingmarginbasedonthemodelstandarddeviation.

= L Total DL ).

TX i

Incoveragepredictions,shadowingmarginsaretakenintoaccountwhentheoption"Shadowingtakenintoaccount"
isselected.

L Indoor :Indoorlossestakenintoaccountwhentheoption"Indoorcoverage"isselected.

Mi

Mi

:Receiverterminallossesforthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.
:Receiverterminalsantennagainforthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Mi

L Ant :Receiverterminalsantennaattenuationcalculatedforthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.
M

Forcalculatingtheusefulsignallevelfromthebestservingcell, L Ant isdeterminedinthedirection(H,V)=(0,0)from

Mi

theantennapatternsoftheantennausedbyMi.Forcalculatingtheinterferingsignallevelfromanyinterferer, L Ant
isdeterminedinthedirectionoftheinterferingcellfromtheantennapatternsoftheantennausedbyMi,whilethe
antennaispointedtowardsMisbestservingcell.

L Body :Bodylossdefinedfortheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Mi

, G

Mi

Mi

Mi

, L Ant , and L Body are not used in the calculations performed for the point

analysistoolsprofiletab,deltapathlosscalculation,andthedownlinkreferencesignal
levelbasedcoveragepredictions.

TX i ic

D CP

:CyclicprefixdurationdefinedintheTXi(ic)frameconfigurationor,otherwise,intheglobalnetworksettings.

Calculations
Thereceivedsignallevels(dBm)fromanycellTXi(ic)arecalculatedforapixel,subscriber,ormobileMiasfollows:

502

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
TX ic
i

C Max

TX ic
i

= EIRP Max L Path M Shadowing Model L Indoor + G

TX ic
i

Withoutsmartantennas: EIRP Max

TX ic
i

Withsmartantennas: EIRP Max

TX i ic

C DLRS

TX ic
i

TX

= P Max + G Ant L
TX ic
i

TX

= P Max + G Ant L

TX

TX i ic

= EIRP1 DLRS L Path M Shadowing Model L Indoor + G

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX

TX ic
i

TX i ic

C SS

TX i ic

= EIRP1 SS

TX ic
i

Mi

TX

L Path M Shadowing Model L Indoor + G

TX ic
i

Withoutsmartantennas: EIRP1 SS

TX i ic

Withsmartantennas: EIRP1 SS
TX i ic

TX

TX ic
i

= P SS

TX i ic

= P SS

TX

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

Mi

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

Mi

Mi

Combining

Div

+ G SA

Mi

L Ant L Body + f CP

Mi

Mi

Mi

L Ant L Body + f CP

TX i

TX

i
Combining
Div
+ 10 Log E SA + G SA
+ G SA

TX i

Withoutsmartantennas: EIRP1 PDSCH = P PDSCH + G Ant L

TX i ic

TX

Mi

Mi

i
Combining
Div
+ 10 Log E SA + G SA
+ G SA

TX i

C PDSCH = EIRP1 PDSCH L Path M Shadowing Model L Indoor + G

Mi

L Ant L Body + f CP

TX i

TX i

TX i

Mi

Withoutsmartantennas: EIRP1 PDCCH = P PDCCH + G Ant L

Withsmartantennas: EIRP1 PDCCH = P PDCCH + G Ant L

Mi

L Ant L Body + f CP

TX i

Mi

C PDCCH = EIRP1 PDCCH L Path M Shadowing Model L Indoor + G

Mi

Div

+ G SA

+ 10 Log E SA + G SA

TX i

TX i

Combining

TX i

Withoutsmartantennas: EIRP1 PBCH = P PBCH + G Ant L

Withsmartantennas: EIRP1 PBCH = P PBCH + G Ant L

Mi

TX

TX i

C PBCH = EIRP1 PBCH L Path M Shadowing Model L Indoor + G

i
Combining
+ 10 Log E SA + G SA

TX i

+ G Ant L

+ G Ant L

L Ant L Body + f CP

TX

TX i

= P DLRS + G Ant L

+ 10 Log E SA + G SA

Withoutsmartantennas: EIRP1 DLRS = P DLRS + G Ant L

Withsmartantennas: EIRP1 DLRS

L Ant L Body + f CP

TX i

TX i

Array

Withsmartantennas: EIRP1 PDSCH = P PDSCH + G SA + G SA

Combining

+ G SA

Div

+ G SA L

TX i

Theenergyperresourceelement(dBm/Sym)receivedfromanycellTXi(ic)arecalculatedforapixel,subscriber,ormobileMi
asfollows:
TX i ic

RSRP: E DLRS

TX i ic

= EIRP2 DLRS L Path M Shadowing Model L Indoor + G

TX i ic

TX i ic

Mi

TX i

Withoutsmartantennas: EIRP2 DLRS = EPRE DLRS + G Ant L

TX i ic

Withsmartantennas: EIRP2 DLRS

TX i ic

E SS

TX i ic

= EIRP2 SS

TX i ic

TX i

= EPRE DLRS + G Ant L

L Path M Shadowing Model L Indoor + G

TX i ic

Withoutsmartantennas: EIRP2 SS

TX i ic

Withsmartantennas: EIRP2 SS

TX i ic

= EPRE SS

TX i ic

= EPRE SS

Mi

TX i

TX i

TX i

Mi

Mi

L Ant L Body + f CP

TX

i
Combining
+ 10 Log E SA + G SA

+ G Ant L

+ G Ant L

Mi

TX i

Mi

TX i

Mi

Mi

L Ant L Body + f CP

TX i

TX i

+ 10 Log E SA + G SA

Combining

Div

+ G SA

503

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks
TX ic
i

Forsk2014
TX ic
i

E PBCH = EIRP2 PBCH L Path M Shadowing Model L Indoor + G

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

TX

Withoutsmartantennas: EIRP2 PBCH = EPRE PBCH + G Ant L

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

TX

Withsmartantennas: EIRP2 PBCH = EPRE PBCH + G Ant L

TX i ic

TX i ic

E PDCCH = EIRP2 PDCCH L Path M Shadowing Model L Indoor + G

TX i ic

TX i ic

Mi

TX

TX

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

Mi

TX i

TX

TX i ic

TX i ic

E PDSCH = EIRP2 PDSCH L Path M Shadowing Model L Indoor + G

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

Mi

TX

TX

TX i ic

TX i

Mi

Combining

Div

+ G SA

Mi

L Ant L Body + f CP

TX i

TX

i
Combining
Div
+ 10 Log E SA + G SA
+ G SA

Mi

Withoutsmartantennas: EIRP2 PDSCH = EPRE PDSCH + G Ant L

TX i ic

TX

Withoutsmartantennas: EIRP2 PDCCH = EPRE PDCCH + G Ant L

Withsmartantennas: EIRP2 PDCCH = EPRE PDCCH + G Ant L

L Ant L Body + f CP

+ 10 Log E SA + G SA

Mi

Mi

L Ant L Body + f CP

TX

Array

Withsmartantennas: EIRP2 PDSCH = EPRE PDSCH + G SA + G SA

Combining

+ G SA

Div

+ G SA L

TX i

Intheabove, L Path isthepathloss(dB)calculatedasfollows:

TX i

L Path = L Model + L Ant

Furthermore,thetotallossesbetweenthecellandthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMicanbecalculatedasfollows:
L Total = L Path + L

TX i

+ L Indoor + M Shadowing Model G

TX i

+L

Mi

Mi

Mi

Mi

+ L Ant + L Body

f CP isthecyclicprefixfactor,i.e.,theratiooftheusefulsymbolenergytothetotalsymbolenergy.
Thetotalsymboldurationofamodulationsymbolcomprisestheusefulsymbolduration,carryingtheactualdatabits,anda
cyclicprefix,addedtotheusefuldatabitsaspaddingagainstmultipathtoavoidintersymbolinterference.Hence,thetotal
energywithinamodulationsymbolbelongsinparttotheusefuldatabitsandinparttothecyclicprefix.Onceamodulation
symbolisreceived,onlytheenergyoftheusefuldatabitscanbeusedforextractingthedata.Theenergybelongingtothe
cyclicprefixislostonceithasserveditspurposeofcombattingintersymbolinterference.Therefore, f CP impliesthatthe
energybelongingtothecyclicprefixisexcludedfromtheusefulsignallevel.

f CP

TX ic
10 Log 7 7.5 If D CPi = Normal

TX i ic
=
= Extended
10 Log 6 7.5 If D CP

0
If TX i ic isaninterferer

Thecyclicprefixenergyandtheusefuldatabitsenergyarebothtakenintoaccountwhencalculatinginterferingsignallevels.
Output
TX i ic

C Max :ReceivedmaxsignallevelfromthecellTXi(ic)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

C DLRS :ReceiveddownlinkreferencesignallevelfromthecellTXi(ic)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

C SS

TX i ic
TX ic
i

:ReceivedSSsignallevelfromthecellTXi(ic)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

TX i ic

C PBCH :ReceivedPBCHsignallevelfromthecellTXi(ic)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

C PDCCH :ReceivedPDCCHsignallevelfromthecellTXi(ic)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

C PDSCH :ReceivedPDSCHsignallevelfromthecellTXi(ic)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

E DLRS :ReceiveddownlinkreferencesignalenergyperresourceelementfromthecellTXi(ic)atthepixel,subscriber,

TX i ic
TX i ic

TX i ic

ormobileMi.

504

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
TX ic
i

E SS

:ReceivedSSenergyperresourceelementfromthecellTXi(ic)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

E PBCH :ReceivedPBCHenergyperresourceelementfromthecellTXi(ic)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

E PDCCH :ReceivedPDCCHenergyperresourceelementfromthecellTXi(ic)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

E PDSCH :ReceivedPDSCHeneregyperresourceelementfromthecellTXi(ic)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

L Path :PathlossbetweenthecellTXi(ic)andthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

L Total :TotallossesbetweenthecellTXi(ic)andthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

TX ic
i
TX ic
i
TX i ic

6.4.4.2 NoiseCalculation(DL)
FordeterminingtheC/NandC/(I+N),Atollcalculatesthedownlinknoisewhichcomprisesthermalnoiseandthenoisefigure
oftheequipment.Thethermalnoisedensitydependsonthetemperature,i.e.,itremainsconstantforagiventemperature.
However,thevalueofthethermalnoisevarieswiththeusedbandwidth.
Input

K:Boltzmannsconstant.
T:TemperatureinKelvin.
F :Subcarrierwidth(15 kHz).

nf

Mi

:Noisefigureoftheterminalusedforcalculationsbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Calculations
Thepowerspectraldensityofthermalnoiseiscalculatedasfollows:
n 0 = 10 Log K T 1000 = 174dBm/Hz
Thethermalnoiseforoneresourceelement,i.e.,overonesubcarrier,iscalculatedasfollows:
TX i ic

n 0 Sym = n 0 + 10 Log F
Thedownlinknoiseisthesumofthethermalnoiseandthenoisefigureoftheterminalusedforthecalculationsbythepixel,
subscriber,ormobileMi.Thedownlinknoiseforoneresourceelement,i.e.,overonesubcarrier,iscalculatedasfollows:
TX i ic

n Sym

TX i ic

= n 0 Sym + nf

Mi

Output

TX i ic

n Sym

:Downlinknoiseforonesubcarrier.

6.4.4.3 InterferenceCalculation(DL)
Theinterferencereceivedbyanypixel,subscriber,ormobile,servedbyacellTXi(ic)fromothercellsTXj(jc)canbedefinedas
thesignallevelsreceivedfrominterferingcellsTXj(jc)dependingontheoverlapthatexistsbetweenthechannelsusedbythe
cellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc),onthetrafficloadsoftheinterferingcellsTXj(jc),andwhetherthecellssupportICICornot.
Input

TX j jc

E DLRS : Received downlink reference energy per resource element received from any interfering cell TXj(jc) as
calculatedin"SignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 501atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMicoveredbythecell
TXi(ic).

TX jc
j

E SS

:ReceivedSSenergyperresourceelementreceivedfromanyinterferingcellTXj(jc)ascalculatedin"Signal

LevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 501atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMicoveredbythecellTXi(ic).

TX j jc

E PBCH :ReceivedPBCHenergyperresourceelementreceivedfromanyinterferingcellTXj(jc)ascalculatedin"Signal
LevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 501atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMicoveredbythecellTXi(ic).

TX jc
j

E PDCCH :ReceivedPDCCHenergyperresourceelementreceivedfromanyinterferingcellTXj(jc)ascalculatedin"Signal
LevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 501atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMicoveredbythecellTXi(ic).

505

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

TX jc
j

E PDSCH :ReceivedPDSCHenergyperresourceelementreceivedfromanyinterferingcellTXj(jc)ascalculatedin"Signal
LevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 501atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMicoveredbythecellTXi(ic).

TX

G SA :Smartantennagaininthedirection .Formoreinformation,see"BeamformingSmartAntennaModels"on
page 41.

TX j

G SA : Smart antenna gain in the direction calculated from the average array correlation matrix:
H

G SA = g n S R Avg S .Formoreinformation,see"BeamformingSmartAntennaModels"onpage 41.

M Shadowing Model :Shadowingmarginbasedonthemodelstandarddeviation.

M Shadowing C I :ShadowingmarginbasedontheC/Istandarddeviation.
In Monte Carlo simulations, the received energies per resource element from interferers already include
M Shadowing Model ,asexplainedin"SignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 501.
Incoveragepredictions,theratio M Shadowing Model M Shadowing C I isappliedtotheinterferingsignals(formore
information,see"ShadowFadingModel"onpage 86).Asthereceivedenergiesperresourceelementfrominterferers
alreadyinclude M Shadowing Model , M Shadowing C I isaddedtothereceivedenergiesperresourceelementfrom
interferersinordertoachievetheratio M Shadowing Model M Shadowing C I :
E

TX j jc

= E

TX j jc

+ M Shadowing C I

Incoveragepredictions,shadowingmarginsaretakenintoaccountwhentheoption"Shadowingtakenintoaccount"
isselected.
TX jc
j

N Sym DLRS :Numberofdownlinkreferencesignalresourceelementsascalculatedin"DownlinkTransmissionPower

Calculation"onpage 485.
N Sym SS :NumberofSSresourceelementsascalculatedin"DownlinkTransmissionPowerCalculation"onpage 485.

N Sym PBCH : Number of PBCH resource elements as calculated in "Downlink Transmission Power Calculation" on

TX j jc

page 485.

TX j jc

N Sym PDCCH :NumberofPDCCHresourceelementsascalculatedin"DownlinkTransmissionPowerCalculation"on

page 485.

TX j jc

N Sym PDSCH :NumberofPDSCHresourceelementsascalculatedin"DownlinkTransmissionPowerCalculation"on

page 485.

TX j jc

N Sym DL :Totalnumberofdownlinkresourceelementsascalculatedin"DownlinkTransmissionPowerCalculation"
onpage 485.

TX i ic TX j jc

rO

: Total channel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Co and Adjacent

ChannelOverlapsCalculation"onpage 493.

TX j jc

TL DL

:DownlinktrafficloadoftheinterferingcellTXj(jc).

TrafficloadscaneitherbecalculatedusingMonteCarlosimulations,orenteredmanuallyforeachcell.Calculationof
trafficloadsisexplainedin"SimulationProcess"onpage 479.
TX j jc

AU DL

W FB :Widthofafrequencyblockinthefrequencydomain(180 kHz).

N FB SS PBCH :NumberoffrequencyblocksthatcarrytheSSandthePBCH(6).

N FB

TX i ic

:DownlinkAASusageoftheinterferingcellTXj(jc).

TX j jc

and N FB

: Total number of frequency blocks defined in the frequency bands table for the channel

bandwidthusedbythecell.

TX i ic

TX j jc

N FB CE0 and N FB CE0 : Number of celledge frequency blocks defined in the frame configurations table for the
channelbandwidthusedbythecellandPSSID0.

TX i ic

TX j jc

N FB CE1 and N FB CE1 : Number of celledge frequency blocks defined in the frame configurations table for the
channelbandwidthusedbythecellandPSSID1.

506

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

TX ic
i

TX jc
j

N FB CE2 and N FB CE2 : Number of celledge frequency blocks defined in the frame configurations table for the
channelbandwidthusedbythecellandPSSID2.

TX ic
i

TX jc
j

F Start and F Start :StartfrequenciesofthechannelsassignedtothecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc)calculatedasexplained

in"ConversionFromChannelNumberstoStartandEndFrequencies"onpage 494.
TX i ic

TX j jc

W Channel and W Channel :BandwidthsofthechannelsassignedtocellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

ID

r DL CE and r DL CE :DownlinkcelledgetrafficratiosofthecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

N Ant TX :Numberoftransmission(downlink)antennaportsdefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

N Ant TX :Numberoftransmission(downlink)antennaportsdefinedforthecellTXj(jc).

TX i ic

TX ic
i

TX j jc

and ID

:PhysicalcellIDsofthecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

TX jc
j

TX i ic

TX j jc

Calculations
TwointerferencecalculationmethodsexistinAtoll.

TX j jc

TX j jc

Calculationsof f MIMO , f TL

TX i ic TX j jc

, f ICIC DL

TX i ic TX j jc

, f PDCCH

TX i ic TX j jc

,and f PDSCH

are

explainedattheendofthissection.

TX j jc

In the calculations below, E DLRS is weighted by the downlink subframe collision

TX ic TX jc
i
j

probability f ABS DL

whentherelevantoptionissetintheAtoll.inifile:

[LTE]
eICIConRS = 1
Method1:SynchronisedTransmissionandReception
Atollcalculatestheinterferencebetweentwocellsusingthismethodwhen:

Thefrequencychannelsassignedtotheinterferedandinterferingcellshavethesamecentrefrequency,and
Theinterferedandinterferingcellsbothhaveanevennumberoffrequencyblocksorbothhaveanoddnumberof
frequencyblocks,and
TheAtoll.inifiledoesnotcontainthefollowingoption:
[LTE]
SameItf_PDSCH_RS_PDCCH = 1
SynchronisedtransmissionandreceptionmeansthattheOFDMsymbolsoftheinterferedandinterferingframesoverlapand
matcheachotherintime.
Theinterferingenergyperresourceelement(dBm/Sym)receivedoverdownlinkreferencesignalsfromanycellTXj(jc)ata
pixel,subscriber,ormobileMiiscalculatedasfollows:

RSoftheinterferedcellTXi(ic)collideonlywithRSoftheinterferingcellTXj(jc)
TX ic
i

Thisoccurswhen ID PSS

TX jc
j

= ID PSS

TX jc
j

TX ic
i

and N Ant TX N Ant TX

Forthecalculationoftheprobabilityofcollision,here N Ant TX = Min 4 N Ant TX .

TX jc

TX jc
j

DLRS

j
TX ic
E DLRS
N i
---------------------
TX ic TX jc
10
i
j
Ant TX
= 10 Log ------------------ 10
TX j jc
+ fO
N Ant TX

RSoftheinterferedcellTXi(ic)collidewithRS,PDCCH,andPDSCHoftheinterferingcellTXj(jc)
TX i ic

Thisoccurswhen ID PSS

TX j jc

= ID PSS

TX j jc

TX i ic

and N Ant TX N Ant TX

507

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

Forthecalculationoftheprobabilityofcollision,here N Ant TX = Min 4 N Ant TX .

With1or2antennaports:
TX jc

TX j jc

DLRS

j
TX jc

E
DLRS
N j
---------------------
TX ic TX j jc
10
Ant TX
+f i
= 10 Log ------------------ 10
O
TXi ic

N Ant TX

TX jc

TX ic TX jc

TX jc

TX ic TX jc

TX jc

TX ic TX jc

TX jc

TX ic TX jc

j
i
j
j
i
j

E PDCCH + f PDCCH
E PDSCH + f PDSCH
TX j jc
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TXi ic
10
10
N Ant TX N Ant TX 10

+ 3 10
+ 10 L og -------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TX i ic
4

N Ant TX

TX i ic

With4or8antennaportsand N SD PDCCH = 1 :
TX jc

TX j jc

DLRS

j
TX jc
E DLRS
N j
---------------------
TX i ic TX j jc
10
Ant TX
= 10 Log ------------------ 10
TX i ic
+ fO
N Ant TX

TX jc

TX ic TX jc

j
i
j
j
i
j

E PDCCH + f PDCCH
E PDSCH + f PDSCH
TX j jc
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TXi ic
10
10
N Ant TX N Ant TX 10

+ 5 10
+ 10 L og -------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TX i ic
6

N Ant TX

TX ic
i

With4or8antennaportsand N SD PDCCH 1 :
TX jc

TX j jc

DLRS

j
TX jc

E
DLRS
N j
---------------------
TX ic TX j jc
10
Ant

TX
+f i
= 10 Log ------------------ 10
O
TX

ic

i
N Ant TX

TX jc

TX ic TX jc

j
i
j
j
i
j

E PDCCH + f PDCCH
E PDSCH + f PDSCH
TX j jc
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TXi ic
10
10
N Ant TX N Ant TX 10

+ 2 10
+ 10 L og -------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TX i ic
3

N Ant TX

RSoftheinterferedcellTXi(ic)collideonlywithPDCCHandPDSCHoftheinterferingcellTXj(jc)
TX ic
i

This occurs when ( ID PSS

TX i ic

ID PSS

TX jc
j

= ID PSS

TX ic
i

and Shift

TX jc
j

TX ic
i

TX j jc

ID PSS

With1or2antennaports:
TX jc

TX jc
j

DLRS

TX ic TX jc

TX ic TX jc

j
i
j
j
i
j
EPDCCH

+ f PDCCH
E PDSCH + f PDSCH
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------10
10
TX ic TX jc
10

+ 3 10
i
j
= 10 Log ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + f O
4

TX i ic

With4or8antennaportsand N SD PDCCH = 1 :

508

TX jc

TX jc
j

= Shift 3 and N Ant TX = N Ant TX = 1 ) OR

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
TX jc

TX jc
j

DLRS

TX ic TX jc

TX jc

TX ic TX jc

TX jc

TX ic TX jc

j
i
j
j
i
j
EPDCCH

+f
E
+f
PDCCH
PDSCH PDSCH
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------10
10
TX ic TX jc
10

+ 5 10
i
j
= 10 Log ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + f O
6

TX i ic

With4or8antennaportsand N SD PDCCH 1 :
TX jc

TX j jc

DLRS

TX ic TX jc

j
i
j
j
i
j
EPDCCH

+ f PDCCH
E PDSCH + f PDSCH
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------10
10
TX i ic TX j jc
10

+ 2 10
= 10 Log ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + f O
3

Theinterferingenergyperresourceelement(dBm/Sym)receivedovertheSSandthePBCHfromanycellTXj(jc)atapixel,
subscriber,ormobileMiiscalculatedasfollows:
TX j jc

TX jc
j

SS PBCH

TX j jc

E PBCH
ESS

--------------------TX j jc
-------------------
10
10
TX ic TX jc
TX jc
10
N Sym SS + 10
N Sym PBCH
j
j
- + f O i
= 10 Log ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ f MIMO
TX j jc

N Sym SS + N Sym PBCH

Theinterferingenergyperresourceelement(dBm/Sym)receivedoverthePDCCHfromanycellTXj(jc)atapixel,subscriber,
ormobileMiiscalculatedasfollows:

PDCCHoftheinterferedcellTXi(ic)collideswithPDCCHandalltheRSoftheinterferingcellTXj(jc)
TX i ic

This occurs when ( ID PSS

TX ic
i

ID PSS

TX j jc

= ID PSS

TX i ic

and Shift

TX j jc

TX i ic

TX j jc

= Shift 3 and N Ant TX = N Ant TX = 1 ) OR

TX jc
j

ID PSS

Forthecalculationoftheprobabilityofcollision,here N Ant TX = Min 4 N Ant TX .

TX jc

TX jc
j

PDCCH

E DLRS
TX j jc

---------------------
TX ic TX jc
N
1
j
Sym DLRSinPDCCH
- 10 10 + f O i
----------------------------------------= 10 Log ------------------TX j jc
TX i ic

N Sym PDCCH
N Ant TX

TX jc

TX ic TX jc

j
i
j
TX ic

E PDCCH + f PDCCH
TX j jc
N i
-----------------------------------------------------------------------

N
10
Sym PDCCH
Sym DLRSinPDCCH

- 10
+ 10 L og ----------------------------------------------------------------------------TX i ic

N Sym PDCCH

Here, N Sym DLRSinPDCCH isthenumberofdownlinkreferencesignalresourceelementsthatfallwithinthePDCCH,and

N Sym PDCCH isthenumberofPDCCHresourceelementsperframe.

PDCCHoftheinterferedcellTXi(ic)collideswithPDCCHandsomeRSoftheinterferingcellTXj(jc)
TX ic
i

Thisoccurswhen ID PSS

TX jc
j

= ID PSS

TX jc
j

TX ic
i

and N Ant TX N Ant TX

Forthecalculationoftheprobabilityofcollision,here N Ant TX = Min 4 N Ant TX .

509

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014
TX jc

TX jc
j

PDCCH

j
TX ic

E
TX jc
TX ic
DLRS
j
i
N i
---------------------
TX ic TX jc
N

N
10
j
Ant TX
Sym DLRSinPDCCH
Sym DLRSinPDCCH
+f i
- 10
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------= 10 Log ------------------O
TX jc
TX ic

j
i
N Ant TX
N Sym PDCCH

TX jc

TX ic TX jc

j
i
j
TX jc

E PDCCH + f PDCCH
N j
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
10
Sym

PDCCH

+ 10 L og ---------------------------- 10
TX i ic

N Sym PDCCH

Here, N Sym DLRSinPDCCH isthenumberofdownlinkreferencesignalresourceelementsthatfallwithinthePDCCH,and

N Sym PDCCH isthenumberofPDCCHresourceelementsperframe.

PDCCHoftheinterferedcellTXi(ic)collidesonlywithPDCCHoftheinterferingcellTXj(jc)
TX i ic

Thisoccurswhen ID PSS
TX j jc

TX j jc

TX j jc

= ID PSS

TX i ic TX j jc

PDCCH = E PDCCH + f PDCCH

TX j jc

TX i ic

and N Ant TX N Ant TX

TX i ic TX j jc

+ fO

Theinterferingenergyperresourceelement(dBm/Sym)receivedoverthePDSCHfromanycellTXj(jc)atapixel,subscriber,
ormobileMiiscalculatedasfollows:

PDSCHoftheinterferedcellTXi(ic)collideswithPDSCHandalltheRSoftheinterferingcellTXj(jc)
TX i ic

This occurs when ( ID PSS

TX i ic

ID PSS

TX j jc

= ID PSS

TX i ic

and Shift

TX j jc

TX i ic

TX j jc

= Shift 3 and N Ant TX = N Ant TX = 1 ) OR

TX j jc

ID PSS

Forthecalculationoftheprobabilityofcollision,here N Ant TX = Min 4 N Ant TX .

TX jc

TX j jc

PDSCH

E DLRS
TX j jc

--------------------
TX ic TX j jc
N Sym DLRSinPDSCH
1
- 10 10 + f O i
= 10 Log ------------------ ----------------------------------------TX

jc

TX

ic

j
i
N Sym PDSCH
N Ant TX

TX jc

TX ic TX jc

j
i
j
TX ic

E PDSCH + f PDSCH
TX j jc
N i
-----------------------------------------------------------------------

N
10
Sym PDSCH
Sym DLRSinPDSCH

10
+ 10 L og ----------------------------------------------------------------------------TX i ic

N Sym PDSCH

Here, N Sym DLRSinPDSCH isthenumberofdownlinkreferencesignalresourceelementsthatfallwithinthePDSCH,and

N Sym PDSCH isthenumberofPDSCHresourceelementsperframe.

PDSCHoftheinterferedcellTXi(ic)collideswithPDSCHandsomeRSoftheinterferingcellTXj(jc)
TX i ic

Thisoccurswhen ID PSS

TX j jc

= ID PSS

TX j jc

TX i ic

and N Ant TX N Ant TX

Forthecalculationoftheprobabilityofcollision,here N Ant TX = Min 4 N Ant TX .

510

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
TX jc

TX jc
j

PDSCH

j
TX ic

E
TX jc
TX ic
DLRS
j
i
N i
---------------------
TX ic TX jc
N

N
10
j
Ant TX
Sym DLRSinPDSCH
Sym DLRSinPDSCH
+f i
- 10
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------= 10 Log ------------------O
TX jc
TX ic

j
i
N Ant TX
N Sym PDSCH

TX jc

TX ic TX jc

j
i
j
TX jc

E PDSCH + f PDSCH
N j
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
10
Sym

PDSCH

- 10
+ 10 L og ---------------------------TX i ic

N Sym PDSCH

Here, N Sym DLRSinPDSCH isthenumberofdownlinkreferencesignalresourceelementsthatfallwithinthePDSCH,and

N Sym PDSCH isthenumberofPDSCHresourceelementsperframe.

PDSCHoftheinterferedcellTXi(ic)collidesonlywithPDSCHoftheinterferingcellTXj(jc)
TX i ic

TX j jc

Thisoccurswhen ID PSS
TX j jc

TX j jc

= ID PSS

TX i ic TX j jc

PDSCH = E PDSCH + f PDSCH

TX j jc

TX i ic

and N Ant TX N Ant TX

TX i ic TX j jc

+ fO

Method2:NonsynchronisedTransmissionandReception
Atollcalculatestheinterferencebetweentwocellsusingthismethodwhen:

Thefrequencychannelsassignedtotheinterferedandinterferingcellsdonothavethesamecentrefrequency,or
Theinterferedandinterferingcellsdonotbothhaveanevennumberoffrequencyblocksordonotbothhaveanodd
numberoffrequencyblocks,or
TheAtoll.inifilecontainsthefollowingoption:
[LTE]
SameItf_PDSCH_RS_PDCCH = 1
ThismethodisalsousedforcalculatingtheinterferencereceivedfromLTEcellsofanexternalnetworkincoplanningmode,
i.e.,intertechnologyinterferencereceivedfromLTEcellscalculatedusingtheintertechnologyIRFs.
Theinterferingenergyperresourceelement(dBm/Sym)receivedoverdownlinkreferencesignalsfromanycellTXj(jc)ata
pixel,subscriber,ormobileMiiscalculatedasfollows:
TX jc

TX j jc

DLRS

TX jc

TX ic TX jc

j
i
j
E j
E PDCCH + f PDCCH
TX j jc
TX jc
DLRS ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ N j
N
10
10
Sym DLRS
Sym PDCCH

- + 10
------------------------ ----------------------------= 10 Log 10
TX j jc
TX j jc

N Sym DL
N Sym DL

+ 10

TX j jc TX i ic TX j jc
E PDSCH + f PDSCH
----------------------------------------------------------------------10

TX j jc
TX ic TX j jc
N Sym PDSCH
- + fO i
---------------------------TX j jc

N Sym DL

Theinterferingenergyperresourceelement(dBm/Sym)receivedovertheSSandthePBCHfromanycellTXj(jc)atapixel,
subscriber,ormobileMiiscalculatedasfollows:
TX j jc

TX j jc

SS PBCH

TX j jc

TX j jc

TX j jc

+ f MIMO
E PBCH + f MIMO
ESS

----------------------------------------------TX j jc
---------------------------------------------
10
10
TX ic TX j jc
N Sym SS + 10
N Sym PBCH
10
- + f O i
= 10 Log --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TX j jc

N Sym SS + N Sym PBCH

Theinterferingenergyperresourceelement(dBm/Sym)receivedoverthePDSCHandthePDCCHfromanycellTXj(jc)ata
pixel,subscriber,ormobileMiiscalculatedasfollows:

511

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014
TX jc

TX jc

TX jc
j

PDSCH

+ 10

TX jc TX ic TX jc
j
i
j
E PDSCH + f PDSCH
----------------------------------------------------------------------10

TX j jc
TX ic TX j jc
N Sym PDSCH
- + fO i
---------------------------TX j jc

N Sym DL

TX jc

TX j jc

TX ic TX jc

j
i
j
E j
E
+f
TX jc
TX jc
DLRS
PDCCH PDCCH
j
j
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------N
N Sym PDCCH
10
10
Sym DLRS

- + 10
----------------------------= 10 Log 10
------------------------
TX jc
TX jc
j
j

N Sym DL
N Sym DL

PDCCH

TX jc

TX ic TX jc

j
i
j
E j
E PDCCH + f PDCCH
TX j jc
TX j jc
DLRS -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------N Sym DLRS
N Sym PDCCH
10
10

---------------------------------------------------- TX jc + 10

= 10 Log 10
TX j jc

j
N Sym DL
N Sym DL

+ 10

TX j jc TX i ic TX j jc
E PDSCH + f PDSCH
----------------------------------------------------------------------10

TX j jc
TX ic TX j jc
N Sym PDSCH
- + fO i
---------------------------TX j jc

N Sym DL

EUTRAcarrierRSSIismeasuredontheOFDMsymbolsthatcontainreferencesignals.Therefore,theinterferingenergyper
frequencyblock(dBm/RB)receivedfromanycellTXj(jc)atapixel,subscriber,ormobileMiover1frequencyblockduringan
OFDMsymbolcarryingreferencesignals,isgivenasfollows:
For cells using more than 1 antenna port, the encircled 10 in the formulas below is
replacedwith8.

TX j jc

TX j jc

RSSI

TX i ic TX j jc

EPDSCH + fPDSCH
TX j jc
---------------------------------------------------------------------10
N Sym PDSCH
10
10
= 10 Log --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TX j jc
TX j jc

N
+
N
Sym PDSCH
Sym PDCCH

TX j jc
TX i ic TX j jc
E
+f
PDCCH
PDCCH
----------------------------------------------------------------------10

TX j jc

N Sym PDCCH
10
- 10 + 10
+ --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TX j jc
TX j jc
N Sym PDSCH + N Sym PDCCH

TX j jc
E DLRS
--------------------10

TX j jc
TX i ic TX j jc

2 Min 2 N Ant TX + f O

CalculationofPDCCHandPDSCHInterferenceWeightingFactors
TX i ic TX j jc

ThePDCCHandPDSCHinterferenceweightingfactors( f PDCCH

TX i ic TX j jc

f PDCCH

TX j jc TX j jc TX i ic TX j jc TX i ic TX j jc

f MIMO + f TL
+ f ICIC DL
+ f ABS DL

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TX j jc
10
1 AU

10
DL

TX jc TX ic TX jc TX ic TX jc

j
i
j
i
j
f TL
+ f ICIC DL
+ f ABS DL

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TX j jc

10
10
+ AU DL

TX jc

TX i ic TX j jc

f PDSCH

TX jc

TX ic TX jc

TX ic TX jc

j
j
i
j
i
j

f MIMO + f TL
+ f ICIC DL
+ f ABS DL
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

TX j jc
10

1 AU DL

10

TX j
TX i ic TX j jc TX i ic TX j jc
TX j

+
f
+
f
SA

SA
ICIC DL
ABS DL

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

TX j jc
10
+ AU DL

10

CalculationofMIMO/AntennaDiversityInterferenceFactors

512

TX i ic TX j jc

and f PDSCH

)arecalculatedasfollows:

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
TX jc

TX jc

TX jc

j
j
j
f MIMO istheinterferenceincrementduetomorethanonetransmissionantennaport: f MIMO = 10 Log N Ant TX
TX jc
j

Ifyoudonotwishtoapply f MIMO ,addthefollowinglinesintheAtoll.inifile:

[LTE]
MultiAntennaInterference = 0
MultiAntennaInterferenceissetto1bydefault.
CalculationofInterferenceReductionFactors
TX jc
j

Calculationsfortheinterferencereductionfactorsduetotrafficload f TL
TX i ic TX j jc

downlinkICICusingfractionalfrequencyreuse( f ICIC DL

TX ic TX jc
i
j

,channeloverlapping( f O

),andstatic

)areexplainedbelow:

Interferencereductionduetothetrafficloadsoftheinterferingcells:
InterferencereductionduetothetrafficloadsoftheinterferingcellsTXj(jc)iscalculatedasfollows:
TX j jc

f TL

TX j jc

= 10 Log TL DL

Interferencereductionduetothecoandadjacentchanneloverlapbetweenthestudiedandtheinterferingcells:
InterferencereductionduetothecoandadjacentchanneloverlapbetweenthecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc)iscalculated
asfollows:
TX i ic TX j jc

fO

TX i ic TX j jc

= 10 Log r O

InterferencereductionduetostaticdownlinkICICusingfractionalfrequencyreuse:
TheinterferencereductionfactorduetostaticdownlinkICICusingfractionalfrequencyreuseforanypixel,subscriber,
ormobileMiiscalculatedasfollows:
TX i ic TX j jc

f ICIC DL

TX ic TX j jc

i
= 10 Log p Collision

Whether a pixel, subscriber, or mobileMi isincell centreor celledge is determined as explainedin "Best Server
Determination"onpage 535.
TX i ic TX j jc

Depending on the ICIC mode defined for the frame configuration of the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc), f ICIC DL

is

calculatedasfollows:

IfbothTXi(ic)andTXj(jc)usetimeswitchedFFR
Thecelledgeandcellcentreresourcesaretimedivided.Therefore,aninterferedusermayreceiveinterference
fromthecelledgeandcellcentrepartsoftheframedependingontimedomainswitchingpointsbetweenthe
celledgeandcellcentrepartsoftheframes.
AtolldeterminestheswitchingpointbetweentheICICandthenonICICpartsoftheframeusingtheICICratios.
TheswitchingpointsbetweentheICICandnonICICpartsoftheframeofthevictimandinterferingcells,TXi(ic)
andTXj(jc)respectively,arecalculatedasfollows:
SP

TX ic
i

TX i ic

TX j jc

TX jc
r DL CE
r DL CE
j
= ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- and SP
= ---------------------------------------------------------------------------TX i ic
TX j jc
TX i ic
TX i ic
TX j jc
TX j jc
N
N
FB CE
FB CE
r DL CE + 1 r DL CE ----------------r DL CE + 1 r DL CE ----------------TX i ic
TX j jc

N FB
N FB

Where,SPistheswitchingpointbetweentheICICandthenonICICpartsoftheframe,and r DL CE isthedownlink
celledgetrafficratiosofthecells.

513

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

TheICICratioisusedtopartitionthetotaldownlinktrafficloadintoICICandnonICIC
partsoftheframe.Therefore,theswitchingpointformulaisderivedfromtheequation:
r DL CE TL DL
1 r DL CE TL DL
--------------------------------------------------------- = ---------------------------------------------- 1 SP W Channel
N FB CE
----------------SP WChannel
N FB
WithcellsusingstaticdownlinkICIC,therecanbefourdifferentinterferencescenarios.
i.

BetweentheICICpartofthevictimandtheICICpartoftheinterferer.

ii. BetweentheICICpartofthevictimandthenonICICpartoftheinterferer.
iii. BetweenthenonICICpartofthevictimandtheICICpartoftheinterferer.
iv. BetweenthenonICICpartofthevictimandthenonICICpartoftheinterferer.
Therefore, Atoll calculates the probabilities of collision for each scenario and weights the total interference
accordingtothetotalcollisionprobability.Theprobabilityofcollision p Coll foreachscenariois:
Case

Interferedcell
TX i ic

Interferingcell
TX j jc

p Coll

ICIC

ICIC

N FB CE
--------------------TX i ic
N FB CE

ii

ICIC

NonICIC

Common

Common

iii

NonICIC

ICIC

N FB CE
--------------------TX i ic
N FB

iv

NonICIC

NonICIC

1
TX i ic

Common

Where, N FB CE isthenumberofcelledgefrequencyblockscommoninTXi(ic)andTXj(jc),and N FB CE isthe

numberofcelledgefrequencyblocksinthecellTXi(ic).
For a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi in the celledge of TXi(ic), the total collision probability for the pixel,
subscriber,ormobileMiiscalculatedasfollows:

TX i ic TX j jc

p Collision

TX j jc
TX i ic
i

p Coll
IfSP
SP

TX jc
TX ic
TX jc
= i
ii
j
i
j

+ p Coll SP
SP
TX j jc
TX i ic
p Coll SP

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SP
IfSP

TX i ic

SP

For a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi in the cell centre of TXi(ic), the total collision probability for the pixel,
subscriber,ormobileMiiscalculatedasfollows:

TX i ic TX j jc

p Collision

TX j jc
TX i ic

iv

p Coll
IfSP
SP

TX j jc
TX jc
TX ic

+ p iii SP j SP i
= p iv
TX jc
TX ic
Coll 1 SP
Coll

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- IfSP j SP i

TX ic
1 SP i

OthercombinationsofICICmodes
TX i ic TX j jc

Separateprobabilitiesofcollisions, p Collision
TX i ic TX j jc

Cellcentre: p Collision

514

Common

N FB CC
= -------------------TX i ic
N FB CC

,arecalculatedforcellcentreandcelledgecasesasfollows:

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
TX ic TX jc
i
j

Celledge: p Collision

Common

N FB CE
= -------------------TX ic
i
N FB CE

Common

Common

Where, N FB CC isthenumberofcommonfrequencyblocksinTXi(ic)andTXj(jc)incellcentre, N FB CE isthe

TX i ic

TX i ic

numberofcommonfrequencyblocksinTXi(ic)andTXj(jc)oncelledge, N FB CC and N FB CE arerespectivelythe

numbersoffrequencyblocksincellcentreandcelledgeofTXi(ic).
Numberoffrequencyblocksin

ICICmode

Cellcentre

Celledge

TX i ic

NoFFR

N FB

TimeswitchedFFR

N FB

TX i ic

N FB

TX i ic

TX i ic

N FB CEx

TX i ic

HardFFR

TX i ic

N FB CEx
TX i ic

SoftFFR

N FB
TX i ic

PartialsoftFFR

N FB

TX ic

N FB CEx

TX i ic

TX i ic

N FB CEx
TX ic

N FB CEx
TX ic

i
i
i
N FB CE0 + N FB CE1 + N FB CE2

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

N FB CEx

TX i ic

Where N FB CEx canbe N FB CE0 , N FB CE1 ,or N FB CE2 dependingonthePSSIDofTXi(ic).

Interferencereductionduetosubframecollisionprobabilities:
TX i ic TX j jc

The interference reduction factor due to downlink subframe collision probabilities f ABS DL

is calculated as

explainedin"SubframePatternCollisionCalculation"onpage 497.
CalculationoftheDownlinkIntertechnologyInterference
Thedownlinkintertechnologyinterferenceiscalculatedasfollows:
Inter Tech
I DL

TX

TX
k

P DL Rec

---------------------------------------
=
F TX ic TX

i
k

TX k ICP DL

Here P DL Rec is the received downlink power from an interfering cell TXk belonging to another technology, and
F TX i ic TX k

ICP DL

istheintertechnologydownlinkchannelprotectionratioforafrequencyoffset F betweentheinterfered

andinterferingfrequencychannelsofTXi(ic)andTXk.
TX k

P DL Rec iscalculatedbasedontheEIRPfromGSMcells,totalpowerfromUMTS,CDMA2000,andTDSCDMAcells,maximum
powerfromLTEcells,preamblepowerfromWiMAXcells,anddownlinkcellpowerfromWiFicells.
Output

TX j jc

DLRS :Interferingenergyperresourceelement(dBm/Sym)receivedoverdownlinkreferencesignalsfromanycell
TXj(jc)atapixel,subscriber,ormobileMicoveredbyacellTXi(ic).

TX jc
j

SS PBCH :Interferingenergyperresourceelement(dBm/Sym)receivedovertheSSandthePBCHfromanycellTXj(jc)
atapixel,subscriber,ormobileMicoveredbyacellTXi(ic).

TX j jc

PDSCH :Interferingenergyperresourceelement(dBm/Sym)receivedoverthePDSCHfromanycellTXj(jc)atapixel,
subscriber,ormobileMicoveredbyacellTXi(ic).

TX j jc

PDCCH :Interferingenergyperresourceelement(dBm/Sym)receivedoverthePDCCHfromanycellTXj(jc)atapixel,
subscriber,ormobileMicoveredbyacellTXi(ic).

515

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

TX jc
j

RSSI :Interferingenergyperfrequencyblock(dBm/RB)receivedfromanycellTXj(jc)atapixel,subscriber,ormobile
Miover1frequencyblockduringanOFDMsymbolcarryingreferencesignals.

I DL

Inter Tech

:Downlinkintertechnologyinterference.

6.4.4.4 C/NCalculation(DL)
Input

TX i ic

E DLRS :ReceiveddownlinkreferencesignalenergyperresourceelementfromthecellTXi(ic)atthepixel,subscriber,
ormobileMiascalculatedin"SignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 501.

TX i ic

E SS

: Received SS energy per resource element from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as

calculatedin"SignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 501.
TX i ic

E PBCH :ReceivedPBCHenergyperresourceelementfromthecellTXi(ic)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMias
calculatedin"SignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 501.

E PDCCH :ReceivedPDCCHenergyperresourceelementfromthecellTXi(ic)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMias

TX i ic

calculatedin"SignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 501.

TX i ic

E PDSCH :ReceivedPDSCHenergyperresourceelementfromthecellTXi(ic)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMias
calculatedin"SignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 501.

TX ic
i

n Sym

:DownlinknoiseforonesubcarrierforthecellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"NoiseCalculation(DL)"onpage 505.

TX i ic

CINR DLRS :DownlinkreferencesignalC/(I+N)fromcellTXi(ic)atpixel,subscriber,ormobileMiascalculatedin"C/

(I+N)andBearerCalculation(DL)"onpage 518.

T AMS DL :AMSthresholddefinedintheLTEequipmentusedbyMisterminal.

T B :BearerselectionthresholdsofthebearersdefinedintheLTEequipmentusedbyMisterminal.

B DL Highest Service :Highestdownlinkbearerdefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,

Mi
Mi

Mi

ormobileMi.

Mi

B DL Lowest Service :Lowestdownlinkbearerdefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,

ormobileMi.
TX i ic

N Ant TX :Numberoftransmission(downlink)antennaportsdefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

N Ant RX :Numberofreception(downlink)antennaportsdefinedfortheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,or

Mi

mobileMi.

Mobility M i :Mobilityusedforthecalculations.

i
BLER B DL :DownlinkblockerrorratereadfromthegraphsavailableintheLTEequipmentassignedtotheterminal

usedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Mi

G Div PBCH :PBCHdiversitygaindefinedintheLTEequipmentoftheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobile

Mi.

Mi

G Div PDCCH : PDCCH diversity gain defined in the LTE equipment of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or
mobileMi.

DL

G Div :Additionaldownlinkdiversitygaindefinedfortheclutterclasswherethepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiis
located.

Calculations
TheC/NforcellTXi(ic)arecalculatedasfollowsforanypixel,subscriber,ormobileMi:
TX i ic

CNR DLRS

516

TX i ic

TX i ic

= E DLRS n Sym

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
TX ic
i

CNR SS

TX ic
i

= E SS

TX ic
i

n Sym

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

CNR PBCH = E PBCH n Sym

CNR PDCCH = E PDCCH n Sym

CNR PDSCH = E PDSCH n Sym

BearerDetermination:
Thebearersavailableforselectioninthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMisLTEequipmentaretheones:

Which are common between Mis and TXi(ic)s equipment (bearer indexes for which selection thresholds are
definedinbothequipment),ifthecorrespondingoptionhasbeensetintheAtoll.inifile.Formoreinformation,
seetheAdministratorManual.

Whoseindexesarewithintherangedefinedbythelowestandthehighestbearerindexesdefinedfortheservice
beingaccessedbyMi.

WhoseselectionthresholdsarelessthanthePDSCHC/NatMi: T B CNR PDSCH

Mi

TX i ic

If the cell supports MIMO, and according to the Mi diversity mode depending on the AMS and MUMIMO
Mi

thresholds and criteria, transmit diversity, SUMIMO diversity, or MUMIMO diversity gain, G Div DL ,
correspondingtothebearerisappliedtoitsselectionthreshold.ThegainisreadfromthepropertiesoftheLTE
TX ic

i
i
i
equipmentassignedtothepixel,subscriber,ormobileMifor N Ant TX , N Ant RX , Mobility M i , BLER B DL .
DL

Theadditionaldownlinkdiversitygaindefinedfortheclutterclassofthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi G Div is
alsoapplied.Therefore,thebearersavailableforselectionareallthebearersdefinedintheLTEequipmentfor
whichthefollowingistrue:
Mi

Mi

TX i ic

DL

T B G Div DL G Div CNR PDSCH

ThebearerselectedfordatatransferdependsonthebearerselectioncriterionoftheschedulerusedbythecellTXi(ic).

BearerIndex
Fromamongthebearersavailableforselection,theselectedbeareristheonewiththehighestindex.

PeakRLCThroughput
Fromamongthebearersavailableforselection,theselectedbeareristheonewiththehighestdownlinkpeakRLC
channelthroughputascalculatedin"ChannelThroughput,CellCapacity,AllocatedBandwidthThroughput,and
PeruserThroughputCalculation"onpage 546.

EffectiveRLCThroughput
Fromamongthebearersavailableforselection,theselectedbeareristheonewiththehighestdownlinkeffective
RLCchannelthroughputascalculatedin"ChannelThroughput,CellCapacity,AllocatedBandwidthThroughput,
andPeruserThroughputCalculation"onpage 546.

MIMODiversityGain:
WithMIMO,thePBCHandPDCCHC/Nbecome:
TX ic
i

TX ic
i

TX i ic

TX i ic

Mi

DL

CNR PBCH = CNR PBCH + G Div PBCH + G Div

DL

CNR PDCCH = CNR PDCCH + G Div PDCCH + G Div

ThePBCHandPDCCHdiversitygainsareappliedtotheC/Nwhenthecellandtheterminalbothsupportanyformof
MIMOindownlink.Theadditionaldownlinkdiversitygaindefinedperclutterisalsoapplied.
Oncethebearerisknown,thePDSCHC/Ncalculatedabovebecomes:
TX i ic

TX i ic

Mi

DL

CNR PDSCH = CNR PDSCH + G Div DL + G Div

517

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014
M

Where G Div DL isthetransmitdiversity,SUMIMOdiversity,orMUMIMOdiversitygainappliedifthecellsupports

MIMOanddependingontheMidiversitymode,theAMSandMUMIMOthresholdsandcriteria.
Output
TX i ic

CNR DLRS :DownlinkreferencesignalC/NfromcellTXi(ic)atpixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

CNR SS

TX ic
i

:SSC/NfromcellTXi(ic)atpixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

TX i ic

CNR PBCH :PBCHC/NfromcellTXi(ic)atpixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

CNR PDCCH :PDCCHC/NfromcellTXi(ic)atpixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

CNR PDSCH :PDSCHC/NfromcellTXi(ic)atpixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

TX i ic
TX i ic

6.4.4.5 C/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(DL)
Thecarriersignaltointerferenceandnoiseratioiscalculatedinthreesteps.FirstAtollcalculatesthereceivedsignallevelfrom
thestudiedcell(asexplainedin"SignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 501)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileunderstudy.
Next,Atollcalculatestheinterferencereceivedatthesamestudiedpixel,subscriber,ormobilefromalltheinterferingcells
(asexplainedin"InterferenceCalculation(DL)"onpage 505).Interferencefromeachcellisweightedaccordingtothecoand
adjacent channel overlap between the studied and the interfering cells, the traffic loads of the interfering cells, and the
probabilityofcollisionincaseICICisusedbythecells.Finally,Atolltakestheratioofthesignallevelandthesumofthetotal
interferencefromothercellsandthedownlinknoise(ascalculatedin"NoiseCalculation(DL)"onpage 505).
Thereceiverterminalisalwaysconsideredtobeorientedtowardsitsbestserver,exceptwhenthe"LockStatus"issetto
"Server+Orientation"forasubscriberinasubscriberlistanditsazimuthandtiltmanuallyedited.InthecaseofNLOSbetween
thereceiverandthebestserver,Atolldoesnottrytofindthedirectionofthestrongestsignal,thereceiverisorientedtowards
thebestserverjustasinthecaseofLOS.
Input

F :Subcarrierwidth(15 kHz).

W FB :Widthofafrequencyblock(180 kHz).

N FB SS PBCH :NumberoffrequencyblocksthatcarrytheSSandthePBCH(6).

N Slot SF :Numberofslotspersubframe(2).

D CP

N SD Slot :Numberofsymboldurationsperslot(7is D CP

N FB

TX i ic

:CyclicprefixdurationdefinedinTXi(ic)frameconfigurationor,otherwise,intheglobalnetworksettings.
TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

isNormal,6if D CP

isExtended).

:Numberoffrequencyblocks,definedinthefrequencybandstable,forthechannelbandwidthusedbythe

cellTXi(ic).

TX i ic

N SF DL :NumberofdownlinksubframesintheframeforthecellTXi(ic).Itisequalto10forFDDfrequencybands,and
isdeterminedfromthecellsTDDframeconfigurationforTDDfrequencybands.

TX i ic

N TDD SSF :NumberofTDDspecialsubframes(containingDwPTS,GP,andUpPTS)intheframeforthecellTXi(ic).Itis

equalto0forFDDfrequencybands,andisdeterminedfromthecellsTDDframeconfigurationforTDDfrequency
bands.
TX i ic

TX i ic

N SF DL and N TDD SSF aredeterminedasfollows:

518

TX i ic

TX i ic

Configuration

N SF DL

N TDD SSF

FDD

10

DSUUUDSUUU

DSUUDDSUUD

DSUDDDSUDD

DSUUUDSUUD

DSUUUDDDDD

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

Configuration

N SF DL

N TDD SSF

DSUUDDDDDD

DSUDDDDDDD

TX i ic

E DLRS :ReceiveddownlinkreferencesignalenergyperresourceelementfromthecellTXi(ic)atthepixel,subscriber,
ormobileMiascalculatedin"SignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 501.

TX i ic

E SS

: Received SS energy per resource element from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as

calculatedin"SignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 501.

TX i ic

E PBCH :ReceivedPBCHenergyperresourceelementfromthecellTXi(ic)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMias
calculatedin"SignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 501.

TX i ic

E PDCCH :ReceivedPDCCHenergyperresourceelementfromthecellTXi(ic)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMias
calculatedin"SignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 501.

TX i ic

E PDSCH :ReceivedPDSCHenergyperresourceelementfromthecellTXi(ic)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMias
calculatedin"SignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 501.

TX ic
i

N Sym PDCCH :NumberofPDCCHresourceelementsascalculatedin"DownlinkTransmissionPowerCalculation"on

page 485.

TX ic
i

N Sym PDSCH :NumberofPDSCHresourceelementsascalculatedin"DownlinkTransmissionPowerCalculation"on

page 485.
TX ic
i

n Sym

:DownlinknoiseforonesubcarrierforthecellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"NoiseCalculation(DL)"onpage 505.

DLRS :Interferingenergyperresourceelement(dBm/Sym)receivedoverdownlinkreferencesignalsfromanycell

TX j jc

TXj(jc)atapixel,subscriber,ormobileMicoveredbyacellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"InterferenceCalculation(DL)"on
page 505.

TX j jc

SS PBCH :Interferingenergyperresourceelement(dBm/Sym)receivedovertheSSandthePBCHfromanycellTXj(jc)
atapixel,subscriber,ormobileMicoveredbyacellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"InterferenceCalculation(DL)"onpage 505.

TX j jc

PDSCH :Interferingenergyperresourceelement(dBm/Sym)receivedoverthePDSCHfromanycellTXj(jc)atapixel,
subscriber,ormobileMicoveredbyacellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"InterferenceCalculation(DL)"onpage 505.

TX j jc

PDCCH :Interferingenergyperresourceelement(dBm/Sym)receivedoverthePDCCHfromanycellTXj(jc)atapixel,
subscriber,ormobileMicoveredbyacellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"InterferenceCalculation(DL)"onpage 505.

TX j jc

RSSI :Interferingenergyperfrequencyblock(dBm/RB)receivedover1frequencyblockduringanOFDMsymbol
carrying reference signals from any cell TXj(jc) at a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as calculated in "Interference
Calculation(DL)"onpage 505.
Inter Tech

NRDL

CNR DLRS :DownlinkreferencesignalC/NfromcellTXi(ic)atpixel,subscriber,ormobileMiascalculatedin"C/N

:Intertechnologydownlinknoiserise.

TX i ic

Calculation(DL)"onpage 516.
Mi

T AMS DL :AMSthresholddefinedintheLTEequipmentusedbyMisterminal.

T B :BearerselectionthresholdsofthebearersdefinedintheLTEequipmentusedbyMisterminal.

B DL Highest Service :Highestdownlinkbearerdefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,

Mi
M

ormobileMi.

Mi

B DL Lowest Service :Lowestdownlinkbearerdefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,

ormobileMi.

TX ic
i

N Ant TX :Numberoftransmission(downlink)antennaportsdefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

519

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks
M

Forsk2014

N Ant RX :Numberofreception(downlink)antennaportsdefinedfortheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,or
mobileMi.

Mobility M i :Mobilityusedforthecalculations.

i
BLER B DL :DownlinkblockerrorratereadfromthegraphsavailableintheLTEequipmentassignedtotheterminal

usedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.
Mi

G Div PBCH :PBCHdiversitygaindefinedintheLTEequipmentoftheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobile

Mi.
Mi

G Div PDCCH : PDCCH diversity gain defined in the LTE equipment of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or

mobileMi.
DL

G Div :Additionaldownlinkdiversitygaindefinedfortheclutterclasswherethepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiis

located.
Inter Tech

I DL

:Downlinkintertechnologyinterferenceascalculatedin"InterferenceCalculation(DL)"onpage 505.

Calculations
ThedownlinkreferencesignalC/(I+N)forcellTXi(ic)iscalculatedasfollowsforanypixel,subscriber,ormobileMi:
TX jc

TX i ic

CINR DLRS

TX ic

j
n Sym
DLRS -

------------------
---------------------
TX i ic
Inter Tech
Inter Tech
10
10

10
+
+
10
+
= E DLRS 10 Log
I
NR
DL

DL

AllTXj jc

TheSSC/(I+N)forcellTXi(ic)iscalculatedasfollowsforanypixel,subscriber,ormobileMi:
TX jc

TX i ic

CINR SS

TX ic

n Sym
SS PBCH-

---------------------------------------------
TX i ic
10
10
Inter

Tech
Inter

Tech
+ NR

10
+I
+ 10
= E SS
10 Log
DL
DL

AllTXj jc

ThePBCHC/(I+N)forcellTXi(ic)iscalculatedasfollowsforanypixel,subscriber,ormobileMi:
TX jc

TX ic
i

CINR PBCH

TX ic

n Sym
SS PBCH-

---------------------------------------------
TX ic
i
10 10 + I Inter Tech + 10 10 + NR Inter Tech
= E PBCH 10 Log
DL

DL

AllTXj jc

ThePDCCHC/(I+N)forcellTXi(ic)iscalculatedasfollowsforanypixel,subscriber,ormobileMi:
TX jc

TX i ic

CINR PDCCH

TX ic

j
n Sym
PDCCH

----------------------------------------
Inter

Tech
Inter

Tech
10
10
+ NR

10
+I
= E PDCCH 10 Log
+10
DL
DL

AllTXj jc

TX i ic

ThePDSCHC/(I+N)forcellTXi(ic)iscalculatedasfollowsforanypixel,subscriber,ormobileMi:
TX jc

TX i ic

CINR PDSCH

TX ic

i
j

n Sym
PDSCH
-------------------

---------------------
TX i ic
10 10 + I Inter Tech+10 10 + NR Inter Tech
= E PDSCH 10 Log
DL
DL

AllTXj jc

Thedownlinkreferencesignalreceivedquality(RSRQ)forcellTXi(ic)iscalculatedasfollowsforanypixel,subscriber,ormobile
Mi:
RSRQ

520

TX i ic

TX i ic

= 10 Log N FB

TX ic

+ E i RSSI
DLRS

TX i ic

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
TX ic
i

Where E DLRS isthecellsRSRPand RSSI

TX ic
i

isthereceivedsignalstrengthindicator,i.e.,thereceivedsignalsfromthe

server(TXi(ic)),andalltheinterferingcells(TXj(jc)),calculatedasfollows:
For cells using more than 1 antenna port, the encircled 10 in the formulas below is
replacedwith8.

TX jc

RSSI

TX i ic

TX ic

i
j

n Sym
RSSI -
------------------ TX ic

--------------------TX ic
i
10
10
Inter

Tech
10
+I
+ NR Inter Tech + 10 Log N i
= 10 Log RSSI +
+
10

12
DL
DL

FB

AllTX j jc

Thedownlinkreferencesignaltotalnoise(I+N)forcellTXi(ic)iscalculatedasfollowsforanypixel,subscriber,ormobileMi:
TX jc

TX ic
i

I + N DLRS

TX ic

j
n Sym
DLRS -

---------------------------------------
TX ic
10 10 + I Inter Tech + 10 10 + NR Inter Tech + 10 Log 2 N i
= 10 Log
DL
FB

DL
AllTXj jc

TheSSandPBCHtotalnoise(I+N)forcellTXi(ic)iscalculatedasfollowsforanypixel,subscriber,ormobileMi:
TX jc

TX i ic

I + N SS PBCH

TX ic

n Sym
SS PBCH

---------------------------------------------
10 10 + I Inter Tech + 10 10 + NR Inter Tech + 10 Log N
= 10 Log
DL
SCa FB N FB SS PBCH

DL
AllTXj jc

ThePDSCHandPDCCHtotalnoise(I+N)forcellTXi(ic)iscalculatedasfollowsforanypixel,subscriber,ormobileMi:
Method1:SynchronisedTransmissionandReception
Fordetails,see"InterferenceCalculation(DL)"onpage 455.

TX i ic

I + N PDCCH

TX i ic

I + N PDSCH

TX jc

TX ic

TX jc

TX ic

i
j

n Sym
TX i ic
PDCCH
-------------------

---------------------
N Sym PDCCH
Inter Tech
Tech
10
10

- + NRInter
= 10 Log
10
+I
+ 10
+ 10 Log ---------------------------------------------DL
TX i ic

DL

TXi ic

AllTXj jc

N SF DL + N TDD SSF

j
n Sym
TX i ic
PDSCH

----------------------------------------
N Sym PDSCH
Tech
10 10 + I Inter Tech + 10 10 + 10 Log ---------------------------------------------- + NR Inter
= 10 Log
DL
TX i ic
TXi ic

DL
N SF DL + N TDD SSF
AllTXj jc

Method2:NonsynchronisedTransmissionandReception
Fordetails,see"InterferenceCalculation(DL)"onpage 455.
TX jc

TX ic
i

I + N PDCCH

TX jc

TX i ic

I + N PDSCH

TX ic

j
n Sym
TX i ic
PDCCH-

N TXi ic

----------------------------------------
10
10

Inter Tech
Sym PDSCH + N Sym PDCCH

-------------------------------------------------------------------- + NR Inter
= 10 Log
10
+ I DL
+ 10
+
10

Log
DL
TX i ic

AllTXj jc

N SD Slot N Slot SF N SF DL

TX ic

j
n Sym
TX i ic
PDSCH-

------------------- N TXi ic

---------------------

Sym PDSCH + N Sym PDCCH

10 10 + I Inter Tech + 10 10 + 10 Log ------------------------------------------------------------------- + NRInter
= 10 Log
DL
DL
TX

ic

i
AllTXj jc

N SD Slot N Slot SF N SF DL

With N SCa FB calculatedasfollows:

W FB
N SCa FB = --------F
BearerDetermination:

521

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

Thebearersavailableforselectioninthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMisLTEequipmentaretheones:

Which are common between Mis and TXi(ic)s equipment (bearer indexes for which selection thresholds are
definedinbothequipment),ifthecorrespondingoptionhasbeensetintheAtoll.inifile.Formoreinformation,
seetheAdministratorManual.

Whoseindexesarewithintherangedefinedbythelowestandthehighestbearerindexesdefinedfortheservice
beingaccessedbyMi.

WhoseselectionthresholdsarelessthanthePDSCHC/(I+N)atMi: T B CINR PDSCH

TX i ic

Mi

If the cell supports MIMO, and according to the Mi diversity mode depending on the AMS and MUMIMO
Mi

thresholds and criteria, transmit diversity, SUMIMO diversity, or MUMIMO diversity gain, G Div DL ,
correspondingtothebearerisappliedtoitsselectionthreshold.ThegainisreadfromthepropertiesoftheLTE
TX ic

i
i
i
equipmentassignedtothepixel,subscriber,ormobileMifor N Ant TX , N Ant RX , Mobility M i , BLER BDL .
DL

Theadditionaldownlinkdiversitygaindefinedfortheclutterclassofthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi G Div is
alsoapplied.Therefore,thebearersavailableforselectionareallthebearersdefinedintheLTEequipmentfor
whichthefollowingistrue:
Mi

Mi

TX i ic

DL

T B G Div DL G Div CINR PDSCH

ThebearerselectedfordatatransferdependsonthebearerselectioncriterionoftheschedulerusedbythecellTXi(ic).

BearerIndex
Fromamongthebearersavailableforselection,theselectedbeareristheonewiththehighestindex.

PeakRLCThroughput
Fromamongthebearersavailableforselection,theselectedbeareristheonewiththehighestdownlinkpeakRLC
channelthroughputascalculatedin"ChannelThroughput,CellCapacity,AllocatedBandwidthThroughput,and
PeruserThroughputCalculation"onpage 546.

EffectiveRLCThroughput
Fromamongthebearersavailableforselection,theselectedbeareristheonewiththehighestdownlinkeffective
RLCchannelthroughputascalculatedin"ChannelThroughput,CellCapacity,AllocatedBandwidthThroughput,
andPeruserThroughputCalculation"onpage 546.

MIMODiversityGain:
WithMIMO,thePBCHandPDCCHC/(I+N)become:
TX ic
i

TX ic
i

TX i ic

TX i ic

Mi

DL

CINR PBCH = CINR PBCH + G Div PBCH + G Div

DL

CINR PDCCH = CINR PDCCH + G Div PDCCH + G Div

ThePBCHandPDCCHdiversitygainsareappliedtotheC/(I+N)whenthecellandtheterminalbothsupportanyform
ofMIMOindownlink.Theadditionaldownlinkdiversitygaindefinedperclutterisalsoapplied.
Oncethebearerisknown,thePDSCHC/(I+N)calculatedabovebecomes:
TX i ic

TX i ic

Mi

DL

CINR PDSCH = CINR PDSCH + G Div DL + G Div

Mi

Where G Div DL isthetransmitdiversity,SUMIMOdiversity,orMUMIMOdiversitygainappliedifthecellsupports

MIMOanddependingontheMidiversitymode,theAMSandMUMIMOthresholdsandcriteria.
Output

522

TX i ic

CINR DLRS :DownlinkreferencesignalC/(I+N)fromcellTXi(ic)atpixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

CINR SS

CINR PBCH :PBCHC/(I+N)fromcellTXi(ic)atpixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

CINR PDCCH :PDCCHC/(I+N)fromcellTXi(ic)atpixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

TX i ic

:SSC/(I+N)fromcellTXi(ic)atpixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

TX i ic
TX ic
i

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
TX ic
i

CINR PDSCH :PDSCHC/(I+N)fromcellTXi(ic)atpixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

RSRQ

TX ic
i

:DownlinkreferencesignalreceivedqualityfromcellTXi(ic)atpixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

TX ic
i

RSSI
:Receivedsignalstrengthindicator,i.e.,thereceivedsignalsfromtheserver(TXi(ic)),andalltheinterfering
cells(TXj(jc)),atpixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

I + N DLRS :DownlinkreferencesignalstotalnoisefromtheinterferingcellsTXj(jc)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobile

TX i ic

MicoveredbyacellTXi(ic).

TX i ic

I + N SS PBCH :SSandPBCHtotalnoisefromtheinterferingcellsTXj(jc)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMicovered
byacellTXi(ic).

TX i ic

I + N PDCCH :PDCCHtotalnoisefromtheinterferingcellsTXj(jc)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi coveredbya

cellTXi(ic).

TX i ic

I + N PDSCH :PDSCHtotalnoisefromtheinterferingcellsTXj(jc)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMicoveredbya
cellTXi(ic).

Mi

B DL :Bearerassignedtothepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiinthedownlink.

6.4.4.6 SignalLevelCalculation(UL)
Input
TX i ic

CINR PUSCH Max :MaximumPUSCHC/(I+N)definedforthecellTXi(ic).

NRUL

TX i ic

:UplinknoiseriseofthecellTXi(ic).Thisvaluecanbeuserdefinedorcalculatedasexplainedin"Interference

Calculation(UL)"onpage 525.

TX i ic

NRUL ICIC : ICIC uplink noise rise of the cell TXi(ic). This value can be userdefined or calculated as explained in
"InterferenceCalculation(UL)"onpage 525.
TX i ic

n PUSCH PUCCH :UplinknoiseforthePUSCHandthePUCCHforthecellTXi(ic).

N FB

TX i ic

:Numberoffrequencyblocks,definedinthefrequencybandstable,forthechannelbandwidthusedbythe

cellTXi(ic).
TX i ic

FPC

P Max :Maximumtransmissionpoweroftheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

P Eff :Effectivetransmissionpoweroftheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi afterpowercontrol

:FractionaluplinkpowercontrolfactordefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

Mi

adjustmentascalculatedin"C/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(UL)"onpage 532.
TX i

G Ant :TransmitterantennagainfortheantennausedbythetransmitterTXi.

L Path :Pathloss( L Path = L Model + L Ant ).

L Total :Totallosscalculatedasexplainedin"SignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 501.

L Model :Lossonthetransmitterreceiverpath(pathloss)calculatedusingapropagationmodel.

L Ant :Antennaattenuation(fromantennapatterns)calculatedfortheantennausedbythetransmitterTXi.

M Shadowing Model :Shadowingmarginbasedonthemodelstandarddeviation.

TX i

:TotaltransmitterlossesforthetransmitterTXi( L

TX i

= L Total UL ).

TX i

TX i

Incoveragepredictions,shadowingmarginsaretakenintoaccountwhentheoption"Shadowingtakenintoaccount"
isselected.

L Indoor :Indoorlossestakenintoaccountwhentheoption"Indoorcoverage"isselected.

Mi

:Receiverterminallossesforthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

523

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

:Receiverterminalsantennagainforthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

L Ant :Receiverterminalsantennaattenuationcalculatedforthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Forcalculatingtheusefulsignallevelfromthebestservingcell, L Ant isdeterminedinthedirection(H,V)=(0,0)from

Mi

theantennapatternsoftheantennausedbyMi.Forcalculatingtheinterferingsignallevelfromanyinterferer, L Ant
isdeterminedinthedirectionoftheinterferingcellfromtheantennapatternsoftheantennausedbyMi,whilethe
antennaispointedtowardsMisbestservingcell.
Mi

L Body :Bodylossdefinedfortheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

D CP

TX i ic

:CyclicprefixdurationdefinedinTXi(ic)frameconfigurationor,otherwise,intheglobalnetworksettings.

Calculations
Atollfirstcalculatestheallowedmaximumtransmissionpowerfortheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.
Thispoweriscalculatedbyperformingfractionalpowercontrol.
FractionalPowerControl:
Fractionalpowercontrolimposesalimitationonthemaximumtransmissionpoweroftheterminal.AnominalPUSCH
powerisindicatedbythecelltoallthepixels,subscribers,ormobiles.ThisnominalPUSCHpoweriscalculatedas
follows:
TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX ic

TX ic

TX ic

P O_PUSCH = CINR PUSCH Max + NR UL

TX i ic

TX i ic

+ n PUSCH PUCCH 10 Log N FB

TX ic

forcellcentre.

TX ic

i
i
i
i
i
P O_PUSCH = CINR PUSCH Max + NR UL ICIC + n PUSCH PUCCH 10 Log N FB
TX i ic

forcelledge.

TX i ic

Where n PUSCH PUCCH 10 Log N FB

correspondstotheuplinknoiseover1frequencyblock.

Next, the maximum allowed transmission power for the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is
calculatedasfollows:
Mi
TX i ic
TX i ic
TX i ic
Mi

P Allowed = Min P Max 10 Log N FB + P O_PUSCH + FPC L Total

Oncethemaximumallowedpowerhasbeencalculated,itisusedasanupperlimitfortransmissionpowerinalltheremaining
calculations.
ThereceivedPUSCHandPUCCHsignallevel(dBm)fromapixel,subscriber,ormobileMiatitsservingcellTXi(ic)iscalculated
asfollows:
Mi

Mi

TX i

C PUSCH PUCCH = EIRP PUSCH PUCCH L Path M Shadowing Model L Indoor + G Ant L

TX i

Mi

Mi

L Ant L Body + f CP

WhereEIRPistheeffectiveisotropicradiatedpoweroftheterminalcalculatedasfollows:
Mi

EIRP PUSCH PUCCH = P

With P

Mi

Mi

Mi

+G

Mi

Mi

= P Allowed withoutpowercontroladjustmentatthestartofthecalculations,andis P

Mi

Mi

= P Eff afterpowercontrol

adjustment.
f CP isthecyclicprefixfactor,i.e.,theratiooftheusefulsymbolenergytothetotalsymbolenergy.
Thetotalsymboldurationofamodulationsymbolcomprisestheusefulsymbolduration,carryingtheactualdatabits,anda
cyclicprefix,addedtotheusefuldatabitsaspaddingagainstmultipathtoavoidintersymbolinterference.Hence,thetotal
energywithinamodulationsymbolbelongsinparttotheusefuldatabitsandinparttothecyclicprefix.Onceamodulation

524

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

symbolisreceived,onlytheenergyoftheusefuldatabitscanbeusedforextractingthedata.Theenergybelongingtothe
cyclicprefixislostonceithasserveditspurposeofcombattingintersymbolinterference.Therefore, f CP impliesthatthe
energybelongingtothecyclicprefixisexcludedfromtheusefulsignallevel.

f CP

TX ic
10 Log 7 7.5 If D CPi = Normal

TX i ic
=
= Extended
10 Log 6 7.5 If D CP

isaninterferer
0
If
M
i

Thecyclicprefixenergyandtheusefuldatabitsenergyarebothtakenintoaccountwhencalculatinginterferingsignallevels.
Output
Mi

C PUSCH PUCCH :ReceivedPUSCHandPUCCHsignallevelfromthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiatacellTXi(ic).

P Allowed :Maximumallowedtransmissionpowerfortheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Mi

6.4.4.7 NoiseCalculation(UL)
FordeterminingtheC/NandC/(I+N),Atollcalculatestheuplinknoiseoverthechannelbandwidthusedbythecell.Theused
bandwidthdependsonthenumberofusedsubcarriers.
Theuplinknoisecomprisesthermalnoiseandthenoisefigureoftheequipment.Thethermalnoisedensitydependsonthe
temperature,i.e.,itremainsconstantforagiventemperature.However,thevalueofthethermalnoisevarieswiththeused
bandwidth.
Input

K:Boltzmannsconstant.
T:TemperatureinKelvin.
W FB :Widthofafrequencyblockinthefrequencydomain(180 kHz).

N FB

TX i ic

:Numberoffrequencyblocks,definedinthefrequencybandstable,forthechannelbandwidthusedbythe

cellTXi(ic).

nf

TX i ic

:NoisefigureofthecellTXi(ic).

Calculations
Thepowerspectraldensityofthermalnoiseiscalculatedasfollows:
n 0 = 10 Log K T 1000 = 174dBm/Hz
ThethermalnoiseforthePUSCHandthePUCCHiscalculatedas:
TX i ic

TX i ic

n 0 PUSCH PUCCH = n 0 + 10 Log N FB

W FB 1000

TheuplinknoiseisthesumofthethermalnoiseandthenoisefigureofthecellTXi(ic).
TX i ic

TX i ic

n PUSCH PUCCH = n 0 PUSCH PUCCH + nf

TX i ic

Output

TX i ic

n PUSCH PUCCH :UplinknoiseforthePUSCHandthePUCCHforthecellTXi(ic).

6.4.4.8 InterferenceCalculation(UL)
ThePUSCHandPUCCHinterferenceisonlycalculatedduringMonteCarlosimulations.Incoveragepredictions,theuplink
noiserisevaluesalreadyavailableinsimulationresultsorintheCellstableareused.
TheinterferencereceivedbyacellTXi(ic)fromaninterferingmobilecoveredbyacellTXj(jc)canbedefinedasthePUSCHand
PUCCHsignallevelreceivedfromtheinterferingmobileMjdependingontheoverlapthatexistsbetweenthechannelsused
bythecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc)andonthetrafficloadoftheinterferingmobileMj.

525

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

Thecalculationofuplinkinterferencecanbedividedintotwoparts:

6.4.4.8.1

Calculationoftheuplinkinterferencefromeachindividualinterferingmobileasexplainedin"InterferingSignalLevel
Calculation(UL)"onpage 526.
Calculation of the uplink noise rise which represents the total uplink interference from all interfering mobiles as
explainedin"NoiseRiseCalculation(UL)"onpage 528.

InterferingSignalLevelCalculation(UL)
Input
TX ic
i

N FB

TX jc
j

and N FB

: Total number of frequency blocks defined in the frequency bands table for the channel

bandwidthusedbythecell.
TX i ic

TX j jc

N FB CE0 and N FB CE0 : Number of celledge frequency blocks defined in the frame configurations table for the

channelbandwidthusedbythecellandPSSID0.
TX i ic

TX j jc

N FB CE1 and N FB CE1 : Number of celledge frequency blocks defined in the frame configurations table for the

channelbandwidthusedbythecellandPSSID1.
TX i ic

TX j jc

N FB CE2 and N FB CE2 : Number of celledge frequency blocks defined in the frame configurations table for the

channelbandwidthusedbythecellandPSSID2.
Mj

C PUSCH PUCCH :PUSCHandPUCCHsignallevelreceivedatacellTXi(ic)fromaninterferingmobileMjcoveredbyacell

TXj(jc)ascalculatedin"SignalLevelCalculation(UL)"onpage 523.

M Shadowing Model :Shadowingmarginbasedonthemodelstandarddeviation.

M Shadowing C I :ShadowingmarginbasedontheC/Istandarddeviation.
InMonteCarlosimulations,interferingsignallevelsalreadyinclude M Shadowing Model ,asexplainedin"SignalLevel
Calculation(UL)"onpage 523.
Incoveragepredictions,theratio M Shadowing Model M Shadowing C I isappliedtotheinterferingsignals(formore
information, see "Shadow Fading Model" on page 86). As the interfering signal levels already include
M Shadowing Model , M Shadowing C I isaddedtothereceivedinterferingsignallevelsinordertoachievetheratio
M Shadowing Model M Shadowing C I :
M

C PUSCH PUCCH = C PUSCH PUCCH + M Shadowing C I

Incoveragepredictions,shadowingmarginsaretakenintoaccountwhentheoption"Shadowingtakenintoaccount"
isselected.
TX i ic TX j jc

rO

: Total channel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Co and Adjacent

ChannelOverlapsCalculation"onpage 493.
Mj

TL UL :UplinktrafficloadoftheinterferingmobileMj.

Traffic loads are calculated during Monte Carlo simulations as explained in "Scheduling and Radio Resource
Allocation"onpage 551.
Calculations
TheuplinkinterferencereceivedatacellTXi(ic)fromaninterferingmobileMjcoveredbyacellTXj(jc)iscalculatedasfollows:
Mj

TX i ic TX j jc

Mj

I PUSCH PUCCH = C PUSCH PUCCH + f O

Mj

Mj

TX i ic TX j jc

+ f TL UL + f ICIC UL

TX i ic TX j jc

+ f ABS UL

Where f TL UL isaninterferencereductionfactorduetotheuplinktrafficloadoftheinterferingmobileMj,calculatedas
follows:
M

j
j
f TL UL = 10 Log TL UL

526

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

TX ic TX jc
i
j

Calculationsfortheinterferencereductionfactorsduetochanneloverlapping( f O
TX ic TX jc
i
j

fractionalfrequencyreuse( f ICIC UL

)andstaticuplinkICICusing

)areexplainedbelow:

Interferencereductionduetothecoandadjacentchanneloverlapbetweenthestudiedandtheinterferingcells:
InterferencereductionduetothecoandadjacentchanneloverlapbetweenthecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc)iscalculated
asfollows:
TX i ic TX j jc

fO

TX i ic TX j jc

= 10 Log r O

InterferencereductionduetostaticuplinkICICusingfractionalfrequencyreuse:
If the cell supports static ICIC in uplink, it means that a part of the LTE frame may use a fraction of the channel
bandwidth.TheinterferencereductionfactorduetostaticuplinkICICusingfractionalfrequencyreuseiscalculatedas
follows:
TX i ic TX j jc

f ICIC UL

TX i ic TX j jc

= 10 Log p Collision

TX i ic TX j jc

Where p Collision

isthecollisionprobabilitybetweenthesubcarriersusedbytheinterferedandinterferingcells.

ItisdeterminedduringMonteCarlosimulationsasfollows:
TX i ic TX j jc

Cellcentre: p Collision

TX i ic TX j jc

Celledge: p Collision

Common

N FB CC
= -------------------TX i ic
N FB CC
Common

N FB CE
= -------------------TX ic
i
N FB CE

Common

Common

Where, N FB CC is the number of common frequency blocks in TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) in cell centre, N FB CE is the
TX i ic

TX i ic

numberofcommonfrequencyblocksinTXi(ic)andTXj(jc)oncelledge, N FB CC and N FB CE arerespectivelythe

numbersoffrequencyblocksincellcentreandcelledgeofTXi(ic).
Numberoffrequencyblocksin

ICICmode

Cellcentre

Celledge

TX i ic

NoFFR

N FB

TimeswitchedFFR

N FB

TX i ic

N FB

TX i ic

TX i ic

N FB CEx

TX i ic

HardFFR

TX i ic

N FB CEx
TX ic
i

SoftFFR

N FB

PartialsoftFFR

TX ic
i

TX i ic

N FB

N FB CEx

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

N FB CEx

TX ic

TX ic

N FB CEx
TX ic

i
i
i
N FB CE0 + N FB CE1 + N FB CE2

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

TX i ic

N FB CEx

TX ic
i

Where N FB CEx canbe N FB CE0 , N FB CE1 ,or N FB CE2 dependingonthePSSIDofTXi(ic).

Whether a pixel, subscriber, or mobile is located in the celledge is determined as explained in "Best Server
Determination"onpage 535.
Interferencereductionduetosubframecollisionprobabilities:
TX i ic TX j jc

The interference reduction factor due to uplink subframe collision probabilities f ABS UL

is calculated as

explainedin"SubframePatternCollisionCalculation"onpage 497.
InMonteCarlosimulations,Atollcalculatestwoseparatenoiserisevalues;forthemobileslocatedinthecelledgeofthe
interferedcellAtollcalculatestheICICULNoiseRise,andforthemobileslocatedinthecellcentreoftheinterferedcellAtoll
calculatestheULNoiseRise.

527

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

Incoveragepredictions,pointanalysis,andcalculationsonsubscriberlists,accordingtothezone,cellcentreorcelledge,
wherethepixel,receiver,orsubscriberislocated,AtolluseseithertheICICULNoiseRiseortheULNoiseRisetocalculatethe
PUSCHandPUCCHC/(I+N).Formoreinformationonthecalculationoftheuplinknoiserise,see"NoiseRiseCalculation(UL)"
onpage 528.
Output
Mj

I PUSCH PUCCH : PUSCH and PUCCH interference signal level received at a cell TXi(ic) from an interfering mobile Mj
coveredbyacellTXj(jc).

6.4.4.8.2

NoiseRiseCalculation(UL)
TheuplinknoiseriseisdefinedastheratioofthetotaluplinkinterferencereceivedbyanycellTXi(ic)fromallinterfering
mobilesMjpresentinthecoverageareasofallothercellsTXj(jc)totheuplinknoiseofthecellTXi(ic).Inotherwords,itisthe
ratio(I+N)/N.
Input
Mj

I PUSCH PUCCH : PUSCH and PUCCH interference signal levels received at a cell TXi(ic) from interfering mobiles Mj

coveredbyothercellsTXj(jc)ascalculatedin"InterferingSignalLevelCalculation(UL)"onpage 526.
TX i ic

n PUSCH PUCCH :UplinknoiseforthePUSCHandthePUCCHforthecellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"NoiseCalculation(UL)"

onpage 525.
Inter Tech

NR UL

:Intertechnologyuplinknoiserise.

Calculations
ForanymobileMiinthecellcentreoftheinterferedcellTXi(ic),AtollcalculatestheULNoiseRiseasfollows:
M

TX i ic

NRUL

TX ic
IPUSCH PUCCH

nonICICM i
n PUSCH PUCCH

-
-------------------------------------------
TX ic
----------------------------------------------------------------------------10
10
+ NRInter Tech n i
= 10 Log
10
+ 10
UL
PUSCH PUCCH

AllMj

AllTXj jc

Foranypixel,subscriber,ormobileMiinthecellcentreoftheinterferedcellTXi(ic),AtollcalculatesthePUSCHandPUCCH
totalnoise(I+N)asfollows:
TX i ic

TX i ic

I + N PUSCH PUCCH = NRUL

TX i ic

+ n PUSCH PUCCH

ForanymobileMiinthecelledgeoftheinterferedcellTXi(ic),AtollcalculatestheICICULNoiseRiseasfollows:
M

TX i ic

NRUL ICIC

TX i ic
I PUSCH PUCCH

ICICM i
n PUSCH PUCCH

-
-------------------------------------------
TX ic
-----------------------------------------------------------------10
10
+ NRInter Tech n i
= 10 Log
10
+ 10

UL
PUSCH PUCCH

AllM j

AllTXj jc

Foranypixel,subscriber,ormobileMiincelledgeoftheinterferedcellTXi(ic),AtollcalculatesthePUSCHandPUCCHtotal
noise(I+N)asfollows:
TX ic
i

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

I + N PUSCH PUCCH = NRUL ICIC + n PUSCH PUCCH

Output

528

TX i ic

NR UL

:UplinknoiseriseforthecellTXi(ic).

TX i ic

NR UL ICIC :ICICuplinknoiseriseforthecellTXi(ic).

I + N PUSCH PUCCH :PUSCHandPUCCHtotalnoiseforacellTXi(ic)calculatedforanypixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

TX i ic

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

6.4.4.9 C/NCalculation(UL)
Input
M

C PUSCH PUCCH :ReceivedPUSCHandPUCCHsignallevelfromthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiatitsservingcellTXi(ic)

ascalculatedin"SignalLevelCalculation(UL)"onpage 523.
TX i ic

n PUSCH PUCCH :PUSCHandPUCCHnoiseforthecellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"NoiseCalculation(UL)"onpage 525.

T AMS UL :AMSthresholddefinedintheLTEequipmentofthecellTXi(ic).

N FB

TX i ic

TX ic
i

:Totalnumberoffrequencyblocksdefinedinthefrequencybandstableforthechannelbandwidthusedby

thecellTXi(ic).
TX i ic

N FB CE0 :Numberofcelledgefrequencyblocksdefinedintheframeconfigurationstableforthechannelbandwidth

usedbythecellTXi(ic)andPSSID0.
TX ic
i

N FB CE1 :Numberofcelledgefrequencyblocksdefinedintheframeconfigurationstableforthechannelbandwidth

usedbythecellTXi(ic)andPSSID1.
TX i ic

N FB CE2 :Numberofcelledgefrequencyblocksdefinedintheframeconfigurationstableforthechannelbandwidth

usedbythecellTXi(ic)andPSSID2.
TX i ic

T B Lowest :BearerselectionthresholdofthelowestbearerintheLTEequipmentassignedtothecellTXi(ic).

P Allowed : Maximum allowed transmission power of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as

Mi

calculatedin"SignalLevelCalculation(UL)"onpage 523.
Mi

P Min :Minimumtransmissionpoweroftheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

M PC :Powercontroladjustmentmargindefinedintheglobalnetworksettings.

T B :BearerselectionthresholdsofthebearersdefinedintheLTEequipmentusedbythecellTXi(ic).

B UL Highest Service :Highestdownlinkbearerdefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,

Mi

Mi

ormobileMi.
Mi

B UL Lowest Service :Lowestdownlinkbearerdefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,

ormobileMi.
M

N Ant TX :Numberoftransmission(uplink)antennaportsdefinedfortheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,or

mobileMi.
TX i ic

N Ant RX :Numberofreception(uplink)antennaportsdefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

Mobility M i :Mobilityusedforthecalculations.

i
BLER BUL :UplinkblockerrorratereadfromthegraphsavailableintheLTEequipmentassignedtothecellTXi(ic).

Calculations
ThePUSCHandPUCCHC/Nfromapixel,subscriber,ormobileMiatitsservingcellTXi(ic)iscalculatedasfollows:
M

TX ic
i

CNR PUSCH PUCCH = C PUSCH PUCCH n PUSCH PUCCH

BearerDetermination:
ThebearersavailableforselectioninthecellTXi(ic)sLTEequipmentaretheones:

Which are common between Mis and TXi(ic)s equipment (bearer indexes for which selection thresholds are
definedinbothequipment),ifthecorrespondingoptionhasbeensetintheAtoll.inifile.Formoreinformation,
seetheAdministratorManual.

Whoseindexesarewithintherangedefinedbythelowestandthehighestbearerindexesdefinedfortheservice
beingaccessedbyMi.

529

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014
M

WhoseselectionthresholdsarelessthanthePUSCHandPUCCHC/NatMi: T B CNR PUSCH PUCCH

If the cell supports MIMO, and according to the Mi diversity mode depending on the AMS and MUMIMO
TX ic
i

thresholds and criteria, receive diversity, SUMIMO diversity, or MUMIMO diversity gain, G Div UL ,
correspondingtothebearerisappliedtoitsselectionthreshold.ThegainisreadfromthepropertiesoftheLTE
TX ic

i
i
i
equipmentassignedtothecellTXi(ic)for N Ant TX , N Ant RX , Mobility M i , BLER B UL .
UL

Theadditionaluplinkdiversitygaindefinedfortheclutterclassofthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi G Div isalso

applied.Therefore,thebearersavailableforselectionareallthebearersdefinedintheLTEequipmentforwhich
thefollowingistrue:
Mi

TX i ic

Mi

UL

T B G Div UL G Div CNR PUSCH PUCCH

ThebearerselectedfordatatransferdependsonthebearerselectioncriterionoftheschedulerusedbythecellTXi(ic).

BearerIndex
Fromamongthebearersavailableforselection,theselectedbeareristheonewiththehighestindex.

PeakRLCThroughput
Fromamongthebearersavailableforselection,theselectedbeareristheonewiththehighestuplinkpeakRLC
channelthroughputascalculatedin"ChannelThroughput,CellCapacity,AllocatedBandwidthThroughput,and
PeruserThroughputCalculation"onpage 546.

EffectiveRLCThroughput
Fromamongthebearersavailableforselection,theselectedbeareristheonewiththehighestuplinkeffective
RLCchannelthroughputascalculatedin"ChannelThroughput,CellCapacity,AllocatedBandwidthThroughput,
andPeruserThroughputCalculation"onpage 546.

MIMODiversityGain:
Oncethebearerisknown,thePUSCHandPUCCHC/Ncalculatedabovebecome:
Mi

TX i ic

Mi

UL

CNR PUSCH PUCCH = CNR PUSCH PUCCH + G Div UL + G Div

TX i ic

Where G Div UL isthereceivediversity,SUMIMOdiversity,orMUMIMOdiversitygainappliedifthecellsupports

MIMOanddependingontheMidiversitymode,theAMSandMUMIMOthresholdandcriteria.
UplinkBandwidthAllocation(No.ofUsedFrequencyBlocks):
TheuplinkbandwidthallocationdependsonthetargetdefinedfortheschedulerusedbythecellTXi(ic).ThePUSCH
and PUCCH C/N calculated above is given for the total number of frequency blocks associated with the channel
TX i ic

bandwidthofthecell,i.e., N FB

.Bandwidthallocationisperformedforallthepixels,subscribers,ormobilesinthe

uplink,andmayreducethenumberofusedfrequencyblocksinordertosatisfytheselectedtarget.

FullBandwidth
Full channel width is used by each mobile in the uplink. As there is no reduction in the bandwidth used for
transmission,thereisnogaininthePUSCHandPUCCHC/N.

MaintainConnection
ThebandwidthusedfortransmissionbyamobileisreducedonlyifthePUSCHandPUCCHC/Nisnotenoughto
evenaccessthelowestbearer.Forexample,asamobilemovesfromgoodtobadradioconditions,thenumberof
frequencyblocksusedbyitfortransmissioninuplinkarereducedonebyoneinordertoimprovethePUSCHand
PUCCHC/N.Thecalculationofthegainintroducedbythebandwidthreductionisexplainedbelow.

BestBearer
The bandwidth used for transmission by a mobile is reduced in order to improve the PUSCH and PUCCH C/N
enoughtoaccessthebestbearer.Forexample,ifusing5frequencyblocks,amobileisabletoaccessthebest
bearer,andusing6itwouldonlygetaccesstothesecondbest,itwillbeassigned5frequencyblocksastheused
uplinkbandwidth.Althoughusing4frequencyblocks,itsPUSCHandPUCCHC/Nwillbebetterthanwhenusing5,
theuplinkbandwidthisnotreducedto4becauseitdoesnotprovideanygainintermsofthebearer,i.e.,the
mobile already has the best bearer using 5 frequency blocks. The calculation of the gain introduced by the
bandwidthreductionisexplainedbelow.

530

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

ThedefinitionofthebestbearerdependsonthebearerselectioncriterionoftheschedulerusedbythecellTXi(ic),
i.e., bearer with the highest index, with the highest peak RLC throughput, or with the highest effective RLC
throughput.
Theuplinkbandwidthallocationmayresultintheuseofanumberoffrequencyblockswhichislessthanthenumber
offrequencyblocksassociatedwiththechannelbandwidthofthecell.Thegainrelatedtothisbandwidthreduction
isappliedtothePUSCHandPUCCHC/N:
Mi

CNR PUSCH PUCCH

Final

N TXi ic
FB
-
= CNR PUSCH PUCCH + 10 Log ---------------- Mi

AllFB
N FB UL
Mi

TX i ic

Mi

Min

Where N FB UL Service N FB UL N FB CC foranypixel,subscriber,ormobileMiinthecellcentreoftheinterfered

TX i ic

Mi

Min

cellTXi(ic),and N FB UL Service N FB UL N FB CE foranypixel,subscriber,ormobileMiinthecelledgeofthe

interferedcellTXi(ic).
Numberoffrequencyblocksin

ICICmode

Cellcentre

Celledge

TX ic
i
N FB

NoFFR

TX ic
i

N FB

TX i ic

TimeswitchedFFR

TX i ic

N FB

N FB CEx

TX i ic

HardFFR

TX i ic

N FB CEx
TX i ic

SoftFFR

N FB
TX i ic

PartialsoftFFR

N FB

TX i ic

N FB CEx

TX i ic

TX i ic

N FB CEx

TX ic

N FB CEx

TX ic

TX ic

TX i ic

i
i
i
N FB CE0 + N FB CE1 + N FB CE2

TX i ic

TX i ic

N FB CEx

TX i ic

Where N FB CEx canbe N FB CE0 , N FB CE1 ,or N FB CE2 dependingonthePSSIDofTXi(ic).

UplinkPowerControlAdjustment:
Oncethebandwidthallocationisperformed,AtollcontinuestoworkwiththeC/Ngivenbythebandwidthallocation,
Mi

Mi

i.e., CNR PUSCH PUCCH = CNR PUSCH PUCCH .

Final

Thepixel,subscriber,ormobileMireducesitstransmissionpowersothatthePUSCHandPUCCHC/Nfromitatitscell
isjustenoughtogettheselectedbearer.
Ifwith P

Mi

Mi

Mi

= P Allowed AND CNR PUSCH PUCCH T

TX i ic
Mi

+ M PC ,where T

B UL

TX i ic
Mi
B UL

isthebearerselectionthreshold,from

theLTEequipmentassignedtothecellTXi(ic),forthebearerselectedforthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.
ThetransmissionpowerofMiisreducedtodeterminetheeffectivetransmissionpowerfromthepixel,subscriber,or
mobileMiasfollows:
Mi
Mi
Mi

TX i ic
Mi
P Eff = Max P Allowed CNR PUSCH PUCCH T M + M PC P Min

B i

UL

Mi

Mi

CNR PUSCH PUCCH iscalculatedagainusing P Eff .

Output

Mi

CNR PUSCH PUCCH :PUSCHandPUCCHC/Nfromapixel,subscriber,ormobileMiatitservingcellTXi(ic).

531

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

6.4.4.10 C/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(UL)
Thecarriersignaltointerferenceandnoiseratioiscalculatedinthreesteps.First,Atollcalculatesthereceivedsignallevel
fromeachpixel,subscriber,ormobileatitsservingcellusingtheeffectivepoweroftheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,
ormobileasexplainedin"SignalLevelCalculation(UL)"onpage 523.Next,Atollcalculatestheuplinkcarriertonoiseratioas
explainedin"C/NCalculation(UL)"onpage 529.Finally,determinestheuplinkC/(I+N)bydividingthepreviouslycalculated
uplinkC/Nbytheuplinknoiserisevalueofthecellascalculatedin"NoiseRiseCalculation(UL)"onpage 528.
TheuplinknoiserisecanbesetbytheusermanuallyforeachcellorcalculatedusingMonteCarlosimulations.
Thereceiverterminalisalwaysconsideredtobeorientedtowardsitsbestserver,exceptwhenthe"LockStatus"issetto
"Server+Orientation"forasubscriberinasubscriberlistanditsazimuthandtiltmanuallyedited.InthecaseofNLOSbetween
thereceiverandthebestserver,Atolldoesnottrytofindthedirectionofthestrongestsignal,thereceiverisorientedtowards
thebestserverjustasinthecaseofLOS.
Input

Mi

CNR PUSCH PUCCH :PUSCHandPUCCHC/Nfromapixel,subscriber,ormobileMiatitservingcellTXi(ic)ascalculated

in"C/NCalculation(UL)"onpage 529.

TX i ic

NR UL

:UplinknoiseriseforthecellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"NoiseRiseCalculation(UL)"onpage 528.

TX i ic

NR UL ICIC :ICICuplinknoiseriseforthecellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"NoiseRiseCalculation(UL)"onpage 528.

T AMS UL :AMSthresholddefinedintheLTEequipmentofthecellTXi(c).

N FB

TX i ic

TX i ic

:Totalnumberoffrequencyblocksdefinedinthefrequencybandstableforthechannelbandwidthusedby

thecellTXi(ic).

TX i ic

N FB CE0 :Numberofcelledgefrequencyblocksdefinedintheframeconfigurationstableforthechannelbandwidth
usedbythecellTXi(ic)andPSSID0.

TX ic
i

N FB CE1 :Numberofcelledgefrequencyblocksdefinedintheframeconfigurationstableforthechannelbandwidth
usedbythecellTXi(ic)andPSSID1.

TX i ic

N FB CE2 :Numberofcelledgefrequencyblocksdefinedintheframeconfigurationstableforthechannelbandwidth
usedbythecellTXi(ic)andPSSID2.
TX i ic

T B Lowest :BearerselectionthresholdofthelowestbearerintheLTEequipmentassignedtothecellTXi(ic).

P Allowed : Maximum allowed transmission power of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as

Mi

calculatedin"SignalLevelCalculation(UL)"onpage 523.
Mi

P Min :Minimumtransmissionpoweroftheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

M PC :Powercontroladjustmentmargindefinedintheglobalnetworksettings.

T B :BearerselectionthresholdsofthebearersdefinedintheLTEequipmentusedbythecellTXi(ic).

B UL Highest Service :Highestdownlinkbearerdefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,

Mi

Mi

ormobileMi.

Mi

B UL Lowest Service :Lowestdownlinkbearerdefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,

ormobileMi.

Mi

N Ant TX :Numberoftransmission(uplink)antennaportsdefinedfortheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,or
mobileMi.

532

TX i ic

N Ant RX :Numberofreception(uplink)antennaportsdefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

Mobility M i :Mobilityusedforthecalculations.

i
BLER B UL :UplinkblockerrorratereadfromthegraphsavailableintheLTEequipmentassignedtothecellTXi(ic).

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Calculations
Foranypixel,subscriber,ormobileMiinthecellcentreoftheinterferedcellTXi(ic),AtollcalculatesthePUSCHandPUCCHC/
(I+N)asfollows:
M

TX ic
i

CINR PUSCH PUCCH = CNR PUSCH PUCCH NRUL

Foranypixel,subscriber,ormobileMiinthecelledgeoftheinterferedcellTXi(ic),AtollcalculatesthePUSCHandPUCCHC/
(I+N)asfollows:
Mi

TX i ic

Mi

CINR PUSCH PUCCH = CNR PUSCH PUCCH NRUL ICIC

BearerDetermination:
ThebearersavailableforselectioninthecellTXi(ic)sLTEequipmentaretheones:

Which are common between Mis and TXi(ic)s equipment (bearer indexes for which selection thresholds are
definedinbothequipment),ifthecorrespondingoptionhasbeensetintheAtoll.inifile.Formoreinformation,
seetheAdministratorManual.

Whoseindexesarewithintherangedefinedbythelowestandthehighestbearerindexesdefinedfortheservice
beingaccessedbyMi.

WhoseselectionthresholdsarelessthanthePUSCHandPUCCHC/(I+N)atMi: T B CINR PUSCH PUCCH

Mi

Mi

If the cell supports MIMO, and according to the Mi diversity mode depending on the AMS and MUMIMO
TX i ic

thresholds and criteria, receive diversity, SUMIMO diversity, or MUMIMO diversity gain, G Div UL ,
correspondingtothebearerisappliedtoitsselectionthreshold.ThegainisreadfromthepropertiesoftheLTE
TX ic

i
i
i
equipmentassignedtothecellTXi(ic)for N Ant TX , N Ant RX , Mobility M i , BLER B UL .

UL

Theadditionaluplinkdiversitygaindefinedfortheclutterclassofthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi G Div isalso

applied.Therefore,thebearersavailableforselectionareallthebearersdefinedintheLTEequipmentforwhich
thefollowingistrue:
M

TX ic
i

UL

T B G Div UL G Div CINR PUSCH PUCCH

ThebearerselectedfordatatransferdependsonthebearerselectioncriterionoftheschedulerusedbythecellTXi(ic).

BearerIndex
Fromamongthebearersavailableforselection,theselectedbeareristheonewiththehighestindex.

PeakRLCThroughput
Fromamongthebearersavailableforselection,theselectedbeareristheonewiththehighestuplinkpeakRLC
channelthroughputascalculatedin"ChannelThroughput,CellCapacity,AllocatedBandwidthThroughput,and
PeruserThroughputCalculation"onpage 546.

EffectiveRLCThroughput
Fromamongthebearersavailableforselection,theselectedbeareristheonewiththehighestuplinkeffective
RLCchannelthroughputascalculatedin"ChannelThroughput,CellCapacity,AllocatedBandwidthThroughput,
andPeruserThroughputCalculation"onpage 546.

MIMODiversityGain:
Oncethebearerisknown,thePUSCHandPUCCHC/(I+N)calculatedabovebecome:
Mi

Mi

TX i ic

UL

CINR PUSCH PUCCH = CINR PUSCH PUCCH + G Div UL + G Div

TX i ic

Where G Div UL isthereceivediversity,SUMIMOdiversity,orMUMIMOdiversitygainappliedifthecellsupports

MIMOanddependingontheMidiversitymode,theAMSandMUMIMOthresholdandcriteria.
UplinkBandwidthAllocation(No.ofUsedFrequencyBlocks):
TheuplinkbandwidthallocationdependsonthetargetdefinedfortheschedulerusedbythecellTXi(ic).ThePUSCH
andPUCCHC/(I+N)calculatedaboveisgivenforthetotalnumberoffrequencyblocksassociatedwiththechannel

533

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014
TX ic
i

bandwidthofthecell,i.e., N FB

.Bandwidthallocationisperformedforallthepixels,subscribers,ormobilesinthe

uplink,andmayreducethenumberofusedfrequencyblocksinordertosatisfytheselectedtarget.

FullBandwidth
Full channel width is used by each mobile in the uplink. As there is no reduction in the bandwidth used for
transmission,thereisnogaininthePUSCHandPUCCHC/(I+N).

MaintainConnection
ThebandwidthusedfortransmissionbyamobileisreducedonlyifthePUSCHandPUCCHC/(I+N)isnotenough
toevenaccessthelowestbearer.Forexample,asamobilemovesfromgoodtobadradioconditions,thenumber
offrequencyblocksusedbyitfortransmissioninuplinkarereducedonebyoneinordertoimprovethePUSCH
andPUCCHC/(I+N).Thecalculationofthegainintroducedbythebandwidthreductionisexplainedbelow.

BestBearer
ThebandwidthusedfortransmissionbyamobileisreducedinordertoimprovethePUSCHandPUCCHC/(I+N)
enoughtoaccessthebestbearer.Forexample,ifusing5frequencyblocks,amobileisabletoaccessthebest
bearer,andusing6itwouldonlygetaccesstothesecondbest,itwillbeassigned5frequencyblocksastheused
uplinkbandwidth.Althoughusing4frequencyblocks,itsPUSCHandPUCCHC/(I+N)willbebetterthanwhenusing
5,theuplinkbandwidthisnotreducedto4becauseitdoesnotprovideanygainintermsofthebearer,i.e.,the
mobile already has the best bearer using 5 frequency blocks. The calculation of the gain introduced by the
bandwidthreductionisexplainedbelow.
ThedefinitionofthebestbearerdependsonthebearerselectioncriterionoftheschedulerusedbythecellTXi(ic),
i.e., bearer with the highest index, with the highest peak RLC throughput, or with the highest effective RLC
throughput.

Theuplinkbandwidthallocationmayresultintheuseofanumberoffrequencyblockswhichislessthanthenumber
offrequencyblocksassociatedwiththechannelbandwidthofthecell.Thegainrelatedtothisbandwidthreduction
isappliedtothePUSCHandPUCCHC/(I+N):
N TXi ic
Mi
Mi
FB
-
CINR PUSCH PUCCH = CINR PUSCH PUCCH + 10 Log ----------------Mi

AllFB
Final
N FB UL
TX i ic

Mi

Min

Where N FB UL Service N FB UL N FB CC foranypixel,subscriber,ormobileMiinthecellcentreoftheinterfered

TX i ic

Mi

Min

cellTXi(ic),and N FB UL Service N FB UL N FB CE foranypixel,subscriber,ormobileMiinthecelledgeofthe

interferedcellTXi(ic).
Numberoffrequencyblocksin

ICICmode

Cellcentre

Celledge

TX i ic

NoFFR

N FB

TimeswitchedFFR

N FB

TX i ic

N FB

TX i ic

TX i ic

N FB CEx

TX ic
i

HardFFR

TX ic
i

N FB CEx
TX i ic

SoftFFR

N FB

PartialsoftFFR

TX i ic

N FB

TX i ic

N FB CEx

TX i ic

TX i ic

N FB CEx

TX ic

TX ic

N FB CEx
TX ic

i
i
i
N FB CE0 + N FB CE1 + N FB CE2

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

N FB CEx

TX i ic

Where N FB CEx canbe N FB CE0 , N FB CE1 ,or N FB CE2 dependingonthePSSIDofTXi(ic).

UplinkPowerControlAdjustment:
Once the bandwidth allocation is performed, Atoll continues to work with the C/(I+N) given by the bandwidth
Mi

Mi

allocation,i.e., CINR PUSCH PUCCH = CINR PUSCH PUCCH .

Final

Thepixel,subscriber,ormobileMireducesitstransmissionpowersothatthePUSCHandPUCCHC/(I+N)fromitatits
cellisjustenoughtogettheselectedbearer.

534

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Ifwith P

= P Allowed AND CINR PUSCH PUCCH T

TX ic
i
M
i
B
UL

+ M PC ,where T

TX ic
i
M
i
B
UL

isthebearerselectionthreshold,from

theLTEequipmentassignedtothecellTXi(ic),forthebearerselectedforthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.
ThetransmissionpowerofMiisreducedtodeterminetheeffectivetransmissionpowerfromthepixel,subscriber,or
mobileMiasfollows:
Mi
Mi
Mi

TXi ic
Mi
P Eff = Max P Allowed CINR PUSCH PUCCH T M + M PC P Min

B i

UL

CINR PUSCH PUCCH iscalculatedagainusing P Eff .

Output
Mi

CINR PUSCH PUCCH :PUSCHandPUCCHC/(I+N)fromapixel,subscriber,ormobileMiatitservingcellTXi(ic).

N FB UL :Numberoffrequencyblocksusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiafteruplinkbandwidthallocation.

P Eff :Effectivetransmissionpoweroftheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

B UL :Bearerassignedtothepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiintheuplink.

Mi

Mi

Mi

6.4.5 BestServerDetermination
InLTE,bestserverreferstoacell("servingtransmitter""referencecell"pair)thatbestcoversapixel,subscriber,ormobile
Miandprovidesthebestservice.
Input

TX i ic

C DLRS :DownlinkreferencesignallevelreceivedfromanycellTXi(ic)atapixel,subscriber,ormobileMiascalculated
in"SignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 501usingtheterminalandserviceparameters( L

Mi

, G

Mi

Mi

Mi

, L Ant ,and L Body )

ofMi.

TX ic
i

E DLRS : Received downlink reference signal energy per resource element (RSRP) from any cell TXi(ic) at a pixel,
subscriber,ormobileMiascalculatedin"SignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 501.
TX i ic

T RSRP :MinimumRSRPdefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

p Layer :PrioritydefinedforthelayerassignedtoforanycellTXi(ic).

M Layer :LayerselectionmargindefinedforthelayerassignedtoforanycellTXi(ic).

N SCell

TX ic
i

TX i ic

Max DL

:Maximumnumberofdownlinksecondarycellsdefinedfortheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,or

mobileMi.

Max UL

N SCell

: Maximum number of uplink secondary cells defined for the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or

mobileMi.
Calculations
Thebestserverselectionforanypixel,subscriber,ormobileMi BS M isperformedasfollows:
i

1. Atollcreatesthefollowinglistsofpotentialservers(servingcells),eachsortedindescendingorderofthebestserver
TX i ic

TX i ic

selectioncriterion( C DLRS or E DLRS ),andforwhichthefollowingistrue:

TX i ic

TX i ic

E DLRS T RSRP

535

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

LTEusers:
a. AlistofpotentialservingcellswhosecelltypeincludesLTE
LTEAusers:
b. AlistofpotentialprimaryservingcellswhosecelltypeincludesLTEAPCell
c. AlistofpotentialprimaryservingcellswhosecelltypeincludesLTE
d. AlistofpotentialsecondaryservingcellswhosemayincludeLTEASCellDLandLTEASCellUL
Amongtheabovelists,listb.haspriorityoverlistsc.andd.
2. Fromalloftheabovelists,optionally,Atolleliminatespotentialservingcellslocatedtoofarfromthepixel,subscriber,
ormobileMi,i.e.,fartherthantheroundtriptimedistancecorrespondingtothecellsPRACHpreambleformat.

PRACH
preamble
format

a.

Cyclicprefix

Preamblesequence

Cyclic
prefix+
preamble
sequence

Window
size

Guard
period

RTTdistance

Tsa

Sec.

Ts

Sec.

Sec.

Sec.

Sec.

Metres

3168

0.00010

24576

0.00080

0.00090

0.00100

0.00010

14521

21024

0.00068

24576

0.00080

0.00148

0.00200

0.00052

77290

6240

0.00020

49152

0.00160

0.00180

0.00200

0.00020

29511

21024

0.00068

49152

0.00160

0.00228

0.00300

0.00072

107269

448

0.00001

4096

0.00013

0.00015

0.00017

0.00002

2811

ThebasicunitoftimeinLTE:Ts=1/(15000x2048)seconds.
3. From all of the above lists, Atoll eliminates incompatible potential servers depending on the mobile speed and
compatibilitybetweenthecellslayersandthelayerssupportedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMisserviceand
terminal.
TX ic
i

TX ic
i

4. Fromeachlist,Atolleliminatesthepotentialservingcellswhosebestserverselectioncriterion( C DLRS or E DLRS )is

TX i ic

lessthanthehighestreferencesignallevelorRSRPofeachlistlessthelayerselectionmargin M Layer .
5. AtollselectstheservingcellforLTEusersfromtheremaininglista.,aprimaryservingcellforLTEAusersfromthe
remaininglistb.,oraservingcellforLTEAusersfromtheremaininglistc.ifnocelloftypeLTEAPCellisselectable
fromlistb.
Theservingcellselectedforcoveragepredictionsisthefirstcellinthelist(belongingtothehighestprioritylayerifthe
predictionisbeingcalculatedforthe"Best"layer.)
TheservingcellselectedforMonteCarlosimulationsdependsontheservingcellselectionmethod:

Random:Eachuserisassignedtooneoftheremainingpotentialserversatrandom.
Layerpriority:Eachuserisassignedtothefirstcellbelongingtothehighestprioritylayer.
Trafficbalancing:Atolltriestobalancethenumbersofusersofdifferentservicesperservingcell.

Atthisstage,userswithoutanyservingcellassignedarerejectedforNoCoverage.
Onceaprimaryservingcellhasbeenselected,Atolleliminatestheselectedcellaswellasanyothercochannelcell
fromlistd.Here,cochannelcellsarecellswhosechannelsoverlapthechannelbeingusedtheprimaryservingcell.
By default, Atoll supports intraeNodeB carrier aggregation. This means that, at this
stage,AtollalsoeliminatescellsbelongingtoothereNodeBsthanthatoftheselected
primarycellfromlistd.
IfyouwishtoswitchtomultieNodeBcarrieraggregation,youcandosobyaddingan
optionintheAtoll.inifile.Formoreinformation,seetheAdministratorManual.
6. ForLTEAuserswithaprimaryservingcelloftypeLTEAPCellselectedfromlistb.,Atollselectssecondaryserving
cellsfromlistd.asfollows:
Theservingcellselectedforcoveragepredictionsisthefirstcellinthelist(belongingtothehighestprioritylayerifthe
predictionisbeingcalculatedforthe"Best"layer.)

536

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

TheservingcellselectedforMonteCarlosimulationsdependsontheservingcellselectionmethod:

Random:Eachuserisassignedtooneoftheremainingpotentialserversatrandom.
Layerpriority:Eachuserisassignedtothefirstcellbelongingtothehighestprioritylayer.
Trafficbalancing:Atolltriestobalancethenumbersofusersofdifferentservicesperservingcell.

This step is carried out until either list d. is empty, or the numbers of downlink or uplink secondary serving cells
Max DL

assigned to the user become equal to the maximum numbers defined in the terminal properties ( N SCell
Max UL
N SCell

and

).

TheprimaryandsecondaryservingcellsonceassignedtoamobiledonotchangeduringaMonteCarlosimulation.
Atolldetermineswhetherthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiisin thecelledgeorcellcentreofTXi(ic)bycalculating the
differencebetweenthepathlossfromthesecondbestserverandthebestserver,andcomparingitwiththedeltapathloss
thresholddefinedforthebestserverofthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.
Therefore,
2ndBS M

L Total

+ 10

pixel,

subscriber,

BS M 2ndBS M
i
i
Log r O

BS M

or

mobile
BS M

Mi

is

considered

to

be

cell

edge
BS M

if

L Total L Path ,anditisconsideredtobeincellcentreotherwise.Here, L Total isthe

2ndBS M

totallossfromMisbestserverand L Total

isthetotallossfromMissecondbestservercalculatedasexplainedin"Signal

LevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 453.Thesecondbestserverforapixel,subscriber,ormobileMiiscalculatedasfollows:
2ndBS M = TX i ic
i

BSM 2ndBS M
i
i

rO

TX i ic
DLRS

TX i ic
= 2ndBest C

AllTX ic DLRS
i

isthetotalchanneloverlapratiobetweenthebestserverandthesecondbestserverascalculatedin"Coand
BS M

AdjacentChannelOverlapsCalculation"onpage 493. L Path isthedeltapathlossthresholddefinedforthebestserverof

thepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.
Output

BSM :Bestservingcellofthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.
i

6.4.6 ThroughputCalculation
Throughputsarecalculatedintwosteps.

Calculationofuplinkanddownlinktotalresourcesinacellasexplainedin"CalculationofTotalCellResources"on
page 537.
CalculationofuplinkanddownlinkUEcapacitiesasexplainedin"CalculationUECapacities"onpage 544.
Calculationofthroughputsasexplainedin"ChannelThroughput,CellCapacity,AllocatedBandwidthThroughput,and
PeruserThroughputCalculation"onpage 546.

6.4.6.1 CalculationofTotalCellResources
Thetotalamountofresourcesinacellisthenumberofmodulationsymbolsthatcanbeusedfordatatransferineachframe.
Thetotalcellresourcescanbecalculatedseparatelyforthedownlinkanduplinkasdescribedin:

6.4.6.1.1

"CalculationofDownlinkCellResources"onpage 537.
"CalculationofUplinkCellResources"onpage 542.

CalculationofDownlinkCellResources
Input

F :Subcarrierwidth(15 kHz).

W FB :Widthofafrequencyblock(180 kHz).

N FB SS PBCH :NumberoffrequencyblocksthatcarrytheSSandthePBCH(6).

N Slot SF :Numberofslotspersubframe(2).

D CP

TX i ic

:CyclicprefixdurationdefinedinTXi(ic)frameconfigurationor,otherwise,intheglobalnetworksettings.

537

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014
TX ic
i

TX ic
i

N SD Slot :Numberofsymboldurationsperslot(7is D CP

isNormal,6if D CP

isExtended).

N SD PDCCH :NumberofPDCCHsymboldurationspersubframedefinedinTXi(ic)frameconfigurationor,otherwise,

TX ic
i

intheglobalnetworksettings.

TX ic
i

N FB

:Totalnumberoffrequencyblocksdefinedinthefrequencybandstableforthechannelbandwidthusedby

thecellTXi(ic).

TX i ic

N FB CE0 :Numberofcelledgefrequencyblocksdefinedintheframeconfigurationstableforthechannelbandwidth
usedbythecellTXi(ic)andPSSID0.

TX i ic

N FB CE1 :Numberofcelledgefrequencyblocksdefinedintheframeconfigurationstableforthechannelbandwidth
usedbythecellTXi(ic)andPSSID1.

TX i ic

N FB CE2 :Numberofcelledgefrequencyblocksdefinedintheframeconfigurationstableforthechannelbandwidth
usedbythecellTXi(ic)andPSSID2.

TX i ic

N SF DL :NumberofdownlinksubframesintheframeforthecellTXi(ic).Itisequalto10forFDDfrequencybands,and
isdeterminedfromthecellsTDDframeconfigurationforTDDfrequencybands.

TX i ic

N TDD SSF :NumberofTDDspecialsubframes(containingDwPTS,GP,andUpPTS)intheframeforthecellTXi(ic).Itis

equalto0forFDDfrequencybands,andisdeterminedfromthecellsTDDframeconfigurationforTDDfrequency
bands.
TX i ic

TX i ic

N SF DL and N TDD SSF aredeterminedasfollows:

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

Configuration

N SF DL

N TDD SSF

FDD

10

DSUUUDSUUU

DSUUDDSUUD

DSUDDDSUDD

DSUUUDSUUD

DSUUUDDDDD

DSUUDDDDDD

DSUDDDDDDD

TX i ic

N Ant TX :Numberoftransmission(downlink)antennaportsdefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

Calculations
InLTE,aresourceblock(RB)isdefinedas1frequencyblockby1slot.However,schedulersareabletoperformresource
allocationeverysubframe(2slots).1frequencyblockby1subframe(2slots)iscalledaschedulerresourceblock(SRB)inthe
calculationsbelow.
Thenumberofmodulationsymbols(resourceelements)perschedulerresourceblockiscalculatedasfollows:
N Sym SRB = N SCa FB N SD Slot N Slot SF
Where N SCa FB isthenumberofsubcarriersperfrequencyblockcalculatedasfollows:
W FB
N SCa FB = --------F
Thenumberofmodulationsymbols(resourceelements)correspondingtotheDwPTSperschedulerresourceblockintheTDD
specialsubframesiscalculatedasfollows:
DwPTS

DwPTS

N Sym SSF = N SCa FB N SD SSF

DwPTS

Where N SD SSF isthenumberofDwPTSsymboldurations(OFDMsymbols)perspecialsubframe,determinedfromtheTDD

specialsubframeconfigurationaccordingtothe3GPPspecificationsasfollows:

538

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

CyclicPrefix=Normal

Special
Subframe
Configuration

DwPTS

GP

N SD SSF

DwPTS

N SD SSF

CyclicPrefix=Extended
UpPTS

DwPTS

GP

UpPTS

N SD SSF

DwPTS

N SD SSF

10

10

11

10

12

10

11

GP

N SD SSF

GP

UpPTS
UpPTS

N SD SSF

Thetotalnumberofmodulationsymbols(resourceelements)indownlinkiscalculatedasfollows:
TX i ic

TX i ic

N Sym DL = N FB

TX i ic

TX i ic

N Sym SRB N SF DL + N Sym DwPTS

TX i ic

TX i ic

Where N Sym DwPTS = N FB

TX i ic

DwPTS

N TDD SSF N Sym SSF

TX i ic

Thetotaldownlinkcellresources,i.e., R DL
TX i ic

R DL

TX i ic

TX i ic

,arecalculatedasfollows:
TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

= N Sym DL O DLRS O PSS O SSS O PBCH O PDCCH O UERS

TX i ic

ThedownlinkDwPTSresources,i.e., R DwPTS ,arecalculatedasfollows:

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

R DwPTS = N Sym DwPTS O DLRS DwPTS O PDCCH DwPTS

TX i ic

Where O DLRS istheoverheadcorrespondingtothedownlinkreferencesignals, O PSS istheoverheadcorrespondingtothe

TX ic
i

primarysynchronisationsignals, O SSS istheoverheadcorrespondingtothesecondarysynchronisationsignals, O PBCH isthe

TX i ic

overhead corresponding to the physical broadcast channel, and O PDCCH is the overhead corresponding to the physical
TX i ic

downlink control channel. O UERS is the overhead corresponding to the UEspecific reference signals transmitted on the
logicalantennaport5whenauserisservedusingsmartantennas.
Theseoverheadsarecalculatedasfollows:
Downlinkreferencesignaloverhead
Thedownlinkreferencesignaloverheaddependsonthenumberoftransmissionantennaports:
TX i ic

O DLRS

TX i ic

= N FB
TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

Where O DLRS DwPTS = N FB

TX i ic

N DLRS SRB

TX i ic

TX i ic

N DLRS SRB N SF DL + O DLRS DwPTS

TX i ic

TX i ic

N DLRS DwPTS N TDD SSF ,

TX i ic

if N Ant TX = 1
8

TX i ic
= 16
,
if N Ant TX = 2

TX ic

24 if N Ant TX = 4or8

TX i ic

And N DLRS DwPTS isdeterminedfromthetablebelow:

539

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

Special
Subframe
Configuration

CyclicPrefix=Normal
DwPTS

N SD SSF

10

11

12

10

11

CyclicPrefix=Extended

TX ic
i
N Ant TX

TX ic
i
N DLRS DwPTS

DwPTS

N SD SSF

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

N Ant TX

N DLRS DwPTS

12

12

20

20

20

20

12

12

20

20

20

20

12

16

20

24

20

24

16

24

24

12

20

20

12

12

20

20

20

20

12

20

20

12

20

20

10

PSSandSSSoverhead
Theprimaryandsecondarysynchonisationsignalsaretransmittedon1symboldurationeachinthe1standthe6th
downlinksubframes,overthecentre6frequencyblocks.Therefore,
O PSS = 2 N FB SS PBCH N SCa FB = 144 symbols
O SSS = 2 N FB SS PBCH N SCa FB = 144 symbols
PBCHoverhead
Thephysicalbroadcastchannelistransmittedonfoursymboldurationsinthe1stdownlinksubframeoverthecenter
6frequencyblocks.Thephysicalbroadcastchanneloverlapswiththedownlinkreferencesignals,therefore,some
downlinkreferencesignalmodulationsymbolsaresubtracted:

540

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

216forextendedcyclicprefix
240fornormalcyclicprefix
PDCCHoverhead
The physical downlink control channel can be transmitted over up to 4 symbol durations in each subframe. The
number of symbol durations for the PDCCH is defined in the global network settings. The PDCCH overlaps some
downlink reference signal symbols. These downlink reference signal symbols are subtracted from the PDCCH
overhead:
TX ic

i
if N SD PDCCH = 0 :
TX i ic

O PDCCH = 0
TX ic

TX ic

i
i
if N SD PDCCH = 1 AND N Ant TX 2 :
TX ic

TX ic

TX ic

i
i
i
O PDCCH = N SD PDCCH N SCa FB 4 N FB
TX ic
i

Where O PDCCH DwPTS =

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

N SF DL + O PDCCH DwPTS

TX ic

TX ic

i
N i

SD PDCCH N SCa FB 4 N FB

TX ic
i

N TDD SSF

Otherwise:
TX ic

TX ic

TX ic

TX ic

i
i
i
i
O PDCCH = N SD PDCCH N SCa FB 2 Min 4 N Ant TX N FB

TX ic

TX ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

N SF DL + O PDCCH DwPTS
TX ic

TX ic

i
i
i
i
Where O PDCCH DwPTS = Min 2 N SD PDCCH N SCa FB 2 Min 4 N Ant TX N FB

TX i ic

N TDD SSF

UEspecificreferencesignaloverhead
UEspecificreferencesignals(12resourceelementsperschedulerresourceblock)aretransmittedforusersserved
usingsmartantennasonthelogicalantennaport5.
TX i ic

TX i ic

Withsmartantennas: O UERS = 12 N FB

TX i ic

N SF DL

TX i ic

Withoutsmartantennas: O UERS = 0
TX i ic

Once R DL

is known, it is scaled down according to the ICIC mode used by the cell TXi(ic) depending on whether the

downlinkcellresourcesarebeingcalculatedforacellcentreorcelledgepixel,subscriber,ormobile.
TX i ic

R DL

TX i ic

= R DL

ICIC

ABS

f Scaling f Scaling

ICIC

f Scaling iscalculatedasfollowsforthedifferentICICmodes:
ICIC

ICICcellresourcescalingfactor f Scaling for

ICICmode

Cellcentre

Celledge

TimeswitchedFFR

N FB CEx
-------------------TX i ic
N FB

HardFFR

N FB CEx
-------------------TX i ic
N FB

SoftFFR

N FB
N FB CEx
-----------------------------------------TX i ic
N FB

NoFFR

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

N FB CEx
-------------------TX i ic
N FB
TX i ic

N FB CEx
-------------------TX i ic
N FB

541

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

ICIC

ICICcellresourcescalingfactor f Scaling for

ICICmode

Cellcentre
TX ic
i

TX ic
i

Celledge

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

N FB
N FB CE0 + N FB CE1 + N FB CE2
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TX i ic
N FB

PartialsoftFFR

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

N FB CEx
-------------------TX i ic
N FB

TX i ic

Where N FB CEx canbe N FB CE0 , N FB CE1 ,or N FB CE2 dependingonthePSSIDofTXi(ic).

ABS

f Scaling iscalculatedasfollows:

Method1:ABSPatternsUsedOnlyatCellEdges

ABS

f Scaling

1
Cellcentre

TX i ic
TX i ic
TX i ic
TX i ic
TX i ic

SFP DL
R DL
R DwPTS +
SFP SSF R DwPTS
=
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1
1
- Celledge

TX i ic

80 R DL

Method2:ABSPatternsUsedThroughouttheCell
TX i ic

ABS

f Scaling

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

R DL
R DwPTS +
SFP SSF R DwPTS

1
1
= ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TX i ic
80 R DL

SFPDL

TX i ic

Formoreinformationon SFP DL

TX i ic

and SFP SSF

,see"SubframePatternCollisionCalculation"onpage 497.

Output

6.4.6.1.2

TX i ic

R DL

:AmountofdownlinkresourcesinthecellTXi(ic).

CalculationofUplinkCellResources
Input

F :Subcarrierwidth(15 kHz).

W FB :Widthofafrequencyblock(180 kHz).

N Slot SF :Numberofslotspersubframe(2).

D CP

N SD Slot :Numberofsymboldurationsperslot(7is D CP

TX i ic

:CyclicprefixdurationdefinedinTXi(ic)frameconfigurationor,otherwise,intheglobalnetworksettings.
TX ic
i

TX ic
i

isNormal,6if D CP

isExtended).

TX i ic

N FB PUCCH : Average number of PUCCH frequency blocks per frame defined in TXi(ic) frame configuration or,
otherwise,intheglobalnetworksettings.

TX i ic

N FB

:Totalnumberoffrequencyblocksdefinedinthefrequencybandstableforthechannelbandwidthusedby

thecellTXi(ic).

TX i ic

N FB CE0 :Numberofcelledgefrequencyblocksdefinedintheframeconfigurationstableforthechannelbandwidth
usedbythecellTXi(ic)andPSSID0.

TX i ic

N FB CE1 :Numberofcelledgefrequencyblocksdefinedintheframeconfigurationstableforthechannelbandwidth
usedbythecellTXi(ic)andPSSID1.

TX ic
i

N FB CE2 :Numberofcelledgefrequencyblocksdefinedintheframeconfigurationstableforthechannelbandwidth
usedbythecellTXi(ic)andPSSID2.

542

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

TX ic
i

N SF UL :NumberofuplinksubframesintheframeforthecellTXi(ic).Itisequalto10forFDDfrequencybands,and
isdeterminedfromthecellsTDDframeconfigurationforTDDfrequencybands.

TX ic
i

N TDD SSF :NumberofTDDspecialsubframes(containingDwPTS,GP,andUpPTS)intheframeforthecellTXi(ic).Itis

equalto0forFDDfrequencybands,andisdeterminedfromthecellsTDDframeconfigurationforTDDfrequency
bands.
TX i ic

TX i ic

N SF UL and N TDD SSF aredeterminedasfollows:

TX i ic

TX i ic

Configuration

N SF UL

N TDD SSF

FDD

10

DSUUUDSUUU

DSUUDDSUUD

DSUDDDSUDD

DSUUUDSUUD

DSUUUDDDDD

DSUUDDDDDD

DSUDDDDDDD

UpPTS is used for SRS (sounding reference signals) if the UpPTS duration is 1 OFDM
symbol,andforSRSandPRACHiftheUpPTSdurationis2OFDMsymbols.Therefore,the
uplinkcellcapacitycanbedeterminedwithoutconsideringtheUpPTSsymbols.
Calculations
InLTE,aresourceblock(RB)isdefinedas1frequencyblockby1slot.However,schedulersareabletoperformresource
allocationeverysubframe(2slots).1frequencyblockby1subframe(2slots)iscalledaschedulerresourceblock(SRB)inthe
calculationsbelow.
Thenumberofmodulationsymbols(resourceelements)perresourceblockiscalculatedasfollows:
N Sym SRB = N SCa FB N SD Slot N Slot SF
Where N SCa FB isthenumberofsubcarriersperfrequencyblockcalculatedasfollows:
W FB
N SCa FB = --------F
Thetotalnumberofmodulationsymbols(resourceelements)inuplinkiscalculatedasfollows:
TX ic

TX ic

i
i
N Sym UL = N FB

TX ic

TX ic

i
i
N FB PUCCH N Sym SRB N SF UL

TX ic
i

Thetotaluplinkcellresources,i.e., R UL
TX ic
i

R UL

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

,arecalculatedasfollows:

TX ic
i

= N Sym UL O ULSRS O ULDRS

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

Where O ULSRS is the overhead corresponding to the uplink sounding reference signals, and O ULDRS is the overhead
correspondingtotheuplinkdemodulationreferencesignals.Thesecontrolchanneloverheadsarecalculatedasfollows:
Calculationsofuplinkcontrolchanneloverheads
Theuplinksoundingreferencesignalsaretransmittedon1symboldurationineachuplinksubframe.Therefore,
TX i ic
TX i ic
N SCa FB
- N Sym
O ULSRS = -------------------- UL
N Sym SRB

The uplink demodulation reference signals are transmitted on two symbol durations in each uplink subframe.
Therefore,

543

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

TX ic
TX ic
N SCa FB
i
i
- N Sym
O ULDRS = 2 -------------------- UL
N Sym SRB
TX ic
i

Once R UL

isknown,itisscaleddownaccordingtotheICICmodeusedbythecellTXi(ic)dependingonwhethertheuplink

cellresourcesarebeingcalculatedforacellcentreorcelledgepixel,subscriber,ormobile.
TX i ic

TX i ic

R UL

= R UL

ICIC

ABS

f Scaling f Scaling

ICIC

f Scaling iscalculatedasfollowsforthedifferentICICmodes:
ICIC

ICICcellresourcescalingfactor f Scaling for

ICICmode

Cellcentre

Celledge

TimeswitchedFFR

N FB CEx
-------------------TX i ic
N FB

HardFFR

N FB CEx
-------------------TX i ic
N FB

SoftFFR

N FB
N FB CEx
-----------------------------------------TX i ic
N FB

PartialsoftFFR

N FB
N FB CE0 + N FB CE1 + N FB CE2

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TX i ic
N FB

NoFFR

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

N FB CEx
-------------------TX i ic
N FB

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

N FB CEx
-------------------TX i ic
N FB
TX i ic

TX i ic

N FB CEx
-------------------TX i ic
N FB

TX i ic

Where N FB CEx canbe N FB CE0 , N FB CE1 ,or N FB CE2 dependingonthePSSIDofTXi(ic).

ABS

f Scaling iscalculatedasfollows:

Method1:ABSPatternsUsedOnlyatCellEdges

ABS

f Scaling

1
Cellcentre

TX i ic

=
SFP UL
1
------------------------------ Celledge
80

Method2:ABSPatternsUsedThroughouttheCell
TX i ic

ABS

SFPUL

1
f Scaling = ----------------------------80
TX i ic

Formoreinformationon SFP UL

,see"SubframePatternCollisionCalculation"onpage 497.

Output

TX ic
i

R UL

:AmountofuplinkresourcesinthecellTXi(ic).

6.4.6.2 CalculationUECapacities
TheUEcategoryparametersdefinethemaximumthroughputthatcanbesupportedbyaUEindownlinkanduplink.TheUE
capacitiesarecalculatedforthedownlinkanduplinkasdescribedin:

544

"CalculationofDownlinkUECapacity"onpage 545.
"CalculationofUplinkUECapacity"onpage 545.

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

6.4.6.2.1

CalculationofDownlinkUECapacity
Input

D Frame :Frameduration.

N TBB TTI :MaximumnumberoftransportblockbitsperTTI(subframe)indownlinkdefinedforaUEcategory.

N SF DL :NumberofdownlinksubframesintheframeforthecellTXi(ic).Itisequalto10forFDDfrequencybands,and

Max DL
TX i ic

isdeterminedfromthecellsTDDframeconfigurationforTDDfrequencybands.
TX i ic

N TDD SSF :NumberofTDDspecialsubframes(containingDwPTS,GP,andUpPTS)intheframeforthecellTXi(ic).Itis

equalto0forFDDfrequencybands,andisdeterminedfromthecellsTDDframeconfigurationforTDDfrequency
bands.
TX i ic

TX i ic

N SF DL and N TDD SSF aredeterminedasfollows:

TX i ic

TX i ic

Configuration

N SF DL

N TDD SSF

FDD

10

DSUUUDSUUU

DSUUDDSUUD

DSUDDDSUDD

DSUUUDSUUD

DSUUUDDDDD

DSUUDDDDDD

DSUDDDDDDD

Calculations
InLTE,themaximumthroughputthatcanbesupportedbyauserequipmentisdefinedthroughitsUEcategoryparameter
TransportBlockSize.ThisisthemaximumnumberoftransportblockbitsthattheUEcancarrypersubframe.
ThedownlinkUEcapacityintermsofthemaximumthroughputsupportedbyaUEindownlinkiscalculatedasfollows:
TX ic

Max
TP UE DL

Max DL
N TBB TTI

TX ic

i
N i
+ N TDD SSF
SF DL

--------------------------------------------------
D Frame

Themaximumtransportblocksizesdefinedbythe3GPPfordifferentUEcategoriescorrespondtothefollowingmaximum
throughputcapacitiesinFDD:
UECategory

Max DL

10296

51024

102048

150752

299552

301504

301504

2998560

Max

10.296

51.024

102.048

150.752

299.552

301.504

301.504

2998.560

N TBB TTI (bits/TTI)

TP UE DL (Mbps)
Output

6.4.6.2.2

Max

TP UE DL :MaximumdownlinkthroughputcapacityofaUEcategory.

CalculationofUplinkUECapacity
Input

D Frame :Frameduration.

N TBB TTI :MaximumnumberoftransportblockbitsperTTI(subframe)inuplinkdefinedforaUEcategory.

N SF UL :NumberofuplinksubframesintheframeforthecellTXi(ic).Itisequalto10forFDDfrequencybands,and

Max UL
TX i ic

isdeterminedfromthecellsTDDframeconfigurationforTDDfrequencybands.

545

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

TX ic
i

N TDD SSF :NumberofTDDspecialsubframes(containingDwPTS,GP,andUpPTS)intheframeforthecellTXi(ic).Itis

equalto0forFDDfrequencybands,andisdeterminedfromthecellsTDDframeconfigurationforTDDfrequency
bands.
TX ic
i

TX ic
i

N SF UL and N TDD SSF aredeterminedasfollows:

TX i ic

TX i ic

Configuration

N SF UL

N TDD SSF

FDD

10

DSUUUDSUUU

DSUUDDSUUD

DSUDDDSUDD

DSUUUDSUUD

DSUUUDDDDD

DSUUDDDDDD

DSUDDDDDDD

Calculations
InLTE,themaximumthroughputthatcanbesupportedbyauserequipmentisdefinedthroughitsUEcategoryparameter
TransportBlockSize.ThisisthemaximumnumberoftransportblockbitsthattheUEcancarrypersubframe.
TheuplinkUEcapacityintermsofthemaximumthroughputsupportedbyaUEinuplinkiscalculatedasfollows:
TX i ic

Max
TP UE UL

Max UL
N TBB TTI

N SF UL
---------------D Frame

Themaximumtransportblocksizesdefinedbythe3GPPfordifferentUEcategoriescorrespondtothefollowingmaximum
throughputcapacitiesinFDD:
UECategory
Max UL
N TBB TTI

(bits/TTI)

Max

TP UE UL (Mbps)

5160

25456

51024

51024

75376

51024

102048

1497760

5.16

25.456

51.024

51.024

75.376

51.024

102.048

1497.760

Output

Max

TP UE UL :MaximumuplinkthroughputcapacityofaUEcategory.

6.4.6.3 ChannelThroughput,CellCapacity,AllocatedBandwidthThroughput,
andPeruserThroughputCalculation
Channelthroughputsarecalculatedforthe entire channelresourcesallocated tothe pixel,subscriber,or mobile Mi.Cell
capacitiesaresimilartochannelthroughputsbutupperboundbythemaximumdownlinkanduplinktrafficloads.Allocated
bandwidththroughputsarecalculatedforthenumberofusedfrequencyblocksinuplinkallocatedtothepixel,subscriber,or
mobile Mi. Peruser throughputs are calculated by dividing the downlink cell capacities or uplink allocated bandwidth
throughputsbytheaveragenumberofdownlinkoruplinkusersdefinedforthecell,respectively.
Input
TX i ic

TL DL Max :MaximumdownlinktrafficloadforthecellTXi(ic).

TL UL Max :MaximumuplinktrafficloadforthecellTXi(ic).

R DL

TX i ic

TX i ic

: Amount of downlink resources in the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Calculation of Total Cell Resources" on

page 537.

TX i ic

R UL

: Amount of uplink resources in the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Calculation of Total Cell Resources" on

page 537.

546

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

M
B

i
DL

:Bearerefficiency(bits/symbol)ofthebearerassignedtothepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiinthedownlinkin

"C/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(DL)"onpage 518.
M :Bearerefficiency(bits/symbol)ofthebearerassignedtothepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiintheuplinkin"C/
B

i
UL

(I+N)andBearerCalculation(UL)"onpage 532.
D Frame :Frameduration.

T AMS UL :AdaptiveMIMOswitchthresholddefinedintheLTEequipmentofthecellTXi(ic).

T AMS DL :AdaptiveMIMOswitchthresholddefinedintheLTEequipmentofthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

T MU MIMO UL :MUMIMOactivationthresholddefinedintheLTEequipmentofthecellTXi(ic).

T MU MIMO DL :MUMIMOactivationthresholddefinedintheLTEequipmentofthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

G MU MIMO UL :UplinkMUMIMOgaindefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

G MU MIMO DL :DownlinkMUMIMOgaindefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

TX ic
i
Mi

TX i ic
TX i ic

TX i ic
TX ic
i

TX ic

i
i
BLER BDL : Downlink block error rate read from the BLER vs. CINR PDSCH graph available in the LTE equipment

assignedtotheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.
M

i
i
BLER BUL :UplinkblockerrorratereadfromtheBLERvs. CINR PUSCH PUCCH graphavailableintheLTEequipment

assignedtothecellTXi(ic).
Mi

f TP Scaling :Throughputscalingfactordefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobile
Mi.
Mi

TP Offset :Throughputoffsetdefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

N FB

TX i ic

:Numberoffrequencyblocks,definedinthefrequencybandstable,forthechannelbandwidthusedbythe

cellTXi(ic).

N FB UL :Numberoffrequencyblocksusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiafteruplinkbandwidthallocationas
calculatedin"C/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(UL)"onpage 532.
TX i ic

N Users DL :NumberofusersconnectedtothecellTXi(ic)indownlink.

N Users UL :NumberofusersconnectedtothecellTXi(ic)inuplink.

TX i ic

Calculations
Downlink:
TX i ic

Mi

R DL

Mi

DL
PeakRLCChannelThroughput: CTP P DL = --------------------------------D Frame

Intheaboveformula,theactualvalueof D Frame isusedtocalculatethechannelthroughputforcoveragepredictions,

while D Frame = 1sec forMonteCarlosimulations.
TX i ic

Forproportionalfairschedulers,thechannelthroughputisincreasedbythemultiuserdiversitygain G MUG DL read

Mi

fromtheschedulerpropertiesforthebearer B DL , Mobility M i ,andthenumberofusersconnectedtothecellin

downlink.
TX i ic

R DL
Mi

M
i
B DL

TX ic

i
CTP P DL = --------------------------------- G MUG DL
D Frame

547

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

TX ic
i

Max

G MUG DL = 1 if CINR PDSCH CINR MUG

Ifthemultiuserdiversitygainfortheexactvalueofthenumberofconnectedusersisnotavailableinthegraph,itis
interpolatedfromthegainvaluesavailableforthenumbersofusersjustlessthanandjustgreaterthantheactual
numberofusers.
MIMOSUMIMOGain:
IfthecellsupportsMIMO,andaccordingtotheMidiversitymodedependingontheAMSthresholdandcriterion,the
Max M i

SUMIMOgain, G SU MIMO DL , corresponding to the bearer is applied toitsefficiency.Thegainis read fromthe

TX i ic

Mi

properties of the LTE equipment assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi for N Ant TX , N Ant RX ,
M

i
Mobility M i , BLER B DL .

Atoll also takes into account the SUMIMO Gain Factor f SU MIMO defined for the clutter class where the pixel,
subscriber,ormobileMiislocated.

Mi

B DL

Max M i

Mi

B DL

1 + f SU MIMO G SU MIMO DL 1

IftheMaxSUMIMOGainfortheexactvalueoftheC/(I+N)isnotavailableinthetable,itisinterpolatedfromthegain
valuesavailablefortheC/(I+N)justlessthanandjustgreaterthantheactualC/(I+N).
MIMOMUMIMOGain(forthroughputcoveragepredictions):
IfthecellsupportsMUMIMO,andaccordingtotheMidiversitymodedependingontheMUMIMOthresholdand
TX i ic

criterion,theMUMIMOgain, G MU MIMO DL ,isappliedtothechannelthroughput.

Mi

Mi

TX i ic

CTP P DL = CTP P DL G MU MIMO DL

M

i
i
i
EffectiveRLCChannelThroughput: CTP E DL = CTP P DL 1 BLER B DL

Mi
Mi
Mi
f TP Scaling
ApplicationChannelThroughput: CTP A DL = CTP E DL ------------------------- TP Offset
100

PeakRLCCellCapacity: Cap P DL = CTP P DL TL DL Max

i
i
i
EffectiveRLCCellCapacity: Cap E DL = Cap P DL 1 BLER B DL

Mi

Mi

TX i ic

Mi

Mi

ApplicationRLCCapacity: Cap A DL

Mi

Mi
f TP Scaling
- TP Offset
= Cap E DL -----------------------100
Mi

Mi

M
Cap P DL
i
PeakRLCThroughputperUser: PUTP P DL = ----------------------TX i ic
N Users DL
Mi

Mi

Cap E DL
= ----------------------TX i ic
N Users DL

EffectiveRLCThroughputperUser: PUTP E DL

Mi
Mi
Mi
f TP Scaling
- TP Offset
ApplicationThroughputperUser: PUTP A DL = PUTP E DL -----------------------100

548

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

CarrierAggregation:
Aggregatedthroughputsarecalculatedbysummingthethroughputsfromeachserving
celltakingpartincarrieraggregationforanyLTEApixel,subscriber,ormobile.Ifthesum
ofthethroughputsexceedsthemaximumthroughputsupportedbytheUEcategory,the
aggregatedthroughputisscaleddownbythefollowingratio:

Mi
Max
CTP P DL
Min TP UE DL

TX i ic
r = --------------------------------------------------------------------------Mi
CTP P DL

TX i ic

Uplink:
TX i ic

R UL

Mi

Mi

UL
PeakRLCChannelThroughput: CTP P UL = --------------------------------D Frame

Intheaboveformula,theactualvalueof D Frame isusedtocalculatethechannelthroughputforcoveragepredictions,

while D Frame = 1sec forMonteCarlosimulations.
TX i ic

Forproportionalfairschedulers,thechannelthroughputisincreasedbythemultiuserdiversitygain G MUG UL read

Mi

fromtheschedulerpropertiesforthebearer B UL , Mobility M i ,andthenumberofusersconnectedtothecellin

uplink.
TX i ic

R UL
Mi

Mi
B UL

TX ic

i
CTP P UL = --------------------------------- G MUG UL
D Frame
TX i ic

Mi

Max

G MUG UL = 1 if CINR PUSCH PUCCH CINR MUG

Ifthemultiuserdiversitygainfortheexactvalueofthenumberofconnectedusersisnotavailableinthegraph,itis
interpolatedfromthegainvaluesavailableforthenumbersofusersjustlessthanandjustgreaterthantheactual
numberofusers.
MIMOSUMIMOGain:
IfthecellsupportsMIMO,andaccordingtotheMidiversitymodedependingontheAMSthresholdandcriterion,the
Max TX ic
i

SUMIMOgain, G SU MIMO UL , corresponding tothebearer isappliedto itsefficiency.Thegainis readfrom the

M

TX ic

i
i
i
propertiesoftheLTEequipmentassignedtotheTXi(ic)for N Ant RX , N Ant TX , Mobility M i , BLER B UL .

Atoll also takes into account the SUMIMO Gain Factor f SU MIMO defined for the clutter class where the pixel,
subscriber,ormobileMiislocated.

Mi

B UL

Max TX ic

Mi

B UL

i
1 + f SU MIMO G SU MIMO UL 1

IftheMaxSUMIMOGainfortheexactvalueoftheC/(I+N)isnotavailableinthetable,itisinterpolatedfromthegain
valuesavailablefortheC/(I+N)justlessthanandjustgreaterthantheactualC/(I+N).
MIMOMUMIMOGain(forthroughputcoveragepredictions):
IfthecellsupportsMUMIMO,andaccordingtotheMidiversitymodedependingontheMUMIMOthresholdand
TX i ic

criterion,theMUMIMOgain, G MU MIMO UL ,isappliedtothechannelthroughput.

Mi

Mi

TX i ic

CTP P UL = CTP P UL G MU MIMO UL

549

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

i
i
i
EffectiveRLCChannelThroughput: CTP E UL = CTP P UL 1 BLER B UL
M

PeakRLCCellCapacity: Cap P UL = CTP P UL TL UL Max

i
i
i
EffectiveRLCCellCapacity: Cap E UL = Cap P UL 1 BLER B UL

i
CTP E UL

M
f TP Scaling
i
- TP Offset
-----------------------100

i
ApplicationChannelThroughput: CTP A UL

TX ic
i

Mi

ApplicationCellCapacity: Cap A UL

Mi
f TP Scaling
- TP Offset
= Cap E UL -----------------------100
Mi

Mi

i
i
i
EffectiveRLCAllocatedBandwidthThroughput: ABTPE UL = ABTPP UL 1 BLER B UL

i
CTP P UL

N FB UL
----------------TX i ic
N FB

i
PeakRLCAllocatedBandwidthThroughput: ABTP P UL

Mi

ApplicationAllocatedBandwidthThroughput: ABTP A UL
Mi

PeakRLCThroughputperUser: PUTP P UL

Mi

Mi
f TP Scaling
- TP Offset
= ABTPE UL -----------------------100
Mi

Cap Mi

M
P UL
- ABTP P i UL
= Min ---------------------- TXi ic

N Users UL

Mi

EffectiveRLCThroughputperUser: PUTP E UL

Mi

ApplicationThroughputperUser: PUTP A UL

Cap Mi

M
E UL
- ABTP E i UL
= Min ---------------------- TXi ic

N Users UL

Mi

Mi
f TP Scaling
- TP Offset
= PUTP E UL -----------------------100
Mi

CarrierAggregation:
Aggregatedthroughputsarecalculatedbysummingthethroughputsfromeachserving
celltakingpartincarrieraggregationforanyLTEApixel,subscriber,ormobile.Ifthesum
ofthethroughputsexceedsthemaximumthroughputsupportedbytheUEcategory,the
aggregatedthroughputisscaleddownbythefollowingratio:

M
Max
i
CTP P UL
Min TP UE UL

TX i ic
r = --------------------------------------------------------------------------M
i
CTP P UL

TX i ic

Output

550

Mi

CTP P DL :DownlinkpeakRLCchannelthroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

CTP E DL :DownlinkeffectiveRLCchannelthroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

CTP A DL :Downlinkapplicationchannelthroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Cap P DL :DownlinkpeakRLCcellcapacityatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Cap E DL :DownlinkeffectiveRLCcellcapacityatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Cap A DL :Downlinkapplicationcellcapacityatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

PUTP P DL :DownlinkpeakRLCthroughputperuseratthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

PUTP E DL :DownlinkeffectiveRLCthroughputperuseratthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Mi
Mi

Mi
Mi
Mi

Mi
Mi

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
M

PUTP A DL :Downlinkapplicationthroughputperuseratthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

CTP P UL :UplinkpeakRLCchannelthroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

CTP E UL :UplinkeffectiveRLCchannelthroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

CTP A UL :Uplinkapplicationchannelthroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Cap P UL :UplinkpeakRLCcellcapacityatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Cap E UL :UplinkeffectiveRLCcellcapacityatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Cap A UL :Uplinkapplicationcellcapacityatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

ABTPP UL :UplinkpeakRLCallocatedbandwidththroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

ABTPE UL :UplinkeffectiveRLCallocatedbandwidththroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

ABTPA UL :Uplinkapplicationallocatedbandwidththroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

PUTP P UL :UplinkpeakRLCthroughputperuseratthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

PUTP E UL :UplinkeffectiveRLCthroughputperuseratthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

PUTP A UL :Uplinkapplicationthroughputperuseratthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

M
M

i
i

Mi

Mi
Mi
Mi

Mi
Mi
Mi

Mi
Mi
Mi

6.4.7 SchedulingandRadioResourceManagement
AtollLTEmoduleincludesanumberofschedulingmethodswhichcanbeusedforschedulingandradioresourceallocation
during Monte Carlo simulations. These resource allocation algorithms are explained in "Scheduling and Radio Resource
Allocation"onpage 551andthecalculationofuserthroughputsisexplainedin"UserThroughputCalculation"onpage 561.

6.4.7.1 SchedulingandRadioResourceAllocation
Input
TX i ic

TL DL Max :MaximumdownlinktrafficloadforthecellTXi(ic).

TL UL Max :MaximumuplinktrafficloadforthecellTXi(ic).

N Users Max :MaximumnumberofusersdefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

p QCI :QCIpriorityoftheserviceaccessedbyamobileMi.

p Service :UserdefinedpriorityoftheserviceaccessedbyamobileMi.

TPD Min DL :DownlinkminimumthroughputdemandfortheserviceaccessedbyamobileMi.

TPD Min UL :UplinkminimumthroughputdemandfortheserviceaccessedbyamobileMi.

TPD Max DL :DownlinkmaximumthroughputdemandfortheserviceaccessedbyamobileMi.

TPD Max UL :UplinkmaximumthroughputdemandfortheserviceaccessedbyamobileMi.

Calculation(DL)"onpage 518.
M :Bearerefficiency(bits/symbol)ofthebearerassignedtothemobileMiintheuplinkin"C/(I+N)andBearer

Calculation(UL)"onpage 532.
:Bearerefficiency(bits/symbol)ofthehighestbeareroftheservicebeingusedbythemobileMiinthe
M

TX i ic

TX ic
i

Mi
Mi

Mi
Mi
M

Mi

Mi
B DL

:Bearerefficiency(bits/symbol)ofthebearerassignedtothemobileMiinthedownlinkin"C/(I+N)andBearer

i
B UL

i
DL Highest

downlink.

551

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

M
B

i
UL Highest

:Bearerefficiency(bits/symbol)ofthehighestbeareroftheservicebeingusedbythemobileMiinthe

uplink.

TX ic

i
i
BLER B DL : Downlink block error rate read from the BLER vs. CINR PDSCH graph available in the LTE equipment

assignedtotheterminalusedbythemobileMi.

i
i
BLER B UL :UplinkblockerrorratereadfromtheBLERvs. CINR PUSCH PUCCH graphavailableintheLTEequipment

assignedtothecellTXi(ic).
M

f TP Scaling :ThroughputscalingfactordefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythemobileMi.

TP Offset :ThroughputoffsetdefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythemobileMi.

CTP P DL : Downlink peak RLC channel throughput at the mobile Mi as calculated in "Throughput Calculation" on

Mi

Mi

page 537.

Mi

CTP E DL :DownlinkeffectiveRLCchannelthroughputatthemobileMiascalculatedin"ThroughputCalculation"on
page 537.

Mi

CTP P UL : Uplink peak RLC channel throughput at the mobile Mi as calculated in "Throughput Calculation" on
page 537.

CTP E UL :UplinkeffectiveRLCchannelthroughputatthemobileMi ascalculatedin"ThroughputCalculation"on

page 537.

ABTP P UL : Uplink peak RLC allocated bandwidth throughput at the mobile Mi as calculated in "Throughput
Calculation"onpage 537.

Mi

ABTP E UL : Uplink effective RLC allocated bandwidth throughput at the mobile Mi as calculated in "Throughput
Calculation"onpage 537.

Max

TP UE DL :MaximumdownlinkthroughputcapacityoftheUEcategoryofthemobileMiascalculatedin"Calculation
ofDownlinkUECapacity"onpage 545.

Max

TP UE UL :MaximumuplinkthroughputcapacityoftheUEcategoryofthemobileMiascalculatedin"Calculationof
UplinkUECapacity"onpage 545.

Calculations
ThefollowingcalculationsaredescribedforanycellTXi(ic)containingtheusersMiforwhichitisthebestserver.
MobileSelection:
TX i ic

Theschedulerselects N Users mobilesfortheschedulingandRRMprocess.IftheMonteCarlouserdistributionhasgenerated

TX i ic

anumberofuserswhichislessthan N Users Max ,theschedulerkeepsallthemobilesgeneratedforthecellTXi(ic).

TX ic

TX ic

TX ic

i
i
i
N Users = Min N Users Max N Users Generated

Sel

Foracell,mobiles M i

TX i ic

N Users areselectedforRRMbythescheduler.

CalculationofActualMinimumandMaximumThroughputDemands:
Iftheservicemaximumthroughputdemanddowngradingisactive(formoreinformation,seetheAdministratorManual),the
maximumthroughputdemandofeachuserwillbedowngradedasfollows:
Sel
Mi

Downlink: TPD Max DL

552

Sel

Mi
Sel
Sel

Mi
Mi
B DL

= Max TPD Min DL TPD Max DL ------------------------------

Sel

Mi
B

DL Highest

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Sel
i
Uplink: TPD Max UL
M

Sel

M
Sel
Sel
i

M
M
B
i
i
UL

= Max TPD Min UL TPD Max UL -------------------------------

Sel

M
i
B

UL Highest

Then,dependingontheselectedtargetthroughputoftheschedulerassignedtothecellTXi(ic),theactualminimumand
maximumthroughputdemandscanbeconsideredasthepeakRLC,effectiveRLC,orapplicationthroughput.Therefore:

TargetThroughput=PeakRLCThroughput
Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Downlink: TPD Min DL , TPD Max DL

Sel

Sel

Mi
Mi
Mi

Uplink: TPD Min UL , Min TPD Max UL ABTPP UL

TargetThroughput=EffectiveRLCThroughput
Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Downlink: TPD Min DL

Sel
Mi

Sel

Mi
TPD Min DL
TPD Max DL
= --------------------------------------------- , TPD Max DL = --------------------------------------------Sel
Sel

Mi

Mi
1 BLER BDL
1 BLER B DL

Sel

Sel
Mi
Uplink: TPD Min UL

Sel
Mi

TPD Min UL
= --------------------------------------------Sel

Mi
1 BLER BUL

Sel
Mi
, TPD Max UL

M
M

i
i
Min TPD Max UL ABTP P UL

= ------------------------------------------------------------------------Sel

Mi
1 BLER B UL

TargetThroughput=ApplicationThroughput
Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Mi

Sel

Sel
Mi

Mi

Mi
TPD Min DL + TP Offset
TPD Max DL + TP Offset
Downlink: TPD Min DL = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- , TPD Max DL = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Sel
Sel

Mi Mi

Mi Mi
1 BLER BDL f TP Scaling
1 BLER B DL f TP Scaling

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Mi

TPD Min UL + TP Offset

-,
Uplink: TPD Min UL = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Sel

Mi Mi
1 BLER BUL f TP Scaling

Sel
M
M
M

i
i
i
Min TPD Max UL ABTP P UL + TP Offset
Sel
Mi

TPD MaxUL = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Sel

Mi Mi
1 BLER B UL f TP Scaling

TheMin()functionselectsthelowerofthetwovalues.Thiscalculationisperformedinordertolimitthemaximumuplink
throughputdemandtothemaximumthroughputthatausercangetinuplinkusingtheallocatedbandwidth(numberof
frequencyblocks)calculatedforitin"C/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(UL)"onpage 532.
ResourceAllocationforMinimumThroughputDemands:

553

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

For their minimum throughput demands, LTEA users are only scheduled on their
primaryservingcells.

Sel

1. Atollsortsthe M i

Sel
Mi

TX i ic

Sel
Mi

N Users inorderofdecreasingeffectiveservicepriority(combinationof p QCI and p Service ).

ThemobilesaresortedfirstintheorderofdecreasingQCIpriority(aslistedinthetablebelow)andthenintheorder
ofdecreasinguserdefinedserviceprioritywithinaQCI.Forexample:
QoSclassidentifier

QCIpriority

Sel

Mi

Sel
Mi

p QCI

0
2

0
3

i
:

Sel

i
:

= 1 upto M i

:
:

Sel

2
:

2. Startingwith M i

Sel
Mi

p Service

NULL

0
TX ic
i

= N Users ,Atollallocatesthedownlinkanduplinkresourcesrequiredtosatisfy

eachusersminimumthroughputdemandsindownlinkanduplinkasfollows:

554

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Sel
i
R Min DL
M

Sel
i

Sel

Sel
i

M
TPD Min DL
TPD Min UL
i
= -------------------------- and R Min UL = -------------------------M

Sel
i

CTP P DL

Sel
i

CTP P UL

3. Atollstopstheresourceallocationindownlinkoruplink,

When/Ifindownlink

Sel
Mi

TX i ic

R Min DL = TL DL Max ,i.e.,theresourcesavailableindownlinkhavebeenusedupfor

Sel
Mi

satisfyingtheminimumthroughputdemandsofthemobiles.

When/If in uplink

Sel
Mi

TX i ic

R Min UL = TL UL Max , i.e., the resources available in uplink have been used up for

Sel
Mi

satisfyingtheminimumthroughputdemandsofthemobiles.
4. MobileswhichareactiveDL+ULmustbeabletogettheirminimumthroughputdemandsinbothULandDLinorder
tobeconsideredconnectedDL+UL.IfanactiveDL+ULmobileisonlyabletogetitsminimumthroughputdemandin
onedirection,itisrejected,andtheresourcesthatwereallocatedtoitintheonedirectioninwhichitwasabletoget
athroughputareallocatedtoothermobiles.
Sel

Max

Mi
TP UE DL
- or
5. Mobiles with minimum throughput demands higher than their UE capacities, i.e., R Min DL -------------------Sel
Mi

CTP P DL
Sel

Max

Mi
TP UE UL
- ,arerejectedduetoNoService.
R Min UL -------------------Sel
Mi

CTP P UL
6. Mobiles which are active UL and whose minimum throughput demand in UL is higher than the uplink allocated
Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

bandwidththroughput( TPD Min UL ABTP P UL )arerejectedduetoResourceSaturation.

7. If

Sel
Mi

TX i ic

Sel
i

Sel
Mi

R Min DL TL DL Max or

TX i ic

R Min UL TL UL Max ,andalltheminimumthroughputresourcesdemandedby

Sel
i

the mobiles have been allocated, Atoll goes to the next step for allocating resources to satisfy the maximum
throughputdemands.
BackhaulSaturation:
Ifatthisstage,asitesdownlinkoruplinkeffectiveRLCaggregatethroughputexceedsitsmaximumdownlinkoruplinkS1
interfacethroughput,respectively,mobilesarerejectedonebyoneduetoBackhaulSaturation,startingfromthemobilewith
thelowestpriorityservice,amongallthecellsofthesiteinordertoreachadownlinkoruplinkeffectiveRLCaggregatesite
throughputthesitesmaximumdownlinkoruplinkS1interfacethroughput.
ResourceAllocationforMaximumThroughputDemands:
Foreachcell,theremainingcellresourcesavailableare:
TX i ic

TX i ic

Downlink: R Rem DL = TL DL Max

Sel
Mi

R Min DL

Sel
Mi
TX i ic

TX i ic

Uplink: R Rem UL = TL UL Max

Sel
Mi

R Min UL

Sel
Mi

Foreachmobile,theremainingthroughputdemandsareeitherthemaximumUEcapacitiesorthedifferencebetweenthe
maximumandtheminimumthroughputdemands,whicheverissmaller:
Sel

Sel

Sel

Mi
Mi
Mi

Max
Downlink: TPD Rem DL = Min TPD Max DL TPD Min DL TP UE DL

Sel
Mi

Uplink: TPD Rem UL

Sel

Sel

Mi
Mi

Max
= Min TPDMax UL TPD Min UL TP UE UL

555

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

Fortheirmaximumthroughputdemands,LTEAusersarescheduledseparatelyoneachoftheirservingcells,primaryand
M

Sel
i

Sel
i

secondary.Eachusersremainingthroughputdemand( TPD Rem DL and TPD Rem UL )isdistributedovereachofitsserving

cellsproportionallytotheresourcesavailableoneachservingcellandtotheusersdownlinkeffectiveRLCchannelthroughput
oruplinkeffectiveRLCallocatedbandwidththroughputoneachofitsservingcell:
Sel
Mi

Downlink: TPD Rem DL

TX i ic

Servern

Mi

R Rem DL
CTP E DL
Servern
Servern
= TPD Rem DL -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5
Sel
Mi

TX ic
i

RRem DL Servern CTPE DL Servern

i

n=1
Sel
i
Uplink: TPD Rem UL
Servern
M

Sel
i
TPD Rem UL
M

TX i ic

Mi

R Rem UL
ABTP E UL
Servern
Servern
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5
TX ic

R i
Rem UL

Mi

Servern

ABTP E UL

Servern

n=1

YoucanaddanoptionintheAtoll.inifiletohaveeachusersremainingthroughputdemanddistributedovereachofitsserving
cellsproportionallyonlytotheresourcesavailableoneachservingcell:
Sel
Mi

Downlink: TPD Rem DL

TX i ic

Sel
Mi

Servern

R Rem DL
Servern
= TPD Rem DL ----------------------------------------------------5
TX i ic

RRem DL Servern
n=1

Sel
Mi

Uplink: TPD Rem UL

TX i ic

Sel
Mi

R Rem UL
Servern
= TPD Rem UL ----------------------------------------------------5

Servern

TX i ic

RRem UL Servern
n=1

Formoreinformation,seetheAdministratorManual.
Withineachservingcell,resourceallocationforthemaximumthroughputdemandsiscarriedoutaccordingtothescheduler
usedbythatparticularcell.Fortheremainingthroughputdemandsofthemobiles,thefollowingresourceallocationmethods
areavailable:

ProportionalFair:
Thegoalofthisschedulingmethodistodistributeresourcesamongusersfairlyinsuchawaythat,ontheaverage,
eachusergetsthehighestpossiblethroughputthatitcangetundertheradioconditionsatitslocation.
Sel

Letthetotalnumberofusersbe N M i

.
TX i ic

TX i ic

a. Eachuserschannelthroughputisincreasedbythemultiuserdiversitygain G MUG DL or G MUG UL readfromthe

Sel
Mi

schedulerpropertiesforthedownlinkoruplinkbearer( B DL
Sel

Mi

Sel
Mi

Sel

or B UL ), Mobility M i assignedtomobile

,andthenumberofconnectedusers,DLorUL,inthecellTXi(ic)intheiterationk1.

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

CTP P DL = CTP P DL
TX ic
i

Sel
Mi

TX i ic

WithoutMUG
M

Sel
i

Sel
Mi

G MUG DL and CTP P UL = CTP P UL

Max

TX ic
i

TX i ic

WithoutMUG

Sel
i

G MUG UL
Max

G MUG DL = 1 if CINR PDSCH CINR MUG and G MUG UL = 1 if CINR PUSCH PUCCH CINR MUG .
Ifthemultiuserdiversitygainfortheexactvalueofthenumberofconnectedusersisnotavailableinthegraph,
itisinterpolatedfromthegainvaluesavailableforthenumbersofusersjustlessthanandjustgreaterthanthe
actualnumberofusers.
b. Atolldividestheremainingresourcesinthecellintoequalpartsforeachuser:
TX i ic

TX i ic

R Rem DL
R Rem UL
--------------------- and -------------------N
N

556

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

c. Atoll converts the remaining throughput demands of all the users to their respective remaining resource
demands:
Sel
i
RD Rem DL
M

Sel
i

Sel

Sel
i

M
TPD Rem DL
TPD Rem UL
i
= --------------------------- and RD Rem UL = --------------------------M

Sel
i

CTP P DL

Sel
i

CTP P UL

Remainingresourcedemandsofauseraregivenbytheratiobetweenitsremainingthroughputdemandsandthe
peakchannelthroughputsattheuserslocation.
d. The resources allocated to each user by the Proportional Fair scheduling method for satisfying its maximum
throughputdemandsare:
Sel

TX i ic

Sel

Sel

Sel

TX i ic

M
M
Mi
Mi
R Rem DL
R Rem UL
i
i
- and R Max
R Max DL = Min RD Rem DL ------------------- UL = Min RD Rem UL ---------------------
N
N

Eachusergetseithertheresourcesitneedstoachieveitsmaximumthroughputdemandsoranequalsharefrom
theremainingresourcesofthecell,whicheverissmaller.
e. Atollstopstheresourceallocationindownlinkoruplink,

When/Ifindownlink

Sel
Mi

TX i ic

R Max DL = R Rem DL ,i.e.,theresourcesavailableindownlinkhavebeenusedup

Sel
i

forsatisfyingthemaximumthroughputdemandsofthemobiles.

When/If in uplink

Sel
Mi

TX i ic

R Max UL = R Rem UL , i.e., the resources available in uplink have been used up for

Sel
Mi

satisfyingthemaximumthroughputdemandsofthemobiles.
f. Iftheresourcesallocatedtoausersatisfyitsmaximumthroughputdemands,thisuserisremovedfromthelistof
remainingusers.
g. Atollrecalculatestheremainingresourcesasfollows:
TX ic
i

TX ic
i

R Rem DL = TL DL Max

Sel
i

R Min DL

Sel
Mi
TX i ic

TX i ic

R Rem UL = TL UL Max

Sel
i

R Max DL and

Sel
Mi
Sel
Mi

R Min UL

Sel
i

Sel
Mi

R Max UL

Sel
i

h. Atollrepeatsthealltheabovestepsfortheuserswhosemaximumthroughputdemandshavenotbeensatisfied
TX i ic

TX i ic

untileither R Rem DL = 0 and R Rem UL = 0 ,orallthemaximumthroughputdemandsaresatisfied.

RoundRobin:
Thegoalofthisschedulingmethodistoallocateequalresourcestousersfairly.
Sel

Letthetotalnumberofusersbe N M i

a. Atolldividestheremainingresourcesinthecellintoequalpartsforeachuser:
TX i ic

TX i ic

R Rem DL
R Rem UL
--------------------- and -------------------N
N
b. Atoll converts the remaining throughput demands of all the users to their respective remaining resource
demands:
Sel
Mi

RD Rem DL

Sel
i

Sel

Sel
i

Mi
TPD Rem DL
TPD Rem UL
= --------------------------- and RD Rem UL = --------------------------M

Sel
i

CTP P DL

Sel
i

CTP P UL

Remainingresourcedemandsofauseraregivenbytheratiobetweenitsremainingthroughputdemandsandthe
peakchannelthroughputsattheuserslocation.

557

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

c. The resources allocated to each user by the Round Robin scheduling method for satisfying its maximum
throughputdemandsare:
Sel
i
R Max DL
M

TX ic
i

Sel

Sel

Sel

TX ic
i

M
Mi
Mi
R Rem DL
R Rem UL
i
- and R Max
= Min RD Rem DL ------------------- UL = Min RD Rem UL ---------------------
N
N

Eachusergetseithertheresourcesitneedstoachieveitsmaximumthroughputdemandsoranequalsharefrom
theremainingresourcesofthecell,whicheverissmaller.
d. Atollstopstheresourceallocationindownlinkoruplink,

When/Ifindownlink

Sel
i

TX ic
i

R Max DL = R Rem DL ,i.e.,theresourcesavailableindownlinkhavebeenusedup

Sel
Mi

forsatisfyingthemaximumthroughputdemandsofthemobiles.

When/If in uplink

Sel
Mi

TX i ic

R Max UL = R Rem UL , i.e., the resources available in uplink have been used up for

Sel
Mi

satisfyingthemaximumthroughputdemandsofthemobiles.
e. Iftheresourcesallocatedtoausersatisfyitsmaximumthroughputdemands,thisuserisremovedfromthelistof
remainingusers.
f. Atollrecalculatestheremainingresourcesasfollows:
TX i ic

TX i ic

R Rem DL = TL DL Max

Sel
Mi

R Min DL

Sel
Mi
TX ic
i

TX ic
i

R Rem UL = TL UL Max

Sel
Mi

R Max DL and

Sel
Mi
M

Sel
i

R Min UL

Sel
Mi

Sel
i

R Max UL

Sel
Mi

g. Atollrepeatsthealltheabovestepsfortheuserswhosemaximumthroughputdemandshavenotbeensatisfied
TX i ic

TX i ic

untileither R Rem DL = 0 and R Rem UL = 0 ,orallthemaximumthroughputdemandsaresatisfied.

ProportionalDemand:
Thegoalofthisschedulingmethodistoallocateresourcestousersweightedaccordingtotheirremainingthroughput
demands.Therefore,theuserthroughputsforuserswithhighthroughputdemandswillbehigherthanthosewithlow
throughputdemands.Inotherwords,thisschedulerdistributeschannelthroughputbetweenusersproportionallyto
theirdemands.
a. Atoll converts the remaining throughput demands of all the users to their respective remaining resource
demands:
Sel
Mi

RD Rem DL

Sel
Mi

Sel

Sel
Mi

Mi
TPD Rem DL
TPD Rem UL
= --------------------------- and RD Rem UL = --------------------------Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

CTP P DL

CTP P UL

Remainingresourcedemandsofauseraregivenbytheratiobetweenitsremainingthroughputdemandsandthe
peakchannelthroughputsattheuserslocation.
b. Atollcalculatestheamountofeffectiveremainingresourcesofthecelltodistributeamongtheusersasfollows:
TX i ic

R Eff Rem DL

Sel
Sel
Mi
TX i ic
Mi
TX i ic

TXi ic

RD Rem DL and R Eff Rem UL = Min R Rem UL

RD Rem UL
= Min R Rem DL

Sel
Sel

Mi
Mi

c. TheresourcesallocatedtoeachuserbytheProportionalDemandschedulingmethodforsatisfyingitsmaximum
throughputdemandsare:

558

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Sel
i
R Max DL
M

TX ic
i
R Eff Rem DL

Sel
i

Sel

RDRem DL

Sel
i

M
TX ic
RD Rem DL
RD Rem UL
i
i
- and R Max
--------------------------------- UL = R Eff Rem UL ---------------------------------Sel
Sel

RDRem UL

Sel
i

Sel
i

MaxC/I:
Thegoalofthisschedulingmethodistoachievethemaximumaggregatethroughputforthecells.Thisisdoneby
allocatingasmuchresourcesasneededtomobileswithhighC/(I+N)conditions.AsmobileswithhighC/(I+N)canget
higherbearers,andthereforerequirelessamountofresources,moremobilescanthereforebeallocatedresources
inthesameframe,andtheendthroughputforeachcellwillbethehighestcomparedtoothertypesofschedulers.
Sel

a. Atollsortsthe M i

TX i ic

N Users inorderofdecreasingPDSCH,orPUSCHandPUCCHC/(I+N),dependingonwhether

theallocationisbeingperformedforthedownlinkorfortheuplink.
b. Starting with the mobile with the highest rank, Atoll allocates the downlink and uplink resources required to
satisfyeachusersremainingthroughputdemandsindownlinkanduplinkasfollows:
Sel
Mi

R Max DL

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Sel

Mi
TPD Rem DL
TPD Rem UL
= --------------------------- and R Max UL = --------------------------Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

CTP P DL

CTP P UL

c. Atollstopstheresourceallocationindownlinkoruplink,

When/Ifindownlink

Sel
Mi

TX i ic

R Max DL = R Rem DL ,i.e.,theresourcesavailableindownlinkhavebeenusedup

Sel
i

forsatisfyingthemaximumthroughputdemandsofthemobiles.

When/If in uplink

Sel
Mi

TX i ic

RMax UL

= R Rem UL , i.e., the resources available in uplink have been used up for

Sel
Mi

satisfyingthemaximumthroughputdemandsofthemobiles.
SpatialMultiplexingwithMultiUserMIMO:
MUMIMOletsthesystem/schedulerworkwithtwoparallelLTEframes(1foreachantenna).Therefore,amobileconnected
toantenna1createsacorrespondingresourceavailabilityonantenna2.Thisresourcesmadeavailableonantenna2canthen
beassignedtoanothermobilewithoutany effectonthe overallloadofthe cell.Whenthesecondmobile isassignedto
antenna2,theresourcesallocatedtoitoverlapwiththeresourcesmadeavailablebythefirstmobileonantenna1.Ifthe
second mobile is allocated more resources than the first one made available, the second mobile will create resource
availabilityonantenna1.Eachnewmobileiseitherconnectedtoantenna1orantenna2.Thepartofthemobilesresources
which are not coupled with resources allocated to another mobile on the other antenna is called the real resource
consumption.Thepartofthemobilesresourceswhicharecoupledwiththeresourcesallocatedtoanothermobileonthe
otherantennaiscalledthevirtualresourceconsumption.
MUMIMOcanbeusedifthecellsupportsMUMIMO,ifthecalculatedvaluefortheMUMIMOcriterionishigherthanthe
TX i ic

TX i ic

MUMIMOactivationthreshold T MU MIMO DL or T MU MIMO UL ,andthenumberofantennaportsisequalto2ormore.

Thefollowingappliestobothdownlinkanduplink,withiastheindexofconnectedMUMIMOmobiles: i = 1toN DL for
downlinkand i = 1toN UL foruplink
MU MIMO

Eachmobile M i

hasacorrespondingtrafficload TL

MU MIMO
Mi = 0

RR
= 100% andavailablevirtualresources V
beenscheduled.
MU MIMO

Thevirtualresourceconsumptionofamobile M i

MU MIMO

Therealresourceconsumptionofamobile M i

MU MIMO
Mi

MU MIMO
Mi = 0

.Theschedulingstartswithavailablerealresources
= 0% . i = 0 meansnoMUMIMOmobilehasyet

isgivenby: VC

isgivenby: RC

MU MIMO
Mi

MU MIMO
i

MU MIMO

Mi
= Min TL

= TL

MU MIMO
i

VC

MU MIMO
Mi 1

MU MIMO
i

559

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014
MU MIMO

Thevirtualresourcesmadeavailablebythemobile M i
V

MU MIMO
i

= V

MU MIMO
i1

Saturationoccurswhen

VC

MU MIMO
i

MU MIMO UL
i

RC UL

+ RC

aregivenby:

MU MIMO
i

TX ic
i

= TL UL Max or

MU MIMO DL
i

RC DL

TX ic
i

= TL DL Max .

Thefollowingtablegivesanexample:
Mobile

TL

MU MIMO
Mi

(%)

VC

MU MIMO
Mi

(%)

RC

MU MIMO
Mi

(%)

MU MIMO
Mi

M1

10

10

10

M2

M3

20

15

15

M4

40

15

25

25

(%)

BackhaulCapacityLimitation:
Backhauloverflowratiosarecalculatedforeachsiteasfollows:
Sel
Sel

Mi
Mi

R Max DL CTP E DL

Sel

M
Site
i
= Max 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ and
Sel
Sel
Mi
Mi

Site
R Min DL CTP E DL
TP S1 DL

Sel

M
Site
i

Site

BHOF DL

Sel
Sel

Mi
Mi

R Max UL CTP E UL

Sel

M
Site
i

= Max 1 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Sel
Sel
Mi
Mi

Site
R Min UL CTP E UL
TP S1 UL

Sel

M
Site
i

Site

BHOF UL

TotalAmountofResourcesAssignedtoEachSelectedMobile:
Sel

Atollcalculatestheamountsofdownlinkanduplinkresourcesallocatedtoeachindividualmobile M i

(whichcanalsobe

referredtoasthetrafficloadsofthemobiles)asfollows:
Sel

Sel
Mi

Downlink: TL DL

Sel
Mi

= R DL

Sel
i

Sel
i

Mi
Mi
Max DL CTP P DL
R Min DL CTP P DL + -----------------------------------------------Site

BHOF DL

= -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Sel

Sel
Mi

CTP P DL
Sel

Sel
Mi

Uplink: TL UL

Sel
Mi

= R UL

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Mi
Mi
Max UL CTP P UL
R Min UL CTP P UL + -----------------------------------------------Site

BHOF UL

= -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Sel

Sel
i

CTP P UL
Output

560

Sel
Mi

TL DL

TL UL

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

= R DL

Sel
Mi

Sel

:Downlinktrafficloadortheamountofdownlinkresourcesallocatedtothemobile M i
Sel

= R UL :Uplinktrafficloadortheamountofuplinkresourcesallocatedtothemobile M i

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

6.4.7.2 UserThroughputCalculation
UserthroughputsarecalculatedforthepercentageofresourcesallocatedtoeachmobileselectedbytheschedulingforRRM
Sel

duringtheMonteCarlosimulations, M i

CarrierAggregation:
Aggregatedthroughputsarecalculatedbysummingthethroughputsfromeachserving
cell taking part in carrier aggregation for any LTEA mobile, limited by the maximum
throughputsupportedbytheUEcategory.
Input

Sel
Mi

R DL

Sel

:Amountofdownlinkresourcesallocatedtothemobile M i

ascalculatedin"SchedulingandRadioResource

Allocation"onpage 551.

Sel
Mi

Sel

R UL :Amountofuplinkresourcesallocatedtothemobile M i

ascalculatedin"SchedulingandRadioResource

Allocation"onpage 551.

Sel
Mi

Sel

CTP P DL :DownlinkpeakRLCchannelthroughputatthemobile M i

ascalculatedin"ThroughputCalculation"on

page 537.

Sel
Mi

Sel

CTP P UL : Uplink peak RLC channel throughput at the mobile M i

as calculated in "Throughput Calculation" on

page 537.
Sel

TX i ic
Mi
BLER BDL :DownlinkblockerrorratereadfromtheBLERvs. CINR PDSCH graphavailableintheLTEequipment

Sel

assignedtotheterminalusedbythemobile M i

Sel

Mi
Mi
BLER BUL :UplinkblockerrorratereadfromtheBLERvs. CINR PUSCH PUCCH graphavailableintheLTEequipment

assignedtothecellTXi(ic).
M

Sel
i

Sel

f TP Scaling :Throughputscalingfactordefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythemobile M i

Sel
Mi
TP Offset

Sel

:Throughputoffsetdefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythemobile M i

Calculations
Downlink:
M

Sel
i

Sel
i

Sel
i

CTP P DL

PeakRLCUserThroughput: UTP P DL = R DL

Mi
Mi
Mi

EffectiveRLCUserThroughput: UTP E DL = UTP P DL 1 BLER B DL

Sel

Sel
Mi

ApplicationUserThroughput: UTP A DL

Sel

Sel

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Sel

Mi
f TP Scaling
- TP Offset
= UTP E DL -----------------------100

Uplink:
Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

CTP P UL

PeakRLCUserThroughput: UTP P UL = R UL

Mi
Mi

Mi
EffectiveRLCUserThroughput: UTP E UL = UTP P UL 1 BLER B UL

Sel

Sel
Mi

ApplicationUserThroughput: UTP A UL

Sel

Sel
Mi

Sel

Sel
i

Sel

Mi
f TP Scaling
- TP Offset
= UTP E UL -----------------------100

561

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

Output
M

Sel
i

Sel
i

Sel

UTP P DL :DownlinkpeakRLCuserthroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobile M i

UTP E DL :DownlinkeffectiveRLCuserthroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobile M i

Sel
Mi
UTP A DL

UTP P UL :UplinkpeakRLCuserthroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobile M i

UTP E UL :UplinkeffectiveRLCuserthroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobile M i

Sel
Mi
UTP A UL

.
Sel

Sel

:Downlinkapplicationuserthroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobile M i

Sel
Mi

Sel

Sel
Mi

.
Sel

Sel

:Uplinkapplicationuserthroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobile M i

6.5 AutomaticPlanningAlgorithms
Thefollowingsectionsdescribethealgorithmsfor:

"AutomaticNeighbourPlanning"onpage 562.
"AutomaticIntertechnologyNeighbourPlanning"onpage 566.
"AutomaticFrequencyPlanningUsingtheAFP"onpage 569.
"AutomaticPhysicalCellIDPlanningUsingtheAFP"onpage 571.

6.5.1 AutomaticNeighbourPlanning
TheintratechnologyneighbourplanningalgorithmtakesintoaccountthecellsofalltheTBCtransmitters.Itmeansthatthe
cellsofalltheTBCtransmittersofyourATLdocumentarepotentialneighbours.
ThecellstobeallocatedwillbecalledTBAcells.Theymustfulfilthefollowingconditions:

Theyareactive,
TheysatisfythefiltercriteriaappliedtotheTransmittersfolder,
Theyarelocatedinsidethefocuszone,
Theybelongtothefolderonwhichallocationhasbeenexecuted.ThiscanbetheTransmittersfolderoragroupof
transmitters(subfolder).

OnlyTBAcellsareassignedneighbours.
IfnofocuszoneexistsintheATLdocument,Atolltakesintoaccountthecomputation
zone.

WeassumeareferencecellTXi(ic)andacandidateneighbourcellTXj(jc).Whenautomaticallocationstarts,Atollchecksthe
followingconditions:
1. Thedistancebetweenbothcellsmustbelessthantheuserdefinablemaximumintersitedistance.Ifthedistance
betweenthereferencecellandthecandidateneighbourisgreaterthanthisvalue,thenthecandidateneighbouris
discarded.
Atollcalculatestheeffectivedistancebetweenthereferencecellanditscandidateneighbourfromtherealdistance
betweenthemandtheazimuthsoftheirantennas:
Dist CellA CellB = D 1 + x cos x cos
Wherex=0.3%sothatthemaximumvariationinDdoesnottoexceed1%.Disstatedinm.

562

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Figure 6.3:InterTransmitterDistanceCalculation
Theformulaaboveimpliesthattwocellsfacingeachotherhaveasmallereffectivedistancethantheactualdistance.
Candidateneighboursarerankedintheorderofincreasingeffectivedistancefromthereferencecell.
2. Thecalculationoptions,

ForceCositeCellsasNeighbours:Ifselected,Atolladdsallthecellslocatedonthesamesiteasthereferencecell
tothecandidateneighbourlist.Theweightofthisconstraintcanbedefined.Itisusedtocalculatetherankofeach
neighbour,anditsimportance.
ForceAdjacentCellsasNeighbours:Ifselected,Atolladdsallthecellsgeographicallyadjacenttothereference
celltothecandidateneighbourlist.Theweightofthisconstraintcanbedefined.Itisusedtocalculatetherankof
eachneighbour,anditsimportance.
DeterminationofAdjacentCells:Geographicallyadjacentcellsaredeterminedonthebasisoftheirbestserver
coverageareas.AcandidateneighbourcellTXi(ic)isconsideredadjacenttothereferencecellTXi(ic)ifthereexists
atleastonepixelofTXj(jc)sbestservercoverageareawhereTXi(ic)isthesecondbestserver.Therankingof
adjacent neighbour cells increases with the number of such pixels. Adjacent cells are sorted in the order of
decreasingrank.

Figure 6.4:DeterminationofAdjacentCells

ForceSymmetry:Ifselected,Atolladdsthereferencecelltothecandidateneighbourlistoftheitscandidate
neighbour.
Asymmetricneighbourrelationisallowedonlyiftheneighbourlistofthereferencecellisnotalreadyfull.IfTXj(jc)
isaneighbourofTXi(ic)butTXi(ic)isnotaneighbourofTXj(jc),therecanbetwopossibilities:
i.

TheneighbourlistofTXj(jc)isnotfull,AtollwilladdTXi(ic)totheendofthelist.

ii. TheneighbourlistofTXj(jc)isfull,AtollwillnotbeabletoaddTXi(ic)tothelist,soitwillalsoremoveTXj(jc)
fromtheneighbourlistofTXi(ic).
Iftheneighbourslistofacellisfull,thereferencecellwillnotbeaddedasaneighbour
ofthatcellandthatcellwillberemovedfromthereferencecellsneighbourslist.Youcan
forceAtolltokeepthatcellinthereferencecellsneighbourslistbyaddingthefollowing
optionintheAtoll.inifile:
[Neighbours]
DoNotDeleteSymmetrics=1

ForceExceptionalPairs:Thisoptionenablesyoutoforce/forbidsomeneighbourrelations.Exceptionalpairsare
pairsofcellswhichwillalwaysorneverbeneighboursofeachother.

563

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

Ifyouselect"Forceexceptionalpairs"and"Forcesymmetry",Atollconsiderstheconstraintsbetweenexceptional
pairsinbothdirectionssoastorespectsymmetrycondition.Ontheotherhand,ifneighbourhoodrelationshipis
forcedinonedirectionandforbiddenintheother,symmetrycannotberespected.Inthiscase,Atolldisplaysa
warningintheEventviewer.

DeleteExistingNeighbours:Ifselected,Atolldeletesallthecurrentneighboursandcarriesoutanewneighbour
allocation.Ifnotselected,theexistingneighboursarekeptinthelist.

3. IftheUseCoverageConditionscheckboxisselected,thecoverageareasofTXi(ic)andTXj(jc)musthaveanoverlap.
Otherwise,onlythedistancecriterionistakenintoaccount.
Theoverlappingzone( S TX ic S TX jc )isdefinedasfollows
i

Here S TX ic isthesurfaceareacoveredbythecellTXi(ic)thatcomprisesallthepixelswhere:
i

ThereceivedreferencesignalenergyperresourceelementisgreaterthanorequaltotheminimumRSRP:
TX ic
i

TX ic
i

E DLRS T RSRP

TX i ic

TX i ic

S TX ic isthesurfaceareacoveredbyTXi(ic)within E DLRS and E DLRS + M RSRP . M RSRP istheRSRPmargin

i

withrespecttothebestdownlinkreferencesignalenergyperresourceelementatwhichthehandoverends.
S TX jc isthecoverageareawherethecandidatecellTXj(jc)isthebestserver.
j

TX i ic

If a global value of the minimum RSRP threshold ( T RSRP ) is set in the coverage
conditionsdialogue,foreachcell,Atollusesthehigherofthetwovalues,i.e.,global
valueandthevaluedefinedforthatcell.
Forcalculatingtheoverlappingcoverageareas,Atollusestheservicewiththelowest
bodyloss,theterminalthathasthehighestdifferencebetweengainandlosses,and
theshadowingmargincalculatedusingthedefinedcelledgecoverageprobability,if
theoptionisselected.Theserviceandterminalareselectedsuchthattheselection
givesthelargestpossiblecoverageareasforthecells.

S TX ic S TX jc
i
j
- 100 ),
Whentheaboveconditionsaremet,Atollcalculatesthepercentageofthecoverageareaoverlap( -------------------------------------S TX ic
i

and compares this value with the % Min Covered Area. TXj(jc) is considered a neighbour of TXi(ic) if
S TX ic S TX jc
i
j
-------------------------------------- 100 %MinCoverageArea .
S TX ic
i

Figure 6.5:OverlappingZones
Next,Atollcalculatestheimportanceoftheautomaticallyallocatedneighbours.Atollsortstheneighboursbydecreasing
importanceinordertokeeptheoneswithhighimportance.Ifthemaximumnumberofneighbourstobeallocatedtoeach
cellisexceeded,Atollkeepstheoneswithhighimportance.

564

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Theneighbourimportancedependsonthedistancefromthereferencetransmitterandontheneighbourhoodcause(cf.table
below);thisvaluevariesbetween0and100%.
Neighbourhoodcause

When

Importancevalue

Existingneighbour

OnlyiftheDeleteExistingNeighboursoptionisnotselected
andincaseofanewallocation

Existingimportance

Exceptionalpair

OnlyiftheForceExceptionalPairsoptionisselected

100%

Cositecell

OnlyiftheForceCositeCellsasNeighboursoptionis
selected

ImportanceFunction(IF)

Adjacentcell

OnlyiftheForceAdjacentCellsasNeighboursoptionis
selected

ImportanceFunction(IF)

Neighbourhoodrelationshipthat
fulfilscoverageconditions

Onlyifthe%MinCoveredAreaisexceeded

ImportanceFunction(IF)

Symmetricneighbourhood
relationship

OnlyiftheForceNeighbourSymmetryoptionisselected

ImportanceFunction(IF)

TheimportanceisevaluatedusinganImportanceFunction(IF),whichtakesintoaccountthefollowingfactors:
The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.

d Di = 1 ---------d max
d is the effective distance (in m). It corresponds to the real intertransmitter distance ( D in m) weighted by the
azimuthsofantennas.
d max isthemaximumdistancebetweenthereferencetransmitterandapossibleneighbour.

Thecositefactor(C):aBoolean,
Theadjacencyfactor(A):thepercentageofadjacency,
Theoverlappingfactor(O):thepercentageofoverlapping.

Theminimumandmaximumimportanceassignedtoeachoftheabovefactorscanbedefined.
Factor

Minimportance

Defaultvalue

Maximportance

Defaultvalue

Distancefactor(Di)

Min(Di)

1%

Max(Di)

10%

Overlappingfactor(O)

Min(O)

10%

Max(O)

30%

Adjacencyfactor(A)

Min(A)

30%

Max(A)

60%

Cositefactor(C)

Min(C)

60%

Max(C)

100%

TheImportanceFunctionisevaluatedasfollows:
Neighbourhoodcause

ImportanceFunction

ResultingIFusingthedefaultvalues
fromthetableabove

No

Min(O)+Delta(O){Max(Di)(Di)+(100%
Max(Di))(O)}+Min(Di)+Delta(Di)(Di)

10%+20%{10%(Di)+90%(O)}+1%+9%(Di)

No

Yes

Min(A)+Delta(A){Max(Di)(Di)+Max(O)(O)+
(100%Max(Di)Max(O))(A)}+Min(Di)+Delta(Di)(Di)

30%+30%{10%(Di)+30%(O)
+60%(A)}+1%+9%(Di)

Yes

Yes

Min(C)+Delta(C){Max(Di)(Di)+Max(O)(O)+
(100%Max(Di)Max(O))(A)}+Min(Di)+Delta(Di)(Di)

60%+40%{10%(Di)+30%(O)
+60%(A)}+1%+9%(Di)

Cosite

Adjacent

No

Where:
Delta(X)=Max(X)Min(X)

565

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

SetMin(Di)andMax(Di)to0%ifyoudonotwanttotakeintoaccountthedistance
factorintheimportancecalculation.
IftheMinandMaxvaluerangesoftheimportancefunctionfactorsdonotoverlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum andmaximum importance fields, neighbours will beranked inthis order:
cositeneighbours,adjacentneighbours,andneighboursallocatedbasedoncoverage
overlapping.
If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.
ThedefaultvalueofMin(O)=1%ensuresthatneighboursselectedforsymmetrywill
have an importance greater than 0%. With a value of Min(O) = 0%, neighbours
selectedforsymmetrywillhaveanimportancefieldgreaterthan0%onlyifthereis
somecoverageoverlapping.

Intheresults,Atolllistsonlythecellsforwhichitfindsnewneighbours.Cellswhosechannelshavethesamecentrefrequency
arelistedasintracarrierneighbours.Otherwise,neighbourcellsarelistedasintercarrierneighbours.

Bydefault,theautomaticneighbourallocationcomparesthedefinedMaxinter
sitedistancewiththeeffectiveintercelldistance.Asaconsequence,therecan
becaseswheretherealdistancebetweenassignedneighboursishigherthanthe
Maxintersitedistance,becausetheeffectivedistanceissmaller.Youcanforce
AtolltocomparetheMaxintersitedistancewiththerealintersitedistanceby
addingthefollowinglinesinAtoll.ini:
[Neighbours]
RealInterSiteDistanceCondition=1

Bydefault,theneighbourimportancecalculatedwithrespecttodistanceisbased
ontheglobalMaxintersitedistancesettingforallneighbourcandidates.Asa
consequence,therecanbecaseswherethecalculatedimportanceisdifferent
whentheglobalMaxintersitedistanceismodified.Toavoidthat,youcanforce
Atoll to prioritise the individual distances between reference cells and their
respectiveneighbourcandidatesbyaddingthefollowinglinesinAtoll.ini:
[Neighbours]
CandidatesMaxDistanceInImportanceCalculation=1

6.5.2 AutomaticIntertechnologyNeighbourPlanning
TheintertechnologyneighbourplanningalgorithmtakesintoaccountalltheTBCtransmitters(iftheothertechnologyis
GSM)orthecellsofalltheTBCtransmitters(foranyothertechnologythanGSM).ThismeansthatalltheTBCtransmitters
(GSM)orthecellsofalltheTBCtransmitters(allothertechnologies)ofthelinkeddocumentarepotentialneighbours.
ThecellstobeallocatedinthemaindocumentwillbecalledTBAcells.Theymustfulfilthefollowingconditions:

Theyareactive,
TheysatisfythefiltercriteriaappliedtotheTransmittersfolder,
Theyarelocatedinsidethefocuszone,
Theybelongtothefolderonwhichallocationhasbeenexecuted.ThiscanbetheTransmittersfolderoragroupof
transmitters(subfolder).

OnlyTBAcellsareassignedneighbours.
IfnofocuszoneexistsintheATLdocument,Atolltakesintoaccountthecomputation
zone.

We assume a reference cell A and a candidate neighbour B. When automatic allocation starts, Atoll checks following
conditions:
1. Thedistancebetweenreferencecellandthecandidateneighbourmustbelessthantheuserdefinablemaximum
intersitedistance.Ifthedistanceisgreaterthanthisvalue,thecandidateneighbourisdiscarded.
Atollcalculatestheeffectivedistancebetweenthereferencecellanditscandidateneighbourfromtherealdistance
betweenthemandtheazimuthsoftheirantennas:
Dist CellA CellB = D 1 + x cos x cos

566

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Wherex=0.3%sothatthemaximumvariationinDdoesnottoexceed1%.Disstatedinm.

Figure 6.6:InterTransmitterDistanceCalculation
Theformulaaboveimpliesthattwocellsfacingeachotherhaveasmallereffectivedistancethantheactualdistance.
Candidateneighboursarerankedintheorderofincreasingeffectivedistancefromthereferencecell.
2. Thecalculationoptions:

CDMAcarriers:ThisoptionisavailablewhenanLTEnetworkisbeingcoplannedwithaUMTS,CDMA,orTD
SCDMAnetwork.ThisoptionenablesyoutoselecttheCDMAcarrier(s)thatyouwantAtolltoconsideraspotential
neighboursofLTEcells.Youmaychooseoneormorecarriers.Atollwillallocateonlythecellsusingtheselected
carriersasneighbours.
Forcecositecellsasneighbours:Ifselected,Atolladdsallthetransmitters/cellslocatedonthesamesiteasthe
referencecellinitscandidateneighbourlist.Theweightofthisconstraintcanbedefined.Itisusedtocalculate
therankofeachneighbouranditsimportance.
Forceexceptionalpairs:Thisoptionenablesyoutoforce/forbidsomeneighbourrelations.Exceptionalpairsare
pairsofcellswhichwillalwaysorneverbeneighboursofeachother.
Deleteexistingneighbours:Ifselected,Atolldeletesallthecurrentneighboursandcarriesoutanewneighbour
allocation.Ifnotselected,theexistingneighboursarekeptinthelist.

3. Neighbourrelationcriterion:

Allocationbasedondistance:
The allocation algorithm is based on the effective distance between the reference cell and its candidate
neighbour.

Algorithmbasedoncoverageoverlapping:
ThecoverageareasofthereferencecellAandthecandidateneighbourBmustoverlap( S A S B ).
TwocasesmayexistforSA:

1stcase:SAistheareawherethecellAisthebestservingcell,witha0dBmargin.
This means that the reference signal energy per resource element received from A is greater than the
minimumrequired(MinRSRP),andisthehighestone..

2ndcase:Themarginisotherthan0dB.SAistheareawhere:
ThereferencesignalenergyperresourceelementreceivedfromAexceedstheminimumrequired(MinRSRP)
andiswithinamarginfromthehighestsignallevel.

TwocasesmayexistforSB:

1stcase:SBistheareawherethecandidateneighbouristhebestserver.Inthiscase,themarginmustbeset
to0dB.
ThesignallevelreceivedfromBexceedstheminimumrequired,andisthehighestone.

2ndcase:Themarginisotherthan0dB.SBistheareawhere:
ThesignallevelreceivedfromBexceedstheminimumrequiredandiswithinamarginfromthebestsignal
level.

SA SB
- 100 )andcomparesthisvaluewiththe%
Atollcalculatesthepercentageofthecoverageareaoverlap( ----------------SA
SA SB
- 100 %MinCoveredArea .
MinCoveredArea.BisconsideredaneighbourofAif ----------------SA
Candidateneighboursarerankedintheorderofdecreasingcoverageareaoverlappercentages.

567

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

Next,Atollcalculatestheimportanceoftheautomaticallyallocatedneighbours.Atollsortstheneighboursbydecreasing
importanceinordertokeeptheoneswithhighimportance.Ifthemaximumnumberofneighbourstobeallocatedtoeach
cellisexceeded,Atollkeepstheoneswithhighimportance.
Theimportance(%)ofneighboursdependsonthedistanceandonthereasonofallocation:

Forallocationbasedondistance:
Neighbourcause

When

Importancevalue

Existingneighbour

IftheDeleteexistingneighboursoptionisnotselected

Existingimportance

Exceptionalpair

IftheForceexceptionalpairsoptionisselected

100%

Cositetransmitter/cell

IftheForcecositecellsasneighboursoptionisselected

100%

Neighbourrelationthatfulfils
distanceconditions

Ifthemaximumdistanceisnotexceeded

d1 ---------d max

d is the effective distance between the reference cell and the neighbour and d max is the maximum intersite
distance.

Forallocationbasedoncoverageoverlapping:
Neighbourcause

When

Importancevalue

Existingneighbour

IftheDeleteexistingneighboursoptionisnotselected

Existingimportance

Exceptionalpair

IftheForceexceptionalpairsoptionisselected

100%

Cositetransmitter/cell

IftheForcecositecellsasneighboursoptionisselected

IF

Neighbourhoodrelationshipthat
fulfilscoverageconditions

Ifthe%minimumcoveredareaisexceeded

IF

TheimportanceisevaluatedusinganImportanceFunction(IF),whichtakesintoaccountthefollowingfactors:

The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.
d Di = 1 ---------d max
d istheeffectivedistance(inm).Itcorrespondstotherealintertransmitterdistanceweightedbytheazimuthsof
antennas.
d max isthemaximumdistancebetweenthereferencetransmitterandapossibleneighbour.

Thecositefactor(C):aBoolean,
Theoverlappingfactor(O):thepercentageofoverlapping.

TheIFisuserdefinableusingtheMinimportanceandMaximportancefields.
Factor

Minimportance

Defaultvalue

Maximportance

Defaultvalue

Distancefactor(Di)

Min(Di)

1%

Max(Di)

10%

Overlappingfactor(O)

Min(O)

10%

Max(O)

60%

Cositefactor(C)

Min(C)

60%

Max(C)

100%

TheIFevaluatesimportanceasfollows:
CositeNeighbourhood
cause

IF

ResultingIFusingthedefaultvalues
fromthetableabove

No

Min(O)+Delta(O){Max(Di)(Di)+(100%Max(Di))(O)}

10%+50%{10%(Di)+90%(O)}

Yes

Min(C)+Delta(C){Max(Di)(Di)/(Max(Di)+Max(O))+
Max(O)(O)/(Max(Di)+Max(O))}

60%+40%{1/7%(Di)+6/7%(O)}

Where
Delta(X)=Max(X)Min(X)

568

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

SetMin(Di)andMax(Di)to0%ifyoudonotwanttotakeintoaccountthedistance
factorintheimportancecalculation.
IftheMinandMaxvaluerangesoftheimportancefunctionfactorsdonotoverlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum andmaximum importance fields,neighbours will be rankedin thisorder:
cositeneighboursandneighboursallocatedbasedoncoverageoverlapping.
If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.

Intheresults,Atolldisplaysonlythecellsforwhichitfindsnewneighbours.

6.5.3 AutomaticFrequencyPlanningUsingtheAFP
TheroleofanAutomaticFrequencyPlanning(AFP)toolistoassignfrequencies(channels)tocellsofanetworksuchthatthe
overallnetworkperformanceisoptimised.Inotherwords,theinterferencewithinthenetworkisreducedasmuchaspossible.
Cochannel interference is the main reason for overall network quality degradation in LTE. In order to improve network
performance,theLTEAFPtriestominimisecoandadjacentchannelinterferenceasmuchaspossiblewhilerespectingany
constraintsinputtoit.Themainconstraintsaretheresourcesavailableforallocation,i.e.,thenumberoffrequencieswith
which the AFPcan work, and the relationships to take into account, i.e., interference matrices, neighbours, and distance
betweentransmitters.
TheAFPisbasedonacostfunctionwhichrepresentstheinterferencelevelinthenetwork.TheaimoftheAFPistominimise
thecost.Thebest,oroptimum,frequencyplanistheonewhichcorrespondstothelowestcost.
The following describes the AFPs automatic planning method for carriers in LTE networks, which takes into account
interferencematrices,neighbourrelations,anddistancebetweentransmitters.
TheAFPtakesintoaccountthecellsofalltheTBCtransmitters.ThecellstobeallocatedwillbecalledTBAcells.Theymust
fulfilthefollowingconditions:

Theyareactive,
Theirchannelallocationstatusisnotsettolocked,
TheysatisfythefiltercriteriaappliedtotheTransmittersfolder,
Theyarelocatedinsidethefocuszone.
IfnofocuszoneexistsintheATLdocument,Atolltakesintoaccountthecomputation
zone.

6.5.3.1 ConstraintandRelationshipWeights
TheAFPisbasedonacostfunctionwhichtakesintoaccountchannelseparationconstraintsbasedonthechanneloverlap
ratioascalculatedin"CoandAdjacentChannelOverlapsCalculation"onpage 493.Channelseparationisstudiedbetween
eachTBAcellanditsrelatedcells.AtollcalculatesthecostbetweeneachindividualTBAandrelatedcell,andthentheoverall
costfortheTBAcell.
RelatedcellsofaTBAcellare:

Itsneighbours,ifthecheckbox"Existingneighbours"isselected,
Defaultweight Neighbour = 0.5

CellsthatarelistedintheinterferencematrixoftheTBAcell,
Defaultweight IM = 0.3

Cellswithinthecells(orthedefault)minimumreusedistance,ifthecheckbox"Reusedistance"isselected,
Defaultweight Dis tan ce = 0.2
Thesumoftheweightsassignedtotheaboverelationsis1.

YoucanmodifytheseweightsinyourLTEdocument.Theabsolutevaluesoftheconstraintweightsarecalculatedfromthe
relativeweights(%)definedintheConstraintWeightsdialogueasfollows:

569

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

% Neighbour
Neighbour = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------% Neighbour + % IM + % Dis tan ce
% IM
IM = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------% Neighbour + % IM + % Dis tan ce
% Dis tan ce
Dis tan ce = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------% Neighbour + % IM + % Dis tan ce

6.5.3.2 CostCalculation
ThecostoftherelationbetweentheTBAcellanditsrelatedcelliscalculatedasfollows:
$

TX i ic TX j jc

TX i ic TX j jc

= rO

TX i ic TX j jc

Where r O

TX i ic TX j jc

Neighbour Neighbour

TX i ic TX j jc

+ Dis tan ce Dis tan ce

TX ic TX j jc

+ i
IM
IM

is the channel overlap ratio as calculated in "Co and Adjacent Channel Overlaps Calculation" on

page 493.
TX i ic TX j jc

Neighbour

TX i ic TX j jc

is the importance of the relationship between the TBA cell and its related neighbour cell. Neighbour

is

calculatedduringautomaticneighbourplanningbyAtollasexplainedin"AutomaticNeighbourPlanning"onpage 562.For
manualneighbourplanning,thisvalueisequalto1.
TX i ic TX j jc

IM

istheimportanceoftherelationshipbetweentheTBAcellanditsrelatedinterferingcellcalculatedasfollows:

TX i ic TX j jc

TX i ic TX j jc

IM

TX i ic TX j jc

IM CC

= r CCO

TX i ic TX j jc

and IM CC

TX i ic TX j jc

IM CC

TX i ic TX j jc

+ r ACO

TX i ic TX j jc

IM AC

are respectively the co and adjacent channel interference probabilities calculated as

TX ic TX jc
i
j

explainedin"InterferenceMatrixCalculation"onpage 575. r CCO

TX ic TX jc
i
j

and r ACO

arethecoandadjacentchannel

overlapratiosascalculatedin"CoandAdjacentChannelOverlapsCalculation"onpage 493.
TX i ic TX j jc

Dis tan ce

istheimportanceoftherelationshipbetweentheTBAanditsrelatedcellwithrespecttothedistancebetween

TX i ic TX j jc

them. Dis tan ce

iscalculatedasexplainedin"DistanceImportanceCalculation"onpage 576.

AtollcalculatesthequalityreductionfactorfortheTBAcellanditsrelatedcellfromthecostcalculatedaboveasfollows:
QRF

TX i ic TX j jc

= 1$

TX i ic TX j jc

Thequalityreductionfactorisameasureofthecostofanindividualrelation.
ThetotalcostofthecurrentfrequencyplanforanyTBAcellisgivenasfollows,consideringallthecellswithwhichtheTBA
cellhasrelations:
TX i ic

$ Total = 1

QRF

TX i ic TX j jc

TX j jc

And,thetotalcostofthecurrentfrequencyplanfortheentirenetworkissimplythesumofthetotalTBAcellcostscalculated
above,i.e.,
$ Total =

TX i ic

$ Total

TX ic
i

6.5.3.3 AFPAlgorithm
TheAFPalgorithmisaniterativealgorithmwhich:

570

Calculatesthecost(asdescribedabove)oftheinitialfrequencyplan,
Triesdifferentfrequencyplansinordertoreducethecost,
Memorisesthedifferentfrequencyplansinordertodeterminethebestone,i.e.,thefrequencyplanwhichprovides
thelowesttotalcost,
Stopswhenitisunabletoimprovethecostofthenetwork,andproposesthelastknownbestfrequencyplanasthe
solution.

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

6.5.4 AutomaticPhysicalCellIDPlanningUsingtheAFP
InLTE,504physicalcellIDsareavailable,numberedfrom0to503.Thereareasmanypseudorandomsequencesdefinedin
the3GPPspecifications.PhysicalcellIDsaregroupedinto168uniquecellIDgroups(calledSSSIDsinAtoll),witheachgroup
containing3uniqueidentities(calledPSSIDsinAtoll).AnSSSIDisthusuniquelydefinedbyanumberintherangeof0to167,
andaPSSIDisdefinedbyanumberintherangeof0to2.
EachcellsdownlinkreferencesignalstransmitapseudorandomsequencecorrespondingtothephysicalcellIDofthecell.
TheSSSandPSSaretransmittedoverthecentresixfrequencyblocksindependentofthechannelbandwidthsusedbycells.
MobilessynchronisetheretransmissionandreceptionfrequencyandtimebylisteningfirsttothePSS.Oncetheyknowthe
PSSIDofthecell,theylistentotheSSSofthecellinordertoknowtheSSSID.ThecombinationofthesetwoIDsgivesthe
physicalcellIDandtheassociatedpseudorandomsequencethatistransmittedoverthedownlinkreferencesignals.
OncethephysicalcellIDandtheassociatedpseudorandomsequenceisknowntothemobile,thecellisrecognizedbythe
mobile basedonthe receiveddownlinkreferencesignals.Downlinkchannel qualitymeasurementsare also made on the
downlinkreferencesignals.
Ascanbeunderstoodfromtheabovedescription,ifallthecellsinthenetworktransmitthesamephysicalcellID,itwillbe
impossibleforamobiletoidentifydifferentcells.Cellsearchandselectionwillbeimpossible.Therefore,itisimportantto
intelligentlyallocatephysicalcellIDstocellssoastoalloweasyrecognitionofcellsbymobiles.
ThefollowingdescribestheAFPsautomaticplanningmethodforphysicalcellIDsinanLTEnetwork,whichtakesintoaccount
interferencematrices,neighbourrelations(firstorderneighbours,firstorderneighboursofacommonLTEcell,firstorder
neighboursofacommonGSMorUMTScellin3GPPmultiRATdocumentsandCDMAcellin3GPP2multiRATdocuments,and
optionallysecondorderneighbours),distancebetweentransmitters,andthefrequencyplanofthenetwork.
TheAFPtakesintoaccountthecellsofalltheTBCtransmitters.ThecellstobeallocatedwillbecalledTBAcells.Theymust
fulfilthefollowingconditions:

Theyareactive,
TheirPSSIDandSSSIDstatusesarebothnotsettolocked,
TheysatisfythefiltercriteriaappliedtotheTransmittersfolder,
Theyarelocatedinsidethefocuszone.
IfnofocuszoneexistsintheATLdocument,Atolltakesintoaccountthecomputation
zone.

6.5.4.1 ConstraintandRelationshipWeights
TheAFPisbasedonacostbasedfunctionwhichtakesintoaccountthefollowingconstraints,intheorderofpriority:
1. PhysicalcellID,
Assignedweight ID = 0.75
2. PSSID,
Assignedweight PSS = 0.02
3. SSSID,
Assignedweight SSS = 0.23
4. PCIMod6,forsingleantennaportDLCRS),
Assignedweight CRS = 0
5. PCIMod30,forULDMRSsequencegroups,
Assignedweight ULDMRS = 0
6. PCIMod(numberoffrequencyblocks/2),forPCFICHresourceelementgroups,
Assignedweight PCFICH = 0
Thesumoftheweightsassignedtotheaboveconstraintsis1.

571

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014

YoucanmodifytheseweightsinyourLTEdocument.Theabsolutevaluesoftheconstraintweightsarecalculatedfromthe
relativeweights(%)definedintheConstraintWeightsdialogueasfollows:
% ID
ID = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------% ID + % PSS + % SSS + % CRS + % ULDMRS + % PCFICH
% PSS
PSS = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------% ID + % PSS + % SSS + % CRS + % ULDMRS + % PCFICH
% SSS
SSS = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------% ID + % PSS + % SSS + % CRS + % ULDMRS + % PCFICH
% CRS
CRS = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------% ID + % PSS + % SSS + % CRS + % ULDMRS + % PCFICH
% ULDMRS
ULDMRS = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------% ID + % PSS + % SSS + % CRS + % ULDMRS + % PCFICH
% PCFICH
PCFICH = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------% ID + % PSS + % SSS + % CRS + % ULDMRS + % PCFICH
The above constraints are studied between each TBA cell and its related cells. Atoll calculates the cost between each
individualTBAandrelatedcell,andthentheoverallcostfortheTBAcell.
RelatedcellsofaTBAcellare:

Itsneighbours,ifthecheckbox"Existingneighbours"isselected,
Assignedweight Neighbour = 0.35
TBAcellswhicharefirstorderneighboursofacommoncellarealsorelatedtoeachotherthroughthatcell.This
relationisalsotakenintoaccount,
Assignedweight Inter Neighbour = 0.15
YoucanchoosetonottakeintoaccountthephysicalcellIDcollisionbetweenneighboursofacommoncellbyadding
anoptionintheAtoll.inifile(seetheAdministratorManual).Ifthecollisionbetweenneighboursofacommoncellis
nottakenintoaccount,theweightassignedtothedirectfirstorderneighbourrelationaloneis Neighbour = 0.5 and
thatofthecollisionbetweenneighboursofacommoncellisofcourse Inter Neighbour = 0 .
ByaddinganoptionintheAtoll.inifile(seetheAdministratorManual),secondorderneighbourscanalsobetaken
into account. In this case, the assigned weights are: Neighbour = 0.25 , 2nd Neighbour = 0.10 , and
Inter Neighbour = 0.15 .
Inter Neighbour appliestotherelationbetweenneighboursofacommoncell,whichcanbeanLTEcell,aUMTScell
oraGSMtransmitterin3GPPmultiRATdocumentsoranLTEorCDMAcellin3GPP2multiRATdocuments.
Figure 6.7onpage 572depictsthedifferentneighbourrelationsthatmayexistinLTE.

Figure 6.7:NeighbourRelationsforPhysicalCellIDAllocation

572

CellsthatarelistedintheinterferencematrixoftheTBAcell,

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Assignedweight IM = 0.3

Cellswithinthecells(orthedefault)reusedistance,ifthecheckbox"Reusedistance"isselected,
Assignedweight Dis tan ce = 0.2
Thesumoftheweightsassignedtotheaboverelationsis1.

YoucanmodifytheseweightsinyourLTEdocument.Theabsolutevaluesoftheconstraintweightsarecalculatedfromthe
relativeweights(%)definedintheConstraintWeightsdialogueasfollows:
% Neighbour
Neighbour = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------% Neighbour + % Inter Neighbour + % 2nd Neighbour + % IM + % Dis tan ce
% Inter Neighbour
Inter Neighbour = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------% Neighbour + % Inter Neighbour + % 2nd Neighbour + % IM + % Dis tan ce
% 2nd Neighbour
2nd Neighbour = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------% Neighbour + % Inter Neighbour + % 2nd Neighbour + % IM + % Dis tan ce
% IM
IM = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------% Neighbour + % Inter Neighbour + % 2nd Neighbour + % IM + % Dis tan ce
% Dis tan ce
Dis tan ce = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------% Neighbour + % Inter Neighbour + % 2nd Neighbour + % IM + % Dis tan ce

6.5.4.2 CostCalculation
AtollcalculatestheconstraintviolationlevelsbetweentheTBAcellTXi(ic)anditsrelatedcellTXj(jc)asfollows:
TX ic TX jc
i
j

VL 1

TX ic TX jc
i
j

VL 2

ID

SSS

CRS

ULDMRS

= ID p Coll + SSS p Penalty + CRS p Coll + ULDMRS p Coll

PCFICH

+ PCFICH p Coll

PSS

= PSS p Coll

Where ID , PSS ,and SSS aretheweightsassignedtothephysicalcellID,PSSID,andSSSIDconstraints.

ID
p Coll

ID
isthephysicalcellIDcollisionprobabilitygivenby p Coll

1
=

1
PSS
PSS
p Coll isthePSSIDcollisionprobabilitygivenby p Coll =

SSS

SSS

p Penalty istheSSSIDpenaltygivenby p Penalty

=
1

TX ic
i

ifID

TX i ic

ifID
TX i ic

ifID PSS

TX i ic

ifID PSS

TX jc
j

= ID

TX j jc

ID

TX j jc

= ID PSS

TX j jc

ID PSS

TX i ic

TX i ic

ifR Cosite 3 ANDID SSS

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

ifR Cosite 3 AND ID

TX j jc

ID SSS

TX jc
j

ID

TX ic iftheSSSID
i

R Cosite

Otherwise

SSS

planningstrategyissetto"Samepersite",andby p Penalty = 0 iftheSSSIDplanningstrategyissetto"Free".TheSSSpenalty

modelstheSSSIDallocationconstraint.
CRS

p Coll

is

1
CRS
p Coll =

the

single
TX i ic

ifID

TX i ic

ifID

antenna

downlink
TX j jc

Mod6 = ID

TX j jc

Mod6 ID

Mod6

cellspecific

reference

signal

collision

probability

given

by

Mod6

573

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

ULDRMS

p Coll

PCFICH

p Coll

PCFICH
p Coll

Forsk2014

1
=

ULDMRS

istheULDMRScollisionprobabilitygivenby p Coll

TX ic
i

ifID

TX jc
j

Mod30 = ID

TX ic
i
ifID
Mod30

Mod30

TX jc
j
ID
Mod30

is the collision probability of the physical control format indicator channel resource element groups given by

TX i ic

TX j jc

TX i ic

TX j jc

TX i ic

TX j jc
N FB
N FB
Mod ---------------- = ID
Mod -----------------
2
2

TX i ic

TX j jc
N FB
N FB
-
Mod ---------------Mod --------------- ID
2
2

ifID

ifID

Next,AtollcalculatestheimportanceoftheneighbourrelationsbetweentheTBAcellanditsrelatedcell.
TX i ic TX j jc

Neighbours

TX i ic TX j jc

= Neighbour Neighbour

TX i ic TX j jc

Where Neighbour

+ Inter Neighbour Inter Neighbour + 2nd Neighbour 2nd Neighbour

TX i ic TX j jc

istheimportanceoftherelationshipbetweentheTBAcellanditsrelatedneighbourcell. Neighbour

iscalculatedduringautomaticneighbourplanningbyAtollasexplainedin"AutomaticNeighbourPlanning"onpage 562.For
manualneighbourplanning,thisvalueisequalto1.
Inter Neighbour is calculated from the neighbour relationship importance values calculated during automatic neighbour
planning.IftwocellsareneighboursofacommoncellandhavethesamephysicalcellIDassigned,theimportanceofthe
physicalcellIDcollisionistheaverageoftheirneighbourimportancevalueswiththecommonneighbourcell.Ifmorethan
onepairofneighboursoftheTBAcellhasthesamephysicalcellIDassigned,thentheimportanceisthehighestvalueamong
alltheaverages:
TX i ic TX j1 j1c

Inter Neighbour

TX i ic TX j2 j2c

Neighbour

+ Neighbour
=
Max
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2

AllNeighbourPairs
withIDCollisions

Where TX j1 j1c and TX j2 j2c aretwoneighboursoftheTBAcell TX i ic thathavethesamephysicalcellIDassigned.The

aboveappliestointratechnologyaswellasintertechnologyneighboursin3GPPmultiRATand3GPP2multiRATdocuments.
2nd Neighbour is calculated from the neighbour relationship importance values calculated during automatic neighbour
planning.IftheTBAcellhasthesamephysicalcellIDassignedasoneofitssecondorderneighbours,theimportanceofthe
physicalcellIDcollisionisthemultipleoftheimportancevaluesofthefirstorderneighbourrelationsbetweentheTBAcell
anditssecondorderneighbour.IftheTBAcellisrelatedtoitssecondorderneighbourthroughmorethanonefirstorder
neighbour,theimportanceisthehighestvalueamongallthemultiples:
2nd Neighbour =

TX ic TX jc

j
i
Neighbour
AllNeighbourPairs

Max

TX j jc TX k kc

Neighbour

withIDCollisions

Where TX k kc isthesecondorderneighbourof TX i ic through TX j jc .

Next,AtollcalculatestheimportanceoftheinterferencerelationsbetweentheTBAcellanditsrelatedcell.
TX i ic TX j jc

Interference

TX i ic TX j jc

IM

TX i ic TX j jc

IM

TX i ic TX j jc

= IM IM

TX i ic TX j jc

IM CC

TX i ic TX j jc

f Overlap

istheimportanceoftherelationshipbetweentheTBAcellanditsrelatedinterferingcellcalculatedasfollows:
TX i ic TX j jc

= r CCO

TX i ic TX j jc

and IM

TX i ic TX j jc

+ Dis tan ce Dis tan ce

TX i ic TX j jc

IM CC

TX i ic TX j jc

= IM CC

TX i ic TX j jc

and IM CC

TX i ic TX j jc

+ r ACO

TX i ic TX j jc

IM AC

if the frequency plan is taken into account

otherwise.

are respectively the co and adjacent channel interference probabilities calculated as

TX i ic TX j jc

explainedin"InterferenceMatrixCalculation"onpage 575. r O

TX i ic TX j jc

, r CCO

TX i ic TX j jc

,and r ACO

arethetotal,

cochannel, and adjacent channel overlap ratios as calculated in "Co and Adjacent Channel Overlaps Calculation" on
page 493.

574

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
TX ic TX jc
i
j

Dis tan ce

istheimportanceoftherelationshipbetweentheTBAanditsrelatedcellwithrespecttothedistancebetween

TX ic TX jc
i
j

Dis tan ce

them.

TX ic TX jc
i
j
f Overlap

is calculated

TX ic TX jc
i
j
rO

as explained in

"Distance Importance Calculation" on page 576.

TX ic TX jc
i
j

ifthefrequencyplanistakenintoaccountand f Overlap

= 1 otherwise.

FromtheconstraintviolationlevelsandtheimportancevaluesoftherelationsbetweentheTBAanditsrelatedcell,Atoll
calculatesthequalityreductionfactorforthepairasfollows:
QRF

TX ic TX jc
i
j

TX ic TX jc
TX ic TX jc
TX ic TX jc
TX ic TX jc
TX ic TX jc
TX ic TX jc

i
j
i
j
j
i
j
i
j
i
j
i
+ VL 2
+
VL

f
= 1 VL 1

Interference
1
Neighbours
Overlap

Thequalityreductionfactorisameasureofthecostofanindividualrelation.
ThetotalcostofthecurrentphysicalcellIDplanforanyTBAcellisgivenasfollows,consideringallthecellswithwhichthe
TBAcellhasrelations:
TX i ic

QRF

$ Total = 1

TX i ic TX j jc

TX j jc

And,thetotalcostofthecurrentphysicalcellIDplanfortheentirenetworkissimplythesumofthetotalTBAcellcosts
calculatedabove,i.e.,

$ Total =

TX i ic

$ Total

TX i ic

6.5.4.3 AFPAlgorithm
TheAFPalgorithmisaniterativealgorithmwhich:

Calculatesthecost(asdescribedabove)ofthecurrentphysicalcellIDplan,
TriesdifferentphysicalcellIDstocellsinordertoreducethecosts,
Memorisesthedifferentplansinordertodeterminethebestplan,i.e.,whichprovidesthelowesttotalcost,
Stopswhenitisunabletoimprovethecostofthenetwork,andproposesthelastknownbestphysicalcellIDplanas
thesolution.

6.5.5 Appendices
6.5.5.1 InterferenceMatrixCalculation
Thecochannelinterferenceprobabilityiscalculatedasfollows:
S TX ic
i

TX i ic TX j jc

IM CC

TX j jc
TX i ic

n Sym
C Max + M Quality

-------------------- ----------------------------------------------------TX ic
TX ic TX ic
TX ic
10
10
i
i
i

T i
C DLRS 10 Log 10
+ 10
2 N FB
RSRP n Sym

= --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------S TX ic
i

Theadjacentchannelinterferenceprobabilityiscalculatedasfollows:
S TX ic
i

TX i ic TX j jc

IM AC

TX j jc
TX i ic
TX i ic

n Sym
C Max + M Quality + f ACS

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TX i ic
TX i ic TX i ic
TX i ic
10
10
T
C DLRS 10 Log 10
+ 10
2 N FB
n Sym

RSRP

= ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------S TX ic
i

Forfrequenciesfartherthantheadjacentchannel,theinterferenceprobabilityis0.
TX i ic

TX i ic

Here S TX ic is the best server coverage area of the cell TXi(ic), that comprises all the pixels where E DLRS T RSRP as
i

calculatedin"BestServerDetermination"onpage 535. S TX ic
i

Condition

isthebestservercoverageareaofthecellTXi(ic)

575

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

Forsk2014
TX ic
i

TX jc
j

wherethegivenconditionistrue. C DLRS isthereceiveddownlinkreferencesignallevelfromthecellTXi(ic). C Max isthe

TX ic
i

receivedmaximumsignallevelfromthecellTXj(jc)calculatedusingtheMaxPowerdefinedforthiscell. n Sym
subcarriernoiseforthecellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"NoiseCalculation(DL)"onpage

istheper

TX ic
i
505and N FB
isthetotalnumberof

frequencyblocksdefinedinthefrequencybandstableforthechannelbandwidthusedbythecell. M Quality isthequality

TX i ic

marginusedfortheinterferencematricescalculation.And, f ACS

istheadjacentchannelsuppressionfactordefinedforthe

frequencybandofthecellTXi(ic).

6.5.5.2 DistanceImportanceCalculation
TX ic TX jc
i
j

Thedistanceimportancebetweentwocells( Dis tan ce

TX i ic TX j jc

Dis tan ce

D Reuse

2
= Log --------------------------------
TX i ic TX j jc

D

-------------------------------------------------------2

Log D Reuse

ifD

)iscalculatedasfollows:

TX ic TX jc
i
j

Otherwise

Where D Reuse istheminimumreusedistance,eitherdefinedforeachTBAcellindividuallyorsetforalltheTBAcellsinthe

AFPdialogue,and D
follows:
D
D

TX i ic TX j jc
TX i ic TX j jc

them. d

= d

TX i ic TX j jc

TX i ic TX j jc

istheweighteddistancebetweentheTBAcellTXi(ic)anditsrelatedcellTXj(jc)calculatedas

1 + x cos cos 2

isweightedaccordingtotheazimuthsoftheTBAcellanditsrelatedcellwithrespecttothestraightlinejoining

TX i ic TX j jc

isthedistancebetweenthetwocellsconsideringanyoffsetswithrespecttothesitelocations.xisset
TX i ic TX j jc

duetotheazimuthsdoesnotexceed40 %. and arecalculated

to10 %sothatthemaximumvariationin D
fromtheazimuthsofthetwocellsasshowninFigure 6.8onpage 576.

Figure 6.8:WeightedDistanceBetweenCells
Theaboveformulaimpliesthattwocellsfacingeachotherwillhaveashortereffectivedistancebetweenthemthanthereal
distance,andtwocellspointinginoppositedirectionswillhaveagreatereffectivedistance.
TheimportanceofthedistancerelationisexplainedinFigure 6.9onpage 577.Thisfigureshowsthatcellsthatarelocated
near (based on the effective distance which is weighted by the orientations of the cells) have high importance, which is
interpretedasahighcost,andcellsthatarelocatedfarhavelowimportance.Cellsthatarefurtherthanthereusedistance
donothaveanycostrelatedtothedistancerelation.

576

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Figure 6.9:ImportanceBasedonDistanceRelation

577

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter6:LTENetworks

578

Forsk2014

Chapter7
3GPPMultiRAT
Networks
Thischapterdescribes3GPPMultiRATcalculations.

Inthischapter,thefollowingareexplained:

"MultiRAT Monte Carlo Simulations" on

page 581

"MultiRATCoveragePredictions"onpage 583

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter7:3GPPMultiRATNetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

7 3GPPMultiRATNetworks
Thischapterdescribesthecalculationsspecificto3GPPmultiRATdocuments.MultiRATcalculationsthatarethesameas
thoseinsingleRATdocumentscanbefoundin:

"GSMGPRSEDGENetworks"onpage 121,
"UMTSHSPANetworks"onpage 207,and
"LTENetworks"onpage 445.

7.1 Definitions
Thistableliststheinputtocoveragepredictionandsimulationcalculations.
Name

Value

Unit

Description

f act

UL

Serviceparameter

None

Uplinkactivityfactor

f act

DL

Serviceparameter

None

Downlinkactivityfactor

TL DL GSM

Subcellparameter

Downlinktrafficload(GSM)

7.2 MultiRATMonteCarloSimulations
Thesimulationprocessisdividedintotwosteps.

Generatingarealisticuserdistributionasexplainedin"UserDistribution"onpage 581.
Atoll generates user distributions as part of the Monte Carlo algorithm based on traffic data. The resulting user
distributioncomplieswiththetrafficdatabaseandmapsselectedwhencreatingsimulations.

SchedulingandRadioResourceManagementasexplainedunder"SimulationProcess"onpage 583.

7.2.1 UserDistribution
Duringeachsimulation,Atollperformstworandomtrials.Thefirstrandomtrialgeneratesthenumberofusersandtheir
activitystatusasexplainedinthefollowingsectionsdependingonthetypeoftrafficinput.

"SimulationsBasedonUserProfileTrafficMaps"onpage 582.
"SimulationsBasedonSectorTrafficMaps"onpage 582.

Once all the user characteristics have been determined, a second random trial is performed to obtain their geographical
locationsweightedaccordingtotheclutterclasses,andwhethertheyareindoororoutdooraccordingtothepercentageof
indoorusersperclutterclass.
Atolldeterminesthetotalnumberofusersattemptingconnectionin eachsimulation
basedonthePoissondistribution.Thismayleadtoslightvariationsinthetotalnumbers
of users in different simulations. To have the same total number of users in each
simulationofagroup,addthefollowinglinesintheAtoll.inifile:
[Simulation]
RandomTotalUsers=0
In3GPPmultiRATdocuments,servicescanbeclassifiedunderconstantbitrateandvariablebitrateservices,whichcanbe
providedbyoneormoretechnology.Theseservicecategoriescomprisethefollowingservicetypesindifferenttechnologies:
ConstantBitRateServices

VariableBitRateServices

GSMGPRSEDGE

Circuit
Packet(ConstantBitRate)

Packet(MaxBitRate)

UMTSHSPA

CircuitR99
PacketHSPA(ConstantBitRate)

PacketR99
PacketHSDPA(BestEffort)
PacketHSPA(BestEffort)

LTE

Voice

Data

581

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter7:3GPPMultiRATNetworks

Forsk2014

SimulationsBasedonUserProfileTrafficMaps
Userprofileenvironmentbasedtrafficmaps:Eachpixelofthemapisassignedanenvironmentclasswhichcontainsalistof
userprofileswithanassociatedmobilitytypeandagivendensity,i.e.,numberofusersofauserprofileperkm.
Userprofiletrafficmaps:Eachpolygonorlineofthemapisassignedadensityofuserswithagivenuserprofileandmobility
type.Ifthemapiscomposedofpoints,eachpointisassignedanumberofuserswithgivenuserprofileandmobilitytype.
Userprofilesmodelthebehaviourofthedifferentusercategories.Eachuserprofilecontainsalistofservicesandparameters
describinghowtheseservicesareaccessedbytheuser.
Thenumberofusersofeachuserprofileiscalculatedfromthesurfacearea(SEnv)ofeachenvironmentclassmap(oreach
polygon)andtheuserprofiledensity(DUP).
N Users = S Env D UP

Incaseof userprofiletraffic mapscomposedof lines,thenumberofusersofeach

user profile is calculated from the line length (L) and the user profile density (DUP)
(usersperkm): N Users = L D UP

Thenumberofusersisadirectinputwhenauserprofiletrafficmapiscomposedof
points.

Atollcalculatestheprobabilityforauserbeingactiveatagiveninstantintheuplinkandinthedownlinkaccordingtothe
serviceusagecharacteristicsdescribedintheuserprofiles,i.e.,thenumberofservicesessions,theaveragedurationofeach
constantbitrateservicesession,orthevolumeofthedatatransferintheuplinkandthedownlinkineachvariablebitrate
servicesessionasexplainedin:

GSMandLTE:"SimulationsBasedonUserProfileTrafficMapsandSubscriberLists"onpage 476
UMTS:"SimulationsBasedonUserProfileTrafficMaps"onpage 222.
Foranyvariablebitrateservice(j),onceseveralnumbersofuserswithdifferentactivitystatuseshavebeencalculated
fordifferenttechnologies,thefinalnumbersofusersareobtainsasfollows:
inactive

Numberofinactiveusers: n j

inactive

= Average n j

inactive

nj

GSM

NumberofusersactiveonUL: n j UL = Average n j UL

GSM

NumberofusersactiveonDL: n j DL = Average n j DL

GSM

inactive

UMTS

nj

n j UL

UMTS

n j DL

UMTS

NumberofusersactiveonUL+DL: n j UL + DL = Average n j UL + DL

LTE

n j UL

LTE

n j DL

LTE

GSM

n j UL + DL

n j UL + DL

UMTS

LTE

SimulationsBasedonSectorTrafficMaps
Sectortrafficmapsarealsoreferredtoaslivetrafficmaps.LivetrafficdatafromtheO&Misspreadoverthebestserver
coverageareasofthetransmittersincludedinthetrafficmap.Eitherthroughputdemandsperserviceorthenumberofactive
usersperserviceareassignedtothecoverageareasofeachtransmitter.
AtollcalculatesthenumberofactiveusersofeachserviceULandDLasfollows:

GSMandLTE:"SimulationsBasedonSectorTrafficMaps"onpage 478
UMTS:"SimulationsBasedonSectorTrafficMaps"onpage 226.

DistributionofTerminals
Terminals assigned to users depend on the percentages defined per traffic map andthe technologies supported by each
terminal.Forexample,ifthepercentagesofterminalsaredefinedasfollows:
TerminalA(GSM):30 %
TerminalB(GSM+UMTS):50 %
TerminalC(GSM+UMTS+LTE):20 %
ForusersofservicesthatcanbeprovidedbyGSM,UMTS,orLTE:
TerminalA:30 %
TerminalB:50 %

582

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter7:3GPPMultiRATNetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

TerminalC:20 %
ForusersofservicesthatcanbeprovidedbyUMTSorLTE:
TerminalB:50/70=71.4 %
TerminalC:20/70=28.6 %
ForusersofservicesthatcanbeprovidedbyLTEonly,TerminalCwillbeassigned.

7.2.2 SimulationProcess
EachMonteCarlosimulationisasnapshotofthenetworkwhereresourceallocationiscarriedout.Thestepsofthisalgorithm
arelistedbelow.

Servingcell/technologyselection
Foreachmobile,Atollsearchesforaservingcellofeachsupportedandavailabletechnologyasfollows:

GSM:AtolldeterminesabestserverbasedontheHCSlayer/serverselectionalgorithm.Ifnobestservercanbe
found,themobilewillbeconsideredrejectedbyGSM.
UMTS:AtolldeterminesabestserverbasedonEc/Io.Ifnobestservercanbefound,themobilewillbeconsidered
rejectedbyUMTS.
LTE:AtolldeterminesthebestserverbasedonRSRPorRSlevelandtheservingcellselectionmethod.Ifnobest
servercanbefound,themobilewillbeconsideredrejectedbyLTE.

Oncethepotentialservingtechnologieshavebeenidentified,Atollselectsthehighestpriorityasdefinedintheservice
assignedtoeachmobile.Thebestserverandtechnologyassignedtoeachmobileremainsunchangedfortherestof
thesimulation.

TechnologywiseMonteCarlosimulationsasexplainedin:

GSM:"RadioResourceManagementinGSM"onpage 180
UMTS:"PowerControlSimulation"onpage 227
LTE:"SchedulingandRadioResourceManagement"onpage 551

7.3 MultiRATCoveragePredictions
Coveragepredictionsarecalculatedbydeterminingthebestserverforeachtechnologyoneachpixelandthendetermining
theselecteddisplayparameterwithinthebestserverscalculationarea.Eachpixelwithinthecalculationareaisconsidered
anoninterferingreceiver.Thepropertiesofthenoninterferingprobereceiveraresetbyselectingaterminal,amobilitytype,
andaservice.
Theresolutionsofcoveragepredictionsdonotdependontheresolutionsofthepathlossmatricesorthegeographicdataand
canbedefinedseparatelyforeachcoverageprediction.Coveragepredictionsaregeneratedusingabilinearinterpolation
methodfrommultiresolutionpathlossmatrices(similartotheoneusedtocalculatesitealtitudes,see"PathLossCalculation
Prerequisites"onpage 53formoreinformation).
3GPP multiRAT coverage predictions are combinations of corresponding singleRAT coverage predictions with specific
parametersettings.MultiRATcoveragepredictionsinclude:

EffectiveServiceAreaAnalysis(DL+UL)
CoveragebyThroughput(DL)

EffectiveServiceAreaAnalysis(DL+UL)
The3GPPmultiRATeffectiveserviceareaisthecombinationofsingleRATeffectiveserviceareas:

GSMServiceAreaAnalysis(DL)isbasedonacoveragebycodingscheme,asexplainedin"GPRS/EDGECoveragePre
dictions"onpage 136oronacoveragebycodecmodes,asexplainedin"CircuitQualityIndicatorsCoveragePredic
tions"onpage 145,dependingonthetypeofservice.
RadioconditionsareevaluatedovertheHCSserverareawithamarginof4 dB,onalltheinterferedsubcells.Codec
modesandcodingschemesareobtainedfromtheseradioconditionsbasedonC/I+Nwithoutideallinkadaptation(as
explainedin"ThroughputCalculationBasedonInterpolationBetweenC/NandC/(I+N)"onpage 134).Thisimplies
thatafrequencyplanhastobedefinedinordertoobtainthisGSM/GPRS/EDGEcoverage.

UMTSEffectiveServiceAreaAnalysis(EbNt)(DL+UL)isbasedonacombinationofdownlinkanduplinkservicearea
predictions, as explained in "Downlink Service Area Analysis" on page 299 and "Uplink Service Area Analysis" on
page 301.InthecaseofHSPAservices,thecoverageisbasedonacombinationofHSDPAetHSUPAserviceareasas
explainedin"HSDPAPredictionStudy"onpage 304and"HSUPAPredictionStudy"onpage 309.
LTEEffectiveServiceAreaAnalysis(DL+UL)isbasedonacombinationofdownlinkanduplinkserviceareapredictions,
asexplainedin"EffectiveSignalAnalysisCoveragePredictions"onpage 472.

Twodisplayoptionsareavailableforthisprediction:

583

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter7:3GPPMultiRATNetworks

Forsk2014

Technologies:Eachpixeldisplaysthecolourrepresentingthevisibletechnologyhavingthehighestprioritydefinedin
theselectedservice.
AvailableTechnologies:Pixelsdisplaythecolourrepresentingthecombinedareasoverwhichamultitechnologyter
minalcanbeserved.Forinstance,theGSM+UMTSareashowstheunionbetweentheGSMandtheUMTSservice
areasasexplainedabove.

CoveragebyThroughput(DL)
The3GPPmultiRATthroughputpredictionisthecombinationofsingleRATthroughputpredictions:

GSMPacketThroughputAnalysis(DL)explainedin"ApplicationThroughputCalculation"onpage 135
The3GPPmultiRATeffectiveRLCthroughputisobtainedfromthemaximumeffectiveRLCthroughputoftheGSM
layer.The3GPPmultiRATapplicationthroughputfromthemaximumapplicationthroughputoftheGSMlayer.

R99 Service Area Analysis (EbNt) (DL) explained in "Downlink Service Area Analysis" on page 299 and HSDPA
ThroughputAnalysis(DL)explainedin"HSDPAPredictionStudy"onpage 304
R99:The3GPPmultiRATeffectiveRLCandapplicationthroughputsarerespectivelyobtainedfromtheeffectiveRLC
and application throughputs of the R99 layer (see "Downlink Service Area Analysis" on page 299 for more
information).
HSDPA:The3GPPmultiRATeffectiveRLCandapplicationthroughputsarerespectivelyobtainedfromtheeffective
RLC and application throughputs of the HSDPA layer (see "HSDPA Prediction Study" on page 304 for more
information).

LTECoveragebyThroughput(DL)explainedin"C/(I+N)basedCoveragePredictions"onpage 473
The 3GPP multiRAT effective RLC and application throughputs are respectively obtained from the Effective RLC
ChannelThroughput(DL)andtheApplicationChannelThroughput(DL)(see"C/(I+N)basedCoveragePredictions"on
page 473formoreinformation).

Fourdisplayoptionsareavailableforthisprediction:

584

EffectiveRLCThroughput:ThethroughputontheRLClayerthatacellcanprovidetotheselectedterminalperpixel
takingintoaccountpossibletransmissionerrors(BLER)forthehighestprioritytechnology.
MaxEffectiveRLCThroughput:ThemaximumthroughputontheRLClayerthatacellcanprovidetotheselected
terminalperpixeltakingintoaccountpossibletransmissionerrors(BLER),consideringallavailabletechnologies.
ApplicationThroughput:Thethroughputontheapplicationlayerthatacellcanprovidetotheselectedterminalper
pixeltakingintoaccountpossibletransmissionerrors(BLER)forthehighestprioritytechnology.
MaxApplicationThroughput:themaximumthroughputontheapplicationlayerthatacellcanprovidetotheselected
terminalperpixeltakingintoaccountpossibletransmissionerrors(BLER),consideringallavailabletechnologies.

Chapter8
3GPP2MultiRAT
Networks
Inthischapter,thefollowingareexplained:

Thischapterdescribes3GPP2MultiRATcalculations

"MultiRATMonteCarloSimulations"on
page 587

"MultiRATCoveragePredictions"onpage 589

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter8:3GPP2MultiRATNetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

8 3GPP2MultiRATNetworks
Thischapterdescribesthecalculationsspecificto3GPP2multiRATdocuments.MultiRATcalculationsthatarethesameas
thoseinsingleRATdocumentscanbefoundin:

"CDMA2000Networks"onpage 337,and
"LTENetworks"onpage 445

8.1 Definitions
Thistableliststheinputtocoveragepredictionandsimulationcalculations.
Name

Value

Unit

Description

f act

UL

Serviceparameter

None

Uplinkactivityfactor

DL

Serviceparameter

None

Downlinkactivityfactor

f act

8.2 MultiRATMonteCarloSimulations
Thesimulationprocessisdividedintotwosteps.

Generatingarealisticuserdistributionasexplainedin"UserDistribution"onpage 587.
Atoll generates user distributions as part of the Monte Carlo algorithm based on traffic data. The resulting user
distributioncomplieswiththetrafficdatabaseandmapsselectedwhencreatingsimulations.

SchedulingandRadioResourceManagementasexplainedunder"SimulationProcess"onpage 588.

8.2.1 UserDistribution
Duringeachsimulation,Atollperformstworandomtrials.Thefirstrandomtrialgeneratesthenumberofusersandtheir
activitystatusasexplainedinthefollowingsectionsdependingonthetypeoftrafficinput.

"SimulationsBasedonUserProfileTrafficMaps"onpage 587.
"SimulationsBasedonSectorTrafficMaps"onpage 588.

Once all the user characteristics have been determined, a second random trial is performed to obtain their geographical
locationsweightedaccordingtotheclutterclasses,andwhethertheyareindoororoutdooraccordingtothepercentageof
indoorusersperclutterclass.
Atolldeterminesthetotalnumberofusersattemptingconnectionin eachsimulation
basedonthePoissondistribution.Thismayleadtoslightvariationsinthetotalnumbers
of users in different simulations. To have the same total number of users in each
simulationofagroup,addthefollowinglinesintheAtoll.inifile:
[Simulation]
RandomTotalUsers=0
In3GPP2multiRATdocuments,servicescanbeclassifiedunderconstantbitrateandvariablebitrateservices,whichcanbe
providedbyoneormoretechnology.Theseservicecategoriescomprisethefollowingservicetypesindifferenttechnologies:
ConstantBitRateServices

VariableBitRateServices

CDMA

Speech
1xRTTData
1xEVDOrev.0
1xEVDOrev.A(GuaranteedBitRate)
1xEVDOrev.B(GuaranteedBitRate)

1xEVDOrev.A(BestEffort)
1xEVDOrev.B(BestEffort)

LTE

Voice

Data

SimulationsBasedonUserProfileTrafficMaps
Userprofileenvironmentbasedtrafficmaps:Eachpixelofthemapisassignedanenvironmentclasswhichcontainsalistof
userprofileswithanassociatedmobilitytypeandagivendensity,i.e.,numberofusersofauserprofileperkm.

587

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter8:3GPP2MultiRATNetworks

Forsk2014

Userprofiletrafficmaps:Eachpolygonorlineofthemapisassignedadensityofuserswithagivenuserprofileandmobility
type.Ifthemapiscomposedofpoints,eachpointisassignedanumberofuserswithgivenuserprofileandmobilitytype.
Userprofilesmodelthebehaviourofthedifferentusercategories.Eachuserprofilecontainsalistofservicesandparameters
describinghowtheseservicesareaccessedbytheuser.
Thenumberofusersofeachuserprofileiscalculatedfromthesurfacearea(SEnv)ofeachenvironmentclassmap(oreach
polygon)andtheuserprofiledensity(DUP).
N Users = S Env D UP

Incaseof userprofiletraffic mapscomposedof lines,thenumberofusersofeach

user profile is calculated from the line length (L) and the user profile density (DUP)
(usersperkm): N Users = L D UP

Thenumberofusersisadirectinputwhenauserprofiletrafficmapiscomposedof
points.

Atollcalculatestheprobabilityforauserbeingactiveatagiveninstantintheuplinkandinthedownlinkaccordingtothe
serviceusagecharacteristicsdescribedintheuserprofiles,i.e.,thenumberofservicesessions,theaveragedurationofeach
constantbitrateservicesession,orthevolumeofthedatatransferintheuplinkandthedownlinkineachvariablebitrate
servicesessionasexplainedin:

LTE:"SimulationsBasedonUserProfileTrafficMapsandSubscriberLists"onpage 476
CDMA:"SimulationsBasedonUserProfileTrafficMaps"onpage 359.
Foranyvariablebitrateservice(j),onceseveralnumbersofuserswithdifferentactivitystatuseshavebeencalculated
fordifferenttechnologies,thefinalnumbersofusersareobtainsasfollows:
inactive

Numberofinactiveusers: n j

inactive

= Average n j

inactive

CDMA

nj

NumberofusersactiveonUL: n j UL = Average n j UL

CDMA

NumberofusersactiveonDL: n j DL = Average n j DL

CDMA

LTE

n j UL

LTE

n j DL

LTE

NumberofusersactiveonUL+DL: n j UL + DL = Average n j UL + DL

n j UL + DL

CDMA

LTE

SimulationsBasedonSectorTrafficMaps
Sectortrafficmapsarealsoreferredtoaslivetrafficmaps.LivetrafficdatafromtheO&Misspreadoverthebestserver
coverageareasofthetransmittersincludedinthetrafficmap.Eitherthroughputdemandsperserviceorthenumberofactive
usersperserviceareassignedtothecoverageareasofeachtransmitter.
AtollcalculatesthenumberofactiveusersofeachserviceULandDLasfollows:

LTE:"SimulationsBasedonSectorTrafficMaps"onpage 478
CDMA:"SimulationsBasedonSectorTrafficMaps"onpage 362.

8.2.2 SimulationProcess
EachMonteCarlosimulationisasnapshotofthenetworkwhereresourceallocationiscarriedout.Thestepsofthisalgorithm
arelistedbelow.

Servingcell/technologyselection
Foreachmobile,Atollsearchesforaservingcellofeachsupportedandavailabletechnologyasfollows:

CDMA:AtolldeterminesabestserverbasedonEc/Io.Ifnobestservercanbefound,themobilewillbeconsidered
rejectedbyCDMA.
LTE:AtolldeterminesthebestserverbasedonRSRPorRSlevelandtheservingcellselectionmethod.Ifnobest
servercanbefound,themobilewillbeconsideredrejectedbyLTE.

Oncethepotentialservingtechnologieshavebeenidentified,Atollselectsthehighestpriorityasdefinedintheservice
assignedtoeachmobile.Thebestserverandtechnologyassignedtoeachmobileremainsunchangedfortherestof
thesimulation.

TechnologywiseMonteCarlosimulationsasexplainedin:

588

CDMA:"Simulations"onpage 358
LTE:"SchedulingandRadioResourceManagement"onpage 551

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter8:3GPP2MultiRATNetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

8.3 MultiRATCoveragePredictions
Coveragepredictionsarecalculatedbydeterminingthebestserverforeachtechnologyoneachpixelandthendetermining
theselecteddisplayparameterwithinthebestserverscalculationarea.Eachpixelwithinthecalculationareaisconsidered
anoninterferingreceiver.Thepropertiesofthenoninterferingprobereceiveraresetbyselectingaterminal,amobilitytype,
andaservice.
Theresolutionsofcoveragepredictionsdonotdependontheresolutionsofthepathlossmatricesorthegeographicdataand
canbedefinedseparatelyforeachcoverageprediction.Coveragepredictionsaregeneratedusingabilinearinterpolation
methodfrommultiresolutionpathlossmatrices(similartotheoneusedtocalculatesitealtitudes,see"PathLossCalculation
Prerequisites"onpage 53formoreinformation).
3GPP2 multiRAT coverage predictions are combinations of corresponding singleRAT coverage predictions with specific
parametersettings.MultiRATcoveragepredictionsinclude:

EffectiveServiceAreaAnalysis(DL+UL)
CoveragebyThroughput(DL)

EffectiveServiceAreaAnalysis(DL+UL)
The3GPP2multiRATeffectiveserviceareaisthecombinationofsingleRATeffectiveserviceareas:

CDMAEffectiveServiceAreaAnalysis(EbNt)(DL+UL)isbasedonacombinationofdownlinkanduplinkservicearea
predictions, as explained in "Downlink Service Area Analysis" on page 414 and "Uplink Service Area Analysis" on
page 417.
LTEEffectiveServiceAreaAnalysis(DL+UL)isbasedonacombinationofdownlinkanduplinkserviceareapredictions,
asexplainedin"EffectiveSignalAnalysisCoveragePredictions"onpage 472.

Twodisplayoptionsareavailableforthisprediction:

Technologies:Eachpixeldisplaysthecolourrepresentingthevisibletechnologyhavingthehighestprioritydefinedin
theselectedservice.
AvailableTechnologies:Pixelsdisplaythecolourrepresentingthecombinedareasoverwhichamultitechnologyter
minalcanbeserved.Forinstance,theCDMA+LTEareashowstheunionbetweentheCDMAandtheLTEserviceareas
asexplainedabove.

CoveragebyThroughput(DL)
The3GPP2multiRATthroughputpredictionisthecombinationofsingleRATthroughputpredictions:

ServiceAreaAnalysis(EbNt)(DL)explainedin"DownlinkServiceAreaAnalysis"onpage 414
The3GPP2multiRATeffectiveRLCandapplicationthroughputsarerespectivelyobtainedfromtheeffectiveRLCand
applicationthroughputs(see"DownlinkServiceAreaAnalysis"onpage 299formoreinformation).

LTECoveragebyThroughput(DL)explainedin"C/(I+N)basedCoveragePredictions"onpage 473
The 3GPP multiRAT effective RLC and application throughputs are respectively obtained from the Effective RLC
ChannelThroughput(DL)andtheApplicationChannelThroughput(DL)(see"C/(I+N)basedCoveragePredictions"on
page 473formoreinformation).

Fourdisplayoptionsareavailableforthisprediction:

EffectiveRLCThroughput:ThethroughputontheRLClayerthatacellcanprovidetotheselectedterminalperpixel
takingintoaccountpossibletransmissionerrors(BLER)forthehighestprioritytechnology.
MaxEffectiveRLCThroughput:ThemaximumthroughputontheRLClayerthatacellcanprovidetotheselected
terminalperpixeltakingintoaccountpossibletransmissionerrors(BLER),consideringallavailabletechnologies.
ApplicationThroughput:Thethroughputontheapplicationlayerthatacellcanprovidetotheselectedterminalper
pixeltakingintoaccountpossibletransmissionerrors(BLER)forthehighestprioritytechnology.
MaxApplicationThroughput:themaximumthroughputontheapplicationlayerthatacellcanprovidetotheselected
terminalperpixeltakingintoaccountpossibletransmissionerrors(BLER),consideringallavailabletechnologies.

589

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter8:3GPP2MultiRATNetworks

590

Forsk2014

Chapter9
TDSCDMANetworks
ThischapterdescribesTDSCDMAcalculations.

Inthischapter,thefollowingareexplained:

"DefinitionsandFormulas"onpage 593

"SignalLevelBasedCalculations"onpage 600

"MonteCarloSimulations"onpage 606

"TDSCDMAPredictionStudies"onpage 624

"SmartAntennaModelling"onpage 637

"NFrequencyModeandCarrierAllocation"on
page 648

"NeighbourAllocation"onpage 649

"ScramblingCodeAllocation"onpage 655

"AutomaticGSM/TDSCDMANeighbour
Allocation"onpage 665

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

9 TDSCDMANetworks
Thischapterdescribesindetailthealgorithms,calculationparameters,andprocessesofthecoveragepredictionsandthe
simulationsavailableinTDSCDMAdocuments.Thefirstpartofthischapterlistsalltheinputandoutputparametersinthe
TDSCDMAdocuments,theirsignificance,locationintheAtollGUI,andtheirusage.Detailedexplanationofthebasiccoverage
predictions, which do not require simulation results, is provided in the second part. The third part describes the traffic
scenario generation and Montel Carlo simulation algorithms including smart antenna modelling and dynamic channel
allocation.ThenextsectionsarededicatedtoTDSCDMAcoveragepredictionswhichcanbebasedonresultsobtainedfrom
simulations. The last three sections describe in detail the allocation of frequencies, i.e., master and slave carriers, the
allocationofneigbours,andtheallocationofscramblingcodes.

9.1 DefinitionsandFormulas
The tables in the following subsections list the input and output parameters and formulas used in simulations and other
computations.

9.1.1 Inputs
Thistableliststheinputstocomputations,coveragepredictions,andsimulations.
Name

Value

Unit

Description

R Ch

Globalparameter

Mcps

Chiprate(orSpreadingrate)(1.28)

Spread

Globalparameter

None

Minimumspreadingfactor(1)

F Max

Spread

Globalparameter

None

Maximumspreadingfactor(16)

Proc

Globalparameter

None

PCCPCHprocessinggain(13.8 dB)

N TS

SF

Globalparameter

None

Numberoftimeslotspersubframe
(7)

SF

Globalparameter

ms

Subframeduration(5)

Frame

Globalparameter

ms

Frameduration(10)

N Ch TS

GP

Globalparameter

None

Numberofguardperiodchipsper
timeslot(16)

N Ch TS

Data

Globalparameter

None

Numberofdatachipspertimeslot
(704)

Midamble

Globalparameter

None

Numberofmidamblechipsper
timeslot(144)

N Ch PTS

Globalparameter

None

Numberofguardperiodchipsper
pilottimeslot(96)

N Ch DwPTS

GP

Globalparameter

None

Numberofguardperiodchipsper
DwPTStimeslot(32)

SYNC_DL

Globalparameter

None

NumberofSYNC_DLchipsper
DwPTStimeslot(64)

None

TotalnumberofchipsperDwPTS
timeslot(96)

F Min

G P CCPCH

D
D

N Ch TS
GP

N Ch DwPTS
Total

N Ch DwPTS

Globalparameter
Total
N Ch DwPTS

GP

SYNC_DL

= N Ch DwPTS + N Ch DwPTS

N Ch UpPTS

GP

Globalparameter

None

Numberofguardperiodchipsper
UpPTStimeslot(32)

SYNC_UL

Globalparameter

None

NumberofSYNC_ULchipsperUpPTS
timeslot(128)

None

TotalnumberofchipsperUpPTS
timeslot(160)

N Ch UpPTS
Total

N Ch UpPTS

Globalparameter
Total
N Ch UpPTS

GP

SYNC_UL

= N Ch UpPTS + N Ch UpPTS

593

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

Name

Forsk2014

Value

Unit

Description

Calculatedglobalparameter
Data

N Ch TS
W = --------------SF
D

bps

Chiprate(140800 bps)

F Avg

Frequencybandparameter

MHz

Averagefrequencyrangeofthe
frequencyband(2010)

BW

Frequencybandparameter

MHz

Channelbandwidthofthecarriersof
afrequencyband(1.6)

F IRF

Cellparameter

None

Interferencereductionfactor

F JD

Siteequipmentparameter

None

JointDetection(JD)factor

TX

Siteequipmentparameter

None

MultiCellJointDetectionfactor

Transmitterparameter
(userdefinedorcalculatedfromtransmitterequipment
characteristics)

None

BTSNoiseFigure

Transmitterparameter
(userdefinedorcalculatedfromtransmitterequipment
characteristics)

None

Transmitterloss
L Tx = L Total UL onuplink

TX

BTSparameter

None

PercentageofBTSsignalcorrectly
transmitted

P TCH

Max

Cellparameter

Maximumcelltraffictimeslotpower

P P CCPCH

Cellparameter

PCCPCHpoweronTS0

P DwPCH

Cellparameter

DwPCHpoweronDwPTS

P OCCH TS0

Cellparameter

Othercommonchannelpoweron
TS0

TComp P CCPCH

Cellparameter

None

PCCPCHRSCPcomparative
thresholdforbatonhandover

P Max

Cellparameter

None

Maximumdifferencebetweentwo
transmittedpowers

Req

Cellparameter

None

Requiredresourceunitsinuplink

RU DL

Req

Cellparameter

None

Requiredresourceunitsindownlink

P HS PDSCH

Available

Cellparameter

HSPDSCHpoweravailableper
downlinktimeslot

P HR

Cellparameter

None

Powerheadroom

P HS SCCH

Cellparameter

HSSCCHpowerperdownlink
timeslot

N HS SCCH

Cellparameter

None

NumberofHSSCCHchannels

N HS SICH

Cellparameter

None

NumberofHSSICHchannels

Max

Cellparameter

None

MaximumnumberofHSDPAusers

N HSPDSCHCodes

Min

Cellparameter

None

MinimumnumberofHSPDSCH
codes

Max

Cellparameter

None

MaximumnumberofHSPDSCH
codes

Max

Cellparameter

None

Maximumnumberofintra
technologyneighbours

Max

Cellparameter

None

Maximumnumberofinter
technologyneighbours

TX

F MCJD
NF

TX

TX

RU UL

N HSDPA

N HSPDSCHCodes
N Intra Neigh
N Intra Neigh

594

L Tx = L Total DL ondownlink

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Name

Value

Unit

Description

RSCP P CCPCH

Min

CellparameterorGlobalparameter

TheminimumPCCPCHRSCP
requiredforausertobeconnected
tothecell

P OCCH

Timeslotparameter

Othercommonchannelpower

DL

Timeslotparameter

Downlinktrafficpower

Timeslotparameter
(Simulationconstraint)

None

Maximumpercentageofdownlink
usedpower

Timeslotparameter
(Simulationresult)

None

Uplinkloadfactor

Timeslotparameter
(Simulationconstraint)

None

Maximumuplinkloadfactor

P HS PDSCH

Timeslotparameter

HSPDSCHpoweravailable

Min

Timeslotparameter

None

MinimumnumberofHSPDSCH
codes

N HSPDSCHCodes

Max

Timeslotparameter

None

MaximumnumberofHSPDSCH
codes

RU Overhead

Timeslotparameter

P TCH
Max

%PDL
X UL

Max

X UL

Available

N HSPDSCHCodes

Overheadresourceunits

Body

Serviceparameter

None

Bodyloss

Act

Serviceparameter

None

Downlinkactivityfactorforcircuit
switchedservicesandtheADPCH
activityfactorforHSDPAservices

f UL

Act

Serviceparameter

None

Uplinkactivityfactorforcircuit
switchedservicesandtheADPCH
activityfactorforHSDPAservices

f DL

Eff

Serviceparameter

None

Downlinkefficiencyfactorforcircuit
switchedservices

f UL

Eff

Serviceparameter

None

Uplinkefficiencyfactorforcircuit
switchedservices

F Scaling

Serviceparameter

None

Applicationthrougputscalingfactor

O TP

Serviceparameter

kbps

Applicationthroughputoffset

UL

Serviceparameter(packetsessionmodelling)

None

Averagenumberofpacketcallson
theuplinkduringasession

DL

Serviceparameter(packetsessionmodelling)

None

Averagenumberofpacketcallson
thedownlinkduringasession

UL

Serviceparameter(packetsessionmodelling)

ms

Averagetimebetweentwopacket
callsontheuplink

T PacketCall

DL

Serviceparameter(packetsessionmodelling)

ms

Averagetimebetweentwopacket
callsonthedownlink

UL

Serviceparameter(packetsessionmodelling)

KBytes

Minimumpacketcallsizeonthe
uplink

DL

Serviceparameter(packetsessionmodelling)

KBytes

Minimumpacketcallsizeonthe
downlink

UL

Serviceparameter(packetsessionmodelling)

KBytes

Maximumpacketcallsizeonthe
uplink

S Max PacketCall

DL

Serviceparameter(packetsessionmodelling)

KBytes

Maximumpacketcallsizeonthe
downlink

T Packet

UL

Serviceparameter(packetsessionmodelling)

ms

Averagetimebetweentwopackets
ontheuplink

DL

Serviceparameter(packetsessionmodelling)

ms

Averagetimebetweentwopackets
onthedownlink

f DL

N PacketCall
N PacketCall
T PacketCall

S Min PacketCall
S Min PacketCall
S Max PacketCall

T Packet

595

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

Name

Forsk2014

Value

Unit

Description

UL

Serviceparameter(packetsessionmodelling)

Bytes

Packetsizeonuplink

DL

Serviceparameter(packetsessionmodelling)

Bytes

Packetsizeondownlink

Nom

R99bearerparameter

kbps

Downlinkpeakthroughput

Nom

R99bearerparameter

kbps

Uplinkpeakthroughput

WR99bearerparameter(Canbecalculatedas ----------)
Nom
R DL

None

Downlinkprocessinggain

WR99bearerparameter(Canbecalculatedas ----------)
Nom
R UL

None

Uplinkprocessinggain

Min

R99bearerparameter

Allowedminimumdownlinktraffic
channelpower

Max

R99bearerparameter

Allowedmaximumdownlinktraffic
channelpower

N DL

TS

R99bearerparameter

None

Numberofdownlinktimelots

TS

R99bearerparameter

None

Numberofuplinktimelots

E Req
C Req
R99bearerparameterpermobility( ----b-
or ---
)
N t TCH UL
I TCH UL

None

Eb/NtorC/Itargetonuplink

E Req
C Req
R99bearerparameterpermobility( ----b-
or ---
)
N t TCH DL
I TCH DL

None

Eb/NtorC/Itargetondownlink

Req

R99bearerparameterpermobility

TargetRSCPonuplinkTCH

Req

R99bearerparameterpermobility

TargetRSCPondownlinkTCH

Div

R99bearerparameterpermobility

None

Downlinkdiversitygain

Div

R99bearerparameterpermobility

None

Uplinkdiversitygain

Term

Terminalparameter

Maximumterminalpower

P Min

Term

Terminalparameter

Minimumterminalpower

P UpPCH

Terminalparameter

UpPCHpower

Term

Terminalparameter

None

TerminalNoiseFigure

Term

Terminalparameter

None

JointDetection(JD)factor

Term

Terminalparameter

None

Percentageofterminalsignal
correctlytransmitted

Term

Terminalparameter

None

Terminalgain

Term

Terminalparameter

None

Terminalloss

TAdd P CCPCH

Mobilityparameter

RequiredRSCPT_AddforPCCPCH

TDrop P CCPCH

Mobilityparameter

RequiredRSCPT_DropforPCCPCH

Req

Mobilityparameter

RequiredRSCPthresholdforDwPCH

Req

Mobilityparameter

RequiredRSCPthresholdforUpPCH

E b Req
C Req
Mobilityparameter( -----
or ---
)
N t P CCPCH
I P CCPCH

None

RequiredqualitythresholdforP
CCPCH

S Packet
S Packet
R DL

R UL

Proc

G DL

Proc

G UL

P TCH DL
P TCH DL

N UL
Req

Q TCH UL
Req

Q TCH DL
RSCP TCH UL
RSCP TCH DL
G DL

G UL

P Max

NF

F JD

RSCP DwPCH
RSCP UpPCH
Req

Q P CCPCH

596

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Name

Value

Unit

Description

E Req
Mobilityparameter( ----c-
)
N t HS SCCH

None

RequiredqualitythresholdforHS
SCCH

E P CCPCH
Mobilityparameter( ----c-
)
N t HS SICH

None

RequiredqualitythresholdforP
CCPCH

C Req
Mobilityparameter( ---
)
I DwPCH

None

Requiredqualitythresholdfor
DwPCH

Clutterclassparameter

None

Modelstandarddeviation

Clutterclassparameter

None

PCCPCHEb/NtorC/Istandard
deviation

Clutterclassparameter

None

DownlinkEb/NtorC/Istandard
deviation

Clutterclassparameter

None

UplinkEb/NtorC/Istandard
deviation

Clutter(and,optionally,frequencyband)parameter

None

Indoorloss

Ortho

Clutterclassparameter

None

Downlinkorthogonalityfactor

F UL

Ortho

Clutterclassparameter

None

Uplinkorthogonalityfactor

Spread

Clutterclassparameter

Spreadingangle

1.38x1023

J/K

Boltzmanconstant

293

Ambienttemperature

TX

NF TX K T BW

Thermalnoiseattransmitter

Term

NF Term K T BW

Thermalnoiseatterminal

TX

Antennaparameter

None

Transmitterantennagain

Propagationmodelresult

None

Pathloss

Resultcalculatedfromcelledgecoverageprobabilityandmodel
standarddeviation

None

Modelshadowingmarginusedin
coveragepredictions

ResultcalculatedfromcelledgecoverageprobabilityandPCCPCH
Eb/Ntstandarddeviation

None

PCCPCHEb/Ntshadowingmargin
usedincoveragepredictions

Eb Nt DL

ResultcalculatedfromcelledgecoverageprobabilityandDLEb/Nt
standarddeviation

None

DLEb/Ntshadowingmarginusedin
coveragepredictions

Eb Nt UL

ResultcalculatedfromcelledgecoverageprobabilityandULEb/Nt
standarddeviation

None

ULEb/Ntshadowingmarginusedin
coveragepredictions

Req

Q HS SCCH
Req

Q HS SICH
Req

Q DwPCH

Model

Eb/Nt

P CCPCH or
CI
P CCPCH
CI

Eb/Nt

or DL

Eb/Nt

or UL

DL

UL

CI

L Indoor
F DL

N0
N0

L Path
Model

M Shadowing
P CCPCH

M Shadowing
M Shadowing
M Shadowing

597

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

Forsk2014

Name

Value

Unit

ForRSCPcalculation
Model

LT

TX

Term

Body

Transmitterterminaltotallossin
coveragepredictions

Model
M Shadowing

L Path L L
L
L Indoor
= ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TX
Term
G G

InUL,onlycarrierpoweris
Eb Nt UL

ForPCCPCHEb/Ntcalculation
TX

Term

Body

attenuatedby M Shadowing .

P CCPCH

L Path L L
L
L Indoor M Shadowing
= ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TX
Term
G G

Eb Nt P

LT
LT

None

ForDLEb/Ntcalculation
Eb Nt DL

LT

TX

Term

Eb Nt UL

LT

Eb Nt DL

P CCPCH

extracellinterferenceisnot.
Eb Nt

ForULEb/Ntcalculation
Term

InDL,carrierpowerandintracell
interferenceareattenuatedby
M Shadowing or M Shadowing while

Eb Nt DL

Body

L Path L L
L
L Indoor M Shadowing
= ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TX
Term
G G

TX

Description

Eb Nt UL

Body

DL

Therefore, M Shadowing or

L Path L L
L
L Indoor M Shadowing
= ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TX
Term
G G

P CCPCH

M Shadowing aresetto1inDLextra
cellinterferencecalculation.

9.1.2 PCCPCHEb/NtandC/ICalculation
Name

Value

E b TXi ic
--- N t P CCPCH

RSCP P CCPCH
------------------------------------------------ G Proc
P CCPCH
TX i ic
N Tot DL

TX i ic

RSCP P CCPCH
-----------------------------------------------TX i ic
N Tot DL

TX

TX i ic

N Tot DL

TX i ic

Term

I Intra DL + I Extra DL + I IC DL ic jc + N 0
TX ic
i

RSCP P CCPCH
TX i ic

I Intra DL

With

TX i

TX i

TX i ic

I IC DL ic jc

TX

TX ic
i

+ RSCP OCCH TS0

Ortho

1 F DL

= 0
1

I Extra DL

None

PCCPCHEb/Ntforthecell TX i ic

None

PCCPCHC/Iforthecell TX i ic

Downlinktotalnoiseforthecell
TX i ic

Downlinkintracellinterferencefor
thecell TX i ic

Downlinkextracellinterferencefor
thecell TX i ic

Intercarrierinterference

Unit

Description

None

DwPCHC/Iforthecell TX i ic

Downlinktotalnoiseforthecell
TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i

TX i ic

Description

TX ic
i

C
---
I P CCPCH

Unit

Term

1 F JD

TX

and

WithoutUsefulSignal
TotalNoise
TX j ic

TX j ic

TX j jc

TX j jc

RSCPP CCPCH + RSCPOCCH TS0

ji

RSCPP CCPCH + RSCPOCCH TS0

TX

j
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------F IRF ic jc

9.1.3 DwPCHC/ICalculation
Name

Value
TX i

TX i ic

TX i ic

N Tot DL

598

TX i ic

RSCP DwPCH
------------------------------------------TX i ic
N Tot DL

C
---
I DwPCH
TX i ic

TX i ic

Term

I Intra DL + I Extra DL + I IC DL ic jc + N 0

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Name

Value
TX ic
i

RSCP DwPCH
TX ic
i
I Intra DL

With

TX

TX

Ortho

1 F DL

= 0
1

TX

Description

Intracellinterferenceforthecell
TX i ic

Extracellinterferenceforthecell
TX i ic

Intercarrierinterference

Unit

Description

None

DownlinkTCHEb/Ntforthecell
TX i ic

None

DownlinkTCHC/Iforthecell TX i ic

Downlinktotalnoiseforthecell
TX i ic

Downlinkintracellinterferencefor
thecell TX i ic

Downlinkextracellinterferencefor
thecell TX i ic

Intercarrierinterference

Unit

Description

None

UplinkTCHEb/Ntforthecell TX i ic

None

UplinkTCHC/Iforthecell TX i ic

Uplinkrequiredpowerforthe
terminal

i
Term

1 F JD

and

WithoutUsefulSignal
TotalNoise
TX j ic

RSCPDwPCH

TX i ic

I Extra DL

Unit

ji

TX j jc

RSCPDwPCH

I IC DL ic jc

TX

j
---------------------------------------F IRF ic jc

9.1.4 DLTCHEb/NtandC/ICalculation
Name

Value
TX i ic

TX i

TX i ic

RSCP TCH DL
Div
---------------------------------------------- G Proc
DL G DL
TX i ic
N Tot DL

TX i ic

RSCP TCH DL
---------------------------------------------- G Div
DL
TX i ic
N Tot DL

E b
--- N t TCH DL

TX i ic

N Tot DL

TX i ic

I Intra DL

TX i ic

I Extra DL

I IC DL ic jc

TX i ic

TX i

C
---
I TCH DL
TX i ic

TX i ic

Term

I Intra DL + I Extra DL + I IC DL ic jc + N 0

TX i
TXi
Ortho
Term

1 F DL 1 F JD + 1

TX ic

TX ic

i
i
RSCP TCH DL + RSCP OCCH

TX j ic

TX j ic

TX j jc

TX j jc

RSCPTCH DL + RSCPOCCH
ji

RSCPTCH DL + RSCPOCCH
TX

j
--------------------------------------------------------------------------F IRF ic jc

9.1.5 ULTCHEb/NtandC/ICalculation
Name

Value
TX i ic

Term

TX i ic

RSCP TCH UL
Div
------------------------------------------------- G Proc
UL G UL
TX i ic
N Tot UL

i
C
---
I TCH UL

TX ic

RSCP TCH UL
------------------------------------------------- G Div
UL
TX i ic
N Tot UL

Term
P Req

Q TCH UL
Q TCH UL
Term
- or P Term
P Max --------------------------Max ------------------------TX i ic
TX i ic
E
C
b
---
-----
I TCH UL
N t TCH UL

E b
--- N t TCH UL

Term

Req

TX i ic

Req

599

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

Forsk2014

9.1.6 InterferenceCalculation
Name

Value
TX jc
j

I C2C TX i TX j

TX j ic

TX j ic

Description

Celltocellinterference

UpPCHinterference

Unit

Description

HSSCCHpower

HSPDSCHpower

HSSICHpower

TX jc
j

RSCPTCH DL + RSCPOCCH

j
RSCPTCH DL + RSCPOCCH +--------------------------------------------------------------------------F IRF ic jc
TX

Unit

TX

j
TX i

TX i ic

N0

I TS1 UL

TX i ic

X TS1 UL
---------------------------------TX ic
1 X i

TS1 UL

9.1.7 HSDPADynamicPowerCalculations
Name

Value
TX i ic

TX ic

TX ic

Ec
i
i
i
---

N t HS SCCH N Tot DL RSCP HS SCCH

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- L Model
T
TX
i

TX i ic

P HS SCCH
TX ic
i

TX ic
i

P HS PDSCH

TX

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

P Max DL Eff P R99 DL P HR

TX i ic

TX ic

TX ic
i

P HS SCCH

Ec
i
i
i
---

N t HS SICH N Tot UL RSCP HS SICH

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- L Model
T
Mi

Mi

P HS SICH

9.2 SignalLevelBasedCalculations
TwotypesofsignallevelbasedcalculationsareavailableinAtoll:
1. PointAnalysis:Realtimecalculationsforprofileandreceptionanalysisusingthemousetomoveaprobemobileon
themap.
2. RSCPBasedCoveragePredictions:CalculationofRSCPrelatedparametersoneachpixelandcolouringaccordingto
theselecteddisplay.

9.2.1 PointAnalysis
FortheselectedtransmittedTXiandcarrier(ic),youcanstudythreeparametersinpointanalysisProfiletab:
Studycriteria

Formulas
Signallevelreceivedfromatransmitteronacarrier(cell)

Signallevel( RSCP )indBm

RSCP

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

Model

L Path M Shadowing L Indoor

TX i

Pathloss( L Path )indB

Totallosses( L T )indB

= EIRP

L Path = L Model + L Ant

L T = L Path + L

TX i

Model

+ L Indoor + M Shadowing G

TX i

Where,
RSCP isthereceivedsignalcodepowerforthePCCPCH.
EIRPistheeffectiveisotropicradiatedpowerofthetransmitter. EIRP

TX i ic

TX i ic

= P P CCPCH + G

TX i

TX i

icisacarriernumber
L Model isthelossonthetransmitterreceiverpath(pathloss)calculatedbythepropagationmodel

600

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
TX

L Ant isthetransmitterantennaattenuation(fromantennapatterns)
Model

M Shadowing istheshadowingmargin.ThisparameteristakenintoaccountwhentheoptionShadowingtakenintoaccount
isselected
L Indoor aretheindoorlosses,takenintoaccountwhentheoption"Indoorcoverage"isselected
G
L

TX i

TX i

isthetransmitterantennagain
isthetransmitterloss( L

TX i

= L Total DL )

Itis possibleto analyse the bestcarrier. Inthis case,Atoll takesthehighestPCCPCH

powerofcellstocalculatethesignallevelreceivedfromatransmitter.

9.2.1.1 ProfileTab
TX i ic

Atolldisplayseitherthesignallevelreceivedfromtheselectedtransmitteronacarrier( RSCP P CCPCH ),orthehighestsignal

levelreceivedfromtheselectedtransmitteronthebestcarrier.
Foraselectedtransmitter,itisalsopossibletostudythepathloss, L Path ,orthetotal
losses, L T .Pathlossandtotallossesarethesameonanycarrier.

9.2.1.2 ReceptionTab
AnalysisprovidedintheReceptiontabisbasedonpathlossmatrices.YoucanstudyreceptionfromTBCtransmittersforwhich
pathlossmatriceshavebeencalculatedontheircalculationareas.
TX i ic

Foreachtransmitter,Atolldisplayseitherthesignallevelreceivedonacarrier,( RSCP P CCPCH ),orthehighestsignallevel

receivedonthebestcarrier.
Receivedsignallevelbargraphsaredisplayedinadecreasingsignallevelorder.Thenumberofbarsinthegraphdependson
thesignallevelreceivedfromthebestserver.Onlybarsfortransmitterswhosesignalleveliswithina30 dBmarginfromthe
bestserversignalaredisplayed.
Youcanuseavalueotherthan30 dBforthemarginfromthebestserversignallevel,for
exampleasmallervalueforimprovingthecalculationspeed.Formoreinformationon
definingadifferentvalueforthismargin,seetheAdministratorManual.

9.2.2 RSCPBasedCoveragePredictions
For each TBC transmitter, TXi, Atoll determines the value of the selected parameter on each studied pixel inside the TXi
calculationarea.EachpixelwithintheTXicalculationareaisconsideredaprobereceiver.
Coveragestudyparameterstobesetare:

ThestudyconditionstodeterminetheserviceareaofeachTBCtransmitter
Thedisplaysettingstoforcolouringthecoveredpixels

AtollusestheparametersenteredintheConditiontabofthecoveragestudypropertiesdialoguetodeterminepixelscovered
bytheeachtransmitter.Coveragepredictiondisplayresolutionisindependentofthepathlossmatrixandgeographicdata
resolutions,andcanbedifferentforeachcoverageprediction.Coveragepredictionsarecalculatedusingbilinearinterpolation
ofmultiresolutionpathlossmatrices(similartotheevaluationofsitealtitudes).

9.2.2.1 CalculationCriteria
TheRSCPfromatransmitterTXiandaselectedcarrier(ic)isgivenby:
RSCP

TX i ic

= EIRP

TX i ic

Model

L Path M Shadowing L Body L Indoor + G

Term

Term

Where,

601

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

Forsk2014

RSCP isthereceivedsignalcodepower.RSCPcanbecalculatedforPCCPCH,DwPCH,orthedownlinkTCH.
TX ic
i

TX ic
i

EIRP is the effective isotropic radiated power of the transmitter. EIRP P CCPCH = P P CCPCH + G
TX ic
i
EIRP DwPCH

TX ic
i
P DwPCH

+G

TX

TX

TX ic
i
i
,or EIRP DL TCH

TX ic
i
P DL TCH

+G

TX

TX

TX

TX

icisacarriernumber
TX i

L Path = L Model + L Ant

L Model isthelossonthetransmitterreceiverpath(pathloss)calculatedbythepropagationmodel
TX i

L Ant isthetransmitterantennaattenuation(fromantennapatterns)
Model

M Shadowing istheshadowingmargin.ThisparameteristakenintoaccountwhentheoptionShadowingtakenintoaccount
isselected
L Indoor aretheindoorlosses,takenintoaccountwhentheoption"Indoorcoverage"isselected
L

Term

istheterminalloss

L Body isthebodylossdefinedintheservice
G
G
L

Term
TX i

TX i

isthereceivertotalgain

isthetransmitterantennagain
isthetransmitterloss( L

TX i

= L Total DL )

9.2.2.2 PCCPCHRSCPCoveragePrediction
9.2.2.2.1

CoverageCondition
ThiscoveragepredictioncalculatesanddisplaystheReceivedSignalCodePower(RSCP)forthePCCPCH.
Thecoveragepredictioniscalculatedforagivensetofaterminaltype,amobilitytype,aservice,acarrier,andforTS0.The
bestserverforthecoveragepredictionisdeterminedaccordingtothePCCPCHRSCPfromthecarrierwiththehighestP
CCPCHpower,orfromthemastercarrierincaseofNfrequencymodecompatibletransmitters.Afterwards,thecoverage
predictioniscalculatedfortheselectedcarrier.Iftheselectedcarrierdoesnotexistonatransmitter,therewillnotbeany
pixels covered by this transmitter. If you perform this coverage prediction for the best carrier, Atoll calculates the RSCP
considering:

thepreferredcarrieroftheselectedservice,or
thecarrierwiththehighestPCCPCHpower,ifnopreferredcarrierisdefinedfortheservice,or
themastercarrierincaseofNfrequencymodecompatibletransmitters.

YoucanselectthedisplaycoloursaccordingtotheRSCP,oronanybestserverparameter.

9.2.2.2.2

CoverageDisplay
Itispossibletocolourthetransmitterserviceareasusingauniquecolourpertransmitter,orcolourthepixelsinthecoverage
areasbyanytransmitterattributeorothercriteriasuchas:

BestSignalLevel(dBm)
TX i ic

Atollcalculatesthebest RSCP P CCPCH receivedfromeachtransmitter TX i ic oneachpixel.Whereotherservice

areasoverlapthestudiedone,AtollchoosesthehighestRSCP.ApixelofaserviceareaiscolourediftheRSCPlevelis
greaterthanorequaltothedefinedthresholds.ThepixelcolourdependsontheRSCPlevel.Coverageconsistsof
severalindependentlayerswhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.Thereareasmanylayersasdefined
thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area where the RSCP from the best server exceeds a defined minimum
threshold.

RSCPMargin(dB)
CoverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperuserdefinedRSCPmargindefinedintheDisplaytab(Prediction
TX i ic

RSCP

properties). For each layer, area is covered if RSCP P CCPCH TAdd P CCPCH Mobility M P CCPCH . Each layer is
assignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

602

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

CellEdgeCoverageProbability(%)
TX ic
i

Oneachpixelofeachtransmitterservicearea,thecoveragecorrespondstothepixelswherethe RSCP P CCPCH from

thetransmitterexceeds TAdd P CCPCH definedinthemobilityselectedintheConditionstab,withdifferentcelledge
coverageprobabilities.Thereisonecoverageareapertransmitterintheexplorer.

9.2.2.3 BestServerPCCPCHCoveragePrediction
ThiscoveragepredictioncalculatesanddisplaysthebestserverRSCPforthePCCPCH.Thecoveragepredictioniscalculated
foragivensetofaterminaltype,amobilitytype,aservice,acarrier,andforTS0.Thebestserverforthecoverageprediction
isdeterminedaccordingtothePCCPCHRSCPfromthecarrierwiththehighestPCCPCHpower,orfromthemastercarrierin
caseofNfrequencymodecompatibletransmitters.Afterwards,thecoveragepredictioniscalculatedfortheselectedcarrier.
Iftheselectedcarrierdoesnotexistonatransmitter,therewillnotbeanypixelscoveredbythistransmitter.Ifyouperform
thiscoveragepredictionforthebestcarrier,AtollcalculatestheRSCPconsidering:

thepreferredcarrieroftheselectedservice,or
thecarrierwiththehighestPCCPCHpower,ifnopreferredcarrierisdefinedfortheservice,or
themastercarrierincaseofNfrequencymodecompatibletransmitters.
TX i ic

Min

The pixels in the TX i ic coverage area where RSCP P CCPCH Max (TAdd P CCPCH,RSCP P CCPCH) and where
TX i ic

RSCP P CCPCH =

Best RSCP TXj jc willbecoveredandcolouredaccordingtothetransmittercolour.

P CCPCH
j=All

9.2.2.4 PCCPCHPollutionAnalysisCoveragePrediction
ThiscoveragepredictioncalculatesanddisplaysthenumberofPCCPCHpolluters.AtollcalculatestheReceivedSignalCode
TX i ic

Power(RSCP)forthePCCPCHforeachpixelinthe TX i ic coverageareawhere RSCP P CCPCH TAdd P CCPCH Mobility

anddeterminesthepollutingtransmittersaccordingto:
TX i ic
TX j jc
RSCP P CCPCH Best RSCP P CCPCH M

ji

WhereMisthespecifiedpollutionmargin.
Thecoveragepredictioniscalculatedforagivensetofaterminaltype,amobilitytype,aservice,acarrier,andforTS0.The
bestserverforthecoveragepredictionisdeterminedaccordingtothePCCPCHRSCPfromthecarrierwiththehighestP
CCPCHpower,orfromthemastercarrierincaseofNfrequencymodecompatibletransmitters.Afterwards,thecoverage
predictioniscalculatedfortheselectedcarrier.Iftheselectedcarrierdoesnotexistonatransmitter,therewillnotbeany
pixels covered by this transmitter. If you perform this coverage prediction for the best carrier, Atoll calculates the RSCP
considering:

thepreferredcarrieroftheselectedservice,or
thecarrierwiththehighestPCCPCHpower,ifnopreferredcarrierisdefinedfortheservice,or
themastercarrierincaseofNfrequencymodecompatibletransmitters.

Atolldeterminesthenumberoftransmitterscoveringeachpixelandcoloursthepixelaccordingtothenumberofpolluting
transmitters.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.Thereareas
manylayersasdefinedthresholds.Eachlayercorrespondstoanareawherethenumberofserversisgreaterthanorequalto
adefinedminimumthreshold.

9.2.2.5 DwPCHRSCPCoveragePrediction
9.2.2.5.1

CoverageCondition
This coverage prediction calculates and displays the Received Signal Code Power (RSCP) for the DwPCH. The coverage
predictioniscalculatedforagivensetofaterminaltype,amobilitytype,aservice,acarrier,andforDwPTS.Thebestserver
forthecoveragepredictionisdeterminedaccordingtothePCCPCHRSCPfromthecarrierwiththehighestPCCPCHpower,
or from the master carrier in case of Nfrequency mode compatible transmitters. Afterwards, the coverage prediction is
calculatedfortheselectedcarrier.Iftheselectedcarrierdoesnotexistonatransmitter,therewillnotbeanypixelscovered
bythistransmitter.Ifyouperformthiscoveragepredictionforthebestcarrier,AtollcalculatestheRSCPconsidering:

thepreferredcarrieroftheselectedservice,or
thecarrierwiththehighestPCCPCHpower,ifnopreferredcarrierisdefinedfortheservice,or
themastercarrierincaseofNfrequencymodecompatibletransmitters.

603

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

Forsk2014
TX ic
i

Min

The pixels in the TX i ic coverage area where RSCP P CCPCH Max (TAdd P CCPCH,RSCP P CCPCH) and where
TX ic
i

Req

RSCP DwPCH RSCP DwPCH Mobility arecoveredandcolouredaccordingtotheselecteddisplayparameter.

9.2.2.5.2

CoverageDisplay
Itispossibletocolourthetransmitterserviceareasusingauniquecolourpertransmitter,orcolourthepixelsinthecoverage
areasbyanytransmitterattributeorothercriteriasuchas:

DwPCHRSCP(dBm)
TX i ic

Atollcalculates thebest RSCP DwPCH receivedfrom eachtransmitter TX i ic oneach pixel.. Whereotherservice

areas overlap the studied one, Atoll chooses the highest RSCP. A pixel of a service area is coloured if
TX i ic

Req

RSCP DwPCH RSCP DwPCH Mobility . The pixel colour depends on the RSCP level. Coverage consists of several
independentlayerswhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.Thereareasmanylayersasdefinedthresholds.
EachlayercorrespondstoanareawheretheRSCPfromthebestserverexceedsadefinedminimumthreshold.

RSCPMargin(dB)
CoverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperuserdefinedRSCPmargindefinedintheDisplaytab(Prediction
TX ic
i

Req

RSCP

properties).Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif RSCP DwPCH RSCP DwPCH Mobility M DwPCH .Eachlayerisassigned

acolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

Celledgecoverageprobability(%)
TX ic
i

Oneachpixelofeachtransmitterservicearea,thecoveragecorrespondstothepixelswherethe RSCP DwPCH from

TX i ic

thetransmitter TX i ic exceeds RSCP DwPCH definedinthemobilityselectedintheConditionstab,withdifferentcell

edgecoverageprobabilities.Thereisonecoverageareapertransmitterintheexplorer.

9.2.2.6 UpPCHRSCPCoveragePrediction
9.2.2.6.1

CoverageCondition
ThiscoveragepredictioncalculatesanddisplaystheReceivedSignalCodePower(RSCP)fortheUpPCHintheuplink.The
coveragepredictioniscalculatedforagivensetofaterminaltype,amobilitytype,aservice,acarrier,andforUpPTS.Thebest
serverforthecoveragepredictionisdeterminedaccordingtothePCCPCHRSCPfromthecarrierwiththehighestPCCPCH
power,orfromthemastercarrierincaseofNfrequencymodecompatibletransmitters.Afterwards,thecoverageprediction
iscalculatedfortheselectedcarrier.Iftheselectedcarrierdoesnotexistonatransmitter,therewillnotbeanypixelscovered
bythistransmitter.Ifyouperformthiscoveragepredictionforthebestcarrier,AtollcalculatestheRSCPconsidering:

thepreferredcarrieroftheselectedservice,or
thecarrierwiththehighestPCCPCHpower,ifnopreferredcarrierisdefinedfortheservice,or
themastercarrierincaseofNfrequencymodecompatibletransmitters.

AtollusestheUpPCHpoweroftheselectedterminaltocalculatetheRSCPfromeachpixelofeachtransmittersbestserver
coveragearea.
TX i ic

Min

Term

Req

The pixels where RSCP P CCPCH Max (TAdd P CCPCH,RSCP P CCPCH) and where RSCP UpPCH RSCP UpPCH Mobility are
coveredandcolouredaccordingtotheselecteddisplayparameter.

9.2.2.6.2

CoverageDisplay
Itispossibletocolourthetransmitterserviceareasusingauniquecolourpertransmitter,orcolourthepixelsinthecoverage
areasbyanytransmitterattributeorothercriteriasuchas:

UpPCHRSCP(dBm)
Term

Atollcalculatesthebest RSCP UpPCH receivedfromeachpixelofeachtransmitterserviceareaatthetransmitter.

Whereotherserviceareasoverlapthestudiedone,AtollchoosesthehighestRSCP.Apixelofaserviceareaiscoloured
Term

Req

if RSCP UpPCH RSCP UpPCH Mobility . The pixel colour depends on the RSCP level. Coverage consists of several
independentlayerswhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.Thereareasmanylayersasdefinedthresholds.
EachlayercorrespondstoanareawheretheRSCPatthebestserverexceedsadefinedminimumthreshold.

604

RSCPMargin(dB)

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

CoverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperuserdefinedRSCPmargindefinedintheDisplaytab(Prediction
Term

Req

RSCP

properties).Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredif RSCP UpPCH RSCP UpPCH Mobility M UpPCH .Eachlayerisassigneda

colouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

CellEdgeCoverageProbability(%)
Term

Oneachpixelofeachtransmitterservicearea,thecoveragecorrespondstothepixelsfromwhichthe RSCP UpPCH at

Term

thetransmitterexceeds RSCP UpPCH definedinthemobilityselectedintheConditionstab,withdifferentcelledge

coverageprobabilities.Thereisonecoverageareapertransmitterintheexplorer.

9.2.2.7 BatonHandoverCoveragePrediction
9.2.2.7.1

CoverageCondition
This coverage prediction determines the pixels which receive RSCP from cells other than the best server high enough to
perform baton handovers. Received Signal Code Power (RSCP) is calculated for the PCCPCH. The coverage prediction is
calculatedforagivensetofaterminaltype,amobilitytype,aservice,acarrier,andforTS0.Thebestserverforthecoverage
predictionisdeterminedaccordingtothePCCPCHRSCPfromthecarrierwiththehighestPCCPCHpower,orfromthemaster
carrier in case of Nfrequency mode compatible transmitters. Afterwards, the coverage prediction is calculated for the
selectedcarrier.Iftheselectedcarrierdoesnotexistonatransmitter,therewillnotbeanypixelscoveredbythistransmitter.
Ifyouperformthiscoveragepredictionforthebestcarrier,AtollcalculatestheRSCPconsidering:

The

thepreferredcarrieroftheselectedservice,or
thecarrierwiththehighestPCCPCHpower,ifnopreferredcarrierisdefinedfortheservice,or
themastercarrierincaseofNfrequencymodecompatibletransmitters.
pixels

TX ic
i
RSCP P CCPCH

9.2.2.7.2

are

covered

and

TAdd P CCPCH Mobility

coloured

according

TX jc
j
and RSCP P CCPCH

to

the

selected

TDrop P CCPCH Mobility

display

parameters,

TX jc
j
TComp P CCPCH

where

CoverageDisplay
Itispossibletodisplaythepotentialhandoverareasorthenumberoftransmitterscoveringeachpixel.

HandoverAreas
Atoll displays the pixels where there are transmitters other than the best server that satisfy the above criteria.
Coverageconsistsofasinglelayerwithadefinedcolourwhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.

NumberofPotentialServers
Atolldeterminesthenumberoftransmitterscoveringeachpixelandcoloursthepixelaccordingtothenumberof
transmitters. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed.
Thereareasmanylayersasdefinedthresholds.Eachlayercorrespondstoanareawherethenumberofserversis
greaterthanorequaltoadefinedminimumthreshold.

9.2.2.8 ScramblingCodeInterferenceAnalysis
This coverage prediction calculates and displays the pixels covered by two cells using the same scrambling code. Atoll
calculates the Received Signal Code Power (RSCP) for the PCCPCH for each pixel in the TX i ic coverage area where
TX ic
i

RSCP P CCPCH TAdd P CCPCH Mobility anddeterminestheinterferingtransmittersaccordingto:

TX i ic
TX j jc
RSCP P CCPCH Best RSCP P CCPCH M

ji

WhereMisthespecifiedpollutionmargin.
Thecoveragepredictioniscalculatedforagivensetofaterminaltype,amobilitytype,aservice,acarrier,andforTS0.The
bestserverforthecoveragepredictionisdeterminedaccordingtothePCCPCHRSCPfromthecarrierwiththehighestP
CCPCHpower,orfromthemastercarrierincaseofNfrequencymodecompatibletransmitters.Afterwards,thecoverage
predictioniscalculatedfortheselectedcarrier.Iftheselectedcarrierdoesnotexistonatransmitter,therewillnotbeany
pixels covered by this transmitter. If you perform this coverage prediction for the best carrier, Atoll calculates the RSCP
considering:

thepreferredcarrieroftheselectedservice,or
thecarrierwiththehighestPCCPCHpower,ifnopreferredcarrierisdefinedfortheservice,or
themastercarrierincaseofNfrequencymodecompatibletransmitters.

Atoll determines whether the cells of two transmitters covering a pixel have the same scrambling code. If the pixel is
interfered, Atoll colours it according to the colour assigned to the scrambling code in the display parameters. Coverage

605

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

Forsk2014

consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as
scramblingcodes.Eachlayercorrespondstotheareawherethecorrespondingscramblingcodehasinterference.Alayer
correspondingtoareaswheremorethanonescramblingcodeinterferesisalsoavailable.

9.3 MonteCarloSimulations
Thesimulationprocessisdividedintotwosteps.

Generatingarealisticuserdistributionasexplainedin"GeneratingaRealisticUserDistribution"onpage 606.
Atoll generates user distributions as part of the Monte Carlo algorithm based on traffic data. The resulting user
distributioncomplieswiththetrafficdatabaseandmapsselectedwhencreatingsimulations.

Dynamicchannelallocationandpowercontrolasexplainedunder"PowerControlSimulation"onpage 611.

9.3.1 GeneratingaRealisticUserDistribution
Duringeachsimulation,Atollperformstworandomtrials.Thefirstrandomtrialgeneratesthenumberofusersandtheir
activitystatusasexplainedinthefollowingsectionsdependingonthetypeoftrafficinput.

"SimulationsBasedonUserProfileTrafficMaps"onpage 606.
"SimulationsBasedonSectorTrafficMaps"onpage 610.
Atolldetermines thetotalnumberof users attemptingconnectionineachsimulation
basedonthePoissondistribution.Thismayleadtoslightvariationsinthetotalnumbers
of users in different simulations. To have the same total number of users in each
simulationofagroup,addthefollowinglinesintheAtoll.inifile:
[Simulation]
RandomTotalUsers=0

Each user israndomly assigneda service,a terminal, and a mobilitytype. The activitystatus isdeterminedbased onthe
calculationsofactivityprobabilitiesusingthetrafficinputs.
The user activity status influences the next step of the simulation, i.e., the interference in the network. Both active and
inactiveusersuseradioresourcesandgenerateinterference.
Once all the user characteristics have been determined, a second random trial is performed to obtain their geographical
locationsweightedaccordingtotheclutterclasses,andwhethertheyareindoororoutdooraccordingtothepercentageof
indoorusersperclutterclassdefinedforthetrafficmaps.
Atollalsocalculatestheshadowingmarginforeachuserbasedonthestandarddeviationsdefinedfortheclutterclassofeach
user.
InTDSCDMAnetworksusersaccessingpacketswitchedservicescantransmiteitheronuplinkorondownlink,butneveron
bothsimultaneously.Usersaccessingcircuitswitchedservicestransmitonbothuplinkanddownlinksimultaneously.Circuit
switchedserviceusers,mobilesconnectedinuplinkanddownlinkboth,aremodelledinAtollbytwomobilesgeneratedat
thesamelocationwithoneconnectedontheuplinkandtheotheronthedownlink.Ifoneofthesetwomobilesisrejected
forsomereason,theotherisalsorejectedduetothesamereason.

9.3.1.1 SimulationsBasedonUserProfileTrafficMaps
Userprofileenvironmentbasedtrafficmaps:Eachpixelofthemapisassignedanenvironmentclasswhichcontainsalistof
userprofileswithanassociatedmobilitytypeandagivendensity,i.e.,numberofusersofauserprofileperkm.
Userprofiletrafficmaps:Eachpolygonorlineofthemapisassignedadensityofuserswithagivenuserprofileandmobility
type.Ifthemapiscomposedofpoints,eachpointisassignedanumberofuserswithgivenuserprofileandmobilitytype.
Theuserprofilemodelsthebehaviourofthedifferentusercategories.Eachuserprofilecontainsalistofservicesandtheir
associatedparametersdescribinghowtheseservicesareaccessedbytheuser.
Thenumberofusersofeachuserprofileiscalculatedfromthesurfacearea(SEnv)ofeachenvironmentclassmap(oreach
polygon)andtheuserprofiledensity(DUP).
N Users = S Env D UP

606

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Incaseofuserprofiletrafficmapscomposedoflines,thenumberofusersperuser
profileiscalculatedfromthelinelength(L)andtheuserprofiledensity(DUP)(users

Thenumberofusersisaninputwhenauserprofiletrafficmapiscomposedofpoints.

perkm): N Users = L D UP

Atanygiveninstant,Atollcalculatestheprobabilityforauserbeingactiveintheuplinkandinthedownlinkaccordingtothe
service usage characteristics described in the user profiles, i.e., the number of voice calls or data sessions, the average
durationofeachvoicecall,orthevolumesofthedataexchangedintheuplinkandthedownlinkineachdatasession.

9.3.1.1.1

CircuitSwitchedService(i)
Userprofileparametersforcircuitswitchedservicesare:

Theuserterminalequipmentusedfortheservice(fromtheTerminalstable),
Theaveragenumberofcallsperhour N Call ,

Theaveragedurationofacall(seconds) D Call .

Thenumberofusersandtheirdistributionperactivitystatusisdeterminedasfollows:

Calculationoftheserviceusagedurationperhour( p 0 :probabilityofaconnection):

N call d
p o = ------------------3600

Calculationofthenumberofuserstryingtoaccesstheservicei( n i ):

n i = N Users p 0
Theactivitystatusofeachuserdependsontheactivityperiodsduringtheconnection,i.e.,theuplinkanddownlinkactivity
UL

DL

factorsdefinedforthecircuitswitchedservicei, f Act and f Act .

Calculationofactivityprobabilities:
UL

DL

Probabilityofbeinginactive: p Inactive = 1 f Act 1 f Act

UL

UL

DL

DL

DL

UL

ProbabilityofbeingactiveonUL: p Active = f Act 1 f Act

ProbabilityofbeingactiveonDL: p Active = f Act 1 f Act
UL + DL

UL

DL

ProbabilityofbeingactivebothonULandDL: p Active = f Act f Act

Calculationofnumberofusersperactivitystatus:
Numberofinactiveusers: n i Inactive = n i p Inactive
UL

UL

Numberofusersactiveintheuplink: n i Active = n i p Active

DL

DL

Numberofusersactiveinthedownlink: n i Active = n i p Active

UL + DL

UL + DL

Numberofusersactiveintheuplinkanddownlinkboth: n i Active = n i p Active

Therefore,aconnectedusercanbeeitheractiveonbothlinks,inactiveonbothlinks,activeonULonly,oractiveonDLonly.

9.3.1.1.2

PacketSwitchedService(j)
Userprofileparametersforpacketswitchedservicesare:

Theuserterminalequipmentusedfortheservice(fromtheTerminalstable),
Theaveragenumberofpacketsessionsperhour N Sess ,

Thevolume(inkBytes)whichistransferredonthedownlink V

DL

andtheuplink V

UL

duringasession.

Apacketsessionconsistsofseveralpacketcallsseparatedbyareadingtime.Eachpacketcallisdefinedbyitssizeandmaybe
dividedinpacketsoffixedsize(1500Bytes)separatedbyaninterpacketarrivaltime.

607

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

Forsk2014

Figure 9.1:DescriptionofaPacketSession
Calculationoftheaveragepacketcallsize(kBytes):
UL

DL

UL
DL
V
V
S PacketCall = -------------------------------------- and S PacketCall = --------------------------------------UL
UL
DL
DL
N PacketCall f Eff
N PacketCall f Eff
UL

DL

IncaseofHSDPAservices, f Eff and f Eff aretheuplinkanddownlinkADPCHactivityfactors,respectively.

Calculationoftheaveragenumberofpacketsperpacketcall:
UL

DL

S PacketCall
S PacketCall
UL
- + 1 and N DL
- + 1
N Packet = Int ------------------------------Packet = Int ------------------------------UL
S Packet 1024
S DL
Packet 1024
1kBytes=1024Bytes.

Calculationoftheaveragedurationofinactivitywithinapacketcall(c):
UL

UL

DL

DL

N Packet 1 T Packet
N Packet 1 T Packet
UL
DL
- and D Inactivity PacketCall = -------------------------------------------------------- D Inactivity PacketCall = --------------------------------------------------------1000
1000
Calculationoftheaveragedurationofinactivityinasession(s):
UL

UL

UL

DL

DL

DL

D Inactivity Session = N PacketCall D Inactivity PacketCall and

D Inactivity Session = N PacketCall D Inactivity PacketCall
Calculationoftheaveragedurationofactivityinasession(s):
UL

UL

DL

DL

N Packet S Packet 8
UL
UL
- and
D Activity Session = N PacketCall -----------------------------------------------UL
R Nom 1000
N Packet S Packet 8
DL
DL
D Activity Session = N PacketCall -----------------------------------------------DL
R Nom 1000
Therefore,theaveragedurationofaconnectioninthesessionsis:
UL

UL

UL

DL

DL

DL

D Connection = D Activity Session + D Inactivity Session and D Connection = D Activity Session + D Inactivity Session
Calculationoftheserviceusagedurationperhour(probabilityofaconnection):
N Sess
N Sess
UL
UL
DL
DL
p Connection = ------------ D Connection and p Connection = ------------ D Connection
3600
3600
Calculationoftheprobabilityofbeingconnected:

608

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
UL

DL

p Connected = 1 1 p Connection 1 p Connection

Therefore,thenumberofuserstryingtoaccesstheservicejis:
n j = N Users p Connected
AsFigure 9.1onpage 608shows,therecanbethreepossiblecaseswhenauserisconnected:
a. 1stcase:Atagiventime,packetsaredownloadedanduploaded.
UL

DL

p Connection p Connection
UL + DL
Theprobabilityofbeingconnectedis: p Connected = --------------------------------------------------------p Connected
b. 2ndcase:Atagiventime,packetareuploadedonly.
UL

DL

p Connection 1 p Connection
UL
Theprobabilityofbeingconnectedis: p Connected = ----------------------------------------------------------------------p Connected
c. 3rdcase:Atagiventime,packetaredownloadedonly.
DL

UL

p Connection 1 p Connection
DL
Theprobabilityofbeingconnectedis: p Connected = ----------------------------------------------------------------------p Connected
Calculationoftheprobabilityofbeingactive:
Todeterminetheactivitystatusofeachuser,theactivityperiodsduringtheconnectionaretakenintoaccount.
f

UL

UL

DL

D Activity Session
D Activity Session
DL
= --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- and f = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------UL
UL
DL
DL
D Inactivity Session + D Activity Session
D Inactivity Session + D Activity Session

Therefore,wehave:
a. 1stcase:Atagiventime,packetsaredownloadedanduploaded.
UL

UL

1 f p Connected

DL

DL

1 f p Connected

DL

p Connected

TheprobabilityoftheuserbeingactiveonULandinactiveonDL: p1 Active = f
TheprobabilityoftheuserbeingactiveonDLandinactiveonUL: p1 Active = f
UL + DL

TheprobabilityoftheuserbeingactiveonbothULandDL: p1 Active = f

UL

DL

UL + DL

UL

UL + DL

UL + DL

UL

DL

UL + DL

TheprobabilityoftheuserbeinginactiveonbothULandDL: p1 Inactive = 1 f 1 f p Connected

b. 2ndcase:Atagiventime,packetareuploadedonly.
UL

TheprobabilityoftheuserbeingactiveonULandinactiveonDL: p2 Active = f

UL

UL

p Connected
UL

UL

TheprobabilityoftheuserbeinginactiveonbothULandDL: p2 Inactive = 1 f p Connected

c. 3rdcase:Atagiventime,packetaredownloadedonly.
DL

TheprobabilityoftheuserbeingactiveonDLandinactiveonUL: p1 Active = f

DL

DL

p Connected

DL

DL

TheprobabilityoftheuserbeinginactiveonbothULandDL: p3 Inactive = 1 f p Connected

Calculationofnumberofusersperactivitystatus:
NumberofinactiveusersonULandDL: n j Inactive = n j p1 Inactive + p2 Inactive + p3 Inactive
UL

UL

UL

DL

DL

DL

NumberofusersactiveonULandinactiveonDL: n j Active = n j p1 Active + p2 Active

NumberofusersactiveonDLandinactiveonUL: n j Active = n j p1 Active + p3 Active
UL + DL

UL + DL

NumberofusersactiveonULandDL: n j Active = n j p1 Active

Therefore,aconnectedusercanbeactiveonbothlinks,inactiveonbothlinks,activeonULonly,oractiveonDLonly.

609

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

Forsk2014

Theuserdistributionperservice,andtheactivitystatusdistributionbetweentheusers
areaveragedistributions.Theserviceandtheactivitystatusofeachuserarerandomin
each simulation. Therefore, if you compute several simulations at once, the average
numberofusersperserviceandaveragenumbersofinactive,activeonUL,activeonDL,
andactive on ULand DLusers,willcorrespond tocalculated distributions. But, ifyou
compareeachsimulation,youwillobservethattheuserdistributionbetweenservicesas
wellastheactivitystatusdistributionbetweenusersisdifferentineachsimulation.

9.3.1.2 SimulationsBasedonSectorTrafficMaps
Sectortrafficmapsarealsoreferredtoaslivetrafficmaps.LivetrafficdatafromtheOMCisspreadoverthebestserver
coverageareasofthetransmittersincludedinthetrafficmap.Throughputdemandsperservice,thenumbersofactiveusers
perservice,orErlangsperserviceareassignedtothecoverageareasofeachtransmitter.

9.3.1.2.1

ThroughputsinUplinkandDownlink
WhenselectingThroughputsinUplinkandDownlink,youcaninputthethroughputdemandsintheuplinkanddownlinkfor
eachsectorandforeachlistedservice.
AtollcalculatesthenumberofusersactiveinuplinkandindownlinkintheTxicellusingtheservice(NULandNDL)asfollows:
N

UL

DL

UL

DL

RS
RS
DL
= ----------- and N = ----------- forR99circuitandpacketswitchedservices
UL
DL
R Nom
R Nom
DL

RS
= ---------forHSDPAservice
DL
R Avg

UL

DL

R S and R S aretheuplinkanddownlinkthroughputsforserviceSintheTXicellfromthetrafficmap.
NULandNDLvaluesinclude:
UL

Usersactiveinuplinkandinactiveindownlink( n i Active ),

Usersactiveindownlinkandinactiveinuplink( n i Active ),

Andusersactiveinbothlinks( n i Active ).

DL

UL + DL

Atolltakesintoaccountactivityperiodsduringtheconnectioninordertodeterminetheactivitystatusofeachuser.
Activityprobabilitiesarecalculatedasfollows:
UL

DL

ProbabilityofbeinginactiveinULandDL: p Inactive = 1 f Act 1 f Act

UL

UL

DL

DL

DL

UL

ProbabilityofbeingactiveinULonly: p Active = f Act 1 f Act

ProbabilityofbeingactiveinDLonly: p Active = f Act 1 f Act
UL + DL

UL

DL

ProbabilityofbeingactivebothinULandDL: p Active = f Act f Act

UL

DL

Where, f Act and f Act arerespectivelytheULandDLactivityfactorsdefinedfortheservicei.

Then,Atollcalculatesthenumberofusersperactivitystatus:
Wehave:
UL

UL + DL

UL

DL

UL + DL

DL

UL + DL

UL

DL

UL + DL

p Active + p Active n i Active + n i Active + n i Active = N UL

p Active + p Active n i Active + n i Active + n i Active = N DL
Therefore,wehave:
UL + DL

UL + DL

N UL p Active
N DL p Active
UL + DL
--------------------------------------NumberofusersactiveinULandDLboth: n i Active = min --------------------------------------
UL
UL + DL
DL
+ DL
p Active + p Active p Active + p UL
Active
UL

UL + DL

NumberofusersactiveinULandinactiveinDL: n i Active = N UL n i Active

610

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
DL

UL + DL

NumberofusersactiveinDLandinactiveinUL: n i Active = N DL n i Active

UL

DL

UL + DL

n i Active + n i Active + n i Active

NumberofinactiveusersinULandDL: n i Inactive = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- p inactive
1 p inactive
Therefore,aconnectedusercanhavefourdifferentactivitystatus:eitheractiveinbothlinks,orinactiveinbothlinks,oractive
inULonly,oractiveinDLonly.

9.3.1.2.2

TotalNumberofUsers(AllActivityStatuses)
WhenselectingTotalNumberofUsers(AllActivityStatuses),youcaninputthenumberofconnectedusersforeachsector
andforeachlistedservice( n i ).
Atolltakesintoaccountactivityperiodsduringtheconnectioninordertodeterminetheactivitystatusofeachuser.
Activityprobabilitiesarecalculatedasfollows:
UL

DL

ProbabilityofbeinginactiveinULandDL: p Inactive = 1 f Act 1 f Act

UL

UL

DL

DL

DL

UL

ProbabilityofbeingactiveinULonly: p Active = f Act 1 f Act

ProbabilityofbeingactiveinDLonly: p Active = f Act 1 f Act
UL + DL

UL

DL

ProbabilityofbeingactivebothinULandDL: p Active = f Act f Act

UL

DL

Where, f Act and f Act arerespectivelytheULandDLactivityfactorsdefinedfortheservicei.

Then,Atollcalculatesthenumberofusersperactivitystatus:
NumberofinactiveusersinULandDL: n i Inactive = n i p Inactive
UL

UL

DL

DL

NumberofusersactiveinULandinactiveinDL: n i Active = n i p Active

NumberofusersactiveinDLandinactiveinUL: n i Active = n i p Active
UL + DL

UL + DL

NumberofusersactiveinULandDLboth: n i Active = n i p Active

Therefore,aconnectedusercanhavefourdifferentactivitystatus:eitheractiveinbothlinks,orinactiveinbothlinks,oractive
inULonly,oractiveinDLonly.

9.3.1.2.3

NumberofUsersperActivityStatus
WhenselectingNumberofUsersperActivityStatus,youcandirectlyinputthenumberofinactiveusers( n i Inactive ),the
UL

DL

UL + DL

numberofusersactiveintheuplink( n i Active ),inthedownlink( n i Active )andintheuplinkanddownlink( n i Active ),for

eachsectorandforeachservice.
Theactivitystatusofusersisbasedonanaveragedistribution.Theactivitystatusofeach
userisrandomineachsimulation.Therefore,ifyoucomputeseveralsimulationsatonce,
theaveragenumbersofinactive,activeonUL,activeonDL,andactiveonULandDL
users,willcorrespondtocalculateddistributions.But,ifyoucompareeachsimulation,
youwillobservethattheactivitystatusdistributionbetweenusersisdifferentineach
simulation.

9.3.2 PowerControlSimulation
BasedonCDMAairinterface,aTDSCDMAnetworkautomaticallyregulatesitselfbyusinguplinkanddownlinkpowercontrol
inordertominimiseinterferenceandmaximisecapacity.Foreachuserdistribution,Atollsimulatesthesenetworkregulation
mechanismsusinganiterativealgorithmandcalculatesnetworkparameterssuchastrafficpowerpercellandpertimeslot,
mobileterminalpower,andhandoffstatusforeachterminal.
Ineachiteration,allthemobiles(R99andHSDPAserviceusers)selectedduringgenerationoftheuserdistributionattempt
toconnecttothenetworkonebyone.Theprocessisrepeatedfromiterationtoiterationandendswhenthenetworkis
balanced,i.e.,whentheconvergencecriteriaonuplinkanddownlinkaresatisfied.
The simulation algorithm also models the impact of smart antennas in the power control loop. The influence of smart
antennasistakenintoaccountinsignalqualitycalculations.Smartantennasimprovethesignalqualityofeachservedmobile,

611

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

Forsk2014

decrease the required powers and the loads of all the surrounding cells. Interference on the downlink and the uplink is
calculatedonaperuser.Powercontrolissimulatedoverasubframe,i.e.,7timeslots.
ForHSDPAusers,uplinkanddownlinkpowercontrolisperformedontheassociatedADCHbearerbeforefastlinkadaptation
ondownlink.Thestepsofthisalgorithmaredetailedbelow.

Figure 9.2:TDSCDMAPowerControlAlgorithm

9.3.2.1 AlgorithmInitialisation
Atthestartofeachsimulation,thesystemloadsforeachcarrierandtimeslotareresettoinitialvalues:

Downlinktrafficpowersofcells P TCH DL areinitialisedto0Watts

Uplinkinterferencepowersreceivedonallthecarriersandtimeslots I Intra UL and I Extra UL areinitialisedto0Watts

(i.e.,noconnectedmobiles)

Term

Uplinkrequiredpowerformobilesissetto P Min

9.3.2.2 R99PartoftheAlgorithm
Req

Thealgorithmisdescribedforaniterationk.Here,XkisthevalueofthevariableXattheiterationk.Inthealgorithm,all Q UL
Req

and Q DL thresholds depend on the user mobility, and are defined in the Service and Mobility parameter tables. All the
variablesusedinthedescriptionbelowarelistedin"DefinitionsandFormulas"onpage 593.
ThefollowingcalculationsaremadeforallR99andHSDPAmobiles(Mi)usingR99bearers.

9.3.2.2.1

DeterminationofMisBestServer(SBS(Mi))
ThisstepisperformedforTS0foreachstationTXicontainingMiinitscalculationarea.
ThebestserverforMiisdeterminedaccordingtothePCCPCHRSCPfromthecarrierwiththehighestPCCPCHpower,orfrom
themastercarrierincaseofNfrequencymodecompatibletransmitters.Afterwards,thePCCPCHRSCPiscalculatedfor:

612

thepreferredcarrieroftheserviceusedbyMi,or

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

thecarrierwiththehighestPCCPCHpower,ifnopreferredcarrierisdefinedfortheservice,or
themastercarrierincaseofNfrequencymodecompatibletransmitters.

TheRSCPfromatransmitterTXiandaselectedcarriericisgivenby:
TX ic
i

TX ic
i

RSCP P CCPCH = P P CCPCH + G

TX

TX

Model

L Path M Shadowing L Body L Indoor + G

indBm

Where,
TX i

L Path = L Model + L Ant

L Model isthelossonthetransmitterreceiverpath(pathloss)calculatedbythepropagationmodel
TX i

L Ant isthetransmitterantennaattenuation(fromantennapatterns)
Model

M Shadowing istheshadowingmargin.ThisparameteristakenintoaccountwhentheoptionShadowingtakenintoaccount
isselected
L Indoor aretheindoorlosses,takenintoaccountwhentheoption"Indoorcoverage"isselected
L

Mi

isthelosoftheterminalusedbyMi

Mi

L Body isthebodylossdefinedintheserviceusedbyMi
G
G
L

Mi
TX i

TX i

isthereceivergainoftheterminaluserbyMi
isthetransmitterantennagain
isthetransmitterloss( L

TX i

= L Total DL )

Acell TX i ic isconsideredthebestserverofamobileMiifitsatisfiesthefollowingconditions:
TX i ic

Min

RSCP P CCPCH RSCP P CCPCH ,

TX i ic

RSCP P CCPCH TAdd P CCPCH Mobility ,

TX i ic

And RSCP P CCPCH =

Best RSCP TX j jc .
P CCPCH
j=All

Thebestserverisdeterminedonceforthewholesimulationduringthefirstiteration,i.e.,k=0,becausethebestserverdoes
notchangeduringthesimulationandsmartantennasdonotinfluencethisstep.
Miisconsideredunabletoconnecttothenetworkifnobestserverhasbeenselected.Inthiscase,Miisrejectedforthereason
PCCPCHRSCP<MinPCCPCHRSCP.IfMihasnobestserver,itisnottakenintoaccountinthenextsteps.

9.3.2.2.2

DynamicChannelAllocation
Thedynamicchannelallocationisperformedonceforthewholesimulationduringthefirstiteration,i.e.,k=0.TheDCA
controlsthemobileadmission.Onceamobilehasbeenadmittedforasimulation,itremainsadmittedforthealltheiterations
unlessthereareotherreasonstorejectit(followingsteps).
TheaimofDynamicChannelAllocation(DCA)istoreduceinterferenceinordertomaximisetheusageoftheradioresources.
Inotherwords,theDCAtriestofindthe"bestcarrier"andthe"besttimeslots",whichwhenallocatedtothemobileswill
optimisetheloadbalancebetweencarriers.
IfapreferredcarrierisdefinedfortheservicerequestedbyMiandifitisavailableat TX i . BestCarrier TX i M i = the
carrierpreferredfortheservice.InthecaseofNfrequencycompatibletransmitters,Micanbeallocatedtimeslotsovermore
thanoneslavecarrier.
Miisconsideredunabletoconnecttothenetworkifnocarrierornotenoughtimeslotshavebeenselected.Inthiscase,the
mobileMiwillberejectedforthereason"RUSaturation".Ifthecarrierandtimeslot(s)selectedbytheDCAdonotsatisfythe
controlofradioresourcelimitsforDLpowerorULload,thenthemobilewillberejectedforthereason"DLLoadSaturation"
or"AdmissionRejection"respectively.

613

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

Forsk2014

TherearefourstrategiesfortheDCAavailableinAtoll.Thesestrategiesaredescribedbelowonebyone.
1. Load
CarrierSelectionbyLoad:TheDCAdeterminestheleastloadedcarrierwithenoughtimeslotstoaccomodatethe
servicebeingusedbyeachmobileMi.Thebestcarrierforamobileistheonethatisleastloaded:
BestCarrier TX i M i = Carrier

Where, X

DCA

DCA

= X DL

Min X

TX i ic TS M i

= N Tot DL

DCA

ifthemobileisconnectedinthedownlink.

TX i ic TS M i

And, X

DCA

DCA

DCA

DCA
X UL

N Tot UL
- X DCA ifthemobileisconnectedintheuplink.
= ----------------------------------------------TX i ic TS M i
TX i
N Tot UL
+ N0

istheloadincrementgivenby:
Mi

TX i

1 f UL 1 f JD

= ---------------------------------------------------------------------1
1 + ----------Req
Q UL
Ortho

E b
--- N t UL
Proc
= ------------------ istheuplinkrequiredsignalquality.Theuplinkprocessinggain G UL calculated
Proc
G UL
Req

Req

C
Req
Where Q UL = ---
I UL

fromtheserviceparameters,ifnosmartantennaisusedbythetransmitterintheuplink.
Ifasmartantennaisusedbythetransmitterintheuplink,thesmartantennagainistakenintoaccountincalculating
Req

Q UL .
TX i ic TS M i

N Tot UL

N Tot DL

Thecarrieristhesameintheuplinkandinthedownlinkformobilesaccessingcircuit
switchedservices.

TX i ic TS M i

isdescribedin"UplinkPowerControl"onpage 615.
isdescribedin"DownlinkPowerControl"onpage 617.

TimeslotselectionbyLoad:Fromtheselectedcarrier,Atollselectsthetimeslotswhicharetheleastloadedandhave
enoughresourceunitsfortheservicebeingaccessedbyMi.
2. AvailableRUs
Carrier selection by Available RUs: The DCA determines the carrier which has the highest number of available
resourceunitswithenoughtimeslotstoaccomodatetheservicebeingusedbyeachmobileMi.Thebestcarrierfora
mobileistheonethathasthehighestnumberofresourceunits:
BestCarrier TX i M i = Carrier

Max RUs

TimeslotselectionbyAvailableRUs:Fromtheselectedcarrier,Atollselectsthetimeslotswhichhavethehighest
numbersofavailableresourceunits.
3. DirectionofArrival
CarrierselectionbyDirectionofArrival:TheDCAdeterminesthedirectionofarrivalofthesignalfromtheserveduser
MiandcheckswhetherthereisaninterferingmobileinthesamedirectionasMi.Atollsearchesforinterferingmobiles
withintheangledefinedbytheAngularStep.Forexample,ifyouenteranangularstepof15degrees,Atollsearches
forinterferingmobileswithin15degreestotherightandtotheleftoftheserveduser,andallocatesadifferentcarrier
thantheonesusedbyanyinterferingmobilesfound.Thebestcarrierforamobileistheonewhichisnotinterfered
byanothermobileinthedirectionofthemobileMi.
BestCarrier TX i M i = Carrier

DoA Mi DoA Mj

Inotherwords,thedirectionofarrivalfortheserveduserMishouldnotbethedirectionofarrivalofaninterfering
mobile.

614

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

TimeslotselectionbyDirectionofArrival:Fromtheselectedcarrier,Atollselectsthetimeslotswhicharenotbeing
usedbyanyothermobileMjlocatedinthesamedirectionastheserveduserMi.
4. Sequential
Sequentialcarrierselection:TheDCAallocatescarrierstoservedusersMiinasequentialorder.
Sequentialtimeslotselection:Fromtheselectedcarrier,AtollallocatestimeslotstoservedusersMiinasequential
order.
AttheendoftheDCA,eachadmittedmobilehasanassociatedcarrierandtimeslots.IncaseofNfrequencymodecompatible
transmitters,anadmittedmobilecanhaveassociatedtimeslotsovermorethanoneslavecarrier.

9.3.2.2.3

UplinkPowerControl
ForeachmobileMi,theuplinkpowercontrolstepcalculatestheuplinkpowerrequiredtosatisfytherequiredqualitylevelon
thetrafficchannel,whichisdefinedfortheservicebeingaccessedbyMi.
IfthemobileMiisconnected(activeorinactive)intheuplinkandhasabestserver TX i ic assignedtoit,Atollcalculatesthe
signalqualityontheuplinktimeslotsallocatedtoMibytheDCA:
TX i ic TS M i

E b
--- N t TCH UL

TX i ic TS M i

Mi

Mi

TX i ic TS M i

TX i ic TS M i
RSCP TCH UL
RSCP TCH UL
Div
C
- G Proc
- G Div
= ------------------------------------------------------= ------------------------------------------------------UL G UL or ---
UL
TX i ic TS M i
TX i ic TS M i
I TCH UL
N Tot UL
N Tot UL

CalculationofUplinkTotalNoise( N Tot UL ):
TheuplinktotalnoiseiscalculatedfortheuplinkconnectionbetweeneachmobileMianditsbestserver TX i ic .
TX i ic TS M i

N Tot UL

TX i ic TS M i

= I Tot UL

TX i

+ N0

Where

TX i ic TS M i

I Tot UL

Mi

RSCP TCH UL TX i ic TS M i

Mj

Mi

RSCP TCH UL TX i ic TS M i

Mi

M j TX i ic TS M i
Mj Mi

1 j RSCP j
TCH UL TX i ic TS M i +

M j TX i ic TS M i
Mj Mi

TX

j
i
RSCP TCH UL TX i ic TS M i 1 F MCJD

M TX ic TS M
j
i
i

Ortho

1 F UL

TX

i
1 F JD and = 0
1

WithoutUsefulSignal
TotalNoise

Theaboveformulagivesthevalueof I Tot UL fortheuplinkconnectionbetweenMiand TX i ic ,takingintoaccountthe

interferencereceivedfromothermobiles,Mj,whicharelocatedintheMibestservercoveragearea,aswellaslocatedinthe
coverageareasofothercells.ThemobileMiisthefocus,i.e.,themobilethatislistenedtobythetransmitter TX i ic .

615

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

Forsk2014

Thefourtermscomprising I Tot UL are:

Theusefulsignalforwhichthereceivedmobileisthefocus(Mi).

TheintracellinterferenceforwhichthebestserveristhesameforthereceivedmobileMjandthefocusMi, TX i ic .

Theintracellinterferenceduetodistortionintheterminaltransmission.

TheextracellinterferenceforwhichthebestserverforthereceivedmobileMjisnot TX i ic .
Mi

P Req TX i ic TS M i
k1
Theuplinkreceivedsignalcodepoweris: RSCP TCH UL TX i ic TS M i = --------------------------------------------------------------Model
LT
Mi

TX i

Mi

Mi

Model

Mi
L Path L L L Body L Indoor M Shadowing
= ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ and P Req TX i ic TS M i is the uplinkrequired mobilepower
TX i
Mi
G G

Model
LT

Mi

Mi

calculatedforthetimeslotallocatedtoMi.IfMiisanHSDPAuser, P Req TX i ic TS M i = 0.1 P Req TX i ic TS M i

Model

In L T

, G

TX i

SA

= G UL and L

TX i

SA

= L UL are calculated according to the smart antenna modelling method used, for

Mi

P Req TX i ic TS M i ,ifasmartantennaisavailableintheuplink.Otherwise, G

TX i

and L

TX i

arereadfromthemainantenna

model.
Interference is updated only for active mobiles on the uplink for circuit and packet
switched services. However, if these mobiles are rejected, they are considered in the
numberofrejectedmobiles.
Mi

CalculationofUplinkRequiredPower( P Req ):
ThenAtolldeterminestherequireduplinkpowerby:
Req

Mi

P Req TX i ic TS M i

E b
--- N t TCH UL
= P Req TX i ic TS M i
-------------------------------------k1
E b TXi ic TS Mi
--- N t TCH UL
Mi

Req

Mi

or P Req TX i ic TS M i

C
---
I TCH UL
-----------------------------------= P Req TX i ic TS M i

TX i ic TS M i
k1
C
---
I TCH UL
Mi

Andif P Req TX i ic TS M i P Min then P Req TX i ic TS M i = P Min

M

If P Req TX i ic TS M i P Max then the mobile Mi is rejected for the reason "Pmob > PmobMax", and
Mi

P Req TX i ic TS M i issetto0.
Mi

Mi

P Min and P Max aresetinthepropertiesoftheterminalusedbythemobileMi.

TX i ic TS M i

Where RSCP TCH UL

TX i

Mi

P Req TX i ic TS M i
k1
= --------------------------------------------------------------Model
LT
Mi

Mi

Model

Mi
L Path L L L Body L Indoor M Shadowing
= ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ and P Req TX i ic TS M i
TX i
Mi
G G
powerforiterationk1transmittedonthetimeslotallocatedtoMi.
Model
LT

616

k1

is the uplink required mobile

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Model

In L T
M

, G

TX

SA

= G UL and L

TX

SA

= L UL are calculated according to the smart antenna modelling method used, for

P Req TX i ic TS M i ,ifasmartantennaisavailableintheuplink.Otherwise, G

TX

and L

TX

arereadfromthemainantenna

model.
Theuplinkrequiredpowersformobilesinactiveintheuplinkaccessingcircuitorpacket
switched services are calculated for information only. However, if these mobiles are
rejected,theyareconsideredinthenumberofrejectedmobiles.

9.3.2.2.4

DownlinkPowerControl
ForeachmobileMi,thedownlinkpowercontrolstepcalculatesthedownlinkpowerforthebestserver TX i ic requiredto
satisfytherequiredqualitylevelonthetrafficchannel,whichisdefinedfortheservicebeingaccessedbyMi.
IfthemobileMiisconnected(activeorinactive)inthedownlinkandhasabestserver TX i ic assignedtoit,Atollcalculates
thesignalqualityontheuplinktimeslotsallocatedtoMibytheDCA:
TX i ic TS M i

E b
--- N t TCH DL

TX i ic TS M i

TX i

TX i

TX i ic TS M i

TX i ic TS M i
RSCP TCH DL
RSCP TCH DL
Div
C

- G Proc
-- G Div
= -------------------------------------------------------
G
or
= -------------------------------------------------------DL
DL
DL
TX i ic TS M i
TX i ic TS M i
I TCH DL
N Tot DL
N Tot DL

CalculationofDownlinkTotalNoise( N Tot DL ):
ThedownlinktotalnoiseiscalculatedforthedownlinkconnectionbetweeneachmobileMianditsbestserver TX i ic .
TX i ic TS M i

N Tot DL

TX i ic TS M i

= I Tot DL

Mi

+ I IC DL ic jc + I MM M i M j + N 0

Where

TX i ic TS M i

I Tot DL

TX i ic TS M i

RSCP Tot DL

Mi

TX i

TX i ic TS M i

RSCP Tot DL

1 i RSCP i
Tot DL

Mj

TX i

M TX ic TS M
j
i
i
Mj Mi
TX

TX ic TS M i

Mj +

M j TX i ic TS M i
Mj Mi

TX j ic TS M i

RSCP Tot DL

Mj

M j TX i ic TS M i

Thefourtermscomprising I Tot DL are:

Theusefulsignalforwhichthereceivedmobileisthefocus(Mi).

TheintracellinterferenceforwhichthebestserveristhesameforthereceivedmobileMjandthefocusMi, TX i ic .

Theintracellinterferenceduetodistortioninthetransmitter.

TheextracellinterferenceforwhichthebestserverforthereceivedmobileMjisnot TX i ic .
TX j jc TS M i

RSCPTot DL

Mi

AllTX

j
I IC DL ic jc = ---------------------------------------------------------------F IRF ic jc

617

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

TX

TX

Forsk2014

Ortho

1 F DL

i
1 F JD and = 0

WithoutUsefulSignal
TotalNoise

I IC DL ic jc istheintercarrierinterferencefromacarrierjctoanothercarriericonthedownlink,whichisreducedbythe
interferencereductionfactor F IRF ic jc definedforthepair(ic,jc).
TX i ic TS M i

TX i ic TS M i

RSCP Tot DL

= RSCP TCH DL

TX i ic TS M i

With RSCP TCH DL

Model

TX ic TS M

i
i
P TCH DL
TX i ic TS M i
P OCCH
k1
= ----------------------------------------- and RSCP OCCH
= -----------------------------Model
Model
LT
LT

TX i ic TS M i

LT

TX i ic TS M i

+ RSCP OCCH

TX i

Mi

Mi

Model

TX i ic TS M i
L Path L L L Body L Indoor M Shadowing
= ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ and P TCH DL
TX i
Mi
G G

k1

isthedownlinktrafficpowertransmitted
TX ic TS M
i
i

onthetimeslotallocatedtoMiduringtheiterationk1.IfMiisanHSDPAuser, P TCH DL
Model

In L T

, G

TX i ic TS M i

P TCH DL

TX i

SA

= G DL and L

TX i

TX ic TS M
i
i

= 0.1 P TCH DL

SA

= L DL are calculated according to the smart antenna modelling method used, for

TX i ic TS M i

onlyandnotfor P OCCH

,ifasmartantennaisavailableinthedownlink.Otherwise, G

TX i

and L

TX i

are

readfromthemainantennamodel.
Mj

RSCPTCH UL Mi
M

j
I MM M i M j = ------------------------------------------------ is the interference from each mobile Mj transmitting in the uplink on the same
F IRF ic jc

timeslotsasthoseonwhichthemobileMiisreceivinginthedownlink.MjcaninterfereMidirectlyifandonlyif:
Mi Mj

ThedistancebetweenMiandMj( d
)islessthantheMaxDistancebetweeninterferingmobilesdefinedbythe
userwhenstartingthesimulation,and
ThedownlinktimeslotofMi(TSMi)isthesameastheuplinktimeslotofMj,(TSMj).

TheinterferencereceivedfromthemobileMjatthemobileMiiscalculatedusingeitherthefreespacepropagationmodelor
theXiamodel.
Mj

Mj
P TCH UL
RSCP TCH UL M i = ------------------L MM

L MM

32.4 + 20 Log F Avg + 20 Log d

=

49 + 30 Log F Avg + 40 Log d

Ifd
Ifd

Mi Mj

Mi Mj

3m

with F Avg beingtheaveragefrequencyinMHzofthe

3m

frequencybandusedbythebestserverofthemobileMi,anddisthedistancebetweenthemobilesMiandMjinkm.
TX i ic TS M i

CalculationofDownlinkRequiredPower( P Req

):

ThenAtolldeterminestherequireddownlinkpowerby:
Req

TX i ic TS M i

P Req

TX i ic TS M i

= P Req

E b
--- N t TCH DL
-------------------------------------k1
E b TXi ic TS M i
--- N t TCH DL
Req

TX i ic TS M i

or P Req

TX i ic TS M i

= P Req

TX i ic TS M i

Andif P Req

618

Min

C
---
I TCH DL
-----------------------------------TX i ic TS M i
k1
C
---
I TCH DL
TX i ic TS M i

P TCH DL Service then P Req

Min

= P TCH DL Service

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
TX ic TS M
i
i

If P Req

TX ic TS M
i
i

Max

P TCH DL Service thenthemobileMiisrejectedforthereason"Ptch>PtchMax",and P Req

isset

to0.
Min

Max

P TCH DL Service and P TCH DL Service aresetinthepropertiesoftheR99bearerassociatedwiththeserviceusedbythe

mobileMi.
TX i ic TS M i

Otherwise,thedownlinktrafficpowerisincremented P TCH DL

TX i ic TS M i

= P TCH DL

TX i ic TS M i

+ P Req

Foreachmobile,AtollalsocalculatesthedownlinktrafficpowerforthedifferentvaluesoftheAngularStep Step .
TX i ic TS M i

RSCP TCH DL

TX i ic TS M i

Step

= RSCP TCH DL

TX i ic TS M i

Where RSCP TCH DL

TX i

SA

G DL
-----------------------SA
L DL Step

TX i ic TS M i

P Req
k1
= ----------------------------------------Model
LT
Mi

Mi

Model

TX i ic TS M i
L Path L L L Body L Indoor M Shadowing
= ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ and P Req
TX i
Mi
G G
1transmittedonthetimeslotallocatedtoMi.
Model
LT

Model

In L T

, G

TX i ic TS M i

P Req

TX i

SA

= G DL and L

TX i

k1

isthedownlinktrafficpowerforiterationk

SA

= L DL are calculated according to the smart antenna modelling method used, for

,ifasmartantennaisavailableinthedownlink.Otherwise, G

TX i

and L

TX i

arereadfromthemainantenna

model.
Thedownlink powerfor mobilesinactive inthe downlinkaccessingcircuitorpacket
switchedservicesarecalculatedforinformationonly.

9.3.2.2.5

UplinkSignalsUpdate
This step uses the uplink terminal powers calculated for each timeslot allocated to the mobiles. The Dynamic Channel
Allocation allocates timeslots and carriers to all the connected and active mobiles. The Dynamic Channel Allocation is
performedonceonly,duringthefirstiteration,andthetimeslotandcarrierallocationremainsthesameforallthefollowing
iterationsofasimulation.
This step updates the received signals for all the mobiles Mi interfered in the uplink by the uplink connection between
interfering mobiles Mj and their best servers TX j ic , only if TX j ic contain Mi in their coverage areas. TX i ic is the
interferedreceiverandMiisthefocus,i.e.,themobilethatislistenedtobythetransmitter TX i ic .
TX i ic TS M i

ForeachmobileMiinterferedbyMjintheuplinkbytheconnectionbetweenMjand TX j ic ,Atollupdates RSCP TCH UL

9.3.2.2.6

DownlinkSignalsUpdate
Forthefirstiteration,i.e.,k=0,thedownlinktrafficpowersforallthedownlinktimeslotsaresetto0Watts.Therefore,for
thefirstiteration,thisstepisperformedforanydownlinktimeslotforeachmobileMithatisconnectedandactive.
However,forthefollowingiterations,thedownlinksignalsupdatestepusestheactualdownlinktrafficpowerscalculatedfor
each timeslot and the actual timeslots allocated to the mobiles. The Dynamic Channel Allocation allocates timeslots and
carriers toalltheconnected andactivemobiles. TheDynamic Channel Allocationis performed once onlyduring the first
iterationandthetimeslotandcarrierallocationremainsthesameforallthefollowingiterationsofasimulation.
Therefore, this step is performed for any downlink timeslot for each mobile Mi that is connected and active for the first
iteration,andthisstepisperformedforallthedownlinktimeslotsallocatedtothemobileMionwhichitisconnectedand
active,forthefollowingiterationssincetheDCAhasbeenperformed.
Thisstepupdatesthereceivedsignalsforallthemobilesinthe TX i ic coverageareawhichareinterferedinthedownlink
bytheconnectionbetween TX i ic andMi.
TX i ic TS M i

ForeachmobileinterferedbyMi,Atollupdates RSCP TCH DL

619

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

Forsk2014

Where TX i ic isthetransmitterconsideredandMiisthefocus,i.e.,themobilethatisthetargetfor TX i ic .

9.3.2.2.7

ControlofRadioResourceLimits(DownlinkTrafficPowerandUplinkLoad)
Thisstepcheckswhetherthedownlinktrafficpowersofthedownlinktimeslotsandtheuplinkloadsoftheuplinktimeslots
ofallthecellssatisfytheconditionsdefinedgloballyorpercellandtimeslot.
DownlinkPowerControl:
AtollverifiesthatthetotalR99powertransmittedbyanycellonanytimeslotdoesnotexceedtheeffectivemaximumcell
powerpertimeslot.Theeffectivemaximumcelltrafficpowerpertimeslotiscalculatedas:
TX i ic TS M i

TX i ic TS M i

P Max DL Eff = P Max DL

TX i ic TS M i

Where P Max DL

%P Max DL

is the maximum cell power per timeslot defined per cell, and %P Max DL is the maximum allowed

downlinkloadeithertakenfromthepropertiesofeachcellorfromthesimulationpropertiesifaglobalvalueisdefined.
ForeachtransmitterTXi,carrieric,anddownlinktimeslot TS M ,
i

TX i ic TS M i

P R99 DL

TX i ic TS M i

= P TCH DL

TX i ic TS M i

If P R99 DL

TX i ic TS M i

+ P OCCH

TX i ic TS M i

P Max DL Eff themobilewiththelowestservicepriorityisrejectedforthereason"DLLoadSaturation".

UplinkLoadControl:
Atoll verifies that the uplink load of any cell on any timeslot does not exceed the maximum uplink cell load allowed per
timeslot.
TX i ic TS M i

Themaximumalloweduplinkcellload, X Max UL

,iseithertakenfromthepropertiesofeachcellorfromthesimulation

propertiesifaglobalvalueisdefined.
ForeachtransmitterTXi,carrieric,anduplinktimeslot TS M ,
i

TX i ic TS M i

If X UL

TX i ic TS M i

X Max UL

themobilewiththelowestservicepriorityisrejectedforthereason"ULLoadSaturation".

Theuplinkloadisgivenby:
TX i ic TS M i

X UL

TX i ic TS M i

N Tot UL
= ----------------------------------------------- ifnosmartantennaisusedbythetransmitterintheuplink.
TX i ic TS M i
TX i
N Tot UL
+ N0

Ifasmartantennaisusedbythetransmitterintheuplink,thesmartantennagainistakenintoaccountinthecalculationof
uplinkload.

9.3.2.3 HSDPAPartoftheAlgorithm
ThefollowingcalculationsaremadeforallHSDPAmobiles(Mi).

9.3.2.3.1

HSDPAPowerAllocation
TX i ic

Thetotaltransmittedpowerofthecell( P Tot DL )isthesumoftheR99transmittedpowerandtheHSDPApowers.

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

P Tot DL = P R99 DL + P HR

TX i ic

TX i ic

+ P HS SCCH + P HS PDSCH

TheHSDPApowers,i.e.,theHSSCCHandHSPDSCHpowersarecalculatedasfollows:

HSSCCHPower:
HSSCCHchannelsaretransmittedonDLtraffictimeslots.ThemaximumnumberofsupportedHSSCCHchannelsis
definedpercell.PowercanbeallocatedtoHSSCCHstaticallyordynamically:

StaticAllocation
ThestaticHSSCCHpowerisdefinedinthepropertiesoftheHSDPAcell.

620

DynamicAllocation

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

TX ic
TX ic
E TXi ic
Req
i
i
HSSCCHpoweriscalculatedfor ----c-
= Q HS SCCH Mobility sothat P HS SCCH P Available HS SCCH .
N t HS SCCH
TX ic
i

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

Where P Available HS SCCH = P Max DL Eff P R99 DL P HR

TX i ic

TX ic
i
,and P R99 DL

TX ic
i
P TCH DL

TX ic
i
P OCCH

is the power available for HSSCCH in the cell

.
TX i ic

TX i ic

Theeffectivemaximumcelltrafficpowerpertimeslotiscalculatedas: P Max DL Eff = P Max DL %P Max DL .

TX ic
i

P Max DL isthemaximumpowerdefinedpercell,and %P Max DL isthemaximumalloweddownlinkloadeither

takenfromthepropertiesofeachcellorfromthesimulationpropertiesifaglobalvalueisdefined.
TX ic
i

TX i ic

P HS SCCH

TX ic

TX ic

Ec
i
i
i
--- N
RSCP HS SCCH
N t HS SCCH Tot DL

Model
= ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- LT
TX i

TX

TX i ic

Where N Tot DL is the downlink total noise calculated in "Downlink Power Control" on page 617,

TX i

TX i

Ortho

1 F DL
TX i

Mi

1 F JD and = 0
1
Mi

Mi

WithoutUsefulSignal
TotalNoise

Model

TX i ic
L Path L L L Body L Indoor M Shadowing
= ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ and P HS SCCH istheHSSCCHpowercalculatedforthe
TX i
Mi
G G
timeslotsallocatedtoMi.
Model
LT

Model

In L T

, G

TX

SA

= G DL and L

TX

SA

= L DL arecalculatedaccordingtothesmartantennamodellingmethodused,for

TX i ic

P HS SCCH , if a smart antenna is available in the downlink. Otherwise, G

TX i

and L

TX i

are read from the main

antennamodel.

HSPDSCHPower:
HSPDSCH channels are transmitted on DL traffic timeslots. Power can be allocated to HSPDSCH statically or
dynamically:

StaticAllocation
ThestaticHSPDSCHpowerisdefinedinthepropertiesoftheHSDPAcell.

DynamicAllocation
HSPDSCHpoweriscalculatedasfollows:
TX ic
i

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

P HS PDSCH = P Max DL Eff P R99 DL P HR

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX ic
i

P HS SCCH

TX i ic

Where P R99 DL = P TCH DL + P OCCH . The effective maximum cell traffic power per timeslot is calculated as:
TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

P Max DL Eff = P Max DL %P Max DL . P Max DL isthemaximumpowerdefinedpercell,and %P Max DL isthe

maximumalloweddownlinkloadeithertakenfromthepropertiesofeachcellorfromthesimulationproperties
ifaglobalvalueisdefined.
TheHSSICHpoweriscalculatedasfollows:

HSSICHPower:
HSSICHchannelscanbetransmittedonanyULtraffictimeslot.ThemaximumnumberofsupportedHSSICHchannels
isdefinedpercell.PowercanbeallocatedtoHSSICHstaticallyordynamically:

StaticAllocation
ThestaticHSSICHpowerisdefinedinthepropertiesoftheterminalusedbytheHSDPAmobileMi.

DynamicAllocation

621

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

Forsk2014

M
TX ic
E TXi ic
Req
i
i
HSSICH power is calculated for ----c-
= Q HS SICH Mobility so that P HS SICH P Max HS SICH and
N t HS SICH
M

P HS SICH P Max HS SICH .

TX ic
i

TX ic

Ec
i
i
i
--- N
RSCP HS SICH
N t HS SICH Tot UL

- L Model
= ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------T
Mi

Mi

P HS SICH

TX ic
i

Where N Tot UL is the uplink total noise calculated in "Uplink Power Control" on page 615,

Ortho

1 F UL

TX i

TX

i
1 F JD and = 0
1
Mi

Mi

WithoutUsefulSignal
TotalNoise

Model

M
L Path L L L Body L Indoor M Shadowing
i
= ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ and P HS SICH istheHSSICHpowercalculatedforthe
TX i
Mi
G G
timeslotsallocatedtoMi.
Model

LT

Model

In L T

, G

TX i

SA

= G UL and L

TX i

SA

= L UL arecalculatedaccordingtothesmartantennamodellingmethodused,

Mi

for P HS SICH , if a smart antenna is available in the uplink. Otherwise, G

TX i

and L

TX i

are read from the main

antennamodel.
TX i ic

Thetotaltransmittedpowerofthecell( P Tot DL )isthesumoftheR99transmittedpowerandtheHSDPApowers.

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

P Tot DL = P R99 DL + P HR

9.3.2.3.2

TX i ic

TX i ic

+ P HS SCCH + P HS PDSCH

ConnectionStatusandNumberofHSDPAUsers
HSDPAuserscannotreceiveHSSCCHandHSPDSCHpowerssimultaneously.HSPDSCHarrives3timeslotsaftertheHSSCCH.
HSSICHis9timeslotsaftertheHSPDSCH.AtollassumesthatanactiveHSDPAuserhasthesameprobabilityofreceivingHS
SCCH and HSPDSCH, and transmitting HSSICH because their occurrence is equally likely. Therefore, each HSDPA user is
assignedasubconnectionstatusrandomly.Thesubconnectionstatuscanbe:

HSSCCH:HSDPAmobilethatisreceivingHSSCCHpower
HSPDSCH:HSDPAmobilethatisreceivingtrafficpower
HSSICH:HSDPAmobilethatistransmittingHSSICHpower

ThenumberofactiveHSDPAusersbelongingtoeachsubconnectionstatusis1/3rdofthetotalnumberofactiveHSDPA
users.
n HS SCCH isthemaximumnumberofHSSCCHchannelsand n HS SICH isthemaximumnumberofHSSICHchannelsthatthe
cellcanmanage.EachHSDPAuserconsumesoneHSSCCHandHSSICHchannels.Therefore,atagiveninstance,thenumber
ofconnectedHSDPAuserscannotexceedthenumberofHSSCCHandHSSICHchannelspercell.Themaximumnumberof
HSDPAusers( n Max )correspondstothemaximumnumberofHSDPAusersthatthecellcansupport.

9.3.2.3.3

HSDPAAdmissionControl
HSSCCH
HSSCCHadmissioncontrolisperformedforactiveHSDPAusersconnectedtoADCHbearersonthedownlinkandhavingan
HSSCCHsubconnectionstatus.EachcellisabletomanageamaximumnumberofHSSCCHchannels, n HS SCCH .Duringthe
R99part,theDCAprovidesaDLtimeslotwithoneSF16resourceunitthathasthedownlinkEc/Nthigherthantherequired
quality.Ifnocellwithsucharesourceunitisavailable,theuserisrejected.
HSSICH
HSSICHadmissioncontrolisperformedforactiveHSDPAusersconnectedtoADCHbearersontheuplinkandhavinganHS
SICHsubconnectionstatus.EachcellisabletomanageamaximumnumberofHSSICHchannels, n HS SICH .DuringtheR99
part,theDCAprovidesanULtimeslotwithoneSF16resourceunitthathastheuplinkEc/Nthigherthantherequiredquality.
Ifnocellwithsucharesourceunitisavailable,theuserisrejected.

622

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

HSPDSCH
SchedulingisperformedforactiveHSDPAusersconnectedtoADCHbearersonthedownlinkandhavinganHSPDSCHsub
connectionstatus.Theschedulingisperformedasfollows:
1. EachHSPDSCHuserisconsideredastheonlyserveduser.TheschedulerallocatesthebestavailableHSDPAbearerto
eachuser.ThebestavailableHSDPAbearerisselecteddependingontheusersEc/Nt.Ifnobearercanbeallocated
duetolowEc/Nt,theuserisrejectedforthereason"HSDPASchedulerSaturation".
TherequiredHSPDSCHEc/Ntvalueisreadfromreceiverequipmentproperties.Foreachbearer,Atollchecksthatthe
Ec/Nt reaches the quality target. HSPDSCH Ec/Nt is calculated by taking into account all intra and extra cells
interferences.
2. TheschedulersortstheHSPDSCHuserstowhombearershavebeenassignedintheorderofdecreasingRLCpeak
throughputs.Iftwousershavethesamebearer,theuserwiththehigherEc/Nthasthehigherrank.
3. TheschedulerconsidersthegroupofHSPDSCHuserstowhombearers,HSSCCH,andHSSICHhavebeenassigned.
ThenumberofHSPDSCHuserscannotexceedthemaximumnumberofHSDPAusers( n Max )supportedbythecell.If
thereareenoughHSDPApowerandresourceunitsavailableinordertoobtainaHSDPAbearer,theuserswillbe
connected.Otherwise,theywillbedelayedandtheirconnectionstatuswillbeHSDPADelayed.
4. OtherHSPDSCHuserswillberejectedforthereason"HSDPASchedulerSaturation".
ForNfrequencymodecompatibletransmitters,theresourceunitsavailableinthemasterandslavecarrierscanbeshared,
i.e.,amobilecanbeconnectedtotimeslotsbelongingmorethanonecarrier.

9.3.2.3.4

HSDPADynamicChannelAllocation
ForeachmobileconnectedtotheADPCHbearer:
1. AtollselectstheHSDPAbearersthatmatchtothemobileterminalandUEcategoryparameters.
2. Foreachbearersupportedbyamobile:
a. Theschedulersearchesforthebestcollectionof"n"orderedtimeslotsthatcanprovideenoughresourceunitsto
supporttheservice,andwhoseEc/Ntisbetterthantheminimumrequiredandenoughtoreachthebearers
resourceunitrequirements.ThebestisdeterminedbyapplyingtheR99DynamicChannelAllocationalgorithm.
b. TheschedulercalculatestheHSPDSCHEc/Ntforeachtimeslotofthebestcollection.TheEc/Ntvalueassociated
withthemobilebearerpairistheworstoneofallselectedtimeslots.
c. Iftheschedulerisunabletofindasatisfactorytimeslotcollection,thebearerisremovedfromthelistofsupported
bearers.
3. ThemobileisconnectedtothesupportedbearerhavingthehighestRLCpeakthroughput.Iftwobearershavethe
sameRLCpeakthroughput,thebestoneistheonewiththehighestEc/Nt.

9.3.2.3.5

RessourceUnitSaturation
Foreachtimeslot,aminimumandmaximumnumberofresourceunitsforHSDPAusersaredefinedinthecellproperties.
Atolldynamicallyallocatestherequirednumberofcodesrespectingtheselimitations.TheminimumnumberofHSDPAcodes
isexcludedfromthesetofcodesavailableforR99users.Theschedulerchecksifenoughcodesareavailablefortheselected
HSDPAbearer(takingintoaccountthemaximumnumberofHSDPAcodes).Ifnot,theschedulerallocatesalowerHSDPA
bearerwhichneedsfewercodes.IftherearenomoreresourceunitsavailableforthelowestHSDPAbearer,theuserwillbe
delayedorrejected.

9.3.2.4 ConvergenceCriteria
Theconvergencecriteriaareevaluatedforeachiterationandcanbewrittenasfollows:
Max TX i ic TS Mi

DL = Int
P Err
100

AllTX i

UL

TX i ic TS M i
TX i ic TS M i

N Tot UL
Max N Tot UL

k
k

1
= Int
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 100
TX

ic

TS

AllTX

i
i
i
N Tot UL

k
TX ic TS M
i
i

Where, P Err

isgivenby:

623

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

Forsk2014
TX ic TS M
i
i

TX ic TS M
i
i
P Err

TX ic TS M
i
i

P Rec
P Rec
Max

k1
Step
Step
=
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- withsmartantennas.
TX ic TS M
0 Step 360
i
i
P Rec

TX ic TS M
i
i
P Err

TX ic TS M
i
i

Step

TX ic TS M
i
i

P Rec
P Rec
k
k 1 withoutsmartantennas.
= ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------TX i ic TS M i
P Rec
k

Atollstopsthesimulationsinthefollowingcases:

Convergence:Betweentwosuccessiveiterations, DL and UL arelessthanorequaltotheirrespectivethresholds

(definedwhencreatingasimulation).
Example:Letusassumethatthemaximumnumberofiterationsis100,andtheULandDLconvergencethresholds
aresetto5 %.If DL 5 and UL 5 betweenthe4thandthe5thiteration,Atollstopsthealgorithmafterthe5th
iteration.Thesimulationhasconverged.

Divergence:After30iterations, DL and/or UL arestillhigherthantheirrespectivethresholdsandfromthe30th

iteration, DL and/or UL donotdecreaseduringthenext15successiveiterations.
Examples:Letusassumethatthemaximumnumberofiterationsis100,andtheULandDLconvergencethresholds
aresetto5 %.
a. Afterthe30thiteration, DL and/or DL equal100anddonotdecreaseduringthenext15successiveiterations.
Atollstopsthealgorithmatthe46thiteration.Thesimulationhasnotconverged.
b. Afterthe30thiteration, DL and/or UL equal80,theystartdecreasingslowlyuntilthe40thiteration(without
goingunderthethresholds)andthen,donotchangeduring15successiveiterations.Atollstopsthealgorithmat
the56thiterationwithoutconverging.

LastIteration:If DL and/or UL arestillmuchhigherthantheirrespectivethresholdsafterthelastiteration,the

simulationhasnotconverged.If DL and UL arelowerthantheirrespectivethresholds,thesimulationhasreached
convergence.

9.4 TDSCDMAPredictionStudies
For each TBC transmitter, TXi, Atoll determines the value of the selected parameter on each studied pixel inside the TXi
calculationarea.EachpixelwithintheTXicalculationareaisconsideredaprobereceiver.
Coveragestudyparameterstobesetare:

ThestudyconditionstodeterminetheserviceareaofeachTBCtransmitter
Thedisplaysettingstoforcolouringthecoveredpixels

AtollusestheparametersenteredintheConditiontabofthecoveragestudypropertiesdialoguetodeterminepixelscovered
bytheeachtransmitter.Coveragepredictiondisplayresolutionisindependentofthepathlossmatrixandgeographicdata
resolutions,andcanbedifferentforeachcoverageprediction.Coveragepredictionsarecalculatedusingbilinearinterpolation
ofmultiresolutionpathlossmatrices(similartotheevaluationofsitealtitudes).

9.4.1 PCCPCHReceptionAnalysis(Eb/Nt)or(C/I)
E
C
These coverage predictions calculate and display the Eb/Nt or C/I on the PCCPCH, ----b-
or ---
. The
N t P CCPCH
I P CCPCH
coveragepredictionsarecalculatedforagivensetofaterminaltype,amobilitytype,aservice,acarrier,andforTS0.Thebest
serversforthecoveragepredictionsaredeterminedaccordingtothePCCPCHRSCPfromthecarrierwiththehighestPCCPCH
power,orfromthemastercarrierincaseofNfrequencymodecompatibletransmitters.Afterwards,thecoveragepredictions
arecalculatedfortheselectedcarrier.Iftheselectedcarrierdoesnotexistonatransmitter,therewillnotbeanypixels
coveredbythistransmitter.Ifyouperformthesecoveragepredictionsforthebestcarrier,AtollcalculatestheEb/NtorC/I
considering:

624

thepreferredcarrieroftheselectedservice,or
thecarrierwiththehighestPCCPCHpower,ifnopreferredcarrierisdefinedfortheservice,or
themastercarrierincaseofNfrequencymodecompatibletransmitters.

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

TX i ic coverage area where

The pixels in the

TX ic

TX ic
i

Min

RSCP P CCPCH Max (TAdd P CCPCH,RSCP P CCPCH) , and

TX ic

i
E b i
Req
Req
---C
---
N t P CCPCH Q P CCPCH or I P CCPCH Q P CCPCH arecoveredandcolouredaccordingtotheselecteddisplayoption.
TX

TX ic
i

TX

TX ic

i
i
TX i ic
E TXi ic
RSCP P CCPCH
RSCP P CCPCH
Proc
C
---
G
Where ----b-
= -----------------------------------------------
and
=
-----------------------------------------------P

CCPCH
TX i ic
I P CCPCH
TX i ic
N t P CCPCH
N Tot DL
N Tot DL
i

TX i ic

TX i ic
P P CCPCH
RSCP P CCPCH = ---------------------LT

Thedownlinktotalnoiseiscalculatedasfollows:
TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

Term

N Tot DL = I Intra DL + I Extra DL + I IC DL ic jc + N 0

Where
TX i ic

TX i ic

I Intra DL = RSCP P CCPCH

With

TX i

TX ic
i

I Extra DL =

TX i

Ortho

1 F DL

TX i

TX i ic

+ RSCP OCCH TS0

Term

1 F JD

TX ic
j

TX i

and = 0
1

WithoutUsefulSignal
TotalNoise

TX ic
j

RSCPP CCPCH + RSCPOCCH TS0

ji

TX j jc

TX j jc

RSCPP CCPCH + RSCPOCCH TS0

TX

j
I IC DL ic jc = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------F IRF ic jc

I IC DL ic jc istheintercarrierinterferencefromacarrierjctoanothercarriericonthedownlink,whichisreducedbythe
interferencereductionfactor F IRF ic jc definedforthepair(ic,jc).
TX i ic

TX i ic

RSCP OCCH TS0

P OCCH TS0
= -----------------------LT

TX i

Eb Nt

Term

L Path L L
L Body L Indoor M Shadowing
L T = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TX i
Term
G G

TX i

Term

and N 0

aredefinedin"DefinitionsandFormulas"onpage 593.

CoverageDisplay
Itispossibletocolourthetransmitterserviceareasusingauniquecolourpertransmitter,orcolourthepixelsinthecoverage
areasbyanytransmitterattributeorothercriteriasuchas:

Eb/NtorC/I(dB)
AtollcalculatestheEb/NtorC/Ioneachpixelofthe TX i ic bestservercoveragearea.Thepixelcolourdependson
the Eb/Nt or C/I level. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be
managed.ThereareasmanylayersasthresholdsdefinedintheDisplaytab(Predictionproperties).Foreachlayer,a
TX i ic

E
pixel is covered if ----b-
Threshold or
N t P CCPCH

TX i ic

C
---
Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and
I P CCPCH

displayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

Eb/NtMarginorC/IMargin(dB)
Atoll calculates the Eb/Nt or C/I margin on each pixel of the TX i ic best server coverage area. The pixel colour
dependsontheEb/NtorC/Imarginvalue.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityinthe
workspacecanbemanaged.ThereareasmanylayersasthresholdsdefinedintheDisplaytab(Predictionproperties).

625

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

Forsk2014

TX ic
E TXi ic
C i
Req
Eb Nt
Req
CI
Foreachlayer,apixeliscoveredif ----b-
Q P CCPCH M P CCPCH or ---
Q P CCPCH M P CCPCH .
N t P CCPCH
I P CCPCH

Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

CellEdgeCoverageProbability(%)
Atollcalculatesthecelledgecoverageprobabilityoneachpixelofthe TX i ic bestservercoveragearea.Thepixel
colourdependsonthecelledgecoverageprobabilityvalue.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhose
visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab
(Prediction properties). For each layer, a pixel is covered if
TX i ic

C
---
I P CCPCH

TX i ic

E b
--- N t P CCPCH

Req

Q P CCPCH or
CECP

Req

Q P CCPCH .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.
CECP

9.4.2 DwPCHReceptionAnalysis(C/I)
C
ThiscoveragepredictioncalculatesanddisplaystheC/IontheDwPCH, ---
.Thecoveragepredictioniscalculatedfora
I DwPCH
givensetofaterminaltype,amobilitytype,aservice,acarrier,andforDwPTS.Thebestserverforthecoveragepredictionis
determinedaccordingtothePCCPCHRSCPfromthecarrierwiththehighestPCCPCHpower,orfromthemastercarrierin
caseofNfrequencymodecompatibletransmitters.Afterwards,thecoveragepredictioniscalculatedfortheselectedcarrier.
Iftheselectedcarrierdoesnotexistonatransmitter,therewillnotbeanypixelscoveredbythistransmitter.Ifyouperform
thiscoveragepredictionforthebestcarrier,AtollcalculatestheC/Iconsidering:

thepreferredcarrieroftheselectedservice,or
thecarrierwiththehighestPCCPCHpower,ifnopreferredcarrierisdefinedfortheservice,or
themastercarrierincaseofNfrequencymodecompatibletransmitters.
TX i ic

TX ic

C
i
Min
Req
Thepixelsinthe TX i ic coverageareawhere RSCP P CCPCH Max (TAdd P CCPCH,RSCP P CCPCH) and ---
Q DwPCH
I DwPCH
arecoveredandcolouredaccordingtotheselecteddisplayoption.
TX

TX ic

TX ic
i

RSCP DwPCH
C i
= -----------------------------------------Where ---
I DwPCH
TX ic
i
N Tot DL
TX i ic

RSCP DwPCH

TX ic
i

P DwPCH
= ---------------LT

Thedownlinktotalnoiseiscalculatedasfollows:
TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

Term

N Tot DL = I Intra DL + I Extra DL + I IC DL ic jc + N 0

Where
TX i ic

TX i ic

I Intra DL = RSCP DwPCH

With
TX i ic

TX i

I Extra DL =

TX i

Ortho

1 F DL

TX i

Term

1 F JD

and = 0
1

WithoutUsefulSignal
TotalNoise

TX j ic

RSCPDwPCH
ji

TX jc
j

RSCPDwPCH
TX

j
I IC DL ic jc = ---------------------------------------F IRF ic jc

I IC DL ic jc istheintercarrierinterferencefromacarrierjctoanothercarriericonthedownlink,whichisreducedbythe
interferencereductionfactor F IRF ic jc definedforthepair(ic,jc).

626

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
TX

Eb Nt

Term

L Path L L
L Body L Indoor M Shadowing
L T = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TX
i
Term
G G

TX

Term

and N 0

aredefinedin"DefinitionsandFormulas"onpage 593.

CoverageDisplay
Itispossibletocolourthetransmitterserviceareasusingauniquecolourpertransmitter,orcolourthepixelsinthecoverage
areasbyanytransmitterattributeorothercriteriasuchas:

C/I(dB)
AtollcalculatestheC/Ioneachpixelofthe TX i ic bestservercoveragearea.ThepixelcolourdependsontheC/I
level.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.Thereareas
many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, a pixel is covered if
TX i ic

C
---
Threshold .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.
I DwPCH

C/IMargin(dB)
AtollcalculatestheC/Imarginoneachpixelofthe TX i ic bestservercoveragearea.Thepixelcolourdependsonthe
C/Imarginvalue.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.
ThereareasmanylayersasthresholdsdefinedintheDisplaytab(Predictionproperties).Foreachlayer,apixelis
TX ic

C i
Req
CI
coveredif ---
Q DwPCH M DwPCH .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetween
I DwPCH
layers.

CellEdgeCoverageProbability(%)
Atollcalculatesthecelledgecoverageprobabilityoneachpixelofthe TX i ic bestservercoveragearea.Thepixel
colourdependsonthecelledgecoverageprobabilityvalue.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhose
visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab
TX ic

C i
(Predictionproperties).Foreachlayer,apixeliscoveredif ---
I DwPCH

Req

Q DwPCH .Eachlayerisassignedacolour
CECP

anddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

9.4.3 DownlinkTCHRSCPCoverage
This coverage prediction calculates and displays the RSCP for the downlink traffic channel, RSCP TCH DL . The coverage
predictioniscalculatedforagivensetofaterminaltype,amobilitytype,aservice,acarrier,andforadownlinktimeslot.The
bestserverforthecoveragepredictionisdeterminedaccordingtothePCCPCHRSCPfromthecarrierwiththehighestP
CCPCHpower,orfromthemastercarrierincaseofNfrequencymodecompatibletransmitters.Afterwards,thecoverage
predictioniscalculatedfortheselectedcarrier.Iftheselectedcarrierdoesnotexistonatransmitter,therewillnotbeany
pixels covered by this transmitter. If you perform this coverage prediction for the best carrier, Atoll calculates the RSCP
considering:

thepreferredcarrieroftheselectedservice,or
thecarrierwiththehighestPCCPCHpower,ifnopreferredcarrierisdefinedfortheservice,or
themastercarrierincaseofNfrequencymodecompatibletransmitters.

The pixels in the

TX ic
i

TX i ic coverage area where

TX i ic

Min

RSCP P CCPCH Max (TAdd P CCPCH,RSCP P CCPCH) and

Req

RSCP TCH DL RSCP TCH DL Service Mobility arecoveredandcolouredaccordingtotheselecteddisplayoption.

TX ic
i

Where RSCP TCH DL isgivenby:

Max

TX ic
P TCH DL Service
i
RSCP TCH DL = ------------------------------------------Model
LT

627

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

Forsk2014
TX

Term

Model

L Path L L
L Body L Indoor M Shadowing
Max
= ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- and P TCH DL Service isthemaximumdownlinktrafficpower
TX
i
Term
G G
definedfortheselectedservice.
Model
LT

Model

In L T

, G

TX

SA

= G DL and L

TX

SA

= L DL are calculated according to the smart antenna modelling method used, for

Max

P TCH DL Service ,ifasmartantennaisavailableinthedownlink.Otherwise, G

TX i

and L

TX i

arereadfromthemainantenna

model.
CoverageDisplay
Itispossibletocolourthetransmitterserviceareasusingauniquecolourpertransmitter,orcolourthepixelsinthecoverage
areasbyanytransmitterattributeorothercriteriasuchas:

DLTCHRSCP(dBm)
AtollcalculatestheDLTCHRSCPoneachpixelofthe TX i ic bestservercoveragearea.Thepixelcolourdependson
theRSCPlevel.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.
ThereareasmanylayersasthresholdsdefinedintheDisplaytab(Predictionproperties).Foreachlayer,apixelis
TX i ic

coveredif RSCP TCH DL Threshold .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

RSCPMargin(dB)
AtollcalculatestheRSCPmarginoneachpixelofthe TX i ic bestservercoveragearea.Thepixelcolourdependson
the RSCP margin value. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be
managed.ThereareasmanylayersasthresholdsdefinedintheDisplaytab(Predictionproperties).Foreachlayer,a
TX i ic

Req

RSCP

pixeliscoveredif RSCP TCH DL RSCP TCH DL Service Mobility M TCH DL .Eachlayerisassignedacolourand

displayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

CellEdgeCoverageProbability(%)
Atollcalculatesthecelledgecoverageprobabilityoneachpixelofthe TX i ic bestservercoveragearea.Thepixel
colourdependsonthecelledgecoverageprobabilityvalue.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhose
visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab
TX i ic

(Prediction properties). For each layer, a pixel is covered if RSCP TCH DL

Req

CECP

RSCP TCH DL Service Mobility .

Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

9.4.4 UplinkTCHRSCPCoverage
ThiscoveragepredictioncalculatesanddisplaystheRSCPfortheuplinktrafficchannel, RSCP TCH UL .Thecoverageprediction
iscalculatedforagivensetofaterminaltype,amobilitytype,aservice,acarrier,andforanuplinktimeslot.Thebestserver
forthecoveragepredictionisdeterminedaccordingtothePCCPCHRSCPfromthecarrierwiththehighestPCCPCHpower,
or from the master carrier in case of Nfrequency mode compatible transmitters. Afterwards, the coverage prediction is
calculatedfortheselectedcarrier.Iftheselectedcarrierdoesnotexistonatransmitter,therewillnotbeanypixelscovered
bythistransmitter.Ifyouperformthiscoveragepredictionforthebestcarrier,AtollcalculatestheRSCPconsidering:

thepreferredcarrieroftheselectedservice,or
thecarrierwiththehighestPCCPCHpower,ifnopreferredcarrierisdefinedfortheservice,or
themastercarrierincaseofNfrequencymodecompatibletransmitters.

The pixels in the

TX i ic

TX i ic coverage area where

Req

TX i ic

Min

RSCP P CCPCH Max (TAdd P CCPCH,RSCP P CCPCH) and

RSCP TCH UL RSCP TCH UL Service Mobility arecoveredandcolouredaccordingtotheselecteddisplayoption.

TX i ic

Where RSCP TCH UL isgivenby:

Term

TX i ic
P Max
RSCP TCH UL = -------------Model
LT

628

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
TX

Term

Model

L Path L L
L Body L Indoor M Shadowing
Term
= ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- and P Max isthemaximumuplinktrafficpowerdefinedforthe
TX
i
Term
G G
selectedterminal.
Model
LT

Model

In L T

, G

TX

SA

= G UL and L

TX

SA

Term

= L UL arecalculatedaccordingtothesmartantennamodellingmethodused,for P Max ,if

asmartantennaisavailableintheuplink.Otherwise, G

TX i

and L

TX i

arereadfromthemainantennamodel.

CoverageDisplay
Itispossibletocolourthetransmitterserviceareasusingauniquecolourpertransmitter,orcolourthepixelsinthecoverage
areasbyanytransmitterattributeorothercriteriasuchas:

ULTCHRSCP(dBm)
AtollcalculatestheULTCHRSCPoneachpixelofthe TX i ic bestservercoveragearea.Thepixelcolourdependson
theRSCPlevel.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.
ThereareasmanylayersasthresholdsdefinedintheDisplaytab(Predictionproperties).Foreachlayer,apixelis
TX i ic

coveredif RSCP TCH UL Threshold .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

RSCPMargin(dB)
AtollcalculatestheRSCPmarginoneachpixelofthe TX i ic bestservercoveragearea.Thepixelcolourdependson
the RSCP margin value. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be
managed.ThereareasmanylayersasthresholdsdefinedintheDisplaytab(Predictionproperties).Foreachlayer,a
TX ic
i

Req

RSCP

pixeliscoveredif RSCP TCH UL RSCP TCH UL Service Mobility M TCH UL .Eachlayerisassignedacolourand

displayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

CellEdgeCoverageProbability(%)
Atollcalculatesthecelledgecoverageprobabilityoneachpixelofthe TX i ic bestservercoveragearea.Thepixel
colourdependsonthecelledgecoverageprobabilityvalue.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhose
visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab
TX i ic

(Prediction properties). For each layer, a pixel is covered if RSCP TCH UL

Req

CECP

RSCP TCH UL Service Mobility .

Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

9.4.5 DownlinkTotalNoise
This coverage prediction calculates and displays the total noise on the downlink, N Tot DL . The coverage prediction is
calculatedforagivensetofaterminaltype,amobilitytype,aservice,acarrier,andforadownlinktimeslot.Thebestserver
forthecoveragepredictionisdeterminedaccordingtothePCCPCHRSCPfromthecarrierwiththehighestPCCPCHpower,
or from the master carrier in case of Nfrequency mode compatible transmitters. Afterwards, the coverage prediction is
calculatedfortheselectedcarrier.Iftheselectedcarrierdoesnotexistonatransmitter,therewillnotbeanypixelscovered
bythistransmitter.Ifyouperformthiscoveragepredictionforthebestcarrier,Atollcalculatesthedownlinknoiseforallthe
carriers but keeps the worst case value, i.e., the most interfered carrier. You can choose to display the minimum, the
maximum,ortheaveragetotalnoisevaluesfromamongthevaluescalculatedforallthecarriers.Pixelsarecoveredand
colouredaccordingtothetotaldownlinknoisethresholdsdefinedinthedisplayoptions.
Totaldownlinknoiseisgivenby: N Tot DL =

Term

RSCP TCH DL + RSCP OCCH + N 0

AllTX,c,andTS

P TCH DL
P OCCH
- and RSCP OCCH = -------------With RSCP TCH DL = ------------------Model
Model
LT
LT
TX

Term

Model

L Path L L
L Body L Indoor M Shadowing
= ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- and P TCH DL and P TCH DL arerespectivelythedownlinktraffic
TX
Term
i
G G
powerandtheothercommoncontrolchannelpowerfortheselectedtimeslot.
Model
LT

629

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

Model

In L T

, G

Forsk2014
TX

SA

= G DL and L

TX

SA

= L DL are calculated according to the smart antenna modelling method used, for

Max

P TCH DL Service ,ifasmartantennaisavailableinthedownlink.Otherwise, G

TX

and L

TX

arereadfromthemainantenna

model.

9.4.6 DownlinkServiceAreaAnalysis(Eb/Nt)or(C/I)
E
C
ThesecoveragepredictionscalculateanddisplaytheEb/NtorC/Ionthedownlinktrafficchannel, ----b-
or ---
.
N t TCH DL
I TCH DL
The coverage predictions are calculated for a given set of a terminal type, a mobility type, a service, a carrier, and for a
downlinktimeslot.ThebestserversforthecoveragepredictionsaredeterminedaccordingtothePCCPCHRSCPfromthe
carrierwiththehighestPCCPCHpower,orfromthemastercarrierincaseofNfrequencymodecompatibletransmitters.
Afterwards, the coverage predictions are calculated for the selected carrier. If the selected carrier does not exist on a
transmitter,therewillnotbeanypixelscoveredbythistransmitter.Ifyouperformthesecoveragepredictionsforthebest
carrier,AtollcalculatestheEb/NtorC/Iconsidering:

The

thepreferredcarrieroftheselectedservice,or
thecarrierwiththehighestPCCPCHpower,ifnopreferredcarrierisdefinedfortheservice,or
themastercarrierincaseofNfrequencymodecompatibletransmitters.
pixels

in

TX i ic

the

coverage

area

where

TX i ic

Min

RSCP P CCPCH Max (TAdd P CCPCH,RSCP P CCPCH) ,

TX ic

TX ic

TX i ic
Eb i
C i
Req
Req
Req
RSCP TCH DL RSCP TCH DL Service Mobility , and -----
Q TCH DL or ---
Q TCH DL are covered and
N t TCH DL
I TCH DL

colouredaccordingtotheselecteddisplayoption.
TX i ic

TX i

TX i

TX i ic

TX ic
i
E TXi ic
RSCP TCH DL
RSCP TCH DL
Div
C
- G Proc
- G Div
Where ----b-
= --------------------------------------------= --------------------------------------------DL G DL and ---
DL
TX

ic

TX i ic
N t TCH DL
I TCH DL
i
N Tot DL
N Tot DL
Max

TX i ic
P TCH DL Service
With RSCP TCH DL = ------------------------------------------ Eb Nt DL
LT
TX

Eb Nt

Term

DL

L Path L L
L Body L Indoor M Shadowing
Max
LT
= ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- and P TCH DL Service is the maximum downlink traffic
TX
Term
i
G G
powerdefinedfortheselectedservice.
Eb Nt DL

Eb Nt

In L T

DL

, G

TX

SA

= G DL and L

TX

SA

= L DL are calculated according to the smart antenna modelling method used, for

Max

P TCH DL Service ,ifasmartantennaisavailableinthedownlink.Otherwise, G

TX i

and L

TX i

model.
TX ic
i

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

Term

N Tot DL = I Intra DL + I Extra DL + I IC DL ic jc + N 0

Where

TX i ic
TX i ic
TX i ic
TX i
TX i
Ortho
Term
I Intra DL = 1 F DL 1 F JD + 1 RSCP TCH DL + RSCP OCCH

TX i ic

With RSCP OCCH

TX i ic

I Extra DL =

TX ic
i

P OCCH
= --------------------- Eb Nt
DL
LT
TX j ic

TX j ic

RSCPTCH DL + RSCPOCCH
ji

TX j jc

TX j jc

RSCPTCH DL + RSCPOCCH
TX

j
I IC DL ic jc = --------------------------------------------------------------------------F IRF ic jc

630

arereadfromthemainantenna

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

I IC DL ic jc istheintercarrierinterferencefromacarrierjctoanothercarriericonthedownlink,whichisreducedbythe
interferencereductionfactor F IRF ic jc definedforthepair(ic,jc).
CoverageDisplay
Itispossibletocolourthetransmitterserviceareasusingauniquecolourpertransmitter,orcolourthepixelsinthecoverage
areasbyanytransmitterattributeorothercriteriasuchas:

MaxEb/NtorMaxC/I(dB)
AtollcalculatestheEb/NtorC/Ioneachpixelofthe TX i ic bestservercoveragearea.Thepixelcolourdependson
the Eb/Nt or C/I level. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be
managed.ThereareasmanylayersasthresholdsdefinedintheDisplaytab(Predictionproperties).Foreachlayer,a
TX ic
E b TX i ic
C i
Threshold or ---
Threshold .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayed
pixeliscoveredif -----
N t TCH DL
I TCH DL

withintersectionsbetweenlayers.

EffectiveEb/NtorEffectiveC/I(dB)
AtollcalculatestheeffectiveEb/NtorC/Ioneachpixelofthe TX i ic bestservercoveragearea.Thepixelcolour
dependsontheeffectiveEb/NtorC/Ilevel.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityinthe
workspacecanbemanaged.ThereareasmanylayersasthresholdsdefinedintheDisplaytab(Predictionproperties).
For

each

layer,

pixel

is

covered

E TXi ic

Req
Min ----b-
Q TCH DL Threshold
N t TCH DL

if

or

C TXi ic

Req
Min ---
Q TCH DL Threshold .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetween
I TCH DL

layers.

Eb/NtMarginorC/IMargin(dB)
Atoll calculates the Eb/Nt or C/I margin on each pixel of the TX i ic best server coverage area. The pixel colour
dependsontheEb/NtorC/Imarginvalue.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityinthe
workspacecanbemanaged.ThereareasmanylayersasthresholdsdefinedintheDisplaytab(Predictionproperties).
TX ic
E TXi ic
C i
Req
Eb Nt
Req
CI
For each layer, a pixel is covered if ----b-
Q TCH DL M TCH DL or ---
Q TCH DL M TCH DL . Each
N t TCH DL
I TCH DL

layerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

RequiredPower(dBm)
Atollcalculatesthedownlinkrequiredpoweroneachpixelofthe TX i ic bestservercoveragearea.Thepixelcolour
depends on the required power level. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the
workspacecanbemanaged.ThereareasmanylayersasthresholdsdefinedintheDisplaytab(Predictionproperties).
Req

Q TCH DL
Req
Req
- P Max
Foreachlayer,apixel iscoveredif P TCH DL Threshold ,where P TCH DL = --------------------------TCH DL Service or
TX ic
i
E b
--- N t TCH DL
Req

Q TCH DL
Req
Max
P TCH DL = ------------------------ P TCH DL Service . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections
TX i ic
C
---
I TCH DL
betweenlayers.

RequiredPowerMargin(dB)
Atollcalculatesthedownlinkrequiredpowermarginoneachpixelofthe TX i ic bestservercoveragearea.Thepixel
colourdependsontherequiredpowermarginvalue.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibility
in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab (Prediction
Req

Max

properties). For each layer, a pixel is covered if P TCH DL P TCH DL Service M arg in , where
Req

Req

Q TCH DL
Q TCH DL
Req
Req
Max
- P Max
P TCH DL = -------------------------- P TCH DL Service .Eachlayerisassigned
TCH DL Service or P TCH DL = ------------------------TX i ic
TX i ic
E
C
----b-
---
I TCH DL
N t TCH DL
acolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

631

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

Forsk2014

CellEdgeCoverageProbability(%)
Atollcalculatesthecelledgecoverageprobabilityoneachpixelofthe TX i ic bestservercoveragearea.Thepixel
colourdependsonthecelledgecoverageprobabilityvalue.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhose
visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab
(Prediction properties). For each layer, a pixel is covered if
TX i ic

C
---
I TCH DL

TX i ic

E b
--- N t TCH DL

Req

Q TCH DL or
CECP

Req

Q TCH DL .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.
CECP

9.4.7 UplinkServiceAreaAnalysis(Eb/Nt)or(C/I)
E
C
ThesecoveragepredictionscalculateanddisplaytheEb/NtorC/Iontheuplinktrafficchannel, ----b-
or ---
.
N t TCH UL
I TCH UL
Thecoveragepredictionsarecalculatedforagivensetofaterminaltype,amobilitytype,aservice,acarrier,andforanuplink
timeslot.ThebestserversforthecoveragepredictionsaredeterminedaccordingtothePCCPCHRSCPfromthecarrierwith
thehighestPCCPCHpower,orfromthemastercarrierincaseofNfrequencymodecompatibletransmitters.Afterwards,the
coveragepredictionsarecalculatedfortheselectedcarrier.Iftheselectedcarrierdoesnotexistonatransmitter,therewill
notbeanypixelscoveredbythistransmitter.Ifyouperformthesecoveragepredictionsforthebestcarrier,Atollcalculates
theEb/NtorC/Iconsidering:

The

thepreferredcarrieroftheselectedservice,or
thecarrierwiththehighestPCCPCHpower,ifnopreferredcarrierisdefinedfortheservice,or
themastercarrierincaseofNfrequencymodecompatibletransmitters.
pixels

in

TX i ic

the

coverage

area

where

TX i ic

Min

RSCP P CCPCH Max (TAdd P CCPCH,RSCP P CCPCH) ,

TX ic

TX ic

TX i ic
Eb i
C i
Req
Req
Req
RSCP TCH UL RSCP TCH UL Service Mobility , and -----
Q TCH UL or ---
Q TCH UL are covered and
N t TCH UL
I TCH UL

colouredaccordingtotheselecteddisplayoption.
TX i ic

TX i ic

TX ic
i
E TXi ic

RSCP TCH UL

RSCP TCH UL
Div
C
- G Proc
---
------------------------------------------------- G Div
Where ----b-
= ------------------------------------------------
G
and
UL
UL
UL
TX i ic
TX i ic
I TCH UL =
N t TCH UL
N Tot UL
N Tot UL
Term

Term

Req

Req

Term
TX i ic
Q TCH UL
Q TCH UL
P Max
Term
Term
Term
- or P Term
- and P Req = P Max --------------------------With RSCP TCH UL = ---------------------Req = P Max ------------------------TX i ic
TX i ic
Eb Nt UL
E
C
b
---
-----
LT
I TCH UL
N t TCH UL
Eb Nt UL

LT

TX i

Eb Nt UL

Term

L Path L L
L Body L Indoor M Shadowing
Term
= ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- and P Max isthemaximumpowerdefinedfortheselected
TX i
Term
G G

terminal.
Eb Nt UL

In L T

, G

TX i

SA

= G UL and L

TX i

SA

Term

= L UL arecalculatedaccordingtothesmartantennamodellingmethodused,for P Max ,

ifasmartantennaisavailableintheuplink.Otherwise, G

TX i

and L

TX i

arereadfromthemainantennamodel.

CoverageDisplay
Itispossibletocolourthetransmitterserviceareasusingauniquecolourpertransmitter,orcolourthepixelsinthecoverage
areasbyanytransmitterattributeorothercriteriasuchas:

MaxEb/NtorMaxC/I(dB)
AtollcalculatestheEb/NtorC/Ioneachpixelofthe TX i ic bestservercoveragearea.Thepixelcolourdependson
the Eb/Nt or C/I level. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be
managed.ThereareasmanylayersasthresholdsdefinedintheDisplaytab(Predictionproperties).Foreachlayer,a
TX ic
E TXi ic
C i
pixeliscoveredif ----b-
Threshold or ---
Threshold .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayed
N t TCH UL
I TCH UL

withintersectionsbetweenlayers.

632

EffectiveEb/NtorEffectiveC/I(dB)

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

AtollcalculatestheeffectiveEb/NtorC/Ioneachpixelofthe TX i ic bestservercoveragearea.Thepixelcolour
dependsontheeffectiveEb/NtorC/Ilevel.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityinthe
workspacecanbemanaged.ThereareasmanylayersasthresholdsdefinedintheDisplaytab(Predictionproperties).
For

each

layer,

pixel

is

covered

if

E b TXi ic

Req
Min -----
Q TCH UL Threshold
N t TCH UL

or

C TXi ic

Req
Min ---
Q TCH UL Threshold .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetween
I TCH UL

layers.

Eb/NtMarginorC/IMargin(dB)
Atoll calculates the Eb/Nt or C/I margin on each pixel of the TX i ic best server coverage area. The pixel colour
dependsontheEb/NtorC/Imarginvalue.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityinthe
workspacecanbemanaged.ThereareasmanylayersasthresholdsdefinedintheDisplaytab(Predictionproperties).
TX ic
E TXi ic
C i
Req
Eb Nt
Req
CI
Foreachlayer,apixel iscoveredif ----b-
Q TCH UL M TCH UL or ---
Q TCH UL M TCH UL .Each
N t TCH UL
I TCH UL

layerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

RequiredPower(dBm)
Atollcalculatestheuplinkrequiredpoweroneachpixelofthe TX i ic bestservercoveragearea.Thepixelcolour
depends on the required power level. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the
workspacecanbemanaged.ThereareasmanylayersasthresholdsdefinedintheDisplaytab(Predictionproperties).
Req

Q TCH UL
Term
Term
- P Term
For each layer, a pixel is covered if P Req Threshold , where P Req = --------------------------Max or
TX i ic
E
----b-
N t TCH UL
Req

Q TCH UL
Term
- P Term
P Req = ------------------------Max .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.
TX ic
i
C

-- I TCH UL

RequiredPowerMargin(dB)
Atollcalculatestheuplinkrequiredpowermarginoneachpixelofthe TX i ic bestservercoveragearea.Thepixel
colourdependsontherequiredpowermarginvalue.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibility
in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab (Prediction
Req

Q TCH UL
Term
Term
Term
- P Term
properties). For each layer, a pixel is covered if P Req P Max M arg in , where P Req = --------------------------Max or
TX i ic
E b
--- N t TCH UL
Req

Q TCH UL
Term
- P Term
P Req = ------------------------Max .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.
TX ic
i
C

-- I TCH UL

CellEdgeCoverageProbability(%)
Atollcalculatesthecelledgecoverageprobabilityoneachpixelofthe TX i ic bestservercoveragearea.Thepixel
colourdependsonthecelledgecoverageprobabilityvalue.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhose
visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab
(Prediction properties). For each layer, a pixel is covered if
TX i ic

C
---
I TCH UL

TX i ic

E b
--- N t TCH UL

Req

Q TCH UL or
CECP

Req

Q TCH UL .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.
CECP

9.4.8 EffectiveServiceAreaAnalysis(Eb/Nt)or(C/I)
Thesecoveragepredictionsconsistofpixelscoveredbytheboththeuplinkandthedownlinkserviceareas.Thesecoverage
E
C
predictions calculate the Eb/Nt or C/I on the downlink and uplink traffic channels, ----b-
or ---
and
N t TCH DL
I TCH DL

633

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

Forsk2014

E b
C
---or ---
,anddisplaythepixelswherebothdownlinkanduplinkEb/NtorC/Iareabovetherequiredquality
N t TCH UL
I TCH UL
thresholds.
Thecoveragepredictionsarecalculatedforagivensetofaterminaltype,amobilitytype,aservice,acarrier,andforallthe
6timeslots.ThebestserversforthecoveragepredictionsaredeterminedaccordingtothePCCPCHRSCPfromthecarrier
with the highest PCCPCH power, or from the master carrier in case of Nfrequency mode compatible transmitters.
Afterwards, the coverage predictions are calculated for the selected carrier. If the selected carrier does not exist on a
transmitter,therewillnotbeanypixelscoveredbythistransmitter.Ifyouperformthesecoveragepredictionsforthebest
carrier,AtollcalculatestheEb/NtorC/Iconsidering:

thepreferredcarrieroftheselectedservice,or
thecarrierwiththehighestPCCPCHpower,ifnopreferredcarrierisdefinedfortheservice,or
themastercarrierincaseofNfrequencymodecompatibletransmitters.

Thepixelsinthe TX i ic coverageareaarecoveredandcolouredaccordingtotheselecteddisplayoptionifallthefollowing
conditionsaresatisfied:
TX i ic

Min

RSCP P CCPCH Max (TAdd P CCPCH,RSCP P CCPCH)

RSCP TCH DL RSCP TCH DL Service Mobility

RSCP TCH UL RSCP TCH UL Service Mobility

E b i
C i
Req
Req
--- Q TCH DL or ---
Q TCH DL foranyofthe6timeslots
N t TCH DL
I TCH DL

E b i
C i
Req
Req
--- Q TCH UL or ---
Q TCH UL foranyofthe6timeslots
N t TCH UL
I TCH UL

TX i ic

Req

TX i ic

Req

TX ic

TX ic

TX ic

TX ic

9.4.9 CelltoCellInterference
Thiscoveragepredictioncalculatesanddisplaystheinterferencereceivedbycellsreceivinginuplinkfromothercellswhich
aretransmittingindownlink.Thetimeslotconfigurationofeachcelldefinesthedirectionofthelinkatanygiveninstance.
During each subframe, the direction of the link changes twice (downlink to uplink, and then uplink to downlink). These
transitionsarereferredtoasswitchingpoints.
Thecoveragepredictioniscalculatedforagivensetofaterminaltype,amobilitytype,aservice,acarrier,andatimeslot.The
bestserverforthecoveragepredictionisdeterminedaccordingtothePCCPCHRSCPfromthecarrierwiththehighestP
CCPCHpower,orfromthemastercarrierincaseofNfrequencymodecompatibletransmitters.Afterwards,thecoverage
predictioniscalculatedfortheselectedcarrier.Iftheselectedcarrierdoesnotexistonatransmitter,therewillnotbeany
pixels covered by this transmitter. If you perform this coverage prediction for the best carrier, Atoll calculates the RSCP
considering:

thepreferredcarrieroftheselectedservice,or
thecarrierwiththehighestPCCPCHpower,ifnopreferredcarrierisdefinedfortheservice,or
themastercarrierincaseofNfrequencymodecompatibletransmitters.

Themobility,service,andterminalareusedtocalculatethebestservercoverageoftheinterferedcell.
Assumingthatatransmitter TX j isinterferingastudiedtransmitter TX i onatimeslot,onthesamecarriericoronanother
carrierjc,thecelltocellinterferenceisgivenby:
TX jc
j

I C2C TX i TX j =

TX ic
j

TX ic
j

TX jc
j

RSCPTCH DL + RSCPOCCH

j
RSCPTCH DL + RSCPOCCH + --------------------------------------------------------------------------F IRF ic jc
TX

TX j

TX j ic

Where

TX ic
P TCH DL
j
RSCP TCH DL = ---------------------------
LT

TX ic
j
RSCP TCH DL

634

TX j ic

TX j

TX j jc

and

TX jc
P TCH DL
j
RSCP TCH DL = ---------------------------
LT
TX j jc

TX j

TX jc
P TCH DL G Ant
P TCH DL G Ant
- ---------- and RSCP TCHj DL = ------------------- ---------- otherwise.
= ------------------TX
TX j
LT
LT
j
L Ant
L Ant

using

smart

antenna,

and

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

TX ic
j
RSCP OCCH

TX ic
j

ITU526 5

L T = L Path
ITU526 5

L Path

TX

TX jc
j

TX

TX jc
P OCCH G Ant
P OCCH G Ant
j
- ---------- otherwise.
and RSCP OCCH = --------------= ---------------- ---------TX
TX
LT
LT
j
j
L Ant
L Ant
TX

TX

L TX L RX

isthepathlosscalculatedusingtheITU5265propagationmodelwithoutantennaloss.

istheangleforthesmartantennapattern.
TX j

L Ant isthemainantennaattenuation.
TX j

G Ant isthemainantennagain.
Atollcalculatesthecelltocellinterferenceoneachpixelofthe TX i ic bestservercoveragearea.Thepixelcolourdepends
onthecelltocellinterferencelevel.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbe
managed.ThereareasmanylayersasthresholdsdefinedintheDisplaytab(Predictionproperties).Foreachlayer,apixelis
coveredif I C2C TX i TX j Threshold .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

9.4.10 UpPCHInterference
UpPCHisusuallycarriedbytheUpPTStimeslot.However,iftheinterferenceonUpPTSishigh,fromunsynchronisedDwPTS
orTS0timeslotsofothercells,itispossibletoshifttheUpPCHtoTS1.ThisiscalledUpPCHshifting.Ifsomecellsinanetwork
useUpPCHshifting,youcanusethiscoveragepredictiontostudytheinterferenceontheshiftedUpPCHofthesecellsfrom
othercells.TheinterferencefromothercellsisinthiscasegeneratedbythetrafficontheTS1ofinterferingcells.
This coverage prediction calculates and displays the uplink interference on the TS1, I TS1 UL . The coverage prediction is
calculatedforagivensetofaterminaltype,amobilitytype,aservice,acarrier,andforTS1.Thebestserverforthecoverage
predictionisdeterminedaccordingtothePCCPCHRSCPfromthecarrierwiththehighestPCCPCHpower,orfromthemaster
carrier in case of Nfrequency mode compatible transmitters. Afterwards, the coverage prediction is calculated for the
selectedcarrier.Iftheselectedcarrierdoesnotexistonatransmitter,therewillnotbeanypixelscoveredbythistransmitter.
Ifyouperformthiscoveragepredictionforthebestcarrier,Atollcalculatestheinterferenceforallthecarriersbutkeepsthe
worstcasevalue,i.e.,themostinterferedcarrier.Youcanchoosetodisplaytheminimum,themaximum,ortheaveragetotal
noise.Thecoveragepredictioniscalculatedusingthemainantenna.
TX ic
i

TX ic
i

Pixelsinthe TX i ic coverageareawhere RSCP P CCPCH TAdd P CCPCH Mobility and I TS1 UL Threshold arecovered
andcolouredaccordingtotheselecteddisplayoption.
TheuplinkinterferenceonTS1iscalculatedfromtheuplinkloadcalculatedinthesimulationsormanuallydefiendfortheTS1.
TX i ic

TX i

TheuplinkinterferenceonTS1isgivenby: I TS1 UL = N 0

TX i ic

X TS1 UL
---------------------------------TX ic
1 X i

TS1 UL

9.4.11 HSDPAPredictions
ThiscoveragepredictioncalculatesanddisplaysthepeakRLCthroughputorthePeakMACthroughputperpixelcoveredby
HSDPA cells. The coverage prediction is calculated for a given set of an HSDPA terminal type, a mobility type, an HSDPA
service,acarrier,andforalldownlinktimeslots.ThebestserverforthecoveragepredictionisdeterminedaccordingtotheP
CCPCH RSCP from the carrier with the highest PCCPCH power, or from the master carrier in case of Nfrequency mode
compatibletransmitters.Afterwards,thecoveragepredictionsarecalculatedfortheselectedcarrier.Iftheselectedcarrier
doesnotexistonatransmitterorifitdoesnotsupportHSDPA,therewillnotbeanypixelscoveredbythistransmitter.Ifyou
performthesecoveragepredictionsforthebestcarrier,AtollcalculatestheRLCorPeakMACthroughputconsidering:

thepreferredcarrieroftheselectedservice,or
thecarrierwiththehighestPCCPCHpower,ifnopreferredcarrierisdefinedfortheservice,or
themastercarrierincaseofNfrequencymodecompatibletransmitters.

Thepixelsinthe TX i ic coverageareaarecoveredandcolouredif:

TX ic
i

RSCP P CCPCH TAdd P CCPCH Mobility ,

635

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

Forsk2014

TX ic
i

E C
Req
--- Q HS PDSCH ,and
N t HS PDSCH

E C
---isenoughtoselectabearerforthepixels.
N t HS PDSCH

TX i ic

FormoreinformationonHSDPAbearerselection,see"HSDPAPartoftheAlgorithm"onpage 620.
CoverageDisplay
Itispossibletocolourthepixelsinthecoverageareasbycriteriasuchas:
TX ic
i

MinHSPDSCHRSCP:Oneachpixel,Atollcalculates RSCP HS SCCH foralltimeslotsandselectsthelowestvalue.

AverageHSPDSCHRSCP:Oneachpixel,Atollcalculates RSCP HS SCCH foralltimeslotsandcalculatestheaverageof

TX i ic

thesevalues.
TX i ic

MaxHSPDSCHRSCP:Oneachpixel,Atollcalculates RSCP HS SCCH foralltimeslotsandselectsthehighestvalue.

E TXi ic
MinHSPDSCHEc/Nt:Oneachpixel,Atollcalculates ----C-
foralltimeslotsandselectsthelowestvalue.
N t HS PDSCH

E TX i ic
AverageHSPDSCHEc/Nt:Oneachpixel,Atollcalculates ----C-
foralltimeslotsandcalculatestheaverage
N t HS PDSCH
ofthesevalues.

E TXi ic
MaxHSPDSCHEc/Nt:Oneachpixel,Atollcalculates ----C-
foralltimeslotsandselectsthehighestvalue.
N t HS PDSCH

Peak RLC Throughput: After selectingthe bearer, Atoll reads the corresponding RLC peak throughput. This is the
highestthroughputthatthebearercanprovideoneachpixel.ThepixelcolourdependsonthepeakRLCthroughput.
Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayerswhosevisibilityintheworkspacecanbemanaged.Thereareasmany
layersasthresholdsdefinedintheDisplaytab(Predictionproperties).Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayed
withintersectionsbetweenlayers.

Peak MAC Throughput: Atoll displays the Peak MAC throughput ( R DL ) provided on each pixel. The Peak MAC

MAC

throughputiscalculatedasfollows:
MAC

R DL

= S Block 500

Where, S Block isthetransportblocksize(inkbits)oftheselectedHSDPAbearer;itisdefinedforeachHSDPAbearer

intherelatedtable.Thevalue500correspondstothenumberofblockspersecond(thereare4blocksperTTIand
2000
2000TTIinonesecond,i.e ------------ blockspersecond).
4
The pixel colour depends on the Peak MAC throughput. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose
visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab
(Predictionproperties).Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

E TX i ic TS
MaxDLADPCHEb/Nt:AtolldisplaystheADPCHEb/Ntatthereceiver( ----b-
)forthebestserverandthe
N t TCH DL Max
selectedtimeslot.Nopowercontrolisperformedasinsimulations.Here,Atolldeterminesdownlinktrafficchannel
qualityatthereceiverforamaximumtrafficchannelpowerallowedforthebestserver.

E TXi ic TS
Max UL ADPCH Eb/Nt: Atoll displays the ADPCH Eb/Nt at the best server ( ----b-
) and the selected
N t TCH UL Max
timeslot.Nopowercontrolisperformedasinsimulations.Here,Atolldeterminesuplinktrafficchannelqualityforthe
maximumterminalpowerallowed.

636

TX i ic

HSSCCHPower:Oneachpixel,Atollcalculates P HS SCCH fortheselectedtimeslot.

HSSCCHRSCP:Oneachpixel,Atollcalculates RSCP HS SCCH fortheselectedtimeslot.

Ec
fortheselectedtimeslot.
HSSCCHEc/Nt:Oneachpixel,Atollcalculates -----
N t HS SCCH

HSSICHPower:Oneachpixel,Atollcalculates P HS SICH fortheselectedtimeslot.

TX i ic

TX i ic

Mi

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
M

HSSICHRSCP:Oneachpixel,Atollcalculates RSCP HS SICH fortheselectedtimeslot.

E Mi
HSSICHEc/Nt:Oneachpixel,Atollcalculates ----c-
fortheselectedtimeslot.
N t HS SICH

HSPDSCHRSCP:Oneachpixel,Atollcalculates RSCP HS PDSCH fortheselectedtimeslot.

E c TXi ic
HSPDSCHEc/Nt:Oneachpixel,Atollcalculates -----
fortheselectedtimeslot.
N t HS PDSCH

TX ic
i

9.5 SmartAntennaModelling
Atollcalculatesthesmartantennagainsandlossesinthedirectionofauserduringthesimulations,andinthedirectionof
eachpixelincoveragepredictions.Duringsimulations,Atolldeterminesthegainsandlossesusingthesmartantennamodels.
Incoveragepredictions,Atolldeterminesthegainsandlossesfromtheangulardistributionscalculatedduringthesimulations
foreachtimeslotandstoredintheCellParametersperTimeslottable.
If a smart antenna model is only downlink or only uplink, the other direction uses the main antenna gain and losses for
calculations.Therefore,

Ifasmartantennaisavailableonthedownlinkanduplink:
TX

SA

TX

SA

TX

SA

TX

SA

G UL = G UL , L UL = L UL and G DL = G DL , L DL = L DL

Ifasmartantennaisavailableonthedownlinkonly:
TX

SA

TX

SA

TX

TX

TX

G DL = G DL , L DL = L DL and G UL = G Ant , L UL = L

TX

= L Total UL

TX

= L Total DL

Ifasmartantennaisavailableontheuplinkonly:
TX

SA

TX

SA

TX

TX

TX

G UL = G UL , L UL = L UL and G DL = G Ant , L DL = L

Ifnosmartantennaequipmentisdefined:
TX

TX

TX

TX

G DL = G UL = G Ant , L UL = L

TX

TX

= L Total UL ,and L DL = L

TX

= L Total DL

9.5.1 ModellinginSimulations
9.5.1.1 GridofBeamsModelling
A gridofbeams smart antenna, called GOB, consists of more than one directional antenna pattern (beam) in different
directions. Each beam of a GOB has a different azimuth so that the GOB as a whole covers an entire sector. During the
simulations,AtolldeterminesthemostsuitablebeamfromtheGOBforeachuserservedbythesmartantenna.Themost
suitablebeam(bestbeam)istheonewhichprovidesthehighestgaintowardstheserveduser:
Beam Best = Beam
H

H
V
Max G Beam L Beam L Beam
V

Where G Beam , L Beam ,and L Beam arethegains,horizontal,andverticalattenuationsofthebeamsoftheGOB.Inwords,the

bestbeamistheoneamongallthebeamsofaGOBthathasthehighestdifferencebetweengain,andhorizontalandvertical
SA

SA

SA

SA

attenuations.ThegainsandlossesoftheGOB( G DL , G UL , L DL ,and L UL )aredeterminedfromtheselectedbestbeam.

ThefollowingexampleshowshowAtollcalculatestheGOBgainsandlosses.
Example:
LetusassumeaGOBwith5beamsthathavethesameverticalpatterns,andwhosehorizontalpatternsarepointedtowards
differentdirectionsasshowninthefigurebelow:

637

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

Forsk2014

Figure 9.3:GridOfBeamsModelling
Letusassumethatallthebeamsandthemainantennahavethesame18 dBigain,andtheverticalattenuationattheuser
locationis15 dB,whichisalsothesameforallthebeamsbecauseweassumethattheverticalpatternsarethesame.
Iftheuserislocatedat = 70 azimuth,asshowninthefigurebelow,Atolldeterminesthebestbeam,whichhasthe
highestgaintowards ,asfollows:
Beam

Gain(dBi)

Horizontal
Vertical
Attenuation(dB) Attenuation(dB)

G Beam L Beam L Beam

TotalGain
(dB)

18

60

15

186015

57

30

18

60

15

186015

57

60

18

2.21

15

182.2115

0.79

30

18

60

15

186015

57

60

18

60

15

186015

57

Transmitter
Centreofthepixelwheretheserveduseris
located

Anglebetweentheuserandthetransmitter
azimuth

Figure 9.4:GOBModellingDeterminationoftheBestBeam
Inourexample,thetotalgainofthebeamat60isthehighest.Thereforethisbeamisselectedasthebestbeam.
Ifthisbeamhasbeenselectedinthedownlink,
SA

SA

G DL = 18dB and L DL = L Beam + L Beam = 17.21dB

Ifthisbeamhasbeenselectedintheuplink,
SA

SA

G UL = 18dB and L UL = L Beam + L Beam = 17.21dB

638

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

9.5.1.2 AdaptiveBeamModelling
Anadaptivebeamsmartantennaiscapableofsteeringagivenantennapatterntowardsthedirectionoftheservedsignal.In
Atoll, this is modelled using a single antenna pattern, called a beam because of its highly directional shape. During the
simulations,thisadaptivebeamisorientedinthedirectionofeachserveduserinordertomodeltheeffectofthesmart
antenna.
SA

SA

SA

Theadaptivebeamgains( G DL and G UL )aretheantennagainsdefinedforthebeam,andtheadaptivebeamlosses( L DL and

SA

L UL )arethehorizontalandverticalpatternattenuations L Beam + L Beam towardstheuserdirection.

ThefollowingexampleshowshowAtollcalculatestheadaptivebeamgainsandlosses.
Example:
Letusassumeanadaptivebeamsmartantennaselectedforatransmitteralongwithamainantenna.Letusassumethatthe
adaptivebeamandthemainantennahavethesame18 dBigain,andtheverticalattenuationattheuserlocationis15 dB.
Iftheuserislocatedat = 60 azimuth,asshowninthefigurebelow:

Transmitter
Centreofthepixelwheretheserveduseris
located

Anglebetweentheuserandthetransmitter
azimuth

Figure 9.5:AdaptiveBeamModellingDeterminationoftheBestBeam
Iftheadaptivebeamsmartantennaisselectedinthedownlink,thegainandlossesoftheadaptivebeamat are:
SA

SA

G DL = 18dB and L DL = L Beam + L Beam = 15dB

Iftheadaptivebeamsmartantennaisselectedintheuplink,thegainandlossesoftheadaptivebeamat are:
SA

SA

G UL = 18dB and L UL = L Beam + L Beam = 15dB

H

Infact,astheidealbeamsteeringalgorithmsteersthebeamtowardstheserveduser, L Beam = 0 .Thesevaluesareusedin

interferencecalculationtodeterminethedownlinkinterferingsignalduetotransmissiontowardstheserveduser,aswellas
forcalculatingtheuplinkinterferingsignalsreceivedattransmitterwhendecodingsignalreceivedfromtheserveduser.

9.5.1.3 StatisticalModelling
AstatisticalmodellingapproachisalsoavailableinAtollwhichcanbeusedtomodeltheeffectofsmartantennasthroughC/
Igains.YoucancreatesmartantennaequipmentinAtollbasedonthestatisticalapproachbyprovidingC/Igainsandtheir
cumulativeprobabilitiesfordifferentspreadingangles, Spread .
Youcanassignaspreadingangletoeachclutterclassinyourdocument.Atollreadstheclutterclassinwhichtheserveduser
islocatedtodeterminethespreadingangle.Differentcluttertypeshavedifferentspreadingeffectsonthepropagationof
radiowaves.Urbananddenseurbancluttertypesintroducemoremultipathandspreadthesignalatawideranglethanan
openorruralcluttetype.
Onceyouhaveassignedthespreadinganglestoclutterclasses,youcanentertheC/Igainsandtheircumulativeprobabilities
foreachspreadingangle,inthesmartantennaequipmentbasedonthestatisticalmodel.Foreachsmartantennaequipment
basedonstatisticalmodelling,youcansetaprobabilitythreshold, TProb

SA

Tofindthesmartantennagain,Atolldeterminestheclutterclassoftheserveduser,itreadsthespreadinganglefromthe
clutterclassproperties,itreadstheprobabilitythresholdfromthesmartantennaproperties,andreadsthesmartantennaC/
Igaindefinedforthe Probability = 1 TProb

SA

correspondingtothespreadingangle.

ThefollowingexampleshowshowAtollcalculatesthestatisticalC/Igainsandlosses.

639

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

Forsk2014

Example:
Letusassumethattheserveduserislocatedataanurbanclutterclasswith Spread = 10 .Thesmartantennaequipment
SA

SA

has TProb = 80% .AtollwillreadthesmartantennaC/Igain G for Prob = 20% .Ifagainfortheexactprobability

valueof20%isnotdefined,Atolllinearlyinterpolatesthegainvaluefromthetwosurroundingvalues.
If G

SA
Prob = 19%

= 4.6298dB and G

SA
Prob = 20.4%

= 4.7196dB ,then G

SA
Prob = 20%

= 4.6941dB

Thesmartantennagainsarethesameforuplinkanddownlink.Theirarenolossesforthistypeofsmartantennaequipment.
NegativevaluesofC/Igainsareconsideredaslosses.

9.5.1.4 BeamformingSmartAntennaModels
See"BeamformingSmartAntennaModels"onpage 41.

9.5.1.5 3rdPartySmartAntennaModelling
3rdpartysmartantennamodelscanbeusedinAtolltodeterminethegainsandlossesduringthesimulationsforagivenuser
distributiongenerated.Thesmartantennagainsandlossesareusedduringthesimulationsandtheresultsarestoredinthe
CellParametersperTimeslottable,whichcanbeusedincoveragepredictions.

9.5.2 ConstructionoftheGeographicDistributions
Duringsimulations,Atollusesthesmartantennamodelselectedforeachtransmittertocalculatethesmartantennagains
andlosses.Thesevaluesarecalculatedandstoredforeachusergeneratedforthesimulations.Therefore,thesevaluesare
calculatedandareavailableforthegivenlocationsoftheusers,i.e.,points,only.AtollusestheAngularStepvaluethatyou
setwhencreatingandrunningsimulationstoconstructthegeographicdistributionsoftheseresults.
OnceAtollhascalculatedthedownlinktrafficpowerandtheuplinkloadusingthesmartantennagainsandlossesdetermined
asexplainedintheprevioussection,atthelocationofagivenuser,itcalculatesthesameforpointslocatedattheangleequal
tothatoftheAngularStepofthesimulations.
Attheendofthesimulations,Atollhasanumberofpoints,AngularStepapart,availablewiththevaluesoftheseresults.The
geographic distribution of these results, i.e., downlink traffic power and uplink loads, is constructed by connecting the
resultingvaluepoints.
The following example explains how the geographic distribution of downlink traffic power is created. The geographic
distributionofuplinkloadsisconstructedinthesamemanner.
Example:
Letusassumeasmartantennaequipmentusingadaptivebeammodelling.Theangularstepdefinedforthesimulationsis
Step = 30 .Therefore,theresultsarecalculatedforeachpointlocatedatregularstepsof 30 ,i.e.,12points.Thedownlink
traffic power at the served user (W) with the adaptive beam pointing in the users direction is P W . The downlink traffic
powers,usingthesameadaptivebeampointedtowardstheserveduser,atthe12otherpointsarealsodetermined.

640

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Figure 9.6:ConstructionoftheGeographicDistributionofDownlinkTrafficPower
Theresultinggeographicdistributionisformedbylinearlyjoiningtheobtainedresults.

Figure 9.7:GeographicDistributionofDownlinkTrafficPower
Theaccuracyofthegeographicdistributiondependsuponthevalueoftheangularstep.Aradiationpatterncreatedata 1
stepwillbemuchmoreaccuratethanonecreatedat 45 ,forexample.But,thelatterwillbecomputed45timesfasterthan
thefirst.ThevalueoftheAngularStepshouldbethebestpossiblecompromisebetweencalculationspeedandaccuracy.

9.5.3 ModellinginCoveragePredictions
The results of Monte Carlo simulations, including the smart antenna results, can be stored in the Cells and in the Cell
Parameters per Timeslot tables, and can be used to carry out coverage predictions. The main results of Monte Carlo
simulationsusedincoveragepredictionsare:

Ifasmartantennaisusedinbothuplinkanddownlink:
GeographicdistributionofULload X

UL

DL

andDLtrafficpower P Traffic

Ifasmartantennaisusedindownlinkonly:
DL

GeographicdistributionofDLtrafficpower P Traffic

Withoutsmartantenna:
ULload X

UL

DL

andDLtrafficpower P Traffic

641

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

Forsk2014

Theuplinkloadandthedownlinktrafficpoweratagivenpixelaredeterminedbycalculatingtheangle ofthatpixelwith
respecttothetransmitterazimuth,andreadingtheuplinkloadanddownlinktrafficpowerfromthegeographicdistribution
results.Ifanexactvaluefortheangleisnotavailable,theloadandpoweraredeterminedusinglinearinterpolationforthe
givenanglebetweentwoavailablevalues.
For example, the figure below shows the distribution of downlink traffic power and uplink traffic load results from a
DL 315

simulation.Forapixellocatedat = 315 ,thedownlinktrafficpower P Traffic

DL 315

fromtheseresults.Inthisexample, P Traffic

30dBm ,and X

UL 315

andtheuplinkload X

UL 315

areread

= 2.75% .

Foreachpixel,Atolldeterminesthedownlinktrafficpowersandtheuplinkloadsfromallthetransmitters.

Figure 9.8:GeographicDistributionofdownlinktrafficpoweranduplinkload

9.5.4 HSDPAQualityandThroughputAnalysis
Fastlinkadaptation(orAdaptiveModulationandCoding)isusedinHSDPA.ThepowerontheHSDSCHchannelistransmitted
ataconstantpowerwhilethemodulation,thecoding,andthenumberofcodesarechangedtoadapttotheradioconditions
variations. Based on the reported channel quality indicator (CQI), the NodeB may change the modulation (QPSK and
optionally16QAM),thecoding,andthenumberofcodesevery2 msduringacommunication.
FastlinkadaptationismodelledinadedicatedHSDPAcoverageprediction.Letusassumeeachbinonthemapcorresponds
toaprobereceiverwithHSDPAcapableterminal,mobility,andHSDPAservice.Theprobereceiveroneachbinisallocatedthe
cellsHSDPA.Thisreceivermaybeusingaspecificcarrierorallofthem.Theprobereceiverdoesnotcreateanyinterference.
Atollcalculatesoneachbineitherthebestpilotquality(PCCPCHEc/Nt)orthebestHSPDSCHquality(HSPDSCHEc/Nt);this
dependsontheoptionselectedinGlobalparameters(HSDPApart):CQIbasedonPCCPCHqualityorCQIbasedonHSPDSCH
quality(CQImeanschannelqualityindicator).Then,itdeterminestheHSPDSCHCQI,deducesthebestHSDPAbearerthatcan
beusedandselectsthesuitablebearersoastocomplywithcellandterminaluserequipmentcapabilities.Oncethebearer
selected, Atoll finds the highest downlink throughput that can be carried at each bin and may deduce the application
throughput.CoverageareaislimitedbytheRSCPPCCPCHthreshold.
ThecoveragepredictioncanbecalculatedforanHSDPAcompatibleterminal,anHSDPAservice,amobility,acarrier,anda
downlinktimeslot.Smartantennaresultsaretakenintoaccountinthecomputationofthisstudy.

9.5.4.1 FastLinkAdaptationModelling
Asexplainedabove,thewayofcalculatingthededicatedHSDPAstudydependsonifCQIisbasedonthePCCPCHqualityor
ontheHSPDSCHquality.

9.5.4.1.1

CQIBasedonPCCPCHQuality
WhentheoptionCQIbasedonCPICHqualityisselected,Atollproceedsasfollows.
PCCPCHQualityCalculation
Ec
Letusassumethefollowingnotation: ------ ic
correspondstothePCCPCHquality.
Nt
P CCPCH
Twooptions,availableinGlobalParameters,maybeusedtocalculateNt:optionWithoutusefulsignaloroptionTotalnoise.
Therefore,wehave:

642

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
TXi

BTS RSCP P CCPCH ic

Ec ----
- forthetotalnoiseoption,
Nt ic P CCPCH = -------------------------------------------------------------------DL
N Tot ic
And
TXi

BTS RSCP P CCPCH ic

Ec ---- ic
= ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ forthewithoutusefulsignaloption.
Nt
P CCPCH
DL
TXi
N Tot ic 1 BTS RSCP P CCPCH ic
With
DL

DL

DL

DL

Term

N Tot ic = I Intra ic + I Extra ic + I Inter Carrier ic jc + N 0

DL

I Inter Carrier ic jc istheintercarrierinterferencefromacarrierjctoanothercarriericonthedownlink,whichisreduced

bytheinterferencereductionfactor F IRF ic jc definedforthepair(ic,jc).
P P CCPCH ic
TXi
RSCP P CCPCH ic = ------------------------------LT
CI

L Path L TX L Term L Body L Indoor M Shadowing

L T = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G TX G Term
Term

BTS , and N 0

aredefinedin"DefinitionsandFormulas"onpage 593.

PCCPCHCQIDetermination
Letusassumethefollowingnotation: CQIP CCPCH correspondstothePCCPCHCQI. CQI P CCPCH isdeducedfromthetable
Ec
.Thistableisdefinedfortheterminalreceptionequipmentandthespecifiedmobility.
CQI P CCPCH = f ------ ic
Nt
P CCPCH
HSPDSCHQualityCalculation
Atollproceedsasfollows:
1ststep:AtollcalculatestheHSPDSCHpower( P HS PDSCH ).
P HSDPA ic isthepoweravailableforHSDPAonthecarrieric.Thisparameterisauserdefinedcellinput.
P HSDPA ic = P HS PDSCH ic + n HS SCCH P HS SCCH ic
Therefore,wehave:
P HS PDSCH ic = P HSDPA ic n HS SCCH P HS SCCH ic
n HS SCCH isthenumberofHSSCCHchannelsand P HS SCCH ic istheHSSCCHpoweroncarrieric.Itiseitherfixedbythe
Req

Ec
user. P HS SCCH ic iscontrolledsoastoreachtherequiredHSSCCHEc/Nt( ------ ic
).Itisspecifiedinmobility
Nt
HS SCCH
properties.
Wehave:
TXi

BTS RSCP HS SCCH ic

Ec ---- ic
= ---------------------------------------------------------- forthetotalnoiseoption,
Nt
HS SCCH
DL
N Tot ic
And
TXi

BTS RSCP HS SCCH ic

Ec ---- ic
= -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- forthewithoutusefulsignaloption.
Nt
HS SCCH
DL
DL
Term
TXi
N Tot ic 1 F Ortho 1 F JD BTS RSCP HS SCCH ic
With
DL

DL

DL

DL

Term

N Tot ic = I Intra ic + I Extra ic + I Inter Carrier ic jc + N 0

DL

I Inter Carrier ic jc istheintercarrierinterferencefromacarrierjctoanothercarriericonthedownlink,whichisreduced

bytheinterferencereductionfactor F IRF ic jc definedforthepair(ic,jc).

643

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

Forsk2014

P HS SCCH ic
TXi
RSCP HS SCCH ic = ------------------------------LT
and
CI

L Path L TX L Term L Body L Indoor M Shadowing

L T = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G TX G Term
Term

BTS , F Ortho , F JD

Term

and N 0

aredefinedin"DefinitionsandFormulas"onpage 593.

Therefore,
Req

EcDL
---- ic
N Tot ic
HS SCCH
Nt

TXi
RSCP HS SCCH ic = ------------------------------------------------------------------- L T forthetotalnoiseoption,

BTS

And
Req

EcDL
----

Nt ic HS SCCH N Tot ic

TXi
RSCP HS SCCH ic = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- L T forthewithoutusefulsignaloption.
Req
Ec 1 + 1 F DL 1 F Term ----

ic

Ortho
JD
BTS
Nt
HS SCCH
2ndstep:Then,AtollcalculatestheHSPDSCHquality
Ec
Letusassumethefollowingnotation: ------ ic
correspondstotheHSPDSCHquality.
Nt
HS PDSCH
Therefore,wehave:
TXi

BTS RSCP HS PDSCH ic

Ec ----
= ------------------------------------------------------------- forthetotalnoiseoption,
Nt ic HS PDSCH
DL
N Tot ic
And
TXi

BTS RSCP HS PDSCH ic

Ec ----= ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- forthewithoutusefulsignaloption.
ic
Nt
HS PDSCH
TXi
RSCP HS PDSCH ic
DL
DL
Term
N Tot ic 1 F Ortho 1 F JD BTS --------------------------------------------n
Here,AtollworksontheassumptionthatfiveHSPDSCHchannelsareused(n=5).
With
DL

DL

DL

DL

Term

N Tot ic = I Intra ic + I Extra ic + I Inter Carrier ic jc + N 0

DL

I Inter Carrier ic jc istheintercarrierinterferencefromacarrierjctoanothercarriericonthedownlink,whichisreduced

bytheinterferencereductionfactor F IRF ic jc definedforthepair(ic,jc).
P HS PDSCH ic
TXi
RSCP HS PDSCH ic = ---------------------------------LT
And
CI

L Path L TX L Term L Body L Indoor M Shadowing

L T = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G TX G Term
Term

BTS , F Ortho , F JD

Term

and N 0

aredefinedin"DefinitionsandFormulas"onpage 593.

HSPDSCHCQIDetermination
The best bearer that can be used depends on the HSPDSCH CQI. Let us assume the following notation: CQIHS PDSCH
correspondstotheHSPDSCHCQI.Atolldeduces CQIHS PDSCH asfollows:
CQI HS PDSCH = CQI P CCPCH P P CCPCH + P HS PDSCH

644

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

BearerSelection
KnowingtheHSPDSCHCQI,AtollfindsthebestbearerthatcanbeusedinthetableBestBearer=f(HSPDSCHCQI).Thistable
isdefinedfortheterminalreceptionequipmentandthespecifiedmobility.
Then,Atollchecksifbestbearercharacteristicsarecompliantwithcellanduserequipmentcategorycapabilities.Atollselects
thebearerwhichisthebestbearercompliantwiththecellandUEcategorycapabilities.
BearercharacteristicsareprovidedintheHSDPABearertable.Assumingthebestbearer=23.Characteristicsofthisbearer
are:

Transportblocksize:9719Bytes
NumberofHSPDSCHchannelsused:7
16QAMmodulationused:Yes
PeakThroughput:4.48Mb/s

Figure 9.9:RadioBearersTable
Assuminguserequipmentcategory=3.Itscapabilitiesare:

Maximumtransportblocksize:7298Bytes
MaximumnumberofHSPDSCHchannelsused:5
16QAMmodulationused:Yes
MinimumnumberofTTIbetweentwoTTIused:2

Figure 9.10:UECategoriesTable
HSDPAcellcapabilitiesare:

MaximumnumberofHSPDSCHchannels:15.

645

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

Forsk2014

Thebearer23cannotbeselectedbecause:

ThenumberofHSPDSCHchannels(7)exceedsthemaximumnumberofHSPDSCHchannelstheterminalcanuse(5),
Andthetransportblocksize(9719Bytes)exceedsthemaximumtransportblocksize(7298Bytes)theterminalcan
carried.

IntheBearertable,Atollsearchesasuitablebearerandselectsthebearerindex22.

ThenumberofHSPDSCHchannels(5)doesnotexceedthemaximumnumberofHSPDSCHchannelstheterminalcan
use(5)andthemaximumnumberofHSPDSCHchannelsavailableatthecelllevel(15),
Thetransportblocksize(7168Bytes)doesnotexceedthemaximumtransportblocksize(7298Bytes)theterminalcan
carried.
16QAMmodulationissupportedbytheterminal.

HSPDSCHQualityUpdate
Once the bearer selected, Atoll knows the number of HSPDSCH channels. Therefore, when the method Without useful
signalisused,AtollcanrecalculatetheHSPDSCHqualitywiththerealnumberofHSPDSCHchannels(Adefaultvalueof5
wastakenintoaccountinthefirstHSPDSCHqualitycalculation).

9.5.4.1.2

CQIBasedonHSPDSCHQuality
WhentheoptionCQIbasedonHSPDSCHqualityisselected,Atollproceedsasfollows.
HSPDSCHQualityCalculation
Atollproceedsasfollows:
1ststep:AtollcalculatestheHSPDSCHpower( P HS PDSCH ).
P HSDPA ic isthepoweravailableforHSDPAonthecarrieric.Thisparameterisauserdefinedcellinput.
P HSDPA ic = P HS PDSCH ic + n HS SCCH P HS SCCH ic
Therefore,wehave:
P HS PDSCH ic = P HSDPA ic n HS SCCH P HS SCCH ic
n HS SCCH isthenumberofHSSCCHchannelsand P HS SCCH ic istheHSSCCHpoweroncarriericfixedbytheuser.TheHS
Req
Ec
SCCHpoweriscontrolledsoastoreachtherequiredHSSCCHEc/Nt( ------ ic
)specifiedinmobilityproperties.
Nt
HS SCCH

Wehave:
TXi

BTS RSCP HS SCCH ic

Ec ----
- forthetotalnoiseoption,
Nt ic HS SCCH = ---------------------------------------------------------DL
N Tot ic
And
TXi

BTS RSCP HS SCCH ic

Ec ----
= -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- forthewithoutusefulsignaloption.
Nt ic HS SCCH
DL
DL
Term
TXi
N Tot ic 1 F Ortho 1 F JD BTS RSCP HS SCCH ic
With
DL

DL

DL

DL

Term

N Tot ic = I Intra ic + I Extra ic + I Inter Carrier ic jc + N 0

DL

I Inter Carrier ic jc istheintercarrierinterferencefromacarrierjctoanothercarriericonthedownlink,whichisreduced

bytheinterferencereductionfactor F IRF ic jc definedforthepair(ic,jc).
P HS SCCH ic
TXi
RSCP HS SCCH ic = ------------------------------LT
i

And
CI

L Path L TX L Term L Body L Indoor M Shadowing

L T = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G TX G Term
Term

BTS , F Ortho , F JD
Therefore,

646

Term

and N 0

aredefinedin"DefinitionsandFormulas"onpage 593.

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
Req
EcDL

----

ic

HS SCCH N Tot ic
Nt
P HS SCCH ic = ------------------------------------------------------------------- L T forthetotalnoiseoption,
BTS

And
Req
EcDL
----

ic
N Tot ic

Nt
HS SCCH
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------P HS SCCH ic =
L T forthewithoutusefulsignaloption.
Req
Ec
DL
Term
1 + 1 F
------ ic

BTS
Ortho
JD

Nt
HS SCCH

2ndstep:Then,AtollevaluatestheHSPDSCHquality
Ec
Letusassumethefollowingnotation: ------ ic
correspondstotheHSPDSCHquality.
Nt
HS PDSCH
Twooptions,availableinGlobalparameters,maybeusedtocalculateNt:optionWithoutusefulsignaloroptionTotalnoise.
Wehave:
TXi

BTS RSCP HS PDSCH ic

Ec ----
= ------------------------------------------------------------- forthetotalnoiseoption,
Nt ic HS PDSCH
DL
N Tot ic
And
TXi

BTS RSCP HS PDSCH ic

Ec ----= ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- forthewithoutusefulsignaloption.
ic
Nt
HS PDSCH
TXi
RSCP HS PDSCH ic
DL
DL
Term
N Tot ic 1 F Ortho 1 F JD BTS --------------------------------------------n
Here,AtollworksontheassumptionthatfiveHSPDSCHchannelsareused(n=5).Then,itdeducestheHSPDSCHCQIandthe
bearertobeused.Oncethebearerselected,AtollexactlyknowsthenumberofHSPDSCHchannelsandrecalculatestheHS
PDSCHqualitywiththerealnumberofHSPDSCHchannels.
With
DL

DL

DL

DL

Term

N Tot ic = I Intra ic + I Extra ic + I Inter Carrier ic jc + N 0

DL

I Inter Carrier ic jc istheintercarrierinterferencefromacarrierjctoanothercarriericonthedownlink,whichisreduced

bytheinterferencereductionfactor F IRF ic jc definedforthepair(ic,jc).
P HS PDSCH ic
TXi
RSCP HS PDSCH ic = ---------------------------------LT
And
CI

L Path L TX L Term L Body L Indoor M Shadowing

L T = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G TX G Term
Term

BTS , F Ortho , F JD

Term

and N 0

aredefinedin"DefinitionsandFormulas"onpage 593.

HSPDSCHCQIDetermination
Letusassumethefollowingnotation: CQI HS PDSCH correspondstotheHSPDSCHCQI. CQI HS PDSCH isdeducedfromthe
Ec
.Thistableisdefinedfortheterminalreceptionequipmentandthespecified
table CQI HS PDSCH = f ------ ic
Nt
HS PDSCH
mobility.
BearerSelection
The bearer is selected as described in "Bearer Selection" on page 645.

9.5.4.2 CoveragePredictionDisplayOptions
Threedisplayoptionsareavailableinthestudypropertydialogue.

647

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

9.5.4.2.1

Forsk2014

ColourperCQI
AtolldisplayseitherthePCCPCHCQIwhentheselectedoptioninGlobalParameters(HSDPApart)isCQIbasedonPCCPCH
quality,ortheHSPDSCHCQIwhenconsideringtheCQIbasedonHSPDSCHqualityoption.
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per CQI threshold ( CQI Threshold ). For each layer, area is covered if
CQI CQI Threshold .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

9.5.4.2.2

ColourperPeakThroughput
Afterselectingthebearer,AtollreadsthecorrespondingRLCpeakthroughput.Thisisthehighestthroughputthatthebearer
canprovideoneachbin.
DL

Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperpossiblepeakthroughput( R Peak ).Foreachlayer,areaiscoveredifthe

peakthroughputcanbeprovided.Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetweenlayers.

9.5.4.2.3

ColourperHSPDSCHEc/Nt
AtolldisplaysoneachbintheHSPDSCHquality.Coverageconsistsofseverallayerswithalayerperthreshold.Foreachlayer,
Ec
Threshold .Eachlayerisassignedacolouranddisplayedwithintersectionsbetween
areaiscoveredif ------ ic
Nt
HS PDSCH
layers.

9.6 NFrequencyModeandCarrierAllocation
TransmittersthatsupportNfrequencymodearemulticarriertransmitterswithamasterandoneormoreslavecarrier.You
canassignmasterandslavecarrierstotransmittersmanually,orusetheautomaticfrequencyallocationinAtolltoassign
carriertypesautomatically.

9.6.1 AutomaticCarrierAllocation
For each transmitter, Atoll determines a list of "near" transmitters. For any transmitter TXi, its "near" transmitters are
geographicallylocatedclosetothetransmitter,andaresortedaccordingtotheirdistancefromit.Thecalculationofdistance
betweenTXiandanyothertransmitterTXjisperformedusingtheequationbelow:
D

TX i TX j

Where D

= d

TX i TX j

TX i TX j

1 + x cos cos 2

istheweighteddistancebetweenTXiandTXj, d

TX i TX j

istherealdistancebetweenbetweenTXiandTXj

consideringanyoffsetswithrespecttothesitelocations,xissetto15 %sothatthemaximumvariationin D

TX i TX j

dueto

theazimuthsdoesnotexceed60 %. and arecalculatedfromtheazimuthsofthetwocellsasshowninFigure 9.11on

page 648.

Figure 9.11:WeightedDistanceBetweenTransmitters
Theaboveformulaimpliesthattwotransmittersfacingeachotherwillhaveashorterweighteddistancebetweenthemthan
therealdistance,andtwotransmitterspointinginoppositedirectionswillhaveagreaterweighteddistance.

648

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

AllocationofAllCarriers
CoNFrequencyAllocation

DiffNFrequencyAllocation

Atollassignsthesamecarrierstocellsofeachcosite
transmitter.

Atollassignsdifferentcarrierstocellsofeachcosite
transmitter.

AllocationofMasterCarriers
AtollassignsonemastercarriertoeachtransmitterTXi,suchthatthemastercarrierofTXiisdifferentfromthemastercarrier
ofTXj,whereTXjbelongstothelistof"near"transmitters.Themastercarrierisoneofthecellsdefinedinthetransmitter.All
theothercellsofthetransmitterareassignedthecarriertype"slave".
For transmitters that support the Nfrequency mode and have master carriers properly assigned, Atoll performs the
neighbourandscramblingcodeallocationforthemastercarrieronly.

9.7 NeighbourAllocation
Atoll permits the automatic allocation of intratechnology neighbours in a TDSCDMA document. The intratechnology
neighbour allocation algorithms take into account all the cells of TBC transmitters. It means that all the cells of TBC
transmittersofyour.atldocumentarepotentialneighbours.
ThecellstobeallocatedwillbecalledTBAcells.Theymustfulfillthefollowingconditions:

Theyareactive
TheirtransmitterssupporttheNfrequencymode,andthecellsaremastercarriersoftheirtransmitters(neighbours
arenotallocatedtostandalonecarriers)
TheysatisfythefiltercriteriaappliedtotheTransmittersfolder
Theyarelocatedinsidethefocuszone
Theybelongtothefolderonwhichallocationhasbeenexecuted.ThisfoldercanbeeithertheTransmittersfolderor
agroupoftransmittersorasingletransmitter.

OnlyTBAcellsmaybeassignedneighbours.
Ifnofocuszoneexistsinthe.atldocument,Atolltakesintoaccountthecomputation
zone.

Inthissection,thefollowingareexplained:

"NeighbourAllocationforAllTransmitters"onpage 649.
"NeighbourAllocationforaGroupofTransmittersorOneTransmitter"onpage 653.
"ImportanceCalculation"onpage 653.

9.7.1 NeighbourAllocationforAllTransmitters
WeassumethatwehaveareferencecellAandacandidateneighbour,cellB.Whenautomaticallocationstarts,Atollchecks
followingconditions:
1. The distance between both cells must be less than the userdefined maximum intersite distance. If the distance
between the reference cell and the candidate neighbour is greater than this value, the candidate neighbour is
discarded.
Atoll calculates the effective distance, which corresponds to the real intertransmitter distance weighted by the
azimuthsofantennas.Forinformationontheeffectivedistancecalculation,see"Appendix:CalculationoftheInter
TransmitterDistance"onpage 654.
2. Thecalculationoptions:

649

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

Forsk2014

Forcecositecellsasneighbours:Thisoptionenablesyoutoforcecellslocatedonthesamesiteasreferencecell
in the candidate neighbour list. This constraint can be weighted among the others and ranks the neighbours
throughtheimportancefield.
Forceadjacentcellsasneighbours:Thisoptionenablesyoutoforcecellsgeographicallyadjacenttothereference
cellinthecandidateneighbourlist.Thisconstraintcanbeweightedamongtheothersandrankstheneighbours
throughtheimportancefield.

Adjacency criterion: Geographically adjacent cells are determined on the basis of

theirbestservercoveragesinTDSCDMAprojects.LetCellAbeacandidateneighbour
cellofCellB.CellAisconsideredadjacenttoCellBifthereexistsatleastonepixelin
the CellB best server coverage area (and PCCPCH RSCP of CellB > PCCPCH RSCP
T_Add)whereCellAisbestserver(ofseveralcellshavethesamebestservervalue)or
CellA is the second best server thatenters the handover set (i.e., PCCPCH RSCP of
CellA>PCCPCHRSCPT_DropandPCCPCHRSCPofCellA>PCCPCHRSCPofCellB
T_Comp.)

When this option is selected, adjacent cells are sorted and listed from the most
adjacenttotheleast,dependingontheabovecriterion.Adjacencyisrelativetothe
numberofpixelssatisfyingthecriterion.

Force symmetry: This option enables you to force the reciprocity of a neighbourhood link. Therefore, if the
referencecellisacandidateneighbourofanothercell,thelaterwillbeconsideredascandidateneighbourofthe
referencecell.
Iftheneighbourslistofatransmitterisfull,thereferencetransmitterwillnotbeadded
as a neighbour of that transmitter and that transmitter will be removed from the
referencetransmittersneighbourslist.YoucanforceAtolltokeepthattransmitterin
thereferencetransmittersneighbourslistbyaddingthefollowingoptionintheAtoll.ini
file:
[Neighbours]
DoNotDeleteSymmetrics=1

Forceexceptionalpairs:Thisoptionenablesyoutoforce/forbidsomeneighbourhoodrelationships.Therefore,
youmayforce/forbidacelltobecandidateneighbourofthereferencecell.
Deleteexistingneighbours:WhenselectingtheDeleteexistingneighboursoption,Atolldeletesallthecurrent
neighboursandcarriesoutanewneighbourallocation.Ifnotselected,theexistingneighboursarekept.

3. IftheUseCoverageConditionscheckboxisselected,theremustbeanoverlappingzone( S A S B )withagivencell
edgecoverageprobability.Otherwise,onlythedistancecriterionistakenintoaccount.
Theoverlappingzone( S A S B )isdefinedasfollows:
Nfrequencyhandoverisabatonhandover.AssumingthatthereferencecellAandthecandidatecellBarelocated
insideacontinuouslayerofcells:
SAistheareawherethecellAisthebestservingcell.

650

ThePCCPCHRSCPfromthecellAisgreaterthanthePCCPCHRSCPT_Add.
ThePCCPCHRSCPfromthecellAisgreaterthanthePCCPCHRSCPfromallothercells.

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

SBistheareawherethecellBcanenterthehandoverset.

ThePCCPCHRSCPfromthecellBisgreaterthanthePCCPCHRSCPT_Drop.
ThePCCPCHRSCPfromthecellBisgreaterthanthePCCPCHRSCPfromthecellAminusthePCCPCHRSCP
T_Comp.

Figure 9.12:NfrequencyNeighbourAllocation
SA SB
- 100 ),whichitcompareswiththe%minimumcovered
Atollcalculatesthepercentageofcoveredarea( ----------------SA
area.Ifthispercentageisnotexceeded,thecandidateneighbourBisdiscarded.
Thecoverageconditioncanbeweightedamongtheothersandrankstheneighboursthroughtheimportancefield.

:OverlappingCoverages
4. Theimportanceofneighbours.
Forinformationontheimportancecalculation,see"ImportanceCalculation"onpage 653.

651

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

Forsk2014

Importancevaluesareusedbytheallocationalgorithmtoranktheneighboursaccordingtotheallocationreason.
Atolllistsallneighboursandsortsthembyimportancevaluesoastoeliminatesomeofthemfromtheneighbourlist
ifthemaximumnumberofneighbourstobeallocatedtoeachtransmitterisexceeded.
Ifweconsiderthecaseforwhichthereare15candidateneighboursandthemaximumnumberofneighbourstobe
allocatedtothereferencecellis8.Amongthese15candidateneighbours,only8(havingthehighestimportance
values)willbeallocatedtothereferencecell.Notethatmaximumnumbersofneighbourscanbedefinedatthecell
level(propertiesdialogueorCellstable).Ifdefinedthere,thisvalueistakenintoaccountinsteadofthedefaultone
availableinthedialogue.
IntheResultspart,Atollprovidesthelistofneighbours,thenumberofneighbours,andthemaximumnumberofneighbours
allowed for each cell. In addition, it indicates the importance (in %) of each neighbour and the allocation reason, i.e., a
neighbourmaybemarkedasexceptionalpair,cosite,adjacent,coverage,orsymmetric.Forneighboursacceptedforcosite,
adjacency, and coverage reasons, Atoll displays the percentage of area that satisfies the coverage conditions and the
corresponding surface area (km2), the percentage of area that satisfies the adjacency conditions and the corresponding
surfacearea(km2).Finally,ifcellshavepreviousallocationsinthelist,neighboursaremarkedasexisting.

Bydefault,theautomaticneighbourallocationcomparesthedefinedMaxinter
site distance with the effective intertransmitter distance. As a consequence,
there can be cases where the real distance between assigned neighbours is
higher than the Max intersite distance, because the effective distance is
smaller.YoucanforceAtolltocomparetheMaxintersitedistancewiththereal
intersitedistancebyaddingthefollowinglinesinAtoll.ini:
[Neighbours]
RealInterSiteDistanceCondition=1

Bydefault,theneighbourimportancecalculatedwithrespecttodistanceisbased
ontheglobalMaxintersitedistancesettingforallneighbourcandidates.Asa
consequence,therecanbecaseswherethecalculatedimportanceisdifferent
whentheglobalMaxintersitedistanceismodified.Toavoidthat,youcanforce
Atolltoprioritisetheindividualdistancesbetweenreferencetransmittersand
theirrespectiveneighbourcandidatesbyaddingthefollowinglinesinAtoll.ini:
[Neighbours]
CandidatesMaxDistanceInImportanceCalculation=1

652

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Youdonotrequiresimulationsorcoveragepredictionsforanautomaticneighbour
allocation. For automatic neighbour allocation, Atoll automatically calculates the
missingpathlossmatrices.
Althoughnospecificterminal,mobility,orserviceisselectedforautomaticneighbour
allocation, the algorithm tries to find the maximum number of neighbours by
selecting:

Theservicewiththelowestbodyloss
TheterminalwiththehighestdifferencebetweenGainandLosses.Ifthisisthe
sameforallterminals,Atollusestheterminalwiththelowestnoisefigure.
Mobilitydoesnotimpacttheallocation
Aforbiddenneighbourmustnotbelistedasneighbourexceptiftheneighbourhood
relationshipalreadyexistsandtheDeleteexistingneighboursoptionisnotselected.
Inthiscase,AtolldisplaysawarningmessageintheEventViewerindicatingthatthe
constraintontheforbiddenneighbourwillbeignoredbythealgorithmbecausethe
neighbouralreadyexists.
Symmetricneighbourrelationsareonlyaddedtotheneighbourlistsiftheneighbour
listsarenotalreadyfull.Thus,ifthecellBisaneighbourofthecellA,butcellAisnot
aneighbourofthecellB,therecanbetwopossibilities:
1. ThereisspaceinthecellBneighbourlist:cellAwillbeaddedtothelist.Itwillbe
thelastone.
2. ThecellBneighbourlistisfull:AtollwillnotincludecellAinthelistandwillremove
thesymmetricrelationbydeletingcellBfromthecellAneighbourlist.

IfyouselectForceexceptionalpairsandForcesymmetryoptions,Atollconsidersthe
constraints between exceptional pairs in both directions so as to respect the
symmetric relation. On the other hand, if a neighbour relation is forced in one
direction and forbidden in the other, symmetry cannot be respected. In this case,
AtolldisplaysawarningmessageintheEventViewer.
In the results, Atoll displays only the cells for which it finds new neighbours.
Therefore, if a TBA cell has already reached its maximum number of neighbours
beforestartingthenewallocation,itwillnotappearintheResultstable.

9.7.2 NeighbourAllocationforaGroupofTransmittersorOne
Transmitter
Inthiscase,Atollallocatesneighboursto:

TBAcells
NeighboursofTBAcellsmarkedasexceptionalpair,adjacent,orsymmetric
NeighboursofTBAcellsthatsatisfycoverageconditions

Automaticneighbourallocationparametersaredescribedin"NeighbourAllocationforAllTransmitters"onpage 649.

9.7.3 ImportanceCalculation
Importancevaluesareusedbytheallocationalgorithmtoranktheneighboursaccordingtotheallocationreasonandthe
distance,andtoquantifytheneighbourimportance.Theneighbourimportancedependsonthedistancefromthereference
transmitterandontheneighbourhoodcause(cf.tablebelow);thisvaluevariesbetween0and100%.
Neighbourhoodcause

When

Importancevalue

Existingneighbour

OnlyiftheDeleteexistingneighboursoptionisnotselected
andincaseofanewallocation

Existingimportance

Exceptionalpair

OnlyiftheForceexceptionalpairsoptionisselected

100%

Cositecell

OnlyiftheForcecositecellsasneighboursoptionis
selected

ImportanceFunction(IF)

Adjacentcell

OnlyiftheForceadjacentcellsasneighboursoptionis
selected

ImportanceFunction(IF)

Neighbourhoodrelationshipthat
fulfilscoverageconditions

Onlyifthe%minimumcoveredareaisexceeded

ImportanceFunction(IF)

Symmetricneighbourhood
relationship

OnlyiftheForceneighboursymmetryoptionisselected

ImportanceFunction(IF)

653

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

Forsk2014

Exceptthecaseofforcedneighbours(importance=100%),priorityassignedtoeachneighbourhoodcauseisdetermined
usingtheImportanceFunction(IF).TheIFconsidersthefollowingfactorsforcalculatingtheimportance:

The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.
d Di = 1 ---------d max
d istheeffectivedistance(inm).Itcorrespondstotherealintertransmitterdistanceweightedbytheazimuthsof
antennas.Forinformationontheeffectivedistancecalculation,see"Appendix:CalculationoftheInterTransmitter
Distance"onpage 654.
d max isthemaximumdistancebetweenthereferencetransmitterandapossibleneighbour.

Thecositefactor(C):aBoolean,
Theadjacencyfactor(A):thepercentageofadjacency,
Theoverlappingfactor(O):thepercentageofoverlapping.

Theminimumandmaximumimportanceassignedtoeachoftheabovefactorscanbedefined.
Factor

Minimportance

Defaultvalue

Maximportance

Defaultvalue

Distancefactor(Di)

Min(Di)

1%

Max(Di)

10%

Overlappingfactor(O)

Min(O)

10%

Max(O)

30%

Adjacencyfactor(A)

Min(A)

30%

Max(A)

60%

Cositefactor(C)

Min(C)

60%

Max(C)

100%

TheImportanceFunctionisevaluatedasfollows:
Neighbourhoodcause

ImportanceFunction

ResultingIFusingthedefaultvalues
fromthetableabove

No

Min(O)+Delta(O){Max(Di)(Di)+(100%
Max(Di))(O)}+Min(Di)+Delta(Di)(Di)

10%+20%{10%(Di)+90%(O)}+1%+9%(Di)

No

Yes

Min(A)+Delta(A){Max(Di)(Di)+Max(O)(O)+
(100%Max(Di)Max(O))(A)}+Min(Di)+Delta(Di)(Di)

30%+30%{10%(Di)+30%(O)
+60%(A)}+1%+9%(Di)

Yes

Yes

Min(C)+Delta(C){Max(Di)(Di)+Max(O)(O)+
(100%Max(Di)Max(O))(A)}+Min(Di)+Delta(Di)(Di)

60%+40%{10%(Di)+30%(O)
+60%(A)}+1%+9%(Di)

Cosite

Adjacent

No

Where:
Delta(X)=Max(X)Min(X)

SetMin(Di)andMax(Di)to0%ifyoudonotwanttotakeintoaccountthedistance
factorintheimportancecalculation.
IftheMinandMaxvaluerangesoftheimportancefunctionfactorsdonotoverlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum andmaximum importance fields, neighbours will beranked inthis order:
cositeneighbours,adjacentneighbours,andneighboursallocatedbasedoncoverage
overlapping.
If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.
ThedefaultvalueofMin(O)=1%ensuresthatneighboursselectedforsymmetrywill
have an importance greater than 0%. With a value of Min(O) = 0%, neighbours
selectedforsymmetrywillhaveanimportancefieldgreaterthan0%onlyifthereis
somecoverageoverlapping.

9.7.4 Appendix:CalculationoftheInterTransmitterDistance
Atoll takes into account the real distance ( D in m) and azimuths of antennas in order to calculate the effective inter
transmitterdistance( d inm).
d = D 1 + x cos x cos
wherex=0.3%sothatthemaximumDvariationdoesnotexceed1%.

654

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Figure 9.13:InterTransmitterDistanceComputation
The formula above implies that two cells facing each other will have a smaller effective distance than the real physical
distance.Itisthiseffectivedistancethatwillbetakenintoaccountratherthantherealdistance.

9.8 ScramblingCodeAllocation
Downlinkscramblingcodesenablemobiletodistinguishonecellfromanother.InTDSCDMA,thereare128scramblingcodes
(orPCCPCHmidamblecodes)distributedin32clustersof4codeseach.AdifferentDLsynchronisationcode,orSYNC_DL
code,isassignedtoeachcluster.Scramblingcodesarenumberedfrom0to127,andSYNC_DLcodesfrom0to31.
DependingontheoptionsyouselectforautomaticallocationofscramblingandSYNC_DLcodes,Atolltakesintoaccount
eitherallthecellsofTBCtransmitters,oronlycellsofactiveandfilteredtransmitterslocatedinsidethecomputationzone.
AtollcalculatesascramblingcodeandaSYNC_DLcodetoallthesecells.But,itallocatesscramblingcodesandSYNC_DLcodes
onlytoTBAcells(cellstobeallocated).TBAcellsarethecellsthatfulfillthefollowingconditions:

Theyareactive
TheysatisfythefiltercriteriaappliedtotheTransmittersfolder
Theyarelocatedinsidethefocuszone
Theybelongtothefolderonwhichallocationhasbeenexecuted.ThisfoldercanbeeithertheTransmittersfolderor
agroupoftransmittersorasingletransmitter.

Furthermore,iftherearetransmittersthatsupporttheNfrequencymodeamongtheTBCtransmittersofyournetwork,the
scramblingcodeallocationalsoconsidersthemasterandslavecarrierallocations.
Ifnofocuszoneexistsinthe.atldocument,Atolltakesintoaccountthecomputation
zone.

9.8.1 AutomaticAllocationDescription
9.8.1.1 AllocationConstraintsandOptions
ThescramblingcodeandSYNC_DLcodeallocationalgorithmcantakeintoaccountfollowingconstraints:
1. Neighbourrelationsbetweencells
Youmayconsider:

Firstorderneighbours:TheneighboursofTBAcellslistedintheIntratechnologyneighbourstable,
Secondorderneighbours:Theneighboursofneighbours,
Thirdorderneighbours:Theneighboursneighboursneighbours.

Atoll can take into account intertechnology neighbour relations as constraints to

allocate different scrambling codes to the TDSCDMA neighbours of a GSM
transmitter. In order to consider intertechnology neighbour relations in the
scrambling code allocation, you must make the Transmitters folder of the GSM.atl
documentaccessibleintheTDSCDMA.atldocument.Forinformationonmakinglinks
betweenGSMandTDSCDMA.atldocuments,seetheUserManual.
Atoll considers symmetry relationship between a cell, its first order neighbours, its
secondorderneighboursanditsthirdorderneighbours.

2. Thescramblingcodereusedistance

655

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

Forsk2014

ReuseDistance:Itisaconstraintontheallocationofscramblingcodes.ThesamescarmblingcodeorSYNC_DLcode
cannotbeallocatedtotwositesthatarenotfartherapartthanthereusedistance.Scramblingcodereusedistance
canbedefinedforeachcellinthecellproperties.Ifthisvalueisnotdefined,Atollusesthedefaultreusedistance
definedintheAutomaticScramblingCodeandSYNC_DLcodeAllocationdialogue.Thereusedistanceconstraintis
usedforclusteredanddistributedpercellallocationstrategies.
3. Thecarrierforwhichyouwanttoperformtheautomaticallocation
Carrier:Youcanselect"All"oraspecificcarrier.Ifyouselect"All",Atollallocatesthesamescramblingcodetoeach
carrierofatransmitter.
4. ThenumberofscramblingcodesperSYNC_DLcode
EachSYNC_DLcodecorrespondstoagroupofscramblingcodesasdefinedin3GPPspecifications.3GPPspecifications
define32SYNC_DLcodeswith4correspondingscramblingcodeseach(SYNC_DLcodesarenumberedfrom0to31).
However,itispossibletodefineadifferentvalue(e.g.ifyousetthenumberofscramblingcodesperSYNC_DLcodes
to2,scramblingcodeswillbedistributedamong64SYNC_DLcodes).
WhentheallocationisbasedonaDistributedstrategy(DistributedperCellorDistributedperSite),thisparametercan
alsobeusedtodefinetheintervalbetweenthescramblingcodesassignedtocellsonasamesite.Thedefinedinterval
isappliedbyaddingthefollowinglinesintheAtoll.inifile:
[PSC]
ConstantStep=1
Formoreinformationaboutsettingoptionsintheatoll.inifile,seetheAdministratorManual.
5. Atollcanuseamaximumofcodes
UseaMaximumofCodes:Ifyouchoosetouseamaximumofcodes,Atollwilltrytospreadtheallocatedspectrumof
scramblingcodesasmuchaspossible.
6. Existingallocation
DeleteAllCodes:Ifyouselectthisoption,Atollwilldeleteanyexistingscramblingcodeallocationandperformafresh
allocation.Otherwise,Atollkeepstheexistingallocation.

9.8.1.2 AllocationStrategies
Youcanchoosefromthefollowingfourallocationstrategies:

Clustered:Thepurposeofthisstrategyistochooseforagroupofmutuallyconstrainedcells,scramblingcodesamong
aminimumnumberofclusters.Inthiscase,Atollwillpreferentiallyallocateallthecodeswithinthesamecluster.
DistributedperCell:Thisstrategyconsistsinusingasmanyclustersaspossible.Atollwillpreferentiallyallocatecodes
fromdifferentclusters.
OneSYNC_DLcodepersite:Thisstrategyallocatesonecluster,i.e.,oneSYNC_DLcode,persite,thenonescrambling
code from the cluster to each cell of the site. When all the clusters have been allocated but there are still sites
remaining,Atollreusestheclustersasfaraspossibleatanothersite.
Samecarriersmustbeassigneddifferentscramblingcodes.Differentcarriersofthesame
site can be assigned the same scrambling code. Therefore, cells of a transmitter (i.e.
different carriers) are assigned the same scrambling code, if the scrambling code
domains associated with the carriers have a common cluster or enough codes in one
cluster.

Distributedpersite:Thisstrategyallocatesagroupofadjacentclusters,i.e.,consecutiveSYNC_DLcodes,toeachsite,
thenonecluster,orSYNC_DLcode,toeachtransmitteronthesiteaccordingtoitsazimuth,andfinallyonescrambling
codefromeachclustertoeachcellofeachtransmitter.Thenumberofadjacentclusters,orconsecutiveSYNC_DL
codes,dependsonthenumberoftransmitterspersite.Whenallthesiteshavebeenallocatedadjacentclusters,and
therearestillsitesremainingtobeallocated,Atollreusestheadjacentclustersasfaraspossibleatanothersite.

IntheResultstable,AtollonlydisplaysscramblingcodesandSYNC_DLcodesallocatedtoTBAcells.

9.8.1.3 AllocationProcess
ForeachTBAcell,Atolllistsallcellswhichhaveconstraintswiththecell.Theyarereferredtoasnearcells.Thenearcellsofa
TBAcellmaybe:

656

Itsneighbourcells:theneighbourslistedintheIntratechnologyneighbourstable(optionsExistingneighboursand
"FirstOrder"),
Theneighboursofitsneighbours(optionsExistingneighboursandSecondOrder),

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Thethirdorderneighbours(optionsExistingneighboursandThirdOrder),
ThecellswithdistancefromtheTBAcelllessthanthereusedistance,
ThecellsthatmakeexceptionalpairswiththeTBAcell.

Additionalconstraintsareconsideredwhen:

ThecellanditsnearcellsareneighboursofasameGSMtransmitter(onlyiftheTransmittersfolderoftheGSM.atl
documentisaccessibleintheTDSCDMA.atldocument),
Theneighbourcellscannotsharethesamecluster(forthe"Distributedpersite"allocationstrategyonly).

TheseconstraintshaveacertainweighttakenintoaccounttodeterminetheTBAcellpriorityduringtheallocationprocess
andthecostofthescramblingcodeplan.Duringtheallocation,AtolltriestoassigndifferentscramblingcodestotheTBAcell
and its near cells. If it respects all the constraints, the cost of the scrambling code plan is 0. When a cell has too many
constraintsandtherearenotanymorescramblingcodesavailable,Atollbreakstheconstraintwiththelowestcostsoasto
generatethescramblingcodeplanwiththelowestcost.Forinformationonthecostgeneratedbyeachconstraint,see"Cell
Priority"onpage 658.

9.8.1.3.1

SingleCarrierNetwork
Theallocationprocessdependsontheselectedstrategy.Algorithmworksasfollows:
Strategies:ClusteredandDistributedperCell
AtollprocessesTBAcellsaccordingtotheirpriority.Itallocatesscramblingcodesstartingwiththehighestprioritycellandits
nearcells,andcontinuingwiththelowestprioritycellsnotallocatedyetandtheirnearcells.Forinformationoncalculating
cellpriority,see"CellPriority"onpage 658.
Strategy:OneSYNC_DLCodeperSite
Allsiteswhichhaveconstraintswiththestudiedsitearereferredtoasnearsites.
Atollassignsacluster,i.e.,aSYNC_DLcode,toeachsite,startingwiththehighestprioritysiteanditsnearsites,andcontinuing
withthelowestprioritysitesnotallocatedyetandtheirnearsites.Whenalltheclustershavebeenallocatedbutthereare
stillsitesremaining,Atollreusestheclustersattheothersites.WhentheReuseDistanceoptionisselected,thealgorithm
reusestheclustersassoonasthereusedistanceisexceeded.Otherwise,whentheoptionisnotselected,thealgorithmtries
toassignreusedclustersasspacedoutaspossible.
Then, Atoll allocates a scrambling code from the cluster to each cell located on the sites (codes belong to the assigned
clusters).Itstartswiththehighestprioritycellanditsnearcellsandgoesonwiththelowestprioritycellsnotallocatedyet
andtheirnearcells.
Forinformationoncalculatingsitepriority,see"SitePriority"onpage 661.Forinformationoncalculatingcellpriority,see
"CellPriority"onpage 658.
Strategy:DistributedperSite
Allsiteswhichhaveconstraintswiththestudiedsitearereferredtoasnearsites.
Atollassignsagroupofadjacentclusters,i.e.,SYNC_DLcodes,toeachsite,startingwiththehighestprioritysiteanditsnear
sites,andcontinuingwiththelowestprioritysitesnotallocatedyetandtheirnearsites.Whenallthesiteshavebeenallocated
adjacentclusters,andtherearestillsitesremainingtobeallocated,Atollreusestheadjacentclustersatothersites.When
theReuseDistanceoptionisselected,thealgorithmreusestheclustersassoonasthereusedistanceisexceeded.Otherwise,
whentheoptionisnotselected,thealgorithmtriestoassignreusedclustersasspacedoutaspossible.
Then,Atollassignseachclusterofthegrouptoeachtransmitterofthesiteaccordingtothetransmitterazimuthandselected
neighbourhoodconstraints(options"NeighboursinOtherClusters"and"SecondaryNeighboursinOtherClusters").Then,
Atollallocatesascramblingcodetoeachcelllocatedonthetransmitters(codesbelongtotheassignedclusters).Itstartswith
thehighestprioritycellanditsnearcellsandgoesonwiththelowestprioritycellsnotallocatedyetandtheirnearcells.
Forinformationoncalculatingsitepriority,see"SitePriority"onpage 661.orinformationoncalculatingcellpriority,see"Cell
Priority"onpage 658.
DeterminationofGroupsofAdjacentClusters
Inordertodeterminethegroupsofadjacentclusterstobeused,Atoll:

Definestheoreticalgroupsofadjacentclusters,independentofthedefineddomain,consideringthe128scrambling
codesavailableand4codespercluster.
Startsthedistributionofclusterstogroupsfromthecluster0
Takesintoaccountthemaximumnumberoftransmitterspersiteinordertodeterminethenumberofclustersineach
group
Determinesthetotalnumberofgroups

657

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

Forsk2014

Ifthenumberofscramblingcodesperclusterissetto4andthemaximumnumberoftransmitterspersiteinthenetworkis
3,thetheoreticalgroupsofadjacentclusterswillbe:
Group1

Group2

Group3

Group4

Cluster0

Cluster3

Cluster6

Cluster9

Cluster1

Cluster4

Cluster7

Cluster10

Cluster2

Cluster5

Cluster8

Cluster11

...

Group11
Cluster30

...

Cluster31

Ifnodomainisassignedtocells,Atollcanuseallthesegroupsfortheallocation.Ontheotherhand,ifadomainisused,Atoll
comparesadjacentclustersactuallyavailableintheassigneddomainwiththetheoreticalgroupsandonlykeepsadjacent
clusterscommonwiththetheoreticalgroups.
Ifwehaveadomaincomprising12clusters:clusters1to8andclusters12to15.Inthiscase,Atollwillusethefollowinggroups
ofadjacentclusters:

Group2withcluster3,4and5
Group3withcluster6,7and8
Group6withcluster12,13and14

Theclusters1,2and15willnotbeused.
Ifadomaindoesnotcontainanyadjacentclusters,AtolldisplaysawarningmessageintheEventViewer.

9.8.1.3.2

MultiCarrierNetwork
Incaseyouhaveamulticarriernetworkandyourunthescramblingcodeallocationonallthecarriers,theallocationorder
changes. It is no longer based on the cell priority but depends on the transmitter priority. All transmitters which have
constraintswiththestudiedtransmitterwillbereferredtoasneartransmitters.
Incaseofa"Percell"strategy(ClusteredandDistributedpercell),Atollstartsscramblingcodeallocationwiththehighest
prioritytransmitteranditsneartransmittersandcontinueswiththelowestprioritytransmittersnotallocatedyetandtheir
neartransmitters.Thesamescramblingcodeisassignedtoeachcellofthetransmitter.
Incase ofthe "One SYNC_DLcodepersite"strategy,Atoll assignsa cluster, i.e.,aSYNC_DL code,to eachsite andthen,
allocatesascramblingcodetoeachtransmitter.Itstartswiththehighestprioritytransmitteranditsneartransmittersand
continueswiththelowestprioritytransmittersnotallocatedyetandtheirneartransmitters.Thesamescramblingcodeis
assignedtoeachcellofthetransmitter.
Incaseofthe"Distributedpersite"strategy,Atollassignsagroupofadjacentclusters,i.e.,SYNC_DLcodes,toeachsite,then
aclustertoeachtransmitterandfinally,allocatesascramblingcodetoeachtransmitter.Itstartswiththehighestpriority
transmitteranditsneartransmittersandcontinueswiththelowestprioritytransmittersnotallocatedyetandtheirnear
transmitters.Thesamescramblingcodeisassignedtoeachcellofthetransmitter.
Forinformationoncalculatingtransmitterpriority,see"TransmitterPriority"onpage 661.
When cells, transmitters or sites have the same priority, processing is based on an
alphanumericorder.

9.8.1.4 PriorityDetermination
9.8.1.4.1

CellPriority
Scrambling code allocation algorithm in Atoll allots priorities to cells before performing the actual allocation. Priorities
assignedtocellsdependuponhowmuchconstrainedeachcellisandthecostdefinedforeachconstraint.Acellwithoutany
constrainthasadefaultcost, C ,equalto0.Thehigherthecostonacell,thehigherthepriorityithasforthescramblingcode
allocationprocess.
Therearesevencriteriaemployedtodeterminethecellpriority.Thetotalcostduetoconstraintsonanycelliisdefinedas:
C i = C i Dom + C i U
With
C i U = C i Dist + C i EP + C i N + C i N 2G + C i Cluster + C i CN
Allthecostcomponentsaredescribedbelow:

ScramblingCodeDomainCriterion

Thecostduetothedomainconstraint, C i Dom ,dependsonthenumberofscramblingcodesavailablefortheallocation.

Thedomainconstraintismandatoryandcannotbebroken.

658

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Whennodomainisassignedtocells,128scramblingcodesareavailableandwehave:
C i Dom = 0
Whendomainsofscramblingcodesareassignedtocells,eachunavailablescramblingcodegeneratesacost.Thehigherthe
numberofcodesavailableinthedomain,thelesswillbethecostduetothiscriterion.Thecostisgivenas:
C i Dom = 128 Numberofscramblingcodesinthedomain

DistanceCriterion

Theconstraintlevelofanycellidependsonthenumberofcells(j)presentwithinaradiusof"reusedistance"fromitscentre.
Thetotalcostduetothedistanceconstraintisgivenas:

Cj Dist i

C i Dist =

Eachcelljwithinthereusedistancegeneratesacostgivenas:
C j Dist i = w d ij c dis tan ce
Where
w d ij isaweightdependingonthedistancebetweeniandj.Thisweightisinverselyproportionaltotheintercelldistance.
Forareusedistanceof2000m,theweightforanintercelldistanceof1500mis0.25,theweightforcositecellsis1andthe
weightfortwocellsspacedout2100mapartis0.
c dis tan ce isthecostofthedistanceconstraint.ThisvaluecanbedefinedintheConstraintCostdialogue.

ExceptionalPairCriterion

Theconstraintlevelofanycellidependsonthenumberofexceptionalpairs(j)forthatcell.Thetotalcostduetoexceptional
pairconstraintisgivenas:
C i EP =

cEP i j
j

Where
c EP isthecostoftheexceptionalpairconstraint.ThisvaluecanbedefinedintheConstraintCostdialogue.

NeighbourhoodCriterion

Theconstraintlevelofanycellidependsonthenumberofitsneighbourcellsj,thenumberofsecondorderneighbourskand
thenumberofthirdorderneighboursl.
Letsconsiderthefollowingneighbourschema:

Figure 9.14:NeighbourhoodConstraints
Thetotalcostduetotheneighbourconstraintisgivenas:

Ci N =

Cj N1 i + Cj j N1 i + Ck N2 i + Ck k N2 i + Cl N3 i + Cl l N3 i
j

Eachfirstorderneighbourcelljgeneratesacostgivenas:
C j N1 i = I j c N1
Where
I j istheimportanceoftheneighbourcellj.
c N1 isthecostofthefirstorderneighbourconstraint.ThisvaluecanbedefinedintheConstraintCostdialogue.

659

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

Forsk2014

Becausetwofirstorderneighboursmustnothavethesamescramblingcode,Atollconsidersthecostcreatedbytwofirst
orderneighbourstobeeachother.
C j N1 i + C j N1 i
C j j N1 i = ----------------------------------------------------2
Eachsecondorderneighbourcellkgeneratesacostgivenas:
C k N2 i = Max ( C j N1 i C k N1 j , C j N1 i C k N1 j ) c N2
Where
c N2 isthecostofthesecondorderneighbourconstraint.ThisvaluecanbedefinedintheConstraintCostdialogue.
Becausetwosecondorderneighboursmustnothavethesamescramblingcode,Atollconsidersthecostcreatedbytwo
secondorderneighbourstobeeachother.
C k N2 i + C k N2 i
C k k N2 i = ------------------------------------------------------2
Eachthirdorderneighbourcelllgeneratesacostgivenas:
C N1 i C k N1 j C l N1 k C j N1 i C k N1 j C l N1 k
C l N3 i = Max j
c N3
C j N1 i C k N1 j C l N1 k C j N1 i C k N1 j C l N1 k
Where
c N3 isthecostofthethirdorderneighbourconstraint.ThisvaluecanbedefinedintheConstraintCostdialogue.
Becausetwothirdorderneighboursmustnothavethesamescramblingcode,Atollconsidersthecostcreatedbytwothird
orderneighbourstobeeachother.
C l N3 i + C l N3 i
C l l N3 i = ----------------------------------------------------2
Atollconsidersthehighestcostofbothlinkswhenaneighbourrelationissymmetricand
theimportancevalueisdifferent.

Inthiscase,wehave:
C j N1 i = Max I i j I j i c N1
And
C k N2 i = Max (C j N1 i C k N1 j ,C j N1 k C i N1 j ) c N2

CloseNeighbourCriterion

Theconstraintlevelofanycellidependsonthenumberofitscloseneighbourcellsj.Thecloseneighbourcost( C i CN )
dependsontwocomponents:theimportanceoftheneighbourrelation( I i j )andthedistance( d i j )relativetomaximum
Max

closeneighbourdistance( d CN ).

C i CN =

di j
I + 1 ----------

ij

Max

d CN

----------------------------------------- c CN
2

Where
c CN isthecostofthecloseneighbourconstraint.ThisvaluecanbedefinedintheConstraintCostdialogue.

GSMNeighbourCriterion

Thiscriterionisconsideredwhenthecoplanningmodeisactivated(i.e.theTransmittersfolderoftheGSM.atldocumentis
made accessible in the TDSCDMA.atl document) and intertechnology neighbours have been allocated. If the cell i is
neighbour of a GSM transmitter, the cell constraint level depends on how many cells j are neighbours of the same GSM
transmitter.ThetotalcostduetoGSMneighbourconstraintisgivenas:

660

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

C i N 2G =

cN2G j Tx2G
j

Where
cN

2G

isthecostoftheGSMneighbourconstraint.ThisvaluecanbedefinedintheConstraintCostdialogue.

ClusterCriterion

Whenthe"DistributedperSite"allocationstrategyisused,youcanconsideradditionalconstraintsonallocatedclusters(one
cell,itsfirstorderneighboursanditssecondorderneighboursmustbeassignedscramblingcodesfromdifferentclusters).In
thiscase,theconstraintlevelofanycellidependsonthenumberoffirstandsecondorderneighbours,jandk.Thetotalcost
duetotheclusterconstraintisgivenas:
C i Cluster =

Cj N1 i cCluster + Ck N2 i cCluster
j

Where
c Cluster isthecostoftheclusterconstraint.ThisvaluecanbedefinedintheConstraintCostdialogue.

9.8.1.4.2

TransmitterPriority
Incaseyouhaveamulticarriernetworkandyourunscramblingcodeallocationon"all"thecarriers,Atollallotsprioritiesto
transmitters.Prioritiesassignedtotransmittersdependonhowmuchconstrainedeachtransmitterisandthecostdefined
foreachconstraint.Thehigherthecostonatransmitter,thehigherthepriorityithasforthescramblingcodeallocation
process.
LetusconsideratransmitterTxwithtwocellsusingcarriers0and1.Thecostduetoconstraintsonthetransmitterisgivenas:
C Tx = C Tx Dom + C Tx U
With C Tx U =

Max C U and C Dom = 128 Numberofscramblingcodesinthedomain

Tx
i Tx i

Here,thedomainavailableforthetransmitteristheintersectionofdomainsassignedtocellsofthetransmitter.Thedomain
constraintismandatoryandcannotbebroken.

9.8.1.4.3

SitePriority
Incaseof"PerSite"allocationstrategies(OneSYNC_DLcodeperSiteandDistributedperSite),Atollallotsprioritiestosites.
Prioritiesassignedtositesdependonhowmuchconstrainedeachsiteisandthecostdefinedforeachconstraint.Thehigher
thecostonasite,thehigherthepriorityithasforthescramblingcodeallocationprocess.
LetusconsiderasiteSwiththreetransmitters;eachofthemhastwocellsusingcarriers0and1.Thecostduetoconstraints
onthesiteisgivenas:
C S = C S U + C S Dom
With C S U =

Max C U and C Dom = 128 Numberofscramblingcodesinthedomain

S
Tx S Tx

Here,thedomainconsideredforthesiteistheintersectionofdomainsavailablefortransmittersofthesite.Thedomain
constraintismandatoryandcannotbebroken.

661

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

Forsk2014

9.8.2 ScramblingCodeAllocationExample
9.8.2.1 SingleCarrierNetwork
Inordertounderstandthedifferencesbetweenthedifferentallocationstrategiesandthebehaviourofalgorithmwhenusing
amaximumofcodesornot,letusconsiderthefollowingsamplescenario:

Figure 9.15:ScramblingCodeAllocationExample
LetSite0,Site1,Site2,andSite3befoursites,with3transmitterseachusingcarrier0,towhomscramblingcodeshavetobe
allocatedoutof6clustersof4scramblingcodes.Thisimpliesthatthedomainofscramblingcodesforthefoursitesisfrom0
to23(cluster0tocluster5).Thereusedistanceissupposedtobelessthantheintersitedistance.Onlycositeneighbours
exist.
Thefollowingsectionshowstheresultsofeachcombinationofoptionswithexplanationswherenecessary.

9.8.2.1.1

Strategy:Clustered
Sincetherestrictionsofneighbourhoodonlyapplytocositesand,inourcase,thedistancesbetweensitesaregreaterthan
thereusedistance,everycellhasthesamepriority.Allocationisperformedinanalphanumericorder.
Without"UseaMaximumofCode"

With"UseaMaximumofCode"

Asitispossibletouseamaximumofcodes,Atollstarts
allocationatthestartofadifferentclusterateachsite.
Atollstartsallocatingthecodesfromthestartofcluster0at
Whenaclusterisreused,andtherearenonallocatedcodes
eachsite.
leftinthecluster,Atollfirstallocatesthosecodesbefore
reusingthealreadyusedones.

662

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

9.8.2.1.2

Strategy:DistributedperCell
Sincetherestrictionsofneighbourhoodonlyapplytocositesand,inourcase,thedistancesbetweensitesaregreaterthan
thereusedistance,everycellhasthesamepriority.Allocationisperformedinanalphanumericorder.
Without"UseaMaximumofCode"

With"UseaMaximumofCode"

Atollallocatescodesfromdifferentclusterstoeachcellof
Atollallocatescodesfromdifferentclusterstoeachsites
thesamesite.Undergivenconstraintsofneighbourhood
cells.Asitispossibletouseamaximumofcodes,Atoll
andreusedistance,samecodescanbeallocatedtoeach
allocatesthecodessothatthereisleastrepetitionofcodes.
sitescells.

9.8.2.1.3

Strategy:OneSYNC_DLCodeperSite
Sincetherestrictionsofneighbourhoodonlyapplytocosites,therefore,everysitehasthesamepriority.Clusterallocation
tositesisperformedinanalphanumericorder.
Without"UseaMaximumofCode"

With"UseaMaximumofCode"

Inthisstrategy,aclusterofcodesislimitedtobeusedatjust
onesiteatatimeunlessallcodesandclustershavebeen
allocatedandtherearestillsitesremainingtobeallocated.
Inthiscase,Atollreusestheclusterasfaraspossibleat
anothersite.

Whenitispossibletouseamaximumofcodes,Atollcan
allocatedifferentcodesfromareusedclusteratanother
site.

663

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

9.8.2.1.4

Forsk2014

Strategy:DistributedperSite
Sincetherestrictionsofneighbourhoodonlyapplytocosites,therefore,everysitehasthesamepriority.Clusterallocation
tositesisperformedinanalphanumericorder.
Without"UseaMaximumofCode"

With"UseaMaximumofCode"

Agroupofadjacentclustersisallocatedtoonesiteatatime,
unlessallthecodesandgroupsofadjacentclustershave
beenallocatedbuttherearestillsitesremainingtobe
allocated.Inthiscase(hereonlyonegroupofadjacent
clusters0,1,and2isavailable),Atollreusesthegroupasfar
aspossibleatanothersite.

Whenitispossibletouseamaximumofcodes,Atollcan
allocatedifferentcodesfromareusedgroupsofadjacent
clustersatanothersite.

9.8.2.2 MultiCarrierNetwork
Ifyouhaveamulticarriernetwork,i.e.,transmitterswithmorethanonecellsusingdifferentcarriers,andyourunscrambling
codeallocationon"all"thecarriers,Atollallocatesthesamescramblingcodetoeachcarrierofatransmitter.
LetSite0,Site1,Site2,andSite3befoursiteswith3cellsusingcarrier0and3cellsusingcarrier1.Scramblingcodeshaveto
beallocatedoutof6clustersconsistedof4scramblingcodes.Thisimpliesthatthedomainofscramblingcodesforthefour
sitesisfrom0to23(cluster0tocluster5).Thereusedistanceissupposedtobelessthantheintersitedistance.Onlycosite
neighboursexist.Everysitehasthesamepriorityandtheclusterallocationtositesisperformedinanalphanumericorder.
Atollallocatesoneclusterateachsiteandthen,onecodetoeachtransmitter.Then,thesamecodeisgiventoeachcellof
thetransmitter.

Figure 9.16:ScramblingCodeAllocationtoAllCarriers

664

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

9.9 AutomaticGSM/TDSCDMANeighbourAllocation
ItispossibletoautomaticallycalculateandallocateneighboursbetweenGSMandTDSCDMAnetworks.InAtoll,itiscalled
intertechnologyneighbourallocation.
Intertechnologyhandoverisusedintwocases:

WhentheTDSCDMAcoverageisnotcontinuous.Inthiscase,theTDSCDMAcoverageisextendedbyTDSCDMAto
GSMhandovers.
Inordertobalancetrafficandservicedistributionbetweenbothnetworks.

Atollsautomaticintertechnologyneighbourallocationalgorithmtakesintoaccountbothcases.
Inordertobeabletousetheintertechnologyneighbourallocationalgorithm,youmusthave:

An.atldocumentcontainingtheGSMnetwork,GSM.atl,andanotheronecontainingtheTDSCDMAnetwork,TD
SCDMA.atl,
AnexistinglinkontheTransmittersfolderofGSM.atlintoTDSCDMA.atl.

The external neighbour allocation algorithm takes into account all the GSM TBC transmitters. It means that all the TBC
transmittersofGSM.atlarepotentialneighbours.TheTDSCDMAcells,inTDSCDMA.atl,tobeallocatedneighboursarecalled
TBAcellswhichfulfillfollowingconditions:

Theyareactive
TheysatisfythefiltercriteriaappliedtoTransmittersfolder
Theyarelocatedinsidethefocuszone
Theybelongtothefolderforwhichallocationhasbeenexecuted.ThisfoldercanbeeithertheTransmittersfolderor
oneofitssubfolders.

OnlyTDSCDMATBAcellscanbeassignedneighbours.

9.9.1 AutomaticAllocationDescription
Theallocationalgorithmtakesintoaccountcriterialistedbelow:

Theintertransmitterdistance
Themaximumnumberofneighbours
Allocationoptions
Theselectedallocationstrategy

Twoallocationstrategiesareavailable:thefirstoneisbasedondistanceandthesecondoneoncoverageoverlapping.
WeassumewehaveaTDSCDMAreferencecell,A,andaGSMcandidateneighbourtransmitter,B.

9.9.1.1 AlgorithmBasedonDistance
Whenautomaticallocationstarts,Atollchecksfollowingconditions:
1. The distance between the TDSCDMA reference cell and the GSM neighbour must be less than the userdefined
maximumintersitedistance.IfthedistancebetweentheTDSCDMAreferencecellandtheGSMneighbourisgreater
thanthisvalue,thenthecandidateneighbourisdiscarded.
Atoll calculates the effective distance, which corresponds to the real intertransmitter distance weighted by the
azimuthsofantennas.Forinformationontheeffectivedistancecalculation,see"Appendix:CalculationoftheInter
TransmitterDistance"onpage 654.
2. Thecalculationoptions:
Carriers:Thisoptionenablesyoutoselectthecarrier(s)onwhichyouwanttoruntheallocation.Youmaychooseone
ormorecarriers.Atollwillallocateneighbourstocellsusingtheselectedcarriers.
Forcecositecellsasneighbours:ItenablesyoutoautomaticallyincludeGSMtransmitterslocatedonthesamesite
thanthereferenceTDSCDMAcellinthecandidateneighbourlist.Thisoptionisautomaticallyselected.
Forceexceptionalpairs:Thisoptionenablesyoutoforce/forbidsomeneighbourhoodrelationships.Therefore,you
mayforce/forbidaGSMtransmittertobecandidateneighbourofthereferenceTDSCDMAcell.
Delete existing neighbours: When selecting the Delete existing neighbours option, Atoll deletes all the current
neighboursandcarriesoutanewneighbourallocation.Ifnotselected,existingneighboursarekept.
3. Theimportanceofneighbours.
Next, Atoll calculates the importance of the automatically allocated neighbours. Atoll sorts the neighbours by
decreasingimportanceinordertokeeptheoneswithhighimportance.Ifthemaximumnumberofneighbourstobe
allocatedtoeachcellisexceeded,Atollkeepstheoneswithhighimportance.

665

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

Forsk2014

Asindicatedinthetablebelow,theneighbourimportancedependsonthedistanceandontheneighbourhoodcause;
thisvaluevariesbetween0to100%.
Neighbourhoodcause

When

Importancevalue

Existingneighbour

IftheDeleteexistingneighboursoptionisnotselected

Existingimportance

Exceptionalpair

IftheForceexceptionalpairsoptionisselected

100%

Cositetransmitter

IftheForcecositecellsasneighboursoptionisselected

100%

Neighbourhoodrelationshipthat
fulfilsdistanceconditions

Ifthemaximumdistanceisnotexceeded

d1 ---------d max

Where d istheeffectivedistancebetweentheTDSCDMAreferencecellandtheGSMneighbourand d max isthe

maximumintersitedistance.
IntheResultspart,Atollprovidesthelistofneighbours,thenumberofneighboursandthemaximumnumberofneighbours
allowedforeachcell.Inaddition,itindicatestheimportance(in%)ofeachneighbourandtheallocationreason.Therefore,a
neighbour may be marked as exceptional pair, cosite, or distance. For neighbours accepted for distance reasons, Atoll
displaysthedistancefromthereferencecell(m).Finally,ifcellshavepreviousallocationsinthelist,neighboursaremarked
asexisting.

9.9.1.2 AlgorithmBasedonCoverageOverlapping
Whenautomaticallocationstarts,Atollchecksfollowingconditions:
1. The distance between the TDSCDMA reference cell and the GSM neighbour must be less than the userdefined
maximumintersitedistance.IfthedistancebetweentheTDSCDMAreferencecellandtheGSMneighbourisgreater
thanthisvalue,thenthecandidateneighbourisdiscarded.
Atoll calculates the effective distance, which corresponds to the real intertransmitter distance weighted by the
azimuthsofantennas.Forinformationontheeffectivedistancecalculation,see"Appendix:CalculationoftheInter
TransmitterDistance"onpage 654.
2. Thecalculationoptions:
Carriers:Thisoptionenablesyoutoselectthecarrier(s)onwhichyouwanttoruntheallocation.Youmaychooseone
ormorecarriers.Atollwillallocateneighbourstocellsusingtheselectedcarriers.
Forcecositecellsasneighbours:ItenablesyoutoautomaticallyincludeGSMtransmitterslocatedonthesamesite
thanthereferenceTDSCDMAcellinthecandidateneighbourlist.Thisoptionisautomaticallyselected.
Forceexceptionalpairs:Thisoptionenablesyoutoforce/forbidsomeneighbourhoodrelationships.Therefore,you
mayforce/forbidaGSMtransmittertobecandidateneighbourofthereferenceTDSCDMAcell.
Delete existing neighbours: When selecting the Delete existing neighbours option, Atoll deletes all the current
neighboursandcarriesoutanewneighbourallocation.Ifnotselected,existingneighboursarekept.
3. Theremustbeanoverlappingzone( S A S B )withagivencelledgecoverageprobability.
TwodifferentcasesmaybeconsideredforSA:

1stcase:SAistheareawherethecellAisthebestservingcelloftheTDSCDMAnetwork.
ThepilotsignalreceivedfromAisgreaterthantheminimumpilotsignallevelandisthehighestone.
Themarginissetto0dB.

2ndcase:Themarginisdifferentfrom0dBandSAistheareawhere:
The pilot signallevel received from A exceeds the userdefinedminimum pilot signal level and is within a
marginfromthehighestsignallevel.

TwodifferentcasesmaybeconsideredforSB:

1stcase:SBistheareawherethecellBisthebestservingtransmitteroftheGSMnetwork.
Inthiscase,themarginmustbesetto0dB.

666

ThesignallevelreceivedfromBontheBCCHTRXtypeexceedstheuserdefinedminimumthresholdandisthe
highestone.

2ndcase:Themarginisdifferentfrom0dBandSBistheareawhere:
ThesignallevelreceivedfromBontheBCCHTRXtypeexceedstheuserdefinedminimumthresholdandis
withinamarginfromthebestBCCHsignallevel.

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

SA SB
- 100 )andcomparesthisvaluetothe%minimumcovered
Atollcalculatesthepercentageofcoveredarea( ----------------SA
area.Ifthispercentageislessthantheminimum,thecandidateneighbourBisdiscarded.
Candidate neighbours fulfilling coverage conditions are sorted in descending order with respect to percentage of
coveredarea.
4. Theimportanceofneighbours.
Next, Atoll calculates the importance of the automatically allocated neighbours. Atoll sorts the neighbours by
decreasingimportanceinordertokeeptheoneswithhighimportance.Ifthemaximumnumberofneighbourstobe
allocatedtoeachcellisexceeded,Atollkeepstheoneswithhighimportance.
Asindicatedinthetablebelow,theneighbourimportancedependsonthedistanceandontheneighbourhoodcause;
thisvaluevariesbetween0to100%.
Neighbourhoodreason

When

Importancevalue

Existingneighbour

IftheDeleteexistingneighboursoptionisnotselected

Existingimportance

Exceptionalpair

IftheForceexceptionalpairsoptionisselected

100%

Cositetransmitter

IftheForcecositecellsasneighboursoptionisselected

IF

Neighbourhoodrelationshipthat
fulfilscoverageconditions

Ifthe%minimumcoveredareaisexceeded

IF

Exceptthecaseofforcedneighbours(importance=100%),priorityassignedtoeachneighbourhoodcauseisdetermined
usingtheImportanceFunction(IF).TheIFconsidersthefollowingfactorsforcalculatingtheimportance:

The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.
d Di = 1 ---------d max
d istheeffectivedistance(inm).Itcorrespondstotherealintertransmitterdistanceweightedbytheazimuthsof
antennas.Forinformationontheeffectivedistancecalculation,see"Appendix:CalculationoftheInterTransmitter
Distance"onpage 654.
d max isthemaximumdistancebetweenthereferencetransmitterandapossibleneighbour.

Thecositefactor(C):aBoolean,
Theoverlappingfactor(O):thepercentageofoverlapping.

TheIFisuserdefinableusingtheMinimportanceandMaximportancefields.
Factor

Minimportance

Defaultvalue

Maximportance

Defaultvalue

Distancefactor(Di)

Min(Di)

1%

Max(Di)

10%

Overlappingfactor(O)

Min(O)

10%

Max(O)

60%

Cositefactor(C)

Min(C)

60%

Max(C)

100%

TheIFevaluatesimportanceasfollows:
CositeNeighbourhood
cause

IF

ResultingIFusingthedefaultvalues
fromthetableabove

No

Min(O)+Delta(O){Max(Di)(Di)+(100%Max(Di))(O)}

10%+50%{10%(Di)+90%(O)}

Yes

Min(C)+Delta(C){Max(Di)(Di)/(Max(Di)+Max(O))+
Max(O)(O)/(Max(Di)+Max(O))}

60%+40%{1/7%(Di)+6/7%(O)}

Where
Delta(X)=Max(X)Min(X)

667

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter9:TDSCDMANetworks

Forsk2014

SetMin(Di)andMax(Di)to0%ifyoudonotwanttotakeintoaccountthedistance
factorintheimportancecalculation.
IftheMinandMaxvaluerangesoftheimportancefunctionfactorsdonotoverlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum andmaximum importance fields, neighbours will beranked inthis order:
cositeneighboursandneighboursallocatedbasedoncoverageoverlapping.
If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.

IntheResultspart,Atollprovidesthelistofneighbours,thenumberofneighboursandthemaximumnumberofneighbours
allowedforeachcell.Inaddition,itindicatestheimportance(in%)ofeachneighbourandtheallocationreason.Therefore,a
neighbourmaybemarkedasexceptionalpair,cositeorcoverage.Forneighboursacceptedforcositeandcoveragereasons,
Atolldisplaysthepercentageofareameetingthecoverageconditionsandthecorrespondingsurfacearea(km2).Finally,if
cellshavepreviousallocationsinthelist,neighboursaremarkedasexisting.

Nopredictionstudyisneededtoperformanautomaticneighbourallocation.When
starting an automatic neighbour allocation, Atoll automatically calculates the path
lossmatricesifnotfound.
Aforbiddenneighbourmustnotbelistedasneighbourexceptiftheneighbourhood
relationship already exists and the Delete existing neighbours option is unchecked
whenyoustartthenewallocation.Inthiscase,AtolldisplaysawarningintheEvent
viewerindicatingthattheconstraintontheforbiddenneighbourwillbeignoredby
algorithmbecausetheneighbouralreadyexists.
In the Results, Atoll displays only the cells for which it finds new neighbours.
Therefore, if a TBA cell has already reached its maximum number of neighbours
beforestartingthenewallocation,itwillnotappearintheResultstable.

9.9.1.3 Appendices
9.9.1.3.1

DeleteExistingNeighboursOption
Asexplainedabove,AtollkeepstheexistingintertechnologyneighbourswhentheDeleteexistingneighboursoptionisnot
selected. If a new TBA cell i is created in TDSCDMA.atl, you can run the automatic allocation with the Delete existing
neighboursoptionnotselected,inordertoallocateneighbourstothenewcellionly.
If you change some allocation criteria (e.g., increase the maximum number of neighbours or create a new GSM TBC
transmitter)andstartanewallocationwithoutselectingtheDeleteexistingneighboursoption,Atollexaminestheneighbour
list of the TBA cells and checks allocation criteria only if there is still space left in their neighbour lists. A new GSM TBC
transmittercanentertheTBAcellneighbourlistifallocationcriteriaaresatisfied.Itwillbethefirstoneintheneighbourlist.

668

Chapter10
WiMAXBWANetworks
ThischapterdescribesWiMAXcalculations.

Inthischapter,thefollowingareexplained:

"Definitions"onpage 671

"CalculationQuickReference"onpage 676

"AvailableCalculations"onpage 688

"CalculationDetails"onpage 700

"AutomaticPlanningAlgorithms"onpage 757

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

10 WiMAXBWANetworks
ThischapterdescribesallthecalculationsperformedinAtollWiMAXdocuments.Thefirstpartofthischapterlistsalltheinput
parametersintheWiMAXBWAdocuments,theirsignificance,locationintheAtollGUI,andtheirusage.Italsocontainsthe
listsoftheformulasusedforthecalculations.
The second part describes all the calculation processes, i.e., signal level coverage predictions, point analysis calculations,
signalqualitycoveragepredictions,calculationsonsubscriberlists,andMonteCarlosimulations.Thecalculationalgorithms
usedbythesecalculationprocessesareavailableinthenextpart.
Thethirdpartdescribesallthecalculationalgorithmsusedinallthecalculations.Thesealgorithmsincludethecalculationof
signal levels, noise, and interference for downlink and uplink considering the effects of smart antennas, power control,
subchannelisation,MIMOetc.,andtheradioresourcemanagementalgorithmsusedbythedifferentavailableschedulers.
IfyouarenewtoWiMAX,youcanalsoseetheGlossaryofWiMAXTermsintheUserManualforinformationonWiMAXterms
andconcepts,especiallyinthecontextoftheiruserinAtoll.

All the calculations are performed on TBC (to be calculated) transmitters. For the
definitionofTBCtransmitterspleasereferto"PathLossMatrices"onpage 99.
A cell refers to a transmittercarrier (TXc) pair. The cell being studied during a
calculationisreferredtoasTXi(ic)inthischapter.
Allthecalculationalgorithmsinthissectionaredescribedfortwotypesofcells.

Astudiedcell(representedbythesubscript"i")comprisingthestudiedtransmitter
TXianditscarrieric.Itisthecellwhichiscurrentlythefocusofthecalculation.For
example,avictimcellwhencalculatingtheinterferenceitisreceivingfromother
cells.
Othercells(representedbythesubscript"j")comprisingtheothertransmitterTXj
anditscarrierjc.Theothercellsinthenetworkcanbeinterferingcells(downlink)
ortheservingcellsofinterferingmobiles(uplink).
Allthecalculationalgorithmsinthissectionaredescribedfortwotypesofreceivers.

Mi:Apixel(coveragepredictions),subscriber(calculationsonsubscriberlists),or
mobile(MonteCarlosimulations)covered/servedbythestudiedcellTXi(ic).
Mj:Amobile(MonteCarlosimulations)covered/servedbyanyothercellTXj(jc).
Logarithmsusedinthischapter(Logfunction)arebase10unlessstatedotherwise.

10.1 Definitions
Thistableliststheinputtocalculations,coveragepredictions,andsimulations.
Name

Value

Unit

Description

1.38x1023

J/K

Boltzmannsconstant

290

Ambienttemperature

n0

Calculationresult( 10 Log K T 1000 = 174dBm/Hz )

dBm/Hz

Powerspectraldensityofthermal
noise

D Frame

Globalparameter

ms

FrameDuration
ChoiceList:2,2.5,4,5,8,10,12.5,20

r CP

Frameconfigurationor,otherwise,globalparameter

None

CyclicPrefixRatio
ChoiceList:1/4,1/8,1/16,1/32

O Fixed

DL

Globalparameter

SD

Fixedtimedomainoverhead(DL)

O Fixed

UL

Globalparameter

SD

Fixedtimedomainoverhead(UL)

DL

Globalparameter

Variabletimedomainoverhead(DL)

UL

Globalparameter

Variabletimedomainoverhead(UL)

TDD

Globalparameter

RatiooftheDLsubframetothe
entireframe(TDDonly)

O Variable
O Variable
r DLFrame

671

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

Name

Value

Unit

Description

N SD DL

TDD

Globalparameter

None

Numberofsymboldurationsper
framethatcorrespondstotheDL
subframe(TDDonly)

TDD

Globalparameter

None

Numberofsymboldurationsper
framethatcorrespondstotheUL
subframe(TDDonly)

D TTG

TDD

Globalparameter

ms

TransmitTimeGuard(TDDonly)

D RTG

TDD

Globalparameter

ms

ReceiveTimeGuard(TDDonly)

M PC

Globalparameter

dB

Uplinkpowercontrolmargin

CNR Min

Globalparametera

dB

Minimumsignaltothermalnoise
threshold(interferercutoff)

PZ

Permutationzoneparameter

None

Numberofsubchannelsperchannel
inULsubframe

N SC DL

PZ

Permutationzoneparameter

None

Numberofsubchannelsperchannel
inDLsubframe

N SCa Total

Frameconfigurationparameter

None

Totalnumberofsubcarriersper
channel(FFTsize)

N SCa Preamble

Frameconfigurationparameter

None

Numberofsubcarriersusedbythe
preamble

PZ

Permutationzoneparameter

None

Numberofusedsubcarriersper
channel

N SCa Data

PZ

Permutationzoneparameter

None

Numberofsubcarriersperchannel
usedfordatatransfer

N SCa DC

Hardcodedparameter( N SCa DC = 1 )

None

NumberofDCsubcarriersper
channel

None

Numberofpilotsubcarriersper
channel

None

Numberofguardsubcarriersper
channel

N SD UL

N SC UL

N SCa Used

PZ

N SCa Pilot

PZ

PZ

PZ

Calculationresult( N SCa Pilot = N SCa Used N SCa Data )

Calculationresult

PZ

N SCa Guard

PZ
( N SCa Guard

PZ

= N SCa Total N SCa Used N SCa DC )

PZ UL

Permutationzoneparameter

None

Uplinkpermutationzone

PZ DL

Permutationzoneparameter

None

Downlinkpermutationzone

QT PZ

Permutationzoneparameter

dB

Qualitythreshold:Required
preambleC/NorC/(I+N)for
accessingazone

Speed Max PZ

Permutationzoneparameter

Km/hr

Speedlimitformobilestryingto
accessapermutationzone

d Max PZ

Permutationzoneparameter

Maximumdistancefromthe
transmittercoveredbyazone

p PZ

Permutationzoneparameter

None

Permutationzonepriority

W Channel

Frequencybandparameter

MHz

Channelbandwidth

First

Frequencybandparameter

None

Firstchannelnumberofthe
frequencyband

N Channel

Last

Frequencybandparameter

None

Lastchannelnumberofthe
frequencyband

F Start FB TDD

Frequencybandparameter

MHz

StartfrequencyoftheTDDfrequency
band

F Start FB FDD DL

Frequencybandparameter

MHz

DLStartfrequencyoftheFDD
frequencyband

F Start FB FDD UL

Frequencybandparameter

MHz

ULStartfrequencyoftheFDD
frequencyband

N Channel

672

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Name

Value

Unit

Description

f Sampling

Frequencybandparameter

None

Samplingfactor

f ACS FB

Frequencybandparameter

dB

AdjacentChannelSuppressionFactor

ICS FB

Frequencybandparameter

MHz

Interchannelspacing

CN FB

Frequencybandparameter

None

Channelnumberstep

Inter Tech

Networkparameter

dB

Intertechnologyinterference
reductionfactor

Bearerparameter

None

Bearerindex

Mod B

Bearerparameter

None

Modulationusedbythebearer

CR B

Bearerparameter

None

Codingrateofthebearer

Bearerparameter

bits/
symbol

BearerEfficiency

TB

Bearerparameter

dB

Bearerselectionthreshold

TP BH DL

Site

Siteparameter

kbps

Maximumbackhaulsitedownlink
throughput

Site

Siteparameter

kbps

Maximumbackhaulsiteuplink
throughput

Transmitterparameter(userdefinedorcalculatedfromtransmitter
equipmentcharacteristics)

dB

Transmitternoisefigure

N Ant TX

Transmitterparameter

None

NumberofantennasusedforMIMO
intransmission

N Ant RX

Transmitterparameter

None

NumberofantennasusedforMIMO
inreception

TX

Antennaparameter

dB

Transmitterantennagain

TX

Transmitterparameter(userdefinedorcalculatedfromtransmitter
equipmentcharacteristics)

dB

Transmitterloss

TX

Smartantennaparameter

None

Numberofsmartantennaelements

Array

Smartantennaparameter

dB

Arraygainoffset

Combining

Smartantennaparameter

dB

Powercombininggainoffset

G SA

Smartantennaparameter

dB

Diversitygain(crosspolarisation)

N Channel

Cellparameter

None

Cellschannelnumber

P Preamble

Cellparameter

dBm

Preamblepower

dB

Trafficpowerreduction

dB

Pilotpowerreduction

dB

Idlepilotpowerreduction

f IRF

TP BH UL
nf

G
L

TX

E SA
G SA
G SA

Div

Cellparameter P Traffic = P Preamble P Traffic indB

P Traffic
Ratio
P Traffic

= 10

P Traffic
------------------------10

in%

Cellparameter P Pilot = P Preamble P Pilot indB

P Pilot
Ratio
P Pilot

= 10

P Pilot
-------------------10

in%

Cellparameter P Idle Pilot = P Preamble P Idle Pilot indB

P Idle Pilot
Ratio
P Idle Pilot

= 10

P Idle Pilot
-----------------------------------10

in%

TL DL

Cellparameter

Downlinktrafficload

TL UL

Cellparameter

Uplinktrafficload

673

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Name

Value

Unit

Description

TL DL Max

Cellparameter

Maximumdownlinktrafficload

TL UL Max

Cellparameter

Maximumuplinktrafficload

NRUL

Cellparameter

dB

Uplinknoiserise

NR UL Seg

Cellparameter

dB

Segmentedzoneuplinknoiserise

N Users Max

Cellparameter

None

Maximumnumberofuserspercell

N Users DL

Cellparameter

None

Numberofusersconnectedtothe
cellindownlink

N Users UL

Cellparameter

None

Numberofusersconnectedtothe
cellinuplink

SU DL

Cellparameter

Downlinksegmentationusageratio

AU DL

Cellparameter

DownlinkAASusageratio

T AMS

Cellparameter

dB

AdaptiveMIMOswitchthreshold

T MU MIMO

Cellparameter

dB

MultiuserMIMOthreshold

PI

Cellparameter

None

Preambleindex

T Preamble

Cellparameter

dB

PreambleC/Nthreshold

D Reuse

Cellparameter

Channelandpreambleindexreuse
distance

G MU MIMO

Cellparameter

None

UplinkMUMIMOgain

Inter Tech

Cellparameter

dB

Intertechnologydownlinknoiserise

Inter Tech

Cellparameter

dB

Intertechnologyuplinknoiserise

ZPB DL

Cellparameter

None

Downlinkzonepermbase

ZPBUL

Cellparameter

None

Uplinkzonepermbase

TX i ic

ProportionalFairschedulerparameter

None

Downlinkmultiuserdiversitygain
(MUG)

TX i ic

ProportionalFairschedulerparameter

None

Uplinkmultiuserdiversitygain
(MUG)

ProportionalFairschedulerparameter

dB

MaximumC/(I+N)abovewhichno
MUGgainisapplied

G SU MIMO

Max

CellWiMAXequipmentparameter

None

MaximumSUMIMOgain

G Div UL

CellWiMAXequipmentparameter

dB

UplinkSTTD/MRC,SUMIMOorMU
MIMOdiversitygain

f Bias

QoS

Schedulerparameter

QoSclassbiasfactor

QoS

Serviceparameter

None

QoSclassoftheservice

Serviceparameter

None

Servicepriority

B DL Highest

Serviceparameter

None

Highestbearerusedbyaservicein
thedownlink

B UL Highest

Serviceparameter

None

Highestbearerusedbyaservicein
theuplink

B DL Lowest

Serviceparameter

None

Lowestbearerusedbyaservicein
thedownlink

B UL Lowest

Serviceparameter

None

Lowestbearerusedbyaservicein
theuplink

UL

Serviceparameter

Uplinkactivityfactor

NRDL

NRUL

G MUG DL
G MUG UL
Max

CINR MUG

f Act

674

Forsk2014

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Name

Value

Unit

Description

f Act

DL

Serviceparameter

Downlinkactivityfactor

TPD Min UL

Serviceparameter

kbps

Minimumthroughputdemandinthe
uplink

TPD Min DL

Serviceparameter

kbps

Minimumthroughputdemandinthe
downlink

TPD Max UL

Serviceparameter

kbps

Maximumthroughputdemandinthe
uplink

TPD Max DL

Serviceparameter

kbps

Maximumthroughputdemandinthe
downlink

UL

Serviceparameter

kbps

Averagerequestedthroughputinthe
uplink

TP Average

DL

Serviceparameter

kbps

Averagerequestedthroughputinthe
downlink

TP Offset

Serviceparameter

kbps

Throughputoffset

f TP Scaling

Serviceparameter

Scalingfactor

L Body

Serviceparameter

dB

Bodyloss

N SC UL

Min

Serviceparameter

None

Minimumnumberofsubchannels

P Min

Terminalparameter

dBm

Minimumterminalpowerallowed

P Max

Terminalparameter

dBm

Maximumterminalpowerallowed

nf

Terminalparameter

dB

Terminalnoisefigure

Terminalparameter

dB

Terminalantennagain

Terminalparameter

dB

Terminalloss

N Ant TX

Terminalparameter

None

NumberofantennasusedforMIMO
intransmission

N Ant RX

Terminalparameter

None

NumberofantennasusedforMIMO
inreception

G SU MIMO

Max

TerminalWiMAXequipmentparameter

None

MaximumSUMIMOgain

G Div DL

TerminalWiMAXequipmentparameter

dB

DownlinkSTTD/MRCorSUMIMO
diversitygain

G Div Preamble

TerminalWiMAXequipmentparameter

dB

Preamblediversitygain

UL

Clutterparameter

dB

Additionaluplinkdiversitygain

G Div

DL

Clutterparameter

dB

Additionaldownlinkdiversitygain

f SU MIMO

Clutterparameter

None

SUMIMOgainfactor

L Indoor

Clutterparameter

dB

Indoorloss

L Path

Propagationmodelresult

dB

Pathloss

TP Average

G Div

ICP DL

Networkparameter

None

Intertechnologydownlinkchannel
protectionratioforafrequency
offset F betweentheinterfered
andinterferingfrequencychannels

M Shadowing Model

MonteCarlosimulations:Randomresultcalculatedfrommodel
standarddeviation
CoveragePredictions:Resultcalculatedfromcelledgecoverage
probabilityandmodelstandarddeviation

dB

Modelshadowingmargin

M Shadowing C I

CoveragePredictions:Resultcalculatedfromcelledgecoverage
probabilityandC/Istandarddeviation

dB

C/Ishadowingmargin

675

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

a.

Forsk2014

Anyinterferingcellwhosesignaltothermalnoiseratioislessthan CNR Min willbediscarded.

10.2 CalculationQuickReference
Thefollowingtableslisttheformulasusedincalculations.

10.2.1 CoandAdjacentChannelOverlapsCalculation
Name
TX i ic

F Start

Value
TX ic
i

TX ic
i

TX i ic

TX i ic

F End

TX jc

TX i ic TX j jc

TX ic

Description

MHz

Startfrequencyforthechannel
numberassignedtoacell

MHz

Endfrequencyforthechannel
numberassignedtoacell

MHz

Cochanneloverlapbandwidth

None

Cochanneloverlapratio

MHz

Bandwidthofthelowerfrequency
adjacentchanneloverlap

None

Lowerfrequencyadjacentchannel
overlapratio

MHz

Bandwidthofthehigherfrequency
adjacentchanneloverlap

None

Higherfrequencyadjacentchannel
overlapratio

None

Adjacentchanneloverlapratio

None

FDDTDDoverlapratio

None

Totaloverlapratio

TX i ic TX j jc

TX i ic TX j jc

TX jc

TX ic

TX jc

TX ic

TX ic

j
i
j
i
i
Min F End F Start Max F Start F Start W Channel

TX i ic TX j jc

W ACO
L
---------------------------------TX i ic
W Channel

TX i ic TX j jc
L

TX i ic TX j jc

TX j jc

TX i ic

Min FEnd F End

TX ic

TX jc

TX ic

i
j
i
+ W Channel Max F Start F End
TX i ic TX j jc

W ACO
H
---------------------------------TX ic
i
W Channel

TX i ic TX j jc

r ACO

TX ic

W CCO
----------------------------------TX i ic
W Channel

r CCO

W ACO

TX jc

j
i
j
i
Min F End F End Max F Start F Start

TX i ic TX j jc

r ACO

TX i ic

F Start + W Channel

W CCO

W ACO

N TXi ic N First TX i ic
Channel
Channel
-
------------------------------------------------------TX i ic

CN FB

TX ic
i

F Start FB + W Channel + ICS FB

Unit

TX i ic TX j jc

TX i ic TX j jc

r ACO

r ACO

TX i ic TX j jc

+ r ACO

TDD

TX i ic TX j jc

r FDD TDD

r DL Frame
----------------------- ifinterfererusesaTDDfrequencybandandvictimuses
100
anFDDfrequencyband,1otherwise
TX ic

f ACS FB
TX ic TX jc TX ic TX jc
----------------------------
TX ic TX jc
10
j
i
j
j
r i
r i
+ r ACO
10
FDD TDD
CCO

TX i ic TX j jc

rO

TX i ic

TX j jc

ifW Channel W Channel

TX ic

f ACS FB
TX ic
TX ic TX jc TX ic TX jc --------------------------- TX ic TX jc W i
10
j
i
j
i
j
Channel
r i

--------------------+ r ACO
10
TX j jc
CCO
r FDD TDD

W Channel

TX i ic

TX j jc

ifW Channel W Channel

676

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

10.2.2 PreambleSignalLevelCalculation
Name
TX ic
i
C Preamble

Value

Unit

Description

dBm

Receivedpreamblesignallevel

dBm

PreambleEIRPofacell

dB

Pathloss

dB

Totallosses

Value

Unit

Description

TX i ic
TX ic
N SCa Preamble Preamble
i

- f Segment
n 0 + 10 Log F Sampling --------------------------------TX i ic

N SCa Total

dBm

Preamblethermalnoiseforacell

1
--3

None

Preamblesegmentingfactor

dBm

Preamblenoiseforacell

Unit

Description

dBm

Totalinterferencegeneratedbyan
interferingcell

dB

Interferencereductionfactordueto
thecoandadjacentchanneloverlap

dB

Interferencereductionfactordueto
segmentation

None

Preamblesubcarriercollision
probability

Downlinkintertechnology
interference

Unit

Description

dB

PreambleC/Nforacell

TX ic
i

EIRP Preamble L Path M Shadowing Model L Indoor + G

L

Mi

Mi

L Ant L Body
TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i

TX i

Withsmartantennas:
TX i ic

P Preamble + G

TX i

TX i

TX i

+ 10 Log E SA +
TX

L Path

L Total

Mi

Withoutsmartantennas: P Preamble + G
EIRP Preamble

Combining
G SA

Div
G SA

L Model + L Ant
L Path + L
Mi

TX i

+ L Indoor + M Shadowing Model G

TX i

+L

Mi

Mi

Mi

+ L Ant + L Body

10.2.3 PreambleNoiseCalculation
Name
TX i ic

n 0 Preamble

Preamble

f Segment
TX i ic

TX i ic

n Preamble

n 0 Preamble + nf

Mi

10.2.4 PreambleInterferenceCalculation
Name
TX j jc

I Preamble

Value
TX j jc

TX i ic TX j jc

C Preamble + f O

TX i ic TX j jc

TX ic TX jc
i
j

TX i ic TX j jc

10 Log r O

TX ic TX jc
i
j

10 Log p Collision

fO

TX i ic TX j jc

TX i ic TX j jc

f Seg Preamble
p Collision

Inter Tech

+ f Seg Preamble + I DL

TX i ic

1if N Seg

TX j jc

= N Seg

TX i ic

and0if N Seg

TX j jc

N Seg

TX k

P DL Rec
--------------------------------------
F

TX

ic

TX

i
k

TX k ICP DL

Inter Tech
I DL

10.2.5 PreambleC/NCalculation
Name
TX i ic

CNR Preamble

Value
TX i ic

TX i ic

Mi

DL

C Preamble n Preamble + G Div Preamble + G Div

677

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

10.2.6 PreambleC/(I+N)Calculation
Name

Value

Unit

Description

TX ic

TX i ic

CINR Preamble

TXj jc

n
Preamble

I Preamble
-----------------------------
Inter

Tech
Inter

Tech
10
--------------------------
I
+ NR

C Preamble 10 Log
+ 10
10
DL
DL

10

PreambleC/(I+N)foracell
dB

AllTX j jc

TX i ic

Mi

DL

+ G Div Preamble + G Div

TX ic

TX ic
i

I + N Preamble

TXj jc
n
Preamble

I Preamble
-----------------------------
Inter

Tech
10
--------------------------
+I
+ NR Inter Tech
dBm
10 Log
+ 10
10
DL

10
DL

AllTXj jc

PreambleTotalNoise(I+N)foracell

10.2.7 TrafficandPilotSignalLevelCalculation(DL)
Name
TX i ic

C Traffic

TX i ic

C Pilot

TX i ic

EIRP Traffic
TX i ic

EIRP Pilot
TX i ic

P Traffic
TX i ic

P Pilot

Value
TX i ic

EIRP Traffic L Path M Shadowing Model L Indoor + G

Mi

Mi

dBm

Receivedtrafficsignallevel

dBm

Receivedpilotsignallevel

Mi

Mi

TX i ic

Mi

Description

L Ant L Body

EIRP Pilot L Path M Shadowing Model L Indoor + G

L

Unit

Mi

Mi

Mi

L Ant L Body

TX i ic

TX i

TX i ic

TX i

P Traffic + G
P Pilot + G

Array

+ G SA

Array

+ G SA

+ G SA
+ G SA

Div

TX i

dBm

TrafficEIRPofacell

Div

TX i

dBm

PilotEIRPofacell

Combining

+ G SA L

Combining

+ G SA L

TX i ic

TX i ic

dBm

Traffictransmissionpowerofacell

TX i ic

TX i ic

dBm

Pilottransmissionpowerofacell

P Preamble P Traffic
P Preamble P Pilot

10.2.8 TrafficandPilotNoiseCalculation(DL)
Name

Value

Unit

Description

dBm

Thermalnoiseforacell

None

Downlinksegmentingfactor

dBm

Downlinknoiseforacell

Mi

TX i ic

n 0 DL

PZ DL

N SCa Used
TXi ic
n 0 + 10 Log F Sampling ------------------------
TX i ic

N SCa Total

WithSegmentation:
Mi

PZDL

TX i ic

N SCa Used
n 0 + 10 Log F Sampling ------------------------ f Segment DL
TX i ic

N SCa Total

f Segment DL
TX i ic

n DL

678

3 PSG + 2 SSG
1withoutand --------------------------------------------- withdownlinksegmentation
15
TX i ic

n 0 DL + nf

Mi

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

10.2.9 TrafficandPilotInterferenceCalculation(DL)
Name

Value
TX jc

Unit

Description

dBm

Totalinterferencegeneratedbyan
interferingcell

TX jc

j
I j

I
Non AAS
Idle
----------------------------------------------
10
10

MonteCarloSimulations: 10 Log 10
+ 10

TX jc

I j
AAS
-----------------10
withoutsmartantennas,or 10 Log 10
withsmart

antennas

TX j jc

I Total

TX jc

TX jc

TX jc

j
j
I j

I
I
Non AAS
Idle
AAS
----------------------------------------------------------------
10
10
10

CoveragePredictions: 10 Log 10
+ 10
+ 10

MonteCarloSimulations:
TX j jc

EIRP Traffic L Path M Shadowing Model L Indoor + G

TX j jc

Mi

Mi

Mi

Mi

L Ant L Body

CoveragePredictions:

I Traffic

dBm

TX j jc

Trafficinterferencepowerofan
interferingcell

EIRP Traffic L Path M Shadowing Model + M Shadowing C I L Indoor

+G

Mi

Mi

Mi

Mi

L Ant L Body
MonteCarloSimulations:

TX jc
j
EIRP Pilot

L Path M Shadowing Model L Indoor + G

TX j jc

L Ant L Body
dBm

Pilotinterferingpowerofan
interferingcell

TX j

dBm

TrafficEIRPofaninterferingcell

TX j

dBm

PilotEIRPofaninterferingcell

dBm

Interferencefromtheloadedpartof
theframetransmittedusingthe
transmitterantennaofaninterfering
cell

CoveragePredictions:

I Pilot

TX jc
j

EIRP Pilot L Path M Shadowing Model + M Shadowing C I L Indoor

+G

Mi

Mi

Mi

Mi

L Ant L Body

TX j jc

EIRP Traffic

TX j jc

TX j

TX j jc

TX j

P Traffic + G

TX j jc

EIRP Pilot

P Pilot + G

L
L

TX jc

TX j jc

I Non AAS

I j

TX j jc
Traffic
------------------ TX jc
TX

jc

N SCa Data
10
j
j

-+
10 Log TLDL
----------------------- 1 AU DL
10
TX j jc

N SCa Used

10

TX j jc
I Pilot
------------------10

TX j jc

N
SCa

Data
1 -------------------------

TX j jc

N SCa Used

MonteCarloSimulations:

TX j jc

EIRP AAS

L Path M Shadowing Model L Indoor + G

TX j jc
TX j jc

EIRP AAS
+G
TX jc
j

Mi

Mi

Mi

Mi

L Ant L Body

CoveragePredictions:

I AAS

EIRP AAS

Mi

dBm

Interferencepowerofaninterfering
celltransmittedusingsmartantenna

dBm

TrafficEIRPofaninterferingcell
usingsmartantenna

L Path M Shadowing Model + M Shadowing C I L Indoor

Mi

Mi

Mi

L Ant L Body
TX jc
j

P Traffic + G

TX

TX

679

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

Name
TX jc
j
I Idle Pilot

Value
TX jc
j
EIRP Idle Pilot

TX j jc

L Path L Indoor + G
TX j jc

EIRP Idle Pilot

P Idle Pilot + G

TX j

i
L Ant

i
L Body

TX j

Unit

Description

dBm

Interferencefromemptypartofthe
frametransmittedusingthe
transmitterantennaofaninterfering
cell

dBm

IdlepilotEIRPofaninterferingcell

dBm

Interferencefromtheemptypartof
theframetransmittedusingthe
transmitterantennaofaninterfering
cell

dB

Interferencereductionfactordueto
thecoandadjacentchanneloverlap

TX jc

TX j jc

I Idle

I j

TX j jc
Idle Pilot-

----------------------------TX j jc
N
10
SCa Data
10 Log 1 TL DL 10
1 ------------------------

TX j jc

N SCa Used

TX ic TX jc
i
j

TX i ic TX j jc

10 Log r O

TX ic TX jc
i
j

i
j
10 Log p Collision DL

dB

Interferencereductionfactordueto
downlinksegmentation

TX k

P
DL Rec
--------------------------------------
F TXi ic TX k

TX k ICP DL

Downlinkintertechnology
interference

Unit

Description

dB

TrafficC/Nforacell

dB

PilotC/Nforacell

fO

TX ic TX jc

f Seg DL

Inter Tech
I DL

10.2.10 TrafficandPilotC/NCalculation(DL)
Name

Value
TX i ic

TX i ic

C Traffic n DL

TX i ic

CNR Traffic

TX i ic

Mi

DL

WithMIMO: CNR Traffic + G Div DL + G Div

TX i ic

TX i ic

C Pilot n DL

TX i ic

CNR Pilot

TX i ic

Mi

WithMIMO: CNR Pilot + G Div DL +

DL
G Div

10.2.11 TrafficandPilotC/(I+N)Calculation(DL)
Name

TX i ic

CINR Traffic

Value

TX ic
i
C Traffic

TX j jc

IDL
-----------------10
10 Log
10

AllTXj jc

TX i ic

Unit

TX ic
i

n DL
Inter

Tech
------------------- +I
+
10
DL
10

Mi

Inter

Tech
+ NR

DL

dB

Description

TrafficC/(I+N)foracell

DL

WithMIMO: CINR Traffic + G Div DL + G Div

TX jc

TX i ic

CINR Pilot

I j

DL
-----------------
TX i ic
10

C Pilot 10 Log
10

AllTXj jc

TX ic
i

TX ic

n
DL

---------------------
Inter

Tech
Inter

Tech
10
+I
+ NR

+10
DL
DL

dB

PilotC/(I+N)foracell

DL

WithMIMO: CINR Pilot + G Div DL + G Div

TX jc

TX i ic

I + N DL

680

TX ic

I j
n DL
DL

------------------
---------------------
10 10 + I Inter Tech + 10 10 + NRInter Tech
10 Log
DL

DL
AllTXj jc

dBm

TrafficTotalNoise(I+N)foracell

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

10.2.12 TrafficSignalLevelCalculation(UL)
Name

Value
M

i
C UL

Unit

Description

dBm

Receiveduplinksignallevel

dBm

UplinkEIRPofauserequipment

Unit

Description

dBm

Thermalnoiseforacell

dBm

Uplinknoiseforacell

Unit

Description

dBm

Uplinkinterferencereceivedatacell

dB

Interferencereductionfactordueto
thecoandadjacentchanneloverlap

dB

Interferencereductionfactordueto
theinterferingmobilesuplinktraffic
load

i
j
10 Log p Collision UL

db

Interferencereductionfactordueto
uplinksegmentation

SC Com
-----------------TX i ic
SC

None

Uplinksegmentationcollision
probability

EIRP UL L Path M Shadowing Model L Indoor + G

L

TX i

Mi

Mi

With P

Mi

Mi

L Ant L Body
P

EIRP UL

TX

Mi

+G

Mi

Mi

Mi

= P Max withoutpowercontroland P

Mi

Mi

= P Eff after

powercontrol

10.2.13 TrafficNoiseCalculation(UL)
Name

Value
Mi

TX i ic

n 0 UL

PZ UL

TXi ic
N SCa Used
n 0 + 10 Log F Sampling ------------------------
TX i ic

N
SCa Total

TX i ic

TX i ic

n UL

n 0 UL + nf

TX i ic

10.2.14 TrafficInterferenceCalculation(UL)
Name
M

I UL

Value
M

TX ic TX jc
i
j

C UL + f O

TX ic TX jc
i
j

+ f TL UL + f Seg UL
TX i ic TX j jc

TX i ic TX j jc

10 Log r O

fO

Mj

j
10 Log TL UL

f TL UL

TX ic TX jc

TX ic TX jc
i
j

f Seg UL

TX i ic TX j jc

p Collision UL

TX i ic

NRUL

TX i ic

NRUL Seg

TX i ic

I + N UL

TX i ic
IMj

n UL
UL nonsegM

---------------------
TX i ic
--------------------------------------------i
Inter Tech
10

10
10 Log
+ NR UL
n UL dB
10
+ 10

AllMj

AllTXj jc

TX i ic
IMj

n UL
UL

segM

---------------------
TX i ic
i

Inter Tech
10
--------------------------------10 Log
+ NR UL
n UL
10
10
+ 10

AllMj

AllTX

jc

TX i ic

NRUL

TX i ic

+ n UL

TX i ic

TX i ic

or NRUL Seg + n UL

dB

Segmentedzoneuplinknoiseata
cellwithoutsmartantennas

dBm

TotalNoise(I+N)foracell

dB

Uplinknoiseatacellwithsmart
antenna

NRUL

I UL + n I
--------------------------------2
n I

Nonsegmentedzoneuplinknoiseat
acellwithoutsmartantennas

681

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

Name
TX ic
i

I + N UL

Value

Unit

Description

dBm

TotalNoise(I+N)foracellincaseof
smartantennas

Unit

Description

dB

UplinkC/Natacell

Unit

Description

dB

UplinkC/(I+N)atacell

Unit

Description

Hz

Samplingfrequency

F Sampling 10
-------------------------------------TX i ic
N SCa Total

kHz

Intersubcarrierdistance

1
------------------TX i ic
F

ms

Usefulsymbolduration

ms

Cyclicprefixduration

ms

Symbolduration

D Frame D TTG D RTG

ms

Usedframeduration

D Used
Frame
Floor ---------------- TXi ic
D Symbol

SD

Framedurationintermsofsymbol
durations

SD

Downlinksubframedurationin
termsofsymboldurations

I UL + n I

10.2.15 TrafficC/NCalculation(UL)
Name

Value
TX i ic

Mi

C UL n UL

Mi

CNR UL

Mi

TX i ic

WithMIMO: CNR UL + G Div UL +

UL
G Div

10.2.16 TrafficC/(I+N)Calculation(UL)
Name

Value
TX i ic

Mi

Withoutsmartantennas: CNR UL NR UL
Mi

CINR UL

Mi

TX i ic

Mi

Withsmartantennas: CNR UL NR UL
Mi

TX i ic

or CNR UL NR UL Seg

TX i ic

UL

WithMIMO: CINR UL + G Div UL + G Div

10.2.17 CalculationofTotalCellResources
Name

Value

TX ic
i
F Sampling

W Channel 10
- 8000
Floor f Sampling ----------------------------------8000

TX i ic

TX ic
i

TX i ic

TX i ic

D Sym Useful

TX i ic

Used

D Frame
TX i ic

N SD Used Frame

TX i ic

TX i ic

r CP
--------------F

D CP

D Symbol

TX i ic

TX i ic

D Sym Useful + D CP
TDD

TDD

IfDL:ULratioisdefinedinpercentage:
TX ic

TX ic
i

N SD DL Subframe

i
TDD
DL
RoundUp N SD Used Frame r DL Frame O Fixed

IfDL:ULratioisdefinedinfraction:
TDD

TXi ic

N SD DL
DL
RoundUp N SD Used Frame ----------------------------------------- O Fixed
TDD
TDD

N SD DL + N SD UL

682

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Name

Value

Unit

Description

TX ic
i

i
DL
PZ
O Variable
TXi ic
DL
-
Floor N SD DL Subframe N SCa Data 1 -------------------100

Symbols

Totaldownlinkcellresources,i.e.,
thenumberofsymbolsinthe
downlinksubframe

SD

Uplinksubframedurationintermsof
symboldurations

Symbols

Totaluplinkcellresources,i.e.,the
numberofsymbolsintheuplink
subframe

R DL

TX ic
i

N Sym DL Subframe

IfDL:ULratioisdefinedinpercentage:
TX ic

i
TDD
UL
RoundDown N SD Used Frame 1 r DL Frame O Fixed

TX ic
i

IfDL:ULratioisdefinedinfraction:

N SD UL Subframe

TDD

TXi ic

N SD UL
UL
RoundDown N SD Used Frame ----------------------------------------- O Fixed
TDD
TDD

N SD DL + N SD UL
TX i ic

R UL

TX i ic

N Sym UL Subframe

i
UL
PZ UL
O Variable
TXi ic

Floor N SD UL Subframe N SCa Data 1 ---------------------

100

10.2.18 ChannelThroughput,CellCapacity,AllocatedBandwidth
Throughput,andPeruserThroughputCalculation
Name

Value
TX i ic

R DL

M
B

Unit

Description

kbps

DownlinkpeakMACchannel
throughput

kbps

DownlinkeffectiveMACchannel
throughput

kbps

Downlinkapplicationchannel
throughput

kbps

DownlinkpeakMACcellcapacity

kbps

DownlinkeffectiveMACcellcapacity

kbps

Downlinkapplicationcellcapacity

kbps

DownlinkpeakMACthroughputper
user

DL
--------------------------------D Frame
TX ic
i

R DL

M
i
B DL

TX i ic

Forproportionalfairschedulers: --------------------------------- G MUG DL

D Frame
Mi

CTP P DL

Withdownlinksegmentation: CTP P DL f Segment DL

WithMIMO(SUMIMO):

Mi

B DL

Max

Mi

1 + f SU MIMO G SU MIMO 1

B DL

WithMIMO(AMS):

Mi
B DL

TX i ic

Max

Mi
B DL

1 + f SU MIMO G SU MIMO 1

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

if CNR Preamble T AMS or CINR Preamble T AMS

M

CTP E DL
Mi

CTP A DL
Mi

Cap P DL
M

Cap E DL
Mi

Cap A DL

i
PUTP P DL

i
i
CTP P DL 1 BLER B DL

Mi

Mi
Mi
f TP Scaling
- TP Offset
CTP E DL -----------------------100
TX i ic

Mi

CTP P DL TL DL Max
M

i
i
Cap P DL 1 BLER B DL

Mi

Mi
f TP Scaling
- TP Offset
Cap E DL -----------------------100
Mi

Mi

Cap P DL
----------------------TX i ic
N Users DL

683

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

Name

Value

Unit

Description

kbps

DownlinkeffectiveMACthroughput
peruser

kbps

Downlinkapplicationthroughputper
user

kbps

UplinkpeakMACchannel
throughput

kbps

UplinkeffectiveMACchannel
throughput

kbps

Uplinkapplicationchannel
throughput

kbps

UplinkpeakMACcellcapacity

kbps

UplinkeffectiveMACcellcapacity

kbps

Uplinkapplicationcellcapacity

kbps

UplinkpeakMACallocated
bandwidththroughput

kbps

UplinkeffectiveMACallocated
bandwidththroughput

kbps

Uplinkapplicationallocated
bandwidththroughput

Cap M i

M
P UL
- ABTP P i UL
Min ---------------------- TXi ic

N Users UL

kbps

UplinkpeakMACthroughputper
user

Cap M i

M
E UL
- ABTP E i UL
Min ----------------------TX i ic

N Users UL

kbps

UplinkeffectiveMACthroughputper
user

Cap E DL
----------------------TX ic
i
N Users DL

i
PUTP E DL

Mi

Mi
f TP Scaling
- TP Offset
PUTP E DL -----------------------100
Mi

PUTP A DL

TX ic
i

R UL

Mi
B UL

--------------------------------D Frame
TX i ic

R UL

Mi
UL

TX ic
i

Forproportionalfairschedulers: --------------------------------- G MUG UL

D Frame
WithMIMO(SUMIMO):
Mi

CTP P UL

i
B UL

Max

1 + f SU MIMO G SU MIMO 1

i
B UL

WithMIMO(AMS):
B

Max

Mi

UL

TX i ic

Mi

1 + f SU MIMO G SU MIMO 1

UL

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

if CNR Preamble T AMS or CINR Preamble T AMS

WithMIMO(MUMIMO)inuplinkthroughputcoveragepredictions:
TX i ic

R UL

Mi
B UL

TX ic

--------------------------------- G MUi MIMO

D Frame
M

Mi

i
i
CTP P UL 1 BLER B UL

Mi
f TP Scaling
CTP E UL ------------------------- TP Offset
100

CTP E UL

CTP A UL
M

Cap P UL

Mi

TX ic
i

CTP P UL TL UL Max
M

Mi

i
i
Cap P UL 1 BLER B UL

Mi
f TP Scaling
Cap E UL ------------------------- TP Offset
100

Cap E UL

Cap A UL

Mi

ABTPP UL

Mi

ABTP E UL
Mi

ABTP A UL

i
PUTP P UL

i
PUTP E UL

684

N SC UL
CTP P UL ----------------Mi

Mi

i
PZ UL
N SC

i
i
ABTP P UL 1 BLER B UL

i
ABTPE UL

Mi

M
f TP Scaling
i
- TP Offset
-----------------------100

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Name
M

Value
M

PUTP A UL

i
PUTP E UL

M
f TP Scaling
i
------------------------- TP Offset
100

Unit

Description

kbps

Uplinkapplicationthroughputper
user

10.2.19 SchedulingandRadioResourceManagement
Name

Value

Unit

Description

Sel
Mi
R Min DL

TPD Min DL
---------------------------

None

Resourcesallocatedtoamobileto
satisfyitsminimumthroughput
demandindownlink

None

Resourcesallocatedtoamobileto
satisfyitsminimumthroughput
demandinuplink

None

Remainingdownlinkcellresources
afterallocationforminimum
throughputdemands

R Min UL

None

Remaininguplinkcellresourcesafter
allocationforminimumthroughput
demands

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

kbps

Remainingthroughputdemandfora
mobileindownlink

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

kbps

Remainingthroughputdemandfora
mobileinuplink

TX i ic

kbps

Downlinkpeakchannelthroughput
withmultiuserdiversitygain
(ProportionalFair)

TX ic
i

kbps

Uplinkpeakchannelthroughputwith
multiuserdiversitygain
(ProportionalFair)

None

Remainingresourcedemandfora
mobileindownlink

None

Remainingresourcedemandfora
mobileinuplink

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

CTP P DL
M

Sel
i

TPD Min UL
---------------------------

Sel
M
i
R Min UL

Sel
i

CTP P UL
TX i ic

R Rem DL

TX i ic

R Rem UL

TX i ic

TL DL Max

Sel
Mi
TX i ic

TL DL Max

M
Sel
Mi

TPD Rem DL
Sel
Mi

TPD Rem UL
Sel
Mi

CTP P DL
Sel
Mi

CTP P UL

Sel
Mi
RD Rem DL

Sel
Mi

R Min DL

Sel
Mi

Sel
i

TPD Max DL TPD Min DL

TPD Max UL TPD Min UL
Sel
Mi

CTP P DL
M

WithoutMUG

G MUG DL

WithoutMUG

G MUG UL

Sel
i

CTP P UL

Sel
Mi

TPD Rem DL
---------------------------Sel
Mi

CTP P DL
M

Sel
M
i
RD Rem UL

Sel
i

TPD Rem UL
---------------------------Sel
M
i
CTP P UL

685

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

Name

Value

Unit

Description

None

Resourcesallocatedtoamobileto
satisfyitsmaximumthroughput
demandindownlink

None

Resourcesallocatedtoamobileto
satisfyitsmaximumthroughput
demandinuplink

Sel
Mi
TXi ic

Min R Rem DL
RD Rem DL

Sel

M
i

None

Effectiveremainingdownlink
resourcesinacell
(ProportionalDemand)

Sel
Mi
TXi ic

Min R Rem UL
RD Rem UL

Sel

Mi

None

Effectiveremaininguplinkresources
inacell
(ProportionalDemand)

None

QoSclassbias
(Biased(QoSClass))

None

Remainingdownlinkcellresources
afterallocationforminimum
throughputdemandsforaQoSclass
(Biased(QoSClass))

TX ic
i

Sel

R Rem DL
Mi
-
ProportionalFair: Min RD Rem DL -------------------N

Sel
Mi

TX i ic

RD Rem DL
ProportionalDemand: R Eff Rem DL ----------------------------------

M
Sel
i
R Max DL
M

Sel
Mi

RD Rem DL

Sel
i
TX i ic

Sel
Mi
Biased(QoSClass): Min RD Rem DL

R QoS DL
--------------------
N QoS

Sel
Mi

TPD Rem DL
MaxAggregateThroughput: --------------------------Sel
Mi

CTP P DL
TX i ic

Sel

Mi
R Rem DL
-
RoundRobin: Min RD Rem DL -------------------N

TX i ic

Sel

R Rem UL
Mi
-
ProportionalFair: Min RD Rem UL -------------------N

Sel
Mi

TX i ic

RD Rem UL
ProportionalDemand: R Eff Rem UL ----------------------------------

M
Sel
i
R Max UL
M

Sel
Mi

RD Rem UL

Sel
i
TX i ic

Sel
Mi

R QoS UL

-
Biased(QoSClass): Min RD Rem UL ------------------N QoS

Sel
Mi

TPD Rem UL
MaxAggregateThroughput: --------------------------Sel
Mi

CTP P UL
TX i ic

Sel

Mi
R Rem UL
-
RoundRobin: Min RD Rem UL -------------------N

TX i ic

R Eff Rem DL

TX ic
i
R Eff Rem UL

QoS

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

R Max ErtPS
f Bias
R Max rtPS
R Max nrtPS
- = -------------------------1 + --------= -------------------------= -------------------------Sel
Sel
Sel
100
Mi
Mi
Mi
R Max rtPS
R Max nrtPS
R Max BE
r

TX i ic

R QoS DL

1 QoS
N QoS ---
TX i ic

R Rem DL ------------------------------------------------------r
1 QoS
N QoS ---

AllQoS

686

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Name

Value

Unit

Description

TX ic
i
R QoS UL

1 QoS
N QoS ---
TX ic

i
R Rem UL ------------------------------------------------------r
1 QoS
N QoS ---

None

Remainingdownlinkcellresources
afterallocationforminimum
throughputdemandsforaQoSclass
(Biased(QoSClass))

Sel
Sel

Mi
Mi

R Max DL CTP E DL

Sel

M i Site
Max 1 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Sel
Sel
Mi
Mi

Site
R Min DL CTP E DL
TP BH DL

Sel

M i Site

None

Sitebackhauloverflowratioin
downlink

Sel
Sel

Mi
Mi

CTP
Max UL

UL

Sel

M
Site
i

Max 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Sel
Sel
M
M

Site
i
i
R Min UL CTP E UL
TP BH UL

Sel

M
Site
i

None

Sitebackhauloverflowratioinuplink

None

Totalresourcesassignedtoamobile
indownlink
(Downlinktrafficloadofthemobile)

None

Totalresourcesassignedtoamobile
inuplink
(Uplinktrafficloadofthemobile)

Unit

Description

kbps

DownlinkpeakMACuserthroughput

kbps

DownlinkeffectiveMACuser
throughput

kbps

Downlinkapplicationuser
throughput

kbps

UplinkpeakMACuserthroughput

kbps

UplinkeffectiveMACuser
throughput

kbps

Uplinkapplicationuserthroughput

AllQoS

Site

BHOFDL

Site

BHOFDL

Sel

Sel
Mi

TL DL

Sel
Mi

= R DL

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Mi
Mi
Max DL CTP P DL
R Min DL CTP P DL + -----------------------------------------------Site

BHOF DL

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Sel

Sel
Mi

CTP P DL
Sel

Sel
Mi

TL UL

Sel
Mi

= R UL

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Mi
Mi
R Max UL CTP P UL
R Min UL CTP P UL + -----------------------------------------------Site

BHOF UL

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Sel

Sel
Mi

CTP P UL

10.2.20 UserThroughputCalculation
Name
Sel
Mi

UTP P DL
Sel
Mi

UTP E DL
Sel
i
UTP A DL
M

Sel
Mi

UTP P UL
Sel
Mi

UTP E UL
Sel
Mi

UTP A UL

Value
Sel
Mi

R DL

Sel
Mi

CTP P DL

Sel

Sel

M
Mi

i
UTP P DL 1 BLER B DL

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Sel

Mi
f TP Scaling
UTP E DL ------------------------- TP Offset
100
Sel
Mi

R UL

Sel
Mi

CTP P UL

Sel

Sel

Mi

Mi
UTP P UL 1 BLER B UL

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Sel

Mi
f TP Scaling
- TP Offset
UTP E UL -----------------------100

687

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

10.3 AvailableCalculations
10.3.1 PointAnalysis
10.3.1.1 ProfileView
Thepointanalysisprofileviewdisplaysthefollowingcalculationresultsfortheselectedtransmitterbasedonthecalculation
algorithmdescribedin"PreambleSignalLevelCalculation"onpage 705.

TX ic
i

Preamblesignallevel C Preamble

Pathloss L Path

Totallosses L Total

, G

, L Ant ,and L Body arenotusedinthecalculationsperformedfortheprofileview.

10.3.1.2 ReceptionView
Analysisprovidedinthereceptionviewisbasedonpathlossmatrices.So,youcandisplayreceivedsignallevelsfromthecells
forwhichcalculatedpathlossmatricesareavailable.Foreachcell,Atolldisplaysthereceivedpreamble,pilot,ortrafficsignal
levelorC/N.
ReceptionlevelbargraphsshowthesignallevelsorC/Nindecreasingorder.Themaximumnumberofbarsinthegraph
dependsonthepreamblesignallevelofthebestserver.Thebargraphdisplayscellswhosereceivedpreamblesignallevels
arehigherthantheirpreambleC/Nthresholdsandarewithina30 dBmarginfromthehighestpreamblesignallevel.
Youcanuseavalueotherthan30 dBforthemarginfromthehighestpreamblesignallevel,forexampleasmallervaluefor
improvingthecalculationspeed.Formoreinformationondefiningadifferentvalueforthismargin,seetheAdministrator
Manual.

10.3.1.3 InterferenceView
Analysisprovidedintheinterferenceviewisbasedonpathlossmatrices.So,youcandisplaythereceivedsignallevelfrom
thebestserverandinterferingsignallevelsfromothercellsforwhichcalculatedpathlossmatricesareavailable.Foreachcell,
Atolldisplaysthebestserverpreamble,pilot,ortrafficsignallevel,andinterferencefromothercells.
Interferencelevelbargraphsshowtheinterferencelevelsondifferentchannelsindecreasingorder.Themaximumnumber
ofbarsinthegraphdependsonthehighestinterferencelevelonthestudiedchannel.ThebargraphdisplayscellswhoseC/
NarehigherthantheminimuminterfererC/Nthresholdandwhoseinterferencelevelsarewithina30 dBmarginfromthe
highestinterferencelevelonthestudiedchannel.
Youcanuseavalueotherthan30 dBforthemarginfromthehighestinterferencelevelinthestudiedchannel,forexamplea
smallervalueforimprovingthecalculationspeed.Formoreinformationondefiningadifferentvalueforthismargin,seethe
AdministratorManual.

10.3.1.4 DetailsView
Analysisprovidedinthedetailsviewisbasedonpathlossmatrices.So,youcandisplaythereceivedsignallevelfromthebest
serverandinterferingsignallevelsfromothercellsforwhichcalculatedpathlossmatricesareavailable.Foreachcell,Atoll
displaysthebestserverpreamblesignallevelandinterferencefromothercells.
Theresultsforthebestserver(firstrow)aredisplayedusingbolditaliccharacters.Othercellsarelistedinthedecreasingorder
of preamble signal level. All the cells from which the received preamble signal level is higher than their preamble C/N
thresholds are listed in the table. As well, interference values are listed for all the cells whose C/N are higher than the
minimuminterfererC/Nthresholdandwhoseinterferencelevelsarewithina30 dBmarginfromthehighestinterference
levelonthepreamble.
Youcanuseavalueotherthan30 dBforthemarginfromthehighestinterferencelevelonthepreamble,forexamplea
smallervalueforimprovingthecalculationspeed.Formoreinformationondefiningadifferentvalueforthismargin,seethe
AdministratorManual.

688

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

10.3.2 CoveragePredictions
10.3.2.1 PreambleSignalLevelCoveragePredictions
Thefollowingcoveragepredictionsarebasedonthereceivedpreamblesignallevels:

CoveragebyTransmitter
CoveragebySignalLevel
OverlappingZones

For these calculations, Atoll calculates the received preamble signal level. Then, Atoll determines the selected display
parameteroneachpixelinsidethecellscalculationarea.EachpixelwithinthecalculationareaofTXi(ic)isconsideredanon
interferingreceiver.Forthesecalculations,thebestservercalculationisalwaysbasedonpreamblesignallevel.
Thesecoveragepredictionsdonotdependonthetrafficinput.Therefore,thesecalculationsareofspecialinterestbeforeand
duringthedeploymentstageofthenetworktostudythecoveragefootprintofthesystem.
L

Mi

, G

Mi

Mi

Mi

, L Ant ,and L Body arenotconsideredinthecalculationsperformedforthepreamblesignallevelbasedcoverage

predictions.
Theresolutionofthecoveragepredictiondoesnotdependontheresolutionsofthepathlossmatricesorthegeographicdata
andcanbedefinedseparatelyforeachcoverageprediction.Coveragepredictionsaregeneratedusingabilinearinterpolation
methodfrommultiresolutionpathlossmatrices(similartotheoneusedtocalculatesitealtitudes,see"PathLossCalculation
Prerequisites"onpage 53formoreinformation).
Formoreinformationonpreamblesignallevelcalculations,see"PreambleSignalLevelCalculation"onpage 705
Formoreinformationoncoverageareadeterminationandavailabledisplayoptions,see:

"CoverageAreaDetermination"onpage 689.
"CoverageDisplayTypes"onpage 690.

CoverageAreaDetermination
AtollusesparametersenteredintheConditiontabofthecoveragepredictionpropertiesdialoguetodeterminecoverage
areastodisplay.Therearethreepossibilities.

AllServers
ThecoverageareaofeachcellTXi(ic)correspondstothepixelswhere.
TX ic

TX ic

TX ic

i
i
i
MinimumThreshold C Preamble or L Total or L Path MaximumThreshold

BestSignalLevelandaMargin
ThecoverageareaofeachcellTXi(ic)correspondstothepixelswhere.
TX ic

TX ic

TX ic

i
i
i
MinimumThreshold C Preamble or L Total or L Path MaximumThreshold

AND
TX i ic
TX j jc
C Preamble Best C Preamble M

ji

WhereMisthespecifiedmargin(dB).TheBestfunctionconsidersthehighestvaluefromalistofvalues.

IfM=0 dB,AtollconsiderspixelswherethereceivedpreamblesignallevelfromTXi(ic)isthehighest.
IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelswherethereceivedpreamblesignallevelfromTXi(ic)iseitherthehighestor
withina2 dBmarginfromthehighest.
IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelswherethereceivedpreamblesignallevelfromTXi(ic)is2 dBhigherthanthe
receivedpreamblesignallevelsfromthecellswhichare2ndbestservers.

SecondBestSignalLevelandaMargin
ThecoverageareaofeachcellTXi(ic)correspondstothepixelswhere.
TX ic

TX ic

TX ic

i
i
i
MinimumThreshold C Preamble or L Total or L Path MaximumThreshold

AND

689

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

TX ic

Forsk2014

TX jc

nd
i
j
C Preamble 2 Best C Preamble M

ji

WhereMisthespecifiedmargin(dB).The2ndBestfunctionconsidersthesecondhighestvaluefromalistofvalues.

IfM=0 dB,AtollconsiderspixelswherethereceivedpreamblesignallevelfromTXi(ic)isthesecondhighest.
IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelswherethereceivedpreamblesignallevelfromTXi(ic)iseitherthesecondhighest
orwithina2 dBmarginfromthesecondhighest.
IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelswherethereceivedpreamblesignallevelfromTXi(ic)is2 dBhigherthanthe
receivedpreamblesignallevelsfromthecellswhichare3rdbestservers.

CoverageDisplayTypes
Apixelofacoverageareaiscolouredifthecalculatedvalueoftheselecteddisplayparameterisgreaterthanorequaltothe
definedthresholdsvalues.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayersthatcanbedisplayedandhiddenonthemap.
Itispossibletodisplaythecoveragepredictionswithcoloursdependingonanytransmitterorcellattribute,andothercriteria
suchas:

SignalLevel(dBm,dBV,dBV/m)
BestSignalLevel(dBm,dBV,dBV/m):Wherecellcoverageareasoverlap,Atollkeepsthehighestvalueofthesignal
level.
PathLoss(dB)
TotalLosses(dB)
BestServerPathLoss(dB):Wherecellcoverageareasoverlap,Atolldeterminesthebestcell(i.e.,thecellwiththe
highestpreamblesignallevel)andevaluatesthepathlossfromthiscell.
BestServerTotalLosses(dB):Wherecellcoverageareasoverlap,Atolldeterminesthebestcell(i.e.,thecellwiththe
highestpreamblesignallevel)andevaluatesthetotallossesfromthiscell.
NumberofServers:Atollevaluatesthenumberofcellsthatcoverapixel(i.e.,thepixelfallswithinthecoverageareas
ofthesecells).

10.3.2.2 EffectiveSignalAnalysisCoveragePredictions
Thefollowingcoveragepredictionsarebasedonthereceivedpreamble,traffic,orpilotsignallevelsandnoise,andtakeinto
accountthereceivercharacteristics( L

Mi

, G

Mi

Mi

Mi

, L Ant ,and L Body )whencalculatingtherequiredparameter:

EffectiveSignalAnalysis(DL)
EffectiveSignalAnalysis(UL)

Forthesecalculations,AtollcalculatesthereceivedsignallevelorC/Nlevelateachpixelforthechanneltypebeingstudied,
i.e.,preamble,traffic,orpilot.EachpixelwithinthecalculationareaofTXi(ic)isconsideredanoninterferingreceiver.The
propertiesofthenoninterferingprobereceiveraresetbyselectingaterminal,amobilitytype,andaservice.
Thesecoveragepredictionsdonotdependonthetrafficinput.Therefore,thesecalculationsareofspecialinterestbeforeand
duringthedeploymentstageofthenetworktostudythecoveragefootprintofthesystem.
Theresolutionofthecoveragepredictiondoesnotdependontheresolutionsofthepathlossmatricesorthegeographicdata
andcanbedefinedseparatelyforeachcoverageprediction.Coveragepredictionsaregeneratedusingabilinearinterpolation
methodfrommultiresolutionpathlossmatrices(similartotheoneusedtocalculatesitealtitudes,see"PathLossCalculation
Prerequisites"onpage 53formoreinformation).
Formoreinformationonsignallevelcalculations,see:

"PreambleSignalLevelCalculation"onpage 705.
"TrafficandPilotSignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 713.
"TrafficSignalLevelCalculation(UL)"onpage 727

Formoreinformationonpermutationzoneselection,see"PermutationZoneSelection"onpage 712.
FormoreinformationonC/Nlevelcalculations,see:

"PreambleC/NCalculation"onpage 710.
"TrafficandPilotC/NCalculation(DL)"onpage 724
"TrafficC/NCalculation(UL)"onpage 732.

Formoreinformationoncoverageareadeterminationandavailabledisplayoptions,see:

690

"CoverageAreaDetermination"onpage 691.
"CoverageDisplayTypes"onpage 691.

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

CoverageAreaDetermination
Thesecoveragepredictionsareallbestservercoveragepredictions,i.e.,thecoverageareaofeachcellcomprisesthepixels
where the cell is the best server. Best server for each pixel is calculated as explained in "Best Server Determination" on
page 711.
CoverageDisplayTypes
Apixelofacoverageareaiscolouredifthecalculatedvalueoftheselecteddisplaytypeparameterisgreaterthanorequalto
thedefinedthresholdsvalues.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayersthatcanbedisplayedandhiddenonthemap.
ItispossibletodisplaytheEffectiveSignalAnalysis(DL)coveragepredictionwithcoloursdependingonthefollowingdisplay
options:

PreambleSignalLevel(DL)(dBm)
PilotSignalLevel(DL)(dBm)
TrafficSignalLevel(DL)(dBm)
PreambleC/NLevel(DL)(dB)
PilotC/NLevel(DL)(dB)
TrafficC/NLevel(DL)(dB)
PermutationZone(DL)
Segment

ItispossibletodisplaytheEffectiveSignalAnalysis(UL)coveragepredictionwithcoloursdependingonthefollowingdisplay
options:

SignalLevel(UL)(dBm)
C/NLevel(UL)(dB)
PermutationZone(UL)

10.3.2.3 C/(I+N)basedCoveragePredictions
Thefollowingcoveragepredictionsarebasedonthereceivedsignallevels,totalnoise,andinterference.

CoveragebyC/(I+N)Level(DL)
ServiceAreaAnalysis(DL)
CoveragebyThroughput(DL)
CoveragebyQualityIndicator(DL)
CoveragebyC/(I+N)Level(UL)
ServiceAreaAnalysis(UL)
CoveragebyThroughput(UL)
CoveragebyQualityIndicator(UL)

Thesecoveragepredictionstakeintoaccountthereceivercharacteristics( L

Mi

, G

Mi

Mi

Mi

, L Ant ,and L Body )whencalculatingthe

requiredparameter.Forthesecalculations,Atollcalculatesthereceivedsignallevel,noise,andinterferenceateachpixel.
EachpixelwithinthecalculationareaofTXi(ic)isconsideredanoninterferingreceiver.Thepropertiesofthenoninterfering
probereceiveraresetbyselectingaterminal,amobilitytype,andaservice.
Thedownlinkcoveragepredictionsarebasedonthedownlinktrafficloadsofthecells,andtheuplinkcoveragepredictions
are based on the uplink noise rise values. These parameters can either be calculated by Atoll during the Monte Carlo
simulations,orsetmanuallybytheuserforallthecells.
Theresolutionofthecoveragepredictiondoesnotdependontheresolutionsofthepathlossmatricesorthegeographicdata
andcanbedefinedseparatelyforeachcoverageprediction.Coveragepredictionsaregeneratedusingabilinearinterpolation
methodfrommultiresolutionpathlossmatrices(similartotheoneusedtocalculatesitealtitudes,see"PathLossCalculation
Prerequisites"onpage 53formoreinformation).
FormoreinformationonC/(I+N),(I+N),andbearercalculations,see:

"PreambleC/(I+N)Calculation"onpage 710.
"TrafficandPilotC/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(DL)"onpage 725.
"TrafficC/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(UL)"onpage 735.
"NoiseRiseCalculation(UL)"onpage 731

Formoreinformationonthoughputcalculations,see:

"Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, Allocated Bandwidth Throughput, and PerUser Throughput Calculation" on
page 741.

Formoreinformationoncoverageareadeterminationandavailabledisplayoptions,see:

"CoverageAreaDetermination"onpage 692.
"CoverageDisplayTypes"onpage 692.

691

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

CoverageAreaDetermination
Thesecoveragepredictionsareallbestservercoveragepredictions,i.e.,thecoverageareaofeachcellcomprisesthepixels
where the cell is the best server. Best server for each pixel is calculated as explained in "Best Server Determination" on
page 711.
CoverageDisplayTypes
Apixelofacoverageareaiscolouredifthecalculatedvalueoftheselecteddisplaytypeparameterisgreaterthanorequalto
thedefinedthresholdsvalues.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayersthatcanbedisplayedandhiddenonthemap.
ItispossibletodisplaytheCoveragebyC/(I+N)Level(DL)coveragepredictionwithcoloursdependingonthefollowingdisplay
options:

PreambleC/(I+N)Level(DL)(dB)
PreambleTotalNoise(I+N)(DL)(dBm)
TrafficC/(I+N)Level(DL)(dB)
TrafficTotalNoise(I+N)(DL)(dBm)
PilotC/(I+N)Level(DL)(dB)

ItispossibletodisplaytheServiceAreaAnalysis(DL)coveragepredictionwithcoloursdependingonthefollowingdisplay
options:

Bearer(DL)
Modulation(DL):Modulationusedbythebearer
Service

ItispossibletodisplaytheCoveragebyThroughput(DL)coveragepredictionwithcoloursdependingonthefollowingdisplay
options:

PeakMACChannelThroughput(DL)(kbps)
EffectiveMACChannelThroughput(DL)(kbps)
ApplicationChannelThroughput(DL)(kbps)
PeakMACCellCapacity(DL)(kbps)
EffectiveMACCellCapacity(DL)(kbps)
ApplicationCellCapacity(DL)(kbps)
PeakMACThroughputperUser(DL)(kbps)
EffectiveMACThroughputperUser(DL)(kbps)
ApplicationThroughputperUser(DL)(kbps)

ItispossibletodisplaytheCoveragebyQualityIndicator(DL)coveragepredictionwithcoloursdependingonthefollowing
displayoptions:

Qualityindicatorsavailableinthedocument(QualityIndicatorstable):AtollcalculatesthedownlinktrafficC/(I+N)
levelsreceivedfromthebestservingcellsateachpixeloftheircoverageareas.FromtheC/(I+N),Atolldeterminesthe
bestbeareravailableoneachpixel.Then,forthecalculatedC/(I+N)andbearer,itdeterminesthevalueoftheselected
qualityindicatorfromthequalitygraphsdefinedintheWiMAXequipmentoftheselectedterminal.

ItispossibletodisplaytheCoveragebyC/(I+N)Level(UL)coveragepredictionwithcoloursdependingonthefollowingdisplay
options:

C/(I+N)Level(UL)(dB)
TotalNoise(I+N)(UL)(dBm)
AllocatedBandwidth(UL)(No.ofSubchannels)
C/(I+N)Levelfor1Subchannel(UL)(dB)
TransmissionPower(UL)(dBm)

ItispossibletodisplaytheServiceAreaAnalysis(UL)coveragepredictionwithcoloursdependingonthefollowingdisplay
options:

Bearer(UL)
Modulation(UL):Modulationusedbythebearer
Service

ItispossibletodisplaytheCoveragebyThroughput(UL)coveragepredictionwithcoloursdependingonthefollowingdisplay
options:

692

PeakMACChannelThroughput(UL)(kbps)
EffectiveMACChannelThroughput(UL)(kbps)
ApplicationChannelThroughput(UL)(kbps)
PeakMACCellCapacity(UL)(kbps)
EffectiveMACCellCapacity(UL)(kbps)
ApplicationCellCapacity(UL)(kbps)
PeakMACAllocatedBandwidthThroughput(UL)(kbps)
EffectiveMACAllocatedBandwidthThroughput(UL)(kbps)

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

ApplicationAllocatedBandwidthThroughput(UL)(kbps)
PeakMACThroughputperUser(UL)(kbps)
EffectiveMACThroughputperUser(UL)(kbps)
ApplicationThroughputperUser(UL)(kbps)

ItispossibletodisplaytheCoveragebyQualityIndicator(UL)coveragepredictionwithcoloursdependingonthefollowing
displayoptions:

Qualityindicatorsavailableinthedocument(QualityIndicatorstable):AtollcalculatestheuplinktrafficC/(I+N)levels
receivedatthebestservingcellsfromeachpixeloftheircoverageareas.FromtheC/(I+N),Atolldeterminesthebest
beareravailableoneachpixel.Then,forthecalculatedC/(I+N)andbearer,itdeterminesthevalueoftheselected
qualityindicatorfromthequalitygraphsdefinedintheWiMAXequipmentofthebestservingcell.

10.3.2.4 CellIdentifierCollisionZonesCoveragePrediction
TheCellIdentifierCollisionZonescoveragepredictionisbasedonthereceivedpreamblesignallevels.Atollcalculatesthe
receivedpreamblesignallevelthenAtolldeterminestheselecteddisplayparameteroneachpixelinsidethecellscalculation
area.EachpixelwithinthecalculationareaofTXi(ic)isconsideredanoninterferingreceiver. L

, G

, L Ant ,and L Body are

notconsideredinthecalculations.
Theresolutionofthecoveragepredictiondoesnotdependontheresolutionsofthepathlossmatricesorthegeographicdata
andcanbedefinedseparatelyforeachcoverageprediction.Coveragepredictionsaregeneratedusingabilinearinterpolation
methodfrommultiresolutionpathlossmatrices(similartotheoneusedtocalculatesitealtitudes,see"PathLossCalculation
Prerequisites"onpage 53formoreinformation).
Formoreinformationonpreamblesignallevelcalculations,see"PreambleSignalLevelCalculation"onpage 705
Formoreinformationoncoverageareadeterminationandavailabledisplayoptions,see:

"CoverageAreaDetermination"onpage 693.
"CoverageDisplayTypes"onpage 693.

CoverageAreaDetermination
AtollusesparametersenteredintheConditiontabofthecoveragepredictionpropertiesdialoguetodeterminecoverage
areastodisplay.Itispossibletodeterminethecoverageareabasedonthebestsignallevel.Thecoverageareaofeachcell
TXi(ic)correspondstothepixelswhere:
TX i ic
TX i ic
TX i ic
TX i ic
TX j jc
MinimumThreshold C Preamble or L Total or L Path MaximumThreshold AND C Preamble Best C Preamble M

ji

WhereMisthespecifiedmargin(dB).TheBestfunctionconsidersthehighestvaluefromalistofvalues.

IfM=0 dB,AtollconsiderspixelswherethereceivedpreamblesignallevelfromTXi(ic)isthehighest.
IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelswherethereceivedpreamblesignallevelfromTXi(ic)iseitherthehighestorwithin
a2 dBmarginfromthehighest.
If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received preamble signal level from TXi(ic) is 2 dB higher than the
receivedpreamblesignallevelsfromthecellswhichare2ndbestservers.

CoverageDisplayTypes
Apixelofacoverageareaiscolouredifthecalculatedvalueoftheselecteddisplayparameterisgreaterthanorequaltothe
definedthresholdsvalues.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayersthatcanbedisplayedandhiddenonthemap.
Itispossibletodisplaythecoveragepredictionswithcolourspercellor:

Numberofinterferers
Numberofinterfererspercell

10.3.3 CalculationsonSubscriberLists
WhencalculationsareperformedonalistofsubscribersbyrunningtheAutomaticServerAllocation,Atollcalculatesthepath
lossagainforthesubscriberlocationsandheightsbecausethesubscriberheightscanbedifferentfromthedefaultreceiver
heightusedforcalculatingthepathlossmatrices.
AtollcalculatesthefollowingparametersforeachsubscriberinthelistwhoseLockStatusissettoNone.

ServingBaseStationandReferenceCellasdescribedin"BestServerDetermination"onpage 711.

693

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

Atollcalculatesthefollowingparametersforeachsubscriberinthelistthathasaservingbasestationassignedandwhose
LockStatusissettoNoneorServer.

Azimuth( ):Anglewithrespecttothenorthforpointingthesubscriberterminalantennatowardsitsservingbase
station.
MechanicalDowntilt( ):Anglewithrespecttothehorizontalforpointingthesubscriberterminalantennatowards
itsservingbasestation.

Atollcalculatestheremainingparametersforeachsubscriberinthelistthathasaservingbasestationassigned,usingthe
propertiesofthedefaultterminalandservice.Formoreinformation,see:

"PreambleSignalLevelCalculation"onpage 705.
"PreambleC/(I+N)Calculation"onpage 710.
"PermutationZoneSelection"onpage 712.
"TrafficandPilotSignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 713.
"TrafficandPilotC/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(DL)"onpage 725.
"TrafficSignalLevelCalculation(UL)"onpage 727.
"NoiseRiseCalculation(UL)"onpage 731.
"TrafficC/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(UL)"onpage 735.
"Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, Allocated Bandwidth Throughput, and PerUser Throughput Calculation" on
page 741.

10.3.4 MonteCarloSimulations
Thesimulationprocessisdividedintotwosteps.

Generatingarealisticuserdistributionasexplainedin"UserDistribution"onpage 694.
Atoll generates user distributions as part of the Monte Carlo algorithm based on traffic data. The resulting user
distributioncomplieswiththetrafficdatabaseandmapsselectedwhencreatingsimulations.

SchedulingandRadioResourceManagementasexplainedunder"SimulationProcess"onpage 697.

10.3.4.1 UserDistribution
Duringeachsimulation,Atollperformstworandomtrials.Thefirstrandomtrialgeneratesthenumberofusersandtheir
activitystatusasexplainedinthefollowingsectionsdependingonthetypeoftrafficinput.

"SimulationsBasedonUserProfileTrafficMapsandSubscriberLists"onpage 694.
"SimulationsBasedonSectorTrafficMaps"onpage 696.

Once all the user characteristics have been determined, a second random trial is performed to obtain their geographical
locationsweightedaccordingtotheclutterclasses,andwhethertheyareindoororoutdooraccordingtothepercentageof
indoorusersperclutterclass.
Atolldetermines thetotalnumberof users attemptingconnectionineachsimulation
basedonthePoissondistribution.Thismayleadtoslightvariationsinthetotalnumbers
of users in different simulations. To have the same total number of users in each
simulationofagroup,addthefollowinglinesintheAtoll.inifile:
[Simulation]
RandomTotalUsers=0

10.3.4.1.1

SimulationsBasedonUserProfileTrafficMapsandSubscriberLists
Userprofileenvironmentbasedtrafficmaps:Eachpixelofthemapisassignedanenvironmentclasswhichcontainsalistof
userprofileswithanassociatedmobilitytypeandagivendensity,i.e.,numberofusersofauserprofileperkm.
Userprofiletrafficmaps:Eachpolygonorlineofthemapisassignedadensityofuserswithagivenuserprofileandmobility
type.Ifthemapiscomposedofpoints,eachpointisassignedanumberofuserswithgivenuserprofileandmobilitytype.
Fixedsubscriberslistedinsubscriberlistshaveauserprofileassignedtoeachofthem.
Userprofilesmodelthebehaviourofthedifferentusercategories.Eachuserprofilecontainsalistofservicesandparameters
describinghowtheseservicesareaccessedbytheuser.
Thenumberofusersofeachuserprofileiscalculatedfromthesurfacearea(SEnv)ofeachenvironmentclassmap(oreach
polygon)andtheuserprofiledensity(DUP).
N Users = S Env D UP

694

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Incaseofuserprofiletrafficmaps composedoflines,thenumberofusersofeach
user profile is calculated from the line length (L) and the user profile density (DUP)

Thenumberofusersisadirectinputwhenauserprofiletrafficmapiscomposedof
points.

(usersperkm): N Users = L D UP

Atollcalculatestheprobabilityforauserbeingactiveatagiveninstantintheuplinkandinthedownlinkaccordingtothe
service usage characteristics described in the user profiles, i.e., the number of voice calls or data sessions, the average
durationofeachvoicecall,orthevolumeofthedatatransferintheuplinkandthedownlinkineachdatasession.
VoiceService(v)
Userprofileparametersforvoicetypeservicesare:

Theuserterminalequipmentusedfortheservice(fromtheTerminalstable).
Theaveragenumberofcallsperhour N Call .

Theaveragedurationofacall(seconds) D Call .

N Call D Call
Calculationoftheserviceusagedurationperhour( p 0 :probabilityofanactivecall): p 0 = ---------------------------3600
Calculationofthenumberofuserstryingtoaccesstheservicev( n v ): n v = N Users p 0
Theactivitystatusofeachuserdependsontheactivityperiodsduringthecall,i.e.,theuplinkanddownlinkactivity
UL

DL

factorsdefinedforthevoicetypeservicev, f Act and f Act .

Calculationofactivityprobabilities:
UL

DL

Probabilityofbeinginactive: p Inactive = 1 f Act 1 f Act

UL

UL

DL

Probabilityofbeingactiveintheuplink: p Active = f Act 1 f Act

DL

DL

UL

Probabilityofbeingactiveinthedownlink: p Active = f Act 1 f Act

UL + DL

UL

DL

Probabilityofbeingactiveintheuplinkanddownlinkboth: p Active = f Act f Act

Calculationofnumberofusersperactivitystatus:
Numberofinactiveusers: n v Inactive = n v p Inactive
UL

UL

Numberofusersactiveintheuplink: n v Active = n v p Active

DL

DL

Numberofusersactiveinthedownlink: n v Active = n v p Active

UL + DL

UL + DL

Numberofusersactiveintheuplinkanddownlinkboth: n v Active = n v p Active

Therefore,ausercanbeeitheractiveonbothlinks,inactiveonbothlinks,activeonULonly,oractiveonDLonly.
DataService(d)
Userprofileparametersfordatatypeservicesare:

Theuserterminalequipmentusedfortheservice(fromtheTerminalstable).
Theaveragenumberofdatasessionsperhour N Session .

Theaveragedatavolume(inkBytes)transferredinthedownlink V

DL
Theaveragethroughputsinthedownlink TP Average

Calculationofactivityprobabilities: f

UL

DL

andtheuplink V

UL
andtheuplink TP Average
UL

UL

duringasession.

fortheserviced.
DL

N Session V 8
N Session V 8
DL
= ------------------------------------------ and f = -----------------------------------------UL
DL
TP Average 3600
TP Average 3600
UL

DL

Probabilityofbeinginactive: p Inactive = 1 f 1 f

695

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014
UL

Probabilityofbeingactiveintheuplink: p Active = f
DL

UL

DL

1 f

Probabilityofbeingactiveinthedownlink: p Active = f

DL

UL

1 f
UL + DL

Probabilityofbeingactiveintheuplinkanddownlinkboth: p Active = f

UL

DL

Calculationofnumberofusers:
Numberofinactiveusers: n d Inactive = N Users p Inactive
UL

UL

Numberofusersactiveintheuplink: n d Active = N Users p Active

DL

DL

Numberofusersactiveinthedownlink: n d Active = N Users p Active

UL + DL

UL + DL

Numberofusersactiveintheuplinkanddownlinkboth: n d Active = N Users p Active

Calculationofthenumberofactiveuserstryingtoaccesstheserviced(nd):
UL

DL

UL + DL

n d = n d Active + n d Active + n d Active

Theuserdistributionperserviceandtheactivitystatusdistributionbetweentheusers
areaveragedistributions.Theserviceandtheactivitystatusofeachuserarerandomly
drawn in each simulation. Therefore, if you calculate several simulations at once, the
average number of users per service and average numbers of inactive, active on UL,
activeonDLandactiveonULandDLusers,respectively,willcorrespondtocalculated
distributions.Butifyoucheckeachsimulation,theuserdistributionbetweenservicesas
wellastheactivitystatusdistributionbetweenuserscanbedifferentineachofthem.

10.3.4.1.2

SimulationsBasedonSectorTrafficMaps
Sectortrafficmapspersectorarealsoreferredtoaslivetrafficmaps.LivetrafficdatafromtheOMCisspreadoverthebest
servercoverageareasofthetransmittersincludedinthetrafficmap.Eitherthroughputdemandsperserviceorthenumber
ofactiveusersperserviceareassignedtothecoverageareasofeachtransmitter.
ForeachtransmitterTXiandeachservices,

SectorTrafficMaps(Throughputs)
AtollcalculatesthenumberofactiveusersofeachservicesonULandDLinthecoverageareaofTXiasfollows:
N

UL

UL

DL

TP Cell
TPCell
DL
= ---------------------- and N = ---------------------UL
DL
TP Average
TP Average
UL

Where TP Cell isthetotaluplinkthroughputdemanddefinedinthemapforanyservicesforthecoverageareaofthe

DL

transmitter, TP Cell isthetotaldownlinkthroughputdemanddefinedinthemapforanyservicesforthecoverage

UL

DL

areaofthetransmitter, TP Average istheaverageuplinkrequestedthroughputoftheservices,and TP Average isthe

averagedownlinkrequestedthroughputoftheservices.

SectorTrafficMaps(#ActiveUsers)
UL

Atolldirectlyusesthedefined N and N
coverageareausingtheservices.

DL

values,i.e.,thenumberofactiveusersonULandDLinthetransmitter

Atanygiveninstant,Atollcalculatestheprobabilityforauserbeingactiveintheuplinkandinthedownlinkasfollows:
Usersactiveintheuplinkanddownlinkbothareincludedinthe N

UL

and N

DL

values.Therefore,itisnecessaryto

UL
DL
UL + DL
accuratelydeterminethenumberofactiveusersintheuplink( n Active ),inthedownlink( n Active ),andboth( n Active

).

Asfortheothertypesoftrafficmaps,Atollconsidersbothactiveandinactiveusers.
Theactivitystatusofeachuserdependsontheactivityperiodsduringthecall,i.e.,theuplinkanddownlinkactivity
UL

DL

factorsdefinedfortheservice, f Act and f Act .

Calculationofactivityprobabilities:

696

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
UL

DL

Probabilityofbeinginactive: p Inactive = 1 f Act 1 f Act

UL

UL

DL

Probabilityofbeingactiveintheuplink: p Active = f Act 1 f Act

DL

DL

UL

Probabilityofbeingactiveinthedownlink: p Active = f Act 1 f Act

UL + DL

UL

DL

Probabilityofbeingactiveintheuplinkanddownlinkboth: p Active = f Act f Act

Calculationofthenumberofactiveuserstryingtoaccesstheservice:
Wehave: N

UL

UL

UL + DL

= p Active + p Active n and N

DL

DL

UL + DL

= p Active + p Active n

Where,nisthetotalnumberofactiveusersinthetransmittercoverageareausingtheservice.
Calculationofnumberofusersperactivitystatus:
UL

UL + DL

DL

UL + DL

N p Active
N p Active
UL + DL
--------------------------------------Number of users active in the uplink and downlink both: n Active = Min -------------------------------------- or
UL
UL + DL
DL
+ DL
p Active + p Active p Active + p UL
Active
UL + DL

simply, n Active = Min N

UL

DL

f Act N

DL

UL

f Act
UL

Numberofusersactiveintheuplink: n Active = N

UL

DL

Numberofusersactiveinthedownlink: n Active = N
UL

DL

UL + DL

n Active
DL

UL + DL

n Active

UL + DL

And, n = n Active + n Active + n Active

Calculationofthenumberofinactiveusersattemptingtoaccesstheservice:
nv
- p Inactive
Numberofinactiveusers: n Inactive = --------------------------1 p Inactive
Theactivitystatusdistributionbetweenusersisanaveragedistribution.Infact,ineach
simulation,theactivitystatusofeachuserisrandomlydrawn.Therefore,ifyoucalculate
severalsimulationsatonce,averagenumbersofinactive,activeonUL,activeonDLand
activeonULandDLuserscorrespondtothecalculateddistribution.Butifyoucheckeach
simulation, the activity status distribution between users can be different in each of
them.

10.3.4.2 SimulationProcess
WiMAX cells include intelligent schedulers and radio resource management features for regulating network traffic loads,
optimisingspectralefficiency,andsatisfyingtheQoSdemandsoftheusers.EachMonteCarlosimulationintheAtollWiMAX
BWAmoduleisasnapshotofthenetworkwithresourceallocationcarriedoutoveradurationof1 second.Thenumberof
WiMAXframesin1 seconddependsontheselectedframeduration, D Frame .Thestepsofthisalgorithmarelistedbelow.
Thesimulationprocesscanbesummedupintothefollowingiterativesteps.
Foreachsimulation,thesimulationprocess,
1. Generatesmobilesaccordingtotheinputtrafficdataasexplainedin"UserDistribution"onpage 694.
2. Setsinitialvaluesforthefollowingparameters:

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

Celltransmissionpowersandreductions( P Preamble , P Traffic , P Pilot ,and P Idle Pilot )aresettothevalues

definedbytheuser.
Mi

Mobiletransmissionpowerissettothemaximummobilepower( P Max ).

Cellloads( TL DL

TX i ic

TX i ic

, TL UL

TX i ic

, NR UL

TX i ic

TX i ic

, NRUL Seg , SU DL

TX i ic

,and AU DL

)aresettotheircurrentvaluesinthe

Cellstable.
3. Determines the best servers for all the mobiles generated for the simulation as explained in "Best Server
Determination"onpage 711.

697

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

Figure 10.1:WiMAXSimulationAlgorithm
Foreachiterationk,thesimulationprocess,
4. Determinesthemobileswhicharewithintheserviceareasoftheirbestservingcellsasexplainedin"ServiceArea
Calculation"onpage 712.
5. Determinesthepermutationzoneassignedtoeachmobileasexplainedin"PermutationZoneSelection"onpage 712.
6. DeterminesthedownlinkanduplinktrafficC/(I+N)andbearersforeachofthesemobilesasexplainedin"Trafficand
PilotC/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(DL)"onpage 725and"TrafficC/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(UL)"onpage 735
respectively.
7. Determines the channel throughputs at the mobile as explained in "Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, Allocated
BandwidthThroughput,andPerUserThroughputCalculation"onpage 741.
8. Performs radio resource management and scheduling to determine the amount of resources to allocate to each
mobileaccordingtotheQoSandthroughputdemandsofeachmobileusingtheselectedschedulerasexplainedin
"SchedulingandRadioResourceAllocation"onpage 746.
9. Calculates the user throughputs after allocating resources to each mobile as explained in "User Throughput
Calculation"onpage 755.
10. Updatesthetrafficloads,andnoiserisevaluesofallthecellsaccordingtotheresourcesinuseandthetotalresources
asfollows:
CalculationofTrafficLoads:
AtollcalculatesthetrafficloadsforallthecellsTXi(ic).
TX i ic

TL DL

Mi

Mi

698

TX i ic

RDL and TLUL

Mi

RUL
Mi

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

TX ic
i

ForuplinkMUMIMO, TL UL

MU MIMO
i

RC UL

MU MIMO
M
i

CalculationofUplinkNoiseRise:
ForeachvictimcellTXi(ic),theuplinknoiseriseiscalculatedandupdatedbyconsideringeachinterferingmobileMj
asexplainedin"NoiseRiseCalculation(UL)"onpage 731.
CalculationofDownlinkSegmentationUsage:
Atollcalculatesthesegmentationusagesforallthecellsasfollows:
Mi

M
TX i ic

i
PZ

Mi

R DL

Mi
PZ DL = Seg

= Seg

DL
= -----------------------------------------------------------TX i ic
TL DL

SU DL

Where
Mi

R DL

Mi
PZ DL = Seg

M
i
PZ DL = Seg

isthesumofthepercentagesofthedownlinkcellresourcesallocatedtomobiles

servedbythedownlinksegmentedpermutationzone.
CalculationofDownlinkAASUsage:
AtollcalculatesthedownlinkAASusagesforallthecellsasfollows:

AAS

Mi

TX i ic

AAS
= ------------------------------TX i ic
TL DL

AU DL

Where

Mi

R DL

Mi

R DL

AAS

isthesumofthepercentagesofthedownlinkcellresourcesallocatedtomobilesservedbythe

AAS

smartantennas.
CalculationofUplinkMUMIMOGain:
AtollcalculatestheuplinkMUMIMOgainforallthecellsasfollows:
MU MIMO
Mi

TX i ic

G MU MIMO =

R UL

MU MIMO
Mi
------------------------------------------------------------MU MIMO
Mi
RC UL

MU MIMO
i
MU MIMO
Mi

Where

R UL

isthesumofthepercentagesoftheuplinkcellresourcesallocatedtoMUMIMO

MU MIMO
Mi

mobilesand

MU MIMO
Mi

RC UL

isthesumoftherealresourceconsumptionofMUMIMOmobiles.

MU MIMO
Mi

11. Performstheconvergencetesttoseewhetherthedifferencesbetweenthecurrentandthenewloadsarewithinthe
convergencethresholds.
Theconvergencecriteriaareevaluatedattheendofeachiterationk,andcanbewrittenasfollows:
TX i ic

TL DL

TX ic

i
Max TL DL
AllTX ic
i

TX i ic

TL DL

k 1

699

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

TX ic
i

TL UL

TX ic

i
Max TL UL
AllTX ic
i

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

TL UL

TX ic

NR UL

TX i ic

If TL DL

i
Max NR UL
AllTX ic
TX i ic

Req

, TL UL

k 1

TX ic
i

NR UL

k 1

TX i ic

Req

,and NR UL

Req

arethesimulationconvergencethresholdsdefinedwhencreating

thesimulation,Atollstopsthesimulationinthefollowingcases.
Convergence:Simulationhasconvergedbetweeniterationk1andkif:
TX i ic

TL DL

TX i ic

TL DL

TX i ic

Req

AND TL UL

TX i ic

TL UL

TX i ic

Req

AND NR UL

TX i ic

NR UL

Req

Noconvergence:Simulationhasnotconvergedevenafterthelastiteration,i.e.,k=MaxNumberofIterationsdefined
whencreatingthesimulation,if:
TX ic
i

TL DL

TX ic
i

TL DL

TX ic
i

Req

OR TL UL

TX ic
i

TL UL

TX ic
i

Req

OR NR UL

TX ic
i

NR UL

Req

12. Repeatstheabovesteps(fromstep 3.)fortheiterationk+1usingthenewcalculatedloadsasthecurrentloads.

SimulationResults
Attheendofthesimulationprocess,themainresultsobtainedare:

Downlinktrafficloads
Uplinktrafficloads
Uplinknoiserisereceivedatthemainantenna
Ssegmentedzoneuplinknoiserisereceivedatthemainantenna
Angulardistributionsofdownlinktrafficpowerdensityforcellswithsmartantennas
Angulardistributionsofuplinknoiseriseforcellswithsmartantennas
DownlinkAASusage
Downlinksegmentationusage
UplinkMUMIMOcapacitygain

TheseresultscanbeusedasinputforC/(I+N)basedcoveragepredictions.
Inadditiontotheaboveparameters,thesimulationsalsolisttheconnectionstatusofeachmobile.Mobilescanberejected
dueto:

NoCoverage:Ifthemobiledoesnothaveanybestservingcell(step 3.)orifthemobileisnotwithintheservicearea
ofitsbestserver(step 4.).
NoService:Ifthemobileisnotabletoaccessabearerinthedirectionofitsactivity(step 6.),i.e.,UL,DL,orDL+UL.
SchedulerSaturation:Ifthemobileisnotinthelistofmobilesselectedforscheduling(step 8.)
ResourceSaturation:Ifallthecellresourcesareusedupbeforeallocationtothemobileorif,forauseractivein
uplink,theminimumuplinkthroughputdemandishigherthantheuplinkallocatedbandwidththroughput(step 8.)
BackhaulSaturation:IfallocatingresourcestoamobilemakestheeffectiveMACaggregatesitethroughputsexceed
themaximumbackhaulthroughputsdefinedforthesite.Thisconditionisonlyverifiedifthesimulationwascreated
withtheBackhaulcapacitycheckboxselected(step 8.)

Connectedmobiles(step 8.)canbe:

ConnectedUL:IfamobileactiveinULisallocatedresourcesinUL.
ConnectedDL:IfamobileactiveinDLisallocatedresourcesinDL.
ConnectedDL+UL:IfamobileactiveinDL+ULisallocatedresourcesinDL+UL.

10.4 CalculationDetails
The following sections describe all the calculation algorithms used in point analysis, calculation of coverage predictions,
calculationsonsubscriberlists,andMonteCarlosimulations.

10.4.1 CoandAdjacentChannelOverlapsCalculation
AWiMAXnetworkcanconsistofcellsthatusedifferentchannelbandwidths.Therefore,thestartandendfrequenciesofall
thechannelsmaynotexactlycoincide.Channelbandwidthsofcellscanoverlapeachotherwithdifferentratios.

700

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Figure 10.2:CoChannelandAdjacentChannelOverlaps
Thefollowingsectionsdescribehowthecoandadjacentchanneloverlapsarecalculatedbetweenthechannelsusedbyany
studied cell TXi(ic) and any other cell TXj(jc) of the network. In terms of interference calculation, the studied cell can be
consideredavictimofinterferencereceivedfromtheothercellsthatmightbeinterferingthestudiedcell.
TX i ic

Ifthestudiedcellisassignedachannelnumber N Channel ,itreceivescochannelinterferenceonthechannelbandwidthof

TX i ic

TX i ic

N Channel ,andadjacentchannelinterferenceontheadjacentchannelbandwidths,i.e.,correspondingto N Channel 1 and

TX i ic

N Channel + 1 .
Inordertocalculatethecoandadjacentchanneloverlapsbetweentwochannels,itisnecessarytocalculatethestartand
end frequencies of both channels (explained in "Conversion From Channel Numbers to Start and End Frequencies" on
page 701).Oncethestartandendfrequenciesareknownforthestudiedandothercells,thecoandadjacentoverlapsand
thetotaloverlapratioarecalculatedasrespectivelyexplainedin:

"CoChannelOverlapCalculation"onpage 702.
"AdjacentChannelOverlapCalculation"onpage 703.
"TotalOverlapRatioCalculation"onpage 704.

10.4.1.1 ConversionFromChannelNumberstoStartandEndFrequencies
Input

TX i ic

TX j jc

F Start FB and F Start FB :StartfrequencyofthefrequencybandassignedtothecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

F Start FB canbethestartfrequencyofaTDDfrequencyband( F Start FB TDD ),ortheuplinkorthedownlinkstart
frequencyofanFDDfrequencyband( F Start FB FDD UL or F Start FB FDD DL ).

First TX ic
i

N Channel
TX i ic

First TX jc
j

and N Channel

:FirstchannelnumbersthefrequencybandassignedtothecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

TX j jc

N Channel and N Channel :ChannelnumbersassignedtocellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

ForFDDnetworks,Atollconsidersthatthesamechannelnumberisassignedtoacellinthedownlinkanduplink,i.e.,
thechannelnumberyouassigntoacellisconsideredforuplinkanddownlinkboth.
TX i ic

TX j jc

W Channel and W Channel :BandwidthsofthechannelsassignedtocellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

ICS FB

CN FB

TX i ic

TX j jc

and ICS FB

TX i ic

:InterchannelspacingofthefrequencybandsassignedtocellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

TX j jc

and CN FB

:ChannelnumberstepofthefrequencybandsassignedtocellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

701

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

Calculations
Channelnumbersareconvertedintostartandendfrequenciesasfollows:
ForcellTXi(ic):
TX ic
i
F Start

TX i ic

F End

TX ic
i
F Start FB

TX ic

TX i ic

TXi ic N First TXi ic

Channel
Channel
N
-------------------------------------------------------
TX i ic

CN FB

TX ic

i
i
+ W Channel + ICS FB

TX i ic

= F Start + W Channel

ForcellTXj(jc):
TX j jc

F Start

TX j jc

F End

TX j jc

TX jc

TX j jc

N TXj jc N First TXj jc

Channel
Channel
-------------------------------------------------------
TX ic

CN FB

TX jc

j
j
= F Start FB + W Channel + ICS FB

TX j jc

= F Start + W Channel

Output
TX ic
i

TX jc
j

F Start and F Start :StartfrequenciesforthecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

F End

TX i ic

TX j jc

and F End

:EndfrequenciesforthecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

10.4.1.2 CoChannelOverlapCalculation
Input

TX i ic

TX j jc

F Start and F Start : Start frequencies for the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Conversion From Channel
NumberstoStartandEndFrequencies"onpage 701.

TX i ic

TX j jc

F End

and F End

: End frequencies for the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Conversion From Channel

NumberstoStartandEndFrequencies"onpage 701.

TX ic
i

W Channel :BandwidthofthechannelassignedtothestudiedcellTXi(ic).

Calculations
AtollfirstverifiesthatcochanneloverlapexistsbetweenthecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).
Cochanneloverlapexistsif:
TX i ic

TX j jc

F Start F End

TX i ic

AND F End

TX j jc

F Start

Otherwisethereisnocochanneloverlap.
Atollcalculatesthebandwidthofthecochanneloverlapasfollows:
TX i ic TX j jc

W CCO

TX jc

TX ic

TX jc

TX ic

j
i
j
i
= Min F End F End Max F Start F Start

Thecochanneloverlapratioisgivenby:
TX i ic TX j jc

r CCO

TX ic TX jc
i
j

W CCO
= ---------------------------------TX i ic
W Channel

Output

702

TX i ic TX j jc

r CCO

:CochanneloverlapratiobetweenthecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

10.4.1.3 AdjacentChannelOverlapCalculation
Input

TX ic
i

TX jc
j

F Start and F Start : Start frequencies for the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Conversion From Channel
NumberstoStartandEndFrequencies"onpage 701.

TX i ic

TX j jc

F End

and F End

: End frequencies for the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Conversion From Channel

NumberstoStartandEndFrequencies"onpage 701.

TX i ic

W Channel :BandwidthofthechannelassignedtothestudiedcellTXi(ic).

Calculations
Atoll first verifies that adjacent channel overlaps exist between (the lowerfrequency and the higherfrequency adjacent
channelsof)thecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).
Adjacentchanneloverlapexistsonthelowerfrequencyadjacentchannelif:
TX i ic

TX i ic

TX j jc

F Start W Channel F End

TX i ic

TX j jc

AND F Start F Start

Adjacentchanneloverlapexistsonthehigherfrequencyadjacentchannelif:
TX i ic

F End

TX j jc

F End

TX i ic

AND F End

TX i ic

TX j jc

+ W Channel F Start

Otherwisethereisnoadjacentchanneloverlap.
Atolldeterminestheadjacentchanneloverlapratioasfollows:
Bandwidthofthelowerfrequencyadjacentchanneloverlap:
TX i ic TX j jc

W ACO

TX jc

TX ic

TX jc

TX ic

TX ic

j
i
j
i
i
= Min FEnd F Start Max F Start F Start W Channel

Thelowerfrequencyadjacentchanneloverlapratioisgivenby:
TX i ic TX j jc

r ACO

TX i ic TX j jc

W ACO
L
= ---------------------------------TX i ic
W Channel

Bandwidthofthehigherfrequencyadjacentchanneloverlap:
TX i ic TX j jc

W ACO

TX j jc

TX i ic

= Min FEnd F End

TX ic

TX jc

TX ic

i
j
i
+ W Channel Max F Start F End

Thehigherfrequencyadjacentchanneloverlapratioisgivenby:
TX i ic TX j jc

r ACO

TX i ic TX j jc

W ACO
H
= ---------------------------------TX ic
i
W Channel

Theadjacentchanneloverlapratioisgivenby:
TX i ic TX j jc

r ACO

TX i ic TX j jc

= r ACO

TX i ic TX j jc

+ r ACO

Output

TX ic TX jc
i
j

r ACO

:AdjacentchanneloverlapratiobetweenthecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

10.4.1.4 FDDTDDOverlapRatioCalculation
TherearemanydifferentinterferencescenariospossibleinaWiMAXnetworkdependingonthetypeofduplexingusedby
thecellsofthenetwork.ThemostcommoninterferencescenariosareFDDonlyandTDDonlyinterferences.However,co
existingFDDandTDDcellsmayalsoexistandinterfereeachother.AtollmodelsthecoexistenceofFDDandTDDcellsina
networkbydeterminingtheFDDTDDoverlapratioasfollows:

703

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

Input

TDD

r DL Frame :Downlinksubframeratiodefinedintheglobalnetworksettings.

Calculations
TheFDDTDDoverlapratioiscalculatedasfollowsdependingonthefrequencybandsassignedtothecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc):
FrequencyBand

TX i ic TX j jc

OverlapRatio r FDD TDD

TXi(ic)

TXj(jc)

TDD

TDD

TDD

FDD

FDD

TDD

r DL Frame
----------------------100

FDD

FDD

TDD

Output

TX ic TX jc
i
j

r FDD TDD

:FDDTDDoverlapratiobetweenthecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

10.4.1.5 TotalOverlapRatioCalculation
Input

TX i ic TX j jc

r CCO

: Cochannel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) andTXj(jc) as calculated in "CoChannel Overlap

Calculation"onpage 702.

TX i ic TX j jc

r ACO

:AdjacentchanneloverlapratiobetweenthecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc)ascalculatedin"AdjacentChannel

OverlapCalculation"onpage 703.

TX i ic TX j jc

r FDD TDD

:FDDTDDoverlapratiobetweenthecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc)ascalculatedin"FDDTDDOverlapRatio

Calculation"onpage 703.
TX i ic

f ACS FB :AdjacentchannelsuppressionfactordefinedforthefrequencybandofthecellTXi(ic).

W Channel and W Channel :BandwidthsofthechannelsassignedtothecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

TX ic
i

TX jc
j

Calculations
Thetotaloverlapratiois:

TX i ic TX j jc

rO

TX ic

f
ACS FB-
TX ic TX jc TX ic TX jc
--------------------------TX ic TX j jc
j
i
j
10
r i
r i
+ r ACO
10
FDD TDD
CCO

TX i ic

TX j jc

TX i ic

TX j jc

ifW Channel W Channel

TX ic

f
TX i ic
ACS FB
TX ic TX jc TX ic TX jc
----------------------------
TX ic TX j jc W
i
j
i
j
10
Channel
r
r i
--------------------+
r

10

ACO
FDD TDD
TX j jc
CCO

W Channel

ifW Channel W Channel

TX i ic

W Channel
Themultiplicativefactor --------------------isusedtonormalisethetransmissionpoweroftheinterferingcellTXj(jc).Thismeansthat
TX j jc
W Channel
TX j jc

TX j jc

iftheinterferingcelltransmitsatX dBmoverabandwidthof W Channel ,anditinterferesoverabandwidthlessthan W Channel ,

704

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

TX ic
i

W Channel
theinterferencefromthiscellshouldnotbeconsideredatX dBmbutlessthanthat.Thefactor --------------------convertsX dBmover
TX jc
j
W Channel
TX jc
j

TX jc
j

W Channel toY dBm(whichislessthanX dBm)overlessthan W Channel .

Output

TX i ic TX j jc

rO

:TotalcoandadjacentchanneloverlapratiobetweenthecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

10.4.2 PreambleSignalLevelandQualityCalculations
These calculations include the calculation of the received preamble signal level, and the noise and interference on the
preamble.Thefollowingsectionsalsodescribehowthereceivedpreamblesignallevel,thenoiseandinterference,C/N,and
C/(I+N)ratiosarecalculatedinAtoll:

"PreambleSignalLevelCalculation"onpage 705.
"PreambleNoiseCalculation"onpage 706.
"PreambleC/NCalculation"onpage 710.
"PreambleInterferenceCalculation"onpage 708.
"PreambleC/(I+N)Calculation"onpage 710.

10.4.2.1 PreambleSignalLevelCalculation
Input
TX i ic

P Preamble :PreambletransmissionpowerofthecellTXi(ic).

E SA :NumberofantennaelementsdefinedforthesmartantennaequipmentusedbythetransmitterTXi.

G SA

Div
G SA

TX i

Combining

TX i

TX

:Smartpowercombininggainoffsetdefinedperclutterclass.

:Smartantennadiversitygain(forcrosspolarisedsmartantennas)definedperclutterclass.
:TransmitterantennagainfortheantennausedbythetransmitterTXi.
i

L Model :Lossonthetransmitterreceiverpath(pathloss)calculatedusingapropagationmodel.

L Ant :Antennaattenuation(fromantennapatterns)calculatedfortheantennausedbythetransmitterTXi.

M Shadowing Model :Shadowingmarginbasedonthemodelstandarddeviation.

TX

:TotaltransmitterlossesforthetransmitterTXi( L

TX

= L Total DL ).

Incoveragepredictions,shadowingmarginsaretakenintoaccountwhentheoption"Shadowingtakenintoaccount"
isselected.

L Indoor :Indoorlossestakenintoaccountwhentheoption"Indoorcoverage"isselected.

Mi
Mi

:Receiverterminallossesforthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

:Receiverterminalsantennagainforthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

L Ant :Receiverterminalsantennaattenuationcalculatedforthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Mi

Mi

Forcalculatingtheusefulsignallevelfromthebestservingcell, L Ant isdeterminedinthedirection(H,V)=(0,0)from

Mi

theantennapatternsoftheantennausedbyMi.Forcalculatingtheinterferingsignallevelfromanyinterferer, L Ant
isdeterminedinthedirectionoftheinterferingcellfromtheantennapatternsoftheantennausedbyMi,whilethe
antennaispointedtowardsMisbestservingcell.

Mi

L Body :Bodylossdefinedfortheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

705

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

, G

, L Ant , and L Body are not used in the calculations performed for the point

analysistoolsprofiletabandthepreamblesignallevelbasedcoveragepredictions.
Calculations
Thereceivedpreamblesignallevel(dBm)fromanycellTXi(ic)iscalculatedforapixel,subscriber,ormobileMiasfollows:
TX i ic

TX i ic

C Preamble = EIRP Preamble L Path M Shadowing Model L Indoor + G

Mi

Mi

Mi

Mi

L Ant L Body

WhereEIRPistheeffectiveisotropicradiatedpowerofthecellcalculatedasfollows:
TX ic
i

TX ic
i

Withoutsmartantennas: EIRP Preamble = P Preamble + G

Withsmartantennas: EIRP Preamble = P Preamble + G

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i

TX

L
TX i

TX

i
TX i

+ 10 Log E SA + G SA

Combining

Div

+ G SA

L Path isthepathloss(dB)calculatedasfollows:
TX i

L Path = L Model + L Ant

Furthermore,thetotallossesbetweenthecellandthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMicanbecalculatedasfollows:
L Total = L Path + L

TX

+ L Indoor + M Shadowing Model G

TX

+L

+ L Ant + L Body

Ifyouwishtoexcludethetheenergycorrespondingtothecyclicprefixpartofthetotal
symbol duration from the useful signal level, you must add the following lines in the
Atoll.inifile:
[WiMAX]
ExcludeCPFromUsefulPower = 1
TX i ic

Whenthisoptionisactive,thecyclicprefixenergyisexcludedfrom C Preamble .Inother

TX ic

i
words,thefactor 10 Log 1 r CP

TX ic

isaddedto C i
Preamble .

Independant of the option, interference levels are calculated for the total symbol
durations,i.e.,theenergyoftheusefulsymboldurationandthecyclicprefixenergy.
Output
TX i ic

C Preamble :ReceivedpreamblesignallevelfromthecellTXi(ic)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

L Path :PathlossbetweenthecellTXi(ic)andthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

L Total :TotallossesbetweenthecellTXi(ic)andthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

10.4.2.2 PreambleNoiseCalculation
FordeterminingthepreambleC/NandC/(I+N),Atollcalculatesthepreamblenoiseoverthebandwidthusedbythecell.The
used bandwidth depends on the number of subcarriers used by the preamble.The number of subcarriers used by the
preamblecanbedifferentfromthenumberofsubcarriersusedbythepermutationzones.
Thepreamblenoisecomprisesthermalnoiseandthenoisefigureoftheequipment.Thethermalnoisedensitydependson
thetemperature,i.e.,itremainsconstantforagiventemperature.However,thevalueofthethermalnoisevarieswiththe
usedbandwidth.
Input

706

K:Boltzmannsconstant.
T:TemperatureinKelvin.

N SCa Preamble :NumberofsubcarriersusedbythepreambledefinedfortheframeconfigurationofthecellTXi(ic).

N SCa Total :TotalnumberofsubcarriersdefinedfortheframeconfigurationofthecellTXi(ic).

TX i ic
TX i ic

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
TX ic
i

F Sampling :SamplingfrequencyforthecellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"CalculationofSamplingFrequency"onpage 738.

nf

:Noisefigureoftheterminalusedforcalculationsbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Calculations
Thepowerspectraldensityofthermalnoiseiscalculatedasfollows:
n 0 = 10 Log K T 1000 = 174dBm/Hz
Thethermalnoiseoverthepreambleforacelliscalculatedas:
TX i ic

n 0 Preamble

TX i ic
TX ic
N SCa Preamble Preamble
i

- f Segment
= n 0 + 10 Log F Sampling --------------------------------TX i ic

N SCa Total

EffectofSegmentation:
Thepreambleissegmentedandoneofthethreepreamblecarriersetsisusedfortransmission.Eachpreamblecarrier
setuses1/3rdofthetotalnumberofpreamblesubcarriers.Thepowertransmittedoverthepreamblehashigher
spectraldensitythanthepowertransmittedovertheentirechannelbandwidth.Thispowerconcentrationdueto
segmentationontheC/NandC/(I+N)resultsinanincreaseinthecoveragefootprintofthepreamble.Hence,the
Preamble
thermalnoiseatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMicoveredbythepreambleisreducedbyafactorof f Segment = 1
--- .
3
ThefollowingtableshowsthedifferenttypesofsubcarriersandtheirnumbersforpreambletransmissioninWiMAX.
N SCa Total

128

512

1024

2048

GuardSubcarriers

DC
Subcarrier

N SCa Preamble

All

1(54)

107

1(54)

35

0.3271

None

36

0.3364

None

36

0.3364

All

1(214)

428

None

143

0.3341

1(214)

142

0.3318

None

143

0.3341

All

1(426)

851

1(426)

283

0.3325

None

284

0.3337

None

284

0.3337

All

1(852)

1703

1(852)

567

0.3329

None

568

0.3335

None

568

0.3335

Segment

Left

10

42

86

172

Right

10

41

86

172

Total

20

83

172

344

Preamble

f Segment

Thepreamblenoiseisthesumofthethermalnoiseandthenoisefigureoftheterminalusedforthecalculationsbythepixel,
subscriber,ormobileMi.
TX i ic

TX i ic

n Preamble = n 0 Preamble + nf

Mi

Output

TX i ic

n Preamble :PreamblenoiseforthecellTXi(ic).

707

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

10.4.2.3 PreambleInterferenceCalculation
Theinterferencereceivedbyanypixel,subscriber,ormobile,servedbyacellTXi(ic)fromothercellsTXj(jc)canbedefinedas
thepreamblesignallevelsreceivedfrominterferingcellsTXj(jc)dependingontheoverlapthatexistsbetweenthechannels
usedbythecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc)andwhichpreamblecarriersetsareusedbythetwocells.
Input

TX j jc

C Preamble : Preamble signal level received from an interfering cell TXj(jc) as calculated in "Preamble Signal Level
Calculation"onpage 705atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMicoveredbythecellTXi(ic).

M Shadowing Model :Shadowingmarginbasedonthemodelstandarddeviation.

M Shadowing C I :ShadowingmarginbasedontheC/Istandarddeviation.
InMonteCarlosimulations,interferingsignallevelsalreadyinclude M Shadowing Model ,asexplainedin"Preamble
SignalLevelCalculation"onpage 677.
Incoveragepredictions,theratio M Shadowing Model M Shadowing C I isappliedtotheinterferingsignals(formore
information, see "Shadow Fading Model" on page 86). As the received interfering signal levels already include
M Shadowing Model , M Shadowing C I isaddedtothereceivedinterferingsignallevelsinordertoachievetheratio
M Shadowing Model M Shadowing C I :
TX jc
j

TX jc
j

C Preamble = C Preamble + M Shadowing C I

Incoveragepredictions,shadowingmarginsaretakenintoaccountwhentheoption"Shadowingtakenintoaccount"
isselected.

TX i ic TX j jc

rO

: Total channel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Co and Adjacent

ChannelOverlapsCalculation"onpage 700.

TX i ic

N Seg

TX j jc

and N Seg

: Segment numbers assigned to the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) calculated from their respective
TX i ic

TX j jc

preambleindexes( n Preamble and n Preamble )asfollows:

Inter Tech

f IRF

n Preamble

N Seg

0to31,96,99,102,105,108,111

32to63,97,100,103,106,109,112

64to95,98,101,104,107,110,113

:Intertechnologyinterferencereductionfactor.

Calculations
Thereceivedpreambleinterference(dBm)fromanycellTXj(jc)iscalculatedforapixel,subscriber,ormobileMiasfollows:
TX j jc

TX j jc

TX i ic TX j jc

I Preamble = C Preamble + f O
TX ic TX jc
i
j

Where f O

TX i ic TX j jc

Inter Tech

+ f Seg Preamble + I DL

is the interference reduction factor due to channel overlap between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc),

calculatedasfollows:
TX i ic TX j jc

fO

TX i ic TX j jc

= 10 Log r O

TX i ic TX j jc

f Seg Preamble istheinterferencereductionfactorduetopreamblesegmentation,calculatedasfollows:

TX i ic TX j jc

TX i ic TX j jc

f Seg Preamble = 10 Log p Collision

708

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
TX ic TX jc
i
j

Theprobabilityofpreamblesubcarriercollision p Collision
TX ic
i

1if N Seg

TX jc
j

= N Seg

TX ic
i

betweenthecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc)is0if N Seg

TX jc
j

N Seg

and

.
TX jc
j

TX jc
j

In case of smart antennas, C Preamble in I Preamble already includes the effect of the
TX

numberofantennaelements( E SA ).Ifyouwishtoincludetheeffectofthenumberof
antennasincaseofMIMO,youmustaddthefollowinglinesintheAtoll.inifile:
[WiMAX]
MultiAntennaInterference
Whenthemultiantennainterferenceoptionisactive,andTXj(jc)doesnothaveasmart
antenna equipment assigned, the interference is incremented by
TX jc

j
+ 10 Log N Ant TX .

TX j jc

Where N Ant TX isthenumberofMIMOtransmission(downlink)antennasdefinedfor

thecellTXj(jc).

Inter Tech

I DL

istheintertechnologydownlinkinterferencefromtransmittersofanexternalnetwork(linkeddocumentofany

technology)calculatedasfollows:
Inter Tech

I DL

TX External

EIRP DL

L Path L Indoor + G

Mi

Mi

Mi

Mi

Inter Tech

L Ant L Body f IRF

AllExternalTXs
TX External

Where EIRP DL

isthedownlinkEIRPoftheexternaltransmitter, L Path isthepathlossfromtheexternaltransmitters

tothepixel,subscriber,ormobilelocation, L Indoor istheindoorlossestakenintoaccountwhentheoption"Indoorcoverage"

isselected, L

Mi

isthereceiverterminallossesforthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi, G

Mi

isthereceiverterminalsantenna

Mi

gain for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi, L Ant is the receiver terminals antenna attenuation calculated for the pixel,
Mi

subscriber,ormobileMi,and L Body isthebodylossdefinedfortheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

CalculationoftheDownlinkIntertechnologyInterference
Thedownlinkintertechnologyinterferenceiscalculatedasfollows:
Inter Tech
I DL

TX
k

P DL Rec

--------------------------------------
=
F TX ic TX

i
k

TX k ICP DL

TX k

Here P DL Rec is the received downlink power from an interfering cell TXk belonging to another technology, and
F TX i ic TX k

ICP DL

istheintertechnologydownlinkchannelprotectionratioforafrequencyoffset F betweentheinterfered

andinterferingfrequencychannelsofTXi(ic)andTXk.
TX k

P DL Rec iscalculatedbasedontheEIRPfromGSMcells,totalpowerfromUMTS,CDMA2000,andTDSCDMAcells,maximum
powerfromLTEcells,preamblepowerfromWiMAXcells,anddownlinkcellpowerfromWiFicells.
Output

TX j jc

I Preamble : Preamble interference received from any interfering cell TXj(jc) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi
coveredbyacellTXi(ic).

Inter Tech

I DL

:Downlinkintertechnologyinterference.

709

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

10.4.2.4 PreambleC/NCalculation
Input

TX ic
i

C Preamble :ReceivedpreamblesignallevelfromthecellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"PreambleSignalLevelCalculation"on
page 705.
TX i ic

n Preamble :PreamblenoiseforthecellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"PreambleNoiseCalculation"onpage 706.

G Div Preamble :PreamblediversitygaindefinedintheWiMAXequipmentoftheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,

Mi

ormobileMi.

DL

G Div :Additionaldownlinkdiversitygaindefinedfortheclutterclasswherethepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiis
located.

Calculations
ThepreambleC/NforacellTXi(ic)iscalculatedasfollowsforanypixel,subscriber,ormobileMi:
TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

Mi

DL

CNR Preamble = C Preamble n Preamble + G Div Preamble + G Div

ThepreamblediversitygainisappliedtothepreambleC/NwhenthecellandtheterminalbothsupportanyformofMIMOin
downlink.Theadditionaldownlinkdiversitygaindefinedperclutterisalsoapplied.
Output

TX i ic

CNR Preamble :PreambleC/NfromthecellTXi(ic)atanypixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

10.4.2.5 PreambleC/(I+N)Calculation
Thecarriersignaltointerferenceandnoiseratioiscalculatedinthreesteps.FirstAtollcalculatesthereceivedpreamblesignal
levelfromthestudiedcell(asexplainedin"PreambleSignalLevelCalculation"onpage 705)atthepixel,subscriberormobile
understudy.Next,Atollcalculatestheinterferencereceivedatthesamestudiedpixel,subscriber,ormobilefromallthe
interferingcells(asexplainedin"PreambleInterferenceCalculation"onpage 708).Interferencefromeachcellisweighted
accordingtothecoandadjacentchanneloverlapbetweenthestudiedandtheinterferingcells,andtheprobabilitiesof
subcarriercollision.Finally,Atolltakestheratioofthepreamblesignallevel,andthesumofthetotalinterferencefromall
interferingcellsandthenoise(ascalculatedin"PreambleNoiseCalculation"onpage 706).
Thereceiverterminalisalwaysconsideredtobeorientedtowardsitsbestserver,exceptwhenthe"LockStatus"issetto
"Server+Orientation"forasubscriberinasubscriberlistanditsazimuthandtiltmanuallyedited.InthecaseofNLOSbetween
thereceiverandthebestserver,Atolldoesnottrytofindthedirectionofthestrongestsignal,thereceiverisorientedtowards
thebestserverjustasinthecaseofLOS.
Input

TX i ic

C Preamble :Preamblesignallevel receivedfromthe cell TXi(ic) atapixel, subscriber,or mobile Mi ascalculated in

"PreambleSignalLevelCalculation"onpage 705.
TX i ic

n Preamble :PreamblenoiseforthecellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"PreambleNoiseCalculation"onpage 706.

I Preamble :PreambleinterferencereceivedfromanycellTXj(jc)atapixel,subscriber,ormobileMicoveredbyacell

TX j jc

TXi(ic)ascalculatedin"PreambleInterferenceCalculation"onpage 708.
Inter Tech

NR DL

G Div Preamble :PreamblediversitygaindefinedintheWiMAXequipmentoftheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,

:Intertechnologydownlinknoiserise.

ormobileMi.

DL

G Div :Additionaldownlinkdiversitygaindefinedfortheclutterclasswherethepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiis
located.

710

Inter Tech

I DL

:Downlinkintertechnologyinterferenceascalculatedin"PreambleInterferenceCalculation"onpage 708.

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Calculations
ThepreambleC/(I+N)foracellTXi(ic)iscalculatedasfollowsatanypixel,subscriber,ormobileMi:
TX ic

TX ic
i

CINR Preamble

TXj jc

n
Preamble

IPreamble
-----------------------------
TX ic
M
i
Inter Tech
DL
10
-
-------------------------- + NR Inter Tech + G i
= C Preamble 10 Log
+ I DL
+ 10
10
DL
Div Preamble + G Div

10

AllTXj jc

ThepreamblediversitygainisappliedtothepreambleC/(I+N)whenthecellandtheterminalbothsupportanyformofMIMO.
Theadditionaldownlinkdiversitygaindefinedperclutterisalsoapplied.
Thepreambletotalnoise(I+N)foracellTXi(ic)iscalculatedasfollowsforanypixel,subscriber,ormobileMi:
TX ic

TX i ic

I + N Preamble

TX j jc
n Preamble

IPreamble
-----------------------------
Inter Tech
10
-
+ NR Inter Tech
--------------------------= 10 Log
+I
+ 10
10
DL

10
DL
AllTX j jc

Output
TX i ic

CINR Preamble :PreambleC/(I+N)fromthecellTXi(ic)atapixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

I + N Preamble :PreambletotalnoisefromtheinterferingcellsTXj(jc)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMicovered

TX i ic

byacellTXi(ic).

10.4.3 BestServerDetermination
InWiMAX,bestserverreferstoacell("servingtransmitter""referencecell"pair)fromwhichapixel,subscriber,ormobileMi
getsthehighestpreamblesignallevelorpreambleC/(I+N).Thiscalculationalsodetermineswhetherthepixel,subscriber,or
mobileMiiswithinthecoverageareaofanytransmitterornot.
Input

TX i ic

C Preamble :PreamblesignallevelreceivedfromanycellTXi(ic)atapixel,subscriber,ormobileMi ascalculatedin

"PreambleSignal Level Calculation" on page 705 using theterminal and serviceparameters ( L
M

Mi

, G

Mi

Mi

, L Ant , and

L Body )ofMi."PreambleC/(I+N)Calculation"onpage 710

TX i ic

CINR Preamble :PreambleC/(I+N)receivedfromanycellTXi(ic)atapixel,subscriber,ormobileMi as calculatedin

"PreambleC/(I+N)Calculation"onpage 710.

Calculations
Thebestserverofanypixel,subscriber,ormobileMi, BSM ,isthecellfromwhichthereceivedpreamblesignallevelorC/
i

(I+N)isthehighestamongallthecells.Thebestserverisdeterminedasfollows:
BS M = TX i ic
i

TX i ic

TX i ic

C Preamble = Best
C

AllTX i ic Preamble

or BS M = TX i ic
i

TX i ic
TX i ic

CINR Preamble = Best

CINR Preamble
AllTX i ic

Here ic is the cell of the transmitter TXi with the highest preamble power. However, if more than one cell of the same
transmittercoversthepixel,subscriber,ormobile,thefinalreferencecellicmightbedifferentfromtheinitialcellic(theone
withthehighestpower)dependingontheservingcellselectionmethod:

Random:Incoveragepredictioncalculationsandincalculationsonsubsriberlists,thecellofthehighestprioritylayer
is selected as the serving (reference) cell. In Monte Carlo simulations, a random cell is selected as the serving
(reference)cell.
Distributive:Incoveragepredictioncalculationsandincalculationsonsubsriberlists,thecellofthehighestpriority
layerisselectedastheserving(reference)cell.InMonteCarlosimulations,mobilesaredistributedamongcelllayers
onebyone,i.e.,ifmorethanonecelllayercoversasetofmobiles,thefirstmobileisassignedtothehighestpriority
layer,the2ndmobiletothesecondhighestprioritylayer,andsoon.

711

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

WhenusingeithertheRandomortheDistributivecellselectionmethod,thereferencecellonceassignedtoamobile
doesnotchangeduringMonteCarlosimulations.
Output

BS M :Bestservingcellofthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.
i

10.4.4 ServiceAreaCalculation
InWiMAX,apixel,subscriber,ormobileMicanbecoveredbyacell(ascalculatedin"BestServerDetermination"onpage 711)
butcanbeoutsidetheservicearea.Apixel,subscriber,ormobileMiissaidtobewithintheserviceareaofitsbestservingcell
TXi(ic) if the preamble C/N from the cell at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile is greater thanorequaltothe preamble C/N
thresholddefinedforthecell.
Input

TX i ic

CNR Preamble :PreambleC/NfromthecellTXi(ic)atapixel,subscriber,ormobileMiascalculatedin"PreambleC/N

Calculation"onpage 710.

TX i ic

T Preamble :PreambleC/NthresholddefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

Calculations
Apixel,subscriber,ormobileMiiswithintheserviceareaofitsbestservingcellTXi(ic)if:
TX ic
i

TX ic
i

CNR Preamble T Preamble

Output

True:Ifthecalculationcriterionissatisfied.
False:Otherwise.

10.4.5 PermutationZoneSelection
In order to be able to calculate the traffic C/(I+N) and the throughputs, a permutation zone is assigned to each pixel,
subscriber,ormobileMilocatedwithintheservicearea(ascalculatedin"ServiceAreaCalculation"onpage 712)ofitsbest
servingcell.ThepermutationzoneassignedtoMiisonewhichcoversMiintermsofdistanceandpreambleC/NorC/(I+N),
andacceptsuserspeedsequaltoorhigherthanMisspeedselectedforthecalculation.
Apixel,subscriber,ormobileMiwhichisunabletogetapermutationzoneisconsideredtobeoutsidetheservicearea.
Input
TX i ic

d Max PZ :MaximumdistancecoveredbyapermutationzoneofacellTXi(ic).

QT PZ

TX ic
i

: Minimum preamble C/N or C/(I+N) required at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi to connect to a

permutationzoneofacellTXi(ic).
TX i ic

Speed Max PZ :MaximumspeedsupportedbyapermutationzoneofacellTXi(ic).

TX ic
i
CNR Preamble

M TX ic
i
i

:Distancebetweenthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiandacellTXi(ic).
:PreambleC/NfromthecellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"PreambleC/NCalculation"onpage 710.

TX i ic

CINR Preamble :PreambleC/(I+N)fromthecellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"PreambleC/(I+N)Calculation"onpage 710.

Mobility M i :Speedofthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Calculations
Mi is assigned the permutation zone with the highest priority among the permutation zones whose selection criteria Mi
satisfies.Misatisfiestheselectioncriteriaofapermutationzoneif:

712

ThedistancebetweenMiandTXi(ic)islessthanorequaltothemaximumdistancecoveredbythepermutationzone:

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

M TX ic
i
i

TX ic
i

d Max PZ

ThepreambleC/NorC/(I+N)atMiisbetterthanorequaltothequalitythresholddefinedforthepermutationzone:
TX ic
i

TX ic
i

CNR Preamble QT PZ

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

or CINR Preamble QT PZ

ThemobilityofMiislessthanorequaltothemaximummobilespeedsupportedbythepermutationzone:
TX i ic

Mobility M i Speed Max PZ

Therefore,thepermutationzonesassignedtoapixel,subscriber,ormobileMiinthedownlinkanduplinkare:

PZ DL

Mi

PZ UL

TX ic
i
= HighestPriority PZ DL

TX ic
TX ic

i
i

CNR

Preamble QT PZ

TX

ic

TX

ic

TX

ic

i
i
i
i
AND Mobility M Speed
d Max PZ AND
OR
d

i
Max

PZ

TX ic
TX i ic
CINR i

QT

TX ic
i
= HighestPriority PZ UL

TX i ic
TX i ic

CNR

QT
Preamble
PZ

TX i ic
TX i ic
M i TX i ic

d Max PZ AND
AND Mobility M i Speed Max PZ
OR
d

TX i ic
TX i ic
CINR

QT

Preamble

Preamble

PZ

PZ

Ifmorethan1permutationzonesatisfiesthedistance,speed,andqualitythresholdcriteria,andallhavethesamepriority,
thepermutationzoneassignedtothepixel,subscriber,ormobilewillbethefirstinthelistofpermutationzones(frame
configuration)amongthesezones.
Output

PZ DL and PZ UL :Downlinkanduplinkpermutationzonesassignedtothepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

10.4.6 TrafficandPilotSignalLevelandQualityCalculations
Trafficandpilotsubcarrierscanbetransmittedwithdifferenttransmissionpowersthanthepreamblepowerofacell,anddo
notsufferthesameinterferenceandnoiseasthepreamble.Thefollowingsectionsdescribehowtrafficandpilotsignallevels,
noiseandinterference,C/N,andC/(I+N)ratiosarecalculatedonthedownlinkanduplink.

"TrafficandPilotSignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 713.
"TrafficandPilotNoiseCalculation(DL)"onpage 715.
"TrafficandPilotInterferenceCalculation(DL)"onpage 716.
"TrafficandPilotC/NCalculation(DL)"onpage 724.
"TrafficandPilotC/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(DL)"onpage 725.
"TrafficSignalLevelCalculation(UL)"onpage 727.
"TrafficNoiseCalculation(UL)"onpage 728.
"TrafficInterferenceCalculation(UL)"onpage 729.
"TrafficC/NCalculation(UL)"onpage 732.
"TrafficC/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(UL)"onpage 735.

10.4.6.1 TrafficandPilotSignalLevelCalculation(DL)
Input
TX i ic

P Preamble :PreambletransmissionpowerofthecellTXi(ic).

P Traffic :TrafficpowerreductionofthecellTXi(ic).

TX ic
i

713

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

TX ic
i

P Pilot :PilotpowerreductionofthecellTXi(ic).

TX

:TransmitterantennagainfortheantennausedbythetransmitterTXi.

Withoutsmartantennas: G

Withsmartantennas: G
G

TX i

TX i

TX

isthetransmitterantennagain,i.e., G

TX

TX

= G Ant .

isthesmartantennagaininthedirectionofthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi,i.e.,

= G SA . Where is the direction in which Mi is located. For more information on the calculation of

G SA ,refertosection"BeamformingSmartAntennaModels"onpage 41.

Array
G SA

G SA

G SA :Smartantennadiversitygain(forcrosspolarisedsmartantennas)definedperclutterclass.

L Path :Pathloss( L Path = L Model + L Ant ).

L Model :Lossonthetransmitterreceiverpath(pathloss)calculatedusingapropagationmodel.

L Ant :Antennaattenuation(fromantennapatterns)calculatedfortheantennausedbythetransmitterTXi.

M Shadowing Model :Shadowingmarginbasedonthemodelstandarddeviation.

:Smartantennaarraygainoffsetdefinedperclutterclass.

Combining

:Smartpowercombininggainoffsetdefinedperclutterclass.

Div

TX i

:TotaltransmitterlossesforthetransmitterTXi( L
TX

TX i

= L Total DL ).

TX i

Incoveragepredictions,shadowingmarginsaretakenintoaccountwhentheoption"Shadowingtakenintoaccount"
isselected.

L Indoor :Indoorlossestakenintoaccountwhentheoption"Indoorcoverage"isselected.

Mi

Mi

:Receiverterminallossesforthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.
:Receiverterminalsantennagainforthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Mi

L Ant :Receiverterminalsantennaattenuationcalculatedforthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Mi

Forcalculatingtheusefulsignallevelfromthebestservingcell, L Ant isdeterminedinthedirection(H,V)=(0,0)from

Mi

theantennapatternsoftheantennausedbyMi.Forcalculatingtheinterferingsignallevelfromanyinterferer, L Ant
isdeterminedinthedirectionoftheinterferingcellfromtheantennapatternsoftheantennausedbyMi,whilethe
antennaispointedtowardsMisbestservingcell.
Mi

L Body :Bodylossdefinedfortheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Calculations
Thereceivedtrafficandpilotsignallevels(dBm)fromanycellTXi(ic)arecalculatedforapixel,subscriber,ormobileMias
follows:
TX i ic

TX i ic

Mi

TX i ic

Mi

C Traffic = EIRP Traffic L Path M Shadowing Model L Indoor + G

TX i ic

C Pilot

= EIRP Pilot L Path M Shadowing Model L Indoor + G

L
L

Mi

Mi

Mi

Mi

Mi

Mi

L Ant L Body and

L Ant L Body

WhereEIRPistheeffectiveisotropicradiatedpowerofthecellcalculatedasfollows:
TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i

TX i ic

TX i

EIRP Traffic = P Traffic + G

TX i ic

EIRP Pilot

= P Pilot + G

TX ic
i

Array

+ G SA

Array

+ G SA

+ G SA
+ G SA

Div

TX i

Div

TX i

Combining

+ G SA L

Combining

+ G SA L

and

TX ic
i

With P Traffic and P Pilot beingthetrafficandpilottransmissionpowersofthecellTXi(ic)calculatedasfollows:

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

P Traffic = P Preamble P Traffic and P Pilot

714

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

= P Preamble P Pilot

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Ifyouwishtoexcludethetheenergycorrespondingtothecyclicprefixpartofthetotal
symbol duration from the useful signal level, you must add the following lines in the
Atoll.inifile:
[WiMAX]
ExcludeCPFromUsefulPower = 1
TX i ic

Whenthisoptionisactive,thecyclicprefixenergyisexcludedfrom C Preamble .Inother

TX i ic

words,thefactor 10 Log 1 r CP

TX ic

isaddedto C i
Preamble .

Independant of the option, interference levels are calculated for the total symbol
durations,i.e.,theenergyoftheusefulsymboldurationandthecyclicprefixenergy.

Output
TX i ic

C Traffic :ReceivedtrafficsignallevelfromthecellTXi(ic)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

C Pilot :ReceivedpilotsignallevelfromthecellTXi(ic)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

TX i ic

10.4.6.2 TrafficandPilotNoiseCalculation(DL)
FordeterminingthetrafficandpilotC/NandC/(I+N),Atollcalculatesthedownlinknoiseoverthechannelbandwidthusedby
the cell. The used bandwidth depends on the number of used subcarriers. The numbers of subcarriers used by different
permutationzonescanbedifferent.
Thedownlinknoisecomprisesthermalnoiseandthenoisefigureoftheequipment.Thethermalnoisedensitydependson
thetemperature,i.e.,itremainsconstantforagiventemperature.However,thevalueofthethermalnoisevarieswiththe
usedbandwidth.
Input

K:Boltzmannsconstant.
T:TemperatureinKelvin.
M
i
PZ DL

N SCa Used :NumberofsubcarriersusedbythedownlinkpermutationzoneofacellTXi(ic)assignedtoMi.

N SCa Total :TotalnumberofsubcarriersdefinedfortheframeconfigurationofacellTXi(ic).

F Sampling :SamplingfrequencyforthecellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"CalculationofSamplingFrequency"onpage 738.

nf

TX i ic

TX i ic
M

:Noisefigureoftheterminalusedforcalculationsbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Calculations
Thepowerspectraldensityofthermalnoiseiscalculatedasfollows:
n 0 = 10 Log K T 1000 = 174dBm/Hz
Thethermalnoiseforacelliscalculatedas:
Mi

TX i ic

n 0 DL

PZ DL

N SCa Used
TXi ic
= n 0 + 10 Log F Sampling ------------------------
TX i ic

N
SCa

Total

Thedownlinknoiseisthesumofthethermalnoiseandthenoisefigureoftheterminalusedforthecalculationsbythepixel,
subscriber,ormobileMi.
TX i ic

n DL

TX i ic

= n 0 DL + nf

Mi

EffectofSegmentation:
If you select downlink segmentation support for the frame configuration used by the cell, it means that the first
downlinkPUSCpermutationzoneissegmented.Allotherzonesarepooledtogethertoformanonsegmentedzone.
The downlink segmenting factor, f Segment DL , is calculated from the number of secondary subchannel groups
assignedtothepermutationzoneinthePermutationZonestable.

715

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

PSG + 2 SSGf Segment DL = 3

-------------------------------------------15
Where,PSGisthenumberofprimarysubchannelgroupsandSSGisthenumberofusedsecondarysubchannelgroups.
Themultiplicativecoefficientsof3and2arederivedfromtheratioofthenumbersof
subchannelsthatbelongtotheprimaryandtothesecondarysubchannelgourps.For
example,fortheFFTsizeof1024(or2048),eachprimarysubchannelgroupcontains6
(or 12) subchannels, and each secondary subchannel group contains 4 (or 8)
subchannels,whichgivestheratioof3:2.And,thedenominatorof15=3x3+2x3.
f Segment DL representsthefractionofthechannelbandwidthusedbyadownlinksegment.Thepowertransmitted
1
over a segment has ---------------------------- times the spectral density of the power transmitted over the entire channel
f Segment DL
1
bandwidth.WhencalculatingthedownlinkC/NandC/(I+N)ratios,theincreaseinpowerby ---------------------------- duetothis
f Segment DL
powerconcentrationisequivalenttoareductioninthenoiselevelby f Segment DL .Hence,ifdownlinksegmentation
is used, the thermal noise power at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by the downlink segmented
permutationzoneisreducedbythefactor f Segment DL .Whichmeansthatthethermalnoisefortheasegmentofthe
channelusedbyacelliscalculatedas:
Mi

TX i ic

n 0 DL

PZ DL

TXi ic
N SCa Used

= n 0 + 10 Log F Sampling ------------------------ f Segment DL

TX i ic

N SCa Total

Output

TX i ic

n DL

:DownlinknoiseforthecellTXi(ic).

10.4.6.3 TrafficandPilotInterferenceCalculation(DL)
Theinterferencereceivedbyanypixel,subscriber,ormobile,servedbyacellTXi(ic)fromothercellsTXj(jc)canbedefinedas
the traffic and pilot signal levels received from interfering cells TXj(jc) depending on the overlap that exists between the
channelsusedbythecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc),onthetrafficloadsoftheinterferingcellsTXj(jc),andwhetherthecellsuse
downlinksegmentationornot.Moreover,theinterferencecancomefromcellsusingsimpleaswellassmartantennas.
Thecalculationcanbedividedintothetwoparts.

10.4.6.3.1

"TrafficandPilotInterferenceSignalLevelsCalculation(DL)"onpage 716.
"EffectiveTrafficandPilotInterferenceCalculation(DL)"onpage 720.

TrafficandPilotInterferenceSignalLevelsCalculation(DL)
ThetrafficandpilotsignallevelsreceivedfrominterferingcellsTXj(jc)atapixel,subscriber,ormobileMi,coveredbyacell
TXi(ic),arecalculatedinadifferentmannerthanthetrafficandpilotsignallevelsfromthestudiedcellTXi(ic).Thissection
explainshowtheseinterferingsignalsarecalculated.
Input

716

TX j jc

P Preamble :PreambletransmissionpowerofthecellTXj(jc).

P Pilot :PilotpowerreductionoftheinterferingcellTXj(jc).

P Traffic :TrafficpowerreductionoftheinterferingcellTXj(jc).

P Idle Pilot :IdlepilotpowerreductionoftheinterferingcellTXj(jc).

TX j jc
TX j jc
TX j jc

TX

:TotaltransmitterlossesforthetransmitterTXj( L

TX

= L Total DL ).

TX j

L Path :Pathloss( L Path = L Model + L Ant ).

L Model :Lossonthetransmitterreceiverpath(pathloss)calculatedusingapropagationmodel.

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
TX

L Ant :Antennaattenuation(fromantennapatterns)calculatedfortheantennausedbythetransmitterTXj.

M Shadowing Model :Shadowingmarginbasedonthemodelstandarddeviation.

M Shadowing C I :ShadowingmarginbasedontheC/Istandarddeviation.
Incoveragepredictions,shadowingmarginsaretakenintoaccountwhentheoption"Shadowingtakenintoaccount"
isselected.

L Indoor :Indoorlossestakenintoaccountwhentheoption"Indoorcoverage"isselected.

Mi

:Receiverterminallossesforthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Mi

:Receiverterminalsantennagainforthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Mi

L Ant :Receiverterminalsantennaattenuationcalculatedforthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.
M

L Ant isdeterminedinthedirectionofTXj(jc)fromtheantennapatternsoftheantennausedbyMiwhiletheantenna
ispointedtowardsTXi(ic).
Mi

L Body :Bodylossdefinedfortheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

TL DL

TX jc
j

:DownlinktrafficloadoftheinterferingcellTXj(jc).

TrafficloadscaneitherbecalculatedusingMonteCarlosimulations,orenteredmanuallyforeachcell.Calculationof
trafficloadsisexplainedin"SimulationProcess"onpage 697.

TX jc
j

AU DL

:DownlinkAASusageratiooftheinterferingcellTXj(jc).

Downlink AAS usage ratios are calculated using Monte Carlo simulations as explained in "Simulation Process" on
page 697.

TX j jc

N SCa Used :Numberofusedsubcarriersdefinedforthefirstdownlinkpermutationzoneintheframeconfiguration

assignedtotheinterferingcellTXj(jc).

TX j jc

N SCa Data :Numberofdatasubcarriersdefinedforthefirstdownlinkpermutationzoneintheframeconfiguration

assignedtotheinterferingcellTXj(jc).

Calculations
WiMAXcellscantransmitdifferentpowersonpilot(NUsedNData)anddata(NData)subcarriersforthepartoftheframewith
traffic,andadifferentpilotpowerforthepartoftheframethatdoesnothavetrafficbursts.Datasubcarriersareoffduring
theemptypartoftheframe.Therefore,theinterferencereceivedfromacelldependsonthetrafficloadandthedifferent
powersofthecell,i.e.,pilot,traffic,andidlepilotpowers.
MonteCarlosimulationsandcoveragepredictioncalculationspresentdifferentscenariosforinterferencecalculationsinthe
caseofsmartantennas.

MonteCarloSimulations:
InthecaseofMonteCarlosimulations,theinterfereriseitherusingthetransmitterantennaorthesmartantennaat
any given moment. So, for each interfered pixel, subscriber, or mobile, Atoll already knows the type of the
interferencesource.Therefore,theinterferencereceivedfromanycellTXj(jc)canbegivenby:
TX jc

TX j jc

Withoutsmartantennas: I Total

TX jc

j
I j

I
Non AAS
Idle
----------------------------------------------
10
10

+ 10
= 10 Log 10

TX jc

TX jc
j
Withsmartantennas: I Total

I j
AAS -
-----------------10

= 10 Log 10

CoveragePredictions:

717

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

In the case of coverage prediction calculations, the interferer could either be transmitting using the transmitter
antenna,orusingthesmartantenna,oritcouldbeempty,ornottransmitting.Therefore,theinterferencereceived
fromanycellTXj(jc)canbegivenby:
TX jc

TX jc

TX jc

j
j
I j

I
I
Non AAS
Idle
AAS
----------------------------------------------------------------
10
10
10
+ 10
+ 10
= 10 Log 10

TX jc
j

I Total

Where,thethreecomponentsoftheinterferenceare:
TX j jc

I Non AAS :Interferencefromtheloadedpartoftheframetransmittedusingthemainantenna,

I AAS

I Idle

TX jc
j
TX j jc

:Interferencefromtheloadedpartoftheframetransmittedusingthesmartantenna,
:Interferencefromtheempty,oridle,partoftheframe.

Theabovecomponentsoftheinterferencearecalculatedasfollows:
Theinterferencefromtheloadedpartoftheframetransmittedusingthemainantennaiscalculatedasfollows:
Thereceivedinterferingtrafficandpilotsignallevels(dBm)fromanycellTXj(jc)arecalculatedforapixel,subscriber,
ormobileMiasfollows:
InMonteCarlosimulations:
TX j jc

TX j jc

Mi

TX j jc

Mi

I Traffic = EIRP Traffic L Path M Shadowing Model L Indoor + G

TX j jc

I Pilot

= EIRP Pilot L Path M Shadowing Model L Indoor + G

L
L

Mi

Mi

Mi

Mi

Mi

Mi

L Ant L Body
L Ant L Body

Incoverageprediction:
TX j jc

TX j jc

Mi

TX j jc

Mi

I Traffic = EIRP Traffic L Path M Shadowing Model + M Shadowing C I L Indoor + G

TX j jc

I Pilot

= EIRP Pilot L Path M Shadowing Model + M Shadowing C I L Indoor + G

L
L

Mi

Mi

Mi

Mi

Mi

Mi

L Ant L Body
L Ant L Body

WhereEIRPistheeffectiveisotropicradiatedpowerofthecellcalculatedasfollows:
TX j jc

TX j jc

EIRP Traffic = P Traffic + G

TX j jc

TX j

TX j

TX j jc

and EIRP Pilot

TX j jc

= P Pilot + G

TX j

TX j

TX j jc

With P Traffic and P Pilot beingthetrafficandpilottransmissionpowersofthecellTXj(jc)calculatedasfollows:

TX jc
j

TX jc
j

TX jc
j

TX jc
j

P Traffic = P Preamble P Traffic and P Pilot

And G

TX j

TX jc
j

TX jc
j

= P Preamble P Pilot

TX j

= G Ant ,i.e.,thetransmitterantennagainfortheantennausedbythetransmitterTXj.

Theinterferencefromtheloadedpartoftheframetransmittedusingthemainantennaisgivenas:
TX jc

TX j jc

I Non AAS

TX jc

j
I j

I
TX j jc
TX j jc
TrafficPilot -

------------------ TX jc
-----------------TX j jc
N
N
j
10
10
SCa

Data
SCa Data
- + 10
----------------------- 1 ----------------------- 1 AU DL 10
= 10 Log TL DL
TX j jc

TX j jc

N SCa Used
N SCa Used

IfyouwishtoincludetheeffectofthenumberofantennasincaseofMIMO,youmust
addthefollowinglinesintheAtoll.inifile:
[WiMAX]
MultiAntennaInterference = 1
Whenthemultiantennainterferenceoptionisactive,theinterferenceisincrementedby
TX jc

TX jc

j
j
+ 10 Log N Ant TX . Where N Ant TX is the number of MIMO transmission

(downlink)antennasdefinedforthecellTXj(jc).

718

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Theinterferencefromtheloadedpartoftheframetransmittedusingthesmartantennaiscalculatedasfollows:
Thereceivedinterferingtrafficsignallevel(dBm)fromanycellTXj(jc)iscalculatedforapixel,subscriber,ormobileMi
asfollows:
InMonteCarlosimulations:
TX j jc

I AAS

TX j jc

= EIRP AAS

L Path M Shadowing Model L Indoor + G

Mi

Mi

Mi

Mi

L Ant L Body

Incoverageprediction:
TX j jc

I AAS

TX j jc

= EIRP AAS

L Path M Shadowing Model + M Shadowing C I L Indoor + G

Mi

Mi

Mi

Mi

L Ant L Body

WhereEIRPistheeffectiveisotropicradiatedpowerofthecellcalculatedasfollows:
TX j jc

EIRP AAS

TX j jc

= P Traffic + G

TX j

TX j

TX j jc

With P Traffic beingthetraffictransmissionpowerofthecellTXj(jc)calculatedasfollows:

TX j jc

TX j jc

TX j jc

P Traffic = P Preamble P Traffic

And, G

TX j

= G SA isthesmartantennagaininthedirectionofthevictimmobileMi,calculatedfromtheangular

distributionsofthedownlinktrafficpowerdensityoftheinterferingcells.Theangulardistributionofthedownlink
trafficpowerdensityisdeterminedfromthearraycorrelationmatricescalculatedduringMonteCarlosimulations.
is the direction in which the victim pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is located. For more information on the
calculationof G SA ,see"BeamformingSmartAntennaModels"onpage 41.
Thegainoftheinterferingsignal, G SA ,transmittedinthedirectionofeachpixel isgivenby:
H

G SA = g n S R Avg S
Where S isthesteeringvectorinthedirection (probemobile/pixel),HdenotestheHilberttransform, R Avg isthe
averagearraycorrelationmatrix,and g n isthegainofthenthantennaelementinthedirection .
Theinterferencefromtheempty,oridle,partoftheframetransmittedusingthetransmitterantennaiscalculated
asfollows:
Thereceivedinterferingpilotsignallevel(dBm)fromanycellTXj(jc)iscalculatedforapixel,subscriber,ormobileMi
asfollows:
TX j jc

TX j jc

I Idle Pilot = EIRP Idle Pilot L Path L Indoor + G

Mi

Mi

Mi

Mi

L Ant L Body

WhereEIRPistheeffectiveisotropicradiatedpowerofthecellcalculatedasfollows:
TX j jc

TX j jc

EIRP Idle Pilot = P Idle Pilot + G

TX j

TX j

TX j jc

With P Idle Pilot beingtheidlepilottransmissionpowerofthecellTXj(jc)calculatedasfollows:

TX j jc

TX j jc

TX j jc

P Idle Pilot = P Preamble P Idle Pilot

And, G

TX j

TX j

= G Ant ,i.e.,thetransmitterantennagainfortheantennausedbythetransmitterTXj.

Theinterferencefromtheempty,oridle,partoftheframetransmittedusingthetransmitterantennaisgivenas:
TX jc

TX j jc

I Idle

I j

TX j jc
Idle Pilot

----------------------------
TX j jc
N
10
SCa Data
1 -----------------------= 10 Log 1 TL DL 10

TX j jc

N SCa Used

719

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

IfyouwishtoincludetheeffectofthenumberofantennasincaseofMIMO,youmust
addthefollowinglinesintheAtoll.inifile:
[WiMAX]
MultiAntennaInterference = 1
Whenthemultiantennainterferenceoptionisactive,theinterferenceisincrementedby
TX jc

TX jc

j
j
+ 10 Log N Ant TX . Where N Ant TX is the number of MIMO transmission

(downlink)antennasdefinedforthecellTXj(jc).

Output

10.4.6.3.2

TX j jc

I Total :Interferencereceivedatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMifromanyinterferingcellTXj(jc).

EffectiveTrafficandPilotInterferenceCalculation(DL)
Theeffectivedownlinktrafficandpilotinterferencereceivedatapixel,subscriber,ormobileMicoveredbyacellTXi(ic)from
interferingcellsTXj(jc)dependsonthecoandadjacentchanneloverlapthatexistsbetweenthechannelusedbythestudied
cell and the interfering cells, and the downlink segmentation parameters of the studied and interfering cells. The first
downlinkPUSCzonecanbesegmentedatthestudiedandtheinterferingcells.Theprobabilityofsubcarriercollisiondepends
onthelengthsofthesegmentedzonesandonthesubchannelgroupsusedatbothsides.
Input

TX j jc

I Total :Interferencereceivedatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi fromanyinterferingcellTXj(jc)ascalculatedin

"TrafficandPilotInterferenceSignalLevelsCalculation(DL)"onpage 716.

TX i ic TX j jc

rO

: Total channel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Co and Adjacent

ChannelOverlapsCalculation"onpage 700.

TX i ic

SU DL

TX j jc

and SU DL

:DownlinksegmentationusageratiosdefinedforcellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

Calculations
Thetotaltrafficandpilotinterference(dBm)fromanycellTXj(jc)iscalculatedforapixel,subscriber,ormobileMiasfollows:
TX j jc

I DL

TX j jc

TX i ic TX j jc

= I Total + f O

TX i ic TX j jc

+ f Seg DL

Inter Tech

+ I DL

Calculations for the interference reduction factors due to channel overlapping and downlink segmentation are explained
below:
Interferencereductionduetothecoandadjacentchanneloverlapbetweenthestudiedandtheinterferingcells:
InterferencereductionduetothecoandadjacentchanneloverlapbetweenthecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc)iscalculated
asfollows:
TX i ic TX j jc

fO

TX i ic TX j jc

= 10 Log r O

Interferencereductionduetodownlinksegmentation:
Ifyouselectdownlinksegmentationsupportfortheframeconfigurationthatyouareusing,itmeansthatthefirst
zoneinthedownlink,i.e.,theDLPUSCzone,issegmented.Allotherzonesarepooledtogethertoformagroupof
nonsegmentedzones.Therearetwoeffectsofsegmentation:
1. Powerconcentration,whichmeansthatthespectraldensityofthepowertransmittedoveronesegmentishigher
thanthespectraldensityofthesamepowertransmittedovertheentirechannelbandwidth.Theeffectofpower
concentrationisvisiblewhencalculatingthedownlinkC/(I+N).Thepowertransmittedoverasegmentedzonehas
1
--------------------------- times the spectral density of the power transmitted over the entire channel bandwidth. When
f Segment DL
1
calculating the C/(I+N) ratio, the increase in power by ---------------------------- is equivalent to decreasing the noise and
f Segment DL

720

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

interference by f Segment DL . Hence, if downlink segmentation is used, the interference received at the pixel,
subscriber,ormobileMicoveredbythesegmentedzoneisreducedbyafactorof f Segment DL .
2. Collisionprobabilitybetweenthesubcarriersusedbythesubchannelsbelongingtothesegmentofthestudiedcell
and the subcarriers used by other sectors, segmented or not. The following paragraphs explain how the collision
probabilityiscalculated.
The downlink segmentation usage (SU) ratio is the percentage of the total downlink traffic load present in the
segmenteddownlinkPUSCzone.Forexample,ifthedownlinktrafficloadis80 %,andthedownlinksegmentation
usageratiois50 %,thenthismeansthatthedownlinktrafficloadofthesegmentedzoneis40 %(i.e.,50 %of80 %),
andthedownlinktrafficloadofthenonsegmentedzonesis40 %.
In coverage predictions, Atoll uses the downlink segmentation usage ratios stored in the cell properties for
determiningtheinterference.Insimulations,Atollresetsthedownlinksegmentationusageratiosforallthecellsto
0,andthencalculatesthedownlinksegmentationusageratiosaccordingtothetrafficloadsofthemobilesallocated
tothesegmentedzoneandinthenonsegmentedzones.

Figure 10.3:DownlinkSegmentation
Atoll determines the switching point between the segmented and the nonsegmented zones using the downlink
segmentationusageratio.Theswitchingpointsbetweenthesegmentedandnonsegmentedzonesofthevictimand
interferingcells,TXi(ic)andTXj(jc)respectively,arecalculatedasfollows:
SP

SP

TX i ic

TX i ic

SU DL
= ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------and
TX i ic
TX i ic
TX i ic

SU DL
+ f Segment DL 1 SU DL

TX j jc

SU DL
= ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TX j jc
TX j jc
TX j jc
SU DL
+ f Segment DL 1 SU DL

TX jc
j

Where, SP is the switching point between the segmented and the nonsegmented zones, SU is the downlink
segmentationusageratiosofthecells,and f Segment DL isdownlinksegmentingfactor,whichgivesthebandwidth
usedbyasegment.
The downlink segmenting factor, f Segment DL , is calculated from the number of secondary subchannel groups
assignedtothefirstdownlinkPUSCpermutationzoneinthePermutationZonestable.
PSG + 2 SSGf Segment DL = 3
-------------------------------------------15
Where,PSGisthenumberofprimarysubchannelgroupsandSSGisthenumberofsecondarysubchannelgroups.
Themultiplicativecoefficientsof3and2arederivedfromtheratioofthenumbersof
subchannelsthatbelongtotheprimaryandtothesecondarysubchannelgourps.For
example,fortheFFTsizeof1024(or2048),eachprimarysubchannelgroupcontains6
(or 12) subchannels, and each secondary subchannel group contains 4 (or 8)
subchannels,whichgivestheratioof3:2.And,thedenominatorof15=3x3+2x3.

721

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

Ifthedownlinksegmentationusageratioissetto0,itmeansthatthesegmentedzonedoesnotexist.SettingSUto0
givesSP=0,andsettingSUto1givesSP=1(or100%),whichshowshowtheswitchingpointvarieswiththedownlink
segmentationusageratio.
Derivationoftheswitchingpointformula:Thedownlinksegmentationusageratioisused
topartitionthetotaldownlinktrafficloadintosegmentedandnonsegmentedzones.
Therefore,theswitchingpointformulaisderivedfromtheequation:
SU DL TL DL
1 SU DL TL DL
-------------------------------------------------------------------- = ----------------------------------------------SP f Segment DL W Channel
1 SP W Channel
Withcellsusingdownlinksegmentation,therecanbefourdifferentinterferencescenarios.

Betweenthesegmentedzoneofthevictimandthesegmentedzoneoftheinterferer.
Betweenthesegmentedzoneofthevictimandthenonsegmentedzoneoftheinterferer.
Betweenthenonsegmentedzoneofthevictimandthesegmentedzoneoftheinterferer.
Betweenthenonsegmentedzoneofthevictimandthenonsegmentedzoneoftheinterferer.

Figure 10.4:DownlinkSegmentationInterferenceScenarios
Therefore,Atollcalculatestheprobabilitiesofcollisionforeachscenarioandweightsthetotalinterferenceaccording
tothetotalcollisionprobability.Theprobabilityofcollision p Coll foreachscenarioisgivenbythefollowingformula:
3 PSG Com + 2 SSG Com
p Coll = ---------------------------------------------------------------------TX i ic
TX i ic
3 PSG
+ 2 SSG
Where,PSGComisthenumberofprimarysubchannelgroupscommoninTXi(ic)andTXj(jc),SSGComisthenumberof
secondarysubchannelgroupscommoninTXi(ic)andTXj(jc), PSG
inthecellTXi(ic),and SSG

TX i ic

TX i ic

isthenumberofprimarysubchannelgroups

isthenumberofsecondarysubchannelgroupsinthecellTXi(ic).

The segment numbers and the cell permutation base numbers (Cell PermBase) are determined from the cells
preambleindex.Themappingbetweenthepreambleindex,thesegmentnumber,andCellPermBaseisavailablein
theIEEEspecifications.ThismappingisperformedinAtollasfollows:
PreambleIndex( PI )
Range:0to113
CellPermBase( PB )
Range:0to31
SegmentNumber( N Seg )
Range:0,1,2

PI 96

96 PI 114

PIModulo32

PI 96

PI
Floor ------
32

PI 96 Modulo3

Therecanbe2casesforcalculatingthetotalprobabilityofcollision.

722

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Case 1: If the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is covered by the segmented zone of TXi(ic), the total collision
probabilityforthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiiscalculatedasfollows:

TX ic TX jc
i
j

p Collision DL

TX jc
TX ic
j
i
SS

p Coll
IfSP
SP

TX jc
TX ic
TX jc
= SS
j
i
j
SN

+ p Coll SP
SP
TX j jc
TX i ic
p Coll SP

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------IfSP
SP

TX i ic

SP

Case2:Ifthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiiscoveredbythenonsegmentedzoneofTXi(ic),thetotalcollision
probabilityforthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiiscalculatedasfollows:

TX i ic TX j jc

p Collision DL

TX j jc
TX i ic

NN
p Coll
IfSP
SP

TX j jc
TX jc
TX ic

+ p NS SP j SP i
= p NN
TX jc
TX ic
Coll 1 SP
Coll

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- IfSP j SP i

TX ic
1 SP i

Theinterferencereductionfactorduetodownlinksegmentationforthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiiscalculated
asfollows:
TX i ic TX j jc

f Seg DL
Inter Tech

I DL

TX ic TX jc

i
j
= 10 Log p Collision DL

istheintertechnologydownlinkinterferencefromtransmittersofanexternalnetwork(linkeddocumentofany

technology)calculatedasfollows:
Inter Tech

I DL

TX External

EIRP DL

L Path L Indoor + G

Inter Tech

L Ant L Body f IRF

AllExternalTXs
TX External

Where EIRP DL

isthedownlinkEIRPoftheexternaltransmitter, L Path isthepathlossfromtheexternaltransmitters

tothepixel,subscriber,ormobilelocation, L Indoor istheindoorlossestakenintoaccountwhentheoption"Indoorcoverage"

isselected, L

Mi

isthereceiverterminallossesforthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi, G

Mi

isthereceiverterminalsantenna

Mi

gain for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi, L Ant is the receiver terminals antenna attenuation calculated for the pixel,
Mi

subscriber,ormobileMi,and L Body isthebodylossdefinedfortheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

CalculationoftheDownlinkIntertechnologyInterference
Thedownlinkintertechnologyinterferenceiscalculatedasfollows:
Inter Tech
I DL

TX

TX k

P DL Rec

---------------------------------------
=
F TX i ic TX k

TX ICP DL
k

Here P DL Rec is the received downlink power from an interfering cell TXk belonging to another technology, and
F TX i ic TX k

ICP DL

istheintertechnologydownlinkchannelprotectionratioforafrequencyoffset F betweentheinterfered

andinterferingfrequencychannelsofTXi(ic)andTXk.
TX k

P DL Rec iscalculatedbasedontheEIRPfromGSMcells,totalpowerfromUMTS,CDMA2000,andTDSCDMAcells,maximum
powerfromLTEcells,preamblepowerfromWiMAXcells,anddownlinkcellpowerfromWiFicells.
Output

TX j jc

I DL

: Effective downlink traffic and pilot interference received at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi from any

interferingcellTXj(jc).

Inter Tech

I DL

:Downlinkintertechnologyinterference.

723

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

10.4.6.4 TrafficandPilotC/NCalculation(DL)
Input

TX ic
i

C Traffic :ReceivedtrafficsignallevelfromthecellTXi(ic)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiascalculatedin"Traffic
andPilotSignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 713.

TX i ic

C Pilot :ReceivedpilotsignallevelfromthecellTXi(ic)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiascalculatedin"Traffic
andPilotSignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 713.

TX i ic

n DL

:DownlinknoiseforthecellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"TrafficandPilotNoiseCalculation(DL)"onpage 715.

TX i ic

T AMS :AMSthresholddefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

T B :BearerselectionthresholdsofthebearersdefinedintheWiMAXequipmentusedbyMisterminal.

B DL Highest Service :Highestdownlinkbearerdefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,

Mi

ormobileMi.

B DL Lowest Service :Lowestdownlinkbearerdefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,

ormobileMi.
TX i ic

N Ant TX :NumberofMIMOtransmission(downlink)antennasdefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

N Ant RX :NumberofMIMOreception(downlink)antennasdefinedfortheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,or

Mi

mobileMi.

Mobility M i :Mobilityusedforthecalculations.

Subchannelallocationmodeusedbythedownlinkpermutationzone PZ DL assignedtothepixel,subscriber,ormobile

Mi

Miascalculatedin"PermutationZoneSelection"onpage 712.

i
BLER B DL : Downlink block error rate read from the graphs available in the WiMAX equipment assigned to the

terminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Calculations
ThetrafficandpilotC/NforacellTXi(ic)arecalculatedasfollowsforanypixel,subscriber,ormobileMi:
TX ic
i

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

TX i ic

TX i ic

CNR Traffic = C Traffic n DL

TX i ic

CNR Pilot

= C Pilot n DL

BearerDetermination:
Thebearersavailableforselectioninthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMisWiMAXequipmentaretheones:

Which are common between Mis and TXi(ic)s equipment (bearer indexes for which selection thresholds are
definedinbothequipment),ifthecorrespondingoptionhasbeensetintheAtoll.inifile.Formoreinformation,
seetheAdministratorManual.

Whoseindexesarewithintherangedefinedbythelowestandthehighestbearerindexesdefinedfortheservice
beingaccessedbyMi.

WhoseselectionthresholdsarelessthanthetrafficorpilotC/NatMi: T B CNR Traffic or T B CNR Pilot

Mi

TX i ic

Mi

TX i ic

Mi

IfthecellsupportsMIMO,theSTTD/MRCorSUMIMOdiversitygain, G Div DL ,correspondingtothebeareris

appliedtoitsselectionthreshold.ThegainisreadfromthepropertiesoftheWiMAXequipmentassignedtothe
TX i ic

Mi

Mi

pixel,subscriber,ormobileMifor N Ant TX , N Ant RX ,thesubchannelallocationmodeof PZ DL , Mobility M i ,

M

i
BLER BDL .

724

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

DL

The additional diversity gain defined for the clutter class of the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi G Div is also
applied.Therefore,thebearersavailableforselectionareallthebearersdefinedintheWiMAXequipmentfor
whichthefollowingistrue:
M

DL

TX ic
i

Mi

DL

TX i ic

T B G Div DL G Div CNR Traffic

Mi

T B G Div DL G Div CNR Pilot

ThebearerselectedfordatatransferdependsonthebearerselectioncriterionoftheschedulerusedbythecellTXi(ic).

BearerIndex
Fromamongthebearersavailableforselection,theselectedbeareristheonewiththehighestindex.

PeakMACThroughput
Fromamongthebearersavailableforselection,theselectedbeareristheonewiththehighestdownlinkpeak
MACchannelthroughputascalculatedin"ChannelThroughput,CellCapacity,AllocatedBandwidthThroughput,
andPerUserThroughputCalculation"onpage 741.

EffectiveMACThroughput
Fromamongthebearersavailableforselection,theselectedbeareristheonewiththehighestdownlinkeffective
MACchannelthroughputascalculatedin"ChannelThroughput,CellCapacity,AllocatedBandwidthThroughput,
andPerUserThroughputCalculation"onpage 741.

MIMOSTTD/MRCandSUMIMODiversityGain:
Oncethebearerisknown,thetrafficandpilotC/Ncalculatedabovebecome:
TX i ic

TX i ic

Mi

DL

TX i ic

Mi

DL

CNR Traffic = CNR Traffic + G Div DL + G Div

TX i ic

CNR Pilot

= CNR Pilot + G Div DL + G Div

Mi

Where G Div DL istheSTTD/MRCorSUMIMOdiversitygaincorrespondingtotheselectedbearer.

Output
TX ic
i

CNR Traffic :TrafficC/NfromthecellTXi(ic)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

CNR Pilot :PilotC/NfromthecellTXi(ic)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

TX i ic

10.4.6.5 TrafficandPilotC/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(DL)
Thecarriersignaltointerferenceandnoiseratioiscalculatedinthreesteps.FirstAtollcalculatesthereceivedsignallevelfrom
thestudiedcell(asexplainedin"TrafficandPilotSignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 713)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobile
understudy.Next,Atollcalculatestheinterferencereceivedatthesamestudiedpixel,subscriber,ormobilefromallthe
interferingcells(asexplainedin"TrafficandPilotInterferenceCalculation(DL)"onpage 716).Interferencefromeachcellis
weightedaccordingtothecoandadjacentchanneloverlapbetweenthestudiedandtheinterferingcells,thetrafficloadsof
theinterferingcells,andtheprobabilitiesofsubcarriercollisionifdownlinksegmentationisused.Finally,Atolltakestheratio
ofthesignallevelandthesumofthetotalinterferencefromothercellsandthedownlinknoise(ascalculatedin"Trafficand
PilotNoiseCalculation(DL)"onpage 715).
Thereceiverterminalisalwaysconsideredtobeorientedtowardsitsbestserver,exceptwhenthe"LockStatus"issetto
"Server+Orientation"forasubscriberinasubscriberlistanditsazimuthandtiltmanuallyedited.InthecaseofNLOSbetween
thereceiverandthebestserver,Atolldoesnottrytofindthedirectionofthestrongestsignal,thereceiverisorientedtowards
thebestserverjustasinthecaseofLOS.
Input

TX ic
i

C Traffic :ReceivedtrafficsignallevelfromthecellTXi(ic)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiascalculatedin"Traffic
andPilotSignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 713.

TX ic
i

C Pilot :ReceivedpilotsignallevelfromthecellTXi(ic)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiascalculatedin"Traffic
andPilotSignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 713.

TX ic
i

n DL

:DownlinknoiseforthecellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"TrafficandPilotNoiseCalculation(DL)"onpage 715.

725

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

TX jc
j

I DL

Forsk2014

: Effective downlink traffic and pilot interference from any cell TXj(jc) calculated for a pixel, subscriber, or

mobileMicoveredbyacellTXi(ic)asexplainedin"TrafficandPilotInterferenceCalculation(DL)"onpage 716.
Inter Tech

NR DL

T AMS :AMSthresholddefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

T B :BearerselectionthresholdsofthebearersdefinedintheWiMAXequipmentusedbyMisterminal.

B DL Highest Service :Highestdownlinkbearerdefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,

:Intertechnologydownlinknoiserise.

TX ic
i
Mi
M

ormobileMi.

Mi

B DL Lowest Service :Lowestdownlinkbearerdefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,

ormobileMi.
TX i ic

N Ant TX :NumberofMIMOtransmission(downlink)antennasdefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

N Ant RX :NumberofMIMOreception(downlink)antennasdefinedfortheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,or

Mi

mobileMi.

Mobility M i :Mobilityusedforthecalculations.

Subchannelallocationmodeusedbythedownlinkpermutationzone PZ DL assignedtothepixel,subscriber,ormobile

Mi

Miascalculatedin"PermutationZoneSelection"onpage 712.

i
BLER B DL : Downlink block error rate read from the graphs available in the WiMAX equipment assigned to the

terminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Inter Tech

I DL

:Downlinkintertechnologyinterferenceascalculatedin"TrafficandPilotInterferenceCalculation(DL)"

onpage 716.
Calculations
ThetrafficandpilotC/(I+N)foracellTXi(ic)iscalculatedasfollowsforanypixel,subscriber,ormobileMi:

TX i ic

CINR Traffic

TX i ic

CINR Pilot

TXj jc
TX ic
i

I DL
n DL
Inter

Tech
Inter

Tech
------------------------------------ + NR
and

= C Traffic 10 Log
+
10 + I DL
10
DL

10

10

AllTXj jc

TX i ic

TX i ic

= C Pilot

TX j jc
TX i ic
n DL

IDL
Inter

Tech
Inter

Tech
------------------------------------ + NR

+
10 Log
10 + I DL
10
DL

10

10

AllTX j jc

TheTrafficTotalNoise(I+N)foracellTXi(ic)iscalculatedasfollowsforanypixel,subscriber,ormobileMi:
TX ic

TX i ic

I + N DL

TX j jc

n DL

IDL
---------------------
Inter

Tech
10
----------------- + NR Inter Tech
= 10 Log
+ 10
10 + I DL
DL

10

AllTXj jc

BearerDetermination:
Thebearersavailableforselectioninthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMisWiMAXequipmentaretheones:

726

Which are common between Mis and TXi(ic)s equipment (bearer indexes for which selection thresholds are
definedinbothequipment),ifthecorrespondingoptionhasbeensetintheAtoll.inifile.Formoreinformation,
seetheAdministratorManual.

Whoseindexesarewithintherangedefinedbythelowestandthehighestbearerindexesdefinedfortheservice
beingaccessedbyMi.

WhoseselectionthresholdsarelessthanthetrafficorpilotC/(I+N)atMi: T B CINR Traffic or T B CINR Pilot

Mi

TX i ic

Mi

TX i ic

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
M

IfthecellsupportsMIMO,theSTTD/MRCorSUMIMOdiversitygain, G Div DL ,correspondingtothebeareris

appliedtoitsselectionthreshold.ThegainisreadfromthepropertiesoftheWiMAXequipmentassignedtothe
TX ic
i

pixel,subscriber,ormobileMifor N Ant TX , N Ant RX ,thesubchannelallocationmodeof PZ DL , Mobility M i ,

M

i
BLER BDL .

DL

The additional diversity gain defined for the clutter class of the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi G Div is also
applied.Therefore,thebearersavailableforselectionareallthebearersdefinedintheWiMAXequipmentfor
whichthefollowingistrue:
Mi

Mi

DL

TX i ic

Mi

Mi

DL

TX i ic

T B G Div DL G Div CINR Traffic

T B G Div DL G Div CINR Pilot

ThebearerselectedfordatatransferdependsonthebearerselectioncriterionoftheschedulerusedbythecellTXi(ic).

BearerIndex
Fromamongthebearersavailableforselection,theselectedbeareristheonewiththehighestindex.

PeakMACThroughput
Fromamongthebearersavailableforselection,theselectedbeareristheonewiththehighestdownlinkpeak
MACchannelthroughputascalculatedin"ChannelThroughput,CellCapacity,AllocatedBandwidthThroughput,
andPerUserThroughputCalculation"onpage 741.

EffectiveMACThroughput
Fromamongthebearersavailableforselection,theselectedbeareristheonewiththehighestdownlinkeffective
MACchannelthroughputascalculatedin"ChannelThroughput,CellCapacity,AllocatedBandwidthThroughput,
andPerUserThroughputCalculation"onpage 741.

MIMOSTTD/MRCandSUMIMODiversityGain:
Oncethebearerisknown,thetrafficandpilotC/(I+N)calculatedabovebecome:
TX i ic

TX i ic

Mi

DL

TX i ic

Mi

DL

CINR Traffic = CINR Traffic + G Div DL + G Div

TX i ic

CINR Pilot

= CINR Pilot + G Div DL + G Div

Where G Div DL istheSTTD/MRCorSUMIMOdiversitygaincorrespondingtotheselectedbearer.

Output
TX i ic

CINR Traffic :TrafficC/(I+N)fromthecellTXi(ic)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

CINR Pilot :PilotC/(I+N)fromthecellTXi(ic)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

I + N DL

TX i ic

TX i ic

:TrafficTotalnoisefromtheinterferingcellsTXj(jc)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMicoveredbyacell

TXi(ic).

Mi

B DL :Bearerassignedtothepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiinthedownlink.

10.4.6.6 TrafficSignalLevelCalculation(UL)
Input

P Max : Maximum transmission power of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi without power
control.

Mi

P Eff :Effectivetransmissionpoweroftheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiafterpowercontrolas
calculatedin"TrafficC/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(UL)"onpage 735.

727

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks
TX

Forsk2014

E SA :NumberofantennaelementsdefinedforthesmartantennaequipmentusedbythetransmitterTXi.

TX

:TransmitterantennagainfortheantennausedbythetransmitterTXi.

Withoutsmartantennas: G

Withsmartantennas: G

TX i

TX

isthetransmitterantennagain,i.e., G

TX

TX

= G Ant .

istheuplinksmartantennabeamforminggain,i.e., G

TX i

TX i

= G SA = 10 Log E SA .

For more information on the calculation of G SA , refer to section "Beamforming Smart Antenna Models" on
page 41.
TX i

:TotaltransmitterlossesforthetransmitterTXi( L

TX i

= L Total UL ).

L Path :Pathloss( L Path = L Model + L Ant ).

L Model :Lossonthetransmitterreceiverpath(pathloss)calculatedusingapropagationmodel.

L Ant :Antennaattenuation(fromantennapatterns)calculatedfortheantennausedbythetransmitterTXi.

M Shadowing Model :Shadowingmarginbasedonthemodelstandarddeviation.

TX i

TX i

Incoveragepredictions,shadowingmarginsaretakenintoaccountwhentheoption"Shadowingtakenintoaccount"
isselected.

L Indoor :Indoorlossestakenintoaccountwhentheoption"Indoorcoverage"isselected.

Mi

Mi

:Receiverterminallossesforthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.
:Receiverterminalsantennagainforthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Mi

L Ant :Receiverterminalsantennaattenuationcalculatedforthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Forcalculatingtheusefulsignallevelfromthebestservingcell, L Ant isdeterminedinthedirection(H,V)=(0,0)from

Mi

theantennapatternsoftheantennausedbyMi.Forcalculatingtheinterferingsignallevelfromanyinterferer, L Ant
isdeterminedinthedirectionoftheinterferingcellfromtheantennapatternsoftheantennausedbyMi,whilethe
antennaispointedtowardsMisbestservingcell.
Mi

L Body :Bodylossdefinedfortheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Calculations
Thereceivedtrafficsignallevel(dBm)fromapixel,subscriber,ormobileMiatitsservingcellTXi(ic)iscalculatedasfollows:
Mi

Mi

C UL = EIRP UL L Path M Shadowing Model L Indoor + G

TX i

TX i

Mi

Mi

L Ant L Body

WhereEIRPistheeffectiveisotropicradiatedpoweroftheterminalcalculatedasfollows:
Mi

EIRP UL = P
With P

Mi

Mi

+G

Mi

Mi

Mi

= P Max withoutpowercontrolatthestartofthecalculations,andisthe P

Mi

Mi

= P Eff afterpowercontrol.

Output

Mi

C UL :Receiveduplinksignallevelfromthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiatacellTXi(ic).

10.4.6.7 TrafficNoiseCalculation(UL)
FordeterminingtheuplinkC/NandC/(I+N),Atollcalculatestheuplinknoiseoverthechannelbandwidthusedbythecell.The
usedbandwidthdependsonthenumberofusedsubcarriers.Thenumbersofsubcarriersusedbydifferentpermutationzones
canbedifferent.
Theuplinknoisecomprisesthermalnoiseandthenoisefigureoftheequipment.Thethermalnoisedensitydependsonthe
temperature,i.e.,itremainsconstantforagiventemperature.However,thevalueofthethermalnoisevarieswiththeused
bandwidth.

728

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Input

K:Boltzmannsconstant.
T:TemperatureinKelvin.

i
UL
N SCa Used

PZ

:NumberofsubcarriersusedbytheuplinkpermutationzoneofacellTXi(ic)assignedtoMi.

TX i ic

N SCa Total :TotalnumberofsubcarriersdefinedfortheframeconfigurationofacellTXi(ic).

F Sampling :SamplingfrequencyforthecellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"CalculationofSamplingFrequency"onpage 738.

nf

TX i ic

TX ic
i

:NoisefigureofthecellTXi(ic).

Calculations
Thepowerspectraldensityofthermalnoiseiscalculatedasfollows:
n 0 = 10 Log K T 1000 = 174dBm/Hz
Thethermalnoiseforacelliscalculatedas:
Mi

TX i ic

n 0 UL

PZ UL

N SCa Used
TXi ic
= n 0 + 10 Log F Sampling ------------------------
TX i ic

N
SCa

Total

TheuplinknoiseisthesumofthethermalnoiseandthenoisefigureofthecellTXi(ic).
TX i ic

n UL

TX i ic

= n 0 UL + nf

TX i ic

Output

TX i ic

n UL

:UplinknoiseforthecellTXi(ic).

10.4.6.8 TrafficInterferenceCalculation(UL)
TheuplinktrafficinterferenceisonlycalculatedduringMonteCarlosimulations.Incoveragepredictions,theuplinknoiserise
valuesalreadyavailableinsimulationresultsorintheCellstableareused.
TheinterferencereceivedbyacellTXi(ic)fromaninterferingmobilecoveredbyacellTXj(jc)canbedefinedastheuplinksignal
levelreceivedfrominterferingmobilesMjdependingontheoverlapthatexistsbetweenthechannelsusedbythecellsTXi(ic)
andTXj(jc),onthetrafficloadsoftheinterferingmobileMj.
Thecalculationofuplinkinterferencecanbedividedintotwoparts:

10.4.6.8.1

Calculationoftheuplinkinterferencefromeachindividualinterferingmobileasexplainedin"TrafficInterference
SignalLevelsCalculation(UL)"onpage 729.
Calculationoftheuplinknoiserisewhichrepresentsthetotaluplinkinterferencefromalltheinterferingmobilesas
explainedin"NoiseRiseCalculation(UL)"onpage 731.

TrafficInterferenceSignalLevelsCalculation(UL)
Input
Mj

C UL :UplinksignallevelreceivedatacellTXi(ic)fromaninterferingmobileMjcoveredbyacellTXj(jc)ascalculatedin

"TrafficSignalLevelCalculation(UL)"onpage 727.
M Shadowing Model :Shadowingmarginbasedonthemodelstandarddeviation.

M Shadowing C I :ShadowingmarginbasedontheC/Istandarddeviation.
InMonteCarlosimulations,interferingsignallevelsalreadyinclude M Shadowing Model ,asexplainedin"TrafficSignal
LevelCalculation(UL)"onpage 727.
Incoveragepredictions,theratio M Shadowing Model M Shadowing C I isappliedtotheinterferingsignals(formore
information, see "Shadow Fading Model" on page 86). As the interfering signal levels already include

729

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

M Shadowing Model , M Shadowing C I isaddedtothereceivedinterferingsignallevelsinordertoachievetheratio

M Shadowing Model M Shadowing C I :
M

C UL = C UL + M Shadowing C I
Incoveragepredictions,shadowingmarginsaretakenintoaccountwhentheoption"Shadowingtakenintoaccount"
isselected.

TX i ic TX j jc

rO

: Total channel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Co and Adjacent

ChannelOverlapsCalculation"onpage 700.

Mj

TL UL :UplinktrafficloadoftheinterferingmobileMj.
Traffic loads are calculated during Monte Carlo simulations as explained in "Scheduling and Radio Resource
Allocation"onpage 746.

Calculations
TheuplinkinterferencereceivedatacellTXi(ic)fromaninterferingmobileMjcoveredbyacellTXj(jc)iscalculatedasfollows:
Mj

Mj

TX i ic TX j jc

I UL = C UL + f O

TX i ic TX j jc

Mj

+ f TL UL + f Seg UL

Calculationsfortheinterferencereductionfactorsduetochanneloverlapping,uplinktrafficload,anduplinksegmentation
areexplainedbelow:
Interferencereductionduetothecoandadjacentchanneloverlapbetweenthestudiedandtheinterferingcells:
InterferencereductionduetothecoandadjacentchanneloverlapbetweenthecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc)iscalculated
asfollows:
TX i ic TX j jc

fO

TX i ic TX j jc

= 10 Log r O

Interferencereductionduetointerferingmobilestrafficload:
Theinterferencereductionfactorduetotheinterferingmobilesuplinktrafficloadiscalculatedasfollows:
M

j
j
f TL UL = 10 Log TL UL

Interferencereductionduetouplinksegmentation:
Ifyouselectuplinksegmentationsupportfortheframeconfigurationthatyouareusing,itmeansthatthefirstzone
in the uplink, i.e., the UL PUSC zone, is segmented. All other zones are pooled together to form a group of non
segmentedzones.Theinterferencereductionfactorduetouplinksegmentationiscalculatedasfollows:
TX ic TX jc
i
j

f Seg UL

TX ic TX jc

i
j
= 10 Log p Collision UL

TX i ic TX j jc

Where p Collision UL isthecollisionprobabilitybetweenthesubcarriersoftheuplinksegmentsbeingusedbythe

interferedandinterferingcells.ItisdeterminedduringMonteCarlosimulationsasfollows:
TX i ic TX j jc

p Collision UL

SC Com
= -----------------TX i ic
SC

Where,SCComisthenumberofsubchannelscommoninTXi(ic)andTXj(jc), SC
thecellTXi(ic).

TX i ic

isthenumberofsubchannelsin

The segment numbers and the cell permutation base numbers (Cell PermBase) are determined from the cells
preambleindex.Themappingbetweenthepreambleindex,thesegmentnumber,andCellPermBaseisavailablein
theIEEEspecifications.ThismappingisperformedinAtollasfollows:
PreambleIndex( PI )
Range:0to113
CellPermBase( PB )
Range:0to31

730

PI 96

96 PI 114

PIModulo32

PI 96

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

SegmentNumber( N Seg )
Range:0,1,2

PI
Floor ------
32

PI 96 Modulo3

InMonteCarlosimulations,Atollcalculatestwoseparatenoiserisevalues;forthemobilesservedbythesegmented
zoneoftheinterferedcellAtollcalculatestheuplinksegmentednoiserise,andforthemobilesservedbythenon
segmentedzonesoftheinterferedcellAtollcalculatestheuplinknoiserise.
Incoveragepredictions,pointanalysis,andcalculationsonsubscriberlists,accordingtothezone,segmentedornon
segmented,thatcoversthepixel,receiver,orsubscriber,Atolluseseithertheuplinksegmentednoiseriseorthe
uplinknoiserisetocalculatetheC/(I+N).Formoreinformationonthecalculationoftheuplinknoiserise,see"Noise
RiseCalculation(UL)"onpage 731.
Output

10.4.6.8.2

Mj

I UL :UplinkinterferencesignallevelreceivedatacellTXi(ic)fromaninterferingmobileMjcoveredbyacellTXj(jc).

NoiseRiseCalculation(UL)
TheuplinknoiseriseisdefinedastheratioofthetotaluplinkinterferencereceivedbyanycellTXi(ic)frominterferingmobiles
MjpresentinthecoverageareasofothercellsTXj(jc)totheuplinknoiseofthecellTXi(ic).Inotherwords,itistheratio(I+N)/N.
Input

Mj

I UL :UplinkinterferencesignallevelsreceivedatacellTXi(ic)frominterferingmobilesMjcoveredbyothercellsTXj(jc)
ascalculatedin"TrafficInterferenceSignalLevelsCalculation(UL)"onpage 729.
TX i ic

n UL

NRUL

:UplinknoiseforthecellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"TrafficNoiseCalculation(UL)"onpage 728.

Inter Tech

:Intertechnologyuplinknoiserise.

Calculations
Theuplinknoiseriseandtotalnoise(I+N)forthecellTXi(ic)arecalculatedasfollows:

Withoutsmartantennas:
ForanymobileMicoveredbyanonsegmentedzoneintheinterferedcellTXi(ic),AtollcalculatestheULnoiseriseas
follows:

TX i ic

NRUL

TX i ic
I Mj

n
UL

UL -
nonsegM i

-------------------TX i ic

Inter Tech
10
-------------------------------------------= 10 Log
+ NR UL
n UL
10
10
+ 10

AllM j

AllTX

jc

For any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by the nonsegmented zone in the interfered cell TXi(ic), Atoll
calculatestheuplinktotalnoise(I+N)asfollows:
TX i ic

I + N UL

TX i ic

= NR UL

TX i ic

+ n UL

ForanymobileMicoveredbythesegmentedzoneintheinterferedcellTXi(ic),Atollcalculatesthesegmentedzone
ULnoiseriseasfollows:

TX i ic

NRUL Seg

TX i ic
IMj

n UL
UL

segM i

---------------------
TX i ic

10
Inter Tech
--------------------------------= 10 Log
+ NR UL
n UL
10
10
+ 10

AllM j

AllTX

jc

Foranypixel,subscriber,ormobileMicoveredbythesegmentedzoneintheinterferedcellTXi(ic),Atollcalculates
theuplinktotalnoise(I+N)asfollows:
TX i ic

I + N UL

TX i ic

TX i ic

= NR UL Seg + n UL

731

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

Withsmartantennas:
TheangulardistributionoftheuplinknoiseriseiscalculatedduringMonteCarlosimulationsandcanbestoredinthe
Cellstableinordertobeusedincoveragepredictions.Theangulardistributionoftheuplinknoiseriseisgivenby:
2

I UL + n I
NR UL = --------------------------------2
n I
TX i ic

I + N UL

= I UL + n I

Output
TX i ic

NR UL

:NonsegmenteduplinknoiseriseforthecellTXi(ic).

NR UL Seg :SegmenteduplinknoiseriseforthecellTXi(ic).

NR UL

I + N UL

TX i ic
TX i ic

:AngulardistributionoftheuplinknoiseriseforthecellTXi(ic).

TX i ic

TX i ic

or I + N UL

:TotalNoiseforacellTXi(ic)calculatedforanypixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

10.4.6.9 TrafficC/NCalculation(UL)
Input

C UL :Receiveduplinksignallevelfromthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiatitsservingcellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin
"TrafficSignalLevelCalculation(UL)"onpage 727.
TX i ic

n UL

T AMS :AMSthresholddefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

T B Lowest :BearerselectionthresholdofthelowestbearerintheWiMAXequipmentassignedtothecellTXi(ic).

:UplinknoiseforthecellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"TrafficNoiseCalculation(UL)"onpage 728.

TX i ic
TX ic
i
Mi
PZ UL

N SC

:Numberofsubchannelsperchanneldefinedfortheuplinkpermutationzoneassignedtothepixel,subscriber,

ormobileMiascalculatedin"PermutationZoneSelection"onpage 712.
Mi
PZ UL = 8

N SC Seg :NumberofsubchannelspersegmentforthefirstuplinkPUSCpermutationzone.

P Max :Maximumtransmissionpoweroftheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

P Min :Minimumtransmissionpoweroftheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

M PC :Powercontrolmargindefinedintheglobalnetworksettings.

T B :BearerselectionthresholdsofthebearersdefinedintheWiMAXequipmentusedbythecellTXi(ic).

B UL Highest Service :Highestdownlinkbearerdefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,

Mi
Mi

Mi

ormobileMi.

B UL Lowest Service :Lowestdownlinkbearerdefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,

ormobileMi.

Mi

N Ant TX :NumberofMIMOtransmission(uplink)antennasdefinedfortheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,or
mobileMi.
TX i ic

N Ant RX :NumberofMIMOreception(uplink)antennasdefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

Mobility M i :Mobilityusedforthecalculations.

Subchannelallocationmodeusedbytheuplinkpermutationzone PZ UL assignedtothepixel,subscriber,ormobile

Miascalculatedin"PermutationZoneSelection"onpage 712.

732

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

i
BLER BUL :UplinkblockerrorratereadfromthegraphsavailableintheWiMAXequipmentassignedtothecell

TXi(ic).
Calculations
TheuplinkC/Nfromapixel,subscriber,ormobileMiatitsservingcellTXi(ic)iscalculatedasfollows:
M

TX ic
i

CNR UL = C UL n UL

BearerDetermination:
ThebearersavailableforselectioninthecellTXi(ic)sWiMAXequipmentaretheones:

Which are common between Mis and TXi(ic)s equipment (bearer indexes for which selection thresholds are
definedinbothequipment),ifthecorrespondingoptionhasbeensetintheAtoll.inifile.Formoreinformation,
seetheAdministratorManual.

Whoseindexesarewithintherangedefinedbythelowestandthehighestbearerindexesdefinedfortheservice
beingaccessedbyMi.

WhoseselectionthresholdsarelessthantheuplinkC/NatMi: T B CNR UL

Mi

Mi

TX i ic

If the cell supports MIMO, the STTD/MRC, SUMIMO diversity or MUMIMO diversity gain, G Div UL ,
corresponding to the bearer is applied to its selection threshold. The gain is read from the properties of the
Mi

TX i ic

Mi

WiMAXequipmentassignedtothecellTXi(ic)for N Ant RX , N Ant TX ,thesubchannelallocationmodeof PZ UL ,

M

i
Mobility M i , BLER BUL .
UL

The additional diversity gain defined for the clutter class of the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi G Div is also
applied.Therefore,thebearersavailableforselectionareallthebearersdefinedintheWiMAXequipmentfor
whichthefollowingistrue:
Mi

TX i ic

UL

Mi

T B G Div UL G Div CNR UL

ThebearerselectedfordatatransferdependsonthebearerselectioncriterionoftheschedulerusedbythecellTXi(ic).

BearerIndex
Fromamongthebearersavailableforselection,theselectedbeareristheonewiththehighestindex.

PeakMACThroughput
Fromamongthebearersavailableforselection,theselectedbeareristheonewiththehighestuplinkpeakMAC
channelthroughputascalculatedin"ChannelThroughput,CellCapacity,AllocatedBandwidthThroughput,and
PerUserThroughputCalculation"onpage 741.

EffectiveMACThroughput
Fromamongthebearersavailableforselection,theselectedbeareristheonewiththehighestuplinkeffective
MACchannelthroughputascalculatedin"ChannelThroughput,CellCapacity,AllocatedBandwidthThroughput,
andPerUserThroughputCalculation"onpage 741.

MIMOSTTD/MRC,SUMIMODiversity,andMUMIMODiversityGain:
Oncethebearerisknown,theuplinkC/Ncalculatedabovebecomes:
Mi

Mi

TX i ic

UL

CNR UL = CNR UL + G Div UL + G Div

TX i ic

Where G Div UL is the STTD/MRC, SUMIMO diversity, or MUMIMO diversity gain corresponding to the selected
bearer.
UplinkSubchannelisation:
Theuplinksubchannelisationdependsontheuplinkbandwidthallocationtargetdefinedfortheschedulerusedbythe
cell TXi(ic). The uplink C/N calculated above is given for the total number of subchannels associated with the

733

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014
M
PZ

permutationzone,i.e., N SC

i
UL

.Subchannelisationisperformedforallthepixels,subscribers,ormobilesintheuplink,

andmayreducethenumberofusedsubchannelsinordertosatisfytheselectedtarget.

FullBandwidth
Full channel width is used by each mobile in the uplink. As there is no reduction in the bandwidth used for
transmission,thereisnogainintheuplinkC/N.

MaintainConnection
ThebandwidthusedfortransmissionbyamobileisreducedonlyiftheuplinkC/Nisnotenoughtoevenaccess
thelowestbearer.Forexample,asamobilemovesfromgoodtobadradioconditions,thenumberofsubchannels
usedbyitfortransmissioninuplinkarereducedonebyoneinordertoimprovetheuplinkC/N.Thecalculationof
thegainintroducedbythesubchannelisationisexplainedbelow.

BestBearer
ThebandwidthusedfortransmissionbyamobileisreducedinordertoimprovetheuplinkC/Nenoughtoaccess
thebestbearer.Forexample,ifusing5subchannels,amobileisabletoaccessthebestbearer,andusing6itwould
onlygetaccesstothesecondbest,itwillbeassigned5subchannelsastheuseduplinkbandwidth.Althoughusing
4subchannels,itsuplinkC/Nwillbebetterthanwhenusing5,theuplinkbandwidthisnotreducedto4because
it does not provide any gain in terms of the bearer, i.e., the mobile already has the best bearer using 5
subchannels.Thecalculationofthegainintroducedbythebandwidthreductionisexplainedbelow.
ThedefinitionofthebestbearerdependsonthebearerselectioncriterionoftheschedulerusedbythecellTXi(ic),
i.e.,bearer withthehighestindex,withthehighestpeakMACthroughput,orwiththehighesteffectiveMAC
throughput.

Theuplinksubchannelisationmayresultintheuseofanumberofsubchannelswhichislessthanthetotalnumberof
subchannelsassociatedwiththepermutationzone.Thegainrelatedtothisbandwidthreductionisappliedtothe
uplinkC/N:
Mi

Mi

CNR UL
Final

Where

PZUL
Mi
N SC
= CNR UL+ 10 Log ----------------
NMi
AllSC
SC UL

Min
N SC UL Service

i
N SC UL

PZ

N SC

Mi
UL

for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by a nonsegmented

Min
permutationzoneintheinterferedcellTXi(ic),and N SC UL Service

Mi

Mi
PZ UL = 8

N SC UL N SC Seg foranypixel,subscriber,

ormobileMicoveredbythesegmenteduplinkPUSCzoneintheinterferedcellTXi(ic).
UplinkPowerControl:
Oncethesubchannelisationisperformed,AtollcontinuestoworkwiththeC/Ngivenbythesubchannelisation,i.e.,
M

CNR UL = CNR UL .
Final

Thepixel,subscriber,ormobileMireducesitstransmissionpowersothattheuplinkC/Nfromitatitscellisjust
enoughtogettheselectedbearer.
Ifwith P

Mi

Mi

Mi

= P Max AND CNR UL T

TX i ic
Mi

+ M PC ,where T

B UL

TX i ic
Mi
B UL

isthebearerselectionthreshold,fromtheWiMAX

equipmentassignedtothecellTXi(ic),forthebearerselectedforthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.
ThetransmissionpowerofMiisreducedtodeterminetheeffectivetransmissionpowerfromthepixel,subscriber,or
mobileMiasfollows:
M
M
TX ic
Mi
Mi

i
i
i
P Eff = Max P Max CNR UL T M + M PC P Min
i

UL

Mi

Mi

CNR UL iscalculatedagainusing P Eff .

734

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Output

CNR UL :UplinkC/Nfromapixel,subscriber,ormobileMiatitservingcellTXi(ic).

10.4.6.10 TrafficC/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(UL)
Thecarriersignaltointerferenceandnoiseratioiscalculatedinthreesteps.First,Atollcalculatesthereceivedsignallevel
fromeachpixel,subscriber,ormobileatitsservingcellusingtheeffectivepoweroftheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,
ormobileasexplainedin"TrafficSignalLevelCalculation(UL)"onpage 727.Next,Atollcalculatestheuplinkcarriertonoise
ratio as explained in "Traffic C/N Calculation (UL)" on page 732. Finally, determines the uplink C/(I+N) by dividing the
previouslycalculateduplinkC/Nbytheuplinknoiserisevalueofthecellascalculatedin"NoiseRiseCalculation(UL)"on
page 731.
TheuplinknoiserisecanbesetbytheusermanuallyforeachcellorcalculatedusingMonteCarlosimulations.
Thereceiverterminalisalwaysconsideredtobeorientedtowardsitsbestserver,exceptwhenthe"LockStatus"issetto
"Server+Orientation"forasubscriberinasubscriberlistanditsazimuthandtiltmanuallyedited.InthecaseofNLOSbetween
thereceiverandthebestserver,Atolldoesnottrytofindthedirectionofthestrongestsignal,thereceiverisorientedtowards
thebestserverjustasinthecaseofLOS.
Input

Mi

CNR UL : Uplink C/N from a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi at it serving cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Traffic C/N
Calculation(UL)"onpage 732.

TX i ic

: Nonsegmented uplink noise rise for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Noise Rise Calculation (UL)" on

NRUL

page 731.
TX i ic

NRUL Seg :SegmenteduplinknoiseriseforthecellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"NoiseRiseCalculation(UL)"onpage 731.

NRUL

TX i ic

:AngulardistributionoftheuplinknoiseriseforthecellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"NoiseRiseCalculation

(UL)"onpage 731.
TX ic
i

T AMS :AMSthresholddefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

T B Lowest :BearerselectionthresholdofthelowestbearerintheWiMAXequipmentassignedtothecellTXi(ic).

N SC

TX i ic
Mi
PZ UL

:Numberofsubchannelsperchanneldefinedfortheuplinkpermutationzoneassignedtothepixel,subscriber,

ormobileMiascalculatedin"PermutationZoneSelection"onpage 712.
M
i
PZ UL = 8

N SC Seg :NumberofsubchannelspersegmentforthefirstuplinkPUSCpermutationzone.

P Max :Maximumtransmissionpoweroftheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

P Min :Minimumtransmissionpoweroftheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

M PC :Powercontrolmargindefinedintheglobalnetworksettings.

T B :BearerselectionthresholdsofthebearersdefinedintheWiMAXequipmentusedbythecellTXi(ic).

B UL Highest Service :Highestdownlinkbearerdefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,

Mi
Mi

Mi

Mi

ormobileMi.

Mi

B UL Lowest Service :Lowestdownlinkbearerdefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,

ormobileMi.

N Ant TX :NumberofMIMOtransmission(uplink)antennasdefinedfortheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,or
mobileMi.
TX i ic

N Ant RX :NumberofMIMOreception(uplink)antennasdefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

Mobility M i :Mobilityusedforthecalculations.

Subchannelallocationmodeusedbytheuplinkpermutationzone PZ UL assignedtothepixel,subscriber,ormobile

Mi

Miascalculatedin"PermutationZoneSelection"onpage 712.

735

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

i
BLER B UL :UplinkblockerrorratereadfromthegraphsavailableintheWiMAXequipmentassignedtothecell

TXi(ic).
Calculations
TheuplinkC/(I+N)foranypixel,subscriber,ormobileMiatacellTXi(ic)iscalculatedasfollows:

Withoutsmartantennas:
Foranypixel,subscriber,ormobileMicoveredbythenonsegmentedzoneintheinterferedcellTXi(ic):
Mi

Mi

TX i ic

CINR UL = CNR UL NR UL

Foranypixel,subscriber,ormobileMicoveredbythesegmentedzoneintheinterferedcellTXi(ic):
Mi

Mi

TX i ic

CINR UL = CNR UL NR UL Seg

Withsmartantennas:

Monte Carlo simulations: The uplink C/(I+N) is calculated as described in the section "Beamforming Smart
AntennaModels"onpage 41.Victimandinterferingmobilesaregeneratedbyatimeslotscenarioasexplained
in"SimulationProcess"onpage 697.

Coveragepredictions: CINR UL = CNR UL NR UL

TX ic
i

BearerDetermination:
ThebearersavailableforselectioninthecellTXi(ic)sWiMAXequipmentaretheones:

Which are common between Mis and TXi(ic)s equipment (bearer indexes for which selection thresholds are
definedinbothequipment),ifthecorrespondingoptionhasbeensetintheAtoll.inifile.Formoreinformation,
seetheAdministratorManual.

Whoseindexesarewithintherangedefinedbythelowestandthehighestbearerindexesdefinedfortheservice
beingaccessedbyMi.

WhoseselectionthresholdsarelessthantheuplinkC/(I+N)atMi: T B CINR UL and T B CINR UL

Mi

Mi

Mi

Mi

TX ic
i

If the cell supports MIMO, the STTD/MRC, SUMIMO diversity or MUMIMO diversity gain, G Div UL ,
corresponding to the bearer is applied to its selection threshold. The gain is read from the properties of the
M

TX ic
i

WiMAXequipmentassignedtothecellTXi(ic)for N Ant RX , N Ant TX ,thesubchannelallocationmodeof PZ UL ,

M

i
Mobility M i , BLER BUL .

UL

The additional diversity gain defined for the clutter class of the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi G Div is also
applied.Therefore,thebearersavailableforselectionareallthebearersdefinedintheWiMAXequipmentfor
whichthefollowingistrue:
Mi

TX i ic

UL

Mi

Mi

TX i ic

UL

Mi

T B G Div UL G Div CINR UL and

T B G Div UL G Div CINR UL
ThebearerselectedfordatatransferdependsonthebearerselectioncriterionoftheschedulerusedbythecellTXi(ic).

BearerIndex
Fromamongthebearersavailableforselection,theselectedbeareristheonewiththehighestindex.

PeakMACThroughput
Fromamongthebearersavailableforselection,theselectedbeareristheonewiththehighestuplinkpeakMAC
channelthroughputascalculatedin"ChannelThroughput,CellCapacity,AllocatedBandwidthThroughput,and
PerUserThroughputCalculation"onpage 741.

EffectiveMACThroughput
Fromamongthebearersavailableforselection,theselectedbeareristheonewiththehighestuplinkeffective
MACchannelthroughputascalculatedin"ChannelThroughput,CellCapacity,AllocatedBandwidthThroughput,

736

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

andPerUserThroughputCalculation"onpage 741.
MIMOSTTD/MRC,SUMIMODiversity,andMUMIMODiversityGain:
Oncethebearerisknown,theuplinkC/(I+N)calculatedabovebecomes:
M

TX ic
i

UL

CNR UL = CNR UL + G Div UL + G Div

Mi

TX i ic

Mi

UL

CINR UL = CINR UL + G Div UL + G Div and

Mi

TX i ic

Mi

UL

CINR UL = CINR UL + G Div UL + G Div

TX i ic

Where G Div UL is the STTD/MRC, SUMIMO diversity, or MUMIMO diversity gain corresponding to the selected
bearer.
UplinkSubchannelisation:
Theuplinksubchannelisationdependsontheuplinkbandwidthallocationtargetdefinedfortheschedulerusedbythe
cell TXi(ic). The uplink C/(I+N) calculated above is given for the total number of subchannels associated with the
Mi
PZ UL

permutationzone,i.e., N SC

.Subchannelisationisperformedforallthepixels,subscribers,ormobilesintheuplink,

andmayreducethenumberofusedsubchannelsinordertosatisfytheselectedtarget.

FullBandwidth
Full channel width is used by each mobile in the uplink. As there is no reduction in the bandwidth used for
transmission,thereisnogainintheuplinkC/(I+N).

MaintainConnection
ThebandwidthusedfortransmissionbyamobileisreducedonlyiftheuplinkC/(I+N)isnotenoughtoevenaccess
thelowestbearer.Forexample,asamobilemovesfromgoodtobadradioconditions,thenumberofsubchannels
usedbyitfortransmissioninuplinkarereducedonebyoneinordertoimprovetheuplinkC/(I+N).Thecalculation
ofthegainintroducedbythesubchannelisationisexplainedbelow.

BestBearer
ThebandwidthusedfortransmissionbyamobileisreducedinordertoimprovetheuplinkC/(I+N)enoughto
accessthebestbearer.Forexample,ifusing5subchannels,amobileisabletoaccessthebestbearer,andusing
6itwouldonlygetaccesstothesecondbest,itwillbeassigned5subchannelsastheuseduplinkbandwidth.
Althoughusing4subchannels,itsuplinkC/(I+N)willbebetterthanwhenusing5,theuplinkbandwidthisnot
reducedto4becauseitdoesnotprovideanygainintermsofthebearer,i.e.,themobilealreadyhasthebest
bearerusing5subchannels.Thecalculationofthegainintroducedbythebandwidthreductionisexplainedbelow.
ThedefinitionofthebestbearerdependsonthebearerselectioncriterionoftheschedulerusedbythecellTXi(ic),
i.e., bearerwith thehighestindex,with thehighestpeak MACthroughput, orwith thehighesteffectiveMAC
throughput.

Theuplinksubchannelisationmayresultintheuseofanumberofsubchannelswhichislessthanthetotalnumberof
subchannelsassociatedwiththepermutationzone.Thegainrelatedtothisbandwidthreductionisappliedtothe
uplinkC/(I+N):
M

CINR UL
Final

Where

PZUL
M
N SC
i
= CINR UL+ 10 Log ----------------
N Mi
AllSC
SC UL

Min
N SC UL Service

Mi

Mi
PZ UL

N SC UL N SC

for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by a nonsegmented

Min
permutationzoneintheinterferedcellTXi(ic),and N SC UL Service

Mi

M
i
PZ UL = 8

N SC UL N SC Seg foranypixel,subscriber,

ormobileMicoveredbythesegmenteduplinkPUSCzoneintheinterferedcellTXi(ic).
UplinkPowerControl:
Oncethesubchannelisationisperformed,AtollcontinuestoworkwiththeC/(I+N)givenbythesubchannelisation,
Mi

Mi

i.e., CINR UL = CINR UL .

Final

737

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

Thepixel,subscriber,ormobileMireducesitstransmissionpowersothattheuplinkC/(I+N)fromitatitscellisjust
enoughtogettheselectedbearer.
Ifwith P

= P Max AND CINR UL T

TX ic
i
M
i
B
UL

+ M PC ,where T

TX ic
i
M
i
B
UL

isthebearerselectionthreshold,fromtheWiMAX

equipmentassignedtothecellTXi(ic),forthebearerselectedforthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.
ThetransmissionpowerofMiisreducedtodeterminetheeffectivetransmissionpowerfromthepixel,subscriber,or
mobileMiasfollows:
Mi
M i TX ic
Mi
Mi

i
P Eff = Max P Max CINR UL T M + M PC P Min
i

UL

Mi

Mi

CINR UL iscalculatedagainusing P Eff .

Output
Mi

Mi

CINR UL or CINR UL :UplinkC/(I+N)fromapixel,subscriber,ormobileMiatitservingcellTXi(ic).

N SC UL :Numberofsubchannelsusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiintheuplinkaftersubchannelisation.

P Eff :Effectivetransmissionpoweroftheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

B UL :Bearerassignedtothepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiintheuplink.

Mi

Mi

10.4.7 ThroughputCalculation
Throughputsarecalculatedintwosteps.

Calculationofuplinkanddownlinktotalresourcesinacellasexplainedin"CalculationofTotalCellResources"on
page 738.
Calculationofthroughputsasexplainedin"ChannelThroughput,CellCapacity,AllocatedBandwidthThroughput,and
PerUserThroughputCalculation"onpage 741.

10.4.7.1 CalculationofTotalCellResources
Thetotalamountofresourcesinacellisthenumberofmodulationsymbolsthatcanbeusedfordatatransferineachframe.
The total cell resources can be calculated separately for the downlink and the uplink subframes. The following sections
describehowthecellcapacitiesarecalculatedforTDDandFDDnetworks.

10.4.7.1.1

CalculationofSamplingFrequency
Input
TX i ic

f Sampling :SamplingfactordefinedforthefrequencybandofthecellTXi(ic).

W Channel :ChannelbandwidthofthecellTXi(ic).

TX i ic

Calculations
Atolldeterminesthesamplingfrequencyasfollows:
TX i ic

TX i ic

F Sampling

W Channel 10
- 8000
= Floor f Sampling ----------------------------------8000

Output

738

TX i ic

F Sampling :SamplingfrequencyforthecellTXi(ic).

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

10.4.7.1.2

CalculationofSymbolDuration
Input
TX ic
i

F Sampling :SamplingfrequencyforthecellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"CalculationofSamplingFrequency"onpage 738.

N SCa Total :TotalnumberofsubcarriersdefinedfortheframeconfigurationofacellTXi(ic).

r CP

TX i ic

TX i ic

:CyclicprefixratiodefinedfortheframeconfigurationofTXi(ic)or,otherwise,intheglobalnetworksettings.

Calculations
Fromthesamplingfrequency,Atolldeterminestheintersubcarrierspacing.
F

TX ic
i

TX i ic

F Sampling 10
= ------------------------------------TX i ic
N SCa Total

Atollcalculatestheusefulsymbolduration.
TX i ic
1
D Sym Useful = ------------------TX ic
i
F

And,thedurationofthecyclicprefix.
TX i ic

D CP

TX i ic

r CP
= -------------F

AddingtheCyclicprefixratiototheusefulsymbolduration,Atolldeterminesthetotalsymbolduration.
TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

D Symbol = D Sym Useful + D CP

Output

10.4.7.1.3

TX i ic

D Symbol :TotalsymboldurationofonemodulationsymbolforacellTXi(ic).

CalculationofTotalCellResourcesTDDNetworks
Input

D Frame :Frameduration.

D TTG :TTGduration.

D RTG :RTGduration.

D Symbol :TotalsymboldurationofonemodulationsymbolforacellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"CalculationofSymbol

TDD
TDD

TX i ic

Duration"onpage 739.
TDD

r DL Frame :DLratio.

N SD DL :Numberofsymboldurationsthatcorrespondtothedownlinksubframe.

N SD UL :Numberofsymboldurationsthatcorrespondtotheuplinksubframe.

O Fixed :Downlinkfixedoverhead.

O Variable :Downlinkvariableoverhead.

O Fixed :Uplinkfixedoverhead.

O Variable :Uplinkvariableoverhead.

TDD
TDD
DL
DL

UL
UL

Mi
PZ DL

N SCa Data :NumberofdatasubcarriersofthedownlinkpermutationzoneofacellTXi(ic)assignedtoMi.

Mi
PZ UL

N SCa Data :NumberofdatasubcarriersoftheuplinkpermutationzoneofacellTXi(ic)assignedtoMi.

739

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

Calculations
ThedownlinkandtheuplinksubframesofaTDDframeareseparatedintimebytheTTGandtheRTGtimeguards.
Firstofall,AtollcalculatestheusefulframedurationbyremovingtheTTGandRTGfromtheframeduration:
Used

TDD

TDD

D Frame = D Frame D TTG D RTG

Then,Atollcalculatestheframedurationintermsofnumberofsymboldurations:
D Used
TX ic
i
Frame
N SD Used Frame = Floor ----------------TX i ic
D Symbol
Next,Atollcalculatesthedownlinkanduplinkcellcapacitiesasfollows:
DownlinkSubframe:
Atollcalculatesthenumberofsymboldurationsinthedownlinksubframeexcludingthefixedoverheaddefinedinthe
globalnetworksettings:
TX ic

TX ic

i
i
TDD
DL
N SD DL Subframe = RoundUp N SD Used Frame r DL Frame O Fixed ifDL:ULratioisdefinedinpercentage.
TDD

TX i ic
N SD DL
TXi ic

DL
Or N SD DL Subframe = RoundUp N SD Used Frame ----------------------------------------- O Fixed if DL:UL ratio is defined in
TDD
TDD

N SD DL + N SD UL

fraction.
TheRoundUpfunctionroundsafloatvalueuptothenearestintegervalue.
Thetotalnumberofsymbolsinthedownlinksubframeafterremovingthevariableoverheadis:
TX i ic

R DL

TX i ic

= N Sym DL Subframe

Mi

DL
PZ DL
O Variable
TXi ic
= Floor N SD DL Subframe N SCa Data 1 --------------------

100

UplinkSubframe:
Atollcalculatesthenumberofsymboldurationsintheuplinksubframeexcludingthefixedoverheaddefinedinthe
globalnetworksettings:
TX ic

TX ic

i
i
TDD
UL
N SD UL Subframe = RoundDown N SD Used Frame 1 r DL Frame O Fixed if DL:UL ratio is defined in
percentage.
TDD

TX i ic
TXi ic
N SD UL

UL
Or N SD UL Subframe = RoundDown N SD Used Frame ----------------------------------------- O Fixed if DL:UL ratio is defined in
TDD
TDD

N SD DL + N SD UL

fraction.
TheRoundDownfunctionroundsafloatvaluedowntothenearestintegervalue.
Thetotalnumberofsymbolsintheuplinksubframeafterremovingthevariableoverheadis:
TX ic
i
R UL

TX ic
i
N Sym UL Subframe

Mi

UL
PZ
O Variable
TX i ic
UL

= Floor N SD UL Subframe N SCa Data 1 ---------------------

100

Output

10.4.7.1.4

TX i ic

R DL

R UL

TX i ic

TX i ic

= N Sym DL Subframe :AmountofdownlinkresourcesinthecellTXi(ic).

TX i ic

= N Sym UL Subframe :AmountofuplinkresourcesinthecellTXi(ic).

CalculationofTotalCellResourcesFDDNetworks
ThetotalcellresourcescalculationisthesamefordownlinkanduplinksubframesinFDDnetworks.Therefore,thesymbolX
isusedtorepresentDLorULintheexpressionsbelow.

740

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Input

D Frame :Frameduration.

D Symbol :TotalsymboldurationofonemodulationsymbolforacellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"CalculationofSymbol

TX ic
i

Duration"onpage 739.
X

O Fixed :Downlinkoruplinkfixedoverhead.

O Variable :Downlinkoruplinkvariableoverhead.

Mi
PZ X

N SCa Data :NumberofdatasubcarriersofthedownlinkoruplinkpermutationzoneofacellTXi(ic)assignedtoMi.

Calculations
TherearenotransmitandreceivetimeguardsinFDDsystems.Therefore,thedownlinkandtheuplinksubframedurations
arethesameastheframeduration.
X

D Subframe = D Frame
Thesubframedurationsintermsofthenumberofsymboldurationsexcludingthefixedoverheadsare:
DX

TX ic
i
Subframe
- O XFixed
N SD X Subframe = Floor ---------------------TX i ic
D Symbol
Thetotalnumbersofsymbolsinthedownlinkoruplinksubframesafterremovingthevariableoverheadsare:
TX i ic

RX

TX i ic

= N Sym X Subframe

Mi

X
PZ X
O Variable
TXi ic
= Floor N SD X Subframe N SCa Data 1 --------------------

100

Output

TX i ic

TX i ic

= N Sym X Subframe :AmountofdownlinkoruplinkresourcesinthecellTXi(ic).

RX

10.4.7.2 ChannelThroughput,CellCapacity,AllocatedBandwidthThroughput,
andPerUserThroughputCalculation
Channelthroughputs are calculatedfortheentirechannelresourcesallocatedtothepixel, subscriber,ormobileMi. Cell
capacitiesaresimilartochannelthroughputsbutupperboundbythemaximumdownlinkanduplinktrafficloads.Allocated
bandwidththroughputsarecalculatedforthenumberofusedsubchannelsinuplinkallocatedtothepixel,subscriber,or
mobile Mi. Peruser throughputs are calculated by dividing the downlink cell capacities or uplink allocated bandwidth
throughputsbytheaveragenumberofdownlinkoruplinkusersdefinedforthecell,respectively.
Input
TX i ic

TL DL Max :MaximumdownlinktrafficloadforthecellTXi(ic).

TL UL Max :MaximumuplinktrafficloadforthecellTXi(ic).

R DL

TX i ic

TX i ic

: Amount of downlink resources in the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Calculation of Total Cell Resources" on

page 738.
TX i ic

R UL

page 738.
M :Bearerefficiency(bits/symbol)ofthebearerassignedtothepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiinthedownlinkin

: Amount of uplink resources in the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Calculation of Total Cell Resources" on

"TrafficandPilotC/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(DL)"onpage 725.
M :Bearerefficiency(bits/symbol)ofthebearerassignedtothepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiintheuplinkin

i
B DL

i
B UL

"TrafficC/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(UL)"onpage 735.

741

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

D Frame :Frameduration.
f Segment DL :DownlinksegmentingfactorforthefirstdownlinkPUSCzoneascalculatedin"EffectiveTrafficandPilot
InterferenceCalculation(DL)"onpage 720.
TX ic
i

CNR Preamble :PreambleC/NthecellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"PreambleC/NCalculation"onpage 710.

T AMS :AMSthresholddefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

T MU MIMO :MUMIMOthresholddefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

G MU MIMO :MUMIMOgaindefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

TX ic
i
TX i ic

TX i ic

TX ic

i
i
BLER B DL :DownlinkblockerrorratereadfromtheBLERvs. CINR Traffic graphavailableintheWiMAXequipment

assignedtotheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.
M

i
i
BLER B UL :UplinkblockerrorratereadfromtheBLERvs. CINR UL graphavailableintheWiMAXequipmentassigned

tothecellTXi(ic).
Mi

f TP Scaling :Throughputscalingfactordefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobile
Mi.

TP Offset :Throughputoffsetdefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.
Mi
PZ UL

N SC

:Numberofsubchannelsperchanneldefinedfortheuplinkpermutationzoneassignedtothepixel,subscriber,

ormobileMiascalculatedin"PermutationZoneSelection"onpage 712.

Mi

N SC UL :Numberofuplinksubchannelsaftersubchannelisationwithwhichthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMicanget
thehighestavailablebearer,ascalculatedin"TrafficC/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(UL)"onpage 735.
TX i ic

N Users DL :NumberofusersconnectedtothecellTXi(ic)indownlink.

N Users UL :NumberofusersconnectedtothecellTXi(ic)inuplink.

TX i ic

Calculations
Downlink:
TX i ic

Mi

R DL

M
i
B DL

PeakMACChannelThroughput: CTP P DL = --------------------------------D Frame

Intheaboveformula,theactualvalueof D Frame isusedtocalculatethechannelthroughputforcoveragepredictions,

while D Frame = 1sec forMonteCarlosimulations.
TX ic
i

Forproportionalfairschedulers,thechannelthroughputisincreasedbythemultiuserdiversitygain G MUG DL read

fromtheschedulerpropertiesforthe Mobility M i andthenumberofusersconnectedtothecellindownlink.
TX i ic

R DL
Mi

M
B

TX ic

CTP P DL

i
DL
= -------------------------------- G MUG DL
D Frame

TX ic
i

Max

G MUG DL = 1 if CINR Traffic CINR MUG

Ifthemultiuserdiversitygainfortheexactvalueofthenumberofconnectedusersisnotavailableinthegraph,itis
interpolatedfromthegainvaluesavailableforthenumbersofusersjustlessthanandjustgreaterthantheactual
numberofusers.
DownlinkSegmentation:
M

Ifthepermutationzoneassignedtothepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiisthefirstdownlinkPUSCzone( PZ DL = 0 )
anditissegmented,thechannelthroughputiscalculatedas:

742

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
M

CTP P DL = CTP P DL f Segment DL

MIMOSUMIMOGain:
Ifthepermutationzoneassignedtothepixel,subscriber,ormobileMisupportsSUMIMOorAMS,SUMIMOgain
Max

G SU MIMO isappliedtothebearerefficiency.ThegainisreadfromthepropertiesoftheWiMAXequipmentassigned
tothepixel,subscriber,ormobileMifor:
TX ic
i

N Ant TX :NumberofMIMOtransmission(downlink)antennasdefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

N Ant RX :NumberofMIMOreception(downlink)antennasdefinedfortheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,

Mi

ormobileMi.

Mobility M i :Mobilityusedforthecalculations.

Subchannelallocationmodeusedbythedownlinkpermutationzone PZ DL assignedtothepixel,subscriber,or

Mi

mobileMiascalculatedin"PermutationZoneSelection"onpage 712.

B DL :Bearerassignedtothepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiinthedownlinkasexplainedin"TrafficandPilotC/
(I+N)andBearerCalculation(DL)"onpage 725.

i
BLER BDL :DownlinkblockerrorratereadfromthegraphsavailableintheWiMAXequipmentassignedtothe
TX ic
i

terminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.BLERisdeterminedfor CINR Traffic .

Atoll also takes into account the SUMIMO Gain Factor f SU MIMO defined for the clutter class where the pixel,
subscriber,ormobileMiislocated.
IncaseofSUMIMO:

IncaseofAMS:

Mi

B DL

Mi
B DL

Max

Mi
B DL

1 + f SU MIMO G SU MIMO 1
TX i ic

Max

Mi

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

1 + f SU MIMO G SU MIMO 1 if CNR Preamble T AMS or CINR Preamble T AMS

B DL

IftheMaxSUMIMOGainfortheexactvalueoftheC/(I+N)isnotavailableinthetable,itisinterpolatedfromthegain
valuesavailablefortheC/(I+N)justlessthanandjustgreaterthantheactualC/(I+N).

i
i
i
EffectiveMACChannelThroughput: CTP E DL = CTP P DL 1 BLER B DL
M

Mi

PeakMACCellCapacity: Cap P DL = CTP P DL TL DL Max

i
i
i
EffectiveMACCellCapacity: Cap E DL = Cap P DL 1 BLER B DL

Mi

i
CTP E DL

M
f TP Scaling
i
- TP Offset
-----------------------100

i
ApplicationChannelThroughput: CTP A DL

TX i ic

Mi

i
ApplicationCellCapacity: Cap A DL

Mi

i
Cap E DL
Mi

PeakMACThroughputperUser: PUTP P DL

M
f TP Scaling
i
- TP Offset
-----------------------100
Mi

Cap P DL
= ----------------------TX i ic
N Users DL
Mi

Mi
Cap E DL
EffectiveMACThroughputperUser: PUTP E DL = ----------------------TX i ic
N Users DL
Mi

ApplicationThroughputperUser: PUTP A DL

Mi

Mi
f TP Scaling
- TP Offset
= PUTP E DL -----------------------100
Mi

743

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

Uplink:
TX ic
i

R UL

i
PeakMACChannelThroughput: CTP P UL

M
B

UL
= --------------------------------D Frame

Intheaboveformula,theactualvalueof D Frame isusedtocalculatethechannelthroughputforcoveragepredictions,

while D Frame = 1sec forMonteCarlosimulations.
TX i ic

Forproportionalfairschedulers,thechannelthroughputisincreasedbythemultiuserdiversitygain G MUG UL read

fromtheschedulerpropertiesforthe Mobility M i andthenumberofusersconnectedtothecellinuplink.
TX i ic

R UL
Mi

Mi

TX ic

CTP P UL

i
UL
= -------------------------------- G MUG UL
D Frame

TX i ic

Mi

Max

G MUG UL = 1 if CINR UL CINR MUG

Ifthemultiuserdiversitygainfortheexactvalueofthenumberofconnectedusersisnotavailableinthegraph,itis
interpolatedfromthegainvaluesavailableforthenumbersofusersjustlessthanandjustgreaterthantheactual
numberofusers.
MIMOSUMIMOGain:
Ifthepermutationzoneassignedtothepixel,subscriber,ormobileMisupportsSUMIMOorAMS,SUMIMOgain
Max

G SU MIMO isappliedtothebearerefficiency.ThegainisreadfromthepropertiesoftheWiMAXequipmentassigned
tothecellTXi(ic)for:

Mi

N Ant TX :NumberofMIMOtransmission(uplink)antennasdefinedfortheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,
ormobileMi.
TX ic
i

N Ant RX :NumberofMIMOreception(uplink)antennasdefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

Mobility M i :Mobilityusedforthecalculations.

Subchannel allocation mode used by the uplink permutation zone PZ UL assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or

Mi

mobileMiascalculatedin"PermutationZoneSelection"onpage 712.

Mi

B UL :Bearerassignedtothepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiintheuplinkasexplainedin"TrafficC/(I+N)andBearer
Calculation(UL)"onpage 735.

i
BLER BUL :UplinkblockerrorratereadfromthegraphsavailableintheWiMAXequipmentassignedtothecell

Mi

TXi(ic).BLERisdeterminedfor CINR UL .
Atoll also takes into account the SUMIMO Gain Factor f SU MIMO defined for the clutter class where the pixel,
subscriber,ormobileMiislocated.
IncaseofSUMIMO:

Mi

B UL

IncaseofAMS:

Mi

B UL

Max

Mi

1 + f SU MIMO G SU MIMO 1

B UL
Max

Mi

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

1 + f SU MIMO G SU MIMO 1 if CNR Preamble T AMS or CINR Preamble T AMS

B UL

IftheMaxSUMIMOGainfortheexactvalueoftheC/(I+N)isnotavailableinthetable,itisinterpolatedfromthegain
valuesavailablefortheC/(I+N)justlessthanandjustgreaterthantheactualC/(I+N).
MIMOMUMIMOGain(foruplinkthroughputcoveragepredictionsonly):
If the permutation zone assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi supports MUMIMO and
TX ic
i

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

CNR Preamble T MU MIMO and N Ant RX 2 ,theMUMIMOgain G MU MIMO isappliedtothechannelthroughput.

TheMUMIMOgainisreadfromthepropertiesofthecellTXi(ic).

744

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
M

TX ic
i

CTP P UL = CTP P UL G MU MIMO

i
i
i
EffectiveMACChannelThroughput: CTP E UL = CTP P UL 1 BLER B UL

Mi
f TP Scaling
- TPOffset
= CTP E UL -----------------------100

Mi

Mi

ApplicationChannelThroughput: CTP A UL

PeakMACCellCapacity: Cap P UL = CTP P UL TL UL Max

i
i
i
EffectiveMACCellCapacity: Cap E UL = Cap P UL 1 BLER B UL

Mi

TX i ic

Mi

Mi

ApplicationCellCapacity: Cap A UL

Mi

Mi
f TP Scaling
- TP Offset
= Cap E UL -----------------------100
Mi

Mi

PeakMACAllocatedBandwidthThroughput: ABTP P UL

Mi

N SC UL
= CTP P UL ----------------M
Mi

PZ

N SC

i
UL

i
i
i
EffectiveMACAllocatedBandwidthThroughput: ABTP E UL = ABTP P UL 1 BLER B UL

Mi

ApplicationAllocatedBandwidthThroughput: ABTP A UL
Mi

PeakMACThroughputperUser: PUTP P UL

Cap Mi

M
P UL
- ABTP P i UL
= Min ----------------------TX i ic

N Users UL

Mi

EffectiveMACThroughputperUser: PUTP E UL

Mi

Mi

Mi
f TP Scaling
- TP Offset
= ABTP E UL -----------------------100
Mi

ApplicationThroughputperUser: PUTP A UL

Cap M i

M
E UL
- ABTP E i UL
= Min ---------------------- TXi ic

N Users UL

Mi

Mi
f TP Scaling
- TP Offset
= PUTP E UL -----------------------100
Mi

Output
Mi

CTP P DL :DownlinkpeakMACchannelthroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

CTP E DL :DownlinkeffectiveMACchannelthroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

CTP A DL :Downlinkapplicationchannelthroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Cap P DL :DownlinkpeakMACcellcapacityatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Cap E DL :DownlinkeffectiveMACcellcapacityatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Cap A DL :Downlinkapplicationcellcapacityatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

PUTP P DL :DownlinkpeakMACthroughputperuseratthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

PUTP E DL :DownlinkeffectiveMACthroughputperuseratthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

PUTP A DL :Downlinkapplicationthroughputperuseratthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

CTP P UL :UplinkpeakMACchannelthroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

CTP E UL :UplinkeffectiveMACchannelthroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

CTP A UL :Uplinkapplicationchannelthroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Cap P UL :UplinkpeakMACcellcapacityatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Mi
M

Mi
Mi
Mi

Mi
M

Mi

Mi
Mi
Mi
M

745

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks
M

Forsk2014

Cap E UL :UplinkeffectiveMACcellcapacityatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Cap A UL :Uplinkapplicationcellcapacityatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

ABTP P UL :UplinkpeakMACallocatedbandwidththroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

ABTP E UL :UplinkeffectiveMACallocatedbandwidththroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

ABTP A UL :Uplinkapplicationallocatedbandwidththroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

PUTP P UL :UplinkpeakMACthroughputperuseratthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

PUTP E UL :UplinkeffectiveMACthroughputperuseratthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

PUTP A UL :Uplinkapplicationthroughputperuseratthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Mi
Mi

Mi
Mi
Mi

10.4.8 SchedulingandRadioResourceManagement
AtollWiMAXBWAmoduleincludesanumberofschedulingmethodswhichcanbeusedforschedulingandradioresource
allocation during Monte Carlo simulations. These resource allocation algorithms are explained in "Scheduling and Radio
ResourceAllocation"onpage 746andthecalculationofuserthroughputsisexplainedin"UserThroughputCalculation"on
page 755.

10.4.8.1 SchedulingandRadioResourceAllocation
Input
TX i ic

TL DL Max :MaximumdownlinktrafficloadforthecellTXi(ic).

TL UL Max :MaximumuplinktrafficloadforthecellTXi(ic).

N Users Max :MaximumnumberofusersdefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

QoS

TX i ic

TX i ic

:QoSclassoftheservice(UGS,ErtPS,rtPS,nrtPS,orBestEffort)accessedbyamobileMi.

TPD Min DL :DownlinkminimumthroughputdemandfortheserviceaccessedbyamobileMi.

TPD Min UL :UplinkminimumthroughputdemandfortheserviceaccessedbyamobileMi.

TPD Max DL :DownlinkmaximumthroughputdemandfortheserviceaccessedbyamobileMi.

TPD Max UL :UplinkmaximumthroughputdemandfortheserviceaccessedbyamobileMi.

:PriorityoftheserviceaccessedbyamobileMi.
M
M

i
i

Mi
Mi

TX ic

i
i
BLER B DL :DownlinkblockerrorratereadfromtheBLERvs. CINR Traffic graphavailableintheWiMAXequipment

assignedtotheterminalusedbythemobileMi.
M

i
i
BLER B UL :UplinkblockerrorratereadfromtheBLERvs. CINR UL graphavailableintheWiMAXequipmentassigned

tothecellTXi(ic).
Mi

f TP Scaling :ThroughputscalingfactordefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythemobileMi.

TP Offset :ThroughputoffsetdefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythemobileMi.

CTP P DL :DownlinkpeakMACchannelthroughputatthemobileMi ascalculatedin"ThroughputCalculation"on

Mi

Mi

page 738.

Mi

CTP E DL :DownlinkeffectiveMACchannelthroughputatthemobileMiascalculatedin"ThroughputCalculation"on
page 738.

746

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

CTP P UL : Uplink peak MAC channel throughput at the mobile Mi as calculated in "Throughput Calculation" on
page 738.

CTP E UL :UplinkeffectiveMACchannelthroughputatthemobileMi ascalculatedin"ThroughputCalculation"on

page 738.

Mi

ABTPP UL : Uplink peak MAC allocated bandwidth throughput at the mobile Mi as calculated in "Throughput
Calculation"onpage 738.

QoS

f Bias :BiasfactordefinedfortheBiased(QoSClass)schedulingmethod.

Calculations
ThefollowingcalculationsaredescribedforanycellTXi(ic)containingtheusersMiforwhichitisthebestserver.
MobileSelection:
TX ic
i

Theschedulerselects N Users mobilesfortheschedulingandRRMprocess.IftheMonteCarlouserdistributionhasgenerated

TX i ic

anumberofuserswhichislessthan N Users Max ,theschedulerkeepsallthemobilesgeneratedforthecellTXi(ic).

TX ic

TX ic

TX ic

i
i
i
N Users = Min N Users Max N Users Generated

TX ic
i

Sel

N Users areselectedforRRMbythescheduler.

Foracell,mobiles M i

CalculationofActualMinimumandMaximumThroughputDemands:
DependingontheselectedtargetthroughputoftheschedulerassignedtothecellTXi(ic),theactualminimumandmaximum
throughputdemandscanbeconsideredasthepeakMAC,effectiveMAC,orapplicationthroughput.Therefore:

TargetThroughput=PeakMACThroughput
Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Downlink: TPD Min DL , TPD Max DL

Sel

Sel

M
M
M

i
i
i
Uplink: TPD Min UL , Min TPD Max UL ABTPP UL

TargetThroughput=EffectiveMACThroughput
Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

TPD Min DL
TPD Max DL
Downlink: TPD Min DL = --------------------------------------------- , TPD Max DL = --------------------------------------------Sel
Sel

Mi

Mi
1 BLER BDL
1 BLER B DL

Sel

Sel

Sel
Mi

Sel

Mi
Mi
TPD Min UL
Uplink: TPD Min UL = --------------------------------------------- , TPD Max UL
Sel

Mi
1 BLER BUL

Mi
Mi

Min TPD Max UL ABTP P UL

= ------------------------------------------------------------------------Sel

Mi
1 BLER B UL

TargetThroughput=ApplicationThroughput
Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Mi

Sel

Sel
Mi

Mi

Mi
TPD Min DL + TP Offset
TPD Max DL + TP Offset
- , TPD Max DL = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Downlink: TPD Min DL = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Sel
Sel

Mi Mi

Mi Mi
1 BLER B DL f TP Scaling
1 BLER B DL f TP Scaling

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Mi

TPD Min UL + TP Offset

Uplink: TPD Min UL = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------,
Sel

Mi Mi
1 BLER BUL f TP Scaling

747

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

Sel

Sel
M
i
TPD Max UL

M
M
M

i
i
i
Min TPD Max UL ABTP P UL + TP Offset

= -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Sel

Mi Mi
1 BLER B UL f TP Scaling

TheMin()functionselectsthelowerofthetwovalues.Thiscalculationisperformedinordertolimitthemaximumuplink
throughputdemandtothemaximumthroughputthatausercangetinuplinkusingtheallocatedbandwidth(numberofused
subchannels)calculatedforitin"TrafficC/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(UL)"onpage 735.
ResourceAllocationforMinimumThroughputDemands:
Sel

1. FortheQoSclassesUGS,ErtPS,rtPS,andnrtPS,Atollsortsthe M i
p

Sel
Mi

TX i ic

N Users inorderofdecreasingservicepriority,

:
Sel

Mi

QoS

Sel
Mi

UGS

Sel
Mi

...n> p

ErtPS

rtPS

Sel
Mi

Sel
i

...n> p

nrtPS

N1

TX i ic

=n

Sel
Mi

=n
>0...

=0
=n

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

>0...

=0

Sel
i

Sel
Mi

...n> p

>0...

=0

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

=n

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

...n> p

Sel
Mi

>0...

=0

TX i ic

Where N N Users ,iftherearesomeBestEffortusers,or N = N Users iftherearenoBestEffortusersselected.

Sel

2. Startingwith M i

Sel

= 1 upto M i

= N ,Atollallocatesthedownlinkanduplinkresourcesrequiredtosatisfyeach

usersminimumthroughputdemandsindownlinkanduplinkasfollows:
Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

TPD Min DL
TPD Min UL
R Min DL = -------------------------- and R Min UL = -------------------------Sel
Mi

CTP P DL

Sel
Mi

CTP P UL

3. Atollstopstheresourceallocationindownlinkoruplink,

748

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

When/Ifindownlink

Sel
i

TX ic
i

R Min DL = TL DL Max ,i.e.,theresourcesavailableindownlinkhavebeenusedupfor

Sel
i

satisfyingtheminimumthroughputdemandsofthemobiles.

When/If in uplink

Sel
i

TX ic
i

R Min UL = TL UL Max , i.e., the resources available in uplink have been used up for

Sel
Mi

satisfyingtheminimumthroughputdemandsofthemobiles.
4. MobileswhichareactiveDL+ULmustbeabletogettheirminimumthroughputdemandsinbothULandDLinorder
tobeconsideredconnectedDL+UL.IfanactiveDL+ULmobileisonlyabletogetitsminimumthroughputdemandin
onedirection,itisrejected,andtheresources,thatwereallocatedtoitintheonedirectioninwhichitwasabletoget
athroughput,areallocatedtoothermobiles.
5. Mobiles which are active UL and whose minimum throughput demand in UL is higher than the uplink allocated
Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

bandwidththroughput( TPD Min UL ABTP P UL )arerejectedduetoResourceSaturation.

6. If

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

TX i ic

TX i ic

RMin DL TLDL Max or RMin UL TLUL Max ,andalltheminimumthroughputresourcesdemandedby

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

the mobiles have been allocated, Atoll goes to the next step for allocating resources to satisfy the maximum
throughputdemands.
BackhaulSaturation:
If at this stage, a sites downlink or uplink effective MAC aggregate throughput exceeds its maximum downlink or uplink
backhaulthroughput,respectively,mobilesarerejectedonebyoneduetoBackhaulSaturation,startingfromthemobilewith
thelowestpriorityservice,amongallthecellsofthesiteinordertoreachadownlinkoruplinkeffectiveMACaggregatesite
throughputthesitesmaximumdownlinkoruplinkbackhaulthroughput.
ResourceAllocationforMaximumThroughputDemands:
Foreachcell,theremainingcellresourcesavailableare:
TX ic
i

TX ic
i

Downlink: R Rem DL = TL DL Max

Sel
i

R Min DL

Sel
Mi
TX i ic

TX i ic

Uplink: R Rem UL = TL UL Max

Sel
Mi

R Min UL

Sel
i

Foreachmobile,thethroughputdemandsremainingoncetheminimumthroughputdemandshavebeensatisfiedarethe
differencebetweenthemaximumandtheminimumthroughputdemands:
M

Sel
i

Sel
i

Sel
i

Downlink: TPD Rem DL = TPD Max DL TPD Min DL

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Uplink: TPD Rem UL = TPD Max UL TPD Min UL

FortheremainingthroughputdemandsofthemobilesbelongingtotheQoSclassesErtPS,rtPS,nrtPS,andBestEffort,the
followingresourceallocationmethodsareavailable:

ProportionalFair:
Thegoalofthisschedulingmethodistodistributeresourcesamongusersfairlyinsuchawaythat,ontheaverage,
eachusergetsthehighestpossiblethroughputthatitcangetundertheradioconditionsatitslocation.

749

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014
Sel

LetthetotalnumberofusersbelongingtotheQoSclassesErtPS,rtPS,nrtPS,andBestEffort,be N M i
TX ic
i

TX ic
i

a. Eachuserschannelthroughputisincreasedbythemultiuserdiversitygain G MUG DL or G MUG UL readfromthe

Sel

schedulerpropertiesforthe Mobility M i assignedtomobile M i

andthenumberofconnectedusers,DLor

UL,inthecellTXi(ic)intheiterationk1.
Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

CTP P DL = CTP P DL

Sel
Mi

TX i ic

WithoutMUG
Sel
Mi

TX i ic

Sel
Mi

G MUG DL and CTP P UL = CTP P UL

WithoutMUG

Sel
Mi

TX i ic

Max

TX i ic

G MUG DL = 1 if CINR Traffic CINR MUG and G MUG UL = 1 if CINR UL

G MUG UL

Max

CINR MUG .

Ifthemultiuserdiversitygainfortheexactvalueofthenumberofconnectedusersisnotavailableinthegraph,
itisinterpolatedfromthegainvaluesavailableforthenumbersofusersjustlessthanandjustgreaterthanthe
actualnumberofusers.
b. Atolldividestheremainingresourcesinthecellintoequalpartsforeachuser:
TX i ic

TX i ic

R Rem DL
R Rem UL
--------------------- and -------------------N
N
c. Atoll converts the remaining throughput demands of all the users to their respective remaining resource
demands:
Sel
Mi

RD Rem DL

Sel
i

Sel

Sel
i

Mi
TPD Rem DL
TPD Rem UL
= --------------------------- and RD Rem UL = --------------------------Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

CTP P DL

CTP P UL

Remainingresourcedemandsofauseraregivenbytheratiobetweenitsremainingthroughputdemandsandthe
peakchannelthroughputsattheuserslocation.
d. The resources allocated to each user by the Proportional Fair scheduling method for satisfying its maximum
throughputdemandsare:
Sel
Mi

R Max DL

TX i ic

Sel

Sel

Sel

TX i ic

Mi
Mi
Mi
R Rem DL
R Rem UL
- and R Max
= Min RD Rem DL ------------------- UL = Min RD Rem UL ---------------------
N
N

Eachusergetseithertheresourcesitneedstoachieveitsmaximumthroughputdemandsoranequalsharefrom
theremainingresourcesofthecell,whicheverissmaller.
e. Atollstopstheresourceallocationindownlinkoruplink,

When/Ifindownlink

Sel
Mi

TX i ic

R Max DL = R Rem DL ,i.e.,theresourcesavailableindownlinkhavebeenusedup

Sel
i

forsatisfyingthemaximumthroughputdemandsofthemobiles.

When/If in uplink

Sel
Mi

RMax UL

TX i ic

= R Rem UL , i.e., the resources available in uplink have been used up for

Sel
Mi

satisfyingthemaximumthroughputdemandsofthemobiles.
f. Iftheresourcesallocatedtoausersatisfyitsmaximumthroughputdemands,thisuserisremovedfromthelistof
remainingusers.
g. Atollrecalculatestheremainingresourcesasfollows:
TX i ic

TX i ic

R Rem DL = TL DL Max

Sel
Mi

R Min DL

Sel
Mi
TX i ic

TX i ic

R Rem UL = TL UL Max

Sel
Mi
Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

RMin UL RMax UL
Sel
Mi

750

Sel
Mi

R Max DL and

Sel
Mi

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

h. Atollrepeatsthealltheabovestepsfortheuserswhosemaximumthroughputdemandshavenotbeensatisfied
TX ic
i

TX ic
i

untileither R Rem DL = 0 and R Rem UL = 0 ,orallthemaximumthroughputdemandsaresatisfied.

ProportionalDemand:
Thegoalofthisschedulingmethodistoallocateresourcestousersweightedaccordingtotheirremainingthroughput
demands.Therefore,theuserthroughputsforuserswithhighthroughputdemandswillbehigherthanthosewithlow
throughputdemands.Inotherwords,thisschedulerdistributeschannelthroughputbetweenusersproportionallyto
theirdemands.
a. Atoll converts the remaining throughput demands of all the users to their respective remaining resource
demands:
Sel
Mi

RD Rem DL

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Sel

Mi
TPD Rem DL
TPD Rem UL
= --------------------------- and RD Rem UL = --------------------------Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

CTP P DL

CTP P UL

Remainingresourcedemandsofauseraregivenbytheratiobetweenitsremainingthroughputdemandsandthe
peakchannelthroughputsattheuserslocation.
b. Atollcalculatestheamounteffectiveremainingresourcesforthecellofeachusertodistributeamongtheusers
asfollows:
TX i ic

R Eff Rem DL

Sel
Sel
Mi
TX i ic
Mi
TXi ic

TXi ic

RD Rem DL and R Eff Rem UL = Min R Rem UL

RD Rem UL
= Min R Rem DL

Sel
Sel

Mi
Mi

c. TheresourcesallocatedtoeachuserbytheProportionalDemandschedulingmethodforsatisfyingitsmaximum
throughputdemandsare:
Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

TX i ic

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

TX i ic

RD Rem DL
RD Rem UL
- and R Max UL = R Eff Rem UL ---------------------------------R Max DL = R Eff Rem DL ---------------------------------Sel
Sel
Mi

Mi

RDRem DL

RDRem UL

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Biased(QoSClass):
ThegoalofthisschedulingmethodistodistributeresourcesamongusersofeachQoSclassfairlyinsuchawaythat,
on the average, each user gets the highest possible throughput that it can get under the radio conditions at its
location.TheresourcesavailableforallocationtousersofeachQoSclassdependonabiasfactor.TheQoSClassBias
FactorcontrolstheamountofresourcesavailableforeachQoSclass.
CalculationoftheRemainingResourcesperQoSClass:
QoS

Thebiasfactor f Bias representsthebiasintermsofresourcesallocatedto1userofaQoSclasswithrankrtothe

resourcesallocatedto1userofaQoSclasswithrankr1:
QoS

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

f Bias
R Max ErtPS
R Max rtPS
R Max nrtPS
= 1 + --------- = -------------------------= -------------------------= -------------------------Sel
Sel
Sel
100
Mi
Mi
Mi
R Max rtPS
R Max nrtPS
R Max BE
TheranksofQoSclassesare:
QoSClass

QoSClassRank r QoS

ErtPS

rtPS

nrtPS

BestEffort

TheresourcesavailablefortheusersofeachQoSclassfromamongtheremainingresourcesiscalculatedasfollows:

751

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014
r

TX ic
i

R QoS DL

1 QoS
1 QoS
N QoS ---
N QoS ---
TX ic
TX ic
TX ic

i
i
i
= R Rem DL ------------------------------------------------------- and R QoS UL = R Rem UL ------------------------------------------------------r
r
1 QoS
1 QoS
N QoS ---
N QoS ---

AllQoS

AllQoS

ResourceAllocation:
Once the remaining resources available for the users of each QoS class have been determined, the allocation of
resourceswithineachQoSclassisperformedasfortheproportionalfairscheduler.
Sel

LetthenumberofusersbelongingtoaQoSclass N QoS M i

a. AtolldividestheremainingresourcesoftheQoSclassintoequalpartsforeachuser:
TX i ic

TX i ic

R QoS DL
R QoS UL
-------------------- and ------------------N QoS
N QoS
b. Atoll converts the remaining throughput demands of all the users to their respective remaining resource
demands:
Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

RD Rem DL

Sel
Mi

Sel

Mi
TPD Rem DL
TPD Rem UL
= --------------------------- and RD Rem UL = --------------------------Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

CTP P DL

CTP P UL

Remainingresourcedemandsofauseraregivenbytheratiobetweenitsremainingthroughputdemandsandthe
peakchannelthroughputsattheuserslocation.
c. TheresourcesallocatedtoeachuserbytheBiasedschedulingmethodforsatisfyingitsmaximumthroughput
demandsare:
Sel
Mi

R Max DL

TX i ic

Sel

Sel

Sel

TX i ic

Mi
Mi
Mi
R QoS DL
R QoS UL
- and R Max
= Min RD Rem DL ------------------ UL = Min RD Rem UL --------------------
N
N QoS

QoS

Eachusergetseithertheresourcesitneedstoachieveitsmaximumthroughputdemandsoranequalsharefrom
theremainingresourcesoftheQoSclass,whicheverissmaller.
d. AtollstopstheresourceallocationforaQoSclassindownlinkoruplink,

Sel
Mi

When/Ifindownlink

TX i ic

R Max DL = R QoS DL ,i.e.,theresourcesavailableindownlinkfortheQoSclasshave

Sel
Mi

beenusedupforsatisfyingthemaximumthroughputdemandsofthemobiles.

When/Ifinuplink

Sel
Mi

TX i ic

R Max UL = R QoS UL ,i.e.,theresourcesavailableinuplinkfortheQoSclasshavebeen

Sel
Mi

usedupforsatisfyingthemaximumthroughputdemandsofthemobiles.
e. Iftheresourcesallocatedtoausersatisfyitsmaximumthroughputdemands,thisuserisremovedfromthelistof
remainingusers.
f. Atollrecalculatestheremainingresourcesasfollows:
TX i ic

TX i ic

R QoS DL = TL DL Max

Sel
Mi

R Min DL

Sel
Mi
TX i ic

TX i ic

R QoS UL = TL UL Max

Sel
Mi

R Max DL and

Sel
Mi
Sel
Mi

R Min UL

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

R Max UL

Sel
Mi

g. AtollrepeatsthealltheabovestepsfortheusersoftheQoSclasswhosemaximumthroughputdemandshavenot
TX i ic

TX i ic

been satisfied until either R QoS DL = 0 and R QoS UL = 0 , or all the maximum throughput demands are
satisfied.

752

MaxAggregateThroughput:

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Thegoalofthisschedulingmethodistoachievethemaximumaggregatethroughputforthecells.Thisisdoneby
allocatingasmuchresourcesasneededtomobileswithhighC/(I+N)conditions.AsmobileswithhighC/(I+N)canget
higherbearers,andthereforerequirelessamountofresources,moremobilescanthereforebeallocatedresources
inthesameframe,andtheendthroughputforeachcellwillbethehighestcomparedtoothertypesofschedulers.
Sel

a. Atollsortsthe M i

TX ic
i

N Users inorderofdecreasingdownlinkoruplinktrafficC/(I+N),dependingonwhetherthe

allocationisbeingperformedforthedownlinkorfortheuplink.
b. Starting with the mobile with the highest rank, Atoll allocates the downlink and uplink resources required to
satisfyeachusersremainingthroughputdemandsindownlinkanduplinkasfollows:
Sel
Mi

R Max DL

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Sel

Mi
TPD Rem DL
TPD Rem UL
= --------------------------- and R Max UL = --------------------------Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

CTP P DL

CTP P UL

c. Atollstopstheresourceallocationindownlinkoruplink,

When/Ifindownlink

Sel
i

TX ic
i

R Max DL = R Rem DL ,i.e.,theresourcesavailableindownlinkhavebeenusedup

Sel
Mi

forsatisfyingthemaximumthroughputdemandsofthemobiles.

When/If in uplink

Sel
Mi

TX i ic

R Max UL = R Rem UL , i.e., the resources available in uplink have been used up for

Sel
Mi

satisfyingthemaximumthroughputdemandsofthemobiles.

RoundRobin:
Thegoalofthisschedulingmethodistoallocateequalresourcestousersfairly.
Sel

LetthetotalnumberofusersbelongingtotheQoSclassesErtPS,rtPS,nrtPS,andBestEffort,be N M i

a. Atolldividestheremainingresourcesinthecellintoequalpartsforeachuser:
TX i ic

TX i ic

R Rem DL
R Rem UL
--------------------- and -------------------N
N
b. Atoll converts the remaining throughput demands of all the users to their respective remaining resource
demands:
Sel
Mi

RD Rem DL

Sel
i

Sel

Sel
i

Mi
TPD Rem DL
TPD Rem UL
= --------------------------- and RD Rem UL = --------------------------M

Sel
i

CTP P DL

Sel
i

CTP P UL

Remainingresourcedemandsofauseraregivenbytheratiobetweenitsremainingthroughputdemandsandthe
peakchannelthroughputsattheuserslocation.
c. The resources allocated to each user by the Round Robin scheduling method for satisfying its maximum
throughputdemandsare:
Sel

TX i ic

Sel

Sel

Sel

TX i ic

Mi
Mi
Mi
Mi
R Rem DL
R Rem UL
- and R Max
R Max DL = Min RD Rem DL ------------------- UL = Min RD Rem UL ---------------------
N
N

Eachusergetseithertheresourcesitneedstoachieveitsmaximumthroughputdemandsoranequalsharefrom
theremainingresourcesofthecell,whicheverissmaller.
d. Atollstopstheresourceallocationindownlinkoruplink,

When/Ifindownlink

Sel
Mi

TX i ic

R Max DL = R Rem DL ,i.e.,theresourcesavailableindownlinkhavebeenusedup

Sel
i

forsatisfyingthemaximumthroughputdemandsofthemobiles.

753

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

When/If in uplink

Sel
i

TX ic
i

R Max UL = R Rem UL , i.e., the resources available in uplink have been used up for

Sel
i

satisfyingthemaximumthroughputdemandsofthemobiles.
e. Iftheresourcesallocatedtoausersatisfyitsmaximumthroughputdemands,thisuserisremovedfromthelistof
remainingusers.
f. Atollrecalculatestheremainingresourcesasfollows:
TX i ic

TX i ic

R Rem DL = TL DL Max

Sel
Mi

R Min DL

Sel
Mi
TX i ic

TX i ic

R Rem UL = TL UL Max

Sel
Mi

R Max DL and

Sel
Mi
Sel
Mi

R Min UL

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

R Max UL

Sel
Mi

g. Atollrepeatsthealltheabovestepsfortheuserswhosemaximumthroughputdemandshavenotbeensatisfied
TX ic
i

TX ic
i

untileither R Rem DL = 0 and R Rem UL = 0 ,orallthemaximumthroughputdemandsaresatisfied.

SpatialMultiplexingwithUplinkMultiUserMIMO:
MUMIMO lets the system/scheduler work with two parallel WiMAX frames (1 for each antenna). Therefore, a mobile
connectedtoantenna1createsacorrespondingresourceavailabilityonantenna2.Thisresourcesmadeavailableonantenna
2 can then be assigned to another mobile without any effect on the overall load of the cell. When the second mobile is
assignedtoantenna2,theresourcesallocatedtoitoverlapwiththeresourcesmadeavailablebythefirstmobileonantenna
1.Ifthesecondmobileisallocatedmoreresourcesthanthefirstonemadeavailable,thesecondmobilewillcreateresource
availabilityonantenna1.Eachnewmobileiseitherconnectedtoantenna1orantenna2.Thepartofthemobilesresources
which are not coupled with resources allocated to another mobile on the other antenna is called the real resource
consumption.Thepartofthemobilesresourceswhicharecoupledwiththeresourcesallocatedtoanothermobileonthe
otherantennaiscalledthevirtualresourceconsumption.
MUMIMO can be used if the permutation zone assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi supports MUMIMO,
TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

CNR Preamble T MU MIMO ,and N Ant RX 2 .

LetibetheindexofconnectedMUMIMOmobiles: i = 1toN
MU MIMO

MU MIMO
Mi

Eachmobile M i

hasacorrespondingtrafficload TL UL

.Theschedulingstartswithavailablerealresources

MU MIMO
Mi = 0
RR UL

MU MIMO
Mi = 0
andavailablevirtualresources V UL

= 0% . i = 0 meansnoMUMIMOmobilehasyet

= 100%

beenscheduled.
MU MIMO

Thevirtualresourceconsumptionofamobile M i

MU MIMO

Therealresourceconsumptionofamobile M i

MU MIMO
Mi

isgivenby: VC UL

MU MIMO
Mi

isgivenby: RC UL

MU MIMO

Thevirtualresourcesmadeavailablebythemobile M i
MU MIMO
Mi

V UL

MU MIMO
Mi 1

= V UL

Saturationoccurswhen

MU MIMO
Mi

VC UL

MU MIMO
Mi

RC UL

MU MIMO

Mi
= Min TL UL

MU MIMO
Mi

= TL UL

MU MIMO
Mi 1

V UL

MU MIMO
Mi

VC UL

aregivenby:

MU MIMO
Mi

+ RC UL

TX i ic

= TL UL Max .

Thefollowingtablegivesanexample:
Mobile

754

MU MIMO
Mi

TL UL

(%)

MU MIMO
Mi

VC UL

(%)

MU MIMO
Mi

RC UL

(%)

MU MIMO
Mi

V UL

M1

10

10

10

M2

(%)

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Mobile

MU MIMO
i

TL UL

(%)

MU MIMO
i

VC UL

(%)

MU MIMO
i

RC UL

MU MIMO
i

V UL

(%)

M3

20

15

15

M4

40

15

25

25

(%)

BackhaulCapacityLimitation:
Backhauloverflowratiosarecalculatedforeachsiteasfollows:
Sel
Sel

Mi
Mi

R Max DL CTP E DL

Sel

M
Site
i

= Max 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- and

Sel
Sel
Mi
Mi

Site
R Min DL CTP E DL
TP BH DL

Sel

M
Site
i

Site

BHOF DL

Sel
Sel

Mi
Mi

R Max UL CTP E UL

Sel

M i Site
= Max 1 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sel
Sel
Mi
Mi

Site
R Min UL CTP E UL
TP BH UL

Sel

M
Site
i

Site

BHOF UL

TotalAmountofResourcesAssignedtoEachSelectedMobile:
Sel

Atollcalculatestheamountsofdownlinkanduplinkresourcesallocatedtoeachindividualmobile M i

(whichcanalsobe

referredtoasthetrafficloadsofthemobiles)asfollows:
Sel

Sel
Mi

Downlink: TL DL

Sel
Mi

= R DL

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Mi
Mi
Max DL CTP P DL
R Min DL CTP P DL + -----------------------------------------------Site

BHOFDL

= -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Sel

Sel
Mi

CTP P DL
Sel

Sel
Mi

Uplink: TL UL

Sel
Mi

= R UL

Sel
i

Sel
i

Mi
Mi
Max UL CTP P UL
R Min UL CTP P UL + -----------------------------------------------Site

BHOF UL

= -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Sel

Sel
Mi

CTP P UL
Output
Sel
Mi

TL DL

Sel
Mi
TL UL

Sel
Mi

= R DL
=

Sel
Mi
R UL

Sel

:Downlinktrafficloadortheamountofdownlinkresourcesallocatedtothemobile M i
Sel

:Uplinktrafficloadortheamountofuplinkresourcesallocatedtothemobile M i

10.4.8.2 UserThroughputCalculation
UserthroughputsarecalculatedforthepercentageofresourcesallocatedtoeachmobileselectedbytheschedulingforRRM
Sel

duringtheMonteCarlosimulations, M i

Input

Sel
Mi

R DL

Sel

:Amountofdownlinkresourcesallocatedtothemobile M i

ascalculatedin"SchedulingandRadioResource

Allocation"onpage 746.

755

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

Sel
i

Sel

R UL :Amountofuplinkresourcesallocatedtothemobile M i

ascalculatedin"SchedulingandRadioResource

Allocation"onpage 746.

Sel
i
CTP P DL
M

Sel

:DownlinkpeakMACchannelthroughputatthemobile M i

ascalculatedin"ThroughputCalculation"on

page 738.

Sel
i

Sel

CTP P UL :UplinkpeakMACchannelthroughputatthemobile M i

ascalculatedin"ThroughputCalculation"on

page 738.
Sel

TX i ic
Mi
BLER B DL :DownlinkblockerrorratereadfromtheBLERvs. CINR Traffic graphavailableintheWiMAXequipment

Sel

assignedtotheterminalusedbythemobile M i

Sel

Mi
Mi
BLER B UL : Uplink block error rate read from the BLER vs. CINR UL graph available in the WiMAX equipment

assignedtothecellTXi(ic).
Sel
Mi

Sel

f TP Scaling :Throughputscalingfactordefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythemobile M i

TP Offset :Throughputoffsetdefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythemobile M i

Sel
Mi

Sel

Calculations
Downlink:
Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

CTP P DL

PeakMACUserThroughput: UTP P DL = R DL

Mi
Mi

Mi
EffectiveMACUserThroughput: UTP E DL = UTP P DL 1 BLER B DL

Sel

Sel
Mi

ApplicationUserThroughput: UTP A DL

Sel

Sel

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Sel

Mi
f TP Scaling
- TP Offset
= UTP E DL -----------------------100

Uplink:
Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

CTP P UL

PeakMACUserThroughput: UTP P UL = R UL

M
M

Mi
i
i
EffectiveMACUserThroughput: UTP E UL = UTP P UL 1 BLER B UL

Sel

Sel
Mi

Sel

Sel
Mi

Sel

Sel
Mi

Sel

Mi
f TP Scaling
ApplicationUserThroughput: UTP A UL = UTP E UL ------------------------- TP Offset
100

Output

756

Sel
Mi

Sel

UTP P DL :DownlinkpeakMACuserthroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobile M i

UTP E DL :DownlinkeffectiveMACuserthroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobile M i

Sel
Mi
UTP A DL

:Downlinkapplicationuserthroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobile M i

Sel
Mi
UTP P UL

:UplinkpeakMACuserthroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobile M i

UTP E UL :UplinkeffectiveMACuserthroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobile M i

Sel
Mi
UTP A UL

Sel
Mi

Sel

Sel

Sel

Sel
Mi

Sel

:Uplinkapplicationuserthroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobile M i

Sel

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

10.5 AutomaticPlanningAlgorithms
Thefollowingsectionsdescribethealgorithmsfor:

"AutomaticNeighbourPlanning"onpage 757.
"AutomaticIntertechnologyNeighbourPlanning"onpage 761.
"AutomaticFrequencyPlanningUsingtheAFP"onpage 763.
"AutomaticPreambleIndexPlanningUsingtheAFP"onpage 765.
"AutomaticZonePermBasePlanningUsingtheAFP"onpage 769.

10.5.1 AutomaticNeighbourPlanning
TheintratechnologyneighbourplanningalgorithmtakesintoaccountthecellsofalltheTBCtransmitters.Itmeansthatthe
cellsofalltheTBCtransmittersofyourATLdocumentarepotentialneighbours.
ThecellstobeallocatedwillbecalledTBAcells.Theymustfulfilthefollowingconditions:

Theyareactive,
TheysatisfythefiltercriteriaappliedtotheTransmittersfolder,
Theyarelocatedinsidethefocuszone,
Theybelongtothefolderonwhichtheallocationhasbeenexecuted.ThiscanbetheTransmittersfolderoragroup
oftransmitters(subfolder).

OnlyTBAcellsareassignedneighbours.
IfnofocuszoneexistsintheATLdocument,Atolltakesintoaccountthecomputation
zone.

WeassumeareferencecellTXi(ic)andacandidateneighbourcellTXj(jc).Whenautomaticplanningstarts,Atollchecksthe
followingconditions:
1. Thedistancebetweenbothcellsmustbelessthantheuserdefinablemaximumintersitedistance.Ifthedistance
betweenthereferencecellandthecandidateneighbourisgreaterthanthisvalue,thenthecandidateneighbouris
discarded.
Atollcalculatestheeffectivedistancebetweenthereferencecellanditscandidateneighbourfromtherealdistance
betweenthemandtheazimuthsoftheirantennas:
Dist CellA CellB = D 1 + x cos x cos
Wherex=0.3%sothatthemaximumvariationinDdoesnottoexceed1%.Disstatedinm.

Figure 10.5:InterTransmitterDistanceCalculation
Theformulaaboveimpliesthattwocellsfacingeachotherhaveasmallereffectivedistancethantheactualdistance.
Candidateneighboursarerankedintheorderofincreasingeffectivedistancefromthereferencecell.
2. Thecalculationoptions,

ForceCositeCellsasNeighbours:Ifselected,Atolladdsallthecellslocatedonthesamesiteasthereferencecell
tothecandidateneighbourlist.Theweightofthisconstraintcanbedefined.Itisusedtocalculatetherankofeach
neighbour,anditsimportance.
ForceAdjacentCellsasNeighbours:Ifselected,Atolladdsallthecellsgeographicallyadjacenttothereference
celltothecandidateneighbourlist.Theweightofthisconstraintcanbedefined.Itisusedtocalculatetherankof
eachneighbour,anditsimportance.

757

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

Figure 10.6:DeterminationofAdjacentCells
DeterminationofAdjacentCells:Geographicallyadjacentcellsaredeterminedonthebasisoftheirbestserver
coverageareas.AcandidateneighbourcellTXi(ic)isconsideredadjacenttothereferencecellTXi(ic)ifthereexists
atleastonepixelofTXj(jc)sbestservercoverageareawhereTXi(ic)isthesecondbestserver.Therankingof
adjacent neighbour cells increases with the number of such pixels. Adjacent cells are sorted in the order of
decreasingrank.

ForceSymmetry:Ifselected,Atolladdsthereferencecelltothecandidateneighbourlistoftheitscandidate
neighbour.
Asymmetricneighbourrelationisallowedonlyiftheneighbourlistofthereferencecellisnotalreadyfull.IfTXj(jc)
isaneighbourofTXi(ic)butTXi(ic)isnotaneighbourofTXj(jc),therecanbetwopossibilities:
i.

TheneighbourlistofTXj(jc)isnotfull,AtollwilladdTXi(ic)totheendofthelist.

ii. TheneighbourlistofTXj(jc)isfull,AtollwillnotbeabletoaddTXi(ic)tothelist,soitwillalsoremoveTXj(jc)
fromtheneighbourlistofTXi(ic).
Iftheneighbourslistofacellisfull,thereferencecellwillnotbeaddedasaneighbour
ofthatcellandthatcellwillberemovedfromthereferencecellsneighbourslist.Youcan
forceAtolltokeepthatcellinthereferencecellsneighbourslistbyaddingthefollowing
optionintheAtoll.inifile:
[Neighbours]
DoNotDeleteSymmetrics=1

ForceExceptionalPairs:Thisoptionenablesyoutoforce/forbidsomeneighbourrelations.Exceptionalpairsare
pairsofcellswhichwillalwaysorneverbeneighboursofeachother.
Ifyouselect"Forceexceptionalpairs"and"Forcesymmetry",Atollconsiderstheconstraintsbetweenexceptional
pairsinbothdirectionssoastorespectsymmetrycondition.Ontheotherhand,ifneighbourhoodrelationshipis
forcedinonedirectionandforbiddenintheother,symmetrycannotberespected.Inthiscase,Atolldisplaysa
warningintheEventviewer.

DeleteExistingNeighbours:Ifselected,Atolldeletesallthecurrentneighboursandcarriesoutanewneighbour
allocation.Ifnotselected,theexistingneighboursarekeptinthelist.

3. IftheUseCoverageConditionscheckboxisselected,thecoverageareasofTXi(ic)andTXj(jc)musthaveanoverlap
( S TX ic S TX jc ).Otherwise,onlythedistancecriterionistakenintoaccount.
i

Theoverlappingzone( S TX ic S TX jc )isdefinedasfollows:
i

Here S TX ic isthesurfaceareacoveredbythecellTXi(ic)thatcomprisesallthepixelswhere:
i

Thereceivedpreamblesignallevelisgreaterthanorequaltothepreamblesignallevelthreshold.Thereceived
TX i ic

TX i ic

preamblesignallevel( C Preamble )andthepreamblesignallevelthresholdarecalculatedfrom CNR Preamble

TX i ic

TX i ic

and T Preamble ,respectively,byaddingthevalueofthenoise( n Preamble )tothem.

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

S TX ic is the surface area covered by TXi(ic) within C Preamble + HO Start and C Preamble + HO End , or
i
TX i ic

TX i ic

CINR Preamble + HO Start and CINR Preamble + HO End . HO Start isthemarginwithrespecttothebestpreamble

758

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

signal level or C/(I+N) at which the handover starts, and HO End is the margin with respect to the best

preamblesignallevelorC/(I+N)atwhichthehandoverends.
S TX jc isthecoverageareawherethecandidatecellTXj(jc)isthebestserver.
j

TX i ic

If a global value of the preamble C/N threshold ( T Preamble ) is set in the coverage
conditionsdialogue,foreachcell,Atollusesthehigherofthetwovalues,i.e.,global
valueandthevaluedefinedforthatcell.
Forcalculatingtheoverlappingcoverageareas,Atollusestheservicewiththelowest
bodyloss,theterminalthathasthehighestdifferencebetweengainandlosses,and
theshadowingmargincalculatedusingthedefinedcelledgecoverageprobability,if
theoptionisselected.Theserviceandterminalareselectedsuchthattheselection
givesthelargestpossiblepreambleC/Ncoverageareasforthecells.

S TX ic S TX jc
i
j
Whentheaboveconditionsaremet,Atollcalculatesthepercentageofthecoverageareaoverlap( --------------------------------------- 100 ),
S TX ic
i

andcomparesthisvaluewiththe%MinCoveredArea.

Figure 10.7:OverlappingZones
S TX ic S TX jc
i
j
TXj(jc)isconsideredaneighbourofTXi(ic)if --------------------------------------- 100 %MinCoverageArea .
S TX ic
i

Next,Atollcalculatestheimportanceoftheautomaticallyallocatedneighbours.Atollsortstheneighboursbydecreasing
importanceinordertokeeptheoneswithhighimportance.Ifthemaximumnumberofneighbourstobeallocatedtoeach
cellisexceeded,Atollkeepstheoneswithhighimportance.
Theneighbourimportancedependsonthedistancefromthereferencetransmitterandontheneighbourhoodcause(cf.table
below);thisvaluevariesbetween0and100%.
Neighbourhoodcause

When

Importancevalue

Existingneighbour

OnlyiftheDeleteExistingNeighboursoptionisnotselected
andincaseofanewallocation

Existingimportance

Exceptionalpair

OnlyiftheForceExceptionalPairsoptionisselected

100%

Cositecell

OnlyiftheForceCositeCellsasNeighboursoptionis
selected

ImportanceFunction(IF)

Adjacentcell

OnlyiftheForceAdjacentCellsasNeighboursoptionis
selected

ImportanceFunction(IF)

Neighbourhoodrelationshipthat
fulfilscoverageconditions

Onlyifthe%MinCoveredAreaisexceeded

ImportanceFunction(IF)

Symmetricneighbourhood
relationship

OnlyiftheForceNeighbourSymmetryoptionisselected

ImportanceFunction(IF)

759

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

TheimportanceisevaluatedusinganImportanceFunction(IF),whichtakesintoaccountthefollowingfactors:

The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.
d Di = 1 ---------d max
d is the effective distance (in m). It corresponds to the real intertransmitter distance ( D in m) weighted by the
azimuthsofantennas.
d max isthemaximumdistancebetweenthereferencetransmitterandapossibleneighbour.

Thecositefactor(C):aBoolean,
Theadjacencyfactor(A):thepercentageofadjacency,
Theoverlappingfactor(O):thepercentageofoverlapping.

Theminimumandmaximumimportanceassignedtoeachoftheabovefactorscanbedefined.
Factor

Minimportance

Defaultvalue

Maximportance

Defaultvalue

Distancefactor(Di)

Min(Di)

1%

Max(Di)

10%

Overlappingfactor(O)

Min(O)

10%

Max(O)

30%

Adjacencyfactor(A)

Min(A)

30%

Max(A)

60%

Cositefactor(C)

Min(C)

60%

Max(C)

100%

TheImportanceFunctionisevaluatedasfollows:
Neighbourhoodcause

ImportanceFunction

ResultingIFusingthedefaultvalues
fromthetableabove

No

Min(O)+Delta(O){Max(Di)(Di)+(100%
Max(Di))(O)}+Min(Di)+Delta(Di)(Di)

10%+20%{10%(Di)+90%(O)}+1%+9%(Di)

No

Yes

Min(A)+Delta(A){Max(Di)(Di)+Max(O)(O)+
(100%Max(Di)Max(O))(A)}+Min(Di)+Delta(Di)(Di)

30%+30%{10%(Di)+30%(O)
+60%(A)}+1%+9%(Di)

Yes

Yes

Min(C)+Delta(C){Max(Di)(Di)+Max(O)(O)+
(100%Max(Di)Max(O))(A)}+Min(Di)+Delta(Di)(Di)

60%+40%{10%(Di)+30%(O)
+60%(A)}+1%+9%(Di)

Cosite

Adjacent

No

Where:
Delta(X)=Max(X)Min(X)

SetMin(Di)andMax(Di)to0%ifyoudonotwanttotakeintoaccountthedistance
factorintheimportancecalculation.
IftheMinandMaxvaluerangesoftheimportancefunctionfactorsdonotoverlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum andmaximum importance fields, neighbours will beranked inthis order:
cositeneighbours,adjacentneighbours,andneighboursallocatedbasedoncoverage
overlapping.
If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.
ThedefaultvalueofMin(O)=1%ensuresthatneighboursselectedforsymmetrywill
have an importance greater than 0%. With a value of Min(O) = 0%, neighbours
selectedforsymmetrywillhaveanimportancefieldgreaterthan0%onlyifthereis
some coverage overlapping.If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance
function factors overlap, the neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a
mixoftheneighbourhoodcauses.

Intheresults,Atolllistsonlythecellsforwhichitfindsnewneighbours.Cellswhosechannelshavethesamestartfrequency,
the same channel width, and the same total number of subcarriers are listed as intracarrier neighbours. Otherwise,
neighbourcellsarelistedasintercarrierneighbours.

760

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Bydefault,theautomaticneighbourallocationcomparesthedefinedMaxinter
sitedistancewiththeeffectiveintercelldistance.Asaconsequence,therecan
becaseswheretherealdistancebetweenassignedneighboursishigherthanthe
Maxintersitedistance,becausetheeffectivedistanceissmaller.Youcanforce
AtolltocomparetheMaxintersitedistancewiththerealintersitedistanceby
addingthefollowinglinesinAtoll.ini:
[Neighbours]
RealInterSiteDistanceCondition=1

Bydefault,theneighbourimportancecalculatedwithrespecttodistanceisbased
ontheglobalMaxintersitedistancesettingforallneighbourcandidates.Asa
consequence,therecanbecaseswherethecalculatedimportanceisdifferent
whentheglobalMaxintersitedistanceismodified.Toavoidthat,youcanforce
Atoll to prioritise the individual distances between reference cells and their
respectiveneighbourcandidatesbyaddingthefollowinglinesinAtoll.ini:
[Neighbours]
CandidatesMaxDistanceInImportanceCalculation=1

10.5.2 AutomaticIntertechnologyNeighbourPlanning
TheintertechnologyneighbourplanningalgorithmtakesintoaccountalltheTBCtransmitters(iftheothertechnologyis
GSM)orthecellsofalltheTBCtransmitters(foranyothertechnologythanGSM).ThismeansthatalltheTBCtransmitters
(GSM)orthecellsofalltheTBCtransmitters(allothertechnologies)ofthelinkeddocumentarepotentialneighbours.
ThecellstobeallocatedinthemaindocumentwillbecalledTBAcells.Theymustfulfilthefollowingconditions:

Theyareactive,
TheysatisfythefiltercriteriaappliedtotheTransmittersfolder,
Theyarelocatedinsidethefocuszone,
Theybelongtothefolderonwhichallocationhasbeenexecuted.ThiscanbetheTransmittersfolderoragroupof
transmitters(subfolder).

OnlyTBAcellsareassignedneighbours.
IfnofocuszoneexistsintheATLdocument,Atolltakesintoaccountthecomputation
zone.

We assume a reference cell A and a candidate neighbour B. When automatic planning starts, Atoll checks following
conditions:
1. Thedistancebetweenreferencecellandthecandidateneighbourmustbelessthantheuserdefinablemaximum
intersitedistance.Ifthedistanceisgreaterthanthisvalue,thecandidateneighbourisdiscarded.
Atollcalculatestheeffectivedistancebetweenthereferencecellanditscandidateneighbourfromtherealdistance
betweenthemandtheazimuthsoftheirantennas:
Dist CellA CellB = D 1 + x cos x cos
Wherex=0.3%sothatthemaximumvariationinDdoesnottoexceed1%.Disstatedinm.

Figure 10.8:InterTransmitterDistanceCalculation
Theformulaaboveimpliesthattwocellsfacingeachotherhaveasmallereffectivedistancethantheactualdistance.
Candidateneighboursarerankedintheorderofincreasingeffectivedistancefromthereferencecell.
2. Thecalculationoptions:

761

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

CDMACarriers:ThisoptionisavailablewhenanWiMAXnetworkisbeingcoplannedwithaUMTS,CDMA,orTD
SCDMAnetwork.ThisoptionenablesyoutoselecttheCDMAcarrier(s)thatyouwantAtolltoconsideraspotential
neighbours of WiMAX cells. You may choose one or more carriers. Atoll will allocate only the cells using the
selectedcarriersasneighbours.
Forcecositecellsasneighbours:Ifselected,Atolladdsallthetransmitters/cellslocatedonthesamesiteasthe
referencecellinitscandidateneighbourlist.Theweightofthisconstraintcanbedefined.Itisusedtocalculate
therankofeachneighbouranditsimportance.
Forceexceptionalpairs:Thisoptionenablesyoutoforce/forbidsomeneighbourrelations.Exceptionalpairsare
pairsofcellswhichwillalwaysorneverbeneighboursofeachother.
Deleteexistingneighbours:Ifselected,Atolldeletesallthecurrentneighboursandcarriesoutanewneighbour
allocation.Ifnotselected,theexistingneighboursarekeptinthelist.

3. Neighbourrelationcriterion:

Allocationbasedondistance:
The allocation algorithm is based on the effective distance between the reference cell and its candidate
neighbour.

Algorithmbasedoncoverageoverlapping:
ThecoverageareasofthereferencecellAandthecandidateneighbourBmustoverlap( S A S B ).
TwocasesmayexistforSA:

1stcase:SAistheareawherethecellAisthebestservingcell,witha0dBmargin.
ThismeansthatthepreamblesignalreceivedfromAisgreaterthantheminimumrequired(calculatedfrom
thepreambleC/Nthreshold),andisthehighestone..

2ndcase:Themarginisotherthan0dB.SAistheareawhere:
ThepreamblesignallevelreceivedfromAexceedstheminimumrequired(calculatedfromthepreambleC/N
threshold)andiswithinamarginfromthehighestsignallevel.

TwocasesmayexistforSB:

1stcase:SBistheareawherethecandidateneighbouristhebestserver.Inthiscase,themarginmustbeset
to0dB.
ThesignallevelreceivedfromBexceedstheminimumrequired,andisthehighestone.

2ndcase:Themarginisotherthan0dB.SBistheareawhere:
ThesignallevelreceivedfromBexceedstheminimumrequiredandiswithinamarginfromthebestsignal
level.

SA SB
Atollcalculatesthepercentageofthecoverageareaoverlap( ------------------ 100 )andcomparesthisvaluewiththe%
SA
SA SB
MinCoveredArea.BisconsideredaneighbourofAif ------------------ 100 %MinCoveredArea .
SA
Candidateneighboursarerankedintheorderofdecreasingcoverageareaoverlappercentages.
Next,Atollcalculatestheimportanceoftheautomaticallyallocatedneighbours.Atollsortstheneighboursbydecreasing
importanceinordertokeeptheoneswithhighimportance.Ifthemaximumnumberofneighbourstobeallocatedtoeach
cellisexceeded,Atollkeepstheoneswithhighimportance.
Theimportance(%)ofneighboursdependsonthedistanceandonthereasonofallocation:

762

Forallocationbasedondistance:
Neighbourcause

When

Importancevalue

Existingneighbour

IftheDeleteexistingneighboursoptionisnotselected

Existingimportance

Exceptionalpair

IftheForceexceptionalpairsoptionisselected

100%

Cositetransmitter/cell

IftheForcecositecellsasneighboursoptionisselected

100%

Neighbourrelationthatfulfils
distanceconditions

Ifthemaximumdistanceisnotexceeded

d1 ---------d max

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

d is the effective distance between the reference cell and the neighbour and d max is the maximum intersite
distance.

Forallocationbasedoncoverageoverlapping:
Neighbourcause

When

Importancevalue

Existingneighbour

IftheDeleteexistingneighboursoptionisnotselected

Existingimportance

Exceptionalpair

IftheForceexceptionalpairsoptionisselected

100%

Cositetransmitter/cell

IftheForcecositecellsasneighboursoptionisselected

IF

Neighbourhoodrelationshipthat
fulfilscoverageconditions

Ifthe%minimumcoveredareaisexceeded

IF

TheimportanceisevaluatedusinganImportanceFunction(IF),whichtakesintoaccountthefollowingfactors:
The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.

d Di = 1 ---------d max
d istheeffectivedistance(inm).Itcorrespondstotherealintertransmitterdistanceweightedbytheazimuthsof
antennas.
d max isthemaximumdistancebetweenthereferencetransmitterandapossibleneighbour.

Thecositefactor(C):aBoolean,
Theoverlappingfactor(O):thepercentageofoverlapping.

TheIFisuserdefinableusingtheMinimportanceandMaximportancefields.
Factor

Minimportance

Defaultvalue

Maximportance

Defaultvalue

Distancefactor(Di)

Min(Di)

1%

Max(Di)

10%

Overlappingfactor(O)

Min(O)

10%

Max(O)

60%

Cositefactor(C)

Min(C)

60%

Max(C)

100%

TheIFevaluatesimportanceasfollows:
CositeNeighbourhood
cause

IF

ResultingIFusingthedefaultvalues
fromthetableabove

No

Min(O)+Delta(O){Max(Di)(Di)+(100%Max(Di))(O)}

10%+50%{10%(Di)+90%(O)}

Yes

Min(C)+Delta(C){Max(Di)(Di)/(Max(Di)+Max(O))+
Max(O)(O)/(Max(Di)+Max(O))}

60%+40%{1/7%(Di)+6/7%(O)}

Where
Delta(X)=Max(X)Min(X)

SetMin(Di)andMax(Di)to0%ifyoudonotwanttotakeintoaccountthedistance
factorintheimportancecalculation.
IftheMinandMaxvaluerangesoftheimportancefunctionfactorsdonotoverlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum andmaximum importance fields,neighbours will be rankedin thisorder:
cositeneighboursandneighboursallocatedbasedoncoverageoverlapping.
If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.

Intheresults,Atolldisplaysonlythecellsforwhichitfindsnewneighbours.

10.5.3 AutomaticFrequencyPlanningUsingtheAFP
TheroleofanAutomaticFrequencyPlanning(AFP)toolistoassignfrequencies(channels)tocellsofanetworksuchthatthe
overallnetworkperformanceisoptimised.Inotherwords,theinterferencewithinthenetworkisreducedasmuchaspossible.
CochannelinterferenceisthemainreasonforoverallnetworkqualitydegradationinWiMAX.Inordertoimprovenetwork
performance,theWiMAXAFPtriestominimisecoandadjacentchannelinterferenceasmuchaspossiblewhilerespecting

763

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

anyconstraintsinputtoit.Themainconstraintsaretheresourcesavailableforallocation,i.e.,thenumberoffrequencieswith
whichthe AFP can work,andtherelationshipstotake into account, i.e., interferencematrices, neighbours, and distance
betweentransmitters.
TheAFPisbasedonacostfunctionwhichrepresentstheinterferencelevelinthenetwork.TheaimoftheAFPistominimise
thecost.Thebest,oroptimum,frequencyplanistheonewhichcorrespondstothelowestcost.
ThefollowingdescribestheAFPsautomaticplanningmethodforfrequenciesinWiMAXnetworks,whichtakesintoaccount
interferencematrices,neighbourrelations,anddistancebetweentransmitters.
TheAFPtakesintoaccountthecellsofalltheTBCtransmitters.ThecellstobeallocatedwillbecalledTBAcells.Theymust
fulfilthefollowingconditions:

Theyareactive,
Theirchannelallocationstatusisnotsettolocked,
TheysatisfythefiltercriteriaappliedtotheTransmittersfolder,
Theyarelocatedinsidethefocuszone.
IfnofocuszoneexistsintheATLdocument,Atolltakesintoaccountthecomputation
zone.

10.5.3.1 ConstraintandRelationshipWeights
TheAFPisbasedonacostfunctionwhichtakesintoaccountchannelseparationconstraintsbasedonthechanneloverlap
ratioascalculatedin"CoandAdjacentChannelOverlapsCalculation"onpage 700.Channelseparationisstudiedbetween
eachTBAcellanditsrelatedcells.AtollcalculatesthecostbetweeneachindividualTBAandrelatedcell,andthentheoverall
costfortheTBAcell.
RelatedcellsofaTBAcellare:

Itsneighbours,ifthecheckbox"Existingneighbours"isselected,
Assignedweight Neighbour = 0.5

CellsthatarelistedintheinterferencematrixoftheTBAcell,
Assignedweight IM = 0.3

Cellswithinthecells(orthedefault)minimumreusedistance,ifthecheckbox"Reusedistance"isselected,
Assignedweight Dis tan ce = 0.2
Thesumoftheweightsassignedtotheaboverelationsis1.

YoucanmodifytheseweightsinyourWiMAXdocument.Theabsolutevaluesoftheconstraintweightsarecalculatedfrom
therelativeweights(%)definedintheConstraintWeightsdialogueasfollows:
% Neighbour
Neighbour = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------% Neighbour + % IM + % Dis tan ce
% IM
IM = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------% Neighbour + % IM + % Dis tan ce
% Dis tan ce
Dis tan ce = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------% Neighbour + % IM + % Dis tan ce

10.5.3.2 CostCalculation
ThecostoftherelationbetweentheTBAcellanditsrelatedcelliscalculatedasfollows:
$

TX i ic TX j jc

TX i ic TX j jc

= rO

TX ic TX jc
i
j

Where r O
page 700.

764

TX i ic TX j jc

Neighbour Neighbour

TX i ic TX j jc

+ Dis tan ce Dis tan ce

TX ic TX j jc

+ i
IM
IM

is the channel overlap ratio as calculated in "Co and Adjacent Channel Overlaps Calculation" on

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
TX ic TX jc
i
j

Neighbour

TX ic TX jc
i
j

is the importance of the relationship between the TBA cell and its related neighbour cell. Neighbour

is

calculatedduringautomaticneighbourplanningbyAtollasexplainedin"AutomaticNeighbourPlanning"onpage 757.For
manualneighbourplanning,thisvalueisequalto1.
TX ic TX jc
i
j

IM

istheimportanceoftherelationshipbetweentheTBAcellanditsrelatedinterferingcellcalculatedasfollows:

TX i ic TX j jc

TX i ic TX j jc

IM

TX i ic TX j jc

IM CC

= r CCO

TX i ic TX j jc

and IM CC

TX i ic TX j jc

IM CC

TX i ic TX j jc

+ r ACO

TX i ic TX j jc

IM AC

are respectively the co and adjacent channel interference probabilities calculated as

TX ic TX jc
i
j

explainedin"InterferenceMatrixCalculation"onpage 772. r CCO

TX ic TX jc
i
j

and r ACO

arethecoandadjacentchannel

overlapratiosascalculatedin"CoandAdjacentChannelOverlapsCalculation"onpage 700.
TX i ic TX j jc

Dis tan ce

istheimportanceoftherelationshipbetweentheTBAanditsrelatedcellwithrespecttothedistancebetween

TX i ic TX j jc

them. Dis tan ce

iscalculatedasexplainedin"DistanceImportanceCalculation"onpage 772.

AtollcalculatesthequalityreductionfactorfortheTBAcellanditsrelatedcellfromthecostcalculatedaboveasfollows:
QRF

TX i ic TX j jc

= 1$

TX i ic TX j jc

Thequalityreductionfactorisameasureofthecostofanindividualrelation.
ThetotalcostofthecurrentfrequencyplanforanyTBAcellisgivenasfollows,consideringallthecellswithwhichtheTBA
cellhasrelations:
TX i ic

$ Total = 1

QRF

TX i ic TX j jc

TX j jc

And,thetotalcostofthecurrentfrequencyplanfortheentirenetworkissimplythesumofthetotalTBAcellcostscalculated
above,i.e.,
$ Total =

TX i ic

$ Total

TX ic
i

10.5.3.3 AFPAlgorithm
TheAFPalgorithmisaniterativealgorithmwhich:

Calculatesthecost(asdescribedabove)oftheinitialfrequencyplan,
Triesdifferentfrequencyplansinordertoreducethecost,
Memorisesthedifferentfrequencyplansinordertodeterminethebestone,i.e.,thefrequencyplanwhichprovides
thelowesttotalcost,
Stopswhenitisunabletoimprovethecostofthenetwork,andproposesthelastknownbestfrequencyplanasthe
solution.

10.5.4 AutomaticPreambleIndexPlanningUsingtheAFP
IEEE802.16edefines114preambleindexes.Eachpreambleindex,from0to113,containsthefollowinginformation:

Segmentnumber(0,1,or2),
DLPermBase(0to31)fortheobligatoryfirstDLPUSCzone,and
Apseudonoisesequencetransmittedusingthesubcarrierscorrespondingtothepreamblecarrierset.

Thedownlinksubframecanbedividedintoa3segmentstructure,andincludesapreamblewhichbeginsthetransmission
(the first symbolofthedownlink transmission).Thepreamblesubcarriersaredivided into 3carrier sets. Thereare three
possiblegroupsconsistingofacarrierseteachwhichmaybeusedbyanysegment.Thesearedefinedbyallocationofdifferent
subcarrierstoeachoneofthem.ThesubcarriersaremodulatedusingaBPSKmodulationwithaspecificPseudoNoise(PN)
sequence.
Preamblecarriersetsaredefinedusingequationbelow:
PreambleCarrierSet n = n + k 3
WherePreambleCarrierSetngivesthesubcarriersusedbythepreamble,nisthenumberofthepreamblecarriersetindexed
0,1,or2,kisarunningindexfrom0to567forFFT2048,from0to283forFFT1024,from0to142forFFT512,andfrom0
to35forFFT128.

765

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

InaWiMAXnetwork,eachbasestationtransmitsadifferentPNsequence,outofthe114available,onthepreamblecarrier
set. A mobile trying to connect to the network scans all the preamble subcarriers, listens to all the preambles (i.e., PN
sequences)fromallthebasestationsitcanreceive,andcomparesthePNsequencesitisreceivingwiththe114storedinits
memoryinordertodetectthepreambleindexfromthePNsequence.
ItselectsthebasestationasitsserverwhosepreambleitreceiveswitheitherthehighestsignallevelorthehighestC/(I+N).
Oncethebestserverisknown,itsPNsequenceisusedtoidentifyitstransmission.ThePNsequenceofthebestservergives
thepreambleindex,whichinturngivesthesegmentnumber,andtheIDCell(DLPermBaseofthefirstDLPUSCzone,referred
toasCellPermBaseinAtoll).Therefore,themobileknowswhichsubcarrierstolistentofortheFCH,DCD,UCD,DLMAP,and
ULMAP.
As can be understood from the above description, if all the cells in the network transmit the same preamble index, the
networkwillhave100%interferenceondownlinkpreambles,anditwillbeimpossibleforamobiletoidentifydifferentcells.
Cellsearchandselectionwillbeimpossible.Therefore,itisimportanttointelligentlyplanpreambleindexestocellssoasto
reducepreambleinterference,andalloweasyrecognitionofcellsbymobiles.
ThefollowingdescribestheAFPsautomaticplanningmethodforpreambleindexesinaWiMAXnetwork,whichtakesinto
accountinterferencematrices,neighbourrelations(firstorderneighbours,firstorderneighboursofacommonWiMAXcell,
andoptionallysecondorderneighbours),distancebetweentransmitters,andthefrequencyplanofthenetwork.
TheAFPtakesintoaccountthecellsofalltheTBCtransmitters.ThecellstobeallocatedwillbecalledTBAcells.Theymust
fulfilthefollowingconditions:

Theyareactive,
Theirpreambleindexstatusorsegmentisnotsettolocked,
TheysatisfythefiltercriteriaappliedtotheTransmittersfolder,
Theyarelocatedinsidethefocuszone.
IfnofocuszoneexistsintheATLdocument,Atolltakesintoaccountthecomputation
zone.

10.5.4.1 ConstraintandRelationshipWeights
TheAFPisbasedonacostbasedfunctionwhichtakesintoaccountthefollowingconstraints,intheorderofpriority:
1. Samepreambleindex,
Assignedweight PI = 0.75
2. Samesegmentnumber,
Assignedweight Seg = 0.02
3. Samecellpermbase,
Assignedweight PB = 0.23
Thesumoftheweightsassignedtotheaboveconstraintsis1.

YoucanmodifytheseweightsinyourWiMAXdocument.Theabsolutevaluesoftheconstraintweightsarecalculatedfrom
therelativeweights(%)definedintheConstraintWeightsdialogueasfollows:
% PI
PI = -----------------------------------------------------% PI + % Seg + % PB
% Seg
Seg = -----------------------------------------------------% PI + % Seg + % PB
% PB
PB = -----------------------------------------------------% PI + % Seg + % PB
The above constraints are studied between each TBA cell and its related cells. Atoll calculates the cost between each
individualTBAandrelatedcell,andthentheoverallcostfortheTBAcell.
RelatedcellsofaTBAcellare:

766

Itsneighbours,ifthecheckbox"Existingneighbours"isselected,

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Assignedweight Neighbour = 0.35

TBAcellswhicharefirstorderneighboursofacommoncellarealsorelatedtoeachotherthroughthatcell.This
relationisalsotakenintoaccount,
Assignedweight Inter Neighbour = 0.15
Youcanchoosetonottakeintoaccountthepreambleindexcollisionbetweenneighboursofacommoncellbyadding
anoptionintheAtoll.inifile(seetheAdministratorManual).Ifthecollisionbetweenneighboursofacommoncellis
nottakenintoaccount,theweightassignedtothedirectfirstorderneighbourrelationaloneis Neighbour = 0.5 and
thatofthecollisionbetweenneighboursofacommoncellisofcourse Inter Neighbour = 0 .
ByaddinganoptionintheAtoll.inifile(seetheAdministratorManual),secondorderneighbourscanalsobetaken
into account. In this case, the assigned weights are: Neighbour = 0.25 , 2nd Neighbour = 0.15 , and
Inter Neighbour = 0.10 .

CellsthatarelistedintheinterferencematrixoftheTBAcell,
Assignedweight IM = 0.3

Cellswithinthecells(orthedefault)minimumreusedistance,ifthecheckbox"Reusedistance"isselected,
Assignedweight Dis tan ce = 0.2
Thesumoftheweightsassignedtotheaboverelationsis1.

YoucanmodifytheseweightsinyourWiMAXdocument.Theabsolutevaluesoftheconstraintweightsarecalculatedfrom
therelativeweights(%)definedintheConstraintWeightsdialogueasfollows:
% Neighbour
Neighbour = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------% Neighbour + % Inter Neighbour + % 2nd Neighbour + % IM + % Dis tan ce
% Inter Neighbour
Inter Neighbour = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------% Neighbour + % Inter Neighbour + % 2nd Neighbour + % IM + % Dis tan ce
% 2nd Neighbour
2nd Neighbour = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------% Neighbour + % Inter Neighbour + % 2nd Neighbour + % IM + % Dis tan ce
% IM
IM = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------% Neighbour + % Inter Neighbour + % 2nd Neighbour + % IM + % Dis tan ce
% Dis tan ce
Dis tan ce = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------% Neighbour + % Inter Neighbour + % 2nd Neighbour + % IM + % Dis tan ce

10.5.4.2 CostCalculation
AtollcalculatestheconstraintviolationlevelsbetweentheTBAcellTXi(ic)anditsrelatedcellTXj(jc)asfollows:
TX i ic TX j jc

VL 1

TX i ic TX j jc

VL 2

PI

PB

= PI p Coll + PB p Penalty
Seg

= Seg p Coll

If TX i ic and TX i jc are cotransmitter cells, and the option Allocate Same Segment to Cotransmitter Cells has been
TX i ic

selected,and N Seg

TX i jc

N Seg

TX i ic TX j jc

,then VL 1

TX i ic TX j jc

+ VL 2

= 1.

Where PI , Seg ,and PB aretheweightsassignedtothepreambleindex,segmentnumber,andcellpermbaseconstraints.

PI
PI
p Coll isthepreambleindexcollisionprobabilitygivenby p Coll = 1

ifPI
ifPI

TX ic
i
TX ic
i

= PI
PI

TX jc
j

TX jc
j

767

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

Seg

p Coll isthesegmentnumbercollisionprobability.If TX i ic and TX j jc arecotransmittercells,andtheoptionAllocate

Seg
SameSegmenttoCotransmitterCellshasbeenselected, p Coll

Seg
p Coll

1
=

TX i ic

ifN Seg

TX i ic

ifN Seg

Seg
isgivenby p Coll

0
=

TX ic
i

ifN Seg

TX ic
i
ifN Seg

TX jc
j

= N Seg

TX jc
j
N Seg

.Otherwise,

TX j jc

= N Seg

TX j jc

N Seg

TX ic
TX jc
TX i ic
TX j jc
1 ifPB i PB j
ANDSite
= Site

PB
PB
p Penalty isthecellpermbasepenaltygivenby p Penalty =
TX i ic
TX j jc
TX i ic
TX j jc ifthe
PB
ANDSite
Site
0.001 ifPB
0 Otherwise

PB

cellpermbaseplanningstrategyissetto"Samepersite",andby p Penalty = 0 ifthecellpermbaseplanningstrategyissetto

"Free".Thecellpermbasepenaltymodelsthecellpermbaseconstraint.
Next,AtollcalculatestheimportanceoftheneighbourrelationsbetweentheTBAcellanditsrelatedcell.
TX i ic TX j jc

Neighbours

TX i ic TX j jc

= Neighbour Neighbour

TX i ic TX j jc

Where Neighbour

+ Inter Neighbour Inter Neighbour + 2nd Neighbour 2nd Neighbour

TX i ic TX j jc

istheimportanceoftherelationshipbetweentheTBAcellanditsrelatedneighbourcell. Neighbour

iscalculatedduringautomaticneighbourplanningbyAtollasexplainedin"AutomaticNeighbourPlanning"onpage 757.For
manualneighbourplanning,thisvalueisequalto1.
Inter Neighbour is calculated from the neighbour relationship importance values calculated during automatic neighbour
planning.Iftwocellsareneighboursofacommoncellandhavethesamepreambleindexassigned,theimportanceofthe
preambleindexcollisionistheaverageoftheirneighbourimportancevalueswiththecommonneighbourcell.Ifmorethan
onepairofneighboursoftheTBAcellhasthesamepreambleindexassigned,thentheimportanceisthehighestvalueamong
alltheaverages:
TX i ic TX j1 j1c

Inter Neighbour

TX i ic TX j2 j2c

Neighbour

+ Neighbour
=
Max
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2

AllNeighbourPairs
withPICollisions

Where TX j1 j1c and TX j2 j2c aretwoneighboursoftheTBAcell TX i ic thathavethesamepreambleindexassigned.

2nd Neighbour is calculated from the neighbour relationship importance values calculated during automatic neighbour
planning.IftheTBAcellhasthesamepreambleindexassignedasoneofitssecondorderneighbours,theimportanceofthe
preambleindexcollisionisthemultipleoftheimportancevaluesofthefirstorderneighbourrelationsbetweentheTBAcell
anditssecondorderneighbour.IftheTBAcellisrelatedtoitssecondorderneighbourthroughmorethanonefirstorder
neighbour,theimportanceisthehighestvalueamongallthemultiples:
2nd Neighbour =

TX ic TX jc

j
i
Neighbour

AllNeighbourPairs

Max

TX j jc TX k kc

Neighbour

withPICollisions

Where TX k kc isthesecondorderneighbourof TX i ic through TX j jc .

Next,AtollcalculatestheimportanceoftheinterferencerelationsbetweentheTBAcellanditsrelatedcell.
TX i ic TX j jc

Interference

TX i ic TX j jc

IM

TX i ic TX j jc

IM

TX i ic TX j jc

= IM IM

768

TX i ic TX j jc

f Overlap

istheimportanceoftherelationshipbetweentheTBAcellanditsrelatedinterferingcellcalculatedasfollows:
TX i ic TX j jc

= r CCO

TX i ic TX j jc

and IM

TX i ic TX j jc

+ Dis tan ce Dis tan ce

TX i ic TX j jc

IM CC

TX i ic TX j jc

= IM CC

otherwise.

TX i ic TX j jc

+ r ACO

TX i ic TX j jc

IM AC

if the frequency plan is taken into account

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
TX ic TX jc
i
j

IM CC

TX ic TX jc
i
j

and IM CC

are respectively the co and adjacent channel interference probabilities calculated as

TX ic TX jc
i
j

explainedin"InterferenceMatrixCalculation"onpage 772. r O

TX ic TX jc
i
j

, r CCO

TX ic TX jc
i
j

,and r ACO

arethetotal,

cochannel, and adjacent channel overlap ratios as calculated in "Co and Adjacent Channel Overlaps Calculation" on
page 700.
TX i ic TX j jc

Dis tan ce

istheimportanceoftherelationshipbetweentheTBAanditsrelatedcellwithrespecttothedistancebetween

TX i ic TX j jc

Dis tan ce

them.

TX i ic TX j jc

f Overlap

is calculated

TX i ic TX j jc

= rO

as explained in

"Distance Importance Calculation" on page 772.

TX i ic TX j jc

ifthefrequencyplanistakenintoaccountand f Overlap

= 1 otherwise.

FromtheconstraintviolationlevelsandtheimportancevaluesoftherelationsbetweentheTBAanditsrelatedcell,Atoll
calculatesthequalityreductionfactorforthepairasfollows:
QRF

TX i ic TX j jc

TX i ic TX j jc
TX i ic TX j jc
TX ic TX j jc
TX i ic TX j jc
TX i ic TX j jc
TX i ic TX j jc

i
= 1 VL 1
+ VL 2
+ VL 1
Neighbours f Overlap

Interference

Thequalityreductionfactorisameasureofthecostofanindividualrelation.
ThetotalcostofthecurrentpreambleindexplanforanyTBAcellisgivenasfollows,consideringallthecellswithwhichthe
TBAcellhasrelations:
TX i ic

$ Total = 1

QRF

TX i ic TX j jc

TX j jc

And,thetotalcostofthecurrentpreambleindexplanfortheentirenetworkissimplythesumofthetotalTBAcellcosts
calculatedabove,i.e.,
$ Total =

TX ic
i

$ Total

TX i ic

10.5.4.3 AFPAlgorithm
TheAFPalgorithmisaniterativealgorithmwhich:

Calculatesthecost(asdescribedabove)oftheinitialpreambleindexplan,
Triesdifferentpreambleindexplansinordertoreducethecost,
Memorisesthedifferentplansinordertodeterminethebestone,i.e.,whichprovidesthelowesttotalcost,
Stopswhenitisunabletoimprovethecostofthenetwork,andproposesthelastknownbestpreambleindexplanas
thesolution.

10.5.5 AutomaticZonePermBasePlanningUsingtheAFP
PermBasesarenumberswhichareusedasseedsinthepermutationofsubcarriers(mappingbetweenphysicalandlogical
subcarriernumbers)andtheirallocationtosubchannels.Subchannelsinachannelcontaindifferentphysicalsubcarrierswhen
differentpermbasesareusedasseeds.
DownlinkPUSCpermutationzonesuse2permbases:
1. ThefirstDLPUSCpermutationzoneusesthecellpermbase(mappedtothepreambleindexofthecell).Itiscalled
IDCellintheIEEEspecifications.Itisanumberfrom0to31.
2. ThesecondDLPUSCpermutationzoneusesthezonepermbase,alsoanumberfrom0to31.
Otherdownlinkpermutationzonesonlyusezonepermbases.
Uplinkpermutationzonesalsouseonlyzonepermbases.However,theuplinkzonepermbaseisanumberfrom0to69.
ThefollowingdescribestheAFPsautomaticplanningmethodforzonepermbasesinaWiMAXnetwork,whichtakesinto
accountinterferencematrices,neighbourrelations(firstorderneighbours,firstorderneighboursofacommonWiMAXcell,
andoptionallysecondorderneighbours),distancebetweentransmitters,andthefrequencyplanofthenetwork.
TheAFPtakesintoaccountthecellsofalltheTBCtransmitters.ThecellstobeallocatedwillbecalledTBAcells.Theymust
fulfilthefollowingconditions:

Theyareactive,
Theirzonepermbasestatusisnotsettolocked,
TheysatisfythefiltercriteriaappliedtotheTransmittersfolder,

769

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

Theyarelocatedinsidethefocuszone.

Inthefollowingdescription, ZPB isusedforthedownlinkzonepermbases( ZPB DL )

anduplinkzonepermbases( ZPBUL )withoutdistinction.

IfnofocuszoneexistsintheATLdocument,Atolltakesintoaccountthecomputation
zone.

10.5.5.1 ConstraintandRelationshipWeights
TheAFPisbasedonacostbasedfunctionwhichtakesintoaccountthefollowingconstraint:

Samezonepermbase,
Assignedweight ZPB = 1

TheaboveconstraintisstudiedbetweeneachTBAcellanditsrelatedcells.Atollcalculatesthecostbetweeneachindividual
TBAandrelatedcell,andthentheoverallcostfortheTBAcell.
RelatedcellsofaTBAcellare:

Itsneighbours,ifthecheckbox"Existingneighbours"isselected,
Assignedweight Neighbour = 0.35
TBAcellswhicharefirstorderneighboursofacommoncellarealsorelatedtoeachotherthroughthatcell.This
relationisalsotakenintoaccount,
Assignedweight Inter Neighbour = 0.15
Youcanchoosetonottakeintoaccountthezonepermbasecollisionbetweenneighboursofacommoncellbyadding
anoptionintheAtoll.inifile(seetheAdministratorManual).Ifthecollisionbetweenneighboursofacommoncellis
nottakenintoaccount,theweightassignedtothedirectfirstorderneighbourrelationaloneis Neighbour = 0.5 and
thatofthecollisionbetweenneighboursofacommoncellisofcourse Inter Neighbour = 0 .
ByaddinganoptionintheAtoll.inifile(seetheAdministratorManual),secondorderneighbourscanalsobetaken
into account. In this case, the assigned weights are: Neighbour = 0.25 , 2nd Neighbour = 0.10 , and
Inter Neighbour = 0.15 .

CellsthatarelistedintheinterferencematrixoftheTBAcell,
Assignedweight IM = 0.3

Cellswithinthecells(orthedefault)minimumreusedistance,ifthecheckbox"Reusedistance"isselected,
Assignedweight Dis tan ce = 0.2
Thesumoftheweightsassignedtotheaboverelationsis1.

10.5.5.2 CostCalculation
AtollcalculatestheconstraintviolationlevelbetweentheTBAcellTXi(ic)anditsrelatedcellTXj(jc)asfollows:
VL

TX ic TX jc
i
j

ZPB

= ZPB p Coll

Where ZPB istheweightassignedtothezonepermbaseconstraint.

ZPB
ZPB
p Coll isthezonepermbasecollisionprobabilitygivenby p Coll = 1

ifZPB
ifZPB

TX i ic
TX i ic

= ZPB
ZPB

TX j jc

TX j jc

Next,AtollcalculatestheimportanceoftheneighbourrelationsbetweentheTBAcellanditsrelatedcell.
TX i ic TX j jc

Neighbours

770

TX i ic TX j jc

= Neighbour Neighbour

+ Inter Neighbour Inter Neighbour + 2nd Neighbour 2nd Neighbour

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
TX ic TX jc
i
j

Where Neighbour

TX ic TX jc
i
j

istheimportanceoftherelationshipbetweentheTBAcellanditsrelatedneighbourcell. Neighbour

iscalculatedduringautomaticneighbourplanningbyAtollasexplainedin"AutomaticNeighbourPlanning"onpage 757.For
manualneighbourplanning,thisvalueisequalto1.
Inter Neighbour is calculated from the neighbour relationship importance values calculated during automatic neighbour
planning.Iftwocellsareneighboursofacommoncellandhavethesamezonepermbaseassigned,theimportanceofthe
zonepermbasecollisionistheaverageoftheirneighbourimportancevalueswiththecommonneighbourcell.Ifmorethan
onepairofneighboursoftheTBAcellhasthesamezonepermbaseassigned,thentheimportanceisthehighestvalueamong
alltheaverages:
TX i ic TX j1 j1c

TX i ic TX j2 j2c

Neighbour
+ Neighbour

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2

AllNeighbourPairs

Inter Neighbour =

Max

withZPBCollisions

Where TX j1 j1c and TX j2 j2c aretwoneighboursoftheTBAcell TX i ic thathavethesamezonepermbaseassigned.

2nd Neighbour is calculated from the neighbour relationship importance values calculated during automatic neighbour
planning.IftheTBAcellhasthesamezonepermbaseassignedasoneofitssecondorderneighbours,theimportanceofthe
zonepermbasecollisionisthemultipleoftheimportancevaluesofthefirstorderneighbourrelationsbetweentheTBAcell
anditssecondorderneighbour.IftheTBAcellisrelatedtoitssecondorderneighbourthroughmorethanonefirstorder
neighbour,theimportanceisthehighestvalueamongallthemultiples:
TX ic TX jc

j
i
Neighbour
AllNeighbourPairs

2nd Neighbour =

Max

TX j jc TX k kc

Neighbour

withZPBCollisions

Where TX k kc isthesecondorderneighbourof TX i ic through TX j jc .

Next,AtollcalculatestheimportanceoftheinterferencerelationsbetweentheTBAcellanditsrelatedcell.
TX i ic TX j jc

Interference

TX i ic TX j jc

IM

TX i ic TX j jc

IM

TX i ic TX j jc

= IM IM

TX i ic TX j jc

= r CCO

TX i ic TX j jc

IM CC

TX i ic TX j jc

and IM

TX i ic TX j jc

TX i ic TX j jc

f Overlap

istheimportanceoftherelationshipbetweentheTBAcellanditsrelatedinterferingcellcalculatedasfollows:

TX i ic TX j jc

IM CC

TX i ic TX j jc

+ Dis tan ce Dis tan ce

= IM CC

TX i ic TX j jc

and IM CC

TX i ic TX j jc

+ r ACO

TX i ic TX j jc

IM AC

if the frequency plan is taken into account

otherwise.

are respectively the co and adjacent channel interference probabilities calculated as

TX i ic TX j jc

explainedin"InterferenceMatrixCalculation"onpage 772. r O

TX i ic TX j jc

, r CCO

TX i ic TX j jc

,and r ACO

arethetotal,

cochannel, and adjacent channel overlap ratios as calculated in "Co and Adjacent Channel Overlaps Calculation" on
page 700.
TX i ic TX j jc

Dis tan ce
them.

istheimportanceoftherelationshipbetweentheTBAanditsrelatedcellwithrespecttothedistancebetween

TX i ic TX j jc

Dis tan ce

TX i ic TX j jc

f Overlap

is calculated

TX i ic TX j jc

= rO

as explained in

"Distance Importance Calculation" on page 772.

TX i ic TX j jc

ifthefrequencyplanistakenintoaccountand f Overlap

= 1 otherwise.

From the constraint violation level and the total importance of the relation between the TBA and its related cell, Atoll
calculatesthequalityreductionfactorforthepairasfollows:
QRF

TX i ic TX j jc

= 1 VL

TX i ic TX j jc

TX i ic TX j jc

Interference

TX i ic TX j jc

TX i ic TX j jc

+ Neighbours f Overlap

Thequalityreductionfactorisameasureofthecostofanindividualrelation.
ThetotalcostofthecurrentzonepermbaseplanforanyTBAcellisgivenasfollows,consideringallthecellswithwhichthe
TBAcellhasrelations:
TX i ic

$ Total = 1

QRF

TX i ic TX j jc

TX j jc

771

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

Forsk2014

And,thetotalcostofthecurrentzonepermbaseplanfortheentirenetworkissimplythesumofthetotalTBAcellcosts
calculatedabove,i.e.,

$ Total =

TX ic
i

$ Total

TX i ic

10.5.5.3 AFPAlgorithm
TheAFPalgorithmisaniterativealgorithmwhich:

Calculatesthecost(asdescribedabove)oftheinitialzonepermbaseplan,
Triesdifferentzonepermbaseplansinordertoreducethecost,
Memorisesthedifferentplansinordertodeterminethebestone,i.e.,whichprovidesthelowesttotalcost,
Stopswhenitisunabletoimprovethecostofthenetwork,andproposesthelastknownbestzonepermbaseplanas
thesolution.

10.5.6 Appendices
10.5.6.1 InterferenceMatrixCalculation
Thecochannelinterferenceprobabilityiscalculatedasfollows:
S TX ic
i

TX ic TX jc
i
j

IM CC

TX j jc
TX i ic

n
C Preamble + M Quality
Preamble-
--------------------------- ------------------------------------------------------------
TX i ic
TX ic
10
10
T i
C Preamble 10 Log 10
+ 10

Preamble

= -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------S TX ic
i

Theadjacentchannelinterferenceprobabilityiscalculatedasfollows:
S TX ic
i

TX i ic TX j jc

IM AC

TX j jc
TX i ic
TX i ic

n Preamble
C Preamble + M Quality + f ACS FB
-----------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TX i ic
TX ic
10
10
T i
C Preamble 10 Log 10
+ 10
Preamble

= -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------S TX ic
i

Forfrequenciesfartherthantheadjacentchannel,theinterferenceprobabilityis0.
TX i ic

TX i ic

Here S TX ic isthebestservercoverageareaofthecellTXi(ic),thatcomprisesallthepixelswhere CNR Preamble T Preamble

i

ascalculatedin"ServiceAreaCalculation"onpage 712. S TX ic
i

TX i ic

Condition

isthebestservercoverageareaofthecellTXi(ic)

TX j jc

wherethegivenconditionistrue. C Preamble and C Preamble arethereceivedpreamblesignallevelsfromthecellsTXi(ic)and

TX ic
i

TXj(jc) respectively, n Preamble the preamble noise for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Preamble Noise Calculation" on
TX i ic

page 706, M Quality isthequalitymarginusedfortheinterferencematricescalculation,and f ACS FB istheadjacentchannel

suppressionfactordefinedforthefrequencybandofthecellTXi(ic).

10.5.6.2 DistanceImportanceCalculation
TX i ic TX j jc

Thedistanceimportancebetweentwocells( Dis tan ce

TX i ic TX j jc

Dis tan ce

772

2
D Reuse
= Log --------------------------------

D TXi ic TXj jc
--------------------------------------------------------2

Log D Reuse

ifD

)iscalculatedasfollows:

TX i ic TX j jc

Otherwise

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Where D Reuse istheminimumreusedistance,eitherdefinedforeachTBAcellindividuallyorsetforalltheTBAcellsinthe

AFPdialogue,and D
follows:
D
D

TX ic TX jc
i
j
TX i ic TX j jc

them. d

= d

TX ic TX jc
i
j

TX ic TX jc
i
j

istheweighteddistancebetweentheTBAcellTXi(ic)anditsrelatedcellTXj(jc)calculatedas

1 + x cos cos 2

isweightedaccordingtotheazimuthsoftheTBAcellanditsrelatedcellwithrespecttothestraightlinejoining

TX i ic TX j jc

isthedistancebetweenthetwocellsconsideringanyoffsetswithrespecttothesitelocations.xisset
TX i ic TX j jc

duetotheazimuthsdoesnotexceed40 %. and arecalculated

to10 %sothatthemaximumvariationin D
fromtheazimuthsofthetwocellsasshowninFigure 10.9onpage 773.

Figure 10.9:WeightedDistanceBetweenCells
Theaboveformulaimpliesthattwocellsfacingeachotherwillhaveashortereffectivedistancebetweenthemthanthereal
distance,andtwocellspointinginoppositedirectionswillhaveagreatereffectivedistance.
TheimportanceofthedistancerelationisexplainedinFigure 10.10onpage 773.Thisfigureshowsthatcellsthatarelocated
near (based on the effective distance which is weighted by the orientations of the cells) have high importance, which is
interpretedasahighcost,andcellsthatarelocatedfarhavelowimportance.Cellsthatarefurtherthanthereusedistance
donothaveanycostrelatedtothedistancerelation.

Figure 10.10:ImportanceBasedonDistanceRelation

773

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter10:WiMAXBWANetworks

774

Forsk2014

Chapter11
WiFiNetworks
ThischapterdescribesWiFicalculations

Inthischapter,thefollowingareexplained:

"Definitions"onpage 777

"CalculationQuickReference"onpage 780

"AvailableCalculations"onpage 787

"CalculationDetails"onpage 797

"AutomaticPlanningAlgorithms"onpage 822

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

11 WiFiNetworks
ThischapterdescribesallthecalculationsperformedinAtollWiFidocuments.Thefirstpartofthischapterlistsalltheinput
parametersintheWiFidocuments,theirsignificance,locationintheAtollGUI,andtheirusage.Italsocontainsthelistsof
theformulasusedforthecalculations.
The second part describes all the calculation processes, i.e., signal level coverage predictions, point analysis calculations,
signalqualitycoveragepredictions,calculationsonsubscriberlists,andMonteCarlosimulations.Thecalculationalgorithms
usedbythesecalculationprocessesareavailableinthenextpart.
Thethirdpartdescribesallthecalculationalgorithmsusedinallthecalculations.Thesealgorithmsincludethecalculationof
signallevels,noise,andinterferencefordownlinkanduplink,andtheradioresourcemanagementalgorithmsusedinMonte
Carlosimulations.

All the calculations are performed on TBC (to be calculated) transmitters. For the
definitionofTBCtransmitterspleasereferto"PathLossMatrices"onpage 99.
A cell refers to a transmittercarrier (TXc) pair. The cell being studied during a
calculationisreferredtoasTXi(ic)inthischapter.
Allthecalculationalgorithmsinthissectionaredescribedfortwotypesofcells.

Astudiedcell(representedbythesubscript"i")comprisingthestudiedtransmitter
TXianditscarrieric.Itisthecellwhichiscurrentlythefocusofthecalculation.For
example,avictimcellwhencalculatingtheinterferenceitisreceivingfromother
cells.
Othercells(representedbythesubscript"j")comprisingtheothertransmitterTXj
anditscarrierjc.Theothercellsinthenetworkcanbeinterferingcells(downlink)
ortheservingcellsofinterferingmobiles(uplink).
Allthecalculationalgorithmsinthissectionaredescribedfortwotypesofreceivers.

Mi:Apixel(coveragepredictions),subscriber(calculationsonsubscriberlists),or
mobile(MonteCarlosimulations)covered/servedbythestudiedcellTXi(ic).
Mj:Amobile(MonteCarlosimulations)covered/servedbyanyothercellTXj(jc).
Logarithmsusedinthischapter(Logfunction)arebase10unlessstatedotherwise.

11.1 Definitions
Thistableliststheinputtocalculations,coveragepredictions,andsimulations.
Name

Value

Unit

Description

1.38x1023

J/K

Boltzmannsconstant

290

Ambienttemperature

n0

Calculationresult( 10 Log K T 1000 = 174dBm/Hz )

dBm/Hz

Powerspectraldensityofthermal
noise

r CP

Frameconfigurationor,otherwise,globalparameter

None

CyclicPrefixRatio(guardinterval)
ChoiceList:1/4(long),1/8(short)

M PC

Globalparameter

dB

Uplinkpowercontrolmargin

CNR Min

Globalparametera

dB

Minimumsignaltothermalnoise
threshold(interferercutoff)

N SCa Total

Frameconfigurationparameter

None

Totalnumberofsubcarriersper
channel(FFTsize)

N SCa Used

Frameconfigurationparameter

None

Numberofusedsubcarriersper
channel

N SCa Data

Frameconfigurationzoneparameter

None

Numberofsubcarriersperchannel
usedfordatatransfer

N SCa DC

Hardcodedparameter( N SCa DC = 1 )

None

NumberofDCsubcarriersper
channel

N SCa Pilot

Calculationresult( N SCa Pilot = N SCa Used N SCa Data )

None

Numberofpilotsubcarriersper
channel

777

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

Name

Value

Unit

Description

N SCa Guard

Calculationresult
( N SCa Guard = N SCa Total N SCa Used N SCa DC )

None

Numberofguardsubcarriersper
channel

W Channel

Frequencybandparameter

MHz

Channelbandwidth

First

Frequencybandparameter

None

Firstchannelnumberofthe
frequencyband

N Channel

Last

Frequencybandparameter

None

Lastchannelnumberofthe
frequencyband

F Start FB DL

Frequencybandparameter

MHz

DLStartfrequencyofthefrequency
band

F Start FB UL

Frequencybandparameter

MHz

ULStartfrequencyofthefrequency
band

f ACS FB

Frequencybandparameter

dB

AdjacentChannelSuppressionFactor

ICS FB

Frequencybandparameter

MHz

Interchannelspacing

CN FB

Frequencybandparameter

None

Channelnumberstep

Inter Tech

Networkparameter

dB

Intertechnologyinterference
reductionfactor

Bearerparameter

None

Bearerindex

Mod B

Bearerparameter

None

Modulationusedbythebearer

CR B

Bearerparameter

None

Codingrateofthebearer

Bearerparameter

bits/
symbol

BearerEfficiency

TB

Bearerparameter

dB

Bearerselectionthreshold

TP BH DL

Site

Siteparameter

kbps

Maximumbackhaulsitedownlink
throughput

Site

Siteparameter

kbps

Maximumbackhaulsiteuplink
throughput

Transmitterparameter

dB

Transmitternoisefigure

N Ant TX

Transmitterparameter

None

NumberofantennasusedforMIMO
intransmission

N Ant RX

Transmitterparameter

None

NumberofantennasusedforMIMO
inreception

TX

Antennaparameter

dB

Transmitterantennagain

TX

Transmitterparameter

dB

Transmitterloss

N Channel

Cellparameter

None

Cellschannelnumber

P DL

Cellparameter

dBm

Power

TL DL

Cellparameter

Downlinktrafficload

TL UL

Cellparameter

Uplinktrafficload

TL DL Max

Cellparameter

Maximumdownlinktrafficload

TL UL Max

Cellparameter

Maximumuplinktrafficload

NRUL

Cellparameter

dB

Uplinknoiserise

N Users Max

Cellparameter

None

Maximumnumberofuserspercell

N Users DL

Cellparameter

None

Numberofusersconnectedtothe
cellindownlink

N Channel

f IRF

TP BH UL
nf

G
L

778

Forsk2014

TX

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Name

Value

Unit

Description

N Users UL

Cellparameter

None

Numberofusersconnectedtothe
cellinuplink

T AMS

Cellparameter

dB

AdaptiveMIMOswitchthreshold

T Min

Cellparameter

dB

MinimumC/Nthreshold

Inter Tech

Cellparameter

dB

Intertechnologydownlinknoiserise

Inter Tech

Cellparameter

dB

Intertechnologyuplinknoiserise

G SU MIMO

Max

CellWiFiequipmentparameter

None

MaximumSUMIMOgain

G Div UL

CellWiFiequipmentparameter

dB

UplinkSTTD/MRCorSUMIMO
diversitygain

Serviceparameter

None

Servicepriority

B DL Highest

Serviceparameter

None

Highestbearerusedbyaservicein
thedownlink

B UL Highest

Serviceparameter

None

Highestbearerusedbyaservicein
theuplink

B DL Lowest

Serviceparameter

None

Lowestbearerusedbyaservicein
thedownlink

B UL Lowest

Serviceparameter

None

Lowestbearerusedbyaservicein
theuplink

f Act

UL

Serviceparameter

Uplinkactivityfactor

f Act

DL

Serviceparameter

Downlinkactivityfactor

TPD Min UL

Serviceparameter

kbps

Minimumthroughputdemandinthe
uplink

TPD Min DL

Serviceparameter

kbps

Minimumthroughputdemandinthe
downlink

TPD Max UL

Serviceparameter

kbps

Maximumthroughputdemandinthe
uplink

TPD Max DL

Serviceparameter

kbps

Maximumthroughputdemandinthe
downlink

UL

Serviceparameter

kbps

Averagerequestedthroughputinthe
uplink

TP Average

DL

Serviceparameter

kbps

Averagerequestedthroughputinthe
downlink

TP Offset

Serviceparameter

kbps

Throughputoffset

f TP Scaling

Serviceparameter

Scalingfactor

L Body

Serviceparameter

dB

Bodyloss

P Min

Terminalparameter

dBm

Minimumterminalpowerallowed

P Max

Terminalparameter

dBm

Maximumterminalpowerallowed

nf

Terminalparameter

dB

Terminalnoisefigure

Terminalparameter

dB

Terminalantennagain

Terminalparameter

dB

Terminalloss

N Ant TX

Terminalparameter

None

NumberofantennasusedforMIMO
intransmission

N Ant RX

Terminalparameter

None

NumberofantennasusedforMIMO
inreception

TerminalWiFiequipmentparameter

None

MaximumSUMIMOgain

NR DL

NR UL

TP Average

Max

G SU MIMO

779

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

Forsk2014

Name

Value

Unit

Description

G Div DL

TerminalWiFiequipmentparameter

dB

DownlinkSTTD/MRCorSUMIMO
diversitygain

UL

Clutterparameter

dB

Additionaluplinkdiversitygain

G Div

DL

Clutterparameter

dB

Additionaldownlinkdiversitygain

f SU MIMO

Clutterparameter

None

SUMIMOgainfactor

L Indoor

Clutterparameter

dB

Indoorloss

L Path

Propagationmodelresult

dB

Pathloss

G Div

F
ICP DL

Networkparameter

None

Intertechnologydownlinkchannel
protectionratioforafrequency
offset F betweentheinterfered
andinterferingfrequencychannels

M Shadowing Model

MonteCarlosimulations:Randomresultcalculatedfrommodel
standarddeviation
CoveragePredictions:Resultcalculatedfromcelledgecoverage
probabilityandmodelstandarddeviation

dB

Modelshadowingmargin

M Shadowing C I

CoveragePredictions:Resultcalculatedfromcelledgecoverage
probabilityandC/Istandarddeviation

dB

C/Ishadowingmargin

Anyinterferingcellwhosesignaltothermalnoiseratioislessthan CNR Min willbediscarded.

a.

11.2 CalculationQuickReference
Thefollowingtableslisttheformulasusedincalculations.

11.2.1 CoandAdjacentChannelOverlapsCalculation
Name
TX i ic

F Start

Value
TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

F End

TX i ic TX j jc

W CCO

TX jc

TX i ic TX j jc
H

TX ic TX jc
i
j
r ACO
H

780

TX ic

Description

MHz

Startfrequencyforthechannel
numberassignedtoacell

MHz

Endfrequencyforthechannel
numberassignedtoacell

MHz

Cochanneloverlapbandwidth

None

Cochanneloverlapratio

MHz

Bandwidthofthelowerfrequency
adjacentchanneloverlap

None

Lowerfrequencyadjacentchannel
overlapratio

MHz

Bandwidthofthehigherfrequency
adjacentchanneloverlap

None

Higherfrequencyadjacentchannel
overlapratio

TX i ic TX j jc

TX jc

TX ic

TX jc

TX ic

TX ic

j
i
j
i
i
Min F End F Start Max F Start F Start W Channel

TX i ic TX j jc

W ACO
L
---------------------------------TX i ic
W Channel

W ACO

TX jc

W CCO
----------------------------------TX i ic
W Channel

TX i ic TX j jc

r ACO

TX ic

j
i
j
i
Min F End F End Max F Start F Start

r CCO

TX i ic TX j jc

TX i ic

F Start + W Channel

TX i ic TX j jc

W ACO

TXi ic N First TX i ic
Channel
Channel
N
-------------------------------------------------------
TX i ic

CN FB

TX i ic

F Start FB + W Channel + ICS FB

Unit

TX j jc

TX i ic

Min FEnd F End

TX ic

TX jc

TX ic

i
j
i
+ W Channel Max F Start F End

TX i ic TX j jc

W ACO
H
---------------------------------TX i ic
W Channel

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Name

Value

Unit

Description

None

Adjacentchanneloverlapratio

None

Totaloverlapratio

Unit

Description

dBm

Receivedsignallevel

dBm

EIRPofacell

Value

Unit

Description

N TXi ic
SCa Used
n 0 + 10 Log ------------------------ TX i ic
N SCa Total

dBm

Thermalnoiseforacell

dBm

Downlinknoiseforacell

Unit

Description

dBm

Interferencegeneratedbyan
interferingcell

dB

Interferencereductionfactordueto
thecoandadjacentchanneloverlap

dB

Interferencereductionfactordueto
downlinktrafficload

Downlinkintertechnology
interference

TX ic TX jc
i
j

TX ic TX jc
i
j

r ACO

r ACO

TX ic TX jc
i
j

+ r ACO

H
TX ic

f ACS FB
TX ic TX jc TX ic TX jc
----------------------------
j
i
j
10
r i

+ r ACO
10
CCO

TX i ic

rO

TX j jc

ifW Channel W Channel

TX i ic TX j jc

TX ic

f ACS FB
TX ic
TX ic TX jc TX ic TX jc --------------------------- W i
j
i
j
10
Channel
r i

--------------------+ r ACO
10
TX j jc
CCO

W Channel

TX i ic

TX j jc

ifW Channel W Channel

11.2.2 SignalLevelCalculation(DL)
Name
TX ic
i
C DL

EIRP

Value
TX i ic

EIRP Traffic L Path M Shadowing Model L Indoor + G

L

Mi

Mi

Mi

Mi

L Ant L Body
TX i ic

TX i ic

P DL

+G

TX i

TX i

11.2.3 NoiseCalculation(DL)
Name
TX i ic

n 0 DL

TX i ic

TX i ic

n DL

n 0 DL + nf

Mi

11.2.4 InterferenceCalculation(DL)
Name
TX j jc

I DL

TX i ic TX j jc

fO

TX jc
j

f TL DL

Inter Tech
I DL

Value
TX j jc

C DL

TX i ic TX j jc

+ fO

TX j jc

Inter Tech

+ f TL DL + I DL

TX i ic TX j jc

10 Log r O

TX j jc

10 Log TL DL

TX k

P DL Rec
--------------------------------------
F TX i ic TX k

TX ICP DL
k

781

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

Forsk2014

11.2.5 C/NCalculation(DL)
Name

Value
TX ic
i

Description

dB

DownlinkC/Nforacell

Unit

Description

TX ic
i

C DL

TX ic
i
CNR DL

Unit

n DL

TX ic
i

WithMIMO: CNR DL

DL

+ G Div DL + G Div

11.2.6 C/(I+N)Calculation(DL)
Name

Value

TX i ic

TX i ic

CINR DL

C DL

TXj jc

IDL

-----------------

10 Log
10 10

AllTXj jc

TX i ic

n DL
+ I Inter Tech + -------------------10
DL
10

TX i ic

WithMIMO: CINR DL

Mi

TX i ic

DownlinkC/(I+N)foracell

DL

+ G Div DL + G Div

TX jc

I + N DL

+ NR Inter Tech
DL

dB

TX ic

I j
n DL
DL

------------------
---------------------
10
10
Inter

Tech
+ NRInter Tech
10
+I
10 Log
+ 10
DL

DL
AllTXj jc

dBm

TotalNoise(I+N)foracell

Unit

Description

dBm

Receiveduplinksignallevel

dBm

UplinkEIRPofauserequipment

Value

Unit

Description

N TX i ic
SCa Used
n 0 + 10 Log ------------------------ TXi ic
N SCa Total

dBm

Thermalnoiseforacell

dBm

Uplinknoiseforacell

Unit

Description

dBm

Uplinkinterferencereceivedatacell

dB

Interferencereductionfactordueto
thecoandadjacentchanneloverlap

11.2.7 SignalLevelCalculation(UL)
Name

Value
Mi

EIRP UL L Path M Shadowing Model L Indoor + G

i
C UL

TX

L Ant L Body
P

EIRP UL

With P

TX i

Mi

+G

Mi

Mi

= P Max withoutpowercontroland P

= P Eff after

powercontrol

11.2.8 NoiseCalculation(UL)
Name
TX i ic

n 0 UL

TX i ic

TX i ic

n UL

n 0 UL + nf

TX i ic

11.2.9 InterferenceCalculation(UL)
Name
Mj

I UL
TX ic TX jc
i
j

fO

782

Value
Mj

TX i ic TX j jc

C UL + f O

Mj

+ f TL UL

TX i ic TX j jc

10 Log r O

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Name
M

Value
M

j
10 Log TL UL

f TL UL

TX i ic

NRUL

TX i ic

I + N UL

Unit

Description

dB

Interferencereductionfactordueto
theinterferingmobilesuplinktraffic
load

TX i ic
IMj

n UL
UL

nonsegM

---------------------
TX i ic
--------------------------------------------i
Inter Tech
10

10 Log
+ NR UL
n UL dB
10
10
+ 10

AllMj

AllTXj jc

TX i ic

TX i ic

Uplinknoiseatacell

dBm

TotalNoise(I+N)foracell

Unit

Description

dB

UplinkC/Natacell

Unit

Description

dB

UplinkC/(I+N)atacell

Unit

Description

W Channel 10
-----------------------------------TX i ic
N SCa Total

kHz

Intersubcarrierdistance

1
------------------TX i ic
F

sec

Usefulsymbolduration

sec

Cyclicprefixduration

sec

Symbolduration

Symbols

Totalcellresources

NR UL

+ n UL

11.2.10 C/NCalculation(UL)
Name

Value

C UL n UL

TX i ic

Mi

CNR UL

TX i ic

Mi

WithMIMO: CNR UL + G Div UL +

UL
G Div

11.2.11 C/(I+N)Calculation(UL)
Name

Value
TX i ic

Mi

Mi

CINR UL

CNR UL NR UL
Mi

TX i ic

UL

WithMIMO: CINR UL + G Div UL + G Div

11.2.12 CalculationofTotalCellResources
Name

TX i ic

TX i ic

D Sym Useful

Value
TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

r CP
--------------F

D CP

TX i ic

D Symbol
TX i ic

R DL

TX i ic

TX i ic

D Sym Useful + D CP

TX ic
1
- N SCai Data
Floor ----------------TX i ic
D

Symbol

783

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

Forsk2014

11.2.13 ChannelThroughput,CellCapacity,andPeruserThroughput
Calculation
Name

Value
TX i ic

R DL
M

CTP P DL

WithMIMO(AMS):
B

Mi

Mi

1 + f SU MIMO G SU MIMO 1

if CNR DL
M

Mi

Mi
Mi
f TP Scaling
- TP Offset
CTP E DL -----------------------100

Mi

Mi

TX i ic

Mi

CTP P DL TL DL Max
M

Mi

i
i
Cap P DL 1 BLER B DL

Mi

Mi
f TP Scaling
- TP Offset
Cap E DL -----------------------100

Cap E DL

Cap A DL

PUTP P DL

PUTP E DL

Mi

Mi
Mi
f TP Scaling
- TP Offset
PUTP E DL -----------------------100
TX i ic

R UL
Mi

CTP P UL

WithMIMO(AMS):

Mi

B UL

1 + f SU MIMO G SU MIMO 1

Mi
f TP Scaling
- TP Offset
CTP E UL -----------------------100

Mi

Mi

TX i ic

Mi

CTP P UL TL UL Max
M

Mi

i
i
Cap P UL 1 BLER B UL

Mi
f TP Scaling
- TP Offset
Cap E UL -----------------------100

Cap A UL

784

Cap E UL

kbps

DownlinkeffectiveMACcellcapacity

kbps

Downlinkapplicationcellcapacity

kbps

DownlinkpeakMACthroughputper
user

kbps

DownlinkeffectiveMACthroughput
peruser

kbps

Downlinkapplicationthroughputper
user

kbps

UplinkpeakMACchannel
throughput

kbps

UplinkeffectiveMACchannel
throughput

kbps

Uplinkapplicationchannel
throughput

kbps

UplinkpeakMACcellcapacity

kbps

UplinkeffectiveMACcellcapacity

kbps

Uplinkapplicationcellcapacity

TX i ic

i
i
CTP P UL 1 BLER B UL

Mi

DownlinkpeakMACcellcapacity

T AMS

Mi

Cap P UL

kbps

B UL
TX i ic

i
CTP A UL

Downlinkapplicationchannel
throughput

Mi
B UL
Max

Mi

if CNR DL
CTP E UL

kbps

Mi

Cap E DL
----------------------TX i ic
N Users DL

Mi

Mi

DownlinkeffectiveMACchannel
throughput

Mi

Cap P DL
----------------------TX i ic
N Users DL

Mi

PUTP A DL

Mi

Mi

kbps

TX i ic

i
i
CTP P DL 1 BLER B DL

Cap P DL

DownlinkpeakMACchannel
throughput

T AMS

Mi

CTP A DL

kbps

DL

TX i ic

CTP E DL

Description

M
i
B DL
Max

DL

Unit

Mi

Mi

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Name

Value
M

i
PUTP P UL

PUTP E UL

Mi

PUTP A UL

Description

kbps

UplinkpeakMACthroughputper
user

kbps

UplinkeffectiveMACthroughputper
user

kbps

Uplinkapplicationthroughputper
user

Cap P UL
----------------------TX ic
i
N Users UL
M

Mi

Unit

Cap E UL
----------------------TX ic
i
N Users UL
Mi

M
M
f TP Scaling
i
i
- TP Offset
PUTP E UL -----------------------100

11.2.14 SchedulingandRadioResourceManagement
Name

Value

Unit

Description

Sel
Mi
R Min DL

TPD Min DL
---------------------------

None

Resourcesallocatedtoamobileto
satisfyitsminimumthroughput
demandindownlink

Sel
Mi
R Min UL

TPD Min UL
---------------------------

None

Resourcesallocatedtoamobileto
satisfyitsminimumthroughput
demandinuplink

None

Remainingdownlinkcellresources
afterallocationforminimum
throughputdemands

R Min UL

None

Remaininguplinkcellresourcesafter
allocationforminimumthroughput
demands

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

kbps

Remainingthroughputdemandfora
mobileindownlink

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

kbps

Remainingthroughputdemandfora
mobileinuplink

None

Remainingresourcedemandfora
mobileindownlink

None

Remainingresourcedemandfora
mobileinuplink

None

Resourcesallocatedtoamobileto
satisfyitsmaximumthroughput
demandindownlink

None

Resourcesallocatedtoamobileto
satisfyitsmaximumthroughput
demandinuplink

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi
CTP P DL
Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

CTP P UL
TX i ic

R Rem DL

TX i ic

R Rem UL
Sel
Mi

TPD Rem DL
Sel
Mi

TPD Rem UL
Sel
Mi
RD Rem DL

TX i ic

TL DL Max

Sel
Mi

R Min DL

Sel
Mi
TX ic
i

TL DL Max

Sel
i

Sel
Mi

TPD Max DL TPD Min DL

TPD Max UL TPD Min UL
Sel
Mi

TPD Rem DL
---------------------------Sel
Mi

CTP P DL
Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi
RD Rem UL

TPD Rem UL
----------------------------

Sel
i
R Max DL

Mi
R Rem DL
-
Min RD Rem DL -------------------N

Sel
Mi

R Max UL

Sel
Mi
CTP P UL
Sel

Sel

TX i ic

TX i ic

R Rem UL
Mi
-
Min RD Rem UL -------------------N

785

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

Forsk2014

Name

Value

Unit

Description

Sel
Sel

M
Mi
i

R Max DL CTP E DL

Sel

M
Site
i
-
Max 1 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sel
Sel
M
Mi

Site
i
TP

CTP
Min DL

BH DL
E DL

Sel

M i Site

None

Sitebackhauloverflowratioin
downlink

Sel
Sel

Mi
Mi

R Max UL CTP E UL

Sel

M i Site

Max 1 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Sel
Sel
Mi
Mi

Site
R Min UL CTP E UL
TPBH UL

Sel

M i Site

None

Sitebackhauloverflowratioinuplink

None

Totalresourcesassignedtoamobile
indownlink
(Downlinktrafficloadofthemobile)

None

Totalresourcesassignedtoamobile
inuplink
(Uplinktrafficloadofthemobile)

Unit

Description

kbps

DownlinkpeakMACuserthroughput

kbps

DownlinkeffectiveMACuser
throughput

kbps

Downlinkapplicationuser
throughput

kbps

UplinkpeakMACuserthroughput

kbps

UplinkeffectiveMACuser
throughput

kbps

Uplinkapplicationuserthroughput

Site

BHOF DL

Site

BHOF DL

Sel

Sel
i
TL DL
M

Sel
i
R DL
M

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Mi
Mi
Max DL CTP P DL
R Min DL CTP P DL + -----------------------------------------------Site

BHOF DL

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Sel

Sel
Mi

CTP P DL
Sel

Sel
Mi

TL UL

Sel
Mi

= R UL

Sel
i

Sel
i

Mi
Mi
Max UL CTP P UL
R Min UL CTP P UL + -----------------------------------------------Site

BHOF UL

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Sel

Sel
Mi

CTP P UL

11.2.15 UserThroughputCalculation
Name
Sel
Mi

UTP P DL
Sel
Mi

UTP E DL
Sel
Mi

UTP A DL
M

Sel
i

UTP P UL
Sel
Mi

UTPE UL
Sel
Mi

UTP A UL

786

Value
Sel
Mi

R DL

Sel
Mi

CTP P DL

Sel

Sel

Mi
Mi

UTP P DL 1 BLER B DL

Sel
i
f TP Scaling
M

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

UTPE DL ------------------------- TP Offset

100
M

Sel
i

R UL

Sel
i

CTP P UL

Sel

Sel

Mi

Mi
UTP P UL 1 BLER B UL

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Sel

Mi
f TP Scaling
- TP Offset
UTP E UL -----------------------100

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

11.3 AvailableCalculations
11.3.1 PointAnalysis
11.3.1.1 ProfileView
Thepointanalysisprofileviewdisplaysthefollowingcalculationresultsfortheselectedtransmitterbasedonthecalculation
algorithmdescribedin"SignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 801.

TX ic
i

Downlinksignallevel C DL

Pathloss L Path

Totallosses L Total

, G

, L Ant ,and L Body arenotusedinthecalculationsperformedfortheprofileview.

11.3.1.2 ReceptionView
Analysisprovidedinthereceptionviewisbasedonpathlossmatrices.So,youcandisplayreceivedsignallevelsfromthecells
forwhichcalculatedpathlossmatricesareavailable.
ReceptionlevelbargraphsshowthesignallevelsorC/Nindecreasingorder.Themaximumnumberofbarsinthegraph
dependsonthesignallevelofthebestserver.Thebargraphdisplayscellswhosereceivedsignallevelsarehigherthantheir
C/Nthresholdsandarewithina30 dBmarginfromthehighestsignallevel.
Youcanuseavalueotherthan30 dBforthemarginfromthehighestsignallevel,forexampleasmallervalueforimproving
thecalculationspeed.Formoreinformationondefiningadifferentvalueforthismargin,seetheAdministratorManual.

11.3.1.3 InterferenceView
Analysisprovidedintheinterferenceviewisbasedonpathlossmatrices.So,youcandisplaythereceivedsignallevelfrom
thebestserverandinterferingsignallevelsfromothercellsforwhichcalculatedpathlossmatricesareavailable.Foreachcell,
Atolldisplaysthebestserversignallevelandinterferencefromothercells.
Interferencelevelbargraphsshowtheinterferencelevelsindecreasingorder.Themaximumnumberofbarsinthegraph
dependsonthehighestinterferencelevel.ThebargraphdisplayscellswhoseC/NarehigherthantheminimuminterfererC/
Nthresholdandwhoseinterferencelevelsarewithina30 dBmarginfromthehighestinterferencelevel.
Youcanuseavalueotherthan30 dBforthemarginfromthehighestinterferencelevel,forexampleasmallervaluefor
improvingthecalculationspeed.Formoreinformationondefiningadifferentvalueforthismargin,seetheAdministrator
Manual.

11.3.2 CoveragePredictions
11.3.2.1 SignalLevelCoveragePredictions
Thefollowingcoveragepredictionsarebasedonthereceivedsignallevels:

CoveragebyTransmitter
CoveragebySignalLevel
OverlappingZones

Forthesecalculations,Atollcalculatesthereceivedsignallevel,thendeterminestheselecteddisplayparameteroneachpixel
insidethecellscalculationarea.EachpixelwithinthecalculationareaofTXi(ic)isconsideredanoninterferingreceiver.
L

Mi

, G

Mi

Mi

Mi

, L Ant ,and L Body arenotconsideredinthecalculationsperformedforthesignallevelbasedcoveragepredictions.

Theresolutionofthecoveragepredictiondoesnotdependontheresolutionsofthepathlossmatricesorthegeographicdata
andcanbedefinedseparatelyforeachcoverageprediction.Coveragepredictionsaregeneratedusingabilinearinterpolation
methodfrommultiresolutionpathlossmatrices(similartotheoneusedtocalculatesitealtitudes,see"PathLossCalculation
Prerequisites"onpage 53formoreinformation).
Formoreinformationonsignallevelcalculations,see"SignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 801
Formoreinformationoncoverageareadeterminationandavailabledisplayoptions,see:

"CoverageAreaDetermination"onpage 788.
"CoverageDisplayTypes"onpage 788.

787

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

Forsk2014

CoverageAreaDetermination
AtollusesparametersenteredintheConditiontabofthecoveragepredictionpropertiesdialoguetodeterminecoverage
areastodisplay.Therearethreepossibilities.

AllServers
ThecoverageareaofeachcellTXi(ic)correspondstothepixelswhere.
TX ic
i

MinimumThreshold C DL

TX ic

TX ic

i
i

or L Total or L Path MaximumThreshold

BestSignalLevelandaMargin
ThecoverageareaofeachcellTXi(ic)correspondstothepixelswhere.
TX ic
i

MinimumThreshold C DL

TX ic

TX ic

i
i

or L Total or L Path MaximumThreshold

AND
TX ic
i

C DL

TX jc
j
Best C DL M
ji

WhereMisthespecifiedmargin(dB).TheBestfunctionconsidersthehighestvaluefromalistofvalues.
IfM=0 dB,AtollconsiderspixelswherethereceivedsignallevelfromTXi(ic)isthehighest.
IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelswherethereceivedsignallevelfromTXi(ic)iseitherthehighestorwithina2 dB
marginfromthehighest.
IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelswherethereceivedsignallevelfromTXi(ic)is2 dBhigherthanthereceived

signallevelsfromthecellswhichare2ndbestservers.

SecondBestSignalLevelandaMargin
ThecoverageareaofeachcellTXi(ic)correspondstothepixelswhere.
TX i ic

MinimumThreshold C DL

TX ic

TX ic

i
or L i

Total or L Path MaximumThreshold

AND
TX i ic

C DL

TX jc

nd
j
2 Best C DL

ji

WhereMisthespecifiedmargin(dB).The2ndBestfunctionconsidersthesecondhighestvaluefromalistofvalues.

IfM=0 dB,AtollconsiderspixelswherethereceivedsignallevelfromTXi(ic)isthesecondhighest.
IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelswherethereceivedsignallevelfromTXi(ic)iseitherthesecondhighestorwithin
a2 dBmarginfromthesecondhighest.
IfM=2 dB,AtollconsiderspixelswherethereceivedsignallevelfromTXi(ic)is2 dBhigherthanthereceived
signallevelsfromthecellswhichare3rdbestservers.

CoverageDisplayTypes
Apixelofacoverageareaiscolouredifthecalculatedvalueoftheselecteddisplayparameterisgreaterthanorequaltothe
definedthresholdsvalues.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayersthatcanbedisplayedandhiddenonthemap.
Itispossibletodisplaythecoveragepredictionswithcoloursdependingonanytransmitterorcellattribute,andothercriteria
suchas:

788

SignalLevel(dBm,dBV,dBV/m)
BestSignalLevel(dBm,dBV,dBV/m):Wherecellcoverageareasoverlap,Atollkeepsthehighestvalueofthesignal
level.
PathLoss(dB)
TotalLosses(dB)
BestServerPathLoss(dB):Wherecellcoverageareasoverlap,Atolldeterminesthebestcell(i.e.,thecellwiththe
highestsignallevel)andevaluatesthepathlossfromthiscell.
BestServerTotalLosses(dB):Wherecellcoverageareasoverlap,Atolldeterminesthebestcell(i.e.,thecellwiththe
highestsignallevel)andevaluatesthetotallossesfromthiscell.
NumberofServers:Atollevaluatesthenumberofcellsthatcoverapixel(i.e.,thepixelfallswithinthecoverageareas
ofthesecells).

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

11.3.2.2 EffectiveSignalAnalysisCoveragePredictions
The following coverage predictions are based on the received signal levels and noise, and take into account the receiver
characteristics( L

, G

, L Ant ,and L Body )whencalculatingtherequiredparameter:

EffectiveSignalAnalysis(DL)
EffectiveSignalAnalysis(UL)

Forthesecalculations,AtollcalculatesthereceivedsignallevelorC/Nlevelateachpixel.Eachpixelwithinthecalculationarea
ofTXi(ic)isconsideredanoninterferingreceiver.Thepropertiesofthenoninterferingprobereceiveraresetbyselectinga
terminal,amobilitytype,andaservice.
Theresolutionofthecoveragepredictiondoesnotdependontheresolutionsofthepathlossmatricesorthegeographicdata
andcanbedefinedseparatelyforeachcoverageprediction.Coveragepredictionsaregeneratedusingabilinearinterpolation
methodfrommultiresolutionpathlossmatrices(similartotheoneusedtocalculatesitealtitudes,see"PathLossCalculation
Prerequisites"onpage 53formoreinformation).
Formoreinformationonsignallevelcalculations,see:

"SignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 801.
"SignalLevelCalculation(UL)"onpage 807.

FormoreinformationonC/Nlevelcalculations,see:

"C/NCalculation(DL)"onpage 804.
"C/NCalculation(UL)"onpage 810.

Formoreinformationoncoverageareadeterminationandavailabledisplayoptions,see:

"CoverageAreaDetermination"onpage 789.
"CoverageDisplayTypes"onpage 789.

CoverageAreaDetermination
Thesecoveragepredictionsareallbestservercoveragepredictions,i.e.,thecoverageareaofeachcellcomprisesthepixels
where the cell is the best server. Best server for each pixel is calculated as explained in "Best Server Determination" on
page 813.
CoverageDisplayTypes
Apixelofacoverageareaiscolouredifthecalculatedvalueoftheselecteddisplaytypeparameterisgreaterthanorequalto
thedefinedthresholdsvalues.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayersthatcanbedisplayedandhiddenonthemap.
ItispossibletodisplaytheEffectiveSignalAnalysis(DL)coveragepredictionwithcoloursdependingonthefollowingdisplay
options:

SignalLevel(DL)(dBm)
C/NLevel(DL)(dB)

ItispossibletodisplaytheEffectiveSignalAnalysis(UL)coveragepredictionwithcoloursdependingonthefollowingdisplay
options:

SignalLevel(UL)(dBm)
C/NLevel(UL)(dB)

11.3.2.3 C/(I+N)basedCoveragePredictions
Thefollowingcoveragepredictionsarebasedonthereceivedsignallevels,totalnoise,andinterference.

CoveragebyC/(I+N)Level(DL)
ServiceAreaAnalysis(DL)
CoveragebyThroughput(DL)
CoveragebyQualityIndicator(DL)
CoveragebyC/(I+N)Level(UL)
ServiceAreaAnalysis(UL)
CoveragebyThroughput(UL)
CoveragebyQualityIndicator(UL)

Thesecoveragepredictionstakeintoaccountthereceivercharacteristics( L

Mi

, G

Mi

Mi

Mi

, L Ant ,and L Body )whencalculatingthe

requiredparameter.Forthesecalculations,Atollcalculatesthereceivedsignallevel,noise,andinterferenceateachpixel.
EachpixelwithinthecalculationareaofTXi(ic)isconsideredanoninterferingreceiver.Thepropertiesofthenoninterfering
probereceiveraresetbyselectingaterminal,amobilitytype,andaservice.

789

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

Forsk2014

Thedownlinkcoveragepredictionsarebasedonthedownlinktrafficloadsofthecells,andtheuplinkcoveragepredictions
are based on the uplink noise rise values. These parameters can either be calculated by Atoll during the Monte Carlo
simulations,orsetmanuallybytheuserforallthecells.
Theresolutionofthecoveragepredictiondoesnotdependontheresolutionsofthepathlossmatricesorthegeographicdata
andcanbedefinedseparatelyforeachcoverageprediction.Coveragepredictionsaregeneratedusingabilinearinterpolation
methodfrommultiresolutionpathlossmatrices(similartotheoneusedtocalculatesitealtitudes,see"PathLossCalculation
Prerequisites"onpage 53formoreinformation).
FormoreinformationonC/(I+N),(I+N),andbearercalculations,see:

"C/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(DL)"onpage 805.
"C/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(UL)"onpage 811.
"NoiseRiseCalculation(UL)"onpage 809

Formoreinformationonthroughputcalculations,see:

"ChannelThroughput,CellCapacity,andPeruserThroughputCalculation"onpage 815.

Formoreinformationoncoverageareadeterminationandavailabledisplayoptions,see:

"CoverageAreaDetermination"onpage 790.
"CoverageDisplayTypes"onpage 790.

CoverageAreaDetermination
Thesecoveragepredictionsareallbestservercoveragepredictions,i.e.,thecoverageareaofeachcellcomprisesthepixels
where the cell is the best server. Best server for each pixel is calculated as explained in "Best Server Determination" on
page 813.
CoverageDisplayTypes
Apixelofacoverageareaiscolouredifthecalculatedvalueoftheselecteddisplaytypeparameterisgreaterthanorequalto
thedefinedthresholdsvalues.Coverageconsistsofseveralindependentlayersthatcanbedisplayedandhiddenonthemap.
ItispossibletodisplaytheCoveragebyC/(I+N)Level(DL)coveragepredictionwithcoloursdependingonthefollowingdisplay
options:

C/(I+N)Level(DL)(dB)
TotalNoise(I+N)(DL)(dBm)

ItispossibletodisplaytheServiceAreaAnalysis(DL)coveragepredictionwithcoloursdependingonthefollowingdisplay
options:

Bearer(DL)
Modulation(DL):Modulationusedbythebearer
Service

ItispossibletodisplaytheCoveragebyThroughput(DL)coveragepredictionwithcoloursdependingonthefollowingdisplay
options:

PeakMACChannelThroughput(DL)(kbps)
EffectiveMACChannelThroughput(DL)(kbps)
ApplicationChannelThroughput(DL)(kbps)
PeakMACCellCapacity(DL)(kbps)
EffectiveMACCellCapacity(DL)(kbps)
ApplicationCellCapacity(DL)(kbps)
PeakMACThroughputperUser(DL)(kbps)
EffectiveMACThroughputperUser(DL)(kbps)
ApplicationThroughputperUser(DL)(kbps)

ItispossibletodisplaytheCoveragebyQualityIndicator(DL)coveragepredictionwithcoloursdependingonthefollowing
displayoptions:

Qualityindicatorsavailableinthedocument(QualityIndicatorstable):AtollcalculatesthedownlinkC/(I+N)levels
receivedfromthebestservingcellsateachpixeloftheircoverageareas.FromtheC/(I+N),Atolldeterminesthebest
beareravailableoneachpixel.Then,forthecalculatedC/(I+N)andbearer,itdeterminesthevalueoftheselected
qualityindicatorfromthequalitygraphsdefinedintheWiFiequipmentoftheselectedterminal.

ItispossibletodisplaytheCoveragebyC/(I+N)Level(UL)coveragepredictionwithcoloursdependingonthefollowingdisplay
options:

790

C/(I+N)Level(UL)(dB)
TotalNoise(I+N)(UL)(dBm)
TransmissionPower(UL)(dBm)

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

ItispossibletodisplaytheServiceAreaAnalysis(UL)coveragepredictionwithcoloursdependingonthefollowingdisplay
options:

Bearer(UL)
Modulation(UL):Modulationusedbythebearer
Service

ItispossibletodisplaytheCoveragebyThroughput(UL)coveragepredictionwithcoloursdependingonthefollowingdisplay
options:

PeakMACChannelThroughput(UL)(kbps)
EffectiveMACChannelThroughput(UL)(kbps)
ApplicationChannelThroughput(UL)(kbps)
PeakMACCellCapacity(UL)(kbps)
EffectiveMACCellCapacity(UL)(kbps)
ApplicationCellCapacity(UL)(kbps)
PeakMACThroughputperUser(UL)(kbps)
EffectiveMACThroughputperUser(UL)(kbps)
ApplicationThroughputperUser(UL)(kbps)

ItispossibletodisplaytheCoveragebyQualityIndicator(UL)coveragepredictionwithcoloursdependingonthefollowing
displayoptions:

Quality indicators available in the document (Quality Indicators table): Atoll calculates the uplink C/(I+N) levels
receivedatthebestservingcellsfromeachpixeloftheircoverageareas.FromtheC/(I+N),Atolldeterminesthebest
beareravailableoneachpixel.Then,forthecalculatedC/(I+N)andbearer,itdeterminesthevalueoftheselected
qualityindicatorfromthequalitygraphsdefinedintheWiFiequipmentofthebestservingcell.

11.3.3 CalculationsonSubscriberLists
WhencalculationsareperformedonalistofsubscribersbyrunningtheAutomaticServerAllocation,Atollcalculatesthepath
lossagainforthesubscriberlocationsandheightsbecausethesubscriberheightscanbedifferentfromthedefaultreceiver
heightusedforcalculatingthepathlossmatrices.
AtollcalculatesthefollowingparametersforeachsubscriberinthelistwhoseLockStatusissettoNone.

ServingBaseStationandReferenceCellasdescribedin"BestServerDetermination"onpage 813.

Atollcalculatesthefollowingparametersforeachsubscriberinthelistthathasaservingbasestationassignedandwhose
LockStatusissettoNoneorServer.

Azimuth( ):Anglewithrespecttothenorthforpointingthesubscriberterminalantennatowardsitsservingbase
station.
MechanicalDowntilt( ):Anglewithrespecttothehorizontalforpointingthesubscriberterminalantennatowards
itsservingbasestation.

Atollcalculatestheremainingparametersforeachsubscriberinthelistthathasaservingbasestationassigned,usingthe
propertiesofthedefaultterminalandservice.Formoreinformation,see:

"SignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 801.
"C/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(DL)"onpage 805.
"SignalLevelCalculation(UL)"onpage 807.
"NoiseRiseCalculation(UL)"onpage 809.
"C/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(UL)"onpage 811.
"ThroughputCalculation"onpage 814.

11.3.4 MonteCarloSimulations
Thesimulationprocessisdividedintotwosteps.

Generatingarealisticuserdistributionasexplainedin"UserDistribution"onpage 791.
Atoll generates user distributions as part of the Monte Carlo algorithm based on traffic data. The resulting user
distributioncomplieswiththetrafficdatabaseandmapsselectedwhencreatingsimulations.

SchedulingandRadioResourceManagementasexplainedunder"SimulationProcess"onpage 795.

11.3.4.1 UserDistribution
Duringeachsimulation,Atollperformstworandomtrials.Thefirstrandomtrialgeneratesthenumberofusersandtheir
activitystatusasexplainedinthefollowingsectionsdependingonthetypeoftrafficinput.

"SimulationsBasedonUserProfileTrafficMapsandSubscriberLists"onpage 792.

791

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

Forsk2014

"SimulationsBasedonSectorTrafficMaps"onpage 793.

Once all the user characteristics have been determined, a second random trial is performed to obtain their geographical
locationsweightedaccordingtotheclutterclasses,andwhethertheyareindoororoutdooraccordingtothepercentageof
indoorusersperclutterclass.
Atolldetermines thetotalnumberof users attemptingconnectionineachsimulation
basedonthePoissondistribution.Thismayleadtoslightvariationsinthetotalnumbers
of users in different simulations. To have the same total number of users in each
simulationofagroup,addthefollowinglinesintheAtoll.inifile:
[Simulation]
RandomTotalUsers=0

11.3.4.1.1

SimulationsBasedonUserProfileTrafficMapsandSubscriberLists
Userprofileenvironmentbasedtrafficmaps:Eachpixelofthemapisassignedanenvironmentclasswhichcontainsalistof
userprofileswithanassociatedmobilitytypeandagivendensity,i.e.,numberofusersofauserprofileperkm.
Userprofiletrafficmaps:Eachpolygonorlineofthemapisassignedadensityofuserswithagivenuserprofileandmobility
type.Ifthemapiscomposedofpoints,eachpointisassignedanumberofuserswithgivenuserprofileandmobilitytype.
Fixedsubscriberslistedinsubscriberlistshaveauserprofileassignedtoeachofthem.
Userprofilesmodelthebehaviourofthedifferentusercategories.Eachuserprofilecontainsalistofservicesandparameters
describinghowtheseservicesareaccessedbytheuser.
Thenumberofusersofeachuserprofileiscalculatedfromthesurfacearea(SEnv)ofeachenvironmentclassmap(oreach
polygon)andtheuserprofiledensity(DUP).
N Users = S Env D UP

Incaseof userprofiletraffic mapscomposedof lines,thenumberofusersofeach

user profile is calculated from the line length (L) and the user profile density (DUP)
(usersperkm): N Users = L D UP

Thenumberofusersisadirectinputwhenauserprofiletrafficmapiscomposedof
points.

Atollcalculatestheprobabilityforauserbeingactiveatagiveninstantintheuplinkandinthedownlinkaccordingtothe
service usage characteristics described in the user profiles, i.e., the number of voice calls or data sessions, the average
durationofeachvoicecall,orthevolumeofthedatatransferintheuplinkandthedownlinkineachdatasession.
VoiceService(v)
Userprofileparametersforvoicetypeservicesare:

Theuserterminalequipmentusedfortheservice(fromtheTerminalstable).
Theaveragenumberofcallsperhour N Call .

Theaveragedurationofacall(seconds) D Call .

N Call D Call
Calculationoftheserviceusagedurationperhour( p 0 :probabilityofanactivecall): p 0 = ---------------------------3600
Calculationofthenumberofuserstryingtoaccesstheservicev( n v ): n v = N Users p 0
Theactivitystatusofeachuserdependsontheactivityperiodsduringthecall,i.e.,theuplinkanddownlinkactivity
UL

DL

factorsdefinedforthevoicetypeservicev, f Act and f Act .

Calculationofactivityprobabilities:
UL

DL

Probabilityofbeinginactive: p Inactive = 1 f Act 1 f Act

UL

UL

DL

Probabilityofbeingactiveintheuplink: p Active = f Act 1 f Act

DL

DL

UL

Probabilityofbeingactiveinthedownlink: p Active = f Act 1 f Act

UL + DL

UL

DL

Probabilityofbeingactiveintheuplinkanddownlinkboth: p Active = f Act f Act

792

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Calculationofnumberofusersperactivitystatus:
Numberofinactiveusers: n v Inactive = n v p Inactive
UL

UL

Numberofusersactiveintheuplink: n v Active = n v p Active

DL

DL

Numberofusersactiveinthedownlink: n v Active = n v p Active

UL + DL

UL + DL

Numberofusersactiveintheuplinkanddownlinkboth: n v Active = n v p Active

Therefore,ausercanbeeitheractiveonbothlinks,inactiveonbothlinks,activeonULonly,oractiveonDLonly.
DataService(d)
Userprofileparametersfordatatypeservicesare:

Theuserterminalequipmentusedfortheservice(fromtheTerminalstable).
Theaveragenumberofdatasessionsperhour N Session .

Theaveragedatavolume(inkBytes)transferredinthedownlink V

DL
UL
Theaveragethroughputsinthedownlink TP Average andtheuplink TP Average fortheserviced.

Calculationofactivityprobabilities: f

UL

DL

andtheuplink V

UL

UL

duringasession.

DL

N Session V 8
N Session V 8
DL
= ------------------------------------------ and f = -----------------------------------------UL
DL
TP Average 3600
TP Average 3600
UL

DL

Probabilityofbeinginactive: p Inactive = 1 f 1 f
UL

Probabilityofbeingactiveintheuplink: p Active = f
DL

UL

DL

1 f

Probabilityofbeingactiveinthedownlink: p Active = f

DL

UL

1 f
UL + DL

Probabilityofbeingactiveintheuplinkanddownlinkboth: p Active = f

UL

DL

Calculationofnumberofusers:
Numberofinactiveusers: n d Inactive = N Users p Inactive
UL

UL

Numberofusersactiveintheuplink: n d Active = N Users p Active

DL

DL

Numberofusersactiveinthedownlink: n d Active = N Users p Active

UL + DL

UL + DL

Numberofusersactiveintheuplinkanddownlinkboth: n d Active = N Users p Active

Calculationofthenumberofactiveuserstryingtoaccesstheserviced(nd):
UL

DL

UL + DL

n d = n d Active + n d Active + n d Active

Theuserdistributionperserviceandtheactivitystatusdistributionbetweentheusers
areaveragedistributions.Theserviceandtheactivitystatusofeachuserarerandomly
drawn in each simulation. Therefore, if you calculate several simulations at once, the
average number of users per service and average numbers of inactive, active on UL,
activeonDLandactiveonULandDLusers,respectively,willcorrespondtocalculated
distributions.Butifyoucheckeachsimulation,theuserdistributionbetweenservicesas
wellastheactivitystatusdistributionbetweenuserscanbedifferentineachofthem.

11.3.4.1.2

SimulationsBasedonSectorTrafficMaps
Sectortrafficmapspersectorarealsoreferredtoaslivetrafficmaps.LivetrafficdatafromtheOMCisspreadoverthebest
servercoverageareasofthetransmittersincludedinthetrafficmap.Eitherthroughputdemandsperserviceorthenumber
ofactiveusersperserviceareassignedtothecoverageareasofeachtransmitter.
ForeachtransmitterTXiandeachservices,

SectorTrafficMaps(Throughputs)

793

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

Forsk2014

AtollcalculatesthenumberofactiveusersofeachservicesonULandDLinthecoverageareaofTXiasfollows:
N

UL

UL

DL

TP Cell
TPCell
DL
= ---------------------- and N = ---------------------UL
DL
TP Average
TP Average
UL

Where TP Cell isthetotaluplinkthroughputdemanddefinedinthemapforanyservicesforthecoverageareaofthe

DL

transmitter, TP Cell isthetotaldownlinkthroughputdemanddefinedinthemapforanyservicesforthecoverage

UL

DL

areaofthetransmitter, TP Average istheaverageuplinkrequestedthroughputoftheservices,and TP Average isthe

averagedownlinkrequestedthroughputoftheservices.

SectorTrafficMaps(#ActiveUsers)
UL

Atolldirectlyusesthedefined N and N
coverageareausingtheservices.

DL

values,i.e.,thenumberofactiveusersonULandDLinthetransmitter

Atanygiveninstant,Atollcalculatestheprobabilityforauserbeingactiveintheuplinkandinthedownlinkasfollows:
Usersactiveintheuplinkanddownlinkbothareincludedinthe N

UL

and N

DL

values.Therefore,itisnecessaryto

UL
DL
UL + DL
accuratelydeterminethenumberofactiveusersintheuplink( n Active ),inthedownlink( n Active ),andboth( n Active

).

Asfortheothertypesoftrafficmaps,Atollconsidersbothactiveandinactiveusers.
Theactivitystatusofeachuserdependsontheactivityperiodsduringthecall,i.e.,theuplinkanddownlinkactivity
UL

DL

factorsdefinedfortheservice, f Act and f Act .

Calculationofactivityprobabilities:
UL

DL

Probabilityofbeinginactive: p Inactive = 1 f Act 1 f Act

UL

UL

DL

Probabilityofbeingactiveintheuplink: p Active = f Act 1 f Act

DL

DL

UL

Probabilityofbeingactiveinthedownlink: p Active = f Act 1 f Act

UL + DL

UL

DL

Probabilityofbeingactiveintheuplinkanddownlinkboth: p Active = f Act f Act

Calculationofthenumberofactiveuserstryingtoaccesstheservice:
Wehave: N

UL

UL

UL + DL

= p Active + p Active n and N

DL

DL

UL + DL

= p Active + p Active n

Where,nisthetotalnumberofactiveusersinthetransmittercoverageareausingtheservice.
Calculationofnumberofusersperactivitystatus:
UL

UL + DL

DL

UL + DL

N p Active
N p Active
UL + DL
Number of users active in the uplink and downlink both: n Active = Min -------------------------------------- -------------------------------------- or
UL
UL + DL
DL
+ DL
p Active + p Active p Active + p UL
Active
UL + DL

simply, n Active = Min N

UL

DL

f Act N

DL

UL

f Act
UL

Numberofusersactiveintheuplink: n Active = N
DL

UL

Numberofusersactiveinthedownlink: n Active = N
UL

DL

UL + DL

n Active
DL

UL + DL

n Active

UL + DL

And, n = n Active + n Active + n Active

Calculationofthenumberofinactiveusersattemptingtoaccesstheservice:
nv
Numberofinactiveusers: n Inactive = ---------------------------- p Inactive
1 p Inactive

794

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Theactivitystatusdistributionbetweenusersisanaveragedistribution.Infact,ineach
simulation,theactivitystatusofeachuserisrandomlydrawn.Therefore,ifyoucalculate
severalsimulationsatonce,averagenumbersofinactive,activeonUL,activeonDLand
activeonULandDLuserscorrespondtothecalculateddistribution.Butifyoucheckeach
simulation, the activity status distribution between users can be different in each of
them.

11.3.4.2 SimulationProcess
EachMonteCarlosimulationinAtollWiFiisasnapshotofthenetworkwithresourceallocationcarriedoutoveraduration
of1 second.Thestepsofthisalgorithmarelistedbelow.
Thesimulationprocesscanbesummedupintothefollowingiterativesteps.
Foreachsimulation,thesimulationprocess,
1. Generatesmobilesaccordingtotheinputtrafficdataasexplainedin"UserDistribution"onpage 791.
2. Setsinitialvaluesforthefollowingparameters:
TX ic
i

Celltransmissionpower( P DL

)issettothevaluedefinedbytheuser.

Mobiletransmissionpowerissettothemaximummobilepower( P Max ).

Cellloads( TL DL

Mi

TX i ic

TX i ic

, TL UL

TX i ic

,and NRUL

)aresettotheircurrentvaluesintheCellstable.

3. Determines the best servers for all the mobiles generated for the simulation as explained in "Best Server
Determination"onpage 813.

Figure 11.1:WiFiSimulationAlgorithm
Foreachiterationk,thesimulationprocess,
4. Determinesthemobileswhicharewithintheserviceareasoftheirbestservingcellsasexplainedin"ServiceArea
Calculation"onpage 813.
5. DeterminesthedownlinkanduplinkC/(I+N)andbearersforeachofthesemobilesasexplainedin"C/(I+N)andBearer
Calculation(DL)"onpage 805and"C/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(UL)"onpage 811respectively.

795

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

Forsk2014

6. Determinesthechannelthroughputsatthemobileasexplainedin"ChannelThroughput,CellCapacity,andPeruser
ThroughputCalculation"onpage 815.
7. Performs radio resource management and scheduling to determine the amount of resources to allocate to each
mobileaccordingtothethroughputdemandsofeachmobileusingtheselectedschedulerasexplainedin"Scheduling
andRadioResourceAllocation"onpage 818.
8. Calculates the user throughputs after allocating resources to each mobile as explained in "User Throughput
Calculation"onpage 821.
9. Updatesthetrafficloads,andnoiserisevaluesofallthecellsaccordingtotheresourcesinuseandthetotalresources
asfollows:
CalculationofTrafficLoads:AtollcalculatesthetrafficloadsforallthecellsTXi(ic).
TX i ic

TL DL

TX i ic

Mi

RDL and TLUL

Mi

RUL

Mi

Mi

Calculation of Uplink Noise Rise: For each victim cell TXi(ic), the uplink noise rise is calculated and updated by
consideringeachinterferingmobileMjasexplainedin"NoiseRiseCalculation(UL)"onpage 809.
10. Performstheconvergencetesttoseewhetherthedifferencesbetweenthecurrentandthenewloadsarewithinthe
convergencethresholds.
Theconvergencecriteriaareevaluatedattheendofeachiterationk,andcanbewrittenasfollows:
TX i ic

TL DL

TX ic

TX i ic

TL UL

i
Max TL DL

AllTX ic

TX i ic

TL DL

TL UL

TX ic

i
Max TL UL
AllTX ic
i

TX i ic

TX i ic

TX ic

NR UL

TX ic
i

If TL DL

i
Max NR UL
AllTX ic
TX ic
i

Req

, TL UL

k 1

k 1

TX i ic

NR UL

k 1

TX ic
i

Req

,and NR UL

Req

arethesimulationconvergencethresholdsdefinedwhencreating

thesimulation,Atollstopsthesimulationinthefollowingcases.
Convergence:Simulationhasconvergedbetweeniterationk1andkif:
TX i ic

TL DL

TX i ic

TL DL

TX i ic

Req

AND TL UL

TX i ic

TL UL

TX i ic

Req

AND NR UL

TX i ic

NR UL

Req

Noconvergence:Simulationhasnotconvergedevenafterthelastiteration,i.e.,k=MaxNumberofIterationsdefined
whencreatingthesimulation,if:
TX i ic

TL DL

TX i ic

TL DL

TX i ic

Req

OR TL UL

TX i ic

TL UL

TX i ic

Req

OR NR UL

TX i ic

NR UL

Req

11. Repeatstheabovesteps(fromstep 3.)fortheiterationk+1usingthenewcalculatedloadsasthecurrentloads.

SimulationResults
Attheendofthesimulationprocess,themainresultsobtainedare:

Downlinktrafficload
Uplinktrafficload
Uplinknoiserise

TheseresultscanbeusedasinputforC/(I+N)basedcoveragepredictions.
Inadditiontotheaboveparameters,thesimulationsalsolisttheconnectionstatusofeachmobile.Mobilescanberejected
dueto:

796

NoCoverage:Ifthemobiledoesnothaveanybestservingcell(step 3.)orifthemobileisnotwithintheservicearea
ofitsbestserver(step 4.).
NoService:Ifthemobileisnotabletoaccessabearerinthedirectionofitsactivity(step 5.),i.e.,UL,DL,orDL+UL.
SchedulerSaturation:Ifthemobileisnotinthelistofmobilesselectedforscheduling(step 7.)
ResourceSaturation:Ifallthecellresourcesareusedupbeforeallocationtothemobileorif,forauseractivein
uplink,theminimumuplinkthroughputdemandishigherthantheuplinkallocatedbandwidththroughput(step 7.)

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

BackhaulSaturation:IfallocatingresourcestoamobilemakestheeffectiveMACaggregatesitethroughputsexceed
themaximumbackhaulthroughputsdefinedforthesite.Thisconditionisonlyverifiedifthesimulationwascreated
withtheBackhaulcapacitycheckboxselected(step 7.)

Connectedmobiles(step 7.)canbe:

ConnectedUL:IfamobileactiveinULisallocatedresourcesinUL.
ConnectedDL:IfamobileactiveinDLisallocatedresourcesinDL.
ConnectedDL+UL:IfamobileactiveinDL+ULisallocatedresourcesinDL+UL.

11.4 CalculationDetails
The following sections describe all the calculation algorithms used in point analysis, calculation of coverage predictions,
calculationsonsubscriberlists,andMonteCarlosimulations.

11.4.1 CoandAdjacentChannelOverlapsCalculation
AWiFinetworkcanconsistofcellsthatusedifferentchannelbandwidths.Therefore,thestartandendfrequenciesofallthe
channelsmaynotexactlycoincide.Channelbandwidthsofcellscanoverlapeachotherwithdifferentratios.

Figure 11.2:CoChannelandAdjacentChannelOverlaps
Thefollowingsectionsdescribehowthecoandadjacentchanneloverlapsarecalculatedbetweenthechannelsusedbyany
studied cell TXi(ic) and any other cell TXj(jc) of the network. In terms of interference calculation, the studied cell can be
consideredavictimofinterferencereceivedfromtheothercellsthatmightbeinterferingthestudiedcell.
TX ic
i

Ifthestudiedcellisassignedachannelnumber N Channel ,itreceivescochannelinterferenceonthechannelbandwidthof

TX i ic

TX i ic

N Channel ,andadjacentchannelinterferenceontheadjacentchannelbandwidths,i.e.,correspondingto N Channel 1 and

TX i ic

N Channel + 1 .
Inordertocalculatethecoandadjacentchanneloverlapsbetweentwochannels,itisnecessarytocalculatethestartand
end frequencies of both channels (explained in "Conversion From Channel Numbers to Start and End Frequencies" on
page 798).Oncethestartandendfrequenciesareknownforthestudiedandothercells,thecoandadjacentoverlapsand
thetotaloverlapratioarecalculatedasrespectivelyexplainedin:

"CoChannelOverlapCalculation"onpage 798.
"AdjacentChannelOverlapCalculation"onpage 799.
"TotalOverlapRatioCalculation"onpage 800.

797

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

Forsk2014

11.4.1.1 ConversionFromChannelNumberstoStartandEndFrequencies
Input

TX ic
i

TX jc
j

F Start FB and F Start FB :StartfrequencyofthefrequencybandassignedtothecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

F Start FB canrepresenttheuplinkorthedownlinkstartfrequencies( F Start FB UL or F Start FB DL ).
First TX i ic

First TX j jc

N Channel

N Channel and N Channel :ChannelnumbersassignedtocellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

TX i ic

and N Channel

:FirstchannelnumbersthefrequencybandassignedtothecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

TX j jc

Atollconsidersthatthesamechannelnumberisassignedtoacellinthedownlinkanduplink,i.e.,thechannelnumber
youassigntoacellisconsideredforuplinkanddownlinkboth.
TX i ic

TX j jc

W Channel and W Channel :BandwidthsofthechannelsassignedtocellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

ICS FB

TX ic
i

TX i ic

CN FB

TX jc
j

and ICS FB

:InterchannelspacingofthefrequencybandsassignedtocellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

TX j jc

and CN FB

:ChannelnumberstepofthefrequencybandsassignedtocellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

Calculations
Channelnumbersareconvertedintostartandendfrequenciesasfollows:
ForcellTXi(ic):
TX i ic

F Start

TX i ic

F End

TX i ic

TX ic

TX i ic

TXi ic N First TXi ic

Channel
Channel
N
-------------------------------------------------------
TX i ic

CN FB

TX ic

i
i
= F Start FB + W Channel + ICS FB

TX i ic

= F Start + W Channel

ForcellTXj(jc):
TX j jc

TX j jc

TX j jc

TX j jc

F End

TX j jc

N TXj jc N First TXj jc

Channel
Channel
-------------------------------------------------------
TX jc

CN FB

TX j jc

F Start = F Start FB + W Channel + ICS FB

TX j jc

= F Start FB + W Channel

Output
TX i ic

TX j jc

F Start and F Start :StartfrequenciesforthecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

F End

TX i ic

TX j jc

and F End

:EndfrequenciesforthecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

11.4.1.2 CoChannelOverlapCalculation
Input

TX i ic

TX j jc

F Start and F Start : Start frequencies for the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Conversion From Channel
NumberstoStartandEndFrequencies"onpage 798.

TX ic
i

F End

TX jc
j

and F End

: End frequencies for the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Conversion From Channel

NumberstoStartandEndFrequencies"onpage 798.

TX ic
i

W Channel :BandwidthofthechannelassignedtothestudiedcellTXi(ic).

Calculations
AtollfirstverifiesthatcochanneloverlapexistsbetweenthecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

798

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Cochanneloverlapexistsif:
TX ic
i

TX jc
j

F Start F End

TX ic
i

AND F End

TX jc
j

F Start

Otherwisethereisnocochanneloverlap.
Atollcalculatesthebandwidthofthecochanneloverlapasfollows:
TX i ic TX j jc

TX jc

TX ic

TX jc

TX ic

j
i
j
i
= Min F End F End Max F Start F Start

W CCO

Thecochanneloverlapratioisgivenby:
TX ic TX jc
i
j

TX i ic TX j jc

W CCO
= ---------------------------------TX i ic
W Channel

r CCO

Output

TX i ic TX j jc

r CCO

:CochanneloverlapratiobetweenthecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

11.4.1.3 AdjacentChannelOverlapCalculation
Input

TX i ic

TX j jc

F Start and F Start : Start frequencies for the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Conversion From Channel
NumberstoStartandEndFrequencies"onpage 798.

TX i ic

F End

TX j jc

and F End

: End frequencies for the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Conversion From Channel

NumberstoStartandEndFrequencies"onpage 798.

TX ic
i

W Channel :BandwidthofthechannelassignedtothestudiedcellTXi(ic).

Calculations
Atoll first verifies that adjacent channel overlaps exist between (the lowerfrequency and the higherfrequency adjacent
channelsof)thecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).
Adjacentchanneloverlapexistsonthelowerfrequencyadjacentchannelif:
TX i ic

TX i ic

TX j jc

F Start W Channel F End

TX i ic

TX j jc

AND F Start F Start

Adjacentchanneloverlapexistsonthehigherfrequencyadjacentchannelif:
TX i ic

F End

TX j jc

F End

TX i ic

AND F End

TX i ic

TX j jc

+ W Channel F Start

Otherwisethereisnoadjacentchanneloverlap.
Atolldeterminestheadjacentchanneloverlapratioasfollows:
Bandwidthofthelowerfrequencyadjacentchanneloverlap:
TX ic TX jc
i
j

W ACO

TX jc

TX ic

TX jc

TX ic

TX ic

j
i
j
i
i
= Min FEnd F Start Max F Start F Start W Channel

Thelowerfrequencyadjacentchanneloverlapratioisgivenby:
TX ic TX jc
i
j
r ACO
L

TX i ic TX j jc

W ACO
L
= ---------------------------------TX i ic
W Channel

Bandwidthofthehigherfrequencyadjacentchanneloverlap:
TX i ic TX j jc

W ACO

TX j jc

TX i ic

= Min FEnd F End

TX ic

TX jc

TX ic

i
j
i
+ W Channel Max F Start F End

Thehigherfrequencyadjacentchanneloverlapratioisgivenby:

799

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

Forsk2014

TX ic TX jc
i
j
r ACO
H

TX ic TX jc
i
j

W ACO
H
= ---------------------------------TX ic
i
W Channel

Theadjacentchanneloverlapratioisgivenby:
TX i ic TX j jc

r ACO

TX i ic TX j jc

= r ACO

TX i ic TX j jc

+ r ACO

Output
TX i ic TX j jc

r ACO

:AdjacentchanneloverlapratiobetweenthecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

11.4.1.4 TotalOverlapRatioCalculation
Input
TX i ic TX j jc

r CCO

: Cochannel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) andTXj(jc) as calculated in "CoChannel Overlap

Calculation"onpage 798.
TX i ic TX j jc

r ACO

:AdjacentchanneloverlapratiobetweenthecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc)ascalculatedin"AdjacentChannel

OverlapCalculation"onpage 799.
TX i ic

f ACS FB :AdjacentchannelsuppressionfactordefinedforthefrequencybandofthecellTXi(ic).

W Channel and W Channel :BandwidthsofthechannelsassignedtothecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

TX i ic

TX j jc

Calculations
Thetotaloverlapratiois:

TX i ic TX j jc

rO

TX ic

f ACS FB
TX ic TX jc TX ic TX jc
----------------------------
10
j
i
j
r i

+ r ACO
10
CCO

TX i ic

TX j jc

ifW Channel W Channel

TX ic

f ACS FB
TX i ic
TX ic TX jc TX ic TX jc
----------------------------
TX i ic
TX j jc
W Channel
10
i
j
i
j
r

-------------------- TX jc ifW Channel W Channel

+ r ACO
10
CCO

W Channel

TX i ic

W Channel
Themultiplicativefactor --------------------isusedtonormalisethetransmissionpoweroftheinterferingcellTXj(jc).Thismeansthat
TX j jc
W Channel
TX j jc

TX j jc

iftheinterferingcelltransmitsatX dBmoverabandwidthof W Channel ,anditinterferesoverabandwidthlessthan W Channel ,

TX ic
i

W Channel
theinterferencefromthiscellshouldnotbeconsideredatX dBmbutlessthanthat.Thefactor --------------------convertsX dBmover
TX jc
j
W Channel
TX j jc

TX j jc

W Channel toY dBm(whichislessthanX dBm)overlessthan W Channel .

Output

800

TX i ic TX j jc

rO

:TotalcoandadjacentchanneloverlapratiobetweenthecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc).

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

11.4.2 SignalLevelandQualityCalculations
The following sections describe how signal levels, noise and interference, C/N, and C/(I+N) ratios are calculated on the
downlinkanduplink.

"SignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 801.
"NoiseCalculation(DL)"onpage 802.
"InterferenceCalculation(DL)"onpage 802.
"C/NCalculation(DL)"onpage 804.
"C/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(DL)"onpage 805.
"SignalLevelCalculation(UL)"onpage 807.
"NoiseCalculation(UL)"onpage 808.
"InterferenceCalculation(UL)"onpage 808.
"C/NCalculation(UL)"onpage 810.
"C/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(UL)"onpage 811.

11.4.2.1 SignalLevelCalculation(DL)
Input
TX ic
i

P DL

TX i

TX i

:TransmissionpowerofthecellTXi(ic).

:TransmitterantennagainfortheantennausedbythetransmitterTXi.( G
:TotaltransmitterlossesforthetransmitterTXi( L

TX i

TX i

TX i

= G Ant ).

= L Total DL ).

TX i

L Path :Pathloss( L Path = L Model + L Ant ).

L Model :Lossonthetransmitterreceiverpath(pathloss)calculatedusingapropagationmodel.

L Ant :Antennaattenuation(fromantennapatterns)calculatedfortheantennausedbythetransmitterTXi.

M Shadowing Model :Shadowingmarginbasedonthemodelstandarddeviation.

TX

Incoveragepredictions,shadowingmarginsaretakenintoaccountwhentheoption"Shadowingtakenintoaccount"
isselected.

L Indoor :Indoorlossestakenintoaccountwhentheoption"Indoorcoverage"isselected.

Mi
Mi

:Receiverterminallossesforthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.
:Receiverterminalsantennagainforthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Mi

L Ant :Receiverterminalsantennaattenuationcalculatedforthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Mi

Forcalculatingtheusefulsignallevelfromthebestservingcell, L Ant isdeterminedinthedirection(H,V)=(0,0)from

Mi

theantennapatternsoftheantennausedbyMi.Forcalculatingtheinterferingsignallevelfromanyinterferer, L Ant
isdeterminedinthedirectionoftheinterferingcellfromtheantennapatternsoftheantennausedbyMi,whilethe
antennaispointedtowardsMisbestservingcell.
Mi

L Body :Bodylossdefinedfortheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Calculations
Thereceivedsignallevels(dBm)fromanycellTXi(ic)arecalculatedforapixel,subscriber,ormobileMiasfollows:
TX i ic

C DL

= EIRP

TX i ic

L Path M Shadowing Model L Indoor + G

Mi

Mi

Mi

Mi

L Ant L Body

WhereEIRPistheeffectiveisotropicradiatedpowerofthecellcalculatedasfollows:
EIRP

TX i ic

TX i ic

= P DL

+G

TX i

TX i

801

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

Forsk2014

Ifyouwishtoexcludetheenergycorrespondingtothecyclicprefix(guardinterval)inthe
totalsymboldurationfromtheusefulsignallevel,youmustaddthefollowinglinesinthe
Atoll.inifile:
[WiMAX]
ExcludeCPFromUsefulPower = 1
TX i ic

When this option is active, the cyclic prefix energyis excluded from C DL
TX i ic

words,thefactor 10 Log 1 r CP

. In other

TX ic

isaddedto C i .
DL

Independant of the option, interference levels are calculated for the total symbol
durations,i.e.,theenergyoftheusefulsymboldurationandthecyclicprefixenergy.
Output

TX i ic

C DL

:ReceivedsignallevelfromthecellTXi(ic)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

11.4.2.2 NoiseCalculation(DL)
FordeterminingtheC/NandC/(I+N),Atollcalculatesthedownlinknoiseoverthechannelbandwidthusedbythecell.The
usedbandwidthdependsonthenumberofusedsubcarriers.Thedownlinknoisecomprisesthermalnoiseandthenoisefigure
oftheequipment.Thethermalnoisedensitydependsonthetemperature,i.e.,itremainsconstantforagiventemperature.
However,thevalueofthethermalnoisevarieswiththeusedbandwidth.
Input

K:Boltzmannsconstant.
T:TemperatureinKelvin.

N SCa Used :NumberofusedsubcarriersdefinedfortheframeconfigurationofacellTXi(ic).

N SCa Total :TotalnumberofsubcarriersdefinedfortheframeconfigurationofacellTXi(ic).

nf

TX i ic
TX ic
i
Mi

:Noisefigureoftheterminalusedforcalculationsbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Calculations
Thepowerspectraldensityofthermalnoiseiscalculatedasfollows:
n 0 = 10 Log K T 1000 = 174dBm/Hz
Thethermalnoiseforacelliscalculatedas:
N TXi ic
TX i ic
SCa Used
n 0 DL = n 0 + 10 Log ------------------------TX i ic

N SCa Total
Thedownlinknoiseisthesumofthethermalnoiseandthenoisefigureoftheterminalusedforthecalculationsbythepixel,
subscriber,ormobileMi.
TX ic
i

n DL

TX ic
i

= n 0 DL + nf

Output

TX i ic

n DL

:DownlinknoiseforthecellTXi(ic).

11.4.2.3 InterferenceCalculation(DL)
Theinterferencereceivedbyanypixel,subscriber,ormobile,servedbyacellTXi(ic)fromothercellsTXj(jc)canbedefinedas
thesignallevelsreceivedfrominterferingcellsTXj(jc)dependingontheoverlapthatexistsbetweenthechannelsusedbythe
cellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc),andonthetrafficloadsoftheinterferingcellsTXj(jc).

802

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Input
TX jc
j

C DL

:ReceivedsignallevelfromthecellTXi(ic)asexplainedin"SignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 801.

M Shadowing C I :ShadowingmarginbasedontheC/Istandarddeviation.
In Monte Carlo simulations, the received signal levels from interferers already include M Shadowing Model , as
explainedin"SignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 801.
Incoveragepredictions,theratio M Shadowing Model M Shadowing C I isappliedtotheinterferingsignals(formore
information,see"ShadowFadingModel"onpage 86).Asthereceivedsignallevelsfrominterferersalreadyinclude
M Shadowing Model , M Shadowing C I is added to the signal levels from interferers in order to achieve the ratio
M Shadowing Model M Shadowing C I :
TX j jc

C DL

TX j jc

= C DL

+ M Shadowing C I

Incoveragepredictions,shadowingmarginsaretakenintoaccountwhentheoption"Shadowingtakenintoaccount"
isselected.

TX j jc

TL DL

:DownlinktrafficloadoftheinterferingcellTXj(jc).

TrafficloadscaneitherbecalculatedusingMonteCarlosimulations,orenteredmanuallyforeachcell.Calculationof
trafficloadsisexplainedin"SimulationProcess"onpage 795.

TX i ic TX j jc

rO

: Total channel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Co and Adjacent

ChannelOverlapsCalculation"onpage 797.
Calculations
Interference(dBm)fromanycellTXj(jc)iscalculatedforapixel,subscriber,ormobileMiasfollows:
TX j jc

I DL

TX j jc

= C DL

TX i ic TX j jc

+ fO

TX j jc

Inter Tech

+ f TL DL + I DL

Ifyouwishtoexcludetheenergycorrespondingtothecyclicprefix(guardinterval)inthe
totalsymboldurationfromtheusefulsignallevel,youmustaddthefollowinglinesinthe
Atoll.inifile:
[WiMAX]
ExcludeCPFromUsefulPower = 1
TX i ic

When this optionis active, the cyclic prefix energy is excluded from C DL
TX i ic

. In other

TX i ic

.
words,thefactor 10 Log 1 r CP isaddedto C DL

Independent of the option, interference levels are calculated for the total symbol
durations,i.e.,theenergyoftheusefulsymboldurationandthecyclicprefixenergy.
Calculationsfortheinterferencereductionfactorsduetochanneloverlappingandtrafficloadareexplainedbelow:
Interferencereductionduetothecoandadjacentchanneloverlapbetweenthestudiedandtheinterferingcells:
InterferencereductionduetothecoandadjacentchanneloverlapbetweenthecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc)iscalculated
asfollows:
TX i ic TX j jc

fO

TX i ic TX j jc

= 10 Log r O

Interferencereductionduetointerferingcellstrafficload:
Theinterferencereductionfactorduetotheinterferingcellstrafficloadiscalculatedasfollows:
TX j jc

TX j jc

f TL DL = 10 Log TL DL

Inter Tech

I DL

istheintertechnologydownlinkinterferencefromtransmittersofanexternalnetwork(linkeddocumentofany

technology)calculatedasfollows:

803

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

Inter Tech

I DL

Forsk2014

TX External

EIRP DL

L Path L Indoor + G

Inter Tech

L Ant L Body f IRF

AllExternalTXs
TX External

Where EIRP DL

isthedownlinkEIRPoftheexternaltransmitter, L Path isthepathlossfromtheexternaltransmitters

tothepixel,subscriber,ormobilelocation, L Indoor istheindoorlossestakenintoaccountwhentheoption"Indoorcoverage"

isselected, L

Mi

isthereceiverterminallossesforthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi, G

Mi

isthereceiverterminalsantenna

Mi

gain for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi, L Ant is the receiver terminals antenna attenuation calculated for the pixel,
M

subscriber,ormobileMi,and L Body isthebodylossdefinedfortheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

CalculationoftheDownlinkIntertechnologyInterference
Thedownlinkintertechnologyinterferenceiscalculatedasfollows:
Inter Tech
I DL

TX k

P DL Rec

---------------------------------------
=
F TX i ic TX k

TX k ICP DL

TX k

Here P DL Rec is the received downlink power from an interfering cell TXk belonging to another technology, and
F TX i ic TX k

ICP DL

istheintertechnologydownlinkchannelprotectionratioforafrequencyoffset F betweentheinterfered

andinterferingfrequencychannelsofTXi(ic)andTXk.
TX k

P DL Rec iscalculatedbasedontheEIRPfromGSMcells,totalpowerfromUMTS,CDMA2000,andTDSCDMAcells,maximum
powerfromLTEcells,preamblepowerfromWiMAXcells,anddownlinkcellpowerfromWiFicells.
Output
TX j jc

I DL

I DL

:Downlinkinterferencereceivedatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMifromanyinterferingcellTXj(jc).

Inter Tech

:Downlinkintertechnologyinterference.

11.4.2.4 C/NCalculation(DL)
Input

TX i ic

C DL

:ReceivedsignallevelfromthecellTXi(ic)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiascalculatedin"SignalLevel

Calculation(DL)"onpage 801.
TX i ic

n DL

:DownlinknoiseforthecellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"NoiseCalculation(DL)"onpage 802.

T AMS :AMSthresholddefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

T B :BearerselectionthresholdsofthebearersdefinedintheWiFiequipmentusedbyMisterminal.

B DL Highest Service :Highestdownlinkbearerdefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,

TX i ic
Mi

Mi

ormobileMi.

Mi

B DL Lowest Service :Lowestdownlinkbearerdefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,

ormobileMi.
TX ic
i

N Ant TX :NumberofMIMOtransmission(downlink)antennasdefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

N Ant RX :NumberofMIMOreception(downlink)antennasdefinedfortheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,or

Mi

mobileMi.

804

Mobility M i :Mobilityusedforthecalculations.
M

i
BLER B DL :DownlinkblockerrorratereadfromthegraphsavailableintheWiFiequipmentassignedtotheterminal

usedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Calculations
TheC/NforacellTXi(ic)arecalculatedasfollowsforanypixel,subscriber,ormobileMi:
TX ic
i

CNR DL

TX ic
i

= C DL

TX ic
i

n DL

BearerDetermination:
Thebearersavailableforselectioninthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMisWiFiequipmentaretheones:

Which are common between Mis and TXi(ic)s equipment (bearer indexes for which selection thresholds are
definedinbothequipment),ifthecorrespondingoptionhasbeensetintheAtoll.inifile.Formoreinformation,
seetheAdministratorManual.

Whoseindexesarewithintherangedefinedbythelowestandthehighestbearerindexesdefinedfortheservice
beingaccessedbyMi.

WhoseselectionthresholdsarelessthantheC/NatMi: T B CNR DL

TX i ic

Mi

Mi

IfthecellsframeconfigurationsupportsAMS,theSTTD/MRCorSUMIMOdiversitygain, G Div DL ,corresponding

tothebearerisappliedtoitsselectionthreshold.ThegainisreadfromthepropertiesoftheWiFiequipment
TX ic

i
i
i
assignedtothepixel,subscriber,ormobileMifor N Ant TX , N Ant RX , Mobility M i , BLER B DL .

DL

The additional diversity gain defined for the clutter class of the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi G Div is also
applied.Therefore,thebearersavailableforselectionareallthebearersdefinedintheWiFiequipmentforwhich
thefollowingistrue:
Mi

Mi

TX i ic

DL

T B G Div DL G Div CNR DL

Thebearerselectedfordatatransferistheonewiththehighestindex.
MIMOSTTD/MRCandSUMIMODiversityGains:
Oncethebearerisknown,theC/Ncalculatedabovebecome:
TX ic
i

TX ic
i

CNR DL

= CNR DL

DL

+ G Div DL + G Div

Mi

Where G Div DL istheSTTD/MRCorSUMIMOdiversitygaincorrespondingtotheselectedbearer.

Output

TX i ic

CNR DL

:C/NfromthecellTXi(ic)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

11.4.2.5 C/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(DL)
Thecarriersignaltointerferenceandnoiseratioiscalculatedinthreesteps.FirstAtollcalculatesthereceivedsignallevelfrom
thestudiedcell(asexplainedin"SignalLevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 801)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileunderstudy.
Next,Atollcalculatestheinterferencereceivedatthesamestudiedpixel,subscriber,ormobilefromalltheinterferingcells
(asexplainedin"InterferenceCalculation(DL)"onpage 802).Interferencefromeachcellisweightedaccordingtothecoand
adjacentchanneloverlapbetweenthestudiedandtheinterferingcells,andthetrafficloadsoftheinterferingcells.Finally,
Atolltakestheratioofthesignallevelandthesumofthetotalinterferencefromothercellsandthedownlinknoise(as
calculatedin"NoiseCalculation(DL)"onpage 802).
Thereceiverterminalisalwaysconsideredtobeorientedtowardsitsbestserver,exceptwhenthe"LockStatus"issetto
"Server+Orientation"forasubscriberinasubscriberlistanditsazimuthandtiltmanuallyedited.InthecaseofNLOSbetween
thereceiverandthebestserver,Atolldoesnottrytofindthedirectionofthestrongestsignal,thereceiverisorientedtowards
thebestserverjustasinthecaseofLOS.
Input

TX i ic

C DL

:ReceivedsignallevelfromthecellTXi(ic)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiascalculatedin"SignalLevel

Calculation(DL)"onpage 801.

TX i ic

n DL

:DownlinknoiseforthecellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"NoiseCalculation(DL)"onpage 802.

805

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks
TX jc
j

I DL

Forsk2014

:InterferencefromanycellTXj(jc)calculatedforapixel,subscriber,ormobileMicoveredbyacellTXi(ic)as

explainedin"InterferenceCalculation(DL)"onpage 802.
Inter Tech

NR DL

TX ic
i
T AMS

T B :BearerselectionthresholdsofthebearersdefinedintheWiFiequipmentusedbyMisterminal.

B DL Highest Service :Highestdownlinkbearerdefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,

:Intertechnologydownlinknoiserise.

:AMSthresholddefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

Mi

Mi

ormobileMi.
M

B DL Lowest Service :Lowestdownlinkbearerdefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,

ormobileMi.
TX i ic

N Ant TX :NumberofMIMOtransmission(downlink)antennasdefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

N Ant RX :NumberofMIMOreception(downlink)antennasdefinedfortheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,or

mobileMi.

Mobility M i :Mobilityusedforthecalculations.

i
BLER B DL :DownlinkblockerrorratereadfromthegraphsavailableintheWiFiequipmentassignedtotheterminal

usedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.
Inter Tech

I DL

:Downlinkintertechnologyinterferenceascalculatedin"InterferenceCalculation(DL)"onpage 802.

Calculations
ThedownlinkC/(I+N)foracellTXi(ic)iscalculatedasfollowsforanypixel,subscriber,ormobileMi:

TX i ic

CINR DL

TX i ic

= C DL

TX j jc

TX i ic
n DL
IDL

Inter

Tech
Inter

Tech
------------------------------------
+ NR

+
10 Log
10 + I DL
10
DL

10

10

AllTX j jc

TheTotalNoise(I+N)foracellTXi(ic)iscalculatedasfollowsforanypixel,subscriber,ormobileMi:
TX ic

TX ic
i

I + N DL

i
TX j jc

n DL
IDL

---------------------
Inter Tech
Inter Tech
10
-----------------= 10 Log
+ 10
+ NR DL
10 + I DL

10

AllTXj jc

BearerDetermination:
Thebearersavailableforselectioninthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMisWiFiequipmentaretheones:

Which are common between Mis and TXi(ic)s equipment (bearer indexes for which selection thresholds are
definedinbothequipment),ifthecorrespondingoptionhasbeensetintheAtoll.inifile.Formoreinformation,
seetheAdministratorManual.

Whoseindexesarewithintherangedefinedbythelowestandthehighestbearerindexesdefinedfortheservice
beingaccessedbyMi.

WhoseselectionthresholdsarelessthanthedownlinkC/(I+N)atMi: T B CINR DL

Mi

TX i ic

IfthecellsframeconfigurationsupportsAMS,theSTTD/MRCorSUMIMOdiversitygain, G Div DL ,corresponding

tothebearerisappliedtoitsselectionthreshold.ThegainisreadfromthepropertiesoftheWiFiequipment
TX ic

i
i
i
assignedtothepixel,subscriber,ormobileMifor N Ant TX , N Ant RX , Mobility M i , BLER BDL .
DL

The additional diversity gain defined for the clutter class of the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi G Div is also
applied.Therefore,thebearersavailableforselectionareallthebearersdefinedintheWiFiequipmentforwhich
thefollowingistrue:

806

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
M

TX ic
i

DL

T B G Div DL G Div CINR DL

Thebearerselectedfordatatransferistheonewiththehighestindex.
MIMOSTTD/MRCandSUMIMODiversityGains:
Oncethebearerisknown,theC/(I+N)calculatedabovebecome:
TX i ic

CINR DL

TX i ic

= CINR DL

Mi

DL

+ G Div DL + G Div

Mi

Where G Div DL istheSTTD/MRCorSUMIMOdiversitygaincorrespondingtotheselectedbearer.

Output
TX i ic

CINR DL

I + N DL

:DownlinkC/(I+N)fromthecellTXi(ic)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

TX i ic

:TotalnoisefromtheinterferingcellsTXj(jc)atthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMicoveredbyacellTXi(ic).

B DL :Bearerassignedtothepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiinthedownlink.

11.4.2.6 SignalLevelCalculation(UL)
Input

Mi

P Max : Maximum transmission power of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi without power
control.

Mi

P Eff :Effectivetransmissionpoweroftheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiafterpowercontrolas
calculatedin"C/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(UL)"onpage 811.
TX i

TX i

L Path :Pathloss( L Path = L Model + L Ant ).

L Model :Lossonthetransmitterreceiverpath(pathloss)calculatedusingapropagationmodel.

L Ant :Antennaattenuation(fromantennapatterns)calculatedfortheantennausedbythetransmitterTXi.

M Shadowing Model :Shadowingmarginbasedonthemodelstandarddeviation.

TX i

:TransmitterantennagainfortheantennausedbythetransmitterTXi( G

TX i

:TotaltransmitterlossesforthetransmitterTXi( L

TX i

= G Ant ).

= L Total UL ).

TX i

TX i

Incoveragepredictions,shadowingmarginsaretakenintoaccountwhentheoption"Shadowingtakenintoaccount"
isselected.

L Indoor :Indoorlossestakenintoaccountwhentheoption"Indoorcoverage"isselected.

:Receiverterminallossesforthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.
i

:Receiverterminalsantennagainforthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

L Ant :Receiverterminalsantennaattenuationcalculatedforthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.
Mi

Forcalculatingtheusefulsignallevelfromthebestservingcell, L Ant isdeterminedinthedirection(H,V)=(0,0)from

M

theantennapatternsoftheantennausedbyMi.Forcalculatingtheinterferingsignallevelfromanyinterferer, L Ant
isdeterminedinthedirectionoftheinterferingcellfromtheantennapatternsoftheantennausedbyMi,whilethe
antennaispointedtowardsMisbestservingcell.

Mi

L Body :Bodylossdefinedfortheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Calculations
Thereceivedtrafficsignallevel(dBm)fromapixel,subscriber,ormobileMiatitsservingcellTXi(ic)iscalculatedasfollows:

807

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks
M

Forsk2014

C UL = EIRP UL L Path M Shadowing Model L Indoor + G

TX

TX

L Ant L Body

WhereEIRPistheeffectiveisotropicradiatedpoweroftheterminalcalculatedasfollows:
M

EIRP UL = P
With P

Mi

+G

Mi

= P Max withoutpowercontrolatthestartofthecalculations,andisthe P

Mi

Mi

= P Eff afterpowercontrol.

Output

C UL :Receiveduplinksignallevelfromthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiatacellTXi(ic).

11.4.2.7 NoiseCalculation(UL)
FordeterminingtheuplinkC/NandC/(I+N),Atollcalculatestheuplinknoiseoverthechannelbandwidthusedbythecell.The
usedbandwidthdependsonthenumberofusedsubcarriers.Theuplinknoisecomprisesthermalnoiseandthenoisefigure
oftheequipment.Thethermalnoisedensitydependsonthetemperature,i.e.,itremainsconstantforagiventemperature.
However,thevalueofthethermalnoisevarieswiththeusedbandwidth.
Input

K:Boltzmannsconstant.
T:TemperatureinKelvin.

N SCa Used :NumberofusedsubcarriersdefinedfortheframeconfigurationofacellTXi(ic).

N SCa Total :TotalnumberofsubcarriersdefinedfortheframeconfigurationofacellTXi(ic).

nf

TX i ic
TX i ic

TX i ic

:NoisefigureofthecellTXi(ic).

Calculations
Thepowerspectraldensityofthermalnoiseiscalculatedasfollows:
n 0 = 10 Log K T 1000 = 174dBm/Hz
Thethermalnoiseforacelliscalculatedas:
N TXi ic
TX i ic
SCa Used
n 0 UL = n 0 + 10 Log ------------------------ TX i ic
N SCa Total
TheuplinknoiseisthesumofthethermalnoiseandthenoisefigureofthecellTXi(ic).
TX i ic

n UL

TX i ic

= n 0 UL + nf

TX i ic

Output

TX ic
i

n UL

:UplinknoiseforthecellTXi(ic).

11.4.2.8 InterferenceCalculation(UL)
TheuplinkinterferenceisonlycalculatedduringMonteCarlosimulations.Incoveragepredictions,theuplinknoiserisevalues
alreadyavailableinsimulationresultsorintheCellstableareused.
TheinterferencereceivedbyacellTXi(ic)fromaninterferingmobilecoveredbyacellTXj(jc)canbedefinedastheuplinksignal
levelreceivedfrominterferingmobilesMjdependingontheoverlapthatexistsbetweenthechannelsusedbythecellsTXi(ic)
andTXj(jc),onthetrafficloadsoftheinterferingmobileMj.
Thecalculationofuplinkinterferencecanbedividedintotwoparts:

808

Calculation of the uplink interference from each individual interfering mobile as explained in "Interference Signal
LevelsCalculation(UL)"onpage 809.
Calculationoftheuplinknoiserisewhichrepresentsthetotaluplinkinterferencefromalltheinterferingmobilesas
explainedin"NoiseRiseCalculation(UL)"onpage 809.

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

11.4.2.8.1

InterferenceSignalLevelsCalculation(UL)
Input

C UL :UplinksignallevelreceivedatacellTXi(ic)fromaninterferingmobileMjcoveredbyacellTXj(jc)ascalculatedin
"SignalLevelCalculation(UL)"onpage 807.

TX i ic TX j jc

rO

: Total channel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Co and Adjacent

ChannelOverlapsCalculation"onpage 797.

Mj

TL UL :UplinktrafficloadoftheinterferingmobileMj.
Traffic loads are calculated during Monte Carlo simulations as explained in "Scheduling and Radio Resource
Allocation"onpage 818.

Calculations
TheuplinkinterferencereceivedatacellTXi(ic)fromaninterferingmobileMjcoveredbyacellTXj(jc)iscalculatedasfollows:
Mj

TX i ic TX j jc

Mj

I UL = C UL + f O

Mj

+ f TL UL

Calculationsfortheinterferencereductionfactorsduetochanneloverlappinganduplinktrafficloadareexplainedbelow:
Interferencereductionduetothecoandadjacentchanneloverlapbetweenthestudiedandtheinterferingcells:
InterferencereductionduetothecoandadjacentchanneloverlapbetweenthecellsTXi(ic)andTXj(jc)iscalculated
asfollows:
TX i ic TX j jc

fO

TX i ic TX j jc

= 10 Log r O

Interferencereductionduetointerferingmobilestrafficload:
Theinterferencereductionfactorduetotheinterferingmobilesuplinktrafficloadiscalculatedasfollows:
M

j
j
f TL UL = 10 Log TL UL

Output

11.4.2.8.2

Mj

I UL :UplinkinterferencesignallevelreceivedatacellTXi(ic)fromaninterferingmobileMjcoveredbyacellTXj(jc).

NoiseRiseCalculation(UL)
TheuplinknoiseriseisdefinedastheratioofthetotaluplinkinterferencereceivedbyanycellTXi(ic)frominterferingmobiles
MjpresentinthecoverageareasofothercellsTXj(jc)totheuplinknoiseofthecellTXi(ic).Inotherwords,itistheratio(I+N)/N.
Input

I UL :UplinkinterferencesignallevelsreceivedatacellTXi(ic)frominterferingmobilesMjcoveredbyothercellsTXj(jc)
ascalculatedin"InterferenceSignalLevelsCalculation(UL)"onpage 809.
TX i ic

n UL

NRUL

:UplinknoiseforthecellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"NoiseCalculation(UL)"onpage 808.

Inter Tech

:Intertechnologyuplinknoiserise.

Calculations
Theuplinknoiseriseandtotalnoise(I+N)forthecellTXi(ic)arecalculatedasfollows:

TX i ic

NR UL

TX i ic

M j
n

UL -
I UL

-------------------TX i ic

Inter Tech
10
--------

= 10 Log
n UL
10 + 10
+ NR UL

10

AllM j

AllTX jc

Foranypixel,subscriber,ormobileMiintheinterferedcellTXi(ic),Atollcalculatestheuplinktotalnoise(I+N)asfollows:

809

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks
TX ic
i

I + N UL

Forsk2014
TX ic
i

= NR UL

TX ic
i

+ n UL

Output
TX ic
i

NR UL

I + N UL

:UplinknoiseriseforthecellTXi(ic).

TX i ic

:TotalnoiseforacellTXi(ic)calculatedforanypixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

11.4.2.9 C/NCalculation(UL)
Input
Mi

C UL :Receiveduplinksignallevelfromthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiatitsservingcellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin

"SignalLevelCalculation(UL)"onpage 807.
TX i ic

n UL

:UplinknoiseforthecellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"NoiseCalculation(UL)"onpage 808.

TX i ic

T AMS :AMSthresholddefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

P Max :Maximumtransmissionpoweroftheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

P Min :Minimumtransmissionpoweroftheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

M PC :Powercontrolmargindefinedintheglobalnetworksettings.

T B :BearerselectionthresholdsofthebearersdefinedintheWiFiequipmentusedbythecellTXi(ic).

B UL Highest Service :Highestdownlinkbearerdefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,

Mi
Mi

Mi

Mi

ormobileMi.
Mi

B UL Lowest Service :Lowestdownlinkbearerdefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,

ormobileMi.
Mi

N Ant TX :NumberofMIMOtransmission(uplink)antennasdefinedfortheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,or

mobileMi.
TX i ic

N Ant RX :NumberofMIMOreception(uplink)antennasdefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

Mobility M i :Mobilityusedforthecalculations.

i
BLER B UL :UplinkblockerrorratereadfromthegraphsavailableintheWiFiequipmentassignedtothecellTXi(ic).

Calculations
TheuplinkC/Nfromapixel,subscriber,ormobileMiatitsservingcellTXi(ic)iscalculatedasfollows:
M

TX ic
i

CNR UL = C UL n UL

BearerDetermination:
ThebearersavailableforselectioninthecellTXi(ic)sWiFiequipmentaretheones:

810

Which are common between Mis and TXi(ic)s equipment (bearer indexes for which selection thresholds are
definedinbothequipment),ifthecorrespondingoptionhasbeensetintheAtoll.inifile.Formoreinformation,
seetheAdministratorManual.

Whoseindexesarewithintherangedefinedbythelowestandthehighestbearerindexesdefinedfortheservice
beingaccessedbyMi.

WhoseselectionthresholdsarelessthantheuplinkC/NatMi: T B CNR UL

Mi

Mi

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

TX ic
i

IfthecellsframeconfigurationsupportsAMS,theSTTD/MRCorSUMIMOdiversitygain, G Div UL ,corresponding

tothebearerisappliedtoitsselectionthreshold.ThegainisreadfromthepropertiesoftheWiFiequipment
TX ic

i
i
i
assignedtothecellTXi(ic)for N Ant RX , N Ant TX , Mobility M i , BLER BUL .

UL

The additional diversity gain defined for the clutter class of the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi G Div is also
applied.Therefore,thebearersavailableforselectionareallthebearersdefinedintheWiFiequipmentforwhich
thefollowingistrue:
M

TX ic
i

UL

T B G Div UL G Div CNR UL

Thebearerselectedfordatatransferistheonewiththehighestindex.
MIMOSTTD/MRCandSUMIMODiversityGains:
Oncethebearerisknown,theC/Ncalculatedabovebecome:
Mi

Mi

TX i ic

UL

CNR UL = CNR UL + G Div UL + G Div

TX i ic

Where G Div UL istheSTTD/MRCorSUMIMOdiversitygaincorrespondingtotheselectedbearer.

UplinkPowerControl:
Thepixel,subscriber,ormobileMireducesitstransmissionpowersothattheuplinkC/Nfromitatitscellisjust
enoughtogettheselectedbearer.
If with P

Mi

Mi

Mi

= P Max AND CNR UL T

TX i ic
Mi

+ M PC , where T

B UL

TX i ic
Mi
B UL

is the bearer selection threshold, from the WiFi

equipmentassignedtothecellTXi(ic),forthebearerselectedforthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.
ThetransmissionpowerofMiisreducedtodeterminetheeffectivetransmissionpowerfromthepixel,subscriber,or
mobileMiasfollows:
Mi
M i TX i ic
Mi

Mi
P Eff = Max P Max CNR UL T M + M PC P Min
i

UL

Mi

Mi

CNR UL iscalculatedagainusing P Eff .

Output

Mi

CNR UL :UplinkC/Nfromapixel,subscriber,ormobileMiatitservingcellTXi(ic).

11.4.2.10 C/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(UL)
Thecarriersignaltointerferenceandnoiseratioiscalculatedinthreesteps.First,Atollcalculatesthereceivedsignallevel
fromeachpixel,subscriber,ormobileatitsservingcellusingtheeffectivepoweroftheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,
ormobileasexplainedin"SignalLevelCalculation(UL)"onpage 807.Next,Atollcalculatestheuplinkcarriertonoiseratioas
explainedin"C/NCalculation(UL)"onpage 810.Finally,determinestheuplinkC/(I+N)bydividingthepreviouslycalculated
uplinkC/Nbytheuplinknoiserisevalueofthecellascalculatedin"NoiseRiseCalculation(UL)"onpage 809.
TheuplinknoiserisecanbesetbytheusermanuallyforeachcellorcalculatedusingMonteCarlosimulations.
Thereceiverterminalisalwaysconsideredtobeorientedtowardsitsbestserver,exceptwhenthe"LockStatus"issetto
"Server+Orientation"forasubscriberinasubscriberlistanditsazimuthandtiltmanuallyedited.InthecaseofNLOSbetween
thereceiverandthebestserver,Atolldoesnottrytofindthedirectionofthestrongestsignal,thereceiverisorientedtowards
thebestserverjustasinthecaseofLOS.
Input

Mi

CNR UL :UplinkC/Nfromapixel,subscriber,ormobileMiatitservingcellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"C/NCalculation(UL)"
onpage 810.

TX i ic

NRUL

:UplinknoiseriseforthecellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"NoiseRiseCalculation(UL)"onpage 809.

811

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

Forsk2014

TX ic
i

T AMS :AMSthresholddefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

P Max :Maximumtransmissionpoweroftheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

P Min :Minimumtransmissionpoweroftheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

M PC :Powercontrolmargindefinedintheglobalnetworksettings.

T B :BearerselectionthresholdsofthebearersdefinedintheWiFiequipmentusedbythecellTXi(ic).

B UL Highest Service :Highestdownlinkbearerdefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,

M
M

i
i

Mi

Mi

ormobileMi.
Mi

B UL Lowest Service :Lowestdownlinkbearerdefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,

ormobileMi.
Mi

N Ant TX :NumberofMIMOtransmission(uplink)antennasdefinedfortheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,or

mobileMi.
TX i ic

N Ant RX :NumberofMIMOreception(uplink)antennasdefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

Mobility M i :Mobilityusedforthecalculations.

i
BLER B UL :UplinkblockerrorratereadfromthegraphsavailableintheWiFiequipmentassignedtothecellTXi(ic).

Calculations
TheuplinkC/(I+N)foranypixel,subscriber,ormobileMiatacellTXi(ic)iscalculatedasfollows:
Mi

TX i ic

Mi

CINR UL = CNR UL NRUL

BearerDetermination:
ThebearersavailableforselectioninthecellTXi(ic)sWiFiequipmentaretheones:

Which are common between Mis and TXi(ic)s equipment (bearer indexes for which selection thresholds are
definedinbothequipment),ifthecorrespondingoptionhasbeensetintheAtoll.inifile.Formoreinformation,
seetheAdministratorManual.

Whoseindexesarewithintherangedefinedbythelowestandthehighestbearerindexesdefinedfortheservice
beingaccessedbyMi.

WhoseselectionthresholdsarelessthantheuplinkC/(I+N)atMi: T B CINR UL

TX i ic

IfthecellsframeconfigurationsupportsAMS,theSTTD/MRCorSUMIMOdiversitygain, G Div UL ,corresponding

tothebearerisappliedtoitsselectionthreshold.ThegainisreadfromthepropertiesoftheWiFiequipment
M

TX ic

i
i
i
assignedtothecellTXi(ic)for N Ant RX , N Ant TX , Mobility M i , BLER B UL .

UL

The additional diversity gain defined for the clutter class of the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi G Div is also
applied.Therefore,thebearersavailableforselectionareallthebearersdefinedintheWiFiequipmentforwhich
thefollowingistrue:
Mi

TX i ic

UL

Mi

T B G Div UL G Div CINR UL

Thebearerselectedfordatatransferistheonewiththehighestindex.
MIMOSTTD/MRCandSUMIMODiversityGains:
Oncethebearerisknown,theC/(I+N)calculatedabovebecome:
Mi

Mi

TX i ic

UL

CINR UL = CINR UL + G Div UL + G Div

TX i ic

Where G Div UL istheSTTD/MRCorSUMIMOdiversitygaincorrespondingtotheselectedbearer.

UplinkPowerControl:

812

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Thepixel,subscriber,ormobileMireducesitstransmissionpowersothattheuplinkC/(I+N)fromitatitscellisjust
enoughtogettheselectedbearer.
Ifwith P

= P Max AND CINR UL T

TX ic
i
M
i
B
UL

+ M PC ,where T

TX ic
i
M
i
B
UL

isthebearerselectionthreshold,fromtheWiFi

equipmentassignedtothecellTXi(ic),forthebearerselectedforthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.
ThetransmissionpowerofMiisreducedtodeterminetheeffectivetransmissionpowerfromthepixel,subscriber,or
mobileMiasfollows:
Mi
M i TX ic
Mi
Mi

i
P Eff = Max P Max CINR UL T M + M PC P Min
i

UL

Mi

Mi

CINR UL iscalculatedagainusing P Eff .

Output
Mi

CINR UL :UplinkC/(I+N)fromapixel,subscriber,ormobileMiatitservingcellTXi(ic).

P Eff :Effectivetransmissionpoweroftheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

B UL :Bearerassignedtothepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiintheuplink.

Mi
M

11.4.3 BestServerDetermination
InWiFi,bestserverreferstoacell("servingtransmitter""referencecell"pair)fromwhichapixel,subscriber,ormobileMi
getsthehighestsignallevel.Thiscalculationalsodetermineswhetherthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiiswithinthecoverage
areaofanytransmitterornot.
Input

TX i ic

C DL

:DownlinksignallevelreceivedfromanycellTXi(ic)atapixel,subscriber,ormobileMiascalculatedin"Signal

LevelCalculation(DL)"onpage 801usingtheterminalandserviceparameters( L

Mi

, G

Mi

Mi

Mi

, L Ant ,and L Body )ofMi.

Calculations
Thebestserverofanypixel,subscriber,ormobileMi, BSM ,isthecellfromwhichthereceiveddownlinksignallevelisthe
i

highestamongallthecells.Thebestserverisdeterminedasfollows:
BS M = TX i ic
i

TX ic
TX i ic
i
= Best
C DL
C

AllTX i ic DL

HereicisthecellofthetransmitterTXiwiththehighestpower.However,ifmorethanonecellofthesametransmittercovers
thepixel,subscriber,ormobile,thefinalreferencecellicmightbedifferentfromtheinitialcellic(theonewiththehighest
power). In coverage prediction calculations and in calculations on subsriber lists, the cell of the highest priority layer is
selectedastheserving(reference)cell.InMonteCarlosimulations,arandomcellisselectedastheserving(reference)cell.
Output

BSM :Bestservingcellofthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.
i

11.4.4 ServiceAreaCalculation
InWiFi,apixel,subscriber,ormobileMicanbecoveredbyacell(ascalculatedin"BestServerDetermination"onpage 813)
butcanbeoutsidetheservicearea.Apixel,subscriber,ormobileMiissaidtobewithintheserviceareaofitsbestservingcell
TXi(ic) if the downlink C/N from the cell at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile is greater than or equal to the minimum C/N
thresholddefinedforthecell.

813

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

Forsk2014

Input

TX ic
i

CNR DL

:DownlinkC/NfromthecellTXi(ic)atapixel,subscriber,ormobileMiascalculatedin"C/NCalculation(DL)"

onpage 804.

TX ic
i

T Min

:MinC/NthresholddefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

Calculations
Apixel,subscriber,ormobileMiiswithintheserviceareaofitsbestservingcellTXi(ic)if:
TX ic
i

CNR DL

TX ic
i

T Min

Output

True:Ifthecalculationcriterionissatisfied.
False:Otherwise.

11.4.5 ThroughputCalculation
Throughputsarecalculatedintwosteps.

Calculationofuplinkanddownlinktotalresourcesinacellasexplainedin"CalculationofTotalCellResources"on
page 814.
Calculationofthroughputsasexplainedin"ChannelThroughput,CellCapacity,andPeruserThroughputCalculation"
onpage 815.

11.4.5.1 CalculationofTotalCellResources
Thetotalamountofresourcesinacellisthenumberofmodulationsymbolsthatcanbeusedfordatatransferpersecond.
Input
TX ic
i

W Channel :ChannelbandwidthofthecellTXi(ic).

N SCa Total :TotalnumberofsubcarriersdefinedfortheframeconfigurationofacellTXi(ic).

N SCa Data :NumberofdatasubcarriersdefinedfortheframeconfigurationofacellTXi(ic).

r CP

TX i ic
TX i ic

TX i ic

:CyclicprefixratiodefinedforthecellsframeconfigurationofTXi(ic)or,otherwise,intheglobalnetwork

settings.
Calculations
Atolldeterminestheintersubcarrierspacing.
F

TX i ic

TX i ic

W Channel 10
= ----------------------------------TX i ic
N SCa Total

Atollcalculatestheusefulsymbolduration.
TX i ic
1
D Sym Useful = ------------------TX i ic
F

And,thedurationofthecyclicprefix(guardinterval).
TX i ic

D CP

TX i ic

r CP
= -------------F

Addingthecyclicprefixratiototheusefulsymbolduration,Atolldeterminesthetotalsymbolduration.
TX i ic

TX i ic

TX i ic

D Symbol = D Sym Useful + D CP

Thetotalnumberofmodulationsymbolsinthedownlinkanduplinkare:

814

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
TX ic
i

R DL

TX ic
i

= R UL

TX ic
1
- N SCai Data
= Floor ----------------TX ic
D i
Symbol

Output

TX i ic

R DL

TX i ic

and R UL

:AmountofdownlinkanduplinkresourcesinthecellTXi(ic).

11.4.5.2 ChannelThroughput,CellCapacity,andPeruserThroughputCalculation
Channelthroughputs are calculatedfortheentirechannelresourcesallocatedtothepixel, subscriber,ormobileMi. Cell
capacitiesaresimilartochannelthroughputsbutupperboundbythemaximumdownlinkanduplinktrafficloads.Peruser
throughputs are calculated by dividing the cell capacities by the average number of connects users, downlink or uplink,
definedforthecell.
Input
TX i ic

TL DL Max :MaximumdownlinktrafficloadforthecellTXi(ic).

TL UL Max :MaximumuplinktrafficloadforthecellTXi(ic).

R DL

TX ic
i

TX i ic

: Amount of downlink resources in the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Calculation of Total Cell Resources" on

page 814.
TX i ic

R UL

page 814.
M :Bearerefficiency(bits/symbol)ofthebearerassignedtothepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiinthedownlinkin

: Amount of uplink resources in the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Calculation of Total Cell Resources" on

"C/(I+N)andBearerCalculation(DL)"onpage 805.
M :Bearerefficiency(bits/symbol)ofthebearerassignedtothepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiintheuplinkin"C/

i
B DL

i
UL

(I+N)andBearerCalculation(UL)"onpage 811.

TX i ic

CNR DL

:DownlinkC/NthecellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"C/NCalculation(DL)"onpage 804.

TX i ic

T AMS :AMSthresholddefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

i
i
BLER BDL :DownlinkblockerrorratereadfromtheBLERvs. CINR DL

TX ic

graphavailableintheWiFiequipment

assignedtotheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

i
i
BLER BUL :UplinkblockerrorratereadfromtheBLERvs. CINR UL graphavailableintheWiFiequipmentassigned

tothecellTXi(ic).

Mi

f TP Scaling :Throughputscalingfactordefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobile
Mi.
Mi

TP Offset :Throughputoffsetdefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

N Users DL :NumberofusersconnectedtothecellTXi(ic)indownlink.

N Users UL :NumberofusersconnectedtothecellTXi(ic)inuplink.

TX i ic
TX i ic

Calculations
Downlink:

TX ic
i

PeakMACChannelThroughput: CTP P DL = R DL

M
i
B DL

MIMOSUMIMOGain:

815

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

Forsk2014
Max

IftheframeconfigurationsupportsAMS,SUMIMOgain G SU MIMO isappliedtothebearerefficiency.Thegainisread

fromthepropertiesoftheWiFiequipmentassignedtothepixel,subscriber,ormobileMifor:
TX ic
i

N Ant TX :NumberofMIMOtransmission(downlink)antennasdefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

N Ant RX :NumberofMIMOreception(downlink)antennasdefinedfortheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,

ormobileMi.

Mobility M i :Mobilityusedforthecalculations.

B DL :Bearerassignedtothepixel,subscriber,ormobileMiinthedownlinkasexplainedin"C/(I+N)andBearer

Mi

Calculation(DL)"onpage 805.

i
BLER BDL :DownlinkblockerrorratereadfromthegraphsavailableintheWiFiequipmentassignedtothe

TX i ic

terminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.BLERisdeterminedfor CINR DL

Atoll also takes into account the SUMIMO Gain Factor f SU MIMO defined for the clutter class where the pixel,
subscriber,ormobileMiislocated.

Mi

B DL

TX i ic

Max

Mi

1 + f SU MIMO G SU MIMO 1 if CNR DL

TX i ic

T AMS

B DL

IftheMaxSUMIMOGainfortheexactvalueoftheC/(I+N)isnotavailableinthetable,itisinterpolatedfromthegain
valuesavailablefortheC/(I+N)justlessthanandjustgreaterthantheactualC/(I+N).

i
i
i
EffectiveMACChannelThroughput: CTP E DL = CTP P DL 1 BLER B DL

Mi

PeakMACCellCapacity: Cap P DL = CTP P DL TL DL Max

i
i
i
EffectiveMACCellCapacity: Cap E DL = Cap P DL 1 BLER B DL

Mi

i
CTP E DL

M
f TP Scaling
i
- TP Offset
-----------------------100

i
ApplicationChannelThroughput: CTP A DL

TX i ic

Mi

i
ApplicationCellCapacity: Cap A DL

Mi

i
Cap E DL

Mi

PeakMACThroughputperUser: PUTP P DL

M
f TP Scaling
i
- TP Offset
-----------------------100
Mi

Cap P DL
= ----------------------TX i ic
N Users DL
Mi

Mi
Cap E DL
EffectiveMACThroughputperUser: PUTP E DL = ----------------------TX i ic
N Users DL
Mi

ApplicationThroughputperUser: PUTP A DL

Mi

Mi
f TP Scaling
- TP Offset
= PUTP E DL -----------------------100
Mi

Uplink:

TX ic
i

PeakMACChannelThroughput: CTP P UL = R UL

M
i
B UL

MIMOSUMIMOGain:
Max

IftheframeconfigurationsupportsAMS,SUMIMOgain G SU MIMO isappliedtothebearerefficiency.Thegainisread

fromthepropertiesoftheWiFiequipmentassignedtothecellTXi(ic)for:

Mi

N Ant TX :NumberofMIMOtransmission(uplink)antennasdefinedfortheterminalusedbythepixel,subscriber,
ormobileMi.

816

TX i ic

N Ant RX :NumberofMIMOreception(uplink)antennasdefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Mobility M i :Mobilityusedforthecalculations.

B UL : Bearer assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi in the uplink as explained in "C/(I+N) and Bearer

Calculation(UL)"onpage 811.

i
BLER BUL :UplinkblockerrorratereadfromthegraphsavailableintheWiFiequipmentassignedtothecell

Mi

TXi(ic).BLERisdeterminedfor CINR UL .
Atoll also takes into account the SUMIMO Gain Factor f SU MIMO defined for the clutter class where the pixel,
subscriber,ormobileMiislocated.

Mi

B UL

TX i ic

Max

Mi

1 + fSU MIMO G SU MIMO 1 if CNR DL

TX i ic

T AMS

B UL

IftheMaxSUMIMOGainfortheexactvalueoftheC/(I+N)isnotavailableinthetable,itisinterpolatedfromthegain
valuesavailablefortheC/(I+N)justlessthanandjustgreaterthantheactualC/(I+N).

i
i
i
EffectiveMACChannelThroughput: CTP E UL = CTP P UL 1 BLER B UL

Mi

Mi
f TP Scaling
- TPOffset
= CTP E UL -----------------------100

Mi

Mi

ApplicationChannelThroughput: CTP A UL

PeakMACCellCapacity: Cap P UL = CTP P UL TL UL Max

i
i
i
EffectiveMACCellCapacity: Cap E UL = Cap P UL 1 BLER B UL

Mi

Mi

TX i ic

Mi

ApplicationCellCapacity: Cap A UL

Mi

Mi
f TP Scaling
- TP Offset
= Cap E UL -----------------------100
Mi

Mi

Mi
Cap P UL
PeakMACThroughputperUser: PUTP P UL = ----------------------TX i ic
N Users UL
Mi

Mi

EffectiveMACThroughputperUser: PUTP E UL

Mi

ApplicationThroughputperUser: PUTP A UL

Cap E UL
= ----------------------TX i ic
N Users UL
Mi

Mi
f TP Scaling
- TP Offset
= PUTP E UL -----------------------100
Mi

Output
Mi

CTP P DL :DownlinkpeakMACchannelthroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

CTP E DL :DownlinkeffectiveMACchannelthroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

CTP A DL :Downlinkapplicationchannelthroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Cap P DL :DownlinkpeakMACcellcapacityatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Cap E DL :DownlinkeffectiveMACcellcapacityatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Cap A DL :Downlinkapplicationcellcapacityatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

PUTP P DL :DownlinkpeakMACthroughputperuseratthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

PUTP E DL :DownlinkeffectiveMACthroughputperuseratthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

PUTP A DL :Downlinkapplicationthroughputperuseratthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

CTP P UL :UplinkpeakMACchannelthroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Mi
M

Mi
Mi
Mi

Mi
M

Mi

Mi

817

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks
M

Forsk2014

CTP E UL :UplinkeffectiveMACchannelthroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

CTP A UL :Uplinkapplicationchannelthroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Cap P UL :UplinkpeakMACcellcapacityatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Cap E UL :UplinkeffectiveMACcellcapacityatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Cap A UL :Uplinkapplicationcellcapacityatthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

PUTP P UL :UplinkpeakMACthroughputperuseratthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

PUTP E UL :UplinkeffectiveMACthroughputperuseratthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

PUTP A UL :Uplinkapplicationthroughputperuseratthepixel,subscriber,ormobileMi.

Mi
Mi

Mi
Mi
Mi

11.4.6 SchedulingandRadioResourceManagement
WiFi scheduling and RRM algorithms are explained in "Scheduling and Radio Resource Allocation" on page 818 and the
calculationofuserthroughputsisexplainedin"UserThroughputCalculation"onpage 821.

11.4.6.1 SchedulingandRadioResourceAllocation
Input
TX i ic

TL DL Max :MaximumdownlinktrafficloadforthecellTXi(ic).

TL UL Max :MaximumuplinktrafficloadforthecellTXi(ic).

N Users Max :MaximumnumberofusersdefinedforthecellTXi(ic).

TPD Min DL :DownlinkminimumthroughputdemandfortheserviceaccessedbyamobileMi.

TPD Min UL :UplinkminimumthroughputdemandfortheserviceaccessedbyamobileMi.

TPD Max DL :DownlinkmaximumthroughputdemandfortheserviceaccessedbyamobileMi.

TPD Max UL :UplinkmaximumthroughputdemandfortheserviceaccessedbyamobileMi.

TX ic
i

TX i ic

Mi

:PriorityoftheserviceaccessedbyamobileMi.
Mi
Mi
Mi
Mi

TX ic

i
i
BLER B DL :DownlinkblockerrorratereadfromtheBLERvs. CINR DL

assignedtotheterminalusedbythemobileMi.
M

graphavailableintheWiFiequipment

i
i
BLER B UL :UplinkblockerrorratereadfromtheBLERvs. CINR UL graphavailableintheWiFiequipmentassigned

tothecellTXi(ic).
Mi

f TP Scaling :ThroughputscalingfactordefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythemobileMi.

TP Offset :ThroughputoffsetdefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythemobileMi.

CTP P DL :DownlinkpeakMACchannelthroughputatthemobileMi ascalculatedin"ThroughputCalculation"on

Mi

Mi

page 814.

Mi

CTP E DL :DownlinkeffectiveMACchannelthroughputatthemobileMiascalculatedin"ThroughputCalculation"on
page 814.

Mi

CTP P UL : Uplink peak MAC channel throughput at the mobile Mi as calculated in "Throughput Calculation" on
page 814.

Mi

CTP E UL :UplinkeffectiveMACchannelthroughputatthemobileMi ascalculatedin"ThroughputCalculation"on

page 814.

818

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Calculations
ThefollowingcalculationsaredescribedforanycellTXi(ic)containingtheusersMiforwhichitisthebestserver.
MobileSelection:
TX ic
i

Theschedulerselects N Users mobilesfortheschedulingandRRMprocess.IftheMonteCarlouserdistributionhasgenerated

TX i ic

anumberofuserswhichislessthan N Users Max ,theschedulerkeepsallthemobilesgeneratedforthecellTXi(ic).

TX ic

TX ic

TX ic

i
i
i
N Users = Min N Users Max N Users Generated

Sel

Foracell,mobiles M i

TX ic
i

N Users areselectedforRRMbythescheduler.

ResourceAllocationforMinimumThroughputDemands:
Sel

1. Atollsortsthe M i

Sel

2. Startingwith M i

TX i ic

N Users inorderofdecreasingservicepriority, p
Sel

= 1 upto M i

Sel
Mi

= N ,Atollallocatesthedownlinkanduplinkresourcesrequiredtosatisfyeach

usersminimumthroughputdemandsindownlinkanduplinkasfollows:
Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

R Min DL

Sel
Mi

Sel

Mi
TPD Min DL
TPD Min UL
= -------------------------- and R Min UL = -------------------------Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

CTP P DL

CTP P UL

3. Atollstopstheresourceallocationindownlinkoruplink,

When/Ifindownlink

Sel
Mi

TX i ic

R Min DL = TL DL Max ,i.e.,theresourcesavailableindownlinkhavebeenusedupfor

Sel
Mi

satisfyingtheminimumthroughputdemandsofthemobiles.

When/If in uplink

Sel
i

TX ic
i

R Min UL = TL UL Max , i.e., the resources available in uplink have been used up for

Sel
Mi

satisfyingtheminimumthroughputdemandsofthemobiles.
4. MobileswhichareactiveDL+ULmustbeabletogettheirminimumthroughputdemandsinbothULandDLinorder
tobeconsideredconnectedDL+UL.IfanactiveDL+ULmobileisonlyabletogetitsminimumthroughputdemandin
onedirection,itisrejected,andtheresources,thatwereallocatedtoitintheonedirectioninwhichitwasabletoget
athroughput,areallocatedtoothermobiles.
5. If

Sel
Mi

TX i ic

R Min DL TL DL Max or

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

TX i ic

R Min UL TL UL Max ,andalltheminimumthroughputresourcesdemandedby

Sel
Mi

the mobiles have been allocated, Atoll goes to the next step for allocating resources to satisfy the maximum
throughputdemands.
BackhaulSaturation:
If at this stage, a sites downlink or uplink effective MAC aggregate throughput exceeds its maximum downlink or uplink
backhaulthroughput,respectively,mobilesarerejectedonebyoneduetoBackhaulSaturation,startingfromthemobilewith
thelowestpriorityservice,amongallthecellsofthesiteinordertoreachadownlinkoruplinkeffectiveMACaggregatesite
throughputthesitesmaximumdownlinkoruplinkbackhaulthroughput.
ResourceAllocationforMaximumThroughputDemands:
Foreachcell,theremainingcellresourcesavailableare:
TX ic
i

TX ic
i

Downlink: R Rem DL = TL DL Max

Sel
i

R Min DL

Sel
Mi

819

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

Forsk2014

TX ic
i

TX ic
i

Uplink: R Rem UL = TL UL Max

Sel
i

R Min UL

Sel
i

Foreachmobile,thethroughputdemandsremainingoncetheminimumthroughputdemandshavebeensatisfiedarethe
differencebetweenthemaximumandtheminimumthroughputdemands:
Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Downlink: TPD Rem DL = TPD Max DL TPD Min DL

M

Sel
i

Sel
i

Sel
i

Uplink: TPD Rem UL = TPD Max UL TPD Min UL

Sel

Letthetotalnumberofuserswithremainingthroughputdemandsgreaterthan0be N M i

1. Atolldividestheremainingresourcesinthecellintoequalpartsforeachuser:
TX i ic

TX i ic

R Rem DL
R Rem UL
-------------------- and -------------------N
N
2. Atollconvertstheremainingthroughputdemandsofalltheuserstotheirrespectiveremainingresourcedemands:
Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

RD Rem DL

Sel
Mi

Sel

Mi
TPD Rem DL
TPD Rem UL
= --------------------------- and RD Rem UL = --------------------------Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

CTP P DL

CTP P UL

Remainingresourcedemandsofauseraregivenbytheratiobetweenitsremainingthroughputdemandsandthe
peakchannelthroughputsattheuserslocation.
3. Theresourcesallocatedtoeachuserforsatisfyingitsmaximumthroughputdemandsare:
Sel
i
R Max DL
M

TX i ic

Sel

Sel

Sel

TX i ic

M
Mi
Mi
R Rem DL
R Rem UL
i
= Min RD Rem DL --------------------- and R Max UL = Min RD Rem UL ---------------------
N
N

Eachusergetseithertheresourcesitneedstoachieveitsmaximumthroughputdemandsoranequalsharefromthe
remainingresourcesofthecell,whicheverissmaller.
4. Atollstopstheresourceallocationindownlinkoruplink,

Sel
Mi

When/Ifindownlink

TX i ic

R Max DL = R Rem DL ,i.e.,theresourcesavailableindownlinkhavebeenusedupfor

Sel
Mi

satisfyingthemaximumthroughputdemandsofthemobiles.

When/Ifinuplink

Sel
Mi

TX i ic

R Max UL = R Rem UL ,i.e.,theresourcesavailableinuplinkhavebeenusedupforsatisfying

Sel
Mi

themaximumthroughputdemandsofthemobiles.
5. Iftheresourcesallocatedtoausersatisfyitsmaximumthroughputdemands,thisuserisremovedfromthelistof
remainingusers.
6. Atollrecalculatestheremainingresourcesasfollows:
TX i ic

TX i ic

R Rem DL = TL DL Max

Sel
Mi

R Min DL

Sel
Mi
TX i ic

TX i ic

R Rem UL = TL UL Max

Sel
Mi

R Max DL and

Sel
Mi
Sel
Mi

R Min UL

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

R Max UL

Sel
Mi

7. Atollrepeatsthealltheabovestepsfortheuserswhosemaximumthroughputdemandshavenotbeensatisfieduntil
TX i ic

TX i ic

either R Rem DL = 0 and R Rem UL = 0 ,orallthemaximumthroughputdemandsaresatisfied.

BackhaulCapacityLimitation:

820

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Backhauloverflowratiosarecalculatedforeachsiteasfollows:
Sel
Sel

M
Mi
i

R Max DL CTP E DL

Sel

M
Site
i
- and
= Max 1 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sel
Sel
Mi
Mi

Site
R Min DL CTP E DL
TP BH DL

Sel

M i Site

Site

BHOF DL

Sel
Sel

Mi
Mi

R Max UL CTP E UL

Sel

M i Site
= Max 1 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Sel
Sel
Mi
Mi

Site
TP

CTP
Min UL

BH UL
E UL

Sel

M i Site

Site
BHOF UL

TotalAmountofResourcesAssignedtoEachSelectedMobile:
Sel

Atollcalculatestheamountsofdownlinkanduplinkresourcesallocatedtoeachindividualmobile M i

(whichcanalsobe

referredtoasthetrafficloadsofthemobiles)asfollows:
Sel

Sel
Mi

Downlink: TL DL

Sel
Mi

= R DL

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Mi
Mi
Max DL CTP P DL
R Min DL CTP P DL + -----------------------------------------------Site

BHOFDL

= -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Sel

Sel
Mi

CTP P DL
Sel

Sel
Mi

Uplink: TL UL

Sel
Mi

= R UL

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

M
Mi
i
Max UL CTP P UL
R Min UL CTP P UL + -----------------------------------------------Site

BHOF UL

= -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Sel

Sel
Mi

CTP P UL
Output
Sel
Mi

TL DL

Sel
Mi
TL UL

Sel
Mi

= R DL
=

Sel
Mi
R UL

Sel

:Downlinktrafficloadortheamountofdownlinkresourcesallocatedtothemobile M i
Sel

:Uplinktrafficloadortheamountofuplinkresourcesallocatedtothemobile M i

11.4.6.2 UserThroughputCalculation
UserthroughputsarecalculatedforthepercentageofresourcesallocatedtoeachmobileselectedbytheschedulingforRRM
Sel

duringtheMonteCarlosimulations, M i

Input

Sel
Mi

R DL

Sel

:Amountofdownlinkresourcesallocatedtothemobile M i

ascalculatedin"SchedulingandRadioResource

Allocation"onpage 818.

Sel
Mi

Sel

R UL :Amountofuplinkresourcesallocatedtothemobile M i

ascalculatedin"SchedulingandRadioResource

Allocation"onpage 818.

Sel
Mi

Sel

CTP P DL :DownlinkpeakMACchannelthroughputatthemobile M i

ascalculatedin"ThroughputCalculation"on

page 814.

Sel
Mi

Sel

CTP P UL :UplinkpeakMACchannelthroughputatthemobile M i

ascalculatedin"ThroughputCalculation"on

page 814.

821

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

Forsk2014

Sel

TX ic
Mi
i
BLER B DL :DownlinkblockerrorratereadfromtheBLERvs. CINR Traffic graphavailableintheWiFiequipment

Sel

assignedtotheterminalusedbythemobile M i

Sel

M
Mi
i
BLER B UL :UplinkblockerrorratereadfromtheBLERvs. CINR UL graphavailableintheWiFiequipmentassigned

tothecellTXi(ic).
Sel
Mi

Sel

f TP Scaling :Throughputscalingfactordefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythemobile M i

TP Offset :Throughputoffsetdefinedinthepropertiesoftheserviceusedbythemobile M i

Sel
Mi

Sel

Calculations
Downlink:
Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

CTP P DL

PeakMACUserThroughput: UTP P DL = R DL

Mi
Mi

Mi
EffectiveMACUserThroughput: UTP E DL = UTP P DL 1 BLER B DL

Sel

Sel
Mi

ApplicationUserThroughput: UTP A DL

Sel

Sel

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Sel

Mi
f TP Scaling
- TP Offset
= UTP E DL -----------------------100

Uplink:
Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

Sel
Mi

CTP P UL

PeakMACUserThroughput: UTP P UL = R UL

M
M

Mi
i
i
EffectiveMACUserThroughput: UTP E UL = UTP P UL 1 BLER B UL

Sel

Sel
Mi

ApplicationUserThroughput: UTP A UL

Sel

Sel
Mi

Sel

Sel
Mi

Sel

Mi
f TP Scaling
- TP Offset
= UTP E UL -----------------------100

Output
Sel
Mi

Sel

UTP P DL :DownlinkpeakMACuserthroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobile M i

UTP E DL :DownlinkeffectiveMACuserthroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobile M i

Sel
Mi
UTP A DL

:Downlinkapplicationuserthroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobile M i

Sel
Mi
UTP P UL

:UplinkpeakMACuserthroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobile M i

UTP E UL :UplinkeffectiveMACuserthroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobile M i

Sel
Mi
UTP A UL

Sel
Mi

Sel

Sel

Thefollowingsectionsdescribethealgorithmsfor:

822

Sel

:Uplinkapplicationuserthroughputatthepixel,subscriber,ormobile M i

"AutomaticNeighbourPlanning"onpage 823.
"AutomaticIntertechnologyNeighbourPlanning"onpage 827.
"AutomaticFrequencyPlanningUsingtheAFP"onpage 829.

Sel

Sel

Sel
Mi

11.5 AutomaticPlanningAlgorithms

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

11.5.1 AutomaticNeighbourPlanning
TheintratechnologyneighbourplanningalgorithmtakesintoaccountthecellsofalltheTBCtransmitters.Itmeansthatthe
cellsofalltheTBCtransmittersofyourATLdocumentarepotentialneighbours.
ThecellstobeallocatedwillbecalledTBAcells.Theymustfulfilthefollowingconditions:

Theyareactive,
TheysatisfythefiltercriteriaappliedtotheTransmittersfolder,
Theyarelocatedinsidethefocuszone,
Theybelongtothefolderonwhichtheallocationhasbeenexecuted.ThiscanbetheTransmittersfolderoragroup
oftransmitters(subfolder).

OnlyTBAcellsareassignedneighbours.
IfnofocuszoneexistsintheATLdocument,Atolltakesintoaccountthecomputation
zone.

WeassumeareferencecellTXi(ic)andacandidateneighbourcellTXj(jc).Whenautomaticplanningstarts,Atollchecksthe
followingconditions:
1. Thedistancebetweenbothcellsmustbelessthantheuserdefinablemaximumintersitedistance.Ifthedistance
betweenthereferencecellandthecandidateneighbourisgreaterthanthisvalue,thenthecandidateneighbouris
discarded.
Atollcalculatestheeffectivedistancebetweenthereferencecellanditscandidateneighbourfromtherealdistance
betweenthemandtheazimuthsoftheirantennas:
Dist CellA CellB = D 1 + x cos x cos
Wherex=0.3%sothatthemaximumvariationinDdoesnottoexceed1%.Disstatedinm.

Figure 11.3:InterTransmitterDistanceCalculation
Theformulaaboveimpliesthattwocellsfacingeachotherhaveasmallereffectivedistancethantheactualdistance.
Candidateneighboursarerankedintheorderofincreasingeffectivedistancefromthereferencecell.
2. Thecalculationoptions,

ForceCositeCellsasNeighbours:Ifselected,Atolladdsallthecellslocatedonthesamesiteasthereferencecell
tothecandidateneighbourlist.Theweightofthisconstraintcanbedefined.Itisusedtocalculatetherankofeach
neighbour,anditsimportance.
ForceAdjacentCellsasNeighbours:Ifselected,Atolladdsallthecellsgeographicallyadjacenttothereference
celltothecandidateneighbourlist.Theweightofthisconstraintcanbedefined.Itisusedtocalculatetherankof
eachneighbour,anditsimportance.

823

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

Forsk2014

Figure 11.4:DeterminationofAdjacentCells
DeterminationofAdjacentCells:Geographicallyadjacentcellsaredeterminedonthebasisoftheirbestserver
coverageareas.AcandidateneighbourcellTXi(ic)isconsideredadjacenttothereferencecellTXi(ic)ifthereexists
atleastonepixelofTXj(jc)sbestservercoverageareawhereTXi(ic)isthesecondbestserver.Therankingof
adjacent neighbour cells increases with the number of such pixels. Adjacent cells are sorted in the order of
decreasingrank.

ForceSymmetry:Ifselected,Atolladdsthereferencecelltothecandidateneighbourlistoftheitscandidate
neighbour.
Asymmetricneighbourrelationisallowedonlyiftheneighbourlistofthereferencecellisnotalreadyfull.IfTXj(jc)
isaneighbourofTXi(ic)butTXi(ic)isnotaneighbourofTXj(jc),therecanbetwopossibilities:
i.

TheneighbourlistofTXj(jc)isnotfull,AtollwilladdTXi(ic)totheendofthelist.

ii. TheneighbourlistofTXj(jc)isfull,AtollwillnotbeabletoaddTXi(ic)tothelist,soitwillalsoremoveTXj(jc)
fromtheneighbourlistofTXi(ic).
Iftheneighbourslistofacellisfull,thereferencecellwillnotbeaddedasaneighbour
ofthatcellandthatcellwillberemovedfromthereferencecellsneighbourslist.Youcan
forceAtolltokeepthatcellinthereferencecellsneighbourslistbyaddingthefollowing
optionintheAtoll.inifile:
[Neighbours]
DoNotDeleteSymmetrics=1

ForceExceptionalPairs:Thisoptionenablesyoutoforce/forbidsomeneighbourrelations.Exceptionalpairsare
pairsofcellswhichwillalwaysorneverbeneighboursofeachother.
Ifyouselect"Forceexceptionalpairs"and"Forcesymmetry",Atollconsiderstheconstraintsbetweenexceptional
pairsinbothdirectionssoastorespectsymmetrycondition.Ontheotherhand,ifneighbourhoodrelationshipis
forcedinonedirectionandforbiddenintheother,symmetrycannotberespected.Inthiscase,Atolldisplaysa
warningintheEventviewer.

DeleteExistingNeighbours:Ifselected,Atolldeletesallthecurrentneighboursandcarriesoutanewneighbour
allocation.Ifnotselected,theexistingneighboursarekeptinthelist.

3. IftheUseCoverageConditionscheckboxisselected,thecoverageareasofTXi(ic)andTXj(jc)musthaveanoverlap
( S TX ic S TX jc ).Otherwise,onlythedistancecriterionistakenintoaccount.
i

Theoverlappingzone( S TX ic S TX jc )isdefinedasfollows:
i

Here S TX ic isthesurfaceareacoveredbythecellTXi(ic)thatcomprisesallthepixelswhere:
i

The received signal level is greater than or equal to the signal level threshold. The received signal level
TX i ic

( C DL

TX i ic

)andthesignallevelthresholdarecalculatedfrom CNR DL
TX i ic

valueofthenoise( n DL

TX i ic

and T Min

,respectively,byaddingthe

)tothem.
TX ic
i

S TX ic isthesurfaceareacoveredbyTXi(ic)within C DL
i

TX ic
i

+ HO Start and C DL

+ HO End . HO Start isthe

margin with respect to the best signal level at which the handover starts, and HO End is the margin with
respecttothebestsignallevelatwhichthehandoverends.

824

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

S TX jc isthecoverageareawherethecandidatecellTXj(jc)isthebestserver.
j

TX ic
i

If a global value of the C/N threshold ( T Min

) is set in the coverage conditions

dialogue,foreachcell,Atollusesthehigherofthetwovalues,i.e.,globalvalueand
thevaluedefinedforthatcell.
Forcalculatingtheoverlappingcoverageareas,Atollusestheservicewiththelowest
bodyloss,theterminalthathasthehighestdifferencebetweengainandlosses,and
theshadowingmargincalculatedusingthedefinedcelledgecoverageprobability,if
theoptionisselected.Theserviceandterminalareselectedsuchthattheselection
givesthelargestpossibleC/Ncoverageareasforthecells.

S TX ic S TX jc
i
j
- 100 ),
Whentheaboveconditionsaremet,Atollcalculatesthepercentageofthecoverageareaoverlap( -------------------------------------S TX ic
i

andcomparesthisvaluewiththe%MinCoveredArea.

Figure 11.5:OverlappingZones
S TX ic S TX jc
i
j
TXj(jc)isconsideredaneighbourofTXi(ic)if --------------------------------------- 100 %MinCoverageArea .
S TX ic
i

Next,Atollcalculatestheimportanceoftheautomaticallyallocatedneighbours.Atollsortstheneighboursbydecreasing
importanceinordertokeeptheoneswithhighimportance.Ifthemaximumnumberofneighbourstobeallocatedtoeach
cellisexceeded,Atollkeepstheoneswithhighimportance.
Theneighbourimportancedependsonthedistancefromthereferencetransmitterandontheneighbourhoodcause(cf.table
below);thisvaluevariesbetween0and100%.
Neighbourhoodcause

When

Importancevalue

Existingneighbour

OnlyiftheDeleteExistingNeighboursoptionisnotselected
andincaseofanewallocation

Existingimportance

Exceptionalpair

OnlyiftheForceExceptionalPairsoptionisselected

100%

Cositecell

OnlyiftheForceCositeCellsasNeighboursoptionis
selected

ImportanceFunction(IF)

Adjacentcell

OnlyiftheForceAdjacentCellsasNeighboursoptionis
selected

ImportanceFunction(IF)

Neighbourhoodrelationshipthat
fulfilscoverageconditions

Onlyifthe%MinCoveredAreaisexceeded

ImportanceFunction(IF)

Symmetricneighbourhood
relationship

OnlyiftheForceNeighbourSymmetryoptionisselected

ImportanceFunction(IF)

825

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

Forsk2014

TheimportanceisevaluatedusinganImportanceFunction(IF),whichtakesintoaccountthefollowingfactors:

The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.
d Di = 1 ---------d max
d is the effective distance (in m). It corresponds to the real intertransmitter distance ( D in m) weighted by the
azimuthsofantennas.
d max isthemaximumdistancebetweenthereferencetransmitterandapossibleneighbour.

Thecositefactor(C):aBoolean,
Theadjacencyfactor(A):thepercentageofadjacency,
Theoverlappingfactor(O):thepercentageofoverlapping.

Theminimumandmaximumimportanceassignedtoeachoftheabovefactorscanbedefined.
Factor

Minimportance

Defaultvalue

Maximportance

Defaultvalue

Distancefactor(Di)

Min(Di)

1%

Max(Di)

10%

Overlappingfactor(O)

Min(O)

10%

Max(O)

30%

Adjacencyfactor(A)

Min(A)

30%

Max(A)

60%

Cositefactor(C)

Min(C)

60%

Max(C)

100%

TheImportanceFunctionisevaluatedasfollows:
Neighbourhoodcause

ImportanceFunction

ResultingIFusingthedefaultvalues
fromthetableabove

No

Min(O)+Delta(O){Max(Di)(Di)+(100%
Max(Di))(O)}+Min(Di)+Delta(Di)(Di)

10%+20%{10%(Di)+90%(O)}+1%+9%(Di)

No

Yes

Min(A)+Delta(A){Max(Di)(Di)+Max(O)(O)+
(100%Max(Di)Max(O))(A)}+Min(Di)+Delta(Di)(Di)

30%+30%{10%(Di)+30%(O)
+60%(A)}+1%+9%(Di)

Yes

Yes

Min(C)+Delta(C){Max(Di)(Di)+Max(O)(O)+
(100%Max(Di)Max(O))(A)}+Min(Di)+Delta(Di)(Di)

60%+40%{10%(Di)+30%(O)
+60%(A)}+1%+9%(Di)

Cosite

Adjacent

No

Where:
Delta(X)=Max(X)Min(X)

SetMin(Di)andMax(Di)to0%ifyoudonotwanttotakeintoaccountthedistance
factorintheimportancecalculation.
IftheMinandMaxvaluerangesoftheimportancefunctionfactorsdonotoverlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum andmaximum importance fields, neighbours will beranked inthis order:
cositeneighbours,adjacentneighbours,andneighboursallocatedbasedoncoverage
overlapping.
If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.
ThedefaultvalueofMin(O)=1%ensuresthatneighboursselectedforsymmetrywill
have an importance greater than 0%. With a value of Min(O) = 0%, neighbours
selectedforsymmetrywillhaveanimportancefieldgreaterthan0%onlyifthereis
some coverage overlapping.If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance
function factors overlap, the neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a
mixoftheneighbourhoodcauses.

Intheresults,Atolllistsonlythecellsforwhichitfindsnewneighbours.Cellswhosechannelshavethesamestartfrequency,
the same channel width, and the same total number of subcarriers are listed as intracarrier neighbours. Otherwise,
neighbourcellsarelistedasintercarrierneighbours.

826

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

Bydefault,theautomaticneighbourallocationcomparesthedefinedMaxinter
sitedistancewiththeeffectiveintercelldistance.Asaconsequence,therecan
becaseswheretherealdistancebetweenassignedneighboursishigherthanthe
Maxintersitedistance,becausetheeffectivedistanceissmaller.Youcanforce
AtolltocomparetheMaxintersitedistancewiththerealintersitedistanceby
addingthefollowinglinesinAtoll.ini:
[Neighbours]
RealInterSiteDistanceCondition=1

Bydefault,theneighbourimportancecalculatedwithrespecttodistanceisbased
ontheglobalMaxintersitedistancesettingforallneighbourcandidates.Asa
consequence,therecanbecaseswherethecalculatedimportanceisdifferent
whentheglobalMaxintersitedistanceismodified.Toavoidthat,youcanforce
Atoll to prioritise the individual distances between reference cells and their
respectiveneighbourcandidatesbyaddingthefollowinglinesinAtoll.ini:
[Neighbours]
CandidatesMaxDistanceInImportanceCalculation=1

11.5.2 AutomaticIntertechnologyNeighbourPlanning
TheintertechnologyneighbourplanningalgorithmtakesintoaccountalltheTBCtransmitters(iftheothertechnologyis
GSM)orthecellsofalltheTBCtransmitters(foranyothertechnologythanGSM).ThismeansthatalltheTBCtransmitters
(GSM)orthecellsofalltheTBCtransmitters(allothertechnologies)ofthelinkeddocumentarepotentialneighbours.
ThecellstobeallocatedinthemaindocumentwillbecalledTBAcells.Theymustfulfilthefollowingconditions:

Theyareactive,
TheysatisfythefiltercriteriaappliedtotheTransmittersfolder,
Theyarelocatedinsidethefocuszone,
Theybelongtothefolderonwhichallocationhasbeenexecuted.ThiscanbetheTransmittersfolderoragroupof
transmitters(subfolder).

OnlyTBAcellsareassignedneighbours.
IfnofocuszoneexistsintheATLdocument,Atolltakesintoaccountthecomputation
zone.

We assume a reference cell A and a candidate neighbour B. When automatic planning starts, Atoll checks following
conditions:
1. Thedistancebetweenreferencecellandthecandidateneighbourmustbelessthantheuserdefinablemaximum
intersitedistance.Ifthedistanceisgreaterthanthisvalue,thecandidateneighbourisdiscarded.
Atollcalculatestheeffectivedistancebetweenthereferencecellanditscandidateneighbourfromtherealdistance
betweenthemandtheazimuthsoftheirantennas:
Dist CellA CellB = D 1 + x cos x cos
Wherex=0.3%sothatthemaximumvariationinDdoesnottoexceed1%.Disstatedinm.

Figure 11.6:InterTransmitterDistanceCalculation
Theformulaaboveimpliesthattwocellsfacingeachotherhaveasmallereffectivedistancethantheactualdistance.
Candidateneighboursarerankedintheorderofincreasingeffectivedistancefromthereferencecell.
2. Thecalculationoptions:

827

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

Forsk2014

CDMACarriers:ThisoptionisavailablewhenaWiFinetworkisbeingcoplannedwithaUMTS,CDMA,orTD
SCDMAnetwork.ThisoptionenablesyoutoselecttheCDMAcarrier(s)thatyouwantAtolltoconsideraspotential
neighboursofWiFicells.Youmaychooseoneormorecarriers.Atollwillallocateonlythecellsusingtheselected
carriersasneighbours.
Forcecositecellsasneighbours:Ifselected,Atolladdsallthetransmitters/cellslocatedonthesamesiteasthe
referencecellinitscandidateneighbourlist.Theweightofthisconstraintcanbedefined.Itisusedtocalculate
therankofeachneighbouranditsimportance.
Forceexceptionalpairs:Thisoptionenablesyoutoforce/forbidsomeneighbourrelations.Exceptionalpairsare
pairsofcellswhichwillalwaysorneverbeneighboursofeachother.
Deleteexistingneighbours:Ifselected,Atolldeletesallthecurrentneighboursandcarriesoutanewneighbour
allocation.Ifnotselected,theexistingneighboursarekeptinthelist.

3. Neighbourrelationcriterion:

Allocationbasedondistance:
The allocation algorithm is based on the effective distance between the reference cell and its candidate
neighbour.

Algorithmbasedoncoverageoverlapping:
ThecoverageareasofthereferencecellAandthecandidateneighbourBmustoverlap( S A S B ).
TwocasesmayexistforSA:

1stcase:SAistheareawherethecellAisthebestservingcell,witha0dBmargin.
ThismeansthatthesignalreceivedfromAisgreaterthantheminimumrequired(calculatedfromtheC/N
threshold),andisthehighestone.

2ndcase:Themarginisotherthan0 dB.SAistheareawhere:
ThesignallevelreceivedfromAexceedstheminimumrequired(calculatedfromtheC/Nthreshold)andis
withinamarginfromthehighestsignallevel.

TwocasesmayexistforSB:

1stcase:SBistheareawherethecandidateneighbouristhebestserver.Inthiscase,themarginmustbeset
to0 dB.
ThesignallevelreceivedfromBexceedstheminimumrequired,andisthehighestone.

2ndcase:Themarginisotherthan0 dB.SBistheareawhere:
ThesignallevelreceivedfromBexceedstheminimumrequiredandiswithinamarginfromthebestsignal
level.

SA SB
Atollcalculatesthepercentageofthecoverageareaoverlap( ------------------ 100 )andcomparesthisvaluewiththe%
SA
SA SB
MinCoveredArea.BisconsideredaneighbourofAif ------------------ 100 %MinCoveredArea .
SA
Candidateneighboursarerankedintheorderofdecreasingcoverageareaoverlappercentages.
Next,Atollcalculatestheimportanceoftheautomaticallyallocatedneighbours.Atollsortstheneighboursbydecreasing
importanceinordertokeeptheoneswithhighimportance.Ifthemaximumnumberofneighbourstobeallocatedtoeach
cellisexceeded,Atollkeepstheoneswithhighimportance.
Theimportance(%)ofneighboursdependsonthedistanceandonthereasonofallocation:

828

Forallocationbasedondistance:
Neighbourcause

When

Importancevalue

Existingneighbour

IftheDeleteexistingneighboursoptionisnotselected

Existingimportance

Exceptionalpair

IftheForceexceptionalpairsoptionisselected

100%

Cositetransmitter/cell

IftheForcecositecellsasneighboursoptionisselected

100%

Neighbourrelationthatfulfils
distanceconditions

Ifthemaximumdistanceisnotexceeded

d1 ---------d max

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

d is the effective distance between the reference cell and the neighbour and d max is the maximum intersite
distance.

Forallocationbasedoncoverageoverlapping:
Neighbourcause

When

Importancevalue

Existingneighbour

IftheDeleteexistingneighboursoptionisnotselected

Existingimportance

Exceptionalpair

IftheForceexceptionalpairsoptionisselected

100%

Cositetransmitter/cell

IftheForcecositecellsasneighboursoptionisselected

IF

Neighbourhoodrelationshipthat
fulfilscoverageconditions

Ifthe%minimumcoveredareaisexceeded

IF

TheimportanceisevaluatedusinganImportanceFunction(IF),whichtakesintoaccountthefollowingfactors:
The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.

d Di = 1 ---------d max
d istheeffectivedistance(inm).Itcorrespondstotherealintertransmitterdistanceweightedbytheazimuthsof
antennas.
d max isthemaximumdistancebetweenthereferencetransmitterandapossibleneighbour.

Thecositefactor(C):aBoolean,
Theoverlappingfactor(O):thepercentageofoverlapping.

TheIFisuserdefinableusingtheMinimportanceandMaximportancefields.
Factor

Minimportance

Defaultvalue

Maximportance

Defaultvalue

Distancefactor(Di)

Min(Di)

1%

Max(Di)

10%

Overlappingfactor(O)

Min(O)

10%

Max(O)

60%

Cositefactor(C)

Min(C)

60%

Max(C)

100%

TheIFevaluatesimportanceasfollows:
CositeNeighbourhood
cause

IF

ResultingIFusingthedefaultvalues
fromthetableabove

No

Min(O)+Delta(O){Max(Di)(Di)+(100%Max(Di))(O)}

10%+50%{10%(Di)+90%(O)}

Yes

Min(C)+Delta(C){Max(Di)(Di)/(Max(Di)+Max(O))+
Max(O)(O)/(Max(Di)+Max(O))}

60%+40%{1/7%(Di)+6/7%(O)}

Where
Delta(X)=Max(X)Min(X)

SetMin(Di)andMax(Di)to0%ifyoudonotwanttotakeintoaccountthedistance
factorintheimportancecalculation.
IftheMinandMaxvaluerangesoftheimportancefunctionfactorsdonotoverlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum andmaximum importance fields,neighbours will be rankedin thisorder:
cositeneighboursandneighboursallocatedbasedoncoverageoverlapping.
If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.

Intheresults,Atolldisplaysonlythecellsforwhichitfindsnewneighbours.

11.5.3 AutomaticFrequencyPlanningUsingtheAFP
TheroleofanAutomaticFrequencyPlanning(AFP)toolistoassignfrequencies(channels)tocellsofanetworksuchthatthe
overallnetworkperformanceisoptimised.Inotherwords,theinterferencewithinthenetworkisreducedasmuchaspossible.
CochannelinterferenceisthemainreasonforoverallnetworkqualitydegradationinWiFi.Inordertoimprovenetwork
performance,theWiFiAFPtriestominimisecoandadjacentchannelinterferenceasmuchaspossiblewhilerespectingany

829

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

Forsk2014

constraintsinputtoit.Themainconstraintsaretheresourcesavailableforallocation,i.e.,thenumberoffrequencieswith
whichthe AFP can work,andtherelationshipstotake into account, i.e., interferencematrices, neighbours, and distance
betweentransmitters.
TheAFPisbasedonacostfunctionwhichrepresentstheinterferencelevelinthenetwork.TheaimoftheAFPistominimise
thecost.Thebest,oroptimum,frequencyplanistheonewhichcorrespondstothelowestcost.
ThefollowingdescribestheAFPsautomaticplanningmethodforfrequenciesinWiFinetworks,whichtakesintoaccount
interferencematrices,neighbourrelations,anddistancebetweentransmitters.
TheAFPtakesintoaccountthecellsofalltheTBCtransmitters.ThecellstobeallocatedwillbecalledTBAcells.Theymust
fulfilthefollowingconditions:

Theyareactive,
Theirchannelallocationstatusisnotsettolocked,
TheysatisfythefiltercriteriaappliedtotheTransmittersfolder,
Theyarelocatedinsidethefocuszone.
IfnofocuszoneexistsintheATLdocument,Atolltakesintoaccountthecomputation
zone.

11.5.3.1 ConstraintandRelationshipWeights
TheAFPisbasedonacostfunctionwhichtakesintoaccountchannelseparationconstraintsbasedonthechanneloverlap
ratioascalculatedin"CoandAdjacentChannelOverlapsCalculation"onpage 797.Channelseparationisstudiedbetween
eachTBAcellanditsrelatedcells.AtollcalculatesthecostbetweeneachindividualTBAandrelatedcell,andthentheoverall
costfortheTBAcell.
RelatedcellsofaTBAcellare:

Itsneighbours,ifthecheckbox"Existingneighbours"isselected,
Assignedweight Neighbour = 0.5

CellsthatarelistedintheinterferencematrixoftheTBAcell,
Assignedweight IM = 0.3

Cellswithinthecells(orthedefault)minimumreusedistance,ifthecheckbox"Reusedistance"isselected,
Assignedweight Dis tan ce = 0.2
Thesumoftheweightsassignedtotheaboverelationsis1.

YoucanmodifytheseweightsinyourWiFidocument.Theabsolutevaluesoftheconstraintweightsarecalculatedfromthe
relativeweights(%)definedintheConstraintWeightsdialogueasfollows:
% Neighbour
Neighbour = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------% Neighbour + % IM + % Dis tan ce
% IM
IM = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------% Neighbour + % IM + % Dis tan ce
% Dis tan ce
Dis tan ce = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------% Neighbour + % IM + % Dis tan ce

11.5.3.2 CostCalculation
ThecostoftherelationbetweentheTBAcellanditsrelatedcelliscalculatedasfollows:
$

TX i ic TX j jc

TX i ic TX j jc

= rO

TX ic TX jc
i
j

Where r O
page 797.

830

TX i ic TX j jc

Neighbour Neighbour

TX i ic TX j jc

+ Dis tan ce Dis tan ce

TX ic TX j jc

+ i
IM
IM

is the channel overlap ratio as calculated in "Co and Adjacent Channel Overlaps Calculation" on

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

AT321_TRR_E1
TX ic TX jc
i
j

Neighbour

TX ic TX jc
i
j

is the importance of the relationship between the TBA cell and its related neighbour cell. Neighbour

is

calculatedduringautomaticneighbourplanningbyAtollasexplainedin"AutomaticNeighbourPlanning"onpage 823.For
manualneighbourplanning,thisvalueisequalto1.
TX ic TX jc
i
j

IM

istheimportanceoftherelationshipbetweentheTBAcellanditsrelatedinterferingcellcalculatedasfollows:

TX i ic TX j jc

TX i ic TX j jc

IM

TX i ic TX j jc

IM CC

= r CCO

TX i ic TX j jc

and IM CC

TX i ic TX j jc

IM CC

TX i ic TX j jc

+ r ACO

TX i ic TX j jc

IM AC

are respectively the co and adjacent channel interference probabilities calculated as

TX ic TX jc
i
j

explainedin"InterferenceMatrixCalculation"onpage 831. r CCO

TX ic TX jc
i
j

and r ACO

arethecoandadjacentchannel

overlapratiosascalculatedin"CoandAdjacentChannelOverlapsCalculation"onpage 797.
TX i ic TX j jc

Dis tan ce

istheimportanceoftherelationshipbetweentheTBAanditsrelatedcellwithrespecttothedistancebetween

TX i ic TX j jc

them. Dis tan ce

iscalculatedasexplainedin"DistanceImportanceCalculation"onpage 832.

AtollcalculatesthequalityreductionfactorfortheTBAcellanditsrelatedcellfromthecostcalculatedaboveasfollows:
QRF

TX i ic TX j jc

= 1$

TX i ic TX j jc

Thequalityreductionfactorisameasureofthecostofanindividualrelation.
ThetotalcostofthecurrentfrequencyplanforanyTBAcellisgivenasfollows,consideringallthecellswithwhichtheTBA
cellhasrelations:
TX i ic

QRF

$ Total = 1

TX i ic TX j jc

TX j jc

And,thetotalcostofthecurrentfrequencyplanfortheentirenetworkissimplythesumofthetotalTBAcellcostscalculated
above,i.e.,
$ Total =

TX i ic

$ Total

TX ic
i

11.5.3.3 AFPAlgorithm
TheAFPalgorithmisaniterativealgorithmwhich:

Calculatesthecost(asdescribedabove)oftheinitialfrequencyplan,
Triesdifferentfrequencyplansinordertoreducethecost,
Memorisesthedifferentfrequencyplansinordertodeterminethebestone,i.e.,thefrequencyplanwhichprovides
thelowesttotalcost,
Stopswhenitisunabletoimprovethecostofthenetwork,andproposesthelastknownbestfrequencyplanasthe
solution.

11.5.4 Appendices
11.5.4.1 InterferenceMatrixCalculation
Thecochannelinterferenceprobabilityiscalculatedasfollows:
S TX ic
i

TX ic TX jc
i
j

IM CC

TX j jc
TX i ic

+ M Quality
n DL
C DL

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

TX i ic
TX ic
10
10
T i
C DL
10 Log 10
+ 10

Min

= ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------S TX ic
i

Theadjacentchannelinterferenceprobabilityiscalculatedasfollows:

831

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

Forsk2014

S TX ic
i

TX ic TX jc
i
j

IM AC

TX jc
TX ic
TX ic
j
i
i

+M
+f
n
C DL

Quality ACS FB
DL
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

TX ic
TX ic
i
10
10
i

C
+ 10
10 Log 10
DL
T Min

= ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------S TX ic
i

Forfrequenciesfartherthantheadjacentchannel,theinterferenceprobabilityis0.
TX i ic

Here S TX ic isthebestservercoverageareaofthecellTXi(ic),thatcomprisesallthepixelswhere CNR DL

i

calculatedin"ServiceAreaCalculation"onpage 813. S TX ic
i

TX i ic

the given condition is true. C DL

TX i ic

respectively, n DL

TX j jc

and C DL

Condition

TX i ic

T Min

as

isthebestservercoverageareaofthecellTXi(ic)where

are the received downlink signal levels from the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc)

thedownlinknoiseforthecellTXi(ic)ascalculatedin"NoiseCalculation(DL)"onpage 802, M Quality is

TX ic
i

thequalitymarginusedfortheinterferencematricescalculation,and f ACS FB istheadjacentchannelsuppressionfactor

definedforthefrequencybandofthecellTXi(ic).

11.5.4.2 DistanceImportanceCalculation
TX i ic TX j jc

Thedistanceimportancebetweentwocells( Dis tan ce

TX ic TX jc
i
j
Dis tan ce

2
D Reuse
= Log --------------------------------

D TXi ic TXj jc
--------------------------------------------------------2

Log D Reuse

ifD

)iscalculatedasfollows:

TX i ic TX j jc

Otherwise

Where D Reuse istheminimumreusedistance,eitherdefinedforeachTBAcellindividuallyorsetforalltheTBAcellsinthe

AFPdialogue,and D
follows:
D
D

TX ic TX jc
i
j
TX i ic TX j jc

them. d

= d

TX i ic TX j jc

TX ic TX jc
i
j

istheweighteddistancebetweentheTBAcellTXi(ic)anditsrelatedcellTXj(jc)calculatedas

1 + x cos cos 2

isweightedaccordingtotheazimuthsoftheTBAcellanditsrelatedcellwithrespecttothestraightlinejoining

TX ic TX jc
i
j

isthedistancebetweenthetwocellsconsideringanyoffsetswithrespecttothesitelocations.xisset
TX i ic TX j jc

duetotheazimuthsdoesnotexceed40 %. and arecalculated

to10 %sothatthemaximumvariationin D
fromtheazimuthsofthetwocellsasshowninFigure 11.7onpage 832.

Figure 11.7:WeightedDistanceBetweenCells
Theaboveformulaimpliesthattwocellsfacingeachotherwillhaveashortereffectivedistancebetweenthemthanthereal
distance,andtwocellspointinginoppositedirectionswillhaveagreatereffectivedistance.
TheimportanceofthedistancerelationisexplainedinFigure 11.8onpage 833.Thisfigureshowsthatcellsthatarelocated
near (based on the effective distance which is weighted by the orientations of the cells) have high importance, which is

832

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

AT321_TRR_E1

interpretedasahighcost,andcellsthatarelocatedfarhavelowimportance.Cellsthatarefurtherthanthereusedistance
donothaveanycostrelatedtothedistancerelation.

Figure 11.8:ImportanceBasedonDistanceRelation

833

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter11:WiFiNetworks

834

Forsk2014

Chapter12
ACPModule
ThischapterdescribesautomaticcellplanningwiththeACPmodule.

Inthischapter,thefollowingareexplained:

"Objectives"onpage 837

"QualityPredictionsandtheAntennaMasking
Method"onpage 841

"Configuration"onpage 843

"MultiLayer,MultiRATandCoplanning
Support"onpage 845

"OptimisationMethodology"onpage 846

"LoadBalancingObjective"onpage 852

"EMFExposure"onpage 858

"ShadowingMarginandIndoorCoverage"on
page 861

"MultiStoreyOptimisation"onpage 861

"ACPSoftwareDataFlow"onpage 864

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter12:ACPModule

AT321_TRR_E1

12 ACPModule
ACPoptimiseskeynetworkparametersinordertoimprovecoverageandquality.TheACPcanalsoselectthebestsitesfrom
alistofcandidatesites.
AtollACPusesuserdefinedobjectivestoevaluatethequalityandimplementationcostofanetworkreconfiguration.
Itusesanefficientglobalsearchalgorithmtotestmanynetworkconfigurationsandproposethereconfigurationswhichbest
meet the objectives. The ACP presents the changes ordered from the most to the least beneficial, allowing phased
implementationorimplementationofjustasubsetofthesuggestedchanges.
Currently,ACPsupportsthefollowingsingleRATradioaccesstechnologies:GSM,UMTS,CDMA2000,LTE,WiMAX,andWiFi.
ACPalsosupports3GPPand3GPP2multiRATdocumentsaswellascoplanning.

12.1 Objectives
AtollACPusesuserdefinedobjectivestoevaluatethequalityandcostofthenetworkreconfigurationorsiteselection.In
addition,acostobjectivecanbetakenintoaccounttoreducetheexpectedimplementationcost.

12.1.1 QualityObjective
Eachqualityobjectiveisalogicalcombinationofdefinedrulesusedtoevaluatespecificqualityindicators,whichareevaluated
inagivenzoneandforagiventrafficprofile.Anobjectivecancombineseveralqualityindicatorsfromdifferenttechnologies
ordifferentlayerswithinthesametechnology.
Eachqualityindicatoristechnologydependent,andisconsistentwiththecorrespondingcoveragepredictionsinAtoll.

12.1.1.1 DefinitionandEvaluation
TheACPcalculatesthequalityobjectiveusingtheuserdefinedresolutionwithinthebordersofthecomputationzone.
Itcalculatesthebasicqualityindicators(RSCP,EcIo,CINR,overlap,etc.)oneachpixelofthecomputationzone.Qualitymaps
covering the computation zone are provided for the initial network (before reconfiguration) and final network (after
reconfiguration).
Eachobjectiveismeasuredonadefinedtargetzone.Thetargetzonecanbeeitherthecomputationzone,thefocuszone,a
hotspot,orazonedefinedasagroupofclutterclasses.Theobjectiveiscalculatedonlyonthesubsetofpixelsbelongingto
thiszone.
Anobjectivecanalsobeweightedaccordingtotrafficorweightedonagivenzone.Thedefinedweightenablesyoutoassign
adifferentimportancetodifferentpixels.Whenusingtrafficweighting,thepixelweightsaretakenfromAtolltrafficmaps.
Whenusingzoneweighting,thepixelweightsaretakenfromaweightdefinedwitheachzone.Bothtypesofweightingcan
beusedatthesametime,inwhichcasethezoneweightistakenasasupplementaryfactortothetrafficweight.Formore
informationonhowweightsareapplied,see"OptimisationMethodology"onpage 846.
Anobjectiveisdefinedbybothasetofrulesandatarget.Apixelissaidtobe"covered"bythesetofruleswhenitfulfilsall
therulesaccordingtotheirlogicalrelationship(OR,AND,orXOR).Aruleisasinglequalityindicatoronasinglelayerfulfilling
adefinedthreshold.
Anexampleofcombinedrulesis:
(UMTS2100RSCP>85dBmORLTE2010C/N>20dB)
Thetargetfortheobjectivedefinestherequiredpercentageofpixelsinthetargetzone(afterapplyinganydefinedweight)
whichmustfulfiltherule.Forexampleifthetargetis90%,theobjectiveissaidtobefulfilledif90%ofthepixelsarecovered
bytheobjectiverule.
Thisisdescribedbythefollowingformula:

Cov Obj =

i 1 Th1 Qual 1 i OR1 Th2 Qual 2 i

i pixelsofzone
where,
1 Th isthestepfunction: 1 Th x = 1 if x Th and 1 Th x = 0 if x Th
Qual k i isthebasicqualitymeasurementonpixeli

837

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter12:ACPModule

Forsk2014

i isthenormalisedweightforpixeli:

i = 1

i pixels

Thresholdsonrulescanbedefinedseparatelyperzoneorpercluttergroups.
Thetargetthresholdcanbedefinedasabsoluteorrelativecomparedtoinitialstatus:
forexampleas90%(absolute)orasincreaseof5%overcurrentcoverage(relative).

12.1.1.2 TargetFiltering
AtollACPallowsyoutofilterpixelsonwhichthetargetpercentagewillbeevaluatedaccordingtodefinedfilterconditions.
Whenusingafilter,thetargetpercentagecoverageisnotevaluatedonallpixelsofthetargetzone,butonlyonpixelsofthe
targetzonewhicharenotfilteredout.
Forexample,youcouldcalculateanobjectiveonlyonthepixelsofazoneforwhichthereisnocoverageinagiventechnology:
Target:90%ofpixelwithUMTSRSCP>95dBforwhichGSMSignalLevel<95dBm
The90%targetwillbeappliedonlytothesubsetofpixelsforwhichtheGSMsignallevelisbelow90dBm

12.1.2 QualityIndicatorsintheACP
AtollACPdefinesasetofbasicqualityindicators.Thesequalityindicatorsareusedwhendefiningaruletoformcomplex
objectives.
Foreachqualityindicator,AtollACPusesthesameformulasasusedelsewhereinAtoll.Thisensuresthatthemeasuredvalues
arethesameintheACPandinAtollpredictions.

12.1.2.1 GSMQualityIndicators
ThequalityindicatorsusedbyACPgivethesamemapsandresultsasthereferencepredictioninAtoll.Inthefollowinglist,
each quality indicator defined in GSM is followed in italics by the reference prediction in Atoll (with the relevant "Field"
setting),ifany:

BCCH Signal Level (Coverage by Signal Level (DL) + "Best Signal Level (dBm)") used as a measure of raw network
coverage.
CINRCochannel(CoveragebyC/ILevel(DL)+"C/ILevel(dB)")
Overlap (Overlapping Zones (DL) + "Number of Servers") to define cell dominance and decrease the level of
interferencebetweencellswhileallowingalevelofcelloverlap.
BestServerDistance
1st2ndDifference
1stNthDifference

TheACPmanagesinterferencequalityinthenetworkbymeasuringsignalpollution:alimitednumberofoverlappingcellsare
allowed in order to allow for coverage continuity and handover capability. The number should be consistent with the
frequencyreuseratiousedforthenetwork.

12.1.2.2 UMTSQualityIndicators
ThequalityindicatorsusedbyACPgivethesamemapsandresultsasthereferencepredictioninAtoll.Inthefollowinglist,
eachqualityindicatordefinedinUMTSisfollowedinitalicsbythereferencepredictioninAtoll(withtherelevant"Field"
setting),ifany:

RSCP(CoveragebySignalLevel(DL)+"BestSignalLevel(dBm)")usedasameasureofrawnetworkcoverage.
EcIo(PilotQualityAnalysis(DL)with"Ec/Io(dB)")todefinetheserviceareazone.
RSSI(TotalNoiseLevelAnalysis(DL)+"MaxNoiseLevel(dBm)")
Overlap(OverlappingZones(DL)+"NumberofServers")tomeasurepilotpollutionaswellassofthandoverquality.
BestServerDistance
1st2ndDifference
1stNthDifference

12.1.2.3 CDMA2000QualityIndicators
ThequalityindicatorsusedbyACPgivethesamemapsandresultsasthereferencepredictioninAtoll.Inthefollowinglist,
eachqualityindicatordefinedinCDMA2000isfollowedinitalicsbythereferencepredictioninAtoll(withtherelevant"Field"
setting),ifany:

838

SignalLevel(CoveragebySignalLevel(DL)+"BestSignalLevel(dBm)")usedasameasureofrawnetworkcoverage.
EcIo(PilotQualityAnalysis(DL)with"Ec/Io(dB)")todefinetheserviceareazone.
Overlap(OverlappingZones(DL)+"NumberofServers")tomeasurepilotpollutionaswellassofthandoverquality.

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter12:ACPModule

AT321_TRR_E1

BestServerDistance
1st2ndDifference
1stNthDifference

ACPhandlesCDMA2000similarlytoUMTS.ThemaindifferenceisthattheformulaforderivingsignallevelandEcIodiffers
between1xRTTand1xEvDO:

In1xRTT,formulasaresimilartotheonesinUMTS,takingintoaccountthepilotpowerasthebasisforsignallevel
computation.
In1xEvDO,thepilotistransmittedatfullcellpower.Thecellmaxpoweristhususedasthebasisofthesignallevel
computation,aswellastheEc/Iocomputation.

12.1.2.4 LTEQualityIndicators
ThequalityindicatorsusedbyACPgivethesamemapsandresultsasthereferencepredictioninAtoll.Inthefollowinglist,
eachqualityindicatordefinedinLTEisfollowedinitalicsbythereferencepredictioninAtoll(withtherelevant"Field"setting),
ifany:

SignalLevel(CoveragebySignalLevel(DL)+"BestSignalLevel(dBm)")usedasameasureofrawnetworkcoverage.
RSC(EffectiveSignalAnalysis(DL)+"RSSignalLevel(DL)(dBm)")usedasameasureofrawnetworkcoverage.
RSC/N(EffectiveSignalAnalysis(DL)+"RSC/NLevel(DL)(dB)")usedasameasureofrawnetworkcoverage.
RSRP(EffectiveSignalAnalysis(DL)+"RSRPLevel(DL)(dBm)")usedasameasureofrawnetworkcoverage.
RSCINR(CoveragebyC/(I+N)Level(DL)+"RSC/(I+N)Level(DL)(dB)")tomeasureandcontrolinterference.
RSRQ(CoveragebyC/(I+N)Level(DL)+"RSRQLevel(DL)(dB)")tomeasureandcontrolinterference.
RSSI(CoveragebyC/(I+N)Level(DL)+"RSSILevel(DL)(dBm)")tomeasureandcontrolinterference.
Overlap(OverlappingZones(DL)+"NumberofServers")tobettercontrolcelldominance.
BestServerDistance
1st2ndDifference
1stNthDifference

BecauseRSCINR,RSRQandRSSIdependstronglyonthefrequencyplan,twomethodsarecurrentlyprovidedbytheACP:

Usingthecurrentfrequencyplan:TheexistingfrequencyplanistakenintoaccountwhencalculatingRSCINR,RSRQ
andRSSI.Currentlythefrequencyplanisnotdynamicallyrecalculatedwhilechangingnetworkparameters.Insome
casesthismayleadtosuboptimalreconfiguration,inwhichcaseitisrecommendedtoperformoneorseveralACP>
AFPcycles.
IgnoringthecurrentfrequencyplanandICIC:Allthenetworkcellsareassumedtobeonthesamechannel.

12.1.2.5 WiMAXQualityIndicators
ThequalityindicatorsusedbyACPgivethesamemapsandresultsasthereferencepredictioninAtoll.Inthefollowinglist,
eachqualityindicatordefinedinWiMAXisfollowedinitalicsbythereferencepredictioninAtoll(withtherelevant"Field"
setting),ifany:

SignalLevel(CoveragebySignalLevel(DL)+"BestSignalLevel(dBm)")usedasameasureofrawnetworkcoverage.
PreambleC(EffectiveSignalAnalysis(DL)+"PreambleSignalLevel(DL)(dBm)")usedasameasureofrawnetwork
coverage.
PreambleC/N(EffectiveSignalAnalysis(DL)+"PreambleC/NLevel(DL)(dB)")usedasameasureofrawnetwork
coverage.
Preamble CINR (Effective Signal Analysis (DL) + "Preamble C/(I+N) Level (DL) (dB)") to measure and control
interferenceandsignalquality.
Overlap(OverlappingZones(DL)+"NumberofServers")tobettercontrolcelldominance.
BestServerDistance
1st2ndDifference
1stNthDifference

BecausePreambleCINRdependsstronglyonthefrequencyplan,twomethodsarecurrentlyprovidedbytheACP:

Using the current frequency plan: The existing frequency and segmentation plan are taken into account when
calculatingtheCINR.Currentlythefrequencyplanandsegmentationplansarenotdynamicallyrecalculatedwhile
changing network parameters. In some cases this may lead to suboptimal reconfiguration, in which case it is
recommendedtoperformoneorseveralACP>AFPcycles.
Ignoringthecurrentfrequencyplanandsegmentation:Allthenetworkcellsareassumedtobeonthesamechannel.

12.1.2.6 QualityIndicatorParametersandReferenceMaps
The parameters that define how each quality indicator is calculated are under "Parameters" on the Objectives tab, for
examplewhichserviceandterminaltousetodefinebodylossandotherlosses(terminalantennagainandloss).Additionally,
youcanconsidershadowinginthecalculation.

839

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter12:ACPModule

Forsk2014

Formostqualityindicators,youcanspecifyareferencepredictionfromamongthepredictionsalreadycalculated.Byusinga
reference prediction, you can ensure that the quality indicator will be calculated the same as the reference prediction,
enablingcomparisonofthequalitymapwiththeAtollcoverageprediction.

12.1.2.7 AdvancedObjectiveConfiguration
Bycombiningseveralrulestodefineoneobjective,youcandefinemoreadvancedobjectives.Forexample:
Example
UMTSOverlap>0
AND UMTSOverlap<4
(UMTSRSCP>90dBmANDUMTSEcIo>12dB)
(LTERSC>85dBmANDLTERSCINR>4dB)

OR

Description
PilotPollutionavoidance(UMTS)
Coverageofferedbyatleastonetechnology

Bydefiningafilter,youcanevenmoreadvancedobjectivesbyapplyingtherulesonlytocertainpixels.Forexample:
Example
GSMBCCH>90dBm
FORPixelswhere:
(UMTSRSCP<100ANDOverlap<2

Description
PossibilityofIntertechnologyhandover
UMTS>GSM

12.1.2.8 CostObjective
AtollACPalsotakescostobjectivesintoconsideration.Therearetwomodesofoperation:

Costlimit:Thetotalcostofthereconfigurationwillnotexceedagivenmaximumcost.
Tradeoffbetweenqualityandcost:TheACPwillselectthechangeswhichhavethemostbenefitfortheleastcost.

Youcanalsoassigndifferentsetsofcostsfordifferentsiteclasses.Eachsiteclasscanbeassignedadifferentsetofcosts.You
canautomaticallycreateasetofsiteclassesandtheirassociatedcostsbydefiningsomeoptionsinthe[ACPGeneralPage]
sectionoftheACP.inifile.Formoreinformation,seetheAdministratorManual.
Sitesareassignedtoasiteclasseithermanuallyorautomatically.Youcanassignthemautomaticallybydefiningacustom
fieldintheSitestableinAtollandthendefiningthecustomfieldintheacp.iniusingthe"site.costClass"option.
[ACPCustomFieldExtraction]
site.costClass=SITECLASS
# The name of the custom column in SITE table used to define the 'cost class'.
# 'cost class' is used to define precisely the cost of changes applied to a site.
ThesiteclassdefinedinthecustomfieldintheSitestablewillbeassignedautomaticallytoeachsiteinthedatabasewhena
newACPsetupiscreated.IfanewcandidatesiteiscreatedinACPandiscolocatedwithanexistingsite,itwillinheritthesite
classoftheexistingsite.Ifitisnotcolocatedwithanexistingsite,thesiteclassissettoDefaultandcanbechangedmanually.

12.1.3 AtollandACPPredictionMatching
ACPcoveragepredictionstryasmuchaspossibletomatchtheAtollcoveragepredictions(e.g.ACPs"EcIo"predictionversus
Atolls"PilotQualityAnalysis(DL)"prediction).Coveragepredictionsarethereforesimilarinmostcases,inspiteofthevariety
ofpotentiallyconflictuousconditionssuchasvaryingresolutions,etc.
Generallyspeaking,theACPandAtollcoveragepredictionswillmatchexceptincornercaseswhicharedifficulttoidentify
andmanage.Whentherearedifferences,theywillbeatpixellevelandarenegligible(e.g.smallmapshifts,etc).Atthescale
ofoverallmaps,theystillmatchprettywelldespitesmallcosmeticmismatchesinsomeveryspecificcornercases.
Hence,potentialmismatchesbetweenACPandAtollcorepredictionsmayappearaccordingthefollowingparametersettings:

840

Resolution:
ThebestmatchbetweenACPandAtollcoveragepredictionsisobtainedwhentheACPresolutionmatchesthe
pathlossresolution.Whentheresolutionoftheoptimisationisdifferentfromtheresolutionofthepathloss
matrices,ACPperformsabilinearinterpolationbyusingthefourclosestpathlossvaluesandinterpolating.
ThemostacutematchbetweenACPandAtollcoveragepredictionsisobtainedwhentheACPresolution,thepath
lossresolution,theAtollpredictionresolution,andtherasterresolutionareidentical.

SetupPreferences>Calculationsetting(onthePreferencestaboftheACPPropertiesdialogbox):
In"Highspeed"mode,ACPreducesthenumberofcellsitmonitorsforeachpixel,someofwhichmayonlycreate
abitofinterferenceatfirst,andlatercreatesignificantlymoreinterferenceafterantennaparametersarechanged
duringoptimisation.

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter12:ACPModule

AT321_TRR_E1

The"AutomaticCandidatePositioning"functionality(NewCandidateSetupdialogbox>
Actionbutton)canbeimpactedin"Highspeed"mode.

In"Highprecision"mode,ACPincreasesthenumberofcellsitmonitorsforeachpixel,therebyreducingpotential
inconsistencieswithAtollcoveragepredictions(formoreinformation,refertothe"ConfiguringDefaultSettings"
sectionintheUserManual).

WhentheMultiStoreyextensionisenabled,thecoveragepredictionscalculatedbytheACPmaydifferslightlyfrom
MultiStoreypredictionsduetodifferentmethodologiesusedbytheACPandtheAtollplatforms.TheACPusesamix
combiningaradialmethodforlowerstoreys(basedonAtoll's"CalculateGrid"API)andasystematicmethodforupper
storeyswherefewevaluationpointsarepresent(usingAtoll's"CalculateSubscribers"API).

12.2 QualityPredictionsandtheAntennaMasking
Method
AtollACPneedstocorrectlyassesshowwellareconfigurednetworkwillmeetqualityobjectiveswhenperforminganantenna
reconfigurationsuchaschangingtheantennamodel,tilt,orazimuth.ACPassessesthischangebycalculatinghowthepath
lossmatriceschangewhentheantennaismodified.Thisprocessisstronglydependentonthetypeofpropagationmodelused
originallytoproducethepathlossmatrices.
Atoll ACP distinguishes between two categories of propagation models: native and nonnative. For native propagation
models,ACPselectsbydefaulttheOptimisedmode.Fornonnativepropagationmodels,ACPproposesthreedifferentmodes:
Basic,Improved,andFullPathLoss.
The antenna masking method is not used for site selection and antenna height
optimisation. These types of reconfiguration are performed by direct path loss
calculation.Inaddition,reconfiguringpowerisperformed bydirectscalingof existing
path loss matrices and therefore does not use either an antenna masking method or
recalculationofthepathlossmatrices.

12.2.1 OptimisedMethod
TheoptimisedmethodisusedforpropagationmethodswhicharenativetoAtoll:theStandardPropagationModel(SPM),
CostHata,CrossWave,etc.TheACPperformsanunmaskingoperationwiththecurrentantennapattern,followedbyre
maskingwiththenewantennapattern.TheoptimisedmethodensuresthattheACPpredictioncorrelatesstronglywiththe
propagationmodelcalculation.
Thiscalculationdependsstronglyonthehorizontalandverticalemissionanglesbetweenatransmitterandthereceivingpixel.
The Optimised antenna masking method provides accurate prediction of the emission angles, using one of two internal
methods:

Directcalculation:ACPcalculatesincidenceanglesbydirectcalculationusingtherasterdata.
Delegatingtothemodel:ACPcalculatesincidenceanglesbydelegatingthecalculationtothepropagationmodel,
providingthatthepropagationmodelimplementstheappropriatemethodsofAtoll'sAPI

ACPautomaticallyselectswhichinternalmethodtouseforeachnativepropagationmodel:

CrossWave:ACPdelegatesthecalculationtomodelthepropagationmodel.
Allothersnativemodels:ACPcalculatesdirectly.
Youcandefinetheinternalmethodusedbysettingtheappropriateoptionintheacp.ini
file.Forinformationonmodifyingtheacp.inifile,seetheAdministratorManual.

12.2.2 AntennaMaskingModesforNonNativePropagationModels
Fornonnativepropagationmodels,ACPproposesthreedifferentmodes:Basic,Improved,andFullPathLoss.

12.2.2.1 BasicMethod
TheBasicmethodissimilartotheOptimisedmethodwithdirectcalculation,butwithafewadditionalparameters.
Youcansetthefollowingparametersforthedefaultmethod:

841

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter12:ACPModule

Forsk2014

Parameter

Description

Antennapatterninterpolation Theantennagaincalculationmethodforderivingtheantennagainfromasetofanglesof
incidence.Either:

Native3DInterpolationmethod:ThemethodusedbyAtoll.Formoreinformation
onAtollsmethodfor3Dinterpolation,seetheTechnicalGuide
LinearInterpolationmethod:Asimplelinearmethodwithasmoothingparameter:
G = A hor azi + A ver elev smooth

Directview

Whenselected,theangleofincidencewillbethedirectTxRxangle

Useclutterheight

Specifywhetherclutterheightsshouldbeappliedalongtheprofilesbetweentransmitter
andreceiver.Clutterheightsareeitherextractedfromtheclutterheightfile,orfrom
defaultclutterheightsbasedontheclutterclassfile.

Receiverontopofclutter

Specifywhetherthereceivershouldbeconsideredtobeontopoftheclutterornot.

OperatorspecificpropagationmodelscanoftenbemodelledcorrectlyusingtheBasicmode.

12.2.2.2 ImprovedMethod
TheImprovedmethodperformsantennamaskingbydelegatingthecalculationoftheanglesofincidencetothepropagation
model.IfthepropagationmodeldoesnotimplementtheappropriatemethodsofAtollsAPI,theImprovedmethodisnot
available.
YoucanadjustthefollowingparameterwhenusingImprovedmethod:
Parameter

Description

Antennapatterninterpolation Theantennagaincalculationmethodforderivingtheantennagainfromasetofanglesof
incidence.Either:

Native3DInterpolationmethod:ThemethodusedbyAtoll.Formoreinformation
onAtollsmethodfor3Dinterpolation,seetheTechnicalGuide
LinearInterpolationmethod:Asimplelinearmethodwithasmoothingparameter:
G = A hor azi + A ver elev smooth

TheImprovedmethodusuallygivesaccurateresults.

12.2.2.3 FullPathLossMethod
With the Full Path loss method, the ACP recalculates all path loss matrices for all combinations of parameters which are
tested.ThisisafallbackmethodforcomplexpropagationmodelsnotaccuratelymodelledbytheBasicorImprovedmethods,
forexample,forcomplexraytracingpropagationmodels.
Whenusingtheprecalculatedmethod,AtollACPfirstcalculatesnewpathlossmatricesforeverypossiblecombinationof
antennaparameterswhichneedstobetested.Theoptimisationprocessthenusestheseprecalculatedpathlossmatricesto
determinehowattenuationchangeswhenanantennaismodified.
TheACPdoesnotcalculateallpathlossmatricesforallpossiblecombinations,forexample,fivepossiblechangesinelectrical
tiltandfivepossiblechangesinazimuth,i.e.,25pathlossmatrices.TheACPonlycalculatesthepathlossmatricesforthe
changeswhichneedtobeevaluatedbytheoptimisationalgorithm.Byprecalculatingonlythissubset,theACPreducesthe
numberofpathlossmatricestobecalculatedandthecalculationtime.
Ifachangeistestedonatransmitterthatwasnottakenintoconsiderationwhenthepathlossmatriceswerecalculated,the
ACPrecalculatesthepathlossmatricesforthatchangeonly.
Themaindrawbackoftheprecalculatedmethodisthelengthyprecalculationrequiredandthediskspacerequiredtostore
thepathlossmatrices.Therefore,thefollowingarerecommended:

Usetheprecalculatedmethodonlywhennecessary.IftheBasicorImprovedmethodgivesaccurateACPpredictions
thatareinlinewithAtoll,useoneofthesemethodsinstead.
Whenusingtheprecalculatedmethod,limitthenumberofparameterscovered.Forexample,onlyenabletwoor
threeazimuthoptions.Alsocarefullydesignyourantennagroups.
Useapathlossstoragedirectorywhichisdedicatedtoyourprojectregion.Thisensuresthatfutureoptimisationsin
thatregionwillhavepathlossmatricesthathavealreadybeencalculated.

842

Poweroptimisationandsiteselection(withoutreconfiguration)donotrequire
recalculationofthepathlossmatrices.
Antennaheightreconfigurationaswellasnewcandidatesalwaysuseamethod
similartotheFullPathlossmethodtocalculatemissingpathlossmatrices.

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter12:ACPModule

AT321_TRR_E1

12.2.3 CrossWavePropagationModel
AtollACPsupportstheCrossWavepropagationmodelasanativemodelusingtheOptimisedmethodanddelegatingthe
calculationoftheanglesofincidencetothemodel.
However,theclutterheightfilesandDTMmustbeaccurateinAtollsothattheACPcanaccesstheterrainprofile(evenwhen
youhaveconfiguredCrossWavetodirectlyaccessbuildingvectors).

12.2.4 AntennaMaskingandRepeaters,RemoteAntennas,and
SecondaryAntennas
ACPfullysupportsrepeaters,cascadedrepeaters,andremoteantennas.Therepeaterorremoteantennacanbereconfigured
forthe"coverageside".Howeverthe"donorside"ofrepeaterscannotbereconfigured.
ACPcorrectlytakesintoaccountthepathlossproducedbytransmittersusingsecondaryantennas.
Howeverreconfigurationofthesetransmittersisnotcurrentlysupportedunlessthesecondaryantennausesapowershare
of0%or100%(forexample,ifyouareusingthesecondaryantennatotestanalternativeconfiguration).
ACPsupportssecondaryantennasasfollows:
1. Foreachsecondaryantennawitha'%power'>0,ACPcreatearemoteantennanamed'txname(SecondaryAntenna
X)'(forexample,'Site1_1(SecondaryAntenna0)').Theseremoteantennashavetheirheightlinkedtothetransmitter
towhichtheyareassociated.
2. TheACPrecalculatesonepathlossmatrixforthemainantenna,andoneforeachsecondaryantenna.Thesepathloss
matricesarestoredintheprivatestoragedirectory.
3. TheACPproceedsasitwouldforanyotherremoteantennawhenreconfiguring,withthefollowingexceptions:

Theremoteantennarepresentingthesecondaryantennaalwayshasitsheightlinkedtothatofthetransmitterto
whichitisassociated.
Duringsiteselection,ACPtransmitterconsidersaseitheractiveorinactivewithallitssecondaryantennas.The
ACPdoesnotsupporttransmitterswhereonlysomeofthesecondaryantennasareactive.

12.3 Configuration
12.3.1 ConfiguringanOptimisationSetup
Settingupthereconfigurationparametersisstraightforward.Foreachparameterchange,arangefortheparametercanbe
specified,forexample:

Maximumvariationforazimuth
Minimum/maximumrangeforelectricaltilt,mechanicaltilt,power,height,etc.

Youhavetheoptionoflockingheightandazimuthoptimisationpersite.Inotherwords,whenachangetoantennaheightor
azimuthismadetoonetransmitteronasite,thesamechangeismadetoalltransmittersofasite.Inthecaseoftheazimuth,
referstotherotationofthemast,andforantennaheight,allantennaswillbealldisplacedtothesameheight.
Bydefault,azimuthlockingisdisabled,whileheightlockingisenabledbydefaultforallcolocalisedtransmittersonthesame
site.

12.3.1.1 AntennaSetup
Electricaltiltandantennamodeloptimisationrequirecorrectantennamodelling.TheconceptsonwhichAtollACPantenna
modellingarebasedarethefollowing:

AntennaElement:Anantennaelementgroupsallinstancesofanantenna,belongingtothesamefrequencyband,
withdifferentelectricaltilts.
Physical Antenna: A physical antenna is a multiband antenna, grouping all antenna elements from different
frequencybandswhicharephysicallythesameantenna.
AntennaGroups(Optional):Anantennagroupisauserdefinedsubsetofthephysicalantennaenablingyoutoselect
antennamodelreconfigurationtobedonewithinthissubset.

Modellingtheantennasnormallyonlyneedstobedoneonce.Atollenablesyoutocarrythisoutinseveraldifferentways:

UsingthePhysicalAntennafieldoftheAntennatable:YoucanassignthesamenameinthePhysicalAntennafield
intheAntennatabletoantennasbelongingtothesamephysicalantenna,independentlyofthefrequencybandthey
use.TheACPwillthenusethisinformationtoautomaticallycreateallantennaelementsandphysicalantennas.The
physicalantennanameisdisplayedinthe"Model"columnoftheACPAntennaPatternTable.

843

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter12:ACPModule

Forsk2014

YoucanalsocreateacustomcolumnintheAntennastabletoautomaticallylinkantennaelementsofamultiband
physicalantennawhichhavethesameelectricaltilt.Youmustidentifythiscolumnusingthe"antenna.etilt.share"
optionintheacp.inifile.Formoreinformationontheacp.inifile,seetheAdministratorManual.
Thisisthepreferredmethod,asACPwillthenautomaticallycreateallantennaelementsandphysicalantennaseach
timeasetupiscreated.

Manually defining Antenna Elements and Physical Antennas: You can manually define antenna elements and
physical or use a REGEX expression. For more information on manually defining antenna elements and physical
antennas,seetheUserManual.
Detectingautomaticallythe"Freq.Band"fieldintheACP"AntennaPatternTable":

IfaFREQUENCYcustomfieldexistsinAtoll,thevalueitcontainswillbeextracted.
IfaFREQUENCYcustomfielddoesnotexistinAtollorexistsandislessthanorequalto0,thenafrequencywill
bedeterminedinthefollowingorder:

If"antennaPattern"isreferencedbyatransmitter,thefrequencydefinedbytransmittersFREQBANDisused.
FREQBANDisthe"Frequency"field(inGSM)or"StartFrequency"field(inUMTSandLTE)intheFrequency
BandstableavailablefromParameters>NetworkSettings>Frequencies>Bands.

IftheprojectcontainsasingleFREQBAND,thenthefrequencydefinedbythisFREQBANDisused
If"antennaPattern"definesa[FMINFMAX]range,thefirstFREQBANDdefiningafrequencywithinthisrange
isused.Else,thehardcodedvalue(935,2110,or1805)containedinthe[FMINFMAX]rangeisused.Ifallfails,
thenthevalueissetto0andthecellremainsempty.

12.3.1.2 AdditionalElectricalTilt(AEDT)
Atoll ACP supports additional electrical tilt (AEDT) processing. AEDT is used when antenna patterns are not available for
changesinelectricaltilts.ThepatternsarederivedbyAtollACPusinggeometricdowntiltsoftheoriginalantennapattern.
YoucanenableAEDTsupportintheACPbysettingthefollowingoptionintheacp.inifile:
[ACPAntennaPage]
enableAedt=1
When you have activated AEDT support, new columns appear in the Antenna Pattern table on the Patterns tab of the
AntennatabtoallowyoutoconfigurewhichantennausesAEDTandtherangeofallowedelectricaltilt.
You can usethefollowingacp.ini options to reference custom columns in theAntennastable.TheACP will usethedata
enteredinthesecustomfieldstosetthedefaultvaluesinanewoptimisationsetup.
[ACPCustomFieldExtraction]
antenna.aedtUse=ACP_AEDT_USE
antenna.aedtMin=ACP_AEDT_MIN
antenna.aedtMax=ACP_AEDT_MAX
Formoreinformationontheavailableoptionsintheacp.inifile,seetheAdministratorManual.

12.3.1.3 RelativeElectricalTiltValues
Bydefault,theACPallowsthereconfigurationofelectricaltiltparametersbasedonabsolutevalues.Thesamedefaultsettings
applytomechanicaltiltparameters.
ThefollowingoptionallowsyoutodisplaytheelectricaltiltvaluesintheTransmitterstable(ontheReconfigurationtab)as
relativevalues,ratherthanabsoluteones:
[ACPReconfPage]
tx.etilt.asRelative=1
ThefollowingoptioncanbeusedtocreateanadditionalconstraintontheReconfigurationtabthatwillbeappliedtoelectrical
tiltchanges.Thisconstraintenablestheusertodefinearangeofelectricaltiltchangeswithinadefinednumberofdegrees
aboveorbelowthecurrentelectricaltilt.ThefollowingexampleforcestheACPtofindanoptimalelectricaltilt4degrees
higherthanor4degreesbelowthecurrentelectricaltilt,foralltransmitters.
[ACPReconfPage]
tx.etilt.deltaLimitConstraint=4

844

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter12:ACPModule

AT321_TRR_E1

12.4 MultiLayer,MultiRATandCoplanningSupport
TheACPfullysupportsmultilayer,multiRAT,andcoplanningdocuments.

12.4.1 ACP'sMultiRATandCoplanningMode
WhenworkingincoplanningmodewithseveralAtolldocuments,ACPenablesyoutoimporttheotherAtollprojectintoone
ACPsetup.TheACPsetupthenbecomesamultiRATsetup.
ThebenefitsofusingtheACPinmultiRATmodeare:

Youcandefinemultilayer/multiRATcombinedobjectives
You can automatically synchronise shared multiband antennas. This ensures that any antenna reconfiguration is
properlytakenintoaccountinallimpactedtechnologies.
Sharedsitelocationisautomaticallymanagedforsitelocationandsitecandidates.InamultiRATdocument,youcan
upgradeexistingsiteswithanewradioaccesstechnology,andtaketheupgradecostintoconsideration.

TheACPautomaticallydetectssitessupportingseveraltechnologies,aswellassharedmultibandantennasusingtheShared
AntennafieldoftheAtollTransmitterstablewhenpresent(SHAREDMASTinthedatabase),andprovidedthatthecolocated
transmittersarewithin1metrefromoneanother.Inaddition,theACPautomaticallydetectscolocatedsitesandantennas,
includingsecondaryantennas(i.e.whenSharedAntennaisnotorisonlypartiallyused)usingthefollowingalgorithm:
Parameter

Description

Colocatedsite

Within10metresofeachother

ColocatedAntenna
(i.e.Transmitters)

Antennapositionwithin1metre
Antennaheightwithin1metre
Antennaazimuthwithin2degrees
Mechanicaltiltwithin1degree
Samephysicalantennawhentheantennadefinesthisfield

Occasionally, problems in the Atoll database can mean that the ACP does not
recognisethatsitesorantennasarecolocated.Ifthishappens,youcanmanually
setthesitesorantennastobecolocated,althoughyoushouldalsoreviewthe
databasetocorrectanyerrorsthere.

Thenormalwayofdetectinglinkedtransmittersistousethe"SharedAntenna"
fieldintheTransmitterstable(SHAREDMAST).Ifatleastonetransmitterdefines
a"SharedAntenna",thenthefollowinglogicisused:

Detectionofcolocatedsitesassiteslocatedwithin1metrefromoneanother.
All transmitters from colocated sites with the same shared antenna are
linkediftheyhaveadifferentfrequencyband,orifthetechnologyisdifferent.
Sanity check is performed to validate that antenna parameters are
consistent: same position, same azimuth, same mechanical tilt, and same
antenna height (within 1 metre for position, within 2 degrees for azimuth,
within1degreefortilt,andwithin1metreforantennaheight).Iftwolinked
transmittersarenotconsistent,theACPwillissueanonblockingwarning.

Ifthe"SharedAntenna"fieldisnotusedbyatleastonetransmitter,thentheACP
willuseanothermodewhereitautomaticallydetectsthelinkedtransmitterusing
the same criteria as the one used in sanity check (within 1 metre for position,
within2degreesforazimuth,etc.).

12.4.2 LayerDefinition
TheACPseeseachradioaccesstechnologyasoneorseverallayers.Thebasiclayersaredefinedaccordingtotherulesbelow:
Technology
GSM
UMTSandCDMA

LayerDefinition

Example

Eachindependentfrequency
bandisseenasaseparatelayer

OnelayerforGSM 900band

Eachchannelisseenasa
separatelayer

Onelayerforeach:

OnelayerforGSM 1800band

Channel0of2110 MHzband
Channel1of2110 MHzband
Channel0of900 MHzband

845

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter12:ACPModule

Technology
LTEandWiMAX

Forsk2014

LayerDefinition

Example

Eachindependentfrequency
Onelayerforeachof:
bandisseenasaseparatelayer.
2010 MHzband
900 MHzband

Whendefiningobjectives,eachruleisassociatedwithasinglelayer.
Eachqualityindicatorisevaluatedforthelayertowhichitisassigned,howeveryoucangroupqualityindicatorsfromdifferent
layers/ortechnologieswithinasameobjective.
Whenyou are usingtheACPwithmorethan onelayer (and,therefore, inmultiRAT projects aswell),youcanputmore
emphasisoncertainlayersbymodifyingtheglobalweightoftheobjectivesoftheindividuallayers.
Atoll ACP optimises the quality objectives for all layers. All layers are considered the
same;thereisnot,forexample,onetargetlayerandoneormoreconstraintlayers.Ifone
layerneedstobeoptimisedwithoutdegradingotherlayers,youneedto:

Defineaheavierweightontheobjectivesrelatedtothe"target"layer,
Or

Use a coverage target for the objectives of the "constraint" layers which are
relative to the current coverage (where a successful optimisation would be
definedas"nocoveragedecrease").

12.5 OptimisationMethodology
WhentheAtollACPperformstheoptimisation,itoptimisesalltheobjectives(qualityandcost)combinedintoasingleglobal
scorefunction.Thisglobalscorefunctionisusedasthebasisforthesearchalgorithm,i.e.,thealgorithmattemptstofindthe
bestparametercombinationtominimisetheglobalscorefunction.
Inthefinalstep,asortingalgorithmprovidesanimplementationplanwherethemostusefulchanges(intermsofminimizing
thescore)aredonefirstandtheleastusefulchangesaredonelast.

12.5.1 SearchAlgorithm
Thepossiblenumberofconfigurationsgrowsexponentiallywiththenumberofsectorstooptimise.Thenaivesearchmethod,
consisting of enumerating all possible solutions, very quickly becomes unmanageable. For example, selecting the best
antennaamong10possibleantennasona100sectornetwork,leadstoasearchspaceof10100possiblesolutions,i.e.,more
thanthenumberofatomsintheuniverse.
Atoll ACP uses a Tabubased search algorithm with fast convergence. In short, this algorithm performs local greedy
optimisation,whileallowingfortheexplorationofnewlocationsinthesearchspace.Whenatransmitterhasbeenalloweda
parameterchange,anynewchangeisforbiddenduringacertainnumberofiterations.
Anumberofadditionaltechniquesareusedtoimprovethebasicprocess,suchasrandomisation,diversification,aspiration,
andlongtermsearch.Knowledgeoftheparticularnatureofthenetwork(cellneighbourrelations,forexample)isalsoused
toimprovetheprocessandmakeitefficient.
Thissearchalgorithmusestheconceptofiterations:eachiterationconsistsofoneparameterchangeononeofthesectors
orsitesofthenetwork.Thenumberofiterationsisakeyparameteroftheoptimisation,andshouldbehighenoughtoensure
thatthesearchspaceisproperlycovered.Usuallyafewtimesthenumberofentitiestooptimiseissufficient,althoughthis
parameterstilldependsstronglyonthesizeofthenetworkandthequalityoftheinitialnetwork.
Itshouldbenotedthatagivensectormightbemodifiedinseveralsteps,i.e.,thefinalchangemightbetheresultofseveral
differentiterations.Someiterationsmightalsocanceleachother,i.e.,asectorisreturnedtoitsinitialstateatthesecond
iteration.
TheACPrecommendsanumberofiterations.Therecommendednumberofiterationsis
calculatedbymultiplyingthenumberofentitiestooptimisebytwo.Bydefininganumber
of iterations equal to or greater than the recommended number, you ensure that the
searchspaceisexploredcorrectly.

846

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter12:ACPModule

AT321_TRR_E1

12.5.2 TuningAlgorithm
TheACPsearchalgorithmincludesatuningphasebetweenthesearchandsortingphases(correspondingtooptimisationand
finalisationphasesintheACPGUI).
Thetuningphaseconsistsinimprovingthebestsolutionfoundduringthesearchphase.Itperformsalocaloptimisationof
thenetworkwhilepreventinguselesschangesfrombeingdone.
Duringthetuningphase,theACPproceedsasintheTabubasedsearchphase,butwithoutusingaTabulist,randomisation,
etc.Itsimplyfindsthebestneighbourcandidatetomoveaftereachiteration,i.e.thechangewhichmostlyimprovesthescore
functionSTOT(x).Thetuningphasestopsassoonasthescorefunction(see"GlobalScoreFunction"onpage 848),canno
longerbeimproved.
Thetuningphaseisfullytransparenttotheenduseranditprovidesthefollowingbenefits:

Removesthechangeswithinsignificantbenefits,i.e.changeswithlessthan1%ofthebenefitprovidedbythebest
singlechange.
Findsthelocaloptimaaroundthebestsolutionoftheoptimisationphase.Duetothebehaviouroftheoptimisation
phase,andtothepossibilityofearlystopping,itcanhappenthattheACPfindsthenonoptimallocaloptima.
AllowstheTabubasedsearchphasetoconcentratemoreonspanningthesolutionphase,withouthavingtoalso
performlocaloptimisationaroundthebestcandidatesolution.
ProvidesabetterautomaticstopconditionfortheTabubasedsearchphase,andbettermanagementofearlymanual
stopsbytheuser.
Will be useful in future releases for better management of multiple solution findings corresponding to different
qualitiesorcosttradeoffs,i.e.differentpointsontheParetosurfaceofmultiobjectiveoptimisationproblems.

Thisfeatureisfullytransparent.Therequestednumberofiterationsisusedinbothphases.Bydefault,about2/3of the
iterationsareusedintheTabubasedsearchphase,and1/3inthetuningphase.Theseratioscandifferwhenanearlystop
(automaticormanual)isperformedduringtheTabubasedsearchphase.
OntheGraphtaboftheOptimisationwindow,averticalbarisdisplayedtoshowtheswitchpointbetweenoptimisationand
tuningphases.

Figure 12.1:GraphtaboftheOptimisationwindow

12.5.3 SortingAlgorithm
Afterapplyingthesearchandtuningalgorithms,AtollACPproposesasolutionconsistingofanumberofchangestobeapplied
totheinitialnetwork.Achangeistypicallyamodificationtoanantennaparameteror(forcandidatesites)deployingasiteor
(forexistingsites)sectororremovingasiteorsector.

847

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter12:ACPModule

Forsk2014

AtollACPthenusesasortingalgorithmtocreateanorderedimplementationplan.Thesortingalgorithmrecursivelyfindsthe
bestchangetoapplyamongallremainingchanges.Thebestchangeistheonewhichimprovesthetotalcostfunctionthebest:

Thefirstchangesproposedhavemorebenefits(intermsofthetradeoffbetweenqualityandcost)thanlaterchanges.
ItisthenpossibletoselectasubsetofthetotalnumberofchangesbyselectingonlytheNfirstchanges.

12.5.4 GlobalScoreFunction
12.5.4.1 SearchAlgorithm
Theglobalscorefunctionusedasabasisforthesearchalgorithmiscreatedbyalinearcombinationofthecostobjectiveand
everyqualityobjective.
Theglobalscorefunctionisinthefollowingform:

C TOT x =

ai fi Qi x + k fc C x

i qualityobj
Where:

i isanindexspanningallqualityobjectivesdefined

n isthenetworkconfigurationtobetested

Q i x isthe"ith"qualityobjectiveevaluation

a i isaweightfactorassociatedwiththe"ith"qualityobjective,andappliesdifferentimportanceonthedifferent

qualityobjectivesforthedifferentlayers
C x isthe(financial)costassociatedwithconfiguration"x"

f i isaonedimensionalfunctionexpressingtheindividualgivencostforthe"ith"qualityobjectivemeasurement.
Thecoveragecostsarenullifthetargetcoverageisreached: f i x = 0forx T arg etCov

f c isaonedimensionalfunctionmappingthenetworkfinancialcostsuitabletobeusedalongsidethequality
objectivecosts.

Example

C TOT x = a obj1 f obj1 Cov obj1 x + a obj2 f obj2 Cov obj2 x

Where: Cov obj1 x (or Cov obj2 x )isthepercentageofcoverageoveraspecifiedthresholdforconfiguration"x".
Forexample,inUMTS:

1
Cov obj1 = --N

i 1 Th E c i Thresh Ec

i pixels

Where: 1 Th isthestepfunction).

1
Cov obj2 = --N

i 1 Th E c I o i Thresh EcIo

i pixels

Where:

i isthenormalisedtrafficdensityonpixel"i":

i = 1

i pixels

E c and E c I o arethebasicqualitymeasurementsononepixelasdescribedearlier.

f obj1 and f obj2 are the onedimensional mapping functions expressing the individual cost for a coverage
figureornetworkquality:

f obj1 cov = 0forcov T arg etRSCP

f obj2 cov = 0forcov T arg etEcIo

848

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter12:ACPModule

AT321_TRR_E1

12.5.4.2 TuningAlgorithm
Theglobalscorefunctionusedasabasisforthetuningalgorithmisthefollowing:

S TOT ( x ) CTOT ( x ) p f n N ( x )
Where:

CTOT (x) istheglobalscorefunctiondescribedearlier

N (x)

isthenetworkconfigurationtobetested

isthenumberofchangesperformedinthenetworkfromtheinitialconfiguration

isaweightfactorderivedautomaticallytohaveanappropriatescalingofthenewtermwith CTOT (x) .Itis

chosensuchthatthe"cost"ofonechangeisequalto q% ofthescorefunctionimprovementprovidedbythe
bestindividualchangeinalltheproposedchanges.Bydefault q

fn

1. 25%

isaonedimensionalfunctionexpressinganindividualcostforagivennumberofchanges.Bydefault,ininitial

implementations,itistheidentityfunction:

fn y y

12.5.5 Weighting
Severaltypesofweightareappliedduringthecalculationoftheglobalscorefunction.
Onageographicallevel(usedtocalculatetheweights i intheaboveformulas):

Trafficweighting:Eachpixelcanhaveanimportanceproportionaltothetrafficsupportedonit.
Zoneweighting:Eachpixelwithinadefinedzone(computation,focus,hotspotzonesorcluttergroupzone)canhave
anadditionalweightwhichincreasesordecreasestheimportanceofthezone.

Onagloballevel(formingtheweights a i intheaboveformulas):

Qualityobjectiveweighting:Withinalayer,eachqualityobjectivecanbegivenmoreorlessimportanceascompared
tootherqualityobjectivesofthatlayer.

12.5.6 ControllingtheOptimisation
AlthoughtheAtollACPprocessisdesignedtobeasautomaticaspossible,thereareacoupleofparametersthatrequiresome
consideration:

Numberofiterations:Thisoptiondefinesthenumberofiterationsinthesearchalgorithm.
Resolution:Theresolutiondefinesthesizeofthepixelsusedtomeasurethequalityobjectives.

Theseparametersaffectthequalityandspeedoftheoptimisation.
Iftheresolutionishigh,ACPdoesabetterjobofsamplingthenetworkzone,buttakeslongertorun.Iftheresolutionislow,
thesamplingismoreapproximatebutthespeedishighlyincreased.Asasuggestion,AtollACPprovidesinformationonthe
totalnumberofpixels,aswellastheaveragenumberofpixelspersite.
Similarly,ifthenumberofiterationsishigh,theoptimisationwilllikelyfindabettersolutionbutwilltakelongertorun.
Thefollowingtablegivestypicalvaluestobeusedforagoodoptimisation:
Parameter

TypicalValue

Numberofiterations

Around1to2peritem(antenna,azimuth,tilt,cellpilot
power,etc.)tobeoptimised

Resolution

Theaveragenumberofpositionspersiteisbetween300
and3000.

You can start with a low resolution first, before using a higher resolution for more
accurateresults.WhentheACPisrunninganoptimisation,thetabsoftheOptimisation
dialogueprovidefeedbackwhichcanhelpyoutodecidetostoptheoptimisationearlyif
theoverallnetworkqualityseemstohaveimprovedenough.

849

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter12:ACPModule

Forsk2014

12.5.7 ImplementationPlan
Thesortingprocessintheimplementationplanisbasedonaglobalscorefunctionwhichincludesqualityobjectivesandthe
cost of changes (i.e. it takes into account the quality settings as well as the Cost Control settings if cost of changes is
considered,withtheselectionofMaximumCostorQuality/Costtradeoffoptions).

C TOT x =

ai fi Qi x + k fc C x

i qualityobj

Figure 12.2:Setup>Properties>Optimisationtab>CostControldialogbox
OnlythedatadisplayedontheChangeDetailstabisactuallyseparatedforqualityobjectivesandcostofchanges:

Quality Improvement Ratio %: this column shows the ratio of attained quality VS the maximum quality when all
changesaremade(thedisplayedvaluesrangefrom0%and100%).Thisratioallowsyoutoknowtherelativegainof
eachchange.Ittakesintoaccountthecoverageandqualityobjectives(i.e.LTERSCoverageandLTERSCINR)and,if
used,thefinancialcost.However,theloadbalancingobjectiveisnotconsidered.

TotalCost:thiscolumnshowstheassociatedcostofchanges.

Thedataisseparatedasitmakesmoresensetodisplayunderstandablevaluesin2columnsratherthandisplaya"Score
improvementratio%"whichwouldbedifficulttounderstand.
Oneconsequenceofthisisthatifyouobtain2changesprovidingthesamequalityimprovementratio,thenthefirstonein
thelistwillbetheonewiththelowestassociatedcost.

850

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter12:ACPModule

AT321_TRR_E1

Figure 12.3:Setup>Optimisation>Properties>ChangeDetailstab

12.5.8 MemoryUsageandOptimisationResolution
Theadministratorcansetanoptionintheacp.inifiletosetalimitontheamountofmemorythatAtollACPcanuse.Ifthisis
thecase,youmightreachthesetlimitwhenusingahighresolutionandAtollwillstoptheACPoptimisationearly.Ifthis
happens,youcanreruntheoptimisationbydecreasingtheresolutionordecreasingthesizeofthecomputationzone.Aswell,
whenperforminganoptimisationonalargearea,youcanlimitmemoryusagebyperformingtheoptimisationinseveralsteps,
eachtimeonadifferentportionoftheentirearea.FormoreinformationonACPmemorylimits,seetheAdministratorGuide.

12.5.9 InternalDataManagementandPerformance
12.5.9.1 MemoryUsage
For each tested network change, the ACP recalculates how each objective improves or degrades. Each objective is the
combinationofoneorseveralqualityindicatorsevaluatedonseveralhundredthousandorevenmillionsofpixelsdepending
ontheresolutionandnetworksize.
TheACPneedstostore,foreachpixel,alistoftheneighbouringcellsinordertobeabletofindnewbestserversandcalculate
interferencelevels.
Giventheamountofdataprocessed,itwouldbeprohibitiveintermsoftheamountoftimenecessarytoreadpathloss
matricesfromthediskoneachiteration.Foreachpixel,theACPkeepsthelistofneighbourcellsandtheirattribute(pathloss
attenuation,forexample)inmemoryinaformatoptimisedforfastprocessing.
TheseinternaldatastructuresarecreatedduringtheloadingphaseofanACPrun.Anymemoryissuethatcouldoccurwhen
optimising a large network should happen during this initial phase, as allocations to memory are very limited during the
solutionsearch.
YoucanchangehowtheACPmanagesthedataitloadsintomemorybysettingcertainoptionsintheacp.inifile.Forexample,
youcansetthenumberofcellsthattheACPmonitorsbysettingthe"maxMonitorCell"optionintheacp.inifile.Youcanuse
the "threshLevelMonitorCell" option to define the best server signal threshold (dB) of the cell in order for the cell to be
monitored.Formoreinformationontheseoptions,seetheAdministratorGuide.
Inpractice,however,itisusuallysufficienttochangethemodeofoperation,therebyperformingatradeoffbetweenmemory
usage,andtheaccuracyoftheoptimisation(especiallyonmeasuresrelatedtointerference):

Highspeed:Thecelllistisshortenedtoreducememoryuse,andthealgorithmisoptimisedtoimprovespeed.
Normal:Thenormalmodewithabalancedtradeoffbetweenspeed,memoryuse,andaccuracy.
Highprecision:Thehighprecisionmoderesultsinhighermemoryusageandalowerspeed,butoffersthehighest
accuracybymonitoringalongerlistofcells.
WhendoingsiteselectioninGreenfieldscenarioswherealotofcandidatesitearedefined
closetoeachother,itisrecommendedtousetheHighprecisionmodeinordertoensure
thatallneighbourcandidatesitesarewellmonitoredbytheACP.

851

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter12:ACPModule

Forsk2014

12.5.9.2 DiskSpaceUsage
Toreducediskspaceusage,theusercandefineinWindowsaprivatestoragedirectoryforACPwithcompressionsettoON.
Thisalsoholdsforthepathlossdirectory.
TobetterusetheACPandavoidlengthyrecalculationsafterrollbackchanges,specifyaShareddirectoryforpathlossmatrix
storageinthepredictionssPropertiesdialogue.

12.6 LoadBalancingObjective
12.6.1 PrincipleUsedinACP
OneobviousapproachforloadcontrolandbalancingwithinACPistocomputethenewactualcellloadsforeachtested
reconfiguration.Bydetectingwhenthecellloadsbecomeimbalancedorinexcessofgivencellresources,itispossibletoavoid
suchreconfiguration.
Theoveralldifficultyisthecalculationofcellloadsgiventhepreciseinputsrequiredfortraffic,service,etc.,(butwhichare
oftenimperfectinpractice),aswellasthecomplexandlengthycalculationinvolvedwhichwouldrequirefullMonteCarlo
simulationsforeachtestedreconfiguration.
Another approach is to consider that the actual cell loads are fixed, i.e. fixing the level of interference generated in the
networkcorrespondingtoatargetload,andthenmakesurethatthesupportedtrafficismaximisedandwellbalanced.This
approachavoidsthecomplexityofcellloadcalculationthroughcomplexMonteCarlosimulation,andwebelieveitismore
robusttoimperfectinputs.Inparticularthisapproachwouldstillprovideusefulinsightsonloadimbalancefromonlyapartial
traffic model (considering for example only 1 or 2 services typically representative of the traffic distribution). This is the
approachusedinACP.
SincethecellpowerloadisfixedinACPcalculation,anothermethodisneededtoinsurethattherealcellloaddoesnot
increasebeyondcapacityandiscorrectlybalancedbetweencells.
TheACPapproachisbasicallytoperformcellcapacityloadbalancing.Thecellcapacityloadisnottheactualcellloadderived
fromasetofrealistictrafficmapsandservicesusingaMonteCarlosimulationwithpowerconvergenceloop,butisonlya
capacityindicatorcomputedbyassumingafixedcellloadandatrafficmodelwhichcouldbesimplifiedmodelaslongasitis
representativeoftheactualtrafficdistribution.
ForUMTSR99,thecellcapacityloadisrelatedtotransmittedpower:

AtotaltransmittedpoweriscomputedoverthewholeBestServerareabyaddingtransmittedpowerforeachpixel.
Eachpixeltransmittedpoweriscomputedbyusingtheloadfactorequation,butstillassumingthatthecellshavea
fixedloadforthepurposeofinterferencecalculation.Eachpixelpowerisscaledwithtrafficdensitydistribution.The
ratio of this total cell power over the maximum cell power is the cell capacity load, and is expressed in % of the
availableresources.
TheACPequalisesthecellcapacityload,avoidingthatsomecellsuseexcessivepower.

Othertechnologiesusethesameprinciples,howeverwithadifferentdefinitionofcellcapacityload.
Thekeyreasonwhycellcapacityloadbalancingisasuitableapproachisthatcellcapacityloadiscorrelatedtotheactualcell
load.Whenthecellcapacityloadsarebeingsuccessfullybalanced,theytendtoconvergelooselytowardstheactualcellload.
Anyimbalanceintheactualcellloadisthusreflectedbyimbalanceinthecapacitycellload.
Moreover,byfocusingonawhatifscenariowherecellloadsaresettoanaveragetargetload(usingforexampleatarget
networkloadof70%),thenthecomputedcapacitycellloadsmeasuredirectlyhowmuchroomisavailableormissinginactual
cellcapacitytosupportthistargetnetworkload.

12.6.2 OptimisationPrinciple
Thecalculationisperformedin3steps:

Assignmentoftherequestedtraffictothevariouscellsonthenetwork,acrosslayersandtechnologies.
Computationofcellcapacityloadfromtheassignedtraffic.
Derivationofthescorefunctionoftheloadbalancingobjectivefromthecellcapacityloads.

12.6.2.1 TrafficCaptureforLoadBalancing
TheACPisdesignedtoperformloadbalancingacrossmultiplelayersandtechnologies.Thismeansthattherequestedtraffic
willbesharedacrosstheavailablelayerswithintheallowedtechnologiesforthisservice.
Therequestedtrafficforeachserviceisassignedtocellsaccordingtothefollowingrules:

852

Candidatecellsforassignmentofapixeltrafficareselectedamongallbestservercellsinalldifferentlayers,andfor
which:

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter12:ACPModule

AT321_TRR_E1

Thelayertechnologyisallowedfortheservice.
Theservicetrafficcaptureconditionsarefulfilled.

Thetrafficisassignedpartiallytoeachofthesecandidatecells,suchthatthecellscapacityloadisminimal.

Theprocedureusesasimulationprocesswherethepixeltrafficisaddedgraduallytothenetwork,andthecellcapacityloads
areupdatedaftereachassignment,followedbyaconvergencelooptoreachaminimumstate.
Thisprocessbasicallysimulatesanetworkwherethetrafficisdynamicallyassignedtolayersinordertoequalisecellloads.
Forexample,ifapixeltrafficrequestedcanbeassignedtoCell1fromLayer1andtoCell2fromLayer2,itwillbeassignedto
theCellwiththeminimumcellload.
The end result of this process is to distribute the traffic across cells and layers in such a way that overlapping cells from
differentlayerstendtobeequallyloaded.Forexample,inUMTSthecellsbelongingtosametransmitterusuallyhavethesame
footprint,andassuchthecomputedloadwilltendtobeequalacrossthesecells;forcellswhichdonotfullyoverlap,the
processstilltendstoequaliseloadasmuchaspossible.
Inotherwords,thisprocesssimulatesaperfectcalladmissioncontrolprocedurewhosepurposeistoperfectlyequalisethe
requestedtrafficamongallcellsandlayersinthenetwork:anewcallisalwaysassignedtothelayerandcellhavingthe
minimumload.Layerswithhighcapacity(forexampleLTEvsGSM)tendtoacquiremoretrafficautomatically.

12.6.2.2 CellCapacityLoadCalculation
Thetrafficassignmentstagebasicallybalancethetrafficrequestacrossthedifferentcells,whilecomputingthecellscapacity
loads.Theexactmethodforcomputingthecontributionofapixeltothecellcapacityloadistechnologydependent.
Thecellcapacityloadisthesumofallpixelcontributions,scaledwithassignedtraffictothecelllayer:

Li =

T k i k

Pixel k Cell i
Where: k isthepixelloadratioandis T k i isthetrafficassignedtopixel"k"andcell"i".
Theunitofcapacityloadisapercentage(%).
InUMTSR99
Theloadfactorequationusedisthefollowing:

Eb No Io
1
= ----------- -----------------------P max A tt G proc
Where:

isthepixelloadratio

P max isthemaximumcellpower

E b N o isthetargetEbNoforthegivenservice

I o isthetotalnoiseandinterference

A tt istheattenuationtowardsthecell,includingantennagainandlosses

G proc istheserviceprocessinggain(Gproc=3.84e6/Tputserv)

InLTE
GiventhepixelSINR,onederivesfirstthebestBearerwhichcanbeassignedtoacalloriginatingfromthatpixel,thenderives
themaximumpossiblethroughputTputmaxwhichcouldbeprovidedtothatpixeloriginatedcall(givenbandwith,etc).The
pixelloadratioisthentheratioofresourcesusedbytheserviceonthispixel,andisgivenby:

Tput serv
= ------------------Tput max
Where Tput serv istheaveragerequestedthroughputfortheservice

12.6.2.3 LoadBalancingScoreFunction
TheLoadBalancingScoreFunctionbeingminimisedtodriveACPoptimisationisthefollowing:

Score = QI 1 + b 1
853

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter12:ACPModule

Forsk2014

Where:

QI is the Load Quality Index, whose minimisation reduces both the average cell load and load imbalance
(explainedbelowwithformulas)
istheTrafficCapturedratiowhichmeasureshowmuchtrafficispotentiallyservedinthetargetzone,dueto
trafficcaptureconditionbeingfulfilled
b isascalingfactortogivemoreorlessweightingtothetrafficcapturedratio(defaultis1)

ThisscorefunctionwillbeconsideredintheACPglobalscorefunctionwhenloadbalancingisactivated.Thisisdescribedin
"ImpactontheGlobalScoreFunction"onpage 858.

12.6.2.4 LoadQualityIndex
TheLoadQualityIndexisdefinedas:

QI = Mean QI l
Where:

QIl = l + a l istheQualityIndexcomputedforlayer"l"

and:

l istheweightedaverageofthecellcapacityload

l istheweightedstandarddeviationofthecellcapacityload

a isascalingfactortogivemoreorlessweightingtothestandarddeviation,i.e.totheloadimbalance(default=1)

1
l = --------------
Wli Li
Wli Celli Layerl
i

1
2
l = --------------
Wli Li l
Wli Celli Layerl
i
Where W li is a weighting factor applied on each cell load, for layer "l", and is used to reduce the effect or
completelydeselectacellinthecalculation:

Cells inside the target zone are considered as having a weight of 1, and cells outside the target zone are
allocatedaweightof0.
Inactivecellsarenotconsideredinthecalculation(intermofaverage/standarddeviationvaluesandnumber
ofcells).

TheoverallLoadQualityindexisanaverageoftheallthelayersLoadQualityindexes,
i.e.eachlayergetsidenticalimportance.

12.6.2.5 CapturedTrafficRatio
Thecapturedtrafficratioisdefinedas:

T ass
= -------T req
Where:

T req isthetotaltrafficrequestedinthetargetzone

T ass isthetotaltrafficassignedinthetargetzone

Increasingscalingfactor"b"leadstoincreasethetotaltrafficassignedwhentheScorefunctionisbeingminimised.
Seedefinitionof"b"in"LoadBalancingScoreFunction"onpage 853.

854

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter12:ACPModule

AT321_TRR_E1

12.6.2.6 IntroductionoftheLoadBalanceasQualityIndicator
TheLoadQualityIndexcanberewrittenas:

l
QI l = l 1 + a ---- = l 1 + aD l
l
Where:

D l = ----l istheLoadDispersionmeasureforlayer"l"
l

theLoadBalance(B)isdefinedas B = 1 D l

Thisloaddispersionparameterdirectlymeasurestheloadimbalance.Hence,minimisingtheLoadQualityIndexcanbeseen
asawayofdecreasingboththeLoadDispersion(thusimprovingtheLoadBalance)andtheAverageLoad(thusimprovingthe
networkcapacity).
A default Load Balance Target value is defined for the Load Balance in the user interface (e.g. 80%). When this target is
reached,theLoaddispersionpartoftheLoadQualityindexissettonull,sincetheobjectiveisabovetarget.ThisLoadBalance
targetallowsamargin,inotherwordsalowlevelofimbalance,forexample10%or20%withoutfurtheroptimisation.Hence,
whentheLoadBalancetargetisreached,onlytheaverageload( l )isconsideredforminimisationinthescorefunction.
TheminimisationoftheQualityindexcanalsobeseenasminimisationofthenumberofoverloadedcells.Let'smakethe
assumptionthatthecellcapacityloadsaredrawnfromaNormalrandomdistribution(Gaussianprocess).Itiscompletely
describedbybothmeanandstandarddeviations.

BydecreasingtheQualityIndexwith"a=1",wethendecreasetheloadofthe85thpercentileofthedistribution.
Byusing"a=2",theloaddecreaseisforthe98thpercentileofthedistribution.

Figure 12.4.CellLoadDistribution
Percentilesrepresenttheareaunderthenormalcurve,increasingfromlefttoright.

As the bottleneck in network capacity for a given quality is often given by its most loaded cells, we directly increase the
capacitybyfocusingonthehighdistributionpercentile.Inthemostgeneralcases,thecellloaddistributionisnotderivedfrom
a Normal distribution, however the argument still holds: decreasing the + a will focus on the capacity network
bottleneck.

12.6.3 QualityFiguresUsedforGraphsandStatisticsResults
The ACP provides graphs for the Load Balance and the Average Load values, in terms of quality figure for an easy
understandingbyusers.Thegoalistoprovideapercentagevalueforanimprovementandagraphwhichincreaseswhenthe
qualityindicatorincreases.

855

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter12:ACPModule

Forsk2014

12.6.3.1 LoadBalance
Thefigureisdesignedtoshow100%forperfectloadbalance,andtoshow0%fortotalimbalance.However,theformulaused
forcalculation, B = 1
--- ,mustbeadaptedduetonegativevaluesobtainedwhen .Consequently,theformulasused

fortheLoadBalancequalityfigureare:

LB = 1 0.8 --- when

1
LB = ---------------------------when
2

1 + 4 --
ItisdisplayedasacurveontheGraphstab,withinitialandfinalvaluesavailableontheStatisticstab.NotethattheLoad
balancevaluewilltendtoincrease(andthegraphtogoup)whencellcapacityloadsarebetterequalised.

12.6.3.2 AverageLoad
Thequalityfigureisgivenintermsofimprovement(%)fromtheinitialaverageload.Theformulausedforthequalityfigureis
0
----- 1

Where 0 istheinitialvalueand isthefinalvalue,or 0 thevalueforstepNand thevalueforstepN+1.

ItisdisplayedasacurveontheGraphstabandthefinalimprovementcanbefoundontheStatisticstab.
Inbothcases,a100%improvementmeansadecreaseby2oftheaverageload,200%adecreaseby3,50%anincreaseby2,
75%anincreaseby4,etc.

This quality figure will tend to increase when the average load decreases, which is
expectedduringoptimisation.

12.6.4 OptimisationResults
12.6.4.1 CapacityTab
TheAverageLoadandLoadBalancequalityfiguresareshownontheCapacitytabforanyspecifiedzone.Theyarebasedon
thecellcapacityloadswhicharedisplayedontherightontheCapacitytab.Hence,fromthelistofcellcapacityloads,itis
possibletorecomputethesequalityfiguresusingtheformulasdescribedintheprevioussection.
Thegraphalsodirectlyshowsthecumulativedistributionofcellcapacityloads,thusprovidingtheratioofcellcapacityload
beingsmallerthansomeloadvalue.

856

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter12:ACPModule

AT321_TRR_E1

Figure 12.5:Setup>Optimisation>Properties>Capacitytab

12.6.4.2 Graphs
TheLoadBalancevalues(initialandfinal)displayedontheStatisticstabarethesameastheonesdisplayedontheCapacity
tab.ThegraphrepresentingtheLoadBalance(blueline)showstheprogressofthisqualityfigureforeachiteration.
TheAverageLoaddisplayedontheStatisticstabistheimprovementfrominitialtofinalsteps.Thegraphrepresentingthe
AverageLoad(brownline)showsforeachiterationtheimprovement(%)withrespecttotheinitialstate.

Figure 12.6:GraphsforQualityFigures

857

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter12:ACPModule

Forsk2014

Figure 12.7:Statisticsresults(extract)

12.6.5 ImpactontheGlobalScoreFunction
TheLoadBalancingScoreFunctionisaddedtotheACPglobalscorefunction,whichalreadyincludesqualityobjectivesand
thecostofchanges.
Theweightingoftheloadbalanceobjectiveversusotherqualityobjectives(e.g.coverage)canbemodifiedfromtheuser
interface(Objectivestab>LoadBalancing>Weightparameter).
ItiscalibratedinsuchawaythatX%improvementoftheLoadqualityindexisequivalenttoanidenticalimprovementonother
objectives.Forexample,1%improvementoftheLoadqualityindexisequivalentto1%improvementoftheRSCPcoverage.

12.7 EMFExposure
EMFexposureisdefinedasthetotalelectromagneticfieldmeasuredatagivenlocation.Although theexactlimit onthe
acceptablelevelofEMFexposurevariesbyjurisdiction,itistypicallyafewVm.
TheACPcananalyseandoptimisetheEMFexposureinthenetworkinordertoreduceexcessiveelectromagneticradiationin
populatedareas.UsinganinternalpropagationmodelspecifictoEMFexposure,ACPcalculatestheEMFexposureintwo
dimensions(foropenareassuchasparksorroads)orinthreedimensions(forbuildings).Additionally,withbuildings,youcan
choosetomeasuretheexposureonlyatthefrontfaade,wheretheEMFexposurewillbethegreatest.
TheinternalpropagationmodelevaluatesthefieldstrengthinV/musingamodelbasedon"freespace"propagation,butit
cantakediffractionintoaccountwhenrequired.
Forregulationrequirements,a"worstcase"modecanbeusedfortheEMFexposurecalculationwhereEMFpredictionsare
verypessimistic,providingthehighestEMFvalueswhichwouldeverlikelybeseenintherealworld.Thismodeisusefulto
ensurethatanunacceptablelevelofEMFexposureisneverreachedinsensitiveareassuchasschools,hospitals,etc.

12.7.1 ConceptsofACPEMFExposure
12.7.1.1 PropagationClasses
TheinternalpropagationmodelcalculatesEMFexposureusingpropagationclasseswhichareretrievedfrominputfiles.Each
propagationclassiseitheropaque,meaningthatthesignalexperiencesdiffractionlossesattheedgeoftheobjectbutdoes
notgocompletelythrough,ortransparent,meaningthatthesignalpassesthroughit(withperhapssomelosses)anddoesnot
experiencediffractionloss.Thepropagationclasseshavethefollowingparameters:

Penetrationloss(dB):Thelossoccurringwhenthesignalenterstheobject.
Linearloss(dB/m):Alinearlossappliedforeachmeterwithinanobject.Thelossisappliedonlyafteragivennumber
ofmeters,specifiedbythe"Linearlossstartdistance(m)"parameter.
Distributionofevaluationpoints:Fieldstrengthmeasurementsaremadeonasetofpointswithinanobject.The
measurementpointscanbedistributedineithera3Dpatternorina2Dpattern.Foratwodimensionaldistribution,
thepointscanbeplacedeitheratthebottom(forexample,inapark)oratthetop(forexample,forabridge)tobetter
reflectwherepeoplewillbe.

Thefollowingdefaultpropagationclassesareprovided:

858

Open:TheOpenpropagationclassisforareaswithoutobstacles,suchasanopenareaorwater.Anopenareacan
alsobeanelevatedareasuchasabridge.Suchareasaretransparent,withnodiffractionloss.
Vegetation:TheVegetationpropagationclassisusedforareascoveredwithvegetation,suchasparks.Theycanbe
consideredastransparentbutwithacertaindegreeofdiffractionloss.
Building:TheBuildingpropagationclassisusedforopaqueobjectssuchasbuildings.Thesignalexperiencessomeloss
whengoingthroughandalsosufferfromdiffractionloss.

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter12:ACPModule

AT321_TRR_E1

Itispossibletodefinenewpropagationclasses,forexampletodifferentiatebetweensimilaritemswithdifferentpenetration
losscharacteristics(forexample,glassbuildings,stonebuildings,woodconstructions,etc.)orfordifferentiatingitemson
whichEMFevaluationshouldbedone(forexample,habitationversusmonuments).
Currently,userdefinedclassesarealwaysofthetype"opaque".

12.7.1.2 TerrainProfile
TomeasureEMFexposure,theACPdoesnotneedanyspecificterrainmodelling,butinsteaditusesallthegeodataavailable
intheAtollproject:

Georasterdata:Rasterdatagiveagridbasedrepresentationoftheterrainwithadefinedresolution.Therasterfiles
neededareDTM(DigitalTerrainModel)representingthegroundaltitude,clutterclassesrepresentingthetypeof
terrainandclutterheights(alsocalledadigitalheightmodel)representingindividualheights(forexample,building
heights).
Geovectordata:Geovectordatamodelthebuildingsandtheirheight,intheformofoneorseveralArcViewSHPfiles
definingnumerouspolygons.

ACPusesthegeodatatocreatea3Drepresentationoftheterrainintheformofafinerasterofpixelswithadefaultresolution
of2 meters.Foreachpixelinthisrasterrepresentation,boththeheightandpropagationclassinformationareencoded:

Forgeovectors,eachpolygonisassociatedwithasinglepropagationclassandaheight.Ifageovectorcontainsmore
thanonepolygon,ACPusestheassociatedDBFfiletomapthepolygonstopropagationclassesandheights.
Forgeorasters,eachclutterclassisassociatedwithasinglepropagationclass.Theheightisobtainedfromtheclutter
heightrasterfile.Ifnoclutterheightfileispresent,thedefaultclutterclassheightisused.

Forareascoveredbothbyvectordataandrasterdata,onlythegeovectordataareused.Georasterdataareonlyusedfor
theareasnotcoveredbygeovectordata.
Itisrecommendedtoalwaysprovideeithergeovectordataorclutterheightsrasterdata
tohavethemostaccurateEMFexposureprediction.

12.7.1.3 DistributionofEvaluationPoints
ACPusestheinternalterrainrepresentationtospecifywheretosetevaluationpointsforEMFexposureevaluation.
Itispossibletodistributeevaluationpointsseparatelyoneachpropagationclassandforeachterrainentry.Forexample,you
candistributeevaluationpointsononegeovectorentryforonesubsetofpolygons,butnotonanothervectorentry.Similarly
youdistributeevaluationpointsononlyselectedclutterclasses.
Evaluationpointsaredistributedeitherina2Dor3Dpatterndependingonthepropagationclass:

Open:FortheOpenclass(e.g.,bridges,roads,openspaces,etc.)evaluationpointsaredistributedin2Donthetopof
theclassheight.
Vegetation:FortheVegetationclass(e.g.,parks,forests,etc.)evaluationpointsaredistributedin2Datthebottom
oftheclassheight.
Building:FortheBuildingclassevaluationpointsaredistributedin3D.Inthiscaseitisalsopossibletospecifythe
maximumindoordistanceonwhichtomeasureEMFexposure,andortorestrictthepredictiononthebuildingfront
faade.

12.7.1.4 TheContributionofTransmitterPowertoEMFExposure
TheACPtakesthemaximumpowertransmissiononallthecarriersandchannelsusedbytransmittersinthenetworkinto
considerationinitscalculations.Thisensuresthatallprovidedresultsareforafullyloadednetwork,therebygivingaworst
casecalculationofEMFexposure.
TheACPalsotakesintoconsiderationtheantennaradiationpatternbycreatinga3Dinterpolationfromthe2Dhorizontaland
verticalcrosssectionsoftheantennaradiationpattern.ThemethodissimilartotheoneusedelsewhereinAtoll.

12.7.1.5 WorstcaseMode
TheACPallowsyoutoconsideraworstcasescenario,whereanyopaquepropagationclasssuchasBuildingbecomesfully
transparenttoelectromagneticwaves.TheEMFexposureisthereforeevaluatedasiftheareawascompletelyfreespace.
Thismodegivesyouapessimisticviewoftheactualexposuresince,intherealworld,penetrationlossthroughobstaclesas
wellasdiffractionandreflectionaroundobstaclestendstostronglydecreasethesignalstrengthcomparedtoacompletely
freespacemodel.

859

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter12:ACPModule

Forsk2014

Thismodeisusefulwhenoptimisingthenetworkswhileensuringthatregulatorylimitsareneverexceeded.

12.7.2 GeneralWorkflow
ACPcreatesarepresentationoftheterrainin3D.Itthendistributesanumberofevaluationpointsinthisrepresentation
accordingtotheparameterssetinthesetup.
ACPevaluatesEMFexposureoneachoftheseevaluationpointsusinganintegratedpropagationmodelspeciallytailoredfor
theevaluationofstrongsignalsinthevicinityoftheantennas.Thismodellingisbasedonfreespaceformulaswhichare
applicablestartingatafewmetersfromtheantennasuptoafewhundredmeters.Ittakesintoaccounttheantennagainand
attenuationpatternstowardseachevaluationpoint,aswellassomediffractionandindoorlosses.
TheoverallEMFexposurecalculationisobtainedbyaddingtheelectromagneticsignallevelgeneratedbyeachtechnology
involved(GSM,UMTS,CDMA,LTE,WiMAX)andconsideringallcarriersandchannelsused.
TopredicttheoverallEMFexposure,ACPcalculatesthequadraticsumofallchannelsinallmultiRATtechnologies:
E =

E GSM + E UMTS + E LTE

Thefollowingparametersareusedinthecalculation:
o

BcchPower

GSM:

UMTS:

MaxPowerCelli

TRX

ACPtakesintoaccountthemaximumtransmissionpowersofcellsortransmitterstosimulate"worstcase"scenarios.
Hence,thefollowingconditionsmustbemetforthemostreliableresults:

GSM:thenumberofTRXsmustbecorrectlyreferencedintheAtolldatabase,and
UMTSandLTE:allthecellswhicharetobeconsideredmustbepresentandactivatedintheAtolldatabase.
Itishighlyrecommendedtoactivatealllayers,i.e.UMTScarriers.
InUMTS,evenifonlyonelayerisactivatedintheACPinterfaceforagivenfrequency
band,theothercarrierswillalsobeincludedinthecalculation.

12.7.3 EMFExposureCalculation
The calculation of EMF exposure is based on the following formula giving the electromagnetic E field (in Volt/meter) at
distance d ,infreespacefarfield:

30EIRP
E = ---------------------d
Where EIRP = P tx G tx and P tx isthetransmittedpowerinWattsand G tx istheantennagain.
ReasonforUsingtheFreeSpaceFarFieldModel
Inthefreespacefarfieldmodel,theplanewavepowerdensityisgiven(inWattspersquaremeter)by:

WM

P tx G tx
= -------------2
4d

Thepowerreceivedbyatheoreticalidealantennawithaneffectiveapertureof A er andagainof G rx isgivenbytheFriis

transmissionformulaforwavelength :

P rx = P

Wm

A er

Where A

= ------ G rx
4

BycombiningtheFriisformulawiththeexpressionof E previouslydefined,therelationshipbetweentheEMFexposurelevel
(indBVm)andthereceivedsignalpowerlevel(indBm)whenconsideringareceivingantennawith0 dBgainatfrequency F
(inMHz)is:

860

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter12:ACPModule

AT321_TRR_E1

P rx dBm = E dB V m + 42.8 20log 10 F MHz

Forfrequenciesaround1 GHz,thesignificantEMFexposurelevel(> 0.1 Vm)correspondstoareceivedsignallevelgreater
than37 dBm.Propagationmodelsdesignedforcoverageanalysistypicallydealwithsignallevelsusuallylowerthan40 dBm.
They model complex phenomena such as diffraction, reflection, multipath transmission, etc., either deterministically (ray
tracing)orempirically.
For example, urban empirical models such as CostHata models are typically an extension of the Friis formula where the
2

distancedenominator 1 d isreplacedwith 1 d ,with n beingavaluefrom3to5.

Inadditiontheyonlymeasurethesignallevelina2Dhorizontalplane,andnotin3Dhorizontalandverticalplanes.
ACPusesasimplepropagationmodeldedicatedtocopewiththerequirementsofEMFexposureevaluation.Thismodelis
basedonthefreespacefarfieldformulasince"lineofsight"exposurecancausesignificantEMFexposure,resultingina
potentialhealthhazard(whenexposureisaboveafewtenthsofV/m).Innonlineofsightsituationsorfarawayfromthebase
station(i.e.,beyondafewhundredmeters),distance,diffraction,andreflectionphenomenadecreasethesignalstrengthvery
rapidly.Thesignalstrengththenbecomessmallerthantherangeofinterest(afewtenthsofV/m).
TheFarfieldRestriction
Thefarfieldareaisusuallydefinedbytheareabeyondadistancerelatedtoantennasize D :

d far field = 2
Whenthelargestdimension D oftheantennaislessthanthewavelength( ).
2

d far field = 2D
Whenthelargestdimension D oftheantennaisgreaterthanthewavelength( ).
Thefarfieldstartsataround10to20metersfromtheantenna.
However, the far field formula usually leads to good field estimates starting at a distance of around 5 meters from the
antenna.
Thisisinpartbecauseantennasareformedofseveralstackeddipoles(forexample8to10)withlowcouplingbetweenthem.
Inpractice,thetotalEMsignalcanbeobtainedbyaddingthesignalgeneratedbyeachdipole,eachonehavingafarfield
startingatadistanceof 2 (orlessthan1meterforatypicalfrequencyofinterest).

12.8 ShadowingMarginandIndoorCoverage
AtollACPsupportsbothindoorcoverageandashadowingmargin.
Whenindoorcoverageisused,anadditionalindoorlossisaddedtoallpixelsmarkedasbeingindoors.Thisindoorlossis
clutterdependent.Bydefault,allpixelsareconsideredasbeingindoors,butitispossibletospecifywhichclutterclasses
shouldbeconsideredasindoors.
Whentheshadowingmarginhasbeenenabled,ashadowingmarginisaddedtothebasicqualitymeasurement.Thismargin
usuallydependson:

Cellcoverageprobability,accordingtothelognormaldistributionfunction.
Themodelstandarddeviationwhichisclutterdependentanddefinedseparatelyfordifferentqualitymeasures.

TheshadowingmarginisappliedinthesamewayasitisinAtollcoveragepredictions,forexample,incalculatingthemacro
diversitygaininUMTS.

12.9 MultiStoreyOptimisation
TheACPincludesamultistoreyextensionwhereevaluationpointsaredistributedonallfloorsofbuildingsdefinedinaclutter
heightsmap.ThisenablestheACPtotakeallfloorsofthebuildingintoaccountduringoptimisation.
TheACPthenproceedswithitsoptimisationalgorithmasusual.All3Dpointsparticipateintheobjectiveoptimisation.

12.9.1 PathLossCalculationandDataCaching
TheACPmultistoreyextensioncalculatesthepathlossesfromeachtransmittertothepointsdistributedinthreedimensions
bycallingcertainmethodsofAtoll'sAPIonthepropagationmodel(CalculateSubscriberandCalculateGrid).

861

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter12:ACPModule

Forsk2014

TheACPfirstdetectsifpathlossmatricescreatedbytheAtollMultiStoreyAddinarepresent,andinthatcasereusesthem
ifpossible.Ifmatricesarenotpresent,itrecalculatespathlossmatricesitselffordifferentheights.Ifthenumberofpoints
distributedforagivenheightislow,thentheACPusesapointtopointcalculationinsteadoffullpathlossmatrices(i.e.,it
usesAPICalculateSubscriberinsteadofCalculateGrid).
TheACPstoresthepathlossattenuationtothemultistoreyevaluationpointsintheACPstoragedirectory.OnfurtherACP
runs,thereisusuallylittleornoneedforpathlossrecalculation,evenaftermodifyingparameterssuchasresolution,etc.
TheACPthencalculatestheanglesofincidencewhichareusedfortheantennamaskingmethod.Thecalculationmethod
dependsonthepropagationmodel:

Directcalculationattherequiredheightwhennotusing"delegationtothepropagationmodel"
Angleestimationfromtheoriginalangleofincidencecalculatedatgroundlevelandtakingintoaccountgeometrical
considerations,whenusing"delegationtothepropagationmodel"(forexample,whenusingapropagationmodel
suchasCrosswave).

12.9.2 PixelWeighting
Thetotalweightassociatedwithanx/ypixel(derivedfromtrafficandzoneweighting)iseithersharedequallyamongall
verticalevaluationpointspresentatthispixel,ormultipliedbythenumberofverticalpointsatthatpixel.
Forexample,ifapixelpresentsaweightof1andatotalof5pointsatthatlocation(onepointatgroundlevelandfour
additionalpoints,oneevery10meters),eachpointeithertakesaweightof0.2(whenverticalweightsharingisselected)or
1(whenverticalweightsharingisnotselected).

12.9.3 Results
Allstatisticalresultsprovidedtakeintoaccountboth2Dand3Dpoints,throughtheweightingprocessdescribedearlier.
HoweverallpredictionsprovidedbytheACPrelateonlytothegroundlayerbydefault.
Viewingdetailedresultsfor3DpointsisdonebycreatingQualityAnalysisandObjectiveAnalysispredictionsintheACP.
Anewtabisavailableinthepropertiesofthepredictiontoshowresultsatdifferentheights.
Threeoptionsareprovided:

Displayatgroundlevel(definedreceiverheight):Onlythepredictionvaluesseenatthegroundpixelsareshown.
Displaymin.valuesseenatagivenposition:Whenseveralpointsarepresentforapixel(1groundlevelpoint+one
orseveralmultistoreypointsatdifferentheights),theminimumvalueofthosepointsisshown.
Displayvaluesatgivenstorey:Onlythepointsatthegivenstoreyaredisplayed

Example:

SignalLevelatgroundlevel

SignalLevelat3rdstorey

12.9.4 Notes

ACPdistributesmultistoreyevaluationpointsonlywhereclutterheightsarepresent.Bydefault,nopointiscreated
usingthedefaultclutterclassheightwhenonlyaclutterclassfileispresent.Toenabletakingthedefaultclutterclass
heightintoaccount,youcandefinethefollowingoptionintheACP.INIfile:
[ACPCore]
multistorey.onlyDHM=true

862

TheactualheightsusedformultistoreyevaluationdependonthereceiverheightdefinedinAtoll.Ifareceiverheight
of1.5 misused,andaverticalstepof2storeys(withastoreydefinedinthisexampleasbeing3 m),thentheactual
heightsare1.5m,7.5m,13.5m,etc.ThisisthesameastheprocessusedbytheMultistoreyPredictionaddin.

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter12:ACPModule

AT321_TRR_E1

PredictionscalculatedbytheACPmightdifferslightlyfrommultistoreypredictionsduetodifferentmethodologies
usedbythetwotools:

The ACP uses a mix of a radial method (CalculateGrid) for lower storeys, and a systematic method
(CalculateSubscribers)fortheupperstoreywherefewevaluationpointsarepresent.
Atollusesingenerala"radial"method.

12.9.5 ConceptsofACPEMFExposure
12.9.5.1 PropagationClasses
TheinternalpropagationmodelcalculatesEMFexposureusingpropagationclasseswhichareretrievedfrominputfiles.Each
propagationclassiseitheropaque,meaningthatthesignalexperiencesdiffractionlossesattheedgeoftheobjectbutdoes
notgocompletelythrough,ortransparent,meaningthatthesignalpassesthroughit(withperhapssomelosses)anddoesnot
experiencediffractionloss.Thepropagationclasseshavethefollowingparameters:

Penetrationloss(dB):Thelossoccurringwhenthesignalenterstheobject.
Linearloss(dB/m):Alinearlossappliedforeachmeterwithinanobject.Thelossisappliedonlyafteragivennumber
ofmeters,specifiedbythe"Linearlossstartdistance(m)"parameter.
Distributionofevaluationpoints:Fieldstrengthmeasurementsaremadeonasetofpointswithinanobject.The
measurementpointscanbedistributedineithera3Dpatternorina2Dpattern.Foratwodimensionaldistribution,
thepointscanbeplacedeitheratthebottom(forexample,inapark)oratthetop(forexample,forabridge)tobetter
reflectwherepeoplewillbe.

Thefollowingdefaultpropagationclassesareprovided:

Open:TheOpenpropagationclassisforareaswithoutobstacles,suchasanopenareaorwater.Anopenareacan
alsobeanelevatedareasuchasabridge.Suchareasaretransparent,withnodiffractionloss.
Vegetation:TheVegetationpropagationclassisusedforareascoveredwithvegetation,suchasparks.Theycanbe
consideredastransparentbutwithacertaindegreeofdiffractionloss.
Building:TheBuildingpropagationclassisusedforopaqueobjectssuchasbuildings.Thesignalexperiencessomeloss
whengoingthroughandalsosufferfromdiffractionloss.

Itispossibletodefinenewpropagationclasses,forexampletodifferentiatebetweensimilaritemswithdifferentpenetration
losscharacteristics(forexample,glassbuildings,stonebuildings,woodconstructions,etc.)orfordifferentiatingitemson
whichEMFevaluationshouldbedone(forexample,habitationversusmonuments).
Currently,userdefinedclassesarealwaysofthetype"opaque".

12.9.5.2 TerrainProfile
TomeasureEMFexposure,theACPdoesnotneedanyspecificterrainmodelling,butinsteaditusesallthegeodataavailable
intheAtollproject:

Georasterdata:Rasterdatagiveagridbasedrepresentationoftheterrainwithadefinedresolution.Therasterfiles
neededareDTM(DigitalTerrainModel)representingthegroundaltitude,clutterclassesrepresentingthetypeof
terrainandclutterheights(alsocalledadigitalheightmodel)representingindividualheights(forexample,building
heights).
Geovectordata:Geovectordatamodelthebuildingsandtheirheight,intheformofoneorseveralArcViewSHPfiles
definingnumerouspolygons.

ACPusesthegeodatatocreatea3Drepresentationoftheterrainintheformofafinerasterofpixelswithadefaultresolution
of2 meters.Foreachpixelinthisrasterrepresentation,boththeheightandpropagationclassinformationareencoded:

Forgeovectors,eachpolygonisassociatedwithasinglepropagationclassandaheight.Ifageovectorcontainsmore
thanonepolygon,ACPusestheassociatedDBFfiletomapthepolygonstopropagationclassesandheights.
Forgeorasters,eachclutterclassisassociatedwithasinglepropagationclass.Theheightisobtainedfromtheclutter
heightrasterfile.Ifnoclutterheightfileispresent,thedefaultclutterclassheightisused.

Forareascoveredbothbyvectordataandrasterdata,onlythegeovectordataareused.Georasterdataareonlyusedfor
theareasnotcoveredbygeovectordata.
Itisrecommendedtoalwaysprovideeithergeovectordataorclutterheightsrasterdata
tohavethemostaccurateEMFexposureprediction.

863

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter12:ACPModule

Forsk2014

12.9.5.3 DistributionofEvaluationPoints
ACPusestheinternalterrainrepresentationtospecifywheretosetevaluationpointsforEMFexposureevaluation.
Itispossibletodistributeevaluationpointsseparatelyoneachpropagationclassandforeachterrainentry.Forexample,you
candistributeevaluationpointsononegeovectorentryforonesubsetofpolygons,butnotonanothervectorentry.Similarly
youdistributeevaluationpointsononlyselectedclutterclasses.
Evaluationpointsaredistributedeitherina2Dor3Dpatterndependingonthepropagationclass:

Open:FortheOpenclass(e.g.,bridges,roads,openspaces,etc.)evaluationpointsaredistributedin2Donthetopof
theclassheight.
Vegetation:FortheVegetationclass(e.g.,parks,forests,etc.)evaluationpointsaredistributedin2Datthebottom
oftheclassheight.
Building:FortheBuildingclassevaluationpointsaredistributedin3D.Inthiscaseitisalsopossibletospecifythe
maximumindoordistanceonwhichtomeasureEMFexposure,andortorestrictthepredictiononthebuildingfront
faade.

12.9.5.4 TheContributionofTransmitterPowertoEMFExposure
TheACPtakesthemaximumpowertransmissiononallthecarriersandchannelsusedbytransmittersinthenetworkinto
considerationinitscalculations.Thisensuresthatallprovidedresultsareforafullyloadednetwork,therebygivingaworst
casecalculationofEMFexposure.
TheACPalsotakesintoconsiderationtheantennaradiationpatternbycreatinga3Dinterpolationfromthe2Dhorizontaland
verticalcrosssectionsoftheantennaradiationpattern.ThemethodissimilartotheoneusedelsewhereinAtoll.

12.9.5.5 WorstcaseMode
TheACPallowsyoutoconsideraworstcasescenario,whereanyopaquepropagationclasssuchasBuildingbecomesfully
transparenttoelectromagneticwaves.TheEMFexposureisthereforeevaluatedasiftheareawascompletelyfreespace.
Thismodegivesyouapessimisticviewoftheactualexposuresince,intherealworld,penetrationlossthroughobstaclesas
wellasdiffractionandreflectionaroundobstaclestendstostronglydecreasethesignalstrengthcomparedtoacompletely
freespacemodel.
Thismodeisusefulwhenoptimisingthenetworkswhileensuringthatregulatorylimitsareneverexceeded.

12.9.6 GeneralWorkflow
ACPcreatesarepresentationoftheterrainin3D.Itthendistributesanumberofevaluationpointsinthisrepresentation
accordingtotheparameterssetinthesetup.
ACPevaluatesEMFexposureoneachoftheseevaluationpointsusinganintegratedpropagationmodelspeciallytailoredfor
theevaluationofstrongsignalsinthevicinityoftheantennas.Thismodellingisbasedonfreespaceformulaswhichare
applicablestartingatafewmetersfromtheantennasuptoafewhundredmeters.Ittakesintoaccounttheantennagainand
attenuationpatternstowardseachevaluationpoint,aswellassomediffractionandindoorlosses.
TheoverallEMFexposurecalculationisobtainedbyaddingtheelectromagneticsignallevelgeneratedbyeachtechnology
involved(GSM,UMTS,CDMA,LTE,WiMAX)andconsideringallcarriersandchannelsused.

12.10 ACPSoftwareDataFlow
Understanding the Atoll ACP software data flow will help understand how the module works and some of its internal
constraints.
Herearesomeoftheconceptsrelatedtothedataflow:

864

Data Model Extraction: When first run (i.e., when the user selects New from the ACP Automatic Cell Planning
contextmenu),theACPextractsallrelevantinformationfromthecurrentAtollprojectandbuildsitsinternaldata
model.Thisdatamodelissavedina"Setup"nodeandenableseachoptimisationsetuptobereviewedorreplayed
later.Thedatamodelalsocontainsinformationidentifyingtheversionusedtogenerateit,meaningthattheresults
producedbyapreviousreleasecaningeneralbereloadedorreplayed.
DataModelContent:ThedatamodelincludesallnecessarydatafromtheAtolldatabase;essentiallyallantennas,
transmitters,sites,cells,andservicedefinitions.Thedatamodeldoesnotincluderasterinformationsuchasclutter,
DEM,DHMmaps,nordoesitcontainthepathlossesmatrices.Therasterdataandpathlossmatricesareaccessed
directlybythecoreoptimisationengineduringACPcalculations.
Setup:TheACPSetupdialogueallowsyoutoviewandmodifytheoptimisationparameters.Thedatamodelisnot
accessibleusingtheSetupdialogue.
Results:Afteranoptimisationrun,AtollACPproducesaresultmodelwhichisfoundundertheoriginalsetupinan
Optimisationnode.UsingtheOptimisationnode,youcanviewtheresultsandgenerateanalysismapsthatcanbe

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter12:ACPModule

AT321_TRR_E1

displayeddirectlyintheAtollmapwindow.Youcanalsocommitthesetofrecommendedchangesdirectlyintothe
Atolldatabase.
Optimisation Engine: The optimisation engine is the core algorithm that performs the optimisation on a defined
setup.ItworksusingtheextractedinternaldatamodelintheSetupnode,butalsousesdirectaccesstorasterand
pathlossinformation.

BecauseAtollACPusesthisinternaldatamodel,itisimportanttounderstandthat:

Anoptimisationrunsonthedatamodelstoredinthesetupnode.IfchangesareintroducedintotheAtolldatabase
later(suchaschangestotheantennas,cells,site,etc.),thesechangesarenottakenintoaccountinanyexistingsetup
node.Thenetworkconfigurationisessentiallyfrozeninthesetupnodeinthestateitwasinwhenthesetupwas
created.Anewsetupneedstobecreatedinorderforthechangestobetakenintoaccount.
Because the path loss information is not stored in the setup node, but is instead accessed directly by the core
optimisationengine,itcanhappenthatthereisamismatchbetweenstoredpathlossmatricesandthedatamodelin
thesetupnode(forexample,aftermodifyingtransmittersdirectlyinAtoll).
TheACPmanagescasesofdatamismatchbyusingtheconceptofalockedsetupnode.Nooptimisationcanberunon
alockedsetupnodeunlessthepathlossinformationisconsistentwiththeinternaldatamodelofthesetup.Setup
nodesareautomaticallyunlockedwhenthepathlossinformationandtheinternaldatamodelonceagainmatch.

ThisbehaviourisparticularlytruewhennewsettingsproducedbyanoptimisationrunarecommittedtoAtoll.Thesetupnode
islockedafteracommit.ItwillbeunlockediftheAtollprojectisrolledbacktoitsinitialstate.

AtollACPenablesyoutoduplicateanexistingsetupnodewhileatthesametimeupdatingitsinternaldatamodelto
beconsistentwiththecurrentstateoftheAtollproject.

865

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide
Chapter12:ACPModule

866

Forsk2014

AT321_TRR_E1

Atoll3.2.1TechnicalReferenceGuide

867

 HeadOffice
7ruedesBriquetiers
31700Blagnac,France
Tel:+33562747210
Fax:+33562747211

AT321_TRR_E1

USOffice

ChinaOffice

200SouthWackerDriveSuite3100
Chicago,IL60606,USA
Tel:+13126744800
Fax:+13126744847

Suite302,3/F,WestTower,JiaduCommercialBuilding,
No.66JianzhongRoad,TianheHiTechIndustrialZone,
Guangzhou,510665,P.R.ofChina
Tel:+862085538938 Fax:+862085538285

www.forsk.com

February2014